[Page]
[Page]
THE WORLD from the best Authorities
[Page]

THE AMERICAN UNIVERSAL GEOGRAPHY, OR, A VIEW OF THE PRESENT STATE OF ALL THE Empires, Kingdoms, States, and Republics IN THE KNOWN WORLD, AND OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA IN PARTICULAR.

IN TWO PARTS.

The FIRST PART

Treats of Astronomical Geography, and other useful preliminaries to the study of Geography, in an enlarged and improved Introduction—of the WESTERN, or AMERICAN CONTINENT—of its Discovery—its Aboriginal Inhabitants, and whence they came—its Divisions—but more par­ticularly of the United States of America, generally and individually—of their Situation, Dimensions, Civil Divisions, Rivers, Lakes, Climate, Moun­tains, Soil, Produce, Natural History, Commerce, Manufactures, Population, Character, Curiosities, Springs, Mines and Minerals, Military Strength, Constitutions, Islands, History of the War, and the succeeding Events.—With a View of the British, Spanish, French, Portuguese, and other Dominions, on the Continent, and in the West Indies.

The SECOND PART

Describes at large, and from the latest and best Authorities, the Present State, in respect to the above mentioned Particulars, of the EASTERN CONTINENT—and its Islands—as divided into EUROPE, ASIA, and AFRICA—and subdivided into Empires, Kingdoms, and Republics.

TO WHICH ARE ADDED,

An improved CATALOGUE of NAMES of PLACES, and their GEOGRAPHICAL SIT­UATION, alphabetically arranged—an enlarged CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE of RE­MARKABLE EVENTS, from the Creation to the present Time—and a LIST of Ancient and Modern Learned and Eminent MEN, in AMERICA, as well as EUROPE.

The whole comprehending a complete and improved SYSTEM of MODERN GEOGRAPHY. Calculated for AMERICANS.

Illustrated with MAPS of the Countries described.

BY JEDIDIAH MORSE

Published according to Act of Congress.

PART I

Being a New Edition of the AMERICAN GEOGRAPHY corrected and greatly enlarged.

PRINTED AT BOSTON.

BY ISAIAH THOMAS AND EBENEZER T. ANDREWS.

Sold at their Bookstore, Faust's Statue, No. 45, Newbury Street, by said THOMAS, in WORCESTER; by BERRY, ROGERS and BERRY, in NEWYORK; by H. and P. RICE, in PHILADELPHIA; and by W. P. YOUNG, in CHARLESTON.

MDCCXCIII.

[Page]

PREFACE To the AMERICAN GEOGRAPHY, published in 1789.

So imperfect are all the accounts of America hitherto pub­lished, even by those who once exclusively possessed the best means of in­formation, that from them very little knowledge of this country can be acquired. Europeans have been the sole writers of American Geogra­phy, and have too often suffered fancy to supply the place of facts, and thus have led their readers into errors, while they professed to aim at removing their ignorance. But since the United States have become an independent nation, and have risen into Empire, it would be re­proachful for them to suffer this ignorance to continue; and the rest of the world have a right n [...] to expect authentic information. To furnish this has been the design of the author of the following work; but he does not pretend that this design is completed, nor will the judicious and candid expect it, when they consider that he has trodden, compara­tively, an unbeaten path—that he has had to collect a vast variety of materials—that these have been widely scattered—and that he could derive but little assistance from books already published. Four years have been employed in this work, during which period the Au­thor has visited the several States in the Union, and maintained an extensive correspondence with m [...]n of Science; and in every instance has endeavoured to derive his information from the most authentic sources; he has also submitted his manuscripts to the inspection of Gen­tlemen in the States which they particularly described, for their cor­rection. It is possible, notwithstanding, and indeed very probable, that inaccuracies may have crept in; but he hopes there are none of any great importance, and that such as may be observed, will not be made the subject of severe censure, but ascribed to s [...]me pardonable cause. He flatters himself, however, that the work now offered to the public, will be found to be as accurate, complete and impartial as the present state of American Geography and History could furnish. After all, like the nation of which it treats, it is but an infant, and as such solicits the f [...]stering care of the country it describes; it will grow and improve as the nation advances towards maturity, and the Author will gratefully acknowledge every friendly communication which will [...]end to make it perfect.

[Page] In the prosecution of the work, he has aimed at utility rather than originality; and of course, when he has met with publications suited to his purpose, he has made a free use of them; and he thinks it prop­er here to observe, that, to avoid unnecessary trouble, he has frequently used the words as well as the ideas of the writers, although the reader has not been particularly apprized of it.

For the Author distinctly to acknowledge the obligations he is under to many citizens of these States, as well as to some foreigners of dis­tinction, among us, would swell this preface to an improper length: He cannot forbear, however, to express his peculiar obligation to EBENE­ZER HAZARD, Esq Postmaster General of the United States, for permission of free access to his very large and valuable Collection of papers, * from which he has derived much of his historical in­formation. This collection has been made with unwearied care and minute exactness; and the papers, which are of unquestion­able authenticity, are the best and most complete depositum of facts relating to the history of America, from its first settle­ment, that is to be found in the United States. The Author's acknowledgments are likewise especially due to Capt. THOMAS HUTCHINS, Geographer General of the United States, for his par­ticular friendship and assistance.

It is to be regretted, that so few maps could be introduced into the work; but the Author hopes to be enabled to increase the number in future Editions.

Every citizen of the United States ought to be thoroughly acquainted with the Geography of his own country, and to have some idea, at least, of the other parts of the world; but as many of them cannot afford time and expense necessary to acquire a complete knowledge of the several parts of the Globe, this book offers them such information as their situation in life may require; and while it is calculated early to impress the minds of Amer­ican Youth with an idea of the superior importance of their own country, as well as to attach them to its interests, it furnishes a simplified account of other countries, calculated for their juvenile capacities, and to serve as an introduction to their future improvement in Geography.

[Page]

PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN UNIVERSAL GEOGRAPHY.

THE following work may be considered, in some respects, as a Second Edition of the AMERICAN GEOGRAPHY, published by the Author in 1789; although it is so far renovated, and so much im­proved and enlarged that it was thought proper to give it a new ti­tle, corresponding to its more extensive design. The Author's principal reason for deviating from his original plan of confining his work chiefly to the United States of America, was that he might furnish his fellow citizens, especially the youth of his coun­try, with a general system of Geography, more complete, and bet­ter adapted to afford them useful information, than those systems which have hitherto been in use among us, which were compiled in Europe, and calculated particularly for Europeans.

Guthrie's Geographical Grammar stands highest in the estima­tion of the public of any work of the kind, and has had a very ex­tensive sale in America. But this work, meritorious as it really is, has two capital faults, as it respects this country.—The first is, its deficiency and falsity in describing the United States. It is not to be supposed that European Geographers should be as well ac­quainted with America as with their own country.—Accordingly we find that their accounts of the United States are not only very concise, but very inaccurate. To attempt to give American youth a knowledge of their own country from these imperfect and erro­neous sketches, would be as fruitless as absurd—it would be to instil into the minds of Americans, British ideas of America, which are far from being favourable or just.—The second fault of Guthrie's Grammar, as it applies to America, is its unwieldy and dispropor­tionate account of Great Britain, which occupies nearly one third part of a book which professes to give us a complete Geographi­cal description of the world. To the inhabitants of Great Britain such a minute detail of particulars may be entertaining and useful; but Americans ought to know their own country better than any other.

To Guthrie's Grammar, in common with others, it has also been objected, that too great a part has been occupied with history. Particular histories of kingdoms and nations, in detail, it is con­ceived do not belong to a treatise on Geography. They must be [Page] either too concise to be of much use, or swell the volume to too expensive a size. No person will have recourse to a system of Geography, with a view to acquaint himself with the History of any country. By expunging from Guthrie's Grammar this and other superfluous matters, its size may, with advantage, be lessened one third, which would give room for much recent and useful information respecting the Eastern Continent, without increasing the expense. It has been the Author's aim to avail himself of this advantage in perfecting his work, by introduc­ing no more history than what was thought necessary to give the reader an idea of the countries described, and by expunging what was judged of no importance to Americans, and giving in its room such information from the best Geographical writers, and the latest and most celebrated travellers and navigators, as will be both pleasing and useful; and he cannot but entertain a hope, that the American reader will find in the Second Part of this work, a better account of the Eastern Continent in general, than is con­tained in Guthrie's Grammar.

Before the Revolution, Americans seldom pretended to write or to think for themselves. We humbly received from Great Britain our laws, our manners, our books, and our modes of thinking; and our youth were educated as the subjects of the British king, not as the citizens of a free and independent re­public. It is not easy at once to break off old habits either of thinking or acting. Accustomed, as we have been, to appreciate British literature and manufactures, it has been natural, in the com­parison, to undervalue our own. It has been for the interest of Great Britain, and of British subjects who have emigrated and set­tled among us, to cherish these sentiments. Hence our own pro­ductions, of books as well as other articles, have been discouraged, and those of Great Britain promoted. To import from Europe all their literary works, and their mechanical, nautical and Geograph­ical improvements and discoveries, is highly useful and proper—But to pretend any longer to receive the knowledge of the Geogra­phy and internal state of our own country, from a kingdom three thousand miles distant from us—to depend on foreigners, partial to a proverb to their own country, for an account of the divisions, riv­ers, productions, manufactures, navigation, commerce, literature, im­provements, &c. of the American States, would certainly be a dis­graceful blot upon our literary and national character. Indeed, the propriety of importing any of our school books from Great Britain, unless they are previously modified and adapted to the genius of our republican government, is very questionable; as we otherwise [Page] run the hazard of having our children imbibe from them the mo­narchical ideas, and national prejudices of the English.

The Science of Geography, like many other Sciences, is not sta­tionary. So rapid are the improvements made in it by travellers and navigators—so fast do alterations and revolutions succeed each other, that it is not an easy matter for a Geographer to keep pace with them. What is this year a geographical truth, may the next year be a geographical error, and require correction. The aston­ishing progress of things in the United States since the year 1789, will readily suggest to the reader the reason of the many alterations and additions in this Second Edition of the American Geography, as contained in the First Part of the following work.

The Author does not forget here very gratefully to acknowledge his great obligations to several of the gentlemen who sustain some of the highest offices in the general government, and to many gen­tlemen of respectability in the several states, for their very liberal and valuable communications, which have contributed not a little to render the work accurate and useful. He hopes that such use has been made of their friendly assistance, as will induce them to continue it, and to afford in future every information, and every hint, which may tend to render the work more perfect.

[Page]

CONTENTS OF PART I.

INTRODUCTION
  • Of Astronomy, as connected with, and introductory to the Sci­ence of Geography, 17
  • Of the several Astronomical Systems of the World, 18
  • Table of the Diameters, Periods, &c. of the several Planets, 20
  • Of Comets, ibid.
  • Of Fixed Stars, 21
  • Of Geography, its Rise and Progress, 24
  • Figure, Magnitude and Motion of the Earth, 29
  • Doctrine of the Sphere, 32
  • Table of Countries and remarkable Places situated in the respec­tive Climates north of the Equator, &c. &c. 36
  • Table shewing the Number of Miles contained in a Degree of Longitude, &c. 37
  • Methods of finding the Latitudes and Longitudes of Places from Celestial Observations, 38
  • Of the Globes, and their Use, 40
  • Problems solved on the Celestial Globe, 46
  • Manner in which different Nations reckon Time, 48
  • Geographical Theorems, or Propositions, ibid.
  • Of Maps and their Use, 50
  • General Observations concerning Heat and Cold, 51
  • Temperature of different Places, according to their Latitudes, 54
  • Theory of the Winds, 55
  • Theory of the Tides, 57
  • Length of Miles in different Countries, 59
  • Natural Divisions of the Earth, ibid.
  • Account of the Gregorian, or New Style, 60
  • Table, exhibiting the Superficial Contents of the whole Globe in Square Miles, &c. &c. 61
AMERICA.
  • History of its Discovery, 63
  • General Description of America, in which the Questions, when, whence, and by whom was America first peopled, are discussed—Account of the Indians—New Discoveries on the Northwest Coast, &c. 71
NORTH AMERICA.
  • Summary Account of its Discovery and Settlement, in Chrono­logical Order, 107
  • Boundaries, Extent, Bays, Sounds, Straits and Islands, 119
  • Divisions of North America, 120
  • Table of the different Countries, Provinces and States of North America—to whom belonging—Chief Towns, and Number of Inhabitants, 121
DANISH AMERICA.
  • Greenland, 121
  • Boundaries and Extent, Face of the Country, Population, &c. &c. 128
BRITISH AMERICA.
  • [Page]New Britain, 130
  • Upper and Lower Canada, 135
  • Island of Cape Breton, 139
  • Nova Scotia, 141
  • Island of St. John's, 145
  • Newfoundland, 146
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.
  • General Description of the United States, including a History of the late War, and many other useful and entertaining Matters, 147
GRAND DIVISIONS OF THE UNITED STATES. 309
First Grand Division, or Northern or Eastern States.
  • New England, 310
  • Vermont, 322
  • New Hampshire, 329
  • District of Main, 345
  • Massachusetts, 353
  • Rhode Island, 381
  • Connecticut, 392
Second Grand Division, or Middle States. 416
  • New York, 417
  • New Jersey, 452
  • Pennsylvania, 469
  • Delaware, 503
  • Territory North West of the Ohio, 509
Third Grand Division, or Southern States. 519
  • Maryland, 520
  • Virginia, 532
  • Indiana, 561
  • Kentucky, 562
  • North Carolina, 569
  • Territory South of Ohio, 584
  • South Carolina, 593
  • Georgia, 610
Spanish Dominions in North America. 625
  • East and West Florida, 627
  • Louisiana, 633
  • Mexico, or New Spain, 642

SOUTH AMERICA.

Spanish Dominions in South America.
  • Torra Firma, or Castile del O [...], 643
  • Peru, 645
  • Ch [...]li, 650
  • Paragua, or La Plata, 652
Portuguese America.
  • Brazil, 654
French America,
  • Cayenne, 657
Dutch America.
  • Surrinam, or Dutch Guiana, 658
Aboriginal America, or that Part which the Indians possess.
  • [Page]Amazonia, 66 [...]
  • Patagonia, 664
WEST INDIA ISLANDS.
  • General description of them, 666
British West Indies.
  • Jamaica, 669
  • Barbadoes, 672
  • St. Christopher's, 673
  • Antigua, 674
  • Grenada, and the Grenadines, ibid.
  • Dominica, ibid.
  • St. Vincent, 675
  • Nevis, and Mont [...]errat, ibid.
  • Barbuda, ibid.
  • Anguilla, ibid.
  • Bermudas, or Sommers' Islands, ibid.
  • Lacay's, or Bahama Islands, 677
  • Falkland Islands, ibid.
Spanish West Indies.
  • Cuba, 678
  • Hispaniola, or St. Domingo, ibid.
  • Porto Rico, 683
  • Trinidad, ibid.
  • Margaretta, 684
  • Juan Fernandes, ibid.
French West Indies.
  • Martinico, 685
  • Gaudalupe, ibid.
  • St. Lucia, ibid.
  • Tobago, ibid.
Dutch West Indies.
  • St. Eustatius, or Eustatia, 686
  • Curassou, 687
Danish West Indies.
  • St. Thomas, 688
  • St. Croix, or Santa Cruz, ibid.
New Discoveries.
  • Northern Archipelago, 690
  • The Pelew Islands, 691
  • The Marquesas Islands, 692
  • Ingraham's Islands, ibid.
  • Otaheite▪ or King George's Island, ibid.
  • Society Islands, 693
  • The Friendly Islands, 694
  • New Zealand, 695
[Page]

CONTENTS OF PART II.

EUROPE.
  • GENERAL Remarks, 1
  • Public Revenue and Land Forces of the Principal States in Europe, 3
  • Naval Forces of the different Powers, 4
  • Grand Divisions, Situation, Boundaries, &c. of Europe, 5
  • Denmark, 7
  • East and West Greenland, Iceland, and the Islands in the At­lantic Ocean, ibid.
  • Norway, 14
  • Denmark Proper, or Jutland, 21
  • Lapland, 30
  • Sweden, 35
  • Muscovy, or the Russian Empire in Europe and Asia, 49
  • The British Empire, 73
  • England, 75
  • Scotland, 125
  • Ireland, 149
  • Isle of Man, 185
  • Isle of Wight, 186
  • Scilly Isles, 187
  • Jersey, Guernsey, &c. 188
  • Germany, 189
  • Prussia, 205
  • Austria, 213
  • Bohemia, 219
  • Hungary, 220
  • Transylvania, Hungary, Sclavonia, &c. 224
  • Poland, 227
  • Switzerland, 241
  • Netherlands, 249
  • France, 269
  • Spain, 317
  • Portugal, 339
  • Italy, 346
  • Turkey in Europe, 375
ASIA.
  • Its Situation, Boundaries, Grand Divisions, and History, 384
  • Turkey in Asia, 387
  • Tartary in Asia, 403
  • China, 411
  • Indostan, Hindoostan, or India on this side the Ganges, 425
  • India beyond the Ganges, 450
  • Persia, 457
  • Arabia, 466
  • Indian and Oriental Islands, 475
AFRICA.
  • [Page]Situation, Boundary, Grand Divisions, &c. 485
  • Egypt, 489
  • The States of Barbary, 497
  • Africa, from the Tropic of Cancer to the Cape of Good Hope, 506
  • African Islands, 516
  • New Discoveries, [524]
  • A new Geographical Table, containing the Names and Situ­ations of all the chief Places in the known World, 521
  • An improved Chronological Table of Remarkable Events, Dis­coveries and Inventions, from the Creation to the present Time, 533
  • List of Ancient and Modern Learned and Ingenious Men, in America, as well as Europe, 548

DIRECTIONS to the BOOKBINDER for PLACING the MAPS, &c.

PART I.
  • 1 World to face Title Page, Page
  • 2 Artificial Sphere, &c. to face 32
  • 3 Northern and Middle States do. 309
  • 4 District of Maine do. 345
  • 5 Map of Pennsylvania do. 469
  • 6 Map of Virginia, North Carolina, &c. do. 532
  • 7 South America do. 642
  • 8 West Indies do. 666
PART II.
  • 1 Europe to face Page 1
  • 2 Asia do. 384
  • 3 Africa do. 485
[Page]

INTRODUCTION.

Of ASTRONOMY, as connected with, and Introductory to, the SCIENCE of GEOGRAPHY.

THE earth is now universally considered as a Planet, and, in com­pany with six other bodies, of a similar nature, revolves round the Sun as its centre. Some acquaintance with the motions, times, dis­tances, and magnitudes of these heavenly bodies, is necessary in order to a complete knowledge of Geography. The science which treats of the planets and other heavenly bodies, is called Astronomy. Hence the propriety of introducing this work with a short account of that science.

Astronomy was first attended to by the shepherds, on the beautiful plains of Egypt and Babylon. Their employment led them to con­template the stars. While their flocks, in the silence of the evening, were enjoying sweet repose, the spangled sky naturally invited the at­tention of the shepherds. The observation of the heavenly bodies afforded them amusement, and at the same time assisted them in travel­ling in the night. A star guided the shepherds to the manger where our blessed Saviour was born. By the aid of a lively imagination, they distributed the stars into a number of constellations or companies, to which they gave the name of the animals which they represented.

The Sun, the most glorious of the heavenly luminaries, is the foun­tain of heat and light to the planets which revolve round it. The paths which the planets describe in their revolutions are called their orbits. The number of planets in the Solar System is seven; whose names, according to their nearness to the sun, are Mercury, Venus, the Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn and the new planet Herschel. The two first of these, because they move within the orbit of the earth, are call­ed inferior, or rather interior planets—the four last, because they move without the earth's orbit, are called superior, or more properly exterior planets.

To express another distinction, these seven planets, are called prima­ry planets, in reference to fourteen other bodies, which are called se­condary planets, moons or satellites, which revolve round their respective primaries from west to east, and at the same time move with them round the Sun. The earth has one satellite or moon, which performs its revolution in 29d. 12h. 44m. at the distance of about 60 semidiam­eters of the earth, or 239,100 miles, and is carried with the earth round the sun, once in a year. Jupiter has four moons; Saturn has seven * and is also encompassed with a broad ring. The diameter of the ring, is, to the diameter of Saturn, as 9 to 4; and the space be­tween the body of Saturn and the ring, is equal to the breadth of the [Page 18] ring. Herschel * has two moons, one of which revolves in about nine, the other in about thirteen and an half days.

Of the several ASTRONOMICAL SYSTEMS of the WORLD.

BY the word system is meant an hypothesis or supposition of a cer­tain order and arrangement of the several parts of the universe, by which the astronomers explain all the phenomina or appearances of the heavenly bodies, their motions, changes, &c. The most famous systems, or hypotheses, are the Ptolemaic, the Tychonic, or Brahean, and the Pythagorean, or Copernican System.

THE PTOLEMAIC SYSTEM.

This system, so called from Claudius Ptolemeus, a celebrated astro­nomer of Pelu [...]ium, in Egypt, who adopted and defended the prevail­ing system of that age, supposes the earth immoveably fixed, in the centre of the universe; and that the moon, the planets, and the stars, all move round it from east to west, once in twenty four hours, in the following order: The Moon, Mercury, Venus, the Sun, Mars, Jupi­ter, Saturn and the fixed stars. These were all supposed to be fixed in separate crystaline spheres, and to be included in another, called the Primum Mobile, which gives motion to all the rest.

This system owed its origin to the sensible appearances of the celes­tial motions. It was taken for granted, that the motions those bo­dies appeared to possess, were real; and not dreaming of any motion in the earth, nor being acquainted with the distinctions between absolute, relative, or apparent motion, the philosophers were incapable of form­ing adequate ideas of these particulars, and thence reduced to the ne­cessity of being misled by their own senses, for want of that assistance which after ages produced. It is easy to observe, they had no notion of any other system but our own, nor of any other world but the earth on which we live. They were persuaded that all things were made for the use of man; that all the stars were contained in one concave sphere, consequently, at an equal distance from the earth; and that the Primum Mobile was circumscribed by the empyrean heaven, of a cu­bic form, which they supposed to be the blissful abode of departed spirits. But modern observations and discoveries have sufficiently shewn the absurdities of this system, so that it is now abandoned by all the learned, and hardly ever mentioned but to be exploded. Even in the infancy of astronomy, it was found insufficient to account for all the motions of the heavenly bodies, without having recourse to such ab­surd suppositions, that a novice in literature would be ashamed to propose.

THE BRAHEAN SYSTEM.

Tycho Brahe, a nobleman of Denmark, and one of the most emi­nent astronomers of his time, proposed another system to account for [Page 19] the motion of the heavenly bodies. Unwilling to admit of the mo­tion of the earth, and convinced that the Ptolemaic hypothesis could not be true, he contrived another, different from any thing before of­fered to the world. In this hypothesis, the earth is supposed to be at rest in the centre of the universe, and the sun, together with the plan­ets and fixed stars, to revolve about the earth in twenty four hours; and at the same time all the planets, except the moon, revolve about the sun. But this was even more absurd than that of Ptolemy, and it acordingly was soon exploded.

THE COPERNICAN, or TRUE SOLAR SYSTEM.

Copernicus, the author of this system, was born at Thorn, in Royal Prussia, in 1473. This hypothesis, which is now universally adopted by all the learned in Europe, supposes the sun to be in the centre of the system, and that all the planets move round him in the order we have already mentioned. These, together with the comets, form the con­stituent parts of the Solar System. See Plate, where this is represent­ed, and by which an adequate idea of the whole may be easily ob­tained.

But it must be observed, that, though the orbits of the planets are circles in the scheme, they are not really so, but ellipses, and the sun placed in one of the focus's. All the planets have one common focus, in which the sun is placed. This supposition readily solves all the ap­pearances observable in the motion of the planets, and also agrees with the strictest philosophical and mathematical reasoning.

All the planets, in their revolutions, are sometimes nearer to, and sometimes farther from, the Sun; a consequence of that luminary's not being placed in the centre of each orbit, and their being ellipses. Hence, also, we see the reason why the planets move faster as they approach nearer to the sun, and slower as they recede from the sun.

If a right line, called by some the vector radius, be drawn from the sun through any planet, and supposed to revolve round the sun with the planet, this line will describe, or pass over every part of the plane of the orbit; so that the vector radius may be said to describe the a­rea of the orbit.

In the solar system are observed two principal laws which regulate the motions of all the planets. These laws are the following:

1. "The planets describe equal areas in equal times." That is, the vector radius, in equal portions of time, describes equal areas or portions of the space contained within the planet's orbit.

2. "The squares of the periodical times of the planets are as the cubes of their mean distances from the sun." That is, as the square of the time which any planet takes to describe its orbit, is to the square of the time taken by any other planet to run through its orbit; so is the cube of the mean distance of the former from the sun, to the cube of the mean distance of the latter from the sun.

These are the two famous laws of Kepler, a great astronomer, who flourished about the beginning of the seventeenth century, and who de­duced them from a multitude of observations; but the first who de­monstrated these laws, was the great Sir Isaac Newton.

By the second law, the relative distances of the planets from the sun are known; and were the real distance of any one of them determined, the absolute distances of all the others would be obtained. By the [Page 20] transit of Venus, over the sun in 1761, we now know the real dis­tances of the planets from the sun much better than before: These, to­gether with the other necessary particulars for forming a competent idea of the solar system, are exhibited in the following table.

A TABLE of the Diameters, Periods, &c. of the several Planets in the Solar System.

Names of the planets. Diameters in English Miles. Mean dis­tances from the sun. Annual periods round the sun. Diurnal rotation on its axis. Hourly motion in its orbit. Hourly motion of its equator. Inclination of axis to orbit.
        d. h. m.      
Sun [...]90,000   y. d. h. 25 6 0   3,818 8° 0′
Mercury 3,000 36,841,468 0 87 23 unknown 109,699 unknown unknown
Venus 9,330 68, [...]91,4 [...]6 0 224 17 24 8 0 80,299 43 75° 0′
Earth 7,970 95,173,000 1 0 0 1 0 0 68,243 1,042 23° 29′
Moon 2,180 ditto. 1 0 0 29 12 44 22,2 [...]0 [...]'
Mars 5,400 145,014,148 1 321 17 0 24 40 55,287 556 0° 0′
Jupiter 94,000 494,990,976 11 314 18 0 9 56 29,083 25,920 0° 0′
Saturn 78,000 907,956,130 29 176 15 unknown 22,101 unknown unknown
* Herschel 637,600 1 [...]00,000,000 82 34 0 unknown unknown ditto. ditto.

By the above Table, a competent idea of the Solar System may be obtained.

The COMETS.

Besides the planets and stars mentioned above, we perceive, in [...]he expanse of the universe, many other bodies belonging to the system of the sun, that seem to have much more irregular motions. These are the comets, that, descending from the far distant parts of the system with great rapidity, surprise us with the singular appearance of a train, or tail, which accompanies them; become visible to us in the lower parts of their orbits, and, after a short stay, go off again to vast distances, and disappear.

They are large opaque bodies, which move in all possible directions. Some revolve from west to east; some from east to west; others from south to north, or from north to south. Their orbits have very different inclinations to the ecliptic. Some have conjectured, that the comets were intended by the all wise Creator, to connect systems, and that each of their several orbits includes the sun, and one of the fixed stars. The figures of the comets are very different. Some of them emit beams on all sides like hair, and are called hairy comets, others have a long, fiery, transparent tail projecting from the part which is opposite to the sun. Their magnitudes also are different. Some appear no bigger than stars of the first magnitude; others larg­er than the moon.

Though some of the ancients had more just notions of these bodies, yet the opinion having prevailed, that they were only meteors generat­ed in the air, like those we see in it every night, and in a few [...] ­ments vanishing, no care was taken to observe or record their phe­nomena accurately, till of late. Hence this part of astronomy is very imperfect. The general doctrine is, that they are solid, compact bo­dies, like other planets, and regulated by the same laws of gravity, [...] [Page 21] as to describe equal areas in equal times by radii drawn from the com­mon centre. They move about the sun, in very eccentric ellipses, and are of much greater density than the earth; for some of them are heated in every period to such a degree as would vitrify or dissipate any substance known to us. Sir Isaac Newton computed the heat of the comet that appeared in the year 1680, when nearest the sun, to be 2000 times hotter than red hot iron, and that being thus heated, it must retain its heat till it comes round again, although its period should be more than 20,000 years; and it is computed to be only 575. The number of comets belonging to our system is unknown. All those which have been observed have moved through the etherial regions, and the orbit of the planets, without suffering the least sensible resist­ance in their motions, which sufficiently proves that the planets do not move in solid orbs. Of all the comets, the periods of three only are known with any degree of certainty, being found to return at inter­vals of 75,129, and 575 years; and of these, that which appeared in 1680, is the most remarkable. This comet, at its greatest distance, is a­bout 11 thousand 200 millions of miles from the sun, while its least distance from the centre of the sun, is about 490 thousand miles; with­in less than one third part of the sun's semidiameter from his surface. In that part of his orbit, which is nearest to the sun, it flies with the amazing volocity of 880,000 miles in an hour; or above 244 miles in a second: a velocity much greater than any we are acquainted with, that of light excepted; and the sun, as seen from it, appears 100 de­grees in breadth, consequently 40,000 times as large as he appears to us. The astonishing distance that this comet runs out into empty space, naturally suggests to our imagination, the vast distance between our sun and the nearest of the fixed stars, of whose attractions all the comets must keep clear, to return periodically and go round the sun. Dr. Halley, to whom every part of astronomy, but this in a particular manner is highly indebted, has joined his labours to those of the great Sir Isaac Newton, on this subject. Our earth was out of the way, when this comet last passed near her orbit: But it requires a more perfect knowledge of the motion of the comet, to be able to judge if it will always pass by us with so little effect; for it may be here ob­served, that the comet, in one part of his orbit, approaches very near to the orbit of our earth: So that in some revolutions, it may approach near enough to have very considerable if not fatal effects upon it.

Of the FIXED STARS.

The fixed stars, though they do not constitute a part of the solar system, must be considered here, as they are of infinite use in the prac­tice of geography. They are readily known from the planets, by their twinkling. They are observed never to change their situations with respect to each other, and hence they obtained the name of fixed stars: They shine by their own light; and there is the greatest reason to think they are suns fixed in the centres of other systems, having planets and comets revolving round them like our sun. They appear of various sizes, owing to their different distances; those sizes are generally dis­tinguished into six or seven classes, called magnitudes; the largest and brightest are said to be of the first magnitude; those of the next class, or degree of brightness, are called stars of the second magnitude, and so on to the last, or those just visible to the naked eye. But besides [Page 22] these there are scattered in every part of the heavens, a prodigious number of others, called telescopic stars, from their being invisible without the assistance of that instrument. Great part of the modern astronomy, indeed, owes both its rise and perfection to that admirable machine. The distance between the earth and the nearest fixed star is astonishing. The orbit of the earth is at least 162 millions of miles in diameter; yet this prodigious difference has no effect on the dis­tance of the star, which appears as far from the earth when in the nearest, as in the farthest point of its orbit. It has been computed, by some of the most able astronomers, that if a cannon ball continued to move with the same velocity as when first discharged from the piece, or 480 miles an hour, it would not reach the nearest fixed star in less than 700,000 years. Light, which is transmitted from one body to another almost instantaneously, takes up more time in passing from the fixed stars to this earth, than we do in making a voyage to Europe; so that if all the fixed stars were now struck out of exist­ance, they would appear to us to keep their stations, for several months yet to come. It is impossible therefore that they should borrow their light from the sun, as do the planets. The distance therefore is too great for the power of human beings to conceive; the understanding is bewildered and lost in the contemplation. But though the fixed stars are placed at such immense distances from us and from each oth­er, and are doubtless suns illuminating different worlds, yet astrono­mers, in order to facilitate their computations, consider them as all e­qually distant from our sun, forming the surface of a sphere, inclosing our system, and called the celestial sphere: a supposition which may be strictly admitted, considering the astonishing distance of the nearest fixed star.

A constellation is a number of stars which appear to lie in the neigh­bourhood of one another on the surface of the celestial sphere, and which astronomers, for their easy remembrance, suppose to be circum­scribed with the outlines of some ancient or other sigure, whereby the motions of the planets is more readily described and composed. These constellations are eighty in number; twelve of which are in the zodi­ac, thirty six in the northern, and thirty two in the southern hemisphere. The number of stars in the whole amounts to two thousand eight hundred and forty three, of which twenty are of the first, sixty five of the second, two hundred and five of the third, four hundred and eigh­ty five of the fourth, six hundred and forty eight of the fifth, and one thousand four hundred and twenty of the sixth magnitude.

These stars, by not altering their situation, in respect to one another, serve astronomers as fixed points whereby the motions of other bo­dies may be compared; and, accordingly, their relative positions have been sought after with the most assiduous care, during many ages, and catalogues of the observations have, from time to time, been publish­ed, by those who have been at the pains to make them. Among these the most copious, and at the same time the most accurate, is that called the Historia Coelestis of Mr. Flamstead. To consider these stars as designed merely to decorate the sky, and form a rich and beautiful canopy for this earth, would derogate from the wisdom of the creator. Astronomers therefore with much reason have considered the fixed stars as so many suns attended with a number of revolving planets, which they illuminate, warm and cherish. If this be true, there are [Page 23] as many systems as there are fixed stars. These may also revolve round one common centre, forming one immense system of systems. All these systems we may conceive, are filled with inhabitants suited to their re­spective climes; and are so many theatres, on which the great Cre­ator and Governor of the Universe displays his infinite power, wis­dom and goodness. Such a view of the starry heavens, must fill the mind of every contemplative beholder, with sublime, magnificent and glorious ideas of the Creator.

The ancient Egyptian priests, to whom the Greeks owed all their philosophical learning, are supposed to have been the first acquainted with the true system of the world. Pythagoras learned it in Egypt, and taught it to his disciples, after his return to Europe. But it was so total­ly forgotten, during the ages of ignorance, that when Copernicus, a ce­lebrated astronomer, revived it, in the fifteenth century, he was consi­dered as the author, rather than the restorer. Some of the learned im­mediately adopted the hypothesis, and it would probably soon have been universally received, had it not met with a formidable opposition from an ignorant and bigoted clergy. Nursed in the lap of indolence, and in­veterate enemies to every species of free and impartial enquiry, they condemned the Copernican system, under pretence of its being repug­nant to the sacred writings. The thunder of the Vatican was employ­ed to silence the voice of reason, and the dread of ecclesiastical cen­sures almost deterred mankind from thinking. At last, the reforma­tion in religion gave a fatal blow to superstitious tyranny; the rays of learning broke through the night of ignorance, and genuine philo­sophy triumphed over the chicanery of the schools: Mankind were now convinced, that the scriptures were never intended to explain the systems of philosophy, but to make us humane, virtuous, and hap­py; that it is agreeable to the Great Author of our being to contem­plate his works, and display the wonders of his creating hand. From this fortunate aera the sciences made rapid strides toward perfection, and every day produced a discovery of some new truth, or the detec­tection of some ancient error. Proofs were multiplied in confirma­tion of the Copernican system, which is now established on a founda­tion not to be shaken. The astonishing harmony which prevails a­mong the several parts, prove it to have been the work of a divine hand; and that nothing less than infinite wisdom could have planned so beautiful a fabric.

The limits we are confined to, will not admit of our multiplying proofs to establish the Copernican system; the following therefore only will be added; but these, if there were no other, would be more than sufficient for the purpose.

1. The planets Mercury and Venus, are always observed to have two conjunctions with the sun, but no opposition: This could not happen, unless their orbits were circumscribed by that of the earth.

2. Mars, Jupiter and Saturn have each their conjunctions and op­positions to the sun, alternately and successively, which they they could not have, unless their orbs were exterior to that of the earth.

3. The greatest elongation or distance of Mercury from the sun is about twenty eight degrees, and that of Venus forty seven degrees; which answers exactly to their distance in the Copernican system: But according to the Ptolemaic, they must often be seen in opposition to him, or at the distance of 180 degrees.

[Page 24] 4. In this disposition of the planets, they will all of them be some­times much nearer to the earth than at others; the consequence of which is, that their brightness and splendour, as well as their appa­rent diameters, will be proportionally greater at one time than at an­other; and this we observe to be true every day. Thus the apparent diameter of Venus, when greatest, is near sixty six seconds; when least, not more than nine seconds and an half: That of Mars, when greatest, is twenty one seconds; when least, only two and an half. But if the Ptolemaic hypothesis be true, they must always be equal.

5. All the planets sometimes appear in direct motion; sometimes stationary, and sometimes retrograde. These appearances must hap­pen according to the Copernican system, but are absolutely repugnant to any other.

6. The bodies of Mercury and Venus, in their superior conjunc­tion with the sun, pass behind the body of that luminary, and in the inferior conjunction are seen to transit or pass over his disk, in the form of a round black spot. These phenomena are necessary in the Copernican system, but impossible in that of Ptolemy.

7. The times in which these conjunctions, oppositions, stations, and retrogradations of the planets happen, are not such as they would be, were the earth at rest in the centre; but precisely such as would hap­pen, if the earth and all the planets move about the sun, in the order, and with the velocities assigned them in the Copernican system. Consequently this, and no other, can be the true system of the world.

Of GEOGRAPHY.—Its RISE and PROGRESS.

GEOGRAPHY is a word derived from the Greek, * and literally signifies a description of the earth, its figure, magnitude, and the posi­tions of the several parts of its surface.—Geography is either universal, as it relates to the earth in general, or particular, as it relates to any sin­gle part of it.

This science, like all others of a practical nature, has advanced to­wards perfection by slow, and, in some periods of time, by almost im­perceptible degrees. In the infancy of the world the figure of the earth was unknown. It was generally supposed to be a plane, of a circular surface, terminated by the heavens; that this plane was of no remarkable thickness; and that the regions below it were the hab­itations of spirits.

Observations, however, soon demonstrated, that this was not the real figure of the earth. The desire of keeping up a mutual inter­course between each other, and of exchanging their different commo­dities, induced the inhabitants of ancient times to undertake journies of considerable length; and these were extended in proportion as the inhabitants spread themselves into distant countries. Their principal guides in these journies were the heavenly bodies. The sun was their direction during the day, and the stars supplied his place in the night. The plains of Asia, where these discoveries were made, are extremely favourable for contemplating the face of the heavens during the night. Blessed with a climate generally serene, the sky is rarely obscured; and the practice of sleeping upon the house tops, which has been con­tinued from the earliest ages, rendered the positions of the stars famil­iar. They could not help observing, that, while the greater part re­volved [Page 25] round the earth, some in the northern parts remained nearly in the same situation; and that the sun every day, in his greatest eleva­tion, was directly opposite to the place of these stars. Hence it was natural to imagine, that all the heavenly bodies revolved round some fixed point situated near those stars; and this point they called the pole. Assisted by these discoveries, however imperfect, and animated with a desire of carrying on a commerce with distant people, they travelled to very remote countries, and traded with the inhabitants of other climes. Those who directed their journies to the south, could not help observing, that the fixed point round which the heavens appeared to revolve, was nearer the horizon there than in their own country; and that new stars appeared in the southern extremities of the hea­vens, which they had not seen before. On the contrary, those who directed their course towards the north, perceived that some of the stars in the southern hemisphere became more depressed, and those in the northern more elevated than in their own country. Hence they saw that the earth was not a plane, as they had at first imagined, but a curve. They further observed, that after passing over equal dis­tances in the direction of the meridian, the greatest and least eleva­tions of the stars were equally increased or diminished; and hence they found, that in the direction of the meridian, at least, the surface of the earth was circular. From this period geography improved gra­dually by travels, by commerce and by conquest.

Homer has described so many places with great accuracy and pre­cision, that Strabo considered him as the first among the geograph­ers of early times.

Thales divided the year into 365 days; which was undoubtedly a method discovered by the Egyptians, and communicated by their to him. It is said to have been invented by the second Mercury, sur­named Trismegistus, who, according to Eusebius, lived about 50 years after the Exodus. From the days of Thales, who flourished in the sixth century before Christ, very little seems to have been done towards the establishment of geography for 200 years.

The expedition of Alexander, who extended his conquests into In­dia, and to the borders of Scythia, made the Greeks acquainted with many countries very remote from their own. That conqueror enter­tained in his service two engineers, Diognetus and Baeton, whose busi­ness consisted in measuring, and keeping an accurate account of his marches. Pliny and Strabo have preserved these measures; Arrian has handed down to us the particulars of the navigation of Nearchus and Onesicritus, who sailed back with Alexander's fleet from the mouth of the Indus to those of the Euphrates and Tigris. By reduc­ing Tyre and Sidon, the Greeks informed themselves of all the places to which the Phenicians traded by sea; and we know that their com­merce extended even to the British Islands. The successors of Alex­ander in the East, by carrying their conquests to the mouths of the Ganges, obtained a general knowledge of many parts of India. Ptol­emy Evergetes, led his armies into Abyssinia; and from his marches and success in that distant country, a general knowledge of it was ob­tained. But geography acquired still greater advantages from the conquests of the Romans. Ambitious of establishing an universal mon­archy, and of forcing all the inhabitants of the earth to submit to the Roman eagles, they carried their armies into very remote countries, [Page 26] and conquered the inhabitants of distant climes. Hence the geogra­phers of those times were enabled to describe countries before hardly known, and correct the errors of former writers. The great roads of the empire, measured through their whole extent, proved extremely useful; and the Itineraries, though often altered, and sometimes in­correct, afforded considerable assistance. Accordingly most of the va­luable geographical treatises wrote by the ancients, were composed during the reigns of the Roman emperors.

Timocharis and Aristillus, who began to observe about 295 years before Christ, seem to have been the first who attempted to fix the longitudes and latitudes of the fixed stars, by considering their dist­ances from the equator. One of their observations gave rise to the discovery of the precession of the Equinoxes, which was first observed by Hipparchus about 150 years after; and he made use of Timocha­ris and Aristillus' method, in order to delineate the parallels of lati­tude, and the meridians on the surface of the earth; thus laying the foundation of the science of geography as we have it at present.

Strabo and Ptolemy are the first among the ancient geographers, and dispute the chair of precedence. The geography of Ptolemy is more extensive; it takes in a greater part of the earth, while it seems equal­ly circumstantial every where: But this very extent renders it more suspected; it is not easy to be every where exact and correct. Strabo, on the contrary, relates very little more than what he saw with his own eyes; he made a vast number of voyages to gain the experience ne­nessary to give the requisite certainly to his accounts, and is very short in what he relates from others. Strabo was a philosopher as well as a geographer. Good sense, perspicuity, accuracy, and solidity of judg­ment are visible in every part of his works. Ptolemy, however, by disposing his geography by latitudes and longitudes, opened a way for improvement, and pointed out a method for carrying the art to per­fection. The discovery of the longitudes and latitudes immediately laid a foundation for making maps, or delineations of the surface of the earth in plano, on a very different plan from what had been at­tempted before. Formerly the maps were little more than rude out­lines and topographical sketches of different countries. The earliest were those of Sesostris, mentioned by Eustathius; who says, that "this Egyptian king, having traversed great part of the earth, recorded his march in maps, and gave copies of his maps not only to the Egyptians, but to the Scythians, to their great astonishment."—Some have ima­gined, that the Jews made a map of the holy land, when they gave the different portions to the nine tribes at Shiloh: For Joshua tells us, that they were sent to walk through the land, and that they described it in seven parts in a book; and Josephus tells us, that when Joshua sent out people from the different tribes to measure the land, he gave them, as companions▪ persons well skilled in geometry.

Eratosthenes was the first who attempted to reduce geography to a regular system, and introduced a regular parallel of latitude. This was traced over certain places where the longest day was of the same length. He began it from the straits of Gibraltar; and it thence pass­ed through the Sicilian sea, and near the southern extremities of Pelo­ponnes [...]s. From thence it was continued through the island of Rhodes and the bay of Issus; and there entering Cilicia, and crossing the rivers Euphrates and Tigris, it was extended to the mountains of [Page 27] India. By means of this line, he endeavoured to rectify the errors of the ancient map, supposed to be that of Anaxi [...]ander. In drawing this parallel, he was regulated by observing where the longest day was fourteen hours and an half, which Hipparchus afterwards deter­mined to be the latitude of 36 degrees.

The first parallel through Rhodes was ever afterwards considered with a degree of preference, like the foundation stone of all ancient maps; and the longitude of the then known world was often attempt­ed to be measured in stadia and miles, according to the extent of that line, by many succeeding geographers. Eratosthenes soon after attempt­ed not only to draw other parallels of latitude, but also to trace a meridian at right angles to these, passing through Rhodes and Alexandria, down to Syene and Merce; and as the progress he thus made tended naturally to enlarge his ideas, heat last undertook a still more arduous task, name­ly, to determine the circumference of the globe by an actual measure­ment of a segment of one of its great circles. He knew that at the summer solstice, the sun was vertical to the inhabitants of Syene, a town on the confines of Ethiopia, under the tropic of Cancer, where they had a well sunk for that purpose, on the bottom of which the rays of the sun fell perpendicular the day of the summer solstice: He ob­served by the shadow of a wire set perpendicular in an hemispherical bafon, how much the sun was on the same day at noon distant from the zenith of Alexandria; and found that distance to be one 50th part of a great circle in the heavens. Supposing then Syene and Alexandria to be under the same meridian, he concluded the distance between them to be the 50th part of a great circle upon the earth; and this distance being by measure 5000 stadia, he concluded the circumference of the earth to be 250,000 stadia; but as this number divided by 360 would give 694 4/9; stadia to a degree, either Eratosthenes himself or some of his followers assigned the round number 700 stadia to a degree; which multiplied by 360, makes the circumference of the earth 252,000 sta­dia *; whence both these measures are given by different authors as that of Eratosthenes.

Astronomy, was not neglected by the ancient geographers. They were convinced, that without its assistance no great progress could be made in their art. Their instruments, indeed, were inaccurate and imperfect, but they were assiduous in their observations. They gene­rally determined the latitudes of places by the shadow of a gnomon of some known height; but they had no other method for determining the longitudes of places than that of observing the eclipses of the moon; they knew, that by comparing the times when any of these phenome­na happened at different places, the difference of longitude between them might be known.

The parts of the earth's surface known to the ancients were confined within narrow bounds. On the west, the Atlantick ocean and British isles limited their knowledge. The Fortunate islands, now called the Canaries, were the remotest lands they were acquainted with to the south. Their notions were very imperfect with regard to the northern countries. Though Scandinavia was known, yet that, and some other countries on the same continent, were considered as large islands. It is not easy to de­termine [Page 28] what place the ancients understood by Ultima Thule; many take it for Iceland; but Procopius thinks it was a part of Scandinavia.

Their knowledge of Sarmatia and Scythia was far from extending to the sea which bounds Russia and Great Tartary on the north and east. Their discoveries went no farther than the Rippean mountains, which now divide Russia from Siberia. The western frontier of China seems to have bounded the knowledge of the ancients on the east. Ptole­my, indeed, had a very imperfect notion of the southern parts of that extensive empire. He composed his system of geography about 150 years after Christ, in the reign of Antoninus Pius. The principal ma­terials he made use of for composing this work, were the proportions of the gnomon to its shadow, taken by different astronomers at the times of the e­quinoxes and solstices; calculations founded upon the length of the long­est days; the measures or computed distances of the principal roads contained in their surveys and itineraries; and the various reports of tra­vellers and navigators, who often determined the distances of places by hearsay and conjecture. All these were compared together, and digested into one uniform body or system; and afterwards were trans­lated by him into a new mathematical language, expressing the differ­ent degrees of longitude and latitude, according to the invention of Hipparchus, but which Ptolemy had the merit of carrying into full practice and execution, after it had been neglected for upwards of 250 years. With such imperfect and inaccurate materials, it is no wonder to find many errors in Ptolemy's system. Neither were these errors such as had been introduced in the more distant extremities of his maps, but even in the very centre of that part of the world which was the best known to the ancient Greeks and Romans, and where all the famed ancient astronomers had made their ob­servations.—Yet this system, with all its imperfections, continued in vogue till the beginning of the present century. All the others, which now make so conspicuous a figure in the commerce of Europe, were unknown. How far they extended their discoveries with re­gard to Africa, cannot certainly be known. Some are of opinion, that they were acquainted with the whole coast, having sailed round the southern extremity, now called the Cape of Good Hope, and ex­tended their voyages from the Red Sea to the Mediterranean. Ptole­my, however, seems to insinuate, that the southern parts had escaped their knowledge. Indeed, the opinion almost universally embraced by the ancients, that the torrid zone was uninhabitable, seems to prove, that their knowledge of Africa was very confined; because, as great part of that country lies in the burning zone, their acquaintance with it must have convinced them, that the general notion was founded on mistake.

The discovery of the southern parts of Africa was reserved for the Portuguese. Animated with a desire of finding a passage to the East Indies, they coasted along the western side of Africa, and, in the fif­teenth century, completed the design. They passed the Cape of Good Hope, and pursued their course to the Indies. The passage be­ing thus opened, several European nations, desirous of sharing in the rich commerce of the east, sent their ships to the Indian Sea, where they discovered the Asiatic islands, and penetrated to the empire of Japan. The voyages of the Russians have completed our knowledge of the eastern parts of the continent of Asia.

The prodigious length of the voyage to India, round the southern [Page 29] extremity of Africa, induced Christopher Columbus to attempt the discovery of a shorter tract. About the end of the fifteenth century he crossed the Atlantick ocean; but, instead of the Indies, he found America, and put the crown of Castile, under whose auspices the voyage was undertaken, in possession of a New World.

The improvements in geography which since have taken place, have been owing to the great progress made in astronomy. More correct methods and instruments for observing the latitude have been found out; and the discovery of Jupiter's Satellites have afforded a much easier method of finding the longitudes than was formerly known. The voyages made by different nations also, which are now become frequent, have brought to our knowledge, a vast number of countries utterly unknown before. The late voyages of Captain Cooke and other late navigators, and the travels of Mr. Bruce and oth­ers, have contributed greatly to the improvement of geography during the present century; so that now the geography of the utmost extrem­ities of the earth is in a fair way of being much better known to the moderns than that of the adjacent countries was to the ancients.

FIGURE, MAGNITUDE and MOTION of the EARTH.

THE fundamental principles of geography are, the spherical figure of the earth; its rotation on its axis; its revolution round the sun; and the position of the axis or line round which it revolves, with re­gard to the celestial luminaries. That the earth and sea taken together constitute one vast sphere, is demonstrable by the following arguments.

1st, Such a figure is best adapted to motion. 2d, The higher the eye is placed, the more extensive is the prospect; whence it is com­mon for sailors to climb up to the tops of the masts to discover land or ships at a distance. But this would give them no advantage were it not for the convexity of the earth; for upon an infinitely extended plane objects would be visible at the same distance whether the eye were high or low; nor would any of them vanish till the angle under which they appeared became too small to be perceptible. 3d, To peo­ple on shore, the mast of a ship at sea appears before the hull; but were the earth an infinite plane, not the highest objects, but the big­gest, would be longest visible; and the mast of a ship would disappear, by reason of the smallness of its angle, long before the hull. 4th, To people at sea, the land disappears, though near enough to be visible were it not for the intervening convexity of the water. 5th, We ar­gue from analogy, all the other planets being of a spherical figure. 6th, The earth has often been sailed round; as by Magellan, Drake, Dampier, Anson, Cooke, and many others; which demonstrates that the surface of the ocean is spherical; and that the land is very little different, may easily be proved from the small elevation of any part of it above the surface of the water. The mouths of rivers, which run 1000 miles, are not more than one mile below their sources; and tho highest mountains are not quite four miles of perpendicular height: so that, though some parts of the land are elevated into hills, and others depressed into valleys, the whole may still be accounted spherical. 7th, An undeniable and indeed occular demonstration of the spherical figure of the earth, is taken from the round figure of its shadow, which [Page 30] falls upon the moon in the time of eclipses. As various sides of the earth are turned towards the sun during the time of different phe­nomena of this kind, and the shadow in all cases appears circular, it is impossible to suppose the figure of the earth to be any other then spherical. The inequalities of its surface have no effect upon the earth's shadow on the moon; for as the diameter of the terraqueous globe is very little less than 8000 miles, and the height of the highest mountain on earth not quite four, we cannot account the latter any more than the 2000th part of the former; so that the mountains bear no more proportion to the bulk of the earth, than grains of dust beat to that of a common globe.

The earth is not truly spherical, but an oblate spheroid, or flatted at the poles, something in the form of a flat turnip. Its diameter from east to west is a few miles longer than that from north to south. As many find it difficult to conceive how people can stand on the oppo­site side of the globe, without falling off, their conception may be as­sisted by supposing all the various bodies on the earth's surface were of iron, and a very large magnet were placed at the centre; then all bodies being attracted towards the centre by the magnet they would not fall off, which way soever the earth should turn. Now the attraction of gra­vitation operates on all bodies, as that of magnetism does on iron only.

According to Norwood's measure of a degree, which is generally preferred, on supposition that the earth is a true sphere, its circumfer­ence is 25,020 miles. But by considering its true figure, its circumfer­ence at the equator is 25,038 miles, and the length of an eliptical meridian 25,927. Though the earth is an oblate spheriod, yet the difference between the two diameters and their two circumferences is but small. Had the difference been more considerable it would have greatly af­fected all nautical and geographical conclusions deduced from a sphere; but the smallness of the difference renders the error scarcely discerni­ble, unless the distance be very great, and the latitudes very high. In the construction of globes, maps, charts, &c. the earth is considered as a perfect sphere.

The earth, like the rest of the planets, has two motions, one round its axis, the other round the sun. It revolves round its axis once in 24 hours, and causes a continual succession of day and night, and an ap­parent motion of the heavenly bodies, from east to west. By this motion on its axis the inhabitants on the equator are carried 1040 miles in an hour. It completes its revolution round the sun once in a year, and oc­casions the difference in the length of the days and nights, and the agreeable variety in the seasons.

The diameter of the earth's orbit is 190,346,000 miles, and its cir­cumference 597,987,646 miles. Its hourly motion in its orbit is 68,217 miles, which is 142 times greater than that of a cannon ball, which moves about 8 miles in a minute; and would be 22 years and 228 days in going from this earth to the sun. Many of the terrestrial phenomena depend upon the globular figure of the earth, and the position of its axis with regard to the sun; particularly the rising and setting of the celestial luminaries, the length of the days and nights, &c. It belongs to geography to take notice of the difference betwixt the same phenom­ena in different parts of the earth. Thus, though the sun rises and sets all over the world, the circumstances of his doing so are very dif­ferent in different countries. The most remarkable of these circum­stances [Page 31] is the duration of the light not only of the sun himself, but of the twilight before he rises and after he sets. In the equatorial re­gions, for instance, darkness comes on very soon after sunset: because the convexity of the earth comes quickly in between the eye of the ob­server and the luminary, the motion of the earth being much more rapid there than any where else. In our climate the twilight always continues between one and two hours, and during the longest days in the summer season it continues in a considerable degree during the whole night. In countries farther to the northward or southward, the twilight becomes brighter and brighter as we approach the poles, un­til at last the sun does not appear to touch the horizon, but goes in a circle at some distance above it for many days successively. In like manner, during the winter, the same luminary sinks lower and lower, until at last he does not appear at all; and there is only a dim twink­ling of twilight for an hour or two in the middle of the day. By rea­son of the refraction of the atmosphere, however, the time of darkness, even in the most inhospitable climates, is always less than that of light; and so remarkable is the effect of this property, that in the year 1682 when some Dutch navigators wintered in Nova Zembla, the sun was visible to them 16 days before he could have been seen above the hori­zon had there been to atmosphere, or had it not been endowed with any such power. The reason of all this is, that in the northern and southern regions only a small part of the convexity of the globe is in­terposed betwixt us and the sun for many days, and in the high lati­tudes none at all. In the warmer climates the sun has often a beauti­ful appearance at rising and setting, by reason of the refraction of his light through the vapours which are copiously raised in those parts.—In the colder regions, halos, parhelia, aurora borealis, and other meteors, are frequent; the two former owing to the great quantity of vapour con­tinually flying from the warm regions of the equator to the colder ones of the poles. The aurora borealis is owing, some say, to the electrical matter imbibed by the earth from the sun in the warm climates, and going off through the upper regions of the atmosphere to the place from whence it came. In the high northern latitudes, thunder and lightning are unknown, or but seldom heard of; but the more terrible phenomena of earthquakes, volcanoes, &c. are by no means unfrequent. These however, seem only to affect islands and the maritime parts of the con­tinent.

Notwithstanding the seeming inequality in the distribution of light and darkness, it is certain, that throughout the whole world, there is nearly an equal proportion of light diffused on every part, abstracting from what is absorbed by clouds, vapours, and the at­mosphere itself. The equatorial regions have indeed the most intense light during the day, but the nights are long and dark; while on the other hand, in the northerly and southerly parts, though the sun shines less powerfully, yet the length of time that he appears above the hor­izon, with the greater duration of the twilight, makes up for the seem­ing deficiency.

Were the earth a perfect plane, the sun would appear to be ver­tical in every part of it: for in comparison with the immense mag­nitude of that luminary, the diameter of this globe itself is but very small: and as the sun, were he near to us, would do much more than cover the whole earth; so, though he were moved to any distance, [Page 32] the whole diameter of the latter would make no difference in the ap­parent angle of his latitude. By means of the globular figure of the earth also, along with the great disparity between the diameters of the two bodies, some advantage is given to the day over the night: [...] thus the sun being immensely the larger of the two, shines upon moon than one half of the earth; whence the unenlightened part has [...] shorter way to go before it again receives the benefit of his rays. This difference is greater in the inferior planets, Venus and Mercury, th [...]n in the earth.

DOCTRINE of the SPHERE.
DEFINITIONS and PRINCIPLES.

A SPHERE with astronomers, is the whole frame of the world, [...] being of a globular figure, or more strictly, the Primum Mobile, which encloses all the other orbs and heavenly bodies.

A direct or [...]ight sphere, is when both the poles of the world are in the horizon, and all equinoctial passes through the zenith; so that the equator and all its parallels, such as the tropics and polar circles, make right angles with the horrizon, and the divided by it into two equal parts; so that the sun, moon and stars ascend directly above, and descend directly below the horizon. See the Plate.

An oblique sphere is that where all the diurnal motions are oblique to the horizon. This is common to all parts of the earth, except those under the poles and the equator. In an oblique sphere, one of the poles is elevated above, and the other depressed below the horizon.

A parallel sphere is when one pole is in the zenith and the other in the nadir, in which the equator, and all its parallels, are parallel with the horizon: This position is peculiar to those parts which lie direct­ly under the poles.

In geography the circles which the sun apparently describes in the heavens, are supposed to be extended as far as the earth, and marked on its surface. We may imagine as many circles as we please to be, described on the earth, and their planes to be extended to the celes­tial sphere till they mark concentric ones on the heavens. Each cir­cle is divided into 360 equal parts, called degrees, each degree is divid­ed into 60 seconds. The circles supposed by geographers to be describ­ed in this manner, are denominated great and less circles.

Great Circles are those which divide either the celestial or terrestrial sphere into two equal parts. Of these there are six—the Equator, the Meridian, the Ecliptic, the Horizon and the two Colures.

Less circles are those which divide the sphere into two unequal parts; of which there are four, the two Tropics and the two Polar Circles.

Axis and Poles of the Earth.] The axis of the earth is an imaginary line passing through its centre from north to south. The extreme points of the axis are called the poles.

Equator.] The equator is that line or circle which encompasses the middle of the earth, dividing the northern half from the southern. This line is often called the equinoctial, because, when the sun appears therein, the days and nights are equal in all parts of the world. From this line latitude is reckoned.

Meridian.] This circle, represented on the artificial globe by a bra [...] ­ring, passes through the poles of the earth, and the zenith and the nadir; crossing the equator at right angles and dividing the globe into eastern [Page]

ARTIFICIAL SPHERE

COPERNICAN SYSTEM

[Page 33] and western hemispheres. It is called meridian from the Latin meridies, mid-day; because when the sun comes to the south part of this circle it is called noon, and the day is half spent. There are an infinite num­ber of meridians, which vary as you travel east or west. Geographers assume one of the meridians for the first; commonly that which pas­ses through the metropolis of their own country. The meridian of Philadelphia is the first for Americans; that of London for the Eng­lish; and that of Paris for the French.

Zodiac.] If two circles were drawn parallel to the ecliptic, at the dist­ance of eight degrees on each side of it, the space, or girdle included between these two parallels, sixteen degrees broad, and divided in the middle by the ecliptic, will comprehend within it the orbits of all the planets, and is called the Zodiac.

Ecliptic.] The Ecliptic is a great circle, in the plane of which the earth performs her annua' revolution round the sun, or in which the sun seems to move round the earth, once in a year. This circle is called the Ecliptic, from the word Eclipse, because no eclipse of the sun or moon happens, but when the moon is in or near the plane of this circle. It makes an angle with the equator of 23° 30′, and intersects it in two opposite parts, called the Equinoctial points, because when the sun is in either of these points, he has no declination, and shines equally to both poles, and the day is then equal to the night all over the world. The times when the sun passes through these points, are the 21st of March, and the 21st September: The former is called the vernal, the latter the autumnal equinox.

The ecliptic is divided into twelve equal parts, of thirty degrees each, called signs. These begin at the vernal intersection of the eclip­tic with the equator, and are numbered from west to east. The names and characters of the signs, with the months in which the sun enters them, are as follows:

Latin names of the signs. English names. Charac­ters. Months in which the sun enters them.
1 Aries The Ram March
2 Taurus The Bull April
3 Gemini The Twins May
4 Cancer The Crab ancer; June
5 Leo The Lion July
6 Virgo The Virgin August
7 Libra The Scales September
8 Scorpio The Scorpion October
9 Sagittarius The Archer November
10 Capricornus The Goat apri; December
11 Aquarius The Water-Bearer January
12 Pisces The Fishes February

The first six are called northern; and the latter southern signs; because the former possess that half of the ecliptic, which lies to the northward of the equinoctial, and the latter that half which lies to the southward.

Horizon.] The horizon, represented on the artificial globe by a broad wooden circle, divides it into upper and lower hemispheres. There are, geographically speaking, two horizons, the sensible and the rational. The sensible horizon is that circle which limits our prospect; where the sky and the land, or water, appear to meet. The rational or real horizon, is a circle whose plane passes through the centre of the earth, dividing it into upper and lower hemispheres.

[Page 34] The horizon is divided into four quarters, and each quarter into 90 degrees. The four quartering points, viz. east, west, north and south, are called the cardinal points. The poles of the horizon are the zenith and the nadir. The former is the point directly over our heads; the latter the point directly under our feet.

Colures.] The two meridians that pass through the four above men­tioned points have particular names; that which passes through the first degrees of Aries and Libra is called the equinoctial Colure, and that which passes through the first degrees of Cancer and Capri­corn is termed the solstitial Colure. There Colures cut each other at right angles, in the poles of the world.

Circles of longitude in the heavens, are great circles of the sphere imagined to pass through the poles of the ecliptic, and to cut the ecliptic at right angles, as the meridians do the equinoctial.

The latitude of any heavenly object is an arch of a circle of longi­tude, intercepted between the centre of the object and the ecliptic. If the object be on the north side of the ecliptic, it is said to be in north latitude; if on the south, in south latitude.

Parallels of celestial latitude, are small circles drawn parallel to the ecliptic.

The longitude of any heavenly object is an arch of the ecliptic, inter­cepted, between the first point of Aries, and a circle of longitude passing through the centre of the object. The right ascension of any heavenly object is an arch of the equinoctial, intercepted between the first point of Aries, and a meridian passing through the centre of the object.

The declination of any heavenly object is an arch of the meridian, intercepted between the centre of the object and the equinoctial. If the object be on the north side of the equinoctial, it is said to have north declination; if on the south side, it has south declination. All small circles in the celestial sphere parallel to the equinoctial, are called parallels of declination. Among these are the tropic of Cancer, the tropic of Capricorn, the Arctic and Antarctic circles.

Tropics.] The tropics, are two circles drawn parallel to the equator, at the distance of 23° 29′ on each side of it. These circles form the limits of the ecliptic, or the sun's declination from the equator. That which is in the northern hemisphere, is called the tropic of Cancer, because it touches the ecliptic in the sign Cancer; and that in the southern hemisphere, is called the tropic of Capricorn, because it touches the ecliptic in the sign Capricorn. On the 21st of June the sun is in Cancer, and we have the longest day. On the 21st of De­cember the sun is in Capricorn, and we have the shortest day. They are called tropics, from the Greek word TREPO, to turn, because when the sun arrives at them, he returns again to the equator.

Polar Circles.] The two polar circles are described round the poles of the earth at the distance of 23° 29′. The northern is called the Arctic circle, from Arctos, or the bear, a constellation situated near that place in the heavens; the southern, being opposite to the former, is called the Antarctic circle.—The polar circles bound the places where the sun sets daily. Beyond them the sun revolves without setting.

The azimuths, or vertical circles, are great circles passing through the zenith and nadir, and cutting the horizon at right angles.

The altitude of an heavenly object, is an arch of a vertical circle, intercepted between the centre of the object and the horizon.

The zenith distance of any heavenly object, is an arch of a vertical cir­cle, intercepted between the center of the object and the zenith.

[Page 35] The meridian altitude, or meridian zenith distance, is the altitude, or zenith distance, when the object is in the meridian.

Zones.] The surface of the earth is supposed to be divided into five unequal parts called zones, each of which is terminated by two parallels of latitude. Of these five zones, one is called the torrid or burning zone; two are stiled frigid or frozen; and two temperate; names adapted to the quality of the heat and cold to which their situ­ations are liable.

The torrid zone is that portion of the earth over every part of which the sun is perpendicular at some time of the year. The breadth of this zone is forty-seven degrees; extending from twenty-three de­grees and a half north latitude, to twenty-three degrees and a half south. The equator passes through the middle of this zone, which is terminated on the north by the parallel of latitude called the tropic of Cancer, and on the south by the parallel called the tropic of Capri­corn. The ancients considered this zone as uninhabitable, on account of the heat, which they though too great to be supported by any hu­man being, or even by the vegetable creation; but experience has long since refused this notion.

Many parts of the torrid zone are remarkably populous; and it has been found that the long nights, great dews, regular rains and breezes, which prevail in almost every part of the torrid zone, render the earth not only inhabitable, but also so fruitful, that two harvests a year are very common. All sorts of spices and drugs are almost solely produced there; and it furnishes more perfect metals, precious stones, and pearls, than all the rest of the earth together.

This zone comprehends the East and West Indies, Philippine Isl­ands, greater part of South America and Africa, and almost all Capt. Cook's discoveries, including the northern parts of New Holland. The frigid zones are those regions round the pole where the sun does not rise for some days in the winter, nor set for some days in the sum­mer. The two poles are the centres of these zones, which extend from these points to twenty-three degrees and a half nearly; that is, they are bounded by the northern and southern parallels of latitude of sixty-six degrees and a half. The part that lies in the northern hemisphere is called the north frigid zone, and is bounded by a par­allel called the arctic or polar circle; and that in the southern hemis­phere, the south frigid zone, and the parallel of latitude which bounds it, is called the antarctic, or polar circle. The northern frigid zone comprehends Nova Zembla, Lapland, part of Norway, Baffin's-Bay, part of Greenland, and part of Siberia.—The southern frigid zone has no land known to us. The two temperate zones are the spaces contained between the tropics and polar circles.

The northern temperate zone contains almost all Europe, the greater part of Asia, part of Africa, the United States of America, and the British Colonies.—The southern temperate zone comprizes the south part of New Holland, (including Botany-Bay) Cape of Good Hope and Cape Horn.

In the frigid zones the longest day is never below 24 hours; in the temperate zones not quite so much, and in the torrid never more than 14 hours.

Climates.] The word climate has two significations, the one com­mon, and the other geographical. In common language, the word is used to denote the difference in the seasons and the temperature of the air. When two places differ in these respects, they are said to be in different climates.

[Page 36] In a geographical sense, a climate is a tract of the earth's surface, in­cluded between the equator and a parallel of latitude, or between two parallels of such a breadth, as that the length of the day in the one, be half an hour longer than in the other. Within the polar circles, how­ever, the breadth of a circle is such, that the length of a day, or the time of the sun's continuance above the horizon without setting, is a month longer in one parallel, as you proceed northerly, than in the other.

Under the equator, the day is always twelve hours long. The days gradually increase in length as you advance either north or south from the equator. The space between the equator, and a parallel line drawn at the distance of 8° 25′, where the days are twelve hours and a half long, is called the first climate; and by conceiving parallels drawn in this manner, at the increase of every half hour, it will be found that there are twenty-four climates between the equator and each of the polar circles. Forty-eight in the whole.

Under the polar circles, the longest day is twenty-four hours. The sun, when at the tropics, skims the horizon without setting. As you advance from the polar circles to the poles, the sun continues above the horizon for days, weeks and months, in a constant increase, until you arrive at the poles, where the sun is six months above the horizon; and the whole year may be said to consist of but one day and one night.

There are thirty climates between the equator and either pole. In the first twenty-four, between the equator and each polar circle, the period of increase for every climate is half an hour. In the other six, between the polar circles and either pole, the period of increase for each climate is a month. These climates continually decrease in breadth as you proceed from the equator, as may be seen by attending to the following table.

TABLE
Climates. Longest day. Latitudes in [...], the respective climate be­gin & end. Names of countries and remarkable places, situated in the respective climates, north of the equator.
    d. m. Within the first climate lie,
1 12½ 8 25 1 The Gold est. in Afr. Molucca in E. [...]nd. Cayenne and Surinamin S. A [...].
2 13 16 25 2 Abysin [...]a, Siam, Madras, Darien, Barbadoes, Tobago, &c.
3 13½ 23 50 3 Mecca, Bombay, Bengal, Canton, Mexico, Jamaica, Gaudaloupe.
4 14 30 25 4 Egypt, Delhi, Canary Isles, E. Florida, Havannah.
5 14½ 36 28 5 Gibraltar, Jerusalem, Ispahan, Nankin, Georgia and Carolinas.
6 15 41 22 6 Lisbon, Madrid, Asia-Minor, Virginia, Maryland, Philadelphia.
7 15½ 45 29 7 Rome, Genoa, Constantinople, Caspian, Sea, N. York, New-England.
8 16 49 01 8 Paris, Vienna, Nova-Scotia, Newfoundland, Canada.
9 16½ 52 00 9 London, Flanders, Prague, Dresden, Cracow, Tartary.
10 17 54 27 10 Dublin, Warsaw, Holland, Hanover, Labrador, New South Wales.
11 17½ 56 37 11 Edinburgh, Copenhagen, Moscow, capital of Russia.
12 18 58 29 12 South Part of Sweden, Tobol [...]i, capital of Siberia.
13 18½ 59 58 13 Orkney Isles, Stockholm, capital of Sweden.
14 19 61 18 14 Bergen in Norway, Petersburgh in Russia.
15 19½ 62 25 15 Hudson's Straits, N. America.
16 20 63 22 16 South Part of West Greenland, Siberia.
17 20½ 64 06 17 Drontheim in Norway.
18 21 64 49 18 Part of Finland in Russia.
19 21½ 65 21 19 Archangel on the White-Sea, Russia.
20 22 65 47 20 Hecla in Iceland.
21 22½ 66 06 21 Northern Parts of Russia and Siberia.
22 23 66 20 22 New-North Wales in N. America.
23 23½ 66 28 23 Davis's Straits in ditto.
24 24 66 31 24 Samoieda.
25 1month 67 21 25 South Part of Lapland.
26 2 do. 69 48 26 West Greenland.
27 3 do. 73 37 27 Zembla Australia.
28 4 do. 78 30 28 Zembla Borealis.
29 5 do. 84 05 29 Spitsbergen, or E. Greenland.
30 6 do. 90 0 30 Unknown.

[Page 37] Latitude.] The latitude of a place is its distance from the equator, reck­oned in degrees, &c. north or south, on the meridian. The greatest latitude is that of the poles, which are ninety degrees distant from the equator. If the place be situated between the equator and the north pole, it is said to be in north latitude; if it lie between the equator and the south pole, it is in south latitude.

The elevation of the pole above the horizon, is always equal to the latitude of the place: for to a person situated on the equator, both poles will rest in the horizon. If you travel one, two, or more degrees north, the north pole will rise one, two, or more degrees, and will keep pace with your distance from the equator.

Longitude.] Every place on the surface of the earth has its meridian. The longitude of a place, is the distance of its meridian from some other fixed meridian, measured on the equator. Longitude is either east or west. All places east of the fixed or first meridian, are in east longitude; all west, in west longitude. On the equator, a degree of longitude is equal to sixty geographical miles; and of course, a mi­nute on the equator is equal to a mile. But as all the meridians cut the equator at right angles, and approach nearer and nearer to each other, until at last they cross at the poles, it is obvious that the degrees of longitude will lessen as you go from the equator to either pole: so that in the sixtieth degree of latitude, a degree of longitude is but thirty miles, or half as long as a degree on the equator; as is evident from the following table.

A TABLE, Shewing the number of miles contained in a degree of longitude in each parallel of latitude from the equator.
Degrees of latitude. Miles. 60th parts of a mile.
1 59 56
2 59 54
3 59 52
4 59 50
5 59 46
6 59 40
7 59 37
8 59 24
9 59 10
10 59 00
11 58 52
12 58 40
13 58 28
14 58 12
15 58 00
16 57 40
17 57 20
18 57 4
19 56 44
20 56 24
21 56 00
22 55 36
23 55 12
24 54 48
25 54 24
26 54 00
27 53 28
28 53 00
29 52 28
30 51 56
31 51 24
32 50 52
33 50 20
34 49 44
35 49 8
36 48 32
37 47 56
38 47 16
39 46 36
40 46 00
41 45 16
42 44 36
43 43 52
44 43 8
45 42 24
46 41 40
47 41 00
48 40 8
49 39 20
50 38 22
51 37 44
52 37 00
53 36 08
54 3 [...] 26
55 34 24
56 33 32
57 32 40
58 31 48
59 30 50
60 30 00
61 29 04
62 28 03
63 7 12
64 26 16
65 25 20
66 24 24
67 23 28
68 22 32
69 21 32
70 20 32
71 19 32
72 18 32
73 17 32
74 16 32
75 15 32
76 14 32
77 13 32
78 12 32
79 11 28
80 10 24
81 09 20
82 08 20
83 07 20
84 06 12
85 05 12
86 04 12
87 03 12
88 02 04
89 01 04
90 00 00
[Page 38]

METHODS of finding the LATITUDES and LONGI­TUDES of PLACES from CELESTIAL OBSERVA­TIONS.

WHAT is meant by latitude and longitude has already been suffici­ently explained, it remains that we shew the methods used for finding both by celestial observations.

I. Of finding the latitude.

As the latitude of a place is an arch of the meridian intercepted between the zenith and the equinoctial, which is always equal to the height of the visible pole above the horizon, it follows that if the me­ridional altitude, or its complement, the zenith distance, of any ce­lestial object, whose place in the heavens is known, can be found, the latitude is easily discovered. Thus, if the heavenly object be in the equinoctial, the zenith distance will be equal to the latitude, which will be either north or south, according as the observer is situated either to the northward or southward of the object. But if the sun or star hath either north or south declination, that is, if its apparent diurnal motion be either to the northward or southward of the equi­noctial, the declination must either be subtracted from, or added to, the zenith distance, according as the zenith distance and declination are of the same or different denominations.

1. If the zenith distance and declination have the same name, their difference will give the latitude. And if the declination is great­er than the zenith distance, the latitude will be of the same name with the declination; but if the declination be less than the zenith distance, the latitude will be of a contrary name. If they are equal, the latitude will be 00 degrees, 00 minutes; that is, the place is situ­ated under the equinoctial.

2. If the declination and zenith distance are of contrary names, that is, one north and the other south, their sum will be the latitude, and always of the same name with the declination.

In most books of astronomy and navigation are tables of the de­clination of the sun, and principal fixed stars; and the meridian alti­tude of the sun or stars may be easily found by a great variety of in­struments.

3. When the object appears in the zenith, the latitude is equal to the declination, and also of the same name.

There are several other methods for finding the latitude, but the above will be sufficient in this place, especially as it is generally used.

II. Of finding the longitude.

It has been already observed, that the difference of longitude be­tween any two places might be determined, by knowing the difference between the times that any remarkable appearance in the heavens was seen in those places. For since the sun and fixed stars appear to move round the earth, or, which is the same thing, the earth revolves about its axis in twenty-four hours; it follows, that in every hour there passes over the meridian one twenty-fourth part of 360 degrees, or of the whole circumference of the equator, equal to fifteen degrees, and a proportionable part in a greater or less time.

The heavenly bodies afford frequent opportunities for making ob­servations of this kind. For as these appearances consist in the ap­pulses, that is, the approaches of the heavenly bodies to one another, [Page 39] or their passing by one another; and these appulses, when they hap­pen, are seen at the same instant of absolute time in all parts of the earth where they are visible: therefore by knowing the relative times of the day when such appearances are seen in two distant places, the difference between those times is known, and consequently the differ­ence of longitude between those places.

Several Ephemeres or Almanacks are annually published, in which the times when the eclipses of the sun, moon, and Jupiter's satellites; the rising, setting, and southing of the planets; the appulsus of the moon to certain fixed stars, and other celestial appearances, are deter­mined with regard to some meridian. By the help of one of these books, and a careful observation of these appearances, the longitude may be determined.

Eclipses of the moon, when they happen, afford one method of finding the difference of longitude. For as these eclipses are occa­sioned by an interposition of the earth between her and the sun, and consequently she is immersed in the earth's shadow, the moment any part of her body is deprived of the solar rays, it is visible to all those people who can see her, at the same instant of absolute time. Hence by observing the beginning, middle, or end of an eclipse of the moon, in any part of the world, noting the apparent time of these phenome­na, and comparing it with the calculations of the same eclipse, adapt­ed to some other meridian, the difference of time, and consequently the difference of longitude between those two places will be known.

Suppose for instance, the beginning of an eclipse of the moon hap­pened at London sixteen minutes after two in the morning, but not till fifty-seven minutes and forty seconds after six in the morning at Bost­on in New-England; then will the difference of time be four hours, forty one minutes, forty seconds, equal to seventy degrees twenty-five minutes, the difference of longitude; and because the eclipse happened later at Boston than at London, the difference of longitude will be west. Consequently, if the longitude be reckoned from the meridian of London, the longitude of Boston will be seventy degrees twenty-five minutes west.

The longitude of places may also be obtained from the observations of solar eclipses, but these being incumbered with the consideration of parallaxes, are much less adapted to that purpose than those of the moon.

But as the eclipses of the sun and moon happen but seldom, another expedient offers, viz. the eclipses of Jupiter's satellites. That planet has four moons, or satellites, moving round him at different distances, and in different intervals of time; one or more of which is eclipsed almost every night: for they disappear either in going behind Jupiter, or passing before him; and the instant of such immersions or emer­sions may be seen by a refracting telescope of about eight or nine feet long, or a reflecting one of nine inches focal length.

The passage of the moon, or the superior planets, over the meridian, affords another method of discovering the longitude: for by having the time in an ephemeris, when the moon or any of the planets pass the meridian of some place, and finding by observation the time when the object passes the meridian of another place, the longitude will be determined; for the difference of time converted into degrees, &c. will give the difference of longitude.

There is still another method, equally expeditious and certain, [Page 40] namely, the appulses of the moon to certain fixed stars, and their occultations by the interposition of her body. For the moon finishing her revolution in the space of twenty-seven days, seven hours, forty-three minutes, there are but few clear nights, when the moon does not pass over, or so near some fixed star, that the time of the nearest approach, or the visible conjunction, may be easily observed. And these, when compared with the visible time computed to the merid­ian of some place, will shew the difference of longitude.

The last method we shall mention for finding the longitude, is by a time keeper, a kind of clock or watch, which will always shew the true time under the meridian of some particular place: for by find­ing the time of the day at any other place, and comparing them with the time then shewn by such a machine, the difference of longitude between those places will be determined. The ingenious Mr. Harri­son, a few years since, completed such a time keeper, which was found upon trial to answer even beyond the most sanguine expectations; and he accordingly received ten thousand pounds from the govern­ment, as a reward for his discovery: but for some reasons, not gene­rally known, the time-keeper has been hitherto kept from the public.

OF THE GLOBES, AND THEIR USE.

AN artificial Globe is a round body, whose surface is every where equally remote from the centre. But by the globes here is meant two spherical bodies, whose convex surfaces are supposed to give a true representation of the earth and heavens, as visible by observation. One of these is called the terrestrial, the other the celestial globe. On the convex surface of the terrestrial globe, all the parts of the earth and sea are delineated in their relative size, form, and situation.

On the surface of the celestial globe, the images of the several con­stellations, and the unformed stars, are delineated; and the relative magnitude and position which the stars are observed to have in the heavens, carefully preserved.

In order to render these globular bodies more useful, they are fitted up with certain appurtenances, whereby a great variety of useful prob­lems are solved in a very easy and expeditious manner.

The brazen meridian is that ring or hoop in which the globe hangs on its axis, which is represented by two wires passing through its poles. The circle is divided into four quarters of 90 degrees each; in one semi-circle the divisions begin at each pole, and end at 90 de­grees, where they meet. In the other semicircle, the divisions begin at the middle, and proceed thence towards each pole, where they end at 90 degrees. The graduated side of this brazen circle serves as a meridian for any point on the surface of the earth, the globe being turned about till that point comes under the circle.

The hour circle is a small circle of brass, divided into twenty-four hours, the quarters and half quarters. It is fixed on the brazen me­ridian, equally distant from the north end of the axis; to which is fixed an index, that points out the divisions of the hour-circle as the globe is turned round its axis.

The horizon is represented by the upper surface of the wooden circular frame, encompassing the globe about its middle. On this wooden frame is a kind of perpetual calendar, contained in several concentric circles, the inner one is divided into four quarters of ninety [Page 41] degrees each. The next circle is divided into the twelve months, with the days in each according to the new stile; the next contains the twelve equal signs of the zodiac, each being divided into thirty degrees; the next the twelve months and days according to the old stile; and there is another circle containing the thirty-two points of the compass, with their halves and quarters. Although these circles are on all horizons, yet they are not always placed in the same dis­position.

The quadrant of altitude is a thin slip of brass, one edge of which is graduated into ninety degrees and their quarters, equal to those of the meridian. To one end of this is fixed 3 brass nut and screw, whereby it is put on, and fastened to the meridian: if it be fixed in the zenith or pole of the horizon, then the graduated edge represents a vertical circle passing through any point.

Besides these, there are several circles described on the surfaces of both globes, such as the equinoctial, or ecliptic, circles of longitude and right ascension, the tropics, polar circles, parallels of latitude and declination on the celestial globe; and on the terrestrial, the equator, ecliptic, tropics, polar circles, parallels of latitude, hour-circles, or meridians to every fifteen degrees; and on some globes, the spiral rhumbs flowing from the several centres, called flies.

In using the Globes, keep the east side of the horizon towards you (unless the problem requires the turning it) which side you may know by the word East, on the horizon; for then you have the graduated meridian towards you, the quadrant of altitude before you, and the Globe divided exactly into two equal parts, by the graduated side of the meridian.

The following Problems, as being most useful and entertaining, are selected from a great variety of others, which are easily solved with a globe fitted up with the aforementioned appurtenances.

I. The latitude of a place being given, to rectify the globe for that place.

Let it be required to rectify the globe for the latitude of Boston, 42 degrees 25 minutes North.

Elevate the north pole, till the horizon cuts the brazen meridian in 42° 25′ and the globe is then rectified for the latitude of Boston. Bring Boston to the meridian, and you will find it in the zenith, or directly on the top of the globe. And so of any other place.

II. To find the latitude and longitude of any place on the terrestrial globe.

Bring the given place under that side of the graduated brazen me­ridian where the degrees begin at the equator, then the degree of the meridian over it shews the latitude; and the degree of the meridian over it shews the latitude; and the degree of the equator, under the meridian, shews the longitude.

Thus Boston will be found to lie in 42° 25′, north latitude, and 70° 37′ west longitude, from Greenwhich, or 4° 43′, east longitude from Philadelphia.

III. To find any place on the globe whose latitude and longitude are given.

Bring the given longitude, found on the equator, to the meridian, and under the given latitude, found on the meridian, is the place sought.

[Page 42]

IV. To find the distance and bearing of any two given places on the globe.

Lay the graduated edge of the quadrant of altitude over both places, the beginning or 0 degree being on one of them, and the degrees be­tween them shew their distance; these degrees multiplied by 60, give the geographical miles, and, by sixty-nine and a half, give the distance in English miles nearly. Observe, while the quadrant lies in this posi­tion, what rhumb of the nearest fly runs mostly parallel to the edge of the quadrant, and that rhumb shews nearly the bearing required.

V. To find the sun's place in the ecliptic.

Look the day of the month in the outer calendar upon the ho­rizon,(if the globe was made before the alteration of the stile) and opposite to it, you will find the sign and degree the sun is in the day.—Thus on the 25th of March, the sun's place is 4½ degrees in Aries.—Then look for that sign and degree in the ecliptic line marked on the globe, and you find the sun's place; there fix on a small black patch, so is it prepared for the solution of the following problems.

Note. The earth's place is always in the sign and degree opposite to the sun; thus, when the sun is 4½ degrees in Aries, the earth is 4½ de­grees in Libra; and so of any other.

VI. To find the sun's declination, that is, his distance from the equinoctial line, either northward or southward.

Bring his place to the meridian; observe what degree of the meridi­an lies over it, and that is his declination. If the sun lies on the north side the line, he is said to have north declination, but if on the south side, he has south declination.

Thus on the 20th. of April the sun has 11½ degrees north declin­ation, but on the 26th of October he has 12½ south declination.

Note. The greatest declination can never be more than 23½ degrees either north or south; that being the distance of the tropics from the equinoctial, beyond which the sun never goes.

VII. To find where the sun is vertical on any day; that is, to find over wh [...] heads the sun will pass that day.

Bring the sun's place to the meridian, observe his declination, or hold a pen or wire over it, then turn the globe round, and all those countries which pass under the wire, will have the sun over their heads that day at noon. Thus, on the 16th day of April, the inhabitants of the north part of Terra Firma, Porto Bello, Philippine Isles, southern parts of India, Abyssinia, Ethiopia, and Guinea, have the sun over their heads that day at 12 o'clock.

Note. This appearance can only happen to those who live under the torrid zone, because the sun never strays farther from the equinoctial either northward or southward, than the two tropics, from whence he returns again.

VIII. To find over whose heads the sun is at any hour, or to what place the sun is vertical.

Bring the place where you are (suppose at Boston) to the meridian, set the index to the given hour by your watch; then turn the globe till the index points to the upper 12, or noon, look under the degree of declination for that day, and you find the place to which the sun i [...] vertical, or over whose head it is at that time.

[Page 43] Thus on the first day of May, at half past 8 o'clock, A. M. I find the sun is then vertical at Cape Verd, the western point of Africa.

Note. If it be morning the globe must be turned from east to west. If in the afternoon, it must be turned from west to east.

IX. To find, at any hour of the day, what o'clock it is at any place in the world.

Bring the place where you are to the brass meridian; set the index to the hour by the watch, turn the globe till the place you are looking for comes under the meridian, and the index will point out the time required.

Thus when it is 10 o'clock in the morning, at Boston, it is 20 min­utes past 12 at Olinda in Brasil, and 8 at Mexico in New Spain; the former being 35 degrees W. Long. and the latter 100 degrees W. Long.

Note. By this problem you may likewise see, at one view, in distant countries, where the inhabitants are rising—where breakfastingdiningdrinking tea; where going to assemblies—and where to bed.

X. To find at what hour the sun rises and sets any day in the year; and also upon what point of the compass.

Rectify the globe for the latitude of the place you are in; bring the sun's place to the meridian, and set the index to 12; then turn the sun's place to the eastern edge of the horizon, and the index will point out the hour of rising; if you bring it to the western edge of the horizon, the index will shew the hour of setting.

Thus on the 10th day of April, the sun rose at half an hour after 5 o'clock, and sat half an hour before seven.

Note. In summer the sun rises and sets a little to the northward of the east and west points; and in winter a little to the southward of them. If therefore, when the sun's place is brought to the eastern and western edge of the horizon, you look on the inner circle, directly against the little patch, you will see the point of the compass upon which the sun rises and sets that day.

XI. To find the length of the day and night, at any time of the year.

Double the the time of the sun's rising that day, and it gives the length of the night; double the time of his setting, and it gives the length of the day.

This problem shews how long the sun stays with us any day, and how long he is absent from us any night.

Thus on the 3d day of May, the sun rises at 5 o'clock, and sets at sev­en; therefore the days are 14 hours long and the nights 10.

XII. To find the length of the longest or shortest day, at any place upon the earth.

Rectify the globe for that place; if its latitude be north, bring the beginning of Cancer to the meridian; set the index to 12. then bring the same degree of Cancer to the east part of the horizon, and the in­dex will shew the time of the sun's rising.

If the same degree be brought to the western side, the index will shew the time of his setting, which doubled. (as in the last problem) will give the length of the longest day and shortest night.

If we bring the beginning of Capricorn to the meridian, and proceed in all respects as before [...]punc; we shall have the length of the longest night and shortest day.

[Page 44] Thus in the great Mogul's dominions, the longest day is 14 hours; and the shortest night 10 hours. The shortest day is 10 hours, and the longest night 14 hours.

At Petersburgh, the seat of the Empress of Russia, the longest day is about 19½ hours, and the shortest night 4½ hours. The shortest day 4½ hours, and the longest night 19½ hours.

Note. In all places near the equator, the sun rises and sets at 6 o'clock the year round. From thence to the polar circles, the days increase as the latitude increases; so that at those circles themselves, the longest day is 24 hours, and the longest night just the same.—From the polar circle to the poles, the days continue to lengthen into weeks and months; so that at the very pole, the sun shines for 6 months together in summer and is absent from it 6 months in winter.Note; also, That when it is summer with the northern inhabitants, 'tis winter with the southern, and the contrary; and every part of the world partakes of an equal share of light and darkness.

XIII. To find all those inhabitants to whom the sun is this moment rising [...] setting in their meridians or midnight.

Find the sun's place in the ecliptic, and raise the pole as much above the horizon as the sun, that day, declines from the equator; then bring the place where the sun is vertical at that hour, to the brass me­ridian; so will it then be in the zenith or centre of a the horizon. Now see what countries lie on the western edge of the horizon; for in th [...] the sun is rising;—to those on the eastern side he is setting;—to those under the upper part of the meridian 'tis noon day;—and to those un­der the lower part of it, it is midnight.

Thus at Charlestown (Mass.) on the 10th of April, at 4 o'clock in the morning;

The sun is about rising at Brasil, S. America.
The sun is setting at New Guinea, the Japan Isles and Kamtschatka.
In the meridian, or noon, at Persia, Austria, and Nova Zem­bla.
Midnight at The Bay of Good Hope, in the vicinity of King George's Sound.

XIV. To find the beginning and end of twilight.

The twilight is that faint light, which opens the morning by little and little in the east, before the sun rises; and gradually shuts in the evening the in west, after the sun is set. It arises from the sun's il­luminating the upper part of the atmosphere, and begins always when [...]e approaches within 18 degrees of the eastern horizon, and ends when [...]e defends 18 degrees below the western; when dark night commences, and continues 'till another day dawn.

To find the beginning of twilight: rectify the globe; bring the sun's place in the ecliptic to the meridian, and set the index to 12 at noon. Turn the degree of the ecliptic, which is opposite to the sun's place 'till it is elevated 18 degrees in the quadrant of altitude above the horizon on the west, so will the index point the hour twilight begins.

To find when it ends—bring the same degree of the ecliptic to 18 degrees of the quadrant on the east side, and the index will point the time twilight ends.

[Page 45] Thus on the 10th of April, at Boston, twilight begins at 41 minutes after 3 in the morning, and ends 19 minutes after 8 in evening. In London they have no total night, but a constant twilight, while the sun is beneath the horizon for two months, from the 20th of May to the 20th of July.

Under the north pole, the twilight ceases when the sun's declination is greater than 18 degrees south, which is from the 13th of November to the 29th of January; so that notwithstanding the sun is absent from that part of the world for half a year together, yet total darkness does not continue above 11 weeks; and besides, the moon is above the hor­izon, at the poles, for a whole fortnight of every month through the year.

Note. The less the sun's meridian altitude, the longer twilight con­tinues; therefore, at the equator, twilight is the shortest.

XV. To measure the distance from one town to another.

Only take their distance with a pair of dividers, and apply it to the equinoctial, that will give the number of degrees between them, which being multiplied by 60, (the number of geographical or com­puted miles in one degree) gives the exact distance sought:—Or, ex­tend the quadrant of altitude from one place to another, that will shew the number of degrees in like manner, which may be reduced to miles as before.

Thus, the distance from London to Madrid is 11½ degrees. From Paris to Constantinople 19½ degrees. From Bristol, in England, to Boston, is 45 degrees, which multiplied by 69½, (the number of Eng­lish miles in a degree) give 3127½miles.

Note. No place can be further from another than 180 degrees—that being half the circumference of the globe, and consequently the greatest distance.

XVI. To find all those countries in which an eclipse of the sun or moon will be visible.

1. Of the Sun: Find the place to which the sun is vertical at the time of the eclipse, by problem 7th, and bring it to the zenith, or top of the globe; then, to all those places above the horizon, if the eclipse be large, will the sun appear (part of it) visibly obscured.

2. Of the Moon: Bring the antipodes, or country opposite the place where the sun is vertical at the time of the eclipse, to the zenith or top of the globe, and then the eclipse will be seen in all places above the horizon at that time.

XVII. To calculate the circumference of the earth, that is, to find how many miles it is round.

A line going round our globe, is supposed by mathematicians to be divided into 360 equal parts, called degrees; and each of these parts are supposed to be divided into 60 equal parts, called minutes. Mr. Norwood found, by accurately measuring from London to York in 1635, that one degree upon the earth's surface contained 69½ statute miles nearly; consequently if the whole 360 degrees be multiplied by 69½ we shall find the circuit of the whole earth, in measured miles, to be 25,020. The accurate measure is 25,038.

Note. 60 computed miles make a degree, which makes the cir­cumference to be but 21,600 geographical miles.

[Page 46]

XVIII. To calculate the diameter of the earth, i. e. to find how many [...] it is through.

It has been found by accurate mensuration, that if a circle measure [...] 22 round, its diameter will be 7; i. e. the diameter is always a li [...] less than one third part of the circumference; and this always [...] true, be the circle bigger or less.

Therefore if we multiply the circumference of the earth by 7, and divide the product by 22, the quotient will give the diameter, [...] thickness; and which, in this case, will be found to be 8018 mea­sured, 6872 computed, miles. The diameter of the earth is commonly reckoned at 7,970 measured miles.

Note. From these dimensions of the earth we may discover, [...] that if there were a hole made through it, and a mill-stone let [...] into this hole, and it should descend at the rate of 1 mile a minute, it would be more than 3¾ days in coming to the centre.

2d. If a man be desirous of travelling round the earth, and should go 20 miles each, day he would be 3 years and ½ in completing the Journey.

3d. If a bird should fly round the earth in 2 days, she must go at the rate of 525 (measured) miles an hour.

XIX. To find the superficial content of the earth.

Multiply the circumference by the diameter.

XX. To find the solid content of the earth.

Multiply the surface by one sixth of the diameter and it will give the solidity. Or, multiply the cube of the diameter by 11, and the product divided by 21, will give the solidity.

After the same manner we may find the surface and solidity not only of the natural globe, but also of the whole body of the atmos­phere surrounding it, (provided it be always and every where of the same height) for having found the perpendicular height thereof by that common experiment of the ascent of Mercury at the foot and top of a mountain, double the said height and add the same diameter of the earth; then multiply the whole as a new diameter, by its pro­per circumference, and from the product subtract the solidity of the earth, it will leave that of the atmosphere.

PROBLEMS solved on the CELESTIAL GLOBE.

THE equator, ecliptic, tropics, polar circles, horizon and bras [...] meridians, are exactly alike on both globes. Both also are rectified in the same manner. N. B. The sun's place for any day of the year, stands directly over that day on the horizon of the celestial globe, as it does on that day of the terrestrial.

The latitude and longitude of the stars, or of all other celestial phe­nomena, are reckoned in a very different manner from the latitude and longitude of places on the earth; for the all terrestrial latitudes are reckoned from the equator; and longitudes from the meridian of some remarkable place, as, of London by the British, and of Paris by the French. But the astronomers of all nations agree in reckoning the lat­itudes of the moon, stars, planets, and comets, from the ecliptic; and their longitudes from the equinoctial colure, in that semicircle of in [Page 47] which cuts the ecliptic at the beginning of Aries; and thence eastward, quite round the same semicircle again. Consequently those stars which lie between the equinoctial and the northern half of the ecliptic, have north declination and south latitude; those which lie between the equinoctial and the southern half of the ecliptic, have south decli­nation and north latitude; and all those which lie between the tropics and poles, have their declinations and latitudes of the same denom­ination.

PROB. I. To find the right ascension and declination of the sun, or any fixed star; bring the sun's place in the ecliptic to the brazen me­ridian; then that degree in the equinoctial which is cut by the meridian, is the sun's right ascension; and that degree of the meridian which is over the sun's place, is his declination. Bring any fixed star to the meridian, and its right ascension will be cut by the meridian in the equinoctial; and the degree of the meridian that stands over it is its declination. So that the right ascension and declination on the celestial globe, are found in the same manner as longitude and latitude on the terrestrial.

II. To find the latitude and longitude of any star. If the given star be on the north side of the ecliptic, place the 90th degree of the quad­rant of altitude on the north pole of the ecliptic, where the twelve se­micircles meet, which divide the ecliptic, into the twelve signs; but if the star be on the south side of the ecliptic, place the 90th degree of the quadrant on the south pole of the ecliptic: Keeping the 90th de­gree of the quadrant on the proper pole, turn the quadrant about, un­til its graduated edge cuts the star; then the number of degrees in the quadrant, between the ecliptic and the star, is its latitude; and the de­grees of the ecliptic, cut by the quadrant, is the star's longitude, reck­oned according to the sign in which the quadrant then is.

III. To present the face of a starry firmament, as seen from any given place of the earth, at any hour of the night.—Rectify the celesti­al globe for the given latitude, the zenith, and sun's place, in every respect, as taught by the problem for the terrestrial; and turn it about, until the index points to the given hour; then the upper hemisphere of the globe will represent the visible half of the heaven for that time: all the stars upon the globe being then in such situations, as exactly cor­respond to those in the heaven. And if the globe be placed duly north and south, by means of a small sea compass, every star in the globe will point toward the like star in the heaven: by which means, the constellations and remarkable stars may be easily known. All those stars which are in the eastern side of the horizon, are then rising in the eastern side of the heaven; all in the western, are setting in the west­ern side; and all those under the upper part of the brazen meridian, be­tween the south point of the horizon and the north pole, are at their greatest altitude, if the latitude of the place be north; but if the lati­tude be south, those stars which lie under the upper part of the meridi­an, between the north point of the horizon and the south pole, are at their greatest altitude.

IV. The latitude of the place, [...]nd day of the month, being given, to find the time when any known star will rise, or be upon the merid­ian, or set.

Having rectified the globe, turn it about until the given star comes to the eastern side of the horizon, and the index will show the time of the star's rising; then turn the globe westward, and when the star [Page 48] comes to the brazen meridian, the index will show the time of the star's coming to the meridian of your place; lastly, turn on, until the star comes to the western side of the horizon, and the index will show the time of the star's setting. N. B. In northern latitudes those [...] which are less distant from the north pole than the quantity of its ele­vation above the north point of the horizon, never set; and those which are less distant from the south pole than the number of degrees by which it is depressed below the horizon, never rise: And vice ver­sa in southern latitudes.

V. To find at what time of the year a given star will be upon the meridian, at a given hour of the night. Bring the given star to the upper semicircle of the brass meridian, and set the index to the given hour; then turn the globe, until the index points to XII at noon, and the upper semicircle of the meridian will then cut the sun's place, answer­ing to the day of the year sought; which day may be easily found a­gainst the like place of the sun among the signs on the wooden hori­zon.

The different MANNER by which some NATIONS and PEOPLE reckon TIME.

THE Babylonians, Persians, and Syrians, and the inhabitants of some part of Germany, begin their days at sun-rising.

The (ancient) Jews, Athenians, and Italians, reckon from sun-setsetting.

The Egyptians, like the English, &c. begin at midnight.

The astronomers and seamen, begin the day at noon, and reckon on 24 hours to the next day at noon. And according to this mode of reck­oning are all the calculations of the sun, moon, and planets, made and inserted in the common almanacks.

GEOGRAPHICAL THEOREMS, or PROPOSI­TIONS.

THESE propositions, which are deducible from the nature of the foregoing work, the learner will find to be so many real truths, if he properly applies and contemplates them upon the globe.

I. Places lying under the equator, have no latitude; because the reck­oning of latitude begins at the equator.

II. Under the poles of the world the latitude is greatest, or just 90 degrees; because the reckoning of latitude ends at the poles.

III. Going from the equator, towards the poles, the latitude increases; [...] towards the equator, the latitude diminishes.

IV. The latitude of any place is equal to the height of the pole in degrees above the horizon.

V. Places lying under that meridian, which is accounted the first, have no longitude; because the reckoning of longitude begins at that meridian.

VI. Those places have the greatest longitude which lie under the meridian, opposite to that where longitude begins.

VII. The longitude of any place cannot be greater than 180 degrees, eastward or westward; because that brings you to the meridian oppo­site to that where longitude began to be counted from.

[Page 49] VIII. No two places can be distant from one another above 180 degrees; because 180 degrees is half the circumference of a great cir­cle on the globe.

IX. All the inhabitants of the earth enjoy the sun's light an equal length of time, and have him equally absent from them.

X. Under the equinoctial, the days and nights are always equal to twelve hours; but not exactly so in any other place.

XI. In all places between the equator and the poles, the days and nights are never equal but at the time of the equinoxes, in March and September.

XII. The difference between the lengths of the days and nights in any place on either side the equator, is greater in proportion as the lati­tude of that place is greater.

XIII. In places exactly under the polar circles, the sun appears, when at the summer tropic, one whole day without setting; and disappears one whole day when in the winter tropic: At other times it daily rises and sets as elsewhere.

XIV. In all places of the frigid zones, the sun appears every year without setting for a certain number of days; and disappears for a­bout the same space of time. And the nearer to, or further form the pole, those places are, the longer or shorter is his appearance in, or absence from them.

XV. To all places under the same semicircle of the meridian, whether on the north or south side of the equator, it is noon, or midnight, or any other hour of the day or night, at the same time percisely.

XVI. Places lying eastward of any other place, have their morning, noon, and evening hours earlier than at that place, by one hour for every 15 degrees it lies eastward of it.

XVII. Places lying westward of any other place have their morning, noon, and evening hours later than at that place, by one hour for every 15 degrees it lies westward of it.

XVIII. A person in going eastward quite round the globe, will have gained one day in his reckoning of time, above the account kept at the place the departed from: But had his circuit been made westward, he would have been one day behind the account kept at that place.

XIX. Two persons setting out at the same time from a place to make the circuit of the globe, one going eastward the other westward, will, on their return, differ in their account of time by two entire days.

XX. To all places within the torrid zone, the sun is vertical, i. e. comes over the heads of the inhabitants, twice a year. To those under the tropics, once: But it is never vertical to those in the temperate or frigid zones.

XXI. People who live to the north of the torrid zone, see the sun due south at noon; and those who live to the south of the torrid zone, see the sun due north at noon.

XXII. Those who see the sun to the northward have their shadows projected southward; but when they see the sun to the southward, their shadows are projected northward.

XXIII. The nearer the sun is to the zenith of any person, the short­er is the shadow at noon; but the further from the zenith at noon, the longer is the shadow: The shadow is always opposite to the sun; and those who have the sun in their zenith, i. e. directly over their heads, have no [length of] shadow at all.

[Page 50] XXIV. In all places situated in a parallel sphere, i. e. at or very near the poles, the sun's daily motion runs always parallel, or nearly so, to the respective horizon of such place.

XXV. In all places situated in a right sphere, i. e. at or near the e­quator, the sun's daily motion is perpendicular, or nearly so, to the ho­rizon of such places.

XXVI. In all places situated in an oblique sphere, i. e. lying between the equator and the poles, the circle of the sun's daily motion is always oblique unto, or cuts the horizon of such place at unequal angles.

XXVII. On the days of the equinoxes only, that is, about the 20th of March, and 23d of September, the sun rises exactly in the east point of the horizon, and sets in the west point, to every place upon earth.

XXVIII. To places in north latitude, the sun rises to the northward of the east, and sets to the northward of the west, from the vernal to the autumnal equinox; and rises to the southward of the east, and sets to the southward of west, from the time of the autumnal equinox to that of the vernal.

Lastly. In all places of the torrid zone, the morning and evening twilight is least; in the two frigid zones it is greatest; and in the tem­perate zones the twilight is a medium between the other two.

Of MAPS and their USE.

A MAP is the representation of some part of the earth's surface de­lineated on a plane according to the laws of projection; for as the earth is of a globular form, no part of its spherical surface can be ac­curately exhibited on a plane.

Maps are either general or particular: General maps are such [...] give us a view of an entire hemisphere, or half of the globe, and [...] projected upon the plane of some great circle, which terminates the projected hemisphere, and divides it from the other half of the globe, as the meridian, equator, or the horizon of some place; and from this circle the projection is said to be meridional, equatorial, or hori­zontal.

Particular maps are such as exhibit a part less than a hemisphere; such as maps of Europe, Asia, Africa, North America, and South America; or of particular kingdoms, provinces, countries, or lesser dis­tricts.

There are two methods of projecting the circles in general maps, viz. stereographic, and orthographic. In order to form an adequate idea of the construction of maps, we may imagine the globe on which the circles are delineated, to be of thin glass, and that half of it is view­ed at the same time. In taking this view, the eye may be conceived to be placed at different distances from the hemisphere to be projected. If the eye be conceived to be placed in some point of the surface of the sphere to view the concave of the opposite hemisphere, it is called the stereographic projection: If the eye be supposed to be placed [...] an infinite distance, it is called the orthographic projection.

In the stereographic projection the parts about the middle are con­tracted, being much less than those nearer the circumference.

All the maps in this treatise, and indeed those in almost all oth [...] are laid down according to the laws of stereographic projection.

Maps differ from the globe in the same manner as a picture d [...] from a statue. The globe truly represents the earth, but a map [...] more than a plane surface can represent one that is spherical. But [Page 51] although the earth can never be exhibited exactly by one map, yet by means of several of them, each containing about ten or twenty degrees of latitude, the representation will not fall very much short of the globe for exactness; because such maps, if joined together, would form a spherical convex nearly as round as the globe itself.

Cardinal Points.] The north is considered as the upper part of the map; the south is at the bottom, opposite to the north; the east is on the right hand, the face being turned to the north; and the west on the left hand, opposite to the east. From the top to the bottom are drawn meridians, or lines of longitude; and from side to side, paralles of latitude. The outermost of the meridians and parallels are marked with degrees of latitude or longitude, by means of which, and the scale of miles, which is commonly placed in the corner of the map, the situation distances, &c. of places may be found, as on the artificial globe. Thus to find the distance of two places, suppose Philadelphia and Boston, by the map, we have only to measure the space between them with the compasses, or a bit of thread, and to apply this distance to the scale of miles, which shews that Boston is 286 miles distant from Philadelphia. If the places lie directly north or south, east or west, from one another, we have only to observe the degrees on the meridians and parallels, and by turning these into miles, we obtain the distance without mea­suring. Rivers are described in maps by blank lines, and are wider towards the mouth than towards the head or spring. Mountains are sketched on maps as on a picture. Forests and woods are represent­ed by a kind of shrub; bogs and morasses, by shades; sands and shallows are described by small dots; and roads usually by double lines. Near harbours, the depth of the water is expressed by figures representing fathoms.

When any parts of the heaven, or earth, are said to be on the right or left, we are to understand the expression differently acording to the profession of the person who makes use of it; because, according to that, his face is supposed to be turned towards a certain quarter. A geographer is supposed to stand with his face to the north, because the northern part of the world is best known. An astronomer looks towards the south, to observe the celestial bodies as they come to the meridian. The ancient augers in observing the flight of birds, looked towards the east; whilst the poets look west, towards the Fortunate isles. In books of geography, therefore, by the right hand we must understand the east; in those of astronomy, the west; in such as relate to augury, the south; and in the writings of poets, the north.

GENERAL ORSERVATIONS concerning HEAT and COLD. *

THAT the presence of the sun is the principal source of heat, as well as of light, and its absence of cold, is too obvious ever to have been doubted.

The next source of heat is the condensation of vapour. It is well known that vapour contains a quantity of the matter of heat which pro­duces no other effect but that of making it assume an aerial expand­ed state, until the vapour is condensed into a liquid; but during this condensation a quantity of sensible heat is set loose, which warms the surrounding atmosphere. This condensation is frequently caused by [Page 52] the attraction of an electrical cloud, and hence the sultriness we fre­quently experience before rain.

As the earth is the chief source of heat, in the atmosphere that sur­rounds it. distance from the earth is the source of cold; or, in other words, the greatest cold must prevail in the highest regions of the at­mosphere, and so much the greater, as clear unclouded air seems to receive no heat whatsoever from the rays of the sun, whether direct or reflected. This if the focus of the most powerful burning glass be directed on mere air, it does not produce the smallest degree of heat; and the reason is, because the air being transparent, affords a free pass­age to the rays of light, which act as fire only when confined within the minutest interstices of bodies; as it is then, and then only, that they contract the attractive power of the particles of matter; in which action and re-action hear consists.

Hence the highest mountains, even under the equator, are, during the whole year, covered with snow. Mr. Bouguer found the cold of Pinchinca, one of the Cordeliers, immediately under the line, to ex­tend from 7 to 9 degrees under the freezing point, every morning be­fore sunrise; and hence at a certain height, which varies in almost every latitude, it constantly freezes at night, in every season, though in the warm climates in thaws to some degree the next day: This height he calls the lower term of congelation. Between the tropics [...] places it at the height of 15577 feet.

At still greater heights it never freezes, not because the cold decrea­ses. but because vapours do not ascend so high; this height Mr. Bou­guer calls the upper term of congelation, and under the equator he fixes it at the height of 28000 feet, at most. Under the equator, there be­ing very little variety in the weather, the height of both terms is near­ly constant; under other latitudes this height is variable, both in sum­mer and winter, according to the degree of heat which prevails on the surface of the earth.

The next general source of cold is, evaporation; for the attraction of the particles of liquids decreases as their points of contact diminish, and thereby their capacity for receiving the matter of heat (which is the same as that of light) increases; by this increased capacity, the matter of heat or fire contained in the neighbouring bodies, which, like all other fluids, flows where it finds least resistance, is determined to flow towards the vapour; and consequently those bodies are cooled, though the vapour is not hea [...]ed; because the re-action of its particles is barely equal to that which it had before its capacity was increased *

With respect to evaporation, we may remark, 1st. That in our climates, it is about four times as great from the vernal to the autum­nal equinox, as from the autumnal to the vernal.

2dly. The degree of cold produced by evaporation, is much great [...] when the air is warmer than the evaporating surface, than that which is produced when the evaporating surface is the warmer of the two. Hence, warm winds, as the Sirocco, Harmatan, &c. are more deficca­tive than cold winds.

3dly. That it is greatly increased by a current of air or wind flow­ing over the evaporating surface, not only because the evaporating surface is thereby increased, but also because unsaturated air is con­stantly brought into contact with it. Hence it has been remarked that calm days are the hottest.

[Page 53] 4thly. That tracts of land covered with trees or vegetables, emit more vapour than the same space covered with water, as Dr. Hales has observed. Mr. Williams found this quantity to amount to one third more.

Lastly, We may observe, that the heat and cold of different coun­tries are transmitted from one to the other by the medium of winds. How the air of a cold country is determined to flow towards a warm­er, is easily understood; but by what means warm air is determined to flow towards cold countries, is somewhat difficult to explain. I shall here mention two causes that occur to me, wishing for a fuller explana­tion from others.

1st. If from any tract in the upper regions of the atmosphere, two currents of air flow in opposite directions, as some time happens, the inferior air being less compressed, will become specifically lighter; and currents of air in opposite directions to the upper currents will take place.

2dly. I conceive that when easterly and westerly winds meet with unequal force. one of them may be reflected northwards.

From what has been already said, it follows, that some situations are better fitted to receive or communicate heat than other situations; thus high and mountainous situations being nearer to the source of cold, must be colder than lower situations; and countries covered with woods, as they prevent the access of the sun's rays to the earth, or to the heaps of snow which they may conceal, and present more numer­ous evaporating surfaces, must be colder than open countries, though situated in the same latitude; and since all tracts of land present infi­nite varieties of situation, uniform results cannot here be expected.

With respect to the annual temperature, we may remark, 1st. That within 10 degrees of the poles the temperatures differ very little; neither do they differ much within 10 degrees of the equator.

2d. The temperatures of different years differ very little near the equator, but they differ more and more, as the latitudes approach the poles.

3d. If scarce ever freezes in latitudes under 35°, unless in very ele­vated situations. and it scarce ever hails in latitudes higher than 60°.

4th. Between latitudes 35° and 60°, in places adjacent to the sea, it generally thaws when the sun's altitude is 40°. and and seldom be­gins to freeze, until the sun's meridian altitude is below 40°.

Hence we may observe, that the month of January is the coldest in every latitude.

2d. That July is the warmest month in all latitudes above 48°; but in lower latitudes, August is generally the warmest.

3d. That December and January, and also June and July, differ but little. In latitudes above 30°, the months of August, September, Oc­tober and November, differ more from each other, than those of Feb­ruary, March, April and May. In latitudes under 30°, the difference is not so great. The temperature of April aproaches more, every where, to the annual temperature, than that of any other month; whence we may infer, that the effects of natural causes. that operate gradually over a large extent, do not arrive at their maximum, until the activity of the causes begins to diminish; this appears also in the op­eration of the moon on seas, which produces tides; but after these effects have arrived at their maximum, the decrements are more rapid [Page 54] than the increments originally were, during the progress to that max­imum

4th. That the differences, between the hottest and coldest months, within 20° of the equator, are inconsiderable, except in some peculiar situations; but that they increase in proportion as we reced [...] from the equator.

5th. That in the highest latitudes, we often meet with a heat of 75 or 80 degrees; and particularly in latitudes 59 and 60, the heat of Ju­ly is frequently greater, than in latitude 51°.

6th. That every habitable latitude enjoys a heat of 60 degrees at least, for two months; which heat seems necessary, for the growth and ma­turity of corn. The quickness of vegetation in the higher latitudes, proceeds from the duration of the sun over the horizon. Rain is lit­tle wanted, as the earth is sufficiently moistened by the liquefaction of the snow, that covers it during the winter; in all this we cannot sufficiently admire the wise disposition of providence.

7th. It is owing to the same provident hand, that the globe of the earth is intersected with seas and mountains, in a manner, that on its first appearance seems altogether irregular and fortuitous; presenting to the eye of ignorance, the view of an immense ruin; but when the effects of these seeming irregularities, on the face of the globe, are carefully inspected, they are found most beneficial and even necessary to the welfare of its inhabitants; for to say nothing of the advanta­ges of trade and commerce, which could not exist without these seas; it is by their vicinity, that the cold of the higher latitudes is moderat­ed, and the heat of the lower. It is by want of seas that the interior parts of Asia, as Siberia and Great Tartary, as well as those of Africa, are rendered almost uninhabitable; a circumstance which furnishes a strong prejudice against the opinion of those, who think these coun­tries were the original habitations of man. In the same manner, moun­tains are necessary; not only as the reservoirs of rivers, but as a defence against the violence of heat, in the warm latitudes: without the Alps, Pyrenees, Apennine, the mountains of Dauphine and Auvergne, &c. Italy, Spain, and France, would be deprived of the mild temperature they at present enjoy. Without the Balgate hills, or Indian Appen­nine, India would have been a desert. Hence Jamaica, St. Domingo, Sumatra, and most other intertropical islands, are furnished with mountains, from which the breezes proceed that refresh them.

A view of the ANNUAL TEMPERATURE of different places, according to the order of their LATITUDES.

  N. Lat. Longitude. Mean an­nual heat
  deg. m. deg. m.  
Wadso, in Lapland 70, 5   36°
Abo 60, 27 22,18 E. 40.
Petersburg 59, 56 30, 24 E. 38, 8
Upsal 59, 51 17, 47 E. 41, 88
Stockholm 59, 20 18. E. 42, 39
Solyskamski 59. 54 E. 36, [...]
Edinburgh 55, 57 3. W. 47, 7
Francker 53. 5, 42 E. 52, 6
Berlin 52, 32 13, 31 E. 49.
Lyndon, in Rutland 52, 30 0. 3 W. 48, 3
Leyden 52, 10 4, 32 E. 52, 25
London 51, 31   51, 9
Dunkirk 51, 2 2, 7 E. 54, 9
Manheim 49, 27 9, 2 E. 51, 5
Rouen 49, 26 1. W. 51.
Ratisbon 48, 56 12, 5 E. 49, 35
Paris 48, 50 2, 25 E. 52.
Troyes, in Champaigne 48, 18 4, 10 E. 53, 17
Vienna 48, 12 16, 22 E. 51, 53
Dijon 47, 19 4, 57 E. 52, 8
Nantes 47, 13 1, 28 E. 55, 53
Poitiers 46, 39 0, 30 E. 53, 8
Lausanne 46, 31 6, 50 E. 48, 87
Padua 45, 23 12. E. 52, 2
Rhodez, in Guienne 45, 21 2, 39 E. 52, 9
Bordeaux 44, 50 0, 36 W. 57, 6
Montpelier 43, 36 3, 73 E. 60, 87
Marseillies 43, 19 5, 27 E. 61, 8
Mont Louis, in Rousillon 42. 2, 40 E. 44, 5
Cambridge, in N. England 42, 25 71. W. 50, 3
Philadelphia 39, 56 75, 9 W. 52, 5
Pekin 39, 54 116, 29 W. 55, 5
Algiers 36, 49 2, 17 E. 72.
Grand Cairo 30. 31, 23 E. 73.
Canton 23. 133. E. 75, 14
Tivoli, in St. Domingo 19.   74.
Spanishtown, in Jamaica 18, 15 76, 38 W. 81.
Manilla 14, 36 1 [...]0, 58 E. 78, 4
Fort St. George 13. 87. E. 81. 3
Pondicherry 12. South Latitude. 67. E. 88.
Falkland Islands 51. 66. W. 47, 4
Quito 0, 13 [...]7, 50 W. 62.

THEORY of the WINDS.

AIR is a fine invisible fluid, surrounding the globe of the earth, and extending to some miles above its surface: and that collection of it, together with the bodies it contains, circumscribing the earth, is called the atmosphere.

Few natural bodies have been the subject of more experiments than the air; and from these it appears, that it is both heavy and elastic. By its gravity it is capable of supporting all lighter bodies, as smoke, va­pours, fumes, odours, &c. And by its elasticity, a small volume of air is capable of expanding itself in such a manner as to fill a very large space, and also of being compressed into a much smaller compass.—Cold has the property of compressing air, and heat of expanding it. But as soon as the expansion or compression is taken away, it will return to its natural state. Hence if an alteration be made in any part of the atmosphere, either by heat or cold, the neighbouring parts will be put into commotion, by the effort which the air always makes to recover its former state. Wind is nothing more than a stream or cur­rent of air capable of very different degrees of velocity, and generally [Page 56] blowing from one point of the horizon to its opposite part. The hor­izon, like all other great circles of the sphere, is divided into 360 de­grees: but as these divisions are too minute for common use, it is also divided into thirty two equal parts, called rhumbs, or points of the com­pass.

Winds are either constant or variable, a general or particular. Con­stant winds are such as always blow the same way, at least for a con­siderable length of time. Variable winds, are such as frequently shift, or change from one point of the compass to another. A gener­al wind, is that which blows the same way over a large tract of the earth the greater part of the year. A particular wind is that which blows in any particular place, sometimes one way and sometimes an­other.

The trade wind is a current of air blowing continually from the east on the Atlantic and Pacific ocean, between thirty degrees north and thirty degrees south latitude.

The cause of this constant wind is the action of the sun in his ap­parent motion from east to west. For the air immediately under the sun being more heated, and consequently more expanded in that [...] than in any other, the air to the eastward is constantly rushing to­wards the west, in order to restore the equilibrium, or natural state of the atmosphere; and by that means occasions a continual current of air from the eastward within those limits.

But the the trade winds near the northern boundary, blow between the north and east; and near the southern, between the south and east. For as the air is expanded by the heat of the sun near the equator, therefore the air from the northward and southward will both flow towards the equator, to restore the equilibrium. But these motions from the north and south being compounded with the foregoing easterly motion, will produce the motions observed near the above limits, be­tween the north and east, and between the south and west.

It must however be observed, that these general currents of the wind are disturbed on the continents and near the coast. Sometimes the nature of the soil increases or lessens the heat in the atmosphere; and sometimes chains of mountains form a kind of eddy near their western sides; henc [...] the motions of the winds may be different and even contrary to the general motions above observed.

In some parts of the Indian Ocean another species of trade-winds, called monsoons, prevail, These blow six months one way, and six months the contrary way.

These phenomena flow from the same cause. For the air that is cool and dense, must force the rarefied air in a continual stream up­wards, where it must spread itself to preserve and equilibrium; conse­quently the upper course or current of the air will be contrary to the under current; for the under current must move from those parts where the greatest heat is; and so by a kind of circulation, the north-east trade-wind below, will be attended with a south-west wind above; and a south-east below with a north-west above. Experience had sufficiently confirmed the truth of this proposition; the seamen [...] ways finding that as soon as they leave the trade winds, they immedi­ately find a wind blowing in an opposite direction.

Between the fourth and tenth degrees of north latitude, and between the longitudes of Cape Verd and the easternmost of the Cape [...] verd Islands, is a tract of sea which seems to be condemned to perpetual [Page 57] calms, attended with dreadful thunder and lightnings, and such frequent rains, that it has acquired the name of the Rains. This phe­nomenon seems to be caused by the great rarefaction of the air on the neighbouring coast, which causing a perpetual current of air to set in from the westward, and this current meeting here with the general trade wind, the two currents balance each other, and cause a general calm; while the vapours carried thither by each wind meeting and condensing, occasion these frequent deluges of rain.

THEORY of the TIDES.

BY the word tide is understood that motion of the water in the seas and rivers by which they regularly rise and fall. The phenomena of the tides occasioned a variety of opinions among the ancient phi­losophers; but the true cause continued unknown till the latter end of the last century, when it was discovered by the illustrious Sir Isaac Newton, who deduced it from the following observations.

One of the inherent properties of matter is gravitation or attract­ion. It is owing to this property, that heavy bodies thrown up into the air fall down to the surface of the earth in perpendicular direct­ions. And as all lines drawn from the centre of a sphere to its cir­cumference are perpendicular to its surface, therefore all heavy bodies fall in lines tending to the centre. This property of gravitation or attraction is found to be universally diffused through this solar system, and probably through the whole universe. The heavenly bodies are governed by this great law of nature. The earth and moon gravitate towards, or are attracted by the sun. Experience has also demon­strated, that the force of attraction exerted by these bodies on one a­nother, is less and less, as they are farther removed asunder in propor­tion to the squares of those distances.

From these general principles it follows, that the gravitation of bodies towards the centre of the earth will be less on those parts of its sur­face that are opposite to the sun and moon than in the others: and this defect of gravitation in particular parts, is the true cause of the ebbing and flowing of the tide. For it is evident, that if no such forces were exerted by the sun and moon, the oceans, being equally attracted towards the earth's centre on all sides by the force of gravity, would continue in a state of perfect stagnation. But as these forces are real­ly exerted, the waters in the oceans must rise higher in those place where the sun and moon diminish their gravity; or where the attract­ion of the sun and moon is greatest.

This being an [...]deniable fact, it follows, that as the force of gravi­ty must be diminished most in those places of the earth to which the moon is nearest. viz. in the zenith; therefore the waters in such places will rise higher, and consequently it will be full sea or flood in such places.

From the same principles it follows, that the parts of the earth di­rectly under the moon in the zenith, and those in the nadir, or those diametrically opposite, will have the flood or high water at the same time.

But as the waters in the zenith and nadir rise at the same time, therefore the waters in their neighbourhood will press towards these places to maintain the equilibrium; and, to supply the places of these, others will move the same way, and soon to place ninety degrees dist­ant [Page 58] from the said zenith and nadir; consequently in those places where the moon appears in the horizon, the waters will have [...] liberty to descend towards the centre; and therefore in those places, the water will be lowest.

From what has been said it follows, that if the surface of the earth was entirely covered with water, the ocean must have a prolate sp [...] ­roidical figure, the longer diameter passing through the place where the moon is vertical, and the shorter where she appears in the horizon. And as the moon apparently shifts her place from east to west in moving round the earth every day, the longer diameter of the spher [...] following her motion, there must be two floods and two ebbs in the length of a lunar day, or about twenty-four hours, fifty minutes.

Hence we see the reason why the time of high-water is about fifty minutes later every day. That is, if it be high-water at eleven to­day, it will not be high-water till near fifty minutes after eleven to­morrow.

The tides are higher than ordinary twice every month, viz. about the time of the new and full moon; and these are called spring tides. Because at these times both the sun and moon concur, or draw in the same right line; and consequently the tides must be more elevated. When the two luminaries are in conjunction, or when the sun and moon are on the same side of the earth, they both conspire to raise the water in the zenith, and consequently in the nadir; and when the sun and moon are in opposition, that is, when the earth is be­tween them, while one makes high-water in the zenith and nadir the other does the same in the nadir and zenith.

The tides are less than ordinary twice every month; that is, about the times of the first and last quarters of the moon; and these are call­ed neap-tides.

For in the quarters of the moon, the sun raises the water where the moon depresses it; and depresses it where the moon raises the water; the tides are made therefore by the difference of their actions.

It is however necessary to be observed, that the spring-tides hap­pen not precisely at the new and full moon, but a day or two after, when the attractions of the sun and moon have acted in the same di­rection for a considerable time. In the same manner the neap-tides happen a day or two after the quarters, when the force of the moon's attraction has been lessened by that of the sun's for several days to­gether.

The spring tides are greater about the time of the equinoxes, than at other times of the year; and the neap-tides are then less.

Because the longer diameter of the spheroid, or the two opposite floods, will at that time be in the earth's equator; and consequently will describe a great circle of the earth, by whose diurnal rotation those floods will move swifter, describing a great circle in the same time they used to describe a lesser circle parallel to the equator, and consequently the waters being impelled more forcibly against the shores, they rise higher.

Such would be the phenomena of the tides if the whole surface of the earth was entirely covered with water; but as this is not the case, there being besides the continents, a multitude of islands, lying in the way of the tide, which interrupt its course; therefore in many places near the shores, a great variety of other appearances besides those al­ready enumerated arise. These require particular solutions, in which [Page 59] the shores, streights, shoals, rocks, and other objects must be consider­ed; a disquisition which requires much mo [...] room than can be spar­ed in this introduction. What has been laid will however be suffi­cient to explain the theory of the tides, and enable the reader to pursue the enquiry and solve the difficulties that may arise with re­gard to any particular place.

LENGTH of MILES in different COUNTRIES.

THERE is scarcely a greater variety in any thing than in this fort of measure; not only those of separate countries differ, as the French from the English, but those of the same country vary, in the different provinces, and all commonly from the standard. Thus the common English mile differs from the statute mile, and the French have three forts of leagues.

We shall here give the miles of several countries, compared with the English by Dr. Hally.

The English statute mile consists of 5280 feet, 1760 yards, or 8 furlongs.

Eleven miles Irish, are equal to fourteen English.

The Russian vorst is little more than ¼ English.

The Turkish, Italian, and old Roman lesser mile is nearly 1 English.

The Arabian, ancient and modern, is about 1¼ English.

The Scotch mile is about 1½ English.

The Indian is almost 3 English.

The Dutch, Spanish, and Polish, is about 3½ English.

The German is more than 4 English.

The Swedish, Danish, and Hungarian, is from 5 to 6 English.

The French common league is near 3 English, and

The English marine league is 3 English miles.

NATURAL DIVISIONS of the EARTH.

THE Planet which we inhabit, called the Earth, is made up of land and water, and is therefore called terraqueous. About one fourth of the surface of the globe is land; the other three fourths are water.

The common divisions of the land and water, are as follows:—

The Divisions of Land are, The Divisions of Water are,
I. Continents.] A Continent is a very large tract of country, not entirely separated by water. There are commonly reckoned two Con­tinents, the Eastern and Western. The Eastern Continent is divided into Europe, Asia and Africa: The Western, into North and South America. To these we may now add the continent of New Holland, which is found to be sufficiently large to bear the respectable name of Continent. Some geographers reckon four continents, viz. Europe, Asia, Africa, and America. But according to the above definition there are but the three mentioned. I. Oceans.] An ocean is a vast col­lection of water, not entirely sepa­rated by land. There are five great Oceans; the Atlantic, lying between America on the west, & Europe and Africa on the east, 3,000 miles wide. The Pacific, between America on the East, and Asia on the west, 10,000 miles over. The Indian, which washes the eastern shores of Africa, and the southern shores of Asia, 3,000 miles wide. Besides these there is the Nor­thern or Frozen ocean. lying north­ward of Europe and Asia, 3,000 miles wide; and the Southern, extending from the southern coasts of Africa to the south pole, 8,500 miles over.
II. Islands.] An island is a tract of land entirely surrounded with water; as, Rhode Island, Long Is­and, Cuba, Ireland, Great Britain, Japan. II. Lakes.] A lake is a [...] collection of water, in the [...] parts of a country, surrounded [...] land; most of them, however, [...] ­municate with the ocean by ri [...] as lake Ontario, &c. A small [...] ­lection of water surrounded [...] ­bove, is called a pond.
III. Peninsulas.] A peninsula is almost an island, or a tract of land surrounded by water, excepting at one narrow neck; as Boston, the Morea, Crim Tartary and Arabia. III. Seas.] A sea or gulf is a [...] of the ocean, surrounded by [...] excepting a narrow pass, called strait, by which it communi [...] with the ocean; as the Mediter­ranean, Baltic and Red Seas; [...] the gulfs of Mexico, St. Lawrence and Venice.
IV. Isthmusses.] An isthmus is a narrow neck of land joining a pen­insula to the main land: as the isth­mus of Darien, which joins North and South America, 70 miles over; and the isthmus of Seuz, which un­ites Asia and Africa, 60 miles over. IV. Straits.] A strait is a [...] row passage out of one sea into a­nother; as the straits of Gibra [...] joining the Mediterranean to the Atlantic; the straits of Babe [...] ­deb, which unite the Red Sea [...] the Indian Ocean.
V. Promontories.] A promontory is a mountain or hill extending in­to the sea, the extremity of which is called a cape. A point of flat land projecting far into the sea is likewise called a cape; as Cape Ann, Cape Cod, Cape Hatteras, Cape Horn. V. Bays.] A bay is a part of the sea running up into the main [...] commonly between two capes; [...] Massachusetts Bay, between Cap [...] Ann and Cape Cod; Delaware Bay, between Cape May and Cap [...] Henlopen; Chesapeek Bay, between Cape Charles and Cape Henry.
VI. Mountains.] A mountain is a part of the land more elevated than the adjacent country, and seen at a distance; as the White Hills. VI. Rivers.] A river is a consid­erable stream of water, issuing from one or more springs, and glid­ing into the sea. A small stream is called a rivulet or brook.

An ACCOUNT of the GREGORIAN or NEW STYLE. *

POPE Gregory the XIII. made a reformation of the Calendar. The Julian Calendar, or Old Style, had, before that time, [...] in general use all over Europe. The year, according to the Julian Calendar, consists of 365 days and 6 hours; which 6 hours being [...] fourth part of a day, the common years consisted of 365 days, [...] every fourth year one day was added to the month of February, which made each of those years 366 days, which are usually called [...] Years.

This computation, though near the truth, is more than the [...] year, by 11 minutes, which in 131 years amounts to a whole day. [...] consequence of this, the vernal equinox was anticipated ten days from [Page 61] the general Council of Nice, held in the year 325 of the Christian AEra, to the time of Pope Gregory; who therefore caused ten days to be taken out of the month of October, 1582, to make the Equinox fall on the 21st of March, as it did at the time of that Coun­cil. And to prevent the like variation in future, he ordered that three days should be abated in every four hundred years, by reducing the Leap year at the close of each century, for three successive centuries, to common years, and retaining the Leap year at the close of each fourth century only.

At that time this was considered as exactly conformable to the true solar year; but Dr. Hally makes the solar year to be 365 days, 5 hours, 48 minutes, 54 seconds, 41 3ds, 27 4ths, 36 5ths: according to which, in 400 years, the Julian year of 365 days 6 hours will exceed the so­lar by three days, one hour and 53 minutes, which is nearly two hours, so that in 50 centuries it will amount to a day.

Though the Gregorian Calendar, or New Style, had long been used throughout the greater part of Europe, it did not take place in Great Britain and America till the first of January 1752, and in September following, the, 11 days were adjusted, by calling the third day of that month the fourteenth, and continuing the rest in their order.

A TABLE,
Exhibiting the Superficial Content of the whole Globe, in Square Miles, sixty to a degree, and also of the Seas and Unknown Parts, the Habitable Earth, the Continents; likewise the great Empires, and principal Islands, arranged ac­cording to their magnitude.

  Square Miles.
The Globe about 199,000,000
Seas and unknown parts 160,000,000
The habitable World 89,000,000
America 14,000,000
Asia 10,500,000
Africa 9,500,000
Europe 2,600,000
Continent of New Holland 4,000,000
Persian Emp. under Darius 1,600,000
Roman Em. in its meridian 1,600,000
Russia 4,000,000
Chinese 1,700,000
Great Mogul 1,100,000
United States of America 1,000,000
Turkish Empire 950,000
Present Persia 800,000
Borneo 228,000
Madagascar 168,000
Sumatra 129,000
Japan 118,000
Great Britain 72,900
Celebes 68,400
Manilla 58,500
Iceland 46,000
Terra del Fuego 42,000
Mindinao 39,100
Cuba 38,400
Java 38,200
Hispaniola 36,000
Newfoundland 35,500
Ceylon 27,700
Ireland 27,500
Formosa 17,000
Anian 12,000
Gilolo 10,400
Sicily 9,400
Timor 7,800
Sardinia 6,600
Cyprus 6,300
Jamaica 6,000
Flores 6,000
Ceram 5,400
Breton 4,000
Scorata 3,600
Candia 3,220
Porto Rico 3,200
Corsica 2,520
Zealand 1,900
St. Jago 1,400
Long Island or Manhattan 1,400
Majorca 1,400
Negropont 1,300
Teneriff 1,270
Gothland 1,000
Madeira 950
St Michael 920
Skye 900
Lewis 886
Funen 768
Yvica 625
Minorca 520
Rhodes 480
Cephalonia 420
Amboyna 400
Orkney Pomona 324
Scio 300
Martinico 260
Lemnos 220
Corfu 194
Providence 16 [...]
Man 160
Bornholm 160
Wight 150
Malta 15 [...]
Barbadoes 140
Antigua 100
St. Christopher's 80
St. Helena 80
Guernsey 50
Rhode Island 50
Jersey 43
Bermudas 40
Islands lately discovered, but not fully explored, and whole dimensions are not exactly known.
  • New Guinea
  • New Zealand
  • New Caledonia
  • New Hebrides
  • Otaheite
  • Friendly Islands
  • Marquesas
  • Easter or David's
  • Pelew Islands
[Page 63]

AMERICA.
This Continent being, to Americans, the most interesting part of the World, we give it the first place in this Work.

HISTORY OF ITS DISCOVERY.

IT is believed by many, and not without some plausible foundation, that America was known to the Ancients. Of this, however, hist­ory affords no certain evidence. The Norwegians, the Welsh and the Germans, each in their turn, have made pretensions to the discov­ery of America. As early as 874 the Norwegians discovered, and planted a colony in Iceland; and in 982, they discovered, and made settlements in Greenland. Thence, some of their enterprizing navi­gators, proceeded still farther westward till they discovered a country, the coast of which was sandy, but the interior parts level and covered with wood, on which account they called it Helle-land and Mark-land, and having afterwards' found some plants of the vine, which bore grapes, they called it Wine-land or Vine-land. But where this country lies historians are not agreed. If it was any part of the American coast, as it probably must have been, all attempts to plant colonies in it proved unsuccessful, and the knowledge of it was soon lost. *

[Page 64] The pretensions of the Welsh to the discovery of America, have [...] a slight foundation. In the 12th Century, according to Powell, a dis­pute having arisen among the sons of Owen Gwyneth, king of Northern Wales, concerning the succession to his crown, Madoc, one of [...] number, weary of this contention, betook himself to sea, in search [...] a more peaceful settlement. He steered due west, leaving Ireland [...] the north, and arrived in an unknown country, which appeared to [...] desirable; he returned to Wales, and carried thither several of his [...] ­herents and companions. This is said to have taken place about [...] year 1170. He and his colony have not been heard of since.

Some German authors ascribe the honour of having discovered A­merica, to Martin Behaim, their countryman. He descended from [...] noble family, of the imperial town of Nuremburgh—was a scholar [...] the celebrated John Muller, and became an adept in the science of [...] ­mography. Under the patronage of the Duchess of Burgundy he repaired to Lisbon, whither the same of the Portuguese discoveries invited all the adventurous spirits of the age. In 1483, in company with Diego Cane, [...] made a voyage to the southward, and is said to have discovered the king­dom of Congo, on the coast of Africa. He settled in the island of [...] one of the Azores, and was a particular friend of Columbus. He con­structed a terrestrial globe, which afterwards fell into the hands of Ma­gellan. On this globe Magellan laid down the course which he p [...] ­posed to hold in search of the communication with the South [...] which he afterwards discovered. In the year 1492, Behaim [...] his relations at Nuremburgh, and left with them a map, drawn with his own hand, which is still preserved among the archives of the [...]. So far the story of Martin Behaim is well authenticated; but [...] to the accounts of his having discovered any part of the American [...] though credited by some ingenious men, they have too great an appear [...] of conjecture to gain general belief *. For ought we can learn from au­thentic documents, the eastern continent was the only theatre of [...] [Page 65] the partial discoveries of the Norwegians excepted, from creation till the year of our Lord 1492; and Columbus has a fair claim to the honour of being the discoverer of the NEW WORLD.

As the following work proposes to give a description of this NEW WORLD, as it was originally called, especially of its most interest­ing parts, which have lately become the scene of the most important events that adorn the page of history, an account of its discovery may rationally be expected.

CHRISTOPHER COLON or COLUMBUS, a subject of the re­public of Genoa, was among the foreigners, whom the fame of the dis­coveries of the Portuguese had allured into their service. He descended from a noble family reduced by misfortunes; but neither the time nor place of his birth are certainly known. His ancestors, having had recourse to a seafaring life for support, Columbus, from his early youth, discover­ed such peculiar talents for that profession, as indicated his future greatness.—His parents encouraged this original propensity by giving him a suitable education. After acquiring some knowledge of the Lat­in tongue, the only language in which science was taught at that time, he was instructed in geometry, cosmography, astronomy and the art of drawing. To these he applied with such ardour and predilection, on account of their connection with navigation, his favourite object, that he made rapid proficiency in them. Thus qualified, in 1461, at the early age of fourteen, he went to sea, and began his career on that ele­ment which conducted him to so much glory. His early voyages were limited principally to those places which had before been dis­covered, in which nothing very remarkable happened, except that in a sea fight, off the coast of Portugal, with some Venetian coasters, the vessel on board which he served, took fire, together with one of the enemy's, to which it was fast grappled; upon which he threw him­self into the sea, laid hold of a floating oar, and by the support of it, and his dexterity in swimming, he reached the shore, though more than six miles distant, and thus preserved a life designed for great undertak­ings.

Soon after this he went of Lisbon, where he married a daughter of Bartholomew. Perestrello, one of the captains employed by Prince Henry in his early voyages, and who had discovered and planted the islands of Porto Santo and Maderia. The journals and charts of this experienced navigator, his father-in-law, fell into his hands, and he, with avidity, availed himself of the valuable information they con­tained. His impatience to visit the places which Perestrello had seen and described, became irresistible; and he made a voyage to Maderia, and spent several years in trading with that island, the Canaries, the Azores, the settlements in Guinea, and all other places which the Por­tuguese had discovered on the continent of Africa.

By the experience acquired during such a variety of voyages, Co­lumbus became one of the most skilful navigators of Europe. But his ambition did not permit him to rest satisfied with that praise. He aim­ed at something more. A project had been conceived of finding out a passage by sea, to the East Indies. The accomplishment of this be­came a favourite object with Columbus. The Portuguese sought this rout by steering towards the south, in hope of arriving at India, by turning to the east, after they had sailed round the farther extremity of Africa; which passage was afterwards effected 1497, by Vasco d [...] [Page 66] Gama, a Portuguese navigator. Columbus contemplated a shor [...] and more direct passage to the East Indies, by sailing towards the west across the Atlantic Ocean. The principles and arguments which in­duced him to adopt this opinion, then considered as chimerical, [...] highly rational and philosophical. The sphericity and magnitude [...] the earth, were at that period ascertained with some degree of [...]. From this it was evident, that the continents of Europe, Asia, and Africa, formed but a small part of the terraqueous globe. It app [...] ­ed likewise extremely probable, that the continent on the one side of the globe, was balanced by a proportionable quantity of land in the other hemisphere. These conclusions concerning the existence of [...] other continent, drawn from the figure and structure of the globe, [...] confirmed by the observations and conjectures of modern navigat [...] and from pieces of timber artificially carved, canes of an enormous [...] trees torn up by the roots, and the dead bodies of two men with [...] ­gular features, which had been discovered and taken up, floating before a westerly wind, or driven on the coasts of the Azores. The some of this united evidence, arising from theoretical principles and practi [...] observations, led Columbus to conclude, that by sailing directly towards the west, across the Atlantic ocean, new countries, which probably formed a part of the vast continent of India, must infallibly be discov­ered.

As early as the year 1474, he communicated his ingenious theory to Paul, a physician of Florence, eminent for his knowledge of co [...] ­graphy. He warmly approved of the plan; suggested several facts in confirmation of it, and encouraged Columbus to persevere in an under­taking so laudable, and which must redound so much to the hou [...] of his country, and the benefit of Europe.

Columbus now became impatient to bring to the test of experiment the truth of his system, and to set out upon a voyage of discovery. The first step towards this, was to secure the patronage of some of the considerable powers of Europe. With this view he laid his scheme before the Senate of Genoa, and making his native and beloved country, the [...] tender of his service, offered to sail, under the banners of the repub­lic, in quest of new regions which he expected to discover. But they incapable of forming just ideas of his principles, inconsiderately reject­ed his proposal as chimerical. He then submitted his plan to the Por­tuguese, who perfidiously attempted to rob him of the honour of accom­plishing it, by privately sending another person to pursue the [...] ­tract which he had proposed. But the pilot, who was thus basely em­ployed to execute Columbus' plan, had neither the genius nor the [...] ­titude of its author. Contrary winds arose—no land appeared [...] ­courage failed, and he returned to Lisbon, execrating a plan which [...] had not abilities to execute.

On discovering this flagrant treachery, Columbus immediately [...] the kingdom in disgust, and landed in Spain, towards the [...] of the year 1484. Here he resolved to propose it in person to Ferd [...] and Isabella, who at that time governed the united kingdoms of [...] and Aragon. He, in the mean time, sent his brother, Bart [...] ­mew of England, to propose his plan to Henry VII.

After experiencing a series of mortifying disappointments, [...] eight tedious years, which the brevity of this history will not [...] us to relate, Columbus, in deep anguish, withdrew from court, deter­mined [Page 67] to repair to England as his last resource. At this juncture the affairs of Spain, which had been perplexed in consequence of a war with the Moors, took a favourable turn. Quintanilla and Santangel, two powerful, vigilant and discerning patrons of Columbus, seized this favourable opportunity to make one more effort in behalf of their friend. They addressed themselves to Isabella, with such forcible ar­guments as produced the desired effect. They dispelled all Isabella's doubts and fears;—she ordered Columbus, who had proceeded on his journey, to be instantly recalled—declared her resolution to employ him on his own terms; and regretting the low estate of her finances, generously offered to pledge her own jewels, in order to raise as much mo­ney as might be needed in making preparations for the voyage. San­tangel, in a transport of gratitude, kissed the queen's hand, and, in or­der to save her from having recourse to such a mortifying expedient for procuring money, engaged to advance, immediately, the sum that was requisite.

Columbus had proceeded some leagues on his journey, when the messenger from Isabella overtook him. He returned with joy, mingled with some degree of fear lest he should again be disappointed. The manner of his reception by the queen was, however, such as quickly dispelled his fears. A negociation commenced, and was forwarded with dispatch, and a treaty of capitulation, with Columbus, was sign­ed on the 7th of April 1492. The chief articles of it were, 1. Ferdi­nand and Isabella, as sovereigns of the ocean, constituted Columbus their high admiral in all the seas, islands, and continents, which should be discovered by his industry; and stipulated, that he and his heirs for­ever should enjoy this office, with the same powers and prerogatives which belonged to the high admiral of Castile, within the limits of his jurisdiction. 2. They appointed Columbus their viceroy in all the islands and continents which he should discover; but if, for the better administration of affairs, it should be necessary to establish a separate Governour in any of those countries, they authorised Columbus to name three persons of whom they would chuse one for that office; and the dignity of viceroy with all its immunities, was likewise to be hereditary in the family of Columbus. 3. They granted to Columbus and his heirs forever, the tenth of the free profits accruing from the productions and commerce of the countries which he should discover. 4. They declared, if any controversy or lawsuit shall arise, with re­spect to any mercantile transaction, in the countries which shall be dis­covered, it should be determined by the sole authority of Columbus, or of judges to be appointed by him. 5. They permitted Columbus to advance one eighth part of what should be expended in preparing for the expedition, and in carrying on commerce with the countries which he should discover, and intitled him, in return, to an eighth part of the profit.

Though the name of Ferdinand appears conjoined with that of Isa­bella in this transaction, his distrust of Columbus was still so violent, that he refused to take any part of the enterprise, as king of Aragon. As the whole expense of the expedition was to be defrayed by the crown of Castile, Isabella reserved for her subjects of that kingdom, an exclu­sive right to all the benefits which might redound from its success.

After all the efforts of Isabella and Columbus, the armament was suitable, neither to the dignity of the power who equipped it, nor to [Page 68] the importance of the service to which it was destined. It consisted of three vessels; the largest, a ship of no considerable burden, was com­manded by Columbus, as admiral, who gave it the name of Santa Ma­ria. Of the second, called the Pinta, Martin Pinzon was captain, and his brother Francis pilot. The third, named the Nigna, was under the command of Vincent Yanez Pinzon. These two last mentioned, were light vessels, hardly superior in burden or force to large boats.—This little squadron was victualled for twelve months, and had on board ninety men, mostly sailors, together with a few adventurers, who followed the fortune of Columbus, and some gentlemen of Isabella's court, whom she appointed to accompany him. The sum employed in sitting out this squadron did not exceed £.4000, sterling.

On the 3d of August, 1492, being Friday *, Columbus set sail, in the presence of a vast crowd of spectators, who offered fervent supplica­tions to heaven for his success, which they rather wished than expect­ed. He steered directly for the Canary islands, and in the short run thither, found his ships crazy and ill appointed, and very unfit for so long and dangerous a navagation as he had undertaken. After resis­ting them as well as he could, he left the Canaries on the 6th of Sep­tember, and here properly commenced the voyage of discovery. He held his course due west, and immediately left the usual track of naviga­tion, and stretched into unknown and unfrequented seas. By the 14th of September the fleet was about 2oo leagues west of the Canaries, at a greater distance from land than any Spaniard had been before that time.

Columbus early discovered, from the spirit of his followers, that he must prepare to struggle, not only with the unavoidable difficulties which might be expected from the nature of his undertaking, but with such also as were likely to arise from the ignorance and timidity of the people under his command. All the art and address he was master of was hardly sufficient to quell the mutinous disposition of his sailors, who grew the more turbulent in proportion as their distance from home increased. What most astonished Columbus, during the voyage, was the variation of the magnetic needle. He observed that it did not point exactly to the polar star, but varied towards the west. This appearance, then one of the mysteries of nature, though now famil­iar, filled the companions of Columbus with terror. They were now in the midst of a trackless ocean—nature herself seemed to be altered, and the only guide they had left was about to fail them. Columbus, with no less quickness than ingenuity, invented a reason for this appearance, which, though it did not satisfy himself, seemed so plausible to them, that it dispelled their fears, and silenced their murmurs.

On the evening of the 11th of October, Columbus was so confident, from various appearances, of being near land, that he ordered the sails to be furled, and the ships to lie too, and strict watch to be kept left they should be driven on shore in the night. During this interval of [Page 69] suspense and expectation, no man shut his eyes, all kept on deck, gazing intently towards that quarter where they expected to discover the land, which had so long been the object of their wishes. A little before midnight. Columbus, from the forecastle, discovered a light at a dis­tance—and shortly after the joyful sound of land! land! was heard from the Pinta, which always kept a head of the other ships. At the dawn of day, an island was seen from every ship, at the distance of about two leagues north, whose verdant aspect indicated a most de­lightful country. The crews of all the ships, with tears of joy and transports of congratulation, unitedly sang [...]e Deum, as a hymn of thanksgiving to God. They then, with feelings of self condemnation, mingled with reverence, threw themselves at the feet of Columbus, begged him to forgive their ignorance, incredulity and insolence, which had given him so much unnecessary disquiet—acknowledged his superior abilities, and promised obedience in future.

At s [...]nrising, the boats were manned and armed, and they rowed towards the island with their colours displayed, with warlike music and other martial pomp. As they approached the coast, they saw it covered with a multitude of people, whom the novelty of the specta­cle had drawn together, whose attitudes and gestures expressed won­der and astonishment at the strange objects before them. Columbus was the first European who set foot in the New World which he had dis­covered. He landed in a rich dress, and with a naked sword in his hand. His men followed, and kneeling down, they all kissed the ground which they had so long desired to see. They next erected a crucifix, and pros­trating themselves before it, returned thanks to God for conducting their voyage to so happy an issue. They then took solemn and formal possession of the country for the crown of Castile and Leon.

The dress of the Spaniards, their beards, their arms, the vast ma­chines with which they had traversed the ocean, the thundering roar of the cannon, accompanied with lightning and smoke, filled the na­tives with surprise and terror, and they began to consider them as chil­ren of the sun, who had descended to visit mortals here below.

The Spaniards were hardly less amazed in their turn. The pro­ductions of the island were different from any thing they had seen in Europe. The inhabitants appeared in the simple innocence of nature, entirely naked. Their black hair, long and uncurled, floated upon their shoulders, or was bound in tresses round their heads. They had no beards, and every part of their bodies was perfectly smooth. Their complexion was of a dusky copper colour; their features singular ra­ther than disagreeable, and their aspect gentle and timid. They were shy at first, through fear, but soon became familiar with the Spaniards, and with transports of joy, received from them various kinds of trink­ets, in return for which they gave provisions, and some cotten yarn, the only commodity of value they could produce. Thus in the first interview between the inhabitants of the Old and New Worlds, eve­ry thing was conducted amicably, and to their mutual satisfaction.

The island on which Columbus first landed he called San Salvador. It is one of that large cluster of islands known by the name of the Lu­caya or Bahama islands, and is above 3000 miles west of the Canaries.

He afterwards touched at several islands of the same cluster, enquiring every where for gold, which he thought was the only object of commerce worth his attention. In steering southward, he discov­ered [Page 70] the islands of Cuba and Hispaniola, abounding in all the necessa­ries of life, and inhabited by a humane and hospitable people.

On his return to Spain he was overtaken by a storm, which had nearly proved fatal to his ships and their crews. At a crisis when all was given up for lost, Columbus had presence of mind enough to reti [...] into his cabin, and to write upon parchment a short account of his voyage. This he wrapped in an oiled cloth, which he inclosed in a cake of wax, put it into a tight cask, and threw it into the sea, in hopes that some fortunate accident might preserve a deposit of so much im­portance to the world. He arrived at Palos in Spain, whence he had sailed the year before, on the 15th of March 1493. He was welcom­ed with all the acclamations which the populace are ever ready to be­stow on great and glorious characters; and the court received him with marks of the greatest respect.

In September, of this year, (1493) Columbus sailed upon his second voyage to America; during the performance of which, he discovered the islands of Dominica, Marigalante, Gaudaloupe, Montserrat, Antigua, Porto Rico and Jamaica; and returned to Spain 1496.

In 1498, he sailed a third time for America; and on the 1st of Au­gust discovered the continent, at the mouth of the river Oronoke. He then coasted along westward, making other discoveries for 200 leagues to Cape Vela, from which he crossed over to Hispaniola, where he was seized by a new Spanish governour, and sent home in chains.

In 1502 Columbus made his fourth, and last, voyage to Hispaniols; thence the went over to the Continent—discovered the bay of Hon [...] ­ias—thence sailed along the main shore easterly 200 leagues, to Cape Gra­cias a Dios, Veragua, Porto Bello and the Gulf of Darien, searching in vain, for a passage to the East Indies. During this voyage, he was shipwrecked on the Island of Jamaica, where he suffered almost in conceivably from the cruelty of the inhabitants, the mutiny of his men, and especially from the infamous conduct of the governour of His­paniola. He returned to Spain in 1504. On his arrival he received the fatal news of the death of his patroness, Queen Isabella.

The jealous and avaricious Spaniards, not immediately receiving those golden advantages, from these new discoveries, which they had prom­ised, and lost to the feelings of humanity and gratitude, suffered their esteem and admiration of Columbus to degenerate into ignoble envy.

The latter part of his life was made wretched by the cruel persecu­tions of his enemies. Queen Isabella, his friend and patroness, was no longer alive to afford him relief. He sought redress from Ferdinand, but in vain. Disgusted with the ingratitude of a monarch, whom [...] had served with so much fidelity and success, exhausted with hardship [...] and broken with the infirmities which these brought upon him, Co­lumbus ended his active and useful life at Valadolid, on the 20th of May, 1506, in the 59the year of his age. He died with a composure mind suited to the magnanimity which distinguished his character and with sentiments of piety becoming that supreme respect for reli­gion which he manifested in every occurrence of his life. He [...] grave though courteous in his deportment, circumspect in his [...] and actions, irreproachable in his morals, and exemplary in all the du­ties of his religion.

Among other adventurers to the New World, in pursuit of ga [...] was Americus Vespucius, a Florentint gentleman, whom Ferdinand [Page 71] had appointed to draw sea charts, and to whom he had given the ti­tle of chief pilot. This man accompanied Ojeda, and enterprizing Spanish adventurer, to America; and having with much art, and some degree of elegance, drawn up an amusing history of his voyage, he published it to the world. It circulated rapidly, and was read with admiration. In his narrative, he had insinuated that the glory of hav­ing first discovered the New World, belonged to him. This was in part believed, and the country began to be called after the name of its supposed first discoverer. The unaccountable caprice of mankind has perpetuated the error; so that now, by the universal consent of all na­tions, this new quarter of the globe is called AMERICA. The bold pre­tentions of a fortunate imposter, have robbed the discoverer of the New World of a distinction which belonged to him. The name of Amer­icus has supplanted that of Columbus, and mankind are lest to regret and act of injustice, which, having been sanctioned by time, they can never redress.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF AMERICA

BOUNDARIES AND EXTENT. THE continent of America, of the discovery of which a succinct account has just been given, extends from Cape Horn, the south­ern extremity of the continent, in latitude 56° south, to the north pole; and spreads between the 40th degree east, and the 100th degree west longitude from Philadelphia. It is nearly ten thousand miles in length from north of south. Its average breadth may be about 14 or 1500 miles. This extensive continent lies between the Pacific Ocean on the west, and the Atlantic on the east. It is said to contain upwards of 14,000,000 square miles.

CLIMATE, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.]In regard to each of these, A­merica has all the varieties which the earth affords. It stretches through almost the whole width of the five zones, and feels the heat and cold of two summers and two winters in every year. Most of the animal and vegetable productions which the eastern continent affords, are found here; and many that are peculiar to America, of which accounts will be given in their proper places.

RIVERS.]This continent is watered by some of the largest rivers in the world. The principal of these, are Rio de la Plata, the Amazon and Oronoke, in South America—The Mississippi and St. Lawrence, in North America.

GULF.]The Gulf or Bay of Mexico, lying in the form of a bason, between North and South America, and opening to the east, is con­jectured by some, to have been formerly land; and that the constant attrition of the waters in the Gulf Stream, has worn it to its present form. The water in the Gulf of Mexico, is said to be many yards higher, than on the western side of the continent in the Pacific Ocean.

GULF STREAM.]The Gulf Stream is a remarkable current, issuing from the Gulf of Mexico, whence it takes its name, and proceeding along the coast of Florida and the United States, to the banks of Newfound­land, where it turns off and runs down through the western Islands; thence to the coast of Africa, and along that coast in a southern di­rection [Page 72] till it arrives at, and supplies the place of those waters, carried by the constant trade winds from the coast of Africa, towards the west, thus producing a perpetual circulating current.

This stream is probably generated by the great accumulation of wa­ter, on the eastern coast of America between the tropics, by the trade winds which constantly blow there. It is known that a large piece of water ten miles broad, and generally only three feet deep, has, by a strong wind, had its waters driven to one side and sustained so as to become six feet deep, while the windward side was laid dry. This may give some idea of the quantity heaped upon the American coast, and the reason of its running down in a strong current through the islands into the Gulf of Mexico and issuing as above mentioned. This also renders the opinion, that the waters in the bay of Mexico, are considerably higher than the waters on the opposite coast of the Pacific Ocean, in a high degree probable.

This stream is distinguished from the other parts of the ocean, by the gulf weed, with which it is every where interspersed. It is also always much warmer, 8 or 10 degrees, than the sea on each side of it, and it does not sparkle in the night, as do the other waters of the ocean. It is no wonder that so vast a body of deep warm water, several leagues wide, coming from between the tropics, and issuing out of the gulf, in­to the northern seas, should retain its warmth longer than the 20 or 30 days required to its passing the banks of Newfoundland. The quan­tity is too great, and two deep, to be suddenly cooled by passing un­der a cooler air. The air immediately over it may receive so much warmth from it as to be rarefied and rise, being rendered lighter than the air on each side of the stream; hence the surrounding denser air must rush in to supply the place of the rising warm air, and meeting with each other form those tornadoes and water spouts, which are [...] common in and near the stream: and as the vapour from a cup of tea in a warm room, is hardly discernible, but becomes visible, in the cold air; so the vapour from the Gulf Stream, in warm latitudes, is scarcely visible, but when it comes into cool air, off Newfoundland, it is condensed into the fogs for which those parts are so remarkable.

The power of wind to raise water above its common level in the sea, is evident by the high tides occasioned in all our American sea ports, when a strong north-east wind blows against the Gulf Stream.

Skilful navigators, who have acquired a knowledge of the extent to which this stream reaches on the New England coast, have learnt, in their voyages from Europe to New England, New York or Penn­sylvania, to parts the banks of Newfoundland in about 44° or 45° North Latitude; to sail thence in a course, between the northern edge of the Gulf Stream, and the shoals and banks of Sable Island, Georges Bank and Nantucket, by which they make better and quicker passages [...] America.

This stream is about 75 miles from the shores of the southern States. The distance increases as you proceed northward. The width of it [...] about 40 or 50 miles, widening towards the north. Its common rapid­ity is 3 miles an hour. A northeast wind narrows the stream, rea­ders it more rapid and drives it nearer the coast; north-west and west winds have a contrary effect.

Isthmus of Darien.] The celebrated Isthmus of Darien, which divides North and South America, lies in about 8° North Latitude, and in the [Page 73] narrowest part is not more than 70 miles across on an E. N. E. and W. S. W. course. The country about the narrowest parts of the Isth­mus, is made up of low, sickly vallies, and mountains of such stupen­dous height, as to incline one to imagine that nature had raised them to serve as an eternal barrier between the Atlantic and Pacific oceans, which here approach so near each other, that from these mountains you can plainly discern the waters of both at the same time, and seem­ingly at a very small distance.

Some have imagined it practicable to unite these Oceans by a Ca­nal, through this Isthmus. But an English Gentleman, from a late careful survey of the country, pronounces such and undertaking impract­icable; as the mountains run north and south, and several ridges of them, consisting of little else than solid rock and immense beds of oys­ter shells, must be dug through in order to accomplish it. But by go­ing into 12° North Latitude, and joining the head of Lake Nicaragua to a small river that runs into the Pacific Ocean, a communication be­comes practicable; and by 30 miles digging through a level, low country, two oceans may be joined, and a tedious navigation saved, of 10,000 miles, round Cape Horn. What would be the consequences of such a junction is not easy to say, but is very probable, that a small canal, into this place, would in the course of a few years be form­ed into a deep river, more especially when we consider that the wa­ters on the opposite shore of the Atlantic, as we before observed, are considerably higher than those in the Pacific.

Probably too, in a length of years, such a junction would wear away the earthy parts of the Isthmus, and form a broad strait between the Oceans; in which case the Gulf Stream would cease, being turned into a different channel, and a voyage round the World would become an inconsiderable thing.

Upwards of an hundred years ago, the Scots people had so just an idea of the great importance of this Isthmus, that they sent out a col­ony to settle there, which settlement, however, proved abortive, through the extreme jealousy of the Spaniards in that neighbourhood, but more through the shameful partiality of William III. and the jealousy of the English nation.

Mountains.]The principal mountains on this Western Continent are the famous chain of the Andes of South America. They stretch along the Pacific Ocean from the Straits of Magellan to the Isthmus of Darien of Panama, upwards of 4000 miles; thence they are conti­nued through the extensive kingdom of New Spain till they lose them­selves in the unknown countries of the north. In New Spain, the most considerable part of this chain is known by the name of Sierra Madre, particularly in Cinaloa, and Tarahumary, Provinces 1200 miles distant from the Capital. Farther north they have been called, from their bright appearance, the Shining Mountains.

Little is known respecting them. It is conjectured that they termi­nate in about 47 or 48 degrees of north latitude, where a number of rivers use and empty themselves either into the Pacific Ocean, into Hudson's Bay, into the waters which lie between them, or into the At­lantic ocean.

The Allegany Mountains, extending from Georgia to Hudson's river, in New York, are next in magnitude and length of the Andes. It is not improbable that they are a branch of the Andes, striking off in some [Page 74] part of South America, and interrupted by the Gulf of Mexico. [...] has been conjectured that the West India Islands were formerly u [...] ­ed with each other, and formed a part of the continent. Their pre­sent disjointed situation is supposed to have been occasioned by [...] trade winds. It is well known, as we have before mentioned, the they produce a strong and continual current in the ocean from east west, which, by beating against the continent for a long course of years, must have caused great alterations, and may possibly have pro­duced the effect supposed.

In the Bahama channel are many indications that the Island of Cuba was once united to Florida.

POPULATION.]There are no data from which we may estimate the number of inhabitants in America, with any degree of accuracy. All calculations must proceed on uncertain grounds. The population of most of those countries which have been settled by Europeans have been ascertained; who then is capable of estimating the number of inhabitants in those numerous countries which have been very parts partic­ularly explored, and those which are altogether unknown to any Eu­ropean or other civilized nation? and such are those vast regions w [...] north west, and north of the Missisipi and the Lakes, and imme [...] countries in the interior parts of South America. The number of provinces, kingdoms, and even of nations, is unknown. We can therefore hardly guess at the number of inhabitants.

It has been common in estimating the population of the whole world to give 150 millions to America. The calculations of P. Ri [...] ­cioli, make them 300 millions.—Susimilch, in one part of his work computes them at 100 millions, in another at 150 millions.—M. de Paw says that political arithmeticians, do not reckon more than 100 mil­lions; but it is his own opinion that there are not more than from thirty to forty millions of "real Americans." I know not the princi­ples upon which either of these authors grounded their calculations. I am inclined, however, to differ from them all. Some of them I and persuaded are far beyond the truth; and M. de Paw; I imagine, [...] ­erred on the other hand. I ground my dissent from the common opin­ion, and from the estimates of the forementioned respectable author, on a calculation, made on the following simple principles, which I a­dopt because I know of none better.

I suppose the continent of America to contain 14 millions of square­miles; including the islands, 15 millions. The United States contain one million square miles, or one fifteenth part of the American conti­nent and islands. I suppose (merely for the purpose of calculation, what I do not believe to be fact) that every other part of America is as populous as the United States. Probably there may be some parts, par­ticularly the West India islands, and some provinces in Spanish America, which are more populous, but there are many other pa [...] which are by no means so populous. The probability is, in my opin­ion, that the other parts of America, collectively considered, are [...] nearly so thickly inhabited as the territory of the United States. Their is certainly no reason to believe that they are more populous. Indian population is thin: and vast tracts of deserts, marshes, and moun­tains are uninhabited. In the United States we reckon four millions inhabitants. Anglo-Americans, Negroes, Mulattoes, and Indians, with in the jurisdiction of the General Government. Besides these their [Page 75] may be about 50,000 Indians, independent of the United States, and subject to their own Princes. The whole population of the United States then we reckon at 4,050,000. If then we suppose America to contain 15 millions of square miles; and that in every part it is equally as populous as the United States, that is, that there are in every mil­lion of square miles 4,050,000 inhabitants, the whole number will be sixty millions, seven hundred and fifty thousand. The exact number I pre­sume is considerably less than this.

WHEN WAS AMER­ICA PEOPLED?} That America was peopled very anciently and soon after the flood, is very probable: 1. Because the aboriginal Americans, till they became acquainted with Europeans, were ignorant of those arts and inventions, such, among others, as those of wax and oil for light, which being very ancient in Europe and Asia, on the one hand, are, on the other, most useful not to say necessary, and when once discovered, are never forgotten. 2. Because the pol­ished nations of the New World, and particularly those of Mexico, preserve in their traditions and paintings, the memory of the Creation of the World, the building of the Tower of Babel, the confusion of languages, and the dispersion of the people, though blended with some fables, and had no knowledge of the events which happened after­wards in Asia, Africa or in Europe, many of which were too remark­able to escape the memory. 3. Because neither was there among the Americans any knowledge of the people of the old continent, nor among the latter any account of the passage of the former to the New World. These reasons we presume render it at least probable that America was peopled early after the flood. *

WHO WERE THE FIRST PEOPLE OF AMERICA? AND WHENCE DID THEY COME?} On these two questions much has been said. Those who call in question the author­ity of the sacred writings say, the Amer­icans are not descendants from Adam, that he was the father of the Asiatics only, and that God created other men to be the patriarchs of the Europeans,▪ Africans and Americans. But this is one among the ma­ny weak hypotheses of unbelievers, and is wholly unsupported by history. It is contrary to the tradition of the Americans, who in their paintings, and in their hymns, called themselves the descendants of those who escaped from the general deluge. The Mexicans, Tol­tecas, and several other nations were agreed in this point. They all said their ancestors came from other parts into those countries; they pointed out the road they came, and even preserved the names, true or false, of their first progenitors, who, after the confusion of languag­es, separated from the rest of mankind. These traditions, with others, which the limits of this work will not allow us to insert, considered in connection with the sacred writings, must convince us that we ought to seek among the descendants of Noah, for the first peoplers of America.

But who were they? To recite all the opinions given in answer to this question, and the reasons to support them, would fill a volume. Dr. Robertson, and the Abbe Clavigero have extensively and learned­ly investigated the subject. I cannot expect to afford the reader more satisfaction than to give him the result of their enquiries. Dr. Rob­ertson, having recapitulated and canvassed the most plausible opinions on the subject, comes to the following conclusions. viz.

[Page 76] 1. That America was not peopled by any nation from the ancient continent, which had made any considerable progress in civilization because when America was first discovered, its inhabitants were [...] acquainted with the necessary arts of life, which are the first essays [...] the human mind toward improvement; and if they had ever [...] acquainted with them, for instance, with the plow, the loom, and [...] forge, their utility would have been so great and obvious, that it [...] impossible they should have been lost. Therefore the ancestors of [...] first settlers in America were uncivilized and unacquainted with [...] necessary arts of life.

2. America could not have been peopled by any colony from the more southern nations of the ancient continent; because none of the rude tribes of these parts possessed enterprize, ingenuity, or po [...] sufficient to undertake such a distant voyage: but more especially, be­cause, that in all America there is not an animal, tame or wild, which properly belongs to the warm, or temperate countries of the eastern continent. The first care of the Spaniards, when they settled in America, was to stock it with all the domestic animals of Europe. The first settlers of Virginia and New England, brought over [...] them, horses, cattle, sheep, &c. Hence it is obvious that the peopled who first settled in America, did not originate from those countries where these animals abound, otherwise, having been accustomed [...] their aid, they would have supposed them necessary to the improve­ment, and even support of civil society.

3. Since the animals in the northern regions of America correspond with those found in Europe in the same latitudes, while those in the tropical regions, are indigenous, and widely different from those wh [...] inhabit the corresponding regions on the eastern continent, it is [...] than probable that all the original American animals were of those kinds which inhabit northern regions only, and that the two continents, towards the northern extremity, are so nearly united as that those animals might pass from one to the other.

4. It having been established beyond a doubt, by the discoveries of Capt. Cook in his last voyage, that at Kamtsatha, in about latitude of 66° north, the continents of Asia and America are separated by a strait only, 18 miles wide, and that the inhabitants on each continent are simi­lar, and frequently pass and repass in canoes from one continent to the other; from these and other circumstances it is rendered highly p [...] ­bable that America was first peopled from the northeast parts of Asia. But since the Esquimaux Indians are manifestly a separate species of men, distinct from all the nations of the American Continent, in language, in disposition, and in habits of life; and in all these respects bear a near resemblance to the northern Europeans, it is believed that the Esquimaux Indians emigrated from the north west parts of Europe Several circumstances confirm this belief. As early as the ninth cen­tury the Norwegians discovered Greenland, and planted colonies there. The communication with that country, after long interruption, [...] renewed in the last century. Some Lutheran and Moravian mission­aries, prompted by zeal for propagating the Christian faith, have ven­tured to settle in this frozen region. From them we learn, that the north west coast of Greenland is separated from America, but by a very narrow strait, if separated at all; and that the Esquimaux [...] America perfectly resemble the Greenlanders in their aspect, dress, [Page 77] mode of living, and probably language. By these decisive facts, not not only the consanguinity of the Esquimaux and Greenlanders is es­tablished, but the possibility of peopling America from the north west parts of Europe. On the whole, it appears rational to conclude, that the progenitors of all the American nations, from Cape Horn to the southern limits of Labrador, from the similarity of their aspect, color, &c. migrated from the north east parts of Asia; and that the nations that inhabit Labrador, Esquimaux, and the parts adjacent, from their un­likness to the American nations, and their resemblance to the north­ern Europeans, came over from the north west parts of Europe. *

Such is the opinion of Dr. Robertson, on the question before us; and for want of information, it is in several respects inaccurate and without foundation. The opinion of the Abbe Clavigero, who was a native of America, and had much better advantages for knowing its history than Dr. Robertson, and who also is a later writer, is in my opinion far less exceptionable, and has much better grounds for its support. He explains his opinions in the following conclusions:—

1. The Americans descended from different nations, or from differ­ent families dispersed after the confusion of tongues. No person will doubt of the truth of this who has any knowledge of the multitude and great diversity of the American languages. In Mexico alone thirty five have already been discovered. In South America still more are known. In the beginning of the last century the Portuguese counted fifty in Maragnon. Between some of these languages, there is indeed a great affinity; but others are as different from each other as the English and the Hebrew. It is a truth, that no living or dead languages can differ more than the languages of the Mexicans, Otomies, Tarascas, Mayas, and Miztecas, five languages prevailing in different provinces of Mex­ico. It would therefore be absurd to say, that languages so different were different dialects of one original. Is it probable or even possi­ble that a nation should alter its primitive language to such a degree, or multiply its dialects so variously as that there should not be, even after many centuries, if not some words common to all, as least an af­finity between them, or some traces lest of their origin?

2. The Americans do not derive their origin from any people now existing as a nation on the eastern continent; at least there is no reason to affirm that they do. This inference is founded on the same argument with the preceding; since, if the Americans are descend­ants from any of these nations it would be possible to trace their origin by some marks in their languages, in spite of the antiquity of their sep­aration: but any such traces have not yet been discovered, although most diligent and attentive search has been made, as appears from the work of Dominican Garcia. We have, says Clavigero, leisurely com­pared the Mexican and other American languages with many others which are now living, and with those which are dead, but have not been able to discover the least affinity between them. This argument is strong with respect to the Americans, as they shew great firmness and constancy in retaining their languages. The Mexicans preserve their language among the Spaniards, and the Otomies retain their difficult dialect among Spaniards and Mexicans, after communication with both for more than two centuries and an half.

[Page 78] If the Americans descended from different families dispersed [...] after the confusion of tongues, as we believe, and have since been sepa­rated from those others who peopled the countries on the eastern con­tinent, authors will labour in vain, to seek, in the language or [...] ­oms of the Asiatics, for the origin of the people of America.

But the most difficult point in the problem of the population [...] America, remains to be solved, and that is, how did the inhabitant and animals originally pass to America, and from what parts did [...] come? Among the various opinions of authors upon this point, [...] following is the Abbe Clavigero's.

1. The men and animals of America passed there from, the old con­tinent. This is confirmed by the sacred writings. Moses, who de­clares Noah the common father of all men who survived the de [...] says expressly, that in that general inundation of the earth all [...] quadrupeds, birds and reptiles, perished, except a few, of the several s [...] ­cies which were saved alive in the ark, to re-people the earth with th [...] kind. The repeated expressions which the sacred historian uses [...] signify its universality, do not permit us to doubt, that all qua [...], peds, birds, and reptiles, which are in the world, descended [...] those few individuals which were saved from the general inundation.

2. The first inhabitants of America might pass there in vessels [...] sea, or travel by land or by ice. 1. They might either pass there vessels designedly, if the distance by water were but small, or be ca [...] ­ed upon it accidentally by favourable winds. 2. They might pass [...] land, on the supposition of the union of the continents. 3. They might also make that passage over the ice of some frozen arm of [...] sea.

3. The ancestors of the nations which peopled Anahuac, (now called New Spain) might pass from the northern countries of Europe into the northern parts of America, or which is more probable, from the [...] eastern parts of Asia, to the most western parts of America. The conclusion is founded on the constant and general tradition of [...] nations, which unanimously say, that their ancestors came into A [...] ­huac from the countries of the north and north west. This tradition is confirmed by the remains of many ancient edifices, built by the people in their migrations. In a journey made by the Spaniards in 1606, from New Mexico unto the river which they call Tizon, [...] miles from that Province towards the north west, they found that some large edifices, and met with some Indians who spoke the [...] can language, and who told them, that a few days journey from that river, towards north, was the kingdom of Tollan, and many other in­habited places, whence the Mexicans migrated. In fact, the whole people of Anahua have usually affirmed, that towards the north, [...] the kingdoms and provinces of Tollan, Aztlan, Copalla and sev [...] others which have all Mexican names. Boturini says, that in the an­cient paintings of the Toltecas, was represented the migration of [...] ancestors through Asia and the northern countries of America, [...] they established themselves in the country of Tollan; and even end [...] ­vours to ascertain in his general history, the rout they pursued in the travels.

With respect to the other nations of America, as there is no tradi­tion among them, concerning the way by which their ancestors [...] to the new world, we can say nothing certain of them. It is possible, that [Page 79] they all passed by the same way in which the ancestors of the Mexi­cans passed, but it is more probable that they passed by a very differ­ent rout. We conjecture that the ancestors of the nations of South America, went there by the way in which the animals proper to hot countries passed; and that the ancestors of those nations inhabiting Esquimaux, and Labrador, and the countries adjacent, passed thither from the north west parts of Europe. The difference of character which is discoverable in the three above mentioned classes of aboriginal Americans, and the situation of the countries which they occupied, afford ground to suspect that they had different origins, and that their ancestors came there by different routs. But this is mere conjecture.

4. The quadrupeds and reptiles of the New World passed there by land. This fact is manifest from the improbability and inconsist­ency of all other opinions. St. Augustin solves the difficulty of peo­ling the islands with wild beasts and destructive animals by sup­posing either, 1. That the angels transported them thither, (a solution, which, though it cuts off every difficulty in the passage of animals to the new world, would not be satisfactory in the present age) or 2. That they might swim to the islands, or 3. That they might have been car­ried there by men for the sake of hunting, or 4. That they might have been formed there by the Creator in the beginning. Others have im­agined that beasts might pass over some frozen strait or arm of the sea. But as neither of these opinions can be supported *, the proba­bility is, that the quadrupeds, as well as the reptiles which are found in America, passed thither by land, and of course that the two conti­nents were formerly united. This was the opinion of Acosta, Groti­us, Buffon, and other great men. That this earth has experienced great changes since the deluge will not admit of a doubt. Earthquakes have swallowed up large tracts of land in some places—subterraneous fires have thrown up others—the sea in some places has been forced to retreat many miles from the shore—in others it has made encroach­ments—and in many instances separated territories which were formerly united. Very considerable tracts of land have been also formed at the mouths of rivers. We have many examples of all these revolutions—Sicily was formerly united to the continent—The straits of Gibraltar, as Diodorus, Strabo and other ancient authors affirm, were formed by a violent irruption of the ocean upon the land between the mountains Abyla and Calpe. The people of Ceylon have a tradition, that a sim­ilar irruption of the sea separated their island from the peninsula of In­dia. The same is believed by the inhabitants of Malabar with respect to the Isles of Maldivia, and by the Malayans with respect to Suma­tra. Ceylon, as Buffon asserts, has lost 30 or 40 leagues of land, by the sea; and Tongres, a place in the Low Countries, has gained 30 leagues of land from the sea—And Florida and the southern American States have gained as much from the Bay of Mexico, and the islands between North and South America.—The northern parts of Egypt owes its existence to inundations of the Nile—And the province of Yellow-River in China, and part of Louisiana in America, have both been formed by the mud of rivers. The peninsula of Yucatan, has every appearance of having once formed a part of the bed of the sea. In the strait which separates America from Asia, many islands are found [Page 80] which probably were the mountains belonging to that part of the [...] which we suppose to have been swallowed up by earthquakes; [...] is rendered probable by the multitude of volcanoes which have [...] discovered in the peninsula of Kamtskatka. The sinking of that [...] however, and the separation of the two continents, was probably [...] ­sioned by those extraordinary earthquakes mentioned in the history of the Americans, which formed an era almost as memorable as [...] of the deluge.

5. The quadrupeds and reptiles of America passed by different plac­es from the one continent to the other. Among the American [...] there are many whose natures are averse to cold; such are apes, dan [...] crocodiles, &c.—There are others formed to inhabit cold countries such are martins, rein-dear, and gluttons. The former could not go [...] America through any country in the frigid zone;—their nature would not have admitted it—they would have perished in their pas­sage—We cannot indeed imagine what inducement they could [...] to quit a climate, congenial to their nature, and undertake a journal they knew not whither, through a region whose cold they could [...] endure—How did they know there was a country friendly to the natures in America?

The apes which are in New Spain passed there, certainly, from South America. Time was when they did not inhabit that country and it is known that they came from the South. The center of the population is the country under the equator, and 14 or 15 degrees [...] each side of it. It decreases as you depart from this tract on either side, till you arrive at the tropics, when it ceases, and none are found, except in some few districts, which, from the peculiarity of their situation▪ are as hot as the equinoctial country. None can imagine that the species of animals travelled to the New World, through the cold [...] ­gions of the north. Nor can we believe that they were transported thither by men; for, not to mention that some of them are of a fe [...] ­cious disposition, and vere unlikely to be selected to be companions as a long voyage, to people a new country, there is another still greater difficulty: As they could not have been conducted over the seas and countries of the north, on account of the cold, they must have been transported from the warm countries of the old, to the warm countries of the new world, over a sea subject to a clime not dissimilar to the native country of those quadrupeds, that is, by the countries of the southern parts of Asia, to about the same latitudes in America, over [...] Indian and Pacific Oceans—or from the western countries of Africa to the eastern countries of America, over the Atlantic Ocean. If therefore, men transported those animals from the one to the other world, they did it across those seas. But was this navigation ac [...] ­dental or designed? If the former, how, and why did they carry [...] many animals with them? If the latter, if they were determined [...] pass from the old to the new continent, who gave them intelligence of the New World? Who shewed them the situation of those countries? How did they venture to cross such vast seas without a compass? [...] what vessels did they pass? If they landed there happily, why [...] there not remain, among the Americans, some memory of their [...] constructions? Why—but it is needless to start more objections; these already mentioned can never be answered.

Besides in the torrid zone, and the warm climates that border upon it, in the New World, crocodiles are common animals which require [Page 81] a hot or temperate climate, and live alternately on land or in sweet water: how did such animals pass there? Not by the north—they could not endure the cold—No one will believe they were transport­ed by men—nor yet that they swam thither 2000 miles through an ocean of salt water.

There remains no other solution but that of admitting an ancient union between the equinoctial countries of America and those of Af­rica—and a connexion of the northern countries of America with Europe on the east, and Asia on the west—so that there has probably been a period since the flood, when there was but ONE Continent.—The beasts of cold climes passed over the northern isthmusses, which probably connected Europe, America and Asia—and the animals and reptiles peculiar to hot countries, passed over the isthmus that con­nected South America with Africa—For the reasons already mention­ed induce us to believe that there was formerly a tract of land, which united the most eastern part of Brazil, to the most western part of Af­rica; and that all the space of land may have been sunk by violent earth­quakes, leaving only some traces of it in that chain of islands of which Cape de Verd, Fernando, de Norona, Ascension and St. Matthew's islands make a part; and also in those many sand banks discovered by different navigators, and particularly by de Bauche, who founded that sea with great exactness. These islands and sand banks, may probably have been the highest parts of that sunken isthmus. In like manner it is probable the north western part of America was united to the north eastern part of Asia by a neck of land which has been sunk or wash­ed away, and the north eastern parts of America to the north west­ern parts of Europe, by Greenland, Iceland, &c.

On the whole, we cannot but believe that the quadrupeds and the reptiles of the new world passed there by land, and by different routs, from the old continent. All other suppositions are subject to heavy difficulties; and this is not without some, which however are not al­together insurmountable. The greatest is the improbability of an earth­quake so great as to sink a space of land for more than 1500 miles in length, which, according to our supposition, united Africa and South America. But we do not ascribe this stupendous revolution to a sin­gle shock—it may have been effected by a succession of earthquakes. It is well known that they are common in the climates where we suppose the isthmus to have been. It is not impossible nor improbable, that such an effect should be produced by earthquakes, nor is history un­furnished with such examples to our purpose. The earthquake which was felt in Canada in 1663, * overwhelmed a chain of mountains of free stone more than 300 miles long, and the whole of that immense tract was changed into a plain. How great than must have been the convulsion which was occasioned by those extraordinary earthquakes, mentioned in the histories of America, when the world was thought to be coming to an end!

It may farther be objected to this system, that if beasts passed by land from one continent to the other, it is not easy to assign the cause why some species passed there without leaving a single individual in the old continent; and on the contrary, that some entire species should [Page 82] remain in the old continent, and not a single individual of them [...] to America. But this objection operates with equal force against [...] other opinions, except that which employs angels in the transport [...] of beasts. But suppose it did not, we have a satisfactory answer [...]. All the quadrupeds of the earth are not yet known, we cannot there­fore say how many are in the one which are not in the other continent. The knowledge of the best informed zoologists is very imperfect, [...] they differ among themselves. The Count de Buffon numbers [...] two hundred species of quadrupeds. Bomare, who wrote a little [...] him, makes them 265; but to say how many more there may be, and [...] what kinds they are, until we have examined the interior regions of Africa, of a great part of Tartary, the country of the Amazons, [...] the vast territory west of the Mississippi, and various other unexpl [...] and extensive countries, which together constitute a great part of the whole globe, would be mere conjecture. No argument, therefore, [...] inferred from the difference of the animals in the two continents, again our system, till the animals is these unexplored regions shall have been examined. *

We have dwelt the longer on this subject, as it must be interesting to every inquisitive mind, and the discussion of it is blended with [...] useful information.

INHABITANTS.] Having stated the present population of America, from the best data we could find, and given the most probable [...] counts of the manner in which it was originally peopled, it will be ex­pected that we now say something of its inhabitants, of their character manners, &c.

The present Americans, whose number we reckon at about 60 mil­lions, may be divided into two general classes—First, the proper Americans, commonly called Indians, sometimes Aborigines, or these who are descended from the first inhabitants of the new world, and who have not mixed their blood with the inhabitants of the old conti­nent. Secondly, those who have migrated, or have been transported to America, since its discovery by Columbus, and their descend [...]. The former may be subdivided into three classes; first, the South American Indians, who came over in the manner we have supposed from the northern and western parts of Africa, and the southern part of Asia and Europe. Secondly, the Mexicans and all the Indians [...] of the Lakes and west of the Mississippi. Thirdly, the inhabitants of Esquimaux. Labrador, and the countries around them. The latter [...] also be distinguished into three classes—First, Europeans of many dif­ferent nations, who have migrated to America, and their descendants of unmixed blood:—In this class we include, the Spaniards, English, Scotch, Irish, French, Portuguese, Germans, Dutch, Swedes, &c. [...] in North and South America. Secondly, Africans who have [...] transported to America and its Islands, and their descendants. Thi [...] the mixed breeds, called by the Spaniards, Castas, by the English [...] lattoes, that is, those who are descended from an European and American, or from an European and African, or from an African and American. Leaving the second class, viz. the migrants to American since its discovery by Columbus, and their descendants, to be describ­ed, when we shall treat of the countries they respectively inhabit, [...] shall, under this article, confine ourselves to the proper aborigine Americans, or Indians.

[Page 83] We begin with the South Americans. Various have been the ac­counts given of these people. Some historians exalt them to the rank of the best and happiest people on earth; others seem unwilling to give them a place among human beings. We presume these historians, who differ so widely, spoke of different nations; and on this ground, with proper allowances for exaggeration on both sides, we may recon­cile them. Columbus gives the following account of the Indians of Hispaniola, to Ferdinand and Isabella.

"I swear to your majesties, that there is not a better people in the world than these; more affectionate, affable and mild; they love their neighbours as themselves; their language is the sweetest, the softest and the most cheerful, for they always speak smiling; and although they do naked, let your majesties believe me, their customs are very becoming; and their king, who is served with great majesty, has such engaging manners, that it gives great pleasure to see him, and also to consider the great retentive faculty of that people, and their desire of knowledge, which invites them to ask the causes and effects of things *."

Las Casas, the first bishop of Chiapa, who resided several years in different parts of America, speaks thus of them: "The Americans are a people of a bright and lively genius, easy to be taught, and to ap­prehend every good doctrine, extremely ready to embrace our faith, and the people, of all others in the world, who feel least embarrass­ment by it." In another place, this writer says, "The Indians have as good an understanding, and acute a genius, as much docility and ca­pacity for the moral and speculative sciences, and are, in most instances, as rational in their political government, as appears from many of their very prudent laws, and are as far advanced in our faith and religion, in good customs and civilization, where they have been taught by persons of religious and exemplary life, and are arriving at refinement and polish as fast as any nation ever did since the times of the apostles."

Doctor Robertson, speaking of the Mexicans and Peruvians, whom he is not disposed to rank with those nations which merit the name of civilized, has the following remarks—"When compared with oth­er parts of the new world, Mexico and Peru may be considered as polished states. Instead of small independent, hostile tribes, strug­gling for subsistence amidst woods and marshes, strangers to industry and arts, unacquainted with subordination, and almost without the ap­pearance of regular government, we find countries of great extent sub­jected to the dominion of one sovereign, the inhabitants collected to­gether in cities, the wisdom and foresight of rulers employed in provid­ing for the maintenance and security of the people, the empire of laws in some measure established, the authority of religion recognized, many of the arts essential to life brought to some degree of maturity, and the dawn of such as are ornamental beginning to appear." These are test­imonies respecting the Indians who inhabit the more northern parts of South America, and the islands; who appear to have made greater ad­vances in civilization than those farther south, concerning whom our information is very imperfect.

Charlevoix, in his history of Paraguay, has collected from the Jesuits, perhaps the best information, respecting the more southern Indians. Comparing his particular descriptions of the numerous nations who in­habit the southern division of South America, we give the following as the leading traits in their general character. They are generally of an [Page 84] olive complexion, some darker, others lighter, and some as white as the Spaniards. Their stature is rather below than above the middling size; though some nations rank among the tallest of the human species—most of them are thick legged and jointed, and have round and [...] faces.

Almost all the men and children, in the warm climates, and in the sum­mer, in colder regions, go quite naked. The women wear no more cov­ering than the most relaxed modesty seems absolutely to require. Every nation have a different dialect, and a different mode of adorning them­selves. The clothing of such as make use of it, is made of the ski [...] of beasts, of feathers sewed together, and in the southern and colder regions, where they raise sheep, of wool manufactured into stuffs and blankets. They are represented as almost universally addicted [...] drunkenness. There see [...]m to be no other vice common to them all. A few of them are canibals, and some nations are idolaters; in general they have some notions of a Supreme Being, and have words in their various languages to express their ideas of him. They believe in the immortality of the soul, and have some imperfect ideas of future re­wards and punishments. They are universally addicted to various su­perstitions, and have much to do with witches and evil spirits. *—A great proportion of them lead a wandering life, are extremely indolent, dirty and wretched, living on fish, and the flesh of the various wild animals, birds, and even reptiles which inhabit the forests.—"All the Indians of South America," says Charlevoix, "have hot stomachs," which can digest all sorts of food, and in great quantities, and they are in general "excessively voracious." Their notions of religion and government, with a few exceptions, are very rude. Some nations live compactly in towns and cultivate the earth, raising, among other productions, wheat, which they bruise between stones, and make into cakes. Some nations are represented as dull, cruel and inconstant—others as fierce, cunning, and thievish—others as humane, ingenuous and hospitable—and in general they are kind and attentive to strang­ers, so long as they are well used by them; and we seldom read of the [...] being first in a quarrel with those who pass their territories, or sojour [...] among them. The astonishing success of the Jesuits in converting such multitudes of them to their faith, is a convictive proof of the [...] capacity to receive instruction; of their docility, humanity and friend­ly dispositions.

All accounts agree that the middle and southern parts of S. America are very thinly inhabited, being interspersed with extensive ridges [...] mountains, immense barren plains, and numerous marshes.

As to the second class of American Indians, who formerly inhab­ited, and who yet inhabit, Mexico and the country south of the lakes and west of the Missisippi, and who came over, as we have supposed from the north east parts of Asia; they seem, from whatever cause to be advanced somewhat higher, in the scale of human beings, than [...] South Americans, if we except the Peruvians, who appear to have [...] greater progress in civilization than even the Mexicans. Concern [...] the nations of the vast country of Anahuac or New Spain, composing a large portion of the second class of the proper Americans, the [...] [Page 85] Clavigero, has the following observations: "We have had intimate commerce, for many years, with the Americans, have lived several years in a seminary destined for their instruction, had some Indians among your pupils, had particular knowledge of many American rec­tors, many nobles and numerous artists—attentively observed their character, their genius, their dispositions and manner of thinking; and have examined, besides, with the utmost diligence, their ancient history, their religion, their government, their laws and their customs, after such long experience and study of them, from which we imagine ourselves able to decide without danger of erring, we declare that the mental qualities of the American Indians are not in the least degree inferior to those of the Europeans—that they are capable of all, even the most abstract sciences, and that if equal care and pains were tak­en in their education, we should see rise among them philosophers, mathematicians and divines, who would rival the first in Europe. But it is not possible to make great progress in the sciences, in the midst of a life of misery, servitude and oppression.—Their ancient government, their laws, and their arts evidently demonstrate that they suffered no want of genius."

This same author, who appears to be a competent judge, describes the Mexicans as being of a good stature, rather exceeding the mid­dle size—well proportioned in all their limbs—as having a fine olive complexion—narrow foreheads—black eyes—clean, firm, regular white teeth—thick, black, coarse, glossy hair—thin beards, and generally no hair on their legs, thighs and arms. They are neither very beautiful nor the reverse, but hold a middle place between the extremes. Some of the women are fair and beautiful. Deformities are scarcely known among them. Their senses are very acute, especially that of sight, which they enjoy unimpaired to the greatest age. They are moder­ate eaters, but much addicted to intemperance in drinking, which, as far as we know, is true of all the American Indians. They are pati­ent of injuries and hardships, and grateful for benefits. Good faith is not so much respected as it deserves to be. They are naturally unso­cial, serious and austere, and are more anxious to punish crimes than to reward virtues. Generosity and perfect disinterestedness are strik­ing traits in their character. Their religion is blended with much su­perstition; and some of the more ignorant are very prone to idolatry.

The respect paid by children to their parents, and by the young to the old, among those people, is highly commendable. Parents are fond of their children. The affection of husbands for their wives is less than the wives for their husbands; and it is very common for men to love their neighbours' wives better than their own. Courage and coward­ice seem alternately to affect their minds, and it is difficult to deter­mine which predominates. They can meet dangers in war, and such as proceed from natural causes, with great intrepidity, but are panic struck by the stern look of a Spaniard. On the whole, their charac­ter, like that of all other nations, is a mixture of good and bad.

Of their morality, the following exhortation of a Mexican to his son, may serve as a specimen: "My son, who art come into the light from the womb of thy mother like a chicken from the egg, and like it art preparing to fly through the world, we know not how long Heaven will grant to us the enjoyment of that precious gem which we possess in thee; but however short the period, endeavour to live ex­actly, praying God continually assist thee. He created thee: thou [Page 86] art his property. He is thy father, and loves thee still more than I [...] repose in him thy thoughts, and day and night direct thy sighs to him. Reverence and salute thy elders, and hold no one in contempt. To the poor and distressed be not dumb, but rather use words of comfort. Honour all persons, particularly thy parents, to whom thou owest [...] ­dience, respect and service. Guard against imitating the example of those wicked sons, who, like brutes that are deprived of reason, neither reverence their parents, listen to their instruction, nor submit to [...] correction; because whoever follows their steps will have an unhap­py end, will die in a desperate or sudden manner, or will be killed and devoured by wild beasts.

"Mock not, my son, the aged or the imperfect. Scorn not him wh [...] you see fall into some folly or transgression, nor make him reproaches, but restrain thyself, and beware left thou fall into the same error which offends thee in another. Go not where thou art not called, nor inter­fere in that which does not concern thee. Endeavour to manifest thy good breeding in all thy words and actions. In conversation, do not lay thy hands upon another; nor speak too much, nor interrupt [...] disturb another's discourse. When any one discourses with thee, [...] him attentively, and hold thyself in an easy attitude, neither pla [...] with thy feet, nor putting thy mantle to thy mouth, nor spitting [...] often, nor looking about you here and there, nor rising up frequently if thou art sitting; for such actions are indications of levity and [...] breeding."—He proceeds to mention several particular vices which are to be avoided, and concludes—"Steal not, nor give thyself to gaming; otherwise thou wilt be a disgrace to thy parents, whom thou ough [...] rather to honour for the education they have given thee. If thou will be virtuous, thy example will put the wicked to shame. No more, [...] son; enough hath been said in discharge of the duties of a father. With these counsels I wish to fortify thy mind. Refuse them not, [...] act in contradiction to them; for on them thy life, and all thy happi­ness, depend."

Although so much cannot be said with truth, perhaps, in favour of the more northern Indians, whom we have included in the second class, owing to the inferiority of their advantages, yet we are far from thinking them inferior in point of corporeal or mental endowments, to the Mexicans. In their complexion, size, and form, they are not in general unlike the Mexicans. In social and domestic virtues, in agricul­ture, arts, and manufactures they are far behind the Mexicans—in their hospitality, equal—and in their eloquence in council, and bravery i [...] war, perhaps superior. Their mode of life, and the state of society among them, afford few objects for the display either of their literary or political abilities.

Mons. Buffon has given an humiliating picture of the Aborigines of North America, which, as it is a false one, I shall not give the read [...] Mr. Jefferson's answer to M. Buffon, however, is so full of the [...] valuable information on this subject, that it must not be omitted in this place.—"Of the Indians of South America," says Mr. Jefferson, [...] know nothing; for I would not honor with the appellation of know­ledge, what I derive from the fables published of them. These I be­lieve to be just as true as the fables of AEsop. This belief is founded on what I have seen of man, white, red, and black, and what has been written of him by authors, enlightened themselves, and writing ami [...] an enlightened people. The Indian of North America being more [...] [Page 87] in our reach, I can speak of him somewhat from my own knowledge, but more from the information of others better acquainted with him, and on whose truth and judgment I can rely. From these sources I am a­ble to say, in contradiction to this representation, that he is neither more defective in ardor, nor more impotent with his female, than the white reduced to the same diet and exercise: That he is brave, when an enterprize depends on bravery; education with him making the point of honour consist in the destruction of an enemy by stratagem, and in the preservation of his own person free from injury; or perhaps this is nature; while it is education which teaches us to honor force more than finesse: that he will defend himself against an host of ene­mies, always chusing to be killed, rather than to surrender, though it be to the whites, who he knows will treat him well: that in other sit­uations also he meets death with more deliberation, and endures tor­tures with a firmness unknown almost to religious enthusiasm with us: that he is affectionate to his children, careful of them, and indulgent in the extreme: that his affections comprehend his other connexions, weakened, as with us, from circle to circle, as they recede, from the center: that his friendships are strong and faithful to the uttermost * extremity: that his sensibility is keen, even the warriors weeping most bitterly on the loss of their children, though in general they en­deavour to appear superiour to human events: that his vivacity and activity of mind is equal to ours in the same situation; hence his eag­erness for hunting, and for games of chance. The women are sub­mitted to unjust drudgery. This I believe is the case with every bar­barous people. With such, force is law. The stronger sex there­fore imposes o [...] the weaker. It is civilization alone which replaces women in the enjoyment of their natural equality. That first teaches us to subdue the selfish passions, and to respect those rights in others which we value in ourselves. Were we in equal barbarism, our fe­males would be equal drudges. The man with them is less strong than with us, but their women stronger than ours; and both for the same obvious reason; because our man and their woman is habituated to labour, and formed by it. With both races, the sex which is indulg­ed with case is least athletick. An Indian man is small in the hand and wrist, for the same reason for which a sailor is large and strong in the arms and shoulders, and a porter in the legs and thighs.—They raise fewer children than we do. The causes of this are to be found, not in a difference of nature, but of circumstance. The women very fre­quently attending the men in their parties of war and of hunting, child-bearing becomes extremely inconvenient to them. It is said, therefore, that they have learn the practice of procuring abortion by the use of some vegetable; and that it even extends to prevent con­ception [Page 88] for a considerable time after. During these parties they are exposed to numerous hazards, to excessive exertions, to the greatest extremities of hunger. Even at their homes the nation depends for food, through a certain part of every year, on the gleanings of the forest: that is, they experience a famine once in every year. With all animals, if the female be badly fed, or not fed at all, her young perish: and if both male and female be reduced to like want, genera­tion becomes less active, less productive. To the obstacles then of want and hazard, which nature has opposed to the multiplication of wild animals, for the purpose of restraining their numbers within cer­tain bounds, those of labour and of voluntary abortion are added with the Indian. No wonder then if they multiply less than we do. Where food is regularly supplied, a single farm will shew more of cattle, than a whole country of forests can of buffaloes. The same Indian women, when married to white traders, who feed them and their children plentifully and regularly, who exempt them from exces­sive drudgery, who keep them stationary and unexposed to accident, produce and raise as many children as the white women. Instances are known, under these circumstances, of their rearing a dozen children. An inhuman practice once prevailed in this country of making slaves of the Indians. It is a fact well known with us, that the Indian women so enslaved, produced and raised as numerous families as either the whites or blacks among whom they lived.—It has been said, that Indians have less hair than the whites, except on the head. But this is a fact of which fair proof can scarcely be had. With them it is disgraceful to be hairy on the body. They say it likens them to hogs. They therefore pluck the hair as fast as it appears. But the traders who marry their women, and prevail on them to discontinue this practice, say, that nature is the same with them as with the whites. Nor, if the fact be true, is the consequence necessary which has been drawn from it. Negroes have notoriously less hair than the whites; yet they are more ardent. But if cold and moisture be the agents of nature for diminishing the races of animals, how comes she all at once to suspend their operation as to the physical man of the new world, and to let loose their influence on his moral faculties? How has this combination of the elements and other physical causes, so con­trary to the enlargement of animal nature in this new world, these obstacles to the development and formation of great germs, been arrested, and suspended, so as to permit the human body to acquire its just dimensions; and by what inconceivable process has their action been directed on his mind alone? To judge of the truth of this, to form a just estimate of their genius and mental powers, more facts are wanting, and great allowance to be made for those circumstances of their situation which call for a display of particular talents only. This done, we shall probably find that they are formed in mind as well as in body, on the same model with the * 'Homo sapiens Europaeus.' The principles of their society forbidding all compulsion, they are to be led to duty and to enterprize by personal influence, and persuasion. Hence eloquence in council, bravery and address in war, become the foundations of all consequence with them. To these acquirements all their faculties are directed. Of their bravery and address in war we have multiplied proofs, because we have been [Page 89] the subjects on which they were exercised. Of their eminence in oratory we have fewer examples, because it is displayed chiefly in their own councils. Some, however, we have of very superior lus­tre. I may challenge the whole orations of Demosthenes and Cicero, and of any more eminent orator, if Europe has furnished more em­inent, to produce a single passage, superior to the speech of Logan, a Mingo chief, to lord Dunmore, when governour of this state And▪ as a testimony of their talents in this line, I beg leave to introduce it, first stating the incidents necessary for understanding it. In the spring of the year 1774, a robbery and murder were committed on an inhabitant of the frontiers of Virginia, by two Indians of the Shawanee tribe. The neighbouring whites, according to their custom▪ undertook to punish this outrage in a summary way. Col. Cre­sap, a man infamous for the many murders he had committed on those much injured people, collected a party, and proceeded down the Kanhaway in quest of vengeance. Unfortunately a canoe of women and children, with one man only, was seen coming from the opposite shore, unarmed, and unsuspecting an hostile attack from the whites. Cresap and his party concealed themselves on the bank of the river, and the moment the canoe reached the shore, singled out their objects, and, at one fire, killed every person in it. This hap­pened to be the family of Logan, who had long been distinguished as a friend of the whites. This unworthy return provoked his ven­geance. He accordingly signalized himself in the war which ensued. In the autumn of the same year, a decisive battle was fought at the mouth of the Great Kanhaway, between the collected forces of the Shawances, Mingoes, and Delawares, and a detachment of the Virgin­ia militia. The Indians were defeated, and sued for peace. Logan however disdained to be seen among the suppliants. But, lest the sin­cerity of a treaty should be distrusted, from which so distinguished a chief absented himself, he sent by a messenger the following speech to be delivered to Lord Dunmore.

'I appeal to any white man to say, if ever he entered Logan's cabin hungry, and he gave him not meat; if ever he came cold and naked, and he clothed him not. During the course of the last long and bloody war, Logan remained idle in his cabin, as advocate for peace. Such was my love for the whites, that my countrymen pointed as they pass­ed, and said, 'Logan is the friend of white men.' I had even thought to have lived with you, but for the injuries of one man. Col. Cresap, the last spring, in cold blood, and unprovoked, murdered all the re­lations of Logan, not sparing even my women and children. There runs not a drop of my blood in the veins of any living creature. This called on me for revenge. I have sought it: I have killed many: I have fully glutted my vengeance. For my country, I rejoice at the beams of peace. But do not harbour a thought that mine is the joy of fear. Logan never felt fear. He will not turn on his heel to save his life. Who is there to mourn for Logan?—Not one.'

Before we condemn the Indians of this continent as wanting genius, we must consider that letters have not yet been introduced among them. Were we to compare them in their present state with the Europeans' north of the Alps, when the Roman arms and arts first crossed those mountains, the comparison would be unequal be­cause, at that time, those parts of Europe were swa [...]ting with num­bers, [Page 90] because numbers produce emulation, and multiply the chan [...] of improvement, and one improvement begets another. Yet I may safely ask, How many good poets, how many able mathematicians, how many great inventors in arts or sciences, had Europe, north of the Alps, then produced? And it was sixteen centuries after this be­fore a Newton could be formed. I do not mean to deny, that then are varieties in the race of man, distinguished by their powers both of body and mind. I believe there are, as I see to be the case in the races of other animals. I only mean to suggest a doubt, whether the bulk and faculties of animals depend of the side of the Atlantic on which their food happens to grow, or which furnishes the elements of which they are compounded? Whether nature has enlisted herself as a Cis or Trans-Atlantic partisan?".

No people in the world have higher notions of military honour than the Indians. The fortitude, the calmness and even exultation which they manifest while under the extremest torture, is owing to their education, to their exalted ideas of military glory, and their rude notions of future happiness, which they believe they shall forfeit by the least manifestation of fear, or uneasiness, under their sufferings. They are as bitter and determined in their resentments as they are sincere in their friendships, and often pur­sue their enemies several hundred miles through the woods, surmounting every difficulty, in order to be revenged. * In their public councils they observe the greatest decorum. In the foremost rank fit the old men, who are the counsellors, then the warriors, and next the women and children. As they keep no records, it is the business of the wo­men to notice every thing that passes, to imprint it on their memories, and tell it to their children. They are, in short, the records of the council; and with surprizing exactness, preserve the stipulations of treaties entered into a hundred years back. Their kindness and hos­pitality is scarcely equalled by any civilized nation. Their politeness in conversation is even carried to excess, since it does not allow then to contradict any thing that is asserted in their presence. In short, there appears to be much truth in Dr. Franklin's observation, "We call them savages, because their manners differ from ours, which we think the perfection of civility; they think the same of theirs."

[Page 91] Society among the Indians, we are sorry to say, has not been improv­ed, but in most instances corrupted, by their intercourse with Europe­ans. It is believed by many, that the wars with them generally origi­nate in the injustice, avarice and pride of their opposers and vanquis­hers. None, however, can justify their mode of carrying on a war when once it has commenced. If the guilty, or those who should con­ceal and defend the guilty, were the sole objects of their vengeance, we could not condemn them. But when those who never did or meant them an injury, when defenceless women, and children, and even babes, are made the victims of their shocking barbarity, we can­not but deeply lament their want of that humanity, and just discrim­ination between the innocent and the guilty, which are the peculiar fruits of civilization. We wish we could say, that they never had any examples of indiscriminate barbarity from their neighbours, who ought to have taught them better.

The Indians many times treat their prisoners in the most cruel and barbarous manner; but they often use them with the greatest human­ity, feeding and clothing them, even better than themselves, and a­dopting them as fathers, mothers, sons and daughters, brothers and sisters, and treating them in all respects as such. There have been in­stances of whites, thus adopted, while young, who have become Chiefs of the nations that adopted them. Compulsion has frequently been found necessary to separate from their Indian relations, those white prisoners who have resided a few years with them; and many men and women, who have been ransomed and delivered up by the Indians to their white parents or relations, have returned back to their Indian friends, and of choice, married and settled among them.

A late enterprising traveller * into the country west on the Missi­sippi, who took his course west south west from the posts on the Lakes, and penetrated to the head of the Missouri, and thence due west, till he arrived within about 500 miles of the Pacific ocean, informs that beyond the Missouri he met with many powerful nations of Indians, who were in general courteous and hospitable. The nations which he visited to the westward appeared to be a polished, civilized peo­ple, having regularly built towns, and enjoying a state of society not far removed from the European, and in order to be perfectly equal, wanting only the use of iron and steel. Their clothing is of skins, cut in an elegant manner, and in many respects preferable to the gar­ments in use among the whites. Adjacent to these nations is a vast range of mountains, which may be called the Allegany of the western parts of America, and serves as a barrier against the too frequent in­cursions of the coast Indians, who, Mr. Stewart relates, appear to be inveterate enemies to the tribes eastward of the mountains.

[Page 92] The Indians are unacquainted with letters, and their history is pre­served in some few instances by [...]ierogliphic paintings, and sculpture, but principally by tradition. They often discover great ingenuity i [...] communicating information to the absent. Of the following instance of Indian hierogliphic writing, Doctor Mitchill, who in a very oblig­ing manner communicated it to the Author, was an eye witness.

Dr. Mitchill, in company with several other gentlemen, as they [...] proceeding up Onondago river, to an Indian treaty, overtook several canoes of Seneka Indians, who encamped with them at night [...] fort Brewington; and the next day proving rainy, the continued [...] company till the weather became so favourable as to permit them [...] cross the Oneida Lake. During the storm, one of the Indian ca [...] stove, and became unfit for service. The commissioners, took the [...] on board their boat, and carried them to a landing place some distance up Wood Creek. Here one of them, before he left the water, took the following method to let his companions, who were left behind, know when and whither they had proceeded. He took a piece of wood, and hewed it flat and smooth, and then raked his fire for a suit­able coal, with which he rudely delineated, on the slab, the figure of an Indian, carrying a gun reversed upon his shoulder. In front of him he drew a crooked line, which reached to a man with a long coat and cocked hat, and holding a cane in his hand; and behind him a fram­ed house. He then took a strait pole, and tied some weeds and grass upon one end of it, and fixed the other in the earth, in such a manner, that, in the position the sun then was, which was six o'clock in the morning, it cast no shadow—or, in other words, he pointed it exactly towards the sun. The meaning of all, was this—"Susquewewah (the name of the Indian) left this spot at six o'clock in the morning, or when the sun was in the place where the pole pointed, and has pro­ceeded up Wood Creek, (which is remarkably crooked) to the settle­ment where the Commissioners of the State of New York are assem­bled to hold a treaty with the Indians."—All these insignia were ar­ranged so conspicuously on the margin of the creek, that his compan­ions behind could scarcely avoid observing them as they passed.

In the interior parts of America various monuments of art have been found, which discover greater ingenuity in their construction, than the present generation of Indians appear to possess.—Two miles west of the Genessee river, in the State of New York, we have been informed, * are the remains of an ancient Indian Fort. It encloses a­bout 4 acres—is encompassed with a ditch 8 feet wide and 5 or 6 feet deep, and has six gate ways. Its form is circular, except on one part, which is defended by nature with a high bank, at the foot of which is a fine stream of water; there is an appearance of there having been a deep covered way through the middle of the bank, to the water. Some of the trees on the bank and in the ditch look as if they had been growing 150 or 200 years. Half a mile south, on an eminence, are the ruins of another Indian fortified town, of smaller dimen­sions, and more advantageously situated for defence. The old Indians say these forts were built before the Senakas were admitted into con­federacy with the Mohawks, Onondagos, Oneidas and Cayogas, and while the Senakas were at war with the Mississauges, and other Indians, [Page 93] on the great Lakes, which Mr. Kirkland conjectures, from various ac­counts that he received from different tribes, was at least 300 years ago.

A few miles from the above mentioned forts, at a place which the Senakas call [...]egateenedaghque, signifying a town with a fort at each end, are the remains of two other forts, constructed nearly in the same form, with six gates, a ditch, and a stream of water, and a covered way to it.—Near the northern fort, are the ruins of a funeral pile, 6 feet high, and 20 or 30 feet diameter, where were buried 800 Indians, who, according to tradition, fell in a famous battle fought at this place, between the Senakas, who were the victors, and the western Indians. The weapons of war then in use were bows and arrows, the spear or javelin pointed with bone, and the war club, or death-mall. When the former fort of weapons were expended, they came to close engage­ment with the latter. The warriors wore a short jacket made of wil­low sticks or of moose wood, laced tight round their bodies—on their heads they wore a cap of the same kind, but commonly wove double, the better to secure them against a mortal blow from the death-mall. The battle above mentioned was fought, some of the Indians say 300, some 400, and some 600 lives or ages ago, and long before the arrival of the Europeans. They commonly reckon a life or an age, one hun­dred winters or colds.

Mr. Kirkland observes, that there are similar vestiges of ancient for­tified towns throughout the extensive territories of the Six Nations, and, by Indian report, in various other parts, and particularly on a branch of the Delaware river, which appear to be very ancient. He adds, "I find on enquiring, that a tradition prevails among the Indians in general, that all Indians came from the west." This is a confirma­tion of the opinion that this second class of Indians, of whom we have been speaking, and of which the Six Nations make a part, came over from the north east of Asia, to the north west coast of America, whence they migrated south towards Mexico, and eastward into the present territory of the United States.

Judging of the ancient Indians from the traditionary accounts of them, and the ruins we have been describing, we are led to conceive of them as a more civilized, ingenious, and warlike people than their descendants at the present time. We are at a loss for the causes of their degeneracy, unless we mention as such the introduction of spir­ituous liquors among them, a deep sense of their inferiority in military skill to the white people, and their chagrin and broken heartedness, at the loss of their lands, and being forced to give place to their sup­posed enemies.

The third class of American Indians, viz. those who inhabit Esqui­maux, Labrador, and the countries around, are much less known than either of the aforementioned classes. Those who profess to be best ac­quainted with them say, they differ in size and shape from the other American Indians, and resemble the Laplanders, and Samoeids, of Eu­rope, from whom, it is conjectured, they descended. *

In the years 1771, and 1772, Mr. Hearne, an ingenious young Gen­tleman, travelled many hundred miles into these dreary countries, (for such be found them) and in his Journal draws a plain, artless picture of the savage modes of life, the scanty means of subsistance, and the singular wretchedness in almost every respect, of the various tribes, [Page 94] who without fixed habitations, pass their lives in roving over [...] deserts and frozen lakes, of the extensive tract of Continent thro [...] which he passed. * The following extracts from his Journal will [...] the reader a better and more just idea of these Indians, than any [...] counts of them which the Author can furnish from any other sov [...].

"We arrived at the Copper-mine river on the 13th of July, and [...] found afterwards, about forty miles from its exit into the sea. On [...] arrival at the river, the Indians dispatched three men before, as sp [...] to see if any Esquimaux Indians were about the river: and on the [...] of the same month, as I was continuing my survey towards the mo [...] of the river, I met the spies, who informed me there were 5 ten [...] Esquimaux on the west side of the river, and by their accounts of [...] distance, I judged they were about twelve miles off. On receive [...] this news, no more attention was paid to my survey, but their wh [...] thought was engaged on planning the best method of stealing on th [...] the ensuing night, and killing them while asleep. The better to com­plete their design it was necessary to cross the river, and by the account of the spies, no place was so proper for that purpose as where [...] were, it being fine and smooth and at some distance from any cataract. Accordingly, after they had put their guns, targets, spears, &c. in order we were ferried over the river, the doing of which (as we had only three canoes) took up a considerable time. It must be observed this before we set out on the west side, all the men painted their target some with the image of the Sun, others with the Moon, others with different kinds of birds and beasts of prey, and some had the imaged fairies, and other imaginary beings on them, which, according to this silly imaginations, are inhabitants of the different elements, as the early sea, air, &c. By a strict enquiry into the reason of this superstition, I found that each man had the image of that being painted on his tar­get, which he relied most on for success in the intended battle with the Esquimaux: and some were contented with a single representation, whilst others, doubtful I suppose of the power of any single being would have their targets covered to the very margin with hieroglyphics, quite unintelligible.

"This piece of superstition being compleated, we began to advance towards the tents of the Esquimaux, always walking in low grounds, and being very careful how we crossed any hills, for fear of being seen by the inhabitants. The number of my gang being so far superior to the five tents of Esquimaux, and the warlike manner in which they were equipped, in proportion to what might be expected of the post Esquimaux, rendered a total massacre inevitable, unless kind provi­dence should work a miracle for their preservation. The land was so situated that we walked under cover of the hills till we came within 200 yards of their tents, where the Indians that were with me lay so [...] time in ambush, watching the motions of the Esquimaux (for we were in full sight of their tents.) The Indians advised me to stay here till the sight was over, with which I would by no means comply, for I thought when the Esquimaux were surprised, they would fly every way for refuge, and if they found me alone, not knowing me from an [Page 95] enemy, they would lay violent hands on me when there were none to assist. I therefore determined to accompany them, assuring them at the same time that I would have no hand in the murder unless I found it necessary for my own safety. They seemed highly pleased with my proposal, and directly fixed a spear and bayonet for me, but I had no target. By the time this was all settled it was near one o'clock in the morning, when finding all the Esquimaux asleep in their tents, they ran on them without being discovered, until they came close to their very doors. They then began the cruel massacre, while I stood neuter in the rear, and in a few seconds a scene truly shocking presented it­self to my view. For as the poor unhappy victims were surprised in the midst of their sleep, they had neither power not time to make any resistance, but men, women and children ran out of their tents quite naked. But alas, where could they fly for shelter! They every soul fell a sacrifice to Indians barbarity, in all near thirty. The shrieks and groans of the poor expiring souls were truly horrible, and this was much encreased by the sight of one poor girl (about 18 years old) whom they killed so near to me, that when the first spear was struck into her, she fell down and twisted about my feet and legs, and it was with much difficulty I disengaged myself from her dying grasps. As the Indians pursued her, I solicited for her life, but so far was it from be­ing granted, that I was not fully assured of my own being in entire safety for offering to speak in her behalf. When I begged her life the two fellows that followed her made no reply, till they had both their spears through her fixed into the ground: they then both looked me sternly in the face, and began to upbraid me by asking if I wanted an Esquimaux wife; at the same time paying no regard to the loud shrieks of the poor girl, who was twining round the spears like an eel. Indeed I was obliged at last to desire that they would be more expe­ditious in dispatching her out of her misery, lest otherwise I should be obliged out of pity, to assist in performing that friendly office. The brutish manner in which they used the bodies, which they had depriv­ed of life, is too shocking, and would be too indecent to describe, and the terror of mind I was in from such a situation is so much easier to be conceived than described, that I shall not attempt it. When they had compleated this most inhuman murder, we observed seven more tents on the opposite side of the river. The Indians of these tents were soon in great confusion, but did not offer to make their escape. The Indians fired many shot at them across the river, but the poor Esqui­maux were so unacquainted with the nature of guns, that when the bullets struck the rocks they ran in great bodies to see what was sent them, and seemed curious in examining the pieces of lead which the leg, after which they found slatted on the rocks, till at last one man was shot through the leg, after which they embarked in their canoes, with their wives and children, and paddled to a shoal in the river. When my Indians had made all their observations on the bodies, as above mentioned, and had plundered their tents of all their copper-work (which they and the Copper Indians used instead of iron) they assembled at the top of an high hill, standing in a circle with their spears erect in the air, and gave shouts of victory, calling Tima! Tima! by way of derision to the sur­viving Esquimaux who were standing on the shoal. We then went up the river about half a mile, to the place where out canoes and baggage were, with an intent to cross over and plunder the other seven tents. It taking up a considerable time to get all across the river, as we had [Page 96] only three canoes, and being entirely under cover of the rocks, the pour Esquimaux whom we left on the shoal, thought we were gone about our own business, and had returned to their own tents again. And the land was so situated on the east side that the Indians went under cover of the hills, until they were within a hundred yards of their tents, where they saw the Esquimaux busy in tying up their bundles. They ran on them again with great fury, but having their canoes ready, they all embarked, and reached the shoals beforementioned, except one poor old man, who being too attentive in tying up his things, had [...] ­tune to reach his canoe, and so fell a sacrifice to Indian fury. After the Indians had plundered these tents of what they thought worth their notice, they threw their tent poles into the river, broke their stone ket­tles, and did all they could to distress the poor survivors. We found an aged woman at a small distance up the river, snaring of salmon whom they butchered in the same manner, every man having a thrust at her with his spear."

The other extract is as follows:

"This day, January 11th 1772, as the Indians were hunting, some of them saw a strange snow shoe track, which they followed, and at a con­siderable distance came to a little but, where they found a young wo­man sitting alone. They brought her to the tents, and an examining her found that she was one of the western dog-ribbed Indians, and had been taken prisoner by the Arathapescow Indians, in the summer of 1770, and when the Indians, who took her prisoner, were near this place in 1771, she eloped from them, with an intent to return to her own country. But it being so far off, and when she was taken pris­oner having come all the way in canoes, with the winding of rivers and lakes, she had forgot the way, and had been in this little hut ever since the beginning of fall. By her account of the moons past since her elopement, it appears to have been the middle of last July when she left the Arathapescow Indians, and she had not seen a human face since. She had supported herself by snaring rabbits, partridges and squirrels, and was now in good health, and I think, as fine a woman of a real Indian, as I have seen in any part of North America. She had nothing to make snares of but the sinews of rabbits legs and feet, which she twisted together for that purpose, and of the rabbits skins had made a neat and warm winter's clothing. The stock of ma­terials she took with her when she eloped, consisted of about five inch­es of an iron hoop for a knife, a stone steel, and other hard stones for flints, together with other fire tackle, as tinder, &c. about an inch and an half of the shank of the shoeing of an arrow, of iron, of which she made an awl. She had not been long at the tents, before half a score of men wrestled to see who should have her for a wife. She says, that when the Arathapescow Indians took her prisoner they stole upon the tents in the night, when all the inhabitants were asleep, and murder­ed every soul except herself and three other young women. Her father, mother and husband were in the same tent with her, and they were all killed. Her child, of about five months old, she took with her, wrapt in a bundle of her own clothing undiscovered, in the night. But when she arrived at the place where the Arathapescows had left their wives, which was not far off, it being then day break, these Indian women immediately began to examine her bundle, and having there found the child, took it from her and killed it immediately. The re­lation of this shocking scene only served the savages of my gang for [Page 97] laughter. Her country is so far to the westward, that she says she never saw any iron or other metal till she was taken prisoner; those of her tribe making their hatchets and chissels of deer's horns, and knives of stone and bone; their arrows are shod with a kind of state, bone, and deer's horns, and their instruments to make their wood work are nothing but beaver's teeth. They have frequently heard of the useful materials that the nations to the east of them are supplied with from the English, but instead of drawing nearer to be in the way of trading for iron work, &c. are obliged to remove farther back to avoid the Arathapescow Indians, as they make surprizing slaughter among them every year, both winter and summer."

The Esquimaux, according to Mr. Pennant, are distinguish­ed from the tribes south of them, chiefly by their dress, their canoes, and their instruments of chace. He divides them into two varieties. About Prince Williams Sound they are of the largest size. As you advance northward they decrease in height, till they dwindle into the dwarfish tribes, which occupy some of the coasts of the Icy sea, and the maritime parts of Hudson's Bay, of Greenland and Labrador. Their dw [...]rsishness is doubtless occasioned by the scantiness of their provisions, and the severity of their climate. Beyond the 67th deg. N. Lat. according to Capt. Ellis's account, there are no inhabitants. The Arctic countries in America, Asia and Greenland, if inhabited at all, have very few inhabitants; and those are of the dwarfish kind, scat­tered on the banks of rivers, lakes, and seas, and subsistmiserably up­on fish, and the flesh of those animals which inhabit those frozen re­gions, with the skins of which they clothe themselves.

Mr. Crantz gives it as his opinion that the Esquimaux came originally from the northeast regions of Great Tartary, between the Icy sea and Mungalia; because he observes a greater assinity between them and the Kalmucks, Tunguses and Kamskadales, who inhabit those regions, that between them and the Laplanders, Samoi [...]ds and Ostiaks, who inhabit the northwest parts of Europe, whence, it has gen­erally been conjectured the Esquimaux migrated. It is his opinion al­so, that Greenland was settled in the 14th century, from the north­eastern parts of America; for till that period, Greenland appears not to have had any inhabitants. The rout which the first migrants took, he supposes was, first into Tartary, after the dispersion on the nations, thence into Kamtskatka, thence across the strait which separates the two continents; whence they spread themselves unmolested, into the then uninhabited countries round Hudson's Bay, and down as far south as Canada. And here they were found in the 11th century, by the Norwegians, in their Wineland. Afterwards these more south­erly regions were conquered by the more numerous and powerful tribes south of the lakes, and the Esquimaux were forced to retire as far north as the 60th deg. N. lat. Here Capt. Ellis found the Esqui­maux, in his voyage to Hudson's bay, and discovered that they had the same aspect, dress, boats, hunting and fishing implements, habita­tions, manners and usages as the Greenlanders. * They are often [Page 98] pursued and hunted by the other Indians, who live about the south and west shores of Hudson's Bay, and who appear to be quite a dif­ferent people.

The newly discovered American Indians about Nootka Sound, dis­guise themselves after the manner of the ancient Scythians, in dresses made of the skins of wolves and other wild beasts, and wear even the heads fitted to their own. These habits they use in the chace to cir­cumvent the animals of the field.

Concerning the religion of the Indians much has been said, and much that has no foundation. In general it may be said, that they all have an idea of a Supreme Being, whom they worship under dif­ferent names, and with a great variety of superstitious rites and cere­monies. Some, particularly the nations of the Algonquin language, call their Supreme God, the Great Hare; some Michabou, and others Atahocan. The Being opposed to this First Spirit, whom they consid­er as the Creator and Governor of the world, they style, the Great Tyger.

The name of the Hurons' Supreme God, or more properly their God of War, is Areskoui; of the Iroquois, Agrestouse; but most of the nations south of the Lakes, as far as Louisiana, denominate their Su­preme God, the Great, the Good, or the Grand Spirit, to whom they ascribe a kind of omnipresence, and whom they invoke as their guar­dian. To their evil genii they never address themselves, except to entreat them not to do them any injury; and to appease their wrath they often sacrifice to them. Mr. Kirkland mentions a small lake, which he visited, situated at the foot of a precipice, nearly 50 feet per­pendicular height, in the territory of the Six Nations, in which, the old Indians affirm, resided formerly a demon in the shape of a dragon, and that he had been seen frequently to disgorge balls of liquid fire. To appease his wrath, they said, many a sacrifice of tobacco had been made at the lake, by the fathers.

NEW DISCOVERISE ON THE NORTH-WEST COAST OF AMERICA.} The country on the North Western part of the Continent of America, bound­ed by the Pacific ocean, is yet unexplor­ed. We however have several charts of the coast: the latest published, is that, taken by Captains Portlock and Dixon, in a voyage performed in the years 1785—86—87 and 88; and from the enterprizing genius and repeated voyages of our own countrymen, we expect to be furn­ished with others much improved. "This vast country, with very little deviation, has the appearance of one continued forest, being cov­ered with pines of a different species, and these intermixed with alder, birch, witch-hazle, &c. besides various kinds of brush­wood: and the valleys and low grounds afford wild currants, goose­berries, raspberries, and various flowering shrubs. On the coast and many islands, spacious bays, commodious, harbours and mouths of nav­igable rivers: among which arc, Queen Charlotte's islands, § extending from N. lat. 51° 42′ to 54° 18′—W. long 129° 54′ to 133° 18′ from [Page 99] Greenwich. Nootka Sound, situated in N. lat. 40° 30′. W. long. 126° 42′. Admiralty bay and port Mulgrave, N. lat. 59° 31′—W. long. 140° 18′. Prince William's Sound, N. lat. 60° 30′—W. long. 147° 30′. Cook's river, N. lat. 59° 30′—W. long. 153° 12′.

This coast is inhabited by numerous but small tribes of Indians; each tribe appears to be independent and governed by its own chief. They differ from each other in their language and customs. The neighbour­ing tribes are frequently involved in wars with each other. It is im­possible to ascertain with any degree of certainty the number of in­habitants; but they have been computed at ten thousand, from Cook's river to Nootka Sound, an extent of about 1000 miles. Capt. Portlock saw [...]t Cape Edgecomb, several men much marked with the small pox; and was informed that the distemper carried of great numbers of the inhabitants. From what circumstances be could collect, be conjectur­ed it was brought by the Spaniards, who were there in 1775. The [...], are for the most part short in stature: their faces, men and women, are in general shat and round, with high cheek bones and slat noses; and their teeth white and regular. Their complexions are lighter than the Southern Indians, and some of their women have rosy cheeks. Both sexes are fond of ornamenting themselves with beads and trinkets, and they generally paint their hands and faces. They have a custom of making a longitudinal slit in the under lip, between the mouth and chin, some of them as large as the mouth, in which they wear a piece of bone, wood or ivory, fitted with holes in it, from which they suspend beads as low as the chin. They are very fond of masks or visors, and various kinds of caps painted with different devices, such as birds, beasts, fishes and sometimes representations of the human face. They have likewise many devices carved in wood, which are greatly valued by them. There appears to be a greater uni­formity in the dress of the different tribes than in their ornaments. The aperture, or second mouth, above the chin, seems confined to the men of Cook's river and Prince William's Sound; whilst the wooden ornament in the under lip is worn by the women only, in that part of the coast from port Mulgrave to Queen Charlotte's Islands.—Thieving is a very prevalent inclination among them, which is practised, not only upon strangers, but among themselves. In the course of their trading, they are frequently seen to steal from each other, and on being detected they will give up the articles stolen with a laugh, and im­mediately appear as unconcerned as if nothing had happened. Their habitations are generally the most wretched that can be conceived: a few poles stuck in the ground, without regularity, loosely covered with bark, constitute their huts, which are quite insufficient to shelter them from the snow and rain, and the insides of their dwellings exhibit a complete picture of filth and indolence. In one corner are thrown the bones and remaining fragments of victuals lest at their meals; in another, heaps of fish and putrefied flesh, grease, oil, &c. In short, the whole serves to show in how wretched a state it is possi­ble for human beings to exist.

They subsist wholly by fishing and hunting. Their clothing is made of the skins of animals and birds; and the probable reason why the Indians take no greater pains in the construction of their habitati­ons, is, that their situation is merely temporary; for no sooner does the master of a tribe find game begin to grow scarce, or fish rot so plenty [Page 100] as he expected, then he takes down his hut, puts the boards or barks into his canoe, and paddles away to seek a spot better adapted to his purposes; which having found, he erects his dwelling in the same care­less manner as before.

Few or no remarks concerning their religious ceremonies have yet been handed to us; but from the traits already discerned, those cannot be less rude than their other customs.

The chief object of civilized nations in navigating this coast hither to, has been to traffick with the natives for furs; which they give in exchange for pieces of iron, nails, beads, penknives and other trifling trinkets. These furs are carried to China and disposed of to a great profit. The skins obtained, are those of the sea otter, racoon, pine martin, land beaver, earless mammot, &c.

A traffick, which in prospect, affords such uncommon profit, has induced many citizens of the United States to engage in it; but whe­ther the number of vessels fitted out by other nations, has not made a scarcity of furs, and taught the natives to set a higher value on them experience will determine

The following statement shews the number of vessels that had ar­rived at China, from the N. W. coast, to February 1788, with the number of furs, and their value, viz.

Vessels. Names. Capts. Tons Burden. Years. From whence sent. No of furs obtained. Sold for D [...]
B [...]g Hanna, 60 1765   560 S. Otter 20, [...]00
Ditto ibid.   ibid.   400 8,000
Snow Capt. Cook, Lovie, 300 1786 Bombay, 600 24,000
Snow Experiment, Guise, 100
—Nootka, Mears,   1786 Bengal, 357 14,24 [...]
—Imperial Eagle, Berkley, 800 30,000
      1700 Skins imported by the Spaniards, unsold, valued  
Ship Peyrouse,         54. [...]
Ship De Langle,

What furs the Russians procure is not known, as they never carry them to Canton. From the above sketch it appears that the fur trade has been very lucrative. There are also other articles which might per­haps be procured to advantage, such as ginseng, copper, oil, spars, &c. with great quantities of salmon.

The following extracts from the account of Capt. Cook's discoveries, contain much valuable information respecting the N. W. coast of A­merica, and its neighbouring islands.

Having left the Society Islands, Captain Cook proceeded to the northward, crossing the equator on the 22d and 23d of December 1777; and on the 24th discovered a low uninhabited Island about 15 or 20 leagues in circumference. Here the longitude and latitude were exactly determined, by means of an eclipse of the sun. The west side of it where the eclipse was observed, lies in N. Lat. 1° 59′ E. Lon. 202° 30′. From the time of its discovery it obtained the name of Christ­mas Island. Plenty of turtle were found upon it, and the Captain ca [...] ­ed the seeds of the cocoa-nut, yams, and melons, to be planted.

Proceeding still to the northward, our navigator next fell in with in five islands, to which he gave the general name of Sandwich Isles, in honest of his patron. Their names in the language of the country are W [...] ­hoo, Atooi, Oneeheow, Oreehoua, and Tehoora. They are situated in the latitude of 21° 30′ and 22° 15′ North, and between 199° 20′ and [Page 101] 201°. 30′. E. Long. The longitude was deduced from no fewer than 72 sets of lunar observations. The largest of these islands is Atooi, and does not in the least resemble the islands of the South Sea formerly visited by our navigators. excepting only that it has hills near the cen­tre, which slope gradually towards the sea side. The only domestic animals found upon it were hogs, dogs, and fowls: Captain Cook designed to have made the inhabitants of this island a present of some others; but being driven out of it by stress of weather, he was obliged to land them upon a smaller one named Oncchccow. He left a he goat with two females, and a boar and sow of the English breed, which is much superior to that of the South Sea Islands. He left al­so the seeds of melons, pumpkins, and onions. The soil of this island seemed in general to be poor: it was observed that the ground was covered with shrubs and plants, some of which had a more delicious fragrancy than he had ever experienced before. The inhabitants of these islands are much commended, not with standing their horrid custom of eating human flesh. In every thing manufactured by them there is an ingenuity and neatness in an uncommon degree; and the elegant form and polish of some of their fishing books could not be exceeded by an European artist, even assisted by all his proper tools. From what was seen of their agriculture also, it appeared that they were by no means novices in that art, and that the quantity and goodness of their vege­table productions might with propriety be attributed as much to their skilful culture as to the fertility of the soil. The language of the Sandwich Isles is almost identically the same with that of Otaheite.

Proceeding farther to the northward, our navigator discovered the coast of New Albion, on the 7th of March 1778. Its appearance was very different from that of the countries with which they had hither­to been conversant. The land was full of mountains, the tops of which were covered with snow; while the valleys between them, and the grounds on the sea coast, high as well as low, were covered with trees, which formed a beautiful prospect as of one vast forest. The place where they landed was situated in N. Lat. 74°. 33′. E. Long. 235°. 20′. At first the natives seemed to prefer iron to every other article of commerce; but at last they showed such a predilection for brass, that scarcely a bit of it was left in the ships, except what belonged to the necessary instruments. It was observed also, that these people were much more tenacious of their property than any of the savage nations that had hitherto been met with, insomuch that they would part nei­ther with wood, water, grass, nor the most trifling article, without a compensation, and were sometimes very unreasonable in their demands; with which, however, the captain always complied as far as was in his power.

The place where the Resolution was now anchored, was by our nav­igator called St George's Sound, but he afterwards understood that the natives gave it the name of Nootka. Its entrance is situated in the east corner of Hope Bay: in N. Lat. 49°. 33′. E. Long. 233°. 12′. The climate, as far as they had an opportunity of observing it, was much milder than that on the eastern coast of the American continent in the same parallel of latitude; and it was remarkable that the thermometer, even in the night, never fell lower than 42°, while in the day time it frequently role to 60°. The trees met with here are chiefly the Ca­nadian pine, white cypress, and some other kinds of pne. There seem­ed [Page 102] to be a scarcity of birds, which are much harassed by the natives, who ornament their clothes with the feathers, and use the flesh for food. The people are no strangers to the use of metals, having iron tools in general use among them; and Mr. Gore procured two silver spoons, of a construction similar to what may be observed in some Flem­ish picture, from a native who wore them round his neck as an orna­ment. It is most probable that these metals have been conveyed to them by the way of Hudson's Bay and Canada; nor is it improbable that some of them may have been introduced from the north western parts of Mexico.

While Capt. Cook sailed along this coast, be kept always at a distance from land when the wind blew strongly upon it: whence several large gape were left unexplored, particularly between the latitudes of 50° and 55°. The exact situation of the supposed straits of Anian was not ascertain­ed, though there is not the least doubt, that if he had lived to return by the same way in 1779, he would have examined every part with his usual accuracy. On departing from Nootka Sound, our navigator first fell in with an island in N. lat. 59. 49. E. long. 216. 58. to which he gave the name of Kay's Island. Several others were discovered in the neighbourhood; and the ship came to an anchor in an inlet named by the Captain Prince William's Sound. Here he had an opportunity of making several observations on the inhabitants, as well as on the nature of the country. From every thing relative to the former, it was con­cluded, that the inhabitants were of the same race with the Esqui­maux or Greenlanders. The animals were much the same with [...] met with at Nootka, and a beautiful skin of one animal, which seemed to be peculiar to the place, was offered for sale. Mr. Anderson was inclined to think that it was the same to which Mr. Pennant has given the name of the casan marmot. The alcedo, or great King's fisher, was found here, having very fine and bright colours. The humming bird also came frequently, and flew about the ship while at anchor; though it is scarce to be supposed that it can live throughout the winter, on account of the extreme cold. The water fowl were in considerable plenty; and there is a species of diver which seemed to be peculiar to the place. Almost the only kinds of fish met with in the place were torsk and halibut. The trees were chiefly the Canadian and spruce pines, some of which were of a considerable height and thickness. The Sound is judged by Captain Cook to occupy a degree and a half of latitude, and two of longitude, exclusively of its arms and branches, which were not explored. There was every reason to believe that the inhabitants had never been visited by any European vessel before; but our navigator found them in possession not only of iron but of beads, which it is probable are conveyed to them across the continent from Hudson's Bay.

Soon after leaving Prince William's Sound, our navigator fell in with another inlet, which it was expected would lead either to the northern sea or to Hudson's or Baffin's bay; but upon examination it was found to end in a large river. This was traced for 210 miles from the mouth, as high as N. lat. 61. 30, and promises to vie with the most considerable ores already known, as it lies open by means of its various branches to a very considerable inland communication. As no name was given by our commander to this river, it was order­ed by Lord Sandwich to be named Cook's River. The inhabitants [Page 103] seemed to be of the same race with those of Prince William's Sound; and like them had glass beads and knives; they were also clothed in very fine furs; so that it seemed probable that a valuable fur trade might be carried on from that country. Several attempts have accordingly been made from the British settlements in the East Indies to establish a traffic of that kind; but little benefit accrued from it, except to the proprietors of the first vessel, her cargo having greatly lowered the price of that commodity in the Chinese market. It must be observed, that on the western side of the American continent, the only valuable skins met with are those of the sea otter; those of the other animals, especial­ly foxes and martins, being of an inferior quality to such as are met with in other parts.

Proceeding farther to the northward our navigator now fell in with a race of people who had evidently been visited by the Russians, and seemed to have adopted from them some improvements in dress, &c. In the prosecution of this part of their voyage, it appeared that they had been providentially conveyed in the dark through a passage so dangerous, that our commander would not have ventured upon it in the day time. They were now got in among those islands which had lately been discovered by Capt. Beering and other Russian navigators, and came to an anchor in a harbour of Oonalashka, situated in N. lat. 53. 55. E. long. 193. 30. Here it was remarked, that the inhabitants had as yet profited very little by their intercourse with the Russians; so that they did not even dress the fish they used for their food, but devoured them quite raw.

From Oonalashka our navigator proceeded again towards the con­tinent, which he continued to trace as far as possible to the north­ward. In the latitude of 54. 48. E. long. 195. 45. J. lat. is a volca­no of the shape of a perfect cone, having the crater at the very summit. On the coast farther to the north the soil appears very barren. Produc­ing neither three nor shrub, though the lower grounds are not destitute of grass and some other plants. To a rocky point of considerable height situated in N. lat. 58. 42. E. long. 197. 36. our commander gave the name of Cape Newnham.

Here Mr. Anderson, the surgeon of the Resolution, died of a con­sumption, under which he had laboured for more than twelve months. Soon after he had breathed his last, land being seen at a distance, it was named Anderson's Island; and on the 9th of August the ship an­chored under a point of the continent which he named Cap, Prince of Wales. This is remarkable for being the most westerly point of the American continent hitherto known. It is situated in N. lat. 65. 46. E. long. 191. 45. It is only 39 miles distant from the eastern coast of Siberia; so that our commander had the pleasure of ascertaining the vicinity of the two continents to each other, which had only been im­perfectly done by the Russian navigators. Setting sail from this point next day, he steered to the west and north, when he soon fell in with the country of the Tschutski, which had been explored by Beering in 1728. Here he had an opportunity of correcting M. Stoehlin's map, who had placed in these seas fear an imaginary island, on which he be­stowed the name of Alas [...]hka. Being convinced that the land he had now reached was part of the Asiatic continent, our commander direct­ed his course eastward, in order to fall in with that of America; and on the 17th reached the latitude of 70. 33. and E. long. 197. 41. Here [Page 104] they began to perceive that brightness in the horizon called by [...] mariners the bl [...]nk of the ice; and in 70° 41′ they had got quite up [...] it, so that no farther progress could be made. Next day they made shift to get as far as 70° 44′. but the ice was now as compact [...] wall, and about ten or twelve feet in height. Its surface was extrem [...] rugged, and farther to the northward appeared much higher. Its [...] face was covered with pools of water; and great numbers of seas­ons lay upon it, whose flesh they were now glad to use as food. [...] commander continued to traverse the Icy Sea till the 29th, but the [...] ­structions becoming every day greater and greater, it was thought pro [...] to give over all further attempts of finding a passage to Europe for that [...] He did not, however, omit the investigation of the Asiatic and Ameri­can coasts, until he had fully ascertained the accuracy of Captain B [...] ­ing's accounts as far as he went, and corrected the errors of M. St [...] ­lin. Great additions were thus made to the geographical knowledge of this part of the globe. From Beering's straits he sailed for Oona­lashka, where he arrived on the 2d of October, and staid for [...] time in order to repair his ships. While the carpenters were em­ployed in this work one third of the people had permission to go [...] those by turns, in order to gather berries, with which the island a­bounds, and which, though now beginning to decay, were of great service, in conjunction with the spruce beer, to preserve the people from the scurvy. With regard to the natives of Oonalashka, they [...] to appearance the most innoffensive and peaceable people in the world not to be in a state of civilization; though perhaps this may be owi [...] in some measure to the connection they have long had with the Rus­sians. From the affinity observed between the language of the Esqui­maux, Greenlanders, and those of Norton's Sound, in N. lat. 64°. [...] there is great reason to believe, that all those nations are of the sa [...] extraction; and if that be the case, there is little reason on doubt, th [...] a communication, by sea, exists between the eastern and western [...] of the American continent; which, however, may very probably [...] shut up by ice in the winter time, or even for the most part through­out the year.

The following information respecting the N. West coast of Amer­ica, is extracted from the journal of Mr. John Cordis of Charlestown, Massachusetts▪ second officer of the Snow Eleanora, from Boston.

On the 30th of August, 1789, Mr. Cordis, at Washington Island, left the Sloop Washington, which was commanded by Captain Kendric, and went on board the Snow Eleanora, commanded by Cap­tain Simcon Metcalf.

Captain Cook, when he passed this Island, supposed it to be a part of the continent▪ as the weather at the time was thick, and the wind boisterous, which obliged him to keep at sea, till he made the western cape of the continent in about lat. 55°. Captain Gray, in the Sloop Washington, first discovered it to be an island, and gave it the name of WASHINGTON. To a harbour, about the middle of the island, he gave the name of Barrell's Inlet, in honour of Joseph Barrell, E [...] of Boston. Another harbour, whose entrance is in lat. 52° 12′ [...] lon. 136 W. they called Clinton's Harbour, in honor of Governor Clinton of New York.

On the continent opposite the island is a convenient harbour, with a muddy bottom, which they called Cordis's Cove. The island has [...] excellent harbours.

[Page 105] This island is about 100 miles in length, from S. E. to N. W. and about 30 in breadth. The southernmost point is in about lat. 51° 50′ N. lon.135° W.

It is composed principally of irregular mountains, the tops of which, even in summer, are covered with snow. It abounds with spruce, pine, and cedar trees. Among other animals on this island, are the bear, deer, dog, seal, and sea otter; of the latter, are great numbers, whose skins are of a most beautiful black, intermixed with white hair, and their fur is extremely fine and delicate.

The number of inhabitants on this island, Mr. Cordis conjectures. is between ten and eleven thousand. He calculates thus—One of the Chiefs informed him that he possessed six large canoes, or as they call them, Lux Chepotts, which would carry upwards of 50 men each; and his tribe was large enough to man them all. There were seventeen other Chiefs, he said, beside himself, on the island; each of whom, had nearly the same number of men; hence he concludes, that upon a moderate calculation each tribe contains 600 souls; and the whole island about ten thousand eight hundred.

The natives of this island are in general well made, robust, active, and athletic; and of a larger size than those on the opposite continent, and of a lighter complexion. Their hair is very harsh and long, and tied back with a piece of red cedar bark [...] The women have a very singular mode of ornamenting, or rather of disfiguring themselves, by making, when very young, a small hole in the under lip, and putting in a small piece, or plug of wood, for the purpose of keeping it distended. By frequently increasing the size of this plug, as they advance in age, by the time they are five and twenty, the hole becomes large enough to contain a piece of wood two inches long, and about an inch wide, the up­per part of which is dug out in the form of a spoon, which serves both for ornament and use, as it is used at their meals to contain the oil for their fish. This custom, however, is not general throughout the island. Their war implements, which they have frequent occasion to use▪ some or other of the tribes being almost perpetually at war, are spears about 15 feet long▪ with the ends pointed with shells or stone, and bows and arrows. The iron which they obtain in traffic is immedi­ately converted into ornaments for the neck, and into knives. Their mode of working it could not be discovered. It is a custom in some of the tribes, when a prisoner offends them, for the Chiefs to kill and eat him. Mr. Cordis was an eye witness to one instance of this kind▪ as he found a piece of human flesh, with an Indian woman, the wife of a Chief, of which she ate, and appeared to be fond. Their com­mon diet is dried fish and their spawns▪ mixed with a large quanity of fish oil. They sometimes▪ when they have no fire near, eat small fish [...]aw▪ just as they are taken from the water.

Their habitations are small huts, of a triangular form, constructed of poles, and the bark of cedar trees, with a small hole for a door. They frequently remove from place to place as the fish go up or down the riv­er. The man are extremely jealous of their wives, but chastity is not a­mong the virtues of the young unmarried women. Both men and women generally paint themselves red or black, every morning. Their dress consists of skins thrown over their shoulders, and tied round their necks with a leathern thong: the rest part of their bodies is entirely naked, except the women, who sometimes, but not always, have a skin fastened round their waist.

[Page 106] Their method of disposing of their dead is very singular. They put the corpse into a square box; if the box happens to be too small for the body, they cut off the head, or other parts of it, which they put into the vacant places. This being done, the box is secured by having several mats wound round it, and then is hoisted into the top of the highest tree in the neighbourhood, where it is fastened and lest till the box decays and drops in pieces. Though frequently asked, they would not tell their reasons for this custom.

The manner of treating the dead, on the continent opposite the Isl­and, is somewhat different. They put the dead body into a square box, when it has become a little putrefied, and secure it well with cords. After this the relations of the deceased, seat themselves on the box, and with an instrument made of a shell, cut their faces till they are covered with blood, speaking all the while in a loud and melancholy tone. This ceremony being over, they wash themselves, and return to the company with great gaiety. The corpse is then put under a great tree, and covered with mats and earth, and left to be devoured by wild beasts.

It has been conjectured by navigators upon this coast, that there i [...] some where between the latitudes of 50 and 60 degrees, a passage through the continent, from the Pacific ocean, into Hudson's Bay. Mr. Cordis, by order of Capt. Metcalf, explored a large strait, to the eastward of Washington Island, running up N. E. into the country. On the 24th of September 1789, he left the ship, and in the yawl, with six men, proceeded N. N. E. about 25 miles up the strait, where he found it about 3 miles wide. The land on each side was moun­tainous and woody, and bears and wolves were heard during the night. Continuing his course next day, N. N. E. till 10 o'clock, A. M. he found the strait to lead north, and to be much narrower. He kept on the eastern shore, till 2 o'clock, P. M. when the strait opened wider to the N. E. The next day he proceeded upwards of 40 miles, N. E. and N. N. E. where he found the strait much wider than any part he had passed, except the entrance. The time to which he was limited be­ing now expired, and his provisions short, he returned on board, strongly impressed, however, with the opinion that this strait commu­nicated with Hudson's Bay, or with some of the water [...] of the Atlan­tic Ocean.

In January 1790, Capt. Metcalf visited the Sandwich Islands. The principal of these Islands. O-why-hee, according to Mr. Cordis's reck­oning, lies in 19° 50′ N. Lat. and 154° 50′W. or in 205° 20′ E. Long. from Greenwich. The natives of these Islands are, generally speaking, stout, vigorous and active, and by being almost constantly in the wa­ter, seem to be nearly amphibious. They are of a light copper colour, with black hair. The women have a custom of anointing them­selves with an ointment which gives them a yellowish appearance.

They have two kinds of canoes, the single and the double. The former are about 30 feet long and two and a half broad; and to pre­vent their overturning▪ have an out▪ rigger which projects 5 feet from the canoe. The latter, are two canoes, connected by arched timbers passing from the gunwale of one, to the gunwale of the other, and are about three feet apart; some of these double canoes are above 80 feet in length, and will contain as many men. The paddles of these ca­noes are about 5 feet long▪ and the part which goes into the water 15 inches broad; with these they will paddle at the rate of 6 miles an hour.

[Page 107] These islands produce sugar canes, potatoes, cocoa nuts, bread fruit, plantains, water mellons, yams, and a root they call tea, which is of a sweetish taste, not disagreeable. It is about the bigness of a man's arm and nearly as long. They have also a root which they call avd. With its juice they often get intoxicated, or rather stupefied. Those who make a free use o [...] it, when they become old, have a scaly appearance not unlike the leprosy. These islands abound with hogs, which are large and good. Dogs are considered by the chiefs as a delicate dish, and are fed with great care for their use. A few dunghill fowls were also found on these islands, which probably were left here by some ship, not many years since.

The only valuable wood on these islands, is what is called sandle wood, which is of a yellowish colour, and has a most agreeable smell. It is much esteemed by the Chinese, who burn it in their Churches. They have another species of wood, not unlike the lignum vitoe, with which they make their spears, which are from ten to twelve feet in length. These spears, with the knife, which is made of a small piece of wood, and on both sides stuck full of sharks' teeth, appear to be their only instruments of war.

The Island of O-why-hee, is nearly twenty leagues in circumference, and contains upwards of 30,000 inhabitants, under the arbitrary gov­ernment of one Chief.

A SUMMARY ACCOUNT of the first DISCOVERY and SETTLEMENT of NORTH AMERICA, arranged in chronological order.

NORTH AMERICA was discovered in the reign of Henry VII. a period when the arts and sciences had made very considerable pro­gress in Europe. Many of the first adventurers were men of genius and learning, and were careful to preserve authentic records of such of their proceedings as would be interesting to posterity. These re­cords afford ample documents for American historians. Perhaps no people on the globe, can trace the history of their origin and pro­gress with so much precision, as the inhabitants of North America; particularly that part of them who inhabit the territory of the United States.

The same which Columbus had acquired by his first discoveries on this western continent, spread through Europe, and inspired many with the spirit of enterprize. 1495. As early as 1495, four years only after the first discovery of America, John Cabot, a Ve­netian, obtained a grant or commission from Henry VII. to discover unknown lands and annex them to the crown. *

In the spring of 1496 he sailed from England with two ships, car­rying with him his three sons. In this voyage, which was intended for China, he fell in with the north side of Terra Labrador, and coasted northerly as far as the 67th degree of latitude.

1497.] The next year he made a second voyage to America with his son Sebastian, who afterwards proceeded in the discoveries which his father had begun. On the 24th of June he discovered Bonavista, on the north east side of Newfoundland. Before his return he travers­ed the coast from Davis's straits to Cape Florida.

[Page 108] 1502.] Sebastian Cabot was this year at Newfoundland; and return, carried three of the natives of that island to King Henry.

1513.] In the spring of 1513, John Ponce sailed from Ports northerly, and discovered the continent in 30° 8′north latitudes landed in April, a season when the country around was covered verdure, and in full bloom. This circumstance induced him [...] the country FLORIDA, which, for many years, was the common for North and South America.

1516.] In 1516, Sir Sebastian Cabot and Sir Thomas Port, exp [...] the coast as far as Brazil in South America.

This vast extent of country, the coast of which was thus exp [...] remained unclaimed and unsettled by any European power, (exce [...] the Spaniards in South America) for almost a century from the ti [...] its discovery.

1524.] It was not till the year 1524 that France attempted d [...] ­eries on the American coast. Stimulated by his enterprizing [...] ­bours, Francis I. who possessed a great and active mind, sent John [...] ­razano, a Florentine, to America, for the purpose of making dis [...] ­ries. He traversed the coast from latitude 28° to 50° north. In [...] ­cond voyage, sometime after, he was lost.

1525.] The next year Stephen Gomez, the first Spaniard who [...] upon the American coast for discovery, sailed from Groyn in Sp [...] to Cuba and Florida, thence northward to Cape Razo, in latitude [...] north, in search of a northern passage to the East Indies.

1534.] In the spring of 1534, by the direction of Francis I. a [...] was fitted out at St. Malo's in France▪ with design to make discov [...] in America. The command of this fleet was given to James Car [...] ▪ He arrived at Newfoundland in May of this year. Thence he sa [...] northerly: and on the day of the festival of St. Lawrence, he fou [...] himself in about latitude 48° 30′ north, in the midst of a broad [...] which he named St. Lawrence. He gave the same name to the [...] ­er which empties into it. In this voyage, he sailed as far north a [...] [...] ­itude 51°, expecting in vain to find a passage to China.

1535.] The next year he sailed up the river St. Lawrence 300 leagues to the great and swift Fall. He called the country New France; [...] a fort in which he spent the winter, and returned in the following spring to France.

1539.] On the 12th of May, 1539, Ferdinand de Soto, with [...] men, besides seamen, sailed from Cuba, having for his object the [...] quest of Florida. On the 30th of May he arrived at Spirito Sa [...] from whence he travelled northward to the Chickasaw country, in a­bout latitude 35° or 36°. He died and was buried on the bank [...] Mississippi River, May, 1542, aged 42 years. Alverdo succeeded him.

1542.] In 1542, Francis la Roche, Lord Robewell, was sent to Can­ada, by the French king, with three ships and 200 men, women and children. They wintered here in a fort which they had built, a returned in the spring. About the year 1550, a large number of venturers sailed for Canada, but were never after heard of. In [...] the king of France commissioned the Marquis De la Roche to conq [...] Canada, and other countries not possessed by any Christian Pri [...] ▪ We do not learn, however, that la Roche ever attempted to execute commission, or that any further attempts were made to settle Canada during this century. *

[Page 109] January 6, 1548-49.] This year king Henry VII. granted a pension for life to Sebastian Cabot, in consideration of the important services he had rendered to the kingdom by his discoveries in America. * Ve­ry respectable descendants of the Cabot family now live in the Com­monwealth of Massachusetts.

1562.] The Admiral of France, Chatillon, early in this year, sent out a fleet under the command of John Ribalt. He arrived at Cape Francis on the coast of Florida, near which, on the first of May, he discovered and entered a river which he called May river. It is more than probable that this river is the same which we now call St. Mary's, which forms a part of the southern boundary of the United States. As he coasted northward he discovered eight other rivers, one of which he called Port Royal, and sailed up it several leagues. On one of the rivers he built a fort and called it Charles, in which he left a colony under the direction of Captain Albert. The severity of Albert's measures excited a mutiny, 1564. in which, to the ruin of the colony, he was slain. Two years after, Chatillon sent Rene Laudonier with three ships to Florida. In June he arrived at the river May, on which he built a fort, and, in honor to his king, Charles IX. he called it CAROLINA.

In August, this year, Capt. Ribalt arrived at Florida the second time, with a fleet of seven vessels, to recruit the colony, which, two years before, he had left under the direction of the unfortunate Capt. Albert.

The September following, Pedro Melandes, with six Spanish ships, pursued Ribalt up the river on which he had settled, and over power­ing him in numbers, cruelly massacred him and his whole company. Melandes, having in this way taken possession of the country, built three forts, and left them garrisoned with 1200 soldiers. Laudonier and his colony on May River, receiving information of the fate of Ribalt, took the alarm and escaped to France.

1567.] A fleet of three ships was this year sent from France to Florida, under the command of Dominique de Gourges. The object of this expedition, was to dispossess the Spaniards of that part of Flor­ida which they had cruelly and unjustifiably seized three years before. 1568. He arrived on the coast of Florida, April 1568, and soon after made a successful attack upon the forts. The recent cruelty of Melandes and his company excited revenge in the breast of Gourges, and roused the unjustifiable principle of retaliation. He took the forts; put most of the Spaniards to the sword; and having burned and demolished all their fortresses, returned to France. Dur­ing the 50 years next after this event, the French enterprized no settle­ments in America.

1576.] Capt. Frobisher▪ was sent this year, to find out a north west passage to the East Indies. The first land which he made on the coast was a Cape, which, in honor to the queen, he called Queen Elizabeth's Foreland. In coasting northerly he discovered the straits which bear his name. He prosecuted his search for a passage into the western ocean, till he was prevented by the ice, and then returned to Eng­land.

[Page 110] June 11th, 1578.] In 1578, Sir Humphry Gilbert obtained a p [...] from queen Elizabeth, for lands not yet possessed by any Chri [...] prince, provided he would take possession within six [...] 1583. With this encouragement he sailed for America, and on the [...] of August 1583, anchored in Conception Bay. Afterwards [...] discovered and took possession of St. John's Harbour, and the coun­try south of it. In pursuing his discoveries he lost one of his ships [...] the shoals of Sablon, and on his return home, a storm overtook him, [...] which he was unfortunately lost, and the intended settlement was pre­vented.

1584.] This year two patents were granted by queen Elizabeth one to Adrian Gilbert, (Feb.6.) the other to Sir Walter Raleigh ( [...] 25.) for [...]nds not possessed by any Christian prince. * By the di­rection of Sir Walter, two ships were fitted and sent out under the command of Philip Amidas, and Arthur Barlow, with 107 passangers. In June 1585 they arrived on the coast, and anchored in a harbour seven leagues west of the Roanoke. This colony returned to England in June, 1586. On the 13th of July, they, in a formal manner, took possession of the country, and, in honor of their virgin queen Eliza­beth, they called it Virginia. Till this time the country was known by the general name of Florida. After this VIRGINIA became the common name for all North America.

1586.] This year, Sir Walter Raleigh sent Sir Richard Greenville to America, with seven ships. He arrived at Wococon harbour in June. Having stationed a colony of more than an hundred people [...] Roanoke, under the direction of Capt. Ralph Lane, he coasted north­easterly as far as Chesapeak Bay, and returned to England.

The colony under Capt. Lane, endured extreme hardships, and [...] have perished, had not Sir Francis Drake fortunately returned to Vir­ginia, and carried them to England, after having made several con­quests for the queen in the West Indies and other places.

A fortnight after, Sir Richard Greenville arrived with new re­cruits; and although he did not find the colony which he had before left, and knew not but they had perished, he had the rashness to leave 50 men at the same place.

1587.] The year following, Sir Walter sent another company to Virginia, under Governour White, with a charter and twelve assist­ants. In July he arrived at Roanoke. Not one of the second com­pany remained. He determined, however, to risk a third colony. Accordingly he left 115 people at the old settlement, and returned to England.

This year (Aug. 13.) Mantco was baptized in Virginia. He was the first native Indian who received that ordinance in that part of A­merica. He, with Towaye, another Indian, had visited England, and returned home to Virginia with the colony. On the 18th of August, Mrs. Dare was delivered of a daughter, whom she called VIRGIN­IA. She was born at Roanoke, and was the first English child that was born in North America.

1590.] In the year 1590, Governor White came over to Virginia with supplies and recruits for his colony; but, to his great grief, not a man was to be found. They had all miserably famished with hun­ger, or were massacred by the Indians.

1602.] In the spring of this year, Bartholomew Gosnold, with 3 [...] [Page 111] persons, made a voyage to North Virginia, and discovered and gave names to Cape Cod, Martha's Vineyard, and Elizabeth Islands, and to Dover Cliff. Elizabeth Island was the place which they fixed for their first settlement. But the courage of those who were to have tarried, failing, they all went on board and returned to England. All the attempts to settle this continent which were made by the Dutch, French, and English, from its discovery to the present time, a period of 110 years, proved ineffectual. The Spaniards only, of all the Euro­pean nations, had been successful. There is no account of there hav­ing been one European family, at this time, in all the vast extent of coast from Florida to Greenland.

1603.] Martin Pring and William Brown, were this year sent by Sir Walter Raleigh, with two small vessels, to make discoveries in North Virginia. They came upon the coast which was broken with a mul­tude of islands, in latitude 43° 30′ north. They coasted southward to Cape Cod Bay; thence round the Cape into a commodious harbour in latitude 41° 25′ where they went ashore and tarried seven weeks, during which time they loaded one of their vessels with sassafras, and returned to England.

Bartholomew Gilbert, in a voyage to South Virginia, in search of the third colony which had been left there by Governour White, in 1587, having touched at several of the West India Islands, landed near Chesapeak Bay, where, in a skirmish with the Indians, he and four of his men were unfortunately stain. The rest, without any further search for the colony, returned to England.

France, being at this time in a state of tranquillity in consequence of the edict of Nantz in favor of the Protestants, passed by Henry IV. (April 1598) and of the peace with Philip king of Spain and Portugal, was induced to pursue her discoveries in America. Accordingly the king signed a patent * in favor of De Mons, (November 8, 1603) of all the country from the 40th to the 46th degrees of north lat­itude, 1604. under the name of Acadia. The next year De Mons ranged the coast from St. Lawrence to Cape Sable, and round to Cape Cod.

1605.] In May 1605, George's Island and Pentecost Harbour were discovered by Capt George Weymouth. In May he entered a large river in latitude 43° 20′, (variation 11° 15′ west,) which Mr. Prince, in his Chronology, supposes must have been Sagadahok; but from the latitude, it was more probably the Piscataqua. Capt. Weymouth carried with him to England five of the natives.

1606.] April 10th this year, James I. by patent, divided Virginia into two colonies. The southern, included all lands between the 34th and 41st degrees of north latitude. This was styled the first colony, under the name of South Virginia, and was granted to the London Company. The northern, called the second colony, and known by the general name of North Virginia, included all lands between the 38th and 45th degrees north latitude, and was granted to the Plymouth Company. Each of these colonies had a council of thirteen men to govern them. To prevent disputes about territory, the colony which should last place themselves was prohibited to plant within an hun­dred miles of the other. There appears to be an inconsistency in these grants, as the lands lying between the 38th and 41st degrees are covered by both patents.

[Page 112] Both the London and Plymouth companies enterprized settle [...] within the limits of their respective grants. With what succ [...] now be mentioned.

Mr. Piercy, brother to the Earl of Northumberland, in the [...] the London Company, went over with a colony to Virginia, [...] covered Powhatan, now James River. In the mean time the Ply [...] company sent Capt. Henry Challons, in a vessel of fifty five tons, [...] a colony in North Virginia; but in his voyage he was taken Spanish fleet and carried to Spain.

1607. April 26. The London company this spring, sent Capt. Chri [...] Newport, with three vessels, to South Virginia. On [...] of April he entered Chesapeak Bay, and landed, and soon after gav [...] most southern point the name of Cape Henry, which [...] retains. May 13. Having elected Mr. Edward Wingfield p [...] for the year, they next day landed all their men, [...] ­gan a settlement on James river, at a place which they [...] ­ed James Town. June 22. This is the first town that was [...] the English in North America. The June following. Newport failed for England, leaving with the president one [...] and four persons.

August22.] In August died Capt. Bartholomew Gosnold, th [...] projector of this settlement, and one of the council. The fol [...] winter James-Town was burnt.

During this time, the Plymouth company fitted out two ships [...] the command of Admiral Rawley Gilbert. They sailed for [...] Virginia on the 31st of May, with one hundred planters, and [...] George Popham for their president. They arrived in August [...] ­tled about nine or ten leagues to the southward of the mouth of [...] dahok river. A great part of the colony, however, disheartened [...] severity of the winter, returned to England in December, leaving [...] president, Capt. Popham, with only forty five men.

It was in the fall of this year that the famous Mr. Robinson, [...] part of his congregation, who afterwards settled at Plymouth in [...] England, removed from the north of England to Holland, to av [...] cruelties of persecution, and for the sake of enjoying "purity of [...] ship and liberty of conscience."

This year a small company of merchants at Dieppe and St. [...] founded Quebec or rather the colony which they sent, built [...] huts there, which did not take the form of a town until the [...] Lewis XIV.

1608.] Sagadahok colony suffered incredible hardships after th [...] [...] ­parture of their friends in December. In the depth of winter, [...] was extremely cold, their storehouse caught fire and was co [...] with most of their provisions and lodgings. Their misfortun [...] increased soon after, by the death of their president. Rawley [...] was appointed to succeed him.

Lord chief Justice Popham made every exertion to keep th [...] [...] [...]ny alive, by repeatedly sending them supplies. But the circumstance of his death, which happened this year, together with that of [...] ­dent Gilbert's being called to England to settle his affairs, [...] the colony, and they all returned with him to England.

The unfavorable reports which these first unfortunate ad [...] propagated respecting the country, prevented any further att [...] settle North Virginia for several years after.

[Page 113] 1609.] The London company, last year, sent Capt. Nelson, with two ships and one hundred and twenty persons, to James'-Town; and this year, Capt. John Smith, afterwards president, arrived on the coast of South Virginia, and by sailing up a number of the rivers, discovered the interiour country. In September, Capt. Newport arrived with seventy persons, which increased the colony to two hundred souls.

Mr. Robinson and his congregation, who had settled at Amsterdam, removed this year to Leyden; where they remained more than eleven years, till a part of them came over to New England.

The council for South Virginia, having resigned their old com­mission, * requested and obtained a new one; in consequence of which they appointed Sir Thomas West, Lord De la War, general of the colony; Sir Thomas Gates, his lieutenant; Sir George Somers, Ad­miral; Sir Thomas Dale, high marshal; Sir Ferdinand Wainman, gen­eral of the horse; and Capt. Newport, vice admiral.

June8.] In June Sir Thomas Gates, Admiral Newport, and Sir George somers, with seven ships, a ketch and a pinnace, having five hundred souls on board, men, women and children, sail­ed from Falmouth for South Virginia. July 24. In crossing the Ba­hama Gulf, on the 24th of July, the fleet was overtaken by a violent storm, and separated. Four days after, Sir George Somers r [...]n his vessel ashore on one of the Bermuda Islands, which, from this circumstance, have been called the Somer Islands. The people on board, one hundred and fifty in number, all got safe on shore; and there remained until the following May. The remainder of the fleet arrived at Virginia in August. The colony was now increased to five hundred men. Capt. Smith, then president, a little before the arrival of the fleet, had been very badly burnt by means of some pow­der which had accidentally caught fire. This unfortunate circum­stance, together with the opposition he met with from those who had lately arrived, induced him to leave the colony and return to England; which he accordingly did the last of September. Francis West, his successor in office, soon followed him, and George Piercy was elected president.

1610.] The year following, the South Virginia or London com­pany, sealed a patent to Lord De la War, constituting him Governor and Captain General of South Virginia. He soon after embarked for America with Capt. Argal and one hundred and fifty men, in three ships.

The unfortunate people, who, the year before, had been shipwreck­ed on the Bermuda Islands, had employed themselves during the winter and spring, under the direction of Sir Thomas Gates, Sir George Somers, and Admiral Newport, in building a sloop to transport themselves to the continent. They embarked for Virginia on the 10th of May, with about one hundred and fifty persons on board; leaving two of their men behind, who chose to stay; and landed at James'-Town on the [...]3d of the same month. Finding the colony, which at the time of Capt. Smith's departure, consisted of five hundred souls, now reduced to sixty, and those few in a distressed and wretched situation, they with one voice resolved to return to England; and for this pur­pose, on the 7th of June, the whole colony repaired on board their vessels, broke up the settlement, and sailed down the river on their way to their native country.

[Page 114] Fortunately, Lord De la War, who had embarked for James-Town the March before, met them the day after they sailed, and pers [...] them to return with him to James-Town, where they arrived and [...] ­ed the 10th of June. The government of the colony of right, de [...] ­ed upon Lord De la War. From this time we may date the es [...] settlement of Virginia. Its history from this period, will be [...] in its proper place.

As early as the year 1607 and 1608, Henry Hudson, an Englishman, under a commission from king James, in the employ of certain mer­chants, made several voyages for the discovery of a north west pas­sage to the E. Indies. In 1609▪ upon some misunderstanding, he [...] ­gaged in the Dutch service, in the prosecution of the same design, [...] on his return ranged along the sea coast of what has since been called New England, (which, three years before was granted by king James to his English subjects, the Plymouth Company) and entered Hudson's river, giving it his own name. He ascended this river in his bo [...] far as what has since been called Aurania or Albany. In 1613, the Dutch West India company, sent some persons to this river, to trade with the Indians; and as early as 1623, the Dutch had a trading house, on Connecticut river. In consequence of these discoveries and settle­ments, the Dutch claimed all the country extending from Caps C [...] to Cape Henlopena long the sea coast, and as far back into the country as any of the rivers within those limits extend. But their claim has been disputed. This extensive country, the Dutch called New N [...] ­lands, and in 1624 the States General granted a patent to sundry [...] ­chants for an exclusive trade on Hudson's river, who the [...] year, 1614. (1614) built a fort on the west side near Albany. [...] this time we may date the settlement of New-York, the history of which will be annexed to a description of the State.

Conception Bay, on the Island of Newfoundland, was settled in the year 1610, by about forty planters under governor John Guy, [...] whom king James had given a patent of incorporation.

Champlain, a Frenchman, had begun a settlement at Quebec 16th St. Croix, Mount Mansel, and Port Royal were settled about the same time. These settlements remained undisturbed till 1613, when the Virginians, hearing that the French had settled within their limits, sent Capt. Argal to dislodge them. For this purpose he sailed to S [...] ­adahock, took their forts at Mount Mansel, St. Croix and Port Roy­al, with their vessels, ordnance, cattle and provisions, and carried them to James-Town in Virginia. Quebec was left in possession of the French.

1614.] This year Capt John Smith with two ships and forty five men and boys, made a voyage to North Virginia, to make experiments upon a gold and copper mine. His orders were, to fish and trade [...] the natives, if he should fail in his expectations with regard [...] mine. To facilitate this business, he took with him Tantum, an [...] perhaps one that Capt. Weymouth carried to England in 1605. [...] April he reached the island Monahigan in latitude 48° 30′. [...] Capt. Smith was directed to stay and keep possession with ten men [...] the purpose of making a trial of the whaling business, but being disap­pointed in this, he built seven boats, in which thirty-seven men [...] a very successful fishing voyage. In the mean time the Captain [...] self with eight men only, in a small boat, coasted from Penobs [...] Sagadahok, Acocisco, Passataquack, Tragabizanda, now called [...] [Page 115] Ann, thence to Acomac, where he skirmished with some Indians; thence to Cape Cod, where he set his Indian, Tantum, ashore, and left him, and returned to Monahigan. In this voyage he found two French ships in the Bay of Massachusetts, who had come there six weeks before, and during that time, had been trading very advantage­ously with the Indians. It was conjectured that there were, at this time, three thousand Indians upon the Massachusetts Islands.

In July, Capt. Smith embarked for England in one of the vessels, leaving the other under the command of Capt. Thomas Hunt, to equip for a voyage to Spain. After Capt. Smith's departure, Hunt perfidi­ously allured twenty Indians (one of whom was Squanto, afterwards so serviceable to the English) to come on board his ship at Patuxit, and seven more at Nausit, and carried them to the island of Malaga▪ where he sold them for twenty pounds each, to be slaves for life. This con­duct, which fixes an indelible stigma upon the character of Hunt, ex­cited in the breasts of the Indians such an inveterate hatred of the English, as that, for many years after, all commercial intercourse with them was rendered exceedingly dangerous.

Capt. Smith arrived at London the last of August, where he drew a map of the country, and called it NEW-ENGLAND. From this time North Virginia assumed the name of New-England, and the name Vir­ginia was confined to the southern colony.

Between the years 1614 and 1620, several attempts were made by the Plymouth company to settle New-England, but by various means they were all rendered ineffectual. During this time, however, an ad­vantageous trade was carried on with the natives.

1617.] In the year 1617, Mr. Robinson and his congregation, influ­enced by several weighty reasons, meditated a removal to America. Various difficulties intervened to prevent the success of their designs until the years 1620, 1620. when a part of Mr. Robinson's congregation came over and settled at Plymouth. At this time commenced the settlement of New-England.

The particulars relating to the first emigrations to this northern part of America; the progress of its settlement, &c. will be given in the history of New-England, to which the reader is referred.

In order to preserve the chronological order in which the several colonies, now grown into independent states, were first settled, it will be necessary that I should just mention, 1621. that the next year after the settlement of Plymouth, Captain John Mason ob­tained of the Plymouth council a grant of a part of the present state of New-Hamshire. 1623. Two years after, under the authority of this grant, a small colony fixed down near the mouth of Pis­cataqua river. From this period we may date the settlement of NEW-HAMPSHIRE.

1627.] In 16 [...]7▪ a colony of Swedes and Finns came over and landed at Cape Henlopen; and afterwards purchased of the Indians the land from Cape Henlopen to the Falls of Delaware, on both sides the river, which they called New Swedeland Stream. On this river they built several forts, and made settlements.

1628.] On the 19th of March, 1628, the council for New-Eng­land sold to Sir Henry Roswell, and five others, a large tract of land, lying round Massachusetts Bay. The June following, Capt. John Endicot, with his wife and company, came over and settled at Naum­keag, [Page 116] now called Salem. * This was the first English settlement which was made in MASSACHUSETTS BAY. Plymouth, indeed, which is now included in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, was settled eight years before, but at this time it was a separate colony, under a distinct gov­ernment; and continued so, until the second charter of Massachusetts was granted by William and Mary in 1691; by which, Plymouth, the Province of Main and Sagadahok, were annexed to Massachusetts.

June13, 1633.] In the reign of Charles the first, Lord Baltimore, a Roman Catholick, applied for and obtained a grant of a tract of land upon Chesapeak Bay, about one hundred and forty miles long and one hundred and thirty broad. Soon after this, in consequence of the rigor of the laws of England against the Roman Catholicks, Lord Bal­timore, with a number of his persecuted brethren, came over and set­tled it, and in honor of queen Henrietta Maria, they called it MARY, LAND.

The first grant of Connecticut was made by Robert, Earl of Wa [...] ­wick, president of the council of Plymouth, to Lord Say and Seal, Mar. 19th 1631. 1635. 1636. to Lord Brook and others, in the year 1613. In con­sequence of several smaller grants made afterwards, by the Patentees to particular persons, Mr. Fenwick made a settle­ment at the mouth of Connecticut river, and called it Say­brook. About the same time (1636) a number of people from Massachusetts Bay came and began settlements at Hartford, Wethersfield and Windsor, on Connecticut river. Thus commenced the English settlement of CONNECTICUT.

Rhode Island was first settled in consequence of religious persecu­tion. Mr. Roger Williams, who was among those who came early over to Massachusetts, not agreeing with some of his brethren in sen­timent, was very unjustifiably banished the colony, and went with twelve others, 1635. his adherents, and settled at Providence in 1635 From this beginning arose the colony, now state of RHODE-ISLAND.

1664.] On the 20th of March, 1664, Charles the second granted to the Duke of York, what is now called NEW-JERSEY, then a part of a large tract of country by the name of New-Netherland. Some parts of New-Jersey were settled by the Dutch as early as about 1615.

1662.] In the year 1662, Charles the second granted to Edward Earl of Clarendon, and seven others, almost the whole territory of the three Southern States, North and South Carolina and Georgia. Two years after he granted a second charter, 1664. enlarging their boundaries. The proprietors, by virtue of authority vested in [Page 117] them by their charter, engaged Mr. Lo [...]ke to frame a system of laws for the government of their intended colony. Notwithstanding these preparations, no effectual settlement was made until the year 1669, 1669. (though one was attempted in 1667) when Govern­or Sayle came over with a colony and fixed on a neck of land between Ashley and Cooper Rivers. Thus commenced the settlement of CAROLINA, which then included the whole territory between the 29° and 36° 30′ North latitude, together with the Bahama Islands, lying between latitude 22° and 27° north.

1681.] The Royal charter for Pennsylvania was granted to William Penn on the 4th March 1681. The first colony came over the next year and settled under the proprietor. 1682. William Penn, who acted as Governor from October 1682, to August 1684. The first assembly in the province of Pennsylvania was held at Chest­er, on the 4th of December 1682. Thus William Penn, a Quaker, justly celebrated as a great and good man, had the honor of laying the foundation of the present populous and very flourishing STATE of PENNSYLVANIA.

The proprietary government in Carolina, was attended with so ma­ny inconveniences, and occasioned such violent dissentions among the settlers, that the Parliament of Great Britain was induced to take the province under their immediate care. The proprietors, (except Lord Granville) accepted of £. 22.500 sterling, from the crown, for the pro­perty and jurisdiction. This agreement was ratified by act of Parliament in 1729. 1729. A clause in this act reserved to Lord Granville his eighth share of the property and arrears of quit­rents, which continued legally vested in his family 'till the revolution in 1776. Lord Granville's share, made a part of the present state of North-Carolina. About the year 1729, the extensive territory belong­ing to the proprietors, was divided into North and South Carolina. They remained separate royal governments until they became indepen­dent States.

For the relief of poor indigent people of Great Britain and Ireland, and for the security of Carolina, a project was formed for planting a colony between the rivers Savannah and Alatamaha. Accordingly, application being made to King George the second: he issued letters patent, 1732. bearing date June 9th, 1732, for legally carrying into execution the benevolent plan. In honor of the king, who greatly encouraged the plan, they called the new province GEORGIA. Twenty one trustees were appointed to conduct the affairs relating to the settlement of the province. The November following, one hundred and fifteen persons, one of whom was general Oglethorp, embarked for Georgia, where they arrived: and landed at Yamacraw. In exploring the country, they found an elevated pleasant spot of ground on the bank of a navigable river, upon which they marked out a town, and from the Indian name of the river which passed by it, called it Savannah. From this period we may date the settlement of GEORGIA.

The country, now called Kentucky, was well known to the Indian traders, many years before its settlement. They gave a description of it to Lewis Evans, 1752. who published his first map of it as early as the year 1752. James Macbride, with some others, explor­ed this country in 1754. 1754. Col. Daniel Boon visited it in 1769.

[Page 118] 1773.] Four years after, Col. Boon and his family, with five other families, who were joined by forty men from Powle's valley, began the settlement of KENTUCKY, which is now one of the most grow­ing colonies, perhaps, in the world, and was erected into an indepen­dent state, by act of Congress, December 6th, 1790, and received into the Union, June 1st, 1792.

The tract of country called VERMONT▪ before the late war, was claimed both by New-York and New-Hampshire. When ho [...]ties commenced between Great-Britain and her Colonies, the inhabitants considering themselves as in a state of nature, as to civil government, and not within any legal jurisdiction, associated and formed for them­selves a constitution of government. Under this constitution, they have ever since continued to exercise all the powers of an indepen­dent State. Vermont was not admitted into union with the other states till March 4th 1791; yet we may venture to date her political existence as a separate government, 1777. from the year 1777, because since that time, Vermont has to all intents and purposes been sovereign and independent State. The first settlement in this [...] was made at Bennington as early as about 1764.

The extensive tract of country lying northwest of the Ohio River, within the limits of the United States, was erected into a separate [...] ­porary government, 1787. by an Ordinance of Congress passed the 13th of July, 1787.

Thus we have given a summary view of the first discoveries and progressive settlement of North America in their chronological order.

The following recapitulation will comprehend the whole in [...] view.

Names of places. When settled. By whom.
Quebec, 1608 By the French.
Virginia, June 10, 1610 By Lord De la War.
Newfoundland, June, 1610 By Governor John Guy.
New York, about 1614 By the Dutch.
New Jersey,
Plymouth, 1620 By part of Mr. Robinson's cong [...] ­gation.
New Hampshire, 1623 By a small English colony near the mouth of Piscataqua river.
Delaware, 1627 By the Swedes and Fins.
Pennsylvania,
Massachusetts Bay, 1628 By Capt. John Endicot and company.
Maryland, 1633 By Lord Baltimore, with a of Roman Catholics.
Connecticut, 1635 By Mr. Fenwick, at Saybrook, [...] the mouth of Connecticut river.
Rhode-Island, 1635 By Mr. Roger Williams and his per­secuted brethren.
New Jersey. 1664 Granted to the Duke of York [...] Charles II. and made a distinct government, and settled some time before this by the English.
South Carolina 1669 By Governor Sayle.
Pennsylvania, 1682 By William Penn, with a colony of Quakers.
North Carolina, about 1728 Erected into a separate government, settled before by the English.
Georgia, 1732 By General Oglethorpe.
Kentucky, 1773 By Col. Daniel Boon.
Vermont about 1764 By emigrants from Connecticut and other parts of New-England.
Territory N. W. of Ohio river. 1787 By the Ohio and other companies.

The above dates are from the periods, when the first permanent set­tlements were made.

NORTH AMERICA

BOUNDARIES AND EXTENT.

NORTH AMERICA comprehends all that part of the western continent which lies north of the isthmus of Darien, extending north and south from about the 10th degree north latitude, to the north pole; and east and west from the Atlantic to the Pacific Ocean, be­tween the 45th and 165th degrees of west longitude from London. Beyond the 70th degree N. Lat. few discoveries have been made. In July 1779, Capt. Cook proceeded as far as lat. 71°, when he came to a solid body of ice extending from continent to continent.

BAYS, SOUNDS, STRAITS AND ISLANDS. Of these (except those in the United States, which we shall describe under that head) we know little more than their names. Baffin's Bay, lying be­tween the 70th and 80th degrees N. Lat. is the largest and most north­ern, that has yet been discovered in N. America. It opens into the Atlantic ocean through Baffin's and Davis's Straits, between Cape Chidley, on the Labrador coast, and Cape Farewell. It communicates with Hudson's Bay to the south, through a cluster of islands. In this capacious bay or gulph, is James Island, the south point of which is called Cape Bedford; and the smaller islands of Waygate and Disko. Davis's Straits separate Greenland from the American continent, and are between Cape Walsingham, on James island, and South Bay in Greenland, where they are about 60 leagues broad, and extend from the 67th to the 71st degrees of lat. above Disko island. The most southern point of Greenland is called Cape Farewell.

Hudson's Bay took its name from Henry Hudson, who discovered it in 1610. It lies between 51 and 69 degrees of north latitude. The eastern boundary of the Bay is Terra de Labrador; the northern part has a straight coast, facing the bay, guarded with a line of isles innu­merable. A vast bay, called the Archiwinnipy Sea, lies within it, and opens into Hudson's bay▪ by means of gulph Hazard; through which the Beluga whales pass in great numbers. The entrance of the Bay, from the Atlantic ocean, after leaving▪ to the north, Cape Farewell and Davis's Straits, is between Resolution isles on the north, and Button's isles, on the Labrador coast, to the south, forming the eastern extremity of Hudson's straits.

The coasts are very high▪ rocky and rugged at top; in some places [Page 120] precipitous, but sometimes exhibit extensive beaches. The islands of Salisbury, Nottingham, and Digges are very lofty and naked: The depth of water in the middle of the Bay is 140 fathoms. From Cape Churchill to the south end of the bay, are regular soundings; [...] the shore, shallow, with muddy or sandy bottom. To the northward of Churchill, the soundings are irregular, the bottom rocky, and in some parts the rocks appear above the surface at low water.

James's Bay lies at the bottom, or most southern part of Hudson's Bay, with which it communicates, and divides New-Britain [...] South Wales. To the northwestward of Hudson's bay is an exten­sive chain of lakes, among which is Lake Menichlick, Lat. 61 [...] Long. 105° W. North of this, is Lake Dobount, to the northward of which lies the extensive country of the northern Indians. West of these lakes, between the latitudes of 60 and 66 degrees, after passing a large cluster of unnamed lakes, lies the lake or sea Arathapescow, whose southern shores are inhabited by the Arathapescow Indians. North of this, and near the Arctic circle, is Lake Edlande, around which live the Dog-ribbed Indians. Further north, is Buffaloe Lake, near which, is Copper Mine River, in lat. 72° N. and Long. 119° W. of Greenwich. The Copper Mine Indians inhabit this country.

Between Copper Mine River, (which according to Mr. Herne [...] ­ties into the Northern sea, where the tide rises 12 or 14 feet, and which in its whole course is encumbered with shoals and falls) and the North west coast of America, is an extensive tract of unexplored country. As you descend from north to south on the western coast of America, [...] south of the Arctic circle, you come to Cape Prince of Wales, oppo­site East Cape on the eastern Continent; and here the two Continent approach nearest to each other. Proceeding southward you pass Nort [...] Sound, Cape Stephen's, Shoalness, Bristol Bay, Prince William's Sound, Cook's River, Admiralty Bay and Port Mulgrave, No [...] Sound. &c. From Nootka Sound proceeding south, you pass the unexplored country of New Albion, thence to California, and New Mexico.

DIVISIONS OF NORTH AMERICA.

THE vast tract of country, bounded west by the Pacific Ocean, south and east by California, New Mexico and Louisiana—the United States, Canada and the Atlantic ocean, and extending as far north [...] the country is habitable (a few scattered English, French, and some other European settlements excepted) is inhabited wholly by various nations and tribes of Indians. The Indians, also possess large tracts of country within the Spanish American, and British dominions. Those part [...] North America, not inhabited by Indians, belong (if we incl [...] Greenland) to Denmark, Great Britain, the American States, and Spain. Spain claims East and West Florida, and all west of the Missisippi, and south of the northern boundaries of Louisiana, North Mexico and California. Great Britain, claims all the country inhab­ited by Europeans, lying north and east of the United States, ex [...] Greenland, which belongs to Denmark. The remaining part is [...] territory of the Fifteen United States. The particular provinces [...] States, are exhibited in the following Table.

[Page 121]

TABLE
Belonging to Countries, Provinces and States. Number of Inhabitants. Chief Towns.
Denin. Greenland 10,000 New Herrnhut
British Provinces. New Britain unknown  
Upper Canada 20,000 Kingston, Detroit, Niagara
Lower Canada Cape Breton 1. 130,000 Quebec, Montreal
1,000 Sidney, Louisburgh
New Brunswick Nova Scotia 35,000 Fredericktown
Nova Scotia Halifax
Nova Scotia St. John's Isl. in 1783 5,000 Charlottetown
Newfoundland Island 7,000 Placentia, St. John's
United States of America. Vermont 85,539 Windsor, Rutland
New Hampshire 141,885 Portsmouth, Concord
Massachusetts District of Maine 378,787 Boston, Salem, Newbury Port
Massachusetts District of Maine 96,540 Portland, Hallowell
Rhode Island 68,825 Newport, Providence
Connecticut 237,946 New Haven, Hartford
New York 340,120 New York, Albany
New Jersey 184,139 Trenton, Burling. Brunswick
Pennsylvania 434,373 Philadelphia, Lancaster
Delaware 59,094 Dover, Wilmington, Newcastle
Maryland 319,728 Annapolis, Baltimore
Virginia 747,610 Richmond, Petersb. Norsolk
Kentucky 73,677 Lexington
North Carolina 393,751 Newbern, Edenton▪ Halifax
South Carolina 249,073 Charleston, Columbia
Georgia 82,548 Savannah, Augusta
Territory S. of Ohio 35,691 Abingdon
Territory N. W. of Ohio   Marietta
Span. Provin. East Florida   Augustine
West Florida   Pensacola
Louisiana   New Orleans
New Mexico   St. Fee
California   St. Juan
Mexico, or New Spain   Mexico

GREENLAND.

THIS extensive country properly belongs to neither of the two con­tinents; unless, as seems probable, it be united to America to the northward of Davis' Straits. As it has commonly been described as belonging to Europe, we shall give Guthrie's account of it in our description of that quarter of the Globe. From its contiguity to, and probable union with the American continent, however, it ap­pears most proper to rank it among the countries of the western con­tinent [...] and we have accordingly given it a place in the table of divi­sions of N. America, and shall here give a new description of it from the best authorities extant.

[Page 122] BOUNDARIES AND EXTENT. Greenland is bounded by Davis' Straits which di­vide it from America, on the west; to the north­ward, it is not limited, except by some unknown ocean, or by the North pole; east, it has the Icy sea, and a strait which separate it from Iceland; southeast, it is washed by the Atlantick ocean; south it terminates in a point called Cape Farewell, in latitude 59 degrees north. From Cape Farewell, northeasterly, along the southeast sh [...] the coast has been discovered as far as 80 degrees north, and along the western shore, up Davis' Straits, as far as the 78th degree.

Whether Greenland be an island, has not yet been decided, as [...] ship has yet penetrated higher than the 78th degree, on account of the ice. That it is not an island, but a part of the American continent, i [...] rendered probable, 1 ft. Because Davis' Straits. * or rather Bassin's Bay, grows narrower and narrower towards the 78th degree north 2d. Because the coast, which in other places is very high towards the sea, grows lower and lower northward. 3d. The tide, which at Capt. Farewell, and as far up as Cockin's Sound, in latitude 65°, rises [...] feet at the new and full moon, decreases to the northward of Disko, so that in latitude 70° it rises little more than 8 feet, and p [...] ­ably continues to diminish, till there is no tide at all. § To the a­bove may be added the relation of the Greenlanders, (which however cannot be much depended on) viz. that the strait contracts itself [...] narrow at last, that they can go on the ice so near to the other side a [...] to be able to call to the inhabitants, and that they can strike a fish [...] both sides at once; but that there runs such a strong current from the north into the strait, that they cannot pass it.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY. The western coast, which is washed by Davis' Straits is high, rocky, barren land, which rears its [...] in most places, close to the sea, in lofty mountains and inaccessi­able cliffs, and meets the mariner's eye 40 leagues at sea. All these, except the excessively steep and slippery rocks, are constantly cov­ered with ice and snow, which has also, in length of time, filled all the elevated plains, and many valleys, and probably increases yearly. Those rocks and cliffs, which are bare of snow, look, at a distance, of a dark brown, and quite naked as to any kind of growth; but by a nearer inspection, they are found to be interspersed with many [...] of variegated colors of stone, here and there spread over with a little earth and turf.

POPULATION. Most of the Greenlanders live to the southward of the [...] degree of N. latitude, or as the inhabitats are wont to say, i [...] the south; but no Europeans live there, so that these parts are [...] [...] known. The European colonies have fixed themselves to the northward of latitude 62°.

Formerly the western part of Greenland was inhabited by [...] thousands of Indians; but the small pox, in 1733, almost depopulated this country, which is the finest part of Greenland.

A factor, who lived many years in the country, and whose accuracy, [...] far as the subject will admit, may be depended on, found in the compass of 40 leagues, which was the circle of his dealings, 957 souls; [Page 123] constant residents, besides occasional visitors. This part of Green­land is the most populous, except Disko bay, (which is the best place for trade) and the southern parts. In other places, a person may travel 60 miles and not meet with a single person. Suppose however, that the country is inhabited for the space of 400 leagues, and that there are 1000 souls, for every 40 leagues, the amount would be 10,000. The above mentioned factor, thinks that there are not more than 7000, because there are so many desert places. He asserts indeed that the native Greenland­ers, in 1730, amounted to 30,000; and when he made his first calcu­lation in 1746, there were still 20,000. Consequently since that time their number has diminished at least one half.

CORIOSITIES. The astonishing mountains of ice in this country may well be reckoned among its greatest curiosities. Twelve leagues from the colony at Good-hope, lies the famous Ice glance, called in some charts, Eis-blink. It is a large high field of ice, whose glance in the air may be seen for many leagues at sea, resembling the Aurora Borea­lis. The mouth of an inlet, 4 leagues north of the colony, is blocked up in such a manner, by many large pieces of ice driven out by the ebb, that it forms a phenomenon like an arched ice bridge, stretching from land to land, 8 leagues in length, and two in breadth. The openings or arches of it are computed to be from 14 to 40 yards high. People might pass through them in boats, if they were not afraid of the broken fragments of ice that often fall from the top and sides of the arches. Places are found here, where Greenland houses once stood, which proves that the mouth of this harbour was once open.

Nothing can exhibit a more dreadful, and at the same time a more dazzling appearance, than those prodigious masses of ice that surround the whole coast in various forms, reflecting a multitude of colours from the sun beams, and calling to mind the enchanting scenes of romance. Such prospects they yield in calm weather, but when the wind begins to blow, and the waves to rise in vast billows▪ the violent shocks of those pieces of ice, dashing against one another, fill the mind with horror.

The ice mountains are pieces of ice floating in the sea, of an amaz­ing size, and of very curious forms: Some have the appearance of a church or castle, with square or pointed turrets; others, of a ship un­der sail; and people have often given themselves fruitless toil to go on board and pilot the imaginary ship into harbour; others look like large islands, with plains, allies and hills, which often rear their heads 200 yards above the level of the sea: In Disko Bay, on a ground which the whale fishers say is 300 fathoms deep, several such ice mountains have stood fast for many years, one of which they call the city Harlem, and another Amsterdam. This ice for the most part, is very hard, clear, and transparent as glass, of a pale green colour, and some pieces sky blue—but if you melt it and let it freeze again it be­comes white.

TIDES, SPRINGS AND RIVERS. The tide flows from south to north, and rises in common 3 fathoms in the south; two, at Good Hope, and one at Disko, and continues to decrease as you proceed north. It is remarkable that the wells and springs in the country rise and fall, in exact conformity to the waxing and waning of the moon, or the ebbing and flowing of the tides. In winter▪ especially, when all is covered over with ice and snow, new and brisk fountains of water [Page 124] rise at spring tides, and disappear again in places where there is com­monly no water, and which are elevated far above the level of the [...]

This country, in general, is not so well supplied with water, as [...] hilly countries in warmer regions. Most of the springs which [...] clear and wholesome water, have no other supply than the melted [...] ­imbibed snow water. In the valleys, large ponds are thinly [...] ­spersed, which are fed by the ice and snow distilling from the moun­tains. The little streams from the hills, called salmon elves, are [...] so considerable as the hill waters, in more southern latitudes.

The country does not admit of large rivers. The valleys are [...] long, for the mountains presently shoot up aloft, and are covered [...] perpetual ice, which melts very little, and of course affords the [...] but a scanty supply. Many springs are therefore dry in summer▪ and the winter are arrested by the frost. Men and beasts would then [...] of thirst, if a wise providence had not ordered; that in the [...] winter, rains and thaws sometimes happen, when the filtrated [...] water gathers in pools under the ice, and is thence taken by the in­habitants.

AIR AND SEASONS. As this country is covered, in most [...] with everlasting ice and snow, it is easy to imagine that it must extremely cold. In those places where the inhabitants enjoy the [...] of the sun for an hour or two in a day in winter, the cold is tolerable though even there strong liquors will freeze, when out of the [...] rooms. But where the sun entirely forsakes the horizon, while [...] are drinking tea, the emptied cup will freeze on the table. Mr. Paul [...] in his Journal of January 7th, 1738, records the following effects [...] cold at Disko: "The ice and hoar frost reaches through the chimney to the stove's mouth, without being thawed by the fire in the day [...] Over the chimney is an arch of frost with small holes, through [...] the smoke discharges itself. The door and walls are as if they [...] plastered over with frost, and, which is scarcely credible, beds are [...] ­en frozen to the bedsted. The linen is frozen to the drawers. [...] [...] ­er eider-down-bed and the pillows are quite stiff with frost [...] inch thick, from the breath. The flesh barrels must be hewn in [...] to get out the meat."

The most severe cold commences in January, and is so piercing [...] February and March, that the stones split, and the sea reeks like [...] oven, especially in the bays. When this frost smoke, as it is called [...] wasted into the colder atmosphere, if freezes into little icy parti [...] which are driven by the wind, and create such a keen cold on the [...] that one can scarcely leave the house without being frozen.

We may fix the limits of their summer from the beginning of [...] to the end of September; for during these five months the native [...] camp in tents. The ground however is not thawed till June, and [...] only on the surface, and till then, it does not entirely leave off [...] ­ing. In August it begins to snow again, but the permanent snow [...] not fall till October. In the long summer days, the weather is so [...] as to oblige the inhabitants to throw off their warm garments. [...] heat, in a clear sunshine upon the open sea, has been known to [...] great, as to melt the pitch on the sides of a ship.

In summer there is no night in this country. Beyond the 66th de­gree, in the longest days, the sun does not set; and at Good-Hope latitude 64°, the sun does not set till to minutes after to 10 o'clock, [...] rises again 50 minutes after one o'clock. The winter days are [...]

[Page 125] PRODUCTIONS, MINER­AL AND VEGETABLE. The amiantus and asbestos, or stone flax, is found in plenty in the hills of this country. There are also quartzes and crystals in pretty large pieces, coarse marble of all colours, iron stone and ore, and a soft stone call­ed by some, French chalk, by others bastard marble, out of which the inhabitants make all their vessels. When rubbed with oil, it assumes a beautiful marble smoothness, and grows more firm and solid by being used over the fire.

Among the vegetables of this cold country, are sorrel of various sorts, angelica, wild tansey, scurvy grass, in great quantities, wild rose­mary, dandelions in plenty, and various sorts of grass. Whortle-ber­ries and cranberries grow here. Europeans have sown barley and oats, which grow as high and thrifty as in warmer climates, but seldom ad­vance so far as to ear, and never, even in the warmest places, to ma­turity, because the frosty nights begin too soon.

ANIMALS. Unfruitful as this country is, it affords food for some, though but few kinds of beasts, which furnish the natives with food and raiment. Of the wild game, are white hares, rein deer, foxes, and white bears, who are fierce and mischievous. The Greenlanders have no tame animals but a species of dogs, which resemble wolves.

The Seal of Greenland, is a quadruped, and amphibious. There are several sorts of them, but they are alike in having a tough hairy skin, like the land animals, except that the hair is thick, short and smooth. They have two short feet before, standing downwards, for the conven­iency of rowing, and behind they have also two standing outwards for steering, one on each side of the tail. They have five toes on their feet, each consisting of four joints, and terminating in a long nail or claw, with which they climb the ice or rocks. The hinder feet are webbed like those of a goose, so that in swimming they spread them like a fan. The water is their proper element, and fish their food. Their flesh affords the inhabitants a nourishing food, and their skins an excellent warm covering.

RELIGION. The first missionaries among the Greenlanders, enter­tained a doubt whether they had any conception of a Divine Being, as they had no word in their language by which to designate him. When they were asked who made the heaven and earth and all visible things? their answer was—"We know not; or, we don't know him; or▪ it must have been some mighty person: or, things always have been as they are, and will always remain so." But when they understood their lan­guage better, they found they had some vague notions concerning the soul, and spirits; and were solicitous about the state after death. It was evident also that they had some faint conceptions of a Divine Being.

They believe in the doctrine of the transmigration of souls—that the soul is a spiritual essence, quite different from the body—that it needs no corporeal nourishment—that it survives the body, and lives in a future better state, which they believe will never end. But they have very different ideas of this state. Many place their Elysium in the abysses of the ocean, or the bowels of the earth, and think the deep cavities of the rocks are the avenues leading to it. There dwells Torngarsuck * and his mother; there a joyous summer is perpetual, and a shining sun is obscured by no night; there is the limpid stream, and [Page 126] abundance of sowls, fishes, rein deer and their beloved seals, and th [...] are all to be caught without toil, may they are even found in a [...] kettle boiling alive. But to those delightful seats none must approach but those who have been dextrous and diligent at their work, (for [...] their grand idea of virtue) that have performed great exploits, [...] have mastered many whales and seals, have undergone great hard [...] have been drowned in the sea or died in childbed. The disemb [...] spirit does not enter dancing into the Elysian fields, but must spend [...] whole days, some say longer, in sliding down a rugged rock, which i [...] thereby smeared with blood and gore. Those unfortunate souls which are obliged to perform this rough journey in the cold winter, or i [...] boisterous weather, are peculiar objects of their pity, because they [...] be easily destroyed on the road, which destruction they call the [...] death, and describe it as a perfect extinction, and this, to them, is the [...] dreadful consideration. Therefore during these five days or more, [...] surviving relations must abstain from certain meats, and from all [...] work. (except the necessary fishing) that the soul may not be dist [...] or perish in its perilous passage. From all which, it is plain that [...] Greenlanders, stupid as they have been represented, have an idea [...] the good will be rewarded—and the bad punished—and that they conceive a horror at the thoughts of the entire annihilation of [...] soul.

Others have their paradise among the celestial bodies, and they imag­ine their flight thither so easy and rapid, that the soul rests the very [...] evening in the mansion of the moon, who was a Greenlander, and [...] it can dance and play at ball with the rest of the souls; for they [...] the northern lights to be the dance of sportive souls. The souls in [...] paradise, are placed in tents round a vast take abounding with fish [...] fowl. When this lake overflows, it rains on the earth, but should [...] ­dam once break, there would be a general deluge.

The wiser Greenlanders, who consider the soul as a spiritual [...] ­terial essence, laugh at all this, and say, if there should be such a ma­terial, luxuriant paradise, where souls could entertain themselves [...] hunting, still it can only endure for a time. Afterwards the souls [...] certainly be conveyed to the peaceful mansions. But they know [...] what their food or employment will be. On the other hand, they [...] their hell in the subterraneous regions, which are devoid of light [...] heat, and filled with perpetual terror and anxiety. This last [...] people lead a regular life, and refrain from every thing they think [...] evil.

HISTORY. West Greenland was first peopled by Europeans [...] eighth century. At that time a company of Icelanders, headed by [...] Ericke Rande, were by accident driven on the coast. On his [...] he represented the country in such a favourable light, that some [...] ­ies again followed him thither, where they soon became a [...] colony, and bestowed on their new habitation the name of [...] land, or Greenland, on account of its verdant appearance. This [...] was converted to christianity by a missionary from Norway, [...] thither by the celebrated Olaf, the first Norwegian monarch [...] embraced the true religion. The Greenland settlement continues increase and thrive under his protection; and in a little time the [...] ­try was provided with many towns, churches, convents, bishops, [...] under the jurisdiction of the archbishop of Drontheim. A co [...] ­able [Page 127] commerce was carried on between Greenland and Norway; and a regular intercourse maintained between the two countries till the year 1406, when the last bishop was sent over. From that time all correspondence was cut off, and all knowledge of Greenland has been buried in oblivion.

This strange and abrupt cessation of all trade and intercourse has been attributed to various causes; but the most probable is the following. The colony, from its first settlement, had been harassed by the natives, a barbarous and savage people; agreeing in customs, garb, and appearance, with the Esquimaux found about Hudson's Bay. This nation, called Schrellings, at length prevailed against the Iceland settlers who inhabited the western district, and exterminated them in the 14th century: insomuch that when their brethren of the eastern district came to their assistance, they found nothing alive but some cat­tle and [...]ocks of sheep running wild about the country. Perhaps they themselves afterwards experienced the same fate, and were totally de­stroyed by these Schrellings, whose descendants still inhabit the west­ern parts of Greenland, and from tradition confirm this conjecture. They affirm that the houses and villages, whose ruins still appear, were inhabited by a nation of strangers whom their ancestors destroyed. There are reasons, however, for believing that there may be still some descendants of the ancient Iceland colony remaining in the eastern district, though they cannot be visited by land, on account of the stu­pendous mountains, perpetually covered with snow, which divide the two parts of Greenland; while they have been rendered inaccessible by sea, by the vast quantity of ice driven from Spitzbergen, or east Greenland. One would imagine that there must have been some considerable alteration in the northern parts of the world since the 15th century▪ so that the coast of Greenland is now become almost totally inaccessible, though formerly visited with very little difficulty. It is also natural to ask, by what means the people of the eastern colony surmounted the above-mentioned obstacles when they went to the as­sistance of their western friends; how they returned to their own country: and in what manner historians learned the success of their expedition? Concerning all this we have very little satisfactory information. All that can be learned from the most authentic re­cords is, that Greenland was divided into two districts, called West Bygd and East Bygd: that the western division contained four parishes and 100 villages: that the eastern district was still more flourishing, as being nearer to Iceland, sooner settled, and more frequented by shipping from Norway. There are also many accounts, though most of them romantic and slightly attested, which render it probable that part of the eastern colony still subsists, who, at some time or other, may have given the imperfect relation above mentioned. This colony, in ancient times, certainly comprehended twelve extensive parishes, one hundred and ninety villages; a bishop's see, and two monaste­ries. The present inhabitants of the western district are entirely ig­norant of this part, from which they are divided by rocks, mountains, and deserts, and still more effectually by their apprehension: for they believe the eastern Greenlanders to be a cruel, barbarous nation, that destroy and eat all strangers who fall into their hands. About a cen­tury after all intercourse between Norway and Greenland had ceased, several ships were sent successively by the kings of Denmark, in order [Page 128] to discover the eastern district; but all of them miscarried. Among [...] adventurers, Mogens Heinson, after having surmounted many di [...] ­ties and dangers, got sight of the land, which, however he could [...] ap­proach. At his return, he pretended that the ship was arrested in [...] middle of her course, by certain rocks of loadstone at the bottom of sea. The same year, 1576, in which this attempt was made, ha [...] rendered remarkable by the voyage of Captain Martin Frobisher▪ upon the same errand by Queen Elizabeth. He likewise [...] the land; but could not reach it, and therefore returned to Eng [...] yet not before he had sailed sixty leagues in the strait, which [...] ­tains his name, and landed on several islands, where he had some [...] ­munication with the natives. He had likewise taken possession [...] country in the name of Queen Elizabeth; and brought away [...] pieces of heavy black stone, from which the refiners of London ex [...] ­ed a certain proportion of gold. In the ensuing spring, he under [...] second voyage at the head of a small squadron, equipped at the ex [...] of the publick; entered the straits a second time; discovered up [...] [...] island a gold and silver mine; bestowed names on different bays, [...] ­ands and headlands; and brought away a lading of ore, together [...] two natives, a male and a female, whom the English Kidnapped.

Such was the success of this voyage, that another armament was [...] ­ted out under the auspices of Admiral Frobisher, consisting of 15 [...] including a considerable number of soldiers, miners, smelters, car [...] ­ters, and bakers, to remain all winter near the mines in a wooden [...] the different pieces of which they carried out in their transported. They met with boisterous weather, impenetrable fogs, and violent [...] ­rents upon the coast of Greenland, which retarded their operat [...] until the season was far advanced. Part of their wooden fort was [...] at sea; and they had neither provision nor fuel sufficient for the [...] ­ter. The admiral therefore determined to return with as much [...] he could procure: of this they obtained large quantities out [...] new mine, to which they gave the name of the Countess of [...] They likewise built an house of stone and lime, provided with ov [...] and here, with a view to conciliate the affection of the natives, [...] left a quantity of small morrice-bells, knives, beads, looking-gl [...] leaden pictures, and other toys, together with several loaves of [...] They buried the timber of the fort where it could be easily [...] next year; and sowed corn, peas, and other grain, by way of [...] ­iment, to know what the country would produce. Having taken [...] precautions, they sailed from thence in the beginning of September [...] and after a month's stormy passage, arrived in England: but this [...] ­ble design was never prosecuted.

Christian IV. king of Denmark, being desirous of discovering [...] old Greenland settlement, sent three ships thither, under the [...] ­mand of Captain Godske Lindenow; who is said to have reach [...] east coast of Greenland, where he traded with the savage inhabit [...] such as they are still found in the western district, but saw no [...] a civilized people. Had he actually landed in the eastern [...] he must have perceived some remains of the ancient colony, [...] the ruins of their convents and villages. Lindenow kidnapped [...] the natives, who were conveyed to Copenhagen; and the same [...] fraud * was practised by other two ships which sailed into [...] [Page 129] Straits, where they discovered divers fine harbours and delightful meadows covered with verdure. In some places they are said to have found a considerable quantity of ore, every hundred pounds of which yielded twenty six ounces of silver. The same Admiral Lin­denow, made another voyage to the coast of Greenland in the year 1606, directing his course to the westward of Cape Farewell. He coasted along the straits of Davis; and having made some observa­tions on the face of the country, the harbours and islands, returned to Denmark. Carsten Richards, being detached with two ships on the same discovery, descried the high land on the eastern side of Green­land; but was hindered by the ice from approaching the shore.

Other expeditions of the same nature have been planned and execut­ed with the same bad success, under the auspices of a Danish compa­ny of merchants. Two ships returned from the western part of Green­land loaded with a kind of yellow sand, supposed to contain a large pro­portion of gold. This being assayed by the goldsmiths of Copenhagen, was condemned as useless, and thrown overboard: but from a small quantity of this sand, which was reserved as a curiosity, an expert chem­ist afterwards extracted a quantity of pure gold. The captain, who brought home this adventure, was so chagrined at his disappointment, that he died of grief, without having left any directions concerning the place where the sand had been discovered. In the year 1654, Hen­ry Moller, a rich Dane, equipped a vessel under the command of Da­vid de Nelles, who sailed to the west coast of Greenland, from which he carried off three women of the country. Other efforts have been made, under the efforts of the Danish king, for the discovery and re­covery of the old Iceland colony in Greenland: but all of them mis­carried, and people began to look upon such expeditions as wild and chimerical. At length the Greenland company at Bergen in Norway, transported a colony to the western coast, about the 64th degree of latitude, and these Norwegians sailed in the year 1712, accompanied by the Reverend Hans Egede, to whose care, ability, and precision, we owe the best and most authentic account of modern Greenland. This gentleman endeavoured to reach the eastern district, by coasting southwards, and advanced as far as the States Promontory: but the [Page 130] season of the year, and continual storms, obliged him to return; [...] as he could not even find the Strait of Frobisher, he concluded the no such place ever existed. In the year 1724, a ship, being equip [...] by the company, sailed on this discovery, with a view to land on [...] east side opposite to Iceland; but the vast shoals of ice, which barri [...] ­ed that part of the coast, rendered this scheme impracticable. [...] Danish majesty, in the year 1728, caused horses to be transported, [...] Greenland, in hopes that the settlers might, by their means, travel [...] land to the eastern district; but the icy mountains were found impossi­ble. Finally, lieutenant Richards, in a ship which had wintered [...] the new Danish colony, attempted, in his return to Denmark, to [...] on the eastern shore; [...]ut all his endeavours proved abortive.

Mr. Egede is of opinion, that the only practicable method of [...] ­ing, that part of the country, will be to coast north-about in small [...] ­sels, between the great flakes of ice and the shore; as the Greenland­ers have declared, that the currents continually issuing from the [...] and inlets, and running south-west wards along the shore, hinder [...] ice from adhering to the land; so that there is always a channel [...] through which vessels of small burden might pass, especially if [...] were built at suitable distances on the shore, for the conveni [...] and direction of the adventures.

BRITISH AMERICA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.

UNDER the general name of British America, we comprehend [...] vast and unknown extent of country, bounded south, by the Unit­ed States of America, and the Atlantic ocean; east, by the same [...] and Davis's Straits, which divide it from Greenland; extending [...] to the northern limits of the Hudson's bay charter; and westward [...] an unknown extent—Lying between 42° 30′ and 70° north latit [...] and between 50° and 105° W. Lon. from Greenwich; and between 25° E. and 30° W. Lon. from Philadelphia.

DIVISIONS.] British America is divided into four Provinces, [...] 1. Upper Canada; 2. Lower Canada, to which are annexed New Britain, or the country lying round Hudson's Bay, and the Island of Cape Breton; 3. New Brunswick; 4. Nova Scotia, to which is [...] nexed the island of St. John's Besides these there is the island of Newfoundland, which is governed by the admiral for the time [...] and two lieutenant governors, who reside at Placentia and St. John's. The troops stationed at Newfoundland, however, are subject to the orders of the Governor General of the four British Provinces.

NEW BRITAIN.

THE country lying round Hudson's Bay, or the country of [...] quimaux, comprehending Labrador, New North and South [...] has obtained the general name of NEW BRITAIN, and is attach [...] the government of Lower Canada. A superintendant of trade [...] pointed by the Governor General of the four British Provinces [...] responsible to him, resides at Labrador.

RIVERS.] The principal rivers which water this country, [...] Wager, Monk, Seal, Pockerekesko, Churchill, Nelson, Hayes, [...] ­ [...]ern Albany and Moose rivers, all which empty into Hudson's and [...] [Page 131] Bay, from the west. The mouths of all the rivers are filled with shoals, except Churchill's, in which the largest ships may lie; but ten miles higher, the channel is obstructed by sand banks. All the rivers as far as they have been explored, are full of rapids and cataracts, from 10 to 60 feet perpendicular. Down these rivers the Indian traders find a quick passage; but their return is a labour of many months.

FACE OF THE COUN­TRY, SOIL, &c.} As far inland as the Hudson Bay com­pany have settlements, which is 600 miles to the west of fort Churchill, at a place called Hudson House, Lat. 53°, Lon. 106° 27 W. from London, is flat country: nor is it known how far to the eastward, the great chain seen by navigators from the Pacific Ocean, branches off. From Moose river, or the bottom of the Bay, to Cape Churchill, the land is flat, marshy and wooded with pines, birch, larch and willows. From Cape Churchill, to Wager's river, the coasts are high and rocky to the very sea, and woodless ex­cept the mouths of Pockerekesko and Seal rivers. The hills on their back are naked, nor are there any trees for a great distance inland.

The eastern coast is barren, past the efforts of cultivation. The surface is every where uneven, and covered with masses of stone of an amazing size. It is a country of fruitless vallies and frightful mountains, some of an astonishing height. The vallies are full of lakes, formed not from springs, but rain and snow, so chilly as to be product­ive of a few small trout only. The mountains have here and there a blighted shrub, or a little moss. The vallies are full of crooked, stant­ed trees, pines, fir, birch, and cedars, or rather a species of the Juni­per. In Lat. 60°, on this coast, vegetation ceases. The whole shore, like that on the west, is faced with islands at some distance from lane.

INHABITANTS, CUSTOMS, &c.] The inhabitants among the moun­tains are Indians; along the coasts, Esquimaux. The dogs of the former are very small; of the latter large, and headed like a fox. Notwithstanding they have rein deer, they never train them for the sledge, but apply their dogs to that use. Walruses visit a place called Nuchvunk, in lat. 60°▪ during winter; from thence the natives purchase the teeth, with which they head their darts.

The laudable zeal of the Moravian clergy induced them, in the year 1752, to send missionaries from Greenland to this country. They fix­ed on Nesbit's harbour for their settlement; but of the first party, some of them were killed, and the others driven away. In 1764, under the protection of the British government, another attempt was made. The missionaries were well received by the Esquimaux, and the mission goes on with success.

CLIMATE.] The climate, even about Haye's river, in only lat. 57°, is, during winter, excessively cold. The snows begin to fall in October, and continue falling by intervals the whole winter; and, when the frost is most rigorous, in form of the finest land. The ice on the riv­ers is eight feet thick. Port wine freezes into a solid mass; brandy coagulates. The very breath falls on the blankets of the beds in the form of a hoar frost, and the bed clothes often are found frozen to the wall. The sun rises, in the shortest day, five minutes past nine, and sets five minutes before three. In the longest day the sun rises at three, and sets about nine. The ice begins to disappear in May, and h [...]t weather commences about the middle of June, which at times is so violent as to scorch the faces of the hunters. Thunder is not frequent, but very violent. But there must be a great difference of heat and cold [Page 132] in this vast extent, which reaches from lat. 50. 40, to lat. 63 north. During winter the firmament is not without its beauties. Moc [...] [...] halos are not unfrequent; they are very bright, and richly tinged [...] all the colours of the rainbow. The sun rises and sets with a [...] cone of yellowish light. The night is enlivened with the Aurora [...] realis, which spreads a thousand different lights and colours over [...] whole concave of the sky, not to be defaced even by the splendo [...] [...] the full moon; and the stars are of a fiery redness.

ANIMALS.] The animals of these countries are, the moose [...] stags, rein deer, bears, tygers, buffaloes, wolves, foxes, beavert, [...] lynxcs, martins, squirrels, ermines, wild cats, and hares. The rein [...] pass in vast herds towards the north in October, seeking the ex [...] cold. The male polar bears rove out at sea, on the floating ice, [...] of the winter, and till June; the females lie concealed in the [...] or beneath the banks of rivers, till March, when they come [...] with their twin cubs, and bend their course to the sea in search of the consorts. Several are killed in their passage; and those that wounded show vast fury, roar hideously, and bite and throw up [...] air even their own progeny. The females and the young, wh [...] interrupted, continue their way to the sea. In June the males [...] to shore, and by August are joined by their consorts, with their [...] by that time of a considerable size. The feathered kinds are, [...] bustards, ducks, growse, and all manner of wild fowls. [...] multitudes of birds retire to this remote country, to Labrad [...] Newfoundland, from places more remotely south, perhaps fr [...] Antilles; and some even of the most delicate little species. [...] them, with numbers of aquatic fowls, are seen returning south [...] with their young broods to more favourable climates. The fava [...] some respects regulate their months by the appearance of birds; [...] have their goose month, from the vernal appearance of geese, fr [...] south. All the growse kind, ravens, cinereous crows, titmouse, [...] Lapland finch, brave the severest winter: and several of the [...] and owls seek shelter in the woods. Of fish, there are whales, [...] seals, codfish, and a white fish, preferable to herrings; and in [...] rivers and fresh waters, pike, perch carp, and trout.

All the quadrupeds of these countries are clothed with a close, [...] warm fur. In summer there is here, as in other places, a vari [...] [...] the colours of the several animals; when that season is over, [...] holds only for three months, they all assume the livery of winter, [...] every sort of beasts, and most of their fowls, are of the colour of [...] snow; every thing animate and inanimate is white. This is [...] [...] prising phenomenon. But what is yet more surprising, and what is indeed one of the most striking things, that draw the most inatt [...] to an admiration of the wisdom and goodness of Providence, is [...] the dogs and cats from Britain that have been carried into Hu [...] Bay, on the approach of winter, have entirely changed their [...] ­ [...]nce, and acquired a much longer, softer, and thicker coat of ha [...] they had originally.

DISCOVERY AND COMMERCE.} The knowledge of these northern [...] countries was owing to a project sta [...] England for the discovery of a north west passage to China [...] East Indies, as early as the year 1576. Since then it has be [...] [...] ­quently dropped and as often revived, but never yet compleated [...] from the late voyages of discovery it seems probable, that no pr [...] [Page 133] passage ever can be found. Frobisher discovered the Main of New Britain, or Terra de Labrador, and those straits to which he has given his name. In 1585, John Davis failed from Portsmouth, and viewed that and the more northern coasts, but he seems never to have entered the bay. Hudson made three voyages on the same adventure, the first in 1607, the second in 1608, and his third and last in 1610. This bold and judicious navigator entered the straits that lead into the bay known by his name, coasted a great part of it, and penetrated to eighty degrees and a half, into the heart of the frozen zone. His ardour for the discovery not being abated by the difficulties he struggled with in this empire of winter, and world of frost and snow, he stayed here until the ensuing spring, and prepared, in the beginning of 1611, to pursue his discoveries, but his crew, who suffered equal hardships, without the same spirit to support them, mu­tinied, seized upon him and seven of those who were most faithful to him, and committed them to the fury of the icy seas, in an open boat. Hudson and his companions were either swallowed up by the waves, or gaining the inhospitable coast, were destroyed by the savages; but the ship and the rest of the men returned home.

Other attempts towards a discovery were made in 1612 and 1667; and a patent for planting the country, with a charter for a company, was obtained in the year 1670. In 1646 captain Ellis wintered as far north as 57 degrees and a half, and captain Christopher attempted farther discoveries in 1361. But besides these voyages, we are indebt­ed to the Hudson's Bay company for a journey by land; * which throws much additional light on this matter, by affording what may be called demonstration, how much farther North, at least in some parts of their voyage, ships must go, before they can pass from one side of America to the other. The northern Indians, who came down to the Company's factories to trade, had brought to their knowledge a river, which on account of much copper being sound near it, had ob­tained the name of the Copper Mine river. The Company being desirous of examining into this matter with precision, directed Mr. Hearne, a young gentleman in their service, and who having been brought up for the navy, and served in it the war before last, was ex­tremely well qualified for the purpose, to proceed over land, under the convoy of those Indians, for that river; which he had orders to survey, if possible, quite down to its exit into the sea; to make observa­tions for fixing the latitudes and longitudes; and to bring home maps and drawings, both of it and the countries through which he should pass.

Accordingly Mr. Hearne, set out from Prince of Wales's Fort, on Churchill river, latitude 58° 47½' North, and longitude 94° 7½ West from Greenwich, on the 7th of December, 1770. Mr. Hearne on the 13th of July reached the Copper Mine river, and found it all the way, even to its exit into the sea, incumbered with shoals and falls, and emptying itself into it over a dry slat of the those, the tide being then out, which seemed, by the edges of the ice to rise about 10 or 14 feet. This rise, on account of the falls, will carry it but a very small way within the river's mouth, so that the water in it has not the least brackish taste. Mr. Hearne is, nevertheless, sure of the place it emp­tied itself into being the sea, or a branch of it, by the quantity of whale bone and seal skins which the Esquimaux had at their ten's; and also by the number of seals which he saw upon the ice. The sea, at the river's mouth, was full of islands and shoals, as [...] as he could [Page 134] see, by the assistance of a pocket telescope: and the ice was [...] (July 17th) broke up, but thawed away only for about three [...] of a mile from the shore, and for a little way round the [...] shoals which lay off the river's mouth. But he had the most [...] view of the sea when he was about eight miles up the river, from [...] station the extreme parts of it bore N. W. b. W. and N. E.

By the time Mr. Hearne had finished his survey of the river, [...] was about one o'clock in the morning on the 18th, there [...] very thick fog and drizzling rain; and as he had found the riv [...] sea, in every respect unlikely to be of any utility, he thought is [...] ­cessary to wait for fair weather, to determine the latitude more [...] ­ly by observation; but by the extraordinary care he took in ob [...] the courses and distances, walking from Congecathawhachaga, [...] had two very good observations, he thinks the latitude may be [...] ­ed on within 10' at the utmost. It appears from the map which [...] Hearne constructed of this singular journey, that the month [...] Copper Mine river lies in latitude 72° N. and longitude 25° W. [...] Churchill river; that is, about 119° W. of Greenwich. Mr. [...] journey back from the Copper Mine river to Churchill lasted [...] 30th 1772; so that he was absent almost a year and seven [...] The unparalleled hardships he suffered, and the essential [...] performed, have met with a suitable reward from his mast [...] [...] has been several years governor of Prince of Wales's Fort, on Church­ill river, where he was taken prisoner by the French in 1782.

Though the adventurers failed in the original purpose for [...] they navigated this bay, their project, even in its failure, has [...] great advantage to England. The vast countries which surround Hudson's Bay, as we have already observed, abound with animals, [...] and skins are excellent. In 1670, a charter was granted to a [...] which does not consist of above nine or ten persons, for the [...] trade to this bay, and they have acted under it ever since with [...] benefit to the private men, who compose the company, though [...] paratively with little advantage to Great Britain. The fur and [...] trade might be carried on to a much greater extent, were it not [...] ­ly in the hands of this exclusive company, whose interested, not [...] iniquitous spirit, has been the subject of long and just [...]. The company employ four ships, and 130 seamen. They have [...] sorts, viz. Prince of Wales's fort, Churchill river, Nelson, New [...] and Albany, which stand on the west side of the bay, and are [...] oned by 186 men. The French, in May 1782, took and destroyed [...] [...]orts, and the settlements, &c. said to amount to the value of [...] They export commodities to the value of 16,000l. and carry [...] ­turns to the value of 29,340l, which yield to the revenue [...] This includes the fishery in Hudson's Bay. This commerce, [...] it is, affords immense profits to the company, and even some ad [...] ­es to Great Britain in general; for the commodities [...] with the Indians for their skins and furs, are all manufactured [...] ­tain; and as the Indians are not very nice in their choice, such [...] are sent of which there is the greatest plenty, and which, in th [...] [...] phrase, are drugs. Though the workmanship too [...] to be in many respects so deficient, that no civilized people [...] take it, it may be admired among the Indians. On the other the skins and furs brought from Hudson's Bay, are manufa [...] [Page 135] and afford articles for trading with many nations of Europe, to great advantage. These circumstances prove the immense benefit that would redound to Britain, by throwing open the trade to Hudson's Bay, since even in its present restrained state it is so advantageous. The only attempt made to trade with Labrador, has been directed towards the fishery. Great Britain has no settlement here. The annual produce of the fishery, amounts to upwards of 49,000l.

UPPER AND LOWER CANADA.

THE Provinces of Upper and Lower Canada, constituted by act of Parliament in 1791, comprehend the territory heretofore called Canada, or the Province of Quebec.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 600 Miles. between Degrees. 61 and 81 61 and 81 W. Lon. from London, or 14 E. and 6 W. from Philadelphia.
Breadth 550 Miles. Degrees. 42 30 and 52 N. Latitude.

BOUNDARIES AND DIVISIONS.} Bounded north, by New Britain; east, by the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and part of the Province of New Brunswick; south east and south, by the District of Main, New Hampshire, Vermont, New York and the Lakes; the western boundary is undefined. The Province of Upper Canada is the same, as what is commonly called the Upper Country. It lies north of the great Lakes, between the latitudes of 42° 30′ and 50°, and is sepa­rated from New York by the river St. Lawrence, here called the Cata­raqui, and the Lakes Ontario and Erie.

Lower Canada lies on both sides the river St. Lawrence, between 61° and 71° W. Lon. from London; and 45° and 52° N. Lat. and is bounded south by New Brunswick, Maine, N. Hampshire, Vermont and New York; and west by Upper Canada.

The line which divides Upper from Lower Canada, commences at a stone boundary, on the north bank of the Lake St. Francis, at the Cove west of Pointe au Boudet, in the limit between the township of Lancaster and the Seigneurie of New Longuevil, running along the said limit in the direction of north thirty four degrees west, to the west­ernmost angle of the said Seigneurie of New Longuevil; thence along the north western boundary of the Seigneurie of Vandreuil, running north, twenty five degrees east, until it strikes the Ottawas river; to ascend the said river into the Lake Tomiscanning; and from the head of the said lake by a line drawn due north, until it strikes the boun­dary line of Hudson's Bay or New Britain. Upper Canada, to include all the territory to the westward and southward of the said line, to the utmost extent of the country known by the name of Canada.

RIVERS.] The river St. Lawrence is one of the largest rivers in North America. It issues from Lake Ontario, forming the outlet of the long chain of great lakes, which separate Upper Canada from the United States. It takes its course northeast▪ washes the island of Montreal, which it embosoms; just above which it receives Ottawas from the west, and forms many fertile islands. Continuing the same course, it meets the tide upwards of 400 miles from the sea, and is so far navigable for large vessels. Below Quebec it becomes broad and [Page 136] of sufficient depth for ships of war. Having received in its [...] besides Ottawas, St. John's Seguina, Despraires, Trois Rivier [...], [...] innumerable other smaller streams, it falls into the ocean at Capa [...] ­sieres, by a mouth 90 miles broad. In its course it forms a great [...] ­riety of bays, harbours and islands, many of them fruitful and extr [...] ­ly pleasant.

A river has lately been surveyed, by the deputy Surveyor [...] of Canada, from its entrance into the Bay of Kenty, near Cada [...] to its source in Lake St. Clie; from which there is an easy and [...] portage across N. W. to the N. E. angle of Lake Huron; and [...] ther that is neither long nor difficult, to the southward, to the old [...] ­tlement of Toronto. This is a short rout from Fort Frontinac [...] Michillimakkinak.

CLIMATE.] Winter continues, with such severity, from December to April, as that the largest rivers are frozen over, and the snow [...] commonly from four to six feet deep during the winter. But [...] air is so serene and clear, and the inhabitants so well defended [...] the cold, that this season is neither unhealthy nor unpleasant. [...] spring opens suddenly, and vegetation is surprizingly rapid. Th [...] summer is delightful, except that a part of it is extremely hot.

SOIL AND PRODUCE.] Though the climate be cold, and [...] winter long and tedious, the soil is in general very good, and in [...] parts both pleasant and fertile, producing wheat, barley, rye, [...] many other sorts of grain, fruits and vegetables; tobacco, in particu­lar, thrives well, and is much cultivated. The isle of Orleans, [...] Quebec, and the lands upon the river St. Lawrence and other rive [...] are remarkable for the richness of the soil. The meadow grounds [...] Canada, which are well watered, yield excellent grass, and feed [...] numbers of great and small cattle.

ANIMALS.] See this article under the head of the United States.

PRINCIPAL TOWNS.] Quebec is the capital, not only of Lower Canada, but of all British America, and is situated at the confluence of the rivers St. Lawrence and St. Charles, or the Little River, about 320 miles from the sea. It is built on a rock, partly of marble and partly of slate. The town is divided into an upper and lower. The houses in both are of stone, and built in a tolerable manner. The fortification are strong, though not regular. The town is covered with a regular and beautiful citadel, in which the governor resides. The number of inhabitants is computed at about 15,000. The river, which from the sea hither is four or five leagues broad, nar­rows all of a sudden to about a mile wide. The haven which lies op­posite the town, is safe and commodious, and about five fathoms deep. The harbour is flanked by two bastions, that are raised 25 feet from the ground, which is about the height of the tides at the time of the equinox.

From Quebec to Montreal, which is about 170 miles, in sailing up the river St. Lawrence, the eye is entertained with beautiful land­scapes, the banks being in many places very bold and steep, and shad­ed with lofty trees. The farms lie pretty close all the way, several gentlemen's houses, neatly built, shew themselves at intervals, and there is all the appearance of a flourishing colony; but there are few towns or villages. It is pretty much like the well settled part of Virginia and Maryland, where the planters are wholly within themselves. Many beautiful islands are interspersed in the channel of the river▪ [Page 137] which have an agreeable effect upon the eye. After passing the Riche­ [...]ieu islands, the air becomes so mild and temperate, that the traveller thinks himself transported to another climate; but this is to be under­stood only in the summer months.

The town called Trois Rivieres, or the Three Rivers, is about half way between Quebec and Montreal, and has its name from three rivers which join their currents here, and fall into the river St. Lawrence. It is much resorted to by several nations of Indians, who, by means of these rivers come hither and trade with the inhabitants in various kinds of furs and skins. The country is pleasant, and fertile in corn, fruit &c. and great numbers of handsome houses stand on both sides the river.

Montreal stands on an island in the river St. Lawrence, which it ten leagues in length and four in beadth, at the foot of a mountain which gives name to it, about half a league from the south shore. While the French had possession of Canada, both the city and island of Montreal belonged to private proprietors, who had im­proved them so well, that the whole island had become a most delight­ful spot, and produced every thing that could administer to the con­veniences of life. The city forms an oblong square, divided by re­gular and well-formed streets; and when taken by the Eng­lish the houses were built in a very handsome manner; and every house might be seen at one view from the harbour, or from the south­ernmost side of the river, as the hill on the side of which the town stands falls gradually to the water. This place is surrounded by a wall and a dry ditch; and its fortifications have been much improved by the English. Montreal is nearly as large as Quebec, but since it fell into the hands of the English it has suffered much by fires.

The principal towns in Upper Canada are Kingston, on Lake Onta­rio, Niagara, between Lake Ontario and Lake Erie, and Detroit, sit­uated on the western bank o [...] Detroit river, between Lake Erie and Lake Huron, and nine miles below Lake St. Clair. *

GOVERNMENT.] By the Quebec Act, passed by the parliament of Great Britain in the year 1791, so much of the act of the 14th of George III. passed in the year 1774, as relates to the appointment of a council for the Government of the Province of Quebec, is repealed; and it is en­acted that there shall be within each of the Provinces of Upper and Low­er Canada, a legislative council, and an assembly, who, with the consent, of the Governor, appointed by the king, shall have power to make laws. The Governor may give or withold his Majesty's assent to bills passed by the legislative council and assembly, or reserve them for his Majesty's pleasure. Bills reserved are to have no force till his Majes­ty's assent is signified by the Governor, which, to be valid must be signified within two years from the time the bill is presented to the Governor. The Governor must transmit to the Secretary of State co­pies of such bills as have been assented to, which his Majesty's in Coun­cil may declare his disallowance of within two years from the receipt.

The Legislative Council is to consist of not fewer than seven mem­bers for Upper, and fifteen for Lower Canada, to be summoned by the Governor, who must be authorized by the King. Such members are to hold their seats for life; unless forfeited by four years continual absence, or by swearing allegiance to some foreign power.

[Page 138] The house of assembly is to consist of not less than sixteen members from Upper, and not less than fifty from Lower Canada; chosen by [...] freeholders in the several towns and districts. The council and assem­bly are to be called together at least once in every year, and every assem­bly is to continue four years, unless sooner dissolved by the Government. All questions are to be decided by a majority of votes of the mem­bers present. His Majesty may authorize the Governor to fix the times and place, of holding the elections; (subject however, to such provisions as may hereafter be made by the Legislature) and to fix the times and places of holding the sessions of the assembly, and to prorogue and dis­solve the same whenever he shall judge it necessary.

The Governor, together with such of the executive council as shall appointed by the King, for the affairs of each Province, are to be a court of civil jurisdiction for hearing and determining appeals, subject however to such appeals from their judgement as heretofore existed. All lands i [...] Upper Canada are to be granted hereafter in free and common socca [...]; and also in Lower Canada, when the grantee shall desire it, subject nevertheless to alterations by an act of the Legislature.

British America is superintended by an officer stiled Governor General of the four British Provinces in N. America, who, besides other powers, is commander in chief of all the British troops in the four Provinces and the governments attached to them, and Newfoundland. Each of the Provinces, have a Lieutenant Governor, who, in the ab­sence of the Governor General, has all the powers requisite to a Chief Magistrate.

POPULATION.] Upper Canada, though an infant settlement, is said by some to contain 40,000, by others, only 20,000 inhabitants. The truth probably is between them. Lower Canada, in 1784, con­tained 113,012 souls. Both Provinces may now contain about 150,000 souls, which number is multiplying both by natural increase and by emigrations.

RELIGION.] As many as about nine tenths of the inhabitants of these Provinces are Roman Catholics, who enjoy under the present Government, the same provision, rights, and privileges, as was granted them in 1774, by the act of the 14th of George III. The rest of the people are Episcopalians, Presbyterians, and a few of almost all the different sects of christians.

Agreeably to constitution, his Majesty may authorize the Governor to make allotments of lands, for the support of a Protestant clergy in each Province, out of the crownlands already granted; and to the same purpose is to be appropriated, the amount of one seventh of the value of all future grants of lands. His Majesty may authorize the Govern­or, with the advice of the Executive Council, to erect parsonages, ac­cording to the establishment of the Church of England, within every township, or parish already formed, or which may hereafter be found­ed; and to endow them with so much of the lands appropriated, as a­foresaid, as they shall judge to be expedient; and also to present [...] every such parsonage, a minister of the Church of England, duly [...] ­dained, who is to hold and enjoy in the same manner, and upon the same conditions as incumbents in England. But presentations to par­sonages, and the enjoyment of them, are to be subject to the eccle [...] ­ical jurisdiction granted to the bishop of Nova Scotia.

TRADE.] The amount of the exports from the Provinces of Que­bec, in the year 1786, was £343,262: 19: 6. The amount of imports [...] [Page 139] the same year was £325,116. The exports consisted of wheat, flour, biscuit, flaxseed, lumber of various kinds, fish, potash, oil, ginseng and other medicinal roots, but principally of furs and peltries, to the amount of £285,977. The imports consisted of rum, brandy, molasses, coffee, sugar, wines, tobacco, salt, chocolate, provisions for the troops, and dry goods.

HISTORY.] This country was discovered by the English as early as about 1497, and settled by the French in 1608, who kept possession of it till 1760, when it was taken by the British arms, and at the treaty of Paris, in 1763, was ceded, by France, to the crown of England, to whom it has ever since belonged,

For the best history of this country the reader is referred to Charle­voix's history of it; to the Encyclopedia Brittannica; articles, Canada, Quebec, and America, No. 195, 200, and 207.

THE ISLAND OF CAPE BRETON.
Annexed to the Province of LOWER CANADA.

THE island, or rather collection of islands, called by the; French Les Isles de Madame, which lie so contiguous as that they are com­monly called but one, and comprehended under the name of the Island of Cape Breton, lies between lat. 45° and 47° N. and between 59° and 60°, W. long. from London, or 14° and 15° E. lon. from Philadel­phia, and about 45 leagues to the eastward of Halifax. It is about 100 miles in length, and 50 in breadth; and is separated from Nova Sco­tia by a narrow strait, called the Gut of Canso, which is the communica­tion between the Atlantic Ocean and the Gulf of St. Lawrence.

It is surrounded with little sharp pointed rocks, separated from each other by the waves, above which some of their tops are visible. All its harbours are open to the east, turning towards the south. On the other parts of the coast there are but a few anchoring places for small vessels, in creeks, or between islets. The harbour of St. Peter's, at the west end of the island, is a very commodious place for carrying on the fishery.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY, CLIMATE, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.} Except in the hilly parts. the surface of the country has but little solidity, being every where covered with a light moss and with water. The dampness of the soil is exhaled in fogs, without rendering the air unwholesome. In other respects, the climate is very cold, owing either to the prodigious quantity of lakes, which cover above half the island, and remain frozen a long time; or to the number of forests, that totally intercept the rays of the sun; the ef­fect of which is besides decreased by perpetual clouds.

The inhabitants never applied themselves to agriculture, the soil being unfit for it. They often sowed corn, but it seldom came to maturity; and when it did thrive so much as to be worth reaping. it had degenerated so considerably, that it was not fit for seed for the next harvest. They have only continued to plant a few pot herbs that are tolerably well tasted, but must be renewed every year from abroad. The poorness and scarcity of pastures has likewise prevented the in­crease of cattle. In a word, the soil of Cape Breton seems calculated to invite none but fishermen and soldiers.

[Page 140] Though the island was entirely covered with forests before [...] inhabited, its wood has scarce ever been an object of trade. A [...] quantity, however, of soft wood, was found there, fit for firing [...] some that might be used for timber; but the oak has always [...] scarce, and the fir never yielding much resin.

POPULATION, CHIEF TOWNS, &c.} On this island there are about 1000 in [...] ­tants, who have a lieutenant gov [...] [...]sident among them, appointed by the king. The principal tow [...] Sidney, the capital, and Louisburg, which has the best harbour [...] island.

This island may be considered as the key to Canada, and the [...] valuable fishery, in its neighbourhood, depends for its protecti [...] the possession of this island; as no nation can carry it on [...] some convenient harbour of strength to supply and protect it; [...] Louisburg is the principal one for these purpose.

TRADE.] The peltry trade was a very inconsiderable object. [...] ­sisted only in the skins of a few lynxes, elks, musk-rats, wild [...] bears, otters, and foxes, both of a red, silver and grey colour. [...] these were procured from a colony of Micmac Indians, who [...] settled on the island with the French, and never could raise [...] than 60 men able to bear arms. The rest came from St. John's or [...] neighbouring continent. Greater advantages might possibly, [...] been derived from the coal mines which abound in this island. [...] lie in a horizontal direction; and being no more than six or [...] feet below the surface, may be worked without digging deep, or [...] ­ing off the waters. Notwithstanding the prodigious demand for [...] coal from New-England, from the year 1745 to 1749, these [...] would, probably have been forsaken, had not the ships, which [...] sent out to the French islands, wanted ballast. In one of these [...] a fire has been kindled, which could never yet be extinguished.

The people of Cape Breton did not send all their fish to Europe. They sent part of it to the French southern islands, on board 20 [...] ships from 70 to 140 tons burden. Besides the cod, which made at [...] half their cargo, they exported to the other colonies timber, [...] thin oak boards, salted salmon and mackerel, train oil, and sea-oil. These were paid for, some in sugar and coffee, but chiefly in [...] molasses. The island could not consume all these commodities. Canada took off but a small part of the overplus; it was chiefly bought by the people of New England, who gave in exchange fruits, vegeta­bles, wood, bricks, and cattle. This trade of exchange was allowed; but a smuggling trade was added to it, carried on in flour and salt [...].

In 1743, while this island belonged to the French, they caught 1,149,000 quintals of dry fish, and 3,500,000 do. of mud-fish, the val­ue of both which, including 3,116¼ tons of train oil, drawn from the blubber, amounted to £926,577: 10 sterling, according to the prime cost of the fish at Newfoundland. The whole value of this trade, annually, at that period, amounted to a million sterling. No [...] than 564 ships, besides shallops, and 27,000 seamen, were employed in this trade. Charlevoix, in his history of France, says, "This fishery is a more valuable source of wealth and power to France, than [...] the mines of Peru and Mexico would be."

HISTORY.] Though some fishermen had long resorted to this [...] and every summer, not more than 20 or 30 had ever fixed there. [...] [Page 141] French, who took possession of it in August 1713, were properly the first inhabitants. They changed its name into that of Isle Royalc, and fixed upon Fort Dauphin for their principal settlement. This harbour was two leagues in circumference. The ships came to the very shore, and were sheltered from the winds. Forests, affording oak sufficient to fortify and build a large city, were near at hand; the ground appeared less barren than in other parts, and the fishery was [...]re plentiful. This harbour might have been rendered impregna­ble at a trifling expense; but the difficulty of approaching it (a cir­cumstance that had at first made a stronger impression than the ad­vantages resulting from it) occasioned it to be abandoned, after great labour had been bestowed upon the undertaking. They then turned their views to Louisburg, the access to which was easier; and con­venience was thus preferred to security: the fortification of Louis­burg, however, was not begun till 1720.

In the year 1714, some fishermen, who till then had lived in New­foundland, settled in this island. It was expected that their number would soon have been increased by the Acadians, who were at liberty from the treaties that had been granted them, to remove with all their effects, and even to dispose of their estates; but these hopes were dis­appointed. The Acadians chose rather to retain their possessions under the dominion of Britain, than to give them up for any precarious ad­vantage they might derive from their attachment to France. Their place was supplied by some distressed adventurers from Europe, who came over from time to time to Cape Breton, and the number of in­habitants gradually increased to 4000. They were settled at Louisburg▪ Fort Dauphin, Port Toulouse, Neruka, and on all the coasts where they found a proper beach for drying the cod.

This island remained in possession of the French till 1745, when it was captured for the crown of Great Britain, by a body of troops from New England, under the command of Lieutenant General William Pepperell. For the authentic particulars of this important, singular and successful expedition, see "The American Apollo," Part I. Vol. I. containing the publications of the Historical Society, in Boston. Also Encyclopedia Brittannica, article Breton.

NOVA SCOTIA.
Comprehending the Provinces of NEW BRUNSWICK and NOVA-SCOTIA.

BOUNDARIES AND EXTENT.
Length 400 Miles. between Degrees. 43 30 and 49 north latitude.
Breadth 300 Miles. Degrees. 60 and 67 east long. from London. 8 and 15 east long. from Phil.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED on the north, by the River St. Lawrence; east, by the Gulf of St. Lawrence, (which washes its coast 110 leagues in extent, from the Gut of Canso, at its entrance into the Gulf, to Cape Rozier, which forms the south [Page 142] part of the river St. Lawrence.) and by the Gut of Canso, which di­vides it from Cape Breton; south, it is washed by the Atlantic Ocean, having a sea coast of 90 leagues, from Cape Canso, east, to Cape [...] ­bles, west, which forms one part of the entrance into the Bay of [...] ­dy, which also forms a part of its southern boundary; west, by a [...] of Lower Canada, and the District of Maine.

The tract of country within these limits, known by the [...] of Nova-Scotia, or New Scotland, was, in 1784, divided into two pro­vinces, viz. New Brunswick on the northwest, and Nova-Scotia on the southeast. The former comprehends that part of the old province of Nova-Scotia, which lies to the northward and westward of a [...] drawn from the mouth of the river St. Croix, through the center of the Bay of Fundy, to Bay Verte, and thence into the Gulf of St. Law­rence, including all lands within 6 leagues of the coast. The re [...] [...] the province of Nova Scotia, to which is annexed, the Island of St. John's, which lies north of it, in the Gulf of St. Lawrence.

DIVISIONS.] In 1783, were the following countries in Nova-Scotia, viz.

Counties. Townships. By whom settled. Rivers.
      Avon or Pigiguit All emptying into the Av [...] and except [...] last [...]avigable.
HANTS, on the riv­er Avon. Windsor St.Croix
Falmouth Kenetcoot
Newport Coemiguen
    Cacaguet Nav. 40 [...]. for vess. Of 60
    Cobeguit
HALI [...]AX. Eastern part of Nova Sco­tia. Hai [...]ax    
London Der. Irish & Scotch Shebbenaccadie. Boatable. Pitcoudiac Memremcoot.
Truro
Onflow N.England.
Colchester  
Lawrenence
Southamp.
Canso
Tinmouth
KINGS. on the Bason of Miner. Cornwallis   Percau, small Habitant, nav. for v. of 40 [...] a small distance.
Horton Canaid, nav. for vess. of [...] tons 3 or 4 miles.
  Cornwallis, nav. for vess. of 100 tons 5 m. for v. of 50 tons 10 [...] Salmon river *
ANNAPOLIS on Annapo­lis river. Wilmot sett. from Ire. and N. Eng. Annapolis, navigable for [...] of any burthen 10 miles—of 100 tons [...]5 miles; tide [...] 30 miles, passable in [...] [...] within 20 miles of Horton.
Granville do. a finetown­ship 30 miles in leng. On the Bay of Fundy.
Annapolis
Clare 40 families of Acadians.
Moncton Do.
CUMBER­LAND at the head of Bay of Fundy.     An Lac whicharenav. 3 or 4 mil. for vess. of 5 tons.
    Marequesh
Cumberland   La Planche
Sackville, settled from N. Eng. & Yorksh. Napan shoal rivers.
    Macon
Amberst, settled from N. of Ire. N. Eng. and Yorkshire. Memrem. navigable 4 or 5 miles.
Hillsboro Petcoudia
Hopewell Chepodie
    Herbert. navigable by boats to its head 12 mil.
SUNBURY, on the river St. John's, north shore of Bay of Fundy. Conway   St. John's, described under the head of rivers.
Gage Town
Burton
Sunbury
St. Ann's Settled from Massachusetts, Connecticut, &c.
Willmot
Newton
Maugerville
QUEENS, south side of Bay of Fun­dy. Argyle Scots & Acad. None
Yarmouth New England.
Barrington(Sable Ist.) Quakers from Nantucket.
Liverpool New England.
LUMEN­BURG, on Mahone Bay. New Dublin Irish formerly, now Germans. None
Lunenburg Chester Germans New England.
Blandford 3 families only.

RIVERS, BAYS, LAKES AND CAPES.} Most of the rivers which water this country have already been mentioned. The rivers Risgonche and Nipisiguit, run from west to east into Chaleur and Nipisiguit Bays, which communicate with the Gulph of St. Law­rence. The river St. Croix, (which is the true St. Croix, is yet unde­termined) empties into Passamaquoddy Bay, and forms a part of the boundary between New-Brunswick and Main. St. John's is the largest river in the province. It empties into the north side of the bay of Fundy, and is navigable for vessels of 50 tons, 60 miles, and for boats upwards of 200 miles. This is a common rout to Quebec. The banks of this river, enriched by the annual freshets, are excellent land. About 30 miles from the mouth of this river commen­ces a fine level country, covered with large trees of timber of vari­ous kinds. Masts, from 20 to 30 inches in diameter, have been cut on this tract. The tide flows, in this river, 80 or 90 miles. It furnishes the inhabitants with salmon, bass and sturgeon. Near fort Howe, the river suddenly narrows, and occasions a fall at certain times of tide, like that at London bridge.

The coast of these provinces is indented with numerous bays, and commodious harbours. The principal, as you descend southerly from the mouth of St. Lawrence river, are Gaspee, Chaleur, Verte, which is separated from the bay of Fundy by a narrow isthmus of about 18 miles wide; Cape and harbour of Canso, 40 leagues eastward of Hal­ifax. Chedabucto bay is about 10 leagues N. W. of Canso. Chebucto Bay, on which stands the town of Halifax. In the Bay of Fundy, which [Page 144] extends 50 leagues into the country, the ebb and flow of the [...] from 45 to 60 feet. Chenigto bay is at the head of Fundy Bay. [...] samaquoddy bay borders on the District of Main, and receives the waters of St. Croix river. At the entrance of this bay is an [...] granted to several gentlemen in Liverpool in Lancasbire, who [...] ­ed it Campobello. At a very considerable expense, they attemp [...] form a settlement here, but failed. On several other islands in [...] bay there are settlements made by people from Massachusetts. [...] the lakes in these provinces, which are very numerous, and as [...] without names, is Grand Lake, in the province of N. Brunswick, [...] St. John's river, about 30 miles long and 8 or 10 broad, and in [...] Places 40 fathoms deep.

The principal Capes, are Cape Canso, on the west side of th [...] [...] ­trance into Chedabucto Bay, and Cape Sables, on the east side, of [...] entrance into the Bay of Fundy.

PRINCIPAL TOWNS.] Halifax is the capital of the Prov [...] Nova Scotia. It stands on Chebucto Bay, commodiously situ [...] [...] the fishery, and has a communication with other parts of this [...] and New Brunswick, by land and water carriage. It has a [...] harbour, where a small squadron of ships of war lies during the [...] ­ter, and in the summer, protects the fishery. The town has [...] [...] ­trenchment, and is strengthened with forts of timber. It is [...] to contain 15 or 16,000 inhabitants.

Shelburne (N. Scotia) on Port Roseway, near Cape Sables▪ [...] supposed, in 1783, to contain 600 families. Since that time it [...] come less populous. Guysborough, (N. S.) formerly called Manc [...] ­ter, situated on Chedabucto Bay, about 10 leagues N. W. of [...] Canso, contained, in 1783, about 250 families. Rawdon (N. S.) [...] miles from Halifax, has about 60 houses. Annapolis (N. S.) [...] east side of Fundy Bay, has one of the finest harbours in the [...]. In other respects it is a poor, inconsiderable place.

Fredricktown, about 90 miles up St. John's River, is the capital of the province of New Brunswick.

CLIMAIE, SOIL, AND PRODUCT­IONS.} During a great part of the year, the atmos­phere is clouded with thick fog, which [...] ­ders it unhealthy for the inhabitants; and four or five months it is intensely cold. A great part of this country lies in forest, and the soil, in many parts, is thin and barren. On the banks of the rivers, however, and some other parts, the soil in very good, producing large crops of English grass, hemp and flax: many of the bays, and salt water rivers, and some parts of the sea coast, are bordered with fine tracts of salt marsh. The inhabitants [...] not raise provisions enough for home consumption.

FORTS.] These are Fort Edward at Windsor, capable of contain­ing 200 men; Annapolis, in its present state, 100; Cumberland, [...] Fort Howe, on St. John's River, 100; besides which there are barr [...] inclosed in a stockade at Cornwallis, for about 50 men.

INDIANS.] These are the Micmacks, and the tribe called the [...] ­chites. The former inhabit the eastern shore, between Halifax [...] Cape Breton; between Cumberland county and the northeast cost [...] the Province, towards Chaleur Bay; about the heads of the [...] ­ers which run through the counties of Hants and Kings Co [...] and between Cape Sable and Annapolis Royal. This tribe is [...] [Page 145] posed to have about 300 fighting men. The Marechites, inhabit the river St. John's, and around Passamaquoddy Bay; and are estimated at 140 fighting men: they are much superior in all respects to the Mickmacks.

ANIMALS.] The same as in the United States, though much less numerous.

TRADE.] The exports from G. Britain to this country consist chiefly of linen and woollen cloths, and other necessaries for wear, of fishing tackle, and rigging for ships. The amount of exports, at an average of three years, before the new settlements, was about 26,500l. The only arti­cles obtained in exchange are, timber and the produce of the fishery, which, at a like avarage, amounted to 38,000l. But from the late in­crease of inhabitants, it is supposed that they will now crect saw mills, and endeavour to supply the West India islands with lumber of every kind, as well as the produce of the fishery, which will be a profitable article to both countries. The whole population of Nova Scotia and the islands adjoining, is estimated at 50,000. This estimate it is supposed is considerably too large. Recent accounts of these settlements represent them as in a declining state, having great num­bers of the houses built in the new towns uninhabited, and considera­bly reduced in value.

HISTORY.] Notwithstanding the forbidding appearance of this country, it was here that some of the first European settlements were made. The first grant of lands in it was given by James 1. to his se­cretary, Sir William Alexander, from whom it had the name of No­va Scotia, or New Scotland. Since then it has frequently changed hands, from one private proprietor to another, and from the French to the English nation backward and forward. It was not confirmed to the English, till the peace of Utrecht, and their design in acquiring it, does not seem to have arisen so much from any prospect of direct profit to be obtained by it, as from an apprehension that the French, by possess­ing this province, might have had it in their power to annoy the other British settlements. Upon this principle, 3000 families were trans­ported in 1749, at the charge of the government, into this country, who built and settled the town of Halifax.

ISLAND OF ST. JOHN's.

THIS island lies in the Gulf of St. Lawrence, near the northern coast of the Province of Nova Scotia, and is about 60 miles long, and 30 or 40 broad. It has several fine rivers, a rich soil, and is pleasantly situated. Charlottetown is its Principal town, and is the residence of the lieutenant governor, who is the chief officer on the island. The number of inhabitants are estimated at about 5000. Upon the reduction of Cape Breton, in 1745, the inhabitants of this island, amounting to about 4000, submitted quietly to the British arms. While the French possessed this island, they improved it to so much advantage as that it was called the granary of Canada, which it furnished with great plenty of corn, as well as beef and pork. It is attached to the province of Nova Scotia.

[Page 146]

NEWFOUNDLAND ISLAND.

NEWFOUNDLAND is situated to the east of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, between 46 and 52 degrees of north lat. and between 53 and 59 degrees west long. separated from Labrador, or New Britain, by the straits of Belleisle; and from Canada, by the Bay of St. Lawrence; being 550 miles long and 200 broad. The coasts are extremely subject to fogs, attended with almost continual storms of snow and sleet, the sky being usually overcast. From the soil of this island the British reap no great advantage, for the cold is long continued and severe; and the summer heat, though violent, warms it not enough to produce any thing valuable; for the soil, at least i [...] those parts of the island which have been explored, is rocky and bar­ren. However, it is watered by several good rivers, and has many large and good harbours. This island, whenever the continent shall come to fail of timber, convenient to navigation (which on the sea coast perhaps will be at no very remote period,) it is said will afford a large supply for masts, yards, and all sorts of lumber for the West India trade. But what at present it is chiefly valuable for, is the great fishery of cod carried on upon those shoals, which are called the Banks of Newfoundland. Great Britain and North America, at the lowest computation, annually employ 3000 sail of small craft in this fishery; on board of which, and on shore to cure and pack the fish, are up­wards of 100,00 hands; so that this fishery is not only a very valuable branch of trade to the merchant, but a source of livelihood to so many thousands of poor people, and a most excellent nursery to the royal navy. This fishery is computed to increase the national stock 300,000l. a year in gold and silver, remitted for the cod sold in the North, i [...] Spain, Portugal, Italy, and the Levant. The plenty of cod, both on the great bank and the lesser ones, which lie to the east and south-east of this island, is inconceivable; and not only cod, but several other species of fish, are caught there in abundance; all of which are near­ly in an equal plenty along the shores of Newfoundland, Nova Sco­tia, New England, and the isle of Cape Breton; and very profitable fisheries are carried on upon all their coasts.

This island, after various disputes about the property, was entirely ceded to England by the treaty of Utrecht, in 1713; but the French were left at liberty to dry their nets on the northern shores of the island; and by the treaty of 1763. they were permitted to fish in the gulf of St. Lawrence, but with this limitation, that they should not ap­proach within three leagues of any of the coasts belonging to England. The small islands of St. Pierre and Miquelon, situated to the south­ward of Newfoundland, were also ceded to the French, who stipulated to [...]rect no fortifications on these islands, nor to keep more than [...] soldiers to enforce the police. By the last treaty of peace, the French are to enjoy the fisheries on the north and on the west coasts of the [...] and; and the inhabitants of the United States are allowed the same [...] ­eges in fishing as before their independence. The chief toward [...] Newfoundland, are, Placentia, Bonavista, and St. John's: but not a­bove 1000 families remain here in winter. A small squadron of [...] of war are sent out every spring to protect the fisheries and inhabitants, [Page 147] the Admiral of which, for the time being, is Governor of the island, besides whom there are two lieutenant Governors, one at Placentia, and the other at St. John's.

THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 1250 Miles. between Degrees. 31° and 46° North Latitude.
Breadth 1040 Miles. Degrees. 8° E. and 24' W. Long. from Philadelphia. 64° and 96° W. Long. from London.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north and east, by British Amer­ica, or the Provinces of Upper and Lower Canada, and New Brunswick; south east, by the Atlantic ocean; south, by East and West Florida; west, by the river Missisippi.

In the treaty of peace, concluded in 1783, the limits of the Ameri­can United States are more particularly defined in the words follow­ing. "And that all disputes which might arise in future on the sub­ject of the boundaries of the said United States may be prevented, it is hereby agreed and declared, that the following are and shall be their boundaries, viz. From the north west angle of Nova Scotia, viz. That angle which is formed by a line drawn due north from the source of St. Croix River to the Highlands, along the said Highlands, which divide those rivers that empty themselves into the river St. Lawrence, from those which fall into the Atlantic Ocean, to the north westernmost head of Connecticut river; thence down along the mid­dle of that river to the forty-fifth degree of north latitude; from thence by a line due west on said latitude, until it strikes the river Iro­quois or Cataraqui; thence along the middle of the said river into Lake Ontario; through the middle of said lake, until it strikes the communication by water between that lake and Lake Erie; thence along the middle of said communication into Lake Erie, through the middle of said lake, until it arrives at the water communication be­tween that lake and Lake Huron; thence through the middle of said lake to the water communication between that lake and Lake Superior; thence through Lake Superior, northward of the Isles Royal and Phil­lipeaux, to the Long Lake; thence through the middle of said Long Lake, and the water communication between it and the Lake of the Woods, to the said lake of the Woods; thence through the said lake to the most northwestern point thereof, and from thence, on a due west course, to the River Missisippi; thence by a line to be drawn along the middle of said River Missisippi, until it shall intersect the northernmost part of the thirty-first degree of north latitude.

"South, by a line to be drawn due east from the determination of the line last mentioned, in the latitude of thirty-one degrees north of the equator, to the middle of the River Apalachichola, or Catahouche; thence along the middle thereof to its junction with the Flint River; thence strait to the head of St. Mary's River; and thence down along the middle of St. Mary's River to the Atlantic Ocean.

"East by a line to be drawn along the middle of the River St. Croix [Page 148] from its mouth, in the Bay of Fundy, to its source, and from its source directly north, to the aforesaid Highlands, which divide, the rivers that fall into the Atlantic Ocean, from those which fall into the River St. Lawrence; comprehending all islands within twenty leagues of [...] part of the shores of the United States, and lying between lines to be drawn due east from the points where the aforesaid boundaries between Nova Scotia on the one part, and East Florida on the other, shall re­spectively touch the Bay of Fundy and the Atlantic Ocean, excepting such islands as now are, or heretofore have been, within the limits of the said province of Nova Scotia."

The territory of the United States, according to Mr. Hutchins, con­tains, by computation, a million of square miles, in which are

  640,000,000 acres
Deduct for water 51,000 000
Acres of land in the United States 589,000,000

That part of the United States, comprehended between the west boundary line of Pennsylvania, on the east; the boundary line between Great Britain and the United States, extending from the river St. Croix to the northwest extremity of the Lake of the Woods, on the north; the river Missisippi, to the mouth of the Ohio, on the west; and the river Ohio on the south, to the aforementioned bounds of Penn­sylvania, contains, by computation, about 411,000 square, miles▪ in which are

  263,040,000 acres.
Deduct for water 43,040,000 acres.
To be disposed of by order of Con­gres, when purchased of the Indians} 220,000,000

The whole of this immense extent of unappropriated western terri­tory, containing, as above stated, 220,000,000 of acres, and several large tracts south of the Ohio, * have been, by the cession of some of the original thirteen states, and by the treaty of peace, transferred to the federal government, and are pledged as a fund for sinking the [...] of the United States. Of this territory the Indians now possess a ve­ry large proportion. Mr. Jefferson, in his report to congress, Nov. [...], 1791, describes the boundary line between us and the Indians, as fol­lows; "Beginning at the mouth of the Cayahoga (which falls into the southernmost part of Lake Erie) and running up the river to the portage, between that and the Tuscarora (or N. E.) branch of the Muskingum; then down the said branch to the forks, at the crossing place above fort Lawrence; then westwardly, towards the portage of the Great Miami, to the main branch of that river; then down the Mi [...]i, to the fork of that river, next below the old fort, which was taken by the French, in 1752; thence due west to the river De la [...] (a branch of the Wabash) and down that river to the Wabash. So for the line is precisely determined, and cleared of the claims of the In­dians. The tract comprehending the whole country within the above described line, the Wabash, the Ohio, and the western limits of Penn­sylvania, contains about 55,000 square miles. How far on the [...] ­ern side of the Wabash, the southern boundary of the Indians [...] been defined, we known not. It is only understood in general, that their [Page 149] title to the lower country, between that river and the Illinois, was formerly extinguished by the French, while in their possession."

Estimate of the number of acres of water, north and westward of the river Ohio, within the territory of the United States.
  Acres.
In Lake Superior, 21,95 [...],780
Lake of the Woods, 1,133,800
Lake Rain, &c. 165,200
Red Lake, 551,000
Lake Michigan, 10, [...]68,000
Bay Puan, 1,216,000
Lake Huron 5,009,920
Lake St. Clair, 89,500
Lake Erie, western part, 2,252,800
Sundry small lakes and rivers, 301,000
  43,040,000
Estimate of the number of acres of water within the thirteen United States.
In the Lakes, &c. as abovementioned— 43,040,000
In Lake Erie, westward of the line extended from the north west corner of Pennsylvania, due north to the boundary between the British terri­tory and the United States, 410,000
In Lake Ontario, 2,390,000
Lake Champlain, 500,000
Chesapeek Bay, 1,700,000
Albemarle Bay, 330,000
Delaware Bay, 630,000
All the rivers within the thirteen States, including the Ohio, 2,000,000
7,960,000
Total, 51,000,000

LAKES.] It may in truth be said, that no part of the world is so well watered with springs, rivulets, rivers, and lakes, as the territory of the United States. By means of these various streams and collections of water, the whole country is checkered into islands and peninsulas. The United States, and indeed all parts of North America, seem to have been formed by nature for the most intimate union. The facilities of navigation, render the communication be­tween the ports of Georgia and New-Hampshire, far more expeditious and practicable, than between these of Provence and Picardy in France; Cornwall and Caithness, in Great Britain; of Gallicia and Catalonia, in Spain. The Canals proposed between Susquehannah and Dela­ware, between Pasquetank and Elizabeth rivers, in Virginia, and be­tween [Page 150] the Schuylkill and Susquehannah, will open a communication from the Carolinas to the western counties of Pennsylvania and New­York. The improvements of the Potomak, will give a passage from the southern States, to the western parts of Virginia, Maryland, Penn­sylvania, and even to the lakes. From Detroit, to Alexandria, of the Potomak, six hundred and seven miles, are but two carrying places, which together do not exceed the distance of forty miles. The [...] of Delaware and Chesapeek, will open the communication from South Carolina, to New Jersey, Delaware, the most populous parts of Penn­sylvania, and the midland counties of New York. Were these, and the proposed canal between Ashley and Cooper rivers, in S. Caroli­na—the canals in the northern parts of the state of New York, and those of Massachusetts and New Hampshire, all opened, North Amer­ica would thereby be converted into a cluster of large and fertile isl­ands, communicating with each other with ease and little expense, and in many instances without the uncertainty or danger of the seas.

There is nothing in other parts of the globe, which resembles the prodigious chain of lakes in this part of the world. They may pro­perly be termed inland seas of fresh water; and even those of the se­cond or third class in magnitude, are of larger circuit than the great­est lake in the eastern continent. Some of the most northern lakes belonging to the United States, have never been surveyed, or even visited by white people; of course we have nor description of them which can be relied on as accurate. Others have been partially su­rveyed and their relative situation determined. The best account of them which we have been able to procure is as follows.

The Lake of the Woods, the most northern in the United States, is so called from the large quantities of wood growing on its banks; such as oaks, pines, firs, spruce, &c. This lake lies nearly east of the south end of the Lake Winnepeek, and is supposed to be the source or conductor of one branch of the river Bourbon, if there by such a riv­er. Its length from east to west is said to be about seventy miles, and in some places it is forty miles wide. The Killistinoe Indians encamp on its borders to fish and hunt. This lake is the communica­tion between the Lakes Winnepeek and Bourbon, and Lake Supe­rior.

Rainy, or Long Lake, lies east of the Lake of the Woods, and i [...] said to be nearly and hundred miles long, and in no part more than twenty miles wide.

Eastward of this lake, lie several small ones, which extend in a string to the great carrying place, and thence into Lake Superior. Be­tween these little lakes are several carrying places, which render the trade to the north west di [...]cult, and exceedingly tedious, as it takes two years to make one voyage from Michillimakkinak to these parts.

Lake Superior, formerly termed the Upper Lake, from its northern situation, is so called from its magnitude, it being the largest on the continent. It may justly be termed the Caspian of America, and, i [...] supposed to be the largest body of fresh water on the globe. According to the French charts, it is 1500 miles in circumference. A great part of the coast is bounded by rocks and uneven ground. The water is pure and transparent, and appears generally, through the lake, to lie upon a bed of huge rocks. It has been remarked, in regard to the [Page 151] waters of this lake, with how much truth I pretend not to say, that although their surface, during the heat of summer, is impregnated with no small degree of warmth, yet on letting down a cup to the depth of about a fathom, the water drawn from thence is cool and refreshing.

The situation of this lake, from the most accurate observations which have come to our knowledge, lies between forty-six and fifty degrees of north latitude, and between nine and eighteen degrees of west lon­gitude from the meridian of Philadelphia.

There are many islands in this lake, two of them have each land enough, if proper for cultivation, to form a considerable province; especially Isle Royal, which is not less than an hundred miles long, and in many places forty broad. The natives suppose these islands are the residence of the Great Spirit.

Two large rivers empty themselves into this lake, on the north and northeast side; one is called the Nipegon, which leads to a tribe of the chipeways, who inhabit a lake of the same name, and the other is the Mschipicooton river, the source of which is towards James' Bay, from whence there is said to be but a short portage to another river, which empties itself into that bay.

Not far from the Nipegon is a small river, that, just before it enters the lake, has a perpendicular fall from the top of a mountain, of more than a hundred feet. It is very narrow, and appears at a distance like a white garter suspended in the air. There are upwards of thirty oth­er rivers, which empty into this lake, some of which are of a consider­able size. On the south side of it is a remarkable point or cape of about sixty miles in length, called point Chegomegan. About an hundred miles west of this cape, a considerable river falls into the lake, the head of which is composed of a great assemblage of small streams. This river is remarkable for the abundance of virgin copper that is found on and near its banks. Many small islands, particularly on the eastern shores, abound with copper ore lying in beds, with the appearance of cop­peras. This metal might be easily made a very advantageous article of commerce. This lake abounds with fish, particularly trout and stur­geon; the former weigh from twelve to fifty pounds, and are caught almost any season of the year in great plenty. Storms affect this lake as much as they do the Atlantic Ocean; the waves run as high, and the navigation is equally dangerous. It discharges its waters from the south east corner, through the Straits of St. Marie, which are about forty miles long. Near the upper end of these Straits is a rapid, which though it is impossible for canoes to ascend, yet, when con­ducted by careful pilots, may be descended without danger.

Though Lake Superior is supplied by near forty rivers, many of which are large, yet it does not appear that one tenth part of the waters which are conveyed into it by these rivers, is discharges by the a­bovementioned strait. Such a superabundance of water can be dis­posed of only by evaporation. * The entrance into this lake from the [Page 152] straits of St. Marie, affords one of the most pleasing prospects in the world. On the left may be seen many beautiful little islands that [...] ­tend a considerable way before you; and on the right, an [...] succession of small points of land, that project a little way in [...] [...] water, and contribute, with the islands, to render this delightful [...] calm, and secure from those tempestuous winds, by which the [...] ­ing lake is frequently troubled.

Lake Huron, into which you enter through the straits of St. [...] is next in magnitude to lake Superior. It lies between 43° 30′ and [...] 30' of north latitude, and between six and eight degrees west [...] ­tude. Its circumference is about one thousand miles. On the sou [...] side of this lake is an island called Manataulin, signifying a pla [...] of spirits, and is considered as sacred by the Indians. On the southern part of this lake is Saganaum Bay, about eighty miles in length and about eighteen or twenty miles broad. Thunder Bay, so called [...] the thunder that is frequently heard here, lies about half way be­tween Saganaum Bay and the north west corner of the lake. It is [...] nine miles across either way. The fish are the same as in Lake Supe­rior. At the northwest corner this Lake communicates with [...] Michigan, by the Straits of Michillimakkinak.

The Chipeway Indians live scattered around this lake; particularly near Saganaum Bay. On its banks are found amazing quantities of [...] cherries.

Michigan Lake lies between latitude 42° 10′ and 46° 30′ north▪ and between 11° and 13° west long▪ from Philadelphia. Its compound length is 280 miles, from north to south; its breadth from 60 to [...] miles. It is navigable for shipping of any burthen; and at the [...] eastern part communicates with Lake Huron, by a strait six miles broad, on the south side of which stands fort Michillimakki [...]; which is the name of the strait. In this lake are several kinds of fish, particularly trout of an excellent quality, weighing from 20 to 60 pounds, and some have been taken in the Straits of Michillimakki [...], of 90 pounds. Westward of this lake are large meadows, said to [...] ­tend to the Missisippi. It receives a number of rivers from the west and east, among which is the river St. Joseph, very rapid and full of islands; it springs from a number of small lakes, a little to the north­west of the Miami village, and runs northwest into the southeast [...] [Page 153] of the lake. On the north side of this river is fort St. Joseph, from which there is a road, bearing north of east, to Detroit. The Powte­ [...]atamie Indians, who have about 200 fighting men, inhabit this river opposite fort St. Joseph.

Between Lake Michigan on the west, and Lakes Huron, St. Clair, and the west end of Erie on the east, is a fine tract of country, peninsulated, more than 250 miles in length, and from 150 to 200 in breadth. The banks of the lakes, for a few miles, inland, are sandy and barren, producing a few pines, shrub oaks and cedars.—Back of this, from either lake, the timber is heavy and good and the soil lux­uriant.

Lake St. Clair lies about half way between Lake Huron and Lake Erie, and is about ninety miles in circumference. It receives the wa­ters of the three great lakes, Superior, Michigan and Huron, and dis­chares them through the river or strait, called Detroit, (which is in French, the Strait) into Lake Erie. This lake is of an oval form, and navigable for large vessels. The fort of Detroit is situated on the western bank of the river of the same name, about nine miles below Lake St. Clair. The settlements are extended on both sides of the strait or river, for many miles towards Lake Erie, and some few above the fort.

Lake Erie is situated between forty-one and forty-three degrees of north latitude, and between 3° 40′ and 8° degrees west longitude. It is nearly three hundred miles long, from east to west, and about for­ty, in its broadest part. A point of land projects from the north side into this lake, several miles, towards the southeast, called Long Point. The islands and banks towards the west end of the lake are so inse [...]ted with rattle-snakes, as to render it dangerous to land on them. The lake is covered near the banks of the islands with the large pond lily, the leaves of which lie one the surface of the water so thick, as to cover it entirely for many acres together; on these, in the summer season, lie myri [...]ds of water-snakes basking in the sun. Of the ven­omous serpents which infest this lake, the hissing snake is the most re­markable. It is about eighteen inches long, small and speckled. When you approach it, it flattens itself in a moment, and its spots, which are of various colours, become visibly brighter through rage; at the same time it blows from its mouth, with great force, a subtile wind, said to be of a nauseous smell; and if drawn in with the breath of the unwary traveller, will infallibly bring on a decline, that in a few months must prove mortal. No remedy has yet been found to coun­teract its baneful influence. This lake is of a more dangerous naviga­tion than any of the others, on account of the craggy rocks which project into the water, in a perpendicular direction, many miles toge­ther from the northern shore, affording no shelter from storms.

Presque Isle is on the southeast shore of this Lake, about lat.4 [...]° 10′. From this to Fort Le Beuf, on French creek, is a portage of 15 miles. About 20 miles northeast of this is another portage of 9 [...] miles between Chatoughque Creek, emptying into Lake Erie, and Chatough­que Lake, a water of Allegany river.

Fort Erie stands on the northern shore of Lake Erie, and the [...] bank of Niagara river, in Upper Canada. This lake, at its northeast end, communicates with Lake Ontario, by the river Niagara which runs from south to north, about 30 miles, including its windings▪ [...] ­bracing in its course, Grand Island, and [...] [Page 154] from the east. About the middle of this river, are the cele [...] falls of Niagara, which are reckoned one of the greatest natural curi­osities in the world. The waters which supply the river Niagara [...] near two thousand miles to the northwest, and passing through [...] lakes Superior, Michigan, Huron and Erie, receiving in their c [...]se, constant accumulations, at length, with astonishing grandeur, and down a stupendous precipice of 150 feet perpendicular; and [...] strong rapid, that extends to the distance of eight or nine miles [...] fall near as much more; the river then loses itself in Lake Ontario. The noise of these falls, in a clear day and fair wind, may be [...] between forty and fifty miles. When the water strikes the bottom [...] its spray rises a great height in the air, occasioning a thick cloud of vapours, in which, when the sun shines, may be seen, morning and evening, a beautiful rainbow. Fort Niagara, is situated on the [...] of Niagara river, at its entrance into Lake Ontario. This [...] that at Detroit, contrary to the treaty of 1783, are yet in the possession of the British Government.

Lake Ontario is situated between forty-three and forty-five degree north latitude, and between one and five degrees west longitude. [...] form is nearly oval. Its greatest length is from southwest to north­east, and its circumference about six hundred miles. It abounds with fish of an excellent slavour, among which are the Oswego bass, weigh­ing three or four pounds. It receives the waters of the [...] river from the south, and of Onondago, at Fort Oswego, from the southeast, by which it communicates, through Lake Oneida, and Wood Creek, with Mohawk river. On the northeast, this lake dis­charges itself through the river Cataraqui, (which at Montreal, [...] the name of St. Lawrence) into the Atlantic ocean.

About 8 miles from the west end of Lake Ontario, is a curious cavern, which the Messisaugas Indians call Manito ah wigwam, or house of the Devil. The mountains which border on the lake, at this place, break off abruptly, and form a precipice of 200 feet perpendicular de­scent; at the bottom of which the cavern begins. The first open­ing is large enough for three men conveniently to walk abreast. It continues of this bigness for 70 yards in a horizontal direction. Then it falls almost perpendicularly 50 yards, which may be descended by irregular steps from one to four feet distant from each other. It then continues 40 yards horizontally, at the end of which is another per­pendicular descent, down which there are no steps. The cold here is intense. In spring and autumn, there are, once in about a week, explosions from this cavern, which shake the ground for 16 miles round.

Lake Champlain is next in size to Lake Ontario, and lies nearly east from it, forming a part of the dividing line between the State of New York and the State of Vermont. It took its name from a French Governor, whose name was Champlain, who was drowned in it. It was before called Corlaers Lake. It is about eighty miles in length from north to south, and in its broadest part fourteen. It is well s [...] ­ed with fish, and the land on its borders, and on the banks of its riv­ers, is good. Crown Point and Ticonderoga, are situated on the bank of this lake, near the southern part of it.

Lake George, lies to the southward of Champlain, and is a most clear, beautiful collection of water, 36 miles long and from 1 to [...] miles wide. It embosoms more than 200 islands, some say 365; very [Page 155] few of which, are any thing more than barren rock, covered with heath, and a sew cedar, spruce and hemlock trees and shrubs, and abundance of rattle snakes. On each side it is skirted by prodigious mountains, from which large quantities of red cedar are every year carried to New York for ship timber. The lake is full of fishes, and some of the best kind; among which are the black or Oswego bass and large speckled trouts. The water of this lake is about 100 feet above the level of Lake Champlain. The portage between the two lakes is one mile and a half; but with a small expense might be reduced to 60 yards; and with one or two locks might be made navigable through, for batteaux. This lake, in the French charts, is called Lake St. Sa­crament; and it is said that the Roman Catholics, in former times, were at the pains to procure this water for sacramental uses in all their churches in Canada: hence probably it derived its name.

RIVERS.] The Missisippi receives the waters of the Ohio and Illi­nois, and their numerous branches from the east; and of the Missouri and other rivers from the west. These mighty streams united, are borne down with increasing majesty, through vast forests and meadows, and dis­charged into the Gulf of Mexico. The great length and uncommon depth of this river, says Mr. Hutchins, and the excessive muddiness and salu­brious quality of its waters, after its junction with the Missouri, are very singular. * The direction of the channel is so crooked, that from New Orleans to the mouth of the Ohio, a distance which does not exceed four hundred and sixty miles in a strait line, is about eight hun­dred and fifty-six by water. It may be shortened at least two hundred and fifty miles, by cutting across eight or ten necks of land, some of which are not thirty yards wide. Charlevoix relates that in the year 1722, at Point Coupee or Cut Point, the river made a great turn, and some Canadians, by deepening the channel of a small brook, diverted the waters of the river into it. The impetuosity of the stream was so violent, and the soil of so rich and loose a quality, that, in a short time the point was entirly cut through, and travellers saved fourteen leagues of their voyage. The old bed has no water in it, the times of the periodical overflowings only excepted. The new channel has been since sounded with a line of thirty fathoms, without finding bot­tom. Several other points, of great extent, have, in like manner, been since cut off, and the river diverted into new channels.

In the spring floods the Missisippi is very high, and the current so strong that it is with difficulty it can be ascended; but this disadvan­tage is remedied in some measure by eddies or counter currents, which are generally found in the bends close to the banks of the river, and assist the ascending boats. The current at this season descends at the rate of about five miles an hour. In autumn, when the waters are low, it does not run faster than two miles, but it is rapid in such parts of the river, as have clusters of islands, shoals and sand banks. The [Page 156] circumference of many of these shoals being several miles, the [...] is longer and in some parts more dangerous than in the spring. [...] merchandize necessary for the commerce of the upper settlements [...] near the Missisippi, is conveyed in the spring and autumn in [...] rowed by eighteen or twenty men, and carrying about sorty [...] From New Orleans to the Illinois, the voyage is commonly per [...] in eight or ten weeks. A prodigious number of islands, some of [...] are of great extent, intersperse that mighty river. Its waters, [...] overflowing its banks below the river lbberville on the east, and [...] river Rouge on the west, never return within them again, there [...] many outlets or streams, by which they are conducted into the [...] Mexico, more especially on the west side of the Missisippi, [...] the country into numerous islands. These singularities distinguish [...] from every other known river in the world. Below the Ibberville the land begins to be very low on both sides of the river, across the country, and gradually declines as it approaches nearer to the [...]. The island of New Orleans, and the lands opposite, are to all appear­ance of no long date; for in digging ever so little below the surface, you find water and great quantities of trees. The many beeches and breakers, as well as [...]nlets, which have arisen out of the channel with [...] the last half century, at the several mouths of the river, are convi [...] proofs that this peninsula was wholly formed in the same manner. And it is certain that when La Salle sailed down the Missisippi [...] the sea, the opening of that river was very different from what it [...] at present.

The nearer you approach to the sea, this truth becomes more [...] ­ing. The bars that cross most of these small channels, opened by the current, have been multiplied by means of the trees carried down with the streams▪ one of which, stopped by its roots or branches in a shal­low part, is sufficient to obstruct the passage of thousands more, and to fix them at the same place. Astonishing collections of trees [...] daily seen in passing between the Balize and the Missouri. No human force is sufficient to remove them, and the mud carried down by the river serves to bind and cement them together. They are gradually covered, and every inundation not only extends their length and breadth, but adds another layer to their height. In less than ten years time, canes, shrubs and aquatick timber grow on them, and form [...] and islands, which forcibly shift the bed of the river.

Nothing can be asserted with certainty, respecting the length of this river. Its source is not known, but supposed to be upwards of three thousand miles from the sea as the river runs. We only know, that from St. Antony's falls in lat. 43° it glides with a pleasant clear c [...] ­ [...]ent, and receives many large and very extensive tributary streams, be­fore its junction with the Missouri, without greatly increasing the breadth of the Missisippi, though they do its depth and rapidity. The muddy waters of the Missouri discolour the lower part of the river, till it empties into the Bay of Mexico. The Missouri is a longe [...], broader, and deeper river than the Missisippi, and affords a more ex­tensive navigation; it is in fact the principal river, contributing [...] [...]o the common stream than does the Missisippi. It has been ascend­ed by French traders about twelve or thirteen hundred miles, and [...] the depth of water, and breadth of the river at that distance, it app [...] ­ed to be navigable many miles further.

[Page 157] From the Missouri river, to nearly opposite the Ohio, the western bank of the Missisippi, is (some few places excepted) higher than the eastern. From Mine au fer, to the Ibberville, the eastern bank is high­er than the western, on which there is not a single discernible rising or eminence, the distance of seven hundred and fifty miles. From the Ibberville to the sea, there are no eminences on either side, though the eastern bank appears rather the highest of the two, as far as the English turn. Thence the banks gradually diminish in height to the mouths of the river, where they are but a few feet higher than the common surface of the water.

The slime which the annual floods of the river Missisippi leaves on the surface of the adjacent shores, may be compared with that of the Nile, which deposits a similar manure, and for many centuries past has insured the fertility of Egypt. When its banks shall have been cultivated, as the excellency of its soil and temperature of the climate deserve, its population will equal that of any other part of the world. The trade, wealth and power of America, may, at some future pe­riod, depend, and perhaps centre upon the Missisippi. This also re­sembles the Nile in the number of its mouths, all issuing into a sea that may be compared to the Mediterranean, which is bounded on the north and south by the two continents of Europe and Africa, as the Mexican bay is by North and South America. The smaller mouths of this river might be easily stopped up, by means of those floating trees with which the river, during the floods, is always covered. The whole force of the channel being united, the only opening then left would probably grow deep and the bar be removed.

Whoever for a moment, will cast his eye over a map of the town of New Orleans, and the immense country around it, and view its ad­vantageous situation, must be convinced that it, or some place near it, must, in process of time, become one of the greatest marts in the world.

The falls of St. Anthony, in about latitude 45°, received their name from Father Lewis Hennipin, a French missionary, who travelled in­to these parts about the year 1680, and was the first European ever seen by the natives. The whole river, which is more than 250 yards wide, falls perpendicularly about thirty feet, and forms a most pleasing cataract. The rapids below, in the space of three hundred yards, ren­der the descent considerably greater; so that when viewed at a distance, they appear to be much higher than they really are. In the middle of the falls is a small island, about forty feet broad, and somewhat longer, on which grow a few cragged hemlock and spruce trees; and about half way between this island and the eastern shore is a rock, lying at the very edge of the fall, in an oblique position, five or six feet broad, and thirty or forty long. These falls are peculiarly sit­uated, as they are approacable without the least obstruction from any intervening [...]ill or precipice, which cannot be said of any other con­siderable fall, perhaps in the world. The country around is exceed­ingly beautiful. It is not an uninterrupted plain, where the eye finds no relief, but composed of many gentle ascents, which in the spring and summer, are covered with verdure, and interspersed with little groves, that give a pleasing variety to the prospect.

A little distance below the falls, is a small island of about an acre and an half, on which grow a great number of oak trees, almost all the [Page 158] branches of which, able to bear the weight, are, in the proper season of the year, loaded with eagle's nests. Their instinctive wisdom [...] taught them to choose this place, as it is secure, on account of the [...] ­ids above, from the attacks of either man or beast.

From the best accounts that can be obtained from the Indians, we learn that the four most capital rivers on the continent of North A­merica, viz. The St. Lawrence, the Missisippi, the river [...] and the Oregon, or the river of the West, have their sources in [...] same neighbourhood. The waters of the three former, are said [...] within thirty miles of each other; the latter is rather farther west.

This shews that these parts are the highest lands in North America▪ and it is an instance not to be paralleled in the other three quarte [...] of the globe, that four rivers of such magnitude should take their [...] to­gether, and each, after running separate courses, discharge their [...] into different oceans, at the distance of more than two thousand miles from their sources. For in their passage from this spot to the bay [...] St. Lawrence, east; to the bay of Mexico, south; to Hudson's Bay, north; and to the bay at the straits of Annian, west; where the [...] Oregon is supposed to empty, each of them traverses upwards of [...] thousand miles.

The Ohio is a most beautiful river. Its current gentle, waters clea [...] and bosom smooth and unbroken by rocks and rapids, a single instance only excepted. It is one quarter of a mile wide at Fort Pitt: [...] hundred yards at the mouth of the Great Kanhaway: 1200 yards [...] Louisville; and the rapids, half a mile, in some few places below Louisville: but its general breadth does not exceed 600 yards. [...] some places its width is not 400, and in one place particularly, [...] below the rapids, it is less than 300. Its breadth in no one place [...] ­ceeds 1200 yards, and at its junction with the Missisippi, neither river is more than 900 yards wide. *

Its length, as measured according to its meanders by Capt. Hutchin [...], is as follows:

From Fort Pitt Miles.
To Log's Town 18½
Big Beaver Creek 10¾
Little Beaver Creek 13½
Yellow Creek 11¾
Two Creeks 21¾
Long Reach 53¾
End Long Reach 16½
Muskingum 26½
Little Kanhaway 12¼
Hockhocking 16
Great Kanhaway 82½
Guiandot 43¾
Sandy Creek 14½
Sioto 48¾
To Little Miami 126¼
Licking Creek 8
Great Miami 26¾
Big Bones 32½
Kentucky 44½
Rapids 77¼
Low Country [...]55¼
Buffalo River 64½
Wabash 97¼
Big Cave 42¼
Shawnee River 52 [...];
Cherokee River 13
Massac 11
Missisippi 46
  1188

[Page 159] In common winter and spring floods, it affords 30 or 40 feet water to Louisville, 25 or 30 feet to La Tarte's rapids, forty miles above the mouth of the great Kanhaway, and a sufficiency at all times for light batteaux and canoes to Fort Pitt. The rapids are in latitude 38° 8′. The inundations of this river begin about the last of March, and sub­side in July, although they frequently happen in other months, so that boats which carry 300 barrels of flour, from the Monongahela, or Youhiogany, above Pittsburg, have seldom long to wait for water only. During these floods a first rate man of war may be carried from Louis­ville to New Orleans, if the sudden turns of the river and the strength of its current will admit a safe steerage; and it is the opinion of Col. Morgan, who has had all the means of information, that a vessel pro­perly built for the sea, to draw 1 [...] feet water, when loaded, and carry­ing from 12 to 1600 barrels of flour, may be more easily, cheaply and safely navigated from Pittsburg to the sea, than those now in use; and that this matter only requires one man of capacity and enterprize to ascertain it. He observes that a vessel intended to be rigged as a brig­antine, snow, or ship, should be double decked, take her masts on deck, and be rowed to the Ibberville, below which are no islands, or to New Orleans, with 20 men, so as to afford reliefs of 10 and 10 in the night. Such a vessel, without the use of oars, he says, would float to New Orleans, from Pittsburg, in 20 times 24 hours. If this be so, what a­ [...]greeable prospects are presented to our brethren and fellow citizens, in the western country.

The rapids at Louisville descend about 10 feet in a length of a mile and a half. The bed of the river there is a solid rock, and is divided by an island into two branches, the southern of which is about two hun­dred yards wide, but impassable in dry seasons. The bed of the northern branch is worn into channels by the constant course of the water, and attrition of the pebble stones carried on with that, so as to be pass­able for batteaux through the greater part of the year. Yet it is thought that the southern arm may be most easily opened for constant navi­gation. The rise of the waters in these rapids does not exceed 20 or 25 feet. We have a fort, situated at the head of the falls. The ground on the south side rises very gradually.

At Fort Pitt the river Ohio looses its name, branching into the Mo­nongahela and Allegany.

The Monongahela is four hundred yards wide at its mouth. From thence is twelve or fifteen miles to the mouth of Yohogany, where it is three hundred yards wide. Thence to Red stone by water is 50 miles, by land thirty. Then to the mouth of Cheat river, by water forty miles, by land twenty eight, the width continuing at three hun­dred yards, and the navigation good for boats. Thence the width is about two hundred yards to the western fork, fifty miles higher, and the navigation frequently interrupted by rapids; which, however, with a swell of two or three feet, become very passable for boats. It then admits light boats, except in dry seasons, sixty five miles further, in the head of Tygart's valley, presenting only some small rapids and falls of one or two feet perpendicular, and lessening in its width to twenty yards. The Western fork is navigable in the winter ten or fifteen miles towards the northern of the Little Kanhaway, and will admit a good waggon road to it. The Yohogany is the principal branch of this river. It passes through the Laurel mountain, about thirty [Page 160] miles from its mouth; is, so far, from three hundred to one▪ [...] and fifty yards wide, and the navigation much obstructed in dry [...] ­ther by rapids and shoals. In its passage through the mounta [...] [...] makes very great falls, admitting no navigation for ten miles, [...] Turkey foot. Thence to the Great Crossing, about twenty miles, [...] again navigable, except in dry seasons, and at this place is two hun­dred yards wide. The sources of this river are divided from [...] the Patomak by the Allegany mountain. From the falls, where [...] ­tersects the Laurel mountain, to Fort Cumberland, the head [...] navigation on the Patomak, is forty miles of very mountainous [...] Will's creek, at the mouth of which was Fort Cumberland, is [...] or forty yards wide, but affords no navigation as yet. Ch [...]t [...] another considerable branch of the Monongahela, is two [...] yards wide at its mouth, and one hundred yards at the Dunka [...] [...] ­tlement, fifty miles higher. It is navigable for boats, except [...] seasons. The boundary between Virginia and Pennsylvania [...] about three or four miles above its mouth.

The Allegany river, affords navigation at all seasons for light bat­teaux to Venango, at the mouth of French creek, where [...] hundred yards wide; and it is practised even to Le B [...]uf, from [...] there is a portage of fifteen miles and a half to Presque Isle on [...] Erie.

The country watered by the Mississippi and its eastern bra [...] [...] constitutes five-eighths of the United States; two of which five [...] are occupied by the Ohio and its waters: the residuary streams, [...] run into the Gulf of Mexico, the Atlantic, and the St. Lawrence water the remaining three-eights.

Before we quit the subject of the western waters, we will [...] view of their principal connections with the Atlantic. Th [...]se [...] sour, the Hudson's river, the Patomak, St. Lawrence and [...] Down the last will pass all the heavy commodities. But the [...] ­gation through the Gulf of Mexico is so dangerous, and that [...] Missisippi so difficult and tedious, that it is thought probable that [...] ­ropean merchandize will not be conveyed through that channel. [...] is most likely that flour, timber, and other heavy articles [...] be floated on rafts, which will themselves be an article for [...] as well as their loading, the navigators returning by [...] as at present. There will therefore be a competition [...] the Hudson, the Patomak and the St. Lawrence rivers, for [...] residue of the commerce of all the country westward of Lake [...] on the waters of the lakes of the Ohio, and upper parts of Missi­sippi. To go to New York, that part of the trade which [...] [...] the lakes or their waters, must first be brought into Lake Erie. [...] be­tween Lake Superior and its waters, and Huron, are the rapids [...] Marie, which will permit boats to pass, but not larger vessels. [...] Huron and Michigan afford communication with Lake Erie by [...] of eight feet draught. That part of the trade which comes [...] the waters of the Missisippi, must pass from them through [...] portage into the waters of the lakes. The portage from the [...] river into a water of Michigan, is of one mile only. From the [...] Miami, Muskingum, or Allegany, are portages into the waters of [...] Erie, of from one to fifteen miles. When the commodities are [...] into and have passed through Lake Erie, there is between that [...] Ontario an interruption by the falls of Niagara, where the [...] [Page 161] is of eight miles; and between Ontario and the Hudson's river are portages of the falls of Onondago, a little above Oswego, of a quarter of a mile; from Wood creek to the Mohawks river two miles; at the little falls of the Mohawks river half a mile, and from Schenectady to Alb [...]ny sixteen miles. Besides the increase of expense occasioned by frequent change of carriage, there is an increased risk of pillage produced by committing merchandize to a greater number of hands [...]ssively. The Patomak offers itself under the following circum­ [...]nce. For the trade of the lakes and their waters westward of Lake [...] when it shall have entered that lake, must coast along its south­ern shore, on account of the number and excellence of its harbours; [...] northern, though shortest, having few harbours, and these unsafe. [...]ing reached Cayahoga, to proceed on to New York, it will have [...] hundred and twenty-five miles and five portages; whereas it is but [...] hundred and twenty five miles to Alexandria, its emporium on the Patomak, if it turns into the Cayahoga, and passes through that, Bi [...]eaver, Ohio, Yohoganey, (or Monongalia and Cheat) and Pato­mak, and there are but two portages; the first of which, between Cay­ahoga and Beaver, may be removed by uniting the sources of these [...], which are lakes in the neighbourhood of each other, and in a champaign country; the other, from the waters of Ohio to Patomak, will be from fifteen to forty miles, according to the trouble which [...] be taken to approach the two navigations. For the trade of the [...] or that which shall come into it from its own waters or the Missisippi, it is nearer through the Patomak to Alexandria than to New York, by five hundred and eighty miles, and it is interrupted by one portage only. There is another circumstance of difference too. The [...]kes themselves never freeze, but the communications between [...] freeze, and the Hudson's river is itself shut up by the ice three [...] in the year; whereas the channel to the Chesapeek leads [...] into a warmer climate. The southern parts of it very rarely [...] at all, and whenever the northern do, it is so near the sources of the rivers, that the frequent floods, to which they are there liable, [...] up the ice immediately, so that vessels may pass through the whole winter, subject only to accidental and short delays. Add to all [...], that in case of a war with our neighbours of Canada, or the In­dians, the rout to New-York becomes a frontier through almost its whole length, and all commerce through it ceases from that moment. But the channel to New-York is already known to practice; where­as, the [...]per waters of the Ohio and the Patomak, and the great falls of the latter, are yet to be cleared of their fixed obstructions.

The rout by St. Lawrence is well known to be attended with many advantages, and with some disadvantages: But there is a fifth rout, which the enlightened and enterprizing Pennsylvanians contemplate▪ which, if effected, will be the easiest, cheapest and surest passage from the lakes, and Ohio river, by means of the Susquehanna, and a [...] from thence to Philadelphia. The latter part of this plan, viz. the [...] between Susquehannah and the Schuylkill rivers, is now actual­ly [...] execution. Should they accomplish their whole scheme, [...] they appear confident of success, Philadelphia, in all probability [...] become, in some future period, the largest city that has ever yet [...].

Particular descriptions of the other rivers in the United States, are reserved to be given in the geographical account of those states, through [Page 162] which they respectively flow. One general observation respective [...] rivers will, however, be naturally introduced here, and that i [...] [...] the entrance into almost all the rivers, inlets and bays, from [...] Hampshire to Georgia, are from southeast to northwest.

BAYS.] The coast of the United Sates is indented with [...] bays, some of which are equal in size to any in the known [...]. Beginning at the northeasterly part of the continent, and pro [...] southwesterly, you first find the bay or gulf of St. Lawrenc▪ [...] receives the waters of the river of the same name. Next are [...] to and Chebukto Bays, in Nova-Scotia, the latter distinguished [...] loss of a French fleet in a former war between France and G. Britain▪ [...] Bay of Fundy, between Nova-Scotia and New-Brunswick, is [...] for its tides, which rise to the height of fifty or sixty feet, and flow so [...] ­ly as to overtake animals which feed upon the shore. Passa [...] Penobscot, Broad and Casco Bays, lie along the coast of the [...] Maine. Massachusetts Bay spreads eastward of Boston, and is compre­hended between Cape Ann on the north, and Cape Cod on the [...]. The points of Boston harbour are Nahant and Alderton points. [...] by Narraganset and other bays in the state of Rhode Island, you [...] Long Island found, between Montauk point and and the main. [...] Sound, as it is called, is a kind of inland sea, from three to twenty [...] miles broad, and about one hundred and forty miles long, [...] the whole length of the island, and dividing it from Connecticut. It communicates with the ocean at both ends of Long Island, and [...] fords a very safe and convenient inland navigation.

The celebrated strait, called Hell-Gate, is near the west end of [...] sound, about eight miles eastward of New York city, and is [...] able for its whirlpools, which make a tremendous roaring at [...] times of tide. These whirlpools are occasioned by the [...] and crookedness of the pass, and a bed of rocks which [...] quite across it; and not by the meeting of the tides from east to [...] as has been conjectured, because they meet at Frogs' point, several [...] above. A skilful pilot may with safety, conduct a ship of any [...] ­den through this strait with the tide, or, at still water, with a [...] wind *.

[Page 163] Delaware Bay is sixty miles long. from the Cape to the entrance of the river Delaware at Bombay hook; and so wide in some parts, as that a ship, in the middle of it, cannot be seen from the land. It opens into the Atlantic northwest and southeast, between Cape Hen­ [...]pen on the right, and Cape May on the left. These Capes are eigh­teen or twenty miles apart.

The Chesapeek is one of the largest bays in the known world. Its entrance is nearly E. N. E. and S. S. W. between Cape Charles, lat. [...]7° 12, and Cape Henry, lat. 37°. in Virginia, twelve miles wide, and it extends two hundred and seventy miles to the northward, dividing Virginia and Maryland. It is from seven to eighteen miles broad, and generally as much as nine fathoms deep; affording many commodious [...]bours, and a safe and easy navigation. It receives the waters of the Susquehannah, Patomak, Rappahannok, York and James rivers, which are all large and navigable.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY.} The tract of country belonging to the United States, is happily variegated with plains and moun­tains, hills and vallies. Some parts are rocky, particularly New Eng­land, the north parts of New York, and New Jersey, and a broad space, including the several ridges of the long range of mountains which run southwestward through Pennsylvania, Virginia, North Carolina, and part of Georgia, dividing the waters which flow into the Atlant­ic, from those which fall into the Missisippi. In the parts east of the Allegany mountains, in the southern states, the country for several hundred miles in length, and sixty or seventy, and sometimes more, in breadth, is level and entirely free from stone. It has been a question agitated by the curious, whether the extensive tract of low, flat coun­try, which fronts the several states south of New York, and extends back to the hills, has remained in its present form and situation ever since the flood: or whether it has been made by the particles of earth which have been washed down from the adjacent mountains, and by the accumulation of soil from the decay of vegetable substances; or by earth washed out of the bay of Mexico by the Gulf Stream, and lodged on the coast: or by the recess of the ocean, occasioned by a charge in some other parts of the earth. Several phenomena deserve consideration in forming an opinion on this question.

1. It is a fact, well known to every person of observation who has lived in, or travelled through the southern states, that marine shells and other substances which are peculiar to the sea shore, are almost invariably found by digging eighteen or twenty feet below the surface of the earth. A gentleman of veracity told me, that in sinking a well many miles from the sea, he found, at the depth of twenty feet, every appearance of a salt marsh, that is, marsh grass, marsh mud, and brack­ish water. In all this flat country, until you come to the hilly land, wherever you dig a well, you find the water, at a certain depth, fresh and tolerable good; but if you exceed that depth two or three feet, you [Page 164] come to a saltish or brackish water that is scarcely drinkable, and [...] earth dug up, resembles, in appearance and smell, that which is dug [...] on the edges of the salt marshes.

2. On and near the margin of the rivers are frequently found [...] hills, which appear to have been drifted into ridges by the force of water. At the bottom of some of the banks in the rivers, fifteen [...] twenty feet below the surface of the earth, are washed out from [...] solid ground, logs, branches and leaves of trees; and the whole [...] from bottom to top, appears streaked with [...] of logs, leaves [...] sand. These appearances are seen far up the rivers, from eighty to [...] hundred miles from the sea, where, when the rivers are low, the [...] are from fifteen to twenty feet high. As you proceed down the [...] ­ers toward the sea, the banks decrease in height, but still are [...] of layers of sand, leaves and logs, some of which are entirely [...] and appear to have been suddenly covered to a considerable depth.

3. It has been observed that the rivers in the southern states, [...] ­quently vary their channels; that the swamps and low grounds [...] constantly filling up, and that the land, in many places, annually [...] fringes upon the ocean. It is an authenticated fact, that no longer [...] go than 1771, at Cape Lookout, on the coast of North Carolina, [...] about latitude 34° 50′, there was an excellent harbour, capa [...] enough to receive an hundred sail of shipping at a time, in a good depth of water. It is now entirely filled up, and is solid ground. Instance of this kind are frequent along the coast.

It is observable, likewise, that there is a gradual descent of [...] eight hundred feet, by measurement, from the foot of the mountains [...] the sea board. This descent continues, as is demonstrated by so [...] ­ings, far into the sea.

4. It is worthy of observation, that the soil on the banks of the [...] ­ers is proportionably coarse or fine according to its distance from the mountains. When you first leave the mountains, and for a considera­ble distance, it is observable, that the soil is coarse, with a large mixt [...] of sand and shining heavy particles. As you proceed toward the [...] the soil is less coarse, and so on, in proportion as you advance, the [...] is finer and finer, until, finally, is deposited a soil so fine, that it [...] ­solidates into perfect clay; but a clay of a peculiar quality, for a gr [...] part of it has intermixed with it reddish streaks and veins, like a [...] ­cies of ochre, brought probably from the red-lands which lie up towards the mountains. This clay, when dug up and exposed to the weather, will dissolve into a fine mould, without the least mixture of sand or any gritty substance whatever. Now we know that running waters, when turbid, will deposit, first, the coarsest and heaviest particles, [...] ­diately, those of the several intermediate degrees of fineness, and ulti­mately, those which are the most light and subtle; and such in fact is the general quality of the soil on the banks of the southern rivers.

5. It is a well known fact, that on the banks of Savannah river, about ninety miles from the sea in a direct line, and one hundred and fifty or two hundred, as the river runs, there is a very remarkable col­lection of oyster shells of an uncommon size. They run in a northeast and southwest direction, nearly parallel to the sea coast, in [...] distinct ridges, which together occupy a space of seven miles in breadth. The ridges commence at Savannah river, and have been traced [...] south as the northern branches of the Alatamaha river. They [...] found in such quantities, as that the indigo planters carry them away [Page 165] in large boat loads, for the purpose of making lime water, to be used in the manufacture of indigo. There are thousands and thousands of tons still remaining. * The question is, how came they here? It can­not be supposed that they were carried by land. Neither is it proba­ble that they were conveyed in canoes, or boats, to such a distance from the place where oysters are now found. The uncivilized natives, agreeably to their roving manner of living, would rather have remov­ed to the sea shore, than have been at such immense labour in procur­ing oysters. Besides, the difficulties of conveying them would have been insurmountable. They would not only have had a strong current in the river against them, an obstacle which would not have been easily overcome by the Indians, who have ever had a great aversion to labour, but could they have surmounted this difficulty, oysters, conveyed such a distance, either by land or water, in so warm a climate, would have spoiled on the passage, and have become useless. The circumstance of these shells being found in such quantities, at so great a distance from the sea, can be rationally accounted for in no other way, than by sup­posing that the sea shore was formerly near this bed of shells, and that the ocean has since, by the operation of certain causes not yet fully investigated, receded. These phenomena, it is presumed, will autho­rize this conclusion, That a great part of the flat country which spreads easterly of the Allegany mountains, had, in some past period, a super­incumbent sea; or rather, that the constant accretion of soil from the various causes before hinted at, has forced it to retire.

MOUNTAINS.] The tract of country east of Hudson's river, com­prehending part of the State of New-York, the four New-England States, and Vermont, is rough, hilly, and in some parts mountainous. These mountains will be more particularly described under New-Eng­land. In all parts of the world, and particularly on this western conti­nent, it is observable, that as you depart from the ocean, or from a river, the land gradually rises; and the height of land, in common, is about e­qually distant from the water on either side. The Andes, in South-A­merica, form the height of land between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. The highlands between the District of Maine and the Province of Lower Canada, divide the rivers which fall into the St. Lawrence, north, and into the Atlantic, south. The Green Mountains, in Vermont, divide [...]he waters which flow easterly into Connecticut river, from those [Page 166] which fall westerly into Lake Champlain, Lake George, and Hud­son's River.

Between the Atlantic, the Missisippi, and the Lakes, runs [...] range of mountains, made up of a great number of ridges. The [...] mountains extend northeasterly and southwesterly, nearly [...] the sea coast, about nine hundred miles in length, and from [...] one hundred and fifty, and two hundred miles in breadth. Mr. [...] observes, with respect to that part of these mountains which he [...] ­led over, viz. in the back parts of Pennsylvania, that scarcely [...] [...] in ten is capable of culture. This, however, is not the case in all [...] of this range. Numerous tracts [...]f fine arable and grazing land [...] ­vene between the ridges. The different ridges which compose [...] immense range of mountains, have different names in different [...].

As you advance from the Atlantic, the first ridge in Pennsylvania, Virginia, and North Carolina, is the Blue Ridge or South [...] which is from one hundred and thirty, to two hundred miles from the sea. Between this and the North Mountain, spreads a large [...] ­vale; next lies the Allegany ridge; next beyond this is the [...] Ridge, called the Laurel Mountains, in a spur of which, about [...] 36°, is a spring of water, fifty feet deep, very cold, and it is [...] blue as indigo. From these several ridges, proceed innumerable [...] ­less branches or spurs. The Kittatinny mountains run through [...] northern parts of New-Jersey and Pennsylvania. All these [...] except the Allegany, are separated by rivers, which appear to [...] forced their passages through solid rocks.

The principal ridge is the Allegany, which has been descri [...] called the back bone of the United States. The general name for [...] mountains, taken collectively, seems not yet to have been determined▪ Mr. Evans calls them the Endless Mountains: Others have called [...] the Appalachian mountains, from a tribe of Indians, who live [...] river which proceeds from this mountain, called the Appalachian. But the most common, name i [...] the Allegany Mountains, so called, either from the principal ridge of the range, or from their running [...] parallel to the Allegany or Ohio river; which, from its head [...] till it empties into the Missisippi, is known and called by the [...] Allegany river, by the Seneca and other tribes of the Six Nations, who [...] inhabited it. These mountains are not confusedly scattered and [...] ­en, rising here and there into high peaks, overtopping each other▪ [...] stretch along in uniform ridges, scarcely half a mile high. They [...] as you proceed south, and some of them terminate in high perpendicu­lar bluffs. Others gradually subside into a level country, giving rise [...] the rivers which run southerly into the Gulf of Mexico.

They afford many curious phenomena, from which naturalists have deduced many theories of the earth. Some of them have been [...] ­sical enough▪ Mr. Evans supposes that the most obvious of the [...] ­ries which have been formed of the earth is, that it was originally [...] out of the ruins of another. "Bones and shells which escaped the [...] of softer animal substances, we find mixed with the old materials, and elegantly preserved in the loose stones and rocky bases of the highest of these hills." With deference, however, to Mr. Evans's opinion, these appearances have been much more rationally accounted for by supposing the reality of the flood, of which Moses has given us [...] count. Mr. Evans thinks this too great a miracle to obtain [...]. But whether is it a greater miracle for the Creator to alter a globe of [Page 167] earth by a deluge, when made, or to create one new from the ruin [...] of another? The former certainly is not less credible than the latter.—"These mountains," says our author, "existed in their present elevated height before the deluge, but not so bare of soil as now." How Mr. Evans came to be so circumstantially acquainted with these pretended facts, is difficult to determine, unless we suppose him to have been an Antediluvian, and to have surveyed them accurately before the convul­sions of the deluge; and until we can be fully assured of this, we must be excused in not assenting to his opinion, and in adhering to the old philosophy of Moses and his advocates. We have every reason to be­lieve that the primitive state of the earth was totally metamorphosed by the first convulsion of nature, at the time of the deluge; that the fountains of the great deep were indeed broken up, and that the various strata of the earth were dissevered, and thrown into every possible degree of confusion and disorder. Hence those vast piles of mountains which lift their craggy cliffs to the clouds, were probably thrown together from the floating ruins of the earth: And this conjecture is remarka­bly confirmed by the vast number of fossils and other marine exuvioe which are found imbeded on the tops of mountains, in the interior parts of continents remote from the sea, in all parts of the world hither­to explored. The various circumstances attending these marine bodies, leave us to conclude, that they were actually generated, lived, and died in the very beds wherein they were found, and therefore these beds must have originally been at the bottom of the ocean, though now in many instances elevated several miles above its surface. Hence it ap­pears that mountains and continents were not primary productions of nature, but of a very distant period of time from the creation of the world; a time long enough for the strata to have acquired their great­est degree of cohesion and hardness; and for the testaccous matter of marine shells to become changed to a stony substance; for in the fis­sures of the lime-stone and other strata, fragments of the same shell have been frequently found adhering to each side of the cleft, in the very state in which they were originally broken; so that if the several parts were brought together▪ they would apparently tally with each other exactly. A very considerable time therefore must have elapsed be­tween the chaotic state of the earth and the deluge, which agrees with the account of Moses, who makes it a little upwards of sixteen hun­dred years. These observations are intended to shew, in one instance out of many others, the agreement between revelation and reason, between the account which Moses gives us of the creation and deluge, and the present appearances of nature. Those who wish to have this agree­ment more fully and satisfactorily stated, are referred to a very learn­ed and ingenious "Inquiry into the original state and formation of the earth," by John Whitchurst, F. R. S. to whom I acknowledge myself indebted for some of the foregoing observations.

SOIL AND VEGETABLE PRODUCTIONS.} In the United States are to be found every species of soil that the earth af­fords. In one part of them or another, they produce all the various kinds of fruits, grain▪ pulse and hortuline plants and roots, which are found in Europe, and have been thence transplanted to America. Besides these, a great variety of native, vegetable productions.

The natural history of the American States, particularly of New­England, is yet in its infancy. Several ingenious foreigners, skilled in Botany, have visited the southern, and some of the middle States, [Page 168] and Canada; and these States have also had ingenious [...] their own, who have made considerable progress in describing the [...] ­tions of those parts of America which they have visited; [...] England seems not to have engaged the attention, either of [...] or American Botanists. There was never an attempt to descri [...] [...] ­tanically, the vegetable productions of the eastern states, till [...] Doct. Cutler, of Ipswich, turned his attention to the subject. [...] result of his first enquiries was published in the first volume [...] "Memoirs of the American Academy of Arts and Science." [...] that period, the Doctor has paid very particular attention to [...] favourite study;s and the public may shortly expect to be [...] and improved by his botanical descriptions and discoveries. * [...] liberal and generous communications, I am principally indeb [...] the following account of the vegetable productions of the easter [...] middle States.

N. B. The following catalogues are all incomplete, and [...] only to give general ideas. They contain, however, more [...] formation concerning the Natural History of New-England, than [...] yet been published.

Grain, cultivated in the Eastern and Middle States.} Indian Corn (Zea mays) a native [...] of N. America. The varieties of this [...] occasioned by difference in soil, cultiva­tion and climate, are almost endless. Winter and summer rye ( [...] ­cale cereale, hybernum et vernum,) the only species cultivated by our farmers. The winter rye succeeds best in ground newly [...], but summer rye is frequently sown in old towns, where the land [...] been long under cultivation. The winter and summer rye are the same species, forming two varieties; but the winter and summer wh [...] are two distinct species. Several species of barely are cultivated, the most common is the six ranked (Hordeum hexastichon,) and the [...] ranked (Hordeum distichon.) The wheat principally cultivated [...] the winter and summer (Triticum hybernum et aestivum.)—Oats (A [...] ­na sativa.)—Buck-wheat (Polygonum fagopi [...]um.)

In the southern States, as far north as Virginia, where the lands are suitable, besides the grain already mentioned, they cultivate rice.—This grain was brought into Carolina first by Sir Nathaniel Johnson, in 1688; and afterwards more and of a different kind, probably a va­riety, was, imported by a ship from Madagascar▪ in 1696; till which [Page 169] time it was not much cultivated. It succeeds well also on the Ohio river, where it is planted both on the high and low grounds, and in the same fields with Indian corn and other grain. A gentleman who had planted it several years in his garden, informed Dr. Cutler that it yielded at the rate of 80 bushels an acre. At Marietta, it has answer­ed the most sanguine expectations of the inhabitants, producing equal to any other grain, without being at any time overflowed with water. The Doctor himself saw it growing in a very flourishing state, on high land, but it had not, at the season he saw it, began to bloom. It was said not to be of the same species of the Carolina rice. It is prob­ably the wild rice, which I have been informed grows in plenty, in some of the interior parts of North America, and is the most valuable of all the spontaneous productions of the country. In Pennsylvania grows a sort of grain called, by the Germans, Spelts, which resembles wheat; and is a very valuable grain.

Cultivated Grasses in the Eastern and Middle States.} All the grasses, cultivated in the middle and New-England States, are found growing indigenous. It is not improbable, however, that some of them may be naturalized exotics. The following are the principal grasses sown in our cultivated ground, or in any way propa­gated for feed and hay.

Herd's Grass or Fox Tail, (Alopecurus pratensis,) this is reckoned the best grass we have, is a native, and supposed to be peculiar to this country. Blue Grass (Alopecurus geniculatus.)—Many species of Bent. (Agrostis,) Particularly the Rhode Island Bent (Agrostis inter­rupta?) The small and great English grass (Poa trivialis et pratensis.)—Wire grass (Poa compressa.)—Fowl Meadow grass (Poa aviaria, spi­culis subb [...]floris.) * Red and white Clover (Trifolium pratense et re­pens.)

The grasses of Virginia, according to Mr. Jefferson, are Lucerne, St. Foin, Burnet, Timothy, Ray and Orchard grass, red, white and yellow Clover; Greenswerd, Blue grass and Crab grass. South of Virginia very little attention is paid to the cultivation of grasses. The winters are so mild, that the cattle find a tolerable supply of food in the woods.

Native Grasses in New-England.} Besides the cultivated grasses, the States of New-England abound with a great va­riety which are found growing in their native soils and situations, many of which have not been described by any botanical writers. The small experiments which have been made, sufficiently evince that several of them make excellent hay. They might be greatly improv­ed by cultivation, and are highly worthy the attention of our farmers. Those which are found most common are the following, viz.

The vernal grass (Anthoxanthum odoratum.)—Timothy, or bulbus cat's tail grass (Phlcum pratense.)—Several species of Panic grass (Panicum)—Several species of bent (Agrostis)—Hair grass (Aira aqua­tica)—Numerous species of Poa▪—Quaking grass, (Briza) several spe­cies—Cock's foot grass (Dactylis glomerata)—Millet (Milium effusum)—Fescue grass (Festuco) many species—Oat grass (Avena spicata)—Reed grass (Arundo) several species—Brome grass (Bromus squarrosus)—Lime grass (Elymus hystrix)—Barley grass (Hordeum pratense)—Dog's or couch grass (Triticum repens)—Many species of rush grass [Page 170] (Juncus)—Numerous species of Carex, in fresh and salt, marshy [...] Several species of Beard grass (Andropogon)—Soft grass, ( [...] lanatus et odoratus)—Besides these, there are many valuable [...] which, at present, are non-descripts.

Wild Fruits in New-England.] Black Currant (Ribes [...] Gooseberry (Ribes glossularia)—Prickly Gooseberry (Ribes [...] bati)—Two species of Grapes—the Black grape (Vitis [...] and Fox grape (Vitis vulpina.) Of these two species we [...] many varieties, differing only in size, colour and taste. An [...] ­lent wine, and in large quantities, has lately been made by [...] French people, at their new settlement on the Ohio river, from [...] native grapes, without any kind of cultivation. They collected [...] grapes promiscuously from all the varieties growing in that [...] By separating them, wines of different, and no doubt some of [...] of a much better quality, might have been made. The native [...] propagated with great ease; its growth is luxuriant, overspread [...] highest trees in the forests, and by proper attention, would aff [...] ample supply of wines, in the northern as well as southern States. [...] principal difficulty seems to be the want of a proper knowledge of [...] process in making wine, and preparing it for use.—Barberry [...] (Berberis vulgaris)—Whortleberry (Vaccinium ligustrinum)— [...] ­berry (Vaccinium corymbosum)—White Whortleberry (Vac [...] albu [...])—Indian Gooseberry (Vaccinium frondosum)—Long [...] Whortleberry (Vaccinium stamineum)—Craneberry (Vaccinium [...] couo [...])—Yellow Plumb (Prunus americana)—Beach Plumb ( [...] marati [...]a▪—Large black cherry (Prunus nigra)—Purple [...] (Prunus virginiana)—Wild red Cherry (Prunus rubra)— [...] [...] Choak Cherry (Prunus canadensis)—Mountain Cherry ( [...] [...]ontana).—Service tree (Mespilus canadensis)—Bramble [...] (Rubus occidentalis)—Sawteat Blackberry or Bumblekites ( [...] ­fruticosus)—Briar Blackberry (Rubus moluccanus)—Dewberry (Rubus hispidus)—Common Raspberry (Rubus idaeus)—Smo [...] stalked Raspberry (Rubus canadensis)—Superb Raspberry ( [...] ­odoratus)—Strawberry (Fragaria vesca.) The native strawberry is much improved by cultivation, and produces a larger and better flavoured fruit, than the exotic.—Mulberry (Morus nigra.)

For information on this article, respecting the Southern States, the reader may consult what Catesby, Clayton, Jefferson and Bartra [...] [...] written upon it.

Nut Fruit.] White Oak (Quercus alba)—Red Oak (Quercus [...] ­bra) and several other species with smaller fruit.—Black Walnut ( [...] ­glans nigra)—White Walnut, Butternut, or Oilnut (Juglans catha [...]—White, or round nut Hiccory (Juglans alba)—Shag-bark Hico [...] (Juglans cineria?) *—Chesnut (Fagus castanca)—Chinquipin, or dwa [...] Chesnut (Fagus pumila)—Beech nut (Fagus sylvatica.)—Ha [...]c [...] (Corylus avallana)—Filbert (Corylus cornuta.)

We may here mention the Paccan or Illinois nut (Juglans alba, [...] ­ [...]lis lanceolatis, acuminatis, serratis, tomentosis, fructu minore, [...] compresso, vix insculpto, dulci, putamine, tenerrimo. Jefferson.) The nut is about the size of a large long acorn, and of an oval form, the shell▪ is easily cracked, and the kernel shaped like that of a [...]. The trees which bear this fruit grow, naturally, on the Missisippi [...] its branches, south of forty degrees north latitude. They grow well when planted in the southern Atlantic States.

[Page 171] Medicinal Plants in New England.} Among the native and uncultivated plants of New England, the following have been em­ployed for medicinal purposes. Water Horehound (Lycopus virgin­ica)—Blue Flag (Iris virginica)—Skunk Cabbage (Arum Americanum▪ Catesh▪ and Dracontium foetidum▪ Linn.)—Partridge-berry (Mitchella rep [...]ns)—Great, and Marsh Plantain (Plantago major et maritima)—Witch Hazel (Hamamelis virginica)—Hounds tongue (Cynog [...]o [...]um officinale)—Comfrey (Symphytum officin.)—Bear's ear Sanicle (Co [...] ­ [...]sa g [...]elini)—Appleperu (Datura strammonium)—Bittersweet (Sola­num dulca-mare)—Tivertwig, or American Maxerion (Celastrus scan­dens)—Elm * (Ulmus americana)—Great Laserwort, and Wild Angel­ica (Laserpitium trilobum, et latifolium)—Angelica, or American [...]erwort (Angelica lucida)—Water Elder (Virburnum opulus)—Elder (Sambucus nigra)—Chickweed (Alfina [...]pedia)—Pettimorrel▪ or Life of man (Aralia racemosa)—Sarsaparilla (Aralia nudicaulis?—Marsh Rosemary (Statice limonium)—Sundew (Drosera rotundifolia)—Solomon's Seal (Convallaria stellata?)—Adder's tongue (Convalla­ria bi [...]olia)—Unicorn (Aletrisfarinosa)—Sweet Flag (Acorus calamus)—Several species of Dock (Rumex)—Bistort (Polygonum bistorta)—Spice wood, or Feverbush (Laurus benzoin)—Sassatras (Laurus saffa­ [...]ras)—Consumption root (Pyrola rotundifolia)—Rheumatism weed (Pyrola minor)—Mouse ear (Cerastium viseosum)—Gargit, or Skok [...] (Phytolacca decandria)—Wild Hyssop (Lythrum hysopis)—Agrimony (Agrimonia eupatoria)—Common Avens, or Her [...] Bennet (Geum Virg.)—Water Avens, or Throat root (Geum rivale)—Blood root, or Puccoon (Sanguinario canadensis)—Celandine (Chelidonium majus)—Yellow Water Lily (Nymphoea lutea)—Pond Lily (Nymphoea alba)—Golden thread, or Mouth root (Nigella?)—Liverwort (Anemone hepatica)—Crowsfoot (Ranunculus Pennsylv.)—Germander (Teucrum Virg.)—Catmint, or Catnip (Nepeta cataria)—Head Betony (Betonica officinalis)—Horsemint, Spearmint, Watermint and Penniroyal (Me [...] ­th [...] spicata, viridis, aquatica, et pulegium)—Ground [...]vy, or Gill go over the ground (Glecoma hederacea)—Hedgene [...]le (Stachys sylvatica)—Horehound (Marruhium vulgare)—Motherwort (Leonurus cardiaca)—Wild Marjorum (Origanum vulgare)—Wild Lavender (Trichostema?) Wood Betony (Pidicularis canadensis)—Shephard's p [...]se or▪ pouch (Th [...]apspi burs. pastoris)—Water Cresses (Sisymbrium nasturtium)—Cranesbill (Geranium macrorhizum)—Marsh Mallow (Althoea officin.)—Mallow (Malva rotundifolia)—Succory (Crepis barba [...]a)—Burdock (Arctium lappa)—Devil's bit (Serratula amara) The root resembles the European Devils bit (Scabivla succisa) from which circumstance the English name has probably been applied to this plant.—Tanley (Tan­ [...]cetum vulgare)—Wormwood (Artemi [...]ia absinthiani)—Life everlasting (Gnaphalium odoratissimum?)—Colts foot (Tussilago farsara)—Golden­rod (Solidago canad.)—Elecampane (Inula helenium)—Mayweed (An­themis cotula)—Yarrow (Achillea millefolia)—American Pride (Lobe­lia cardinalis) Three other species of Lobelia (Lobelia dortmanna, kal [...]ii, et [...]iphilitica)—Dragon root (Arum Virg.)—Stinging Nettle (Urticaurens)—White Walnut, Butter nut, or Oilnut (Juglans cathartica)—Swamp Willow (Salix cinerea?)—Sweet Gale (Myrica gale)—White Hellebore or Pokeroot (Veratrum album)—Moonwort (Osmundalunaria)—Female Fern (Pteris caudata)—Hearts tongue (Alplenium scolopend [...][Page 172] um—Splcenwort (Asplenium salicifolium)—Black Maidenhair (A [...] ­um ad [...]antum.) To the above we may add, Arsmart (Poly [...] Sagitatum. Linn.)

Among a great variety of other medicinal plants in the south [...] and middle States are Pink root ( [...]) an excellent [...] ­fuge—Senna (Cassia ligustrina)—Clivers or Goose grass (Galium [...] ­um)—Palma Christi (Ricinus) from which the Castor oil is [...] ­ed—Several species of Mallow—Indian Physic (Spiraea trif [...] Euphorbia Ipecacuanhae—Pleurisy root (Asclepias decumbens)—V [...] ­ia Snake root (Aristolochia serpentaria)—Black snake root (A [...] ­cemola)—Seneca rattle snake root (Polygala Senega)—Valerian ( [...] ­ria [...]a locusta radiata)—Ginseng (Panax quinquefolium)—Angelica (An­gelica fylvestris)—Cassava (Jatropha urens.)

Flowering Trees and Shrubs in the United States.} Globe flower (Cephalanthus ocei [...] ­lis)—Pigeonberry (Cissus sicyoide [...]) [...] ­ginian Dogwood (Cornus florida)—Conel (Cornus canadens [...])— [...] flowered Honeysuckle (Azalea nudiflora)—White American [...] suckle (Azalea viscosa)—American Tea (Ceanothus americanus)— [...] ­ry Honeysuckle (Lonicera diervilla)—Virginia scarlet Honey [...] (Lonicera virginiana)—Dwarf Cherry Honeysuckle (Lonicera [...] ­densis)—Evergreen spindle Tree (Euonymus sempervirens)—Vir [...] Itea (Itea virginica) Stag's horn Sumach (Rhus typhinum)— [...] Haw (Viburnum prunifolium)—Blackberried Elder (Sambucus [...])—Redberried Elder (Sambucus canadensis)—Scarlet flowered [...] Chestnut (AEsculus pavia)—Judas Tree (Cercis canadensis)— [...] Laurel (Kalmia latifolia)—Dwarf Laurel (Kalmia angustifolia)— [...] leaved Marsh Cistus (Ledum Thymifolium)—American Senna ( [...] dora canadensis)—Rose bay Tree (Rhododendrum maximum)— [...] pepper bush (Andromeda arborea)—Red bud Andromeda (Androme­da racemosa)—Bog evergreen (Andromeda calyculata)— [...] Redbud (Andromeda nitida)—Carolina Iron wood Tree (Andro [...] plumata)—Carolinian Syrianga (Philadelphus inodorus)—Sorbus [...] (Sorbus aucuparia)—Mountain Ash (Sorbus americana) Service [...] (Mespilus canadensis)—Medlar Tree (Mespilus nivea)—Sweet [...] Crab Apple tree (Pyrus coronaria)—Meadow sweet (Spiraea salic [...] ­lia)—Queen of the Meadows (Spiraea tomentosa)—Canadian Spir [...] (Spiraea hypericifolia)—Wild Rose (Rosa carolina)—Pennsylvania Swamp Rose (Rosa palustris)—Superb Raspberry (Rubus odorat [...] Carolian Fothergilla (Fothergilla gardeni)—Tulip Tree (Liriode [...] [...] tulipifera)—Evergreen Tulip Tree (Magnolia grandiflora)— [...] Trumpet flower (Bignonia radicans)—Virginian Stewartia (Stewa [...] malacodendron)—Franklin Tree (Franklinia alatamaha)—Locust [...] (Robinia pseud acacia)—Roseflowered Locust Tree (Robinia rose [...] Swamp Willow (Salix cineria?)—Redflowered Maple (Acer [...].

N. B. The above catalogue is far from being complete, but [...] serve to give a tolerable idea of this class of shrubs, in the United States.

Forest Trees.] Were we possessed of accurate materials for the [...] ­pose, it would far exceed the limits a work embracing such a [...] of subjects, to give a complete catalogue of our trees. From the [...] going catalogues the reader must necessarily conclude that they [...] very numerous. And it ought to be observed that almost all of [...] for some purpose o [...] other, have been used as timber. Some of [...] most useful [...] not be omitted, and are [...] [Page 173] following—ELM (Ulmus americana) Of this tree there is but one spe­cies * of which there are two varieties, the white and the red. WILD CHEERY; many species, highly valued for cabinet work. LOCUST (Ro­binia pseudo-acacia) of quick growth, good for fuel, and excellent for posts to set in the ground, and trunnels for ships. EIRCH; several species, 1. White (Betula alba) 2. Black (Betula nigra) 3. Red or yellow (Betula lenta)—OAK; several species 1. Black (Quercus niger) 2. Red (Quercus rubra) three varieties. 3. White (Quercus alba) 4. Shrub or ground oak (Quercus pumila) 5. Chesnut oak (Quercus prinus) 6. Live oak (Quercus sempervirens—Quercus Virginiana. Millar) 7. Black jack oak (Quercus aquatica, Clayton) The two last are peculiar to the southern States. CHESNUT (Fagus castanea) chiefly used for fencing. BEACH (Fagus sylvatica) three varieties. PINE (Pi­nus) seven species▪ 1. White (Pinus strobus) the prince of the Amer­ican forests, in size, age and majesty of appearance. It is found in the greatest abundance in Maine, New Hampshire, and Vermont—Excel­lent for masts, bowsprits and yards for ships.—2. Yellow (Pinus pinea) its plank and boards are used for the floors of houses and the decks of ships—3. Black or Pitch pine (Pinus taeda) when burnt in kilns it makes the best of charcoal; its knots and roots being full of the ter [...]binthine oil, when kindled, afford a brighter light than candles; its foot is collected and used for lampblack. It grows sparsely in the N. England and middle States, but in the greatest plenty in the south­ern States, between the sea coast and the mountains. From it they [...] tar in large quantities. 4. The Larch (Pinus larix) Its turpen­ti [...]e is said to be the same with the Burgundy pitch. Besides these, naturalists reckon the Fir (Pinus balsamea)—Spruce (Pinus canadensis) [...]Hemlock (Pinusabies)—ARBOR VITAE (Thuya occidentalis) the same [...] what is called WHITE CEDAR. JUNIPER or RED CEDAR (Juni­perns virginica) It produces the Juniperberry. WHITE CEDAR, of the southern States (Cupressus Thyoides) different from the white ce­dar of the northern states. CYPRESS (Cupressus disticha) Found only in the southern states—Used for shingles and other purposes. Grows in swamps, very large. WHITE WILLOW (Salix alba) The bark of its root is an excellent substitute for the Peruvian bark. ASH (Fraxinus americana) two species, Black, or swamp Ash, and White Ash. MAPLE, three species; 1. White (Acer negundo) much used in cabinet work. 2. Red (Acer rubrum) 3. Black Rock or Sugar Maple (Acer saccha [...]inum) Its sap has a saccharine quality; and when refined and hardened by boiling and baking, makes a well tasted and wholesome sugar, the manufacture of which has greatly increased in the eastern and middle States, within a few years past.

There is in the United States, an infinitude of trees of less note, and many probably equally noticeable with those enumerated, for a catalogue and descriptions of which, I must refer the reader, till a more perfect catalogue he furnished by Dr. Cutler and Dr. Ba [...]ton▪ to Catesby's Natural History—Dr. Clayton's Flora Virginica—Mr. Jefferson's Notes on Virginia—Mr. Bartram's Travels through North and South Carolina, &c.—Dr. Cutler's paper in the Memoirs of the American Academy—and Dr. Belknap's History of New Hampshire, Vol. III.

Exotic Fruits.] Of these, Apples are the most common in the [Page 174] United States. They grow in the greatest plenty and variety in [...] eastern and middle States; and the cyder which is expressed [...] them, affords the most common and wholesome liquor that is [...] by the inhabitants. The Crab Apple (Pyrus coronaria) though not an [...] ­oti [...], on account of its being a genuine, but distinct species of the [...] ­ple, ought to be mentioned in this connection. It grows in all [...] of North America, which have been explored, from the Atlantic [...] far west as the Missisippi. Its blossoms are remarkably fragrant; [...] fruit small, possessing, perhaps of all vegetables, the keenest [...]. The cyder made of this fruit, is admired by connoisseurs. It [...] excellent vinegar. The European Crab Apple is very different [...] ours. The other exotic fruits are pears, peaches, quinces, mulberries, plumbs, cherries, currants, barberries, of all which, except quinces [...] barberries, we have many species and varieties. These, with a [...] apricots, and nectarines, flourish in the eastern states, and are i [...] [...] section in the middle states. *

The exotic fruits of the southern states, besides those already men­tioned, are figs, oranges and lemons.

Pulse and Hortuline Plants and Roots.} Besides those transplanted from Europe [...] America, of which we have all the various kinds that Europe produces, the following are natives of this country. Potatoes, (Solanum tuberosum) Ground Nuts, a sort of potatoe, probably a species, highly relished by some people; Tobacco (Nicotian [...]) [...] Pumpkins (Cucurbita pepo)—Cymlings (Cucurbita verrucosa) [...] Squashes (Cucurbito melopepo) Cantelope melons, Beans, Peas, [...] Probably others.

ANIMALS.] America contains, at least, one half, and the terri [...] of the United States about one fourth of the quadrupeds of the know [...] world. Some of them are common to North America, and to [...] European and Asiatic parts of the Eastern Continent; others are pe­culiar to this country. All those that are common to both [...] ­nents, are found in the northern parts of them, and are such as may [...] supposed to have migrated from one continent to the other. Com­paring individuals of the same species, inhabiting the different conti­nents, some are perfectly similar; between others there is some dif­ference in size, colour or other circumstances; in some few instances [...] European animal is larger than the American; in others the reverse i [...] true. A similar variety, arising from the temperature of the [...] quantity of food furnished in the parts they inhabit, degree of safety, &c. takes place between individuals of the same species, in different parts of this continent.

But our information on this suject is not sufficient to autho [...] many observations. It is very probable that some of our quadrup [...] are utterly unknown; others are known only by common report, [...] hunters and others, and therefore could not be scientifically described and with respect to many others, the multiplying and misapplying names has produced great uncertainty and confusion. §

[Page 175] The Rev. Dr. Cutler, has obliged me with the Following Catalogue of our Animals, with their Linnoean names annexed.

Seal Phoca vitulina.
Wolf Canis lupus
Red fox Canis alopex?
Grey Fox Canis.
Wild cat Felis lynx.
Skunk Viverra p [...]torius.
Otter Mustela lutra?
M [...]tin Mustela.—
Wo [...]f [...]l Mustela martes?
Ermi [...]e Mustela [...]rminea.
Bear Ursus arctos.
[...] Ursus lotor.
Wolverine Ursus luscus.
Wood chuck (Ursi vel mustelae species.)
M [...]le Talpa europea.
Shrew mouse Sorex cristatus.
Ground mouse Sorex murinus.
Field mouse Sorex araneus.
P [...]cupine Hystrix dorsata.
Ha [...]e Lepus timidus?
Rabbit Lepus c [...]niculus.
[...] Castor fiber.
Musquash Castor zibethicus.
M [...]k
Black [...]at Mus—
Black squirrel Sciurus niger.
Grey ditto Sciurus cinerens.
Red ditto Sciurus [...]lavus.
S [...]iped ditto Sciurus striatus.
Flying ditto Sciurus v [...]lans.
Mo [...]e Cervus tarandus.
Deer Cervus dama.
Mamillary biped
[...]at Vespertilio murinus.

The importance of this part of our natural History, has induced [...] to pay the most assiduous attention to it, and to seek information from every authority on the subject. With the liberal and generous assistance of an ingenious friend, * I have been enabled to form the following catalogue of the Quadruped animals within the United States, and to add the descriptions of them which succeed.

Ma [...]oth * Caribou * Bear * Catamount
* H [...]pp [...]ta [...]us * Red Deer * Wolverene * Cougar
* Bison * Fallow Deer * Wolf * Mountain Cat
* Moose * Roe * Fox * Lynx
* Margay * Opossum * Flying Squir * M [...]squash
* Kincajou * Woodchuck Bat * Morse
* Weasel Urchin * Field Mouse * Seal
* Ermine * Hare * Wood Rat Maniti
* Martin * Raccoon * Shrew Mouse * Sapajou
* Mink * Fox Squirrel * Purple Mole * Sagoin
* Otter * Grey Squirrel * Black Mole  
* Fisher * Red Squirrel * Water Rat  
* Skunk * Striped Squir. * Beaver  

N. B. Those Animals to which an asterism * is prefixed, [...] animals; whose skins are sometimes dressed in allum, with the [...] and worn in dress; or whose fur or soft hair is used for various [...] ­ufactural purposes.

The Wolf, Fox, Weasel, Ermine, Otter, Flying Squirrel, [...], Water Rat, are of the same species with the European anima [...] [...] same name.

The Fallow Deer, Grey Fox, Martin, Otter, Opossum, Wood [...] [...] Hare, some of the Squirrels, and the Beaver, have been tamed. [...] ­bably most of these, and some others, might be perfectly do [...] ­ed. It has been observed of our wild animals, in general, the [...] are not of so savage a nature as those in Europe.

Of the animals supposed to be larger in America than in [...] are the following, viz. Moose or Elk, Fallow Deer, Bear, [...], Otter, and Beaver. Of those that are less, are the Hare, Red [...] and Shrew Mouse.

MAMMOTH.] This name has been give to an unknown [...] whose bones are found in the northern parts of both the old [...] world. From the form of their teeth, they are supposed to have [...] carnivorous. Like the Elephant they were armed with tusks of [...] but they obviously differed from the elephant in size; their [...] prove them to have been 5 or 6 times as large. These enormous [...] are found in several parts of North America, * particularly about [...] [Page 177] salt licks or springs, near the Ohio river. These licks were formerly frequented by a vast number of graminivorous animals, on account of the salt, of which they are excessively fond. From the appearance of these bones, some of which are entirely above ground, others wholly bur­ried, it is probable that the animals died at different periods, some perhaps as lately as the first settlement of this country by the Euro­peans.

Mr. Jefferson informs us that a late Governour of Virginia, having [...] some delegates of the Delawares, what they knew or had heard respecting this animal, the chief speaker immediately put himself into [...] oratorial attitude, and with a pomp suited to the supposed elevation of the subject, informed him that it was a tradition handed down from their fathers, "That in ancient times a herd of them came to the Big-bone licks, and began an universal destruction of the bears, deer, elks, buffaloes, and other animals which had been created for [...] use of the Indians: that the Great Man above, looking down and seeing this, was so enraged that he seized his lightning, descended to the earth, seated himself upon a neighbouring mountain, on a rock, on which his seat and the print of his feet are still to be seen, and [...] his bolts among them till the whole were slaughtered, except the [...]ig bull, who, presenting his forehead to the shafts, shook them [...] as they fell; but at length missing one, it wounded him in the [...]; whereon, springing round, he bounded over the Ohio, the Wa­ [...], the Illinois, and finally over the great lakes, where he is living at this day." *

HIPPOPOTAMUS.] That this animal ever existed in America was [...] supposed till a few years ago. The ingenious Dr. Mitchill, in a [...] to the Author, says, "That in the year 1788, some teeth were [...] on Long Island, which, from their shape, size and consistence, [...] a doubt, belong to the HIPPOPOTAMUS. Some of them, which [...] presented to me, I forwarded to Mr Peale of Philadelphia. They [...] exactly with those of the same animal, which I saw in the [...] Museum, at Oxford; and in the Leveri [...] Collection at Lon­ [...]. They moreover correspond, precisely, with the plate and de­scription [Page 178] of that animal's skull and jaws, as given by Dr. Grew, i [...] Musco Regalis Societatis; and printed at London in folio, 1681. He is, therefore, worthy of a place in our history as well as the Mam­moth."

BISON. This animal has generally been called the Buffalo, but very improperly, as this name has been appropriated to another [...] ­mal. He is of the same species with our common neat cat [...] [...] difference being the effect of domestication. Compared with the [...] cattle, the Bison is considerably larger, especially about the fore [...] of his body. On his shoulders, arises a large fleshy or grisly substa [...] which extends along the back. The hair on his head, neck and shoulders, is long and woolly, and all of it is fit to be spun, or wro [...] into hats. Calves from the domestic cow and wild bull, are sometimes raised; but when they grow up, they become so wild that no co [...] ­fence will confine them.—Is found in the middle States.

These animals were once exceedingly numerous in the western parts of Virginia, and Pennsylvania; and so late as the year 1766, herd of [...] were frequently seen in Kentucky, and from thence to the Missisippi.

The American forests abound with various animals of the deer kind▪ Naturalists have arranged them differently. I have followed M. [...] Buffon, who has reduced them all to the several species known in Eu­rope.

MOOSE. Of these there are two kinds, the black and the grey. The black are said to have been from 8 to 12 feet high; at present they are very rarely seen. The grey Moose are generally as tall as a horse, and some are much taller; both have spreading▪ palmated [...], weighing from 30 to 40 pounds. These are shed annually, in the month of February. They never run, but trot with amazing speed. In summer they feed on wild grasses, and the leaves of the most mucil­aginous shrubs. In winter they form herds; and when the snow falls, by moving constantly in a small circle, they tread the snow hard, and form what is called a pen. While the snow is deep and will not bear them, they are confined within this pen, and eat all the bark and twigs within their reach. They are considered as of the same species with the Elk of the eastern continent.—They are found in New England.

CARIBOU. This animal is distinguished by its branching▪ palmated horns, with brow antlers. He is probably the rein deer of the north­ern parts of Europe. From the tendons of this animal, as well as of the Moose, the aboriginal natives made very tolerable thread.—Found in the District of Main.

DEER. The Red Deer * has round branching horns. Of this spe­cies we have three or four different kinds or varieties; one of which, found on the Ohio river, and in its vicinity, is very large, and there commonly called the ELK.

The FALLOW DEER * has branching, palmated horns. In the United States, these animals are larger than the European, of a differ­ent colour, and supposed, by some, to be of a different species. In the southern states, are several animals, supposed to be varieties of the ROE DEER. *

BEAR. Of this animal two sorts are found in the northern states; both are black, but different in their forms and habits. One has short legs, [Page 179] a thick, clumsy body, is generally fat, and is very fond of sweet, vege­table food, such as sweet apples, Indian corn in the milk, berries, grapes, honey, &c. Probably he is not carnivorous. As soon as the first snow falls, he betakes himself to his den, which is a hole in a cleft of rocks, a hollow tree, or some such place; here he gradually becomes torpid, and dozes away the winter, sucking his paws, and expending the stock of fat which he had previously acquired.

The other sort is distinguished by the name of the RANGING BEAR, and seems to be a grade between the preceding and the wolf. His legs are longer, and his body more lean and gaunt. He is carnivo­rous, frequently destroying calves, sheep and pigs; and sometimes children. In winter he migrates to the southward. The former ap­pears to be the common black bear of Europe; the latter corresponds to the brown bear of the Alps; and is probably of the same species with those spoken of 2 Kings ii. 24th, which formerly inhabited the mountainous parts of Judea, between Jericho and Bethel.—Found in all the states.

The WOLVERENE, called in Canada the Carcajou, and by hunters the Beaver eater, seems to be a grade between the bear and the wood­chuck. He agrees exactly with the badger of Europe. His length is [...] s [...]et and upwards; his circumference nearly two feet; his head and ears resemble a woodchuck's; his legs short; feet and paws large and strong; tail about 7 inches long, black and very bushy or shaggy; hair about two inches long, and very coarse; his head, sallow grey; back almost black; breast, sported with white; belly, dark brown; sides and rump, light reddish brown. This animal lives in holes, cannot run fast, and has a clumsy appearance. He is very mischievous to hunters, following them when setting their traps, and destroying their game, particularly the beaver.—Found in the northern states.

WOLF. Of this animal, which is of the dog kind, or rather the dog himself in his savage state, we have great numbers, and a consid­erable variety in size and colour. The dimensions of a skin, measured of writing this account, were as follows; length of the body 5 feet: the fore legs 18 inches; of the hind legs 15 inches; of the tail 18 inches. The circumference of the body was from 2½ to 3 feet. The colour of these animals in the northern states, is generally a light, dirty fallow, with a list of black along their back. In some, the black is extended down their sides, and sometimes forms waving streaks; others are said to be spotted: Some of them, particularly in the southern states, are entirely black and considerably smaller. The Indians are said to have so far tamed some of these animals before their acquaint­ance with the Europeans, as to have used them in hunting. They next made use of European dogs, and afterwards of mongrels, the off­spring of the wolf and dog, as being more docile than the former, and more oager in the chase than the latter. The appearance of ma­ny of the dogs, in the newly settled parts of the country, indicate their relation to the wolf.—Found in all the states.

FOX. Of foxes we have a great variety; such as the Silver Fox, Red Fox, Grey Fox, Cross Fox, Brant Fox, and several others. Natural­ists have generally supposed that there is more than one species of foxes, but they differ very much in their mode of arranging them. It is highly probable however, that there is but one species of these ani­mals, [Page 180] as they are found in all their varieties of size, and of [...] ­riously intermixed, in different parts of the United States. Fo [...] and other animals furnished with fur, of the northern states, are larger [...] those of the southern.

CATAMOUNT. This animal, the most dreaded by hunters of [...] of the inhabitants of the forests, is rarely seen, which is probably [...] reason why no account of him has ever been published, to our [...] ledge, except what is contained in a letter of Mr. Collinson's to [...] Buffon. The dimensions of one, killed a few years ago, is [...] Hampshire, as nearly as could be ascertained by the skin, worn as [...] lows; the length of his body (including the head) 6 feet; circumfer­ence of his body 2½ feet; length of his tail 3 feet, and of his [...] about 1 foot. The colour, along his back, is nearly black; [...] sides, a dark reddish brown; his feet black. He seems not [...] ­ed for running, but leaps with surprizing agility. His favouri [...] is blood, which, like other animals of the cat kind, he takes from [...] jugular vessels of cattle, deer, &c. leaving the carcase. Smaller [...] he takes to his den; and he has been known to carry off a [...]. He seems to be allured by five, which terrifies all other carniv [...] animals, and betrays no fear either of man of beast.—He is [...] the northern and middle states.

COUGAR. The body of this animal is about 5 feet long; him [...] longer in proportion to his body, than those of the common cat [...] colour is a dark fallow. In his habits and manners he resem [...] rest of the family. He is found in the southern states, and th [...] [...] ­ed the Tyger.

MOUNTAIN CAT. ( Pardalis, Linn.) ( Ocelot, de Buffon.)—The [...] of his body is from 3½ to 4 feet; his tail about 2 feet. His [...] is a fallow ground, with black spots and stripes. The male has a [...] list along his back, and is the most beautiful animal of the cat [...]. He is exceedingly fierce, but will seldom attack a man—Founded [...] southern states.

LYNX. We have three kinds of the Lynx, each probably for [...]i [...]g a distinct species. The first, ( Lupus cervarius, Linn. 3d. [...] is called by the French and English Americans, Loup [...]. He is from 2½ to 3 feet in length; his tail is about 5 inches. His [...] is long, of a light grey colour, forming, in some places, small, [...] ­lar, dark shades; the end of his tail is black. His fur is [...] and thick. He is the Lynx of Siberia, and some of the northern pa [...] Europe. A few may be found in the northeastern parts of the dis­trict of Main; but in the higher latitudes they are more numer­ous.

The second, ( Catus cervarius, Linn.) is called by the French Amer­icans, Chat cervier; and in New England, the Wild-cat. He is consid­erably less than the former, or the Loup cervier. He is from [...] feet long; his tail is proportionably shorter, about three inches [...] and wants the tuft of black hair on the end of it. His hair is [...] or, particularly on his legs and feet; is of a darker colour, [...] dark sallow and green, variously intermixed. His fur is said to [...] a very different quality; his ears are shorter, and he has very [...] of the pencil of black hairs on the tips of them, which is so [...] ­able in the former kind. This animal destroyed many of the [...] of the first settlers of New England.

[Page 181] The third species is about the size of a common cat. The colour of the male is a bright brown or bay, and black spots on his legs. His tail is about 4 inches long, and encircled by 8 white rings: The fe­male is of a reddish grey.—Found in the middle and south­ern states.

MARGAY. This animal very much resembles the European wild­cat, both in form and size. His colour is like that of some of our tabby cats—dark, waving streaks, on a sallow ground.—Found in the southern states.

KINCAJOU. This animal is frequently confounded with the Carc [...]jou, though he resembles him in nothing but the name. He belongs to the family of cats; at least he very much resembles them. He is about as large as a common cat, and is better formed for agility and speed, than for strength. His tail gradually tapers to the end, and is as long as his whole body. His colour is yellow. Between him and the fox there is perpetual war. He hunts in the same manner as do other animals of that class; but being able to suspend himself by twin­ing the end of his tail round the limb of a tree, or the like, he can pursue his prey where other cats cannot; and when he attacks a large animal, his tail enables him to secure his hold till he can open the blood vessels of the neck. In some parts of Canada, these animals are very numerous, and make great havoc among the deer, and do not spare even the neat cattle. But we have heard of none in these states, except a few in the northern parts of New Hampshire.

The WEASEL is about 9 inches in length; his body is remarkably round and slender; his tail long and well furnished with hair 5 his legs very short, and his toes armed with sharp claws. His hair is short and thick, and of a pale, yellowish colour, except about the breast, where it is white. This is a very sprightly animal; notwith­standing the shortness of his legs, it seems to dart rather than to run. He kills and eats rats, striped squirrels and other small quadrupeds: He likewise kills fowls, sucks their blood, and esteems their eggs a delicacy.

The EZMINE does not differ materially from the Weasel, in size, form or habits: even his colour is the same in summer, except that the end of his tail is black, and the edges of his ears and toes are white. In winter he is entirely white, except the tip of the tail. He is generally considered as forming a species distinct from the Wea­sel; but Linnaeus makes them the same.—They are said to be found in Canada, and Dr. Belknap mentions that a few have been seen in New Hampshire.

In addition to the preceding we have another variety of this family. It appears to differ from the Weasel in no respect, except its colour, which is perfectly white, both in summer and winter.

MARTIN. This animal is called the Martin (Marte) by M. de Buffon:—in England, the pine Martin, fir Martin, yellow breasted Martin, pine Weasel, and yellow breasted Weasel; in New England, the Sable; and by the Indians, Wauppanaugh. He is formed like the Weasel; is generally about 16 inches long, and is of a sallow colour; but his size, and the shades of his colour, vary in different parts of the country. Some have spots of yellow on the breast, others of white, and others have none. He keeps in forests, chiefly on trees, and lives by hunting.—He is found in the northern states.

[Page 182] MINK. The Mink is about as large as a Martin, and of the same form. The hair on its tail is shorter; its colour is generally, black some have a white spot under their throats; others have none. They burrow in the ground, and pursue their prey both in fresh and salt wa­ter. Those which frequent the salt water are of a larger size, light [...] colour, and have inferior fur. They are found in considerable number [...] both in the southern and northern states.

OTTER. The Otter very much resembles the Mink in its [...] and habits. Its colour is not so dark; its fixe much larger, being about 3 feet long and 15 inches in circumference. It lives in holes in banks near the water, and feeds on fish and amphibious animals. Found in all the states.

FISHER. In Canada he is called Pekan: In these states frequently the Black cat, but improperly, as he does not belong to the class of cats. He has a general resemblance to the Martin, but is considera­bly larger, being from 20 to 24 inches in length, and 12 in circumfer­ence. His tail is a little more than half his length; its hair long and bushy. His fore legs, about 4½ inches long, his hinder legs 6 inch­es. His ears short and round. His colour is black, except the head, neck and shoulders, which are a dark grey. He lives by hunt­ing, and occasionally pursues his prey in the water.—Found is the northern states.

SKUNK. This animal as about a foot and an half long, of a mod­erate height and size. His tail is long and bushy; his hair long and chiefly black; but on his head, neck and back, is found more of less of white, without any regularity or uniformity. He appears to see but indifferently, when the sun shines; and therefore in the day time, keeps close to his burrow. As soon as the twilight commences, be goes in quest of his food, which is principally beetles and other insects: He is also very fond of eggs and young chickens. His flesh is said to be tolerably good, and his fat is sometimes used as an emollient. But what renders this animal remarkable is, his being furnished with or­gans for secreting and retaining a liquor, volatile and saetid beyond any thing known, and which he has the power of emitting to the distance of a rod or more, when necessary for his defence. When this ammunition is expended he is quite harmless. * This volatile faetor is a powerful antispasmodic.—Found in all the states.

[Page 183] Another Stinkard, called the Squash, is said by Buffon, to be found in some of the southern states. He is of a chesnut colour; climbs trees, and kills poultry.

OPOSSUM. This animal is about a foot and a half long; has a long pointed nose, furnished with long stiff hairs; ears thin and nak­ed; tail naked, nearly as long as the body, and capable of holding the animal suspended; legs short; feet small and naked. He uses his forepaws like a Monkey. His body is well covered with a woolly for, white at the roots, and black at the ends. His hair is long, thin and coarse; its colour black and white, forming a grey of various shades; and these different shades are often so intermixed as to give a spotted or variegated appearance. But the most singular part of this animal is a kind of false belly or pouch, with which the female is fur­nished; it is formed by a duplicature of the skin;—is so placed as to include her teats, and has an aperture which she can open and shut at pleasure. She brings forth her young from four to six at a time, while they are not bigger than a bean;—incloses them in this pouch, and they, from a principle of instinct, affix themselves to her teats: Here they remain and are nourished till they are able to run about, and are afterwards taken in occasionally, particularly in time of dan­ger. The Opossum feeds on vegetables, particularly fruit. He like­wise kills poultry, sucks their blood, and eats their eggs. His fat is used instead of lard or butter.—Found in the southern and middle states.

WOODCHUCK. ( Monax, de Buffon.) His body is about 16 inches long, and nearly the same in circumference; his tail is moderately long, and full of hair. His colour is a mixture of sallow and grey. He digs a burrow in, or near, some cultivated field, and feeds on pulse, the tops of cultivated clover, &c. He is generally very fat, excepting in the spring. They young are good meat; the old are rather rank and disagreeable. In the beginning of October they retire to their burrows, and live in a torpid state about 6 months. In many respects he agrees with the Marmot of the Alps; in others he differs, and on the whole is probably not the same.

An animal resembling the Woodchuck is found in the southern states, which is supposed to form another species.

URCHIN. The Urchin, or Urson, is about two feet in length, and, when fat, the same in circumference. He is commonly called Hedge-Mog or Porcupine, but differs from both those animals in every char­acteristic mark, excepting has being armed with quills on his back and sides. These quills are nearly as large as a wheat straw; from three to four inches long, and, unless erected, nearly covered by the animal's hair. Their points are very hard, and filled with innumerable very small barbs or scales, whose points are raised from the body of the quill. When the Urchin is attacked by a dog, wolf, or other beast of prey, he throws himself into a posture of defence, by shortning his body, elevating his back, and erecting his quills. The assistant soon finds some of those weapons stuck into his mouth, or other part of his body, and every effort which he makes to free himself, causes them to penetrate, the farther; they have been known to bury themselves entirely in a few minutes. Sometimes they prove fatal; at other times they make their way out again through the skin from various parts of the body. If not molested, the Urchin is an inoffen­sive animal. He finds a hole or hollow which he makes his residence, [Page 184] and feeds on the bark and roots of vegetables. His flesh, in the opin­ion of hunters, is equal to that of a fucking pig.—Is found in the northern states.

HARE. Of this animal we have two kinds, which appear to the different species: the one is commonly called the white Rabbit [...] Coney; the other is simply the Rabbit; but from the proporti [...] length of their hinder legs, and other specific marks, they both [...] to the family of the hare. The former has a covering of [...] white hair, which comes on before winter, and falls off the [...] spring. He is about half the size of a large European hare, and [...] as large as the other kind. The latter burrows in the ground, like [...] rabbit. They have both been found in the same tract of country [...] have not been known to associate. The former has been found in the northern states, and appears to be the same as the hare of the northern part of Europe; the latter is found in all the states, and is probably a species peculiar to America.

RACCOON. The Raccoon, in the form and size of his body, resem­bles the fox; his legs are larger and shorter. His toes are long, and armed with sharp claws. His body is grey; his tail annulated with alternate rings of black and brown. In his manners he resembles the squirrel; like him he lives on trees, feeds on Indian corn, acorns, &c. and serves himself with his fore paws. His flesh is good meat, and his fur is valued by the hatters. He is found in all the climates in the temperate zone in North America.

The FOX SQUIRREL. Of this animal, there are several varieties, black, red and grey. It is nearly twice as large as the common grey squirrel, and is found in the southern States, and is peculiar to this continent.

The GREY SQUIRREL of America, does not agree exactly with that of Europe, but is generally considered as of the same species. Its [...] indicates its general colour; but some are black; and others black on the back and grey on the sides. They make a nest of moss in a hollow tree, and here they deposit their provision of nuts and acorns; this is the place of their residence during the winter, and here they bring forth their young. Their summer house, which is built of sticks and leaves, is placed near the top of the tree. They sometimes mig [...]ts is considerable numbers. If in their course they meet with a river, each of them takes a shingle, piece of bark, or the like, and carries is to the water. Thus equipped, they embark, and erect their tails to the gentle breeze, which soon wafts them over in safety; but a [...] flaw of wind sometimes produces a destructive shipwreck. The great­er part of the males of this species is found castrated.

A Grey Squirrel is found in Virginia, nearly thrice as large as this Whether it be the same, or a different species, is uncertain.

The RED SQUIRREL, is less than the grey squirrel. It has a rod, list along its back; grey on its sides, and white under the belly. It differs in some respects from the common European squirrel; but [...] ­de Buffon considers it as the same species. Its food is the same [...] that of the grey squirrel, except that it sometimes feeds on the seeds of the pine and other evergreens; hence it is sometimes called the pine squirrel, and is found further to the northward than the grey squirrel. It spends part of its time on trees, in quest of food; but confident its hole, under some rock or log, as its home.

The STRIFED SQUIRREL, is still less than the last mentioned. Its [Page 185] colour is red. It has a narrow stripe of black along its back; at the dis­tance of about half an inch, on each side, is a stripe of white, border­ed with very narrow stripes of black. Its belly is white. In the males, the colors are brighter and better defined than in the fe­males. It is sometimes called a mouse squirrel, and ground squirrel, [...] its forming a burrow in loose ground. Linnaeus confounds it with a striped mouse squirrel, found in the north of Asia; but that animal is represented as in some measure resembling the mouse; whereas ours is a genuine squirrel. In summer it feeds on apples, peaches, and various kinds of fruit and seeds; and for its winter store says up nuts, acorns and grain. It sometimes ascends trees in quest of [...], but always descends on the appearance of danger; nor does it feel secure but in its hole, a stone wall, or some covert place. Found in the northern and and middle states.

FLYING SQUIRREL. This is the least and most singular of the class of squirrels. A duplicature of the the skin connects the fore and hinder legs together: by extending this membrane, it is able of leap much farther, and to alight with more safety than other squirrels. It lives in the holes of trees, and feeds on seeds.—Is found in all the States.

BAT. The Bat is so common and so singular a creature that a particular description of it is unnecessary.—Found both in America and Europe.

FIELD MOUSE. This species in England, is called the short tailed field mouse. It has a general resemblance to the common house mouse; but both its body and tail are larger and his hair has a slight reddish tint. Its food depends very much on its situation. In gardens it oft­en destroys young fruit trees by eating their bark; in fields and mea­dows, it feeds on the roots of grass, sometimes leaving a groove in the sward, which appears as if it had been cut out with a gouge. In woods, they are said to feed on acorns, and to lay up a large store of these in their burrows.

WOOD RAT. "This is a very curious animal; they are not half the size of the domestic rat; of a dark brown or black colour; their tails slender and short in proportion, and covered thinly with short hair. They are singular with respect to their ingenuity and great labour in con­structing their habitations, which are conical pyramids, about 3 or 4 feet high, constructed with dry branches, which they collect with great labour and perseverance, and pile up without any apparent or­der; yet they are so interwoven with one another, that it would take a hear or wild-cat some time to pull one of these castles to pieces, and allow the animals sufficient time to retreat with their young.

There is likewise a ground-rat, twice as large as the common rat, and burrows in the ground."

[ Bartram's Travels.

SHREW MOUSE. This is the smallest of quadrupeds, and holds nearly the same place among them as the humming bird does among the feathered race. Some of the European shrew mice, are three inches long: we have seen but two or three of the American, and those dri­ed; but should not judge that those ever exceeded 2 inches. Their head, which constitutes about one third of their whole length, has some resemblance to that of a mole; the ears are wanting; their eyes scarce­ly visible; the nose very long, pointed and furnished with long hairs. In other respects these resemble the common mouse. They live in roods, and are supposed to feed on grain and insects.—Found in New-England.

[Page 186] MOLE. The purple mole is found in Virginia; the black mole in New-England; he lives in and about the water: they differ from one another, and both from the European.

The WATER RAT is about the size of the common rat; brown on the back and white under the belly; feeds on aquatic animals.

BEAVER. The beaver is an amphibious animal, which cannot live for any length of time in the water; and can exist without it pro­vided he has the convenience of sometimes bathing himself. The largest beavers, formerly, were four feet in length, and weighed 50 or 60 pounds. At present they are not more than three feet in length, and may weigh from 25 to 30 pounds. Their head of this animal is large, and his ears short and round. Their fore teeth are prominent, long broad, strong and grooved or hollowed like a gouge. Their fore legs are short, with toes separate; their hinder legs are long, with toes webbed. The tail is large, broad and scaly, resembling the body of a fish. Their colour is generally a dark brown, but varies according to the climate they inhabit. Their hair is long and coarse; the fur very thick, fine and highly valued. The castor used in medicine is found is sacks formed behind the kidneys.

Their houses are always situated in the water; sometimes they make use of a natural pond, but generally they choose to form one by build­ing a dam across some brook or rivulet. For this purpose they select a number of saplings of soft wood, generally of less than 6 inches diameter, but sometimes of 16 or 18 inches; these they fell, and divide into proper lengths, and place them in the water, so that the length of the sticks make the width of the dam. These sticks they lay in mud or clay, their tails serving them for tr [...]wels, as their teeth did for axes. These dams are six or eight feet thick at bottom; sloping on the side opposed to the stream; and are about a quarter as broad at top as at bottom. Near the top of the dam they leave one or more waste ways, or sliding places to carry off the surplus water.

The formation of their cabins is no less remarkable. They consist of two stories, one under, the other above water. They are shaped like the oval bee-hive; and of a size proportioned to the number of inhabitants. The walls of the lower apartment are two or three feet thick, formed like their dams; those of the upper story are thinner, and the whole, on the inside, plaistered with mud. Each family con­structs and inhabits its own cabin. The upper apartments are curi­ously strewed with leaves, and rendered neat, clean and comfortable. The winter never surprizes these animals, before their business is com­pleted; for their houses are generally finished by the last of September, and their stock of provisions laid in, which consists of small pieces of wood deposited in the lower apartments. Before a storm, all hands are employed in repairing or strengthning their dams. They retain this industrious habit even after they are domesticated. In summer they roam abroad and feed on leaves, twigs, and food of that kind. These beavers are considered as the same species as those in Europe, but are vastly superior to them in every respect.

There is likewise a race of beavers, called Terriers, who dig holes and live a solitary unsocial life. These are probably savages, who have never formed themselves into societies, and consequently have not made those improvements, which are to be acquired only in a social state. Found in all the States.

The MUSQUA [...] [...] MU [...] about [...] inches in length, an [Page 187] a foot in circumference. His tail is nearly a foot long; his hair very short; the colour on his back, dark; on his sides, generally reddish; his head and tail very much resemble those of a rat. This animal is furnished with glands, which separate a substance that has the smell of musk. In his mode of living, he is a distant imitator of the beaver; builds a rude cabin in shallow water, and feeds on vegetables. Found in the northern and middle States.

The MORSE or SEA-COW, more properly called the Sea-Elephant, has two large ivory tusks, which shoot from the upper jaw; Its head al­so is formed like that of the elephant, and would entirely resemble it in that part, if it had a trunk; but the morse is deprived of that instru­ment, which serves the elephant in place of an arm and hand, and has real arms. These members, like those of the seal, are shut up within the skin, so that nothing appears outwardly but its hands and feet. Its body is long and tapering, thickest towards the neck; the toes and the hands, or feet, are covered with a membrane, and terminated by short and sharp pointed claws. Excepting the two great tusks, and the cut­ting teeth, the morse perfectly resembles the seal; it is only much larger and stronger, the morse, being commonly from twelve to sixteen feet in length, and eight or nine in circumference; whereas the largest seals are no more than seven or eight feet long. The morses and seals frequent the same places. They have the same habits in every respect, except that there are fewer varieties of the morse than of the seal; they are likewise more attached to one particular climate, and are rare­ly found, except in the northern seas.

The SEAL, of which there are several species, is an amphibious ani­mal, living the greater part of the time in the sea, and feeds on marine plants. These animals formerly frequented our northern shores; but at present have nearly forsaken them.

MANATI. This animal forms the connecting link between beasts and fishes. It cannot be called a quadrupede; nor can it entirely be termed a fish; it partakes of the nature of the fish by its two feet or hands; but the hinder legs, which are almost wholly concealed in the bodies of the seal and morse, are entirely wanting in the manati. In­stead of two short feet, and a small, narrow tail, which is placed in a horizontal direction in the morse, the manati has only a thick tad, spread out broad like a fan. It is a very clumsy mishapen animal, with a head thicker than that of an ox; eyes small; and the two feet are placed near the head, for the purpose of swimming. It is of suffi­cient size to form a load for two oxen. Its flesh, which is more like beef than fish, is said to be excellent for eating. They are about 15 feet long, and 6 broad. As this animal has only fore feet, it has obtained the name of Manati, i. e. "an animal with both hands." The female has breasts placed forward like those of a woman's, and she generally brings forth two young ones at a time, which she suckles. It is not properly amphibious; it only raises its head out of the water to feed on the herbage by the sea side. This animal is very common in South America, and some, it is said, have been found in the southern States.

SAPAJOU. SAGOIN. There are various species of animals said to inhabit the country on the lower part of the Missisippi, called Sapajous and Sagoins. The former are capable of suspending them­selves by their tails: the latter are not. They have a general resem­lance to monkeys; but are not sufficiently known, to be particularly

[Page 188] BIRDS.] Several catalogues of the birds in the southern and middle states, have been published by different authors; and one, [...] those in New Hampshire, by Dr. Belknap; but no general catab [...] of the birds in the American States has yet appeared. The follow [...] catalogue, which claims to be the most full and complete of any [...] published, though fat from perfection, has been carefully selec [...] from Bartram's Travels, Jefferson's Notes of Virginia, Belknap's History of New-Hampshire, and a Manuscript furnished by Dr. [...] Bartram's catalogue, as far as it extends, appears to be the most [...] rate and complete, and his mode of arrangement the most natur [...] [...] intelligible; I have therefore adopted it, and inserted his noted [...] references. *

Popular Names. Bartram's Designation.
The OWL. STRIX.
Great White Owl Strix arcticus, corpore toto [...]
Great Horned Owl Strix pythaules, corpore rush.
† Great Horned White Owl Strix maximus, corpore nive [...].
§ Horned Owl Strix bubo? Peck.
¶Whooting Owl Strix acclamator, corpore gri [...].
† Sharp Winged or Speckled Owl Strix perigrinator, corpore [...] ­sicolore.
Strix alcuo, Cutler, Belk [...].
¶ Little Screech Owl Strix asio, corpore ferruginio.
§ Barn Owl— Strix passeri. Cutler. Belknap.
The VULTURE. VULTUR.
Turkey Buzzard Vultur aura.
‖ White Tailed Vulture Vultur sacra.
‖ Black Vulture, or Carrion Crow Vultur atratus.
EAGLE and HAWK. FALCO.
¶ Great Grey Eagle Falco regalis.
¶Bald Eagle Falco leucocephalus.
* Fishing Eagle Falco piscatorius.
¶ Great Eagle Hawk Falco Aquilinus, cauda ferruginia.
¶Hen Hawk Falco gallinarius.
¶Chicken Hawk Falco pularius.
* Pigeon Hawk Falco columbarius.
¶Black Hawk Falco niger.
* Marsh Hawk Falco ranivorus.
* Sparrow Hawk, or least Hawk Falco sparvenius.
§ Brown Eagle Falco fulvus. Belknap.
§ Large Brown Hawk Falco hudsonius? Belknap.
§ Pigeon Hawk Falco subbuteo. Peck.
§ Fish Hawk Falco haliaetus. Peck.
§ Bird Hawk Lanius canadensis. Belkn. Cutl.
KITE HAWK. * MILVUS.
Forked Tail Hawk, or Kite Falco furcatus.
‖ Sharp Winged Hawk, of a pale, sky blue colour, the tip of the wings black. Palco glaucus.
‖ Sharp Winged Hawk, of a dark or dusky blue colour. Falco subcerulius.
‖ Parrot of Carolina, or Patrakeet Psitticus Caroliniensis.
The CROW kind. CORVUS.
* The Raven Corvus carnivorus.
Great Sea side Crow or Rook Corvus maritimus.
¶ Common Crow Corvus frugivorus.
§ Royston Crow Corvus cor [...]ix. Cutler.
¶ Blue Jay Corvus cristatus, pica glandaria.
‖ Little Jay of Florida Corvus Floridanus, pica glan­da [...]ra minor.
¶Purple Jackdaw or Crow Blackbird Gracula quiscula.
* L [...]sser Purple Jackdaw Gracula purpurea.
* C [...]kow of Carolina Cuculus Caroliniensis.
Whet Saw Cuculus—Carver.
WOOD PECKERS. PIOUS.
Greatest crested Woodpecker, having a white back Picus princip [...]tis.
* Great Red Crested, Black Woodpecker Picus pileatus.
* Red Headed Woodpecker Picus erythrocephalus.
* Gold Winged Woodpecker Picus auratus.
¶ Red Bellied Woodpecker Picus Carolinus.
¶ Least Spotted Woodpecker Picus pubescons.
¶ Hairy, Speckled and Crested Woodpecker Picus villosus.
¶Yellow Bellied Woodpecker Picus varius.
§ Swallow Woodpecker Picus hirundinacens. Cutler.
§ Speckled Woodpecker Picus maculosus. Cutler.
¶ Nuthatch Sitta capito nigro. Catesby.
Small Nuthatch Sitta capite susco. Catesby.
† Little, Brown variegated Creeper Certhia rufa.
* Pine Creeper Certhia pinus.
* Blue and White, pied Creeper Certhia picta.
* Great Crested King Fisher Alcedo alcyon.
* Humming Bird. Trochilus colobris.
* Little Grey Butcher Bird of Pennsylvania. Lanius griseus.
* Little Black Capped Butcher Lanius garrulus.
* [...] Bird Lanius tyrannus.
* Pewit, or Black Cap Fly Catcher. Muscicapa nunciola.
* Great Crested, Yellow Bellied Fly Catcher Muscicapa cristata.
* Lesser Pewit, or Brown and Greenish Fly Catcher. Muscicapa rapax.
* Little Olive colored Fly Catcher Muscicapa subviridis.
* Little Domestic Fly Catcher or Green Wren Muscicapa cantacrix.
* Red Eyed Fly Catcher Muscicapa sylvicola.
† Turtle Dove of Carolina Columba Caroliniensis.
‖ Ground Dove Columba passerina
† Wild Pigeon Columba migratoria.
* Great Meadow Lark Alauda magna.
† Sky Lark Alauda campestris, gutture flavo,
† Little Brown Lark Alauda migratoria, corpore [...] ferruginio.
Red Winged Starling—Marsh Black Bird or Red Winged Black Bird Sturnus niger alis superne [...] ibus. Catesby.
¶ Robin Red Breast. Field Fare. Turdus migratorius.
* Fox coloured Thrush Turdus rufus.
* Mocking Bird Turdus polyglottos.
* Wood Thrush Turdus melodes.
* Least Golden Crown Thrush Turdus minimus, vertice au [...]io.
§ Cross Bill Loxia curvi rostra? Belknap.
§ Cherry Bird Ampelis garrulus. Cutler.
* Baltimore Bird, or Hang Nest Oriolus Baltimore.
* Goldfinch or Icterus Minor Oriolus spurius.
* Sand Hill Red Bird of Carolina Merula flammula.
* Summer Red Bird Merula Marilandica.
* Yellow Breasted Chat Garrulus australis.
* Cat Bird or Chicken Bird Lucar lividus, apice nigra. Muscicapa vertice nigro. Catesby.
¶ Crown Bird or Cedar Bird Ampelis garrulus.
GRANIVOROUS TRIBES.
¶ Wild Turkey Meleagris Americanus.
Gallopavo sylvestris. Catesby.
¶ Pheasant of Pennsylvania or Partridge of New England? Tetrao tympanus.
¶ Mountain Cock or Grous Ptarmigan. (Mitchill.) Tetrao lagopus.
¶ Quail or Partridge Tetrao minor, s. coturnix.
¶ Red Bird. Virgnia Nightingale Loxia cardinalis.
‡ Cross Beak Loxia rostro forsicato.
* Blue Cross Beak Loxia caerulea.
* Rice Bird. * Boblincoln Emberiza oryzivora.
‡ Blue or Slate coloured Rice Bird Emberiza livida.
* Pied Rice Bird * Emberiza varia.
‡ Painted Finch, or Nonpareil Linaria ciris.
§ Red Linnet Tangra rubra.
* Blue Linnet Linaria cyanea.
Goldfinch. Yellow Bird ( Cutl.) or Lettuce Bird Carduelus Americanus.
Fringilla tristis. Linn.
Lesser Goldfinch. Carduelus pinus.
Least Finch Carduelus pusilus.
* Towhe Bird, Pewee, Cheeweeh, Fringilla erythrophthalma.
Passer nigris occulis rubris. Cat.
Purple Finch Fringilla purpurea.
Spring Bird Fringilla. Cutler.
Hemp Bird Fringilla canabina.
Winter Sparrow Fringilla grisea. Cutler.
Red, Fox coloured, Ground or Hedge Sparrow Fringilla rufa.
Large, Brown, White Throat­ed Sparrow. Fringilla fusca.
* Little House Sparrow, or Chip­ping Bird Passer domesticus.
* Reed Sparrow Passer palustris.
* Little Field Sparrow. Passer agrestis.
Snow Bird Passer nivalis.
* May Bird Calandra pratensis.
* Red winged Starling, or Corn Thief Sturuus predatorius.
* Cowpen Bird Sturuus stercorarius.
Passer fuscus. Catesby.
* Blue Bird Motacilla sialis.
Rubicula Americana caerulea.
Catesby.
* Water Wagtail Motacilla fluviatilis.
* House Wren Motacilla domestica. (regulus ru­fus.)
* Marsh Wren Motacilla palustris (regulus minor.)
* Great Wren of Carolina—Body dark brown, throat and breast, pale clay colour Motacilla Caroliniana. (regulus magnus.)
Grape Bird Motacilla icterocephala. Cutler.
* Little Bluish Grey Wren Regulus griseus.
Golden Crown Wren Regulus cristatus.
Ruby Crown Wren (Edwards) Regulus cristatus, Alter vertice rubini coloris.
* Olive coloured, yellow Throat­ed Wren Regulus peregrinus, gutture flavo.
* Red Start Ruticilla Americana.
* Yellow hooded Titmouse Luscinia, s. philomela Americana.
* Bluish Grey crested Titmouse Parus cristatus.
Black Cap Titmouse Parus Europeus.
* Summer Yellow Bird Parus luteus.
* Yellow Rump Parus cedrus, uropygio flavo.
Tom Teet Parus atricapillus. Cutler.
* Various coloured Little Finch Creeper Parus varius.
* Little Chocolate Breast Titmouse Parus peregrinus.
* Yellow Red Pole Parus aureus, vertice rubro.
* Green Black Throated Fly Catcher Parus viridis, gutturo nigro.
* Golden Winged Fly Catcher Parus alis aureis.
* Blue Winged Yellow Bird Parus aureus alis ceruleis.
* Yellow Throated Creeper Parus griecus gutture luteo.
* House Swallow, or Chimney Swallow Hirundo pelasgia, cauda acule [...].
* Great Purple Martin Hirundo purpurea.
* Bank Martin or Swallow Hirundo riparia, vertice purpu [...]
White Bellied Swallow Hirundo.—
Barn Swallow Hirundo subis. Cutler.
Great Bat, or Chuck wills wid­ow, or Goat Sucker Caprimulgus lucifugus.
* Whip-poor-will. * Caprimulgus minor America­nus. Catesby. Caprimulgus europeus. Cutler.
* Night Hawk Caprimulgus americanus. Cutler.
AMPHIBIOUS or AQUATIC BIRDS, of such as obtain their food [...], and reside in the water.
The CRANE. GRUS.
Great Whooping Crane Grus clamator, vertice [...] corpore niveo, remighib [...] nigris.
Great Savanna Crane Grus pratensis, corpore [...] vertice papilloso,
The HERON. ARDEA.
Great Bluish, Grey crested Heron Ardea Herodias.
* Great White, River Heron Ardea immaculata.
Crane Ardea canadensis. Cutler.
* Little White Heron Ardea alba minor.
Stork Ardea ciconia. Cutler.
Little crested Purple or Blue Heron Ardea purpurea cristata.
* Grey, White crested, Heron Ardea varra cristata.
Speckled crested Heron, or Crab Catcher. Ardea maculata cristata.
* Marsh Bittern, or Indian Hen Ardea migitans. Ardea stellaris Americans. Cat.
* Quaw Bird or Frog Catcher Ardea clamator, corpore sub­ceruleo.
Little Brownish spotted Bittern Ardea subfusca stillata.
Crested Blue Bittern, called Poor Job Ardea violacca.
* Green Bittern. Poke. Shouk. Ardea virescens. Ardea virescens minor.
* Lesser Green Bittern.  
* Least Brown and Stripped Bit­tern Ardea parva.
* Spoon Bill; seen as far north as the river Alatamaha Platalea ajaja.
Popular Names. Bortram's Designation.
The WOOD PELICAN. TANTALUS.
Wood Pelican Tantalus loculator.
White Curlew Tantalus alber.
Dusky and White Curlew Tantalus fuscus.
Crying Bird, beautifully speckled Tantalus pictus, (Ephouskyka. In­dian.)
Gannet, perhaps little differ­ent from the Ibis. Tantalus Ichthyophagus.
White Godwit Numenius, alba varia.
Great red breasted Godwit Numenius pectore rufo.
The greater Godwit Numenius Americana.
Red Shark, or pool Stripe Numenius fluvialis.
Great sea-coast Curlew Numenius magnus rufus.
* Lesser field Curlew Numenius minor campestris.
Sea side lesser Curlew Numenius cinereus.
* Great red Woodcock Scolapax Americana rufa.
Wood Snipe Scolapax fedoa. Cutler.
* Meadow Snipe Scolapax minor arvensis.
* Red coot footed Tring Tringa rufa.
* White throated, coot footed Tring Tringa cinerea, gutture albo.
* Black cap, coot footed Tring Tringa vertice nigro.
Spotted Tring. Rock bird Tringa maculata.
Little pond Snipe Tringa griseus.
Little brown pool Snipe Tringa fusca.
Little Trings of the sea shore. Sand Birds Tringa parva.
Ox Eye Tringa fulicaria? Cutler.
Humility Tringa interpres? Cutler.
* Turnstone or Dotril Morinella Americana.
Wild Swan Cygnus ferus.
Canadian Goose Anser Canadensis.
Blue Winged Goose Anser aleis caeruleis.
Laughing Goose Anser fuscus maculatus.
White Brant Goose Anser branta, corpore albo, re­migibus nigris,
Great parti-coloured Brant or Grey Goose Anser branta, grisea maculata.
Great Wild Duck. Duck and Mallard Anasfera torquata major, caput­et collum viridisplendentis, dor­sum griseo fuscum, pectore ru­fescente, speculum violacrum.
Great Black Duck Anas nigra maxima.
Bull Neck or Buffaloe Head Quindar Anas bucepala.
Blue Bill Anas subcerulea.
Black White Faced Duck Anas leucocephala.
Wood Duck Anas arborea.
Sprigtail Duck Anas caudacuta.
Little Brown and White Duck Anas rustica.
Various coloured Duck, his breast and neck as though or­namented with chains of beads Anas principalis, maculata.
Popular Names. Bartram's Designation.
Little Black and White Duck, called Butter Back Anas minor picta
Sea Duck Anas mollissima. Cutler.
Sea Pigeon Anas histrionica. Cutler.
Old Wife Anas thyemalis. Peck. Anas strepera. Cutler.
Blue Winged Shoveller Anas Americana lato rostro. Catesby.
Dipper Anas albeola. Cutler.
TEAL. QUERQUIDULAE,
* Summer Duck Anas sponsa.
Blue Winged Teal Anas discors.
Least Green Winged Teal Anas migratoria.
* Whistling Duck Anas sistulosa.
Great Fishing Duck Mergus major pectore ruso.
Round crested Duck Mergus cucultatus.
* Eel Crow Colymbus migratorius.
Great Black Cormorant of Florida, having a red Beak Colymbus Floridanus.
Snake Bird of Florida Colymbus colubrinus, cauda elongata.
Great Black and White Pied Diver or Loon Colymbus musicus.
Large Spotted Loon or Great Colymbus Glacialis. Peck.
Speckled Diver Colymbus arcticus.
Little eared, Brown Dobchick Colymbus auritus et cornutus.
Little crested Brown Dobchick Colymbus minor fuscus.
Dobchick or Notail Colymbus podiceps. Peck.
Cream coloured Sheldrake Mergus merganser. Cutler.
Red Bellied Sheldrake Mergus serrator. Cutler.
Pyed Sheldrake Mergus castor. Cutler.
Penguin Alea impennis. Cutler.
Water Hen Alea arctica. Cutler.
Murr Alea torda. Peck.
Petteril Procellaria pelagica. Peck
Tropic Bird Phaaeton aetherius.
Great White Gull Larus alber.
Great Grey Gull Larus griseus.
Little White, River Gull Larus alba minor.
Mackarel Gull Larus ridibundus. Cutler.
Fishing Gull Sterna minuta. Cutler.
Sea Swallow or Noddy Sterna stolida.
Sea Sucker Petromyzon marinus. Peck.
Pintado Bird Petrelle pintado.
Thornback Raja sullonica. Peck.
Shear Water or Razor Bill Rynchops niger.
Frigate or Man of War Bird Pelicanus aquilus.
Booby Pelicanus sula.
Shag Pelicanus graculus. Cutler.
Pelican of the Mississippi, whose pouch holds 2 or 3 quarts Pelicanus.
American Sea Pelican Onocratalus Americanus.
The PLOVER KIND. CHARADRUS.
* Kildee or Chattering Plover Charadrus vociferous.
* Great Spotted Plover Charadrus maculatus.
* Little sea side Ring Necked Plover Charadrus minor.
* Will Willet or Oyster Catcher Hematopus ostrealegus.
Great Blue of Slate coloured Coot Fulica Floridana.
[...]White Head Coot Anas spectabilis. Cutler.
[...]Brown Coot Anas fusca. Cutler.
* Soree. Brown Rail. Widgeon Rallus Virginianus.
Little Dark Blue Water Rail Rallus aquatinus minor.
* Greater Brown Rail Rallus rufus.
Blue or Slate coloured Water Rail of Florida. Rallus major subceruleus.
Peep Rallus carolinus. Cutler.
* Flamingo: seen about the point of Florida; rarely as far North as St. Augustine Phoenicopterus ruber.

Besides these, the following have not been described or classed, un­less, under different names, they are contained in the above catalogue.

Sheldrach or Canvas Back Mow Bird
Ball Coot Blue Peter
Water Witch Water Wagtail
Water Pheasant Wakon Bird

The birds of America, says Catesby, generally exceed those of Eu­rope in the beauty of their plumage, but are much inferior to them in the melody of their notes.

The middle states, including Virginia, appear to be the climates, in North America, where the greatest number and variety of birds of passage celebrate their nuptials and rear their offspring, with which they annually return to more southern regions. Most of our birds are birds of passage from the southward. The eagle, the pheasant, grous and partridge of Pennsylvania, several species of woodpeckers, the crow, blue jay, robin, marsh wren, several species of sparrows or snow birds, and the swallow, are perhaps nearly all the land birds that con­tinue the year round to the northward of Virginia.

Very few tribes of birds build or rear their young in the south or maritime parts of Virginia, in Carolina, Georgia and Florida; yet all those numerous tribes, particularly of the soft billed kind, which breed in Pennsylvania, pass, in the spring season, through these regions in a few weeks time, making but very short stages by the way; and again, but few of them winter there on their return southwardly.

It is not known how far to the south they continue their rout, dur­ing their absence from the northern and middle states.

"The SWAN ( Cygnus ferus) is the largest of the aquatic tribe of birds which is seen in this country. One of them has been known to weigh 36 lb. and to be 6 feet in length, from the bill to the feet, when stretched. It makes a found resembling that of a trumpet, both when in the water and on the wing." (Belknap.)

The CANADIAN GOOSE ( A [...]ser Canaden [...]) is a bird of passage, and [Page 196] gregarious. The offspring of the Canadian and common goose are mongrels, and reckoned more valuable than either of them singly, but do not propagate.

The P [...]ARMIGAN ( Tetrao lagopus) ordinarily inhabits the colder cli­mates about Hudson's Bay, but is sometimes driven, through want of food, to the more southern latitudes. In the winter of 1788 these birds were taken plentifully about Quebec. Whenever the winter of the Arctic region sets in with rain, so as to cover the branches and leaves of trees with a glaze of ice, they are deprived of their food, and obliged to sly to the south, to a milder climate, where it can be procured. Hence they frequently visit the United States. Their feathers are mostly white, covered with down quite to the nails, and their flesh black, and of an exquisite relish.

Probably this is a different bird from Bartram's Mountain Cock or Grous, though both have the same Linnaean name.

The QUAIL or PARTRIDGE ( Tetrao minor, s-coturnix) This bird is the Quarl of New England, and the Partridge of the southern states; but is properly neither. It is a bird peculiar to America. The Par­tridge of New England ( Tetrao tympanus) is the Pheasant of Pennsyl­vania, but is miscalled in both places. It is a species of the Grous. Neither the Pheasant, Partridge or Quail, are found in America.

CUCKOW ( Cuculus Caroliniensis) These birds are said not to pair, like the rest of the feathered tribes. When the female appears on the wing she is often attended by two or three males. Unlike all o­ther birds, she does not build a nest of her own, but takes the oppor­tunity, while the Hedge Sparrow, (probably they make use of other nests) is laying her eggs, to deposite her egg among the rest, leaving the future care of it entirely to the hedge sparrow. The cuckow's, egg requires no longer incubation than her own. When the hedge spar­row has sat her usual time, and disengaged the young cuckow and some of her own offspring from their shells, the young cuckow, astonishing as it may seem, immediately sets about clearing the nest of the young sparrows, and the remaining unhatched eggs, and with sur­prizing expertness soon accomplishes the business, and remains sole possessor of the nest, and the only object of the sparrow's future care. *

The WAKON BIRD, which probably is of the same species with the bird of Paradise, receives its name from the ideas the Indians have of its superior excellence; the Wakon Bird being in their language the bird of the Great Spirit. It is nearly the size of a swallow, of a brown colour, shaded about the neck with a bright green. The wings are of a darker brown than the body. Its tail is composed of four or five feathers, which are three times as long as its body, and which are beautifully shaded with green and purple. It carries this fine length of plumage in the same manner as the peacock does his, but it is not known whether like him, it ever raises it to an erect position.

The WHETSAW is of the cuckow kind, being, like that, a solitary bird, and scarcely ever seen. In the summer months it is heard in the groves, where it makes a noise like the filing of a saw, from which cir­cumstance it has received its name.

The HUMMING BIRD ( Trochilus colubris) is the smallest of all the feathered inhabitants of the air. Its plumage surpasses description. On its head is a small tuft of jetty black; its breast is red; its belly [Page 197] white; its back, wings and tail of the finest pale green: small specks of gold are scattered over it with inexpressible grace: and to crown the whole, an almost imperceptible down softens the several colours, and produces the most pleasing shades.

AMPHIBIOUS REPTILES.] Among these are the mud tortoise or turtle (Testudo denticulata.) Speckled land tortoise (testudo caro­lina.) Great soft shelled tortoise of Florida (Testudo na [...]o cylindracea elongato, truncato. Bartram.)—When full grown it weighs from 30 to 40 pounds, extremely fat and delicious food.—Great land tortoise, called gopher, its upper shell is about 18 inches long, and from 10 to 12 broad.—Found south of Savanna River.

Two species of fresh water tortoises, inhabit the tide water rivers in the southern States, one is large, weighing from 10 to 12 pounds; the back shell nearly of an oval form; the other species small; but both are esteemed delicious food.

Of the frog kind, (Ranoe) are many species. The road (Rana luso?) several species, the red, brown and black. The former are the largest; the latter the smallest. Pond frog (Rana oc [...]llata.) Green fountain frog (Rana esculanta.) Tree frog (Rana mu [...]ulata.) Bull frog (Rana boans.) Besides these are the dusky brown, spotted frog of Carolina. 8 or 9 inch­es long from the nose to the extremity of the toes; their voice resembles the grunting of a swine. The bell frog, so called because their voice is fancied to be exactly like that of a loud cow bell. A beautiful green frog, whose noise is like the barking of little dogs, or the yelp­ing of puppies. A less green frog, whose notes resemble those of young chickens.—Little grey speckled frog, who make a noise like the strik­ing of two pebbles together under the surface of the water. There is yet an extremely diminutive species of frogs, called by some Savanna crickets, whose notes are not unlike the chattering of young birds or crickets. They are found in great multitudes after plentiful rains.

Of lizards (Lacertoe) we have also many species. The alligator, or American crocodile, is a very large, ugly, terrible, creature, of pro­digious strength, activity and swiftness in the water. They are from 12 to 23 feet in length; their bodies are as large as that of a horse, and are covered with horny places or scales, said to be impenetrable to a rifle ball, except about their heads and just behind their fore legs, where they are vulnerable; in shape they resemble the lizard. The head of a full grown alligator is about three feet long, and the mouth opens nearly the same length. The eyes are comparatively small, and the whole head, in the water, appears at a distance like a piece of rot­ten, floating wood. The upper jaw only, moves, and this they raise so as to form a right angle with the lower one. They open their mouths, while they lie basking in the sun, on the banks of rivers and creeks, and when filled with flies, musketoes and other insects, they suddenly let fall their upper jaw with surprising noise, and thus se­cure their prey. They have two large, strong, conical tusks, as white as ivory, which are not covered with any skin or lips, and which give the animal a frightful appearance. In the spring, which is their season for breeding, they make a most hideous and terrifying roar, re­sembling the Sound of distant thunder. The alligator is an evaporous animal; their nests, which are commonly built on the margin of some creek or river, at the distance of 15 or 20 yards from the water, are in the form of an obtuse cone, about 4 feet high, and 4 or 5 in di­ameter at their basis. They are constructed with a sort of mortar, made of a mixture of mud, grass and herbage. First they lay a floor of [Page 198] this composition, on which they deposite a layer of eggs; and [...] on this a stratum of their mortar, 7 or 8 inches thick; and their [...] other layer of eggs, and in this manner, one stratum upon [...] nearly to the top of the nest. They lay from one to two [...] eggs in a nest. These are hatched, it is supposed, by the [...] [...] sun, assisted, perhaps, by the fermentation of the vegetable [...] which they are deposited. The female, it is said, carefully [...] her own nest of eggs till they are all hatched. She them [...] brood under her care, and leads them about the shores like [...] a [...] does her chickens, and is equally courageous in defending [...] time of danger. When she lies basking upon warm banks [...] [...] brood around her, the young ones may be heard whining and barking [...] young puppies. The old feed on the young alligators, till they get [...] as that they cannot make a prey of them; so that happily but few [...] brood survive the age of a year. They are fond of the flesh of [...] hogs, which they devour whenever they have an opportunity. [...] principal food in fish. In Carolina and Georgia they retire [...] [...] ­dens, which they form by burrowing far under ground, [...] under water and working upwards, and there remain in a torpi [...] [...] during the winter. Further south, in warmer climates, they are [...] numerous, and more fierce and ravenous, and will boldly attack [...]. In South America, the carrion vulture is the instrument of [...] ­dence to destroy multitudes of young alligators, who would other [...] render the country uninhabitable.

Besides the alligator, we have of this species of amphibious [...] the brown lizard ( Lacerta punctatn.)—Swist ( Lacerta fusciata)— [...] lizard, or a little green cameleon of Carolina, about 6 or 7 inches [...] it has a large, red gill under its throat, and, like the camele [...], [...] [...] faculty of changing its colour. The striped lizard or scorpio [...]. mdash; [...] bellied, squamous lizards, several varieties.—Large copper [...] lizard.—Swift, slender, blue lizard, with a long slender tail, as [...] as that of the glass snake. The two last are rarely seen, but are some­times found about old log buildings in the southern States.

AMPHIBIOUS SERPENTS.] The characters by which amphibious serpents are distinguished are these, the belly is furnished with [...] and the tail has both scuta and scales. Of these reptiles, the following are found in the United States.

Rattle Snake Crotalus horidus.
Yellow Rattle Snake Crotali species.
Small Rattle Snake
Bastard Rattle Snake
Moccasin Snake Coluber—
Grey Spotted Moccasin Snake of Carolina
Water Viper, with a sharp thorn tail Coluber punctatus.
Black Viper Coluber prester.
Brown Viper Coluber luridus.
White Bodied, Brown Eyed Snake Coluber atropos.
Black Snake with linear rings Coluber leberis.
A Snake with 152 scutae and 135 scutellae Coluber dispas.
Bluish Green Snake, with a stretched out triangular snout, or Hognose Snake Coluber mycterizens.
Copper Bellied Snake Coluber erythrogaster.
Black Snake Coluber constrictor.
White Neck Black Snake Coluber—
Small Brown Adder Coluber striatulus.
House Adder Coluber punctatis.
Water Adder Coluber—
Brown Snake Coluber sipedon.
Little Brown Bead Snake Coluber annulatus.
Coach Whip Snake Coluber flagellum.
Corn Snake Coluber fulvius.
Green Snake. Coluber aestivus.
Wampum Snake Coluber fasciatus.
Ribbon Snake  
Pine, Horn, or Bull Snake, with a horny spear in his tail  
Joint Snake  
Garter Snake Anguis eryx.
Striped Snake
Chicken Snake Anguis maculata?
Glass Snake Anguis ventralis.
Brownish Spotted Snake Anguis reticulata.
Yellowish White Snake Anguis lumbricalis.
Hissing Snake  
Ring Snake  
Two headed Snake  

The RATTLE SNAKE ( Crotalus horridus) is the largest serpent yet known to exist in America. They are from 4 to upwards of 6 feet in length, and from 4 to 6 inches in diameter. Formerly, it is said, they were much larger. Their rattles consist of several articulated, crusta­ [...], or rather horny bags, forming their tails, which, when they move, make a rattling noise, warning people of their approach. It is said, they will not attack a person unless previously provoked. When molested or irritated, they erect their rattles, and by intervals, give the warning alarm. If pursued and overtaken, they instantly throw them­selves into the spiral coil; their whole body swells through rage, con­tinually rising and falling like a bellows; their beautiful particoloured skin becomes speckled and rough by dilatation; their head and neck are flattened; their cheeks swoolen, and their lips constricted, dis­covering their fatal fangs; their eyes red as burning coals, and their brandishing forked tongues, of the colour of the hottest flame, menaces a horrid death. They never strike unless sure of their mark. They are supposed to have the power of fascination, in an eminent degree; and it is generally believed that they charm birds, rabbits, squirrels and other animals, in such a manner as that they loose the power of resist­ance, and flutter and move slowly, but reluctantly, towards the yawning jaws of their devourers, and either creep into their mouths, or lie down and suffer themselves to be taken and swallowed. This dreaded reptile is easily killed. One well directed stroke on the head or across the back, with a stick not larger than a man's thumb, is sufficient to still the largest: and they are [...]o slow of motion that they cannot make [Page 200] their escape, nor do they attempt it when attacked. Many [...] remedies for the bite of a rattle snake have been prescribed [...] used with different success; the following, received from [...] au­thority, is recommended as a cure for the bite of all venom [...] [...] "Bind a ligature tight round the leg or thigh, above the part [...] as to interrupt the circulation; then open or scarify the wou [...] [...] lancet, knife or flint, and suck the wound or let a friend do it; [...] with any unctious matter, either animal or vegetable; or if [...] not be procured, make use of salt. Take care to keep the bow [...] [...] and free, by drinking sweet oil and milk or cream. If pure [...] at hand, apply it to the wound, after opening and sucking it, [...] [...] ­ference to any other thing; and eat plentifully of honey and [...].

The bastard rattle snake, is of the nature of the asp or adder of [...] Eastern continent; in form and colour they resemble the rattle snake, are 8 or 10 inches long; and very spiteful and venomous. [...] the rattle snake, they throw themselves into a coil; swell and [...] their bodies; continually darting out their heads, and seem capable of springing beyond their length.—Found in the southern States.

The moccasin snake is from 3 to 5 feet in length, and as thick as a man's leg: When disturbed by an enemy they throw themselves [...] a coil, and then gradually raise their upper jaw till it falls back, [...] touching the neck, at the same time vibrating their long purple [...] ­ed tongue, and directing their crooked poisonous fangs [...] their enemy. In this attitude the creature has a most terrifying ap­pearance. It is said their bite is incurable; but the probability [...] that it is not. Like the rattle snake they are slow in their [...] never bite a person unless provoked.—Found in abundance in [...] swamps and low grounds in the southern States.

The other moccasin snake is about 5 or 6 feet long, and as there is a man's arm; of a pale grey, sky coloured ground, with bro [...] [...] ­dulatory ringlets.—They are said not to be venomous; have no [...] ­onous sangs; are very swift and active, and flee from an [...]. Found in the southern States—and supposed to be a species of the wampum snake of Pennsylvania, if not the same snake, though [...] and deeper coloured.

The black snake is of various lengths from 3 to 6 feet, all over [...] a shining black; it is not venomous; is useful in destroying rats, [...] pursues its prey with wonderfully agility. It is said that it will [...] the rattle snake by twisting round it and whipping it to death [...] has been reported also that they have sometimes twined, themselves round the bodies of children, squeezing them till they die.—They are found in all the States.

The coach whip snake is of various and beautiful colours, some parts brown, or chocolate, others black and others white; it is 6 or 7 feet long, and very slender and active; it runs swiftly, and is quite in [...] ­fensive; but the Indians imagine that it is able to cut a man in two with a jerk of its tail. Like the black snake, it will run upon its [...] with its head and body erect.

The pine or bull snake, called also the Horn snake, is the largest of the serpent kind known in North America, except the rattle snake, and perhaps exceeds him in length.—They are pied black and white are inoffensive with respect to mankind, but devour squirrels, rabbit [...] and every other creature they can take as food. Their tails terri [...] with a hard horny spur, which they vibrate very quick when dis [...] ­ed, [Page 201] but they never attempt to strike with it. They have dens in the earth to which they retreat in time of danger.

The glass snake has a very small head; the upper part of its body is of a colour blended brown and green, most regularly and elegantly spotted with yellow. Its skin is very smooth and shining, with small scales, more closely connected than those of other serpents, and of a different structure. A small blow with a stick will separate the body, not only at the place struck, but at two or three other places, the muscles being articulated in a singular manner, quite through to the vertebra. They appear earlier in the spring than any other serpent, and are numerous in the sandy woods of the Carolinas and Georgia; and harmless.

The joint snake, if we may credit Carver's account of it, is a great curiosity. Its skin is as hard as parchment, and as smooth as glass. It is beautifully streaked with black and white. It is so stiff, and has so few joints, and those so unyielding, that it can hardly bend itself in­to the form of a hoop. When it is struck, it breaks like a pipe stem; and you may, with a whip, break it from the tail to the bowels into pieces not an inch long, and not produce the least tincture of blood. It is not venomous.

The two headed snake, has generally been considered as a monstrous production. I am disposed to believe, however, that it is a distinct species of serpents. I have seen one, and received accounts of three others, found in different parts of the United States. One of these was about 8 inches long, and both heads, as to every outward appear­ance, were equally perfect, and branching out from the neck at an a­cute angle.

The snakes are not so numerous nor so venomous in the northern as in the southern States. In the latter, however, the inhabitants are furnished with a much greater variety of plants and herbs, which af­ford immediate relief to persons bitten by these venomous creatures. It is an observation worthy of perpetual and grateful remembrance, that, wherever venomous animals are found, the God of natural has kindly provided sufficient antidotes against their poison.

FISHES] Fishes form the fourth class of animals in the Linnaean [...]. Mr. Pennant, in his British Zoology, distributes fish into three divisions, comprehending six orders. His divisions are, into Cetaceous, Cartilagenous, and Bony. We are not sufficiently informed on this part of our natural history, to arrange the following catalogue of our fishes agreeably to Mr. Pennant's judicious divisions.

CETACEOUS FISH.
The Whale. Dolphin. Porpesse. Grampus. Beluga.

CARTILAGENOUS FISH.
Lamprey. Brownspotted Garr fish. Red bellied Bream.
Skate. Lump fish. Silver or White Bream.
Shark. Pipe fish. Yellow Bream.
Dog fish. Golden Bream or Sun Black or blue Bream.
Storgeon. fish  

BONY FISH. *
Eel. Conger eel. Cat fish.
Snake fish Pout Week Fish
Haddock Horse Mackarel King Fish
Cod Blue Mackarel Sole
Frost fish Speckled Mackarel Mummy [...]hog.
Pollock Salmon White Fish
Small Pollock Salmon Trout Tide Black Fish
Hake Trout Rock Black Fish
Sculpion Smelt Blue Fish (Be [...]i [...])
Plaice Pike or Pickerel Sheeps Head
Flounder Athernie Red Drum
Holly but Mullet Black Drum
Dab Herring Branded Drum
Red Perch Carp Sheeps Head Drum
White Perch Pond Fish Mossbonker
Yellow perch Toad Fish Shadine
Sea Perch Roach Porsie
Whiting Shad Dace
Sea Bass Hard Head Anchovy
Shiner Alewise Flying Fish
Chub Bret
Stickle back Sucker
Skip jack Minow

The WHALE ( Balaena mysticetus) is the largest of all animals. In the northern seas some are found 90 feet in length; and in the [...] zone, where they are unmolested, whales have been seen 160 feet in length. The head is greatly disproportioned to the size of the body. In the middle of the head are two orifices, through which they sp [...]t water to a great height. The eyes are not larger than those of an [...], and are placed towards the back of the head, for the convenience of seeing both before and behind. They are guarded by eyelids as in quadrupeds; and they appear to be very sharp sighted, and quick of hearing. What is called Whale bone adheres to the upper jaw, and it formed of thin parallel laminae; some of the longest are 12 feet in length: Of these there are from 350 to 500, on each side, according to the age of the whale. The tail, which alone it uses to advance it­self in the water, is broad and semilunar, and when the fish lies on one side, its blow is tremendous.

In copulation, the male and female join, it is asserted, more hx [...]; and once in two years feel the accesses of desire. Their fidelity to each other is remarkable. An instance of it is related, by Mr. Ander­son, as follows: "Some fishers having struck one of two whales, a male and a female, in company, the wounded fish made a long and terrible resistance; it struck down a boat with two men in it, with a single blow of its tail, by which all went to the bottom. The other still attended its companion, and lent it every assistance; till, at last, the fish that was struck, sunk under the number of its wounds; while its faithful associate, disdaining to survive the loss, with great bellowing, stretched itself upon the dead fish, and shared its [...]." The whale goes with young nine or ten months, and generally pro­duces one young one, never above two, which are black and about to feet long. The teats of the female are placed in the lower [...] the belly. When she suckles her young, she throws herself [...] side, on the surface of the water, and the young ones attach the [...] to the teats. Nothing can exceed the tenderness and care of, [...] ­male for her young.

[Page 203] The Whale louse, Sword fish, and Thresher (a species of Squalus) are mortal enemies to the whale, who itself is an inoffensive animal.

Formerly whales were found in plenty upon the coasts of the Unit­ed States; at present they are scarce. The principal branch of the whale fishery in the United States, is carried on from Nantucket. The enterprize of the Nantucket whalemen is remarkable. Not sat­isfied with the scope which the Atlantic Ocean affords them, they have lately proceeded round Cape Horn, and penetrated the great Western Ocean, in pursuit of whales. Capt. Worth has lately returned from a very successful voyage, of which he gives the following account. viz. That he went to the southward, from Nantucket, doubled Cape Horn, and then pursued a north westwardly course, till he arrived at the island of Juan Fernandes.—That here, where a harpoon was scarcely ever thrown, the whales swim in shoals, and that it is quite a matter of choice, which of the company they shall fall upon.—That along the coast of Chili, for a considerable distance at sea, no rain falls to incommode the frying of blubber, as happens, to the great disadvant­age of the whaling business, in Hudson's Bay and Davis's straits; so that they can carry on their business without any of the interruptions common in other places; in consequence of which they can make more advantageous voyages. A cargo worth 6000£ sterling, it is said, has been procured in a 15 months voyage to this ocean. For the manner of taking the whales, see Part. II. page 9th.

The BELUGA (Delphinus beluga) is the 4th and last species of the Dolphin genus. The head is short; nose blunt; eyes and mouth small; in each side of each jaw are 9 teeth, short and rather blunt; those of the upper jaw are bent and hollowed, fitted to receive the teeth of the under jaw, when the mouth is closed; it has pectoral fins, nearly of an oval form; beneath the skin may be felt the bones of five fin­gers, which terminate at the edge of the fin in five very sensible pro­jections. This brings it into the next rank, in the order of beings, with the Manati, which we have already described under the head of animals.—Found in the northern parts of the American coasts; par­ticularly in the Gulf of St. Lawrence and Hudson's Bay.

The Lamprey frequents most of the rivers in the New England States, especially where the passage is not interrupted by dams. That part of the lamprey which is below the air holes is salted and dried for food. After the spawning season is over, and the young fry have gone down to the sea, the old fishes attach themselves to the roots and limbs of trees, which have fallen or run into the water, and there perish. A mortification begins at the tail, and proceeds upward to the vital part. Fish of this kind have been found at Plymouth, in New Hampshire, in different stages of putrefaction. *

The amphibious Lobster is found in the small brooks and swamps in the back parts of North Carolina. In its head is found the eye stone.

INSECTS.] The following catalogues of insects and vermes, except some small additions and the annexed descriptions, are taken from Dr. Belknap's History of New Hampshire, Vol. III. page 180-183.

Horned Beetle Scarabaeus simson.
Carolina Beetle Scarabaeus carolinus.
[...]ghill Beetle Scarabaeus stercorarius.
Appgle Beetle Scarabaeus horticola?
Golden Beetle Scarabaeus lanigerus.
  Several new species, and others that have not been arranged
Stag Beetle Lucanus cervus.
Fluted Beetle Lucanus interruptus.
  Dermestes lardarius.
  Dermestes typographus.
Water Flea Gyrinus natator.
Fetid Beetle Silpha vespillo.
Lady Fly Coccinella 2—pustulata.
  Several species.
  Chrysomela—many species.
Wheat Fly  
Weevil Bruchus pis [...].
Snouted Weevil Curculio quercus,
  Many species.
Goat Chaffer Cerambyx coriarius.
  Many species.
Firefly Lampyris lucida.
  Several species.
Skipper Elater oculatus.
  Many species.
Glow Worm Cicindela carolina.
  One or two other species.
Cantharides Buprestris mariana.
  Two or three other species.
Water Beetle Dytiscus piceus.
  Dytiscus marginalis.
  Dytiscus striatus.
  Several other species.
Black Beetle Carabus americanus.
  Numerous species.
Blossom Eater Meloe nigra.
  Staphylinus maxillosus.
  Forsicula.—Two species.
Cockroach Blatta americana, (non indigenu [...].)
Grasshopper Grillus.—Numerous species.
Cricket
Locust
Mole Cricket Grillus gryllotalpa.
Froghopper Cicada.—Many species.
Balm Cricket
Large and Small Water Fly Notanecta.—Several species.
Boat Fly
Bug Cinex.—Numerous species.
Louse, on Cabbages. Aphis brassicae.
Louse, on leaves of trees and plants. Aphis.—Numerous species.
Bug, on plants and trees Chermes.—Many species.
Butterfly Papilio. Numerous species [...] several non- descri [...]
Night Flutterer Owl Moth Sphinx.
Many new species.
Moth, or Miller [...] Palaena.—
[...] Numerous species.
Apple Moth, or Canker Worm Phalaena wauaria?
Dragon Fly Libellula.—Several species.
Adder Fly
  Hemerobius pectinicornis.
  Several species.
Oak Apple Fly Cynips.—Several species.
Saw Fly Tenthredo betulae.
Wasp Vespa.—Many species.
Hornet
Bumble Bee Aspis.—Several species
Wild Bee
Aunt Formica.—Several species
Black Fly Musca.—Numerous species
Brown Fly
Horse Fly Tabanus.—Several species.
Mosquito, or Musketoe Culex pipiens.
Stinging Fly Conops calcitrans.
Snow Flea Podura nivalis.
  Phalangium.
Father Long Legs Several species.
Spider Aranea,—Many species.
Crab Cancer.—Many species.
Lobster
Shrimp
Hermit Crab
Slender Crab
King Crab, or Horse Shoe Monoculus polyphemus.
  Monoculus piscinus.
Cray Fish  
Amphibious Lobster  
  Monoculus pulex.
  Monoculus quadricornis.
VERMES.
Sea Clam Holothuria phantaphus.
Squid Sepia media.
  Sepia loligo.
Sea Lungs Medusa pil [...]aris.
Star Fish, or Finger Fish Asterias.—Three or four species.
Sea Egg Echinus.—Several species.
Barnaole Lepas anatifera.
Hog Clam Mya arenaria.
Ra [...]or Shell Clam Solen ensis.
Long Shell Clam Solen radiatis.
Oyster Ostrea—
Muscle Mytilus edulis.
Cockle Nerita littoralis?
Limpets Patella fusca.
Sand Shell Clam Sabella granulata.
Sea Anemone Anemone marina (locomotiva.)

[Page 206] The Wheat fly, commonly but improperly called the H [...]ssia [...] [...] which has, of late years, proved so destructive to the wheat in various parts of the United States, has generally been supposed, to have [...] [...] ported from Europe. This opinion, however, seems not [...]o be [...] founded. Count Ginanni of Ravenna, in a late learned [...] the diseases of wheat in its growing state, between seed time and [...] vest, has given an account of more than 50 different insects that [...] the Italian wheat, and yet our wheat fly is not delineated nor desc [...]i [...]. There is reason therefore to doubt its existence in the south of [...] Sir Joseph Banks said it did not exist in England; nor could he [...] ­lect any account of it in Germany. This destructive insect is proba­bly a non-descript, and peculiar to the United States. *

[Page 207] The Ink or Cuttle fish, is a curiosity. It is furnished with a cyst of black liquor, which is a tolerable substitute for ink. This it emits▪ when pursued by its enemies. The moment this liquor is emitted, the water becomes like a thick, black cloud, in the eyes of its pursuer, and it improves this opportunity to make its escape. This cyst of li­quor appears designed by Providence solely for the purpose of person­al defence, and is certainly a most apt and curious contrivance. The Wholemen call these fish, Sq [...]ids, and say that they are eaten in abun­dance by some species of whales.

POPULATION.] According to the census, taken by order of Con­gress, in 1790, the number of inhabitants in the United States of America, was three millions, nine hundred thirty thousand, nearly. In this number none of the inhabitants of the Territory N. W. of the River Ohio, and but a part of the inhabitants of the Territory south of the River Ohio, are included. These added, would undoubtedly have encreased the number to 3,950,000, at the period the census was tak­en. The increase since, on supposition that the inhabitants of the United States double once in twenty years, has been about 200,000: So that now, 1792▪ there are, probably 4,150,000, souls in the Amer­ican United States.

This number is rapidly multiplying by immigrations from Europe▪ as well, as by natural increase. The American Republic is composed▪ of almost all nations, languages, characters and religions which Europe can furnish; the greater part, however, are descended from the Eng­lish; and all [...]ay, perhaps, be distinguishingly denominated Federal A­mericans.

It has generally been considered as a fact, that, of the human race, [...] males than females are born into the world. The proportion commonly fixed on, is as thirteen to twelve. Hence a conclusive [...] has been derived against poligamy. The larger number of [...] has been believed to be a wise appointment of Providence, to balance the destruction of the males in war, by sea, and by other oc­cupations more hazardous to life than the domestic employment of [Page 208] the female sex. The following table, formed from the census of [...] United States, in which the males and females are numbered [...] [...] ­ent columns, furnishes a new proof of the truth of the com [...] [...] ­ion, as it respects the United States. *

TABLE
  Males. Females. Excess. [...]
Vermont 44,763 40,505 4,258 [...]
New Hampshire 70,937 70,160 777 [...]
District of Maine       [...]
Massachusetts 182,742 190,582 7,840 [...]
Rhode Island 31,818 32,652 834 [...]
Connecticut 114,926 117,448 2,522 [...]
New York 161,822 152,320 9,502 [...]
New Jersey 86,667 83,287 3,380 [...]
Pennsylvania 217,736 206,363 11,373 [...]
Delaware 23,926 22,384 1,540 [...]
Maryland 107,254 101,395 5,839 [...]
Virginia 227,071 215,046 12,025 [...]
Kentucky 32,211 28,922 3,289 [...]
North Carolina 147,494 140,710 6,784 [...]
South Carolina 73,298 66,880 6,418 [...]
Georgia 27,147 25,739 1,408 [...]
Territory S. of Ohio 16,548 15,365 1,18 [...] [...]

It is remarkable that the excess in all the states is on the [...] males, except in Massachusetts, Rhode Island and Connecticut [...] these states the females are considerably the most numerous. T [...] [...] ­ference is obviously to be ascribed to the large migrations from [...] states, to Vermont, the northern and western parts of New York [...] Territory N. W. of Ohio, Kentucky, Pennsylvania, and some [...] most all the southern states. A great proportion of these [...] were males▪ and while they have served to increase the propor [...] of males, in the states where they have settled, as is strikingly [...] case in Vermont and Kentucky, to which the migrations have [...] most numerous, and where the males are to the females nearly [...] to nine, they have served to lessen the proportion of males in the [...] from whence they emigrated.

The number of Slaves, in 1790, in all the states, was 697, 69 [...] [...] increase of this number since, owing to salutary laws, in [...] of [...] states, and the humane exertions which have been made in [...] [...] their emancipation, has happily been small, and probably [...] [...] less in future.

CHARACTER AND MANNERS.] Federal Americans, collec [...] to­gether from various countries, of different habits, formed [...] [Page 209] different governments, have yet to form their national character, or we may [...]ther say, it is in a forming state. They have not yet existed as [...] nation long enough for us to form an idea of what will be, in its maturity, its prominent features. Judging, however, from its pre­sent promising infancy, we are encouraged to hope, that, at some fu­ture period, not far distant, it will, in every point of view, be respect­able.

Until the revolution which was accomplished in 1783, Europeans were strangely ignorant of America and its inhabitants. They concluded that the New World must be inferior to the old. The count de Buffon sup­posed that the animals in this country were uniformly less than in Europe, and thence concluded, that, "on this side the Atlantic there is a ten­dency in nature to belittle her production." The Abbe Raynal, in a [...] edition of his works supposed this belittling tendency or influ­ence had its effect on the race of whites transplanted from Europe, and thence had the presumption to assert, that "America had not yet produced one good poet, one able mathematician, one man of genius in a single art or science." Had the Abbe been justly informed respect­ing Americans, we presume he would not have made an assertion so [...], and injurious to their genius and literary character. This assertion drew from Mr. Jefferson the following reply.

"When we shall have existed as a people as long as the Greeks did before they produced a Homer, the Romans a Virgil, the French a Racine and Voltaire, the English a Shakespear and Milton, should this [...] be still true, we will enquire from what unfriendly causes it [...] proceeded, that the other countries of Europe and quarters of the [...] shall not have inscribed any name in the roll of poets. In war [...] have produced a WASHINGTON, whose memory will be adored while liberty shall have votaries, whose name will triumph over time, and will in future ages assume its just station among the most celebrated [...] of the world, when that wretched philosophy shall be for­ [...], which would arrange him among the degeneracies of nature. [...] [...] we have produced a FRANKLIN, than whom no one of the present age has made more important discoveries, nor has en­riched philosophy with more, or more ingenious solutions of the [...] of nature. We have supposed Mr. RITTENHOUSE sec­ [...] no astronomer living: that in genius he must be the first, be­cause he is self-taught. As an artist, he has exhibited as great [...] of mechanical genius as the world has ever produced.—He has not indeed made a world; but he has, by imitation, ap­proached nearer its Maker than any man who has lived from [...] creation to this day. As in philosophy and war, so in govern­ment, in oratory, in painting, in the plastic art, we might shew that America, though but a child of yesterday, has already given hope­ful [...] of genius, as well of the nobler kinds, which arouse [...] most feelings of man, which call him into action, which sub­ [...] [...] his freedom, and conduct him to happiness, as of the subor­ [...] which serve to amuse him only. We therefore suppose, that [...] [...] is as unjust as it is unkind; and that, of the geniuses [...] [...] the present age, America contributes its full share. For [...] it with those countries, where genius is most cultivated, [...] the most excellent models for art, and scaffoldings for the [...] of science, as France and England for instance, we calcu­ [...] [...]. The United States contain three millions of inhabitants; [Page 210] France twenty millions; and the British islands ten. We produc [...] Washington, a Franklin, a Rittenhouse. France then should [...] half a dozen in each of these lines, and Great Britain half that num­ber, equally eminent. It may be true, that France has; we are [...] just becoming acquainted with her, and our acquaintance so far [...] us high ideas of the genius of her inhabitants. It would be [...] too many of them to name particularly a Voltaire, a Buffon, the [...] ­ [...]tellation of Encyclopedists, the Abbe Raynal himself, &c. [...] We therefore have reason to believe she can produce her full [...] genius."

The two late important revolutions in America, which have [...] scarcely exceeded since the memory of man, I mean that of the dec­laration and establishment of independence, and that of the ado [...] of a new form of government without bloodshed, have called [...] historic fame many noble and distinguished characters who [...] otherwise have slept in oblivion.

But while we exhibit the fair side of the character of Federal Amer­icans, we would not be thought blind to their faults.

An European writer has justly observed, that "If there be an [...] ­ject truly ridiculous in nature, it is an American patriot, signing re [...] ­lutions of independency with one hand, and with the other brandish­ing a whip over his affrighted slaves."

Much has been written, to shew the injustice and iniquity of [...] slaving the Africans; so much as to render is unnecessary here to [...] any thing on that part of the subject. We cannot, however, [...] introducing a few observations respecting the influence of slavery up­on policy, morals and manners. From calculations on the subject, i [...] has been found, that the expense of maintaining a slave, especially [...] the purchase money be included, is much greater than that of [...] ­taining a free man: This however is disputed by some; but sup­pose the expense in both cases be equal, it is certain that the labour [...] the free man, influenced by the powerful motive of gain, is, at [...] twice as profitable to the employer as that of the slave. Besides, [...] ­ry is the bane of industry. It renders labour, among the wh [...] not only unfashionable, but disreputable. Industry is the offs [...] of necessity rather than of choice. Slavery precludes this necess [...] and indolence, which strikes at the root of all social and [...] happiness, is the unhappy consequence. These observations, [...] adding any thing upon the injustice of the practice, shew that [...] is impolitic.

Its influence on manners and morals is equally pernicious. [...] negro wenches, in many instances, are nurses to their mistresses' chil­dren. The infant babe, as soon as it is born, is delivered to its [...] nurse, and perhaps seldom or never tastes a drop of its mother's [...]. The children, by being brought up, and constantly associating with [...] negroes, too often imbibe their low ideas, and vitiated man [...] morals; and contract a negroish kind of accent and dia [...]ect, wh [...] they often carry with them through life.

To these I shall add the observations of a native * of a state [...] contains a greater number of slaves than any of the others. [...] his observations upon the influence of slavery were inte [...] particular state, they will apply equally well to all places [...] pernicious practice in any considerable degree prevails.

[Page 211] "There must doubtless" he observes "be an unhappy influence on the ma [...]ers of our people, produced by the existence of slavery a­mong us. The whole commerce between master and slave is a per­petual exercise of the most boisterous passions, the most unremitting despotism on the one part, and degrading submissions on the other. Our children see this, and learn to imitate it; for man is an imitative [...]. This quality is the germ of all education in him. From his [...]dle to his grave, he is learning to do what he sees others do▪ If a [...] could find no motive either in his philanthropy or his self-love▪ for restraining the intemperance of passion towards his slave, it should always be a sufficient one that his child is present. But generally it is not sufficient. The parent storms, the child looks on, catches the lin­ [...]ments of wrath, puts on the same ai [...]s in the circle of smaller slaves, giv [...] a loose to his worst of passions, and thus nursed, educated, and daily exercised in tyranny, cannot but be stamped by it with odious peculiarities. The man must be a prodigy who can retain his manners and morals undepraved by such circumstances. And with what exe­ [...]tion should the statesman be loaded, who permitting one half of the citizens thus to trample on the rights of the other, transforms those [...] despots, and these into enemies; destroys the morals of the one part, and the [...]or patrioe of the other. For if a slave can have a coun­try in this world, it must be any other in preference to that in which he is born to live and labour for another: in which he must lo [...]k up the faculties of his nature, contribute as far as depends on his indi­vidual endeavours to the evanishment of the human race, or entail his own miserable condition on the endless generations proceeding from him. With the morals of the people, their industry also is destroyed. For in a warm climate, no man will labour for himself who can make another labour for him. This is so true, that of the proprietors of [...] a very small proportion indeed are ever seen to labour. And [...] the liberties of a nation be thought secure when we have remov­ed their only firm basis, a conviction in the minds of the people that these liberties are the gift of God? That they are not to be violated but with his wrath? Indeed I tremble for my country when I reflect that God is just: that his justice cannot sleep forever: that consider­ing [...]bers, nature and natural means only, a revolution of the wheel of fortune, an exchange of situation, is among possible events: that it may become probable by supernatural interference!—The Almighty ha [...] [...]o attribute which can take side with us in such a contest. But it is impossible to be temperate and to pursue this subject through the various considerations of policy; of morals, of history, natural and [...] ▪ We must be contented to hope they will force their way into [...] one's mind. I think a change already perceptible, since the [...] of the present revolution. The spirit of the master is abating, [...] of the slave rising from the dust, his condition mollifying, the [...] [...]pe preparing, under the auspices of heaven, for a total eman­ [...]; and that this is disposed, in the order of events, to be with the consent of their masters, rather than by their extirpation."

Under the Federal government, from the measures already [...] we have reason to believe that all slaves in the United [...] will in time be emancipated, in a manner most consist­ent with their own happiness, and the true interest of their pro­ [...]. Whether this will be effected by transporting them back [...] [...]; or by colonizing them in some part of our own territory [Page 212] and extending to them our alliance and protection, until they shall have acquired strength sufficient for their own defence; or by incorpora­tion with the whites; or in some other way, remains to be determined.

In the middle and northern states, there are comparatively but [...] slaves; and of course there is less difficulty in giving them their free­dom. In Massachusetts alone, and we mention it to their distinguish­ed honour, there are NONE. Societies for the manumission of slaves, have been instituted in Philadelphia and New York, and other places, and laws have been enacted, and other measures taken in the New England states, to accomplish the same purpose. The FRIENDS, (commonly called Quakers) have evinced the propriety of their name, by their goodness in originating, and their vigorous exertions in exe­cuting this truly humane and benevolent design.

The English Language is universally spoken in the United States, and in it business is transacted, and the records are kept. It is sp [...]k­en with great purity, and pronounced with propriety in New-Eng­land, by persons of education; and, excepting some corruptions in pronunciation, by all ranks of people. In the middle and southern states, where they have had a great [...]uflux of foreigners, the language, in many instances, is corrupted, especially in pronunciation. Attempts are making to introduce a uniformity of pronunciation throughout the states, which for political, as well as other reasons, it is hoped will meet the approbation and encouragement of all literary and influ­ential characters.

Intermingled with the Americans, are the Dutch, Scotch, Irish, French, Germans, Swedes and Jews; all these, except the Scotch and Irish, retain, in a greater or less degree, their native lan­guage, in which they perform their public worship, converse [...] transact their business with each other.

The time, however, is anticipated, when all improper distinctions shall be abolished; and when the language, manners, customs, political and religious sentiments of the mixed mass of people who inhabit the United States, shall have become so assimilated, as that all nominal distinctions shall be lost in the general and honourable name of AMERICANS.

GOVERNMENT.] Until the fourth of July, 1776, the present United States were British colonies. On that memorable day, the Representatives of the United States of America, in Congress assem­bled, made a solemn declaration, in which they assigned their reasons for withdrawing their allegiance from the King of Great Britain. Appealing to the Supreme Judge of the world for the rectitude of their intentions, they did, in the name and by the authority of the good people of the colonies, solemnly publish and declare, That these United Colonies were, and of right ought to be, FREE and INDEPEN­DENT States; that they were absolved from all allegiance to the Brit­ish crown, and that all political connection between them and Great Britain was, and ought to be totally dissolved; and that as Free and Independent States, they had full power to levy war, conclude [...] contract alliances, establish commerce, and do all other acts and thing [...] which Independent States may of right do. For the support of th [...] declaration, with a firm reliance on the protection of divine p [...]i­dence, the delegates then in Congress, fifty-five in number, [...] pledged to each other their lives, their fortunes, and their sacred [...].

At the same time they published articles of Confederation and Perpetual Union between the states, in which they took the [...].

[Page 213] "THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA," and agreed, that each state should retain its sovereignty, freedom, and independence, and every power, jurisdiction and right not expressly delegated to Congress by the confederation. By these articles, the thirteen United States seve­rally entered into a firm league of friendship with each other for their common defence, the security of their liberties, and their mutual and general welfare, and bound themselves to assist each other, against all force offered to, or attacks that might be made upon all, or any of them, on account of religion, sovereignty, commerce or any other pre­tence whatever. But for the more convenient management of the general interests of the United States, it was determined, that Dele­gates should be annually appointed, in such manner as the Legislature of each state should direct, to meet in Congress the first Monday in November of every year, with a power reserved to each state to re­call its delegates, or any of them, at any time within the year, and to send others in their stead for the remainder of the year. No state was to be represented in Congress by less than two, or more than sev­en members; and no person could be a delegate for more than three years, in any term of six years, nor was any person, being a delegate, capable of holding any office under the United States, for which he, or any other for his benefit, should receive any salary, fees or emolu­ment of any kind. In determining questions in Congress, each state was to have one vote. Every state was bound to abide by the deter­minations of Congress in all questions which were submitted to them by the confederation. The articles of confederation were to be in­variably observed by every state, and the Union to be perpetual; nor was any alteration at any time hereafter to be made in any of the articles, unless such alterations be agreed to in Congress, and be after­wards confirmed by the legislatures of every state. The articles of confederation were ratified by Congress, July 9th, 1778.

These articles of confederation, being found inadequate to the purposes of a federal government, for reasons hereafter men­tioned, delegates were chosen in each of the United States, to meet and fix upon the necessary amendments. They accordingly met in convention at Philadelphia, in the summer of 1787, and agreed to propose the following constitution for the consideration of their con­stituents.

Constitution.] WE, THE PEOPLE of the United States, in order to form a more perfect union, establish justice, insure domestic tranquillity, provide for the common defence, promote the general welfare, and se­cure the blessings of liberty to ourselves and our posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution for the United States of America.

ARTICLE I.

Sect. 1. ALL legislative powers herein granted shall be vested in a Congress of the United States, which shall consist of a Senate and House of Representatives.

Sect. 2. The House of Representatives shall be composed of mem­bers chosen every second year by the people of the several states, and the electors in each state shall have the qualifications requisite for e­lectors of the most numerous branch of the state legislature.

No person shall be a Representative who shall not have attained to the age of twenty five years, and been seven years a citizen of the United States, and who shall not when elected, be an inhabitant of [...] state in which he shall be chosen.

[Page 214] Representatives and direct taxes shall be apportioned among [...] several states which may be included within this Union, according [...] their respective numbers, which shall be determined by adding to the whole number of free persons, including those bound to service for a term of years, and excluding Indians not taxed, three fifths of [...] other persons. The actual enumeration shall be made within three years after the first meeting of the Congress of the United States, [...] within every subsequent term of ten years, in such manner as they [...] by law direct. The number of representatives shall not exceed one for every thirty thousand, but each state shall have at least one repre­sentative; and, until such enumeration shall be made, the state of New Hampshire shall be entitled to choose three, Massachusetts eight, Rhode Island and Providence Plantations one, Connecticut five, New York six, New-Jersey four, Pennsylvania eight, Delaware one, Marry­land six, Virginia ten, North-Carolina five, South-Carolina five, and Georgia three.

When vacancies happen in the representation from any state, the executive authority thereof shall issue writs of election to fill such vacancies.

The House of Representatives shall choose their Speaker and oth­er officers; and shall have the sole power of impeachment.

Sect. 3. The Senate of the United States shall be composed of two senators from each state, chosen by the legislature thereof, for six years; and each senator shall have one vote.

Immediately after they shall be assembled, in consequence of the first election, they shall be divided as equally as may be into three cla [...]. The seats of the senators of the first class shall be vacated at the expira­tion of the second year, of the second class at the expiration of the fourth year, and of the third class at the expiration of the sixth year, so that one third may be chosen every second year; and if vacancies happen by resignation, or otherwise, during the recess of the legislature of any state, the executive thereof may make temporary appoint­ments until the next meeting of the legislature, which shall th [...] [...] such vacancies.

No person shall be a senator who shall not have attained to the age of thirty years, and been nine years a citizen of the United States, and who shall not, when elected, be an inhabitant of that state for which he shall be chosen.

The Vice-President of the United States shall be President of the Senate, but shall have no vote, unless they be equally divided.

The Senate shall choose their other officers, and also a President pro [...]empore in the absence of the Vice-President, or when he shall exer­cise the office of President of the United States.

The Senate shall have the sol [...] power to try all impeachments. When sitting for that purpose, they shall be on oath or affirmation. When the President of the United States is tried, the chief justice [...] preside: and no person shall be convicted without the concurrence of two thirds of the members present.

Judgment in cases of impeachment shall not extend further than [...] removal from office, and disqualification to hold and enjoy any [...] of honour, trust or profit under the United States; but the party con­victed shall nevertheless be liable and subject to indictment, [...] judgment and punishment, according to law.

Sect. 4. The times, places and manner of holding elections [...] senators and representatives, shall be prescribed in each state by [...] [Page 215] legislature thereof; but the Congress may at any time by law make or alter such regulations, except as to the places of chusing Senators.

The Congress shall assemble at least once in every year, and such meeting shall be on the first Monday in December, unless they shall by law appoint a different day.

Sect. 5. Each house shall be the judge of the elections, returns and qualifications of its own members, and a majority of each shall con­stitute a quorum to do business; but a smaller number may adjourn from day, to day, and may be authorised to compel the attendance of absent members, in such a manner, and under such penalties as each house may provide.

Each house may determine the rules of its procedings, punish its members for disorderly behaviour, and, with the concurrence of two thirds, expel a member.

Each house shall keep a journal of its proceedings, and from time to time publish the same, excepting such parts as may in their judgment require secrecy; and the yeas and nays of the members of either house on any question, shall, at the desire of one fifth of those present, be entered on the journal.

Neither house, during the session of Congress, shall, without the consent of the other, adjourn for more than three days, nor to any other place than that in which the two houses shall be sitting.

Sect. 6. The Senators and Representatives shall receive a compensa­tion for their services, to be ascertained by law, and paid out of the treasury of the United States. They shall in all cases, all except treason, felony and breach of the peace, be privileged from arrest during their attendance at the session of their respective houses, and in going to and returning from the same; and for any speech or debate in either House, they shall not be questioned in any other place.

No Senator or Representative shall, during the time for which he was elected, be appointed to any civil office under the authority of the United States, which shall have been created, or the emoluments whereof shall have been encreased during such time; and no person holding any office under the United States, shall be a member of either House during his continuance in office.

Sect. 7. All bills for raising revenue shall originate in the House of Representatives; but the Senate may propose or concur with a­mendments as on other bills.

Every bill which shall have passed the House of Representatives and the Senate, shall, before it becomes a law, be presented to the Presi­dent of the United States; if he approve, he shall sign it, but if not he shall return it, with his objections, to that house in which it shall have originated, who shall enter the objections at large on their journal, and proceed to re-consider it. If, after such re-consid­eration, two thirds of that house shall agree to pass the bill, it shall be sent, together with the objections, to the other house, by which it shall likewise be reconsidered, and if approved by two thirds of that house it shall become a law. But in all such cases the votes of both houses shall be determined by yeas and nays, and the names of the per­sons voting for and against the bill shall be entered on the journal of each house respectively. If any bill shall not be returned, by the Presi­dent within ten days, (Sundays excepted) after it shall have been pre­sented to him, the same shall be a law, in like manner as if he had sign­ed it, unless the Congress, by their adjournment, prevent its return, in which case it shall not be a law.

[Page 216] Every order, resolution, or vote, to which the concurrence of the Senate and House of Representatives may be necessary (except on a question of adjournment) shall be presented to the President of the United States; and before the same shall take effect, shall be approv­ed by him, or, being disapproved by him, shall be re-passed by two thirds of the Senate and House of Representatives, according to the rules and limitations prescribed in the case of bill.

Sect. 8. The Congress shall have power

To lay and collect taxes, duties, imposts and excises; to pay the debts and provide for the common defence and general welfare of the United States; but all duties, imposts and excises shall be uniform throughout the United States;

To borrow money on the credit of the United States;

To regulate commerce with foreign nations, and among the several states, and with the Indian tribes;

To establish an uniform rule of naturalization, and uniform laws on the subject of bankruptcies throughout the United States;

To coin money, regulate the value thereof, and of foreign coin, and fix the standard of weights and measures;

To provide for the punishment of counterfeiting the securities and current coin of the United States;

To establish post offices and post roads;

To promote the progress of science and useful arts, by securing for limited times, to authors and inventors, the exclusive right to their re­spective writings and discoveries;

To constitute tribunals inferior to the supreme court;

To define and punish piracies and felonies committed on the high seas, and offences against the law of nations;

To declare war, grant letters of marque and reprisal, and make rules concerning captures on land and water;

To raise and support armies, but no appropriation of money to that use shall be for a longer term than two years;

To provide and maintain a navy;

To make rules for the government and regulation of the land and naval forces;

To provide for calling forth the militia to execute the laws of the union, suppress insurrections, and repel invasions;

To provide for organizing, arming, and disciplining the militia, and for gove [...]ing such part of them as may be employed in the service of the United States, reserving to the states respectively, the appointment of the officers, and the authority of training the militia according to the discipline prescribed by Congress;

To exercise exclusive legislation in all cases whatsoever, over such district (not exceeding ten miles square) as may by cession of particu­lar states, and the acceptance of Congress, become the seat of govern­ment of the United States, and to exercise like authority over all places purchased by the consent of the legislature of the state in which the same shall be, for the erection of forts, magazines, arsenals, dock­yards, and other needful buildings:—And

To make all laws which shall be necessary and proper for carrying into execution the foregoing powers, and all other powers vested by this constitution in the government of the United States, or in any de­partment or officer thereof.

[Page 217] Sect. 9. The migration or importation of such persons as any of the states now existing shall think proper to admit, shall not be prohibited by the Congress prior to the year one thousand eight hundred and eight, but a tax or duty may be imposed on such importation, not exceeding ten dollars for each person.

The privilege of the writ of habeas corpus shall not be suspended, unless when in cases of rebellion or invasion the public safety may re­quire it.

No bill of attainder or ex post facto law shall be passed.

No capitation▪ or other direct tax, shall be laid, unless in propor­tion to the census or enumeration herein before directed to be taken.

No tax or duty shall be laid on articles exported from any state.—

No preference shall be given by any regulation of commerce or reve­nue to the ports of one state over those of another: nor shall ves­sels bound to or from, one state, be obliged to enter, clear, or pay duties in another.

No money shall be drawn from the treasury, but in consequence of appropriations made by law; and a regular statement and account of the receipts and expenditures of all publick money shall be pub­lished from time to time.

No title of nobility shall be granted by the United States:—

And no person holding any office of profit or trust under them, shall, without the consent of the Congress, accept of any present, em­olument, office or title of any kind whatever, from any king, prince or foreign state.

Sect. 10. No state shall enter into any treaty, alliance or confedera­tion; grant letters of marque and reprisal; coin money; emit bills of credit; make any thing but gold and silver coin a tender in payment of debts; pass any bill of attainder, ex post facto law, or law impairing the obligation of contracts, or grant any title of nobility.

No State shall, without the consent of the Congress, say any imposts or duties on imports or exports, except what may be absolutely neces­sary for executing its inspection laws; and the net produce of all duties and imposts, laid by any state on imports or exports, shall be for the use of the Treasury of the United States; and all such laws shall be subject to the revision and control of the Congress. No state shall, without the consent of Congress, lay any duty of tonnage, keep troops, or ships of war, in time of peace, enter into any agree­ment or compact with another state, or with a foreign power, or en­gage in war, unless actually invaded, or in such imminent danger as will not admit of delay.

ARTICLE II.

Sect. 1. The executive power shall be vested in a President of the United States of America. He shall hold his office during the term of four years, and, together with the Vice-President, chosen for the same term, be elected as follows:

Each state shall appoint, in such manner as the legislature thereof may direct, a number of electors, equal to the whole number of Sena­tors and Representatives to which the state may be entitled in the Congress: but no Senator or Representative, or person holding an of­fice of trust or profit under the United States, shall be appointed an elector.

[Page 218] The electors shall meet in their respective states, and vote by bal­lot for two persons, of whom one at least shall not be an inhabitant of the same state with themselves. And they shall make a list all the persons voted for, and of the number of votes for each; which list they shall sign and certify, and transmit, sealed, to the seat of the government of the United States, directed to the President of the Senate. The President of the Senate shall, in the presence of the Senate and House of Representatives, open all the certificates, and the votes shall then be counted. The person having the greatest number of votes shall be the President, if such number be a majority of the whole number of electors appointed; and if there be more than [...] who have such majority, and have an equal number of votes, then the House of Representatives shall immediately choose by ballot one of them for President; and if no person have a majority, then from the five highest on the list, the said house shall in like manner choose the President. But in choosing the President, the votes shall be taken by states, the representations from each state having one vote; a quo­rum for this purpose shall consist of a member or members from two thirds of the states, and a majority of all the states shall be necessary [...] a choice. In every case, after the choice of the President, the [...] having the greatest number of votes of the electors, shall be the Vice-President. But if there should remain two or more who have equal votes, the Senate shall choose from them by ballot the Vice-President.

The Congress may determine the time of choosing the electors, and the day on which they shall give their votes; which day shall be the same throughout the United States.

No person, except a natural born citizen, or a citizen of the United States at the time of the adoption of this constitution, shall be eligible to the office of President; neither shall any person be eligible to that office who shall not have attained to the age of thirty five years, and been fourteen years a resident within the United States.

In case of the removal of the President from office, or of his death, resignation, or inability to discharge the powers and duties of the said office, the same shall devolve on the Vice-President, and the Congress may by law provide for the case of removal, death, resignation or inability, both of the President and Vice-President, declaring what officer shall then act as President, and such officer shall act accord­ingly, until the disability be removed, or a President shall be elected.

The President shall, at stated times, receive for his services, a com­pensation, which shall neither be encreased or diminished during the period for which he shall have been elected, and he shall not receive within that period any other emolument from the United States, or any of them.

Before he enter on the execution of his office, he shall take the following oath or affirmation:

"I do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will faithfully execute the office of President of the United States, and will, to the best of my ability, preserve, protect, and defend the constitution of the United States."

Sect. 2. The President shall be commander in chief of the army and navy of the United States, and of the militia of the several states, when called into the actual service of the United States; he may require the opinion, in writing, of the principal officer in each of the executive departments, upon any subject relating to the duties of their respective of­fices, [Page 219] and he shall have power to grant reprieves and pardons for of­fences against the United States, except in cases of impeachment.

He shall have power, by and with the advice and consent of the senate, to make treaties, provided two thirds of the senators present concur; and he shall nominate, and by and with the advice and con­sent of the senate, shall appoint ambassadors, other public ministers and consuls, judges of the supreme court, and all other officers of the United States, whose appointments are not herein otherwise provided for, and which shall be established by law. But the Congress may by law vest the appointment of such inferior officers, as they think pro­per, in the President alone, in the courts of law, or in the heads of de­partments.

The president shall have power to fill up all vacancies that may happen during the recess of the senate, by granting commissions which shall expire at the end of their next session.

Sect. 3. He shall from time to time give to the Congress informa­tion of the state of the union, and recommend to their consideration such measures as he shall judge necessary and expedient; he may, on extraordinary occasions, convene both houses, or either of them, and in case of disagreement between them, with respect to the time of ad­journment, he may adjourn them to such time as he shall think proper; he shall receive ambassadors and other public ministers; he shall take care that the laws be faithfully executed, and shall commission all the officers of the United States.

Sect. 4. The President, Vice-President, and all civil officers of the United States, shall be removed from office on impeachment for, and conviction of, treason, bribery, or other high crimes and misdemea­ [...].

ARTICLE III.

Sect. 1. The Judicial power of the United States shall be vested in one supreme court, and in such inferior courts as the Congress may from time to time ordain and establish. The Judges, both of the su­preme and inferior courts, shall hold their offices during good behav­iour, and shall, at stated times, receive for their services, a compensa­tion, which shall not be diminished during their continuance in office.

Sect. 2. The Judicial power shall extend to all cases, in law and equity, arising under this constitution, the laws of the United States, and treaties made, or which shall be made, under their authority; to all cases affecting ambassadors, other public ministers and consuls; to all cases of admiralty and maritime jurisdiction; to controversies to which the United States shall be a party: to controversies between two or more states, between a state and citizens of another state, be­between citizens of different states, between citizens of the same state claiming lands under grants of different states, and between a state, or the citizens thereof, and foreign states, citizens or subjects.

In all cases affecting ambassadors, other public ministers and consuls▪ and those in which a state shall be party, the supreme court shall have original jurisdiction. In all the other cases before mentioned, the supreme court shall have appellate jurisdiction, both as to law and fact, with such exceptions, and under such regulations as the Congress shall make.

The trial of all crimes, except in cases of impeachment, shall be by jury; and such trial shall be held in the state where the said crime [Page 220] shall have been committed; but when not committed within any [...] the trial shall be at such place or places as the Congress may by law have directed.

Sect. 3. Treason against the United States, shall consist only in levy­ing war against them, or in adhering to their enemies, giving them and and comfort. No person shall be convicted of treason unless on the testimony of two witnesses to the same overt act, or on confession in open court.

The Congress shall have power to declare the punishment of trea­son, but no attainder of treason shall work corruption of blood, or forfeiture, except during the life of the person attainted.

ARTICLE IV.

Sect. 1. Full faith and credit shall be given in each state to the pub­lic acts, records, and judicial proceedings of every other state. And the Congress may by general laws prescribe the manner in which such acts, records and proceedings shall be proved, and the effect thereof.

Sect. 2. The citizens of each state shall be entitled to all privilege and immunities of citizens in the several states.

A person charged in any state with treason, felony, or other crime, who shall flee from justice, and be found in another state, shall, on de­mand of the executive authority of the state from which he fled, be delivered up, to be removed to the state having jurisdiction of the crime.

No person held to service or labour in one state, under the laws thereof, escaping into another, shall in consequence of any law or regulation therein, be discharged from such service or labour, but shall be delivered up on claim of the party to whom such service or labour may be due.

Sect. 3. New states may be admitted by the Congress into this uni­on, but no new state shall be formed or erected within the jurisdiction of any other state; nor any state be formed by the junction of two or more states, or parts of states, without the consent of the legislatures of the states concerned as well as of the Congress.

The Congress shall have power to dispose of and make all needful rules and regulations respecting the territory or other property belong­ing to the United States; and nothing in this constitution shall be so construed as to prejudice any claims of the United States, or of any particular state.

Sect. 4. The United States shall guarantee to every state in this union of republican form of government, and shall protect each of them against invasion; and on application of the legislature, or of the executive (when the ligislature cannot be convened) against do­mestic violence.

ARTICLE V.

The Congress, whenever two thirds of both houses shall deem it ne­cessary, shall propose amendments to this constitution, or, on the ap­plication of the legislatures of two thirds of the several states, shall call a convention for proposing amendments, which, in either ca [...], shall be valid to all intents and purposes, as part of this constitution, when ratified by the legislatures of three fourths of the several states or by conventions in three fourths thereof, as the one or the other mode of ratification may be proposed by the Congress: Provided, the [Page 221] no amendment which may be made prior to the year one thousand eight hundred and eight, shall in any manner affect the first and fourth clauses in the ninth section of the first article; and that no state, without its consent, shall be deprived of its equal suffrage in the Senate.

ARTICLE VI.

All debts contracted, and engagments entered into, before the adop­tion of this constitution, shall be as valid against the United States under this constitution, as under the confederation.

This constitution, and the laws of the United States which shall be made in pursuance thereof; and all treaties made, or which shall be made, under the authority of the United States, shall be the supreme law of the land; and the judges in every state shall be bound thereby, any thing in the constitution or laws of any state to the contrary not­withstanding.

The Senators and Representatives before mentioned, and the mem­bers of the several state Legislatures, and all Executive and Judicial officers, both of the United States and of the several states, shall be bound by oath or affirmation, to support this constitution; but no re­ligious test shall ever be required as a qualification to any office or public trust under the United States.

ARTICLE VII.

The ratification of the conventions of nine states, shall be sufficient for the establishment of this constitution between the states so ratify­ing the same.

DONE in Convention, by the unanimous consent of the states present, the seventeenth day of September, in the year of our Lord One Thousand Seven Hundred and Eighty-seven, and of the Independence of the United States of America the Twelfth. In Witness whereof, we have hereunto subscribed our names.
GEORGE WASHINGTON, President, Signed also by all the Delegates which were present from twelve states. Attest. WILLIAM JACKSON, Secretary.

PRESENT.

The States of New Hampshire, Massachusetts, Connecticut, Mr. Hamilton from New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware, Maryland, Virginia, North Carolina, South Carolina and Georgia.

Resolved,

THAT the preceding constitution be laid before the United States in Congress assembled, and that it is the opinion of this Conven­tion, that it should afterwards be submitted to a convention of Dele­gates, chosen in each state by the people thereof, under the recommen­dation of its Legislature, for their assent and ratification; and that each convention assenting to, and ratifying the same, should give no­tice thereof to the United States in Congress assembled.

RESOLVED, That it is the opinion of this convention, that as soon as the conventions of nine states shall have ratified this constitu­tion, the United States in Congress assembled, should fix a day on which Electors should be appointed by the states which shall have ratified the same, and a day on which the Electors should assemble to [Page 222] vote for the President, and the time and place for commencing pro­ceedings under this constitution. That after such publication, the Electors should be appointed, and the Senators and Representatives elected: That the electors should meet on the day fixed for the elec­tion of the President, and should transmit their votes certified, signed, sealed and directed, as the constitution requires, to the Secretary of the United States in Congress assembled; that the senators and repre­sentatives should convene at the time and place assigned; that the senators should appoint a President of the Senate, for the sole purpose of receiving, opening and counting the votes for President; and, that after he shall be chosen, the Congress, together with the President, should, without delay, proceed to execute this Constitution.

By the unanimous order of the Convention, GEORGE WASHINGTON, President. WILLIAM JACKSON, Secretary.
SIR,

WE have now the honour to submit to the consideration of the United States in Congress assembled, that constitution which has ap­peared to us the most adviseable.

The friends of our country have long seen and desired, that the power of making war, peace and treaties, that of levying money and regulating commerce, and the correspondent executive and judicial authorities, should be fully and effectually vested in the general govern­ment of the union; but the impropriety of delegating such exten­sive trust to one body of men is evident.—Hence results the necessity of a different organization.

It is obviously impracticable, in the federal government of these states, to secure all rights of independent sovereignty to each, and yet provide for the interest and safety of all.—Individuals entering into society, must give up a share of liberty to preserve the rest. The magnitude of the sacrifice must depend as well on situation and cir­cumstance, as on the object to be obtained. It is at all times diffi­cult to draw with precision the line between those rights which must be surrendered, and those which may be reserved; and on the present occasion this difficulty was encreased by a difference among the sev­eral states as to their situation, extent, habits and particular interests.

In all our deliberations on this subject, we kept steadily in our view, that which appears to us the greatest interest of every true A­merican, the consolidation of our union, in which is involved our prosperity, felicity, safety, perhaps our national existence. This im­portant consideration, seriously and deeply impressed on our minds, led each state in the convention to be less rigid on points of inferior magnitude, than might have been otherwise expected; and thus the con­stitution, which we now present, is the result of a spirit of amity, and of that mutual deference and concession which the peculiarity of our po­litical situation rendered indispensible.

That it will meet the full and entire approbation of every state i [...] not perhaps to be expected: but each will doubtless consider, that had her interests been alone consulted, the consequences might have been particularly disagreeable or injurious to others: That it is liable to as few exceptions as could reasonably have been expected, we hope and believe: That it may promote the lasting welfare of that country [Page 223] so dear to us all, and secure her freedom and happiness, is our most ar­dent wish.

With great respect, we have the honour to be, Sir, Your Excel­lency's most obedient, and humble servants,

GEORGE WASHINGTON, President. By unanimous order of the Convention. His Excellency the President of Congress.

The Conventions of a number of the states having at the time of their adopting the Constitution expressed a desire, in order to prevent misconstruction or abuse of its powers, that further declaratory and restrictive [...]uses should be added: And as extending the ground of public confidence in the government will best ensure the beneficent ends of its institution.

RESOLVED by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, two thirds of both houses concurring, That the following articles be proposed to the legislatures of the several states, as amendments to the Constitu­tion of the United States, all or any of which articles, when ratified by three fourths of the said legislatures, to be valid to all intents and purposes, as part of the said constitution, viz.

Articles in addition to, and amendment of, the Constitution of the United States of America, proposed by Congress, and ratified by the Legislatures of the sev­eral states, pursuant to the fifth Article of the original constitution.

ARTICLE I.

After the first enumeration required by the first article of the Con­stitution, there shall be one Representative for every thirty thousand, until the number shall amount to one hundred, after which the propor­tion shall be so regulated by Congress, that there shall be not less than one hundred Representatives, nor less than one Representative for every forty thousand persons, until the number of Representatives shall amount to two hundred, after which the proportion shall be so regulated by Congress, that there shall not be less than two hundred Representatives, nor more than one Representative for every fifty thous­and persons.

ARTICLE II.

No law varying the compensation for the services of the Senators and Representatives, shall take effect, until an election of Representa­tives shall have intervened.

ARTICLE III.

Congress shall make no law respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise thereof; or abridging the freedom of speech, or of the press; or the right of the people peaceably to as­semble, and to petition the government for a redress of grievances.

ARTICLE IV.

A well regulated militia being necessary to the security of a free state, the right of the people to keep and bear arms shall not be in­fringed.

ARTICLE V.

No soldier shall in time of peace be quartered in any house with­out the consent of the owner, nor in time of war, but in a manner to be prescribed by law.

[Page 224]

ARTICLE VI.

The right of the people to be secure in their persons, houses, [...] ­pers and effects, against unreasonable searches and seizures, shall not be violated, and no warrants shall issue, but upon probable cause, sup­ported by oath or affirmation, and particularly describing the place [...] be searched, and the persons or things to be seized.

ARTICLE VII.

No person shall be held to answer for a capital, or otherwise infa­mous crime, unless on a presentment or indictment of a grand jury, except in cases arising in the land or naval forces, or in the mi [...] when in actual service in time of war or public danger; nor shall any person be subject for the same offence to be twice put in jeopardy of life or limb; nor shall be compelled in any criminal case to be a [...] ­ness against himself, nor be deprived of life, liberty or property, with out due process of law; nor shall private property be taken for [...] ­lic use without just compensation.

ARTICLE VIII.

In all criminal prosecutions the accused shall enjoy the right to a speedy and public trial, by an impartial jury of the state and district wherein the crime shall have been committed, which district shall have been previously ascertained by law, and to be informed of the nature and cause of the accusation; to be confronted with the witness­es against him; to have compulsory process for obtaining witnesses in his favor, and to have the assistance of counsel for his defence.

ARTICLE IX.

In suits at common law, where the value in controversy shall ex­ceed twenty dollars, the right or trial by jury shall be preserved, and no fact, tried by a jury, shall be otherwise re-examined in any court of the United States, than according to the rules of the common law.

ARTICLE X.

Excessive bail shall not be required, nor excessive fines imposed, nor cruel and unusual punishments inflicted.

ARTICLE XI.

The enumeration in the Constitution, of certain rights, shall not be construed to deny or disparage others retained by the people.

ARTICLE XII.

The powers not delegated to the United States by the Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the States, are reserved to the States respective­ly, or to the people.

The following states have ratified all the foregoing articles of a­mendment to the constitution of the United States, viz. Maryland, North Carolina, South Carolina, New York, Virginia and Ver [...], New Hampshire, New Jersey and Pennsylvania reject the second arti­cle; and Delaware rejects the first article. No official returns, to our knowledge, have been made from the other States.

SOCIETY OF THE CINCINNATI. This Society was instituted im­mediately on the close of the war in 1783. At their first general [Page 225] [...] Philadelphia, in May 1784, they altered and a [...]ended the original In­stitution, and reduced it to its present form. They denominated them­selves " The Society of the Cincinnati," from the high veneration they possessed for the character of that illustrious Roman, Lucius Quintius Cin [...]alus.

The persons who constitute this society, are all the commissioned and brevet officers of the army and navy of the United States, who served three years, and who left the service with reputation; all offi­cers who were in actual service at the conclusion of the war; all the principal staff officers of the continental army; and the officers who have been deranged by the several resolutions of Congress, upon the different reforms of the army.

There are also admitted into this society, the late and present min­isters of his most Christian majesty to the United States; all the gen­erals and colonels of regiments, and legions of the land forces; all the admirals and captains of the navy, ranking as colonels, who have co-operated with the armies of the United States in their exertions for liberty; and such other persons as have been admitted by the res­pective state meetings.

The motives which originally induced the officers of the Ameri­can army to form themselves into a society of friends, are sum­m [...]d up in a masterly manner, in their circular letter. "Having▪" says they, "lived in the strictest habits of amity through the various [...] of a war, unparalleled in many of its circumstances; having seen [...] objects for which we have contended, happily attained; in the mo­ment of triumph and separation, when we were about to act the la [...] pleasing, melancholy scene in our military drama-pleasing, because we [...] to leave our country possessed of independence and pence—melancholy, because we were to part, perhaps never to meet again; while every breast was penetrated with feelings which can be more easily conceived than described; while every little act of tenderness recurred fresh to the recollection, it was impossible not to wish our friendships should be continued; it was extremely natural to desire they might be perpetuated by our posterity to the remotest ages. With these impressions, and with such sentiments, we candidly confess we signed the institution.—We know our motives were irreproachable."

They rest their institution upon the two great pillars of FRIEND­SHIP and CHARITY. Their benevolent intentions are, to diffuse [...] and support to any of their unfortunate companions who have seen better days, and have merited a milder fate; to wipe the tear from the eye of the widow, who must have been consigned, with her helpless infants, to indigence and wretchedness, but for this charitable institution; to succour the fatherless; to rescue the female orphan from destruction; and to enable the son to emulate the virtues of the father▪ 'let us then,' they conclude, 'prosecute with ardor what we have insti­tuted in sincerity; let Heaven and our own consciences approve our [...]; let our actions be our best comment on our words; and let us [...] a lesson to posterity, THAT THE GLORY OF SOLDIERS CAN­ [...] [...] COMPLETED, WITHOUT ACTING WELL THE PART O [...] CITI­ZENS.'

The society have an order, (viz) A Bald Eagle of gold, bearing on its breast the emblems described as follows—

The Principal figure is CINCINNATUS: three senators presenting [Page 226] him with a sword and other military ensigns: On a field in the [...] ground, his wife standing at the door of their cottage; near it a [...] and other instruments of husbandry. Round the whole, [...] [...] servare rempubli [...]m. On the reverse, the sun rising, a city with [...] gates, and vessels entering the port; same crowning Cincinn [...]tus [...] wreath, inscribed, virtutis proemium. Below, hands joining, suppor [...] a heart; with the motto, esto perpetua. Round the whole, foci [...]s [...] cinnatorum, instituta, A. D. 1783.

AGRICULTURE, COMMERCE AND MANUFACTURES. The three important object [...] attention in the United States, [...] agriculture, commerce and manufactures. The richness of the [...] which amply rewards the industrious husbandman; the temper [...] [...] of the climate, which admits of steady labour; the cheapness of [...] which tempts the foreigner from his native home, lead us to fix on ag­riculture as the present great leading interest of this country. T [...] furnishes outward cargoes not only for all our own ships, but for [...] also which foreign nations send to our ports; or in other [...] pays for all our importations; it supplies a great part of the [...] of the inhabitants, and food for them and their cattle. What i [...] [...] ­sumed at home including the materials for manufacturing, is four or five times the value of what is exported.

The number of people employed in agriculture, is at least [...] parts in four of the inhabitants of the United States; some say [...]. It follows of course that they form the body of the militia, who [...] the bulwark of the nation. The value of the property occupied by agriculture, is many times greater than the property employed in [...] ­ery other way. The settlement of waste lands, the subdivision of form, and the numerous improvements in husbandry, annually increase [...] preeminence of the agricultural interest. The resources we derive [...] it, are at all times certain and indispensibly necessary. Besides, the [...] life promotes health, by its active nature; and morality, by [...] people from the luxuries and vices of the populous towns. In [...] agriculture is the spring of our commerce, and the parent of our man­ufactures.

The vast extent of sea coast, which spreads before these [...] ­ated states; the number of excellent harbours and sea-port [...] the numerous creeks and immense bays, which indent the [...] and the rivers, lakes and canals▪ which peninsulate the whole coun­try; added to its agricultural advantages and improvements, give this part of the world superior advantages for trade. Our commerce, [...] ­cluding our exports, imports, shipping, manufactures and fisher [...] may properly be considered as forming one interest. This has been con­sidered as the great object, and the most important interest of the New England States.

Since commerce has ever been considered as the handmaid of agri­culture, particularly in this country, where the agricultural interest [...] greatly predominates; and since neither can flourish without the [...] policy and interest point out the necessity of such a system of [...] and agricultural regulations, as will originate and effectually pre [...] a proper connection and balance between them.

The consumption of fish oil, whale-bone and other articles, ob [...] ­ed through the fisheries, in the towns and counties that are con [...] ­ient [Page 227] for navigation, has become much greater than is generally, sup­posed. It is computed that no less than five thousand barrels of mackarel, salmon and pickled codfish are vended annually in the city of Philadelphia: Add to them the dried fish, oil, sperma­c [...]ti candles, whale-bone, &c. and it will be found that a little fleet of sloops and schooners are employed in the business.

The demand for the forementioned articles is proportionably great in other parts of the union, (especially in Boston and the large commer­cial towns that lie along the coast northeast ward, which enter largely in­to the fishing trade) and the vessels employed in transporting them pro­ [...]bly numerous. The increase of our towns and manufactures will in­c [...] the demand for these articles, and of course the number of coasting vessels. In the present state of our navigation, we can be in no [...] of procuring these supplies by means of our own vessels. This [...] afford encouragement to the business of ship-building, and in­crease the number of our seamen, who must hereafter form an impor­tant part of the defence of our country. Add to these, our prospects from the fur trade of Canada. The vast settlements which are mak­ing at pittsburg, Genesse and in other parts in the neighbourhood of Canada; the advantages of our inland navigation, by means of the lakes, the northern branches of the Ohio, the Patomak, the Susque­hannah and the Hudson, with many other circumstances, depending not only on the situation, but likewise on the climate, proximity, &c. [...] in a few years put a large share of this fur trade into our hands, and procure us at least, our proportionable share of the large profits thence arising, which Canada, since the year 1763, has enjoyed almost exclusively. These advantages, however, are still but in prospect; and must [...]tain so un [...] the British, agreeably to treaty, shall have evacu­ated the [...]orts at Niagara, the large settlements of the Heights, and that of Mi [...]i [...]imakinak. Although the British, by the treaty of peace, are to enjoy with us the portages of the navigation of the lakes, yet should a dispute arise, it will not be convenient for them to contend with us; for the northern and north eastern parts of the continent, included in the British limits, are much colder, more mountainous and poorer than the United States, and have no rivers, but such as are full of rapids and falls; consequently, this trade cannot be carried on by the Canadians with the sa [...] facility nor advantage as by us. Still they will have left the exclu­sive right to the communication from Montreal, with the High-lands, through the large river of the Ottawas, which flows into the river St. Lawrence at the lake of the Two Mountains, nine miles from that city; but its rapids, and falls, will render this way, if not impracticable, at [...] always very expensive and precarious.

The quantity of fur exported from the northern parts of America to Great Britain, have amounted yearly to about forty one thousand pounds s [...]erling, estimated from the freight during the years 1768, 1769 and 1770. The exports of buck-skins amounted to upwards of thirty three thousand pounds. The sales of fur, which take place in London [...] spring, produced in 1782, four thousand seven hundred pounds. It was a little increased in 1783, and in 1784; it exceeded two hundred and forty five thousand pounds. All this fur is paid for by English manufacturers; and a fourth part of it is worked in England, where its [...] is doubled. This valuable trade, which is carried on through Quebec, will a great part of it fall into our hands, as soon as the forti­fications, [Page 228] which the British possess in our northern territories, shall be restored to us. To this consideration, rather than to the pretended [...] passion for the Royalists, may be attributed the delay of that r [...] ­tion. The period when this restitution must be made, the British [...] ­ticipate with sorrow. Such are some of the commercial resources and prospects of this country.

But for various reasons, the advantages for trade which [...] [...] so liberally given us, have never till since the establishment of [...] present government, been properly improved. Before the revolution [...] Great Britain claimed an exclusive right to the trade of her Ameri­can colonies. This right, which she inflexibly maintained, [...] her to fix her own price, as well on the articles which she purchased from us, as upon those of her own manufactures exported for [...] consumption. The carrying trade too, was preserved almost [...] ­sively in her own hands, which afforded a temptation to the car­riers, that was often too powerful to be withstood, to exact [...] ­tant commissions and freights. Although we will not even ha [...]d▪ conjecture how much Great Britain enriched herself by this ex [...] trade with her colonies, yet this we may say, that by denying us [...] privilege of carrying our produce to foreign markets, she deprived us of the opportunity of realizing, in their full extent, the advantage for trade which nature has given us.

The late war, which brought about our separation from [...] Britain, threw our commercial affairs into great confusion. The p [...] ­ers of the old confederation were unequal to the complete execution of any measures, calculated effectually to recover them from their [...] ranged situation. Through want of power in the old Congress [...] [...] ­lect a revenue for the discharge of our foreign and domestic debt, [...] credit was destroyed, and trade of consequence greatly embarrassed, Each state, in her desultory regulations of trade, regarded her own in­terest, while that of the union was neglected. And so different [...] the interests of the several states, that their laws respecting trade, [...] clashed with each other, and were productive of unhappy conse­quences. The large commercial states had it in their power to [...] ­press their neighbours; and in some instances this power was [...] or indirectly exercised. These impolitic and unjustifiable regulations formed on the impression of the moment, and proceeding from [...] [...] form or permanent principles, excited unhappy jealousies [...] the clashing states, and occasioned frequent stagnations in th [...]ly [...] and in some instances, a secrecy in their commercial policy. [...] [...] wise measures which have been adopted by Congress, under [...] ­sent efficient government, have extricated us almost entirely [...] these embarrassments, and put a new and pleasing face upon our pub­lick affairs. Invested with the adequate powers, Congress [...] formed a system of commercial regulations, which enable [...] meet the opposers of our trade upon their own ground; a [...] which has placed our commerce on a respectable, uniform and [...] ­ligible footing, adapted to promote the general interests of the [...] with the smallest injury to the individual states.

The following tables, taken from authenticated copies, will give the best idea of the present state of commerce in the United States.

[Page 229]

ABSTRACT of Duties arising on Goods, Wares and Merchandise imported into the UNITED STATES, commencing on the 1st October 1790, and ending the 30th of September 1791.
STATES. Gross amount of Duties. Discount of 10 per cent▪ on goods imported in American vessels. Addition of 10 per cent, on goods imported in Foreign vessels. Total amount of Duties. Expense of collection. Drawbacks Bounties. Nett amount of duties.
  Dol. Cts. Dol. Cts. Dol. Cts. Dol. Cts. Dol. Cts. Dol. Cts. Dol. Cts. Dol. Cts.
New Hampshire 29,429. 44 455. 24 86. 49½ 29,010. 69½ 1,558. [...] 144. 9 [...] 3 [...]1. 68 27,000. 29
Massachusetts 480,129. 47½ 10,528. 97½ 1,448. 95½ 471,049. 45¼ 25,953. 8310/10; 11,130. 48 [...] 13,258. 00 [...] 420,707. 17 5/12;
Rhode Island 115,350. 42 [...] 1,906. 37 [...] 15. 68 113,459. 72¼ 4,924. 88½ 389. 10 1,043. 39 107,102. 35¼
Connecticut 112,728. 47 1,762. 49 1,653. 04 112,619. 02 5,5 [...]3. 29¼ 674. 19 [...] 106,351. 53¼
New York 639,165. 53½ 5,202. 65 15,565. 50 649,528. 38½ 13,460. 45 16,416. 33 117. 44 619,534. 16½
New Jersey 7,162. 56 214. 49 6,948. 07 349. 36½ —: 6,598. 68½
Pennsylvania 727,133. 37 10,162. 19 13,179. 85 730,151. 03 15,280. 48 6,915. 26 707,955. 29
Delaware 20,036. 52½ 571. 05 203. 67 19,669. 14 [...] 1,246. 96 [...] 138, 32 18,283. 86
Maryland 338,035. 25 4,798. 02 6,009. 70¼ 339,246. 93¼ 11,223. 62¼ 5,058. 38½ 322,964. 92½
Virginia 340,303. 03 2/12 5,143. 70½ 11,502. 56 346,661. 88 [...] 11,176. 49½ 461. 66 27. 90 334,995. 832/12
North Carolina 62,065. 11 [...] 781. 97 1,788. 52 63,071. 66½ 4,180. 78¾ 29. 45¼ 58,861. 42½
South Carolina 239,912. 99 3,118. 33 8,166. 95 244,961. 61 10,879. 38 234,082. 23
Georgia 43,634. 91½ 334. 87 1,796. 59 45,096. 63½ 2,692. 77 118. 77 42,285. 09½
Total 3,155,087. 09⅔ 44,980. 35½ 61,367. 51¼ 3,171,474. 25 5/12; 108,516. 16 7/12 40,802. 62 15,432. 61¼ 3,006,722. 85 7/12

TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Register's Office, March 15 th, 1792.

JOSEPH NOURSE, Register.

[Page 230]

GENERAL ABSTRACT of DUTIES arising on the TONNAGE of Vessels entered into the United States from the 1st of October 1790, to 30th of September 1791.
  UNITED STATES VESSELS. UNITED STATES COASTERS. UNITED STATES FISHERIES. FRANCE. GREAT BRITAIN.
STATES. Tons. 95 ths. Dol. Cts. Tons. 95 ths. Dol. Cts. Tons. 95 ths Dol. Cts. Tons. 95 ths. Dol. Cts. Tons. 95 ths Dol. Cts.
New Hampshire 10,839 650. 34 1,560. 93. 60 629 37. 74 264 132. 1,386. 693
Massachusetts 96,564. 25 5,822. 98½ 46,063. 94 2,767. 56 29,560. 27 1,774. 70½ 404. 57 202. 28 22,495. 93 11,251. 21⅓
Rhode Island 19,196. 70 1,151. 84 [...] 9,103. 18 546. 25¾ 810. 87 48. 65½ 88. 18 26. 46 180. 71 140. 37½
Connecticut 19,728. 63 1,183. 72 8,098. 48 487. 70½ 913. 32 54. 80     3,996. 71 1,983. 23½
New York 40,334. 47 2,720. 85 5,725. 343. 38 567. 24 34. 3 1,503. 24 751. 60 35,154. 47 17,576. 56
New Jersey 1,213. 24 72. 79 4,567. 92 274. 34            
Pennsylvania 50,327. 64 3,234. 34 3,923. 40 235. 43     967 483. 50 27,327. 48 13,664. 12
Delaware 4,610. 23 276. 61½ 1,187. 71. 22         1,913. 24 956. 62
Maryland 33,375. 11 2,029. 34 7,836. 16 470. 12½ 537. 4 [...] 32. 25 714. 48 357. 25 18,215. 55 9,107. 78⅔
Viriginia 32,041. 6 1,922. 36½ 10,636. 60 638. 77 72. 71 4. 36½ 2,414. 34 1,207. 18 44,812. 9 22,406. 70
North Carolina 23,962. 75 1,437. 80¼ 6,796. 31 438. 56¾     436. 79 218. 42 13,662. 59 6,831. 31½
South Carolina 22,497. 55 1,349. 75 4,675. 38 280. 77 25 1. 50 339. 5 169. 52 20,827. 80 10,413. 47
Georiga 7,063. 40 423. 80 733. 20 43. 96     391. 60 195. 82 16,165. 75 8,082. 88
Total 361,754. 28 22,276. 54½ 110,906. 77 6,691. 67½ 33,116. 3 1,988. 4½ 7,523. 40 3,744. 3 206,208. 62 103,107.27½

[Page 231]

  SPAIN. PORTUGAL. UNITED NETHERLANDS. GERMANY. HANSE TOWNS.
STATES. Tons. 95 ths. Dol. Cts. Tons.95 ths Dol. Cts. Tons. 95 ths Dol. Cts. Tons. 95 ths Dol. Cts. Tons. 95 ths Dol. Cts.
New Hampshire     162. 81            
Massachusetts     248. 69 124. 37 121. 65. 50        
Rhode Island 47. 23. 50     100. 31 50. 26½        
Connecticut 59. 59 29. 80     100. 21 50. 11        
New York 243. 24 121. 62 1,563. 71 781. 85 1,079. 71 539. 85        
New Jersey                    
Pennsylvania 2,062. 79 1,025. 90 2,533. 14 1,266. 61 251. 88 125. 98        
Delaware         163 81.50        
Maryland 503 251. 50 589 294. 50 1,372. 47 686. 25 463 231. 50    
Virginia 65 32. 50     180 90        
North Carolina         73 36. 50        
South Carolina 1,670. 32 835. 14 56. 21 28. 11 194. 68 97. 36     2,603. 9 1.301. 50
Georgia 102. 53 51. 26     243. 88 121. 96     218. 54 109. 28
Total 4,753. 57 2,371. 22 5,152. 80 2,576. 44 3,890. 54 1,945. 27½ 463 231. 50 2,821. 63 1, [...]0. 78

[Page 232]

  DENMARK. SWEDEN AND RUSSIA. TOTAL AMERICAN TONNAGE. TOTAL FOREIGN TONNAGE. TOTAL FOREIGN AND DOMESTIC.
STATES. Tons. 95 ths Dol. Cts. Tons. 95 ths. Dol. Cts. Tons. 95 ths. Dol. Cts. Tons. 95 ths. Dol. Cts. Tons. 95 ths Dol. Cts.
New Hampshire         13,028 781. 68 1,812 888. 40 14,840. 1,670. 8
Massachusetts 531. 16 265. 68 319. 92 160. 172,084. 51 10,359. 13 24,131. 42 12,046. 60 [...] 196,215. 93 22,405. 73⅓
Rhode Island         29,110. 80 1,729. 90 516. 45 240. 60 29,627. 30 1,970. 50
Connecticut         28,740. 48 1,726. 22½ 4,126. 56 2,063. 14 [...] 32,867. 9 3,789. 37
New York         46,626. 71 3,098. 26 39,544. 47 19,448. 8 86,171. 23 22,546. 34
New Jersey         5,234. 69 302. 94     5,234. 69 302. 94
Pennsylvania 219 109. 50 225. 32 112. 67 53,186. 24 3,405. 87 33,586. 71 16,686. 86 86,773. 20,092. 73
Delaware         5,797. 23 347. 83½ 2,076. 24 1,038. 12 7,873. 47 1,385. 95½
Maryland 497 248. 50     41,748. 74 2, [...]1. 23½ 22,254. 55 10,699. 22⅔ 64,103. 34 13,230. 46⅙
Virginia 194. 43 97. 25     42,750. 42 2,5 [...]5. 50 47,665. 86 22,947. 59 90,416. 33 25,513. 9
North Carolina     136. 59 68. 31 30,759. 11 1,876. 37 14,309. 7 7,019.54½ 45,068. 18 8,895. 91½
South Carolina     76. 54 38. 28 27,197. 93 1,632. 2 25,767. 79 12,883. 38 52,965. 77 14,515. 40
Georgia         7,796. 60 467. 76 17,122. 45 8,561. 20 24,919. 10 9,028. 96
Total 1,441. [...]59 720. 93 758. 47 379. 26 504,061. 76 30,824. 72½ 233,013. 82 114,52 [...]. 75 737,075. 63 145,347. 47½

TREASURY DEPARTMENT, Register's Office, March 9 th, 1792.

JOSEPH NOURSE, Register.

[Page 233] ABSTRACT of GOODS, WARES and MERCHANDIZE, ex­ported from the United States, from the 1st October 1790, to the 30th September 1791.

SPECIES OF MERCHANDIZE EXPORTED.
  Quantity. Value.
ASHES, Pot 3,083 74/100;tons Dols. 308,36 [...]
Ashes, Pearl 3,197 60/100;ditto 431,676
Apples 12,352 barrels 12,352
Bricks 737,764 number 2,58 [...]
Boats 99 2,970
Bellows for smiths 4 12 [...]
Beer, Ale and Porter 44,526 gallons 8,905. [...]
Ditto bottled 719 dozens 1,4 [...]
Boots 482 pairs 2,89 [...]
Boot-Legs 17 ditto 34
Brimstone 3,280 pounds 9 [...]
Blacking or Lampblack 8,518 ditto 2,850
Bayberries 18 bushels [...]
Cider 1,694 barrels 2,541
Ditto bottled 310 dozens 310
Chalk 10 tons 180
Cotton 189,316 pounds 47,329
Co [...]e 962,977 ditto 144,446. 55
C [...]o [...] 8,322 ditto 88 [...]. 2 [...]
Chocolate 497 boxes 3,832
Candles, Myrtle Wax 348 ditto [...],088
Wax 185 ditto 1,665
Tallow 2,745 ditto 13,725
Cables and Cordage 3,633 per 112 lb. 27,264
Copper Ore 20 ditto 300
Pig 216 ditto 4,320
Sheet 296 ditto 7,992
Manufactured 1,480 pounds 493. 33
Coals 3,788 bushels 758
Cran [...]berries 720 ditto 360
Corks 300 groce 45
Corn-Fans 1 number 16
Canes and Walking-Sticks 598 ditto 153
Cotton and Wool Cards 25 dozens 2,350
CARRIAGES.    
Coaches, Chariots, Phaetons, &c. 85 number 12,300
Waggons and Carts 25 ditto 1,280
Duck American 478 bolts 4,780
Russia 235 ditto 2,350
DRUGS and MEDICINE.    
Glauber Salts 1,580 pounds [...]5 [...]
Pink, China and Snake Root, &c. 14,900 ditto 3,000
Sassafras Bark 3¼ tons 390
Sassafras Wood or Root 34¼ ditto 685
  Carried forward 1,059,006. 28
EARTHEN and STONE WARE. Brought forward, dols. 1,059,006, [...]
Stone 55 dozens 100
Yellow or Queen's 157 crates 1,884
Flaxseed 58,492 casks 327,555. [...]
Flax 18,600 pounds 1,488
Feathers 900 ditto 420
Flints 40,000 number 200
FRAMES of Vessels 1 400
Scows 6 300
Boats 10 150
Houses 195 9,750
Windows and Doors 31 46
FURNITURE HOUSE
Tables. 75 750
Bedsteds 18 180
Desks 78 1,560
Bureaus 21 294
Sophas and Settees 59 [...]34
Clocks 8 640
Clock-Cases 3 90
Chests 785 1,410
Chairs Windsor 5,134 5,134
Chairs Rush 738 224
FISHERIES.
Fish dried 383,237 quin. P [...] 112 lb. 958,09 [...]. 50
Fish pickled 57,424 barrels 172,272
Oil Whale 447,323 gallons 89,464. 60
Oil Spermaceti 134,595 ditto 53,838
Candles ditto 4,560 boxes 54,720
Whalebone 124,829 pounds 24,965. 80
Gensang 29,208 ditto 7,682. 80
Grindstones 125 number 187. 50
Glass Ware 21 crates 84
ditto for Windows 92 boxes 920
GROCERIES.
Cassia and Cinnamon 1,778 pounds 3,389
Cloves 900 ditto 1,150
Pimento 141,701 ditto 22,672
Pepper 492 ditto 246
Brown Sugar 73,304 ditto 5,864. 32
Loaf Sugar 1,157 ditto 231. 33
Other Sugars 1,200 ditto 132
Raisins 400 ditto 64
GRAIN and PULSE.
Wheat 1,018,339 bushels 1,018,339
Rye 36,737 ditto 19,470. 6 [...]
Barley 35 ditto [...]23. 33
Indian Corn 1,713,241 ditto 856,620. 50
Oats 116,634 ditto 23,3 [...]6. [...]0
Buckwheat 14,499 ditto 4,784. 67
Peas and Beans 165,273 ditto 123,954. 73
Horns and Horn [...]ips 119,776 number 1,348
Hides raw 704 1,408
  Carried forward 4,857,667. [...]
  Brought forward, dols. 4,857,667. 32
Hats 435 1,305
Honey 1,740 gallons 1,044
Hops 650 pounds 200
Ho [...]p 1,544 ditto 103
Hay 2,006 tons 25,075
IRON WROUGHT.
Axes 979 number 979
Hoes 200 99. 96
Drawing Knives 24 4
Scythes 48 48
Locks and Bolts 2,000 600
Shovels 261 130. 50
Skimmers and Ladles 15 pair 50
Anchors 175 number 5,300
Giapnals 18 244
Muskets 160 800
Cutlasses 72 144
Knives and Forks 240 10
Chests of Carpenters' Tools 4 200
IRON CASTINGS.
Waggon Boxes 50 pairs 83
Pots, Kettles and other Castings 808 number 600
Cannon 87 1,110
Swivels 8 24
Shot for Cannon 1,000 150
IRON the Ton.    
Pig 4,178¾ tons 108,647. 50
Bar 349½ ditto 27,960
Nail-Rods 8 ditto 800
Hoops 16½ ditto 1,980
Indigo (see note A.) 497,720 lbs. and sundry casks 570,234
Leather tanned and dressed 5,424 pounds 1,356
Lime 1,320 bushels 198
LEAD Sheet 45 sheets 1,650
Pig 16½ tons 1,848
Shot 6,473 pounds 388. 38
LIVE STOCK.
Horned Cattle 4,627 number 84,442. 67
Horses 6,975 279,000
Mules 444 17,760
Sheep 10,377 17,640. 90
Deer 4 16
Hogs 16,803 45,368. 10
Poultry 10,217 dozens 15,325. 50
Merchan. or dry Goods foreign 1,439 packages estim. at 120,000
Molasses 12,721 gallons 2,544. 20
Millstones 2 number 200
Mustard 710 pounds 390
Madder 1,034 ditto 258. 50
Nails 130,293 ditto 19,543. 95
Negro Slaves 24 number 3,808
  Carried forward 6,217,330. 48
  Brought forward, dols. 6,217,33 [...]. 48
Nankeens 7,070 pieces 10,6 [...]
Nuts 1,240 bushels 1,24 [...]
NAVAL STORES. (see note A.)    
Pitch 3,818 barrels 6, [...]. [...]
Tar 51, [...]44 ditto 76, [...]
Rosin 228 ditto 57 [...]
Turpentine 58,107 ditto 116,21 [...]
Spirits of Turpentine 1,172 gallons 58 [...]
Oil Linseed 90 ditto [...]
Porcelain or China Ware 2 boxes [...]
Powder Gun 25,854 pounds 1, [...]. [...]
Powder Hair 1,276 ditto 3 [...]
Pomatum 45 ditto 22. [...]
Paints 1,520 ditto [...]
Pipes 1 box 2
Printing Presses 4 number [...]
Plaister of Paris 4 tons 3 [...]
PROVISIONS.
Rice (see note A.) 93,329 tierces 1,136,599. [...]
Flour 119,681 barrels 3,408, [...]45. 50
Ship Stuff 6,484 ditto 12, [...]
Rye Meal 24,062 ditto 60,1 [...]
Indian Meal 70,339 ditto 140, [...]
Buckwheat Meal 422 ditto 1, [...]. [...]
Oat Meal 6 ditto 1 [...]
Bread 100,279 ditto 250,69 [...]. [...]
Beef 62,871 ditto [...]4,226
Pork 26,635 ditto 266,350
Crackers 15,346 kegs 6,138. [...]
Hams and Bacon 295,647 pounds 26,59 [...]. [...]
Venison and Mutton Hams 600 ditto 1 [...]
Cheese 120,901 ditto 3,463. 7
Lard 522,715 ditto 41,817. [...]
Butter 16,670 firkins 91,6 [...]
Sausages 250 pounds 25
Fresh Beef 62,269 ditto 3,690. 76
Fresh Pork 29,334 ditto 1,7 [...]0. 4
Carcases of Mutton 561 number 2, [...]05
Neats Tongues 160 barrels 1,200
Oysters pickled 1,228 kegs 2,456
Potatoes 22,263 bushels 5,565. 75
Onions 42,420 ditto 21,21 [...]
Other Vegetables sundries 1,000
Reeds 15,450 77. 50
SPIRITS.
Rum American 513,234 gallons 205,29 [...]. [...]
Rum West-India 4,742 ditto 3,79 [...]. [...]
Brandy 158 ditto 158
Brandy Peach 753 ditto 753
Gin 10,252 ditto 8,2 [...]. [...]
Ditto 3,817 cases 15,26 [...]
Ditto 3,039 jugs 509. 75
Cordials 69 cases 207
  Carried forward 12,534,47 [...]. [...]
  Brought forward 12,534,474. 6 [...]
SADLERY.
Saddl [...] M [...] 414 number 4,968
Brid [...] 402 450
Coach and other Carriage Harness 74 sets 1,740
Waggon and Cart Geers 8 50
Shoes, Mens and Womens 7,046 pairs 6,341. 40
Soup 6 [...]1 boxes 2,764
[...] 2,382 pounds 382. 82
St [...]h 160 ditto 90. 60
Snuff 15,689 ditto 3,137. 80
[...] 1,375 bundles 7,333. 33
Silk [...] 153 pounds 425. 34
Silver old 103 ounces 103
Salt 4,208 bushels 1,052
Sp [...] Essence of 94 cases 517
SEEDS.
Garden 1,060 pounds 1,060
Mustard 660 88
Play 60 8
[...] 199 bushels 104. 99
SKINS and FURS.
Mar [...] 132 number of 264
Calf in Hair 404 ditto 3 [...]1. 60
[...] Moose 1,063 ditto 563
Souls 2,672 ditto 13,36 [...]
[...], Wolf and Tyger 37 ditto 56. 57
[...] 100 ditto 166. 6 [...]
[...] Skins 49,01 [...] pounds 24,555. 50
Skins and Furs unknown 889 casks and packets 132,000
Tabacco [see note A.] 101,272 hogsheads 3,469,44 [...]
Ditto manufactured 81,122 pounds 12,16 [...]. 60
Tyger 3 boxes 3 [...]0
[...] 317,195 pounds 28,547. 55
[...] 19¾ per 112 lb 441. 86
T [...]cloth 1,850 yards 1,233
T [...] for children 112½ dozens 225
Tin 9 boxes 120
Ditto manufactured 15½ dozens 80
TEAS Bohea 17½ chests 1,750
Souchong 492 ditto 24,600
Green 178 ditto 5,340
Hyson 2,235¾ ditto 145,323. 75
Vinegar 2,248 gallons 562
Varnish 60 ditto 20
WINES.
Madeira 76,466 ditto 99,405. 80
Other Wines 32,336 ditto 24,252
bottled 6 dozens 4 [...]
WAX Bees 224,538 pounds 53,889. [...]
Myrtle 2,272 ditto 272. 6 [...]
Whips 146 number 26
  Carried forward 16,602,425. 6 [...]
  Brought forward, dols. 16,602,425. 6 [...]
WOOD.
Staves and Heading 29,061,590 number 369,66 [...]
Shingles 74,205,976 133,570
Shook Casks 42,032 29,422. 40
Casks 297 297
Laths 25,500 20. 4 [...]
Hoops 1,422,155 14,221. [...]
Hoop-poles 3,422 27. [...]
Masts 405 3,64 [...]. [...]
Bowsprits 42 420. [...]
Rooms 74 148. [...]
Spars 4,983 7,474. [...]
Hand Spikes 36,714 1,529. [...]
Pumps 80 120. [...]
Boxes and Brakes 56 14. [...]
Blocks 7,040 2,000. [...]
Oars 28,456 5,69 [...]. 2 [...]
Oar Rafters 13,080 2,616. [...]
Trunnels 45,905 137. [...]
Cedar and Oak Knees 1,067 7,460. [...]
Breast Hooks 50 100. [...]
Carlings 13 1 [...]. [...]
Anchor Stocks 809 404. [...]
Cedar Posts 10,453 2,976. [...]
Oak Boards and Plank 963,822 feet 9,638. [...]
Pine Boards and Plank 37,288,928 ditto 223,733. [...]
Other Boards and Plank 3,463,673 ditto 34,636. [...]
Scantling 6,237,496 ditto 31,187. [...]
Timber. Oak, Pine, &c. Ditto ditto Mahogany 2,180,137 ditto 21,801. [...]7
13,775 tons 41,325. [...]
5 ditto 22. [...]
Lignum Vitae 1,180 per 112 lb. 354. [...]
Logwood and Nicaragua 105 2/2 ditto 105. 50
Mohogany, Logwood, &c. 3,251 pieces 2,879. [...]6
Oak, Pine, &c. 38,680 ditto 18,000. [...]
Cords of Oak, Pine, Hickory, &c. 499 cords 748. 50
Ditto of Oak Bark 57 ditto 114. [...]
Oak Bark Ground 1,040 hhds. 6,240. [...]
Mast Hoops 148 dozens 111. [...]
Axe Helves 149 ditto 74. 50
Truss Hoops 15 sets 37. 50
Yokes and Bows for Oxen 197 ditto 295. 50
Lock Stocks 4,000 number 60. [...]
Worm Tubs 6 ditto 30. [...]
Wheel Barrows 6 ditto 9. 60
Waggon and Cart Wheels 25 pairs 300. [...]
Spokes and Fellies 12,972 number 1,621. 50
Spinning Wheels 17 ditto 52. [...]
Tubs, Pails, &c. 34 dozens 150. [...]
Bowls, Dishes, Platters, &c. 170 ditto 340. [...]
Total dollars, 17,571,551. 45

(A.) Returns for two quarters from Charleston, and from several small ports, are deficient.

[Page 239]

SUMMARY OF EXPORTS. A Summary of the Value and destination of the EX­PORTS of the UNITED STATES agreeably to the foregoing abstract.
  Dols. Cts.
To the dominions of Russia 3,570
To the dominions of Sweden 21,866. 2
To the dominions of Denmark 277,273. 53
To the dominions of the United Netherlands 1,634,825. 66
To the dominions of Great Britain 7,953,418. 21
To the Imperial ports of the Austrian Netherlands and Germany 362,010. 21
To Hamburg, Bremen and other Hanse towns 64,259. 25
To the dominions of France 4,298,762. 26
To the dominions of Spain 1,301,286. 95
To the dominions of Portugal 1,039,696. 47
To the Italian Ports 31,726. 90
To Morocco 3,660. 50
To the East Indies generally 318,628. 46
To Africa generally 168,477. 92
To the West Indies generally 59,434. 36
To the North West Coast of America 3,380
To Europe and the West Indies for a market 29,274. 75
Total Dollars 17,571,551. 45

TREASURY DEPARTMENT, March 28th, 1792.

TENCH COXE, Assist. Sec'ry.

The foregoing tables will serve to give the reader an accurate view of the state of our commerce with foreign nations; of the articles, and the quantity exported of each, and of the amount of duties arising from our imports and tonnage.

In this connection it may be useful to notice the principal restrict­ions, impositions and prohibitions sustained by the United States, in their trade with the British Dominions, in contrast with those sustain­ed by Great Britain in her trade with the United States; and this is the more necessary, as there are not wanting persons who affirm, that the balance of favour is given to the United States, and that Great Britain is so far injured by our deportment, as to justify a retaliation.

The principal facts, relative to the question of reciprocity of com­mercial regulations, between Great Britain and the United States of America, have, by a gentleman who had access to every necessary in­formation for the purpose, been thrown into the form of a table, as follows.

GREAT BRITAIN THE UNITED STATES
Prohibits American vessels from entering into the ports of several parts of her dominions, viz. the West Indies, Canada, Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Newfoundland, [...] [...]reton, Hudson's Bay, Hon­ [...] Bay, and her East India spice [...]. Admit British vessels into all their ports, subject to a tonnage duty of 44 cents, or 24 sterling pence, more than American ves­sels, and an addition of one tenth to the amount of the impost accru­ing on their cargoes.
She imposes double light money on American vessels in most of her ports. They do not impose extra light money on British vessels in any of their ports.
She prohibits the navigating ad libitum, of American vessels, by native or other seamen. They admit the navigating of British vessels by native or other seamen, ad libitum.
She prohibits the employment of American built ships by her own citizens, in many branches of trade, upon any terms. They admit the employment of British built ships by their [...] citizens, in every branch of [...], upon the terms of 44 co [...]ts [...] per ton, and one tenth extra on the impost arising from their ca [...].
She charges a duty on American sail cloth, made up in the United States for British ships. They do not charge a duty [...] British sail cloth, made up in Great Britain for American ships.
She prohibits the importation of goods from several parts of her dominions into others, in Ameri­can vessels, upon any terms. They admit the importation of goods from any part of their do­minions into another, in British vessels, on the terms of 44 [...] per ton extra on the vessel.
She prohibits the importation of goods into Great Britain, by A­merican vessels, from any other country than the United States. They admit the importation of goods into the United States, i [...] British vessels, from every country whatever.
She prohibits the importation into G. Britain from the United States, by American vessels, of all goods not produced by the United States. They do not prohibit the import­ation into the United States from G. Britain, by British vessels, of any goods not produced by G. Britain.
She prohibits the importation of any goods previously brought into the United States, from the said states into Great Britain, even in British vessels. They do not prohibit the im­portation of any goods previously brought into G. Britain, from that kingdom into the United States, i [...] either British or American bottoms
She prohibits the exportation of several articles from Great Brit­ain to the United States. They do not prohibit the ex­portation of any article from the United States to Great Britain.
She lays duties of various rates upon the exportation of many arti­cles to the United States. They do not lay a duty on the exportation of any article whatev­er to Great Britain.
She prohibits the importation of all manufactures from the Unit­ed States, into her European do­minions, and her colonies, unless it be some very simple preparations and decoctions, requisite to her na­vy, shipping and manufactures. They do not prohibit the im­portation of any manufacture whatever from Great Britain.
She imposes very considerable duties upon some of the agricultu­ral productions of the United States, and excludes others by duties equal to their value. They impose moderate duties (lower than any other foreign na­tion by 2,3, and 4 for one) on the preduce and manufactures of Great Britain, except in a very few in­stances, and exclude scarcely any articles by duties equal to [...] value.
She prohibits for considerable terms of time, some of the princi­pal agricultural productions of the United States, and others at all times. They prohibit none of the agri­cultural productions of Great Bri­tain or her dominions.
It is understood that by treaty she grants some favours, which are not extended to the United States. They treat Great Britain as fa­vourably as any nation whatever, as to ships, imports, and exports, and in all other respects.
She prohibits the importation of some American articles, in A­merican ships, or any but British ships, into her European domin­ions. They do not prohibit the im­portation of any British article in British vessels or any but Amer­ican vessels.
She does not permit an Amer­ican citizen to import goods into some of her dominions, and to sell them there, even in British vessels. In other parts of her do­minions, she lays an extra tax on him, or his sales. They permit a British citizen to import goods into all their ports, in any vessels, and to sell them there without any extra tax on him, or his sales.
She imposes heavy duties on certain articles of the produce of the American fisheries, and insup­portable duties on others, in some parts of her dominions: and in other parts, she prohibits their importation. They impose only five per cent. on the produce of the British fisheries (which duty is drawn back on exportation) and admit every article derived from them.
She prohibits the consumption of some American articles, of which she permits the importa­tion. They do not prohibit the con­sumption of any British article whatever.
She prohibits the importation of American articles from foreign countries into the British domin­ions, even in her own ships. They do not prohibit the import­ation of British articles from for­eign countries in any ships.

Besides, there is no country that contributes so much to the support of the navy of Great Britain, as the United States, by the employment they give to her ships. From August 1789, to August 1790, no less than 230,000 tons of British vessels, cleared from these states; which much exceed the quantity of vessels they employed the same year in the Russian trade. The whole Baltic trade of Great Britain, with all the countries of the various powers that lie within the Sound, impor­tant as it is to her, does not fill more. Their trade with Holland, France, Spain and Portugal, does not altogether employ as many ves­sels. Their whole fisheries, American colonial trade, and West India trade, do not employ and load more. And how, it may be asked, are the United States requited for thus strengthning the acknowledged bulwark of Great Britain, by annually giving a complete lading to the unequalled quantity of 230,000 tons of her private vessels? The whole of the American vessels, which have arrived in our ports in the same year, from all the countries and places subject to the British crown, amount to no more than 43,580 tons.

[Page 242] Our allies and friends, the French, have been more liberal in their policy. In the arret, passed in council December 29, 1787, for en­couraging the commerce of France with the United States of America, it is ordained. That whale oil and spermaceti, the produce of the fish­eries of the United States, brought directly into France in French or American bottoms, shall be subject to a duty only of seven livres ten sols (equal to six shillings and three pence sterling) the barrel of five hundred and twenty weight; and whale fins shall be subject to a duty of only six livres thirteen sols and four deniers (equal to five shillings and six pence half penny) the quintal, with ten sols per livre on each of the said duties; which ten sols per livre was to cease on the last day of December 1790.

The other fish oils and dry salted fish, produced and imported as a­foresaid, are not liable to pay any other or greater duties, than the most favoured nations are, or shall be subject to in the same case.

Corn, wheat, rye, rice, peas, beans, lentils, flax-seed and other seeds, flour, trees and shrubs, pot and pearl ashes, skins, and fur of beaver, raw hides, furs and peltry, and timber carried from the United States to France in French or American bottoms, are subject to a duty of one eighth per cent. on their value. Vessels, proved to have been built in the United States, and sold in France, or purchased by Frenchmen, are ex­empted from duties. Turpentine, tar and pitch, are liable to a duty of two and a half per cent. on their value. Arms may be imported into the United States, in French or American vessels, on paying a duty of one eighth per cent. on their value; and gunpowder duty free, by giving a cautionary bond. Books and papers of all sorts imported as aforesaid, are to be exempted from all duties, and entitled to a resti­tution of the fabrication duties on paper and paste board. Permis­sion is given to store all productions and merchandize of the United States, for six months, in all the ports of France open to the commerce of her colonies, subject to a duty only of one eighth per cent. His majesty reserves to himself the power of granting encouragement to favour the exportation of arms, hard ware, jewelry, bonetry, wool, cot­ton, coarse woollens, small draperies and stuffs of cotton of all sorts, and other merchandize of fabric, which may be sent to the United States.

As to other merchandizes not enumerated in this act, imported and exported in French or American vessels, and with respect to all com­mercial conventions whatever, his majesty ordains, 'That the citizens of the United States enjoy in France, the same rights, privileges and exemptions, with the subjects of his majesty; saving what is provided in the ninth article hereof. *

'His majesty grants to the citizens and inhabitants of the United States all the advantages which are enjoyed, or which may be hereafter enjoyed by the most favoured nations in his colonies of America: and moreover his majesty ensures to the said citizens and inhabitants [Page 243] of the United States, all the privileges and advantages which his own subjects of France enjoy or shall enjoy in Asia, and in the seas leading thereto, provided always, that their vessels shall have been fitted out and dispatched in some port of the United States.'

MANUFACTURES.] We now come to the subject of our Manufactures; a subject which has lately become in a high degree interesting to the in­habitants of the United States, but which is too copious to be treated at large in a work in this kind. * I shall confine what I have to say, in this place, on this article, to a few general observations on the advantages of encouraging manufactures in the United States; and to an enumeration of the articles already manufactured among us, and a specification of those branches which merit or require to be particularly encouraged.

The prevailing disposition among the European nations, and partic­ularly Great Britain, to restrict and embarrass the external trade of the United States, have forced them to serious and salutary reflections on the importance and necessity of enlarging the sphere of their do­mestic commerce, and creating a more extensive demand at home, for the increasing surplus of their agricultural produce, by adopting mea­sures for encreasing the variety and quantity of their manufactures, and consequently the number of manufactures. This circumstances, and the complete success which has rewarded manufacturing enterprize, in some valuable branches, and the promising prospects which attend some less mature essays, have put the matter of expediency of encour­aging manufactures in the United States, which was not along since deemed very questionable, beyond a doubt; and they also justify the belief, that the obstacles to the increase of this species of employment among us, are less formidable than have been generally imagined. That manufacturing establishments would, in a variety of respects, be advan­tagous to these states, appears very evident from the following circum­stances.

1. They would occasion a proper division of labour, than which there is scarcely any thing of greater moment in the economy of a na­tion. The separation of occupations, causes each to be carried to much greater perfection than it could possibly acquire, if they were blended; because there would be a saving of time, by avoiding that loss of it, which is occasioned by a frequent change from one operation to ano­ther of a different nature; and because from a constant and undivided application to a single object, there naturally results a greater skill and dexterity in accomplishing it.

2. Manufacturing establishments would be a means of extending the use of machinery; which, as it is an artificial aid to man, and, to all the purposes of labour, an increase of hands and of strength, without the expense of maintaining the labourer, is of great importance in the gen­eral mass of national industry. The cotton mill, invented in England within the last 20 years, is a signal illustration of this general idea. In consequence of it, all the different processes for spinning cotton are [Page 244] performed by means of machines, which are put in motion by water, and attended chiefly by women and children; and by a smaller number of persons, in the whole, than are requisite in the ordinary mode of spinning. And the operations of this mill may be continued night and day with convenience and advantage. It is easy to conceive the prodigious effect of such a machine. To this invention is to be attri­buted, essentially, the immense progress, which has been so suddenly made in Great Britain, in the various fabrics of cotton. The value of labour saving machines, has, in some degree, been known and experi­enced already among us; and by their general adoption in their most improved state, to the cotton, flaxen, hempen, metal, and part of the woollen and silken branches, to all of which raw materials they apply, the United States might, in a vory few years, acquire a desirable degree of independency on British and other foreign manufactures. And as to advantageous situations, for the erection of miles, and for the estab­lishment of manufactures in general, no country has more, and few so many as the United States: And we are far from being deficient in ingenious mechanics who are capable, not only of erecting machines already invented, and making improvements upon them, but also of inventing new machines of the most complicated and useful kind.

3. Another advantage resulting from manufacturing establishments is, they would afford employment to classes of people who are ei­ther not fully occupied, or wholly idle, and thereby give occasion to the exertion of a greater quantity of industry, even by the same number of persons. In general, women and children are rendered more useful, and the latter more early useful, by manufacturing establishments, than they would otherwise be. Of the number employed in the cotton manufactories of Great Britain, it is computed that 4 in 7, nearly, are women and children; of whom the greatest proportion are children; and many of them of a tender age.

4. The establishment of manufactures would greatly increase the inducements which this country, in its present state, holds out to for­eigners to come among us, and become citizens. The oppression that is experienced by the people in some parts of Europe, and the dis­tresses that multitudes are brought into, by the disturbed state of so many kingdoms, have excited a disposition in many of their valuable citizens, to emigrate to a country where they may enjoy freedom and peace. The effect of multiplying the opportunities of employment to those who emigrate, by manufactural establishments, would probably be, an increase of the number and extent of valuable acquisitions to the population, arts and industry of the country. This sentiment, however, ought to be known, that while we think ourselves justifiable, as it respects the cause of humanity, religion and policy, in benefiting our country, by opening an asylum, for the oppressed and distressed citizens of Europe, we are very far from finding a plea­sure in those affecting calamities which render a removal, on their part, desirable.

European manufacturers, listening to the powerful invitations of a better price for their fabrics or their labour—of greater cheapness of provisions and raw materials—of an exemption from the chief part of the taxes, burdens and restraints which they endure in the Old World—of freedom from those distresses and embarrassments into which they have been thrown by the disturbances of Europe—of greater personal independence and consequence, under the operations of a [Page 245] more equal government—and of what is far more precious than more religious toleration, a perfect equality of religious privileges—encouraged. I say, by all these powerful inducements, manufactures would probably stock from Europe to America to pursue their respective occupations, if they were once made sensible of the advantages they would enjoy, and were inspired with an assurance of encouragement and employment.

Besides the advantages already enumerated, which would result to these States from the encouragement of manufactures, we may add, that in this way, greater scope would be afforded for the exercise of the various talents and dispositions of men, a more ample field opened for enterprise; which circumstances are the more important, as there seems evidently to be, in the genius of the people of this coun­try, a remarkable aptitude for mechanical inventions and improve­ments, and a singular spirit of enterprise. The increase of manufac­tures, also, would be a mean of creating, in some instances a new, and securing in all, a more certain and steady demand, for the surplus pro­duce of the soil. This circumstance, as it is a principal mean, by which the establishment of manufactures contributes to an augmenta­tion of the produce or revenue of a country, and has an immediate and direct relation to the prosperity of agriculture, is among the most im­portant advantages enumerated.

But there are other considerations which serve to fortify the idea that the encouragement of manufactures is the interest of all parts of the union. If the northern and middle states should be the principal scenes of such establishments, they would immediately benefit the more southern, by creating a demand for productions, some of which they have in common with the other states, and others of which either are peculiar to them, or more abundant, or of better quality than else­where. These productions principally are, timber, flax, hemp, cot­ton, wool, raw silk, indigo, iron, lead, furs, hides, skins and coals; of these articles; cotton and indigo are peculiar to the southern states; flax and hemp are, or may be raised in greater abundance there than in the more northern states; and the wool of Virginia is said to be of a better quality, than that of any other state; which is probable, as Virginia embraces the same latitudes of the finest wool countries in Europe. The climate of the south is also better adapted to the pro­duction of silk. The extensive cultivation of cotton can hardly be ex­pected, but from the previous establishment of domestic manufactories of the article; and the surest encouragement and vent for the others, would result from similar establishments in regard to them.

The most material objection that has been made to the pursuit of manufactures in the United States, is the impracticability of success, arising from scarcity of hands, dearness of labour, and want of capi­tal. The last of these circumstances, want of capital, has no real found­ation. With regard to the scarcity of hands, the fact must be applied, with no small qualification, to certain parts of the United States. There are large districts which may be considered as pretty fully peo­pled; and which, notwithstanding a continual drain for distant set­tlements, are thickly interspersed with flourishing and increasing towns.—Connecticut and Massachusetts contain, on an average as many as 55 inhabitants to every square mile; and the country of Essex, in Massachusetts, will average 1 [...]5 inhabitants to every square mile. This latter district has already reached the point at which the com­plaint [Page 246] of scarcity of hands ceases; and the abovementioned states at large, are not far remote from, and are approaching fast towards it; And having, perhaps, fewer attractions to agriculture than some other more southern and temperate parts of the union, they exhibit a pro­portionably stronger propensity to the pursuit of manufactures, which is exemplified in the maturity which some branches have already attained, in these districts.

But there are circumstances, which have been already noticed with another view, that materially diminish every where the effect of a scarci­ty of hands. These circumstances are, the great use which may be made of women and children—the vast extension given, by late improve­ments, to the employment of machines, which, substituting the agency of fire and water, has prodigiously lessened the necessity for manual labour—and lastly, the attraction of foreign emigrants. In all our populous towns there is already a large proportion of ingenious and valuable workmen, in different arts and trades, who, by expatiating from Europe, have improved their own condition, and added to the industry and wealth of the United States. It is a natural inference, from the experience we have already had, that as soon as the United States shall present the countenance of a serious prosecution of man­ufactures—as soon as foreign artists shall be made sensible that the state of things here, affords a moral certainly of employment and encourage­ment, competent numbers of European workmen will transplant them­selves, so as effectually to ensure the success of the design. These circumstances sufficiently obviate the objection which arises from a scarcity of hands.

But, to all the arguments which are brought to evince the impract­icability of success, in manufacturing establishments in the United States, it would be a sufficient answer, to refer to the experience of what has been already done. It is certain that several important branches have grown up and flourished, with a rapidity which surpris­es; affording an encouraging assurance of success in future attempts. Of these the following are the most considerable, viz. Of skins—Tan­ned and tawed leathers, dressed skins, shoes, boots and slippers, har­ness and saddlery of all kinds, portmanteaus and trunks, leather breech­es, gloves, muffs and tippets, parchment and glue.—Of Iron—Bar and sheet iron, steel, nail rods and nails, implements of husbandry, stoves, pots and other household utensils, the steel and iron work of carriages and for ship building, anchors, scale beams and weights, and various tools of artificers, arms of different kinds.—Of Wood—Ships, cabinet wares, and turnery, wool and cotton cards, and other machinery for manufactures and husbandry, mathematical instruments, coopers wares of every kind.—Of Flax and Hemp—Cables, sail cloth, cordage, twine and packthread.—Of Clay—Bricks and coarse tiles, and potters wares.—Ardent spirits and malt liquors.—Writing and printing paper, sheath­ing and wrapping paper, paste boards, fullers or press papers, and pa­per hangings.—Hats of fur and wool, and mixtures of both.—Wo­mens stuff and silk shoes.—Refined sugars.—Chocolate.—Oil of ani­mals and seeds, soap, spermaceti and tallow candles—Copper and brass wares, particularly utensils for distillers, sugar refiners and brewers, andirons and other articles for household use—clocks, philosophical ap­paratus—Tin wares of almost all kinds for ordinary use—Carriages of all kinds—Snuff, chewing and smoaking tobacco—Starch and hair powder—Lampblack and other painters colours—Gunpowder.

[Page 247] Besides the manufacture of these articles, which are carried on as regular trades, and have attained to a considerable degree of maturity, there is a vast scene of household manufacturing, which contributes very largely to the supply of the community. These domestic man­ufactures are prosecuted as well in the southern, as in the middle and northern states; great quantities of coarse cloths, coatings, serges and flannels, linsey woolseys, hosiery of wool, cotton and thread, coarse fustians, jeans and muslins, checked and striped cotton and linen goods, bedticks, coverlets, and counterpanes, tow linens, coarse shirtings, shootings, towelling and table linen, and various mixtures of wool and cotton, and of cotton and flax, are made in the household way, and in many instances, to an extent, not only sufficient for the supply of the families in which they are made, but for sale, and even in some cases for exportation. It is computed in a number of districts, that two thirds, three fourths, four fifths, and in some places even a greater proportion, of all the clothing of the inhabitants is made by them­selves. In a moral and political view these facts are highly pleasing and interesting.

The above enumeration does not comprehend all the articles that are manufactured as regular trades. The following articles, though manu­factured in a less extensive degree, and some of them in less perfection, ought to be added—Gold, silver, pewter, lead, glass and stone wares of many kinds, books in various languages, printing types and presses, bells, combs, buttons, corn fans, ploughs and all other implements of husbandry. Some of these are still in their infancy, as are others not enumerated, but which are attended with favourable appearances. There are other articles also of very great importance, which, through strictly speaking manufactures, are omitted, as being immediately con­nected with husbandry; such are flour and meal of all kinds, pot and pearl ashes, pitch, tar, turpentine, maple sugar, wine, and the like.

Having pointed out the advantages of encouraging manufactures in the United States, and enumerated the articles manufactured, it remains that we specify some of the articles which merit or require encour­agement. In making the selection of objects, five circumstances are entitled to particular attention: the capacity of the country to fur­nish the raw material—the degree in which the nature of the manufact­ure admits of a substitute for manual labour in machinery—the faculty of execution—the extensiveness of the uses, to which the article can be applied—its subserviency to other interests, particularly the great one of national defence. And of this description, none are more essential in their kinds, or more extensive in their uses, than the manufactures of iron, steel, copper, brass, lead, coal, wood, skins, grain, flax and hemp, cotton, wool, silk, glass, gunpowder, paper, printed books, refined sugars, choco­late, wines and maple sugar. These are the most important of the several kinds of manufactures, which appear to require, and at the same time to be the most proper for public encouragement, either by bounties on the articles manufactured, duties on imported articles of the same kind, or drawbacks of the duties upon the imported raw materials, accord­ing to the nature of the case.

We have mentioned the manufactures of wine and maple sugar, as objects worthy of legislative attention and encouragement in the Unit­ed States. A [...] to the first, successful experiments have already been [Page 248] made, by some new settlers of French people, on the river Ohio, * which evince the practicability of the manufacture of wines of an ex­cellent quality: And as grapes are the spontaneous production of all the United States, and, by culture, might be raised in any desir­able quantity, and in great perfection, this manufacture, with proper legislative encouragement, might be carried on to such an extent, as greatly to diminish, and in time, perhaps, wholly to preclude foreign importations.

The manufacture of maple sugar, though it has for [...] years been carried on, in the small way, in the eastern states, has but very lately become an object of public attention.—The east­ern and middle states furnish a sufficient number of maple trees [...] supply the United States with the article of sugar; and, it is asserted, of a quality "equal, in the opinion of competent judges, to the best sugars imported from the West-India Islands." A person, whose judgment on this subject is much to be relied on, as well from his ex­perience in the business, as his established character for candor and integrity, has given it as his opinion, "That four active and industri­ous men, well provided with materials, and conveniences proper for carrying on the business, may make, in a common season, which lasts from four to six weeks, 4000lbs, of sugar, that is 1000lbs to each man." If such be the amazing product of six weeks labour of an in­dividual, what may be expected from the labours of the many thous­ands of people who now inhabit, and may hereafter inhabit, the ex­tensive tracts of country which abound with the sugar maple tree? This manufacture is so important and interesting, as it respects th [...] wealth and prosperity of our country, and the cause of humanity, that it deserves the countenance of every good citizen, and even national encouragement. No less than 18 millions of pounds of West-India sugars, manufactured by the hands of slaves, is annually imported into and consumed in the United States. In proportion as this quantity can be lessened by our own manufactures, by the hands of [...] the wealth of the United States will be increased, and the cause of hu­manity promoted.

MILITARY STRENGTH.] Standing armies are deemed inconsistent with a republican government; we of course have none. § Our mili­tary strength lies in a well disciplined militia. According to the [...] census, there are in the United States, 814,000 men of 16 years old and upwards, whites. Suppose that the superannuated, the officers of government and the other classes of people who are excused from military duty, amount to 114,000, there will remain a militia of 700,000 men. Of these a great proportion are well disciplined, ve [...]eran troops. No nation or kingdom in Europe, can bring into the field an army of equal numbers, more formidable than can be raised in the United States.

FINANCES.] The Revenue of the United States is raised from [...] ­ties on the tonnage of vessels entered in the United States, and on [...] ­ported goods. wares and merchandize, and from an excise on various articles of consumption. The amount of the duties arising on the tonnage of vessels, for the year commencing October 1st 1799, and ending September 30th 1791, amounted to 145,347 dollars. The du­ties arising on goods, wares and merchandize, for the same year, amount­ed [Page 249] to 3,006,722 dollars. The whole amount of the revenue from the excise is not accurately known. In Massachusetts it amounts annually to 200,000 dollars. The old Congress, in their last requisitions, con­sidered Massachusetts as a sixth part. If this proportion be accurate, the whole amount of the excise will be 1,200,000 dollars.

This revenue is appropriated to the purposes of supporting the civ­il and military establishments, in the payment of the interest, and the diminution of the principal, of the Public Debt.

In the year following October 1st 1789, the expenses and revenue of Government were as follows,

  Expenses.   Revenue.
  Dols. Cts.   Dols. Cts.
Civil list 299,276. 53 Duties on Imports 1,903,790. 48
Additional expense 50,756. 7 Duties on Tonnage 165,465. 93
War Department 390,199. 54    
Total 740,232, 14 Total 2,069,175. 47
From a report of the Secretary of the Treasury, of the 23d of January 1792, it appears that the whole amount of the Domestic debt of the United States, principal and interest, which has been subscribed to the loan proposed concerning that debt, by the act intituled, "An act making provision for the debt of the United States," is Dollars 31,797,481. 2 [...]
which, pursuant to the terms of that act, has been con­verted into stock bearing an immediate interest of 6 per cent. 14,177,450. 43
Stock bearing the like interest from Jan. 1st, 1801 7,088,727. 79
Stock bearing an immediate interest of 3 per cent. 10,331,303
Making together Dollars. 31,797,481. 22
Of which there stands to the credit of the Trustees of the sinking fund, [...] consequence of purchases of the public debt, made under their direction, the sum of Dollars. 1,131,364. 76
The unsubscribed residue of the said debt amounts to 10,616,604. 63
The debts of the respective states collectively are estimated to amount to 25,403,362. [...]
of which, 21,500,000 dollars have been assumed, and 17,072,334 [...] subscribed, agreeably to act of Con­gress, of 4th of August 1790.  
The amount of a debt due to certain foreign offi­cers, who served the United States, during the late war, with arrears of interest, is 220,646. 81

FOREIGN DEBT.

The whole amount of the Foreign Debt of the United States, is about 1 [...] million dollars; of which about 6,900,000 dollars are due to France. [...] the rest to Holland. The Executive has been empowered to make [...] additional Loan in Holland, sufficient to pay the debt to France; and measures for that purpose have been in agitation in Holland.

The act, making provision for the debt of the United States, has ap­propriated the proceeds of the western lands as a fund for the dis­charge of the public debt. And the act, making provision for the re­duction of the public debt, has appropriated all the surplus of the [...] ­ties [Page 250] on imports and tonnage, to the end of the year 1790, to the pur­pose of purchasing the debt at the market price; and has authorities the President to borrow the further sum of two millions of dollars for the same object. These measures serve to indicate the intention of the legislature, as early and as fast as possible, to provide for the extin­guishment of the existing debt.

The present eligible situation of the United States, compared with that of Europe at large, as it respects taxes or contributions for the payment of all public charges, appears from the following statement, furnished by a gentleman of acknowledged abilities. In the United States, the average proportion of his earnings which each citizen pays for the support of the civil, military and naval establishments, and for the discharge of the interest of the public debts of his country, is a­bout one dollar and a quarter; equal to two days labour, nearly; that is 5 millions of dollars to 4 millions of people. In Great Britain, France, Holland, Spain, Portugal, Germany, &c. the taxes for these objects, on an average, amount to about six dollars and a quarter, to each person. Hence it appears, that in the United States, we enjoy the blessings of free government, and mild laws; of personal liberty, and protection of property, for one fifth part of the sum for each individual, which is paid in Europe for the purchase of public benefits of a similar nature, and too generally without attaining their objects: for less than one fifth, indeed, as in European countries, in general, 10 days labour, on an average, do not amount to 6¼ dollars. In this estimate proper allowances [...] made for public debts. The Indian war in the United States, at pre­sent, requires nearly half a million of dollars annually, extra; but this, being temporary only, is not taken into the estimate.

From the best data that can be collected, the taxes in the United States, for county, town and parish purposes; for the support of schools, the poor, roads, &c. appear to be considerably less than in those countries; and perhaps the objects of them, except in roads, is at­tained in a more perfect degree. Great precision is not to be expect­ed in these calculations; but we have sufficient documents to prove that we are not far from the truth. The proportion in the United States is well ascertained; and with equal accuracy in France, by Mr. Neckar; and in England, Holland, Spain and other kingdoms in Eu­rope, by him, Zimmermann, and other writers on the subject.

For the objects of the late war and civil government, in the United States, nearly 12 millions of dollars were annually raised, for nine years successively, apportioned on the number of inhabitants at that period, which amounted to a little short of four dollars to each person. This was raised principally by direct taxes. Perhaps a contribution of six dollars a person, would not have been so severely felt, had a part of it been raised by impost and excise. These sums, raised for the war, by the free exertions of the people, obviate all such object­ions as assert that the United States are poor; at the same time they evince that their situation is eligible and prosperous, by shewing how large a proportion of their earnings, the people, in general, can apply to their private purposes.

BANK OF THE UNITED STATES.] This Bank was incorporated by act of Congress, February, 25th 1791, by the name and stile of The President, [...] [...] Company of the Bank of the United States. The amount of [...] capital stock is 10 million dollars, one fourth of which [...] that part of the public [Page 251] debt of the United States, which, at the time of payment, bears an ac­cruing interest of 6 per cent. per annum. Two millions of this capi­tal stock of 10 millions, is subscribed by the President, in behalf of the United States. The Stockholders are to continue a corporate body, by the act, until the 4th day of March 1 [...]11; and are capable, in law, of holding property to an amount not exceeding, in the whole, 15 million dollars, including the aforesaid 10 million dollars, capital stock. The corporation may not at any time owe, whether by bond, bill or note, or other contract, more than 10 million dollars, over and above the monies then actually deposited in the Bank for safe keeping, unless the contracting of any greater debt shall have been previously author­ised by a law of the United States. The corporation is not at liberty to receive more than 6 per cent. per annum for or upon its loans or discounts; nor to purchase any public debt whatever, or to deal or trade, directly or indirectly, in any thing except bills of exchange, gold or silver bullion, or in the sale of goods really and truly pledged, for money lent, and not redeemed in due time, or of goods which shall be the produce of its bonds; they may sell any part of the public debt of which its stock shall be composed. Loans not exceed­ing 100,000 dollars, may be made to the United States, and to partic­ular states, of a sum not exceeding 50,000 dollars.

Offices for the purposes of discount and deposit only, may be estab­lished within the United States, upon the same terms, and in the same manner, as shall be practised at the bank. Four of these offices, call­ed Branch Banks, have been already established, viz. at Boston, New York, Baltimore and Charleston. The faith of the United States is pledged that no other bank shall be established by any future law of the United States, during the continuance of the above Corporation. The great benefits of this Bank, as it respects, public credit and com­merce, have already been experienced.

RELIGION.] The constitution of the United States, provides a­gainst the making of any law respecting an establishment of religion, or prohibiting the free exercise of it. And in the constitutions of the respective states, religious liberty is a fundamental principle. In this important article, our government, is distinguished from that of every other nation, if we except France. Religion here, is placed on its proper basis; without the feeble and unwarranted aid of the civil power, it is left to be supported by its own evidence, by the lives of its professors, and the Almighty care of its Divine Author.

All being thus left at liberty to choose their own religion, the peo­ple, as might easily be supposed, have varied in their choice. The bull of the people would denominate themselves Christians; a final pro­portion of them are Jews; some plead the sufficiency of natural relig­ion, and reject revelation at unnecessary and fabulous; and many, we have reason to believe, have yet their religion to choose. Christian profess their religion under various forms, and with different ideas of it, doctrines, ordinances and precepts. The following denominations o [...] christians are more or less numerous in the United States, viz. Con­gregationalists, Presbyterians, Dutch Reformed Church, Episcopalians, Baptists, Quakers or Friends, Methodists, Roman Catholics, German Lutherans, German Calvinists or Presbyterians, Moravians, Tunkers, [...]eaonists, Universalists, and Shakers.

Of these the CONGREGATIONALISTS are the most numerous. In New England alone, besides those which are scattered through the [...] [Page 252] and southern states, there are not less than 1000 congregations of this denomination, viz.

In New Hampshire 200
Massachusetts 440
Rhode Island 13
Connecticut 197
Vermont (say) 150
Total 1000

It is difficult to say what is the present ecclesiastical constitution of the Congregational churches. Formerly their ecclesiastical pro­ceedings were regulated, in Massachusetts, by the Cambridge platform of church discipline, established by the Synod, 1648: and in Con [...] ­ [...]ut, by the Saybrook Platform of discipline; but since the revolution, less regard has been paid to these constitutions, and in many in­stances they are wholly disused. Congregationalists are pretty gen­erally agreed in this opinion, that "Every church or particular congregation of visible saints, in gospel order, being furnished with a Pastor of Bishop, and walking together in truth and peace, has re­ceived from the Lord Jesus full power and authority, ecclesiastical, within itself, regularly to administer all the ordinances of Christ, and is not under any other ecclesiastical jurisdiction whatsoever." Their churches, with some exceptions, disclaim the word Independent, as applicable to them, and claim a sisterly relation to each other.

From the answer of the Elders, and other messengers of the churches assembled at Boston, in the year 1662, to the questions proposed to them by order of the General Court, it appears that [...] churches, at that period, professed to hold communion with each other in the following acts, viz.

1. "In hearty care and prayer one for another—2. In affording relief, by communication of their gifts in temporal or spiritual [...] ­sities.—3. In maintaining unity and peace, by giving account [...] another of their public actions, when it is properly desired; to strengthen one another in their regular administrations; in particular by a concurrent testimony against persons justly censured.—4. To [...] and accept help from, and afford help to each other, in case of [...] ­sions, and contentions, whereby the peace of any church is disturbed—in matters of more than ordinary importance, as the ordination, instal­lation, removal, and deposition of Pastors or Bishops—in doubtful and difficult questions and controversies, doctrinal or practical, that may arise—and for the rectifying of mal-administration, and healing of errors and scandals that are not healed among themselves.—5. In [...] ­ing notice, with a spirit of love and faithfulness, of the troubles and difficulties, errors and scandals of another church, and to admini [...] help (when the case manifestly calls for it) though they should so [...] ­lect their own good and duty, as not to seek it.—6. In admonis [...] one another, when there is cause for it; and after a due con [...] of means, patiently to withdraw from a church, or peccant party [...] obstinately persisting in error or scandal."

A consociation of churches was at the period mentioned, considered as necessary to a communion of churches, (the former being but an agree­ment to maintain the latter) and therefore a duty. The consociation of churches they defined to be, "Their mutual and solemn agreement to exer­cise [Page 253] communion in such acts as aforesaid (meaning, the acts of commun­ion above recited) amongst themselves, with special reference to those churches which, by Providence, are planted in a convenient vicinity, though with liberty reserved without offence, to make use of others, as the nature of the case, or the advantage of the opportunity may lead thereunto."

The ministers of the Congregational order, are pretty generally asso­ciated for the purposes of licensing candidates for the ministry, and friendly intercourse and improvement; but there are few congrega­tional churches that are consociated, on the above principles; and the practice has very generally gone into disuse, and with it the commun­ion of churches in most of the acts before recited. In Connecticut and the western parts of Massachusetts, the churches have deviated less from their original constitution. The degeneracy of the con­gregational churches from that order, fellowship and harmony, in dis­cipline, doctrines, and friendly advice and assistance in ecclesiastical matters, which formerly subsisted between them, is matter of deep re­gret to many, not to say to most people of that denomination. A re­formation, or a return to a practice conformable to the original princi­ples of the congregational churches, is an event more earnestly desir­ed, than confidently expected.

Congregationalists are divided in opinion respecting the doctrines of the gospel, and the proper subjects of its ordinances. The body of th [...] are Calvinists; a respectable proportion are what may be de­ [...]inated Hopkensian Calvinists; besides these, some are Arminians, some Arians, a few Socinians, and a number who have adopted Dr. Chauncy's scheme of the final salvation of all men. *

Next to Congregationalists, PRESBYTERIANS are the most numerous denomination of christians in the United States. They have a constitu­tion, by which they regulate all their ecclesiastical proceedings, and a confession of faith, which all church officers and church members are required to subscribe. Hence they have preserved, a singular uniform­ity in their religious sentiments. and have conducted their ecclesiasti­cal affairs with a great degree of order and harmony.

The body of the presbyterians inhabit the middle and southern states, and are united under the same constitution. By this constitu­tion, the Presbyterians who are governed by it, are divided into five synods and seventeen presbyteries; viz. Synod of New-York, 5 pres­byteries; 94 congregations; 61 settled ministers.—2. Synod of Phil­adelphia, 5 presbyteries; 92 congregations; 60 settled ministers, be­sides the ministers and congregations belonging to Baltimore pres­bytery.—3. Synod of Virginia, 4 presbyteries; 70 congregations; 40 settled ministers, exclusive of the congregations and ministers of Tran­ [...]ia presbytery.—4. Synod of the Carolinas, 3 presbyteries: 82 congregations; 42 settled ministers; the ministers and congregations in [...]bington presbytery not included. If we suppose the number of con­gregations in the presbyteries which made no returns to their synods. [...] 100, and the number of settled ministers in the same to be 40, the whole number of presbyterian congregations in this connection, will be 438, which are supplied by 223 settled ministers, and between 70 and 80 candidates, besides a number of ordained ministers who have no [Page 254] particular charges. Each of the four synods meet annually; besides which they have a joint meeting, by their commissioners, once a year, in General Assembly at Philadelphia.

The Presbyterian churches are governed by congregational, presby­terial and synodical assemblies. These assemblies possess no civil juris­diction. Their power is wholly moral or spiritual, and that only ministerial and declarative. They possess the right of requiring obe­dience to the laws of Christ, and of excluding the disobedient from the privileges of the church; and the powers requisite for obtaining evidence and inflicting censure; but the highest punishment, to which their authority extends, is to exclude the contumacious and impenitent from the congregation of believers.

The Church Session, which is the congregational assembly of judicatory, consists of the minister or ministers and elders of a particular con­gregation. This body is invested with the spiritual government of the congregation; and have power to enquire into the knowledge and christian conduct of all its members; to call before them offenders and witnesses, of their own denomination; to admonish, suspend or ex­clude from the sacraments, such as deserve these censures; to [...] measures for promoting the spiritual interests of the congregation; and to appoint delegates to the higher judicatories of the church.

A Presbytery consists of all the ministers, and one ruling elder [...] each congregation, within a certain district. Three ministers and three elders, constitutionally convened, are competent to do business. This body have cognizance of all things that regard the welfare of the particular churches within their bounds, which are not cognizable by the session. Also, they have a power of receiving and issuing appeals from the sessions—of examining and licensing candidates for the min­istry—of ordaining, settling, removing, or judging ministers—of resolv­ing questions of doctrine or discipline—of condemning erroneous opinions, that injure the purity or peace of the church—of visiting particular churches, to enquire into their state, and redress the evils that may have arisen in them—of uniting or dividing congregations, at the request of the people; and whatever else pertains to the spirit­ual concerns of the churches under their care.

A Synod is a convention of several presbyteries. The synod have power to admit and judge of appeals, regularly brought up from the presbyteries—to give their judgment on all references made to them, of an ecclesiastical kind—to correct and regulate the proceedings of presbyteries—to take effectual care that presbyteries observe the con­xstitution of the church, &c.

The highest judicatory of the Presbyterian church is stiled The Gene­ral Assembly of the Presbyterian Church in the United States of America. This grand Assembly is to consist of an equal delegation of bishops and el­ders from each presbytery within their jurisdiction, by the title of Commis­sioners, to the General Assembly. Fourteen commissioners make a quorum. The General Assembly constitute the bond of union, peace, correspondence, and mutual confidence among all their churches; and have power to re­ceive and issue all appeals and references which may regularly be brought before them from inferior judicatories—to regulate and cor­rect the proceedings of the synods, &c. To the General Assembly also belongs the power of consulting, reasoning, and judging in controver­sies respecting doctrine and discipline; of reproving, warning or bear­ing testimony against error in doctrine, or immorality in practice [...] [Page 255] any church, presbytery or synod—of corresponding with foreign churches—of putting a stop to schismatical contentions and disputa­tions—and in general of recommending and attempting reformation of manners, and of promoting charity, truth and holiness in all the churches—and also of erecting new synods, when they judge it necessary.

The confession of faith adopted by the Presbyterian church, em­braces what are called the Calvinistic doctrines; and none who disbe­lieve these doctrines are admitted into fellowship with their churches. The General Assembly of the Presbyterian church, hold a friendly cor­respondence with the General Association in Connecticut, by letter, and by admitting delegates from their respective bodies, to fit in each others general meetings.

Disconnected with the churches of which we have been speaking, there are four small presbyteries in New England, who have a similar from of ecclesiastical government and discipline, and profess the same doctrines.

Besides these, there is the "Associate Presbytery of Pennsylvania" having a separate ecclesiastical jurisdiction, in America, and belong­ing to the Associate Synod of Edinburgh, which they declare is the only ecclesiastical body, either in Britain or America, with which they are agreed concerning the doctrine and order of the church of Christ, and concerning the duty of confessing the truth, and bearing wit­ness to it by a public testimony against the errors of the times. This connection is not to be understood as indicating subjection to a for­eign jurisdiction; but is preserved for the sake of maintaining unity with their brethren in the profession of the christian faith, and such an intercourse as might be of service to the interests of religion. This sect of Presbyterians are commonly known by the name of Seceders, on account of their seceding from the national church in Scotland, in 1736. *

The DUTCH REFORMED churches in the United States, who maintain the doctrine of the synod of Dort, held in 1618 are between 70 and 80 in number, constituting six classes, which form one synod, styled. "The Dutch Reformed Synod of New-York and New Jersey." The classes consist of ministers and ruling elders; each classis delegates two min­isters and an elder to represent them in synod. From the first plant­ing of the Dutch churches in New York and New Jersey, they have, under the direction of the classis of Amsterdam, been formed exactly upon the plan of the established church of Holland, as far as that is ec­clesiastical. A strict correspondence is maintained between the Dutch Reformed Synod of New York and New Jersey, and the synod of North-Holland, and the classis of Amsterdam. The acts of their synods are mutually exchanged every year, and mutual advice is given and received, in disputes respecting doctrinal points and church discipline.

The PROTESTANT EPISCOPAL Church in the United States (the churches of that denomination in New England excepted) met in Con­vention at Philadelphia, October, 1785, and revised the book of com­mon prayer, and administration of the sacraments, and other rites and [...]monies, with a view to render the liturgy consistent with the Amer­ican Revolution. But this revised form was adopted by none of the churches except one or two in Philadelphia.

In October, 1789, at another meeting of their convention, a plan of union among all the Protestant Episcopal churches in the Unit­ed States of America, was agreed upon and settled; and an ade­quate representation from the several States being present, they a­gain [Page 256] revised the book of common prayer, which is now published and generally adopted by their churches. They also agreed upon and published 17 canons for the government of their church, the first of which declares that "these shall, in this church, be three orders in the ministry, viz. Bishops, Priests and Deacons."

At the same time they agreed upon a Constitution which provides that there shall be a general convention of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the United States, on the second Tuesday of September, of every third year from 1789—That each state is entitled to a representation of both the clergy and the laity, or either of them, and may send deputies, not exceeding four of each order, chosen by the convention of the State.—That the bishops of the church, when three or more are present, shall, in their general conventions, form a separate house, with a right to originate and propose acts for the concurrence of the house of depu­ties, composed of clergy and laity; and with a power to negative [...] passed by the house of deputies, unless adhered to by four fifths of the other house.—That every bishop shall confine the exercise of his epis­copal office to his proper diocese or district.—That no person shall in admitted to holy orders, until examined by the bishop and two pres­byters, having produced the requisite testimonials—and that no person shall be ordained until he shall have subscribed the following declara­tion—"I do believe the Holy Scriptures of the Old and New Testa­ment to be the Word of God, and to contain all things necessary to salvation; and I do solemnly engage to conform to the doctrines and worship of the Protestant Episcopal Church in the United States."

They have not yet adopted any Articles of religion other than those contained in the Apostles and Nicene Creeds. The number of Episcopal churches in the United States is not ascertained; in New England there are between forty and fifty; but in the southern states, they are much more numerous. Four Bishops, viz. of Connecticut, New York, Pennsylvania and Virginia, have been elected by the conventions of their respective states, and have been duly consecrated. The former by the Bishops of the Scotch Church, the three latter, by the Bishops of the English church. And these four, in September 179 [...], united in the consecration of a fifth, elected by the conventions of the state of Maryland.

The BAPTISTS, with some exceptions, are upon the calvinistic plan, as to doctrines, and independents as to church government and disci­pline. Except those who are styled " open communion baptists," of whom there is but one association, they refuse to communicate in the ordi­nance of the Lord's Supper, with other denominations; because they hold that immersion only is the true baptism, and that baptism is necessary to communion; it is, therefore, improper and inconsistent, in their opinion, to admit unbaptized persons, (as all others are, in their view, but themselves) to join with them in this ordinance; though they allow ministers of other denominations to preach to their congre­gations, and sometimes to assist in ordaining their ministers.

From an account taken by a preacher * of the baptist denomination, who has travelled through the United States, to ascertain their num­ber and state, we are enabled to give the following statement of their associations, churches, ministers, church members, and principles.

    MINISTERS  
STATES CHURCHES ordained licensed MEMBERS.
New Hampshire [...] 23 17 1732
Massachusetts 107 95 31 7116
Rhode Island 38 37 39 3502
Connecticut 55 44 24 3214
Vermont 34 21 15 1610
New York 57 53 30 3987
New Jersey 26 20 9 2279
Pennsylvania 28 26 7 1231
Delaware 7 9 1 409
Maryland 12 8 3 776
Virginia 207 157 109 20157
Kentucky 42 40 21 3105
Western Territory 1     30
North Carolina 94 81 76 7742
Deceded Territory 18 15 6 889
South Carolina 68 48 28 4012
Georgia 42 33 39 3184
Total 868 710 422 64975
Of these there are     MINISTERS  
  ASSOC. CHH'S. ordained licensed MEM.
Six principle baptists 1 18 26 4 1599
Open Communion Do. 1 15 13 4 1714
General Provision Do 3 30 26 19 1948
Seventh Day Do.   10 13 3 887
Regular or Particular Do. 30 795 632 392 58827
Total 35 868 710 422 64975

To this account, the compiler conjectures that 1500 members, and 30 Churches ought to be added—making the whole number of Churches about 900, and the members about 66,000. He suppose moreover that at least three times, as many attend their meetings, as have joined their churches, which, if we suppose all who attend their meetings are in principle Baptists, will make the whole number of that denomination in these states, 198,000, or a twenty sixth part of the inhabitants.

Some of the leading principles of the regular or particular baptists, are—The imputation of Adam's sin to his posterity—the inability of [...] to recover himself—effectual calling by sovereign grace—justifica­tion by the imputed righteousness of Christ—immersion for baptism, and that on profession of faith and repentance—congregational church­es, and their independency, and reception into them upon evidence of sound conversion.

We shall next speak of the people called QUAKERS. * This denomina­tion of christians arose about the year 1648, and were first collected into religious societies by their highly respected elder, George Fox. [Page 258] They came to America as early as 1656. The first settlers of Penn­sylvania were all of this denomination; and the number of Friends meetings in the United States, at present, is about 320.

Their doctrinal tenets may be summarily expressed as follows—In common with other christians, they believe in One Eternal God, and in Jesus Christ the Messiah and Mediator of the new covenant. To Christ alone, in whose divinity they believe, they give the title of the Word of God, and not to the Scriptures; yet they profess a high es­teem for these sacred writings, in subordination to the Spirit who in­dited them, and believe that they are able, through faith, to make wife to salvation—They reverence the excellent precepts of Scripture, and believe them practicable and binding on every christian; and that in the life to come, every man will be rewarded according to his works. In order to enable mankind to put in practice these precepts, they believe, that every man coming into the world is endued with a measure of the Light, Grace or Good Spirit of Christ; by which he is enabled to distinguish good from evil, and correct the disorderly passions and corrupt propensities of his nature, which mere reason is altogether insufficient to overcome—that this divine grace is, to those who sincerely seek it, an all sufficient and present help in time of need—and that by it the snares of the enemy are detected, his allurements avoided, and deliverance experienced, through faith in its effectual op­eration, and the soul translated out of the kingdom of darkness into the marvellous light and kingdom of the Son of God—Thus persuad­ed, they think this divine influence especially necessary to the perform­ance of the highest act of which the human mind is capable, the wor­ship of God in spirit and in truth; and therefore consider, as obstruc­tions to pure worship, all forms which divert the mind from the secret influence of this unction of the Holy One—Though true worship is not confined to time or place, they believe it is incumbent on church­es to meet often together, but dare not depend for acceptance, on a formal repetition of the words and experiences of others—They think it is their duty to wait in silence to have a true sight of their condition bestowed on them; and believe even a single sigh, arising from a sense of their infirmities and need of divine help, to be more acceptable to God, than any performances which originate in the will of man.

They believe the renewed assistance of the light and power of Christ, which is not at our command, nor attainable by study, but the free gift of God, to be indispensibly necessary to all true ministry—Hence arises their testimony against preaching for hire, and conscientious re­fusal to support such ministry by tythes or other means.—As they [...] not encourage any ministry, but such as they believe to spring from the influence of the Holy Spirit; so neither dare they attempt to re­strain this influence to persons of any condition in life, or to the [...] sex—but allow such of the female sex as appear to be qualified, to ex­ercise their gifts for the general edification of the church.

They hold that as there is one Lord and one faith, so his baptism is one in nature and operation, and that nothing short of it can made us living members of his mystical body; and that baptism with wa­ter belonged to an inferior and decreasing dispensation. With respect to the Lord's Supper, they believe that communication between Christ and his Church, is not maintained by that nor any other external [...] ­nance, but only by a real participation of his divine nature, through [Page 259] faith; that this is the supper alluded to Rev. iii. 20—and that where the substance is attained, it is unnecessary to attend to the shadow.

Believing that the grace of God is alone sufficient for salvation, they can neither admit that it is conferred on a few only, while others are left without it; nor, thus asserting its universality, can they limit its operation to a partial cleansing of the soul from sin, even in this life—On the contrary, they believe that God doth vouchsafe to assist the obedient to submit to the guidance of his pure spirit, through whose assistance they are enabled to bring forth fruits unto holiness, and to stand perfect in their present rank.

As to oaths, they abide literally by Christ's positive injunction, "Swear not at all." They believe that "wars and fightings" are, in their origin and effects, utterly repugnant to the Gospel, which still breathes peace and good will to men. * They also are firmly persuad­ed that if the benevolence of the Gospel, were generally prevalent in the minds of men, it would effectually prevent them from oppressing, much more from enslaving their brethren, of whatever complexion; and would even influence their treatment of the brute creation, which would no longer groan the victims of their avarice, or of their false ideas of pleasure.—They profess that their principles, which inculcate submission to the laws in all cases wherein conscience is not violated, are a security to the salutary purposes of government.—But they hold that the civil magistrate has no right to interfere in matters of relig­ion, and think persecution, in any degree, unwarrantable.—They re­ject the use of those names of the months and days, which, having been given in honour of the heroes or gods of the heathen, originat­ed in their flattery or superstition; and the custom of speaking to a flagle person in the plural number, as having arisen also from motives of adulation. Compliments, superfluity of apparel or furniture, out­ward shews of rejoicing or mourning, and observations of days and times, they deem incompatible with the simplicity and sincerity of a christian life—and they condemn public diversions, gaming, and other vain amusements of the world.—They require no formal subscription to any articles, either as the condition of membership, or to qualify for the service of the Church.

To effect the salutary purposes of discipline, Monthly, Quarterly and Yearly meetings are established.—A Monthly meeting is composed of several neighbouring congregations.—Its business is to provide for the subsistence of the poor, and for the education of their offspring—to judge of the sincerity and fitness of persons appearing to be convinced of the religious principles of the society, and desiring to be admitted to membership; to excite due attention to the discharge of religious and moral duties; to deal with disorderly members—to appoint over­seers to see that the rules of their dicipline are put in practice—to al­low of marriages, &c.

[Page 260] A Quarterly meeting is composed of several Monthly meetings. At this meeting are produced written answers from monthly meetings, to certain questions respecting the conduct of their members and the meeting's care over them. The accounts thus received, are digested and sent by representatives, to the yearly meeting. Appeals from the judgement of monthly meetings, are brought to the quarterly meetings.

The Yearly meeting has the general superintendance of the society in the country in which it is established. The business of this meet­ing is to give forth its advice—make such regulations as appear to be requisite, or excite to the observance of those already made, &c. Ap­peals from the judgment of quarterly meetings are here finally deter­mined; and a brotherly correspondence, by epistles, is maintained with other yearly meetings.

As they believe women may be rightly called to the work of the ministry, they also think they may share in their christian discipline. Accordingly they have monthly, quarterly, and yearly meetings of their own sex; held at the same time, and in the same place with those of the men; but separately, and without the power of making rules.

Their elders and ministers have meetings peculiar to themselves. These meetings, called Meetings of ministers and elders, are generally held in the compass of each monthly, quarterly, and Yearly meeting—for the purposes of exciting each other to the discharge of their sev­eral duties—of extending advice to those who may appear weak, &c. They also, in the intervals of the yearly meetings, give certificates to those ministers who travel abroad in the work of the ministry.

The yearly meeting, held in London, 1675, appointed a meeting to be held in that city, for the purpose of advising and assisting in cases of suffering for conscience sake, called Meeting for sufferings, which is yet continued. It is composed of Friends under the name of correspondents, chosen by the several quarterly meetings, who reside in and near the city. This meeting is intrusted with the care of printing and distributing books, and with the management of its stock, and considered as a standing committee of the yearly meet­ing.—In none of their meetings have they a President, as they believe Divine Wisdom alone ought to preside; nor has any member a right to claim pre-eminence over the rest.

The METHEODIST denomination of christians arose in England in 1739; and made their first appearance in America about 24 years since. Their general style is, "The United Societies of the Methodist Epis­copal Church." They profess themselves to be "a company of men, having the form and seeking the power of godliness, united into order to pray together, to receive the word of exhortation, and to watch over one another in love, that they may help each other to work out their salvation."—Each society is divided into classes of 12 persons; one of whom is stiled the Leader, whose business it is to see each person in [Page 261] his class once a week, in order to enquire, how their souls prosper, to advise, reprove, comfort or exhort as occasion may require; and to receive contributions for the relief of the church and poor. In order to admission into their societies they require only one condition, viz. "A desire to flee from the wrath to come, i. e. a desire to be saved from their sins." It is expected of all who continue in their societies, that they should evidence their desire of salvation, by doing no harm, by avoiding all manner of evil, by doing all manner of good, as they have ability and opportunity, especially to the household of faith; employing them preferably to others, buying of one another (unless they can be served better elsewhere) and helping each other in busi­ness—And also by attending upon all the ordinances of God; such as publick worship, the supper of the Lord, family and private prayer, searching the scriptures, and fasting or abstinence. The late celebrat­ed Mr. John Wesley, is considered as the father of this class of Me­thodists, who, as they deny some of the leading Calvinistic doctrines, and hold some of the peculiar tenets of Arminius, may be called Ar­minian Methodists.—The famous Mr. Whitefield, was the leader of the Calvinistic Methodists, who are numerous is England, and a few are in different parts of the United States, who were patronized and suppli­ed with ministers, by the late lady Huntingdon.

In 1788, the number of Wesl [...]ian Methodists in the United States, stood thus,

Georgia 2011
S. Carolina 3366
N. Carolina 6779
Virginia 14356
Maryland 11017
Delaware 1998
Pennsylvenia
New Jersey 1751
New York 2004
Total 43263

Since this estimate of their numbers was taken, some few scattering societies have been collected in different parts of the New England States, and their numbers increased in other parts; so that in 1790, the whole connection amounted to 57,621. To superintend the Methodist connection in America, they had, in 1768, two Bishops, 30 Elders and 50 Deacons.

In Great Britain and Ireland, the whole number of persons in full connection with the Methodist Episcopal church, amounted, in [...] to 71,568.

The whole number of RONAN CATHOLICS in the United States is estimated at about 50 000; one half of which are in the state of Maryland. Their peculiar and leading doctrines and tenets, are too generally known to need a recital here. They have a Bishop, who resides in Baltimore, and many of their congregations are large and respectable.

The German inhabitants in these states, who principally belong to Pennsylvania, and New York, are divided into a variety of sects; the principal of which are, Lutherans, Calvinists or Presbyterians, Mora­ [...], Tunkers, and Mennonists. Of these the German Lutherans are the most numerous. Of this denomination, and the German Presby­terians or Calvinists, who are next to them in numbers, there are up­wards of 60 ministers, in Pennsylvania—and the former have 12, and the latter 6 churches in the state of New York. Many of their churches are large and splendid▪ and in some instances furnished with [...]. These two denominations live together in the greatest har­mony, [Page 262] money often preaching in each others churches, and sometimes unit­ing in the erection of a church, in which they alternately wor­ship.

The MORAVIANS are a respectable body of christians in these States. Of this denomination, there were, in 1788, about 1300 souls in Penn­sylvania; viz. at Bethlehem, between 5 and 600, which number has since increased—at Nazareth, 450; at Litiz, upwards of 300. Their other settlements, in the United States, are at Hope, in New-Jersey, about 100 souls; at Wachovia, on Yadkin river, North Carolina, con­taining 6 churches. Besides these regular settlements, formed by such only as are members of the brethren's church, and live together in good order and harmony, there are in different parts of Pennsylva­nia, Maryland and New Jersey, and in the cities and towns of New­port, (R. Island) New York, Philadelphia, Lancaster, Yorktown, &c. congregations of the brethren, who have their own church and min­ister, and hold the same principles, and doctrinal tenets, and church rites and ceremonies as the former, though their local situation does not admit of such particular regulations, as are peculiar to the regular settlements.

The call themselves, "The United Brethren of the Protestant Episcopal Church." They are called Moravians, because the first settlers in the English dominions were chiefly migrants from Moravia. These were the remnant and genuine descendents of the church of the an­cient United Brethren, established in Bohemia and Moravia, as early as the year 1456. About the middle of the last century, they left their native country to avoid persecution, and to enjoy liberty of conscience, and the true exercise of the religion of their fore-fathers. They were received in Saxony, and other Protestant dominions, and were encouraged to settle among them, and were joined by many se­rious people of other denominations. They adhere to the Augustan Confession of Faith, which was drawn up by the Protestant divines at the time of the reformation in Germany, in the year 1530, and pre­sented at the diet of the empire at Ausburg; and which, a [...] that time, contained the doctrinal system of all the established Protes­tant churches. They retain the discipline of their ancient church, and make use of Episcopal ordination, which has been handed down to them in a direct line of succession, for more than three hundred years. *

They profess to live in strict obedience to the ordinances of Christ, such as the observation of the Sabbath, Infant Baptism, and the Lord's Supper; and in addition to these, they practice the foot washing the kiss of love, and the use of the lot.

They were introduced into America by Count Zinzendorf, and set­tled at Bethlehem, which is their principal settlement in America, as early as 1741. Regularity, industry, ingenuity and economy, are cha­racteristics these people.

The TUNKERS are so called in derision, from the word sunken, is put a morsel in sauce. The English word that conveys the proper mean­ing of Tunkers is Sops or Dippers. They are also called Tumbl [...], [Page 263] from the manner in which they perform baptism, which is by putting the person, while kneeling, head first under water, so as to resemble the motion of the body in the action of tumbling. The Ger­mans sound the letters t and b like d and p; hence the words Tunk­ers and Tumblers, have been corruptly written Dunkers and Dump­lers.

The first appearing of these people in America, was in the fall of the year 1719, when about twenty families landed in Philadelphia, and dispersed themselves in various parts of Pennsylvania. They are what are called General Baptists, and hold to general redemption and general salvation. They use great plainness of dress and language, and will neither swear, nor fight, nor go to law, nor take interest for the money they lend. They commonly wear their beards—keep the first day Sabbath, except one congregation—have the Lord's Supper with its ancient attendants of Love-feasts, with washing of feet, kiss of charity, and right hand of fellowship. They anoint the sick with oil for their recovery, and use the trine immer­sion, with laying on of hands and prayer, even while the person bap­tised is in the water. Their church government and discipline are the same with those of the English Baptists, except that every brother is allowed to speak in the congregation; and their best speaker is usual­ly ordained to be their minister. They have deacons, deaconesses (from among their ancient widows) and exhorters, who are all licens­ed to use their gifts statedly. On the whole, notwithstanding their peculiarities, they appear to be humble, well meaning christians, and have acquired the character of the harmless Tunkers.

Their principal settlement is at Ephrata, sometimes called Tunkers­town, in Lancaster county, sixty miles westward of Philadelphia. It consists of about forty buildings, of which three are places of worship: One is called Sharon, and adjoins the sister's apartment as a chapel; another, belonging to the brothers apartment, is called Bethany. To these the brethren and sisters resort, separately, to worship morning and evening, and sometimes in the night. The third is a common church, called Zion, where all in the settlement meet once a week for public worship. The brethren have adopted the White Friars' dress, with some alterations; the sisters that of the nuns; and both like them have taken the vow of celibacy. All however do not keep the vow. When they marry, they leave their cells and go among the married people. They subsist by cultivating their lands, by attending a printing office, a g [...]ist mill, a paper mill, an oil mill, &c. and the sisters by spinning, weaving, sewing, &c. They at first slept on board couch­es, but now on beds, and have otherwise abated much of their form­er severity. This congregation keep the seventh day Sab­bath. Their singing is charming, owing to the pleasantness of their voices, the variety of parts, and the devout manner of performance. Besides this congregation at Ephrata, there were, in 1770, fourteen others in various other parts of Pennsylvania, and some in Maryland. The whole, exclusive of those in Maryland, amounted to upwards of [...]000 souls.

The MENNONISTS derive their name from Menno Simon, a na­tive of Witmars in Germany, a man of learning, born in the year 150 [...], in the time of the reformation by Luther and Calvin. He was a famous Roman Catholic preacher, till about the year 1 [...]3 [...], when he became a Baptist. Some of his followers came into Pennsylvania from [Page 264] New York and settled at Germantown, as early as 1692. This is at present their principal congregation, and the mother of the rest. Their whole number, in 1770, in Pennsylvania, was upwards of 4000, divid­ed into thirteen churches, and forty-two congregations, under the care of fifteen ordained ministers, and fifty three licensed preachers

The Mennonists do not, like the Tunkers, hold the doctrine of gen­eral salvation; yet like them, they will neither swear nor fight, nor bear any civil office, nor go to law, nor take interest for the money they lend, though many break this last rule. Some of them wear their beards; wash each others feet, &c. and all use plainness of speech and dress. Some have been expelled their society for wearing buckles in their shoes, and having pocket holes in their coats. Their church government is democratical. They call themselves the Harmless christ­ians, Revengeless christians and Weaponless christians. They are Bap­tists rather in name than in fact; for they do not use immersion. Their common mode of baptism is this: The person to be baptized kneels; the minister holds his hands over him, into which the deacon pours water, which runs through upon the head of the person kneeling. After this, follow imposition of hands and prayer.

The denomination stiled UNIVERSALISTS, though their schemes are very various, may properly enough be divided into two classes, viz. Those who embrace the scheme of Dr. Chauncey, exhibited in his book entitled "The Salvation of all Men;" and the disciples of Mr. Winchester and Mr. John Murray.

A judicious summary of Dr. Chauncey's sentiments has been given, * as follows.

"That the scheme of revelation has the happiness of all mankind ly­ing at bottom, as its great and ultimate end; that it gradually tend [...] this end; and will not fail of its accomplishment, when fully completed. Some, in consequence of its operation, as conducted by the Son of God, will he disposed and enabled, in this present state, to make such im­provements in virtue, the only rational preparative for happiness, as that they shall enter upon the enjoyment of it in the next state. Oth­ers, who have proved incurable under the means which have been used with them in this state, instead of being happy in the next, will be awfully miserable; not to continue so finally, but that they may be convinced of their folly, and recovered to a virtuous frame of mind: and this will be the effect of the future torments upon many; the con­sequence whereof will be their salvation, they being thus fitted for it. And there may be yet other states, before the scheme of God may be perfected, and mankind universally cured of their moral disorders, and in this way qualified for, and finally instated in, eternal happiness. But however many states some of the individuals of the human spe­cies may pass through, and of however long continuance they may be, the whole is intended to subserve the grand design of universal happiness, and will finally terminate in it; insomuch, that the Son of God and Saviour of men, will not deliver up his trust into the hands of the Father, who committed it to him, till he has discharged his obligations in virtue of it; having finally fixed all men in heaven, when God will be All in All."

The number of this denomination is not known. The open advo­cates of this scheme are few; though the number is larger, who em­brace [Page 265] the doctrine of the salvation of all men, upon principles simi­lar, but variously differing from those on which the abovementioned schemes is grounded.

The latter class of Universalists have a new scheme, differing essential­ly from that of the former, which they reject as inconsistent and absurd: And they cannot conceive how they who em brace it, can, "with any degree of propriety, be called Universalists, on Apostolic principles, as it does not appear that they have any idea of being saved by, or in the Lord, with an everlasting, or with any salvation"—Hence they call them "Pharisaical Universalists, who are willing to justify themselves." *

It is difficult to say what is the present scheme of the denomination of which we are now speaking; for they differ not only from all other Universalists, and from each other, but even from themselves at differ­ent periods. The reader, however, may form an idea of some of their tenets from what follows, collected from the Letter referred to in the note. This letter, written lately, by the head of the denomination, and professing to rectify mistakes respecting doctrines propagated un­der the christian name—to give the character of a Consistent Universalist—and to acquaint the world with their rea [...] sentiments, we have reason to conclude, gives as true an account of their scheme as can be ob­tained.

From this Letter it appears, that they believe "that Religion of some sort or other, is a public benefit;" and that every person is at liberty▪ and is bound, to support what he conceives to be the true Religion—That public worship on every first day of the week, is an incumbent duty on all real lovers of divine truth—that prayer, as it indicates [...] is, and dependence on God, is part of his worship—They believe that the Deceiver, who beguiled Eve, and not our first parents themselves, did the deed which brought ruin and death on all the human race—That there are two classes of fallen sinners—the Angels who kept not their first estate, and the human nature, deceived by the former, and appar­ently destroyed consequent thereon—that a just God, in the law given by Moses, has denounced death and the curse on every one who continu­al not is all things, written in the book of the law to do them—but that the same God, was manifested in the flesh as the head of every man, made under the law, is redeem them that are under the law, being made a curse for them—that he tasted death for every man, being a Saviour, not of a few only, but of all men—and that the declaration of this is the Gospel.—They be­lieve that when God denounces on the human race, woes, wrath, tribu­lation, death, damnation, &c. in the Scriptures, he speaks in his legisla­tive capacity, as the just God who will by no means dear the guilty—that when he speaks of mercy, grace, peace▪ of life as the gift of God, and salvation in whole or in part, he speaks in the character of the [...] God and Saviour—that the former is the language of the law; the latter the language of the Gospel.

Confession of sins—Repentance, and supplications for mercy and forgiveness, make no part of their creed or worship.

They believe that the Prince of Peace came to save the human nature from the power and dominion of the Devil, and his works—that he came to destroy the latter, that he might save the former—That "Sin is the work of the Devil—that he is the Worker and Doer of what­ever gives offence"—That Jesus, as the Saviour of the world, small sep­arate [Page 266] from his kingdom, both the evil Worker and his evil works; the evil Worker, in the character of goats—The evil works in the character of tares.—They suppose that what is wicked in mankind, is represented by the evil seed sown by the evil One in human nature, and that "when the Sower of the evil seed, and all the evil seed sown, shall be separ­ated from the seed which God sowed, then the seed which is properly God's seed, will be like him who sowed it, pure and holy."

They consider all ordinances as merely shadows; yet they celebrate the Lord's Supper, by eating bread and drinking wine—and some of them suppose that every time they eat bread and drink wine, they com­ply with our Lord's injunction, "Do this in remembrance of me."—Various other opinions prevail among them respecting this ordinances, and that of baptism. They "admit of but one baptism, the baptizer Jesus Christ, the elements made use of, the Holy Ghost and fire"—yet they are willing, in order to avoid contention, "to become all things to all men" and to baptize infants by sprinkling, or adults by immersion—or to omit these signs altogether, according as the opinions of parents may vary upon this subject.—Some think it proper to dedi­cate their children to the Lord, by putting them into the arms of the minister, to be by him presented to Christ, to be baptized with his baptism, in the name of the Trinity, the minister at the same time to bless them in the words in which God commanded Aaron and his sons to bless the children of Israel—"The Lord bless thee, &c."—It appears in short, that their notions respecting these ordinances are various, vague and unsettled.

They believe in a judgment past and a judgment to come—that the past judgment is either that in which the world was judged in the second Adam, according to the word of the Saviour, " Now is the judg­ment of this worldnow is the Prince of this world cast out and judgment executed on them and on the whole human nature, according is the righteous judgment of God—or that which every man is to exercise upon himself, according to the words " judge yourselves and ye shall not be judged"—"The judgment to come is that in which all who have not judged themselves—all unbelievers of the human race, and all the fallen angels, shall be judged by the Saviour—but these two characters viz. unbelievers of the human race, and the fallen angels, shall be placed, the former on the right, the latter on the left hand of their Judge; the one under the denomination of sheep, for whose salvation the Saviour laid down his life—the other under the denomination of goats, who are the accursed, whose nature he passed by—"The human nature" (i. e. the sheep or unbelievers of the human race) "as the offspring of the everlasting Father, and the ransomed of the Lord—shall be brought, by divine power, into the kingdom prepared for them, before the foundation of the world—the other nature, (i. e. the goats, or fallen angels) "will be sent into the fire prepared for them." * From which it appears, that it is their opinion, that unbelievers of the human race, or sheep, and the fallen angels, or goats, will be the only classes of creatures concerned in the awards of the last judgment—and that the righteous, or believers in [Page 267] Christ, will not then be judged, having previously judged themselves *—"But the rest of mankind," say they, "will be the subjects of this judg­ment, when our Saviour shall be revealed from heaven in flaming fire, tak­ing vengeance on them that know not God, and obey not the gospel; and they shall then be punished with everlasting destruction from the presence of the Lord and the glory of his power." Their inference from, and exposition of this passage, are peculiar, and will serve to give the reader an idea of their manner of explaining other parallel passages of Scripture. From this awful revelation of the Saviour, to take vengeance on them that know not God, and obey not the gospel, they infer this consequence, "they shall then be made to know God, and obey the gospel."—The everlast­ing destruction, from the presence of the Lord and the glory of his power, with which they shall be punished, they suppose is suf­fered by unbelievers, in consequence of the revelation of the everlasting destruction, previous to this awful period—and that they will suffer no punishment after it—for "it is not said," they say, "that they shall be everlastingly punished with destruction." They explain their idea of everlasting punishment and suffering the pain of eternal fire, thus, "Were it possible to find a culinary fire that never would be extinguished, but in the strictest sense of the word, was everlasting or eternal—should any member of the body pass through that burning flame, though but a moment of time had been thus spent in passing through; yet even in that moment, it would suffer the pain of eternal fire."—But whether they believe it possible that there should be such a fire, or that unbeliev­ers shall be doomed to suffer the punishment of eternal fire by thus passing through it, they do not declare.

They do not suppose that "all mankind will be on a level in the article of death, but that they who die in unbelief, will be down in sor­row, and rise to the resurrection of damnation, or condemnation; and when the books shall be opened, and the dead, both small and great, shall be judged out of the things written in the books—every month shall be stopped, and all the world become guilty before God; and while conscious of guilt, but ignorant of a Saviour—they shall call on the rocks and mountains to fall on them to hide them from the wrath of the Lamb—But that in this judgment the judge is the Saviour—they will be judged by their own head;" and as the head of every man is Christ—all of course must be acquitted and saved.

Although the believe that the Devil is the doer or worker of every thing that gives offence; yet they assert that " all men at all times are sin­ners, and come short of the glory of God" —but they believe that [...] Christ suffered, "was considered by the Great Lawgiver, as done and suffered by every man in his own person; and that every man is as much interested in what Christ, the second Adam did, as they were in what the first Adam did"—thus believing, they consider God as just in being their Saviour, as he would have been in their eternal damnation.

The Consistent Universalist, "does not consider himself under the law any more than a woman considers herself under the di­rection or dominion of a husband that is dead and buried—nor is he afraid of death, being assured that Jesus hath abolished death, and lest nothing of it but the shadow."

[Page 268] The Universalists of this denomination, in common with other christians, profess themselves to be the advocates of piety, religion and morality.—They assert the duty of doing right as men—as members of civil society—and as christians. "As mere men" they hold, [...] "they must follow nature, or they will sink beneath the level of the beasts of the field"—and yet they assert that " all the righteousness found in the best of mere human nature is but as a filthy rag"—That as mem­bers of civil society they must submit to the laws, or if thought [...] severe, they may avoid them by a removal from the state."—That as christians they must be under the direction of Christ, and do [...] he commands them; and these are his commandments, " that we believe in him, and love one another."

There are but a few of this denomination of Universalists in the United States—Of these few, some are in Pennsylvania—some in dif­ferent parts of New York, Connecticut, Rhode Island, and N [...]w Hampshire; but the body of them are in Boston, and Gloucester, in Massachusetts. They have several constituted churches, which are governed by an ecclesiastical constitution, formed in 1789, by a small convention of their ministers at Philadelphia.

There is a small, and singular sect of christians, called SHAKERS, which have sprung up among us as lately as 1774; when a few of this sect came from England to New York, and there being joined by a few others, they settled at Nisqueunia, above Albany, which is th [...] principal settlement: a few others are scattered in different parts of the country.

The head of this party, while she lived. * was Anna Leese, styled the Elect Lady. Her followers asserted, that she was the woman spoken of in the twelfth chapter of the Revelation, and that she spoke seven­ty two tongues: And although these tongues were unintelligible to the living, she conversed with the dead who understood her language. They alledged also that she was the mother of all the Elect; that [...] travailed for the whole world—that no blessing could descend to any person but only by and through her, and that in the way of her being possessed of their sins, by their confessing and repenting of them, one by one, according to her direction.

Their leading doctrinal tenets, as given by one of their own de­nomination▪ are, "That the first resurection is already come, and now is the time to judge themselves. That they have power to heal the sick, to raise the dead and cast out devils. That they have a corres­pondence with angels, the spirits of the saints and their departed friends. That they speak with divers kind of tongues in their publick assem­blies—That it is lawful to practice vocal mufick with dancing in the christian churches, if it be practised in praising the LORD.—That their church is come out of the order of natural generation, to be as Christ was and that those who have wives are as though they had none.—That by these means heaven begins upon earth, and they thereby lose their earth­ly and sensual relation to Adam the first, and come to be transparent in their ideas, in the bright and heavenly visions of God. That some of their people are of the number of the 144,000 who were red [...] from the earth, and were not defiled with women. That the [...] everlasting, when applied to the punishment of the wicked, [...] [Page 269] only a limited period, except in the case of those who fall from their church; and that for such there is no forgiveness, neither in this world nor that which is to come. That it is unlawful to swear, game, or use compliments—and that water baptism and the Lord's Supper are a [...]otified.—That Adam's sin is not imputed to his posterity—and that the doctrines of election and reprobation are to be rejected."

The discipline of this denomination is founded on the supposed perfection of their leaders. The mother, or the Elect Lady, it is said, obeys God through Christ. European elders obey her. American la­bourers, and common people obey them; while confession is made of every secret thing, from the oldest to the youngest. The people are made to believe that they are seen through and through in the gospel glass of perfection, by their teachers, who behold the state of the dead, and innumerable worlds of spirits good and bad.

These people are generally instructed to be very industrious, and to bring in according to their ability, to keep up the meeting. They vary in their exercises. Their heavy dancing, as it is called, is performed by a perpetual springing from the house floor, about four inches up and down, both in the men's and women's apartment, moving about with extra­ordinary transport, singing sometimes one at a time, sometimes more, making a perfect charm.

This elevation affects the nerves; so that they have intervals of shuddering, as if they were in a strong fit of the ague. They some­times clap hands and leap so as to strike the joist above their heads. They throw off their outside garments in these exercises, and spend their strength very cheerfully this way. Their chief speaker often calls for attention; when they all stop and hear some harangue, and then fall to dancing again. They assert, that their dancing is the tok­en of the great joy and happiness of the new Jerusalem state, and de­notes the victory over sin. One of the postures, which increases a­mong them, is turning round very swift for an hour or two. This they say is to show the great power of God.

They sometimes fall on their knees and make a sound like the roar­ing of many waters, in groans and cries to God, as they say, for the wicked world who persecute them. §

The Jews are not numerous in the United States—They have Syn­agogues at Savannah, Charleston, (S. C.) Philadelphia, New-York, and New port. Besides those who reside at these places, there are oth­ers scattered in different towns, in the United States.

The Jews in Charleston, among other peculiarities in burying their dead, have these: After the funeral dirge is sung, and just before the corpse is deposited in the grave, the coffin is opened, and a small bag of [...]th, taken from the grave, is carefully put under the head of the deceased; then some powder, said to be earth brought from Jerusalem, and carefully kept for this purpose, is taken and put upon the eyes of the corpse, in token of their remembrance of the holy land, and of [...] expectations of returning thither in God's appointed time. [...]er this custom is universal among the Jews, is not known.

They generally expect a glorious return to the Holy Land, when [...] shall be exalted above all the nations of the earth. And they [Page 270] flatter themselves that the period of their return will speedily arrive, though they do not venture to fix the precise time.

The whole number of persons who profess the Jewish religion, in all parts of the world, is supposed be about three millions; who, as their phrase is, are witnesses of the unity of God in all the nations in the world.

Besides the religious sects enumerated, there are a few of the Ger­man inhabitants in Pennsylvania, who are styled SWINSEILDIANS, and, in Maryland, a small number called NICOLITES or NEW QUAKERS but with the distinguishing sentiments of these sects I am not acquaint­ed.

HISTORY.] In addition to what we have already said of the discov­ery and settlement of North America, we shall here give a brief histo­ry of the late war with Great Britain, with a sketch of the events which preceded and prepared the way for the revolution. This gen­eral view of the history of the United States, will serve as a suitable introduction to the particular histories of the several states, which will be given in their proper places.

America was originally peopled by uncivilized nations, who lived mostly by hunting and fishing. The Europeans, who first visited these shores, treating the natives as wild beasts of the forest, which have [...] property in the woods where they roam, planted the standard of their respective masters, where they first landed, and in their names claimed the country by right of discovery. * Prior to any settlement in North America, numerous titles of this kind were acquired by the English, French, Spanish, and Dutch navigators, who came hither for the pur­poses of fishing and trading with the natives. Slight as such cities were, they were afterwards the causes of contention between the Eu­ropean nations. The subjects of different princes often laid claim to the same tract of country, because both had discovered the same riv [...] or promontory; or because the extent of their respective claims [...] undetermined.

While the settlements in this vast uncultivated country were incon­siderable and scattered, and the trade of it confined to the bartering of a few trinkets for furs, a trade carried on by a few adventurers, the interfering of claims produced no important controversy among the settlers on the nations of Europe. But in proportion to the progress of population, and the growth of the American trade, the jealousies of the nations, which had made early discoveries and settlements on this coast, were alarmed: ancient claims were received; and each power took measures to extend and secure its own possessions at the expense of a rival.

By the treaty of Utretcht in 1713, the English claimed a right of cutting logwood in the Bay of Campeachy, in South-America. In the exercise of this right, the English merchants had frequent oppor­tunities of carrying on a contraband trade with the Spanish settle­ments on the continent. To remedy this evil, the Spaniards resolves to annihilate a claim, which though often acknowledged, had never been clearly ascertained. To effect this design they captured the En­glish vessels, which they found along the Spanish Main, and many of the British subjects were doomed to work in the mines of Potoss.

[Page 271] Repeated severities of this kind at length (1739) produced a war between England and Spain. Porto Bello was taken from the Span­iards, by Admiral Vernon. Commodore Anson, with a squadron of ships, failed to the South Seas, distressed the Spanish settlements on the western shore of America, and took a galleon laden with immense riches. But in 1741, a formidable armament, destined to attack Car­thagena, under the command of Lord Cathcart, returned unsuccessful, with the loss of upwards of twelve thousand British soldiers and sea­men; and the defeat of the expedition, raised a clamour against the minister, Sir Robert Walpole, which produced a change in the ad­ministration. This change removed the scene of war to Europe, so that America was not immediately affected by the subsequent transac­tions; except the Lou [...]sburgh, the principal fortress of Cape-Breton, was taken from the French by General Pepperell, assisted by Commo­dore Warren and a body of New-England troops *.

This war was ended in 1748, by the treaty of peace signed at Aix la Chapelle, by which restitution was made, on both sides, of all places taken during the war.

Peace however was of short duration. The French possessed Canada, and had made considerable settlements in Florida, claiming the country on both sides of the Missisippi, by right of discovery. To se­cure and extend their claims, they established a line of sorts, from Canada to Florida. They had secured the important pass at Niagara, and erected a fort at the junction of the Allegany and Monongahela rivers, called Fort Du Quesne. They took pains to secure the friend­ship and assistance of the natives; encroachments were made upon the English possessions, and mutual injuries succeeded. The disputes among the settlers in America, and the measures taken by the French to command all the trade of the St. Lawrence river on the north, and of the Missisippi on the south, excited a jealously in the English nation, which soon broke forth in open war.

The next year three other expeditions were undertaken in Ameri­ca against the French. One was conducted by General Monckton, who had orders to drive the French from their encroachments on the province of Nova-Scotia. This expedition was attended with success. General Johnson was ordered, with a body of troops, to take possession of Crown Point, but he did not succeed. General Shirely commanded an expedition against the fort at Niagara, but lost the season by delay.

In 1755, General Braddock marched against fort Du Quesne, but in penetrating through the wilderness, he incautiously fell into an am­buscade, and suffered a total defeat. General Braddock was killed, but the enemy not pursuing the vanquished across the river, being eager in plundering the baggage of the dead, a part of his troops were saved by slight under the conduct of General Washington, at that time a Colonel, who then began to exhibit proofs of those military talents, by which he afterwards conducted the armies of America to victory, and his country to independence.

The ill success of these expeditions, left the English settlements in America exposed to the depredations of both the French and Indians. But the war now raged in Europe and the East-Indies, and engaged the attention of both nations in those quarters.

It was not until the campaign in 1758, that affairs assumed a more favourable aspect in America. But upon a change of administration, [Page 272] Mr. Pitt was appointed prime minister, and the operations of war [...] came more vigorous and successful. General Amherst was [...] take possession of Cape Breton; and after a warm siege, the [...] of Louisburg surrendered by capitulation. General Forbes wa [...] [...] ­cessful in taking possession of fort Du Quesne, which the French thought fit to abandon. But General Abercrombie, who commanded the troops destined to act against the French at Crown Point and [...] conderoga, attacked the lines at Ticonderoga, and was defeated wi [...] a terrible slaughter of his troops. After his defeat, he returned to [...] camp at Lake George.

The next year, more effectual measures were taken to subd [...] [...] French in America. General Prideaux and Sir William Johnson be­gan the operations of the campaign by taking the French fort [...] Niagara. § General Amherst took possession of the forts at Crown Point and Ticonderoga, which the French had abandoned.

But the decisive blow, which proved fatal to the French interests by America, was the defeat of the French army, and the taking of Que­bec, by the brave General Wolfe. This hero was slain in the beginn­ing of the action on the plains of Abram, and Monsieur Montcalm, the French commander, likewise lost his life. The loss of Quebec was soon followed by the capture of Montreal, by General Amherst, and Canada has remained ever since in possession of the English.

Colonel Grant, in 1761, defeated the Cherokees in Carolina, and obliged them to sue for peace. The next year Martihico was [...] by Admiral Rodney and General Monekton; and also the island of Grenada, St. Vincents and others. The capture of these was [...] followed by the surrender of the Havanna, the capital of the island of Cuba.

In 1763, a definitive treaty of peace was concluded at Paris, between Great Britain, France and Spain; by which the English ceded to the French, several islands which they had taken from them in the West Indies, but were confirmed in the possession of all North America on this side the Missisippi, except the island of Orleans.

But this war, however brilliant the successes and glorious the ev [...] proved the cause of great and unexpected misfortunes to Great Britain. Engaged with the combined powers of France and Spain, [...] several years, her exertions were surprising and her expense immensely. To discharge the debts of the nation, the parliament was obliged to [...] recourse to new expedients for raising money. Previous to the [...] treaty in 1763, the parliament had been satisfied to raise a rev [...] from the American Colonies by a monopoly of their trade.

It will be proper here to observe, that there were four kinds of government established in the British American Colonies. The first was a charter government, by which the powers of legislation were vested in a governor, council and assembly, chosen by the people. Of this kind were the governments of Connecticut and Rhode-Island. The second was a proprietary government, in which the propri [...] of the province, was governor; although he generally resided abroad and administered the government by a deputy of his own appointment; the assembly only being chosen by the people. Such were the govern­ments of Pennsylvania and Maryland; and, originally, or New Jersey and Carolina. The third kind was that of royal government, where [Page 273] the governour and council were appointed by the crown, and the as­sembly by the people. Of this kind were the governments of New-Hampshire, New-York, New-Jersey, (after the year 1702) Virginia, the Carolinas, after the resignation of the proprietors, in 1728; and Georgia. The fourth kind was that of Massachusetts, which differed [...] all the rest. The governour was appointed by the king. So far it was a royal government. But the members of the council were elect­ed by the representatives of the people. The governour, however, had a right to negative a certain number, but not to fill up vacancies th [...] occasioned. This variety of governments created different de­grees of dependence on the crown. In the royal government, to ren­der a lays valid, it was constitutionally required that it should be rat­ified by the king; but the charter governments were empowered to exact laws and no ratification by the king was necessary. It was on­ly required that such laws should not be contrary to the laws of Eng­land. The charter of Connecticut is express to this purpose.

At the beginning of the last was with France, commissioners from many of the colonies had assembled at Albany, and proposed that a great council should be formed by deputies from the several colonies, which, with a general government to be appointed by the crown, should be empowered to take measures for the common safety, and to raise money for the execution of their designs. This proposal was not relished by the British ministry; but in place of this plan, it was proposed that the governours of the colonies, with the assistance of one or two of their council, should assemble and concert measures for the general defence; erect forts, levy troops, and draw on the treasu­ry of England for monies that should be wanted; but the treasury to be reimbursed by a tax on the colonies, to be laid by the English par­liament. To this plan, which would imply an avowal of the right of parliament to tax the colonies, the provincial assemblies objected with [...] [...]en firmness. It seems therefore that the British parliament, be­fore the war, had it in contemplation to exercise the right they claimed of taxing the colonies at pleasure, without permitting them to be rep­resented. Indeed it is obvious that they laid hold of the alarming sit­uation of the colonies, about the year 1754 and 1755, to force them into an acknowledgment of the right, or to the adoption of measures that might afterwards be drawn into precedent. The colonies how­ever, with an uncommon foresight and firmness, defeated, all their at­ [...]ts▪ The war was carried on by requisitions on the colonies for [...] of men and money, or by voluntary contributions.

But no sooner was peace concluded, than the English parliament [...] the plan of taxing the colonies; and to justify their attempts, said that the money to be raised, was to be appropriated to defray the expense of defending them in the late war.

The first attempt to raise a revenue in America, appeared in the memorable stamp act, passed March 22, 1765; by which it was enacted that certain instruments of writing, as bills, bonds, &c. should not be [...] in Law, unless drawn on stamped paper, on which a duty was laid. When this bill was brought in, Mr. Charles Townsend concluded a [...]ch in its favour, with words to the following effect, "And now, [...] these Americans, children planted by our care, nourished up by [...] indulgence, till they are grown to a degree of strength and opu­ [...], and protected by our arms, will they grudge to contribute their [...] to relieve us from the heavy weight of that burden which we [Page 274] lie under?" To which Colonel Bar [...]e replied. "They planted by your care? No, your oppressions planted them in America. They fled from tyranny to a then uncultivated and unhospitable [...] where they exposed themselves to almost all the hardships to [...] human nature is liable; and among others to the cruelty of a [...] foe, the most subtle, and I will take upon me to say, the most [...] ­able of any people upon the face of God's earth; and yet, actually principles of true English liberty, they met all hardships with [...] sure, compared with those who suffered in their own country, [...] hands of those who should have been their friends. They nour [...] up by your indulgence? They grew by your neglect of them [...] soon as you began to care about them, that care was exercised in [...] ­ing persons to rule them in one department and another▪ who were per­haps the deputies of deputies to some members of the house, [...] to spy out their liberties, to misrepresent their actions and to pray up­on them.—Men, whose behaviour on many occasions, has [...] the blood of those sons of liberty to recoil within them.—Men pro­moted to the highest seats of justice, some, who to my knowledge [...] glad, by going to a foreign country, to escape being brought to [...] of a court of justice in their own.—They protected by your arms? They have nobly taken up arms in your defence, have exerted a [...] midst their constant and laborious industry, for the defence of a [...] ­try whose frontier was drenched in blood, while its interior [...] yielded all its little savings to your emolument; and believe [...] member I this day told you so, that the same spirit of freedom which [...] ­ated that people at first, will accompany them still: but prudence [...] bids me to explain myself farther. God knows, I do not at this [...] speak from any motives of party heat; what I deliver are the [...] sentiments of my heart. However superior to me in general knowledge and experience, the respectable body of this house may be, yet I [...] to know more of America than most of you, having seen and been conversant in that country. The people I believe are as truly loyal as any subjects the king has, but a people jealous of their libert [...], and who will vindicate them, if ever they should be violated: but the subject is too delicate—I will say no more."

No sooner was this act published in America, than it raised a [...] alarm. The people were filled with apprehensions at an [...] which they supposed to be an attack on their constitutional rights. The colonies petitioned the king and parliament for a redress of the [...] ­ance, and formed associations for the purpose of preventing [...] portation and use of British manufactures, until the act should be ap­pealed. This spirited and unanimous opposition of the Americans produced the desired effect; and on the 18th of March, 1766, the [...] act was repealed. The news of the repeal was received in the colo­nies with universal joy, and the trade between them and Great Britain was renewed on the most liberal footing.

The parliament, by repealing this act, so obnoxious to this Amer­ican brethren, did not intend to lay aside the scheme of raising [...] venue in the colonies, but merely to change the mode. Accordingly the next year, they passed an act, laying a certain duty on glass, [...] paper and painters colours; articles which were much wanted, and [...] manufactured, in America. This act kindled the resentment of the Americans, and excited a general opposition to the measure; so that parliament thought proper, in 1770, to take off these duties, [...] [Page 275] [...] [...] a pound on tea. Yet this duty, however trifling, kept [...] the jealousy of the colonists, and their opposition to parliament­ary taxation continued and increased.

[...] it must be remembered than the inconvenience of paying the du­ [...] not the sole, nor principal cause of the opposition; it was the [...] which, once admitted, would have subjected the colonies to [...] parliamentary taxation, without the privilege of being rep­ [...]. The right, abstractly considered, was denied; and the small­ [...] [...]pt to establish the claim by precedent, was uniformly resisted. [...] Americans could not be deceived as to the views of parliament; [...] the repeal of the stamp act was accompanied with an unequivocal [...], 'that the parliament had a right to make laws, of sufficient validity, to bind the colonies in all cases whatsoever.'

The colonies therefore entered into measures to encourage their own [...]tures, and home productions, and to retrench the use of for­ [...] superfluities; while the importation of tea was prohibited. In [...] and proprietary governments, and in Massachusetts, the govern­ [...] and people were in a state of continual warfare. Assemblies were [...] called, and suddenly dissolved. While sitting, the assem­ [...] employed the time in stating grievances and framing remonstran­ [...]. To inflame these discontents, an act of parliament was passed, [...]ining that the governours and judges should receive their salaries of the crown; thus making them independent of the provincial as­ [...], and removeable only at the pleasure of the king.

These arbitrary proceedings, with many others not here men­ [...], * could not fail of producing a rupture.

On the second of March, a fray took place in Boston, near Mr. Gray's [...], between a private soldier of the 29th regiment, and an inhabi­tant. The former was supported by his comrades, the latter by the [...]akers, till several on both sides were involved in the consequen­ces. On the fifth a more dreadful scene was presented. The soldiers, [...] under arms, were pressed upon, insulted and pelted by a mob [...] with clubs, sticks▪ and snowballs covering stones. They were [...]red to fire. In this situation, one of the soldiers who had re­ceived a blow, in resentment fired at the supposed aggressor. This [...] followed by a single discharge from six others. Three of the in­ [...]ts were killed, and five were dangerously wounded. The town [...] immediately in commotion. Such was the temper, force, and [...] of the inhabitants, that nothing but an engagement to remove [...] out of the town; together with the advice of moderate [...], prevented the townsmen from falling on the soldiers. The killed [...] buried in one vault, and in a most respectful manner, in order to [...] the indignation of the inhabitants at the slaughter of their breth­ [...] by soldiers quartered among them, in violation of their civil liber­ [...] Capt. Preston, who commanded the party which fired on the inhab­itant, was committed to jail, and afterwards tried. The captain, and fix [...], were acquitted. Two were brought in guilty of man-slaught­ [...] [...] appeared on the trial, that the soldiers were abused, insulted, [...] and pelted, before they fired. It was also proved, that [...] seven guns were fired by the eight prisoners. These circum­ [...] induced the jury to make a favourable verdict. The result of the [...] great honour on John Adams, and Josiah Quincy. Esqs. [Page 276] the council for the prisoners; and also on the integrity of the [...] who ventured to give an upright verdict, in defiance of popular [...] ­ions.

The consequences of this tragical event, sunk deep in the [...] of the people, and were made subservient to important purposes, [...] anniversary of it was observed with great solemnity for 13 years, [...] ­quent orators, were successively employed to deliver an [...] ­tion to preserve the remembrance of it fresh in their minds. [...] occasions the blessings of liberty—the horrors of slavery—the [...] of a standing army—the rights of the colonies, and a variety of [...] topics, were represented to the public view under their most [...] and alarming forms. These annual orations administered fuel [...] fire of liberty, and kept it burning, with an incessant flame. *

In 1773, the spirit of the Americans broke out into open vi [...]. The Gaspee, and armed schooner belonging to his Britannic [...], had been stationed at Providence, in Rhode Island, to prevent [...] ­gling. The vigilance of the commander irritated the inhabitants that degree, that about two hundred armed men entered the [...] night, compelled the officers and men to go ashore, and set fire [...] schooner. A reward of five hundred pounds, [...]ered by gover [...] for apprehending any of the persons concerned in this daring of produced no effectual discovery.

About this time, the discovery and publication of some private, con­fidential letters, written by the royal officers in Boston, to person in office in England, served to confirm the apprehensions of the A [...] ­cans, with respect to the designs of the British government. It was now made obvious that more effectual measures would be taken es­tablish the supremacy of the British Parliament over the [...]. The letters recommended decisive measures, and the writ [...] [...] charged, by the exasperated Americans, with betraying their trust and the people they governed.

As the resolutions of the colonies not to import or confirms [...] had, in a great measure, deprived the English government of a [...] ­ue from this quarter, the parliament formed a scheme of introducing tea into America, under cover of the East India Company. For by purpose an act was passed, enabling the company to export all [...] teas, duty free, to any place whatever. The company departed [...] their usual mode of doing business and became their own exp [...]. Several ships were freighted with teas, and sent to the American colonies, and factors were appointed to receive and dispose of their cargoes.

The Americans, determined to oppose the revenue system of the English parliament in every possible shape, considered the attempt of the East India Company to evade the resolutions of the colonies and dispose of teas in America, as an indirect mode of taxation, sa [...] ­ed by the authority of parliament. The people assembled in [...] places, and in the large commercial towns, took measures to [...] the landing of the teas. Committees were appointed, and armed [...] extensive powers to inspect merchants books, to propose [...] make use of other expedients to frustrate the designs of the [...] India company. The same spirit prev [...]ded the people from [...] Hampshire to Georgia. In some places, the consignees of the [...] were intimidated so far as to relinquish their appointments, [...] to enter into engagements not to act in that capacity. The cargo [...] [Page 277] south Carolina was stored, the consignees being restrained from offering the tea for sale. In other provinces, the ships returned back without discharging their cargoes.

It was otherwise in Massachusetts. The tea ships designed for the [...] of Boston, were consigned to the son, cousins and particular [...] of governour Hutchinson. When they were called upon to [...] they answered, "That is was out of their power." Then col­ [...] [...] to give a clearance, unless the vessels were discharged [...] articles. The governour refused to give a pass for the ves­sels unless properly qualified from the custom-house. The govern­ [...] likewise requested Admiral Montague to guard the passages out of the harbour and gave orders to suffer no vessels, coasters excepted, to pass the fortress, from the town, without a pass signed by himself. From a combination of these circumstances, the return of the sea ves­sels from Boston, was rendered impossible. The inhabitants then, had [...]hernative, but to prevent the landing of the tea, or to suffer it to be [...], and depend on the unanimity of the people not to purchase it, on [...] destroy the tea, or to suffer a deep laid scheme against their [...] liberties to take effect. The first would have required in­ [...] watching by night, as well as by day, for a period of time, the duration of which no one could compute. The second would have been visionary to childishness, by suspending the liberties of a gearing country, on the self denial and discretion of every sea drink­ [...] the province. They viewed the tea as a vehicle of an uncon­ [...]onal tax, and is inseparably associated with it. To avoid the one them resolved to destroy the other. About seventeen persons, dressed as Indians, repaired to the tea ships, brook open 342 chests of tea, and without doing any other damage, discharged their contents into the [...] *

[...] sooner did the news of this destruction of the tea reach Great [...] than the parliament determined to punish that devoted town. On the king's laying the American papers before them, a bill was [...] in and passed, to "discontinue the landing and discharging, lading and shipping of goods, wares and merchandizes at the town of Boston, or within the harbour."

This act, passed March 25, 1774, and called The Boston Port Bill, [...] the inhabitants into the greatest consternation. The town of Boston passed a resolution, expressing their sense of this oppressive measure, and a desire that all the colonies would concur to stop all importations from Great Britain. Most of the colonies entered into sp [...]ited resolutions, on this occasion, to unite with Massachusetts in a [...] opposition to the unconstitutional measures of the parliament. The first of June, the day on which the Port Bill was to take place, was appointed to be kept as a day of humiliation, fasting and prayer throughout the colonies, to seek the divine direction and aid, in that [...] and gloomy juncture of affairs.

[...]ought here to be observed, that this rational and pious custom of [...] fasts in times of distress and impending danger and of cel­ [...] days of public thanks giving, after having received special tok [...] divine favour, has ever prevailed in New England since its first [...], and in some parts of other states. These public supplica­tions and acknowledgements to heaven, at the commencement of hos­tilities, [Page 278] and during the whole progress of the war, were more [...] than usual, and were attended with uncommon servour and [...]. They were considered by the people, as an humble appeal [...] for the justness of their cause, and designed to manifest their [...] [...] ­ence on the GOD OR HOSTS for aid and success in maintainable [...] ­gainst their hostile brethren. The prayers and public disc [...] the Clergy, who were friends to their suffering country, ( [...] [...] were very few who were not) breathed the spirit of patri [...] [...] as their piety and integrity had generally secured to th [...] [...] [...] ­dence of the people, they had great influence and success in [...] aging them to engage in its defence. In this way, that cl [...] of [...] aided the cause of their country; and to their pious [...] [...] the GREAT ARBITER of human affairs, has been justly [...] inconsiderable share of the success and victory that crowned the Amer­ican arms.

During the height of the consternation and confusion which Boston Bort Bill occasioned, and at the very time when a town [...] ­ing was sitting to consider of it, General Gage, who had been [...] [...] ­ed to the government of Massachusetts, arrived in the harbour. [...] arrival, however, did not allay the popular ferment, or check th [...] [...] ­gress of the measures then taking, to unite the colonies in opposition to the oppressive acts of parliament. He was received with all the honours, usual on such occasions.

But the port bill was not the only act that alarmed the app [...] [...] ­sions of the Americans. Determined to compel the province of Mas­sachusetts to submit to their laws, parliament passed an act for [...] better regulating government in the province of Massachusetts [...]. The object of this act was to alter the government, as it stood [...] charter of king William; and to make the judges and sheriffs [...] [...] ­dent on the king, and removeable at his will and pleasure.

The act was soon followed by another, which ordained th [...] person, indicted for murder, or other capital offence committed [...] ­ing the magistrates in executing the laws, might be sent by the governour, either to any other colony, or to Great Britain, [...] ­trial.

This was soon followed by the Quebec Bill; which extend [...] bounds of that province, and granted many privileges to the [...] Catholics. The object of this bill was, to secure the attachment of that province to the crown of England, and prevent its joining the colonies in their resistance of the laws of parliament.

But these measures did not intimidate the Americans. On the [...] hand, they served to confirm their former apprehensions of that [...] designs of government, and to unite the colonies in their oppo [...]. A correspondence of opinion with respect to the unconstitutional of parliament, produced a uniformity of proceedings in the [...]. The people generally concurred in a proposition for holding [...] Con­gress, by deputation from the several colonies, in order to [...] measures for the preservation of their rights. Deputies were [...] ­ingly appointed, and met at Philadelphia, on the 26th of [...] 1774.

In this first congress, the proceedings were cool, deliberate [...] ­al; but marked with unanimity and firmness. Their first [...] declaration, or state of their claims as to the enjoyment of all [...] of British subjects, and particularly that of taxing themselves [...] [Page 279] [...]ly, and of regulating the internal police of the colonies. They also drew up a petition to the king, complaining of their grievances, and [...]ying for a repeal of the unconstitutional and oppressive acts of p [...]ent. They signed an association to suspend the importation of British goods, and the exportation of American produce, until their [...] should be redressed. They sent an address to the inhabitants of Great Britain, and another to the people of America; in the for­ [...] of which they enumerated the oppressive steps of parliament, and called on their British brethren not to aid the ministry in enslaving their American subjects; and in the latter, they endeavoured to con­ [...] the people in a spirited and unanimous determination to defend their constitutional rights.

In the mean time every thing in Massachusetts wore the appearance of opposition by force. A new council for the governour, had been appointed by the crown. New Judges were appointed and attempted to proceed in the execution of their office. But the juries refused to be [...] under them. In some counties, the people assembled to pre­vent the courts from proceeding to business; and in Berkshire they [...]ded, setting an example of resistance that has since been follow­ed in violation of the laws of the state.

In this situation of affairs, the day for the annual muster of the [...] approached. General Gage, apprehensive of some violence, had the precaution to seize the magazines of ammunition and stores at Cambridge and Charlestown, and lodged them in Boston. This mea­ [...] with the fortifying of the neck of land which joins Boston to the main land at Roxbury, caused a universal alarm and ferment.

On this occasion, an assembly of delegates from all the towns in [...]olk county, was called; and several spirited resolutions were a­ [...] [...]o. These resolutions were prefaced with a declaration of alle­giance; but they breathed a spirit of freedom that does honor to the [...]gates. They declared that the late acts of parliament, and the proceedings of General Gage, were glaring infractions of their rights and liberties, which their duty called them to defend by all lawful means.

This assembly remonstrated against the fortification of Boston Neck, and against the Quebec bill; and resolved upon a suspension of com­merce, an encouragement of arts and manufactures, the holding of a provincial congress, and a submission to the measures which should be recommended by the continental congress. They recommended that the collectors of taxes should not pay any money into the treasury▪ without further orders; they also recommended peace and good order, a [...] they meant to act merely upon the defensive.

In answer to their remonstrance, General Gage assured them that [...] had no intention to prevent the free egress and regress of the in­habitants to and from the town of Boston, and that he would not suf­fer any person under his command to injure the person or property of any of his majesty's subjects.

[...]vious to this, a general assembly had been summoned by the [...] to meet at S [...]lem; and notwithstanding the writs had been [...]ermanded by the governour's proclamation, on account of the vi­ [...] of the times, and the resignation of several of the new coun­ [...], yet in defiance of the proclamation, 90 of the newly elected▪ members met at the time and place appointed; and soon after resolved themselves into a Provincial Congress and adjourned to Concord, 19 [Page 280] miles from Boston, and after choosing Mr. Hancock president, pro­ceeded to business.

This congress addressed the governour with a rehearsal of their dis­tresses, and took the necessary steps for defending their rights. They regulated the militia, made provision for supplying the treasury, and furnishing the people with arms; and such was the enthusiasm and union of the people, that the recommendations of the provincial con­gress had the force of laws.

General Gage was incensed at these measures. He declared in [...] answer to the address, that Britain could never harbour the black [...] ­sign of enslaving her subjects, and published a proclamation, in which he insinuated that such proceedings amounted to rebellion. He [...] ordered barracks to be erected for the soldiers; but he found differently in procuring labourers, either in Boston or New York.

In the beginning of 1775, the fishery bills were passed in parliament, by which the colonies were prohibited to trade with Great Britain, Ireland or the West Indies, or to take fish on the banks of Newfoundland.

In the distresses to which these acts of parliament reduced the [...] of Boston, the unanimity of the colonies was remarkable, in the large supplies of provision furnished by the inhabitants of different [...], from New Hampshire to Georgia, and shipped to the relief of the suf­ferers.

Preparations began to be made, to oppose by force, the execution of these acts of parliament. The militia of the country were trained [...] the use of arms—great encouragement was given for the manufacture of gunpowder, and measures were taken to obtain all kinds of [...] stores.

In February, Colonel Leflie was sent with a detachment of [...] from Boston, to take possession of some cannon at Salem. But the people had intelligence of the design—took up the draw bridge in that town, and prevented the troops from passing, until the [...] wore secured; so that the expedition failed.

Provisions and military stores were also collected and stored in different places, particularly at Concord. General Gage, though zealous for his royal master's interest, discovered a prevailing [...] after a peaceable accommodation. He wished to prevent hostilities, by depriving the inhabitants of the means necessary for carrying them on. With this view, * he determined [...] destroy the stores which he knew were collected for the support of a provincial army; and wishing to accomplish this without bloodshed, he took every precaution to effect it by surprise, and without alarming the country. At eleven o'clock at night 800 grenadiers and light infantry, the flower of the royal army, embarked at the Common, landed at Leechmore's Point and marched for Concord, under the command of lieutenant colonel Smith. Neither the secrecy with which this expedition was planned—the privacy [...] which the troops marched out, nor an order that no inhabitants should leave Boston, were sufficient to prevent intelligence from ly­ing sent to the country militia▪ of what was going on. About [...] in the morning, 130 of the Lexington militia had assembled to oppose them, but the air being chilly, and intelligence respecting the [...] uncertain, they were dismissed, with orders to appear again at the [Page 281] [...]ent of drum. They collected a second time, to the number of 70, between 4 and 5 o'clock in the morning, and the British regulars soon after made their appearance. Major Pitcairn, who led the ad­vanced corps, rode up to them and called out, "Disperse you rebels, th [...]w down your arms and disperse." They still continued in a body, on which he advanced nearer—discharged his pistol—and ordered his soldiers to fire. A dispersion of the militia was the consequence, but the firing of the regulars was nevertheless continued. Individuals find­ing they were fired upon, though dispersing, returned the fire. Three or four of the militia were killed on the green. A few more were shot after they had begun to disperse. The royal detachment proceeded on to Concord, and executed their commission. They disabled two 24 pounders—throw 500lb of ball into rivers and wells, and broke in pieces about 60 barrels of flour. Mr. John Buterick, major of a minute regiment, [...] knowing what had passed at Lexington, ordered his men not to [...] the first fire, that they might not be the aggressors. Upon his ap­pe [...]ching near the regulars, they fired, and killed captain Isaac Davis, and one private of the provincial minute men. The fire was re­turned, and a skirmish ensued. The king's troops having done their business, began their retreat towards Boston. This was conducted with expedition, for the adjacent inhabitants had assembled in arms and began to attack them in every direction. In their return to Lex­ington they were exceedingly annoyed, both by those who pressed on their rear, and others who poured in from all sides, firing from behind [...] walls, and such like coverts, which supplied the place of lines and redoubts. At Lexington the regulars were joined by a detach­ment of 900 men under lord Piercy, which had been sent out by general Gage to support lieutenant colonel Smith. This reinforce­ment, having two pieces of cannon, awed the provincials, and kept them at a greater distance; but they continued a constant, though ir­regular and scattering fire, which did great execution. The close fir­ing from behind the walls by good marksmen, put the regular troops in no small confusion, but they nevertheless kept up a brisk retreating [...] on the militia and minute men. A little after sunset the regulars [...]ched Bunkers-hill, worn down with excessive fatigue, having [...] h [...]d that day between thirty and forty miles. On the next day they crossed Charlestown ferry, to Boston.

There never were more than 400 provincials engaged at one time, and often not so many. As some tired and gave out, others came up and took their places. There was scarcely any discipline observed a­mong them. Officers and privates fired when they were ready and saw a royal uniform, without waiting for the word of command. [...] knowledge of the country enabled them to gain opportunities, by crossing fields and fences, and to act as flanking parties against the king's troops, who kept to the main road.

The regulars had 65 killed, 174 wounded, and 24 made prisoners. Of the provincials 49 were killed, and 39 wounded and missing.

Here was spilt the first blood in the late war; a war which severed America from the British empire. Lexington opened the first scene to this great drama, which, in its progress, exhibited the most illustrious characters and events, and closed with a revolution, equally glorious [...] the actors, and important in its consequences to mankind.

This battle roused all America. The Provincial Congress of Massa­chusetts being at this time in session, voted that "An army of 30,000 [Page 282] men be immediately raised; that 13,600 be of their own province, and that a letter and delegate be sent to the several colonies of New Hamp­shire, Connecticut and Rhode Island." The militia collected from all quarters, and Boston, in a few days, was besieged by twenty thousand men. A stop was put to all intercourse between the town and coun­try, and the inhabitants were reduced to great want of provis [...] General Gage promised to let the people depart, if they would de [...] ­er up their arms. The people complied; but when the general had obtained their arms, the perfidious man, [...]refused to lot the people go.

This breach of faith, and the consequences that attended it, were justly and greatly complained of; and although many, at dif [...] times, were permitted to leave the town, they were obliged to heart all their effects behind; so that many who had been used to live i [...] case and affluence, were at once reduced to extreme indigence and misery. A circumstance peculiarly and wantonly aggravating, and which was the ground of the bitterest complaints of congress, was, that passports were granted and retained in such a manner, as that families were broken▪ and the dearest connections separated; part being com­pelled to quit the town, and part cruelly retained against their incli­nation.

About the latter end of May a great part of the reinforcements or­dered from Great Britain, arrived at Boston. Three British genera [...] Howe, Burgoyne and Clinton, whose behaviour in the preceding war had gained them great reputation, also arrived about the same time. General Gage, thus reinforced, prepared for acting with more deci [...], but before he proceeded to extremities, he conceived it due to ancient forms to issue a proclamation, holding forth to the inhabitants the alter­native of peace or war. He therefore offered pardon in the king's name, to all who should forthwith lay down their arms, and return to their respective occupations and peaceable duties, excepting only from the benefit of that pardon "Samuel Adams, and John Hancock," who [...] offences were said to be "of too flagitious a nature to admit of any oth­er consideration than that of condign punishment." He also pro­claimed, that not only the persons above named and excepted, but also all their adherents, associates and correspondents, should be deemed guilty of treason and rebellion, and treated accordingly. By this pro­clamation it was also declared "that as the courts of judicature were shut, martial law should take place, till a due course of justice should be re-established." It was supposed that this proclamation was a pre­lude to hostilities, and preparations were accordingly made by the A­mericans. The heights of Charlestown, were so situated as to make the possession of them a matter of great consequence, to either of the contending parties. Orders were therefore issued, June 16th, by the provincial commanders, that a detachment of a thousand men should intrench upon Breed's-hill. * Here the Americans, between midnight and morning, with uncommon expedition and silence, threw up a small redoubt, which the British did not discover till the morning of the 17th, when they began an incessant firing and continued it till afternoon. With the intrepidity of veteran soldiers the Americans bore this [...], and proceeded to finish their redoubt, and to throw up a breast-work, extending eastward of it to the bottom of the hill. About noon gen­eral Gage detached Major General Howe, and brigadier general [...] ­got, with the flower of his army, in two detachments, amounting in the whole to nearly 3000 men.—They landed at a point about 150 or [Page 283] 200 rods S. E. of the redoubt, and deliberately prepared for the attack. While the troops, who first landed, were waiting for a reinforcement, the Americans on the left wing, towards Mystic river, for their securi­ty, pulled up some adjoining post and rail fence, and set it down in two parallel lines, near each other, and filled the space between with hay, which the day before was mowed and remained in the adjacent field. The British troops, in the mean time, formed in two lines, and about [...]o'clock, advanced slowly towards the Americans. The hills and [...]ples in Boston, and the circumjacent country, were crowded with [...] spectators of the dubious conflict. While some felt for the honour of British troops, multitudes, with a keener sensibility, felt for the liberties of a great and growing country. The attack com­men [...]d on the part of the British troops. The Americans had the precaution to reserve their fire, till their enemies had approached within 10 or 12 rods of their works. They then began a well directed and furious discharge of small arms, which mowed down their enemies in ranks, and occasioned a disorderly and precipitate retreat. Their [...] rallied them with difficulty, and pushed them forward with their swords, to a second attack. They were, in the same manner put [...] slight a second time. With still greater difficulty they were forced by General Howe, to a third attack. By this time the powder of the Americans began to fail, and their redoubt was attacked on two sides. Under these circumstances, a retreat was ordered; the left wing of the Americans, N. E. of the redoubt, still continuing their fire, igno­rant of what had taken place on the right, till the British had nearly surrounded them. The retreat was effected, with an inconsiderable [...], considering the greater part of the distance they had to pass was completely exposed to the incessant fire of the Glasgow man of war and two floating batteries.

During the heat of this bloody action, by order of General Gage, Charlestown was [...]et on fire, by a battery on Cop [...]-Hill, in Boston, and a party from the Somerset man of war, lying in Charles river, and nearly 400 houses, including [...]ix public buildings, were consumed, with their furniture, &c. valued by 19 men, under oath, at £ [...]6,900, specie; and 2000 persons reduced from affluence and mediocrity, to [...] most aggravated poverty and exile. *

The number of Americans engaged in this memorable action, a­mounted to 1500 only. There have been few battles in modern wars in which, all circumstances considered, there was a greater slaughter of men than in this short engagement. The loss of the British, as acknowledged by General Gage, amounted to 1054 men. Nineteen commissioned officers were killed and 70 wounded. The loss of the Americans was 77 killed—278 wounded and missing.

The death of Major General Warren, who four days before had received his commission, and who, having had no command assigned him, sought this day as a volunteer, was particularly and greatly la­mented. "To the purest patriotism, and the most undaunted bravery, [...]e added the virtues of domestic life, the eloquence of an accomplish­ed orator, and the wisdom of an able statesman."

[Page 284] About this time a scheme was laid by a number of gentlemen in Connecticut, to take possession of Ticonder [...]ga, where a great quanti­ty of military stores were lodged, and which is the key to Canada. Having made the necessary preparations, and collected 270 men, chief­ly Green Mountain [...]oy [...], they rendezvoused at Castleton, where they [...] joined by Col. Allen, and shortly after by Col. Arnold from Cambridge, under commission from the Provincial Congress. Col. Allen command­ed this volunteer party. Having arrived at Lake Champlain, opposite Ticonderoga, in the night, Cols. Allen and Arnold, with 83 men, cross­ed over, and at the dawn of day entered the fort, without resistance, and called upon the commander, who was in bed, to surrender the [...]. He asked by what authority? Col. Allen replied—I demand it i [...] the name of the Great Jehovah and of the Continental Congress."—Thus the fort was captured, with its valuable stores and 43 prisoners. Crown Point was taken at the same time, by Col. Warren, and pos­session obtained of all Lake Champlain, in the course of a few days, by a few determined man.

On the 15th of June, two days before the memorable battle on Breeds Hill, the Continental Congress unanimously appointed George Washington, Esq *; a native o [...] Virginia, to the chief command of [Page 285] the American army. This gentleman had been a distinguished and suc­cessful officer in the preceding war, and seemed destined by heaven to be the saviour of his country. He accepted the appointment with a diffidence which was a proof of his modesty, his prudence and his greatness; and by his matchless skill, fortitude and perseverance, con­ducted America through indescribable difficulties, to independence and peace.

General Washington, with other officers appointed by congress, arrived at Cambridge, and took command of the American army in July. From this time, the affairs of America began to assume the ap­pearance of a regular and general opposition to the forces of Great Britain.

In Autumn, a body of troops, under the command of General Montgomery, besieged and took the garrison at St. John's, which commands the entrance into Canada. The prisoners amounted to [Page 286] about seven hundred. General Montgomery pursued his success, and took Montreal; and designed to push his victories to Quebec.

A body of troops, commanded by General Arnold, was ordered to march to Canada, by the river Kennebek, and through the wilderness. After suffering every hardship, and the most distressing hunger, they arrived in Canada, and were joined by General Montgomery, before Quebec. This city, which was commanded by Governor Carle [...], was immediately besieged. But there being little hope of taking the town by a siege, it was determined to storm it.

The garrison of Quebec, at this time, consisted of about 1520 m [...]n, of which 800 were militia. The American army consisted of [...] men. General Montgomery having divided his little army into [...] detachments, ordered two feints to be made against the upper town, one by Colonel Livingston, at the head of the Canadians, against St. John's Gate; the other by Major Brown against Cape Diamond; [...] ­serving to himself and Col. Arnold, the two principal attacks against the lower town. At 5 oclock in the morning, General Montgomery advanced against the lower town. He passed the first barrier, and was just opening to attack the second, when he was killed, together with his Aid-de-camp, Capt. M [...]Pherson. This so dispirited the men, that Col. Campbell, on whom the command devolved, thought proper to draw them off. In the mean time Col. Arnold, with 350 men, made a successful attack on another part of the town. In the attack of the first battery Col. Arnold was wounded, and was obliged to be carried off the field of battle. His party, however, commanded by Capt. Morgan of Virginia, proceeded, and entered the town; but not be­ing joined by the other parties, was obliged to surrender to superior force.

The loss of the Americans in killed and wounded▪ was about [...] and 300 were taken prisoners. Historians will do justice to the bra [...] ­ry of the Provincial troops on this occasion.

After the defeat, Col. Arnold, who now commanded the troops, continued some months before Quebec, although his troops were reduced in numbers, and suffered incredibly from cold and sick­ness.

The death of General Montgomery was greatly and sincerely regret­ted on both sides. "His many amiable qualities had procured him an uncommon share of private affection, and his great abilities, an equal proportion of public esteem. His name was mentioned in par­liament with singular respect. The Minister himself acknowledged his worth, while he reprobated the cause in which he fell. He con­cluded an involuntary panegyric, by saying, "Curse on his virtues, they have undone his country." *

[Page 287] About this time, the large and flourishing town of Norfolk in Vir­ginia, was wantonly burnt by order of lord Dunmore, the then royal governour of that province.

General Gage went to England in September, and was succeeded in the command, by General Howe.

Falmouth, a considerable town in the province of Main in Massa­chusetts, shared the fate of Norfolk; being laid in ashes by order of the British admiral.

The British king entered into treaties with some of the German Prin­ces for about fourteen thousand men, who were to be sent to America the next year, to assist in subduing the colonies. The parliament also passed an act, forbidding all intercourse with America; and while they repealed the Boston port and fishery bills, they declared all American property on the high seas, forfeited to the captors.

Measures were taken to annoy the enemy in Boston. For this pur­pose, batteries were opened on several hills, from whence shot and bombs were thrown into the town. But the batteries which were open­ed on Dorchester point had the best effect, and soon obliged General Howe to abandon the town. In March 1776 the British troops em­barked for Halifax, and General Washington entered Boston in tri­umph.

In the ensuing summer, a small squadron of ships commanded by Six Peter Parker, and a body of troops under the Generals Clinton and Cornwallis, attempted to take Charleston, the capital of South Carolina. The ships made a violent attack upon the fort on Sullivan's Island, but were repulsed with great loss, and the expedition was aban­doned.

In July, Congress published their declaration of independence, which separated America from Great Britain. This great event took place two hundred and eighty four years after the the discovery of A­merica by Columbus—one hundred and sixty six, from the first effect­ual settlement in Virginia, and one hundred and fifty six from the first settlement of Plymouth in Massachusetts, which were the earliest Eng­lish settlements in America.

Just after this declaration, General Howe, with a powerful force, arrived near New York; and landed his troops on Staten Island. General Washington was in New-York with about thirteen thousand men, who were encamped either in the city or the neighbouring forti­fications.

The operations of the British began by the action on Long Island, in the month of August. The American Generals Sullivan and Lord Sterling, with a large body of men, were made prisoners. The night after the engagement, a retreat was ordered and executed with such silence, that the Americans left the island without alarming their ene­mies, and without loss.

In September, the city of New York was abandoned by the Amer­ican army, and taken by the British.

In November, Fort Washington on York Island was taken, and more than two thousand Americans made prisoners. Fort Lee▪ oppo­site to Fort Washington, on the Jersey shore, was soon after taken, but the garrison escaped.

About the same time, General Clinton was sent with a body of troops to take possession of Rhode Island; and succeeded. In addition to all these losses and defeats, the American army suffered [Page 288] by desertion, and more by sickness, which was epidemic, and very mortal.

The northern army at Ticonderoga, was in a disagreeable situation, particularly▪ after the battle on Lake Champlain, in which the Amer­ican force, consisting of a few l [...]ght vessels, under the command of gen­erals Arnold and Waterbury, was totally dispersed. But General Carleton, instead of pursuing his victory, landed at Crown Point, [...] ­connoitered our posts at Ticonderoga and Mount Independence, and returned to winter quarters in Canada.

The American army might now be said to be no more. All that now remained of an army, which at the opening of the campaign, a­mounted to at least twenty five thousand men, did not now exceed [...] thousand. The term of their engagements being expired, they return­ed, in large bodies, to their families and friends; the few, who, from personal attachment, local circumstances, or superior perseverance and bravery, continued with the Generals Washington and Lee, were [...] inconsiderable to appear formidable in the view of a powerful and victorious enemy.

In this alarming and critical situation of affairs, General Lee, through an imprudent carelessness, which ill became a man in his im­portant station, was captured by a party of British light horse▪ com­manded by Col. Harcourt. This unfortunate circumstance gave a se­vere shock to the remaining hopes of the little army, and rendered their situation truly distressing.

While these things were transacting in New Jersey, General Wash­ington, far from being discouraged by the loss of General Lee, and always ready to improve every advantage to raise the drooping spirits of his handful of men, had made a stand on the Pennsylvania side of the Delaware. He collected his scattered forces, called in the assistance of the Pennsylvania militia, and on the night of the 25th of December (1776) when the enemy were lulled into security by the idea of his weakness, and by the inclemency of the night, which was re­markably boisterous, as well as by the fumes of a Christmas eve, [...]e crossed the river, and at the breaking of day, marched down to T [...] ­ton, and so completely surprised them, that the greater part of the de­tachment which were stationed at this place, surrendered after a short resistance. The horsemen and a few others made their escape at the opposite end of the town. Upwards of nine hundred Hessians were taken prisoners at this time.

The address in planning and executing this enterprize, reflected the highest honour on the commander, and the success revived the des­ponding hopes of America. The loss of General Mercer, a gallant officer, at Princeton, was the principal circumstance that allayed the joys of victory.

The following year, 1777, was distinguished by very memorable e­vents, infavour of America. On the opening of the campaign, govern­our Tryon was sent with a body of troops to destroy the stores at D [...] ­bury in Connecticut. This plan was executed, and the town mostly burnt. The enemy suffered in their retreat, and the American▪ lost General Wooster, a brave and experienced officer.

General Prescot was taken from his quarters, on Rhode Island, by the address and enterprize of Col. Barton, and conveyed prisoner to the continent.

[Page 289] General Burgoyne, who commanded the northern British army, took possession of Ticonderoga, which had been abandoned by the Americans. He pushed his successes, crossed Lake George, and en­camped upon the banks of the Hudson, near Saratoga. His progress however was checked, by the defeat of Col. Baum, near Bennington, in which the undisciplined militia, under General Stark, displayed un­exampled bravery, and captured almost the whole detachment. The militia assembled from all parts of New England, to stop the progress of General Burgoyne.

These, with the regular troops, formed a respectable army, commanded by General Gates. After two severe actions, in which the Generals Lincoln and Arnold, behaved with uncommon gallantry, and were wounded, General Burgoyne found himself enclosed with brave troops, and was forced to surrender his whole army, amounting to five thou­sand seven hundred and fifty-two men, into the hands of the Ameri­cans. * This memorable event happened on the 17th of October, 1777: and diffused an universal joy over America, and laid a foundation for the treaty with France.

But before these transactions, the main body of the British forces had embarked at New York, sailed up the Chesapeek, and landed at the head of Elk river. The army soon began their march for Phila­delphia. General Washington had determined to oppose them, and for this purpose made a stand, first at Red Clay Creek, and then upon the heights, near Brandy wine Creek. Here the armies engaged, and the Americans were overpowered, and suffered great loss. The ene­my soon pursued their march, and took possession of Philadelphia, to­wards the close of September.

Not long after, the two armies were again engaged at Germantown, and in the beginning of the action, the Americans had the advantage; but by some unlucky accident. The fortune of the day was turned in favour of the British. Both sides suffered considerable losses; on the side of the Americans, was General Nash.

In an attack upon the forts at Mud-Island and Red Bank, the Hes­sians were unsuccessful, and their commander, Col. Donop, killed. The British also lost the Augusta, a ship of the line. But the forts were afterwards taken, and the navigation of the Delaware opened. General Washington was reinforced, with a part of the troops, which had composed the northern army, under General Gates; and both ar­mies retired to winter quarters.

In October, the same month in which General Burgoyne was taken at Saratoga, General Vaughan, with a small fleet, sailed up Hudson's river, and wantonly burnt Kingston, a beautiful Dutch settlement, on the west side of the river.

The beginning of the next year, 1778, was distinguished by a treaty of alliance between France and America; by which we obtained a powerful and generous ally. When the English ministry were in­formed that this treaty was on foot, they dispatched commissioners to America, to attempt a reconciliation. But America would not now accept their offers. Early in the spring, Count de Estaing, with a fleet of fifteen sail of the line, was sent by the court of France to assist America.

General Howe left the army, and returned to England; the com­mand then devolved upon Sir Henry Clinton.

[Page 290] In June the British army left Philadelphia, and marched for New York. On their march they were annoyed by the Americans; and at Monmouth, a very regular action took place, between part of the armies; the enemy were repulsed with great loss. General Lee, for his misconduct that day, was suspended, and was never after­wards permitted to join the army.

General Lee's conduct, at several times before this, had been very suspicious. In December 1776, he lay at Chatham, about eleven miles from Elizabeth Town, with a brigade of troops, when a great quan­tity of baggage was stored at Elizabeth Town, under a guard of only five hundred Hessians. General Lee was apprised of this, and might have surprised the guard and taken the baggage. But he neglected the op­portunity, and after several marches and counter marches between Troy, Chatham and Morris Town, he took up his quarters at, or near White's tavern, where he was surprised and taken prisoner by a party of the British horse. He was heard to say repeatedly, that General Washington would ruin a fine army. It was suspected that he had designs to supplant the General, and his friends attempted to place him at the head of the army. General Washington's prudent delays, and cautious movements, afforded General Lee's friends many opportuni­ties to spread reports unfavourable to his character. It was insinuat­ed, with some success, that General Washington wanted courage and abilities. Reports of this kind, at one time, rendered General Lee very popular, and it is supposed he wished to frustrate rate General Washing­ton's plans, in order to increase the suspicions already entertained of his generalship, and turn the public clamour in his own favour. His conduct at Monmouth, was, by some, supposed to have proceeded from such a design; for he commanded the flower of the Ameri­can army, and was not destitute of courage.

In August, General Sullivan, with a large body of troops, attempted to take possession of Rhode Island, but did not succeed. Soon after, the stores and shipping at Bedford in Massachusetts, were burnt by a party of the British troops. The same year, Savannah, the capital of Georgia, was taken by the British, under the command of Colonel Campbell.

In the following year (1779) General Lincoln was appointed to the command of the southern army.

Governour Tryon and Sir George Collier made an incursion into Connecticut, and burnt, with wanton barbarity, the towns of Fairfield and Norwask. But the American arms were crowned with success, in a bold attack upon Stoney Point, which was sur­prized and taken by the brave General Wayne, in the night of the 15th of July. Five hundred men were made prisoners, with little loss on either side.

A party of British forces attempted this summer, to build a fort on Penobscot river, for the purpose of cutting timber in the neigh­bouring forest. A plan was laid in Massachusetts to dislodge them and a considerable fleet collected for the purpose. But the plan [...]ail­ed of success, and the whole marine force fell into the hands of the British, except some vessels which were burnt by the Americans them­selves.

In October, General Lincoln and Count de Estaing made an assault upon Savannah; but they were repulsed with considerable loss. In [Page 291] this action, the celebrated Polish Count Pulaski, who had acquired the reputation of a brave soldier, was mortally wounded.

In this summer, General Sullivan marched with a body of troops, into the Indian country, in the western part of New York State, and burnt and destroyed all their provisions and settlements that fell in their way.

On the opening of the campaign, the next year, (1780) the British troops left Rhode Island. All expedition under General Clinton and Lord Cornwallis, was undertaken against Charleston, South Carolina, where General Lincoln commanded. This town, after a close siege of about six weeks, was surrendered to the British commander; and General Lincoln, and the whole American garrison, were made prisoners.

General Gates was appointed to the command in the southern de­partment, and another army collected. In August, Lord Cornwallis attacked the American troops at Camden, in South Carolina, and rout­ed them with considerable loss. He afterwards marched through the southern states, and supposed them entirely subdued.

The same summer, the British troops made frequent incursions from New York into the Jersies; ravaging and plundering the country.

In July, a French fleet, under Monsieur d'Ternay, with a body of land forces, commanded by Count de Rochambeau, arrived at Rhode­Island, to the great joy of the Americans.

This year was also distinguished by the infamous treason of Gen­eral Arnold. General Washington having some business to transact at Weathersfield in Connecticut, left Arnold to command the impor­tant post of West Point; which guards a pass in Hudson's river, about sixty miles from New York. Arnold's conduct in the city of Philadelphia, the preceding winter, had been censured; and the treatment he received in consequence, had given him offence.

He determined to take revenge; and for this purpose, he entered into a negociation with Sir Henry Clinton, to deliver West Point, and the army, into the hands of the British. While General Wash­ington was absent, he dismounted the cannon in some of the forts, and took other steps to render the taking of the post easy for the ene­my.

But by a providential discovery, the whole plan was defeated. Ma­jor Andre, aid to General Clinton, a brave officer, who had been sent up the river as a spy, to concert the plan of operations with Arnold, was taken, condemned by a court martial, and executed. Arnold made his escape, by getting on board the Vulture, a British vessel which lay in the river. His conduct has stamped him with infamy; and like all traitors, he is despised by all mankind. The name of Bene­dict Arnold has become proverbially contemptible. General Wash­ington arrived in camp just after Arnold made his escape, and restor­ed order in the garrison.

After the defeat of General Gates in Carolina, General Greene was appointed to command in the southern department. From this [Page 292] period, things in that quarter wore a more favourable aspect. Colonel Tarleton, the active commander of the British legion, was defeated by General Morgan, the intrepid commander of the riflemen.

After a variety of movements the two armies met at Guilford, in Carolina. Here was one of the best fought actions during the w [...] General Greene and Lord Cornwallis exerted themselves at the head of their respective armies; and although the Americans were obliged to retire from the field, yet the British army suffered an immense loss, and could not pursue the victory. The action happened on the 15th March, 1781.

In the spring, Arnold, the traitor, who was made a Brigadier Gen­eral in the British service, with a small number of troops, sailed for Virginia, and plundered the country. This called the attention of the French fleet to that quarter, and a naval engagement took place be­tween the English and French, in which some of the English ships were much damaged, and one entirely disabled.

After the battle of Guilford, General Greene moved towards South Carolina, to drive the British from their posts in that state. Here Lord Rawdon obtained an inconsiderable advantage over the Ameri­cans near Camden. But General Greene more than recovered this disadvantage, by the brilliant and successful action at the Eutaw Springs; where General Marian distinguished himself, and the brave Col. Washington was wounded and taken prisoner.

Lord Cornwallis, finding General Greene successful in Carolina, marched to Virginia collected his forces, and fortified himself in York­town. In the mean time Arnold made an incursion into Connecticut, burnt a part of New London, took Fort Griswold by storm, and put the garrison to the sword. The garrison consisted chiefly of men col­lected from the little town of Groton, which, by the savage cruelty of the British officer who commanded the attack, lost, in one hour, al­most all its heads of families. The brave Col. Ledyard, who com­manded the fort, was slain with his own sword after he had surrender­ed.

The Marquis de la Fayette, * the brave and generous nobleman, [Page 293] whose services command the gratitude of every American, had been dispatched with about two thousand light infantry, from the main ar­my, to watch the motions of Lord Cornwallis in Virginia. He prose­cuted this expedition with the greatest military ability. Although his force was much inferior to that of the enemy he obliged them to leave Richmond and Williamsburgh, and to seek protection under their shipping.

About the last of August, Count de Grasse arrived in the Chesapeek and blocked up the British troops at Yorktown. Admiral Greaves, with a British fleet, appeared off the Capes, and an action succeeded; but it was not decisive.

General Washington had before this time moved the main body of his army, together with the French troops, to the southward; and as soon as he heard of the arrival of the French fleet in the Chesaspeek, he made rapid marches to the head of Elk, where embarking, the troops soon arrived at Yorktown.

A close siege immediately commenced, and was carried on with such vigour, by the combined forces of America and France, that lord Cornwallis was obliged to surrender. This glorious event, which took place on the 19th of October, 1781, decided the contest in favour of America; and laid the foundation of a general peace.

A few months after the surrender of Cornwallis, the British evac­uated all their posts in South Carolina and Georgia and retired to the main army in New York.

The next spring (1782) Sir Guy Carleton arrived in New York, and took the command of the British army in America. Immediate­ly on his arrival, he acquainted General Washington and Congress, that negociations for peace had commenced at Paris.

[Page 294] On the 30th of November, 1782, the provisional articles of peace, and reconciliation, between Great Britain and the American States, were signed at Paris; by which Great Britain acknowledged the inde­pendence and sovereignty of the United States of America. These articles were ratified by a definitive treaty, September 3d, 1783. This peace was negociated on the part of Great Britain by David Hartley, Esq: and on the part of the United States by John Adams, John Jay, and Benjamin Franklin, * Esquires.

[Page 295] Thus ended a long and arduous conflict, in which Great Britain ex­pended near an hundred millions of money, with an hundred thousand lives, and won nothing. America endured every cruelty and distress from her enemies; lost many lives and much treasure; but delivered herself from a foreign dominion, and gained a rank among the nations of the earth.

Holland acknowledged the independence of the United States on the 19th of April 1782; Sweden, February 5th 1783; Denmark the 25th of February; Spain, in March, and Russia in July 1783.

No sooner was peace restored by the definitive treaty, and the Brit­ish troops withdrawn from the country, than the United States began to experience the defects of their general government. While an en­emy was in the country, fear, which had first impelled the colonies to associate in mutual defence, continued to operate as a band of politi­cal union. It gave to the resolutions and recommendations of Congress the force of laws, and generally commanded a ready acquiescence on the part of the state legislatures. Articles of confederation and per­petual union had been framed in Congress, and submitted to the con­sideration of the states, in the year 1778. Some of the states imme­diately acceded to them; but others, which had not unappropriated lands, hesitated to subscribe a compact, which would give an advan­tage to the states which possessed large tracts of unlocated lands, and were thus capable of a great superiority in wealth and population. All objections however had been overcome, and by the accession of Maryland in March 1781, the articles of confederation were ratified, as the frame of government for the United States.

These articles however were framed during the rage of war, when a principle of common safety supplied the place of a coercive power in government; by men who could have had no experience in the art of governing an extensive country, and under circumstances the most critical and embarrassing. To have offered to the people, at that time, a system of government armed with the powers necessary to reg­ulate and control the contending interests of thirteen States, and the possessions of millions of people, might have raised a jealousy between the states or in the minds of the people at large, that would have [Page 296] weakened the operations of war, and perhaps have rendered a [...] impracticable▪ Hence the numerous defects of the confederation.

On the conclusion of peace, these defects began to be felt. Each state assumed the right of disputing the propriety of the resolutions of Congress, and the interest of an individual state was placed in oppo­sition to the common interest of the union. In addition to this sour [...] of division, a jealousy of the powers of Congress began to [...]e excited in the minds of people.

The jealousy of the privileges of freemen, had been roused by the oppressive act of the British parliament; and no sooner had the dan­ger from this quarter ceased, than the fears of people changed their object, and were turned against their own rulers.

In this situation, there were not wanting men of industry and tal­ents, who had been enemies to the revolution, and who embraced the opportunity to multiply the apprehensions of people and encrease the popular discontents. A remarkable instance of this happened in Con­necticut. As soon as the tumults of war had subsided, an attempt was made to convince the people, that the act of Congress passed in 1778, granting to the officers of the army, half play for life, was high­ly unjust and tyrannical; and that it was but the first step towards the establishment of pensions and an uncontrolable desp tism. The act of Congress, passed in 1783▪ commuting half pay for life, for five years full pay, was designed to appease the apprehensions of people, and to convince them that this gratuity was intended merely to in­demnify the officers for their losses by the depreciation of the paper currency, and not to establish a precedent for the granting of pensions. This act however did not satisfy the people, who supposed that the of­ficers had been generally indemnified for the loss of their pay, by the grants made them from time to time by the legislatures of the several states. Besides, the act while it gave five years full pay to the offi­cers, allowed but one years pay to the privates: a distinction which had great influence in exciting and continuing the popular ferment▪ and one that turned a large share of the public rage against the offi­cers themselves.

The moment an alarm was raised respecting this act of Congress, them enemies of our independence became active in blowing up the flame, by spreading reports unfavourable to the general government and tending to create public dissentions.—Newspapers, in some parts of the country, were filled with inflammatory publications; while false reports and groundless insinuations were industriously circulated to the prejudice of Congress and the officers of the late army. Among a people feelingly above to every thing that could affect the rights for which they had been contending these reports could not fail of hav­ing a powerful effect; the clamour soon became general; the offi­cers of the army it was believed, had attempted to raise their fortunes on the distresses of their fellow citizens, and Congress become the ty­rants of their country.

Connecticut was the seat of this uneasiness; although other states were much agitated on the occasion. But the inhabitants of that state, accustomed to order and a due subordination to the laws, did not proceed to outrages: they took their usual mode of collecting the sense of the state—assembled in town meetings—appointed committees to meet in convention, and consult what measures should be adopted to procure a redress of their grievances. In this convention, which was [Page 297] held [...] Middletown, some nugatory resolves were passed, expressing the disapprobation of the half pay act, and the subsequent commuta­tion of the grant for five years whole pay. The same spirit also dis­covered itself in the assembly at their October session 1783. A remon­strance against the acts in favour of the officers, was framed in the house of representatives and notwithstanding the upper house refused to concur in the measure, it was sent to congress.

During this situation of affairs, the public odium against the officers, was augmented by another circumstance. The officers, just before the disbanding of the army, had formed a society, called by the name of the Cincinnati, after the Roman Dictator, Cincinnatus.

Whatever were the real views of the framers of this institution, its design was generally understood to be harmless and honorable. The [...] views of the society could not however screen it from popular jealousy. A spirited pamphlet appeared in South Carolina, the avowed production of Mr. Burke, one of the Judges of the supreme court in the state, in which the author attempted to prove that the principles, on which the society was formed, would, in pro­cess of time, originate and establish an order of nobility in this coun­try, which would be repugnant to the genius of our republican gov­ernments and dangerous to liberty. This pamphlet appeared in Con­necticut, during the commotions raised by the half pay and commu­tation acts, and contributed not a little to spread the flame of opposi­tion.

Notwithstanding the discontents of the people were general, and ready to burst forth in sedition, yet men of information, viz. the offi­cers of government, the clergy, and persons of liberal education, were mostly opposed to the unconstitutional steps taken by the committees and convention at Middletown. They supported the propriety of the measures of Congress, both by conversation and writing, proved that such grants to the army were necessary to keep the troops together, and that the expense would not be enormous nor oppressive. During the close of the year 1783, every possible exertion was made to enlignten the people, and such was the effect of the arguments used by the mi­nority, that in the beginning of the following year, the opposition [...], the committees were dismissed, and tranquillity restored to the state. In May, the legislature were able to carry several measures which had before been extremely unpopular. An act was passed granting the impost of five per cent▪ to Congress; another giving great encouragement to commerce; and several towns were incor­porated with extensive privileges, for the purpose of regulating the ex­ports of the state, and facilitating the collection of debts.

The opposition to the congressional acts in favour of the officers, and to the order of the Cincinnati, did not rise to the same pitch in the other states as in Connecticut; yet it produced much disturbance i [...] Massachusetts, and some others. Jealousy of power had been uni­versally spread among the people of the United States. The destruc­tion of the old forms of governments, and the licentiousness of war, had, in a great measure, broken their habits of obedience; their pas­sions had been inflamed by the cry of despotism; and like centinels, [...] have been suddenly surprized by the approach of an enemy, the [...] of a leaf was sufficient to give them an alarm. This spirit of jealousy, operated with other causes to relax the energy of federal op­positions.

[Page 298] During the war, vast sums of paper currency had been emitted by Congress, and large quantities of specie had been introduced, towards the close of the war, by the French army, and the Spanish trade. Th [...]s plenty of money enabled the states to comply with the first requisitions of Congress; so that during two or three years, the federal treasury was, in some measure, supplied. But when the danger of war [...] ceased, and the vast importations of foreign goods had lessened the quantity of circulating specie, the states began to be very [...] in furnishing their proportion of monies. The annihilation of the credit of the paper bills had totally stopped their circulation, and the sp [...] was leaving the country in cargoes, for remittances to Great Britain still the luxurious habits of the people, contracted during the war, called for new supplies of goods, and private gratification seconded the narrow policy of state interest in defeating the operations of the general government.

Thus the revenues of Congress were annually diminishing; some of the states wholly neglecting to make provision for paying the inter­est of the national debt; others making but a partial provision, [...] the scanty supplies received from a few of the richest states, would hardly satisfy the demands of the civil list.

This weakness of the federal government, in conjunction with the flood of certificates or public securities, which Congress could neither fund nor pay, occasioned them to depreciate to a very inconsiderable value. The officers and soldiers of the late army, and those who furnished supplies for public exigencies, were obliged to receive for wages these certificates, or promistary notes, which passed at a fifth, [...] eighth or a tenth of their nominal value; being thus deprived at once of the greatest part of the reward due for their services. Some indeed profited by speculations in these evidences of the public debt; but such as were under a necessity of parting with them, were robbed of that sup­port which they had a right to expect and demand from their country­men.

Pennsylvania indeed made provision for paying the interest of her debts, both state and federal; assuming her supposed proportion of the continental debt, and giving the creditors of her own state notes in exchange for those of the United States. The resources of that state are immense, but she was not able to make punctual payments, even in a depreciated paper currency.

Massachusetts, in her zeal to comply fully with the requisitions of Congress, and satisfy the demands of her own creditors, laid a heavy tax upon the people. This was the immediate cause of the rebellion in that state, in 1786. But a heavy debt lying on the state, added to burdens of the same nature, upon almost every corporation within it; a decline, or rather all extinction of public credit; a relaxation and corruption of manners, and a free use of foreign luxuries; a decay of trade and manufactures, with a prevailing scarcity of money; and, above all, individuals involved in debt to each other. These were the real, though more remote causes of the insurrection. It was the tax which the people were required to pay, that caused them to f [...]l the evils which we have enumerated—this called forth all their other grievances; and the first act of violence committed, was the burning or destroying of the tax bill. This sedition threw the state into a con­vulsion which lasted about a year; courts of justice were violently obstructed; the collection of debts was suspended; and a body of [Page 299] armed troops, under the command of General Lincoln, was employed during the winter of 1786, to disperse the insurgents. Yet so numer­ous were the latter in the counties of Worcester, Hampshir [...] and [...], and so obstinately combined to oppose the execution of law by [...], that the governour and council of the state thought proper not [...] intrust General Lincoln with military powers, except to act on the defensive, and to repel force with force, in case the insurgents [...] him. The leaders of the rebels, however, were not men [...] [...]; they were desperate, but without fortitude; and while they were supported with a superiour force, they appeared to be im­pro [...]ed with that conciousness of guilt, which awes the most daring wretch, and makes him shrink from his purpose. This appears by the conduct of a large party of the rebels before the magazine at Springfield; where General Shepard, with a small guard, was station­ed to protect the continental stores. The insurgents appeared upon the plain, with a vast superiority of numbers, but a few shot from the [...] made the multitude retreat in disorder, with the loss of four men. This spirited conduct of General Shepard, with the industry, perseverence and prudent firmness of General Lincoln, dispersed the [...]—drove the leaders from the state, and restored tranquillity. A [...] [...] of indemnity was passed in the legislature for all the insur­gents, except a few of the leaders, on condition they should become [...]eable subjects and take the oath of allegiance. The leaders after­wards petitioned for pardon, which, from motives of policy, was [...] by the legislature. *

But the loss of public credit, popular disturbances and insurrections, [...] not the only evils which were generated by the peculiar circum­stances of the times. The emissions of bills of credit and tender laws, were added to the black catalogue of political disorders.

The expedient of supplying the deficiences of specie, by emissions of paper bills, was adopted very early in the colonies. The expedi­ [...] was obvious and produced good effects. In a new country, [...] population is rapid, and the value of lands increasing, the far­ [...] finds an advantage in paying legal interest for money; for if he [...] pay the interest by his profits, the increasing value of his lands [...] a few years, discharge the principal.

[...] no colony was this advantage more sensibly experienced than in Pennsylvania. The emigrations to that province were numerous—the natural population rapid—and these circumstances combined, advanced the value of real property to an astonishing degree. As the first set­ [...] there, as well as in other provinces, were poor, the purchase of a few foreign articles drained them of specie. Indeed for many years, the balance of trade [...]st have necessarily been greatly against the colonies.

But bills of cedit, emitted by the state and loaned to the industrious inhabitants, supplied the want of specie, and enabled the farmer to [...] stock. These bills were generally a legal tender in all coloni­al or private contracts, and the sums issued did not generally exceed the quantity requisite for a medium of trade; they retained their full nom­inal value in the purchase of commodities. But as they were not re­ceived by the British merchants, in payment of their goods, there [...] a great demand for specie and bills, which occasioned [...] latter at [...] times to appreciate. Thus was introduced a difference between [Page 300] the English sterling money and the currencies of the colonies, which remains to this day. *

The advantages the colonies had derived from bills for credit, under the British government, suggested to Congress, in 1775, the idea of is­suing bills for the purpose of carrying on the war. And this wa [...] perhaps their only expedient. Money could not be raised by taxation—it could not be borrowed. The first emissions had no other effect upon the medium of commerce, than to drive the specie from circu­lation. But when the paper substituted for specie, [...]ad, by repeated emissions, augmented the sum in circulation, much beyond the usual sum of specie, the bills began to loose their value. The depreciation continued in proportion to the sums emitted, until seventy, and even one hundred and fifty nominal paper dollars, were hardly an equiva­lent for one Spanish milled dollar. Still, from the year 1775 to 178 [...], this depreciating paper currency was almost the only medium of trade. It supplied the place of specie, and enabled Congress to support a numerous army; until the sum in circulation amounted to two hun­dred millions of dollars. But about the year 1780, specie began to be plentiful, being introduced by the French army, a private trade with the Spanish islands, and an illicit intercourse with the British garrison at New York. This circumstance accelerated the depreciation of pa­per bills, until their value had sunk almost to nothing. In 1781, the merchants and brokers in the southern states, apprehensive of the approaching sate of the currency, pushed immense quantities of it suddenly into New England—made vast purchases of goods in Boston—and instantly the bills vanished from circulation.

The whole history of this continental paper is a history of public and private frauds. Old specie debts were often paid in a depreciated currency—and even new contracts for a few weeks on days were of­ten discharged with a small part of the value received. From this plenty and fluctuating state of the medium, sprung hosts of speculat­ors and itinerant traders, who left their honest occupations for the prospect of immense gains, in a fraudulent business, that depended on no fixed principles, and the profits of which could be reduced to no certain calculations.

To increase these evils, a project was formed to fix the prices of ar­ticles, and restrain persons from giving or receiving more for any com­modity than the price stated by authority. These regulating acts were reprobated by every man acquainted with commerce and finance; as they were intended to prevent an effect without removing the cause. To attempt to fix the value of money, while streams of bills were in­cessantly flowing from the treasury of the United States, was as ridicu­lous as an attempt to restrain the [...]ing of wa [...] [...]n rivers amidst show­ers of rain.

Notwithstanding all opposition, some states framed and attempted to enforce these regulating acts. The effect was, a momentary appar­ent stand in the price of articles; innumerable acts of collusion and evasion among the dishonest; numberless injuries done to the honest; and finally a total disregard of all such regulations, and the consequen­tial contempt of laws and the authority of the magistrate.

[Page 301] During these fluctuations of business, occasioned by the variable value of money, people lost sight, in some measure, of the steady prin­ciples which had before governed their intercourse with each other­Speculation followed and relaxed the rigour of commercial obliga­tions.

Industry likewise had suffered by the flood of money which had deluged the states. The prices of produce had risen in proportion to the quantity of money in circulation, and the demand for the commo­dities of the country. This made the acquisition of money easy, and indolence and luxury, with their train of desolating consequences, spread themselves among all descriptions of people.

But as soon as hostilities between Great Britain and America were suspended, the scene was changed. The bills emitted by congress had for sometime before ceased to circulate; and the specie of the country was soon drained off to pay for foreign goods, the importations of which exceeded all calculation. Within two years from the close of the war, a scarcity of money was the general cry. The merchants found it impossible to collect their debts, and make punctual remittances to their creditors in Great Britain; and the consumers were driven to the necessity of retrenching their superfluities in living, and of return­ing to their ancient habits of industry and economy.

This change was however progressive and slow. In many of the states which suffered by the numerous debts they had contracted, and by the distresses of war, the people called aloud for emissions of paper bills to supply the deficiency of a medium. The depreciation of the continental bills, was a recent example of the ill effects of such an expedient, and the impossibility of supporting the credit of paper, was urged by the opposers of the measure as a substantial argument against adopting it. But nothing would silence the popular clamor; [...] many men of the first talents and eminence, united their voices [...]ith that of the populace. Paper money had formerly maintained its credit, and been of singular utility; and past experience, notwith­standing a change of circumstances, was an argument in its favor that have down all opposition.

Pennsylvania, although one of the richest states in the union, was the first to emit bills of credit, as a substitute for specie. But the revolution had removed the necessity of it, at the same time, that it had destroyed the means by which its former credit had been support­ed. Lands, at the close of the war, were not rising in value—bills on London could not so readily be purchased, as while the province was dependent on Great Britain—the state was split into parties, one of which attempted to defeat the measures most popular with the other—and the depreciation of continental bills, with the injuries which it had done to individuals, inspired a general distrust of all pub­lic promises.

Notwithstanding a part of the money was loaned on good landed security, and the faith of that wealthy state pledged for the redemp­tion of the whole at its nominal value, yet the advantages of specie a [...] a medium of commerce, especially as an article of remittance to London, soon made a difference of ten per cent. between the bills of credit and specie. This difference may be considered rather as an appreciation of gold and silver, than a depreciation of paper; but its effects, in a commercial state, must be highly prejudicial. It on [...] the door to frauds of all kinds, and frauds are usually [...] [Page 302] on the honest and unsuspecting, especially upon all classes of la­bourers.

North Carolina, South Carolina, and Georgia, had recourse to the fame wretched expedient to supply themselves with money; not reflecting that industry, frugality, and good commercial laws are the only means of turning the balance of trade in favour of a country, and that this balance is the only permanent source of solid wealth and ready money. But the bills they emitted shared a worse fate than those of Pennsylvania; they expelled almost all the circulating cash from the states; they lost a great part of their nominal value, they im­poverished the merchants, and embarrassed the planters.

The state of Virginia tolerated a base practice among the inhabi­tants of cutting dollars and smaller pieces of silver, in order to prevent it from leaving the state. This pernicious practice prevailed also in Georgia. *

Maryland escaped the calamity of a paper currency. The house of delegates brought forward a bill for the emission of bills of credit to a large amount; but the senate firmly and successfully resisted the pernicious scheme. The opposition between the two houses was vio­lent and tumultuous; it threatened the state with anarchy; but the question was carried to the people, and the good sense of the senate finally prevailed.

New Jersey is situated between two of the largest commercial towns in America, and consequently drained of specie. This state also e­mitted a large sum in bills of credit, which served to pay the interest of the public debt; but the currency depreciated, as in other states.

Rhode Island exhibited a melancholly proof of that licentiousness and anarchy which always follows a relaxation of the moral princi­ples. In a rage for supplying the state with money, and filling every man's pocket without obliging him to earn it by his diligence, the leg­islature passed an act for making one hundred thousand pounds in bills; a sum much more than sufficient for a medium of trade in that state, even without any specie. The merchants in Newport and Pro­vidence opposed the act with firmness; and their opposition added fresh vigor to the resolution of the assembly, and induced them to en­force the scheme by a legal tender of a most extraordinary nature. They passed an act, ordaining that if any creditor should refuse to take their bills, for any debt whatever, the debtor might lodge the sum due, with a justice of the peace, who should give notice of it in the public papers; and if the creditor did not appear and receive the money within six months from the first notice, his debt should be for­feited. This act astonished all honest men; and even the promoters of paper money-making in other states, and other principles, reprobat­ed this act of Rhode Island, as wicked and oppressive. But the state was governed by faction. During the cry for paper money, a num­ber of boisterous, ignorant men, were elected into the legislature, from the smaller towns in the state. Finding themselves united with a majority in opinion, they formed and executed any plan their in­clination suggested; they opposed every measure that was agreeable to the mercantile interest; they not only made bad laws to suit their own wicked purposes, but appointed their own corrupt creatures to fill [Page 303] the judicial and executive departments. Their money depreciated sufficiently to answer all their vile purposes in the discharge of debts—business almost totally ceased, all confidence was lost, the state was thrown into confusion a [...] home and was execrated abroad.

Massachusetts Bay had the good fortune, amidst her political calam­ities, to prevent an emission of bills of credit. New Hampshire made no paper: but in the distresses which followed her loss of business af­ter the war, the legislature made houses, lumber, and most articles of produce, a legal tender in the fulfilment of contracts. It is doubtless unjust to oblige a creditor to receive any thing for his debt, which he had not in contemplation at the time of the contract. But as the commodities which were to be a tender by law, in New Hampshire, were of an intrinsic value, bearing some proportion to the amount of the debt, the injustice of the law was less flagrant, than that which enforc­ed the tender of paper in Rhode Island. Indeed a similar law pre­vailed for some time in Massachusetts; and in Connecticut it is op­tional with the creditor either to imprison the debtor or take land on execution at a price to be fixed by three indifferent freeholders; pro­vided no other means of payment shall appear to satisfy the demand. It must not however be omitted, that while the most flourishing commer­cial states introduced a paper medium, to the great injury of honest men, a bill for an emission of paper in Connecticut, where there is very little specie, could never command more than one eighth of the votes of the legislature. The movers of the bill have hardly escaped ridicule; so generally is the measure reprobated as a source of frauds and public mischief.

The legislature of New York, a state that had the least necessity and apology for making paper money, as her commercial advantages al­ways furnish her with specie sufficient for a medium, issued a large sum in bills of credit, which supported their value better than the cur­rency of any other state. Still the paper raised the value of specie▪ which is always in demand for exportation, and this difference of exchange between paper and specie, ever exposes commerce to most of the inconveniences resulting from a depreciated medium.

Such is the history of paper money thus far; a miserable substi­tute for real coin, in a country where the reins of government are too weak to compel the fulfilment of public engagements, and where all confidence in public faith is totally destroyed.

While the states were thus endeavouring to repair the loss of specie, by empty promises, and to support their business by shadows, rather than by reality, the British ministry formed some commercial regula­tions that deprived them of the profits of their trade to the West-Indies and Great Britain. Heavy duties were laid upon such articles as were remitted to the London merchants for their goods, and such were the duties upon American bottoms, that the states were almost wholly deprived of the carrying trade. A prohibition, was laid up­on the produce of the United States, shipped to the English West India Islands in American built vessels, and in those manned by A­merican seamen. These restrictions fell heavy upon the eastern states, which depended much upon ship building for the support of their trade; and they materially injured the business of the other states.

Without a union that was able to form and execute a general syst­em of commercial regulations, some of the states attempted to impose [...]aints upon the British trade that should indemnify the merchant [Page 304] for the losses he had suffered, or induce the British ministry to enter into a commercial treaty and relax the rigor of their navigation laws. These measures however produced nothing but mischief. The states did not act in concert and the restraints laid on the trade of one state, operated to throw the business into the hands of its neighbour. Massachusetts, in her zeal to counteract the effect of the English nav­igation laws, laid enormous duties upon British goods imported into that state: but the other states did not adopt a similar measure; and the loss of business soon obliged that state to repeal or suspend the law. Thus when Pennsylvania laid heavy duties on British goods, Delaware and New Jersey made a number of free ports to encourage the landing of goods within the limits of those states; and the duties in Penn­sylvania served no purpose, but to create smuggling.

Thus divided, the states began to feel their weakness. Most of the legislatures had neglected to comply with the requisitions of Con­gress for furnishing the federal treasury; the resolves of Congress were disregarded; the proposition for a general impost to be laid and collected by Congress was negatived first by Rhode Island, and after­wards by New York. The British troops continued, under pretence of a breach of treaty on the part of America▪ to hold possession of the forts on the frontiers of the states. Many of the states indi­vidually were infested with popular commotions or iniquitous tend­er laws, while they were oppressed with publick debts; the certifi­cates or public notes had lost most of their value, and circulated mere­ly as the objects of speculation; Congres lost their respectability, and the United States, their credit and importance.

In the midst of these calamities, a proposition was made in 1783, in the house of delegates in Virginia, to appoint commissioners, to meet such as might be appointed in the other states, who should form a system of commercial regulations for the United States, and recom­mend it to the several legislatures for adoption. Commissioners were accordingly appointed▪ and a request was made to the legislatures of the other states to accede to the proposition. Accordingly several of the states appointed commissioners who met at Annpolis in the summer of 786, to consult what measures should be taken to unite the states in some general and efficient commercial system. But [...] the states were not all represented▪ and the powers of the commis­sioners were, in their opinion, too limited to propose a system of regu­lations adequate to the purposes of government, they agreed to re­commend a general convent on to be held at Philadelphia the next year▪ with powers to frame a general plan of government for the United States. This measure appeared to the commissioners absolute­ly necessary. The old confederation was essentially defective. It was destitute of almost every principle necessary to give effect to legis­lation.

It was defective in the article of legislating over states, instead of individuals. All history testifies that recommendations will not op­erate as laws, and compulsion cannot be exercised over states, with­out violence, war and anarchy. The confederation was also desti [...] of a sanction to its laws. When resolutions were passed in Congress▪ there was no power to compel obedience by fine, by suspension of pri­vileges or other means. It was also destitute of a guarantee for the state governments. Had one state been invaded by its neighbour, the union was not constitutionally bound to assist in repelling the in­vasion, [Page 305] and supporting the constitution of the invaded state. The confederation was further deficient in the principle of apportioning the quotas of money to be furnished by each state; in a want of power to form commercial laws, and to raise troops for the defence and secu­rity of the union; in the equal suffrage of the states, which placed Rhode Island on a footing in Congress with Virginia; and to crown all the defects, we may add the want of a judiciary power, to define the laws of the union, and to reconcile the contradictory decisions of a number of independent judicatories.

These and many inferior defects were obvious to the commissioners, and therefore they urged a general convention, with powers to form and offer to the consideration of the states, a system of general govern­ment that should be less exceptionable. Accordingly in May, 1787, delegates from all the states, except Rhode Island, assembled at Phila­delphia, and chose General Washington for their President. After four months deliberation, in which the clashing interests of the several states, appeared in all their force, the convention agreed to recommend the plan of federal government which we have already recited.

As soon as the plan of the federal constitution was submitted to the legislatures of the several states, they proceeded to take measures for collecting the sense of the people upon the propriety of adopting it. In the small state of Delaware, a convention was called in November, which, after a few days deliberation, ratified the constitution, without a dissenting voice.

In the convention of Pennsylvania, held the same month, there was a spirited opposition to the new form of government. The de­bates were long and interesting. Great abilities and firmness were displayed on both sides; but, on the 13th of December, the constitu­tion was received by two thirds of the members. The minority were [...]atisfied, and with an obstinacy that ill became the representatives of a free people, published their reasons of dissent, which were calcu­lated to inflame a party already violent, and which, in fact, produced [...] disturbances in the western part of the state.

In New Jersey, the convention which met in December, were unanimous in adopting the constitution; as was likewise that of Georgia.

In Connecticut there was some opposition; but the constitu­tion was on the 9th of January 1788, ratified by three fourths of the [...]es in convention, and the minority peaceably acquiesced in the de­ [...]on.

In Massachusetts, the opposition was large and respectable. The convention, consisting of more than three hundred delegates, were assembled in January, and continued their debates, with great candor and liberality, about five weeks. At length the question was carried [...] the constitution by a small majority, and the minority, with that [...]ly condescension which becomes great minds, submitted to the [...]sure, and united to support the government.

In New Hampshire, the federal cause was for sometime doubtful. The greatest number of the delegates in convention, were at first on beside of the opposition; and some, who might have had their object­ [...] removed by the discussion of the subject, were instructed to reject the constitution. Although the instructions of constituents cannot, on the true principles of representation, be binding upon a deputy, in [Page 306] any legislative assembly, because his constituents are but a part of the state, and have not heard the arguments and objections of the whole, whereas his act is to affect the whole state, and therefore is to be di­rected by the sense or wisdom of the whole, collected in the legislative assembly; yet the delegates in the New Hampshire convention con­ceived very erroneously, that the sense of the freemen in the towns, those little dictricts, where no act of legislation can be performed, imposed a restraint upon their own wills. * An adjournment was therefore moved, and carried. This gave the people opportunity to gain a farther knowledge of the merits of the constitution, and at the se­cond meeting of the convention, it was ratified by a respectable majority.

In Maryland, several men of abilities appeared in the opposition, and were unremitted in their endeavours to persuade the people, that the proposed plan of government was artfully calculated to deprive them of their dearest rights; yet in convention it appeared that five sixths of the voices were in favour of it.

In South Carolina, the opposition was respectable; but two thirds of the convention appeared to advocate and vote for the constitu­tion.

In Virginia, many of the principal characters opposed the ratifica­tion of the constitution with great abilities and industry. But after a full discussion of the subject, a small majority, of a numerous conven­tion, appeared for its adoption.

In New York, two thirds of the delegates i [...] convention were, at their first meeting, determined to reject the constitution. Here there­fore the debates were the most interesting, and the event extremely doubtful. The argument was managed with uncommon address and abilities on both sides of the question. But during the session, the ninth and tenth states had acceded to the proposed plan, so that by the constitution, Congress were empowered to issue an ordinance for or­ganizing the new government. This event placed the opposition on new ground; and the expediency of uniting with the other states—the generous motives of conciliating all differences, and the danger of a rejection, influenced a respectable number, who were originally opposed to the constitution, to join the federal interest. The con­stitution was accordingly ratified by a small majority; but the ratifi­cation was accompanied here, as in Virginia, with a bill of rights, declaratory of the sense of the convention, as to certain great princi­ples, and with a catalogue of amendments, which were to be recom­mended to the consideration of the new Congress, and the several state legislatures.

North Carolina met in convention in July, to deliberate on the new constitution. After a short session they rejected it by a majority of one hundred and seventy-six, against seventy-six. In November 1789, however, this state again met in convention, and ratified the constitu­tion by a large majority.

Rhode Island was doomed to be the sport of a blind and singular policy. The legislature, in consistency with the measures which had been before pursued, did not call a convention, to collect the sense of the s [...]ate upon the proposed constitution; but in an unconstitutional and absurd manner, submitted the plan of government to the consider­ation of the people. Accordingly it was brought before town meet­ings, and in most of them rejected. In some of the large towns, par­ticularly [Page 307] in Newport and Providence, the people collected and resolv­ed, with great propriety, that they could not take up the subject; and that the proposition for embracing or rejecting the federal constitution, could come before no tribunal but that of the state in convention or legislature. On the 24th of May 1790, a convention of this state met at Newport, and on the 29th, adopted the constitution by a majority of two only.

Vermont, in convention at Bennington, January 10th 1791, ratifi­ed the constitution of the United States, by a great majority. *

From the moment the proceedings of the general convention at Phi­ladelphia transpired, the public mind was exceedingly agitated, and suspended between hope and sear, until nine states had ratified their plan of a federal government. Indeed the anxiety continued until Virginia and New York had acceded to the system. But this did not prevent the demonstrations of their joy, on the accession of each state.

On the ratification in Massachusetts▪ the citizens of Boston, in the ele­vation of their joy, formed a procession in honor of the happy event, which was novel, splendid, and magnificent. This example was after­wards followed, and in some instances improved upon, in Baltimore, Charleston, Philadelphia, New Haven, Portsmouth and New York, successively. Nothing could equal the beauty and grandeur of these exhibitions. A ship was mounted upon wheels, and drawn through the streets; mechanics erected stages▪ and exhibited specimens of labour in their several occupations, as they moved along the road; [...]ags with [...]lems, descriptive of all the arts and of the federal union, were invented and displayed in honor of the government; multitudes of all ranks in life assembled to view the splendid scenes; while so­briety, joy and harmony marked the brilliant exhibitions, by which the Americans celebrated the establishment of their Empire.

On the 3d of March 1789, the delegates from the eleven states, which at that time had ratified the constitution, assembled at New York, where a convenient and elegant building had been prepared for their accommodation. On opening and counting the votes for Presi­dent, it was found that GEORGE WASHINGTON was unanimously elect­ed to that dignified office, and that JOHN ADAMS was chosen Vice [Page 308] President. The annunciation of the choice of the first and second Magistrates of the United States, occasioned a general diffusion of [Page]

A MAP of the NORTHERN and MIDDLE STATES: Comprehending the Western Territory and the British Dominions in NORTH AMERICA Compiled from the best Authorities.

[Page 309] joy among the friends to the union, and fully evinced that these em­inent characters were the choice of the people.

On the 30th of April 1789, GEORGE WASHINGTON was inaugu­rated PRESIDENT of the United States of America, in the city of New York. The ceremony was performed in the open gallery of Federal Hall, in the view of many thousand spectators. The oath was administered by Chancellor Livingston. Several circumstances concurred to render the scene unusually solemn—the presence of the beloved Father and Deliverer of his country—the impressions of grat­itude for his past services—the vast concourse of spectators—the de­vout fervency with which he repeated the oath, and the reverential manner in which he bowed to kiss the sacred volume—These circum­stances, together with that of his being chosen to the most dignified office in America, and perhaps in the world, by the unanimous voice of more than three millions of enlightened freemen, all conspired to place this among the most august and interesting scenes which have eve [...] been exhibited on this globe. *

Hitherto the deliberations of the legislature of the union, have been marked with wisdom, and the measures they have adopted have been productive of great national prosperity. The wise appointments to office, which, in general, have been made—the establishment of a re­venue and judiciary system, and of a national bank—the assumption of the debts of the individual states, and the encouragement that has been given to manufactures, commerce, literature, and to useful inven­tions, open the fairest prospect of the peace, union and increasing res­pectability of the American States.

GRAND DIVISIONS OF THE UNITED STATES.

THE AMERICAN REPUBLIC, of which we have given a general ac­count, consists of three grand divisions, denominated the Northern, more properly Eastern, Middle and Southern States.

The first division, (the Northern or Eastern States) comprehends

  • VERMONT
  • NEW HAMPSHIRE
  • DISTRICT of MAINE (belonging to Massachusetts)
  • MASSACHUSETTS
  • RHODE ISLAND
  • CONNECTICUT

These are called the New England States, and comprehend that part of America, which, since the year 1614, has been known by the name of NEW ENGLAND.

The second division (the Middle States) comprehends

  • NEW YORK
  • NEW JERSEY
  • PENNSYLVANIA
  • DELAWARE
  • TERRITORY N. W. of OHIO

[Page 310] The third division (the Southern States) comprehends

  • MARYLAND
  • VIRGINIA
  • KENTUCKY
  • NORTH CAROLINA
  • TERRITORY S. of OHIO.
  • SOUTH CAROLINA
  • GEORGIA

Of these we shall treat in their order.

NEW ENGLAND, OR NORTHERN OR EASTERN STATES.

SITUATION AND BOUNDARIES.

NEW-ENGLAND lies between 41 and 46 degrees N. Lat. and between 1 degree 30 minutes and 8 degrees E. Lon. from Philadelphia; and is bounded north, by Lower Canada; east, by the Province of New Brunswick, and the Atlantic O­cean; south, by the same ocean, and Long Island Sound; west, by the state of New York. It lies in the form of a quarter of a circle. Its west line, beginning at the mouth of Byram river, which empties into Long Island Sound at the south west corner of Connecticut, lat. 41°, runs a little east of north, until it strikes the 45th degree of lat­itude, and then curves to the eastward almost to the Gulf of St. Law­rence.

CLIMATE AND DISEASES.] New England has a very healthful climate, as is evinced by the longevity of the inhabitants. It is esti­mated that about one in seven of the inhabitants live to the age of 70 years; and about one in thirteen or fourteen to 80 years a [...] ­wards.

North west, west, and south west winds are the most prevalent. East and north east winds, which are unelastic and disagreeable, are frequent at certain seasons of the year, particularly in April and May, on the sea coasts. The [...]ther is less variable than in the middle and especially the southern states, and more so than in Canada. The ex­tremes of heat and cold according [...]o Farenheit's thermometer, are from 20° below, to 100° above 0. The medium is from 48° to 5 [...]°. The inhabitants of New England, on account of the dryness of their atmosphere, can endure, without inconvenience, a greater degree of heat than the inhabitants of a moister climate. It is supposed by some philosophers, that the difference of moisture in the atmosphere in Pennsylvania and New England is such, as that a person might hear at least ten degrees of heat more in the latter than in the former.

The quantity of rain which falls in England annually, is computed to be 24 inches; in France 18 inches, and in New England from 46 to 50 inches▪ and yet in New England they suffer more from drought than in either of the forementioned countries, although they have more than double the quantity of rain. These facts evince the re­markable dryness of the atmosphere, in this eastern division of the United States, and in part account for its singular healthfulness. Win­ter commonly commences, in its seventy, about the middle of Decem­ber—sometimes earlier, and sometimes not till Christmas. Cattle are fed or housed, in the northern parts of New England, from about the 20th of November to the 20th of May—In the southern parts not [Page 311] quite so long. There have been frosts in almost every month in the year, though not in the same year; but not very injurious.

The diseases most prevalent in New England are the following, viz.

Alvine fluxes Inflammatory Fevers
St. Anthony's Fire Slow nervous, and
Asthma Mixed
Atrophy Pulmonary Consumption  
Catarrh Quinsy  
Colic Rheumatism  

These disorders, of which the pulmonary consumption is much the most destructive, are commonly the effect of imprudent exposures to cold and rainy weather, evening air, and the wearing of damp linen; or from frequent excesses in the use of strong liquors, especially of fresh distilled rum, which in too many instances proves the bane of morals, and the ruin of families.

The small pox, which is a specific, infectious disease, is not allowed at present to be communicated by inoculation, except in hospitals erected for the purpose, in bye places, and in cases where there is a probability of a general spread of the infection in a town. Nor is this disease permitted to be communicated generally by inoculation, in any of the United States, except New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Delaware and South Carolina.

In populous towns, the prevalent diseases are more numerous and complicated, owing to want of fresh air and exercise, and to luxurious and fashionable living.

A late writer * has observed that "in other countries, men are divid­ed according to their wealth or indigence, into three classes; the opu­lent, the middling and the poor; the idleness, luxuries and debaucheries of the first, and the misery and too frequent intemperance of the last, destroy the greater proportion of these two. The intermediate class is below those indulgencies which prove fatal to the rich, and above these sufferings to which the unfortunate poor fall victims: This is therefore the happiest division of the three. Of the rich and poor, the American Republic, furnishes a much smaller proportion than any other district of the known world. In Connecticut particularly, the distribution of wealth and its concomitants is more equal than else­where, and therefore, as far as excess or want of wealth may prove destructive or salutary to life, the inhabitants of this state may plead▪ exception from diseases." What this writer says of Connecticut in particular, will, with very few exceptions, apply to New England at large.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY, MOUNTAINS, &c.] New England is a high, hilly, and in some parts a mountainous country, formed by na­ture to be inhabited by a hardy race of free, independent republicans. The mountains are comparatively small, running nearly north and south in ridges parallel to each other. Between these ridges, flow the great rivers in majestic meanders, receiving the innumerable rivu­lets and larger streams which proceed from the mountains on each side. To a spectator on the top of a neighbouring mountain, the vales be­tween the ridges, while in a state of nature, exhibit a romantic appear­ance. They seem an ocean of woods, swelled and depressed in its [Page 312] surface like that of the great ocean itself. A richer, though less ro­mantic view is presented, when the valleys, by industrious husband­men, have been cleared of their natural growth; and the fruit of their labour appears in loaded orchards, extensive meadows, covered with large herds of sheep and neat cattle, and rich fields, of flax, corn and the various kinds of grain.

These valleys are of various breadths, from two to twenty miles; and by the annual inundations of the rivers and smaller streams, which flow through them, there is frequently an accumulation of rich, fat soil, left upon their surface when the waters retire.

There are three principal ranges of mountains, passing nearly from southwest, to northeast, through New England. These consist of a multitude of parallel ridges, each having many spurs, deviating from the course of the general range; which spurs are again broken into irregular, hilly land. The main ridges commence, in high bluff heads, near the sea coast; and sometimes by a gradual assent in the interior part of the country. One of the main ranges runs between Connecticut and Hudson's rivers. This range branches, and bounds the vales through which flows the Housatonick river.

In Lyme, on the east side of the mouth of Connecticut river, anoth­er range of mountains commences, forming the eastern boundary of Connecticut vale. This range runs northerly, at the distance, gener­ally, of about ten or twelve miles east from the river, and passes through Massachusetts, from where the range takes the name of Chicabee Moun­tain; thence crossing into New Hampshire, at the distance of about twen­ty miles from the Massachusetts line, it runs up into a very high p [...]k, called Monadnock, which terminates this ridge of the range. A west­ern ridge continues▪ and in about latitude 43° 20′, runs up into [...] mountains. About 50 miles further, in the same ridge, is Mo [...]e [...] mountain.

A third range begins near Stonington in Connecticut. It takes its course northeasterly, and is sometimes broken and discontinued; it th [...] rises again, and ranges in the same direction into New Hampshire.

These ranges of mountains are full of springs of water, that give rise to numberless streams of various sizes, which, interlocking each other in every direction, and falling over the rocks in romantic cas­cades, flow meandering into the rivers below. No country on the globe is better watered than New England.

On the sea coast the land is low, and in many parts level and sandy. In the valleys, between the forementioned ranges of mountains, the land is generally broken, and in many places rocky, but of a strong rich soil, capable of being cultivated to good advantage, which also is the case with many spots even on the tops of the mountains.

RIVERS.] The principal rivers in New England are Penobscot, Kenne­beck, Androscogin, or Ameriscoggin, Saco, (pronounced Sawco) Merri­mack, Connecticut, Housatonick and Onion Rivers; besides many small­er ones.

FLOWERING SHRUBS AND PLANTS.] Dr. Cutler has furnished the following catalogue of flowering shrubs and plants in New Eng­land, which, from the attention he has paid to natural history, we have reason to rely upon as accurate.

Blue Flag ( his virginica)—Globe Flower ( Cephalanthus occident [...]lis)—Pigeonberry ( Cissus sicyo [...]des)—Cornel ( Cornus canadensis)—American Honeysuckle ( Azalea viscosa)—American Tea ( Ceanothus Americanus)—Cherry Honeysuckle ( Lonicera diervilla)—Great Convolvulus ( [...] [Page 313] —Stag's horn Sumach ( Rhus typhinum)—Mealtree ( V [...] ­ [...]n lantana)—White flowered Elder ( Sambucus nigra)—Red berried Elder ( Sambucus canadensis.)—Meadow Blue Bells ( Gentiana ciliata)—Lillies, several species ( Litrum)—Bethlem Star ( Ormth [...]ulum luteum)—American Senna ( Rhodora canadensis)—Great Laurel ( Kalmta lat [...]folta)—Dwarf Laurel ( Kalmia angustesolia)—White Pepper Bush ( Andro­ [...]e arborea)—Bog Evergreen ( Andromeda calyculata)—Sweet Pepper bush ( Clethra alnifolia)—Mountain Laurel, or Sorbus tree Sorbus ancu­po [...]t [...])—Meadow-Sweet ( Spiroea salicisolia)—Queen of the Meadows ( Spiroea tormentosa)—Service Tree ( Mespulus canadensts)—Wild Rose ( Ro­se carolina)—Superb Raspberry ( Rubus odoratus)—Bancherry ( Aclea spi­ [...])—Side saddle flower ( Sarracena purpurea)—Red Columbine ( Aqui­ [...]gin c [...]densis)—Anemone, several species ( anemone hepatica, sylvestris a [...]irosa)—Traveller's Joy ( Clematis virginica)—Dragon's Head ( Dr [...]cocephalum virginicum)—Snap Dragon ( Antirrhinum canadensis)—A­merican Cardamine ( Cardamine virginica)—Lupin ( Lupinus angustrsolia)—Locust ( Robinia pseud-acacia)—Beach Pea ( Pisum maritimum)—Pied [...] ( Pisum ochrus)—Wood Pea ( Orobus sylvaticus)—Variegated Pea ( L [...]thyrus heterophyllus)—Meadow Sunflower ( Ageratum ciliare)—Amer­ican Amaranthus ( Gnaphalium helian themifolium)—New-England Aster ( [...] [...]o-anglicum)—Smooth leaved Golden rod ( Solida [...]o allissima)—New England Sunflower ( Helianthus divaricalus)—American Pride ( [...] cardinalis.)—Ladies Plume ( Orchis pycodes)—Ladies Slipper ( Cypri­ [...] calceolus)—Blue-eye ( Sisyrinchium bermudiauna)—Swamp Willow, or Dog-wood ( Salix cinerea?)—Red flowered Maple ( Acerubrum.)—

PRODUCTIONS FROM CULTURE.] New England, generally speak­ing, is better adapted for grazing than for grain, though a sufficient quantity of the latter is raised for home consumption, if we except wheat, which is imported in considerable quantities from the middle and southern states. Indian corn, rye, oats, barely, buck wheat, flax and hemp, generally succeed very well. Wheat is cultivated to ad­vantage in many parts of the interior country, but on the sea coast it i [...] subject to blast. This has been attributed to various causes, but the [...] one probably is, the sudden, cold, easterly winds, after a hot day, which cause a stagnation and extravasation of the juices of the stalk. Apples are common, and in general plenty in New England, and ci­der constitutes the principal drink of the inhabitants. Peaches do on thrive as well as formerly. The other common fruits are more or less cultivated in different parts.

New England is a fine grazing country; the valleys, between the hills, are generally intersected with brooks of water, the banks of which are lined with a tract of rich meadow or intervale land. The high and rocky ground is, in many parts, covered with clover, and gen­erally affords the finest of pasture. It will not be a matter of wonder, therefore, that New England boasts of raising some of the finest cat­tle in the world; nor will she be envied, when the labour of raising their is taken into view. Two months of the hottest season in the year, the farmers are employed in procuring food for their cattle; and the cold winter is spent in dealing it out to them. The pleasure and profit of doing this, is however a satisfying compensation to the hon­est and industrious farmer. Butter and cheese are made for exporta­tion Considerable attention has lately been paid to the raising of sheep.

POPULATION, CHARACTER AND DIVERSIONS.] New England is the most populous part of the United States. It contains, according [Page 314] to the census of 1790, 1,009,523 souls. The great body of these are landholders and cultivators of the soil. As they possess, in see sim­ple, the farms which they cultivate, they are naturally all attached to their country; the cultivation of the soil makes them robust and healthy, and enables them to defend it.

New England may, with propriety, be called a nursery of men, whence are annually transplanted, into other parts of the United States, thousands of its natives. Vast numbers of them, since the war, have emigrated into the northern parts of New York, into Kentucky and the Western Territory, and into Georgia; and some are scattered into every State, and every town of note in the union.

The inhabitants of New England are almost universally of English descent; and it is owing to this circumstance, and to the great and general attention that has been paid to education, that the English language has been preserved among them so free of corruption.

The New Englanders are generally tall, stout, and well built. Their education, laws and situation, serve to inspire them with high notions of liberty. Their jealousy is awakened at the first motion towards an invasion of their rights. They are indeed often jealous to excess; [...] circumstance which is a fruitful source of imaginary grievances, and of groundless suspicions and complaints against government. But these ebullitions of jealousy, though censurable, and productive of some political evils, shew that the essence of true liberty exists in New England; for jealousy is a guardian of liberty, and a characteristic of free republicans. A chief foundation of liberty and equality in the New England States, is a law by which intestate estates dese [...]d to all the children, or other heirs, in equal proportions, except to the eldest son, who has two shares. In 1789 Massachusetts abolished this exception. In consequence of these laws, the people of New Eng­land enjoy an equality of condition unknown in any other part of the world: And it is in this way that the people have preserved that hap­py mediocrity among themselves, which, by inducing economy and industry, removes from them temptations to luxury, and forms them to habits of sobriety and temperance. At the same time, their indus­try and frugality exempt them from want, and from the necessity of submitting to any encroachments on their liberties.

In New England, learning is more generally diffused among all ranks of people than in any other part of the globe; arising from the ex­cellent establishment of schools in almost every township.

In these schools, which are generally supported by a public tax, and under the direction of a school committee, are taught the elements of reading, writing and arithmetic, and in the more wealthy towns, they are beginning to introduce the higher branches of grammar, geogra­phy, &c.

A very valuable source of information to the people is the Newspa­pers, of which not less than thirty thousand are printed every week in New England, and circulate in almost every town and village in the country. *

A person of mature age, who cannot both read and write, is rarely to be found. By means of this general establishment of schools, the extensive circulation of Newspapers, and the consequent spread of learning, every township throughout the country, is furnished with [Page 315] men capable of conducting the affairs of their town with judgment and discretion. These men are the channels of political information to the lower class of people; if such a class may be said to exist in New England, where every man thinks himself at least as good as his neighbour, and believes that all mankind are, or ought to be equal. The people, from their childhood, form habits of canvassing public af­fairs, and commence politicians. This naturally leads them to be ve­ry inquisitive. It is with knowledge as with riches, the more a man has, the more he wishes to obtain; his desire has no bound. This desire after knowledge, in a greater or less degree, prevails throughout all classes of people in New England; and from their various modes of expressing it, some of which are blunt and familiar, bordering on impertinence, strangers have been induced to mention impertinent inqui­sitiveness as a distinguishing characteristic of New England people. But this is true only with regard to that class of people who have confined themselves to domestic life, and have not had opportunity of mingling with the world; and such people are not peculiar to New England; they compose a great part of the citizens of every state and country.

Before the late war, which introduced into New England a flood of corruptions, with many improvements, the Sabbath was observed with great strictness; no unnecessary travelling, no secular business, no vi­siting, no diversions were permitted on that sacred day. They con­sidered it as consecrated to divine worship, and were generally punctual and serious in their attendance upon it. Their laws were strict in guarding the sabbath against every innovation. The supposed severity with which these laws were composed and executed, together with some other traits in their religious character, have acquired for the New Englanders, the name of a superstitious, bigotted people. But superstition and bigotry are so indefinite in their significations, and so variously applied by persons of different principles and educations, that it is not easy to determine whether they ever deserved that char­acter. Leaving every person to enjoy his own opinion in regard to this matter, we will only observe, that, since the war, a catholic tole­rant spirit, occasioned by a more enlarged intercourse with mankind, has greatly increased, and is becoming universal; and if they do not break the proper bound, and liberalize away all true religion, of which there is very great danger, they will counteract that strong propensity in human nature, which leads men to vibrate from one extreme to its opposite.

There is one distinguishing characteristic in the religious character of this people, which we must not omit to mention; and that is, the custom of annually celebrating Fasts and Thanksgivings. In the spring, the governours of the several New England states, except Rhode Island, issue their proclamations, appointing a day to be religiously observed in fasting, humiliation and prayer throughout then respective states, in which the predominating vices, that particularly call for humiliation, are enumerated. In autumn, after harvest, that gladsome era in the husbandman's life, the governors again issue their proclamations, appointing a day of public thanksgiving, enume­rating the public blessings received in the course of the foregoing year.

This pious custom originated with their venerable ancestors, the first settlers of New England; and has been handed down as sacred, through the successive generations of their posterity. A custom so [Page 316] rational, and so happily calculated to cherish in the minds of the peo­ple, a sense of their dependence on the GREAT BENEFACTOR of the world for all their blessings, it is hoped will ever be sacredly pre­served.

The people of New England, generally obtain their estates by hard and persevering labour: They of consequence know their value, and spend with frugality. Yet in no country do the indigent and unfor­tunate fare better. Their laws oblige every town to provide a compe­tent maintainance for their poor, and the necessitous stranger is pro­tected, and relieved by their humane institutions. It may in truth be said, that in no part of the world are the people happier, better fur­nished with the necessaries and conveniences of life, or more indepen­dent than the farmers in New England. As the great body of the people are hardy, independent freeholders, their manners are, as they ought to be, congenial to their employment, plain, simple, and unpol­ished. Strangers are received and entertained among them with a great deal of artless sincerity, and friendly, unformal hospitality. Their children, those imitative creatures, to whose education particu­lar attention is paid, early imbibe the manners and habits of those a­round them; and the stranger, with pleasure, notices the honest and decent respect that is paid him by the children as he passes through the country.

As the people, by representation, make their own laws and appoint their own officers, they cannot be oppressed; and living under govern­ments, which have few lucrative places, they have few motives to [...]i­bery, corrupt canvassings or intrigue. Real abilities and a moral character unblemished, are the qualifications requisite in the view of most people, for officers of public trust. The expression of a wish to be promoted, is, in some parts of New England, the direct way [...] be disappointed.

The inhabitants, in some parts of New England, are generally fond of the arts and sciences, and have cultivated them with great success. Their colleges have flourished. The illustrious characters they have produced, who have distinguished themselves in politics, law, divinity, the mathematics and philosophy, natural and civil history, and in the fine arts, particularly poetry, evince the truth of these observations.

Many of the women in New England are handsome. They gene­rally have fair, fresh and healthful countenances, mingled with much female softness and delicacy. Those who have had the advantages of a good education (and they are numerous) are genteel, easy, and agree­able in their manners, and are sprightly and sensible in conversation. They are early taught to manage domestic concerns with neatness and economy. Ladies of the first rank and fortune, make it a part of their daily business to superintend the affairs of the family. Employ­ment at the needle, in cookery, and at the spinning wheel, with [...] is honourable. Idleness, even in those of independent fortunes, is [...] ­versally disreputable. The women in country towns, manufacture [...] greatest part of the clothing of their families. Their linen and wo [...] ­len cloths are strong and decent. Their butter and cheese is not infe­rior to any in the world.

Dancing is the principal and favourite amusement in New England▪ and of this the young people of both sexes are extremely [...]. Gaming is practised by none but those who cannot, or rather [...] not find a reputable employment. The gamester, the horse [...] [Page 317] and the knave, are equally despised, and their company is avoided by all who would sustain fair and irreproachable characters.

The athletic and healthy diversions of cricket, foot ball, quoits, wrestling, jumping, hopping, foot races, and prison bass, are universal­ly practised in the country, and some of them in the most populous places, and by people of almost all ranks.

HISTORY.] New England owes its first settlement to religious persecution. Soon after the commencement of the reformation * in England, which was not until the year 1534, the Protestants were di­vided into two parties, one the followers of Luther, and the other of Calvin. The former had chosen gradually, and almost imperceptibly, to recede from the church of Rome; while the latter, more zealous, and convinced of the importance of a thorough reformation, and at the same time possessing much firmness and high notions of religious liberty, was for effecting a thorough change at once. Their conse­quent endeavours to expunge from the church all the inventions which had been brought into it since the days of the Apostles, and to intro­duce the "Scripture purity," derived for them the name of PURI­TANS. From these the inhabitants of New England descended.

The first company that came to New England, planted themselves at Plymouth. They were a part of the Rev. Mr. Robinson's con­gregation, which for 12 years before, had lived in Holland, for the sake of enjoying liberty of conscience. They came over in the year 1620.

It was their intention to have settled at the mouth of Hudson's riv­er; but the Dutch, intending to plant a colony there of their own, privately hired the master of the ship to contrive delays in Eng­land, and then to conduct them to these northern coasts, and there, under pretence of shoals and winter, to discourage them from ventur­ing to the place of destination. This is confidently asserted by the historians of that time. Although Cape Cod harbour, in which they first anchored, was good, the country around was sandy and barren. These were discouraging circumstances; but the season being far ad­vanced, they prudently determined to make the best of their present situation.

As they were not within the limits of their patent, and consequent­ly not under the jurisdiction of the Virginia company, they conclud­ed it necessary to establish a separate government for themselves. Ac­cordingly, [Page 318] before they landed, having on their knees devoutly given thanks to God for their safe arrival, they formed themselves into a body politic, by a solemn contract, * to which they all subscribed, thereby making it the basis of their government. They chose Mr. John Carver, a gentleman of piety and approved abilities, to be their gov­ernor for the first year. This was on the 11th of November, 1620.

Their next object was to fix on a convenient place for settlement. In doing this they were obliged to encounter numerous difficulties, and to suffer incredible hardships. Many of them were sick in consequence of the fatigues of a long voyage: Their provisions were bad—the sea­son was uncommonly cold—the Indians, though afterwards friendly, were now hostile—and they were unacquainted with the coast. These difficulties they surmounted, and on the 31st of December they were all safely landed at a place, which, in grateful commemoration of Plymouth in England, the town which they last left in their native land, they called Plymouth. This is the first English town that was settled in New England.

In some of their excursions in search of a suitable place for settle­ment, they found buried several baskets of Indian corn, to the a­mount of ten bushels, which fortunately served them for planting the next spring, and perhaps was the means of preserving them from per­ishing with hunger. They made diligent enquiry for the owners, whom they found, and afterwards paid the full value of the corn.

Before the end of November, Susanna, the wife of William White, was delivered of a son, whom they called Peregrine. He is sup­posed to have been the first child of European extract, born in New-England.

The whole company that landed consisted of but 101 souls, Their situation was distressing, and their prospect truly dismal and discourag­ing. Their nearest neighbours, except the natives, were a French set­tlement at Port Royal, and one of the English at Virginia. The near­est of these was five hundred miles from them, and utterly incapable of affording them relief in a time of famine or danger. Wherever they turned their eyes, distress was before them. Persecuted for their religion in their native land—grieved for the profanation of the ho­ly Sabbath, and other licentiousness, in Holland—satigued by their long and boisterous voyage—disappointed through the treachery of their commander of their expected country—forced on a dangerous and un­known shore, in the advance of a cold winter—surrounded with hos­tile [Page 319] barbarians, without any hope of human succour—denied the aid or favour of the court of England—without a patent—without a pub­lic promise of a peaceable enjoyment of their religious liberties—worn out with toil and sufferings—without convenient shelter from the rig­ours of the weather.—Such were the prospects, and such the situation of these pious solitary christians; and to add to their distresses, a gener­al and very mortal sickness prevailed among them, which swept off for­ty six of their number before the opening of the next spring. To sup­port them under these trials, they had need of all the aids and comforts which christianity affords; and these were sufficient. The free and un­molested enjoyment of their religion, reconciled them to their humble and lonely situation—They bore their hardships with unexampled patience, and persevered in their pilgrimage of almost unparalleled trials, with such resignation and calmness, as gave proof of great piety and unconquer­able virtue.

On the 3d of November, 1620, king James signed a patent, incor­porating the duke of Lenox, the marquisses of Buckingham and Ham­ilton, the earls of Arundel and Warwick, Sir Francis Gorges, with thirty four others, and their successors, stiling them▪ The council es­tablished in Plymouth, in the county of Devon, for the planting, ruling ordering and governing of New England in America. To this coun­cil he granted all that part of America which lies between the 40th and 48th degrees of north latitude. This patent is the great civil basis of all the grants and patents by which New England was afterwards divided.

The Plymouth council retained the power vested in them by the crown, until the year 1635, when they resigned their charter. Previous to this, however, the council had made several grants of land to ad­venturers, who proposed to settle in New England.—They granted New Hampshire to Capt John Mason in 1621—the Province of Main, to Sir R. Gorges in 1622, and Massachusetts Bay to Sir Henry Ros­well and five others, in 1627.

As early as March, 1621, Masassoit, * one of the most powerful Sag­a [...]res of the neighbouring Indians, with sixty attendants, made a vine to the Plymouth settlers and entered into a formal and very friendly treaty with them, wherein they agreed to avoid injuries on both sides—to punish offenders—to restore stolen goods—to assist each other in all justifiable wars—to promote peace among their neighbours, &c—Masassoit and his successors for fifty years, inviolably observed this treaty. The English are much indebted to him for his friendship; and his memory will ever be respected in New England.

The Narragansets, disliking the conduct of Masassoit, declared war against him, which occasioned much confusion and fighting among the Indians. The Plymouth colony interposed in favour of Masassoit, their good ally, and terminated the dispute, to the terror of their ene­mies. Even Canon [...]us himself, the terrific Sachem of the Narragan­sets, fued for peace.

The prudent, friendly and upright conduct of the Plymouth col­ony toward their neighbours, the Indians, secured their friendship and alliance. On the 13th of September 1621, no less than nine Sach­ems declared allegiance to king James; and Masassoit, with many of his Sub-Sachems, who lived around the bays of Patuxent and Mas­sachusetts, subscribed a writing, acknowledging the king of England [Page 320] their master. These transactions are so many proofs of the peaceful and benevolent disposition of the Plymouth settlers; for had they been otherwise disposed they never could have introduced and maintained a friendly intercourse with the natives.

On the 10th of Sept. this year, the king granted to Sir William A­lexander a patent of all the tract of country bounded by a line drawn from Cape Sables to the Bay of St. Mary; thence to the river St. Croix; thence north to Canada river—down the river to Gachep [...]; thence southeast to Cape Breton Island and Cape Breton; thence round to Cape Sables; with all seas and islands within six leagues of the western and eastern parts, and within forty leagues southward of Cape Breton and Cape Sables; to be called Nova Scotia.

The first duel in New England, was fought with sword and dagger between two servants. Neither of them was killed, but both were wounded. For this disgraceful offence, they were formally tried before the whole company, and sentenced to have 'their heads and feet tied together, and so to be twenty four hours without meal or drink.'

This year (1622) died Squanto, the friend of the English, who merits to have his name perpetuated in history. Squanto was one of the twenty Indians whom Hunt perfidiously carried to Spain; * whence he came to London, and afterwards to his native country with the Ply­mouth colony. Forgetting the perfidy of those who made him a captive, he became a warm friend to the English, and continued so to the day of his death. A few days before he died, he desired the gov­ernour to pray that he might go to the Englishman's God in heaven.

In March 1624, Mr. Winslow, agent for the colony, arrived, and together with a good supply of clothing, brought a bull and three heis [...]s which were the first cattle of the kind in this part of America. From these, and others that were afterwards brought over from England, sprang the present multitude of cattle in the northern states. None of the domestic animals were found in America by the first European settlers.

At the close of this year, (1624) the plantation at New-Plymouth, consisted of 180 persons, who lived in thirty two dwelling houses. Their stock was a few cattle and goats, and a plenty of swine and poultry. Their town was impaled about half a mile in compass. On a high mount in the town, they had erected a fort of wood, lime and stone, and a handsome watch tower.

The year 1625 is distinguished by the death of the Rev. Mr. Rob­inson. He died at Leyden in March, in the 50th year of his age. He was truly a great and good man, and lived in great love and harmony with his people. He was held in high estimation by all his acqu [...] ­ance, for his learning, piety, moderation and excellent accomplish­ments. His death was lamented as a public loss, and felt by none more than by his beloved and far distant people at Plymouth. His son [...] ac came over to Plymouth, where he lived to the age of 90 years. His descendants still live in Barnstable county, in Massachusetts.

After the death of Mr. Robinson, the remaining part of his con­gregation were extremely desirous of coming over to their friends [...] Plymouth, and measures were taken for the purpose; yet it was not until the year 1629, that they effected their design.

[Page 321] From this time New England began to flourish. Sir Henry Ros­well and others, had received a patent of Massachusetts from the council of New England. Settlements were successfully enterprized at Salem, Charlestown, Boston, Dorchester and other places, so that in forty years from this time (1629) 120 towns were settled, and forty churches were gathered.

The Laudian persecution was conducted with unrelenting severity; and while it caused the destruction of thousands in England, proved to be a principle of life and vigor to the infant settlements in Amer­ica. Several men of eminence in England, who were the friends and protectors of the Puritans, entertained a design of settling in New England, if they should fail in the measures they were pursuing for the establishment of the liberty, and the reformation of the religion of their own country. They solicited and obtained grants in New England, and were at great pains in settling them. Among these patentees were the Lords Brook, Say and Seal, the Pelhams, the Hampdens and the Pyms; names which afterwards appeared with great eclat. Sir Matthew Boynton, Sir William Constable, Sir A [...] ­ [...]ur Haslerig, and Oliver Cromwell, were actually upon the point of embarking for New England, when Archbishop Laud, unwilling that so many objects of his hatred should be removed out of the reach of his power, applied for, and obtained, an order from the court to put a stop to these transportations. However, he was not able to prevail so far as to hinder New England from receiving vast additions, as well of the clergy, who were silenced and deprived of their living, for non-conformity, as of the laity who adhered to their opin­ions.

The colony of Plymouth remained without a charter, until they were incorporated with Massachusetts in 1691 or 1692. Notwithstanding [...], it was a government de fact [...], and considered as such by king Charles in his letters and orders, which were sent them at various times previ­ous to their incorporation with Massachusetts.

It was in the spring of 1630, that the GREAT CONSPIRACY was en­tered into by the Indians in all parts, from the Narragansets round [...] eastward, to extirpate the English. The colony at Plymouth [...] the principal object of this conspiracy. They well knew that if [...] could effect the destruction of Plymouth, the infant settlement at Massachusetts would fall an easy sacrifice. They laid their plan with much art. Under colour of having some diversion at Plymouth, they i [...]ded to have fallen upon the inhabitants, and thus to have effected their design. But their plot was disclosed to the people at Charles­town, by John Saga [...]ore, an Indian, who had always been a great friend [...] English. This treacherous design of the Indians alarmed the English, and induced them to erect forts and maintain guards, to prevent [...] fatal surprize in future. These preparations, and the firing of [...] guns, so terrified the Indians that they dispersed, relinquish­ed their design, and declared themselves the friends of the Eng­land.

[...] was the vast increase of inhabitants in New England by natu­re regulation, and particularly by emigrations from Great Britain▪ [...] few years, besides the settlements in Plymouth and Massa­chusetts, very flourishing colonies were planted in Rhode Island, Con­necticut, New Haven, and New Hampshire. The dangers to which [...] were exposed from the surrounding Indians, as well as [Page 322] from the Dutch, who, although very friendly to the infant colony at Plymouth, were now likely to prove troublesome neighbours, first in­duced them to think of an alliance and confederacy for their [...] defence. Accordingly in 1643, the four colonies of Plymouth, Mas­sachusetts, Connecticut and New Haven, agreed upon articles of con­federation, whereby a congress was formed, consisting of two com­missioners from each colony, who were chosen annually, and when met were considered as the representatives of "The United Colonies of New England." The powers delegated to the commissioners, [...] much the same as those vested in Congress by the articles of confede­ration, agreed upon by the United States in 1778. The colony [...] Rhode Island would gladly have joined in this confederacy, but Mas­sachusetts, for particular reasons, refused to admit their commissioners. This union subsisted, with some few alterations, until the year [...], when all the charters, except that of Connecticut, were in effect vova­cated by a commission from James the II.

The reader will obtain the best knowledge of the history of [...] England by consulting Hutchinson's History of Massachusetts▪ Hazard's Historical Collections, 4 to, 2 vols. the 2d vol. not yet pub­lished, but ready for the press—Belknap's History of New Hamp­shire—The first letter in Dr. Gordon's History of the American Revo­lution—Gov. Winthrop's Journal—Chalmer's Political Annals— [...] Gookins' Historical Collections of the Indians in New England, pub­lished in Boston, by the Historical Society, in the American Apollo. 17 [...].

VERMONT.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 150 Miles. between 42° 44′ and 45° N. Lat.
Breadth 70 Miles. 1° 35′ and 3° 30′ E. Long. from [...].

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Lower Canada; [...] by Connecticut River, which divides it [...] New Hampshire; south, by Massachusetts; west, by New York.

DIVISIONS.] Vermont is naturally divided by the Green Moun­tain, which [...] from south to north, and divides the state nearly in the middle. Its civil divisions are as follows.

Counties Towns
W. of the Moun. BENNINGTON BENNINGTON
RUTLAND RUTLAND
ADDISON ADDISON
CHITIENDON COLCHESTER
E. of the Moun. ORANGE NEWBURY
WINDSOR WINDSOR
WINDHAM NEW [...]
P [...]T [...]Y

These counties are divided into upwards of 200 townships, which are generally six miles square. In every township is a reserve of [...] rights of land, of 350 acres each, one to be appropriated for the [...] port of public schools; the other to be given in fee to the first [...] ­ister who settles in the township. A part of the townships [...] granted by the governour of New Hampshire, and the other [...] that of Vermont. In those townships granted by the former, a [...] of land is reserved for the support of the gospel in foreign parts [...] those granted by the latter, a college right, and a right for the [...] [Page 323] port of county grammar schools, are reserved. In these reservations, liberal provision is made for the support of the gospel, and for the p [...]cation of common and collegiate education.

RIVERS.] The principal rivers in this state are Michiscoui, La­ [...], Onion, and Otter Creek rivers, which run from east to west in­to Lake Champlain; West, Sexton's▪ Black, Waterquechee, White, [...]panoosuck, Weld's, Wait's, Passumsick, and several smaller rivers [...] [...] from west to east, into Connecticut river. Over the river [...]ille is a natural stone bridge 7 or 8 rods in length. Otter Creek i [...] navigable for boats 50 miles. Its banks are excellent land, being [...]ally overflowed, and enriched. White river takes its name from [...] peculiar whiteness of its water, caused by the clear white stones and gravel which constitute the bed of this river quite to its source. This peculiarity deceives people in regard to its depth. It rises in [...]ter of the state, flows through a rich tract of country free from [...] and empties into the Connecticut 4 miles below Dartmouth Col­ [...], and is from 100 to 150 yards wide, some distance from its mouth. [...]panoosuck is a short, furious river, not more than 40 or 50 [...] wide, emptying into the Connecticut at Norwich. Weld's is al­ [...] short and rapid river, 40 yards across. Passumsick is 100 yards [...] and noted for the quantity and quality of the salmon it produces. In this river, which is settled 20 miles up, are some of the best Town­ships in the state.

LAKES AND SPRINGS.] Memphremagog is the largest lake in this [...]. It is the reservoir of three considerable streams, Black, Barton, and Clyde rivers. One of these rises in Willoughby Lake, and forms a communication between that and lake St. Peter's, in the river St. Lawrence. Issuing from Willoughby's Lake, it empties into Mem­phremagog, and thence, by the name of St. Francis, empties into the St. Peter. This river is not all the way navigable; otherwise it would afford a communication of very great importance to the north­ern part of this state, as the settlers might transport their produce with [...] ease to Montreal or Quebec. Willoughby's Lake furnishes fish [...]ling bass, of an excellent flavour, weighing from 10 to 30 pounds. They form a most delicious feast for the new settlers. People travel [...] miles to this lake, to procure a winter's stock of this fish. Lake [...]zon, in the county of Rutland, gives rise to a branch of Poult­ing river, on which iron works have been erected in the township of for Haven.

In some low lands, over against the great Ox Bow, a remarkable spring was discovered, about 20 years since, which dries up once in two or three years, and bursts out in another place. It has a strong smell of sulphur, and throws up continually a peculiar kind of white sand. A thick yellow scum rises upon the water when settled. Ponds and oth­er collections of water in this state are remarkably clear and transpar­ent, and afford abundance of trout and perch.

MOUNTAINS.] The principal mountain in this state is the one we [...] already mentioned, which divides the state nearly in the center, [...] Connecticut river and Lake Champlain. The ascent from [...] east to the top of this mountain is much easier than from the west, [...] you get to Onion river, where the mountain terminates. The [...]ight of land is generally from 20 to 30 miles from the river, and a­ [...] the same distance from the New York line. The natural growth [...] this mountain, is hemlock, pine, spruce, and other evergreens; [Page 324] hence it has always a green appearance, and on this account has ob­tained the descriptive name of Ver Mons, Green Mountain. On some high parts of this mountain, snow lies till May, and sometimes till June. This chain of mountains passes through Massachusetts and Connecti­cut, and terminates in New Haven.

The other noted mountains is Aschutney, bordering on Connecticut river, in the townships of Windsor and Weathersfield, and Upper Great Monadnock, quite in the N. E. corner of the State.

It is remarkable that the hills and mountains are generally cover­ed on the east sides with what is called hard wood, such as [...], beach, maple, ash, elm, and butternut; the west side is generally covered with evergreens.

CLIMATE.] During the winter season, which commonly lasts from the beginning of November to the middle of April, the inhabitants enjoy a serene sky, and a keen cold air. Snow begins to fall, com­monly, by the first of November; but the permanent snows do not [...] till about the 10th of December, which prevent the ground fre [...] any considerable depth. In April the snow is gradually dissolved by the warm influences of the sun, which moistens and enriches the [...], and vegetation advances with surprising rapidity.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY, SOIL, PRODUCTIONS, &c.} This state, generally speak [...] is hilly but not rocky. [...] of the mountain, from the county of Rutland northward to the Cana­da line, is a flat country well adapted for tillage. The state at la [...]g [...] well watered, and affords the best of pasturage for cattle. Some of the finest beef cattle in the world are driven from this state. [...] also are raised for exportation. The natural growth upon the rivers, i [...] white pines of several kinds, intermingled with low intervales of [...], elm and white oak. Back from the rivers, the land is thickly [...] ­bered with birch, sugar maple, ash, butternut and white oak of an ex­cellent quality. The soil is natural for wheat, rye, barley, oats, [...] hemp, &c. Indian corn, back from the river, is frequently [...] by the frost; but on the river it is raised in as great perfection [...] any part of New England, owing in a great measure to the fogs, [...] ­ing from the river, which either prevent or extract the frost. Th [...] fogs begin as soon as the corn is in danger from frosts, and [...] till cold weather commences. Fruit tro [...]s, in the northern counti [...] not prosper.

TRADE AND MANUFACTURES.] The inhabitants of this state, trade principally with Boston▪ New York and Hartford. The articles of export are pot and pearl ashes, chiefly, beef, horses, grain, some [...] ­ter and cheese, lumber, &c. The inhabitants generally manufacture their own clothing, in the family way. Grain has been raised in [...] plenty within a few years past, that the inhabitants have been [...] to attempt the manufacture of corn spirits. For this purpose six or sev­en stills have already been erected, which yield a sufficient supply [...] the people, and a profit to the owners. Vast quantities of [...] pearl ashes are made in every part of the state. But one of the [...] important manufactures, in this state, is that of maple sugar. It [...] been estimated by a competent judge that the average quantity [...] for every family back of Connecticut river, is 200lbs. a year, [...] man, with but ordinary advantages, in one month, made 550lbs, of [...] quality equal to imported brown sugar. In two towns, in [...] county, containing no more than 40 families, 13 [...]00lbs. of sugar [...] [Page 325] made in the year 1791. The probability is that in a few years, maple su­gar will become an article of export. In some parts of the state, the in­habitants are beginning to line the roads with maple trees. And it would certainly be a wise measure if this practice should become gen­eral throughout the states. Orchards of these trees, planted on sloping hills, so as to render it easy to collect the juice, might be attended with peculiar advantages to the owners.

POPULATION, RELIGION AND CHARACTER.} In 1790, according to the census then taken, this state contained 85,539 inhabitants, consisting chiefly of emigrants from Connecticut and Mas­sachusetts, and their descendants. Two townships in Orange county are settled principally by Scotch people. The body of the people, are O [...]gregationalists. The other denominations are Presbyterians, Baptists and Episcopalians. This state is rapidly peopling. Five years age, the township of Danville, in the county of Orange, was a wildor­ [...] without so much as a single family. Now they have two con­siderable companies of militia; besides a company of light in­ [...]try, dressed in uniform.

The inhabitants of this state are an assemblage of people from va­ [...] places, of different sentiments, manners and habits. They have not lived together long enough to assimilate and form a general character. Assemble together in imagination, a number of individu­al of different nations—consider them as living together amicably, and [...]ing each other through the toils and difficulties of life; and yet r [...]ously opposed in particular religious and political tenets; jea­ [...] of their rulers, and tenacious of their liberties—dispositions which originate naturally from the dread of experienced oppression, and the [...] of living under a free government—and you have a pretty just [...] of the character of the people of Vermont. Indolence is never [...]acteristical feature of the settlers of a new country. Emigrants [...] general are active and industrious. The opposite characters have [...] spirit nor inclination to quit their native spot. The inference [...] that Vermont is peopled with an active, industrious, hardy, frugal [...]; as is really the case. And as it is a maxim that the inhabitants of [...] new countries grow virtuous before they degenerate, it will most probably be so in Vermont.

MILITARY STRENGTH.] In 1788, there were upwards of 17,000 man upon the militia rolls of this state. These consisted of two divi­ [...]nt one on the west, the other on the east side of the mountain. In these two divisions were 7 brigades, consisting of 22 regiments. The [...] of the Vermonteers, or Green Mountain boys, is proverbial.

LITERATURE AND IMPROVEMENTS.] Much cannot be said in fa­ [...] of the present State of literature in this state; but their pros­ [...] in this regard are good. In every charter of a town, as we [...] mentioned, provision is made for schools, by reserving a certain [...] of land solely for their support. The assembly of this State, [...] October session in 1791, passed an act for the establishment of [...] in the town of Burlington, on lake Champlain, on the south [...] of Onion river, and appointed [...]o Trustees. General Ira Allen, [...] of the Trustees, on certain conditions, offers lands, &c. to the [...] of £4000 towards this establishment.

The expediency of opening a communication between the waters of [...] Champlain and Hudson's river; and of rendering the naviga­tion [...] of Connecticut river more easy and advantageous, has been dis­cussed [Page 326] by the legislature of this State; and measures have been adopted to effect the latter, by incorporating a company for the purpose of locking Bellows' falls, who are to complete the work within 4 years from the passing of the act, and to receive a toll for all boats that p [...]s; the toll to be a subject of regulation. The works are already began, and when completed will be of great advantage to the state, by [...] ­itating the exportation of their produce. The other proposed canal between Lake Champlain and Hudson's river, would also be impor­tant, but it is doubtful whether it will, at present, be accompli [...].

CHIEF TOWNS.] In a new and interior country, large, [...] towns are not to be expected. Bennington, situated near the [...] west corner of the state, is one of the largest. It contains about [...] inhabitants, a number of handsome houses, a congregational [...], a court house and goal. A famous battle was fought in or [...] [...] town, during the late war, in 1777, between Brigadier General States, at the head of 800 undisciplined militia, and a detachment of [...] ­eral Burgoyne's army, commanded by Col. Baum. In this action, and the one that succeeded it in the same place, and on the same day, be­tween a reinforcement of the British, under Col. Breymen, and [...] ­eral Starke, who was reinforced by Col. Warner, with a conti [...] regiment, were taken, 4 brass field pieces, and other military stores, and 700 prisoners. The overthrow of these detachments was the first [...] in a grand chain of causes, which finally proved the ruin of the [...] ­al army. This is one of the oldest towns in the state, being first [...] ­tled about the year 1764, and is a thriving town, and has been, till [...] ­ly, the seat of government.

Windsor and Rutland, by a late act of the legislature, are alternate­ly to be the seat of government for 8 years. The former is [...] on Connecticut river, and contains about 1600 inhabitants; the [...] lies upon Otter Creek, and contains upwards of 1400 inhabitants. Both are flourishing towns. Guildford, Brattleborough, [...] Westminster, Weathersfield, Hartland, Norwich and Newbur [...] [...] considerable towns, lying from south to north, on Connecticut [...] Newbury is the shire town or Orange county, which comprehend [...] [...] three eights of the whole state, and contains about 900 inhabitants. It has a court house, and a very elegant meeting house for cong [...] ­tionalists, with a steeple, the first erected in the state. The celeb [...] Coos meadows or intervales, commence about 9 miles below this [...] Newbury court house stands on the high lands back from the river and commands a fine view of what is called the great Ox Bo [...], which is formed by a curious bend in the river. It is one of the most [...] ­riful and fertile meadows in New England. The circumference of [...] Bow, is about 4½ miles; its greatest depth is seven eighths of a mile, con­taining about 450 acres. At the season when nature is dressed in [...] green attire, a view of this meadow from the high lands is truly [...] ­uriant.

[...]aftsbury, Pownal, Manchester, Clarendon, Poultney, [...] Danby and Charlotte, are considerable and flourishing towns [...] the mountain. In the town of Orwell is Mount Independent [...] the southern extremity of Lake Champlain, opposite to which [...] [...] conderoga, in the state of New York.

[Page 327] CURIOSITIES.] There is a very remarkable ledge of rocks in the town of Bradford, in the county of Orange. It lies on the west bank of Connecticut river, and is as much as 200 feet high. It appears to [...]ng over and threaten the traveller as he passes. The space between this ledge and the river, is scarcely wide enough for a road. *

In the township of Tinmouth, on the side of a small hill, is a ve­ry curious cave. The chasm, at its entrance, is about four feet in circumference. Entering this you descend 104 feet, and then opens a spacious room, 20 feet in breadth, and 100 feet in length. The angle of descent is about 45 degrees. The roof of this cavern is of rock, through which the water is continually percolating. The stalactites which bang from the roof appear like icicles on the eves of houses, and are continually increasing in number and magnitude. The bot­tom and sides are daily incrusting with sparr and other mineral sub­stances. On the sides of this subterraneous hall, are tables, chairs, [...], &c. which appear to have been artificially carved. This [...] ornamented room, when illuminated with the candles of the [...], has an enchanting effect upon the eye of the spectator. If we might be indulged in assigning the general cause of these astonishing appearances, we should conclude from the various circumstances ac­companying them, that they arise from water filtrating slowly through [...] incumbent strata; and taking up in its passage a variety of mine [...] substances, and becoming thus saturated with metallic particles, gradually exsuding on the surface of the caverns and fissures, in a qui­escent state, the aqueous particles evaporate, and leave the mineral substances to unite according to their affinities.

At the end of this cave is a circular hole, 15 feet deep, apparently have out, in a conical form, enlarging gradually as you descend, in the form of a sugar loaf. At the bottom is a spring of fresh water, in continual motion, like the boiling of a pot. Its depth has never been founded.

CONSTITUTION.] The inhabitants of Vermont, by their repre­sentatives in convention, at Windsor, on the 25th of December, 1777, declared that the territory called Vermont, was, and of right ought to be, a free and independent state; and for the purpose of maintaining regular government in the same, they made a solemn declaration of [...] rights, and ratified a constitution, of which the following is an [...]ract.

Their declaration, which makes a part of their constitution, asserts [...] all men are born equally free—with equal rights, and ought to en­ [...] liberty of conscience—freedom of the press—trial by jury—pow­er [...] form new states in vacant countries, and to regulate their own internal police—that all elections ought to be free—that all power is originally in the people—that government ought to be instituted for the common benefit of the community—and that the community have a right to reform or abolish government—that every member of soci­ety [Page 328] hath a right to protection of life, liberty and property—and in re­turn is bound to contribute his proportion of the expense of that pro­tection, and yield his personal service when necessary—that he shall not be obliged to give evidence against himself—that the people have a right to bear arms—but no standing armies shall be maintained in time of peace—that the people have a right to hold themselves, their houses, papers, and possessions, free from search or seizure—and there­fore warrants without oaths first made, affording sufficient foundation for them, are contrary to that right and ought not to be granted—that no person shall be liable to be transported out of this state for trial for any offence committed within this state, &c.

By the frame of government, the supreme legislative power is vest­ed in a house of representatives of the freemen of the state of Ver­mont, to be chosen annually by the freemen on the first Tuesday in September, and to meet the second Thursday of the succeeding Octo­ber—This body is vested with all the powers necessary for the legislature of a free state—Two thirds of the whole number of representativ [...] [...] ­lected, make a quorum.

Each inhabited town throughout the state, has a right to send one representative to the assembly.

The supreme executive power is vested in a governour, lieutenant governour, and twelve counsellors, to be chosen annually in the same manner, and vested with the same powers as in Connecticut.

Every person of the age of 21 years, who has resided in the state one whole year next before the election of representatives, and is of a quiet, peaceable behaviour, and will bind himself by his oath, to do what he shall in conscience judge to be most conducive to the best good of the state, shall be entitled to all the privileges of a freeman of this state.

Each member of the house of representatives, before he takes his seat, must declare his belief in one God—in future rewards and pun­ishments, and in the divinity of the scriptures of the Old and New Testament, and must profess the protestant religion.

Courts of justice are to be established in every county throughout the state.

The supreme court, and the several courts of common pleas of this state, besides the powers usually exercised by such courts, have the powers of a court of chancery, so far as relates to perpetuating testi­mony, obtaining evidence from places not within the state, and the care of the persons and estates of those who are non compotes mentis, &c. All prosecutions are to be commenced in the name, and by the authority of the freemen of the state of Vermont. The legislature are to regulate entails so [...] to prevent perpetuities.

All field and staff officers, and commissioned officers of the army, and all general officers of the militia, shall be chosen by the general assembly; and be commissioned by the governour.

Every seventh year, beginning with the year 1785, thirteen persons (none of whom are to be of the council or assembly) shall be chosen by the freemen, and be called 'the council of censors,' whose duty it shall be to enquire whether the constitution has been preserved inviolate in every part—whether the legislative and executive powers have been properly exercised—taxes justly laid and collected—the public monies rightly disposed of—and the laws duly executed.—For these purposes they shall have power to send for persons, papers, &c.—to pass public [Page 329] censures—to order impeachments, and to recommend the repeal of all laws enacted contrary to the principles of the constitution. They are to be vested with these powers for one year only, after the day of their election.

The council of censors, when necessary, may call a convention, to meet two years after their sitting—to alter the constitution—the pro­posed alterations to be published at least six months before the elec­tion of delegates to such convention.

HISTORY.] The tract of country called Vermont, before the late war, was claimed both by New York and New Hampshire; and these interfering claims have been the occasion of much warm altercation, the particulars of which it would be neither entertaining nor useful to detail. They were not finally adjusted till since the peace. When hostilities commenced between Great Britain and her colonies, the inhabitants of this district, considering themselves as in a state of na­ture, and not within the jurisdiction either of New York or New Hampshire, associated and formed for themselves the constitution, of which we have given an abstract. Under this constitution they have continued to exercise all the powers of an independent state, and have been prospered. On the fourth of March, 1791, agreeably to act of Congress of December 6th, 1790, this state became one of the United States, and constitutes the fourteenth, and not the least respectable Pil­lar in the American Union.

NEW HAMPSHIRE.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 168 Miles. between 42° 41′ and 45° 11′ N. Lat.
Breadth 60 Miles. 4° 30′ and 6° 17′ E. Long.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by the Province of Low­er Canada; east, by the District of Main and the Atlantic Ocean; south, by Massachusetts; west, by the western bank of Connecticut river; containing 9,491 squaremiles, or 6,074,240 acres; of which at least 100,000 acres are water. The shape of New Hampshire resembles an open fan; Connecticut river makes the curve, the southern line the shortest, the eastern line the longest side.

CIVIL DIVISIONS.] This state is divided into 5 counties, which are subdivided into townships, most of which are about 6 miles square.

Counties Townships Inhabitants Chief Towns No. Inhab.
Rockingham 46 43,169 Portsmouth, Lat. 43° 5′ 4,720
Exeter 1,722
Concord 1,747
Strafford 24 & 3 lo­cations 23,601 Dover 1,998
Durham 1,247
Hillsborough 37 & 3 lo­cations 28,772 Amherst 2,369
Cheshire 34 32,871 Keen 1,314
Charlestown 1,09 [...]
Grafton 50 & 17 lo­cations 13,472 Haverhill 552
Plymouth 625
Total 214 141,885    

CLIMATE.] See New England.

[Page 330] FACE OF THE COUNTRY.] This state has but about 18 miles of sea­coast, at its southeast corner. In this distance there are several coves for fishing vessels; but the only harbour for ships is the entrance of Piscataqua river, the shores of which are rocky. The shore is mostly a sandy beach, adjoining which are salt marshes, intersected by creeks. From the sea no remarkable high lands in New Hampshire appear, nearer than 20 or 30 miles. The first ridge, by the name of the Blue Hills, passes through Rochester, Barrington, and Nottingham, and the several summits are distinguished by different names. Be­yond these are several higher, detached mountains. Farther back, the mountains rise still higher, and among this third range, Choco­rua, Ossapy and Kyarsarge, are the principal. Beyond these is the lofty ridge which divides the branches of Connecticut and Merrimack rivers, denominated The Height of Land. In this ridge is the cele­brated Monadnock mountain. Thirty miles north of which is S [...] ­pee, and 42 miles further, in the same direction, is Moosehillock moun­tain. The ridge is then continued northerly, dividing the waters of the river Connecticut from those of Saco, and Ameriscoggin. Here the mountains rise [...]uch higher, and the most elevated summits in this range, are the White Mountains. The lands west of this last men­tioned range of mountains, bordering on Connecticut river, are in­terspersed with extensive meadows or intervales, rich and well watered.

MOUNTAINS.] We have already named the most considerable mountains in this state. Several of them require a particular descrip­tion. We begin with the Monadnock, which lies 10 miles north of the southern boundary of the state, and 22 miles east of Connecticut river. The elevation of this mountain above the level of the sea, as measured by James Winthrop, Esq 1780, is 3254 feet. The base of this mountain is about 5 miles in diameter, from north to south, and 3 from east to west. Its summit is a bald rock; and on the sides are some appearances of the explosion of subterraneous fires. In West­river mountain, adjoining Connecticut river, in the township of Ches­terfield, appearances of a similar nature are more visible. About the year 1730, the garrison of Fort Dummer, 4 miles distant, was alarmed with frequent explosions of fire and smoke emitted from the moun­tain. The like appearances have been observed since.

Ossapy mountain lies adjoining the town of Moultonborough, on the north east. In this town it is observed, than in a N. E. storm, the wind falls over the mountain, like water over a dam; and with such force, as frequently to unroof houses.

Moosehillock mountain, is the highest of this chain, the White mountains excepted. It takes its name from the circumstance of its being a remarkable range for Moose. This mountain is about 70 miles westward of the White mountains. From its N. W. side flows Bak­er's river, a branch of Pemigewasset. On this mountain snow has been seen, from the town of Newbury, on the 30th of June and 31st of August; and on the mountains intervening, called Franconia and Lincoln mountains, snow, it is said, lies through the year.

People who live near these mountains, by noticing the various movements of attracted vapours, can form a pretty accurate judg­ment of the weather; and they hence style these mountains their Al­manack. If a cloud is attracted by a mountain, and hovers on its top, they predict rain; and if after rain, the mountain continues capped, they expect a repetition of showers. A storm is preceded for several [Page 331] hours, by a roaring of the mountain, which may be heard 10 or 12 miles.

But the White Mountains are by far the most stupendous of any in this state or in New England, and perhaps are the most remarka­ble of any within the United States. They therefore merit particular notice. The Rev. Dr. Belknap elegantly describes them as follows.—

"They are undoubtedly the highest land in New England, and in clear weather, are discovered before any other land, by vessels coming in to the eastern coast; but by reason of their white appearance, are frequently mistaken for clouds. They are visible on the land at the distance of eighty miles, on the south and southeast sides; they appear higher when viewed from the northeast, and it is said, they are seen from the neighbourhood of Chamble and Quebec. The Indians gave them the name of Agiocochook: They had a very ancient tradi­tion that their country was once drowned, with all its inhabitants, except one Powaw and his wife, who, foreseeing the flood, fled to these mountains, where they were preserved, and that from them the country was re-peopled. * They had a superstitious veneration for the summit, as the habitation of invisible beings; they never venture to ascend it, and always endeavour to dissuade every one from the attempt. From them, and the captives, whom they sometimes led to Canada, through the passes of these mountains, many fictions have been propa­gated, which have given rise to marvellous and incredible stories; particularly, it has been reported, that at immense and inaccessible heights, there have been seen carbuncles, which are supposed to ap­pear luminous in the night. Some writers, who have attempted to given an account of these mountains, have ascribed the whiteness of them, to shining rocks, or a kind of white moss; and the highest summit has been deemed inaccessible, on account of the extreme cold, which threatens to freeze the traveller, in the midst of summer.

Nature has, indeed, in that region, formed her works on a large scale, and presented to view many objects which do not ordinarily oc­cur. A person who is unacquainted with a mountainous country, can­not, upon his first coming into it, make an adequate judgement of heights and distances; he will imagine every thing to be nearer and less than it really is, until, by experience, he learns to correct his ap­prehensions, and accommodate his eye to the magnitude and situation of the objects around him. When amazement is excited by the gran­deur and sublimity of the scenes presented to view, it is necessary to curb the imagination, and exercise judgement with mathematical pre­cision; or the temptation to romance will be invincible.

The White Mountains are the most elevated part of a ridge, which extends N. E. and S. W. to an immense distance. The area of their base, is an irregular figure, the whole circuit of which, is not less than sixty miles. The number of summits within this area, cannot at present be ascertained, the country around them being a thick wilder­ness. The greatest number which can be seen at once, is at Dartmouth, on the N. W. side, where seven summits appear at one view, of which four are bald. Of these the three highest are the most distant, be­ing on the eastern side of the cluster; one of these is the mountain which makes so majestic an appearance all along the shore of the eastern counties of Massachusetts: It has lately been distinguished by the name of MOUNT WASHINGTON.

To arrive at the foot of this mountain, there is a continual ascent [Page 332] of twelve miles, from the plain of Pigwacket, which brings the trav­eller to the height of land, between Saco and Ameriscoggin rivers. At this height there is a level of about a mile square, part of which is a meadow, formerly a beaver pond, with a dam at each end. Here, though elevated more than three thousand feet above the level of the sea, the traveller finds himself in a deep valley. On the east is a steep mountain, out of which issue several springs, one of which is the fountain of Ellis river, a branch of Saco. which runs south; another, of Peabody river, a branch of Amariscoggin, which runs north. From this meadow, towards the west, there is an uninterrupted as­cent on a ridge between two deep gullies, to the summit of Mount Washington.

The lower part of the mountain is shaded by a thick growth of spruce and fin. The surface is composed of rocks, covered with ve­ry long, green moss, which extends from one rock to another, and is, in many places, so thick and strong, as to bear a man's weight. This immense bed of moss, serves as a sponge, to retain the moisture brought by the clouds and vapours, which are frequently rising and gathering round the mountains; the thick growth of wood, prevents the rays of the sun from penetrating to exhale it; so that there is a constant supply of water deposited in the crevices of the rocks, and issuing in the form of springs, from every part of the mountain.

The rocks which compose the surface of the mountain, are, in some parts, state, in others flint; some specimens of rock chrystal have been found, but of no great value. No lime stone has yet been dis­covered, though the most likely rocks have been tried with aqua fortis. There is one precipice, on the eastern side, not only completely per­pendicular, but composed of square stones, as regular as a piece of masonry; it is about five feet high, and from fifteen to twenty in length. The uppermost rocks of the mountain, are the common quartz, of a dark grey colour; when broken, they shew very small shining specks, but there is no such appearance on the exterior part. The eastern side of the mountain, rises in an angle of 45 degrees, and requires six or seven hours of hard labour to ascend it. Many of the precipices are so sleep as to oblige the traveller to use his hands, as well as his feet, and to hold by the trees, which diminish in size, till they de­generate into shrubs and bushes; above these, are low vines, some bearing red, and others blue berries, and the uppermost vegetation is a species of grass, called winter-grass, mixed with the moss of the rocks.

Having surmounted the upper and steepest precipice, there is a large area, called the plain. It is a dry health, composed of rocks covered with moss, and bearing the appearances of a pasture, in the beginning of the winter season. In some openings, between the rocks, there are springs of water, in others, dry gravel. Here the grous or heath bird resorts, and is generally out of danger. The sugar loaf, which stands on this plain, is a pyramidal heap of grey rocks, which, in some places, are formed like winding steps. This pinnacle has been ascended in an hour and a half. The traveller having gain­ed the summit, is recompensed for his toil, if the sky be serene, with a most noble and extensive prospect. On the S. E. side, there is a view of the Atlantic ocean, the nearest part of which, is sixty five miles, in a direct line. On the W. and N. the prospect is bounded by the high lands, which separate the waters of Connecticut and Ameris­coggin rivers, from those of Lake Champlain and St. Lawrence▪ [Page 333] On the south, it extends to the southernmost mountains of New Hampshire, comprehending a view of the Lake Winipiseogee. On every side of these mountains, are long winding gullies, beginning at the precipice below the plain, and deepening in the descent. In winter, the snow lodges in these gullies; and being driven, by the N. W. and N. E. wind, from the top, is deepest in those which are situated on the southerly side. It is observed to lie longer in the spring on the south, than on the N. W. side, which is the case with many other hills in New Hampshire.

During the period of nine or ten months, the mountains exhibit more or less of that bright appearance, from which they are denomi­nated white. In the spring, when the snow is partly dissolved, they appear of a pale blue, streaked with white; and after it is wholly gone, at the distance of 60 miles, they are altogether of the same pale blue, near­ly approaching a sky colour; while at the same time, viewed at the dist­ance of eight miles or less, they appear of the proper colour of the rock. These changes are observed by people who live within constant view of them; and from these facts and observations, it may with certainty be concluded, that the whiteness of them is wholly caused by the snow, and not by any other white substance, for in fact, there is none.

A company of gentlemen visited these mountains in July, 1784, with a view to make particular observations on the several phenomena which might occur. It happened unfortunately, that thick clouds covered the mountains almost the whole time, so that some of the in­struments, which, with much labour, they had carried up, were ren­dered useless.

The height of the mountain was computed, in round numbers, at five thousand and five hundred feet above the meadow, in the valley below and nearly ten thousand feet above the level of the sea. *

These vast and irregular heights, being copiously replenished with water, exhibit a great variety of beautiful cascades; some of which, fall in a perpendicular sheet or spout, others are winding and sloping, others spread, and form a bason in the rock, and them gush in a cataract [...] its edge. A poetic fancy may find full gratification amidst these wild and rugged scenes, if its ardor be not checked by the fatigue of the approach. Almost every thing in nature, which can be supposed capable of inspiring ideas of the sublime and beautiful, is here realized. Aged mountains, stupendous elevations, rolling clouds, impending [...]eks, verdant woods, chrystal streams, the gentle till, and the roar­ing torrent, all conspire to amaze, to soothe and to enrapture.

On the western part of these mountains is a pass, commonly called the notch, which, in the narrowest part, moa [...]res but twenty-two feet, between two perpendicular rocks. From the height above it, a brook descends, and meanders through a meadow, formerly a beaver pond. It is surrounded by rocks, which, on one side, are perpendicular, and on the others, rise in an angle of forty-five degrees—a strikingly picturesque scene! This defile was known to the Indians, who for­merly led their captives through it to Canada; but it had been for­ [...]ten or neglected, till the year 1771, when two hunters passed through it, and from their report, the proprietors of lands, on the northern [Page 334] parts of Connecticut river, formed the plan of a road through it, to the Upper Coos, from which it is distant twenty-five miles. Along the eastern side of the meadow, under the perpendicular roch, is a causeway, of large logs, sunk into the mud by rocks, blown with gun powder, from the mountain. On this foundation, is con­structed a road which passes through the narrow defile at the south end of the meadow, leaving a passage for the rivulet, which glides a­long the western side. This rivulet, is the head of the river Saco; and on the north side of the meadow, at a little distance, is another brook, which is the head of Amonoosuck, a large branch of Connect­icut river. The latitude of this place, is 44° 12′, N.

The rivulet, which gives rise to Saco, descends towards the south; and at a little distance from the defile, its waters are augmented by two streams from the left, one of which descends in a trench of two feet wide, and is called the flume, from the near resemblance which it bears to an artificial flume. Over these are thrown strong bridges; and the whole construction of this road, is firm and durable; much la­bour has been expended upon it, and the neat proceeds of a confiscated estate, were applied to defray the expense. In the descent, the pass wid­ens, and the stream increases; but for eight or ten miles from the north, the mountains on each side are so near, as to leave room only for the river and its intervales; which are not more than half a mile wide. In the course of this descent, several curious objects present themselves to view. On the side of one mountain, is a projection, resembling a shelf, on which stand four large square rocks, in a form resembling as many huge folio volumes. In two or three places, at immense heights, and perfectly inaccessible, appear rocks of a white and red hue, the surface of which is polished, like a mirror, by the constant trickling of water over them. These being exposed to the west and south, are capable, in the night, of reflecting the moon and star beans to the wondering traveller in the deep, dark valley below, and by the help of imagination, are sufficient to give rise to the fiction of carbun­cles.

To encompass these mountains as the roads are laid out, through the eastern and western passes, and round the northern side of the whole cluster, it is necessary to travel more then seventy miles, and to send eight considerable rivers, beside many smaller streams. The distance between the heads of rivers, which pursue such different courses, from this immense elevation, and which fall into the sea, so many hundred miles asunder, is so small, that a traveller may, in the course of one day, drink the waters, of Saco, Ameriscoggin and Connecticut rivers. These waters are all perfectly limpid and sweet, excepting one brook, on the eastern side of Mount Washington, which has a saponac [...] taste; and is covered with a very thick and strong froth. It is said that there is a part of the mountain where the magnetic needle refuses to traverse; this is probably caused by a body of iron one. It is also [...] that a mineral, supposed to be lead, had been discovered, near the east­ern pass; but that the spot cannot now be found. What stores the bowels of these mountains contain, time must unfold; all searches for subterraneous treasures, having hitherto proved fruitless. The [...] certain riches which they yield, are the freshets, which bring down the soil, to the intervales below, and form a fine mould, producing, by the aid of cultivation, corn and herbage, in the most luxuriant plen­ty. *

[Page 335] RIVERS.] Five of the largest streams in New England, receive more of less of their waters from this state. These are Connecticut, Ameriscoggin, Saco, Merrimack and Piscataqua rivers.

Connecticut river rises in the Highlands which separate the United States from the British Province of Lower Canada. It has been sur­veyed about 25 miles beyond the 45th degree of latitude, to the head spring of its northwestern branch. It is settled all the way nearly to its source. Its general course is about S. S. W. It extends along the western side of New Hampshire, about 170 miles, and then passes into Massachusetts. The rivers which it receives from Vermont, on the western side, have been already mentioned. Besides smaller streams, it receives from New Hampshire, Upper Amonoosuck, which passes through excellent meadows: Israel river, a romantic stream, border­ed with fine land, as is John's river, a deep, muddy stream, 25 or 30 yards wide, 6 miles below Israel river. This country is called Upper Coos. Just above the town of Haverhill in Lower Coos, falls in Great of Lower Amonoosuck, 100 yards wide—and which, 2 miles from its mouth, receives Wild Amonoosuck, 40 yards wide, from Franconia and Lincoln mountains. Two or three hours heavy rain rises the water in this river several feet, and occasions a current so furious, as to put in motion stones of a foot in diameter; but its violence soon subsides. As you proceed south to the Massachusetts line you pass Sugar, Cold and Ashuelot rivers.

Connecticut river, in its course between New Hampshire and Ver­mont, has two considerable falls; the first are called Fifteen Mile Falls, between Upper and Lower Coos—The river is rapid for 20 miles. At walpole is a second remarkable fall, formerly known by the name of the Great Fall, now denominated Bellows' Falls. The breadth of the river above them, is, in some places 22, in others not above 16 rods. The depth of the channel is about 25 feet and commonly runs full of water. In Sept. 1792, however, owing to the severe drought, the water of the river, it is said, "passed within the space of 12 feet wide and 2½ feet deep." A large rock divides the stream into two chan­ [...], [...]ch about 90 feet wide. When the water is low, the eastern [...]nel is dry, being crossed by a bar of solid rock, and the whole stream falls into the western channel, where it is contracted to the [...]dth of 16 feet, and flows with astonishing rapidity. The per­pendicular height of this fall has not been ascertained, not the depth of the water below it. There are several pitches one above another, in the length of half a mile, the largest of which is that where the [...] divides the stream. Notwithstanding the velocity of the current, the salmon pass up the fall, and are taken many miles above; but the [...] proceed no farther. This is the famous fall which is so extrava gently and ludicrously described in an anonymous publication, fill­ [...] with such extravagant falsehoods, commonly known by the title of "Peters' history of Connecticut."

On the steep sides of the island rock, hang several arm chairs, fastened [...]ladders, and secured by a counterpoise, in which fishermen set to catch [...] with dipping nets. In 1784, a bridge of timber, constructed by Col. Hale, was projected over this fall, 365 feet long▪ and supported in the middle by the great rock, under which the highest floods pass without detriment. This is the first and only bridge that has been erected upon this river, but it is in contemplation to erect another, [...] miles above, at the middle [...] of Agar falls, where the passage [Page 336] for the water between the rocks is about 100 feet wide. This place is in the township of Lebanon, two miles below Dartmouth College. This beautiful river, in its whole length, is lined on each side, with a great number of the most flourishing and pleasant towns in the United States. In its whole course it preserves a distance of from 80 to 100 miles from the sea coast.

Merrimack river is formed by the confluence of Pemigewassat and Winnipiseogee rivers; the former is a very rapid river, and springs from a white mountain, west of the noted mountains of that name; and before its junction with the Winnipiseogee branch, it receives from the west, Baker's river, a pleasant stream, forty miles in length, and several smaller streams. The Winnipiseogee branch, rises from the Lake of the same name. The stream which issues from the take is small, and in its course passes through a bay 12 miles long, and from 3 to five broad. A few miles from its entrance into the Pemi­gewasset, is a place called the Wares, remarkable for the number of sal­mon and shad which are here caught. The river is wide, and so [...] low that the fishermen turn the course of the river, in a short time or compress it into a narrow channel, where they fix their Gillnets, and take the fish as they pass up the stream. After the Pemigewassge re­ceives the waters of Winnipiseogee, it takes the name of [...] ­mack; and after a course of about 90 miles, first in a southerly, and then in an easterly direction, and passing over Hookset, Amu [...], and Pantacket Falls, empties into the sea at Newburyport [...] [...] the west it receives, Blackwater, Contoocook, Piscataquoag, S [...] ­gan Nashua, and Concord rivers; from the east, Bowcook, Su [...] Cohas, Beaver, Spicket and Powow rivers. Contoocook heads [...] Monadnock mountain, is very rapid, and 10 to 12 miles from its [...] is 100 yards wide, just before its entrance into the Merrimack it [...] and forms a beautiful island of about 5 or 6 acres. This island remarkable as being the spot where a Mrs. Duston performed an [...] ordinary exploit. This woman had been taken by a party of [...] from Haverhill in Massachusetts, and carried to this island. The [...] 8 or 10 in number, fatigued, and thinking themselves secure, fall [...] She improved this opportunity to make her escape, and that she [...] effect it without danger of being pursued, she, with one of [...] tomahawks killed them all, and scalped them, and took their [...] and returned down the river to Haverhill, and carried the [...] Boston, where she was generously rewarded.

A bridge has lately been projected over Amuskeag falls, 556 [...] in length, and 80 feet wide, supported by 5 piers, and an [...] ­ment on each side; the top of the bridge is 30 feet from the bottom the river. In the construction of the wood work, 2,000 tons [...] ­ber were used. And what is remarkable, this bridge was [...] passable for travellers, in 57 days, after it was begun. Two other [...] are building over this river, in Massachusetts.

"The Piscataqua is the only large river whose whole cour [...] New Hampshire. Its head is a pond in the N. E. corner of [...] of Wakefield, and its general course thence, to the sea, is [...] about 40 miles. It divides New Hampshire from York [...] the District of Main, and is called Salmon-fall river, from its [...] to the lower falls at Berwick; where it assumes the name of [...] wichawannock, which it bears till it meets with Cochecho rivers, [...] comes from Dover, when both run together in one channel, [...] ­ton's [Page 337] point, where the western branch meets it. From this junction to the sea, the river is so rapid that it never freezes; the distance is seven miles, and the course generally form S. to S. E. The western branch is formed by Swamscot river, which comes from Exeter, Winnicot river, which comes through Greenland, and Lamprey riv­er, which divides New market from Durham; these empty into a bay, four miles wide, called the Great Bay. The water in its further progress it contracted into the a lesser bay, and then it receives Oyster river, which runs through Durham, and Back river, which come from Dover, and at length meets with the main stream at Hilton's point. The tide rises into all these bays, and branches as far as the lower falls in each river, and forms a most rapid current, especially at the season of the freshets, when the ebb continues about two hours longer than the flood; and were it not for the numerous eddies, formed by the in­dentings of the shore, the ferries would then be impassable.

At the lower falls in the several branches of the river, are landing places, whence lumber and other country produce is transported, and vessels or boats from below discharge their lading: So that in each river there is a convenient trading place, not more than twelve of fif­teen miles distant from Portsmouth, with which there is constant com­munication by every tide. Thus the river, from its form, and the situation of its branches, is extremely favourable to the purposes of navigation and commerce.

At Dover is an high neck of land between the main branch of Pas­ [...]a and Back river, about two miles long, and half a mile wide, rising gently along a fine road, and declining on each side like a ship's [...] It commands an extensive and variegated prospect of the riv­ere, bays, adjacent shores, and distant mountains. It has often been [...] by travellers as an elegant situation for a city, and by [...] gentlemen for a fortress. The first settlers pitched here, but the trade has long since been removed to Cochecho falls, about four miles farther up; and this beautiful spot is almost deserted of inhab­ [...]." *

Amariscoggin and Saco rivers, are principally in the District of Main, and will be described under that head.

LAKES.] Winnipisiogee Lake, is the largest collection of wa­ter in New Hampshire. It is about 21 miles in length, from S. E. [...] W. and of very unequal breadth, from 3 to 12 miles. It is full of islands, and is supplied with numerous rivulets from the surround­ing mountains. This lake is frozen about 3 month in a year, and [...] sleighs and teams, from the circumjacent towns, cross it on the [...]. In summer it is navigable its whole length. The landing on the [...] [...] side of the lake is 26 miles from Dover landing, where the [...] flows.

The other considerable lakes, are Umbagog, in the N. E. corner of the state, and partly in the District of Main, Squam, Sunnapee, and [...] Ossapee.

SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.] Of these there is a great variety in the state. The intervale lands upon the margin of the large rivers [...] the most valuable, because they are overflowed and enriched every [...] by the water from the uplands, which brings down a fat flame [...] sediment. There are generally two state of intervale lands, on the [Page 338] borders of the large rivers, one is overflowed every year, the other, which is considerably higher, only in very high freshets. These in­tervale lands are of various breadth, according to the near or remote situation of the hills. On Connecticut river, they are from a quarter of a mile to a mile and a half on each side; and it is observable that they yield wheat in greater abundance and perfection, than the same kind of soil, east of the height of land. These lands in every part of the state, yield all the other kinds of grain, in the greatest perfection; but are not so good for pasture as the upland of a proper quality. The wide spreading hill are generally much esteemed as warm and rich; rocky, moist land, is accounted good for pasture; drained swamps have a deep mellow soil; and the valleys between hills are generally very productive.

Apples and pairs are the most common, and the principal fruits cul­tivated in this state. No good husbandman thinks his farm com­plete without an orchard.

Agriculture is the chief business of the inhabitants of this state, Beef, pork, mutton, poultry, wheat, rye, Indian corn, barley, pulse, butter, cheese, flax, hemp, hops, esculent plants and roots, articles which will always find a market, may be produced in almost any quantity in New Hampshire.

TRADE AND MANDEACTURES.] The inhabitants in the south­western quarter of this state generally carry their produce to Boston. In the middle and northern part, as far as the Lower Coos, they trade at Portsmouth. Above the Lower Coos, there are yet no convenient roads directly to the sea coast. The people on the upper branches of Saco river, find their nearest market at Portland, in the District of Main; and thither the inhabitants of Upper Coos have generally car­ried their produce; some have gone in the other direction to New York market. But from a survey made in 1782, it was found that a road from the upper Amonoosuck, which empties into Connecticut River, to the head of navigation, in Kennebeck river, is very practicable. The distance 80 or 90 miles; and for a third part of that distance from Ken­nebeck, there are already roads and settlements.

The articles and the quantity of each, exported and imported into the port of Pascataqua, in two years following Oct, 1st, 1789, will ap­pear from the following tables taken from Dr. Belknap's History.

TABLE of Exportation form the port of Pascataqua, from October [...], 1789, to October 1, 1791.
Articles exported To Europe. W. Ind. N. S. Afri. Tot.
1000 feet of Pine Boards 6247 11622 96 69 18034
Do. feet of oak plank 378 26     404
Do. staves and heading 1317 1608 44   2969
Do. clapboards 2 19     21
Do. shingles   268     2689
Do. hoops   79¼ 7   86¼
Feet of oar rafters 47000 950     47950
Tons of pine timber 88½ 86     174½
Do. oak timber 254 20     271
Frames of houses   12     12
Pine masts 41 4     45
Spruce spars 13 72     85
Shook hogsheads   2079     2079
Waggons   2     2
Pairs of cart wheels   14     14
Sets of yokes and bows   28     28
Boats   30     30
Handspikes 80       80
Quintals of dry fish 250 26207     26457
Barrels of pickled fish   501     501
Do. Whale oil   120     120
Do. Tar 1613 60     1673
Casks of flax seed 1798       1798
Barrels of beef   2775 2   2777
Do. pork   9 1   10
Do. rice       2 2
Bushels of Indian corn   391   2000 2391
oxen and cows   577 33   6 [...]0
Horses   207 2   209
Sheep   261 229   490
Gallons of N. E. rum     150 1449 1599
Do. Madeira wine   845     845
Thousands of bricks   129     129
Tons of pot ash 88½       88½
Do. pearl ash 30 [...]       30½
Bores of candles   28     28

Total value of exportation for two years 296,839 dollars 51 cents.

TABLE of Importation into the Port of P [...]scataqua, from Octo­ber 1, 1789, to October 1, 1791.
Articles imported from Europe. W. Indies. No. Sco [...]a Total.
Gallons of rum   138,911   130911
Do. gin   22½   22½
Do. molasses   270,785   270,785
Do. wine from Madeira       4721
Do. Porter 457     457
lbs of unrefined sugar   546,648   546,648
Do. loaf sugar     77 77
Do. Coffee   68,633   68,633
Do. cotton   17,564   17,564
Do. cocoa   27,944   27,944
Do. Cheese 1056     1056
Do. tea 2696 86   2782
Do. twine 2204     2204
Do. nails 16890     16,890
Hundreds of cordage 17,1,7     17,1,7
Do. hemp 940--     940—
Bushels of salt ( part) ( part)   98,336
Do. sea coal 3131     3131
lbs of steel unwrought 16527     16527
Do. bar and sheet lead 4336     4336
Grindstones     (a few not as­certained)  

N. B."What comes coast ways from any of the United States cannot be ascertained; as no regular entries are made where only the produce of the United States is on board: except accompanied with more than two hundred dollars value of foreign articles. The value of imported articles is generally governed by the Boston market."

TABLE of CLEARANCES at the Port of Pascataqua, from Oct­ober 1, 1789, to October 1, 1791.
France Ships and Snows. Brigantines Schooners Sloops Total of vessels American tonnage French ditto British ditto Portuguese ditto Total of tonnage
French West Indies 17 70 39 10 136 16616 264     16880
St. Peter's and Miquelon     8 1 9 428 34     462
England 16 25 1   42 6725   441   7166
Scotland   4     4 616       616
Ireland 1 3     4 666       666
British West Indies 8 3 4 1 16     3134   3134
Nova Scotia     12   12     502   502
Portugal                    
Portuguese Islands 1       1       162 162
Holland and Plantations   2     2 233       233
Denmark and Islands                    
Africa     1   1 110       110
Coasting and cod fishery     40 10 50 1166       1166
Total 43 107 105 22 277 26360 298 1077 162 31097
Statement of the FISHERIES at Pascataqua and its neigh­bourhood.
Schooners 27 employed in the Cod and Scale Fishery annually.
Boats 20
Tonnage 630
Seamen 2 [...]0

[Page 341] The Schooners, Boats, and Seamen belonging to the Isles of Shoals, are not included in the above estimation.

Product of the Fishery in the year 1791.
Quintals made Merchantable fish 5170
Jamaica ditto 14217
Seale ditto 6463
Total 25850

The fish made at the Isles of Shoals are included in this state­ment.

The success of the fishery in this season was uncommonly good.

The staple commodities of New Hampshire are ships, lumber, pro­visions, fish, horses, pot and pearl ashes, and flax feed.—Ships are built in all the towns contiguous to the river Pascataqua and its branch­es. The number of ships, built in 1790, was 8; in 1791, 20.

The number of ships and other vessels belonging to the Port of Pas­cataqua, in 1791, was as follows—Above 100 tons, 33—Under 100 tons, 50; in all 83.

The people in the country generally manufacture their own cloth­ing; and considerable quantities of tow cloth for exportation. The other manufactures are pot and pearl ashes, maple, sugar, bricks and pottery, and some iron, not sufficient, however, for home consump­tion, though it might be made an article of exportation.

BANK.] By act of assembly, of January 1792, a Bank, by the name of, "The Bank of New Hampshire," was established, to continue 50 years, under the management of a President and seven directors. The capital stock is 60,000 dollars: and the stockholders have liberty to increase it to 200,000 dollars specie, and 100,000 dollars in any other estate.

POPULATION AND [...].] The number of inhabitants in 1790, has been mentioned in the preceding table of divisions. In 1767 they were estimated at 52,700. The mean increasing ratio per annum since. D. [...] at 1883. According to this mode of computation, the [...] of people in New Hampshire, has actu­ally doubled in [...] were years of war.

Dr. Belknap [...] [...] of instances of remarkable lon­g [...]ity in this [...]. In [...] [...] of the first settlers were liv­ing in 1785, [...] years of age. In London­derry, the [...] years, and some to 104. One Robert [...] Wakefield, in 1787, aged 115. He [...] from Port [...]mouth to Boston, 66 miles, in one [...]. He performed this journey the last time [...].

The inhabitants of New Hampshire, like the settlers in all new countries, are in general, a [...] round, active, brave people. The advantages of easy [...] have not been to generally enjoyed, as good men have [...] of which there has been a deficiency of [...] the various depart­ments of government [...] the means of infor­mation and improvement [...] and extended, and this political evil, in a great [...].

[Page 342] "The free indulgence of spiritous liquors, has been and is now, one of the greatest faults of many of the people of New Hampshire; espe­cially in the neighbourhood of the river Pascataqua and its branches, and wherever the business of getting lumber forms the principal em­ployment of the people. In travelling up the country it affords plea­sure to observe the various articles of produce and manufacture com­ing to market; but in travelling down the country it is equally dis­gustful to meet, the same teams returning loaded with casks of rum, a­long with fish, salt and other necessary articles. Among husband­men, cyder is their common drink. Malt liqour is not so frequently used, as its wholesomeness deserves. But after all, there are no per­sons more robust and healthy, than those, whole only or principal drink, is the simple element, with which nature has universally and bountifully supplied this happy land." *

COLLEGE, ACADEMIES, &c.] The only college in this State is in the township of Hanover, situated on a beautiful plain about half a mile east of Connecticut river, inlatitude 43° 33. It was named Dart­mouth College. after the Right Honourable William Ears of Dartmouth, who was one of its principal benefactors. It was founded by the late pious and benevolent Dr. Eleazer Whe [...]lock. who, in 1769, obtained a royal charter, wherein ample privileges were granted, and suitable provision made for the education and instruction of youth of the In­dian tribes, in reading, writing and all parts of learning which should appear necessary and expedient for civilizing and christanizing the children of Pagans, as well as in all liberal arts and sciences, and also of English youths and any others. The very humane and laudable attempts which have been made to christianize and educate the In­dians, have not, through their native untractableness, been crowned with that success which was hoped and expected. Its situation, in a frontier country, exposed it, during the late war, to many incon­veniencies, which impeded its property. It flourished, however, amidst all its embarrassments, and is now one of the most growing seminaries in the United States.

The funds of this college consist chiefly in lands, amounting to a­bout 80,000 acres, which are increasing in value, in proportion to the growth of the country. Twelve hundred acres he contiguous to the col­lege, and are capable of the best improvement. Twelve thousand acres lie in Vermont. A tract of 8 miles square was granted by the assembly of New Hampshire, in 1789. The revenue of the college, arising from the lands, amounts annually to £140. By contracts already made, it will amount in four years to £450; and in twelve years to £650. The income from tuition is about £600 per annum.

The number of under graduates in 1790, was about 150; they have since increased. A grammar school of about 50 or 60 scholars, is an­nexed to the college.

The students are under the immediate government and instruction of a President, who is also professor of history: a professor of mathe­matics and natural philosophy, a professor of languages and two tu­tors. In the 22 years since the college was founded, 470 students have received degrees, 1 [...]0 of whom are, or have been ministers of the gospel, and 448 are now living.

The college is furnished with a handsome library and a philosophical apparatus tolerably complete. A new college building of wood, 150 by 50 feet, and three stories high, was erected in 178 [...], and since [...] [Page 343] containining 36 rooms for students. Its situation is elevated, healthful and pleasant, commanding an extensive prospect to the west. There are three other public buildings belong to the College.

There are a number of academies in this State: the principal of which is at Exeter, founded and endowed by the Hon. John Philips. LLD. of Exeter, and incorporated by act of assembly in 1781, by the name of "Philips's Exeter Academy." It is a very respectable and useful institution, under the inspection of a board of trustees, and the immediate government and instruction of a preceptor and an assistant. It has a fund of nearly £10,000 one fifth of which is in lands not yet productive. The present and income is £480. It has commonly between 50 and 60 students.

An Academy, at New Ipswich, was incorporate in 1789; and has a fund of about £1000, and generally from 40 to 50 scholars.

There is another academy at Atkinson, sounded by the Hon. Na­ [...]aiel Pcabody, who has endowed it with a conation of 1000 acres of land. It was incorporated in 1790.

At Amherst, an academy was incorporated in 1791, by the name of the "Aurean Academy." Similar institutions are forming at Charles­town, Concord and other places, which, with the peculiar attention which has lately been paid to schools, by the legislature, and the estab­lishment of social libraries in several towns, afford a pleasing prospect of the increase of literature and useful knowledge in this State.

CHIEF TOWNS.] Portsmouth is the largest town in this State. It is about two miles from the sea, on the south side of Pascataqua riv­er. It contains about 610 dwelling houses, and nearly as many other buildings, besides those for public uses, which are three congregation­al churches, one episcopal, one universalist, and state house, market house, four school houses, and a work house.

Its harbour is one of the finest on the continent, having a suffi­cient depth of water for vessels of any burthen. It is defended a­gainst storms by the adjacent land, in such a manner, as that ships may securely ride there in any season of the year. Besides, the har­bour is so well fortified by nature that very little art will be necessary to render it impregnable. Its vicinity to the sea renders it very con­venient for naval trade. A light house, with a single light, stands at the entrance of the harbour. Ships of war have been built here; a­mong others, the America, of 74 guns, launched Nov. 1782, and pre­sented to the King of France, by the Congress of the United States.

Exeter is 15 miles S. W. from Portsmouth, situated at the head of navigation, upon Swam [...]cot, or Exeter river. The tide rises here 11 feet, it is well situated for a manufacturing town, and has already a duck manufactory, in its infancy—6 saw mills, a fulling mill, slitting mill, paper mill, snuff mill, two chocolate and to grist mills, iron works and a printing office. The public buildings are two congre­gational churches, an academy, a new and handsome court house and a goal. The public offices of the State are kept here. Formerly this town was famous for ship building, but this business has not flourished since its interruption by the war.

Concord is a pleasant, flourishing, island town, situated on the west bank of Merrimack river; [...] miles W. N. W. from Portsmouth. The general court, of late have commonly held their sessions here; and from its central situation and a thriving back country, it will probably [Page 344] soon become the permanent seat of government. Much of the [...] of the upper country centers in this town.

Dover, Amhert, Keen. Charlestown, Plymouth and Haverhill, [...] the other most considerable towns in this State. Haverhill, is a [...] thriving town, on the east side of Connecticut river, in Lower Coun [...]. It is the most considerable town in the country of Grafton, and [...] a well constructed court house and a congregational church. In is [...] a bed of iron one, which has yielded some profit to the proprietor [...] also a quarry of free stone, from which the people are supplied [...] chimney pieces, hearth stone, &c. It has also a fulling mill and [...] oil mill, and many other excellent mill seats.

CURIOSITIES AND CANAL.] In the township of Chester, is [...] circular eminence, half a mile in diameter, and 400 feet high, [...] Rattlesnake hill. On the south side, 10 yards from its base, is them [...] ­trance of a cave called the Devil's Den, in which is a room 15 or 20 [...] square and 4 feet high, floored and circled by a regular rock, from the upper part of which are dependent many excrescences, nearly in the [...] and size of a part, and when approached by a torch throw out a spark­ling lustre of almost every hue. Many frightful stories have been told of this cave, by those who delight in the marvellous. It is a cold, dreary, gloomy place.

In the town of Durham is a rock, computed to weigh 60 or 70 tons. It lies so exactly poised on another rock, as to be easily mov­ed with one finger. It is on the top of a hill, and appears to be nat­ural. In the township of Atkinion, in a large meadow, there is a small island of 6 or 7 acres, which was formerly loaded with valuable pine timber, and other forest wood. When the meadow is overflow­ed, by means of an artificial dam, this island rises with the water, which is sometimes 6 feet. Near the middle of the island is a small pond, which has been gradually lessening ever since it was known, and is now almost covered with verdure. In this place a pole 50 feet long has disappeared, without finding bottom. In the water of that pond, there have been fish in plenty, which, when the meadow has been overflowed, have appeared there, and when the water has been drawn off, have been left on the meadow, at which time the island settles to its usual place.

In the year 1791, a canal was cut through the marshes, which opens and inland navigation, from Hampton, through Salisbury, into Merri­mack river, for about 8 miles. By this passage, laded boats may be conducted with the utmost ease and safety.

RELIGION.] The principal denominations of christians in this State, are Congregationalists, Presbyterians, Episcopalians, Baptists and Quakers. There is a small society of Sandemanians, and another of Universalists, in Portsmouth. For the distinguishing characteristics of these several sects, see the general account of the United States, ar­ticle RELIGION.

"The People in general throughout the state, are professors of the christian religion its some form or other. There is however, a sort of wise men, who pretend to reject it; but they have not yet been able to substitute a better in its place." *

CONSTITUTION.] The citizens of this State have lately form [...] for themselves a constitution of government, upon the same gene [...] principles with their former one, which is not yet published.

[Page]

THE DISTRICT OF MAIN from the latest Surveys

[Page 345] HISTORY.] The first discovery made by the English of any part of New Hampshire, was in 1614, by Captain John Smith, who rang­e the shore from Penobscot to Cape Cod; and in this rout, discover­ed the river Pascataqu [...]. On his return to England, he published a description of the country, with a map of the coast, which he pre­sented to Prince Charles, who gave it the name of NEW ENGLAND. The first settlement was made in 1623.

New Hampshire was for many years under the jurisdiction of the Governor of Massachusetts, yet they had a separate legislature. They ever bore a proportionable share of the expenses and levies in all en­terprises, expeditions and military exertions, whether planned by the colony or the crown. In every stage of the opposition that was made to the inoroachments of the British parliament, the people, who ever had a high sense of liberty, cheerfully bore their part. At the com­mencement of hostilities, indeed, while their council was appointed by royal mandamus, their patriotick ardour was checked by these crown officers. But when freed from this restraint, they flew eager­ly to the American standard, when the voice of their country declar­ed for war, and their troops had a large share of the hazard and fatigue, is well as of the glory of accomplishing the late revolution.

As the best and only history of this state, the reader is referred to the Rev. Dr. Belknap's, published complete, in 3 vols. 8vo. in 1792, written in a pure, neat, historic stlyle—The two first volumes contain the history of New Hampshire; the third contains "A geographical description of the State, with sketches of its natural history, produc­ [...] and improvements, laws and government," and is replete a curious and useful information, and interspersed with many [...]emous and philosophical remarks. From this volume much distance has been derived, in making the foregoing compilation.

DISTRICT OF MAIN. [BELONGING TO MASSACHUSETTS.]

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 170 Miles. between 4° and 9° E. Lon. Sq. miles. 21750
Breadth 125 Miles. 43° and 48° N. Lat. Sq. Miles. 21750

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Lower Canada, from which it is separated by the high lands: east, by the river St. Croix, * and a line drawn due north from its [Page 346] source to the said highlands, which divides it from the Province of New Brunswick; south, by the Atlantic Ocean; west, by New Hamp­shire.

The Old Province of Main (included in the above limits) is bound­ed on the west by New Hampshire; south by the Atlantic ocean, and north and northeast by the land, called in some maps Sagadahock. It was supposed at the time of its being made a province, to have been 120 miles square; but by a settlement of the line, in 1737, on the part, or side adjoining New Hampshire, the form of the land was reduced from a square to that of a diamond. The Province of Main contains, according to Douglas, about 9,600 square miles.

DIVISIONS.] The District of Main is divided into five counties, viz.

Counties. No. Inhabitants. Chief Towns. Inhabitants.
York 28,821 York 2,900
Cumberland 25,450 Portland Lat.43° 43′ 2,240
Lincoln 29 962 Pownalborough 2,055
Hallowell 1,194
Waldoborough 1,210
Hancock 9,549 Penobscot 1,048
Washington 2,758 Machias 818
Total 96,540    

FACE OF THE COUNTARY, SOIL AND CLIMATE.} The District of Main, though an elevated tract of country, cannot be called mountainous. A great proportion of the lands are arable and exceedingly fertile, particularly between Penobscot and Kencbeck riv­ers. On some parts of the sea coast, the lands are but indifferent; but this defect might easily be remedied, by manuring it with a marine vegetable, called rock weed, which grows on the rocks between high and low water mark, all along the shores. It makes a most excellent manure, and the supply is immense. It generally grows, in this Dis­trict, on all the shores that are washed by the sea; and the breadth of the border is in proportion to the height the tide rises, which, in the eastern part of the district, is nearly 30 feet. It is estimated that there are 4000 acres of this rock weed on this coast, and that each acre will produce annually 20 loads, making in the whole 80,000 loads of the best manure, 10 loads of which spread upon an acre, is reck­oned sufficient for three years. The country has a large proportion of dead swamps, and sunken lands, which are easily drained, and leave a rich, fat soil. The interior country is universally represented as be­ing of an excellent soil, well adapted both for tillage and pasture—The lands in general are easily cleared, having but little under brush.

The District of Main may naturally be considered in three divi­sions—The first comprehending the tract lying east of Penobscot river, of about 4.500.000 acres—The second, and best tract, of about 4,000▪000 acres, lying between Penobscot and Kenecbeck river.—The third, first settled and most populous at present, west of Kenebeck river, con­taining also about 4,000▪000 acres.

[Page 347] The climate does not materially differ from the rest of New Eng­land. The weather is more regular in the winter, which usually lasts, with severity, from the middle of December, to the last of March; during this time the ponds and fresh water rivers are passable on the ice, and sleighing continues uninterrupted by thaws, which are com­mon in the three southern in New England States. Although vegetation, in the spring, commences earlier in these states than in the District of Main, yet in the latter it is much more rapid. The elevation of the [...] in general—the purity of the air, which is rendered sweet and [...]brious by the balsamic qualities of many of the forest trees—the [...] streams, both large and small, which abundantly water this country, and the regularity of the weather, all unite to render this one of the healthiest countries in the world.

RIVERS, LAKES, &c.] This district has a sea coast of about 240 miles, in which distance there is an abundance of safe and commodi­ [...] harbours; besides which there is a security given to navigation, [...] [...] part of the coast, by what is called the inland passage. Almost the whole coast is lined with islands, among which vessels may gener­ally anchor with safety.

The country of which we are speaking, is watered by many large and small rivers. The principal are the following, as you proceed from east to west. St. Croix, a short river, issuing from a large [...] in the vicinity of St. John's river, remarkable only for its [...]ming a part of the eastern boundary of the United States. Next in Passamaquaddy river, which with the Schoodiac from the west, [...] by one mouth into Passamaquaddy bay. Opposite Mount [...] island, which is about 15 miles long and 12 broad, Union river [...] into a large bay. A short distance west is the noble Penobscot, which rises in two branches from the highlands. Between the source of the west fork, and its junction with the east, is Moosehead lake 30 or 40 miles long and 15 wide. The eastern branch passes through several small­er lakes. From the Forks, as they are called, the Penobscot Indians pass to Canada, up either branch, principally the west, the source of which they say is not more than 20 miles from the waters that empty into the river St. Lawrence. At the Forks is a remarkable high mountain. from the Forks down to Indian Old Town, situated on an island in this river, is about 60 miles, 40 of which the water flows in a still, smooth stream, and in the whole distance there are no falls to inter­rupt the passing of boats. In this distance, the river widens and em­braces a large number of small islands; and about half way receives two considerable tributary streams, one from the east and the other from the west, whose mouths are nearly opposite each other. About so rods below Indian Old Town, are the great Falls, where is a carry­ing place of about 20 rods; thence 12 miles to the head of the tide, there are no falls to obstruct boats. Vessels of 30 tons, come within a mile of the head of the tide. Thence 35 miles to the head of the bay, to the site of old Fort Pownal, the river is remarkably straight, and [...] navigated. Passing by Majabagaduse, on the east, 7 miles, and [...] head, 20 miles further, on the west, you enter the ocean.

Proceeding westward, over several small creeks, you come to Ken­ [...]eck, one of the finest rivers in this country. One branch of it rises in the highlands, a short distance from a branch of the [...] which empties into the St. Lawrence. Another branch rises in [...] head Lake. In its course it receives sandy river from the [...] Sebasticook and several others from the [...], and passes to [Page 348] sea by Cape Small Point. It is navigable for vessels of 150 tons, up­wards of 40 miles from the sea.

Sneepscut river is navigable 20 or 30 miles, and empties into the ocean a little to the east of Kennebeck. On this river is the import­ant port of Wiscasset, in the township of Pownalborough.

Ameriscoggin, now more generally called Androscoggin, properly speaking is but the main western branch of the Kenebeck. Its founded are north of Lake Unbagog—Its course is southwardly, till it approach­es near the White mountains, from which it receives Moose and P [...] ­body rivers; and then turns to the east, and then southeast, in [...] course it passes within two miles of the sea coast, and turning north [...] over Pejepskaeg, falls into Merry Meeting Bay, where it forms a junc­tion with the Kenebeck, 20 miles from the sea. Formerly, from [...] bay to the sea, the confluent stream, was called Saggadahock. The lands on this river are very good. Steven's river heads within a [...] of Merry Meeting Bay. A canal, uniting these waters, has lately [...] opened. Cusien's river is between Freeport and North Yarm [...] Royal's river empties itself into the sea in North Yarmouth. P [...] ­scut is fed by Sebacook lake, and meets the sea at Falmouth. [...] such river passes to sea through Scarborough. It receives its [...] from its extraordinary freshets.

Saco river is one of the three largest rivers in this district. T [...] principal part of its waters fall from the White mountains. It [...] some distance from its source, is southwardly; it then suddenly [...] to the east and crosses into the District of Main, and then makes large bend to the northeast, east and southwest, embracing the [...] township of Fryeburg, in the country of York. Its general [...] thence to the sea is S. E. Great and little Ossapee rivers fall [...] from the west. This river is navigable for ships to Saco falls, [...] 6 miles from the sea. Here the river is broken by Indian Island, [...] which is the Post road. A bridge is thrown over each of the branch­es. A number of miles are erected here, to which logs are [...] from 40 or 50 miles above; and vessels can come quite to the miles take in the lumber. Four million feet of pine boards were [...] sawed at these mills before the war. Biddeford and Pepp [...] borough lie on either side of the mouth of this river. Mous [...] York and Cape Neddock rivers, in the county of York, are short [...] inconsiderable streams.

We have already mentioned the most considerable lakes, which [...] known in this District. Lake Scbacook, 18 miles N. W. of [...] land, in extent is equal to two large townships, and is connected with long Pond, on the N. W. by Sungo river. The whole extent these waters is neatly 30 miles N. W. and S. E.

BAYS AND CAPES.] The principal Bays are Passamaquaddy, [...] ch [...]as, Penobscot, Cas [...]o and Wells. Of these, Penobscot and [...] are the most remarkable. Both are full of islands, some of [...] are large enough for townships. Long Island, in the center of [...] nobscot Bay, is 15 miles in length, and from 2 to 3 in breadth, forms an incorporated township by the name of Islesborough. Con­taining about 400 inhabitants. On a fine peninsula on the east side the bay, the British built a [...]ort and made a settlement, which is the shire town in the county of Hancock. The points of Casce [...] are Cape Small Point on the east, and Cape Elizabeth on the [...]. This bay is about 25 miles wide, and 14 deep, forming a most exce [...] [Page 349] harbour for vessels of any burden, and interspersed with a multitude of islands, some of which are nearly large enough for townships. Wells Bay lies between Cape Porpoise and Cape Neddock.

PRODUCTIONS.] The soil of this country, in general, where it is properly fitted to receive the feed, appears to be very friendly to the growth of wheat, rye, barley, oats, peas, hemp, flax, as well as for the production of almost all kinds of culinary roots and plants, and for English grass; and also for Indian corn, provided the seed be [...] from a more northern climate. Hops are the spontaneous growth of this country. It is yet problematical whether apple and other fruit trees will flourish in the northern and eastern parts of this District. It is said, however, that a century ago, there were good orch­ [...], within the county of Washington, about the Bay of Passamaquad­ly, which were destroyed alter Col. Church broke up the French settle­ments at that place. From some experiments of the present inhabi­tants, the presumption is rather against the growth of fruit trees. In the countries of York and Cumberland, fruit is as plenty as in New-Hampshire. This country is equally good for grazing as for village, and large stocks of neat cattle may be fed both summer and winter.

The natural growth of this country consists of white pine and spruce [...] in large quantities, suitable for masts, boards and shingles; the white pine is perhaps, of all others the most useful and important; [...]wood will supply its place in building. Maple, beech, white and [...] oak and yellow bitch, are the growth of this country. The bitch [...] large sightly tree, and is used for cabinet work, and receives a pol­ [...] little inferior to mahogany. The outer bark, which consists of a great number of layers, when separated, is as smooth and soft as the best writ­ing paper, and in some cases a tolerable substitute for it. The low [...] produce sir. This tree is fit neither for timber not fuel; but [...] a balsam that is highly prized. This balsam is contained in small [...]berances like blisters, under the smooth bark of the tree. The [...] is an evergreen, resembling the spruce, but very tapering and nei­ [...] tall nor large.

Under this article, the following remarks of General Lincoln merit a place.

"From the different rivers, in the eastern country, waters may be [...] for mills, and all water work; besides, many are the advantages which arise to a country, through which streams of water are so lib­ [...]lly interspersed, as they are in this; and especially when they a­ [...], as many of these do, with fish of different kinds; among them [...] the salmon, shad, alewive and others, which seek the quiet waters of the Lakes, as the only places in which they can with safety lodge their spawns. From this source, the inland country may draw a sup­ply of fish, equal to all their demands, (if they are not interrupted in their passage,) which are rendered peculiarly valuable, as their annu­al return is at a season of the year when most needed, and when they [...] be cured with a very little salt; so that a long and free use of them will not be injurious to the health of the inhabitants. The cer­ [...] of the supply adds to its value. These fish, as is supposed, and of which, there cannot, I think, be a doubt, return to the same waters [...], in which they were spawned, unless some natural obstruction [...] thrown in their way. Whilst the people inland may be supplied with these fish, the inhabitants of the sea coast may be supplied with [...] cod and other ground fish, which are allured quite into their har­ [...] in pursuit of the river fish, and may be taken with the greatest [Page 353] ease, as no other craft is necessary, in many places, than a common canoe. Great advantages arise also, to those who live on the sea-coast, from the shell fish, viz. the lobster, the scollop and the clam. To these advantages may be added, those which arise from the forests be­ing filled with the moose and deer, and the waters being covered with wild fowls of different kinds."

COMMERCE AND MANUFACTURES.] From the first settlement of Main, until the year 1774 or 1775, the inhabitants generally followed the lumber trade to the neglect of agriculture. This afforded an im­mediate profit. Large quantities of corn and other grain were [...] ­ally imported from Boston and other places, without which it was sup­posed the inhabitants could not have subsisted. But the late war, by rendering these resources precarious, put the inhabitants upon their true interest, i. e. the cultivation of their lands. The inhabitants now raise a sufficient quantity for their own consumption; though too many are still more fond of the axe than of the plough. Their wool and flax are very good—hemp has lately been tried with great suc­cess. Almost every family manufacture wool and flax into cloth, and make husbandry utensils of every kind for their own use.

EXPORTS.] This country abounds with lumber of various kinds, such as masts, which of late, however, have become scarce; white pine boards, ship timber, and every species of split lumber manufactured from pine and oak; these are exported from the different ports is immense quantities. Dried fish furnishes a capital article of ex­port.

MINERALS.] Mountain and bog iron ore are found in some parts, and works have been erected for its manufacture.

There is a species of stone in Lebanon, in the county of York, which yields copperas and sulphur.

STATE OF LITERATURE.] The erection of a college near Casco Bay is contemplated, and the legislature have proceeded to far in the busi­ness as to determine on the principles of such an establishment. A­cademies in Hallowell, Berwick, Fryeburg and Machias have been incorporated by the legislature, and endowed with handsome grants of the public lands. And it is but just to observe, than town schools are very generally maintained in most of the towns that are able to defray the expense, and a spirit of improvement is increasing.

CHIEF TOWNS.] Portland is the capital of the District of Main. It is situated on a promontory in Casco Bay, and was formerly a part of Falmouth. In July 1786, this part of the town, being the most populous and mercantile, and situated on the harbour, together with the islands which belong to Falmouth, was incorporated by the name of Portland. It has a most excellent, safe and capacious harbour, which is seldom or never completely frozen over. It is near the Main Ocean, and is easy of access. The inhabitants carry on a considerable foreign trade, build ships, and are largely concerned in the fishery. It is one of the most thriving commercial towns in the Commonwealth of Massa­chusetts. Although three fourths of it was laid in ashes by the British fleet in 1775, it has since been entirely rebuilt, and contains above 2300 inhabitants. Among its public buildings are three churches, two for congregationalists, and one for episcopalians, and a handsome court house.

A light house has lately been erected on a point of land called Port­land head, at the entrance of the harbour. It is a stone edifice, 72 feet high, exclusive of the lanthorn.

[Page 351] York is 74 miles N. E. from Boston and 9 from Portsmouth. It is divided into two parishes of congregationalists. York river, which is navigable for vessels of 250 tons, 6 or 7 miles from the sea, passes through the town. Over this river, about a mile from the sea, a wooden bridge was built in 1761, 270 feet long, exclusive of the wharves at each end, which reach to the channel, and 25 feet wide. The bridge stands on thirteen piers; and was planned and conducted by Major Samuel Sew­all, an ingenious mechanic and a native of the town. The model of Charles river bridge was taken from this, and was built under the su­ [...]tendance of the same gentleman. It has also served as the mo­del of Malden and Beverly bridges, and has been imitated, even in Europe by those ingenious, American artists, M [...]ssicurs, Coxe and Thompson.

This town was settled as early as 1630, and was then called Aga­ [...]ticus, from a remarkable high hill in it, of that name, a noted [...] mark for mariners. It is in Lat. 43° 16′

About the the year 1640, a great part of this town, was incorporat­ed by Sir Ferdinando Gorges, by the name of Georgiana. He ap­pointed a Mayor and Aldermen, and made it a free port. In 1652, when it fell under the jurisdiction of Massachusetts, in assumed the [...] of York, which it has since retained.

Hallowell is a very flourishing town, situated in latitude 44° 40′, at the head of the tide waters on Kenebeck river. Pownalborough, Penobscot, and Machias, are also towns of considerable and increasing importance. Bangor, situated at the head of the tide waters on Pe­ [...]scot, river, latitude 45°, it is thought, will, in a few years, become a place of very considerable trade. The other towns of consideration are, Kittery, Wells, Biddeford, Berwick, North Yarmouth, and Waldoborough.

POPULATION, CHARACTER AND RELIGION.} For the first of these articles see the table of divisions. There are no peculiar features in the character of the people of this District, to distinguish them from their neighbours in New Hampshire, and Ver­mont. Placed as they are in like circumstances, they are like them a [...], hardy, enterprizing, industrious, hospitable people. The pre­vailing religious denominations are Congregationalists and Baptists; There are a few Episcopalians and Roman Catholics.

INDIANS.] The remains of the Penobscot tribe are the only In­dians, who take up their residence in this district. They consist of about 100 families, and live together in regular society at Indian Old town, which is situated on an Island of about 200 acres, in Penobscot river, just above the great falls. They are Roman Catholics, and have a priest who resides among them—and administers the ordinan­ces. They have a decent house for public worship, with a bell, and another building where they meet to transact the public business of their tribe. In their assemblies all things are managed with the great­est order and decorum. The Sachems from the legislative and execu­tive authority of the tribe: though the heads of all the families are invited to be present at their periodical public meetings. The tribe is increasing, in consequence of an obligation laid, by the Sachems, on the young people, to marry early.

In a former war this tribe lost their lands: but at the commence­ment of the last war, the Provincial Congress granted them all the lands from the head of the tide in Penobscot river, included in lines drawn six miles from the river on each side, i. e. a tract twelve miles [Page 352] wide, intersected in the middle by the river. They, however, consid­er that they have a right to hunt and fish as far as the mouth of the Bay of Penobscot extends. This was their original right, in opposi­tion to any other tribe, and they now occupy it.

CONSTITUTION.] The same as Massachusetts.

HISTORY.] The first attempt to settle this country was made in 1607, on the west side of Kenebeck, near the sea. No permanent settlement, however, was at this time effected. It does not appear that any further attempts were made until between the years 1620 and 1630.

The Dutch formerly had a settlement at the place which is now called Newcastle, which was under the jurisdiction of the governour of New York, then called Manhadoes. The town was built on a beautiful neck of land, where rows of old cellars, are now to be seen.

In 1635, Sir Ferdinando Gorges obtained a grant from the council of Plymouth, of the tract of country between the rivers Pascata [...] and Saggadahock, or Kenebeck; and up Kenebeck so far as to form a square of 120 miles. It is supposed that Sir Ferdinand first institut­ed government in this province.

In 1639, Gorges obtained from the crown a charter of the soil and jurisdiction, containing as ample powers perhaps as the king of Eng­land ever granted to any subject.

In the same year he appointed a governor and council, and they ad­ministered justice to the settlers until about the year 1647, when hear­ing of the death of Gorges, they supposed their authority ceased, and the people on the spot universally combined and agreed to be un­der civil government, and to elect their officers annually.

Government was administered in this form until 1652, when the in­habitants submitted to the Massachusetts, who, by a new construction of their charter which was given to Rosswell and others, in 16 [...], claimed the soil and jurisdiction of the Province of Main as far as the middle of Casco Bay. Main then first took the name of Yorkshire; and county courts were held in the manner they were in Massachusetts, and the towns had liberty to send their deputies to the general court at Boston.

In 1691, by charter from William and Mary, the Province of Ma [...] and the large territory eastward, extending to Nova Scotia, was incor­porated with the Massachusetts Bay; since which it has been govern­ed, and courts held as in other parts of the Massachusetts.

The separation of this district from Massachusetts, and its erection into an independent state, have been subjects discussed by the inhabit­ants in town meeting, by the appointment of the legislature. Such i [...] the rapid settlement and growth of this country, that the period when this contemplated separation will take place, is probably not far dist [...]

For the best historical account of this District, the reader is re [...] ­ [...]ed to "Memoirs of Sir Ferdinando Gorges," by the Rev. Dr. Bel [...] published in the Columbian Magazine for 1788—and to Hutchin [...] History of Massachusetts.

[Page 353]

MASSACHUSETTS.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 125 Miles. between 1° 30′ and 5° 40′ E. Long. Sq. Miles. 6250
Breadth 50 Miles. 41° 30′ and 43° N. Lat. Sq. Miles. 6250

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Vermont and New Hampshire; east by the Atlantic Ocean; [...], by the Atlantic, Rhode Island and Connecticut; west, by New York.

DIVISIONS.] This part of Massachusetts is divided into the fol­lowing counties.

Counties No. Towns No. Hou. No. Fam. No. Inh. Ch. Towns. No. Inh.
S [...]folk 23 6355 8038 44875 BOSTON 18038
[...]ex 22 7644 10883 57913 Salem 7921
Newbury Port 4837
Middlesex 41 5998 7580 42737 Charlestown 1583
Concord 1590
Hampshire 60 9181 9617 59681 Northampton 1628
Springfield 1574
[...]outh 15 4240 5173 29535 Plymouth 2995
[...]tol 15 4514 5441 31709 Taunton 3804
[...]nstable 10 2343 2889 17354 Barnstable 2610
Duke's 3 1013 558 3265 Edgartown 1352
[...]tucket 1 872 4620 Sherburne 4620
Worcester 49 8613 9729 56807 Worcester 2095
[...]shire 26 4176 4899 30291 Stock bridge 1336
Great Barrington [...] 1373
[...] counties 265 51377 65779 378787 Population for every square mile 60.  

CLIMATE.] See New England.

RIVERS.] Housatonick river, rises from several sources in the western part of this State, and flows southerly through Connecticut, [...] Long Island Sound. Deerfield river falls into Connecticut river, [...] the west, between Deerfield and Greenfield. A most excellent and beautiful tract of meadow lies on its banks. Westfield river, [...]ties into the Connecticut at West Springfield. Connecticut river [...] through this state, and intersects the county of Hampshire. [...] its course it runs over falls, above Deerfield, and between Northamp­ton and Springfield. A company by the name of "The Proprietors of the Locks and Canals on Connecticut river," was incorporated by the General Court, in 1792, for the purpose of rendering Connecticut [...] passable for boats and other things from Chicapee river north­ward, to New Hampshire. Miller's and Chicapee rivers fall into the Connecticut on the east side; the former at Northfield, the latter at Springfield.

In the eastern part of the state, is Merrimack, which we have al­ready in part described. It is navigable for vessels of burden about 20 miles from its mouth, where it is obstructed by the first falls, or rapids, [Page 354] called Mitchell's Eddy, between Bradford and Haverhill. Vast quan­tities of ship timber, ranging timber, plank, deals, clapboards, shingles staves and other lumber are brought down in rafts, so constructed [...] to pass all the falls in the river except those of Amuskaeg, and Pau­tucket. In the spring and summer considerable quantities of salmon, shad and alewives are caught, which are either used as bait in the [...] fishery, or pickled and shipped to the West Indies. There are 12 [...] ­ries across this river in the county of Essex. The bar across i [...] a mouth of this river is a very great incumbrance to the navigation, [...] is especially terrible to strangers. There are 16 feet water upon it at common tides. In 1787 the general court granted a sum of money for the erection of two sufficient light houses, and made the maintainer o [...] of them a public charge. The houses are of wood, and contrived [...] be removed at pleasure, so as to be always conformed to the shifting of the bar; and thus the single rule of bringing them in a line, will be the only necessary direction for vessels approaching the harbour, and by this direction they may sail with safety, until they are abreast of [...] lights, where is a bold shore and good anchoring ground. The bri [...] ­es over this river will be mentioned under that head.

Nashua, Concord and Shawsheen rivers, rise in this state and [...] a northeasterly course into the Merrimack. Parker's river takes its [...] in Rowley, and after a course of a few miles, passes into the Sound which separates Plumb Island from the main land. It is navigable about two miles from its mouth. Ipswich and Chebacco rivers [...] through the town of Ipswich into Ipswich bay. Mistick river [...] into Boston harbour east of the peninsula of Charlestown. It is navi [...]a­ble 3 miles, to Medford.

Charles river is a considerable stream, the principal branch of which rises from a pond bordering on Hopkinton. It passes through [...] liston, and Bellingham, and divides Medway from Medfield, Wrent­ham and Franklin, and thence into Dedham, where by a curious [...] it forms a peninsula of 900 acres of land. And what is very singul [...], a stream called Mother Brook, runs out of this river, in this [...] and falls into Neponsit river, which answers to a canal uniting the two rivers, and affords a number of excellent mill seats. From De [...] ­hamt he course of the river is northerly through Newtown, passing over romantic falls—it then bends to the northeast and east, through Wa­tertown and Cambridge, and passes into Boston harbour, between Charlestown and Boston. It is navigable for boats to Watertown, 7 miles.

Neponset river originates chiefly from Muddy and Punkapog Ponds, in Stoughton, and Mashapog Pond in Sharon, and after passing over falls sufficient to carry mills, unites with other small streams, and forms a very constant supply of water for the many mills situated [...] the river below, until it meets the tide in Milton, from whence it is navigable for vessels of 150 tons burthen to the bay, distant about four miles. Neponset river, from Milton to the bay, forms a regular and beautiful serpentine, interspersed with hillocks of wood so regularly placed, that from Milton hill it affords one of the finest prosp [...] in the world. Passing Fore and Back rivers in Weymouth you come to North river, which rises in Indian Head Pond in Pembroke, and running in a serpentine course between S [...] ­uate and Marshfield, passes to sea. This river for its fine, in re­markable for its great depth of water, it being, in some places, [...] more than 10 or 50 feet wide, and yet vessels of 300 tons are built [...] [Page 355] P [...]roke, 18 miles (as the river runs) from its mouth. This river is navigable for boats to the first fall, 5 miles from its source in Indian [...] Pond. Thence to the nearest waters which run into Taunton [...], i [...] only three miles. A canal to connect the waters of these two [...] which communicate with Narraganset and Massachusetts bays, [...] [...]e of great utility, as it would save a long and dangerous navi­gable, round Cape Cod.

[...] river is made up of several streams which unite in or [...] the town of Bridgwater. Its course is from N. E. to S. W. till it [...] into Narragansett Bay at Tiverton, opposite the north end of [...] Island. It receives a considerable tributary stream at Taun­ton from the north west. The head waters of Pautucket and Provi­dence rivers, in Rhode Island, and of Quinnabaug and Shetucket riv­er, [...] Connecticut, are in this state.

[...], BAYS, ISLANDS, &c.] The only Capes of note, on the [...] of this state, are Cape Ann on the north side of Massachusetts [...] Cape Cod on the south. "Cape Cod, so called probably from the multitudes of cod fish which are found on its coast, is the south­ [...] part of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. In shape it resem­ [...] man's arm when bended, with the hand turned inward towards [...]. The Cape comprehends the county of Barnstable, and is [...] 70 and 80 miles in length.

[...]vince Town is the hook of the Cape, and is generally narrow [...] place not being more than three miles in extent. The [...], which is one of the best in the state, opens to the southward, [...] [...] depth of water for any ships. It was the first port entered by [...] fathers, when they came to settle this country, in 1620. This place [...] [...] in a state of thriving and decaying many times. It is now [...]. It contains about ninety families, whose whole dependence is [...] the sea for their support. They employ about twenty sail of [...], great and small, in the cod fishery. They have been remark­able successful of late. Ten of their vessels, employed in 1790 upon the Grand Bank, took eleven thousand quintals of cod fish. They [...] not lost a vessel, or a man, in the business, since the war.

The houses stand upon the inner side of the hook of the cape, front­ing southeast, and looking into the harbour. They are small; one [...] high, and set up on blocks, or piles, that the driving sands may [...] them; otherwise they would be buried in sand. The houses [...] in one range upon the beach; the flakes on which they dry [...] fish are round them. The vessels run in upon the shore, which is [...] find, throw their fish over, where they are washed from the salt, [...] carried up to the flakes on hand barrows.

They raise nothing from their lands, but are wholly dependent upon [...] market and other places, for every kind of vegetable production.

[...] are but two horses, and two yoke of oxen, kept in the town. [...] have about fifty cows, which feed in the spring upon beach grass, [...] grows here and there upon the shore; and in summer they feed [...] [...]nken ponds, and marshy places, that are found between the [...] [...]. Here the cows are seen wading, and even swimming, ph [...] [...] heads into the water up to their horns, picking a s [...]nty sub­ [...] from the roots and herbs produced in the water. They are [...] [...] on sedge, cut upon the flats.

[...] a border of loose sand, which runs round the whole place, [...] very broken and hilly. These hills are white sand, and their pro­duce [Page 356] is whortleberry bushes, and small pitch pine shrubs. The [...] next the village, have been much cut off for firewood. Cutting a­way the wood, exposes the hills to be torn away by the violence [...] the winds, and in some instances, persons have been obliged to [...] their houses to prevent being covered up. These hills and sand [...] are constantly shifting; and when torn away in one place, are [...] up on another. It is not unfrequent, to have their fish flakes [...] up with banks of sand like snow. Immediately in stepping from [...] house, the foot sinks in sand to the depth of the shoe. The most s [...] ­erly point of this place, called Wood End, is five miles southwest [...] the village. What is called Race Point, known to all seamen, i [...] [...] northwesterly extremity of the Cape, and lies northwest from the vil­lage, distant three miles.

A traveller, in passing from the village over to Race Point, about [...] way, travels some distance through a pine woods, the trees about [...] feet in height; at length he finds the path obstructed with a [...] of sand, almost perpendicular, rising among the trees to their [...]. His horse with difficulty mounts this precipice, his feet sinking [...] to the knees in the sand. This volume of sand, is gradually [...] into the woods with the winds, and as it covers the trees to the [...] they die. As soon as a traveller mounts this bank, a curious [...] ­cle presents to view, a desert of white sand, five miles in length. [...] with the sea, and one mile and an half in breadth. The [...] the trees appear above the sand, but they are all dead. Where [...] have been lately covered, the bark and twigs are still remaining; [...] others they are fallen off; some have been so long whipped and [...] out with the sand and winds, that there is nothing remaining but [...] hearts and knots of the trees. But over the greater part of this [...] the trees have long since disappeared.

After crossing this wilderness, where the horse sinks to his [...] at every step, you arrive at Race Point. Here are a number of [...] erected by the persons who come over from the village to fish in [...]. Here they keep their fishing apparatus, and lodge. At the distance of fifteen rods from the point, the water is thirty fathoms in depth and cod, h [...]ddock and other kinds of fish, are taken in plenty, whenever the weather will permit. They take many kinds of fish with [...] such as pollock, mackarel, and herrings: The two latter, are [...] taken in their harbour in great abundance. At this place, Race [...] are seen at some times, hundreds of sharks, lying on the [...] which have been caught by the boats when fishing for cod. The weigh from three, to six hundred weight. Their livers, which [...] ­duce oil, are the only parts of them of which any use is made. Th [...] are taken by a large hook, baited with a cod fish, and fastened to [...] iron chain with a swivel, to prevent them from biting or twisting it [...]. When the shark has seized the hook, they drag him up to the [...] of the boat, and being too large to take on board the boats there [...] use of, they row ashore with him, drag him up on the beach, rip [...] open, take out his liver, and the carcase is left to perish. [...] either at sea in vessels, or round the shore in boats, is the whole em­ployment of all the inhabitants. There is no employment but [...] to which they can turn their attention. And the boys as soon [...] [...] have strength to pull a cod fish, are put on board a boat or a vessel.

As this harbour is of so much consequence, often affording [...] shelter from storms to vessels both inward and outward bound, [...] [Page 357] of importance that there should always be a settlement here. The Province formerly afforded them some encouragement, besides exempt­ing them from taxation. That encouragement is now withholden, and a poll [...] has been required, whether with good policy has been doubted by [...]. The inhabitants complain of it, as an unreasonable burthen. [...] employment is a great public benefit, and what they acquire is [...] many perils and the hardest labour.

The extent of Cape Cod, on the outer shore, beginning at Wood [...] round to Buzzard's Bay, or to the line between Sandwich and [...], is about one hundred and thirty miles. The inner [...] [...] Massachusetts Bay, is about seventy five miles. The road [...] [...] commonly travelled on to the Cape, is on the inner side, and [...] by this, the extent of the Cape will be as first mentioned. Cape Cod in general is a thin, barren soil, by far the most so of any [...] of New England. But the sea air impregnates all vegetables with a quality which renders them far more nutritive to cattle, than the [...] quantity far inland. It being an undoubted fact, that cattle will [...] in such pastures, as, far up in the country, would starve them [...]. Their salt hay, which is almost their only forage, affords a [...] which is also far superiour to that which is made at a distance [...] the sea. This greatly assists their crops of corn and rye, beyond [...] the land promises in its appearance. The lands of Cape Cod [...] never support its inhabitants, which are nearly 17000. A great [...] of the men and boys, are constantly employed at sea. In this busi­ness they support themselves and families; and it is observed, that the [...] people form family connections, earlier in life, than in any oth­er part of the country: which, perhaps, is one evidence, that the [...] of subsistence are easily obtainable. Cape Cod is a nursery for [...], and in that view, one of the most important places in the state, [...] America. If the cultivation of the sea is a blessing to any na­tion, we may consider the inhabitants of the Cape as the most valua­ble among our countrymen.

The Cape abounds with clear fresh ponds, generally stocked with fish. There is little sunken land. The wood on the Cape is gener­ally pitch pine. There are few or no stones below Barnstable. The [...] are walled with brick, in a circular form, to prevent the loose [...] from caving in. The wells are secured in the same manner, and [...] are obliged to keep them covered, to prevent the sand from blow­ing in, and spoiling the water. Formerly, the inhabitants took many whales round the Cape, chiefly in Massachusetts bay: but that busi­ness is almost at an end. The manner of taking black fish is some­ [...] singular. They are a fish of the whale kind, of about five tons [...], and produce oil, in the same manner as a whale. When a [...] of them is discovered, which sometimes consists of several hun­ [...], the inhabitants put off in boats, get without them, and drive [...] like so many cattle, on to the shore and flats, where they are [...] by the tide and fall an easy prey. The shore of the Cape, is in many places, covered with the huge bones of these fish and of whales, which remain unconsumed for many years. Many persons conjecture, that the Cape is gradually wearing away, and that it will finally fall a sacrifice to the ravages of the winds and the seas, and many circum­stances favour such an opinion. At Province Town harbour, stumps [...] are seen, which the sea now covers in common tides. When the English first settled upon the Cape, there was an island off Chatham, [Page 358] at three leagues distance, called Webb's Island, containing twenty acres, covered with red cedar or savin. The inhabitants of Nansucke [...] [...] to carry wood from it. This island, has been wholly worn away for almost a century. A large rock, that was upon the island, and which settled as the earth washed away, now marks the place; it rises as much above the bottom of the sea, as it used to rise above the surface of the ground. The water is six fathoms deep on this spot. And in many places on the Cape, the sea appears to be encroaching on the land.

The Cape is so exposed to winds in every direction, that fruit trees do not thrive. There are few orchards, of any consequence, below Barn­stable. There is not a cider mill in the county. In many places, their forest trees, have more the appearance of a prim hedge, than of timber.

The Cape is an healthy situation, except for those constitutions which are too delicate for the piercing winds that come from the sea.

The inhabitants in general, live as long as in the other parts of the northern States.

The winds, in every direction, come from the sea; and invalids, by visit­ing the Cape, sometimes experience the same benefit as from going to sea.

The principal bays on the coast of Massachusetts are, Ipswich, Bos­ton, Plymouth, Cape Cod or Barnstable, and Buzzard's Bays. Many islands are scattered along the coast▪ the most noted of which are Plumb Island, which is about 9 miles in length, extending from Merri­mack river on the north, to the entrance of Ipswich river on the south, and is separated from the main land by a narrow sound, called Plumb Island river, fordable in several places at low water. It consists principally of sand, blown into curious heaps, and crowned with bush­es bearing the beach plumb. There is however a valuable property of [...]alt marsh▪ and at the south end of the island are two or three good farms. On the north end are the light houses before mentioned. On the sea shore of this island, and on Salisbury beach, the marine society and other gentlemen of Newburyport have humanely erected several small houses, furnished with fuel and other conveniencies for the re­lief of mariners who may be shipwrecked on this coast.

Nantucket Island, lies south of Cape Cod. It contains, according to Douglass, 23,000 acres, including the beach. No mention is made of the discovery and settlement of this island, under its present name, by any of our historians. It is more than probable that this is the island which is usually called Nautican by ancient voyagers. As the island is low and sandy it is calculated only for those people who are will­ing to depend almost entirely on the watry element for subsistance. The island of itself constitutes one county by the name of Nantucket. It has but one town, called Sherburn * containing 4620 inhabitants, and sends one representative to the general assembly.

The inhabitants formerly carried on the most considerable whale fishery on the coast, but the war almost ruined this business. They have since, however, revived it again, and pursue the whales, even in­to the Great Pacific Ocean. There is not a single tree on the island of natural growth; they have a place called the woods, but it has been destitute of trees for these 60 years past. The island was formerly well wooded. The people, especially the females, are fondly attached to the island, and few wish to migrate to a more desirable situation.

The inhabitants of this island are principally quakers; there is one so­ciety of congregationalists. Forty years ago there were three congre­gations of Indians, each of which had a house for worship and a [Page 359] [...]cher. Their last Indian pastor died 20 years since, and was a wor­thy, respectable character.

Martha's Vineyard, which lies a little to the westward of Nantuck­et, is about 21 miles in length and four in breadth. It contains three societies of congregationalists, at Edgarton, Tisbury and Chilmark, two of Baptists, without ministers, and three congregations of Indians, [...] of which is supplied by an ordained Indian minister, and to the others, the Rev. Mr. Mayhew preaches in rotation, and superintends the whole. This and the neighbouring island constitute Duke's coun­ty, containing 3265 inhabitants, between 400 and 500 of which are In­dians and mulattoes, subsisting by agriculture and fishing.

Edgarton, which includes the fertile island of Chabaquidick, three miles long and one and a half broad, is the shire town. This little island joins to the harbour and renders it very secure. Gayhead, the westernmost part of the island, containing about 2400 acres, is very good tillage [...], and is wholly occupied by Indians, but not well cultivated. One third of this tract is the property of the English society for propagat­ing the gospel in New England. The principal productions of the isl­and are corn, rye and oats.—They raise sheep and cattle in considera­ble numbers. There are 4 mill streams in Tisbury. The inhabitants of this county send three representatives, and in conjunction with Nantucket, one senator, to the general court.

The other islands of consideration are in Massachusetts Bay, which is agreeably diversified by about 40 of various sizes. Seven of them only, are within the jurisdiction of the town of Boston, and taxed with it. Cattle island is about three miles from Boston and contains about 18 acres of land. The buildings are the governor's house, a magazine, goal, barracks, and workshops. In June 1792, there were confined on this island 77 convicts, who are employed in the manufac­ture of nails, and guarded by a company of between 60 and 70 soldiers. The fort on this island commands the entrance of the harbour. Here are mounted 50 pieces of cannon, and 44 others lie dismounted.

LIGHT HOUSES.] Within this state are the following Light Houses; [...] Plumb island, near Newbury, are two, which we have already men­tioned. On Thatcher's island, off Cape Ann, two lights of equal height. Another stands on a rock on the north side of the entrance of Boston harbour, with one single light. On the north point of Ply­mouth harbour are two lights. On a point at the entrance of the harbour on the island of Nantucket is one with a single light. This light may be seen as far as Nantucket shoals extend. The island be­ing low, the light appears over it.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY.] See New England. By an admeasure­ment made by the barometer at Princetown, in this State, about 45 miles N. W. from Boston, and at Cambridge, in 1777, it appears that Prince­town is 1332 feet higher than the level of the sea. The top of Wa­c [...]set mountain in Princetown, was found to be 2989 feet above the level of the sea. A hill of this height, in a clear horizon, may be seen by miles.

SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.] In Massachusetts are to be found all the varieties of soil, from very good to very bad, capable of yielding all the different productions common to the climate, such as Indian corn, rye, wheat, barley, oats, hemp, flax, hops, potatoes, field beans and pe [...]s—apples, pairs, peaches, plumbs, cherries, &c. It has been observed that the effects of the east winds extend farther inland than [Page 360] formerly, and injure the tender fruits, particularly the peach, and [...] ­en the more hardy apple. The average produce of the good lands, well cultivated, has been estimated as follows—40 bushels of corn on an acre—30 of barley—20 of wheat—30 of rye—100 of potatoes—The staple commodities of this state, are fish, beef and lumber.

COMMERCE.] The following abstract of goods, wares and merchan­dize, exported from this state, including the District of Main, from the first of October 1790, to the 31st of September, 1791, will give the [...] the best idea of their articles of export, and the quantity of each.

EXPORTS from Massachusetts from October 1st 1790, to Sep­tember 31st 1791.
Ash Pot tons 783.20
—Pearl   1,159.50
Apples bbls. 1,131
Bricks num. 330,250
Smiths Bellows do. 2
Boats do. 75
Beer, Ale and Porter gal. 15,532
Boots pairs. 339
Brimstone lbs. 3,280
Blacking or Lamp­black kegs 158
Cider bbls. 292
doz. 310
Chalk tons 10
Cotton lbs. 13,371
Coffee do. 68, [...]44
Cocoa do. 2,804
Chocolate boxes 331
Candles Myrtle do. 348
Wax do. 169
Tallow do. 1,106
Cables and Cordage tons 32
cwt. 18
coils 16
Copp. Ore cwt. 20
Manufactured do. 1,480
Coals bush. 1,548
Cranberries do. 688
Canes and walking sticks   96
Cards, cotton and wool doz. 25
Coaches, Chaises, Phaetons num. 16
Carts and Waggons do. 4
Duck, American bolts 288
Drugs Glauber salts lbs. 1,220
Sassafrass root tons 17
Earl. Ware Yel. or queens crates 92
Stone   doz. 25
Flaxseod hhds. 6,056
Flax lbs. [...],700
Feathers do. [...]
Flints num. 40, [...]
Fram. of Boats do. 20
Houses   do. 180
Wind. & Doors do. 30
Furniture House Tables do. 37
Desks   23
Bureaus   16
Sophas   [...]5
Chests   705
Windsor and Rush Chairs   54
Fisheries. Fish dried cwt. 326,560
do. Pickled bbls. 20,177
Oil Whale gall. 270,810
Oil Spermaceti do. 70,266
Sper. Candles boxes 2,927
Whalebone lbs. 85,161
Gensang lbs. 3,096
Grindstones num. 104
Glass Ware crates 21
Window boxes 13
Groeeries Cassia & Cinna. lbs. 1,178
Pimento do. 5,58 [...]
Pepper do. 9 [...]
Brown Sugar do. 3,904
Raisins do. 10 [...]
Grain & Fulse Wheat bush. 52
Rye do. 2,350
Barley do. 32
Indian Corn do. 69,0 [...]4
Oats do. 447
Peas and Beans do. 3,746
Horns and Horntips num. 71,281
Hats do. 376
Hops lbs. 650
Hay tons 53
from [...] A [...]es num. 662
Scythes do. 48
Locks and Bolts do. 2,000
Shovels do. 247
Skimmers and Ladles pr. 15
Anchors num. 66
Muskets do. 60
Cutlasses do. 72
Knives and Forks do. 240
Chests of Car­penters Tools   4
[...] Pots, Kettles, &c. do. 702
Cannon do. 25
Shot for Cannon do. 1,000
[...] Pig tons 173½
Bar do. 36.18
Nail rods do. 1
Hoops do. 1
Indigo lbs. 1,238
Leather, tanned and [...] do. 1,240
sides 19
Li [...] bush. 456
[...] lbs. 2,553
Live Stock Horned cattle num. 652
Horses do. 324
Sheep do. 5,140
Hogs do. 619
Poultry doz. 999
Merchandize foreign packages 179
[...] gal. 11,421
Hi [...]stones num.  
[...] lbs. 780
M [...]dder do. 1,034
Na [...]s do. 20,000
Nankeens No. of pieces 3,594
Nuts bush. 692
[...]-Stores Pitch bbls. 552
Tar do. 2,824
Turpentine do. 4,266
Rosin do. 23
Old linseed gal. 90
Powder gun lbs. 13,814
—Hair do. 166
P [...]tum do. 45
Pai [...]s do. 840
Provisions. Rice tierces 810
Flour blbs. 21,236
Ship stuff do. 214
Indian meal do. 7,000
Rye do. blbs. 252
Bread do. 2,285
Beef do. 30,499
Pork do. 3,174
Crackers kegs 1,812
Hams & Bacon lbs. 36,946
Venison and Mutton hams do. 200
Cheese do. 23,155
Lard do. 4,860
Butter firk. 3,873
Saysages lbs. 250
Fresh beef do. 92,269
Pork do. 29,334
Careases of Mutton num. 561
Neats tongues blbs. 154
Oysters Pickled Kegs kegs 214
Potatoes bush. 3,808
Onions do. 5,497
Spirits Rum Amer. gals. 298,257
Do. West India do. 2,734
Brandy do. 118
Gin cases 2,113
Cordials do. 69
Sad­lery Saddles & Bridles No. 70
Carriage Harness sets 14
Shoes pairs 3,400
Soap boxes 477
Snuff lbs. 1,939
Steel bundles 27
Spruce essence of cases 31
Salt bush. 3,647
Seeds Hay lbs. 60
Skins and Furs Morocco num. 13 [...]
Calf in hair do. 290
Deer & Moose do. 90 [...]
Bears, &c. do. 24
Deer and other Skins unknown, hhds, casks and packages   [...]
Tobacco hhds. 1,190
Do. Manufactured lbs. 71,108
Tallow do. 275,641
Twine cwt. [...],900
Tow Cloth yards 4,548
Toys for children doz. 1 [...]
Tin manufactured doz. 14
Tras Bohea chests 6 [...]
Souchong do. 108½
Green do. 178
Hyson do. 628 [...]
Vinegar gal. 2,098
Wines    
Madeira do. 4,622
Other Wines do. 3,940
Bottled doz. 6
Wax Bees lbs. 10,254
Myrtle do. 1,946
Whips No. 144
Wood    
Stav. & Head. No. 5,456,041
Shingles do. 12,325,600
Shooks & casks   do. 29,895
Laths do. 15,500
Hoops & H. poles do. 511,764
Masts   219
Bowsprits   42
Booms   74
spars   3,243
Handspikes   13,126
pumps   23
Boxes and Brakes   56
Blocks   5,162
Oars and Rasters   33,920
Wood    
Trunnels   35, [...]5
Cedar & Oak Knees   1,0 [...]1
Carvings   [...]
Anchor Stocks   [...]
Oak Boards and Plank feet 568, [...]65
Pine Boards and Plank do. 2 [...],136,10 [...]
Other do. do. [...]
Scantling   [...]
Oak and Pine Timber   68, [...]
Oak and Pine do. tons [...]
Oak and Pine pieces [...]
Oak and Pine, Hie'ry cords [...]
Oak Bark do. [...]
Oak do. ground hhds. [...]
Mast Hoops doz. [...]
Yokes for [...]   96
Besides a variety of smaller articles    

Value of Goods, Wares and Merchandize exported from Massa­chusetts, in the above mentioned year. Dols. 2,445,975. Ct. 53

It must be noted that the foregoing abstract comprehends those arti­cles only which were exported to foreign ports; the domestic trade i [...] not taken into the account. Shoes, cards, hats, saddlery and various other manufactures, and several articles of the produce of the country, to a great amount, were, the same year, exported to the Southern States.

This State owns more than three times as many tons of shipping as any other of the states, and more than one third part of the whole that belongs to the United States. * Upwards of 29,000 tons are employed in carrying on the fisheries; 46,000 in the coasting business, and 96,564, in trading with almost all parts of the world. Pot and pearl ash, staves, flaxseed, beeswax, &c. are carried chiefly to Great Britain in remittance for their manufactures; masts and pro­visions to the East Indies; fish, oil, beef, pork, lumber, candles, &c. are carried to the West Indies, for their produce, and the two first articles, fish and oil, to France, Spain and Portugal; roots, vegetables, fruits, and small meats to Nova Scotia and New Brunswick; hats, saddlery, cabinet work, men's and women's shoes, nails, tow cloth, bar­ley, hops, butter, cheese, &c. to the southern states. The Negr [...] trade, was prohibited by law, in 1788, and there is not a single slave belong­ing to the Commonwealth.

MANUFACTURES.] If we except printing types, stone wares, pitch, tar and turpentine, and wine, most if not all the other articles enumerated in pages 246 and 247, are manufactured in a greater or less degree in this state. There is a duck manufactory at Boston, from which 1700 bolts, of 40 yards each, said to be the best duck ev­er before seen in America, have been sold in one year. Manu­factories [Page 363] of this kind have been begun in Salem, Haverhill and Spring­field, and are said to be in a promising way. Manufactories of cot­ton goods have been established at Beverly and Worcester; and much [...] is due to the patriotic gentlemen, who began them; although by their persevering exertions, they have not been able to surmount the various obstacles in the way of success. At Taunton, Bridgwater, Middleborough and some other places, nails have been made in such [...] as to prevent in a great measure the importion of them from Great Britain. In this state there are twelve paper mills, 5 on Ne­ [...]et river, 5 on Charles river, 1 at Andover, on Shawsheen river, [...] the other at Sutton in Worcester county. Ten of these mills [...] two vats each, and when in action, employ 10 men, and as many girls and boys, and produce at the rate of 60,000 reams of writing, printing and wrapping paper, annually. It is estimated that twenty thousand pounds worth of paper is yearly made by these mills; and the quantity is annually and rapidly increasing.

The principal card manufactory is in Boston, and belongs to Mr. [...] Richards, and Co. in which are made yearly, about 7000 dozen of cotton and wool cards▪ of the various kinds or numbers, which con­fine about a hundred casks of wire, averaged at £.30, a cask and a­bout 20,000 tanned calf, sheep and lamb skins at 2s. each. The stick­ing of these cards employs not less that 1000 people, chiefly children, and about 60 men are fully occupied in manufacturing card boards, card rocks, and finishing the cards. It is estimated that about 2000 do [...]en cards are made at the other manufactories in different parts of the state.

The feat of the Shee manufacture is at Lynn, 8 miles to the northward of Boston, in the county of Essex. It is not easy to six the number of shoes annually made by the industrious inhabitants of this town▪ but it has been estimated by those most competent 10 form an accurate judg­ment, that, besides the home consumption, and the large numbers sent every week to Boston and other places▪ several hundred thousand pa [...] [...] shipped to the different parts of the United States. One man, Mr. A. Johnson, from his own workshop, in the course of seven months, shipped 20,600 pa [...] of shoes, valued at £.4▪979. [...]6, exclusive of large numbers sold in the vicinity.

S [...]k and thread lace, of an elegant texture, are manufactured by women and children, in large quantities, in the town of Ipswich, in Essex county, and [...]old for use and exportation in Boston, and other [...]cantile towns. This manufacture, if properly regulated and en­couraged might be productive of great and extensive advantages. In the year 1790, no less than 41,0 [...]0 yards were made in this town▪ and the quantity, it is supposed, has since been considerably increased.

A wire manufactory, has lately been erected, at a considerable ex­pense, in Dedham, in Suffolk county, for the purpose of drawing who for the use of the fish book, and card manufacturers in Boston. The essays which have already been made, promise success.

There are several snuff, oil, chocolate and powder mills in dis­ [...] parts of the state—and a number of iron works and [...]tting [...], besides other mills, in common use, in great abundance, for [...]aw­ing lumber, grinding grain, and [...]lling cloth.

There are be distilleries in this State, employed in dis [...]ing from foreign materials. In these distilleries are 158 stills, which together [...] 102,173 gallions. Besides these there are [...] [Page 364] em­ployed in distilling domestic materials; but these are small, and the most of them very lately erected, and some have never yet been worked. One million, nine hundred thousand gallons have been dis­tilled in one year, which, at a duty of eleven cents a gallon, yield a revenue to the government of 209,000 dollars.

A brick pyramidical glass house was erected in Boston, by a company of Gentlemen in 1789. But for want of workmen, skilled in the [...] ­ness, their works were not put in operation effectually till November, 1792; and although several of the first essays or meltings proved and successful, later essays give the fullest ground to believe that this very important manufacture may be prosecuted to the advantage of the pro­prietors, as well as to the great benefit of the public. From the speci [...] of glass exhibited, it appears to be of the best quality for clearness [...] goodness; and as there is an abundance of the material for this man­ufacture at command, there can be little doubt of its being carried to such an extent in the course of a few years, as to preclude foreign importations, which will make a vast saving to our country. Ever friend to his country must wish that the patriotic company which have established this manufacture, might meet with such success as to have their expenses reimbursed, which have already exceeded [...] sum of 16,000 dollars.

BRIDGES AND CANALS.] The Bridges that merit notice in this State are the following, viz. Charles river bridge, built in in 1786-87, 1503 feet long, and connecting Boston and Charlestown. It is built on 75 piers, with a convenient draw in the middle, for the passage of vessels. Each pier is composed of seven sticks of oak timber, united by a cap piece, strong braces and girts, and afterwards driven into the bed of the river, and firmly secured by a single pile on each side, driven obliquely to a solid bottom. The piers are connected to each other by large string pieces, which are covered with four inch plank. The bridge is 43 feet in width, and on each side is accommodated with a passage six feet wide, railed in for the safety of people on foot. The bridge has a gradual rise from each end, so as to be two feet higher in the middle than at the extremities. Forty elegant lamps are e­rected, at a suitable distance from each other, to illuminate it when necessary. There are 4 strong, stone wharves connected with three piers each, sunk in various parts of the river. The machinery of the draw is simple, and requires but two men to raise it. At the highest tides the water rises 12 or 14 feet; the floor of the bridge is then a­bout four feet above the water. The depth of the water in the chan­nel, at low tide, is 27 feet. This bridge was completed in 13 months; and while it exhibits the greatest effect of private enterprize, of this kind in the United States, it being the first bridge of considerable mag­nitude, that has been erected, presents a most pleasing proof, how cer­tainly objects of magnitude may be attained by spirited exertions.

The success which attended this experiment led others to engage in similar works of enterprize. Malden bridge across Mystic river, connecting Charlestown with Malden, was begun in April, 1787, and was opened for passengers the September following. This bridge, including the abutments, is 2420 feet long, and 32 feet wide, it has a draw 30 feet wide. The deepest water at full tide is 23 feet. The expense of this bridge was estimated at £.5300.

Essex bridge, upwards of 1500 feet in length, with a well contriv­ed draw, was erected in 1789, and connects Salem with Beverly. The [Page 365] [...]nse of this bridge is said not to have exceeded one third part of [...] of Charles river bridge, yet it is esteemed quite equal in [...], and is thought by travellers to be superior in point of beau­ty.

[...] Rowloy, on the post road between Boston and Newburyport, is [...] across Parker's river 870 feet long, and 26 feet wide, consisting of [...] [...] piers and eight wooden arches. This bridge was built in the year 1758.

Bridge over Merrimack river in the county of Essex, about two [...] above Newburyport, was lately completed. At the place where the bridge is erected, an island divides the river into two branches. An [...] 160 feet diameter and 40 feet above the level of high water, [...] this island with the main on one side. The channel on the other side is wider, but the center arch is but 140 feet diameter. [...] ingenuity is discovered in the construction of this bridge, than [...] that have hitherto been built; and it is one among the vast [...] of stupendous and useful works which owe their origin [...] confidence between man and man, which has been created or [...] by the measures of the general government.

Another ingeniously constructed bridge, has lately been completed [...] this river at Pautucket falls, between Chelmsford and Dracut in the county of Middlesex. These bridges are all supported by a toll.

Several other Bridges are contemplated in different parts of the state, and [...] is actually begun, which, when completed, with connect the [...] part of Boston with Cambridge, over Charles river, and will be [...] twice as long, and attended with nearly twice the expense of any other that has yet been built in this or in any of the United States.

This Legislature, in February 1792, were petitioned by a company [...] liberty to build a bridge over Connecticut river, at Montague; which was granted.

The only Canals of importance which have been contemplated in this Commonwealth, are one between Barnstable and Buzzard's Bay, and those necessary to render Connecticut river navigable, both of [...] we have mentioned, and one which shall open a communica­tion between the town of Boston, and some part of Connecticut riv­er for which purpose General Knox, and others, were incorporated, in 1792, by the name of "The Proprietors of the Massachusetts [...]."

[...]ITIES.] In the north part of the township of Adams, in [...]shire county, not half a mile from Stamford in Vermont, is a natural curiosity which merits a description. A pretty mill stream, called Hudson's Brook, which rises in Vermont and falls into the [...] branch of Hoosuck river, has, for 30 or 40 rods, formed a very [...] channel through a quarry to white marble. The hill, gradually [...]ending towards the south, terminates in a steep precipice, down which, probably, the water once tumbled. But finding in some plac­es [...] chasms in the rocks, and in others wearing them away, as [...] from their appearance, it has formed a channel which, in [...] places is more than 60 feet deep. Over this channel, where [...] some of the rocks remain, and form a natural bridge. From [...] of this bridge to the water it is 62 feet; its length is about 12 [...] and its breadth about 10. Partly under this bridge, and about [...] feet below it, is another, which is wider but not so long; for [Page 366] at the east end they form one body of rock, 12 or 14 feet thick, and under this the water flows. It is evident, from the appearance of the rocks, that the water, in some places, formerly flowed 40 or 50 feet above its present bed. Many cavities, of different figures and di [...] ­sions, but generally circular, are worn out in the rocks. One of [...] in the solid rock, is about 4 feet in diameter, and 4 or 5 feet [...] the rock is on one side worn through at the bottom. A little [...] the bridge, on the west side of the chasm, is a cave or little [...] which has a convenient entrance at the north, and a passage [...] east. From the west side of this cave, a chasm extends into the [...] but soon becomes too narrow to pass. The rocks here, which [...] mostly white, though in some places clouded on streaked with [...] colours, appear to be of that species of coarse white marble which [...] common at Lanesborough, and in other towns in Berkshire county.

In the town of Wrentham, about two miles S. E. of the [...] house, is a curious cavern called Wampom's Rock, from an Indian [...] of that name who resided in it for a number of years. It is [...] on the south side of a hill, and is surrounded by a number of [...] rocks. It is nearly square, each side measuring about 9 feet. The height is about 8 feet in front, but from the center it lessens to [...] 4 feet. At present it serves only as a shelter for cattle and sho [...]p, [...] do one or two other rocks or caves in the town, formerly inhabited by Indians.

Under this article we mention the falls of Powow river, which rises in New Hampshire, and falls into the Merrimack between Salis­bury and Amesbury, in the county of Essex. At these falls, [...] [...] scent of the water, in the distance of 50 rods, is 100 feet, and in [...] passage carries one bloomery, five saw mills, seven grist mills, [...] linseed oil mills, one fulling mill and one snuff mill, besides [...] wheels, auxiliary to different labours. The rap [...] fall of the [...] the dams at very short distances crossing the river—the various [...] and mills arising almost immediately one over another—and the [...] irregular and grotesque situation of the houses and other buildings [...] the adjoining grounds, give this place a romantic appearance, and [...] ford in the whole, one of the most singular views to be found in [...] country.

Lynn Beach may be reckoned a curiosity. It is one mile in length and connects the peninsula, called Nahant, with the main land. [...] is a place of much resort for parties of pleasure from Boston, Charles­town, Salem and Marblehead, in the summer season. The [...] used as a race ground, for which it is well calculated, being [...] smooth and hard.

MINERALS, FOSSILS AND MINERAL SPRINGS.] Iron ore, in im­mense quantities, is found in various parts of this State, particular [...] in the old colony of Plymouth, in the towns of Middle [...]on [...] Bridgewater, Taunton Attleborough, Stoughton, and the towns in [...] neighbourhood, which has in consequence become the seat of the [...] manufactures. The slitting mills in this district, it is said annually [...] 600 tons of iron; and one company has lately been formed, [...] will annually manufacture into nails, of a quality equal to these [...] ported, 500 tons of iron. The number of spikes and nails [...] this State is supposed now to be twice as large as that made in [...] and is still increasing, and will probably soon preclude all foreign, [...] portations; and, from the abundance of the raw material, may [...] an article of export.

[Page 367] [...] ore is found at Leverett in the county of Hampshire, and [...] in the county of Bristol—Several mines of black lead [...] discovered in Brimfield in Hampshire county—and white [...] and yellow and red ochre, at Martha's Vineyard. Allum [...] [...] has been found in some parts; and also ruddle or a red [...] which has been used as a ground colour for priming, instead of [...] brown. In a quarry of lime stone, in the parish of Byefield, [...] [...] of Essex, is found the Asbestos, or incombustible cotton, [...] called. Marble has been found in the same vicinity. [...] [...] conjectured that there are considerable beds of it. The spe­ [...] [...] it already exhibited have been beautifully variegated in co­ [...] admit an admirable polish. A marble quarry at Lanesbo­rough [...] very good marble.

[...] mineral springs have been found in different parts of the [...] particularly at Lynn, Wrentham, Menotomy Parish in Cam­bridge &c. but none are celebrated as places of resort for in­ [...]

[...]ARY, HUMANE and other SOCIETIES.] These institu­ [...] Massachusetts, exhibit a fair trait in the character of the in­ [...]. Among the first literary institutions in this state, is the [...] ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SCIENCES, incorporated May [...]. It is declared in the act, that the end and design of the [...], is to promote and encourage the knowledge of the anti­ [...] of America, and of the natural history of the country, and to [...] the uses to which the various natural productions of the [...] may be applied. Also to promote and encourage medical [...], mathematical disquisitions, philosophical enquiries and [...]; astronomical, meteorological and geographical observa­ [...] improvements in agriculture, arts, manufacture, commerce and [...] cultivation of every science that may tend to advance a free, in­ [...], and virtuous people. There are never to be more than [...] members, nor less than forty. This society has four stat­ [...] [...] meetings. They have a Committee, by the name of "The [...] Committee," whose business it is to receive and communi­ [...] [...] useful information on that subject.

[...] MASSACHUSETTS CHARITABLE SOCIETY, incorporated Decem­ber 1779, is intended for the mutual aid of themselves and families, [...] be distressed by any of the adverse accidents of life, and for [...] and relieving of widows and orphans of their deceas­ [...] [...]. The members of this society meet annually, and are not [...] [...] an hundred in number.

The BOSTON EPISCOPAL CHARITABLE SOCIETY, first instituted [...] and incorporated February 12, 1784, has for its object, char­ [...] [...] as are of the episcopal church, and to such others as the [...] shall think fit; but more especially the relief of those who are [...] of, and benefactors to the society, and afterwards become [...] objects of its charity. The members of this society meet an­ [...] and are not to exceed one hundred in number.

[...] MASSACHUSETTS MEDICAL SOCIETY, was incorporated No­vember [...] 1781. The design of this institution is, to promote med­ical [...] [...]gical knowledge, enquiries into the annual economy, [...] [...] properties and effects of medicine, by encouraging a free in­ [...] with the gentlemen of the faculty throughout the United States of America, and a friendly correspondence, with the eminent [Page 368] in those professions throughout the world. The number of [...] who are inhabitants of the state, cannot exceed seventy. [...] ­fent number is sixty one, and thirteen have died since to [...] ­ment. The powers vested in the society are—To choose their [...] and enact any laws for their own government which are not [...] to the laws of the Commonwealth—To use a common Seal [...] be sued—To hold real estate of the annual income of [...] and personal estate of the annual income of £600—To [...] suspend, expel or disfranch [...]e any fellows of the society— [...] scribe and point out, from time to time, such a mode of [...] [...] ­struction or education as they shall judge requisite for [...] the practice of physick and surgery—To examine all [...] shall offer themselves for examination, respecting their [...] the profession—And to give letters testimonial of their [...] to all such as may be duly qualified to practice. *

Committees are appointed in each county to receive [...] from, and to correspond with their medical brethren who are [...] lows of the society; and this has led to the formation or [...] medical associations, whose views are to aid the laudable [...] this important institution.

Further to evidence their humanity and benevolence, a [...] the medical and other gentlemen, in the town of Boston, [...] formed a society, by the name of the HUMANE SOCIETY, for [...] ­pose of recovering persons apparently dead, from drowning [...] [...], strangling, and other accidents. This society, [...] incorporated in 1791, have erected 7 huts, furnished with wood [...] cabbins, [...]nder boxes, blankets, &c. two on Lovel's Island, [...] Calf Island both in Boston harbour two on Nantasket beach and [...] on S [...]tuate beach near Marshfield, for the comfort of [...] [...] seamen. Huts of the same kind are erected on Plumb [...] Newbury, by the marine society of that place, already [...] [...] there are also some contiguous to Hampton and Sal [...]sbury [...].

At their semiannual meetings, a public discourse is delivered [...] person appointed by the trustees for that purpose, on [...] [...] subject connected with the principal object of the society; [...] [...] to investigation, and a reward of merit, a medal i [...] [...] annually by the president and trustees, to the person who [...] most approved dissertation.

THE SOCIETY FOR PROPAGATING THE GOSPEL [...] [...] ­dians and others in North America, was incorporated November [...] 1787. They are enabled to receive subscriptions of charitably [...] persons, and may take any personal estate in [...]cession. [...] nations to the society either by subscriptions, legacy or [...] excepting such as may be differently appropriated by the [...] make a part of, or be put into the capital stock of the society, [...] to be put out on interest on good security, or otherwise [...] the best advantage, and the income and profits are to be [...] purposes aforesaid, in such manner as the society shall [...] condu [...]ve to answer the design of their institution. For [...] past missionaries have been appointed and supported by the [...] to visit the eastern parts of the District of Main, where [...] ­ple are generally destitute of the means of religious instruction [Page 369] [...] the summer months with them. The success of these missions [...] highly satisfactory to the society. Several thousand books of [...] kinds, suited to the state of the people, have been purchased by [...] funds, and distributed among them and the Oneida Indians. [...] of this society are a board of commissioners from the Scot's so­ [...] promoting christian knowledge among the Indians in America. [...] MASSACHUSETTS SOCIETY FOR PROMOTING ACRICULTURE, [...] incorporated in 1792, in consequence of which the agricultural [...] of the Academy is dissolved. At a late meeting of this society, [...], a very considerable sum of money was subscribed, for establish­ [...] a [...] to defray the expense of premiums and bounties, which [...] be voted by the society.

[...] society was established in this state in 1791, called the HISTOR­ [...] SOCIETY, the professed design of which is to collect, preserve [...] communicate materials for a complete history of this country [...] the beginning of its settlement.

[...] to Pennsylvania, this state has the greatest number of societies [...] promotion of useful knowledge and human happiness; and [...] are founded on the broad basis of benevolence, patr [...]tism and char­ [...] [...] cannot fail to prosper. These institutions, which are fast increas­ [...] in almost every state in the union, are so many evidences of the [...] and advancing state of civilization and improvement in this [...], and of the excellence of our national government. They [...] likewise that a free republican government, like ours, is the [...] happily calculated to promote a general diffusion of useful know­ [...] and the most favourable to the benevolent and humane feelings [...] human heart.

LITERATURE, COLLEGES, ACADEMIES, &c.] According to the [...] of this Commonwealth, every town having fifty householders or [...], is to be provided with one or more school masters to teach children and youth to read and write, and instruct them in the Eng­lish language, arithmetic, orthography and decent behaviour; and [...] any town has 200 families, there is also to be a grammar school [...] therein, and some discreet person, well instructed in the Latin, [...] and English languages, procured to keep the same, and be suitably [...] by the inhabitants. The penalty for neglect of schools in towns [...] families is 10l. those of 100 families 20l.—of 150 30l.

[...] laws respecting schools, are not so well regarded in many [...] of the state, as the wise purposes which they were intended to [...], and the happiness of the people require.

[...] Boston there are seven public schools, supported wholly at the [...] of the town, and in which the children of every class of citi­ [...] [...] associate. In the Latin grammar school the rudiments of the [...] and Greek languages are taught, and boys qualified for the uni­ [...] ▪ into this school none are admitted till ten years of age, [...] been previously well instructed in English grammar. In the [...] English grammar schools, the children of both sexes, from 7 to 14 [...] of age, are instructed in spelling, accenting and reading the English language both prose and verse, with propriety, also in English [...] and composition, together with the rudiments of geography; [...] other three the same children are taught writing and arithme­ [...]. These schools are attended alternately, and each of them is fur­ [...] with an Usher or Assistant. The masters of these schools [...] each a salary of 666 [...] dollars per annum, payable quarterly.

[Page 370] They are all under the immediate care of a committee of twenty one gentlemen, for the time being, chosen annually, whose duty it is "to visit the schools at least once in three months, to examine the scholars in the various branches in which they are taught, to devise the best methods for the instruction and government of the schools, to give such advice to the masters as they shall think expedient, and by all proper methods to excite in children a laudable ambition so ex­cel in a virtuous, amiable deportment, and in every branch of use­ful knowledge." At the annual visitation in July 1792, there were present 470 miles and 720 boys. Besides these there are sev­eral private schools, for instruction in the English, Lattin, and French languages—in writing, arithmetic and the higher branch­es of mathematics—and also in music and dancing. Perhaps there is not a town in the world, the youth of which more ful­ly enjoy the benefits of school education, than Boston. And when we consider how inseparably the happiness and prosperity of our country, and the existence of our present happy government, are con­nected with the education of children, too much credit cannot be given to the enlightened citizens of this town, for the attention they have paid to this important business, and the worthy example they have exhibited for the imitation of others.

Next in importance to the grammar schools are the Academies, in which, as well as in the grammar schools, young gentlemen are fitted for admission to the University.

DUMMER ACADEMY, at Newbury, was founded as early as 1756, by means of a liberal donation from the Honorable William Dummer formerly Lieutenant Governour, and a worthy man, whose name is has ever since retained. It was opened in 1763, and incorporated by an act of the general court, in 1784. By the act the number of Trus­tees is not to exceed 15, who are to manage the funds for the support of the instructors. This academy is at present in a flourishing state.

PHILLIPS ACADEMY, in Andover, was founded and handsomely endowed April 21, 1778, by the Honourable Samuel Phillips, Esq of Andover, in the county of Essex, and commonwealth of Massachusetts lately deceased, and his brother, the Honourable John Phillips L. L. D. of Exeter, in the state of New Hampshire. It was incorporated Oc­tober 4, 1780. It is under the direction of thirteen Trustees of re­spectable characters, and the immediate care of a Principal, (who is one of the Trustees ex off [...]io) an Assistant, and a Writing Master. They are accommodated with a large and elegant building, erected at the expense of the founders, and their brother the Honourable Wil­liam Phillips, Esq. of Boston. It is situated on a delightful eminence, near the mansion house of the Honourable Samuel Phillips, Esq. its distinguished patron, and son of the deceased founder—is encompass­ed with a salubrious air, and commands an extensive prospect. The lower story contains a large school-room, with ample accommodation for an hundred students, and two other apartments for a library, and other purposes; the upper story consists of a spacious hall, sixty four feet in length, and thirty-three feet in breadth, designed for exhibi­tions and other public occasions.

The design of this foundation, according to its constitution, is, [...] The promotion of true piety and virtue, the instruction of youth [Page 371] [...] the English, Latin and Greek languages; together with writing, arithmetic, practical geometry, musick and oratory, logic and geo­graphy; and such other of the liberal arts and sciences, of languages, [...] opportunity and ability may hereafter admit, and the Trustees [...] direct."

[...]CESTER ACADEMY, in the township of Leicester, and county of Worcester, was incorporated in 1784. For the encouragement of this institution, Ebenezer Crafts and Jacob Davis, Esqr's▪ generously [...] a large and commodious mansion house, lands and appurtenances, [...] Leicester.

In Williamstown, in Berkshire county, is another Academy. Col. [...]phraim Williams laid the foundation of it by a handsome donation in lands. In 1790, partly by lottery and partly by the liberal donation of gentlemen in the town, a brick edifice was erected, 82 feet by 42, and four stories high, containing 24 rooms for students▪ a large school [...]; a dining hall and a room for public speaking. It has a Precep­ [...], an Usher and a Master of the English school. The number of students is at present between 50 and 60, besides the scholars of the [...] school. The languages and sciences usually taught in the Amer­ican colleges are taught here. Board, tuition and other expenses of education are very low▪ and from its situation and other circumstanc­es, it is likely, in a short time, to become an institution of considerable utility and importance.

An Academy at Taunton was incorporated in 1792.

At Hingham is a well endowed school, which in honor of its prin­cipal donor and founder, is called DERBY SCHOOL.

These Academies are designed to disseminate virtue and true piety, to promote the education of youth in the English, Latin, Greek and French languages, in writing, arithmetic, oratory, geography, practical [...], logic, philosophy, and such other of the liberal arts and sciences, or languages, as may be thought expedient.

HARVARD UNIVERSITY takes its date from the year 1638. Two years before, the general court gave four hundred pounds for the sup­port of a public school at Newtown, which has since been called Cambridge. This year (1638) the Rev. Mr. John Harvard, a worthy [...] residing in Charlestown, died, and left a donation of £779 for the use of the forementioned public school. In honour to the memory of so liberal a benefactor, the general court the same [...], ordered that the school should take the name of HARVARD COLLEGE.

In 1642, the College was put upon a more respectable footing, and the governor, deputy governor, and magistrates, and the ministers of the fix next adjacent towns, with the President, were erected into a corporation for the ordering and managing its concerns. It received its first charter in 1650.

Cambridge▪ in which the university is situated, is a pleasant village, [...] miles westward from Boston, containing a number of gentlemen's [...] which are neat and well built. The university consists of four elegant brick edifices▪ handsomely enclosed. They stand on a beau­tiful green which spreads to the northwest, and exhibit a pleasing view▪

The names of the several buildings are, Harvard Hall, Massachusetts [...], Hollis, Hall and Holden Chapel. Harvard Hall is divided into [...] apartments one of which is appropriated for the library, one for [Page 372] the museum, two for the philosophical apparatus; one is used for a chapel, and the other for a dining hall. The library, in 1791, [...] of upwards of 13,000 volumes; and will be continually in [...] from the interest of permanent funds, as well as from casual [...] ­tions. The philosophical apparatus, belonging to this university, [...] between 1400 and £1500 lawful money, and is the most elegant and complete of any in America.

Agreeable to the present constitution of Massachusetts, his excell [...]y the governor, lieutenant governor, the council and senate, the pre [...] of the university, and the ministers of the congregational chu [...] [...] the towns of Boston, Charlestown, Cambridge, Watertown, Rox­bury, and Dorchester, are, ex officiis, Overseers of the University.

The corporation is a distinct body, consisting of seven members, [...] whom is vested the property of the university.

Harvard university has a President, Emeritus Professor of Divinity—Hollisian Professor of Divinity—Hancock Professor of Hebrew and other oriental languages—Hollis Professor of the mathematics and Natural Philosophy—Hersey Professor of anatomy and surgery— [...] ­sey Professor of the theory and practice of physick—E [...]ving Profess [...] of chymistry and materia medica—four Tutors, who teach the [...] and Latin languages, logic, metaphysics and ethics, geography and the elements of geometry, natural philosophy, astronomy and [...], and a preceptor of the French language.

This university, as to its library, philosophical apparatus and pro­fessorships, is at present the first literary institution on this cont [...]. Since its first establishment, upwards of 3300 students have [...] honorary degrees from its successive officers; about one third of [...] have been ordained to the work of the gospel ministry. It has gen­erally from 130 to 160 students.

This university is liberally endowed, and is frequently receiving donations for the establishment of new professorships. For [...] there was an annual grant made by the legislature, to the president and professors, of from four to five hundred pounds, which for seven years past has been discontinued.

BANKS.] There are four incorporated Banks in this Common­wealth, of which the Branch Bank in Boston, which is a part of the National Bank, is one. The Massachusetts Bank in Boston was incorporated in 1784. It was designed as a public benefit, and [...] particularly to accomodate the mercantile interest. Its present capital consists of 800 shares of 500 dollars each, making in all 400,000 dollars. It is kept open every day in the year, except public days. The an [...] meeting for the choice of nine directors is on the first Wednesday [...] January.

Essex Bank, at Salem, was incorporated 1792, and is under the management of a president and six directors.

Union Bank, in Boston, was also incorporated in 179 [...], and has pre­sident and eleven directors. Its capital consists of 100,000 [...] of eight dollars each, so that when the payment of the shares shall [...] completed, the whole stock will amount to 800,000 dollars.

CHIEF TOWNS.] BOSTON is the capital, not only of Massachu­setts, but of New England, and lies in lat. 42° 23′ N. It is [...] [...] a peninsula of an irregular form, at the bottom of Massachusetts [...]. The neck or isthmus which joins the peninsula to the continent, [...] the south end of the town, and leads to Roxbury. The length of [...] [Page 373] [...] itself i [...] not quite two miles. Its breadth is various. At the [...] from Roxbury it is narrow. The greatest breadth is one [...] and [...]39 yards. The buildings in the town cover about 1000 acres. [...] contains nearly 2000 dwelling houses and about 10,000 inhabitants.

[...] this town there are seventy nine streets, 38 lanes, and twenty one [...] exclusive of squares and courts; and about eighty wharves and [...] very convenient for vessels. The principal wharf extends 600 [...] [...] the sea, and is covered on the north side with large and con­ [...] stores. It far exceeds any other wharf in the United States.

[...] are 17 houses for public worship; of which nine are for [...] [...]tionalists, three for episcopalians, two for baptifts, one for the [...] one for universalists, and one for Roman catholics.

[...] other public buildings are the state house, court house, goal, Fan­ [...] [...], an alms house, a work house, a bridewell and powder mag­ [...]. That building which was formerly the governour's house, is [...] [...] in its several apartments, by the council, the treasur­ [...] the secretary; the two latter hold their offices in it. Most of [...] buildings are handsome, and some of them are elegant. The [...] irregularly built, but, as it lies in a circular form around the [...], it exhibits a very handsome view as you approach it from [...] [...]. On the west side of the town i [...] the mall, a very beautiful pub­ [...] [...] adorned with rows of trees, and in view of the common; which is always open to refreshing breezes. Beacon hill, on which a [...] monument, commemorative of some of the most important [...] of the late war, has lately been erected, overlooks the town [...] and affords a fine variegated prospect.

[...] harbour of Boston i [...] safe, and large enough to contain 500 ships [...] in a good depth of water; while the entrance is so narrow [...] scarcely to admit two ships abreast. It is diversified, as we have al­ [...] observed, with 40 islands, which afford rich pasturing, hay and [...]. About three miles from the town is the castle, which com­ [...] the entrance of the harbour.

The market in this town is supplied with an abundance of beef, pork, [...], lamb, veal and poultry, and of a quality equal to any in [...] world; and also with [...] butter, cheese, roots, vegetables and [...] of various kinds, in great plenty. The fish market is also ex­ [...] and not only furnishes the tables of the rich with some of [...] dainties, but is also a singular blessing to the poor.

[...] annual meeting in March, seven selectmen are chosen for the [...] immediate government of the town; at the same time are elected a [...], a town treasurer, 12 overseers of the poor, 12 firewards, [...] of the market, 12 scavengers, and 12 constables, besides [...] of other officers. Attempts have been made to change the [...] of the town from its present form to that of a city, but [...] form not being consonant to the democratic spirit of the [...] of the people, it has been rejected.

[...] was settled as early as the year 1631, from Charlestown, [...] peninsula was called, by the natives, Shzwmut; but the inhabi­tants of Charlestown, from the view they had of three hills, called it [...]. The new inhabitants, however, named it Boston, out of [...] [...] the Rev. Mr. Cotton, formerly a minister of Boston, in [...], who was expected to come over to New England. He [...] minister of the first church.

[...] been computed, that during the siege in 1775, as many houses [...] destroyed in Boston by the British troops, as were burnt in [Page 374] Charlestown. Since the peace a spirit of repairs and improvement has diffused itself among the inhabitants. The streets of late, have been lighted with lamps at the expense of the town; and some [...] beginnings have been made towards improving the streets by [...] [...] ­ing them, which it is hoped will stimulate to like improvements [...] the town. The principal manufactures here are, rum, beer, paper [...] ­ings of which 24,000 pieces are annually made, loaf sugar, [...] cards, sail cloth, spermaceti and tallow candles glass—there are 30 di [...] ­ries, 2 breweries, 8 sugar houses, and [...] [...]ope walks. A few [...] [...]nder the metropolis of Massachusetts a [...] [...]amed for arts, [...] and commerce, as any city in the United States.

Salem, the second town for size in the Commonwealth, [...] [...] 928 houses and 7921 inhabitants, and except Plymouth, the [...] was settled in 1628, by governor Endicot, and was called by [...] [...] ­dians Naumkeag. Here are a meeting of quakers, an [...] church and five congregational societies. The town is [...] [...] peninsula, formed by two small inlets of the sea, called [...] south rivers. The former of these passes into Beverly harbod [...] [...] has a draw bridge across it, built many years ago at private expe [...]. At this place some part of the shipping of the town is fitted [...] the principal harbour and place for business is on the other side of [...] town, at south river, if that may properly be called a river [...] depends on the flowing of the sea for the water it contains. So [...] is this harbour that vessels which draw more than ten or twelve [...] water, must be laden and unladen at a distance from the [...] by the assistance of lighters. This inconvenience, notwithstanding more navigation is owned, and more trade carried on in [...] [...] in any port in the Commonwealth, Boston excep [...]d. The [...] the trade to the West Indies, to Europe, to the coast of Africa, [...] East Indies, and the freighting business from the southern states, [...] here all pursued with energy and spirit. The enterprize of the [...] ­chants of this place is equalled by nothing but their indefatigable In­dustry and severe economy. This latter virtue forms a distinguish [...] feature in the character of the people of this town. Some [...] rank, in former times, having carried it to an unbecoming [...] a character to the people in general of a disgraceful [...]. But, whether this reproach was ever justly applied in so [...] measure or not, nothing can be more injurious than to contin [...] [...] the present time; fo [...] i [...] may justly be [...] of the inhabitants of [...] [...] this day, that, with a laudable attention to the [...]quisition of [...] p [...]ty, they exhibit a public spirit and hospitality, alike honourable [...] themselves and their country. A general plainness and neatness [...] buildings and equipage▪ and a certain stillness and gravity of [...] perhaps in some degree peculiar to commercial people, distinguish [...] them from the citizens of the metropolis. It is indeed to be [...] that the sober industry here so universally practised, may [...] [...]re extensive through the union, and form the national [...] federal Americans.

A court house, built in 1786, at the joint expense of the county [...] [...] forms a principal ornament, and is executed in a style of [...] ­lecture that would add to the elegance of any city in the [...]. Supreme Judicial court, holds a term here the second Tuesday, [...] [...], the [...]ourts of common pleas and sessions, the second [...] March and September.

[Page 375] A manufactory of duck and sail cloth, was lately instituted here, [...] is prosecuted with much spirit.

The melancholly delusion of 1692 originated in this town, in the [...] of the Rev. Mr. Paris, the then minister, and here was the prin­cipal theatre of the bloody business. At the upper end of the town, [...] place called, from the number of executions which took place [...] [...]llows hill, the graves of the unhappy sufferers may yet be traced. Though this unfortunate and disgraceful business was chiefly transact­ [...] [...], it is well known that the leading people, both of church and [...] the colony, took an active part in it. Unjust therefore and [...] it is to fix a peculiar odium on the town of Salem for [...] was the general weakness or crime of the country. While the [...] [...]mile is excited among the vain and unthinking, or the insult­ing [...] of illiberal prejudice is unjustly thrown on this shocking [...], the serious cannot but lament to find the human mind, subject [...] [...] deceptions, and the man of candour will hasten to drop [...] on the dismal scene.

[...] from Salem, and at four miles distance from it, lies [...], containing one episcopal and two congregational [...], besides a small society of separatists. The chief attention of [...] is devoted to the bank fishery, and more is done in that line [...] i [...] any port in the government. The late war putting to total [...] this business, and vast numbers of the men before employed in [...] lost by land and water, the peace found those who sur­ [...] in circumstances of great distress. Great exertions were made [...] the former course of business, and it is lamented by every [...] industry and the prosperity of the country, that these exertions [...] not been crowned with more success; every thing here has more [...] the symptoms of decay. The great number of widows and [...] caused by the war, and left at the close of it to the charge of [...], are a melancholy burthen under which nothing less than [...]mental aid can relieve it. A lottery has been granted by the [...] for the double purpose of lessening the weight of this burden, and repairing the sea wall, which protects the harbour; and which was [...] danger of giving way, to the great detriment, if not [...] [...] of the port.

A peculiarity observable in our fishing towns may be worthy men­ [...]. The spring, summer and autumn, being entirely occupied in [...] pursuit of their employment, leaves no time for amuse­ [...]. In winter, every thing is different. There are few calls to [...] and all are devoted to mirth and jollity. A continual round of [...] and dissipation occupy the fisherman's time, until returning [...] calls him to returning labour, which he now pursues as eagerly [...] did just before his amusement.

[...] Port, originally part of Newbury, from which its incorpor­ [...] detached it in 1764, and by which and Merrimack river it is [...] [...]cled, is perhaps the most limited in its extent of land, of any [...] in the commonwealth, containing but about 640 acres. [...] [...] four houses for public worship, viz. one Epistopalian, one [...] and two Congregational. It was formerly remarkable [...] number of vessels annually built here; but since the commence [...] the late war, this business has in a great degree failed, and [...]facture of consequence has yet supplied its place. The con­ [...] frigates, Boston and Hancock, were built here, besides many [Page 376] large private armed ships during the war. The trade to the West In­dies is carried on here with much spirit and to a great amount. [...] quantities of rum are distilled, which is principally exported to the southern states. Some vessels are employed in the freighting business, and a few in the fishery. In November, 1790, there were [...] in this port six ships, 45 brigantines, 39 schooners and 28 sloops, [...] in the whole 11,870 tons. A term of the courts of common plea [...] general sessions is held here on the last Tuesday of September.

Ipswich, by the Indians called Agawam, in the county of [...] 32 miles N. N. E. from Boston, is divided into 5 parishes [...] [...] ­tains 4562 inhabitants. An excellent stone bridge, across Ipswich river, composed of two arches, with one solid pier in the bed of the river, connects the two parts of the town, and was executed [...] the direction of the late Honourable Judge Choate, in a style of strength and neatness, hitherto unequalled in this country. [...] was heretofore a place of much more consideration than at [...]. Its decline is attributed to a barred harbour and shoal rivers. Its [...] ­ural situation is very pleasant, and on all accounts excellently well [...] ­culated to be a large manufacturing town. The supreme judicial court, the courts of common pleas and sessions, are held here once in a year; and from its central situation, appears to be the most conveni­ent place for all the courts and public offices of the county.

Charlestown, called by the aboriginal inhabitants, Mishaw [...], lies [...] of Boston, with which it is connected by Charles river bridge, and it the principal town in Middlesex county. The town, properly so called, i [...] built on a peninsula, formed by Mystic river, on the east, and a [...], setting up from Charles river on the west. It is very advantageous situated for health, * navigation, trade, and manufactures of almost all the various kinds. A dam across the mouth of the bay, which [...] up from Charles river, west of the town, would afford a great number of mill seats for manufacturers. Bunker, Breed's, and Cobble, now Barrell's, hills, are celebrated in the history of the American Revolu­tion; and no less so for the elegant and delightful prospects which they afford of Boston, and its charmingly variegated harbour—of Cambridge and its Colleges, and of an extensive tract of highly cul­tivated country.

The destruction of this town by the British, in 1775, we have men­tioned in the historical sketch we have given of the war. Before in destruction, several branches of manufactures were carried on to [...] advantage, some of which have been since revived; particularly [...] manufacture of pot and pearl ash, rum, ships, leather in all its branch­es, silver, tin, brass, and pewter. §

Cambridge and Concord, are the most considerable inlands towns in the County of Middlesex, the former is 4 miles from Boston, and i [...] a pleasant town, and the seat of the University. The latter is 19 [...] N. W. of Boston, and is also a pleasant, healthy, thriving [...] The Provincial Congress sat in Concord in 1774, and the general [...] have frequently held their sessions here when contagious diseases have prevailed in the capital. This town is rendered famous in history [...] its being the place where the first opposition was made to the British troops, on the memorable 19th of April 1775. The public buildings [Page 377] [...], a congregational church, a spacious stone goal, the best in New­England, and a county court house. The town is accommodated with [...] handsome bridges, one of which is 208 feet long and 18 feet [...] supported by 12 piers, built after the manner of Charles river [...]. In 1791, there were 1 [...]90 inhabitants, in this town, 80 of [...] were upwards of 70 years old. For 13 years past the average [...] of deaths has been 17, one in four of whom were 70 years [...] and upwards.

[...], the principal town in the county of the same name, and [...] of the Old colony, so called, is 42 miles S. E. of Boston, and [...] about 300 houses. Before the war, the inhabitants of this [...] employed 90 sail of vessels, chiefly in the fishing business. But [...] course of the war, they were mostly taken or destroyed by the [...], and their seamen captivated, and many of the inhabitants re­ [...] to indigence. They have since, in a great measure, emerged [...] their distressed state. The harbour is spacious but the water is [...]. This town is famous for being the first place settled by the [...] ancestors of the New Englanders, in 1620.

[...], the shire town of the county of the same name, is the [...] inland town in New England, and is situated about 47 miles [...] of Boston. The public buildings in this town, are two [...] churches, a court house, and a strong stone goal. The [...] carry on a large inland trade, and manufacture pot and [...] cotton and linen goods, besides some other articles.

[...]ing, in its various branches, is carried on very extensively in this town, by Isaiah Thomas, who, in the year 1791, carried through his presses two editions of the Bible, the one the large royal quarto, the [...] of that kind published in America, the other a large folio, with 50 cop­ [...]tes, besides several other books of consequence. His printing ap­paratus consists of 10 printing presses, with types in proportion; and he [...] now making preparations for the printing of Bibles of various smaller lands, which will cause him to make a great addition to his works, of [...] presses and types. This printing apparatus is now the largest in America.

[...] Connecticut river, in the county of Hampshire, there are a [...] of very pleasant towns, among which are Springfield [...] Hadley, on the east side of the river; Northampton, Hatfield and [...] on the west. Courts are held in all these places in their [...] except Hatfield. Springfield is the oldest of these towns, having [...] settled as early as 1636. Its public buildings are a congregation­al [...]ch, court house, and goal. A large proportion of the military [...] of the commonwealth are lodged here. A clear meandering [...] runs through the town from north to south, and adds much to its [...] and pleasantness.

suchbridge, Great Barrington, and Lenox, are the principal towns [...] Berkshire county, and lie from 45 to 55 miles W. N. W. from Springfield.

MILITARY STRENGTH.] The active militia of Massachusetts is composed of all able bodied, white male citizens from 16 to 40 years of [...], excepting officers of government, and those who have held [...]issions, &c. The whole is completely armed and organized, and is formed into nine divisions, each commanded by a major gener­al, nineteen brigades, consisting of seventy nine regiments of instant­ly, [Page 378] eleven battalions of cavalry, and eight battalions of artillery▪ to­gether forming a well regulated body of 50,000 infantry, 2,000 [...] ▪ and 1500 artillery men, with 60 pieces of field artillery. This [...] ­tive military corps is assembled by companies for discipline, in [...] respective districts, four times a year; and once a year by regi [...] or brigades; at which time they are reviewed and inspected.

Besides the military strength abovementioned, which may be [...] ­ered as the active militia of the state, there are en [...]olled about [...] men from 40 to 60 years of age, who are obliged always to keep them­selves completely; armed; and they are required, under penalty [...] law, to exhibit their arms once a year to their respective captain, [...] make returns thereof. This last corps is called the alarm list, and [...] properly distinguished as the Corps de Reserve of the Common [...].

RELIGION.] The religion of this Commonwealth is establish [...] their excellent constitution, on a most liberal and tolerant [...] persons of whatever religious profession or sentiments, may worship God agreeably to the dictates of their own consciences, unmo [...] provided they do not disturb the peace.

The following statement, shews what are the several religious de­nominations in this state, and their proportional numbers.

Denominations. Number of Congregations Supposed number of each denomination.
Congregationalists, 400 277,600
Baptists, 84 58,296
Episcopalians, 16 11,104
Friends or Quakers, 10 6,940
Presbyterians, 4 2,776
Universalists, 2 1,388
Roman Catholics 1 69 [...]
Total 517 358,798

In this statement, it is supposed that all the inhabitants in the [...] consider themselves as belonging to one or the other of the religious de­nominations mentioned; and that each religious society, of every de­nomination, is composed of an equal number of souls; that is, each i [...] supposed to contain 694, which, if we reckon the number of inhabi­tants in the state at 358,798, will be the proportion for each con­gregation.

Although this may not be an exact apportionment of the different sects, yet it is perhaps as accurate as the nature of the subject will allow and sufficient to give a general idea of the proportion which the sev­eral denominations bear to each other.

The number of congregational churches in 1749 was 250.

In 1760, the number of inhabitants in this state, was about 268, [...] The proportion of the sects was then nearly as follows, viz. [...].

Sects. Congregations Supposed number of souls of each [...]
Congregationalists, 306 225, [...]6
Friends meetings, 22 16,192
Baptists, 20 14,70 [...]
Episcopalians, 13 9, [...]
Prosbyterians, 4 2,944
Total 365 268,85 [...]

[Page 379] POPULATION.] The population of the state is accurately stated [...] of divisions. The counties of Essex, part of Suffolk, and [...] of Hampshire, are the most populous parts of the state. Essex, [...] [...] as 135 inhabitants for every square mile.

CHARACTER, MANNERS, &c.] See New England.

REVENUE AND TAXES.] The principal sources of revenue are land and [...] taxes and the sales of new lands. Taxes are [...]evied on all [...] between sixteen and fifty, except such as are exempted by law—al­ [...] [...] the number of acres of improved and unimproved land—on [...] houses and barns, ware houses, stores, &c. These are all valued, [...] this valuation taxes are laid, so many pounds for every £1000.

[...]TIONS AND IMPROVEMENTS.] Great improvements have of [...] made in several manufacturing machines, by which those [...] of manufacture in which they are employed, have been [...] facilitated in the execution, and fewer hands required. But [...] ingenious improvement, or invention, and which most [...] notice, is a complete and elegant Planetarium, 6 feet in [...], constructed by Mr. Joseph Pope of Boston. This is [...] a work of original genius and assiduous application, as [...] Pope never saw a machine of the kind till his own was com­ [...]. It exhibits a proof of great strength of mind, and really [...] him much honour, both as a philosopher and a mechanic. This machine has been purchased for the University at Cambridge, and is a very useful and ornamental addition to the philosophical ap­paratus.

CONSTITUTION.] The constitution of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts established in 1780, contains a declaration of rights and [...] of government. The declaration asserts the natural freedom and equality of men—Liberty of conscience—Freedom of the Press [...] by jury—Sovereignty and independence—that all power is [...] the people—that hereditary honours and emoluments are inadmis­ [...] that every subject is entitled to protection of life, liberty and [...]—and, in return, must obey the laws and pay his proportion [...] the common expense—that he shall not be obliged to accuse him­self▪ but may be heard in his own defence—that he may keep arms; [...] [...] armies shall not be maintained in time of peace—that no [...] be [...]ev [...]ed without the consent of the people by their repre­sentatives—that no expost facto law shall be made—that the martial [...] extend only to men in actual military service—that the legis­lative, executive, and judiciary powers shall be kept distinct, &c. By the frame of government, the power of legislation is lodged in a [...] court, consisting of two branches, viz. a senate and a house of representatives, each having a negative upon the other. They meet [...] on the last Tuesday in May. No act can be passed without [...]bation of the governour, unless two thirds of both branches are i [...] favour of it after a revisal. Either branch, or the governour [...], may require the opinion of the justices of the supreme judicial court, upon important questions. Senators are chosen by [...] of which there cannot be less than thirteen. The number of [...] and senators, for the whole Commonwealth, is forty; the number of each district is in proportion to their public taxes; [...] district shall be so large, as to have more than six. Six­teen senators make a quorum. The representative▪ are chosen by the several towns, according to their numbers of rateable polls. [...] [Page 380] 150 polls one is elected; and for every addition of 225, an additional one. Their travelling expense, to and from the general [...] [...] defrayed by the public, but their wages for attendance are [...] their own towns. Impeachments, for misconduct in office, are [...] by the representatives, and tried by the senate; but the [...] can go only to removal from office and future disqualification. Mo­ney bills originate in the house of representatives, but may be [...] by the senate. Representatives are privileged from arrests on [...] process. Sixty members make a quorum. The supreme executive authority is vested in a governour, who is elected annually by the people, and has a council consisting of the lieutenant governour, and nine gentlemen chosen out of the forty, who are returned for counsel­lors and senators. Five counsellors make a quorum. The governor is commander of all the military force of the Commonwealth▪ [...] may convene the general court, may adjourn them, when the [...] branches disagree about the time, and in their recess, may [...] them from time to time, not exceeding ninety days—may pardon [...] ­victs, but the legislature alone can grant pardons, before conviction. He commissions all officers, and with the advice of the council, ap­points all judicial officers. Military officers are thus appointed; the respective companies choose their captain and subalterns, who choose their regimental officers, who choose their brigadiers. The major generals are appointed by the general court. Justices of the [...] are commissioned for seven years; all other judicial, and all executive and military officers, continue during good behaviour, yet [...] re­moveable by the governour, upon address of the legislature. The sal­aries of the governour and justices of the supreme court, [...] diminished, although they may be enlarged. Official qualification are as follows—for a voter, twenty one year's age, one year's residence, a freehold of three pounds annual value or sixty pounds of any other estate—for a representative, £100 freehold or £200 other estate, and one year's residence in the town—for a senator, £300 freehold [...] £600 other estate in the Commonwealth and five years residence [...] the district—for governour or lieutenant governour, £1000 [...] and seven years residence. Every governour, lieutenant governour, counsellor, senator, [...] representative, must declare that he believes the christian religion, and has the legal qualifications. A governour lieu­tenant governour, or justice of the supreme court can hold [...] other office. No man s [...]all hold two of these offices, judge of [...] sheriff, register. No justices of the supreme court, secretary, [...] general, treasurer, judge of probate, instructor of Harvard College, clerk, register, sheriff or custom officer can have a seat in the legislature. The privilege of Habeas Corpus cannot be suspend­ed more than a year at one time. In 1795, if two thirds of the qual­ified voters desire [...]t, a convention shall be called to revise the consti­tution.

HISTORY.] See Hutchinson's History of Massachusetts— [...] History of the Insurrection in Massachusetts—The Publications of the Historical Society, in the American Apollo—Hazard's Historical Collections—Chalmer's Political Annals, and Gough's History of the People called Quakers.

[Page 381]

RHODE ISLAND, AND PROVIDENCE PLANTA­TIONS.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 68 Miles between 3° and 4° E. Long.
Breadth 40 Miles 41° and 42° N. Lat.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north and east, by the Common­wealth of Massachusetts; south, by the At­lantic; west, by Connecticut. These limits comprehend what is [...] Rhode Island and Providence Plantations.

CIVIL DIVISIONS AND POPULATION.] This State is divided into [...] counties, which are subdivided into 30 townships, as follows:

Counties Towns No. Inb. Slaves
NEWPORT New Port 6716 223 14,300
Portsmouth 1560 17
New Shoreham 682 47
Jamestown 507 16
Middletown 840 15
Tivertown 2453 25
Little Compton 1542 23
PROVIDENCE Providence 6380 48 24,391
Smithfield 3171 5
S [...]ate 2315 6
Gloucester 4023 1
Cumberland 1964  
Cranston 1877 10
Johnston 1320 3
North Providence 1071 5
Foster 2268 4
WASHING­TON Westerly 2298 10 18,075
North Kingston 2907 96
South Kingston 4131 175
Charlestown 2022 12
Exeter 2495 37
Richmond 1760 2
Hopkinton 2462 7
BRISTOL Bristol 1406 64 3,211
Warren 1122 22
Barrington 683 12
K [...]NT Warwick 2493 35 8,848
East Greenwich 1824 13
West Greenwich 2054 10
Coventry 2477 5
Total five Thirty 67877 948 68825
No. in each Coun.
The number of Inhabitants in Rhode Island and Providence Plantations was in the year
1730 15,352 Whites
2,633 Blacks
1774 54,435 Whites
5,243 Blacks
1748 29,755 Whites
4,373 Blacks
1783 48,538 Whites
3,361 Blacks
1761 35,939 Whites
4,697 Blacks
1790 67,877 Whites
948 Blacks

BAYS, HARBOURS AND ISLANDS.] Narraganset Bay makes up [...] south to north, between the main land on the east and west. [Page 382] It embosoms many fertile islands, the principal of which are Rhode Island, Canonnicut, Prudence, Patience, Hope, Dyer's and [...] islands

The harbours are Newport, Providence, Wickford, Patuket, W [...] ­ren and Bristol.

Rhode Island, from which the State takes half its name, is 13 [...] in length; its average breadth is about 4 miles. It is divided [...] three townships, Newport, Portsmouth and Middletown. This [...], in point of soil, climate, and situation, may be ranked among the [...] and most charming in the world. In its most flourishing state, it [...] called, by travellers, the Eden of America. But the change [...] the ravages of war, and a decrease of business have effected, is [...] and melancholy. Some of the most ornamental country seats [...] destroyed, and their fine groves, orchards and fruit trees, want [...] cut down; and the gloom of its present decayed state, is height [...] by its charming natural situation, and by reflecting upon its for [...] glory. The farming interest, suffered far less injury, than the com­mercial city of Newport, and has nearly recovered its former state—Between 30,000 and 40,000 sheep are fed on this island, besides [...] cattle and horses.

Canonnicut Island, lies west of Rhode Island, and is six miles in length, and about one mile in breadth. It was purchased of the In­dians in 1657, and incorporated by act of assembly by the name of the Island of Jamestown, in 1678.

Block Island, called by the Indians Manisses, is 21 miles S. S. W. from Newport, and is the southernmost land belonging to the State. It was erected into a township, by the name of New-Shoreham in 1672. The inhabitants of this Island were formerly noted for [...] ­ing good cheese. They catch considerable quantities of Cod fish, round the ledges near the island.

Prudence Island is nearly or quite as large as Canonnicut, and lies north of it, and is a part of the township of Portsmouth.

RIVERS.] Providence and Taunton rivers both fall into Narragan­set Bay the former on the west, the latter on the east side of Rhode­Island. Providence river rises partly in Massachusetts, and is navi­gable as far as Providence for ships of 900 tons, thirty miles from the sea. Taunton river is navigable for small vessels to Taunton. Com­mon tides rise about four feet.

Fall river is small, rising in Freetown, and passing through Tiver­town. The line between the states of Massachusetts and Rhode Island, passes Fall river bridge. Patuxet river, rises in Mashapog Pond, and, 5 miles below Providence, empties into Narraganset Bay. Pau­tucket river, called more northerly Blackstone's river, empties into Seek honck river, 4 miles N. N. E. from Providence, where are the falls hereafter described, over which is a bridge, on the post road to Boston, and 40 miles from thence. The confluent stream empties into Providence river, about a mile below▪ Waybossett, or the G [...] Bridge. Naspatucket river falls into the bay about 1½ miles N. W. of Waybossett bridge. Moshassuck river, falls into the same bay three fourths of a mile north of the bridge. These rivers united form Providence river, which, a few miles below the town, receives the name of Narraganset Bay, and affords fine fish, oysters and lobsters in great plenty.

CLIMATE.] Rhode Island is as healthful a country as any part of [Page 383] [...] [...]. The winters, in the maritime parts of the state, are [...] in the inland country; the air being softened by a sea va­ [...] also enriches the soil. The summers are delightful, ef­ [...] Rhode Island, where the extreme heats, which prevail in [...] of America, are allayed by cool and refreshing breezes [...].

[...] In the rivers and bays is plenty of sheeps-head, black­ [...] sha [...], lobsters, oysters and clams; and around the shores [...] Island, besides those already mentioned, are cod, halibut, [...] [...]ass, had dock, &c. &c. to the amount of more than seven­ [...] kinds, so that in the seasons of fish, the markets are alive [...] Travellers are agreed that Newport furnishes the best fish [...] the world.

[...].] The constitution of the state admits of no religious [...]ents, any further than depends upon the voluntary choice of [...]. All men professing one Supreme Being, are equally pro­ [...] the laws, and no particular sect can claim pre-eminence▪ [...] [...]imited liberty in religion is one principal cause why there is [...] variety of religious sects in Rhode Island. The baptists are the [...] numerous of any denomination in the state. These, as well as the [...] [...] in New England, are chiefly upon the Calvinistic plan [...], and independents in regard to church government, [...], however, some who profess the Arminian tenets, and are [...] Arminian baptists. Others observe the Jewish or Saturday [...] from a persuasion that it was one of the ten commandments, [...] they plead are all in their nature moral, and were never abro­ [...] the New Testament, and must at least be deemed of equal va­ [...] public worship as any day particularly set apart by Jesus Christ and his apostles. These are called sabbatarian, or seventh day [...]. There are others who are called separate baptists.

[...] other religious denominations in Rhode Island are congrega­ [...], friends or quakers, episcopalians, moravians and Jews. [...] these there is a considerable number of the people who can [...] to no particular denomination.

[...] towns public worship is too much neglected by the greater [...] of the inhabitants. They pay no taxes for the support of eccle­ [...] of any denomination; and a peculiarity which distinguishes [...] from every other protestant country in the known world is, [...] contract formed by the minister with his people, for his salary [...] [...] law. So that ministers are dependent wholly on the integ­rity [...] the people for their support, since their salaries are not re­ [...]ble by law. It ought in justice, however, to be observed, that the [...] in general are liberally maintained, and none who me [...]t it have reason to complain for want of support.

LITERATURE.] The literature of this state is confined principally [...] the towns of Newport and Providence. There are men of learn­ing [...] abilities scattered through other towns, but they are rare. The [...] of the inhabitants in other parts of the state, are involved in [...] ignorance perhaps than in most other parts of New Eng­land. As impartial history of their transactions since the peace, [...]rince the truth of the above observations.

Providence, is Rhode Island college. The charter for founding the [...] of learning was granted by the general assembly of the [...] by the name of the "Trustees and Fedows of the college o [...] [Page 384] University, in the English colony of Rhode Island and Providence Plantations," * in 1764, in consequence of the petition of a large num­ber of the most respectable characters in the state. By the ch [...] the corporation of the college consists of two separate branches, [...] distinct, separate and respective powers. The number of trust [...] thirty six, of whom twenty two are of the denomination called baptists, five of the denomination of friends, five episcopalians, and four con­gregationalists. The same proportion of the different denomination to continue in perpetuum. The number of the fellows (inclusive [...] the president, who is a fellow ex officio) is twelve, of whom eight [...] baptists, the others chosen indiscriminately from any denomination. The concurrence of both branches, by a majority of each, is [...] ­ry for the validity of an act, except adjudging and conferring [...] which exclusively belongs to the fellowship as a learned faculty. The president must be a baptist; professors and other officers of instruction are not limited to any particular denomination. There is annually a general meeting of the corporation. On the first Wednesday in Septem­ber, at which time the public commencement is held.

This institution was first founded at Warren, in the county of Bris­tol, and the first commencement held there in 1769.

In the year 1770, the college was removed to Providence, where a large, elegant building was erected for its accommodation, by the gen­erous donations of individuals, mostly from the town of providence. It is situated on a hill to the east of the town; and while its ele [...] situation renders it delightful, by commanding an extensive, variegat­ed prospect, it furnishes it with a pure, salubrious air. The edifice is of brick, four stories high, 150 feet long and 46 wide, with a projection of ten feet each side. It has an entry lengthwise with rooms on each side. There are 48 rooms for the accommodation of students, and eight larger ones for public uses. The roof is covered with state.

From December 1776, to June 1782, the college edifice was used by the French and American troops for an hospital and barracks, so that the course of education was interrupted during that period. No de­grees were conferred from 1776 to 1786. From 1786 the college again became regular, and is now very flourishing, containing upwards of six­ty students.

This institution is under the instruction of a president, a professor of divinity, a professor of natural and experimental philosophy, a pro­fessor of mathematics and astronomy, a professor of natural history, and three tutors. The institution has a library of between two and three thousand volumes, containing a valuable philosophical apparatus. New­ly all the funds of the college are at interest in the treasury of the state, and amount to almost two thousand pounds.

At Newport there is a flourishing academy, under the direction of a rector and tutors, who teach the learned languages, English gram­mar, geography, &c.

SOCIETIES.] A marine society was established [...] Newport in 1732, for the purpose of relieving distressed widows and orphans of maritime brethren and such of their society as may need assistance.

The Providence Society for promoting the abolition of slavery, for the relief of persons unlawfully held in bondage, and for improving the condition of the African race, commenced in 1789, and was incor­porated [Page 385] [...] the year following. It consists of upwards of 150 members, [...] whom belong to the State of Massachusetts.

MOUNTAIN.] In the town of Bristol is Mount Hope, or as some [...] [...] Haup, which is remarkable only for its having been the [...] King Phillip, and the place where he was killed.

RIVERS.] The great bridge, in the town of Providence, former­ [...] Weybo [...]et, from a high hill of that name, which stood near the [...] of the bridge, but which is now removed, and its base built [...] the only bridge of considerable note in this state. It is 160 [...] and 22 feet wide, supported by two wooden trussels, and two [...] [...]. It unites the eastern and western parts of the town, and is [...] of resort in summer, affording a pleasant prospect of all vessels, [...] and leaving the harbour. This is not a toll bridge.

The bridge over Patucket fails, is a work of considerable magni­ [...] and much ingenuity.

The assembly of this state, in their session of May 1792, passed an act incorporating three companies for the purpose of erecting three bridg­es—one over the upper, and another over the lower ferry of Seek honk [...] and a third over Howland ferry, which would unite Rhode Island with Tiverton on the main; the two former will greatly accom­ [...] the town of Providence—the latter must prove highly advanta­ [...] to the people of Newport and others on Rhode Island. To [...] works of utility and enterprize every good man wishes success.

[...]IL AND PRODUCTIONS.] This state, generally speaking, is a [...] for pasture and not for grain. It however produces corn, rye, [...] oats, and in some parts wheat sufficient for home consumption; [...] the various kinds of grasses, fruits, and culinary roots and plants [...] abundance, and in good perfection; cider is made for ex­hibition. The northwestern parts of the state, are but thinly inhab­ [...], and are more rocky and barren than the other parts. The tract of [...]try lying between South Kingston, and the Connecticut line, [...] the Narraganset country, is excellent grazing land, and is in­ [...] by a number of large and wealthy farmers, who raise some of [...] [...] neat cattle in New England, weighing from 16 to 1800 weight. [...] keep large dairies, and make butter and cheese of the best qual­ity and in large quantities for exportation. Narraganset has been [...] for an excellent breed of pacing horses▪ remarkable for their [...] and ha [...]diness for enduring the fatigues of a journey; this breed [...] has much depreciated of late, the best mares having been [...] by people from the westward.

TRADE.] Before the war, the merchants in Rhode Island imported [...] Britain, dry goods from Africa, slaves—from the West Indies, su­ [...] and molasses—and from the neighbouring colonies, lumber and [...]. With the bills which they obtained, in Surrinam and other [...] West India islands, they paid their merchants in England; their [...] carried to Holland; the slaves from Africa, they carried to the [...] Indies, together with the lumber and provisions procured from their [...]; the rum distilled from the molasses, was carried to Africa to [...] negroes; with their dry goods from England they trafficed [...] neighbouring colonies. By this kind of circuitous commerce, [...] [...] and grew rich. But the war, and some other events, [...] [...] a great, and in most respects, an injurious effect upon the [...] of this State. The slave trade, which was a source of wealth to [Page 386] many of the people in Newport, and in other parts of the State, has happily been abolished. The legislature have passed a law prohibit­ing ships from going to Africa for slaves, and selling them in the West-India islands; and the oath of one seaman, belonging to the ship, is sufficient evidence of the fact. This law is more favourable to the cause of humanity, than to the temporal interests of the mer­chants who had been engaged in this inhuman traffic. The town of Bristol carries on a considerable trade to Africa, the West-Indies, and to different parts of the United States. But by far the greatest part of the commerce of this state, [...] at present carried on by the inhabi­tants of the flourishing town of Providence. In June 1791, there were, belonging to this port,

    Tons 95 parts
11 Ships, containing 3,066 54
35 Brigs 4,266 48
1 Snow 141  
1 Polec [...]e 101  
25 Schooners 1,320 21
56 Sloops 3,047 56
Total 129 sail, containing 11,942 84 Tons.

The present exports from the state are flaxseed, lumber, horses, cat­tle, beef, pork, fish, poultry, onions, butter, cheese, barley, grain, spir­its and cotton and linen goods. The imports consist of European and West-India goods, and logwood from the Bay of Honduras. Upwards of 600 vessels enter and clear annually at the different ports in this state. The amount of exports from this state to foreign coun­tries, for one year, ending the 30th of September 1791, was 470,131 dollars 9 cents.

LIGHT HOUSE.] For the safety and convenience of sailing into the Naraganset Bay and harbour of Newport, a light house was erect­ed, in 1749, in Beavertail, at the south end of Canonnicut island.

The diameter at the base, is 24 feet, and at the top 13 feet. The height from the ground to the top of the cornice is 58 feet, round which is a gallery, and within that stands the lanthorn, which is about 11 feet high, and 8 feet diameter.

The ground the light house stands upon, is about 12 feet above the surface of the sea at high water.

MANUFACTURES.] The inhabitants of this state are progressing rapidly in this branch of business. A cotton manufactory has been erected at Providence, which from present prospects will answer the expectations of the proprietors. The warps are spun by water, with a machine which is an improvement of Mr. Ark wright's; and strong, smooth and excellent yarn, is thus made both for warps and stockings. The filling of the cotton goods is spun with jennies. In these several works five carding machines are employed, and a cal­ender constructed after the European manner. Jeans, fustians, de­nims, thicksets, velvets, &c. &c. are here manufactured and sent to the southern states. Large quantities of linen and tow cloth are made in different parts of this state for exportation. But the most consid­erable manufactures in this state are those of iron, such as bar and sheet iron, steel, nail rods and nails, implements of husbandry, stoves, [Page 387] pots and other household utensils, the iron work of shipping anchors, bells &c. The other manufactures of this state are rum, corn, spirits, chocolate, paper, wool and cotton cards, &c. beside domestic manu­factures for family use, which, in this, in common with the other states, amount to a vast su [...] which cannot be ascertained.

MINERALS. FOSSILS, &c.] Iron ore is found in great plenty in sev­eral parts of the State. The iron works on Patuxet river, twelve miles from Providence, are supplied with ore from a bed 4 miles and a half distant, which lies in a valley, through which runs a brook. The brook is turned into a new channel, and the ore pits are cleared of water by a steam engine, constructed and made at the furnace, by, and under the direction, of the late Joseph Brown, Esq. of Providence, which continues a very useful monument of his mechanical genius. At this ore bed are a variety of ores, curious stones and ochres.

At diamond hill, in the county of Providence, which is so called from its sparkling and shining appearance, there are a variety of pe­culiar stones, more curious than useful. Not far from this hill, in the township of Cumberland, is a copper mine, mixed with iron strongly impregnated with load stone, of which some large pieces have been found in the neighbourhood. No method has yet been discovered to work it to advantage.

An abundance of limestone is found in this state, particularly in the county of Providence, of which large quantities of lime are made and exported. This limestone is of different colours, and is the true mar­ble, both of the white, plain and variegated. It takes a fine polish and works equal to any in America.

There are several mineral springs in this state; to one of which, near Providence, many people resort to bathe, and drink the water.

CHIEF TOWNS.] Newport and Providence are the two princi­pal towns in the State. Newport lies in lat. 41° 35′ This town was first settled by Mr. William Coddingtons▪ afterwards governour, and the father of Rhode Island, with seventeen others, in 1639. Its harbour, which is one of the finest in the world, spreads westward before the town. The entrance is easy and safe, and a large fleet may anchor in it and ride in perfect security. It is probable this may, in some future period, become one of the man of war ports, of the American Empire. The town lies north and south upon a gradual ascent as you proceed eastward from the water, and exhibits a beautiful view from the harbour, and from the neighbouring hills which lie westward upon the main. West of the town is Goat Island, on which is a fort. Between this island and Rhode Island is the harbour. Front or Water street is a mile in length.

Newport contains about 1000 houses, built chiefly of wood. It has nine houses for public worship: three for the Baptists, two for Congregationalists, one for Episcopalians, one for Quakers, one for Moravians, and a synagogue for the Jews. The other public buildings are a State house, and an edifice for the public library. The situa­tion, form and architecture of the state house, give it a pleasing ap­pearance. It stands sufficiently elevated, and a long wha [...]f and paved parade lead up to it from the harbour.

The prohibition of the slave trade, the destructive influence of pa­per money (which has now however ceased to operate.) combined with the devastation of a cruel way, have occasioned a stagnation of [Page 388] business, which is truly melancholy and distressing. This city far famed for the beauty of its situation, the salubrity of its climate, and the hospitality and politeness of its inhabitants, and which was the place of resort for invalids from a great distance, now wears the gloomy aspect of decay. Thousands of its inhabitants are almost destitute of employment. This circumstance, together with that of there being a great abundance of raw materials in the vicinity, strong­ly mark out this city, as a convenient and proper situation for exten­sive manufactures. Should the gentlemen of fortune turn their capi­tals into this channel, it is thought that they would not only derive a profit to themselves, but be instrumental in giving employment and bread, to thousands of now unhappy people, and of reviving the for­mer importance of their beautiful city.

The excellent accommodations and regulations of the numerous packets which belong to this port, and which ply thence to Provi­dence and New York, ought not to pass unnoticed. They are said to be superior to any thing of the kind in Europe. The appearance of the islands in Narraganset Bay, and of the circumjacent country, in the spring and summer seasons, either from the land or water, is extreme­ly beautiful and charming.

Providence, situated in latitude 41° 51′ on both sides of Providence river, is 35 miles from the sea, and 30 N. by W. from Newport. It is the oldest town in the state. Roger Williams, and his company, were its first settlers in 1636.

The town is divided into two parts, by the river, and connected by the bridge already described. Ships of almost any size sail up and down the channel, which is marked out by stakes, erected at points, shoals and beds lying in the river, so that strangers may come up to the town without a pilot. A ship of 950 tons, for the East India trade, was lately built in this town, and fitted for sea. In 1764 there [...] belonging to the county of Providence, 54 sail of vessels, containing 4,320 tons. In 1791, they had 129 sail, containing 11,942 tons.

This town suffered much by the Indian war of 1675, when a num­ber of its inhabitants removed to Rhode Island for shelter. In the late war the case was reversed; many of the inhabitants of that [...] and removed to Providence.

The public buildings are an elegant meeting house for Baptists, 80 feet square, with a lofty and beautiful steeple, and a large bell, cast at the Furnace Hope, in Scituate—a meeting house for friends or quakers, two for congregationalists, an episcopal church, a handsome court house, 70 feet by 40, in which is deposited a library for the use of the inhabitants of the town and country—a work house, a market house 80 feet long and 40 feet wide, and a brick school house, in which four schools are kept. The college edifice we have already mentioned. The houses in this town are generally built of wood, though there are some brick buildings which are large and elegant. At a convenient distance from the town a hospital for the small [...] and other diseases has been erected. There are two [...] works, a number of distilleries, sugar houses and other manufactures. Several forts were erected in and near Providence during the late war, which however are not kept in repair. This town has an extensive trade with Massachusetts, Connecticut and part of Vermont; and [...] its advantageous situation, promises to be among the largest towns in [Page 389] New England. It sends four representatives to the General Assembly—the other towns in the county send but two.

Bristol is a pleasant thriving town, about 16 miles north of Newport, on the main. Part of the town was destroyed by the British, but it has since been rebuilt. It has an episcopal and a congregational church. This town is noted for raising large quantities of onions and other roots. A number of vessels are owned by the inhabitants, and they carry on a considerable trade to Africa, the West Indies, and [...] different parts of the United States.

Warren is also a flourishing town—trades to the West Indies and other places, and builds ships.

Little Compton, called by the Indians Seconnet, is said to be the best cul­tivated township in the state, and affords a greater supply of provisions for market, such as meats of the several kinds, butter, cheese, vegeta­bles, &c. than any other town of its size. The inhabitants, who are an industrious and sober people, and in these respects an example wor­thy the notice and imitation of their brethren in some other parts of the state, manufacture linen and tow cloth, [...]lannels, &c. of an excel­lent quality, and in considerable quantities for sale.

East Greenwich and Warwick are noted for making good cider, and formerly for raising tobacco for exportation.

INDIANS.] A few years since there were about 500 Indians in this state. The greater part of them reside at Charlestown. They are peaceable and well disposed towards government, and speak the English language.

CURIOSITIES.] About four miles northeast of Providence lies a small village, called Pautucket, a place of some trade, and famous for lamprey cels. Through this village runs Pautucket river, which empties into Se [...]khonk river at this place. In this river is a beautiful fall of water, directly over which a bridge has been built, which divides the Commonwealth of Massachusetts from the State of Rhode Island. The fall, in its whole length, is upwards of fifty feet. The water passes through several chasms in a rock which [...] diametrically across the bed of the stream, and serves as a dam to the water. Several mills have been erected upon these falls; and the [...] and channels which have been constructed to conduct the streams to their respective wheels, and the bridge, have taken very much from the beauty and grandeur of the scene; which would otherwise have been indescribably charming and romantic.

In the town of Middletown, on Rhode Island, about two miles from Newport, is a place called Purgatory. It joins to the sea on the east side of the island. It is a large cavity or opening, in a high bed of rocks, about 12 feet in diameter at top; and about 40 feet deep before you reach the water, of which, as it joins the sea, it has always a large depth. The rocks on each side appear to have been once united, and were probably separated by some convulsion in na­ture.

CONSTITUTION.] The constitution of this state is founded on the charter granted by Charles II. in 1663; and the frame of govern­ment was not essentially altered by the revolution. The legislature of the state consists of two branches—a senate or upper house, composed of ten members, besides the governour and deputy governour, called, [...] the charter, assistants—and a house of representatives, composed of [Page 390] deputies from the several [...]. The members of the legislature are chosen twice a year; and there are two sessions of this body annual­ly, viz. on the first Wednesday in May, and the last Wednesday in October.

The supreme executive power is vested in a governour, or in his absence, in the deputy governour, who, with the assistants, secretary and general treasurer, are chosen annually in May by the suffrages of the people. The governour presides in the upper house, but has only a single voice in enacting laws.

There is one supreme judicial court, composed of five judges, whose jurisdiction extends over the whole state, and who hold two courts an­nually in each county.

In each county, there is an inferior court of common pleas and gen­eral sessions of the peace, held twice a year for the trial of causes not capital arising within the county, from which an appeal lies to the su­preme court.

HISTORY.] This state was first settled from Massachusetts. Mo­tives of the same kind with those which are well known to have oc­casioned the settlement of most of the other United States, gave birth to this. This emigrants from England who came to Massachusetts, though they did not perfectly agree in religious sentiments, had been tolerably united by their common zeal against the ceremonies of the church of England. But as soon as they were removed from Eccle­siastical courts, and possessed of a patent allowing liberty of con­science, they fell into disputes and contentions among themselves. And notwithstanding all their sufferings and complaints in England, excit­ed by the principle of uniformity, such is human nature, the majority here were as fond of this principle, as those from whole persecution they had fled.

The true grounds of religious liberty were not embraced or under­stood at this time by any sect. While all disclaimed persecution for the sake of conscience, a regard for the public peace and for the pre­servation of the church of Christ from infection, together with the obstinacy of the Hereticks, was urged in justification of that, which stripped of all its disguises, the light of nature and the laws of Christ, in the most solemn manner condemn.

Mr. Roger Williams, a minister who came over to New England in 1631, was charged with holding a variety of errors, and was on that account forced to leave his house, land, wife and children, at Salem, in the dead of winter, and to seek a residence without the limits of Massachusetts. Governor Winthrop advised him to pursue his course to Nehiganset, or Narraganset Bay, which he did, and fixed himself at Se­cunk or Seekhonk now Rehoboth. But that place, being within the bounds of Plymouth colony, Gov. Winslow, in a friendly manner, ad­vised him to remove to the other side of the river, where the lands were not covered by any patent. Accordingly in 1636, Mr. Williams and four others, crossed Seekhonk river, and landed among the Indians, by whom they were hospitably received, and thus laid the foundation of a town, which from a sense of God's merciful Prov­idence to him, he called Providence. Here he was soon after joined by a number of others, and though they were secured from the Indians by the terror of the English, yet they, for a considerble time, suffered much from fatigue and want: but they enjoyed liberty of conscience, which has ever since been inviolably maintained in this state.

[Page 391] The unhappy divisions and contentions in Massachusetts still pre­vailed, and in the year 1636, Gov. Winthrop strove to exterminate the opinions which he disapproved. Accordingly a Synod was called at Newtown (now Cambridge) on the 30th of August, when eighty er­roneous opinions were presented, debated, and condemned; and a court holden in October following at the same place, banished a few leading persons of those accused of these errors, and censured several others; not, it seems, for holding these opinions, but for seditious conduct. The disputes which occasioned this disturbance, were about the same points as the five questions debated between the Synod and Mr. Cotton, which are thus described by Dr. Mather: They were "about the order of things in our union to our Lord Jesus Christ; a­bout the influence of our saith in the application of his righteousness; about the use of our sanctification in evidencing our justification; and about the consideration of our Lord Jesus Christ by men yet under a covenant of works; briefly, they were about the points whereupon depends the grounds of our assurance of blessedness in a better world. *"

The whole colony of Massachusetts, at this time, was in a violent ferment. The election of civil officers was carried by a party spirit, excited by religious dissension. Those who were banished by the court, joined by a number of their friends, went in quest of a new set­tlement, and came to Providence, where they were kindly entertained by Mr. R. Williams; who, by the assistance of Sir Henry Vane, jun. procured for them, from the Indians, Aquidnick, now Rhode Island. Here in 1638, the people, eighteen in number, formed themselves into a body politic, and chose Mr. Coddington their leader, to be their judge or chief magistrate. This same year the sachems signed the deed or grant of the island. For which Indian gift, it is said, they paid very dearly by being obliged to make repeated purchases of the same lands from several claimants.

The other parts of the state were purchased of the natives at sever­al successive periods.

In the year 1643, the people being destitute of a patent or any legal authority▪ Mr. Williams went to England as agent, and by the assist­ance of Sir Henry Vane, jun. obtained by the Earl of Warwick (then governour and admiral of all the plantations) and his council, 'a free and absolute charter of civil incorporation of Providence Plantations in Narraganset Bay.' This lasted until the charter granted by Charles II, in 1663. by which the incorporation was stiled, 'the English colony of Rhode Island and Providence Plantations in New England.' This charter, without any essential alteration, has remained the foundation of their government ever since.

As the original inhabitants of this state were persecuted, at least in their own opinion, for the sake of conscience, a most liberal and free toleration was established by them. So little has the civil authority to do with religion here, that, as has been already hinted, no contract between a minister and a society (unless incorporated for that purpose) in of any force. It is probably for these reasons that so many different sects have ever been found here; and that the Sabbath and all religious institutions, have been more neglected in this, than in any other of the New England states. Mr. Williams became a Baptist in a few years after his settling at Providence, and was active in forming a church of [Page 392] that persuasion in 1639, but ceased to walk with it the following year. This church in 1653▪ disagreed about the rite of laying on of hands, some holding it necessary to church communion, others esteeming it indifferent; upon which the church divided. At Newport Mr. John Clark and some others formed a church, in 1644, on the prin­ciples of the baptists; which church was afterwards divided like that at Providence.

In 1700, the Friends or Quakers meeting house was built in New­port. Their yearly meeting. till Gov. Coddington's death, was held in his house, and he died a member of that body in 1683.

In 1720, there was a congregational church gathered at Newport, and the Rev. Nathaniel Clap was ordained its pastor. Out of this church another was formed in 1728. The worship of God accord­ing to the rites of the church of England was instituted here in 1706, by the society for propagating the gospel in foreign parts. And in 1738, there were seven worshipping assemblies in this town, and a large society of quakers at Portsmouth, at the other end of the island.

In 1630, the colony was filled with inhabitants; and chiefly by the natural increase of the settlers. The number of souls in the state at this time was 17,935, of which no more than 985 were Indians, and 1648 negroes.

In 1738, there were above one hundred sail of vessels belonging to Newport.

The colony of Rhode Island, from its local situation, has ever been less exposed to the incursions of the neighbouring Indians, and from the French from Canada, than their neighbours in Massachusetts and Connecticut. Many of the colony have, from its first establishment, professed the principles of the Quakers, which forbad them to fight. For these reasons, the colony has been very little concerned in the old wars with the French and Indians. In the expedition against Port Royal in 1710, and in the abortive attempt against Canada in 1711, they had some forces. Towards the intended expedition a­gainst Canada in 1746, they raised 300 men, and equipped a sloop of war with 100 seamen; but in their voyage to Nova Scotia, they met with misfortunes and returned. Soon after, the design was dropped.

Through the whole of the late unnatural war with Great Britain, the inhabitants of this state have manifested a patriotic spirit; their troops have behaved gallantly, and they are honoured in having pro­duced the second general in the held. *

CONNECTICUT.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 82 Miles. between 41° and 42° 2′ N. Lat.
Breadth 57 Miles. 1° 50′ and 3° 20′ E. Lon.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Massachusetts; east, by Rhode Island; south, by the found, which divides it from Long Island; west, by the state of New York.

[Page 393] The divisional line between Connecticut and Massachusetts, as set­tled in 1713, was found to be about seventy two miles in length. The line dividing Connecticut from Rhode Island, was settled in 1728, and found to be about 45 miles. The sea coast, from the mouth of Paukatux river, which forms a part of the eastern boundary of Con­necticut, in a direct southwesterly line to the mouth of Byram river, is reckoned at about ninety miles. The line between Connecticut and New York, runs from latitude 4 [...]° to latitude 42° 2′; 72 miles. Connecticut contains about 4,674 square miles; equal to about 2,640,000 acres.

CIVIL DIVISIONS.] Connecticut is divided into eight counties, and about 100 townships. Each township is a corporation, invested with power to hold lands, choose their own town officers, to make prudential laws, the penalty of transgression not to exceed twenty shillings, and to choose their own representatives to the general assem­bly. The townships are generally divided into two or more parishes, in each of which is one or more places for public worship, and school houses at convenient distances.

The names of the counties, their chief towns, and population, in 1790, were as follows.

Counties. Tot. No. Inhab. No. Fema. Slaves Chief Towns.
Hartford 38,029 18,714 263 HARTFORD
New Haven 30,830 15,258 433 NEW HAVEN
New London 33,200 16,478 586 New London
Norwich
Fairfield 36,250 17,541 797 Fairfield
Danbury
Windham 28,921 14,406 184 Windham
Litchfield 38,755 18,909 233 Litchfield
Middlesex 18,855 9,632 221 Middleton
Haddam
Tolland 13,106 6,510 47 Tolland
Total Eight 237,946 117,448 2,764  

RIVERS.] The principal rivers in this state are Connecticut, Housatonick, the Thames, and their branches. Under the heads of New Hampshire and Massachusetts, we have already described Con­necticut river, till it enters this state. Soon after it enters the bounds of Connecticut, it passes over Enfield falls, to render which naviga­ble for boats, a company has been constituted, and a sum of money raised by lottery. At Windsor it receives Windsor Ferry river▪ from the west, which is formed by the junction of Farmingham and Po­quabock rivers. At Hartford it meets the tide, and thence flows, in a crooked channel, into Long Island sound. It is from 80 to 100 rods wide, 130 miles from its mouth.

At its mouth is a bar of sand which considerably obstructs the nav­igation. Ten feet water at full tides is found on this bar, and the same depth to Middleton. The distance of the bar from this place as the river runs, is thirty six miles. Above Middleton are several shoals which stretch quite across the river. Only six feet water is found on the shoal at high tide, and here the tide ebbs and flows but about eight inches. About three miles below Middleton, the river is con­tracted [Page 394] to about 40 rods in breadth, by two high mountains. Almost every where else the banks are low, and spread into fine, extensive meadows. In the spring floods, which generally happen in May, these meadows are covered with water. At Hartford the water some­times rises twenty feet above the common surface of the river, and having all to pass through the above-mentioned streight, it is some­times two or three weeks before it returns to its usual bed. These floods and nothing to the depth of water on the bar at the mouth of the river; this bar lying too far off in the sound to be affected by them.

On this beautiful river, whose banks are settled almost to its source, are many pleasant, neat, well built towns. On its western bank, from its mouth northward, are the towns of Saybrook, Haddam, Middleton, Weathersfield, Hartford, Windsor and Suffield. On its eastern bank, as you ascend the river are, Lyme, East Haddam, Glastenbury, East Hartford, East Windsor, and Enfield.

The river is navigable to Hartford, upwards of fifty miles from its mouth, and the produce of the country for two hundred miles above is brought thither in boats. The boats which are used in this business are flat bottomed, long and narrow, for the convenience of going up stream, and of so light a make as to be portable in carts. They are taken out of the river at three different carrying places, all of which make 15 miles. These obstructions, will, in a few years, it is probable be all removed.

Sturgeon, salmon, and shad, are caught in plenty, in their season, from the mouth of the river upwards, excepting sturgeon, which do not ascend the upper falls; besides a variety of small fish, such as pike, carp, pearch, &c.

From this river were employed in 1789, three brigs of one hundred and eighty tons each, in the European trade; and about sixty sail, from sixty to one hundred and fifty tons, in the West India trade; besides a few fishermen, and forty or fifty coasting vessels.

One branch of the Housatonick * rises in Lanesborough, the other in Windsor, both in Berkshire county in Massachusetts. It passes through a number of pleasant towns, and empties into the sound be­tween Stratford and Milford. It is navigable twelve miles to Derby. A bar of shells, at its mouth, obstructs its navigation for large vessels. In this river, between Salisbury and Canaan, is a cataract, where the water of the whole river, which is 150 yards wide, falls about sixty feet perpendicular, in a perfect white sheet, exhibiting a scene exceed­ingly grand and beautiful.

Naugatuk is a small river, which rises in Torrington, and empties into the Housatonick at Derby.

The Thames emp [...]es into Long Island found at New London. It is navigable fourteen miles, to Norwich Landing. Here it loses its name, and branches into Shetucket, on the east, and Norwich or Lit­tle river, on the west. The city of Norwich stands on the tongue of land between these rivers. Little river, about a mile from its mouth, has a remarkable and very romantic cataract. A rock ten or twelve feet in perpendicular height, extends quite across the chan­nel of the river. Over this the whole river pitches, in one entire sheet upon a bed of rocks below. Here the river is compressed into [Page 395] a very narrow channel between two craggy cliffs, one of which tow­ers to a considerable height. The channel descends gradually, is very crooked, and covered with pointed rocks. Upon these the water swiftly tumbles, foaming with the most violent agitation, fifteen or twenty rods, into a broad bason which spreads before it. At the bot­tom of the perpendicular falls, the rocks are curiously excavated by the constant pouring of the water. Some of the cavities, which are all of a circular form, are five or six feet deep. The smoothness of the water above its descent—the regularity and beauty of the perpen­dicular fall—the tremendous roughness of the other, and the craggy, towering cliff which impends the whole, present to the view of the spectator a scence indescribably delightful and majestic. On this river are some of the finest mill seats in New England, and those immedi­ately below the falls, occupied by Lathrop's mills, are perhaps not ex­ceeded by any in the world. Across the mouth of this river is a broad, commodious bridge, in the form of a wharf, built at a great ex­pense.

Shetucket river, the other branch of the Thames, four miles from its mouth, receives Quinnabogue, which has its source in Brimfield in Massachusetts; thence passing through Sturbridge and Dudley in Massachusetts, it crosses into Connecticut, and divides Pomfret from Killingly, Canterbury from Plainfield, and Lisbon from Preston, and then mingles with the Shetucket. In passing through this hilly coun­try, it tumbles over many falls, two of which, one in Thompson, the other in Brooklyn, are 30 feet each, and affords a vast number of fine mill feats. In its course it receives a number of tributary streams, the principal of which are Muddy Brook, and Five Mile river.

Shetucket river is formed by the junction of Willamantick and Mount Hope rivers, which unite between Windham and Lebanon. In Lisbon it receives Little river; and at a little distance farther the Quinnabogue, and empties as above.

These rivers are fed by numberless brooks from every part of the country. At the mouth of Shetucket, is a bridge of timber 124 feet in length, supported at each end by pillars, and held up in the middle by braces on the top, in the nature of an arch.

Paukatuck river, is an inconsiderable stream, which heads in Ston­ington, and empties into Stonington harbour. It forms part of the di­viding line between Connecticut and Rhode Island.

East, or North Haven river, rises in Southington, not far from a bend in Farmington river, and passing through Wallingford and North Haven, falls into New Haven harbour. It has been meditated to connect the source of this river with Farmington river.

East and West rivers are inconsiderable streams, bounding the city of New Haven on the east and west.

West of the Housatonick, are a number of small rivers which fall into the sound. Among these is Byram river. noticeable only as form­ing a part of the boundary between New York and Connecticut. But neither this, nor any of the others, are considerable enough to merit particular descriptions.

HARBOURS.] The two principal harbours are at New London and New Haven. The former opens to the south. From the Light house, which stands at the mouth of the harbour, to the town, is about three miles; the breadth is three quarters of a mile [...] and in some places more. [Page 396] The harbour has from five to six fathom water—a clear bottom—tough, ooze, and as far as one mile above the town is entirely secure, and commodious for large ships.

New Haven harbour is greatly inferior to that of New London. It is a bay which sets up northerly from the found, about four miles. Its entrance is about half a mile wide. It has very good anchorage, and two and an half fathom at low water, and three fathom and four feet at common tides.

About a mile from the town, on the channel, a pier is erected, at which vessels of such size as cannot come up to the wharf, [...]ade and unlade. A sum of money has lately been raised by lottery for the purpose of extending the long wharf to this pier, and the work is part­ly accomplished. When completed, this wharf will be the longest in the United States, and will be a vast benefit to the town.

The whole of the sea coast is indented with harbours, many of which are safe and commodious, but are not sufficiently used to merit a description.

CLIMATE, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.] Connecticut, though sub­ject to the extremes of heat and cold in their seasons, and to frequent sudden changes, is very healthful. The northwest winds, in the winter season, are often extremely severe and piercing, occasioned by the great body of snow which has concealed from the dissolving in­fluence of the sun, in the immense forests north and north west. The clear and serene temperature of the sky, however, makes amends for the severity of the weather, and is favorable to health and longevity. Connecticut is generally broken land, made up of mountains, hills and vallies; and is exceedingly well watered. Some small parts of it are thin and barren. It lies in the fifth and sixth northern climates, and has a strong, fertile soil. Its principal productions are Indian corn, rye, wheat in many parts of the state, oats, and barley, which are heavy and good, and of late, buck wheat—flax in large quantities—some hemp, potatoes of several kinds, pumpkins, turnips, peas, beans, &c. &c. Fruits of all kinds, which are common to the climate. The soil is very well calculated for pasture and mow­ing, which enables the farmers to feed large numbers of neat cattle and horses. Actual calculation has evinced, that any given quantity of the best mowing land in Connecticut, produces about twice as much clear profit, as the same quantity of the best wheat land in the state of New York. Many farmers, in the eastern part of the state, have lately found their advantage in raising mules, which are carried from the ports of Norwich and New London, to the West India islands, and yield a handsome profit. The beef, pork, butter and cheese of Connecticut, are equal to any in the world.

TRADE.] The trade of Connecticut is principally with the West India islands, and is carried on in vessels from sixty to an hundred and forty tons. The exports consist of horses, mules, oxen, oak staves, hoops, pine boards, oak plank, beans, Indian corn, fish, beef, pork, &c. Horses, live cattle and lumber, are permitted in the Dutch, Danish, and French ports.

Connecticut has a large number of coasting vessels employed in carrying the produce of the state to other states.—To Rhode Island, Massachusetts and New Hampshire, they carry pork, wheat, corn and rye— [...]o North and South Carolinas and Georgia butter, cheese, salt­ed [Page 397] beef, cyder, apples, potatoes, hay, &c. and receive in return, rice, Indigo and money. But as New York is nearer, and the state of the markets always well known, much of the produce of Connecticut, especially of the western parts, is carried there; particularly pot and pea [...] [...], flax seed, beef, pork, cheese and butter, in large quantities. Most of the produce of Connecticut river from the parts of Massa­chusetts, New Hampshire and Vermont, as well as of Connecticut, which are adjacent, goes to the same market. Considerable quantities [...] the produce of the eastern parts of the state, are marketed at Bos­ton and Providence.

The value of the whole exported produce and commodities from this state, before the year 1774, was then estimated at about £200 000 lawful money, annually. In the year ending September 30th 1791, the amount of foreign exports from this state was 710 340 dollars—besides articles carried to different parts of the United States, to a great amount. This state owns and employs in the foreign and coast­ing trade, 32,867 tons of shipping.

MANUFACTURES.] The farmers in Connecticut and their fami­lies, are mostly clothed in plain, decent, Homespun cloth. Their lin­ens and woollens are manufactured in the family way; and although they are generally of a coarser kind, they are of a stronger texture, and much more durable than those imported from France and Great Britain. Many of their cloths are fine and handsome.

A woollen manufactory has been established at Hartford. The le­gislature of the state have encouraged it, and it bids fair to grow in­to importance. Mr. Chittendon of New Haven, has invented a use­ [...] machine for bending and cutting card teeth. This machine is put in motion by a manderil twelve inches in length, and one inch in di­ [...]ter. Connected with the manderil are six parts of the machine, [...] [...]ependent of each other; the first, introduces a certain length of [...] into the chops of the c [...]rone; the [...], shuts the chops and [...] fast the wire in the middle until it is finished; the third, cuts of the wire; the fourth, doubles the tooth in proper form; the fifth, [...] the last bend; and the sixth, delivers the finished tooth from [...] machine. The manderil is moved by a band wheel, five feet in diameter, turned by a crank. One revolution of the manderil makes one tooth; ten are made in a second, and 36,000 in an hour. With one machine like this, teeth enough might be made to fill cards suffi­cient for all the manufacturers in New England. In New Haven are [...] and botton manufactories, which flourish. In Hartford are glass works, a snuff and powder mill, and iron works▪ and a slitting [...]. Iron works are established also at Salisbury, Norwich, and other parts of the state. At Stafford is a furnace at which are made large quantities of hollow ware, and other ironmongery, sufficient to supply the whole state. Paper is manufactured at Norwich, Hartford, New Havan and in Litchfield county. Nails, of every size, are made [...] almost every town and village in Connecticut; so that considerable quantities can be exported to the neighbouring states, and at a better rate than they can be had from Europe. Ironmongery, bats, candles, lea­ther, shoes and boots, are manufactured in this state. Oil mills, of a new and very ingenious construction, have been erected in several parts of the state. A d [...]ck manufactory has been established at S [...]rat­lord, and it is said is doing well.

[Page 398] POPULATION AND CHARACTER.] Connecticut is the most popu­lous, in proportion to its extent, of any of the Thirteen States. It is laid out in small farms from fifty to three or four hundred acres each, which are held by the farmers in fee simple; and are generally cul­tivated as well as the nature of the soil will admit. The state is chequered with innumerable roads or high ways crossing each other in every direction. A traveller, in any of these roads, even in the most unsettled parts of the state, will seldom pass more than two or three miles without finding a house or cottage, and a farm under such improvements as to afford the necessaries for the support of a family. The whole state resembles a well cultivated garden, which, with that degree of industry that is necessary to happiness, produces the necessaries and conveniencies of life in great plenty.

In 1756 the number of inhabitants in Connecticut was 130,611. In 1774, there were 197,856 souls. In 18 years the increase was 67,245. From 1774 to 1782, the increase was but 11,294 persons. This com­paratively small increase of inhabitants may be satisfactorily accounted for from the destruction of the war, and the numerous emigrations to Vermont, the western parts of New Hampshire, New York▪ and the other States.

The inhabitants are almost entirely of English descent. There are no Dutch, French, or Germans, and very few Scotch or Irish people in any part of the state.

In addition to what has been already said under New Eng­land it may be observed, that the people of Connecticut are remarkably fond of having all their disputes, even those of the most trivial kind, settled according to law. The prevalence of this litig­ious spirit, affords employment and support for a numerous body of lawyers. The number of actions entered annually upon the several dockets in the state, justifies the above observations. That party spir­it, however, which is the bane of political happiness, has not raged with such violence in this state as in Massachusetts and Rhode Island. Public proceedings have been conducted generally, and especially of late, with much calmness and candor. The people are well informed in regard to their rights, and judicious in the methods they adopt to secure them. The state enjoys a great share of political tran­quillity.

The clergy, who are numerous, and, as a body, very respectable, have hitherto preserved a kind of aristrocratical balance in the very democratical government of the state; which has happily operated as a check upon the overbearing spirit of republicanism. It has been lamented that the unhappy religious disputes which have too much prevailed among some of the clergy; and an inattention to the quali­fications of those who have been admitted to the sacred office, have, heretofore, considerably diminished their influence. It is a pleasing circumstance that the [...]age for theological disputation is abating; and greater strictness is observed in the admission of candidates to the ministry. Their influence is on the increase; and it is no doubt to be attributed, in part to their increasing influence, that an evident reformation in the manners of the people of this state, has taken place since the peace.

RELIGION.] Such as is happily adapted to a republican govern­ment. As to the mode of exercising church government and disci­pline, [Page 399] it might not improperly be called a republican religion. Each church has a separate jurisdiction, and claims authority to choose then own minister, to exercise judgment and to enjoy gospel ordinances within itself. The churches, however, are not independent of each other; they are associated for mutual benefit and convenience. The associations have power to license candidates for the ministry, to con­sult for the general welfare, and to recommend measures to be adopted by the churches, but have to authority to enforce them. When dis­putes arise in churches, councils are called, by the parties, to settle them; but their power is only advisory. There are eleven associa­tions in the state and they meet twice in a year. These are all com­bined in one general association, who meet annually.

All religions that are consistent with the peace of society, are toler­ated in Connecticut; and a spirit of liberality and Catholicism is in­creasing. There are very few religious sects in this State. The bulk of the people are congregationalists. Besides these there are Episco­palians and Baptists; and formerly there was a society of Sandima­nians at New Haven; but they are now reduced to a very small num­ber. The Episcopalian churches are respectable, and are under the superintendence of a bishop.

DAMAGES SUSTAINED IN THE LATE WAR.] After the establish­ment of the peace in 1783, a number of gentlemen were appointed by the general assembly to estimate the damages done by the British troops, in the several towns which they ravaged. The following is the result of their enquiries.

  Amount of Losses.
New London, (burnt by Benedict Arnold, September 6 1781.)   £145 788 15 [...]
Groton, do. do. 23,217 6
Scattering towns, do. do. 9,806 9 [...]
  £178,812 10 8
Norwalk, (burnt by the British, 1779) £34,867 9 2
—confiscated property and other losses, 2,077 0 0
  £36,944 9 2
Greenwich £6365 11 8
—Losses of men not on oath, 369 17 7
  £6,735 9 3
Fairfield, (burnt 1779) £40,800 2 10
New Haven, ravaged by governour Tryon July 1779 £24,893 7 6
East Haven, do. do. 4,882 16 4
West Haven, do. do. 474 0 3
—Other losses not before computed 586 0 1
  £30,836 4 2
Amount of the losses in the whole State, in money, valued as in 1774. £294,235 16 [...]

[Page 400] The foregoing estimate includes merchandize and public buildings. Exclusive of these, the losses are estimated at £.167,000. To com­pensate the sufferers, the general court, in May 1792, granted them 500,000 acres of the western part of the reserved lands of Connect­icut, which lie west of Pennsylvania.

CHIEF TOWNS.] There are a great number of very pleasant towns, both maritime and inland, in Connecticut. It contains five cities, incorporated with extensive jurisdiction in civil causes. Two of these, Hartford and New Haven, are capitals of the state. The Gen­eral Assembly is holden at the former in May, and at the latter in Oc­tober, annually.

HARTFORD (city) is situated at the head of navigation on the west side of Connecticut river, about fifty miles from its entrance into the found. Its buildings are a state house—two churches for congrega­tionalists—a distillery, besides upwards of 300 dwelling houses, a num­ber of which are handsomely built with brick.

The town is divided by a small river, with high romantic banks. Over this river is a bridge connecting the two divisions of the town. Hartford is advantageously situated for trade, has a very fine back country, enters largely into the manufacturing business, and is a rich, flourishing, commercial town. A Bank has lately been established in this city.

NEW HAVEN (city) lies round the head of a bay, which makes up about four miles north from the sound. It covers part of a large plain, which is circumscribed on three sides by high hills or mountains. Two small rivers bound the city east and west. The town was orig­inally la [...]d out in squares of sixty rods. Many of these squares have been divided by cross streets. Four streets [...]un northwest and south­east, these are crossed by others at right angles—Near the centre of the city is the public square; on and around which are the public build­ings, which are, a state house, college and chapel, three churches for congregationalists and one for episcopalians. These are all handsome and commodious buildings. The college, chapel, state house, and one of the churches are of brick. The public square is encircled with rows of trees, which render it both convenient and delightful. [...] beauty, however, is greatly diminished by the burial ground, and several of the public buildings, which occupy a considerable part of it.

Many of the streets are ornamented with two rows of trees, one on each side, which gives the city a [...]ural appearance. The prospect from the steeples is greatly variegated and extremely beautiful. There are about 500 dwelling houses in the city, principally of wood, and well built and some of them elegant. The streets are sandy but neat and cleanly. Within the limits of the city, are 4000 souls. About one in 70 die annually; this proves the healthfulness of its climate. In­deed as to pleasantness of situation and salubrity of air, New Haven is not exceeded by any city in America. It carries on a considera­ble trade with New York and the West India islands, and several kinds of manufactures, and is flourishing.

NEW LONDON (city) stands on the west side of the river Thames, near its entrance into the sound, in latitude 41° 25′. It has two plac­es for public worship, one for episcopalians and one for congregation­alists, about 300 dwelling houses, and 4600 inhabitants. Its harbour is the best in Connecticut. It is descended by fort Trumbull and fort [Page 401] Griswold, the one in New London, the other in Groton. A con­siderable part of the town was burnt by the infamous Benedict Arnold in 1781. It has since been rebuilt.

NORWICH (city) stands at the head of Thames river, 14 miles north from New London. It is a commercial city, has a rich and extensive back country, and avails itself of its natural advantages at the head of navigation. Its situation upon a river which affords a great number of convenient seats for mills and water machines of all kinds, render it very eligible in a manufactural view.

The inhabitants are not neglectful of the advantages which nature has so liberally given them. They manufacture paper of all kinds, stockings, clocks and watches, chaises, buttons, stone and earthern ware, wire, oil, chocolate, bells, anchors, and all kinds of forge work. The city contains about 450 dwelling houses, a court house, and two churches for congregationalists, and one for episcopalians, and about [...]000 inhabitants. The city is in three detached, compact divisions; viz. Chelsea, at the landing, the town, and Bean-hill; in the latter division is an academy; and in the town is a school supported by a donation from Dr. Daniel Lathrop, deceased. The courts of law are held alternately at New London and Norwich.

MIDDLETON (city) is pleasantly situated on the western bank of Connecticut river, fifteen miles south of Hartford. It is the princi­pal town in Middlesex county—has about 300 houses—a court house—one church for congregationalists—one for episcopalians—a naval office—and carries on a large and increasing trade.

Four miles south of Hartford is WE [...]RSFIELD, a very pleasant town of between two and three hundred houses, situated on a fine soil, with an elegant brick church for congregationalists. A Fair is held here twice a year. This town is noted for raising onions.

Windsor, Farmington, Litchfield, Milford, Stratford, Fairfield, Cuilford, Stamford, Windham, Suffield and Enfield, are all consider­able and very pleasant towns.

CURIOSITIES. Two miles west of New Haven is a mountain, on the top of which is a cave, remarkable for having been the resi­dence of generals Whaley and Goffe, two of the judges of Charles I. who was beheaded. They arrived at Boston, July 1660, and came to New Haven the following year, and retired and concealed themseves behind West mountain, three miles from New Haven. They soon af­ter removed to Milford, where they lived concealed until October, 1664; when they returned to New Haven, and immediately proceed­ed [...]o Hadley, where they remained concealed for about ten years, in which time Whaley died, and Goffe soon after fled. In 1665, John Di [...]well, Esq. another of the kings judges, visited them while at Hadley, and afterwards proceeded to New Haven, where he lived many years, and was known by the name of John Davis. Here he died, and was buried in the public burying place, where his gravestone is standing to this day, with this inscription, "J. D. Esq. deceased March 18th, in the 82d year of his age, 1688."

In the town of Pomsiet is a cave rendered remarkable by the hu­morous adventure of General Putnam.

COLLEGES, ACADEMILS AND SCHOOLS.] In no part of the world is the education of all ranks of people more attended to than in Connecticut. Almost every town in the state is divided into dist­ricts, [Page 402] [...] has a public school kept in it a greater or less [...]. Somewhat more than one third of the monies [...] [...]ax on the polls and rateable estate of the inhabitants, [...] to the support of schools, in the several towns, for the [...] children and youth. The law directs that a grammar [...] I shall be kept in every county town throughout the state.

There is a grammar school at Hartford, and another at New Haven, supported by a donation of governour Hopkins. This venerable and benevolent gentleman, in his last will, dated 1657, left, in the hands of Theoph [...] us Eaton, Esq. and three others, a legacy of 1324l. "as an encouragement, in these foreign plantations, of breeding up hopeful youths both a the grammar school and college." In 1664, the lega­cy was equally divided between New Haven and Hartford; and grammar schools were erected, which have been supported ever since.

Academies have been established at Greenfield, Plainfield, Norwich, Windham and Pomfret, some of which are flourishing.

YALE COLLEGE was founded in 1700, and remained at Killing­worth until 1707—then at Saybrook, until 1716, when it was removed and fixed at New Haven. Among its principal benefactors was gov­ernour Yale, in honour of whom, in 1718, it was named YALE COL­LEGE. Its first building was erected in 1717, being 170 feet in length, and 22 in breadth, built of wood. This was taken down in 178 [...]. The present college edifice, which is of brick, was built in 1750, un­der the direction of the Rev. President Clap, and is 100 feet long, and 40 feet wide, three stories high, and contains thirty-two chambers, and sixty four studies, convenient for the reception of a hundred stu­dents. The college chapel, which is also of brick, was built in 1761, being fifty feet by forty, with a steeple 125 feet high. In this building is the public library, consisting of about 2500 volumes; and the philosophical apparatus, which by a late handsome addition, is now as complete as most others in the United States, and contains the machines necessary for exhibiting experiments in the whole course of experimental philosophy and astronomy.

The college museum, to which additions are constantly making, contains many natural curiosities.

This literary institution was incorporated by the general assembly of Connecticut. The first charter of incorporation was granted to elev­en ministers, under the denomination of trustees, 1701. The powers of the trustees were enlarged by the additional charter, 1723. And by that of 1745, the trustees were incorporated by the name of "The President and Fellows of Yale college, New Haven." By an act of the general assembly "for enlarging the powers and encreasing the funds of Yale college;" passed in May 1792, and accepted by the corporation, the governor, lieutenant governor, and the six senior as­sistants in the council of the state, for the time being, are over here­after, by virtue of their offices, to be trustees and fellows of the col­lege, in addition to the former corporation. The corporation are em­powered to hold estates, continue their succession, make academic laws, elect and constitute all officers of instruction and government, [...] in universities, and confer all learned degrees. The immediate exe­cutive government is in the hands of the president and tutors. The present officers and instructors of the college are, a president, who is [Page 403] also professor of ecclesiastical history, a professor of divinity, and three tutors. The number of students on an average is about 130, divided into four classes. It is worthy of remark, that as many as five [...]ths of those who have received their education at this university, were natives of Connecticut.

The funds of this college received a very liberal addition by a grant of the general assembly in the act of 1792, before mentioned—which will enable the corporation to erect a new building for the accommo­dation of the students—to support several new professorships—and to make a handsome addition to the library.

The course of education, in this university, comprehends the whole circle of literature. The three learned languages are taught, together with so much of the sciences as can be communicated in four years.

In May and September, annually, the several classes are critically examined in all their classical studies. As incentives to improvement is composition and oratory, quarterly exercises are appointed by the president and tutors, to be exhibited by the respective classes in rota­tion. A public commencement is held annually, on the second Wednesday in September, which calls together a more numerous and brilliant assembly, than are convened by any other anniversary in the state.

About 2200 have received the honours of this university; of whom nearly 760 have been ordained to the work of the gospel min­istry. *

MINERALS AND FOSSILS.] On the the bank of Connecticut river, two miles from Middleton, is a lead mine, which was wrought during the war, at the expense of the state, and was productive. It is too expensive to work in time of peace. Copper mines have been discovered and opened in several parts of the state, but have proved unprofitable, and are much neglected. Iron ore abounds in many parts of the state. Talks of various kinds, white, brown, and chocolate coloured crystals, zink or spelter, a semi-metal, and several other fossils and metals have been found in Connecticut.

MODE OF LEVYING TAXES.] All freeholders in the state are required by law, to give in lists of their polls and rateable estate, to persons appointed in the respective towns to receive them, on o [...] before the 20th of August annually. These are valued according to law, arranged in proper order, and sent to the general assembly annu­ally in May.

The sum total of the list of the polls and rateable estate of the in­habitants [Page 404] of Connecticut, as brought into the general assembly in May, 1787, was as follows.

Sum total of the single list, £1,484,901 6 4 [...];
Assessments 47,790 2 9
One quarter of the four-folds, 1,176 9 4
Total. £1,533,867 18 5 [...]

On this sum taxes are levied, so much on the pound, according to the sum proposed to be raised. A tax of two pence on a pound, would raise £12,782. 4 [...].

The ordinary annual expenses of the government before the war, amounted to near 4000l. sterling, exclusive of that which was appro­priated to the support of schools. The expenses have since in­creased.

MINERAL SPRINGS.] At Stafford is a medicinal spring, which is said to be a sovereign remedy for scorbutic, cutaneous and other dis­orders.

CONSTITUTION AND COURTS OF JUSTICE.] The constitution of Connecticut is founded on their charter, which was granted by Charles II. in 1662, and on a law of the state. Contented with this form of government, the people have not been disposed to run the hazard of framing a new constitution since the declaration of inde­pendence.

Agreeable to this charter, the supreme legislative authority of the state is vested in a governour, lieutenant governour, twelve assistants or counsellors, and the representatives of the people, styled the General Assembly. The governour, lieutenant governour and assistants are annual­ly chosen by the freemen in the month of May. The representatives (their number not to exceed two from each town) are chosen by the freemen twice a year, to attend the two annual sessions, on the second Thursdays of May and October. This assembly has power to erect ju­dicatories, for the trial of causes civil and criminal, and to ordain and establish laws for settling the forms and ceremonies of government. By these laws the general assembly is divided into two branches, call­ed the upper and lower houses. The upper house is composed, of the governour, lieutenant governour and assistants. The lower house, of the representatives of the people. No law can pass without the concur­rence of both houses. The judges of the superior court hold their offices during the pleasure of the general assembly. The judges of the county courts, and justices, are annually appointed. Sheriffs are ap­pointed by the governour and council, without limitation of time. The governour is captain general of the militia, the lieutenant governour lieutenant general. All other military officers are appointed by the assembly and commissioned by the governour.

The mode of electing the governour, lieutenant governour, assist­ants, treasurer and secretary, is as follows: The freemen in the sev­eral towns meet on the Monday next after the first Tuesday in April, annually, and give in their votes for the persons they choose for the said offices respectively, with their names written on a piece of paper, which are received and sealed up by a constable in open meeting, the votes for each office by themselves, with the name of the town and office written on the outside. These votes, thus sealed, are sent to [Page 405] the general assembly in May, and there counted by a committee from both houses. All freemen are eligible to any office in government. In choosing assistants, twenty persons are nominated, by the vote of each freeman, at the freeman's meeting for choosing representatives in September annually. These votes are sealed up, and sent to the general assembly in October, and are there counted by a committee of both houses, and the twenty persons who have the most votes stand in nomination; out of which number the twelve who have the great­est number of votes, given by the freemen at their meeting in April are, in May, declared assistants in the manner above mentioned. The qualifications of freemen are, quiet and peaceable behaviour—a civil conversation, and freehold estate to the value of forty shillings per annum, or forty pounds personal estate in the list, certified by the se­lectmen of the town; it is necessary, also, that they take the oath of fidelity to the state. Their names are enrolled in the town clerk's of­fice, and they continue freemen for life, unless disfranchised by sen­tence of the superior court, on conviction of misdemeanor.

The courts are as follows: The justices of the peace, of whom a number are annually appointed in each town by the general assembly, have authority to hear and determine civil actions, where the demand does not exceed four pounds. If the demand exceeds forty shillings, [...]apptal to the county is allowed. They have cognizance of small [...], and may punish by fine, not exceeding forty shillings, or whipping not exceeding ten stripes, or sitting in the stocks. There are eight county courts in the state, held in the several counties by [...] judge and four justices of the quorum, who have jurisdiction of all criminal cases, arising within their respective counties, where the punishment does not extond to life, limb or banishment. They have original jurisdiction of all civil actions which exceed the jurisdiction of a justice. Either party may appeal to the superior court, if the de­ [...] exceeds twenty pounds, except on bonds or notes vouched by [...] witnesses.

There are several courts of probate, in each county, consisting of [...] judge. The peculiar province of this court, is the probate of [...] granting administration on intestate estates, ordering distribution of them, and appointing guardians for minors, &c. An appeal lies [...] any decree of this court to the superior court.

The superior court consists of five judges. It has authority in all criminal cases extending to life, limb, or banishment, and other high [...] and misdemeanors, to grant divorces, and to hear and deter­mine all civil actions brought by appeal from the county courts, or the court of probate, and to correct the errors of all inferior courts. This is a circuit court, and has two stated sessions in each county an­nually. The superior and county courts try matters of fact by jury, or without if the parties will agree.

There is a supreme court of errors, consisting of the lieutenant gov­ernment, and the twelve assistants. Their sole business is to determine write of error, brought on judgments of the superior court, where the [...] complained of appears on the record. They have two stated [...] annually, viz. on the Tuesdays of the weeks preceding the [...] sessions of the general assembly.

The county court is a court of chancery, empowered to hear and [...] cases in equity, where the matter in demand does not ex­ceed [Page 406] one hundred pounds. The superior court has cognizance of all cases where the demand exceeds that sum. Error may be brought from the county, to the superior court, and from the superior court to the supreme court of errors, on judgment in cases of equity as well as of law.

The general assembly only have power to grant pardons and reprieves—to grant commissions of bankruptcy—or protect the persons and estates of unfortunate debtors.

The common law of England, so far as it is applicable to this coun­try, is considered as the common law of this state. The reports of ad­judication in the courts of king's bench, common pleas and chancery, are read in the courts of this state as authorities; yet the judges do not consider them as conclusively binding, unless founded on solid reasons which will apply in this state, or sanctioned by concurrent, ad­judications of their own courts.

The feudal system of descents was never adopted in this state. All the real estate of intestates is divided equally among the children, males and females, except that the eldest son has a double potion. And all estates given in tail, must be given to some person then in be­ing o [...] to their immediate issue, and shall become fee simple estates to the issue of the first donee in tail. The widow of an intestate is entitled to a third part of the personal estate forever, and to has [...] ­er, or third part of the houses and lands belonging to the intestate at the time of his death, during her life.

PRACTICE OF LAW.] The practice of law in this state has [...] simplicity, but less precision, than in England. Assistants and judges are empowered to issue writs through the state, and justices, [...] their respective counties. In these writs the substance of the [...] ­plaints or the declarations must be contained, and if neither of the parties shew good reason for delay, the causes are heard and determin­ed the same term to which the writs are returnable. Few of the [...] ­ions of law so common in the English practice, are know a in this state. The plaintiff always has his election to attach or [...] on the d [...] ­dant. Attornies are admitted and qualified by the county [...]. Previous to their admission to the bar, they must study two years with a practising attorney in the state, if they have had a college education, and three years if they have not; their morals must be good, and their characters unblemished, and they must [...]sustain an examination by the attornies of the court of the county where they are admi [...]ed, and be by them recommended to the court. When admitted [...]o the county court, they can practice, without other qualifications, in any court in the state. There are upon an average, about fifteen attornies to each county, one hundred and twenty in the state; a very great proportion for the real exigencies, of the people. Yet from the rel­igious spirit of the citizens, the most of them find employment and support. There is no attorney general, but there is one attorney to the stat [...] each county.

NEW INVENTIONS.] Early in the war, Mr. David [...], of Saybrook, invented a machine for submarine navigation, altogether different from any thing hitherto devised by the art of [...] [...] machine was so constructed as that it could be rowed horizontally, at any given depth, under water, and could be raised or depressed at pleasure. To this machine, called the American Turtle, was attached [...] [Page 407] magazine of powder, which was intended to be fastened under the bottom of a ship, with a driving screw, in such a way as that the same stroke▪ which disengaged it from the machine should put the internal clock work in motion. This being done, the ordinary operation of a gun lock, at the distance of half an hour, or any determinate time, would cause the powder to explode and leave the effects to the com­mon laws of nature. The simplicity, yet combination discovered in the mechanism of this wonderful machine, have been acknowledged by those skilled in physics, and particularly Hydraulics, to be not less ingenious than novel. Mr. Bushnel invented, several other curious machines for the annoyance of the British shipping, but from acci­dents, not militating against the philosophical principles, on which their success depended, they but partially succeeded. He destroyed a vessel in the charge of commodore Symmonds. One of his kegs also demolished a vessel near the Long Island shore. About Christmas [...]77, he committed to the Delaware river a number of kegs, distined [...]o fall among the British fleet at Philadelphia; but this squadron of [...], having been separated and retarded by the ice, demolished but a [...] boat. This catastrophe, however, produced an alarm, unprece­ [...]ed, in its nature and degree; which has been so happily described by the late Hon. Francis Hopkinson, in a song, stiled "The Battle of the Kegs, *" that the event it celebrates will not be forgotten, so long as mankind shall continue to be delighted with works of humour and [...].

Mr. Hanks, of Litchfield, has invented a method of winding up [...] by means of air or wind only, which is ingenious, and practis­ed upon in New York and other places.

Mr. Culver, of Norwich, has constructed a Dock Drudge, which is [...] for clearing docks and removing bars in rivers; a very ingeni­ous and useful machine. Its good effects have already been experi­enced in the navigation of the river Thames, the channel of which [...] been considerably deepened. This machine will no doubt be productive of very great advantages to navigation throughout the United States.

The Rev. Joseph Badger, while a member of Yale College in 1785, constructed an ingenious planetarium, (without ever having seen one of the kind) which is deposited in the library of that university.

HISTORY.] As there is no particular history of this state to which the reader can be referred, the author will no doubt be indulged, in so far deviating from his general plan, as to relate the following par­ticulars, collected with great pains, relative to the settlement and pro­gress of things in this state.

The present territory of Connecticut, at the time of the first arri­val of the English, was possessed by the Pequot, the Mohegan, Po­ [...], and many other smaller tribes of Indians.

The Pequots were numerous and warlike. Their country extend­ed along the sea coast from Pauka [...]uck, to Connecticut river. About the year 1630, this powerful tribe extended their conquests over a considerable part of Connecticut, over all Long Island and part of [...]raganest. SASSACUS, who was the grand monarch of the whole country, was king of this nation. The seat of his dominion was at New London; the ancient Indian name of which was Pequot.

[Page 408] The Mohegans were a numerous tribe, and their territory exten­sive. Their ancient claim, comprehended most of New London coun­ty, almost the whole of the county of Windham. and a part of the counties of Tolland and Hartford. UNCUS, distinguished for his friendship to the English, was the Sachem of this tribe.

The Podunks inhabited East Hartford, and the circumjacent coun­try. The first sachem of this tribe, of whom the English had any knowledge, was Tatanimoo. He was able to bring into the field more than 200 fighting men.

The first grant of Connecticut was made, by the Plymouth council, to the Earl of Warwick, in 1630, and confirmed by his majesty in council the same year. This great comprehended "all that part of New England which lies west from Narraganset river, 120 miles on the sea coast, from thence, in latitude and breadth aforesaid, to the south sea." The year following, the Earl assigned this grant to Lord Say and Seal, Lord Brook and nine others.

No English settlements were attempted in Connecticut until the year 1633, when a number of Indian traders, having purchased of Zequasson and Natawanut, two principal Sachems, a tract of land at the mouth of Little river in Windsor, built a house and fortified it, and ever after maintained their right of soil upon the river.

The same year, a little before the arrival of the English, a company of Dutch traders came to Hartford, and built a house which they call­ed the Hirse of Good Hope, and erected a small fort, in which they plant­ed two cannon. The remains of this settlement are still visible on the bank of Connecticut river. This was the only settlement of the Dutch in Connecticut in these ancient times. The Dutch, and after them the Province of New York, for a long time claimed as far [...] as the western bank of Connecticut river. It belongs to the profess­ed historian to prove or disprove the justice of this claim. [...] says, "The partition line between New York and Connecticut as es­tablished December 1, 1664, run from the mouth of Memoron [...] river, (a little west from Byram river,) N. N. W. and was the [...] easterly limits of New York, until November 23, 1683, when they line was run nearly the same as it is now settled." *

In 1634, Lord Say and Seal, &c. sent over a small number of men, who built a fort at Saybrook, and held a treaty with the Pequot, In­dians, who in a formal manner, gave to the English their right in Connecticut river and the adjacent country.

In 1635, the Plymouth council granted to the Duke of Hamilton, till lands between Narraganset and Connecticut rivers, and back into the country as far as Massachusetts south line. This covered a part of the Earl of Warwick's patent, and occasioned some disputes in the colony. There were several attempts to revive the Hamilton claim, but were never prosecuted.

In October of this year, about sixty persons, from Newtown, Dor­chester, and Watertown, in Massachusetts, came and settled Hart­ford, Wethers [...]eld and Windsor in Connecticut; and the June fol­lowing the famous Mr. Hooker, and his company, came and settled at Hartford, and was a friend and father to the colony till his [...].

The first court held in Connecticut was at Hartford, April 26th, 1636; and the next year was distinguished by the war with the Pe­quots.

[Page 409] The English obtained the country east of the Dutch settlements, by right of conquest. The pursuit of the Indians led to an acquaintance with the lands on the sea coast, from Saybrook to Fairfield. It was reported to be a very fine country. This favourable report induced Messrs. Eaton and Hopkins, two very respectable London merchants, and Mr. Davenport, a man of distinguished piety and abilities, with their company, who arrived this year (1637) from London, to think of this part of the country as the place of their settlement. Their friends in Massachusetts, sorry to part with so valuable a company, dissuaded them from their purpose. Influenced, however, by the promising prospects which the country afforded, and flattering them­selves that they should be out of the jurisdiction of a general govern­our, with which the country was from time to time threatened, they determined to proceed. Accordingly in March 1638, with the con­sent of their friends of Connecticut river, they settled at New Hav­en, and laid the foundation of a flourishing colony, of which Quini­pink, now New Haven, was the chief town. The first public wor­ship, in this new plantation, was attended on Lord's day April 18th, 1638, under a large spreading oak. The Rev. Mr. Davenport preached from Matt. iii. 1. on the temptations of the wilderness. Both colonies, by voluntary compact, formed themselves into distinct commonwealths and remained so until their union in 1665.

In 1639, the three towns on Connecticut river, already mentioned, [...]ing themselves without the limits of any jurisdiction, formed them­selves into a body politic, and agreed upon articles of civil govern­ment. These articles were the foundation of Connecticut charter, which was granted in 1662. The substance of the articles, so far as they respect the holding of assemblies, the time and manner of electing Magistrates and other civil officers, (except that in the old confederation no person was to be chosen governor more than once in two years) and the extent of legislative powers, was transferr­ed into, and established in said charter.

The first church was gathered in New Haven this year, and con­sisted of seven members. These were chosen by the settlers after Mr. Davenport had preached from the words of Solomon, 'Wisdom [...] builded her house, she hath hewed out her seven pillars.' These men were indeed the pillars of the church, to whom the rest were added as they became qualified. They were also the court to try all civil actions.

The first settlers in New Haven had all things common; all pur­chases were made in the name and for the use of the whole plantation, and the lands were apportioned out to each family, according to their [...]ber and original stock.

At their first election, in October 1639, Mr. Theophilus Eaton was chosen governor for the first year. Their elections, by agreement, were to be annual, and the word of God their only rule in conducting the affairs of government in the plantation.

In 1643, articles of confederation between the four New England colonies were unanimously adopted by the colonies of New Haven and Connecticut.

The general court of New Haven, this year established it as a fun­damental article not to be disputed. That none be admitted as free burgesses but church members, and that none but such should vote at [Page 410] elections. They also ordained, That each town choose from among themselves judges (church members) to be a court, to have cognizance of all civil actions not exceeding twenty pounds; and of criminal cases, where the punishment was sitting in the stocks, whipping and fining not exceeding five pounds. There was liberty of appeal from this court to the court of magistrates. The court of magistrates, con­sisted of all the magistrates throughout the colony, who were to meet twice a year, at New Haven for the trial of all capital causes. Six made a quorum.

The general court was to consist of the governor, deputy govern­or, magistrates and two representatives from each town. The annual election of officers of government was at this time established, and has ever since continued.

The unsettled state of the colony, had hitherto prevented their es­tablishing a code of laws. To supply this defect, the general court ordered, 'That the judicial laws of God as they were delivered to Moses, and as they are a fence to the moral, being neither typical [...] ceremonial, nor having any reference to Canaan, shall be accounted of moral equity and generally bind all offenders, and be a rule to all the courts in this jurisdiction in their proceedings against offenders, until they be branched out into particulars hereafter.'

About this time a war broke out between the Mohegan and Narra­ganset Indians. A personal quarrel between Onkus, sachem of Mohe­gan, and Sequesson, sachem of Connecticut, was the foundation of the war. *

In consideration of the success and increase of the New England col­onies, and that they had been of no charge to the nation, and in pros­pect of their being in future very serviceable to it, the English par­liament, March 10th, 1643, granted them an exemption from all cus­toms, subsidies and other duties, until further order.

In 1644, the Connecticut adventurers purchased of Mr. Fenwick, agent for lords Say and Seal, and lord Brook, their right to the col­ony of Connecticut, for 1600l.

The colony of Connecticut expressed their disapprobation of the use of tobacco, in an act of their general assembly at Hartford, in 1647, wherein it was ordered, 'That no person under the age of twenty years, nor any other that hath already accustomed himself to the use thereof, shall take any tobacco, until he shall have brought a certifi­cate, from under the hand of some who are approved for knowledge and skill in physic, that it is useful for him; and also that he hath re­ceived a license from the court, for the same. All others who had addicted themselves to the use of tobacco were, by the same court, pro­hibited taking it in any company, or at their labours, or on their travels, unless they were ten miles at least from any house, or more than once a day, though not in company, on pain of a fine of six pe [...] for each time; to be proved by one substantial evidence. The con­stable in each town to make presentment of such transgressions to the particular court, and upon conviction, the fine to be paid without gainsaying.'

Massachusetts and New Haven colonies were more cruel towards the Quakers than either Connecticut or Plymouth. Of the four, Con­necticut was the most moderate. The general court of New Haven, [Page 411] 1658, passed a severe law against the Quakers. They introduced their law, which was copied from the act of the commissioners of the colon­ies, with this preamble.

'Whereas there is a cursed sect of heretics lately sprung up in the world, commonly called Quakers, who take upon them that they are immediately sent from God, and infallibly assisted by the spirit, who yet speak and write blasphemous opinions, despise government, and the order of God in church and commonwealth, speaking evil of dig­nities, &c.

Ordered—that whosoever shall bring, or cause to be brought, any known Quaker or Quakers, or other blasphemous hereticks, shall for­feit the sum of 50l. Also,

If a Quaker come into this jurisdiction on civil business the time of his stay shall be limited by the civil authority, and he shall not use any means to corrupt or seduce others. On his first arrival, he shall appear before a magistrate and from him receive license to pass on his business; and (for the better prevention of hurt to the people) have one or more to attend upon them at their charge, &c. The penalties in case of disobedience were whipping, im­prisonment, labour and a deprivation of all converse with any person.'

For the second offence the person was to be branded in the hand with the letter H—to suffer imprisonment—and be put to labour. For the third to be branded in the other hand, imprisoned, &c. as be­fore. For the fourth the offender was to have his tongue bored through with a red hot iron—imprisoned—and kept to labour, until sent away at their own charge.

Any person who should attempt to defend the sentiments of the Quakers, was, for the third offence, to be sentenced to banishment.

Had the pious framers of these laws paid a due attention to the ex­cellent advice of that sagacious doctor of the law Gamaliel, they would, perhaps, have been prevented from they adoption of such severe and unjustifiable measures. This wife man, when his coun­trymen were about to be outrageous in persecuting the apostles, addressed them in the following words, which merit to be en­graved in letters of gold; 'Rejrain from these men, and let them alone; for if this counsel or this work be of men, it will come to nought: but if it be of God. ye cannot overthrow it; left haply ye be found even to fight against God.' * This divine maxim was but little attended to in times of persecution. Our ancestors seem to have left it to posterity to make the important discovery, that persecution is the direct method to multiply its ob­jects.

But these people, who have been so much censured and ridiculed, had, perhaps as many virtues as their posterity. And it would be wise in the moderns, who stand elevated upon the shoulders of their ancestors, with the book of their experience spread before them, to improve their virtues and veil their faults.

The colonies of Connecticut and New Haven, from their first set­tlement, increased rapidly; tracts of land were purchased of the In­dians, and new towns settled from Stamford so Stonington, and far back into the country, when in 1661, Major John Mason, as agent for the colony, bought of the natives all lands which had not before been purchased by particular towns, and made a public surrender of [Page 412] them to the colony, in the presence of the general assembly. Having done these things, the colonists petitioned king Charles II. for a char­ter, and their petition was granted. His Majesty on the 23d of A­pril, 1662, issued his letters patent under the great seal, ordaining that the colony of Connecticut should, forever hereafter, be one body cor­porate and politic, in fact and in name, confirming to them their an­cient grant and purchase, and fixing their boundaries as follows, viz. 'All that part of his Majesty's dominions in New England, in Amer­ica, bounded east by Narraganset river, commonly called Narraganset bay, where the river falleth into the sea; and on the north by the line of Massachusetts plantation, and on the south by the sea, and in, longitude as the line of the Massachusetts colony running from east to west, that is to say, from the said Narraganset bay on the east, to the south sea on the west part, with the islands thereunto belonging.' This char­ter has ever since remained the basis of the government of Connecticut.

Such was the ignorance of the Europeans, respecting the geography of America, that their parents extended they knew not where, many of them were of doubtful construction; and very often covered each oth­er in part, and have produced innumerable disputes and mischiefs in the colonies, some of which are not settled to this day. It is not my business to touch upon these disputes. I have only to observe, that Connecticut construed her charter as authorising them to pass over New York, which was then in possession of the subjects of a chris­tian Prince, and claimed, in latitude and breadth mentioned therein, to the south sea. Accordingly purchases were made of the Indians on the Delaware river, west of the western bounds of New York, and within the supposed limits of Connecticut charter, and settlements were made thereon by people from, and under the jurisdiction of Con­necticut. The charter of Pennsylvania granted to William Penn, in 1681, covered these settlements. This laid the foundation for a dis­pute which for a long time was maintained with warmth on both sides. The matter was at fast submitted to gentlemen chosen for the purpose, who decided the dispute in favour of Pennsylvania. Many however still assert the justice of the Connecticut claim.

The state of Connecticut have ceded to Congress all their lands west of Pennsylvania, except a reserve bounded east by Pennsylvania and extending in length, 120 miles west, and in breadth from latitude 4 [...]° to 42° 2′ north. This cession, Congress have accepted.

The colony of New Haven, though unconnected with the colony of Connecticut, was comprehended within the limits of their charter, and, as they concluded, within their jurisdiction. But New Haven remonstrated against their claim, and refused to unite with them, un­til they should hear from England. It was not until the year 1665, when it was believed that the king's commissioners had a design upon the New England charters, that these two colonies formed an union, which has ever since amicably subsisted between them.

In 1672, the laws of the colony were revised, and the general court ordered them to be printed; and also, 'that every family should buy one of the law books—such as pay in silver to have a book for twelve pence, such as pay in wheat, to pay a peck and a half a book; and such as pay in peas, to pay two shillings a book, the peas at three shil­lings the bushel.' Perhaps it is owing to this early and universal spread of law books, that the people of Connecticut are to this day so fond of the law.

[Page 413] In 1750, the laws of Connecticut were again revised, and published in a small folio volume of 258 pages. Dr. Douglass observes, 'that they were the most natural, equitable, plain and concise code of laws, for plantations, hitherto extant.'

There has been a revision of them since the peace of 1783, in which they were greatly and very judiciously simplified.

The years 1673 and 1676, were distinguished by the wars wi [...] Phillip and his Indians, and with the Narragansets, by which the colony was thrown into great distress and confusion. The inroads of the enraged savages were marked with cruel murders, and with fire and devastation.

In 1684, the charter of Massachusetts bay and Plymouth were tak­en away, in consequence of Quo warrantos which had been issued a­gainst them. The charter of Connecticut was saved by an artful ex­pedient.

Connecticut has ever made rapid advances in population. There have been more emigrations from this than from any of the other states, and yet it is at present full of inhabitants. This increase may be ascribed to several causes. The bulk of the inhabitants are industrious, sagacious husbandmen. Their farms furnish them with all the necessaries, most of the conveniencies and but few of the lux­uries of life. They of course must be generally temperate, and if they choose, can subsist with as much independence as is consistent with happiness. The subsistence of the farmer is substantial, and does not depend on incidental circumstances, like that of most other pro­fessions. There is no necessity of serving an apprenticeship to the business, nor of a large stock of money to commence it to advan­tage. Farmers, who deal much in barter, have less need of money than any other class of people. The ease with which a comfortable subsistence is obtained, induces the husbandman to marry young. The cultivation of his farm makes him strong and healthful. He toils cheerfully through the day—eats the fruit of his own labour with a gladsome heart—at night devoutly thanks his bounteous God for his daily blessings—retires to rest, and his sleep is sweet. Such circumstances as these have greatly contributed to the amazing in­crease of inhabitants in this state.

Besides, the people live under a free government, and have no fear of a tyrant. There are no overgrown estates, with rich and ambitious landlords, to have an undue and pernicious influence in the election of civil officers. Property is equally enough divided, and must con­tinue to be so, as long as estates descen [...] as they now do. No per­son qualified by law is prohibited from voting. He who has the most merit, not he who has the most money, is generally chosen into public of­fice. As instances of this, it is to be observed, that many of the citizens of Connecticut, from the humble walks of life, have arisen to the first offices in the state, and filled them with dignity and reputation. That base business of electioneering, which is so directly calculated to introduce wicked and designing men into office, is yet but little known in Con­necticut. A man who wishes to be chosen into office, acts wisely, for that end, when he keeps his desires to himself.

A thirst for learning prevails among all ranks of people in the state. More of the young men in Connecticut, in proportion to their numbers, receive a public education, than in any of the states.

[Page 414] Some have believed, and with reason, that the fondness for acad­emic and collegiate education is too great—that it induces too many to leave the plough. If men of liberal education would return to the farm, and use their knowledge in improving agriculture, and encour­aging manufactures, there could not be too many men of learning in the state; but this is too seldom the case.

Connecticut had but a small proportion of citizens who did not join in opposing the oppressive measures of Great Britain, and was active and influential, both in the field and in the cabinet, in bringing about the revolution. Her soldiers were applauded by the commander in chief, for their bravery and fidelity.

What has been said in favour of Connecticut, though true when generally applied, needs to be qualified with some exceptions. Dr. Douglass spoke the truth when he said that 'some of the meaner sort are villains.' Too many are idle and dissipated, and much time is un­profitably and wickedly spent at taverns, in law suits and petty arbitra­tions. The public schools, in some parts of the state, have been too much neglected, and in procuring instructors, too little attention is paid to their moral and literary qualifications.

The revolution, which so essentially affected the governments of most of the colonies, produced no very perceptible alteration in the government of Connecticut. While under the jurisdiction of Great Britain, they elected their own governors, and all subordinate civil officers, and made their own laws, in the same manner, and with as little control as they now do. Connecticut has ever been a repub­lic, and perhaps as perfect and as happy a republic as has ever exist­ed. While other states, more monarchical in their government and manners, have been under a necessity of undertaking the difficult task of altering their old, or forming new constitutions, and of changing their monarchical for republican manners, Connecticut has uninter­ruptedly proceeded in her old track, both as to government and man­ners; and, by these means, has avoided those convulsions which have rent other states into violent parties.

At the anniversary election of governor and other public officers, which is held yearly at Hartford on the second Thursday in May, a sermon is preached, which is published at the expense of the state. * On these occasions a vast concourse of respectable citizens, particular­ly of the clergy, are collected from every part of the state; and while [Page 415] they add dignity and solemnity to the important and joyful trans­actions of the day, serve to exterminate party spirit and to harmonize the civil and religious interests of the state.

Connecticut has been highly distinguished in having a succession of governors, eminent both for their religious and political accom­plishments. With the following list of their names, I shall conclude my account of Connecticut.

Colony of Connecticut.
Accessus Names Exitus
1639 John Haynes, Esquires. 1640
1640 Edward Hopkins, 1641
1641 John Haynes, 1642
1642 George Wyllis, 1643
1643 John Haynes, 1644
1644 Edward Hopkins, 1645
1645 John Haynes, 1646
1646 Edward Hopkins, 1647
1647 John Haynes, Esquires. 1648
1648 Edward Hopkins, 1649
1649 John Haynes, 1650
1650 Edward Hopkins, 1651
1651 John Haynes, 1652
1652 Edward Hopkins, 1653
1653 John Haynes, 1653 died.
1654 Edward Hopkins, 1655
1655 Thomas Wells, 1656
1656 John Webster, 1657
1657 John Winthrop, 1658
1658 Thomas Wells, 1659
1659 John Winthrop, 1670
1676 William Leet, 1680
1680 Robert Treat, 1696
1696 John Winthrop, 1707
1707 Gurdon Saltonstall, 1724
1724 Joseph Talcott, 1741
1741 Jonathan Law, 1751
1751 Roger Woolcot, 1754
1754 Thomas Fitch, 1766
1766 William Pitkin, 1769
1769 Jonathan Trumbull, 1784
1784 Matthew Griswold, 1785
1785 Samuel Huntington,  
Colony of New Haven.
Accessus Names Exitus
1639 Theop. Eaton, Esquires. 1658 died.
1659 Fra. Newman, 1661 died.
1662 William Leet, 1665.

This year (1665) the colonies of New Haven and Connecticut unit­ed, and governor Winthrop was governor of both, and governor Leet deputy governor.

[Page 416]

MIDDLE STATES
We now come to the SECOND GRAND DIVISION of the UNITED STATES, comprehending NEW YORK NEW JERSEY PENNSYLVANIA DELAWARE TERRITORY N. W. of OHIO.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Upper Canada, from which it is separated by the Lakes; east, by the New England States; south, by the Atlantic Ocean, Maryland, Virginia, and the Ohio river, which separates it from Kentucky; west, by the Mississippi river.

RIVERS AND BAYS.] The principal rivers in this District are the Hudson, the Delaware, the Susquehannah, the Ohio, the Mississippi and their branches. York, Delaware, and part of Chesapeak Bays are in this District.

CLIMATE.] The climate of this Grand Division, lying almost in the same latitudes, various but little from that of New England. There are no two successive years alike. Even the same successive seasons and months differ from each other every year. And there is perhaps but one steady trait in the character of this climate, and that is, it is uni­formly variable. The changes of weather are great and frequently sudden. The range of the quicksilver in Farenheit's thermometer, according to Dr. Mitchill, is between the 24th degree below, and the 105th degree above cypher; and it has been known to vary 50 degrees in the course of 26 hours. Such alterations are much more consider­able along the coast, than in the interior and midland parts of the country; and, wherever they prevail, are accompanied with propor­tionate changes in the air, from calms towinds, and from moisture to dryness Storms and hurricanes, sometimes happen, which are so violent as to overset vessels, demolish fences, uproot trees and unroof buildings. Droughts of six weeks or two months continuance, oc­cur now and then. Rain has been known to fall in such abundance that the earth by measurement, has received 6,5 inches on a level, in the short space of four hours. * The quantity of water which falls in rain and snow, one year with another, amounts to from 24 to 36 inches. In the northern parts of this district the snow falls in larger quantities, lies longer, and the cold is more steady and intense, by many degrees than in the southern; hence the climate of the former is more a­greeable in winter, and that of the latter in summer. The warmest wea­ther is generally in the month of July; but intensely warm days are often felt in May, June, August and September.—Dr. Rittenhouse says, that during his residence in the country, in the state of Pennsylvania, he never had passed a summer without discovering frost in every month in the year, except July. The greatest degree of heat upon record in Philadelphia in 1789, was 90°—The standard temperature of air in Philadelphia is 52½° which is the temperature of their deep­est wells, and the mean heat of their common spring water. There are seldom more than four months in the year, in which the weather is agreeable without a fire. In winter, the winds generally come from [Page 417] the N. W. in fair, and from the N. E. in wet weather. The N. W. winds are uncommonly dry as well as cold.

The climate on the west side of the Allegany mountains, differs ma­terially from that on the east side, in the temperature of the air, and the effects of the wind upon the weather, and in the quantity of rain and snow which fall every year. The S. W. winds, on the west side of the mountain, are accompanied by cold and rain. The tempera­ture of the air is seldom so cold or so hot by several degrees as on the east side of the mountain.

On the whole it appears that the climate of this division of the United States is a compound of most of the climates in the world—It has the moisture of Ireland in the spring—the heat of Africa in summer—the temperature of Italy in June—the sky of Egypt in au­tumn—the snow and cold of Norway, and the Ice of Holland, in winter—the tempests (in a certain degree) of the West Indies in every season, and the variable winds and weather of Great Britain in every month in the year.

From this account of the climate of this District it is easy to ascer­tain what degrees of health, and what deseases prevail. As the in­habitants have the climates, so they have the acute diseases of all the countries that have been mentioned. Although it might be supposed, that with such changes and varieties in the weather, there would be connected epidemical diseases and an unwholesome climate, yet on the whole, it is found in this District to be as healthy as any part of the United States. *

NEW YORK.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 350 Miles. between 40° 40′ and 45° North Latitude. Sq. Miles 41,000
Breadth 300 Miles. 5° W. and 1° 30′ East Longitude. Sq. Miles. 41,000

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED southeastwardly, by the Atlantic ocean; east, by Connecticut, Massachusetts and Vermont; north, by the 45th degree of latitude, which divides it from Canada; northwestwardly, by the river Iroquois, or St. Law­rence, and the lakes Ontario and Erie; southwest and south, by Penn­sylvania and New Jersey.

CIVIL DIVISIONS.] The State is divided into 19 counties, which by an act of the legislature, passed in March 1783, were subdivided into townships.

[Page 418]

Counties No. Tow. No. Inha. Chief Towns. No. I [...]h.
New York 1 33131 New York City 32328
Albany 20 75736 Albany 3498
Suffolk 8 16440 East Hampton 3260
Huntington 1497
Queens 6 16014 Jama [...]at 1675
Kings 6 4495 Flat Bush 941
Brooklyn 1603
Richmond 4 3835 Westfield 1 [...]51
West Chester 21 24003 Bedford 2470
Orange 6 18492 Goshen 2448
Orange 1 [...]75
Ulster 14 29397 Kingston 3929
Dutchess 12 45266 Poughkeepsie 25 [...]9
Fishkill 5941
Columbia 8 [...]7732 Hudson 2584
Kinderhook 466 [...]
Ransselaer formed since the census. Lansinburg  
Washington 9 14042 Salem 2186
Clinton 4 1614 Plattsburg 458
Montgomery 11 28848 divided since the census into three counties.  
Ontario   1075 Canadaque  
  130 340120 Total number of inhabitants in the State, according to the census of 179 [...].
New Counties Herkemer 3 14000 1792 German Flats 1400
Otsego   12000 Cooperstown  
Tyoga   7000 Chenango  
    Union Town  

These three last mentioned counties have been separated from Montgomery since the census, and have acquired the greater part of their inhabitants subsequent to that period, most of whom emigrated from the New England States. The county of Herkemer is composed of the towns of German Flats, Herkemer, and Whitestown (which in 179 [...], was divided into several other towns) and contained, in 17 [...], according to the census, 4723 inhabitants; since which, this number has been increased to upwards of 14000.

The townships, into which the counties are divided, are corpora­tions invested with certain privileges. The act directs, that the free­holders in the several townships shall assemble in town meetings [...] the first Tuesday in April annually, and choose their town offices viz. one supervisor, one town clerk, from three to seven assessors, [...] or more collectors, two overseers of the poor, commissioners of high­ways, constables, fence viewers, pound-masters, &c. These are to [...] their respective offices one year, or until others be chosen. This [...] which appears to have originated from a spirit of pure republica [...] came in force the first day of April 1789. It has a happy tende [...] to disseminate through the state such information and such prin [...] as are calculated to cherish the spirit of freedom, and to support [...] republican government. The frequent collection of people in [...] meetings makes them acquainted with each other, and assimilates [...] ideas and their manners: Their being invested with power, makes them [Page 419] feel their importance, and rouses their ambition—Their town meetings will be a school, in which all the free citizens of the state may learn how to transact public business with propriety, and in which they may qualify themselves for the higher offices of the state—The number of public offices will be increased, without increasing the expenses of the state; and as the desire of promotion is innate in human nature, and as ambition to possess the requisite qualifications commonly accompa­nies this desire, the probability is, that the number of persons qualified for public office will be increased, and of course the number of good citizens proportionably multiplied, and the subordinate civil affairs of the state more faithfully and more regularly transacted.

RIVERS AND CANALS.] Hudson's river is one of the largest and finest rivers in the United States. It rises in the mountainous coun­try between the lakes Ontario and Champlain. In its course south­easterly it approaches within 6 or 8 miles of Lake George; then, after a short course east turns southerly, and receives the Socondaga from the S. W. which heads in the neighbourhood of Mohawk river. The course of the river thence to New York, where it emp­ties into York Bay, is very uniformly south, 12° or 15° west. Its whole length is about 250 miles. From Albany to Lake George, is sixty five miles. This distance, the river is navigable only for batteaux, and has two portages, occasioned by falls, of half a mile each.

The banks of Hudson's river, especially on the western side, as far as the Highlands extend, are chiefly rocky cliffs. The passage through the Highlands, which is sixteen miles, affords a wild romantic scene. In this narrow pass, on each side of which the mountains tower to a great height, the wind, if there be any, is collected and compressed, and blows continually as through a bellows. Vessels, in passing through it, are often obliged to lower their sails. The bed of this river, which is deep and smooth to an astonishing distance, through a hilly, rocky country, and even through ridges of some of the highest mountains in the United States, must undoubtedly have been produced by some mighty convulsion in nature. The tide flows a few miles above Albany, which is 160 miles from New York. It is navigable for sloops of 80 tons to Albany, and for ships to Hudson. Ship navi­gation to Albany is interrupted by a number of islands, 6 or 8 miles below the city, called the Overslaugh. It is in contemplation to con­fine the river to one channel, by which means the channel will be deepened, and the difficulty of approaching Albany with vessels of a larger size, be removed. About 60 miles above New York the water becomes fresh. The river is stored with a variety of fish, which [...]ders a summer passage to Albany, delightful and amusing to those who are fond of angling.

The advantages of this river for carrying on the fur trade with Canada, by means of the lakes, have been already mentioned. Its convenience for internal commerce are singularly great. The produce of the remotest farms is easily and speedily conveyed to a certain and profitable market, and at the lowest expense. In this respect, New York has greatly the advantage of Philadelphia. A great proportion of the produce of Pennsylvania is carried to market in waggons, over a great extent of country, some of which is rough; hence it is that Philadelphia is crouded with waggons, carts, horses and their drivers, [Page 420] to do the same business that is done in New York, where all the pro­duce of the country is brought to market by water, with much less shew and parade. But Philadelphia has other advantages, which will be mentioned in their proper place, to compensate for this natur­al defect. The increasing population of the fertile lands upon the northern branches of the Hudson, must annually increase the amazing wealth that is conveyed by its waters to New York. Added to this the ground has been marked out, the level ascertained, a company in­corporated, by the name of "The President, Directors and Company of the Northern Inland Lock Navigation, in the state of New York," and funds subscribed, for the purpose of cutting a canal from the near­est approximating point of Hudson's river to South Bay, which emp­ties into the south end of Lake Champlain. The distance is 18 miles. The difference of level and the face of the country are such as to justify a belief that the opening of this canal will not be less practi­cable than useful.

Saranac river, passes through Plattsburg into Lake Champlain. It has been explored nearly 30 miles, and there found equal in size to the mouth. In this river is the greatest abundance of fish, such as salmon, bass, pike, pickerel, trout, &c.

Sable river, not far from the Saranac, is scarcely 60 yards wide. On this stream are remarkable falls. The whole descent of the water is about 200 feet, in several pitches, the greatest of which is 40 feet, perpendicular. At the foot of it the water is unfathomable. A large pine, has been seen in a freshet, to pitch over endwise, and remain several minutes under water. The stream is confined by high rocks on either side, a space of 40 feet, and the banks at the falls, are, at least, as many feet high. In a freshet the stood wood frequently lodges, and in a few minutes, the water rises to full banks, and then bursts away its obstructions, with a most tremendous crashing. The Big and Lit­tle Chazy rivers are in the township of Champlain, which borders on the Canada line. Both are navigable some miles, the former 6 or 7 affording good mill seats—Several mills are already erected. The British have a post, and maintain a small garrison at Point-au-fer, in this township.

The river Boquet passes through the town of Willsborough, in Clinton county, and is navigable for boats about two miles, and is there interrupted by falls, on which are mills. At this place are the remains of an intrenchment, thrown up by General Burgoyne. Here he gave his famous war feast to his "numerous hosts of savages," and here probably he first conceived that celebrated proclamation which he afterwards brought forth.

Black river rises in the high country, near the sources of Canada Creek, which falls into Mohawk river, and takes its course N. W. and then N. E. till it discharges itself into Cataraqua or Irequois river, not far from Swegauchee. It is said to be navigable for bat­teaux up to the lower falls, 60 miles, which is distant from the flou­rishing settlement of Whitestown, 25 miles. The whole length of this river is reckoned at 112 miles.

Onondago river rises in the Oneida lake, runs westwardly into Lake Ontario at Oswego. It is boatable from its mouth to the head of the lake, 74 miles, (except a fall which occasions a portage of twenty yards) thence batteaux go up Wood Creek almost to Fort Stan­wix, [Page 421] 40 miles; whence there is a portage of a mile to Mohawk river. Toward the head waters of this river salmon are caught in great quan­tities.

Mohawk river rises to the northward of Fort Stanwix, about 8 miles from Black river, and runs southwardly 20 miles, to the sort; then eastward 110 miles, into the Hudson. The produce that is con­veyed down this river is landed at Skenectady, and is thence carried by land sixteen miles, over a barren shrub plain, to Albany. Except a portage of about a mile, occasioned by the little falls, 56 miles a­bove Skenectady, the river is passable for boats, from Skenectady, nearly or quite to its source. The perpendicular descent of these falls is estimated at 42 feet, in the course of one mile; and it is sup­posed they might be locked so as to be rendered passable for boats car­rying 5 tons for about £15,000 currency. The Cohoez, in this river, are a great curiosity. They are three miles from its entrance into the Hudson. The river is about 100 yards wide—the rock, over which it pours as over a mill dam, extends almost in a line from one side of the river to the other, and is about thirty feet perpendicular height. Including the descent above, the fall is as much as sixty or seventy feet. The rocks below, in some places, are worn many feet deep by the con­stant friction of the water. The view of this tremendous cataract is diminished by the height of the banks on each side of the river. About a mile below the falls the river branches and forms a large i­sland; but the two mouths may be seen at the same time from the op­posite bank of the Hudson. The branches are fordable at low water, but are dangerous. A company by the name of "The President, Di­rectors and Company of the Western Inland Lock Navigation, in the State of New York" were incorporated by the legislature of New York, in March 1792, for the purpose of opening a lock navigation from the now navigable part of Hudson's river, to be extended to Lake Ontario, and to the Seneca Lake. This rout has been surveyed, and found practicable, the expense estimated, and the funds subscribed, and the work is to be executed with all possible dispatch. The open­ing of this navigation would be a vast acquisition to the commerce of this state. A shore of at least 1000 miles in length would, in conse­quence of it, be washed by boatable waters, exclusive of all the great lakes, and many millions of acres, of excellent tillage land, rapidly settling, would be accommodated with water communication for con­veying their produce to market.

Delaware river rises in Lake U [...]stayantho, lat. 42° 25′ and takes its course southwest, until it crosses into Pennsylvania in latitude 42°. Thence southwardly, dividing New York from Pennsylvania, until it strikes the northwest corner of New Jersey, in latitude 41° 24′; and then passes off to sea, through Delaware bay, having New Jersey on the east side, and Pennsylvania and Delaware on the west.

Susquehannah E. Branch river has its source in lake Otsego, lat. 42° 55′ from which it takes a southwest course. It crosses the line, which divides New York and Pennsylvania, three times, the last time near Tyoga point, where it received Tyoga river. Batteaux pass to its source—thence to Mohawk river is but twenty miles, capable of good roads.

Tyoga river rises in the Allegany mountains, in about latitude 42°, runs eastwardly, and empties into the Susquehannah at Tyoga point, in latitude 41° 57′. It is boatable about 50 miles.

[Page 422] Seneca river rises in the Seneca country, and runs eastwardly, and in its passage receives the waters of the Seneca and Cayuga lakes, (which lie north and south, ten or twelve miles apart, each is between thirty and forty miles in length, and about a mile in breadth) and empties into the Onondago river, 14 miles above the falls, at a place called Three Rivers. From Three river point to Onondago Lake, up Sen­eca, river, is 12 miles. Within half a mile of this lake a salt spring issues from the ground, the water of which is salter than that of the ocean. It constantly emits water in sufficient quantity for works of any extent. It is probable the whole country will be supplied from this spring, and at a very cheap rate. This spring is the property of the state. This river is boatable from the lakes downwards.

Chenessee river rises near the source of the Tyoga, and runs north­wardly by the Chenessee castle and flats, and empties into Lake Onta­rio eighty miles east of Niagara fort. On this river is one set of large falls, not far from its junction with Lake Ontario. The inhabi­tants improve these falls to good purpose, by the erection of mills up­on them.

The northeast branch of the Allegany river, heads in the Allegany mountains, near the source of the Tyoga, and runs directly west un­til it is joined by a larger branch from the southward, which rises near the west branch of the Susquehannah. Their junction is on the line between Pennsylvania and New York,. From this junction, the river pursues a northwest course, leaving a segment of the river of about fifty miles in length, in the state of New York, thence it proceeds in a circuitous southwest direction, until it crosses into Pennsylvania. From thence to its entrance into the Mississippi, it has already been described.

There are few fish in the rivers, but in the brooks are plenty of trout; and in the lakes, yellow perch, sunfish, salmon trout, catfish, and a variety of others.

From this account of the rivers, it is easy to conceive of the excel­lent advantages for conveying produce to market from every part of the state.

The settlements already made in this state, are chiefly upon two narrow oblongs, extending from the city of New York, east and north. The one east, is Long Island, which is 140 miles long, and narrow, and surrounded by the sea. The one extending north is about forty miles in breadth, and bisected by the Hudson. And such is the inter­section of the whole state, by the branches of the Hudson, the Dela­ware, the Susquehannah, and other rivers which have been mentioned, that there are few places, throughout its whole extent, that are more than fifteen or twenty miles from some boatable or navigable stream.

BAYS AND LAKES.] York bay, which is nine miles long and four broad, spreads to the southward before the city of New York. It is formed by the confluence of the East and Hudson's rivers, and em­bosoms several small islands. of which Governor's island is the prin­cipal. It communicates with the ocean through the Narrows, between Staten and Long Islands, which are scarcely two miles wide. The passage up to New York, from Sandy Hook, the point of land that extends farthest into the sea, is safe, and not above twenty miles in length. The common navigation is between the east and west banks, [Page 423] in about twenty two feet water. There is a light house at Sandy Hook, on a peninsula from the Jersey shore.

South bay lies 12 or 15 miles north of the northern bend in Hud­son's river. At its north end it receives Wood Creek from the south, which is navigable several miles, and lined with fine meadows. Soon after it mingles its waters with East bay, which stretches eastward in­to Vermont. At the junction of these bays, commences another bay or lake, from half a mile to a mile wide, whose banks are steep hills, o [...] cliffs of rocks, generally inaccessable. At Ticonderoga, this bay receives the waters of Lake George, from the southwest, through a large brook, which rolls down a gentle declivity, at the foot of which were formerly a set of saw mills. The waters of Lake George are 100 feet higher than those of the bay.

Oneida Lake lies about twenty miles west of Fort Stanwix, and ex­tends westward about 30 miles.

Salt Lake is small, and empties into Seneca river, soon after its junction with the Onondago river, about 12 miles from Three river point. This lake is strongly impregnated with saline particles, which circumstances gave rise to its name. The Indians make their salt from it.

Lake Otsego, at the head of Susquehannah river, is about nine miles long, and narrow, perhaps not more than a mile wide. The land on the banks of this lake is very good, and the cultivation of it easy.

Caniaderago Lake is nearly as large as Lake Otsego, and six miles west of it. A stream, by the name of Oaks Creek, issues from it, and sails into the Susquehannah river, about five miles below Otsego. The best cheese in the state of New York is said to be made upon this Creek.

Chatoque Lake is the source of Conawongo river, which empties into the Allegany. The lower end of it, whence the river proceeds, is in latitude 42° 10′; from thence to its head, is about twenty-five miles. From the northwest part of this to lake Lake Erie, is nine miles, and was once a communication used by the French.

On the north side of the mountains, in Orange county, is a very valuable tract called the Drowned Lands, containing about 40 or 50 000 acres. The waters, which descend from the surrounding hills, being but slowly discharged by the river issuing from it, cover these vast meadows every winter, and render then extremely fertile; but they expose the inhabitants in the vicinity to intermittents. The Wallkill river, which passes through this extensive amphibious tract, and emp­ties into Hudson's river, is, in the spring, stored with very large [...]els in great plenty. The bottom of this river is a broken rock: and it is supposed, that for 2000'. the channel might be deepened so as to let off all the waters from the meadows, and thereby redeem from the floods a large tract of rich land, for grass, hemp, and Indian corn.

ROADS.] The roads in this state have been in general but [...]illy attended to till within the two or three last years. The legislature, convinced of the importance of attending to the matter, and per­haps stimulated by the enterprizing and active Pennsylvanians, who are competitors for the trade of the western country, have lately granted very liberal sums, towards improving those roads that traverse the most settled parts of the country, and opening such as lead into [Page 424] the western and northern parts of the state, uniting as far as possible the establishments on the Hudson's river, and the most populous parts of the interior country by the nearest practicable distances. A post regularly rides from Albany to the Chenesee river, once a fortnight through Whitestown, Geneva, Canadaqua, Canawargus and W [...] ­iamsburgh on the Chenesee river. By this establishment a safe and direct conveyance is opened between the most interior parts of the United States, to the west, and the several states in the union.

A grand road was opened through Clinton county, which bo [...]ders upon Canada, in the year 1790, under the direction of a Mr. Rogers, of Dutchess county, and after him called Rogers' road. This road adds greatly to the convenience and safety of travelling between the state of New York, and Canada, especially in the winter, when pass­ing the Lakes on ice is often dangerous and always uncomforta­ble.

A road also has been lately cut from Katt's Kill, on the Hudson, westwardly, which passes near Owasco Lake.

BRIDGES.] A Bridge called Staat's Bridge, 250 feet long and of a sufficient width to admit two carriages abreast has lately been thrown across Abram's Creek, which falls into Hudson's river, near the city of Hudson, by which a communication with the country, in a new direction, is opened from the city of Hudson; and a distance saved of 4 or 5 miles in the main post road from New York to Albany.

Skaticook bridge, in the town of that name, 10 miles from Lan­sinburgh, is an ingenious structure, built at the private expenses of an enterprizing and liberal gentlemen. It cost 1400l. currency.

The legislature of the state here granted 3000l. to build a bridge over the sprouts of Mohawk river, whenever the sum of 1000l. shall be subscribed and paid. This bridge will be one of the longest in America, and will open a direct communication to a very extensive country, progressing fast in population, in the northwestern parts of the state.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY, MOUNTAINS, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.} The state, to speak gen­erally, is intersected by ridges of mountains running in a northeast and southwest direction. Beyond the Allegany mountains, however, the country is a dead lev­el, of a fine, rich soil, covered in its natural state, with maple, beach, birch, cherry, black walnut, locust, hickory, and some mulberry trees. On the banks of Lake Erie, are a few chesnut and oak ridges. Hem­lock swamps are interspersed thinly through the country. All the creeks that empty into Lake, Erie, have falls, which afford many ex­cellent mill seats.

The lands between the Seneca and Cayuga Lakes, are represented as uncommonly excellent, being most agreeably diversified with gen­tle risings, and timbered with lofty trees, with little underwood. The legislature of this state, have granted one million and a half acres of land, as a gratuity to the officers and soldiers of the line of this state. This tract is bounded west, by the east shore of the Seneca Lake, and the Massachusetts lands in the new county of Ontario; north by part of Lake Ontario near Fort Oswego; south, by a ridge of the Allegany mountains and the Pennsylvania line; and east, by the Tus­caroro creek (which falls nearly into the middle of the Oneida lake) and that part of Montgomery which has been settling by the New England people very rapidly since the peace.

[Page 425] This pleasant country is divided into twenty-five townships of 6 [...],000 acres each, which are again subdivided into 100 convenient farms, of 600 acres, making in the whole 2,500 farms.

East of the Allegany mountains, the country is broken into hills with rich intervening vallies. The hills are clothed thick with timber, and when cleared afford line pasture—the vallies, when cultivated, pro­duce, wheat, hemp, flax, peas, grass, oats, indian corn.

Besides the trees already mentioned, there are, in various parts of the state, the several kinds of oak, such as white, red, yellow, black and chesnut oak; white, yellow, spruce, and pitch pines; cedar, fir tree, butternut, aspin, commonly called popular, white wood, which in Pennsylvania is called poplar, and in Europe the tulip tree, rock maple, the linden tree which, with the whitewood, grows on the low rich ground, the buttonwood, shrub cranberry, the fruit of which hangs in clusters like grapes as large as cherries; this shrub too grows on low ground. Besides these is the sumach, which bears clusters of red berries; the Indians chew the leaves instead of tobacco; the ber­ries are used in dyes. Of the commodities produced from culture, wheat is the staple. Of this article in wheat and flour, equivalent to one million bushels, are yearly exported. Indian corn and peas, are likewise raised for exportation; and rye, oats, barley, &c. for home consumption.

In some parts of the state large dairies are kept which furnish for the market butter and cheese. The best lands in this state, which lie along the Mohawk river, and north of it, and west of the Allegany moun­tains, are yet mostly in a state of nature, but are most rapidly settling.

The county of Clinton, in the most northern part of the state, on Lake Champlain, and Lake George, lies about midway between Que­bec and New York, and from 230 to 240 miles from each, and is settled by about 2000 inhabitants. A great proportion of the lands in this county are of an excellent quality, and produce in abundance the various kinds of grain, cultivated in other parts of the state. The inhabitants manufacture, earthen ware—pot and pearl ash, in large quantities, which they export to New York or Quebec—Their wool is of a better quality than that which is produced in more south­ern climates, their beef and pork is second to none; and the price of stall fed beef in Montreal (distant 60 miles from Plattsburg) is such as to encourage the farmers to drive their cattle to that market. Their forests supply them with sugar and molasses, as every family, with no more implements than are necessary for common use, can make a suf­ficiency for its own consumption, and that at a season when the far­mer can be no otherwise employed. The soil is well adapted to the culture of hemp. The land carriage, from any part of the country, in transporting their produce to New York, does not exceed 18 miles. The carrying place at Ticonderoga is one mile and a half; and from Fort George at the south end of the lake of the same name, to Fort Edward, is but 14 miles; after which there are two or three small ob­structions by falls, which are about to be removed by the proprietors of the northern canal. From this county to Quebec are annually sent large rafts; the rapids at St. John's and Chamblee being the on­ly interruption in the navigation, and those not so great but that, at some seasons, batteaux with sixty bushes of salt can ascend them. At this distance from the sea, salt is fold at half a dollar a bushel.

[Page 426] In the northern and unsettled parts of the state, are a plenty of moose, deer, bears, some beavers, martins, and most other inhabitants of the forest, except wolves. Ducks, growse, pigeons, and fish of ma­ny kinds, and particularly salmon, are taken in great abundance in different parts, and especially in the county of Clinton. At the mouth of Saranac river, which falls into Champlain, the salmon are found in such plenty, that it is usual to take 4 or 500 in a day with spears and small scoop nets. They are caught from May till Novem­ber, and make excellent salted provisions, and every cottager, by spending an hour in the evening, may obtain a sufficient supply for his family.

POPULATION AND CHARACTER.] For the population of this state, according to the census of 1790, the reader is referred to the table of divisions. In 1786, the number of inhabitants was 238,897, of which 18,889 were blacks. In 1756, there were 96,775 inhabitants, including 13,542 blacks. The average annual increate of inhabitants in this state, from 1756, to 1786, was 4.554. The annual increase for the 4 years succeeding 1786, was upwards of 25,000. A great pro­portion of this increase consists of emigrants from the New England states. The population for every square mile, including the whole state, is nearly eight, which shews that a great part of the state is yet unsettled.

The effects of the revolution have been as greatly, and as happily felt by this, as by any of the United States. The accession of inhab­itants within a few years has been great, even beyond calculation; and so long as lands can be obtained upon advantageous terms, and with a good title, and the general government continues to protect industry and encourage commerce, so long they will continue to increase. The new settlements that are forming in the northern and western parts of the state, are principally by people from New England. It is remarka­ble that the Dutch enterprize few or no settlements. Among all the new townships that have been settled since the peace, (and they have been astonishingly numerous) it is not known that one has been set­tled by the Dutch. Although they are as 'intent upon gain' as other people, they had rather rest secure of what they possess, than hazard all or even a part, in uncertain attempts to increase it.

The English language is generally spoken throughout the state, but is not a little corrupted by the Dutch dialect, which is still spoken in some counties, particularly in King's, Ulster, Albany, and that part of Orange which lies south of the mountains. But as Dutch schools [...] almost, if not wholly discontinued, that language, in a few generati [...] will probably cease to be used at all. And the increase of Eng [...] schools has already had a perceptible effect in the improvement of English language.

The manners of the people differ as well as their language. [...] ancestors of the inhabitants in the southern and middle parts of [...] Island, were either natives of England, or the immediate descends [...] of the first settlers of New England, and their manners and cust [...] are similar to those of their ancestors. The counties inhabited by the Dutch, have adopted the English manners in a great degree, but still re­tain many modes, particularly in their religion, which are peculiar to the Hollanders. They are industrious, next and economical in the man­agement of their farms and their families. Whatever business they [Page 427] pursue, they generally follow the old track of their forefathers, and seldom invent any new improvements in agriculture, manufactures or mechanics. They were the first settlers of this state, and were partic­ularly friendly to the English colony that settled at Plymouth in New England, in 1620; and continued to be amicably disposed towards the English colonies east of them, until the unhappy dispute arose con­cerning the lands on Connecticut river.

The revolution and its consequences, have had a very perceptible in­fluence in diffusing a spirit of liberality among the Dutch, and in dispell­ing the clouds of ignorance and national prejudice. Schools, academies and colleges are established and establishing for the education of their children, in the English and learned languages, and in the arts and sciences, and a literary and scientific spirit is evidently increasing. If such are the buddings of improvement in the dawn of our empire, what a rich harvest may we expect in its meridian.

The city of New York is inhabited principally by merchants, phy­sicians, lawyers, mechanics, shop keepers and tradesmen, composed of almost all nations and religions. They are generally respectable in their several professions, and sustain the reputation of honest, punct­ [...]l, fair dealers.

The manners and character of the inhabitants of every colony or state, will take their colouring, in a greater or less degree, from the peculiar manners of the first settlers. It is much more natural for emigrants to a settlement to adopt the customs of the original inhabitants, than the contrary, even though the emigrants should, in length of time, become the most numerous. Hence it is that the neatness, parsimony and in­dustry of the Dutch were early imitated by the first English settlers in the province, and, until the revolution, formed a distinguishing trait in their provincial character. It is still discernible, though in a much less degree, and will probably continue visible for many years to come.

Besides the Dutch and English already mentioned, there are in this states many emigrants from Scotland, Ireland, Germany, and some few from France. Many Germans are settled on the Mohawk, and some Scots people on the Hudson, in the county of Washington. The prin­cipal part of the two former settled in the city of New York; and re­tain the manners, the religion, and some of them the language of their respective countries. The French emigrants settled principally at New Rochelle and on Staten island, and their descendants, several of them, now fill some of the highest offices in the United States.

CHIEF TOWNS.] There are three incorporated cities in this state; New York. Albany and Hudson. New York is the capital of the state, and stands on the southwest point of Manhattan, common­ly called New York island, at the confluence of the Hudson and east rivers. The principal part of the city lies on the east side of the island, although the buildings extend from one river to the other. The length of the city on East River is about two miles; but falls much short of that distance on the banks of the Hud­son. Its breadth on an average is nearly three fourths of a mile; and its circumference may be four miles. The plan of the city is not per­fectly regular, but is laid out with reference to the situation of the ground. The ground which was unoccupied before the peace of 1783, was laid out in parallel streets of convenient width, which has had a [Page 428] good effect upon the parts of the city lately built. The principal streets run nearly parallel with the rivers. These are intersected, though not at right angles, by streets running from river to river. In the width of the streets there is a great diversity. Water street and Queen street, which occupy the banks of East river, are very conven­iently situated for business, but they are low and too narrow; not ad­mitting, in some places, of walks on the sides for foot passengers. Broad street, extending from the Exchange to City hall, is sufficiently wide. This was originally built on each side of the creek, which penetrated almost to the city hall. This street is low, but pleasant. But the most convenient and agreeable part of the city is the Broadway. It begins at a point which is formed by the junction of the Hudson and East rivers—occupies the height of land between them, upon a true meridional line—rises gently to the northward—is near 70 feet wide—adorned, where the fort formerly flood, (which has lately been levelled) with an elegant brick edifice for the accom­modation of the Governor of the state, and a public walk from the extremity of the point, occupying the ground of the lower battery, which is now demolished—also with two Episcopal Churches and a number of elegant private buildings. It terminates, to the northward, in a triangular area, fronting the bridewell and alms house, and com­mands from any point, a view of the Bay and Narrows.

Since the year 1788, that part of the city which was buried in ru­ins during the war, has been rapidly rebuilding—the streets widened, straitened, raised in the middle under an angle sufficient to carry off the water to the tide gutters, and foot ways of brick made on each side. At this time, the part that was destroyed by fire is almost wholly cov­ered with elegant brick houses.

Wall street is generally 50 feet wide and elevated, and the build­ings elegant. Hanover square and Dock street are conveniently situ­ated for business, and the houses well built. William street is also elevated and convenient, and is the principal market for retailing dry goods. Many of the other streets are pleasant, but most of them are irregular and narrow.

The houses are generally built of brick, and the roofs tiled. There are remaining a few houses built after the old Dutch manner; but the English taste has prevailed almost a century.

Upon the southwest point of the land, a fort with four bastions, formerly stood, and also a battery below. The area of the fort con­tained an elegant house for the accomodation of the royal governors, and was consume by fire in Gov. Tryon's time. This fort and battery were removed in the year 1791.

The most magnificent edifice in this city is Federal hall, situated at the head of Broad street, where its non [...] appears to great advantage. The basement story is Tuscan, and is pierced with seven openings; four massy pillars in the centre, support four Doric columns and a pediment. The freeze is ingeniously divided, to admit 13 stars in metopes; these with the American Eagle, and other insignia in the pediment, and the tablets over the windows, flied with the 13 arrows and the olive branch united, mark it as a building designated for na­tional purposes. After entering from the Broad street, we find a plain­ly finished square room, flagged with stone, and to which the citizens have free access: from this we enter the vestibule in the centre of [Page 429] the pile, which leads in front to the floor of the Representatives room, or real Federal Hall, and through two arches on each side by a public stair case on the left, and by a private one on the right, to the senate chamber and lobbies.

This vestibule is paved with marble—is very lofty and well finished; the lower part is of a light rustle, which supports a handsome iron gallery; the upper half is in a lighter style, and is finished with a sky light of about 12 by 18 feet, which is decorated with a profusion of ornament in the richest tame. The representatives' room is a spacious and elegant apartment, 61 feet deep, 58 wide and 36 high, a coved ceiling of about 10 feet high not included. This room is of an oc­tangular form; four of its sides are rounded in the manner of nitches, and give a graceful variety to the whole. The windows are large, and placed 16 feet from the floor; all below them is finished with plain wainscot, interrupted only by four chimmes; but above these a number of lonick columns and pilasters with their proper entablature are very judiciously disposed and give great elegance. In the pan­nels between the windows, trophies are carved, and the letters U. S. to a cypher surrounded with laurel. The speaker's chair is oppo­site the great door and raised by several steps; the chairs for the members are ranged semicircularly, in two rows in front of the speak­er. There are two galleries, for the accommodation of spectators.

On the left of the vestibule is a lobby 19 by 48 feet, finished with Tuscan pilasters. This leads to the senate chamber, which is 40 feet long, 30 wide, and 20 high, with an arched ceiling. It has 3 win­dows in front and 3 back. Those in front open into a gallery, 12 feet deep guarded by an elegant iron railing. In this gallery our beloved PRESIDENT, attended by the Senate and House of Repre­sentatives, took his oath of office, in the face of Heaven, and in pre­sence of a large concourse of people assembled in front.

The senate chamber is decorated with pilasters, of an order invented by Major [...] Enfant the architect, which have a magnificent appearance. The marble which is used in the chimneys is American; and for beauty of shades and polish, is equal to any of its kind in Europe. Besides these there are several other rooms for use and convenience; a libra­ry, lobbies and committee rooms above, and guard rooms below. The building on the whole does much credit to the ingenuity and abilities of the architect.

The other public buildings, in the city are three houses for public worship for the Dutch Reformed church—four presbyterran churches—three Episcopal churches; two for German Lutherans and Cal­vinists—two Friends' meeting houses—two for Baptists—two for me­thodists—one for Moravians—one Roman Catholic church—one French protestant church, out of repair, and a Jews' synagogue. Besides these there is the Governor's house, already mentioned, a most ele­gant building—the college, goal, and several other buildings of less note. The city is accommodated with four markets in different parts, which are furnished with a great plenty and variety of provisions in neat and excellent order.

The government of the city (which was incorporated in 1696) is now in the hands of a mayor, aldermen and common council. The city is divided into seven wards, in each of which there is chosen annually by the people an alderman and an assistant, who together [Page 430] with there corder, are appointed annually by the council of appoint­ment.

The mayor's court, which is held from time to time by adjournment, is in high reputation, as a court of law.

A court of sessions is likewise held for the trial of criminal causes.

The situation of the city is both healthy and pleasant. Surrobund­ed on all sides by water, it is refreshed with cool breezes in summer, and the air in winter is more temperate than in other places under the same parallel. York island is fifteen miles in length, and hardly one in breadth. It is joined to the main by a bridge called king's bridge. The channels between Long and Staten Islands, and between Long and York Islands are so narrow as to occasion an unusual rapid­ity of the tides, which is increased by the confluence of the waters of the Hudson and East River. This rapidity in general prevents the obstruction of the channel by ice, so that the navigation is clear, ex­cept for a few days in seasons when the weather is uncommonly se­vere. There is no bason or bay for the reception of ships; but the road where they lie in East river, is defended from the violence of the sea by the islands which interlock with each other; so that except that of Rhode Island, and Portland in the District of Main, the har­bour of New York, which admits ships of any burthen, is the best in the United States.

This city is esteemed the most eligible situation for commerce in the United States. It almost necessarily commands the trade of one half New Jersey, most of that of Connecticut, and part of that of Massachusetts, and almost the whole of Vermont, besides the whole fertile interior country, which is penetrated by one of the largest riv­ers in America. This city imports most of the goods consumed be­tween a line of thirty miles east of Connecticut river, and twenty miles west of the Hudson, which is 130 miles, and between the ocean and the confines of Canada, about 400 miles; a considerable por­tion of which is the best peopled of any part of the United States, and the whole territory contains at least 800,000 people, of one fifth of the inhabitants of the union. Besides some of the other states are par­tially supplied with goods from New York. But in the staple com­modity flour, Pennsylvania and Maryland have exceeded it—the sup­erfine flour of those states commanding a higher price than that of New York; not that the quality of the grain is worse, but because greater attention is paid in those states to the inspection and manufac­ture of that article.

In the manufacture likewise of iron, paper, cabinet works, &c. Pennsylvania exceeds not only New York, but all her sister states. In times of peace, however, New York will command more commercial business than any town in the United States. In time of war it will be insecure, without a marine force; but a small number of ships will be able to defend it from the most formidable attacks by sea.

A want of good water is a great inconvenience to the citizens; there being few wells in the city. Most of the people are supplied every day with fresh water, conveyed to their doors in casks, from a pump near the head of Queen-street, which receives it from a spring almost a mile from the centre of the city. This well is about 20 feet deep and four feet diameter. The average quantity drawn daily from this remarkable well, is 110 hogsheads of 130 gallons each.—In some hot [Page 431] summer days 216 hogsheads have been drawn from it; and what is very singular, there is never more or less than about 3 feet water in the well. The water is sold commonly at three pence a hogshead at the pump. Several proposals have been made by individuals to supply the citizens by pipes; but none have yet been accepted.

New York is the gayest place in America. The ladies, in the richness and brilliancy of their dress, are not equalled in any city in also United States; not even in Charleston (S. C.) which has heretofore been called the centre of the Beau Monde. The la­ [...]i [...], however, are not solely employed in attentions to dress. There are many who are studious to add to the brilliant external accom­plishments, the more brilliant and lasting accomplishments of the mind. Nor have they been unsuccessful; for New York can boast of great numbers of refined taste, whose minds are highly improved, and whose conversation is as inviting as their personal charms. Tinc­tured with a Dutch education, they manage their families with good economy and singular neatness.

In point of sociability and hospitality, New York is hardly exceed­ed by any town in the United States. If, however, in regard to these agreeable characteristics, the preference must be given to any one place, it decidedly belongs to Charleston (S. C.) Some travellers have, to these respects, given Boston the preference to New York.

An enquirer, who would wish to acquaint himself with the state of the people of New York, their manners and government, would nat­urally ask the citizens for their societies for the encouragement of sciences, arts, manufactures, &c? For their public libraries? For their patrons of literature? Their well regulated academies? For their fe­male academy for instructing young ladies in geography, history, belles lettres, &c? Such enquiries might be made with propriety, but could not at present, be answered satisfactorily. From the spirit of improvement, however, which has of late appeared, there is reason [...] believe that this trait in the character of the citizens of New York, will give place to one distinguished for a preference for these things.

On a general view of this city, as described thirty years ago, and in its present state, the comparison is flattering to the present age; particularly the improvements in taste, elegance of manners, and that only unaffected civility and politeness which form the happiness of social intercourse.

It is found, by a memorandum in one of the old registers, that the number of inhabitants in the city, taken by order of the King in the year 1697, was as follows:

Whites. Men 946 Negroes. Men 20 [...]
Women 1018 Women 205
Young men and boys 864 Boys and girls 161
Young women and girls 899    
Total   3727     575

The number of inhabitants in the city and county of New York in 1756, was 10,881: 1771—21,863; 1786—23,614; 1790—33,131.

The city of Albany is situated upon the west side of Hudson's river, the [...]60 miles north of the city of New York, in latitude 42° 36′, and i [...] [Page 432] by charter granted in 1686, one mile upon the river, and 16 miles, bac [...] ▪ It contains upwards of 1000 houses, built mostly by treading people on the margin of the river. The houses stand chiefly upon Pearl, Mark [...] and Water streets, and six other streets or lanes which cross them at right angles. They are mostly built in the old Dutch Gothi [...] stil [...] with the gable end to the street, which custom the first settlers [...] with them from Holland. The gable end is commonly of brick, with the heavy moulded ornament of flaunting with notches, like stairs, and an iron horse, for a weathercock, at top. The houses are seldom more than one story and a half high, and have but little conveniences, and less elegance; but they are kept very neat, being rubbed, with a mop almost every day, and scoured every week. Many new, houses however, have lately been built in this city, all in the modern [...] the inhabitants are paving the streets in the New York plan, with [...] ways, and making other improvements.

They city of Albany contains about 4000 inhabitants, collected from various parts. As great a variety of languages are spoken in Albany as in any town in the United States, but the English predominates, and the use of every other is constantly lessening. Adventurers in pursuit of wealth, the led here by the advantages for trade which this place affords.

Albany is unrivalled in its situation. It stands on the bank of one of the finest rivers in the world, at the head of sloop navigation. It enjoys a salubrious air, as is evinced by the longevity of its inhabitants. It is the natural Emporium of the increasing trade of a large extent of country west and north—a country of an excellent soil, abounding in every article for the West India market—plentifully watered with navigable lakes, creeks and rivers, as yet only partially peopled, but settling with almost unexampled rapidity, and capable of affording subsistence and affluence to millions of inhabitants. No part of A­merica, affords a more eligible opening for emigrants than this. And when the contemplated locks and canals are completed, the bridge over the Mohawk river erected, and convenient roads opened into every part of the country, all which will, it is expected, be [...] complished in a few years, Albany will probably increase and flourish beyond almost every other city or town in the United States.

The well water in this city is extremely bad, scarcely drinkable by those who are not accustomed to it. It oozes through a stiffiblu [...] clay and it imbibes in its passage, the fine particles common to that kind of soil. This discolors it, and when exposed any length of time to the air, it acquires a disagreeable taste. Indeed all the water for cooking is brought from the river, and many families use it to drink. The wat­er in the wells is unwholesome, being full of little insects, resembling, except in size, those which we frequently see in stagnated rain water. But the inhabitants are about to remedy this inconvenience by con­structing water works, to convey good water into the city.

The public buildings are a Low Dutch church, one for Presbyterians, one for Germans or High Dutch, one for Episcopalians—a Hospital, the City Hall, and a handsome brick Goal.

The city of Hudson has had the most rapid growth as any places in America, if we except Baltimore, in Maryland. It is situated on the east side of Hudson's river, in latitude 42° 23′ and is 130 miles north of New York; thirty miles south of Albany, and four miles west from [Page 433] old Claverack town. It is surrounded by an extensive and Fertile back country, and in proportion to its size and population, carries on a large trade.

No longer ago than the autumn of 1783, Messrs. Seth and Thomas J [...]nkins, from Providence, in the state of Rhode Island, having first reconnoitered all the way up the river, fixed on the unsettled spot where Hudson now stands, for a town. To this spot they found the river was navigable for vessels of any size. They purchased a tract of about a mile square, bordering on the river, with a large bay to the southward, and divided it into thirty parcels or shares. Other adven­turers were admitted to proportions, and the town was laid out in squares, formed by spacious streets, crossing each other at right angles. Each square contains thirty lots, two deep, divided by a twenty feet alley; each lot is fifty feet in front and 120 feet in depth.

In the spring of 1784, several houses and stores were erected. The increase of the town from this period to the spring of 1786, two years only, was astonishingly rapid, and reflects great honour upon the en­terpriaing and persevering spirit of the original founders. In the space of time just mentioned, no less than 150 dwelling houses, besides shops, barns, and other buildings, four warehouses, several wharves, spermaceti works, a covered rope walk, and one of the best distilleries in America, were erected, and 1500 fouls collected on a spot, which, three years before, was improved as a farm, and but two years before began to be built. Its increase since has been very rapid; a printing office has been established, and several public buildings have been erected, besides dwelling houses, stores, &c. The inhabitants are plentifully and conveniently supplied with water, brought to their cellars in wooden pipes, from a spring two miles from the town.

It stands on an eminence from which are extensive and delightful views to the northwest, north, and round that way to then southeast, consisting of hills and vallies, variegated with woods and orchards, cornfields and meadows, with the river, which is in most places a mile over, and may be seen a considerable distance to the northward, forming a number of bays and creeks. From the southeast to the south­west, the city is screened with hills at different distances, and west, afar off over the river and a large valley, the prospect is bounded by a chain of stupendous mountains, called the Katts-kill, running to the west north west, which add a magnificence and sublimity to the whole scene.

Upwards of twelve hundred sleighs entered the city daily, for sever­al days together, in February, 1786, loaded with grain of various kinds, boards, shingles, staves, hoops, iron ware, stone for building, firewood, and sundry articles of provision for the market, from which some idea may be formed of the advantage of its situation, with respect to the country adjacent, which is every way extensive and fertile, particularly westward. The original proprietors of Hudson offered to purchase a tract of land adjoining the south part of the city of Al­bany, and were constrained, by a refusal of the proposition, to become competitors for the commerce of the northern country, when oth­erwise they would have added great wealth and consequence to Albany.

Poughkeepsie is the shire town of Dutchess county, and is situated upon the east side of Hudson's river, and north of Wapping kill or creek. It is a pleasant little town, and has frequently been the seat of the state government.

[Page 434] Lansinburgh, formerly called the New City, stands on the east side of the Hudson, just opposite the south branch of Mohawk river, and 9 miles north of Albany. It is a very flourishing place, pleasantly situ­ated on a plain at the foot of a hill.

Kingston is the county town of Ulster. Before it was burnt by the British, in 1777, it contained about 200 houses, regularly built on an elevated dry plain, at the mouth of a little pleasant stream, called Eusopus kill or creek, that empties into the Hudson; but is nearly two miles west from the river. The town has been rebuilt.

S [...]enectady is sixteen miles northwest of Albany, in Albany county, situated on the banks of the Mohawk river. The town is compact and regular, built of brick, and, excepting a few, in the old Dutch style, on a rich flat of low land, surrounded with hills. The windings of the river through the town, and the fields, which are often over­flowed in the spring, afford a beautiful prospect about harvest time. As it is at the foot of navigation on a long river, which passes through a very fertile country, one would suppose it to embrace much of the commerce of it: but originally knowing no other than the fur trade, since the revolution the place has decayed, and no advantage been taken of its happy situation.

Plattsburgh is an extensive township in Clinton county, situated on the west margin of Lake Champlain. From the south part of the town the mountains trund away wide from the lake, and leave a charming tract of excellent land, of a rich loam, well watered, and about an equal proportion suitable for meadow and for tillage. The land rises in a gentle ascent for several miles from the lake, of which every farm will have a delightful view. Seven years ago, this town­ship and the whole county indeed, which at present contains several thousand inhabitants, was a wilderness; now they have a house for pub­lic worship, a court house and goal, the courts to common pleas and gen­eral sessions of the peace, sit here twice in a year; they have artizans of al­most every kind among them, and furnish among the themselves all the mate­rials for building, glass excepted. Polite circles may here be found, and the genteel traveller be entertained with the luxuries of a seaport, a tune on the harpsicord, and a philosophical conversation. This, with many o­ther instances of the kind, serve to verify a prophetic remark, in a letter of Congress to their constituents, written in a time of gloomy des­pondency, to the following purport: "Vast lakes and rivers, scarce­ly known or explored, whole waters have rolled for ages in silence and obscurity to the ocean, and extensive wildernesses of fertile soil, the dwelling place of savage beasts, shall yet hear the din of industry, become subservient to commerce, and boast delightful villas, gilded spires and spacious cities, rising on their banks, and fields loaded with the fruit of cultivation."

AGRICULTURE AND MANUFACTURES.] New York is consider­ably behind her neighbours in New England, New Jersey, and Penn­sylvania, in point of improvements in agriculture and manufactures. Among other reasons for this deficiency, that of want of enterprize in the inhabitants is not the least. Indeed their local advantages have been such as that they have grown rich without enterprize. Besides, lands have hitherto been cheap, and farms of course large, and in re­quires much less ingenuity to raise 1000 bushels of wheat upon 60 a­cres of land, than to raise the same quantity upon 30 acres. So long [Page 435] therefore as the farmer in New York can have 60 acres of land, to raise 1000 bushels of wheat, he will never trouble himself to find out how he can raise the same quantity upon half the land. It is popula­tion alone that stamps a value upon lands, and lays a foundation for high improvements in agriculture. When a man is obliged to maintain a fam­ily on a small farm, his invention is exercised to find out every improve­ment that may render it more productive. This appears to be the great reason why the lands on Delaware and Connecticut rivers, pro­duce to the farmer twice as much clear profit, as lands in equal quan­tity and of the same quality upon the Hudson. If the preceding ob­servations be just, improvements will keep pace with population and the increasing value of lands. Another cause which has heretofore operated in preventing agricultural improvements in this state, has been their government, which, in the manner it was conducted un­til the revolution, was extremely unfavourable to improvements of al­most every kind, and particularly in agriculture. The governors were many of them land jobbers, bent on making their fortunes; and be­ing invested with power to do this, they either engrossed for them­selves, or patented away to their particular favourites, a very great proportion of the whole province. This, as has been before observed, proved an effectual bar to population, and of course, according to our present hypothesis, has kept down the price of lands, and so prevented improvements in agriculture. It ought to be observed, in this connection, that these overgrown estates could be cultivated on­ly by the hands of tenants, who, having no right in the soil, and no certain prospect of continuing upon the farm which they held at the will of their landlord, had no motives to make those expensive improvements, which, though not immediately productive, would prove very profitable in some future period. The tenant, dependent on his landlord for his annual support, confines his views and im­provements to the present year; while the independent freeholder, secure of his estate for himself and his successors, carries his views in­to futurity, and early lays the foundation for growing improvement. But these obstacles have been removed, in a great measure, by the re­volution. The genius of the government of this state, however, still favours large monopolies of lands, which have, for some years back been granted, without regard either to quantity or settlement. The fine fertile country of the Mohawk, in Montgomery county, which was formerly possessed by Sir William Johnson, and other land job­bers, who were enemies to their country, has been forfeited to the state, and is now split up into freehold estates, and settling with astonishing rapidity.

The foregoing observations will in a great measure account for the great neglect of manufactural improvements. Mr. Smith in his history of New York, more than thirty years ago, observed, "It is much ow­ing to the disproportion between the number of our inhabitants, and the vast tracts still remaining to be settled, that we have not as yet, entered upon scarcely any other manufactures, than such as are indis­pensably necessary for our home convenience." This same cause has operated ever since, in the same way, though not, of late, in the same degree.

Great improvements in agriculture can not be expected (unless they are made by a few individuals who have a particular genius for that [Page 436] business) so long as lands are plenty and cheap; and improvements in manufactures never precede, but invariably follow improvements in agriculture. These observations apply more particularly to the coun­try. The city of New York, contains a great number of people, who are employed in various kinds of manufactures. Among many other articles manufactured in this city are wheel carriages of all kinds, loaf sugar, bread, beer, shoes and boots, saddlery, cabinet work, cutlery, hats, wool cards, clocks, watches, potters ware, umbrellas, all kinds of mathematical and musical instruments, ships and every things necessary for their equipment. Glass works, and several iron works, have been established in different parts of the country, but they never till lately have been very productive, owing solely to the want of workmen, and the high price of labour; its necessary consequence. The internal re­sources and advantages for these manufactories, such as ore, wood, wa­ter, hearth stone, proper situations for bloomeries, forges and all kinds of water works, are immense. There are several paper mills in the state, which are worked to advantage. The manufacture of maple sugar, within a few years past, has become an object of great importance. As many as 300 chests of 400lb. each, were made in the thinly inhabited county of Otsego, in the year 1791; besides large quan­tities, sufficient for home consumption, in other newly settled parts of the state.

TRADE.] The situation of New York, with respect to foreign markets, has decidedly the preference to any of the states. It has at all seasons of the year, a short and easy access to the ocean. We have already mentioned that it commands the trade of a great propor­tion of the best settled, and best cultivated parts of the United States. New York has not been unmindful of her superior local advantages, but has availed herself of them to their full extent.

Their exports to the West Indies are, biscuit, peas, Indian corn, apples, onions, boards, staves, horses, sheep, butter, cheese, pickled oysters, beef and pork. But wheat is the staple commodity of the state, of which no less than 677,700 bushels were exported in the year 1775, besides 2,555 tons of bread, and 2,828 tons of flour. Inspect­ors of flour are appointed to prevent impositions, and to see that none is exported but that which is deemed by them merchantable. West India goods are received in return for these articles. Besides the above mentioned articles, are exported flaxseed, cotton wool, sarsaparilla, coffee, indigo, rice, pig iron, bar iron, pot ash, pearl ash, furs, deer skins, log wood, fustic, mahogany, bees wax, oil, Madeira wine, rum, tar, pitch, turpentine, whale finds, fish, sugars, molasses, salt, tobacco, lard, &c. but most of these articles are imported for re-exportation. The trade of this state has greatly increased since the revolution, and the balance is almost constantly in its favour. The exports to foreign parts, for the year ending Sept. 30th 1791, consisting principally of the articles above enumerated, amounted to 2,516,197 dollars. This state owns 46,626 tons of shipping, besides which the finds employ­ment for about 40,000 tons of foreign vessels.

MEDICINAL SPRINGS.] The most noted springs in this state are snore of Saratoga. They are eight or nine in number, situated in the margin of a marsh, formed by a branch of Kayadarossora Creek, about twelve miles west from the confluence of Fish Creek, and Hud­son's river. They are surrounded by a rock of a peculiar kind, [Page 437] formed by petrefactions. One of them, however, more par­ticularly attracts the attention; it rises above the surface of the earth five or six feet, in the form of a pyramid. The aperture in the top, which discoveres the water, is perfectly cylindrical, of about nine inches diameter. In this the water is about twelve inches below the top, except at the time of its annual discharge, which is common­ly in the beginning of summer. At all times it appears to be in as great agitation as if boiling in a pot, although it is extremely cold. The same appearances obtain in the other springs, except that the sur­rounding rocks are of different figures, and the water flows regularly from them.

By observation and experiment, the principal impregnation of the water is found to be a fossile acid, which is predominant in the taste. It is also strongly impregnated with a saline substance, which is very discernible in the taste of the water, and in the taste and smell of the petrified matter about it. From the corrosive and dissolving nature of the acid, the water acquires a chalybeate property, and receives into its composition a portion of calcareous earth, which, when separated, resembles an impure magnesia. As the different springs have no es­sential variance in the nature of their waters, but the proportions of the chalybeate impregnation, it is rendered probable that they are de­rived from one common source, but flow it, separate channels, where they have connection with metalic bodies, in greater or less propor­tions. The stomachs of some females however, are so delicate, as to perceive a difference in the effect and operation of the different springs.

The prodigious quantity of air contained in this water, makes a­nother distinguishing property of it. This air, striving for enlarge­ment, produces the fermentation and violent action of the water be­fore described. After the water has stood a small time in an open vessel (no tight one will contain it) the air escapes, the water becomes vapid, and looses all that life and pungency which distinguish it when first taken from the pool. The particles of dissolved earth are depo­sited as the water flows off, which, with the combination of the salts and fixt air, concrete and form the rocks about the springs.

As to the quality of these medicinal springs, to most people who drink the waters, they are at first very disagreeable, having a strong, brackish, briny taste; but use in a great measure takes off the nause­ousness, and renders them palatable, and to many, very grateful. Up­on a sew they operate as an emetic: upon most as cathartic and diuretic. They may be taken in very large quantities without sensi­ble injury, or disagreeable operation.

The following curious experiments made on these waters, are extract­ed from Dr. Mitchell's Journal.

"A young turkey held a few inches above the water in the crater of the lower spring, was thrown into convulsions in less than half a mi­nute, and gasping, shewed signs of approaching death; but on remov­al from that place, and exposure to the fresh air, revived and became lively. On immersion again for a minute in the gas, the bird was taken out languid and motionless.

A small dog put into the same cavity, and made to breathe the con­tained air, was, in less than one minute, thrown into convulsive mo­tions—made to pant for breath, and safely to loss entirely the power [Page 438] to cry or move; when taken out, he was too weak to stand, but soon, in the common air, acquired strength enough to rise and stagger away.

A trout recently caught, and briskly swimming in a pail of brook water, was carefully put into a vessel just filled from the spring; the fish was instantly agitated with violent convulsions, gradually loft the capacity to move and poise itself, grew stupid and insensible, and in a few minutes was dead.

A candle repeatedly lighted and let down near the surface of the water, was suddenly extinguished, and not a vestige of light or fire remained on the wick.

A bottle filled with the water and shaken, emits suddenly a large quantity of aerial matter, that either forces out the cork, or makes a way beside or through it, or bursts the vessel.

A quantity of wheaten flour, moistened with this water and kneaded into dough, when made into cakes and put into a baking pan, rose, during the application of heat, into light and soungy bread, without the aid of yeast or leaven.

From which it appears that the air extricated from the water is pre­cisely similar to that produced by ordinary fermentation.

Some lime water, made of stalactites brought from the subterranean cave at Rhinebec, became immediately turbid on mixture with the spring water, but when the water had been lately drawn, the precipi­tate was quickly re-dissolved.

Some of the rock surrounding the spring, on being put into the fire, calcined to quick lime, and slacked very well.

When the aerial matter has evaporated, the water loses it transpar­ency and lets fall a calcarious sediment.

Whence it is true, that the gas is aerial acid, that the rock is lime­stone, and that by [...] of the former the water becomes capable of dissolving and conveying the latter.

Great numbers of people, under a variety of maladies, resort to these springs, and many find relief, and a considerable number a complete cure, particularly in bilious disorders, salt rheum, and relaxations. But as the waters are unfriendly and even fatal in some disorders, they ought to be used under the direction of a physician thoroughly ac­quainted with the qualities of the waters, and the diseases of the pa­tients. Ignorant of the suitableness of the waters to their complaints, many have imprudently thrown away their lives in the use of them.

New Lebanon springs are next in celebrity to those of Saratoga. New Lebanon, is a pleasant village, situated partly in a vale, and part­ly on the declivity of hills. The pool is situated on a commanding eminence, overlooking the valley, and surrounded with a few houses which afford but indifferent accommodations for the valetudinarians who resort here in search of health. The waters have an agreeable temperature, and are not unpleasant to the taste. From the experi­ments of Dr. Mitchill, it appears that the water contains no iron, no lime, no neutral salt, no fixed air no other acid—that soap, unites ve­ry well with the water, and makes a good lather, and is excellent for bleaching cloths—that the spring is a Tharmoe, and has a plenty of lime-stone in its neighbourhood. Its warmth is so considerable that during the coolness of the morning, even in August, copious vapours are emitted by the pool and the stream which issues from it, for a considerable distance. But the evaporated matter has no peculiar o­dour. [Page 439] From all which particulars, taken together, this theory ration­ally results—A quantity of iron and brimstone, somewhere within the mountain, are, by reason of their chemical affinity, in the act of com­bining into martial pyrites. During their action upon each other, heat is produced, and pure air absorbed. The water running in the neigh­bourhood of this bed of pyrites, borrows some of its heat, and receives also that part of the atmospheric fluid which remains after the con­sumption of the pure air, to wit, soul or azotic gas. But as the heat is excited in the bowels of a calcarious mountain, it happens that by the combination of the lime stone with a very small portion of the sulphur, a calcarious hepar is formed, which flying off in the form of hepatic gas, gives an exceedingly flight tincture to the water of the pool. These waters are used with success it is said, in scorbutic and rheumatic dis­eases, salt rheums, &c. but are pernicious to consumptive persons.

In the new town of Renssalaer, nearly opposite the city of Albany, a medicinal spring has lately been discovered, combining most of the valuable properties of the celebrated waters of Saratoga. Should further experiments confirm the favourable opinion already entertained of this spring, it will prove a fortunate discovery for the city of Albany and for the country adjoining, as well as for the inva­lids who annually resort to Saratoga, under many inconveniences and at a great expense.

The salt springs we have already mentioned. The weight of a bushel of the salt made of these waters is 56lb. and is equal in good­ness to that imported from Turks Island.

MINERALS AND FOSSILS.] This state embosoms vast quantities of iron ore. Naturalists have observed that ore, in swamps and pon­dy ground, vegetates and increases. There is a silver mine at Phil­lipsburg, which produces virgin silver. Lead is found in Herkemer country, and sulphur in Montgomery. Spar, zink or spelter, a semi metal, magnez, used in glazings, pyrites, of a golden hue, various kinds of copper ore, and lead and coal mines, are found in this state. Also petrified wood, plaster of Paris, ising glass in sheets, tales and crystals of various kinds and colors, stint, asbestos, and several other fossils. A small black stone has also been found, which vitrifies with a small heat, and it is said makes excellent glass.

LITERARY AND HUMANE SOCIETIES.] There are very few soci­eties for improvement in knowledge or humanity in this state; and these few are in the city of New York. The first is 'The society for promoting useful knowledge.' This society in upon an establish­ment similar to other philosophical societies in Europe and America, but is not incorporated. The members meet once a month. Second­ly. 'The society for the manumission of slaves and protecting such of them as have been or may be liberated.' This society meets once a quarter. Both these societies consist of gentlemen of the first char­acter in the city, and of some in other parts of the state. Besides these there is a marine society, a society for the relief of poor debtors confined in goal—A Manufacturing society, an Agricultural society lately established, of which the members of the legislature, are, ex offi­ [...]s members, and a Medical society.

LITERATURE, COLLEGES, ACADEMIES, &c.] Until the year 1754, there was no college in the province of New York. The state of literature, at that time, I shall give in the words of their historian.

[Page 440] "Our schools are in the lowest order; the instructors want instruc­tion, and through a long and shameful neglect of all the arts and sci­ences, our common speech is extremely corrupt, and the evidences of a bad taste, both as to thought and language, are visible in all our pro­ceedings, public and private." This may have been a just representa­tion at the time when it was written; but much attention has since been paid to education. There are eight incorporated academies in different parts of the state; but many parts of the country are yet ei­ther unfurnished with schools, or the schools which they have are kept by low, ignorant men, which are worse than none; for children had better remain in ignorance than be illy taught. We are happy to add that the legislature have lately patronized collegiate and academic ed­ucation, by granting a large gratuity to the college and academies in this state, which, in addition to their former funds, renders their en­dowments handsome, and adequate to their expenditures.

Kings college, in the city of New York, was principally founded by the voluntary contributions of the inhabitants of the province, as­sisted by the general assembly, and the corporation of Trinity church; in the year 1754, a royal charter (and grant of money) being then ob­tained, incorporating a number of gentlemen therein mentioned, by the name of "The governors of the college of the province of New York, in the city of New York, in America;" and granting to them and their successors forever, amongst various other right and privi­leges, the power of conferring all such degrees, as are usually confer­red by either of the English universities.

By the charter it was provided that the president shall always be a member of the church of England, and that a form of prayer collected from the liturgy of that church, with a particular prayer for the college, shall be daily used, morning and evening, in the college chapel; at the same time, no test of their religious persuasion was required from any of the fellows, professors or tutors; and the advantages of education were equally extended to students of all denominations.

The building (which is only one third of the intended structure) consists of an elegant stone edifice, three complete stones high, with four stair cases, twelve apartments in each, a chapel, hall, library, museum, anatomical theatre, and a school for experimenal philoso­phy.

The college is situated on a dry gravelly soil, about 150 yards from the bank of Hudson's river, which it overlooks; commanding a most extensive and beautiful prospect.

Since the revolution, the legislature passed an act constituting twen­ty-one gentlemen (of whom the governour and lieutenant governour, for the time being, are members ex off [...]ciis) a body corporate and poli­tic, by the name and stile of 'The regents of the university of the state of New York.' They are entrusted with the care of literature in general in the state, and have power to grant charters of incorpo­ration for erecting colleges and academies throughout the state—are to visit these institutions as often as they shall think proper, and report their state to the legislature once a year.

King's college, which we have already described, is now called COLUMBIA COLLEGE. This college, by an act of the legislature passed in the spring of 1787, was put under the care of 24 gentlemen, who are a body corporate, by the name and style of 'The Trustees of [Page 441] Columbia College, in the city of New York.' This body posses all the powers vested in the governors of Kings college, before the revo­lution, or in the regents of the university, since the revolution, so far as their power respected this institution. No regent can be a trustee of any particular college or academy in the state. They regents of the university have power to confer the higher degrees, and them only.

The college edifice has received no additions since the peace. The funds, exclusive of the liberal grant of the legislature, amount to be­tween twelve and thirteen thousand pounds currency, the income of which is sufficient of present exigencies.

This college is now in a thriving state, and has about 100 students is the four classes, besides medical students. The officers of instruction and immediate government, are a president, professor of mathematics and natural philosophy, a professor of logic and geography, and a pro­fessor of languages. A complete medical school has been lately annexed to the college, and able professors appointed by the trustees in every branch of that important science, who regularly teach their respective branches, with reputation. The number of medical students is about 50, and increasing; the library and museum were destroyed during the war. The philosophical apparatus is new and complete.

Of the eight incorporated academies, one is at Flatbush, in Kings county, on Long Island, four miles from Brooklyn-ferry. It is sit­uated in a pleasant, healthy village. The building is large, handsome and convenient, and is called Erasmus hall. The academy is flourish­ing, under the care of a principal and other subordinate instructors.

There is another at East Hampton, on the east and of Long Island; by the name of CLINTON ACADEMY. The other are in different parts of the state. Besides these there are schools established and maintained by the voluntary contributions of the parents. A spirit for literary improvement, is evidently diffusing its influence through­out the state.

RELIGION.] The constitution of this state provides for 'the free exercise and enjoyment of religious profession and worship, without discrimination or preference, within the state, for all mankind. Provided that the liberty of conscience hereby granted, shall not be so construed as to excuse acts of licentiousness, or justify practises in­consistent with the peace and safety of the state.'

The various religious denominations in this state are the following, English Presbyterians, Dutch reformed, Baptists, Episcopalians, Friends or Quakers, German Lutherans, Moravians, Methodists, Roman Catholics, Jews, Shakers, and a few of the followers of Ja­mima Wilkinson. The shakers are principally settled at New Leb­anon, and the followers of Jemima Wilkinson at Geneva, about twelve miles S. W. of the Cayoga lake. For the peculiar sentiments of these various religious sects see the general account of the United States, under the article Religion.

In April 1784, the legislature of this state passed and act enabling all religious denominations to appoint trustees, [...]ot less than three or more than nine, who shall be a body corporate, for the purpose of taking care of the temporalities of their respective congregations, and for the other purposes therein mentioned.

The ministers of every denomination in the state, are supported by [Page 442] the voluntary contributions of the people, raised, generally, by sub­scription, or by a tax upon the pews; except the Duch churches in New York, Skenectady and Kingston, which have, except the two last, large estates confirmed by a charter. The Episcopal church also in New York possesses a very large estate in the and near the city.

CONSTITUTION AND COURTS OF JUSTICE.] The present con­stitution of the state was established by convention authorised for the purpose, April 20, 1777.

The supreme legislative power of the state are vested in two branch­es, a Senate and Assembly. The members of the senate are elected by the freeholders of the state, who posses freehold estates to the value of 100l. clear of debts. For the purpose of electing senators, the state is divided into four great districts, each of which chooses a certain number, viz.

Southern District, including the counties of New York, Nine Senators.
Suffolk,
West Chester,
Kings,
Queens,
Richmond,
Middle District. Dutches, Six
Ulster,
Orange,
Western District Albany, Six,
Mont­gomery,
Eastern District Washingtion, Three.
Cumberland,
Gloucester,

The senators are divided by lot into four classes, six in each class, and numbered, first, second, third, and fourth. The seats of the first class are vacated at the expiration of one year—the second, at the expiration of the next, &c. and their place filled by new elections. Thus a small change is made in the senate every year; but three fourths of the members remaining, preserve a knowledge of the busi­ness of a former session. A majority of the senate is necessary to do business, and each branch of the legislature has a negative upon the other.

The legislature can at any time alter this division of the state for the choice of senators; and an increase of electors in any district, to the amount of one twenty fourth of the electors in the whole state, entitles the district to another senator. But the number of senators can never exceed one hundred.

The assembly of the state is composed of representatives from the several counties, chosen annually in May in the following propor­tion▪

For the city and county of New York, nine.

For the city and county of Albany, seven.

For Dutchess, 7
west Chester, 6
Ulster, 6
Suffolk, 5
Queens, 4
Orange, 4
Kings, 2
For Richmond, 2
Montgomery, 6
Washington, and Clinton, 4
Columbia, 3
Cumberland, 3
Gloucester, 2

By the constitution, however, it is ordered, that at the end of sev­en years after the termination of the late war, a census of the electors [Page 443] and inhabitants shall be taken, and the representation apportioned according to the number of electors in each county.

Every male inhabitant of full age, who has resided in the state six months preceding the day of election, and possessing a freehold to the value of twenty pounds, in the country where he is to give his vote; or has rented a tenement therein of the yearly value of forty shillings, and has been rated and actually paid taxes, is entitled to vote for representatives in assembly. The freedom of the cities of New York, and Albany, likewise entitles a person to the privilege of voting for members of assembly in the city or county where he resides. The me­thod of voting is now by ballot, but subject to alteration by the legis­lature. The house of assembly, a majority of which is necessary to proceed to business, chooses its own speaker, and is a judge of its own privileges.

In all debates on great questions, the house resolves itself into a committee of the whole—the speaker leaves the chair, and a chairman is appointed for the occasion. After the business is completed, the committee rises—the speaker takes the chair—and the chairman re­ports to the house the proceedings of the committee. How far this imitation of the British house of commons is supported by good reasons it may not be easy to determine. Certain it is, that in other legislatures, the proceedings are equally well conducted without this formality.

The number of representatives is limited to three hundred. The present number is sixty five.

The supreme executive power of the state is vested in a governor, (in whose absence a deputy governor is appointed to serve) chosen once in three years by the freemen of the state; the lieutenant governor is, by his office, president of the senate; and, upon and equal division of voices, has a casting vote: but has no voice on other occasions. The governor has not a seat in the legislature; but as a member of the council of revision and council of appointment, he has a vast influ­ence in the state.

The council of revision is composed of the chancellor, the judges of the supreme court, or any of them, and the governor. This council is empowered to revise all bills which have passed the two houses of the legislature, and if it shall appear to the council that such bills ought not to pass into laws, they shall be returned to the house in which they originated, with the objections of the council, in writing. The house shall then proceed to reconsider the bills, with the objections, and if not withstanding, two thirds of the house shall agree to the bills, they shall be sent to the other house▪ where they shall be reconsidered and the assent of two thirds of the members pass them into laws. But if a bill is not returned in ten days, it becomes a law of course.

The subordinate officers of the state are appointed by the council of appointment, which is composed of one senator from each district, to be chosen annually by the legislature, with the governor, or in his absence, the lieutenant governor or the president of the senate, who has a calling vote only.

All military officers hold their commissions during pleasure. The chan­cellor, the judges of the supreme court, and the first judge of each county court, hold their offices during good behaviour. These officers can hold no other office at the same time▪ except that of delegate to con­gress.

[Page 444] Sheriffs and coroners are appoined annually, and can serve but four years successively.

A court of errors and impeachment is instituted, composed of the president of the senate, the senate, chancellor and judges of the supreme court, or the major part of them, under the regulation of the legislature. The power of impeachment if vested in the house of representatives, and the members on trial must be sworn.

Besides the court of errors and impeachment, there is first, a Court of Chancery, consisting of a chancellor, appointed by the council of ap­pointment, who holds his office during good behaviour, or until [...]e arive at the age of sixty years. Secondly, a Supreme Court, the judges of which are appointed in the same manner and for the same time as the chancellor. This is a circuit court. Thirdly, County Courts, held in each county, the judges of which are appointed in the manner above men­tioned, and the first judge holds his office during good behaviour, or until he arrive at at the age of 60 years. Besides these, there are the justices' courts, court of probates, court of admiralty, court of exche­quer, and court of oyer and ter [...]niner and general goal delivery, and court of quarter sessions.

This practice in the supreme court, to which an appeal lies from the courts below, is in imitation of the courts of common pleas and king's bench in England.

All free governments abound with lawyers. Where men have the privilege of thinking and acting for themselves, they will involve themselves in debt and quarrel with their neighbours. In proportion to the debts and disputes of the people, lawyers will mul­tiply. Of these America furnishes a plentiful growth, and New York has its share, as it contains not less than 120 licensed attorneys. In this state, the practice of law is conformed to the English mode, and is perhaps better regulated than in the other states. The several degrees in the posession—the number of critical examinations that candidates are obliged to pass through before they can be admitted as counsellors in the higher courts; together with the time of study re­quired by the rules of admission, render and access to the first honors of the bar so difficult as to preclude ignorant pretenders to the im­portant science of law. New York can boast of many eminent char­acters in all the learned professions, and has furnished America with some of her most able legislators. It is, however, to be feared that a too rigid adherence to the forms of legal process in England, has some­times perplexed the road to justice, and prevented valuable improve­ments in the practice, not only of this but of most of the other States.

MILITARY STRENGTH.] By official returns of the militia of this State, made to the governor by the adjutant general, it appears that the total number in 1789, was 42,679; 1790—44,259; 1791—50,399. Besides these there are as many as 5000 or 6000 of the militia in the new settlements, who are not yet organized.

FORTS, &c.] These are principally in ruins. The demolition of the fort in the city of New York has been mentioned. Remains of the fortifications on Long Island, York Island, White Plains, West Point and other places, are still visible. Fort Stanwix, built by the British in 1758, at the expense, it is said of 60,000l. is 107 miles west­ward of Skenectaday, on an artificial eminence bordering on the M [...] ­hawk river, and in travelling this distance, you pass Fort Hunter, Fort Anthony, Fort Plain, Fort Herkeme [...] and Fort Schuyler. As [...] [Page 445] proceed westward of Fort Stanwix, you pass Fort Bull, and Fort Breweton, at the west end of Oneida Lake. Fort George is at the south end of Lake George. At the point where Lake George com­municates with Lake Champlain, is the famous post of Ticonderoga, by which word the Canadians understand noisy. The works, at this place, are in such a state of delapidation, that a stranger can scarcely from an idea of their construction. They are, however, situated on such high ground as to command the communication between the lakes George and Champlain. Opposite, on the south side of the water that empties out of Lake George, is mountain, to appearance inaccessable, called Mount Defiance, where General Burgoyne in the late war, with a boldness, secrecy and dispatch almost unparalleled, conveyed a number if cannon, stores and troops. The cannon were raised by large brass t [...]cles from tree to tree, and from rock to rock, over dens of rattle snakes, to the summit, which entirely commands the works of Ticonderoga. This circumstance, must ever be consi­dered as a full justification of General Sinclair's sudden retreat with the American army, and the observation which he made, on his trial, in his own defence, that, "though he had lost a post he had saved a States," was afterwards verified.

Crown Point is 15 miles north of Ticonderoga on Lake Cham­plain. The fort at this place, in which a British garrison was always [...]pt, from the reduction of Canada, till the American Revolution, was the most regular, and the most expensive of any ever constructed, and supported by the British government in N. America. The walls a [...] of wood and earth, about 16 feet high, and 20 feet thick, and nearly 150 yards square; surrounded by a deep and broad ditch, cut though a solid rock. It stands on a rising ground perhaps 200 yards from the Lake, with which there was a covered way, by which the garrison could be supplied with water in time of a siege. The only gate op [...] on the north towards the lake, where there was a draw bridge. On the right and left, as you enter the fort, are a row of stone bar­ [...] not inelegantly built, sufficient to contain 1500 or 2000 troops; the [...]de is between them, and is a flat smooth rock. There were several [...] works, which are now in ruins, as is the principal fort, except the walls, and the walls of the barracks, which still remain.

BANKS.] There are two or three incorporated Banks in the city of New York, besides a branch of the national bank, and one has lately [...] established in the city of Albany.

MADE OF RAISING INTERNAL TAXES.] The legislature six upon the sum to be raised, and apportion it among the several counties. This being done, the supervisors, one from each township in the re­spective counties, assemble and assign to each township its proportion of the quota of the county. The supervisor and assessors in each [...]ship, then apportion their quota among the individuals of the [...]ship, according to the value of their real and personal estates. The tax, thus laid, is collected by the collector of the township, and lodged with the county treasurer, who transmits it to the treasurer of the State.

FINANCES.] A variety of circumstances have conspired to fill the [...] of this state; and wholly to supersede the necessity, of taxa­tion for several years past; first, confiscations and economical man­agement of that property— Second, sales of unappropriated lands; and [Page 446] third, a duty on imports previous to the establishment of the Federal Government.—The two former were sold for continental certificates, at a time when the credit of the state was perhaps above the p [...]r of the Union, which was the cause of getting a large sum of the pub­lic debt into the treasury of the state at a depreciated value. These certificates, since the funding system came into operation, added to the assumed state debt, a vast quantity of which was also in the trea­sury, forms an enormous mass of property, yielding and annuity of up­wards of 100,000 dollars; and when the deferred debt shall be­come a 6 per cent. stock this annuity will be increased to upwards of 200,000 dollars.

The ability of the state, therefore, is abundantly competent to aid pub­lic institutions of every kind, to make roads, erect bridges, open canals, and to push every kind of improvement to the most desirable length. It could be wished, that those citizens who were exiled during the war, and whose property was exposed during its continuance to wanton depredations, could be thought of by a legislature possessing so fully the means of discriminating this unhappy class of sufferers, and mak­ing them compensation for their voluntary sacrifices.

CURIOSITIES.] In the county of Montgomery is a small, rapid stream, emptying into Scroon Lake, west of Lake George; it runs under a hill, the base of which is 60 or 70 yards diameter, forming a most curious and beautiful arch in the rock, as white as snow. The fury of the water and the roughness of the bottom, added to the ter­ritic noise within, has hitherto prevented any person from passing through the chasm.

In the township of Willsborough in Clinton county, is a curious Split Rock. A point of a mountain, which projected about 50 yards into Lake Champlain, appears to have been broken by some violent shock of nature. It is removed from the main rock or mountain a­bout 20 feet, and the opposite sides so exactly suit each other, that one needs no other proof of their having been once united. The point broken off contains about half an acre, and is covered with wood. The height of the rock▪ on each side the fissure is about 12 feet. Round this point is a spacious bay, sheltered from the southwest and northwest winds by the surrounding hills and woods. On the west side are four of five finely cultivated farms, which altogether, at certain seasons, and in certain situations, forms one of the most beautiful land capes imaginable. "Sailing under this coast for several miles be­fore you come to Split Rock, the mountains rude and barren, see [...] hang over the passenger and threaten destruction.—A water, bound [...] to the sight, lies before him—man feels his own littleness, and insi [...] ­ [...]y itself pays an unwilling homage to the creator.—Instantly and un­expectedly the scene changes, and peeping with greedy eye, through the fissure, nature presents to the view a silver bason, a verdant lawn—a humble cottage—a golden harvest—a majestic forest—a lofty moun­tain, an azure sky, rising one above another "in just gradation to the amazing whole." *

"A few months ago a very extraordinary cavern, at a place, called by the Indians, Sepascot, on the estate of the Miss Rutsens, at Ryha­beck, in Dutchess county, was discovered. A lad, by chance, passing [Page 447] [...] its entrance, which lay between two huge rocks on the declivity of a sheep hill, on prying into the gloomy recess, saw the top of a lad­der, by which he descended about ten feet, and found himself in a [...]raneous apartment, more capacious than he then chose to invest­ [...].—He found, however, that it had been the abode of persons, [...] probably during the war not daring to be seen openly, had taken [...] there, as bits of cloth, and pieces of leather were scattered a­bout its floor. He then left the place, and little more was thought [...] [...], until three weeks ago, the writer of this account made one of a large party who went from the seat of a gentleman in the neighbourhood, on purpose to examine it. We found its entrance much [...] than we expected, and with some difficulty gained the ladder, by means of which the remaining descent was made tolerably easy. Two young ladies were with us, who had heroism enough to make the [...] tour with us. We had six candles to scrutinize the recesses of the apartment, where, perhaps, light, for upwards of five thousand years before, had never gleamed. We found the cave divided by a nar­row passage into two divisions; the first being about seventeen feet in length and solow that a child of eight years old could but just walk up­right in it—the breadth is about eight or ten feet. The second between twelve and fourteen feet in length, but much higher and broader than the first. In this last room we found that three bats had taken up their winter quarters, and hung suspended from the roof, as it were, by the very tips of their wings. But what makes the cave peculiar­ly worthy of notice is the petrifying quality of the water, that by a [...] oozing, continually drops from every part of the ceiling, the [...] of which exactly resembles a mill gutter in a frosty morning. with a thousand isicles impending. These concretions are formed by the water, and probably are constantly increasing. They have in almost every respect the appearance of isicles, and may be broken off by the [...] if not more than two inches in circumference. They appear of [...]stence much like indurated lime, almost transparent, and are all [...] quite through the whole length, with a hole of the size of [...] his tobacco pipe, through which aperture the water unremit­ [...] drops, although very slow. When a person is in the remotest [...] and the lights are removed into the first, those pendant drops of [...] make an appearance more splendid than can be well imagined. [...] of those stony isicles have at length reached the bottom of the [...] now form pillars, some of more than two feet in girth, of the appearance if marble and almost as hard. They put one in mind of [...] Jachin and Boaz—imagination very easily giving them [...] and chapiters and even wreathen work.

But what we most admired, was the skeleton of a large snake, turned in [...] stone by the petrifying quality of the water before mentioned. It was with some difficulty torn up with an axe from the rock it lay up­ [...] of which adhered to it) and is now in the possession of the re­ [...].

We found the in most recesses of this cavern very warm, and experienc­ed the want of free air, by a difficult respiration, although the candles [...] very clear. *"

INDIANS.] The body of the Six Nations, inhabit in the western parts of this state. The principal part of the Mohawk tribe reside [Page 448] on Grand river, in Upper Canada; and there are two villages of Sen­ecas on the Allegany river, near the north line of Pennsylvania, and a few Delawares and Skawaghkees, on Buffaloe Creek. Including these, and the Stockbridge and Mohegan Indians, who have migrated and settled in the vicinity of Oneida, there are, in the Six Nations, ac­cording to an accurate estimate lately made by the Rev. Mr. Kirkland, missionary among them, 6330 souls. He adds, that among these there is comparatively but very few children.

The following extract of a letter from Mr. Kirkland to the Author, will give the reader an idea of the characters, which according to In­dian tradition, are excluded from the happy country. "The region of pure spirits, the Five Nations call Eskanane. The only characters which, according to their traditions, cannot be admitted to participate of the pleasures and delights of this happy country, are reduced to three, viz. suicides—the disobedient to the counsels of the chiefs, and such as put away their wives on account of pregnancy. According to their tradition there is a gloomy, fathomless gulph, near the borders of the delightful mansions of Eskanane, over which all good and brave spirits pass with safety, under the conduct of a faithful and skil­ful guide, appointed for that purpose; but when a suicide, or any of the above mentioned characters, approaches this gulph, the conductor, who possesses a most penetrating eye, instantly discovers their spiritual features and character, and denies them his aid, assigning his reasons. They will however attempt to cross upon a small pole, which, before they reach the middle, trembles and shakes, till presently down they fall with horrid shrieks. In this dark and dreary gulph, they suppose resides a great dog, some say a dragon, infected with the itch, which makes him perpetually restless and spiteful. The guilty inhabitants of this miserable region, all catch this disease of the great dog, and grope and roam from side to side of their gloomy mansion in perpetu­al torments. Sometimes they approach to near the happy fields of Eskanane, that they can hear the songs and dances of their former companions. This only serves to increase their torments, as they can discern no light, nor discover any passage by which they can gain ac­cess to them. They suppose idiots and dogs go into the same gulph, but have a more comfortable apartment, where they enjoy some little light." Mr. Kirkland adds, that several other nations of Indians with whom he has conversed on the subject, have nearly the same traditionary notions of a future state. They almost universally agree in this, that the departed spirit is ten days in its passage to their happy clysium, after it leaves the body; some of them suppose its course a towards the south; others that it ascends from some lofty main­tain.

The Oncidas inhabit on Oneida Creek, twenty-one miles west of Fort Stanwix.

The Tuscaroras migrated from North Carolina and the frontiers of Virginia, and were adopted by the Oneidas, with whom they have ev­er since lived. They were originally of the same nation.

The Senecas inhabit on the Chenesee river, at the Chenesee castle. They have two towns of sixty or seventy souls each, on French Creek, in Penn­sylvania: and another town on Buffaloe Creek, attached to the British; two small towns on Allegany river, attached to the Americans. O­beil or Coraplanter, one of the Seneca chiefs, resided here.

[Page 449] The Mohawks were acknowledged by the other tribes, to use their own expression, to be 'the true old heads of the confederacy;' and were formerly a powerful tribe, inhabiting on the Mohawk river. As they were strongly attached to the Johnson family, on account of Sir William Johnson, they emigrated to Canada, with Sir John Johnson, about the year 1776. There is now only one family of them in the state, and they live about a mile from Fort Hunter. The father of this family was drowned in the winter of 1788.

All the confederated tribes, except the Oneidas and Tuscaroras, sided with the British in the late war, and fought against the Americans.

The Onond [...]as live near the Onondaga Lake, about twenty-five miles from the Oneida Lake. In the spring of 1779, a regiment of men were sent from Albany, by General J. Clinton, against the Onon­dagas. This regiments surprized their town— [...]ook thirty three prison­ers—killed twelve of fourteen, and returned without the loss of a man. A party of the Indians were at this time ravaging the American fron­tiers.

There are very few of the Delaware tribe in this state.

The five confederated Nations were settled along the banks of the su [...]quehanah, and in the adjacent country, until the year 1779, when General Sullivan, with an army of 4,000 men, drove them from their country to Niagara, but could not bring them to action. They wait­ed, but waited in vain, for the assistance of the elements, or as they expressed themselves, for the assistance of the Great Spirit. Had hea­vy rains fallen while General sullivan's army was advanced into their country, perhaps few of his soldiers would have escaped, and none of their baggage, ammunition or artillery. This expedition had a good effect. General Sullivan burnt several of their towns and destroyed their provisions. Since this irruption into their country, their former habitations have been mostly dele [...]ted, and many of the have gone to Canada.

On the 13th of November, 1787, John Livingston, Esq and four others, obtained of the Six Nations of Indians a lease for 999 years, on a yearly rent reserved of 2000 dollars, of all the country included in the following limits, viz. Beginning at a place commonly known by the name of Canada Creek, about seven miles west of Fort Stan­ [...], now Fort Shuyler, thence northeastwardly to the line of the pe [...]ince of Quebec; thence along the said line to the Pennsylvania [...]; thence east on the sand line or Pennsylvania line, to the line of property, so called by the state of New York; thence along the said [...] of property to Canada Creek aforesaid. And on the 8th Jan. 17 [...], the same persons obtained a lease, of the oneida Indians, for 999 years, on a sent reserved for the first year, of 1200 dollars, and encreasing it at the rate of 100 dollars a year, until it amount to 1500 dollars, of all the tract of land commonly called the Oneida country, except a reservation of several tracts specified in the lease. [...] these leases having been obtained without the consent of the le­gislature of the state, the senate and assembly, in their session. March [...] resolved, "That the said leases are purchases of lands, and there­fore that by the constitution of this state, the said leases are not bind­ing on the said Indians, and are not valid." Since this a treaty has been concluded with the said Indians—the bargain of the lea [...]ees an­nulled, and all the country purchased of the natives, except a reserva­tion [Page 450] to the Oneidas, Cayugas and Onondagas, defined by certain marks and boundaries.

ISLANDS.] There are three islands of note belonging to this state; viz. York Island, which has already been described, Long Island and Staten Island.

Long Island extends 140 miles, and terminates with Montauk point. It is not more than ten miles in breadth, on a medium, and is separat­ed from Connecticut by Long Island found. The island is divided into three counties; Kings, Queens and Suffolk.

Kings county lies at the west end of Long Island, opposite New York, and is not above ten miles long, and eight broad. The inhab­itants are principally Dutch, and live well. It contains a number of pleasant villages, of which Flatbush, Brooklyn, and Bedford, are the principal.

Queens county lies next to Kings as you proceed eastward. It is about thirty miles long and twelve broad. Jamaica, Newtown, Hampstead, in which is a handsome court house, and Oysterbay, are the principal villages in this county.

Suffolk county is about 100 miles long and ten broad, and compre­hends all the eastern part of the island, and several little islands ad­joining; viz. Shelter Island, Fishers Island, Plumb Island and the Isle of White. Its principal towns are Huntington, Southampton, Smith­town, Brook Haven, East Hampton, in which is the academy, South­hold and Bridge Hampton.

The south side of the island is flat land, of a light sandy soil, bor­dered on the sea coast with large tracts of salt meadow, extending from the west point of the island to Southampton. This soil, how­ever, is well calculated for raising grain, especially Indian corn. The north side of the island is hilly, and of a strong soil—adapted to the culture of grain, hay and fruit. A ridge of hills extends from Ja­maica to Southhold. Large herds of cattle feed upon Hamstead plain, and on the salt marshes upon the south side of the Island.

Hampstead plain, in Queens county, is a curiosity. It is sixteen miles in length, east and west, and seven or eight miles wide. The soil is black; and to appearance rich, and yet it was never known to have any natural growth, but a kind of wild grass, and a few shrubs. It is frequented by vast numbers of plover—Rye grows tolerably well on some parts of the plain. The most of it lies common for cattle, horses and sheep. As there is nothing to impede the prospect in the whole length of this plain, it has a curious but tiresome effect up­on the eye, not unlike that of the ocean.

East of this plain, on the middle of the island, is a barren health, overgrown with shrub oaks and pines, in which, it is supposed there are several thousand deer. It is frequented also by a great number of growse, a very delicious bird. Laws have been passed for the preser­vation of these birds and the deer.

It is remarkable that on Montauk point, at the east end of the island, there are no flies. Between this point and East Hampton is a beach, three quarters of a mile wide, in the center of which was found, about fifty years ago, under a sand hill which was blown up by the wind, the entire skeleton of a large whale, nearly half a mile from the wa­ter.

There are very few rivers upon the island. The largest is Peakonok, [Page 451] which rises about ten miles west of a place called River-head, where the court house stands, and runs easterly into a large bay dividing Southhold from Southampton. In this bay are Robin and Shelter Is­lands.

The south side of the island is indented with numerous streams, of various sizes, which fall into a large bay, two or three miles over, form­ed by a beach, about eighty rods wide, which appears like a border to the island, extending from the west end of it to Southampton. Through this beach, in various places, are inlets of such depth as to admit of vessels of sixty or seventy tons. This bay was formerly fresh water. Oysters, clams, and fish of various kinds, are caught with ease, and in great plenty in this bay, with seines, during the winter season. It is not uncommon to see forty or fifty vessels here loading with oys­ters at the same time. And what is almost incredible, though I was told of it by two gentlemen of truth, and who were well informed as to the matter, thirty waggon loads of bass have been caught in this bay at one draught.

Rockonkama pond, lies about the center of the island, between Smithtown and Islip, and is about a mile in circumference. This pond has been found by observation, to rise gradually for several years, un­til it had arrived to a certain height, and then to fall more rapidly to its lowest bed; and thus it is continually ebbing and flowing. The cause of this curious phenomenon has never been investigated. Two miles to the southward of this pond is a considerable stream, called Connecticut river, which empties into the bay.

There are two whale fisheries; one from Sagg harbour which pro­duces about 1000 barrels of oil annually. The other is much smaller, and is carried on by the inhabitants in the winter season, from the south side of the island. They commonly catch from three to seven whales in a season, which produce from twenty-five to forty barrels each of oil. This fishery was formerly a source of considerable wealth to the inhabitants, but through a scarcity of whales, it has greatly declined of late years.

There is a considerable trade carried on from Sagg harbour, whence is exported to the West Indies and other places, whale oil, pitch-pine boards, horses, cattle, flaxseed, beef, &c. The produce of the middle and western parts of the island, is carried to New York. The island contains 36,949 inhabitants.

Staten Island lies nine miles southwest of the city of New York, and forms Richmond county. It is about eighteen miles in length, and, at a medium, six or seven in breadth, and contains 3,835 inhabi­tants. On the south side is a considerable tract of level, good land; [...] the island in general is rough, and the hills high. Richmond is the only town of any note on the island, and that is a poor, inconsid­erable place. The inhabitants are principally descendants of the Dutch and French.

HISTORY.] See Smith's History of New York, published by [...]thew Carey—and Hazard's collection of state papers.

In 1787, the legislature of this state, ceded to the commonwealth of Massachusetts, all the lands, within their jurisdiction, west of a meri­dian that shall be drawn from a point in the north boundary line of Pennsylvania, eighty two miles west from the Delaware; (excepting one mile along the east side of Niagara river) and also ten [Page 452] townships between the Chenengo and Owegy rivers, reserving the jurisdiction to the state of New York. This cession was made to sa­tisfy a claim of Massachusetts founded upon their original charter.

A list of Governors from the year 1664 to the present time.
Names. Began to govern.
Nicolls 1664
Lovelace 1668
Andross 1674
Brockhust 1682
Dongan 1683
Slaughter 1690
Ingoldsby 1691
Fletcher 1692
Bellemont 1698
Nanfan 1699
Bellemont 1700
Depeyster 1700
Smith 1700
Nanfan 1701
Cornbury 1702
Lovelace 1708
Schuyler 1709
Ingoldsby 1709
Beekman 1710
Hunter 1710
Burnet 1720
Montgomerie 1728
Vandam 1731
Crosby 1732
Clarke 1735
Clinton 1743
Osborn 1753
De Lancey 1753
Sir Charles Hardy 1755
De Lancey 1757
Colden (President) 1760
Monckton 1761
Colden 1761
Monckton 1762
Colden 1763
Sir Henry Moore 1765
Colden 1769
Dunmore 1770
Tryon 1771
Clinton 1778

NEW JERSEY.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 160 Miles. between 39° and 41° 24′ North Latitude.
Breadth 52 Miles. The body of the state lies between them ridian of Philadelphia, and 1° East Longitude.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED east, by Hudson's river and the sea; south, by the sea; west, by Delaware bay and river, which divide it from the states of Delaware and Pennsylvania; north, by a line drawn from the mouth of Mahakkamak river, in lat­itude 41° 24′ to a point on Hudson's river in latitude 41°. Contain­ing about 8320 square miles, equal to 5,324,800 acres.

CIVIL DIVISIONS, POPULATION, &c.] New Jersey is divided into 13 counties, which are subdivided into 94 townships or precincts, as follows, [Page 453]

TABLE.
  Counties. Principal towns. Len. Bred. Total No. Inhabitants. No. Slav.
These 7 counties lie from [...] to N. on Delaware river. Cape-May▪ and Gloucester extend across to the sea. Cape May. None. 30 9 571 141
Cumberland. Bridgetown. 50 20 8,248 120
Salem. Salem.     10,437 172
Gloucester. Woodbury & Gloucester. 30 22 13,360 191
Burlington. Burlington & Bordentown. 60 30 18,095  
Hunterdon. Trenton. 37 12 20,253 1,301
Sussex. Newtown     19,500 439
These 4 counties [...]e from N. [...] S. on the Eastern side on the State. Bergen. Hackinsak.     12,601 2,301
Essex. Newark and Elizabethtown     17,785 1,171
Middleses. Amboy and pt. of Brunswick.     15,956 1,318
Monmouth. Freehold. 80 30 16,918 1,596
  Somerset. Boundbrook & pt. Brunswick.     12,296 1,810
  Morris. Morristown. 25 20 16,216 636
Total Thirteen       184,139 11,423

BAYS, PONDS, RIVERS AND CANALS.] New Jersey is washed, on the east and southeast, by Hudson's river and the ocean; and on the west by the river Delaware.

The most remarkable bays are, Arthur Kull, or Newark bay, formed by the union of Passaik and Hackinsak rivers. This bay opens to the right and left and embraces Staten Island. There is a long bay formed by a beach, four or five miles from the shore, extending along the coast northeast and southwest, from Manasquand river, in Monmouth county, almost to Cape May. Through this beach are a number of in­lets, by which the bay communicates with the ocean.

On the top of a mountain, in Morris county, is a lake or pond, three miles in length, and from a mile to a mile and an half in breadth, from which proceeds a continual stream. It is in some places deep. The water is of a sea green colour; but when taken up in a tumbler, is▪ like the water of the ocean, clear and of a crystaline colour.

The rivers in this state, though not large, are numerous. A trav­eller, in passing the common road from New York to Philadelphia, c [...]sses three considerable rivers, viz. the Hackinsak and Passaik, be­tween Bergen and Newark, and the Raritan by Brunswick. The Hackinsak rises in Bergen county, runs a southwardly course, and counties into Newark bay.—At the ferry, near its mouth, it is 460 yards wide, and is navigable fifteen miles.

Passaik is a very crooked river. It rises in a large swamp in Mor­ris county. Its general course is from W. N. W. to E. S. E. until it mingles with the Hackinsak at the head of Newark bay. It is navi­gable about ten miles, and is 230 yards wide at the ferry. The catar­act (or Great Falls) in this river, is one of the greatest natural curiosi­ties in the state. The river is about forty yards wide, and moves in [Page 454] a slow gentle current, until coming within a short distance of a deep, cleft in a rock, which crosses the channel, it descends and falls above seventy feet perpendicularly, in one entire sheet. One end of the cleft, which was evidently made by some violent convulsion in nature, is closed; at the other, the water rushes out with incredible swiftness, forming an acute angle with its former direction, and is received in­to a large bason, whence it takes a winding course through the rocks, and spreads into a broad smooth stream. The cleft is from four to twelve feet broad. The falling of the water occasions a cloud of va­pour to arise, which by floating amidst the sun beams, presents to the view rainbows, that add beauty to the tremendous scene. The new manufacturing town of Paterson is erected upon the Great Falls in this river. The western bank of the river, between Newark and the falls, affords one of the pleasantest roads for a party of pleasure in New Jersey. The bank being high, gives the traveller an elevated and ex­tensive view of the opposite shore, which is low and fertile, forming a landscape picturesque and beautiful. Many handsome country seats adorn the sides of this river; and there are elegant situations for more: Gentlemen of fortune might here display their taste to advantage. The fish of various kinds with which this river abounds, while they would furnish the table with an agreeable repast, would afford the sportsman an innocent and manly amusement.

Raritan river is formed by two considerable streams called the north and south branches; one of which has its source in Morris, the other in Hunterdon county. It passes by Brunswick and Amboy, and mingles with the waters of the Arthur Kull Sound, and helps to form the fine harbour of Amboy. It is a mile wide at its mouth, 250 yards at Brunswick, and is navigable about sixteen miles. It is supposed that this river is capable of a very steady lock naviga­tion, as high as the junction of the North and South branches; and thence up the south branch to Grandin's Bridge in Kingwood. Thence to Delaware river is 10 or 12 miles. It is supposed a portage will be here established by a turnpike road: Or the waters of the Raritan, may be united with those of the Delaware, by a canal from the south branch of the Raritan to Musconetcony river, which empties into the Delaware—or from Capoolong creek, a water of the Raritan, emptying at Grandin's Bridge, and Necessackaway, a water of the Dela­ware. It is supposed also that an inland navigation from Philadel­phia to New York, may be effected by proceeding up the Asanpink, (a water of the Delaware, emptying at Trenton) towards Princeton; and from thence by a canal to the Millstone, a water of the river to New Brunswick.

At Raritan hills, through which this river passes, is a small cas­cade, where the water falls fifteen or twenty feet, a very romantically between two rocks. This river opposite to Brunswick, it so shallow that it is fordable at low water with horses and carriages, but a ti [...]e below it deepens to fast that a twenty gun ship may ride securely at any time of tide. The tide, however, rises so high that large shallops pass a mile above the ford; so that it is no uncommon thing to set vessels of considerable burden riding at anchor, and a number of large river craft lying above, some dry and others on their beam [...] for want of water, within gunshot of each other.

Bridges have lately been erected, and are now nearly or qu [...]e com­pleted [Page 455] (agreeably to laws of the state passed for that purpose) over the Passaick, Hackinsak and Raritan rivers, on the post road between New York and Philadelphia. These bridges will greatly facilitate the intercourse between these two great cities.

Besides these are Cesarea river, on Cohansey creek, which rises in Salem county, and is about thirty miles in length, and navigable for vessels of an hundred tons to Bridgetown, twenty miles from its mouth.

Mulicus river divides the counties of Gloucester and Burlington, and is navigable twenty miles for vessels of sixty tons.

Maurice river rises in Gloucester county, runs southwardly about forty miles, and is navigable for vessels of an hundred tons, fifteen miles, and for shallops ten miles farther.

Alloway creek, in the county of Salem, is navigable sixteen miles for shallops, with several obstructions of drawbridges. Ancocus creek, in Burlington county, is also navigable sixteen miles. These, with many other smaller streams, empty into the Delaware, and carry down the produce which their fertile banks and the neighbouring country afford.

That part of the state which borders on the sea, is indented with a great number of small rivers and creeks, such as Great Egg harbour, and Little Egg harbour rivers, Navesink, Shark, Matiticung, and Fork­ed rivers, which as the country is flat, are navigable for small craft, almost to their sources.

Paulin's Kiln, in Sussex county, is navigable for craft 15 miles; and the Musconetcony, which divides Hunterdon from Sussex, is capable of beneficial improvement, as is the Pequest of Paquasset, between the two last mentioned rivers.

This state is remarkable for mill seats, eleven hundred of which, are already improved; 500 with flour mills, and the rest with saw mills, fulling mills, forges, furnaces, slitting and rolling mills, paper, powder and oil mills.

Sandy Hook, or point, is in the township of Middletown; and on this point stands a light house, 100 feet high, built by the citizens of New York.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY, MOUNTAINS, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.} The counties of Sus­sex, Morris, and the northern part of Bergen, are mountainous. The south Mountain, which [...] ridge of the great Allegany Range, crosses this state in about lati­tude 41°. This mountain embosoms such amazing quantities of iron ore, that it may not improperly be called the Iron Mountain. The Kittatinny ridge passes through this state north of the South mountain. Several spurs from these mountains are projected in a southern direction. One passes between Springfield and Chatham. Another runs west of it, by Morristown, Barkinridge and Vealtown. The interior country [...] in general, agreeably variegated with hills and vallies. The south­ern counties which he along the sea coast are pretty uniformly flat and sandy. The noted Highlands of Navesink, and center Hill, are almost the only hills within the distance of many miles from the [...] mast. The Highlands of Navesink are on the sea coast near sandy [...]look, in the township of Middletown, and are the first lands that are discovered by mariners, as they come upon the coast. They rise about 600 feet above the surface of the water.

The much as five eighths of most of the southern counties, or one [...] [Page 456] fourth of the whole state, is almost a sandy barren, unfit in many parts for cultivation. The land on the sea coast in this, like that [...] the more southern states, has every appearance of made ground. The soil is generally a light sand; and by digging, on an average, about fifty feet below the surface, (which can be done, even at the distance of twenty or thirty miles from the sea, without any impediment from rocks or stones) you come to salt marsh. The gentleman who gave this information adds, 'I have seen an oyster shell that would hold a [...] which was dug out of the marsh, at fifty feet deep, in digging a [...] 'About seven years since,' continues my informer, 'at Long [...], in the county of Monmouth, in the banks of the Atla [...]t, which were greatly torn by a great rise of the sea in a violent easterly [...]torm, was discovered the skeleton of some huge carnivorous animal. The country people who first saw it had so little curiosity, as to suffer it to be wholly destroyed, except a jaw tooth which I saw. This was about two and an half inches wide, five inches long and as many deep. The person who helped to take it out of the bank, assured me there was one rib seven feet four inches, and another four feet long.' The bones of another of these animals, has lately been discovered, in a meadow, in the county of Gloucester, on the river Delaware, by a ne­gro, who was digging a ditch 3 or 4 feet deep. Part of these bones were sent to Philadelphia.—To account for these curious phenomena is not my business. This is left for the ingenious naturalist, who has abilities and leisure to compare facts and appearances of this kind, and who probably may thence draw conclusions which may throw much light on the ancient history of this country.

This state has all the varieties of soul from the worst to the best kind. It has a great proportion of barrens. The good land in the southern counties lies principally on the banks of rivers and creeks. The soil, on these banks, is generally a still clay; and while in a state of nature, produces various species of oak, hickory, poplar, ches­nut, ash, gum, &c. The barrens produce little else but shrub oaks and yellow pines. These sandy lands yield an immense quantity of bog iron ore, which is worked up to great advantage in the iron works in these counties. There are large bodies of salt meadow along the lower part of the Delaware river and Bay, which afford a plentiful pasture for cattle in summer, and hay in winter; but the flies and musketoes frequent these meadows in large swarms, in the months of June, July, and August, and prove very [...]oublesome both to man and beast. [...]n Gloucester and Cumberland counties are several large tracts of banked meadow. Their vicinity to Philadelphia renders them highly valua­ble. Along the sea coast the inhabitants subsist principally, by seed­ing cattle on the salt meadows, and by the fish of various kinds, such as rock, drum, shad, perch, &c. black turtle, crabs and oysters, which the sea, rivers, and creeks afford in great abundance. They raise In­dian corn, rye, potatoes, &c. but not for exportation. Their swamps afford lumber, which is easily conveyed to a good market. The sugar maple tree is common in Sussex county upon the Delaware.

In the hilly and mountainous parts of the state, which are not too rocky for cultivation, the soil is of a stronger kind, and covered in its natural state with stately oaks, hickories, chesnuts, &c. and when cul­tivated produces wheat, rye, Indian corn, buck wheat, oats, barely, flax, and fruits of all kinds common to the climate. The land in this hilly [Page 457] country is good for grazing, and farmers feed great numbers of cattle for New York and Philadelphia markets; and many of them keep large dairies, as there are large tracts of fine meadows between the hills.

The orchards in many parts of the state equal any in the United States, and their cyder is said, and not without reason, to be the best in the world. It is pretty certain that it cannot be surpassed in good­ness.

The markets of New York and Philadelphia receive a very consid­erable proportion of their supplies from the contiguous parts of New Jersey. And it is worthy of remark that these contiguous parts are exceedingly well calculated, as to the nature and fertility of their soils, to afford these supplies; and the intervention of a great number of navigable rivers and creeks renders it very convenient to market their produce. These supplies consist of vegetables of many kinds, apples, [...], peaches, plumbs, strawberries, cherries and other fruits—cyder in large quantities and of the best quality, butter, cheese, beef, pork, mutton, and the lesser meats.

TRADE.] The trade of this state is carried on almost solely with and from those two great commercial cities, New York on one side, and Philadelphia on the other; though it wants not good ports of its own. Severed attempts have been made by the legislature, to secure to the state its own natural advantages, by granting extraordinary privileges to merchants, who would settle at Amboy and Burlington, two very commodious ports. But the people having long been accustomed to fend their produce to the markets of Philadelphia and New York, and of course having their correspondencies established, and their mode of dealing fixed, they find it difficult to turn their trade from the old channel. Besides, in these large cities, where are so many able merchants, and so many wants to be supplied, credits are more easily obtained, and a better and quicker market is found for produce, than could be expected in towns less populous and flourishing. These and other causes of the same kind, have hitherto rendered abortive the en­couragements held out by the legislature.

The articles exported, besides those already mentioned, are wheat, flour, horses, live cattle, hams, which are celebrated as being among the best in the world, lumber, flaxseed, leather, iron, in great quantities, in pigs and bars, and formerly copper ore; but the mines have not been work­ed since the commencement of the late war. The imports consist chief­ly of West India goods.

MANUFACTURES AND AGRICULTURE.] The manufactures of this state have hitherto been very inconsiderable, not sufficient to supply its own consumption, if we except the articles of iron, nails and sea th [...]. A spirit of industry and improvement, particularly in manu­factures, has however greatly increased in the two last years. Most of the families in the country, and many in the populous towns, are clothed in strong, decent homespun; and it is a happy circumstance for our country, that this plain AMERICAN dress is every day growing more fashionable, not only in this, but in all the states.

In Trenton Newark and Elizabethtown, are several very valuable [...]anyards, where leather, in large quantities and of an excellent quality, is made and exported in the neighbouring markets. Steel was manu­factured at Trenton in the time of the war, but not considerably since. [Page 458] In Gloucester county is a glass house. Paper mills, and nail manufacto­ries are erected and worked to good advantage in several parts of the state. Wheat also is manufactured into flour, and Indian corn into meal to good account, in the western counties, where wheat is the sta­ple commodity. But the iron manufacture is, of all others, the great­est source of wealth to the state. Iron works are erected in Glouces­ter, Burlington, Sussex, Morris and other counties. The mountains in the county of Morris, give rise to a number of streams necessary and convenient for these works, and at the same time furnish a copi­ous supply of wood and ore of a superior quality. In this county a­lone are a less than seven rich iron mines, from which might be tak­en ore sufficient to supply the United States; and to work at into iron are two furnaces, two rolling and slating mills, and about thirty forg­es, containing from two to four fires each. These works produce an­nually about 510 tons of bar iron, 800 tons of pigs, besides large quan­tities of hollow ware, sheet iron, and nail rods. In the whole state, it is supposed there is yearly made about 1200 tons of bar iron, 1200 do. of pigs, 80 do. of nail rods, exclusive of hollow ware, and various other castings, of which vast quantities are made.

Early in the late war, a powder mill was erected in Morristown by Col. Ford, who was enabled, by the ample supply to saltpetre furnish­ed by the patriotic inhabitants, to make a considerable quantity of that valuable and necessary article, at a time when it was most need­ed. And when the enemy were at the door, it afforded a timely sup­ply.

A manufacturing company was incorporated, in 1791, by the legis­lature of this state, and favored with very great privileges. The bet­ter to encourage every kind of manufacture, a subscription was open­ed, under the patronage of the Secretary of the Treasury of the Unit­ed States, for this important purpose. Each subscriber promised to pay, for every share annexed to his name, 400 dollars to the Trustees appointed to receive it. A sum of upwards of 500,000 dollars was almost immediately subscribed, and the directors of the association have since taken the proper measures to carry into effect their exten­sive plan. They have fixed on the Great falls, in Passaick river, and the ground adjoining, for the erection of the mills and the town, which they call PATTERSON, in honour of the present Governour of New Jersey. Every advantage appears to be concentrated in this delight­ful situation, to make it one of the most eligible, in the United States, for the permanent establishment of manufactures. Already a large sum of money has been expended, and the works are in forward­ness.

Although the bulk of the inhabitants in this state are farmers yet agriculture has not been improved (a [...]ew instances excepted) to that degree which from long experience, we might rationally expect, and which the fertility of the soil in many places, seems to encourage. A great part of the inhabitants are Dutch, who, although they are in general neat and industrious farmers, have very little enterprize, and seldom adopt any new improvements in husbandry, because, through habits and want of education to expand and liberalize their minds, they think their and modes of tilling the best. Indeed this is the case with the great body of the common people, and proves almost an in­ [...]mountable obstacle to agricultural improvements.

[Page 459] MINES AND MINERALS.] This state embosoms vast quantities of Iron and copper ore. The iron ore is of two kinds; one is capable of being manufactured into malleable iron, and is found in mountains and in low barrens; the other, called bog ore, grows in rich bottoms; and yields iron of a hard, brittle quality, and is commonly manufact­ured into hollow ware, and used sometimes instead of stone in build­ing.

A number of copper mines have been discovered in different parts of the state. One is in Bergen county, which when worked by the Schuysers, to whom it belonged) was considerably productive; but they have for many years been neglected.

The following account of a copper mine at New Brunswick, is given by a gentleman of distinction, well informed upon the sub­ject.

"About the years 1748, 1749, 1750, several lumps of virgin copper from five to thirty pounds weight, (in the whole upwards of 200 pounds) were plowed up in a field, belonging to Phillip French, Esq within a quarter of a mile of New Brunswick. This induced Mr. Elias Boudinot, of the city of Philadelphia, to take a lease of Mr. French of this land, for ninety nine years, in order to search for cop­per ore, a body of which he concluded must be contained in this hill. He took in several partners, and about the year 1751 opened a pit in the low grounds, about 2 or 300 yards from the river. He was led to this spot by a friend on his, who, a little before, passing by at three o'clock in the morning, observed a body of flame arise out of the ground, as large as a common sized man, and soon after die away. He drove a stake on the spot. About fifteen feet deep, Mr. Boudinor cane on a vein of bluish stone, about two feet thick, between two perpendicular loose bodies of red rock, covered with a sheet of pure virgin copper, a little thicker than gold leaf. This bluish stone was f [...]ed with sparks of virgin copper, very much like copper filings, and now and then a large lump of virgin copper from five to thirty pounds weight. He followed this vein almost thirty feet, when, the water coming in very fast, the expense became too great for the com­pany's capital. A stamping mill was erected, when by reducing the bluish stone to a powder, and washing it in large tubs, the stone was carried off, and the fine copper preserved, by which means many tons of the purest copper was sent to England without ever passing through the fire; but labour was to high to render it possible for the company to proceed. Sheets of copper about the thickness of two pennies, and three feet square, on an average, have been taken from between the rocks, within four feet of the surface, in several parts of the hill. At about fifty or sixty feet deep, they came to a body of fine solid ore, in the midst of this bluish vein, but between rocks of a white flinty spar, which, however, was worked out in a few days. These works lie now wholly neglected, although the vein when left was richer than ever it had been. There was also a very rich vein of copper ore discovered at Rocky hill, in Somerset county, which has also been neglected from the heavy expense attending the working of it. There have been va­ [...] attempts made to search the hills beyond Boundbrook, known by the name of Van Horne's mountain, but for the same reason is now neglected. This mountain discovers the greatest appearance of cop­per ore, of any place in the state. It may be picked up on the sur­face [Page 460] of many parts of it. A smelting furnace was erected, before the revolution, in the neighbourhood, by two Germans, who were [...] very considerable profit on their work, until the British destroyed, in the beginning of the war. The inhabitants made it worth the [...] while, by collecting the ore from the surface and by partially diggi [...] into the hill, to supply the furnace. Besides a company opened a ve­ry large shaft on the side of the hill, from which also a great dea [...] [...] valuable ore and some virgin copper were taken. Two sumps of vir­gin copper were found here in the year 1754, which weighed [...] pounds."

A lead mine has been discovered in Hopewell township, four miles from Trenton. There is said to be coal on Raritan river, below Brunswick, and at Pluckemin, and turf in Bethlehem, at the hea [...] [...] its south branch; and also at Springfield on Raway river, which is re­markable for mill seats.

CURIOUS SPRINGS.] In the upper part of the county of Mor [...], is a cold mineral spring, which is frequented by valetudinarians, [...] its waters have been used with very considerable success. In the township of Honover, in this county, on a ridge of hills, are a number of wells, which regularly ebb and flow about six feet, twice in every twenty four hours. These wells are nearly forty miles from the sea, in a streight line. In the county of Cape May, is a spring of fresh wa­ter, which boils up from the bottom of a salt water creek, which runs nearly dry at low tide; but a flood tide, is covered with water directly from the ocean to the depth of three or four feet; yet in this situation, by letting down a bottle well corked, through the salt water into the spring, and immediately drawing the cork with a string pre­pared for the purpose, it may be drawn up full of fine, untainted fresh water. There are springs of this kind in other parts of the state. In the county of Hunterdon, near the top of Muskonercong mountain, is a noted medicinal spring, to which invalids resort from every quar­ter. It issues from the side of a mountain, and is conveyed into all artificial reservoir for the accommodation of those who wish to [...] in, as well as to drink, the waters. It is a strong chalybeate and very cold. These waters have been used with very considerable success but perhaps the exercise necessary to get to them, and the purity of the air in this lofty situation, aided by a lively imagination, have [...] great efficacy in curing the patient as the waters.

A curious spring has been discovered, about 200 yards from the south branch of Raritan river, from which, even in the dryest [...]eas [...] a small stream issues, except when the wind continues to blow from the north west for more than two days successively, when it ceases to run; and if the water be taken out of the cask placed in the ground, it will remain empty until the wind changes, when it is again [...] and flows as usual.

CAVES, MONUMENTS, &c.] In the township of Shrewsbury, [...] Monmouth county, on the side of a branch of Navesink river, is a re­markable cave, in which there are three rooms. The cave is about [...] feet long, and fifteen feet broad. Each of the rooms are arched, [...] centre of the arch is about five feet from the bottom of the cave; [...] sides not more than two and an half. The mouth of the cave is [...] the bottom is a loose lard; and the arch is formed in a soft [...], through the pores of which, the moisture is slowly [...]xudated, and falls in drops on the land below.

[Page 461] On Sandy Hook, about a mile from the light house, is a monument, which was erected to commemorate a very melancholy even that [...] place just at the close of the late war. The following inscription, [...] is upon a marble plate on one side of the monument, will af­ [...] sufficient information of the matter.

There lies the remains of the honourable Hamilton Douglass Halliburton, son of Sholto Charles Earl of Morton, and heir of the an­ [...] family of Halliburton of Pitcurr in Scotland; who perished on [...] p [...]ast with twelve more young gentlemen, and one common sailor, in the spirited discharge of duty, the 30th or 31st of December, 1783: [...] October 10th 1763; a youth who, in contempt of hardship [...] danger, though possessed of an ample fortune, served seven [...] in the British navy with a manly courage. He seemed to be [...]ying of a better fate. To his dear memory, and that of his un­ [...]unate companions, this monumental stone is erected by his unhap­ply [...]ther Katharine, Countess Dowager of Morton.

[...]ame Champion, Lieutenant of Marines.
Alexander Johnson, Midshipmen.
George Paddy,
Robert Heywood,
Charles Gascoigne, Young Gentlemen.
[...]ndrew Hamilton,
William Scott,
David Reddie,
Young Gentlemen. William [...]omlinson,
John M'Chair,
W [...]am Sproy,
Robert Wood.

George Towers, Sailor.

[...], away in pursuit of deserters; all found dead, and buried in this gave.

Of his Britanic Majesty's ship Assistance, MR. HALLIAURTON, First Lieutenant."

POPULATION.] According to the census of 179 [...], as given in the table, [...] were in this state 184,130 inhabitants, of whom 11,423 were slaves. [...] average population for every square mile is nearly 23. The number [...] inhabitants in this state, was in 1738—47,369, including 3,981 slaves; [...]—61,403, including 4,606 slaves; 1784—140,435, including 1,939 [...]. This year there were 10,501 blacks, of which 1,939 only were [...]ed as slaves.

The average annual increase since 1738 has been 2,630, exclusive of [...]tions, which, since 1783, have been numerous, to the country [...] of the Allegany Mountains. These emigrations will lesson in proportion as the inhabitants turn their attention to manufactures.

CHARACTER, MANNERS AND CUSTOMS.] Many circumstances [...] to render these various in different parts of the state. The inhabitants are a collection of Low Dutch, Germans, Eng­lish, Scotch, Irish, and New Englanders, or their descendants. [...] attachment, and mutual convenience, have generally in­ [...] these several kinds of people to settle together in a body, and in [...] their peculiar national manners, customs and character are [...]eryed, especially among the poorer class of people, who have [...] intercourse with any but those of their own nation. Religion, [...] its tendency is to unite people in those things that are es­sential [Page 462] to happiness, occasions wide differences as to manners, customs, and even character. The Presbyterian, the Quaker, the Episcopa­lian, the Baptist, the German and Low Dutch Calvinist, the Method­ist and the Moravian, have each their distinguishing characteristics, either in their worship, their discipline, or their dress. There is still another characteristical difference, distinct from either of the others, which arises from the intercourse of the inhabitants with different states. The people in West Jersey trade to Philadelphia, and of course imitate their fashions, and imbibe their manners. The inhabitants of East Jersey trade to New York, and regulate their fashions and man­ners according to those in New York. So that the difference in re­gard to fashions and manners between East and West Jersey, is nearly as great as between New York and Philadelphia.—Add to all these the differences common in all countries, arising from the vari­ous occupations of men, such as the Civilian, the Divine, the Law­yer, the Physician, the Mechanic, the clownish, the decent, and the respectable Farmer, all of whom have different pursuits, or pursue the same thing differently, and of course must have different ideas and manners;—when we take into view all these differences, (and all these differences exist in New Jersey, and many of them in all the other states) it cannot be expected that many general observations will apply. It may, however, in truth be said, that the people of New Jersey are generally industrious, frugal and hospitable. There are, comparatively, but few men of learning in the state, nor can it be said that the people in general have a taste for the sciences. The poorer class, in which may be included a considerable proportion of the inhabi­tants of the whole state, are inattentive to the education of their children, who are but too generally left to grow up in ignorance. There are, however, a number of gentlemen of the first rank in a­bilities and learning in the civil offices of the state, and in the several learned professions.

It is not the business of a geographer to compliment the ladies; nor would we be thought to do it when we say, that there is at least as great a number of industrious, discreet, amiable, genteel and handsome women in New Jersey, in proportion to the number of inhabitants, as in any of the thirteen states.

RELIGION.] There, are in this state, about fifty Presbyterian con­gregations, subject to the care of three Presbyteries, viz. That of New York, of New Brunswick, and Philadelphia. A part of the charge of New York and Philadelphia Presbyteries lies in New Jer­sey, and part in their own respective states.

Besides these there are upwards of 40 congregations of Friends—30 of the Baptists—25 of Episcopalians—28 of Dutch Reformed, be­sides Methodists—and a settlement of Moravians. All these religious denominations live together in peace and harmony; and are allowed, by the constitution of the state, to worship Almighty God agreeably to the dictates of their own consciences; and are not compelled to attend or support any worship contrary to their own faith, and judg­ment. All Protestant inhabitants, of peaceable behaviour, are eligi­ble to the civil offices of the state.

COLLEGES, ACADEMIES, AND SCHOOLS.] There are tow colleg­es in New Jersey; one at Princetown, called Nassau Hall, the other at Brunswick, called Queens College. The college at Princetown was [Page 463] first founded by charter from John Hamilton, Esq: President of the council, about the year 1738, and enlarged by Governour Belcher in 1 [...]7. The charter delegates a power of granting to "the students of said college, or to any others thought worthy of them, all such de­grees as are granted in either of our universities or any other college in Great Britain." It has twenty-three trustees. The governour of the state, and the president of the college are, ex officiis, two of them. It has an annual income of about 900l. currency; of which 200l. a­rise, from funded public securities and lands, and the rest from the fees of the students.

The president of the college, is also professor of eloquence, criticism, and chronology. The vice president is also professor of divinity and [...] philosophy. There is also a professor of mathematics, and nat­ural philosophy, and two masters of languages. The four classes in college contain commonly from 70 to 100 students. There is a gram­mar school, of about 20 scholars, connected with the college, under the superintendance of the president, and taught sometimes by a seni­or scholar, and sometimes by a graduate.

Before the war this college was furnished with a Philosophical appa­ratus worth 500l. which (except the elegant Orrery constructed by Mr. Rittenhouse) was almost entirely destroyed by the British army in the late war, as was also the library, which now consists of between [...] and 3000 volumes.

The college edifice is handsomely built with stone, and is 180 feet in length, 54 in breadth, and 4 stories high; and is divided into for­ty two convenient chambers for the accommodation of the students, besides a dining hall, chapel, and room for the library. Its situation is elevated and exceedingly pleasant and heathful. It is remarkable, that since the removed of the college to Princeton in 1756, there have been but 5 or 6 deaths among the students. The view from the college balcony is extensive and charming.

The college has been under the care of the succession of presidents eminent for piety and learning; and has furnished a number of Civil­ [...], Divines, and Physicians of the first rank in America. *

The charter for Queens college, at Brunswick, was granted just be­fore the war, in consequence of an application from a body of the [...] church. Its funds, raised wholly by free donations, amounted, [...] after its establishment, to four thousand pounds; but they were considerably diminished by the war. The grammar school, which is connected with the college, consists of between thirty and forty stu­dents, under the care of the trustees. This college at present, is not in a very flourishing state.

There are a number of good academies in this state. One at Free­hold, in the county of Monmouth—Another at Trenton, in which are about eighty students in the different branches. It has a fund of about one hundred any fifty pounds per annum, arising from the in­terest [Page 464] on public securities. Another in Hackkinsak, in the county of Bergen, of upwards of an hundred scholars. Instruction and board are said to be cheaper here than in any other part of the state. There is another flourishing academy at Orangedale, in the county of Esse [...], consisting of nearly as many scholars as any of the others, furnished with able instructors and good accommodations. Another has lately been opened at Elizabethtown, and consists of upwards of twenty students in the languages, and is increasing. An academy, by the name of Burlington academy, has lately been established at Burling­ton, under the direction of seven trustees, and the instruction of two preceptors. The system of education adopted in this academy, is de­signed to prepare the scholars for the study of the more difficult clas­sics and the higher branches of science in a college or university. As Newark, an Academy was founded in June 1792, and promises to be a useful institution. Besides these, there are grammar schools at Spring­field, Morristown, Bordentown and Amboy. There are no regular establishments for common schools in the state. The usual mode of education is for the inhabitants of a village or neighbourhood to join in affording a temporary support for a schoolmaster, upon such terms as are mutually agreeable. But the encouragement which these occa­sional teachers meet with, is generally such, as that no person of a­bilities adequate to the business, will undertake it; and of course, lit­tle advantage is derived from these schools. The improvement in these common schools is generally in proportion to the pay of the teacher. It is therefore much to be regretted that the legislature do not take up this subject and adopt some such method of supporting public schools as has been practised upon with visible good success in some of the New England States.

CHIEF TOWNS.] There are a number of towns in this state, near­ly of equal size and importance, and more that has more than a­bout two hundred houses compactly built. TRENTON is one of the largest towns in New Jersey and the capital of the state. It is situated on the northeast side of the river Delaware, opposite the falls, nearly in the centre of the states, from north to south, in lat. 40° 15′, and about 20' east of the meridian of Philadelphia. The river is not navigable above these falls, except for boats which will carry from five to seven hundred bushels of wheat. This town, with Lamberton, which joins it on the south, contains upwards of two hundred houses, and about 2000 inhabitants. Here the legislature statedly meets, the supreme court sits, and most of the public offices are kept. The inhabitants have lately erected a handsome court house 100 feet by 50, with a semi-hexagon at each end, over which is to be a ballustrade. In the neighbourhood of this pleasant town, are seve­ral gentlemen's feats, finely situated on the banks of the Delaware, and ornamented with taste and elegance. This town, being a thoroughfare between the eastern parts of the state and Philadelphia, has a considerable inland trade.

BURLINGTON (city) extends three miles along the Delaware, and one mile back, at right angles, into the county of Burlington, and [...]-twenty miles above Philadelphia by water, and seventeen by land. The island, which is the most populous part of the city, is a mile and a quarter in length, and three quarters of a mile in breadth. It has four entrances over bridges and causeways, and a quantity of [Page 465] bank meadow adjoining. On the island are about one hundred and [...] houses, 1000 white and 100 black inhabitants. But few of the [...]roes are slaves. The main streets are convenietly spacious, and [...]tly ornamented with trees in the fronts of the houses, which are regularly arranged. The Delaware, opposite the town, is about a mile wide; and under the shelter of Mittinnicunk and Burlington Islands, affords a safe and convenient harbour. It is commodiously situated [...] trade, but is two near the opulent city of Philadelphia to admit of [...] considerable increase of foreign commerce. There are two houses [...] public worship in the town, one for the Friends or Quakers, who [...] the most numerous, and one for Episcopalians. The other public buildings are two market houses, a court house, and the best goal in the state. Besides these, there is an academy, already men­tioned, a free school, a nail manufactory, and an excellent distill­ [...]y if that can be called excellent which produces a poison both of [...]th and morals.

The city was a free port under the state. The mayor, recorder, and [...]dermen hold a commercial court, when the matter in controversy is between foreigners and foreigners, or between foreigners and citi­ [...]en [...]. The island of Burlington was laid out, and the first settlements made as early as 1677. In 1682, the island of Mittinnicunk, or Free School island, was given for the use of the island of Burlington; the yearly profits arising from it (which amount to one hundred and eigh­ty pounds) are appropriated for the education of poor children.

PERTH AMBOY (city) took its name from James Drummond, earl of Perth; and Ambo, the Indian word for point, and stands on a neck of land included between Raritan river and Arthur Kull sound. Its situation is high and healthy. It lies open to Sandy Hook, and has one of the best harbours on the continent. Vessels from sea may enter it in one tide, in almost any weather. Great efforts have been made, and legislative encourrgements offered, to render it a place of trade, but without success. This town was early incorporated with city privileges, and continued to send two members to the general as­sembly until the revolution. Until this event, it was the capital of [...] Jersey; and the legislature and supreme court used to sit here and at Burlington alternately.

BRUNSWICK (city) was incorporated in 1784, and is situated on the southwest side of Raritan river, over which a fine bridge has lately [...] built, twelve miles above Amboy. It contains about two hun­dred houses, and nearly 2000 inhabitants, one half of whom are Dutch. [...] situation is low and unpleasant, being on the bank of the river, and [...]der a high hill which rises back of the town. The ice, at the making up of the river in winter, frequently lodges on the shallow [...]ding place, just opposite the town, and forms a temporary dam, which occasions the water to rise many feet above its usual height, [...]nd sometimes to overflow the lower floors of those houses which are [...] guarded against this inconvenience, by having their foundations [...]ated. The streets are raised and paved with stone. The water [...] the springs and wells is generally bad. The inhabitants are begin­ning to build on the hill above the town, which is very pleasant, and [...]ands a pretty prospect. The citizens have a considerable inland [...], and several small vessels belonging to the part.

PRINCECTON, is a pleasant village, of about 80 houses, 52 [Page 466] miles from New York, and 42 from Philadelphia. Its public build­ings are a large college edifice of stone, already described, and a pres­byterian church built of brick. Its situation is remarkably heal­thy.

ELIZABETHTOWN (borough) is fifteen miles from New York. Its situation is pleasant, and its soil equal in fertility to any in the state. In the compact part of the town, there are about one hundred and fif­ty houses. The public buildings are a very handsome presbyterian brick church, lately built, * an episcopal church, also of brick, and an academy. This is one of the oldest towns in the state. It was purchased of the Indians as early as 1664, and was settled soon af­ter.

NEWARK is seven miles from New York. It is a handsome, flour­ishing town, about the size of Elizabethtown, and has two presbyte­rian churches, one of which is of stone, and is the largest and most elegant building in the state. Besides these there is an episcopal church, a court house and goal. This town is celebrated for the excellence of its cider, and is the seat of the largest shoe manufactory in the state. The average number made daily, throughout the year, is esti­mated at about 200 pair.

PRACTICE OF PHYSICK.] There is a 'Medical Society' in this state, consisting of about thirty of their most respectable physicians, who meet twice a year. No person is admitted to the practice of phy­sic, without a license from the supreme court, founded on a certificate from this society, or at least two of its members, testifying his still and abilities. It is remarkable that in the country of Cape May, no regular physician has ever found support. Medicine has been admin­istered by women, except in some extraordinary cases.

PRACTICE OF LAW.] No person is permitted to practice as an at­torney in any court without a license from the governour. This can­not be obtained, unless the candidate shall be above twenty-one years of age, and shall have served a regular clerkship with some licensed attorney, for four years, and have taken a degree in some public col­lege, otherwise he must serve five years. This regulation is consider­ed by some as a depreciation of rights in regard to citizens of other states, and a bar to the progress of knowledge. He must also submit to an examination by three of the most eminent counsellors in the state, in the presence of the judges of the supreme court. After three years practice as an attorney, he becomes a candidate for a counsellor's license, which is granted on a like examination. Many of the people here, however, as in other states, think (because perhaps they are instruments is o­bliging them to pay their debts) that the lawyers know too much. But their knowledge will not injure those who are innocent, and who will let them alone. Experience has verified this observation in the county of Cape May. No lawyer lives within sixty miles of that country, and it is seldom that they attend their courts.

CONSTITUTION.] The government of this state, agreeable to their constitution, is vested in a governour, legislative council, and general assembly. The governour is chosen annually, by the council and assembly jointly, and is stiled, "Governour and commander in chief in and over the state of New Jersey, and the territories there­unto [Page 467] belonging, chancellor and ordinary in the same." The legisla­tive council is composed of one member from each country, chosen annually by the people. They must be worth one thousand pounds in real and personal estate within the county, and have been freehol­ders and inhabitants of the counties they represent for one year. The general assembly is composed of three members from each county chosen as above; each of them must be worth five hundred pounds, in real and personal estate within the county, and have been freehol­ders and inhabitants as above. Each of these, on taking his seat in the legislature, must swear "that he will not assent to any law, vote or proceeding, which shall appear to him injurious to the public welfare of the state, or that shall annul or repeal that part of the constitution which establishes annual elections, nor that part respecting trial by ju­ry, nor that part which secures liberty of conscience."

The governour sits in, and presides over the legislative council, and [...] a casting vote in their debates. His privy or executive council, i [...] composed of any three members of the legislative council; and the governour and any seven members of the council are a court of ap­peals in the last resort, as to points of law in civil cases, and posses and power of pardoning criminals in all cases whatsoever. The council chus [...] one of their members to be vice president, who, when the gov­ernour is absent from the state, possesses the supreme executive pow­er. The council may originate any bills, excepting preparing and al­tering any money bill, which is the sole prerogative of the assembly. In every other respect their powers are equal. Every bill is read three times in each house. None of the judges of the supreme court, or other courts, sheriffs, or any person possessed of any post of profit un­der the governour, except justices of the peace, is entitled to a seat in the assembly. The estate of a suicide is not forfeited for his of­fence.

COURTS OF JUSTICE, LAWS, &c.] The courts of justice in this state are, first, Justices courts. A competent number of persons are appointed in each county by the council and assembly, in joint meet­ing, who are called justices of the peace, and continue in office five years, who, besides being conservators of the peace, agreeably to the English laws, are authorized to hold courts for the trial of causes un­der twelve pounds. From this court, persons aggrieved, may appeal to the quarter sessions. Secondly, Courts of quarter sessions of the peace, are held quarterly in every county, by at least three of the justices. This court takes cognizance of breaches of the peace, and is general­ly regulated by the rules of the English law.

Thirdly, Court of common pleas, which are held quarterly, by judges appointed for that purpose, in the same manner as the justices of the peace, and who are commonly of their number, and hold their com­missions five years. This court may be held by a single judge, and has cognizance of demands to any amount, and is constructed on, and governed by the principles of the English laws.

Fourthly, Supreme courts, which are held four times in a year, at Trenton, by three judges appointed for that purpose, who hold their [...] three years, but one judge only is necessary to the holding this [...]. This court has cognizance of all actions, both civil and crim­inal throughout the state, having the united authority of the courts of kings bench, common pleas and exchequer in England. The courts [Page 468] of over and terminer and nist prius, commonly held once a year in each county, for the trial of causes arising in the county, and brought to issue in the supreme court, are properly branches of this court, and are hold by one of the judges of it, except that in the courts of oyer and terminer, some of the gentlemen of the county are always added in the commission as assistants to the judge; but they cannot hold the court without him.

[...] Orphan's courts, lately established by act of assembly, are held by the judges of the court of common pleas, ex officiis, and have cog­nizance of all matters relating to wills, administration, &c.

Sixthly, Court of Chancery, held by the governor ex officio, always open. It is a court of law and equity, founded on the same principles, and governed by the same rules as the court of chancery in England.

Seventhly, High Court of Errors and Appeals, composed of the gov­ernor, and seven of the council, and is a court of appeals in the last resort, in all cases of law.

All the English laws which had been practised upon in the state, and which are not repugnant to revolution principles, were adopted by the constitution, and very few alterations of consequence have since been made, except in the descent of the real estates, which in­stead of descending to the eldest son, agreeable to the old feudal sys­tem, as formerly, are now divided (where there is no will) two shares to each son, and one share to each daughter; i. e. the sons, have double the daughter's portions, but all the sons have equal portions and all the daughters.

MILITARY STRENGTH.] The military strength of New Jersey, consists of a militia, of between 30,000 and 40,000 men.

HISTORY.] See Smith's History of New Jersey—and Hazard's State Papers.

This state was the feat of war for several years, during the bloody contest between Great Britain and America. Her losses both of men and property, in proportion to the population and wealth of the state, was greater than of any other of the thirteen states. When General Washington was retreating through the Jersies, almost forsaken by all of ore, her militia were are all times obedient to his orders; and for a considerable length of time, composed the strength of his army. There is hardly a town in the state that lay in the progress of the British army, that was not rendered signal by some enterprize or ex­ploit. At Trenton the enemy received a check which may be said with justice to have turned the tide of the war. At Princeton, the feat of the muses, the received another, which, united, obliged them to retire with precipitation, and take refuge in disgraceful winter quarters. But whatever honour this state might derive from the re­lation, it is not our business to give a particular description of battles or sieges; we leave this to the pen of the historian, and only observe in general, that the many military achievements performed by the Jersey soldiers, give this state one of the first ranks among her sifted in a military view, and entitle her to a share of praise in the accom­plishment of the late glorious revolution, that bears no proportion [...] her size.

[Page]

A MAP OF PENNSYLVANIA with Part of the Adjacent STATES. from the latest Surveys

[Page 469]

GOVERNORS of NEW JERSEY, from the surrender of tithe Government by the PROPRIETORS in 1702, to the present me.
†Edward, viscount Cornbury, 1702 to 1708, removed and succeeded by
†John, lord Lovelace, 1708 to 1709, died and the government devolved to
Lt. Gov. Richard Ingoldsby, 1709 to 1710, when came in
†Brigader Robert Hunter, 1710 to 1720, who resigned in favour of
†William Burnet, 1720 to 1727, removed and succeeded by
†John Montgomery, 1728 to 1731, died and was succeeded by
†William Crosby, 1731 to 1736, died and the government devolved to

John Anderson, President of the Council 1736, by whose death about two weeks after the government devolved to John Hamilton, President of the Council 1736 to 1738 Those marked † were Governors in chief, and down to this time were Governors of Newyork and New Jersey, but from 1738 forward, New Jersey has had a separate governor.

†Lewis Morris, 1738 to 1746, died and the government devolved to
John Hamilton, President, 1746— by whose death it devolved to
John Reading, President, 1746 to 1747.  
†Jonathan Belcher, 1717 to 1757, died and the government again devolved to
John Reading, President, 17 [...]7 to 17 [...]8,  

Thomas Powna [...]l, then Governor of Massachusetts, being Lieu­tenant Governor, arrived on the death of Governor Belcher, but continued in the province a few days only.

†Francis Bernard, 1758 to 1760, removed to Boston and succeeded by
†Thomas Boone, 1760 to 1761, removed to S. Carolina and succeeded by
†Josiah Hardy, 1761 to 1763, removed & succeeded by
†William Franklin, 1763 to 1776, removed & succeeded by
†William Livingston, 1776 to 1790, died & succeeded by
†William Patterson, 1791—  

PENNSYLVANIA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 288 Miles. between 0° 20′ E. and 5° W. Lon. Square Miles. 44,900
Breadth 156 Miles. 39° 43′ and 42° N. Lat.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED east, by Delaware river, which divides it from New Jersey; north, by New York, and a territory of about 202,000 acres, on lake Erie, purchas­ed of congress by this state; northwest, by a part of Lake Erie, where there is a good port; west, by the Western Territory, and a part of Virginia; south, by a part of Virginia, Maryland and Delaware. The state lies in the form of a parallelogram.

CIVIL DIVISIONS.] Pennsylvania is divided into twenty-two counties, which, with their county towns, situation, &c. are mention­ed in the following table, as also the various kinds of mines and mine­rals in the state.

[Page 470]

Counties. No. I [...]. Cheif Tow. Situation. Se [...] Mines, &c.
Philadelphia 54,391 Philadelphia On Delawar. R All  
Chester 27,937 W. Chester On Delawar. R All Iron ore.
Delaware 9,483 Chester On Delawar. R All  
Bucks 25,401 Newtown On Delawar. R All I. ore & lead.
Montgomery 22,929 Norriston On Schuylk. R All Iron ore.
Lancaster 36,147 Lancaster On Susqueh. R All I ore & cop.
Dauphin 18,177 Harisburgh On Susqueh. R ¾ Iron ore.
Berks 30,179 Reading On Schuylk. R ¾ I. ore, coal mi.
Northampton 24,250 Easton On Delawar. R ¾ Iro. ore [&c.
Luzerne 4,904 Wilksburgh On Susqueh. R ¾ I ore, c. min.
York 37,747 York On Susqueh. R ¾ Ir. ore. [&c.
Cumberland 18,243 Carlisle On Susqueh. R ¾ I. ore, le, mi.
Northumber­land 17,161 Sunbury On W. bran. Su. 1/10 I. ore. salt sp.
Franklin 15,655 Chamberston On Susqueh. R ¾ Iron ore.
Bedford 13,124 Bedford On Juniata R ½ Ir. min. &c.
Huntington 7,565 Huntingdon On Juniata R ¼ Co. & l. mi.
Misslin 7,562 Lewisburgh On Juniata R ¼ Iron ore.
Westmoreland 16,018 Greensburg On Allegany R ¼ Coal mines.
Fayette 13,3 [...]5 Union On Mononga. ½ Co. & ir. mi.
Washington 23,866 Washington S. W. co [...]. state. ¼ Co. & ir. mi.
Allegany 10,309 Pittsburg On Allegany R ¼ Co. & ir. mi.
Total 434,373        

RIVERS, CANALS, &c.] There are six considerable rivers which, with their numerous branches, peninsulate the whole state, viz. The Delaware, Schuylkill, Susquehannah, Youghiogeny, Mor ongahela, and Allegany. The bay and river Delaware are navigable from the sea up to the great or lower falls at Trenton, 155 miles; and are accom­modated with a light house, on Cape Henlopen, and with buoys and piers for the direction and safety of ships. The distance of Philadel­phia from the sea, is about 60 miles across the land in a S. W. course, to the New Jersey coast, and 120 miles by the ship channel of the Delaware. So far it is navigable for a 74 gun ship. Sloops go 35 miles farther, to Trenton falls. The river is navigable for boats that carry eight or nine tons, an hundred miles further, and for Indian canoes, except several small falls or portages, one hundred and fifty miles. At Easton, it receives the Lehigh from the west, which is navigable thirty miles. The tide sets up as high as Trenton Falls, and at Philadelphia rises generally about five or six feet. A north­east and east wind raises it higher.

Between Cape Henlopen and Cape May, is the entrance into the Delaware bay. The entrance into the river is twenty miles further up, at Bombay Hook, where the river is four or five miles wide. From Bombay Hook to Reedy Island is twenty miles. This island is the rendezvous of outward bound ships in autumn and spring, waiting for a favourable wind. The course from this to the sea is S. S. E. so that a N. W. wind, which is the prevailing wind in these seasons, is fair for vessels to put out to sea. This river is generally frozen one or [Page 471] two months in the year at Philadelphia so as to prevent navigation, but vessels may, at all times, make a secure harbour at Port Penn, at Reedy Island, where piers have been erected by the State. Vessels are generally from 12 to 24 hours in ascending this beautiful river to Philadelphia; and the navigation is safe, and in the milder seasons, especially in the summer, is indescribeably pleasant.

From Chester to Philadelphia, 20 miles by water and 15 by land, the channel of the river is narrowed by islands of marsh, which are gener­ally banked and turned into rich and immensely valuable meadows.

Billingsport, twelve miles below Philadelphia, was fortified in the late war for the defence of the channel. Opposite this fort, several large frames of timber, headed with iron spikes, called chevaux de [...]i [...]es, were sunk to prevent the British ships from passing. Since the peace, a curious machine has been invented in Philadelphia, to raise them.

The Schuylkill rises north west of the Kittatinny mountains, through which it passes, into a fine champaign country, and runs, from its source, upwards of one hundred and twenty miles in a south east di­rection, and passing through the limits of the city of Philadelphia falls into the Delaware opposite Mud Island. 6 or 7 miles below the city. It is navigable from above Reading, eighty five or ninety miles to its mouth. There are 4 floating bridges thrown across it, made of logs fastened together, and lying upon the water, in the vicinity of Phila­delphia.

The N. E. branch of the Susquehannah river rises in lakes Otsego and Otego, in the state of New York, and runs in such a winding course as to cross the boundary line between New York and Pennsyl­vania three times. It receives Tyoga river, one of its principal branches, in lat. 41° 57′, three miles south of the boundary line. The Susquehannah branch is navigable for batteaux to its source, whence, to Mohawk river, is but twenty miles. The Tyoga branch is navigable fifty miles, for batteaux; and its source is but a few miles from the Chenessee, which empties into lake Ontario. From Tyoga point, the river proceeds southeast to Wyoming, with­out any obstruction by falls, and then southeast, over Wyoming falls, till at Sunbury, in about lat. 41°, it meets the west branch of Susque­hannah, which is navigable 90 miles from its mouth, and some of the branches of it are navigable [...]0 miles, and approach very near some of the boatable branches of the Allegany river. This noble river is passable to Middletown. (below Harris ferry) with boats, carrying several hundred bushels, and with rafts of boards &c. from the state of New York, as well as down the Tyoga, and Juniata branches, sev­eral hundred miles, in their different windings, but it is attended with difficulty and danger on account of the numerous falls below Middle­town. About fifteen miles above Harrisburg, it receives the Juniata, from the north west, proceeding from the Allegany mountains, and flowing through a mountainous, broken, yet cultivable country. This river is navigable, 120 miles from its mouth.

The Swetara, which falls into the Susqueehannah from the northeast, is navigable fifteen miles. About half a mile from the mouth of this river, and a mile from Middletown, is a gr [...]t mill which merits par­ticular notice. It is a very large and handsome stone building, has four pair of stones, and is perhaps in every respect one of the most [Page 472] complete in the state. But the most remarkable circumstance relative to it, is the race, which is a canal from 20 to 30 feet wide, and carried with such a degree of boldness to a length of 476 rods or perches, through rocks and hills, and every obstacle in its course, as cannot fail to ex­cite a very high idea of the enterprize, and persevering industry of Mr. George Frey, the undertaker and owner.

From Swetara to the Tulpehoken branch of Schuylkill, a canal and lock navigation is undertaken, and the works commenced, by an in­corporated company whole capital is 400,000 dollars. This leads through the Schuylkill to Philadelphia. When this shall be effected, a passage will be open to Philadelphia from the Juniata, the Tyoga, and the east and west branches of the Susquehannah, which water at least 15,000,000 of acres. From this junction, the general course of the Susquehannah is about southeast until it falls into the head of Chesapeak bay at Havre de Grace. It is above a mile wide at its mouth, and is navigable for sea vessels but about five miles, on ac­count of its rapids. The banks of this river are very romantic, par­ticularly where it passes through the mountains. This passage has every appearance of having been forced through by the pressure of the water, or of having been burst open by some convulsion in nature.

The several branches of the Youghiogeny river rise on the west side of the Allegany mountains. After running a short distance, they u­nite and form a large beautiful river, which, in passing some of the most western ridges of the mountains, precipitates itself over a level ledge of rocks, lying nearly at right angles to the course of the river. These falls, called the Ohiopyle falls, are about twenty feet in per­pendicular height, and the river is perhaps eighty yards wide. For a considerable distance below the falls, the water is very rapid, and boils and foams vehemently, occasioning a continual mist to rise from it, even at noon day, and in fair weather. The river at this place runs to the southwest, but presently winds round to the northwest, and continuing this course for thirty or forty miles, it loses its name by uniting with the Monongahela, which comes from the southward, and contains perhaps, twice as much water. There united streams, shortly after their junction mingle with the waters of the Allegany at Pittsburgh, and together form the grand river Ohio.

The Monongahela has been already particularly described, and some observations made on the navigation of the Allegany. In addition it may be observed, that the junction of French Creek (which comes from the northwest) with the Allegany, are the remains of a British fortification; and about a mile above is fort Franklin, built in 1787, and then guarded by a company of American soldiers. The Pennsyl­vania north line, crosses French Creek about three miles above Le Boeuf, where there was formerly a fort. From Le Boeuf to Presque­isle, 15 or 16 miles, is an old waggon road, cut by the French in the war of 1755. The lands on French Creek are very rich, and mostly cleared, which is an evidence that its former Indian inhabitants were numerous. Fourteen miles from the mouth of this creek is a gentle rapid, thence to its mouth, it is slow, deep and smooth.

There is said to be a practicable communication between the south­ern branch of the Tyoga and a branch of the Allegany, the head wa­ters of which, are but a short distance from each other. The Sene­ca Indians say they can walk four times in a day, from the boatable [Page 473] waters of the Allegany, to those of the Tyoga, at the place now men­tioned. And between the Susquehannah, just before it crosses into Pennsylvania the first time, and the Delaware, is a portage of only twelve miles. Rafts of timber, plank, boards and staves, with other articles upon them, can be brought down the Delaware from the counties of Montgomery and Otsego in New York, 200 miles above the city by the course of the river. Some money was expended by the government and landholders in improving the navigation up to­wards the source, before the revolution, and there has been a survey since made, for the purpose of proceeding in the improvement of this and the other principal rivers of Pennsylvania, and for making communications by canals in the improved part, and by roads in the improved part of the state. Great progress has already been made in these improvements, and the exertions for their completion are still continued. The Pennsylvanians are much inclined to such enter­prizes, having found great benefit from them. On the completion of the present plans, the state will be as conveniently intersected by roads as any other of its size in the union, which will greatly facilitate the settlement of its new lands. A slight view of the map of Pennsylva­nia will shew how finely this state is watered by the Delaware and its branches, the Schuylkill, the Juniata, the Susquehannah and its branches, the Ohio, Allegany, Youghiogeny, and Monongahela. The Patomak and lake Erie also afford prospects of considerable benefit from their navigation. Nature has done much for Pennsylvania in regard to inland water carriage, which is strikingly exemplified by this fact, that although Philadelphia and lake Erie are distant from each other above 300 miles, there is no doubt but that the rivers of the state may be so improved, as to reduce the land carriage between them nine tenths. In the same way the navigation of Pittsburg, after due improvement, may be used instead of land carriage for the whole distance, except 23 miles.—By these routs it is clear, that a large pro­portion of the foreign articles used on the western waters must be transported, and their furs, skins, ginseng, hemp, flax, pot ash, and other valuable commodities brought to Philadelphia. The hemp and oak timber for the Russian navy is transported by inland navigation 1200 miles, and yet hemp is shipped from that kingdom on lower terms than from any other part of the known world. Russia, long since the settlement of Pennsylvania by civilized and enlightened peo­ple, was in a state of absolute barbarism, and destitute of these im­provements. Much therefore is to be expected from the continued exertions of the prudent, industrious and sensible inhabitants of Penn­sylvania, in the course of the present century.

One remark must not be omitted here, and that is, that in all the back country waters of this state, even in those high up in the moun­tains, marine pe [...]esactions are found in great abundance.

SWAMPS.] The only swamps worth noticing, are, the Great Swamp, between Northampton and Luzerne counties, and Buffaloe swamp in the northwestern parts of Northumberland county, near the head waters of the west branch of the Susquehannah. These swamps, on examination and survey, are found to be bodies of farm land, thickly covered with beach and sugar maple.

[Page 474] MOUNTAINS, FACE OF THE COUNTRY, SOIL AND NATURAL ADVANTAGES.} A considerable proportion of this state may be called mountainous; particularly the counties of Bed­ford, Huntingdon, Cumberland, part of Franklin, Dauphin, and [...] of Bucks and Northampton, through which pass, under various [...] the numerous ridges and spurs, which collectively form wh [...] [...] chuse to call, for the sake of clearness. THE GREAT RANGE OF AL­LEGANY MOUNTAINS. The principal ridges in this range, in Penn­sylvania, are the Kittatinny, or Blue mountains, which pass north of Nazareth in Northampton county, and pursue a southwest cou [...] [...] cross the Lehigh, through Dauphin county, just above Harrisburg thence on the west side of the Susquehannah through Cumberland and Franklin counties. Back of these, and nearly parallel with th [...] are Peters, Tuscarora, and Nescopek mountains, on the east of [...] Susquehannah; and on the west, Shareman's hills, Sideling [...] Ragged, Great Warriors, Evits and Wills' mountains; th [...]n the [...] Allegany ridge, which being the largest, gives its name to the whole range; west of this are the Chesnut ridges. Between the Juniata and the west branch of the Susquehannah are Jacks, Tussys, Nittiny and Bald Eagle mountains. The vales between these mountains and generally of a rich, black soil, suited to the various kinds of grain and grass. Some of the mountains will admit of cultivation almost to [...] tops. The other parts of the state are generally level, or agreeably va­riegated will hills and vallies.

In this connection, I beg leave to introduce the remarks of Mr. Charles Thompson, the late secretary of congress, which were suggest­ed on his reading Mr. Jefferson's discription of the passage of the Patomak through the blue ridge. 'The reflections I was led into on viewing this passage of the Patomak through the blue ridge were, that this country must have suffered some violent convulsion, and that the face of it must have been changed from what it probably was some centuries ago; that the broken and ragged faces of the moun­tain on each side of the river; the tremendous rocks, which are left with one end fixed in the precipice, and the other jutting out and seeming­ly ready to fall for want of support; the bed of the river for several miles below obstructed, and filled with the loose stones carried from this mound; in short, every thing on which you cast your eye evi­dently demonstrates a disrupture and breach in the mountain, and that, before this happened, what is now a fruitful vale, was formerly a great lake or collection of water, which possibly might have here formed a mighty cascade, or had its vent to the ocean by the Susquehannah, where the Blue ridge seems to terminate. Besides this, there are other parts of this country which bear evident traces of a like convulsion. From the best accounts I have been able to obtain, the place where the Delaware now flows through the Kittatinny mountain, which is a continuation of what is called the North ridge, or mountain, was not its original course, but that it passed through what is [...] called 'the Wind-gap', a place several miles to the westward, [...] above an hundred feet higher than the present bed of the river. This wind-gap is about a mile board, and the stones in it such as seem to have been washed for ages by water running over them. Should this have been the case, there must have been a large lake behind that mountain and by some uncommon swell in the waters, or by some convulsion of [Page 475] nature, the river must have opened its way through a different part of [...] mountain, and meeting there with less obstruction, carried away [...] the opposing mounds of earth, and deluged the country below [...] the immense collection of waters to which this new passage gave [...]. There are still remaining, and daily discovered, innumerable [...] of such a deluge on both sides of the river, after it passed the [...] above the falls of Trenton, and reached the champaign. On the [...] Jersey side, which is flatter than the Pennsylvania side, all the [...] below Croswick hills seems to have been overflowed to [...]stance of from ten to fifteen miles back from the river and [...] acquired a new soil by the earth and clay brought down [...] mixed with the native sand. The spot on which Philadel­phia [...]ends evidently appears to be made ground. The different [...] through which they pass in digging to water, the [...]corns, leaves [...] sometimes branches, which are found above twenty feet below [...] face, all seem to demonstrate this. I am informed that at York [...] Virginia, in the bank of York river, there are different strata [...] and earth, one above another, which seem to point out that country there has undergone several changes; that the sea has, for [...]ssion of ages, occupied the place where dry land now appears; [...] that the ground has been suddenly raised at various periods. What a [...] would it make in the country below, should the mountains at [...]gara, by any accident, be cleft asunder, and a passage suddenly op­ [...] to drain off the waters of Erie and the Upper Lakes! While [...]ting on those subjects, I have often been hurried away by fan­ [...] and led to imagine, that what is now the bay of Mexico, was once campaign country; and that from the point or cape of Florida, [...] was a continued range of mountains through Cuba, Hispaniola, [...], Rico, Martinique, Gaudaloupe, Barbadoes, and Trinidad, till it [...] the coast of America, and formed the shores which bounded [...] ocean, and guarded the country behind: That, by some convul­sion [...] shock of nature, the sea had broken through these mounds, [...] deluged that vast plain, till it reached the foot of the Andes; [...] being there heaped up by the trade winds, always blowing from [...] quarter, it had found its way back, as it [...] to do, through [...] gulph between Florida and Cuba, carrying with it the loom and [...] it may have scooped from the country it had occupied, part of which it may have deposited on the shores of North America, and [...] part formed the banks of Newfoundland.—But these are only the visions of fancy.

The soil of Pennsylvania is of various kinds; in some parts it is [...]; a great proportion of the state is good land, and no incon­siderable part is very good. Perhaps the proportion of first rate land is not greater in any of the thirteen states. The richest part of the [...] that is settled is Lancaster county, and the valley through Cumberland, York and Franklin. The richest that is unsettled, is between [...] river and Lake Erie, in the northwest corner of the state, [...] the country on the heads of the eastern branches of the Alle­gany [...]. Of this fine tract, 100,000 acres, lying on, and near French [...] are for sale by the state. The convenient communications [...] this creek into the Allegany, and from the Allegany, through [...] creeks and rivers to the Susquehannah and Patomak, have al­ [...] been mentioned. *

[Page 476] The south side of Pennsylvania is the best settled land throughout, owing entirely to the circumstance of the western road having been run by the armies, prior to 1762, through the towns of Lancaster, Carlisle and Bedford, and thence to Pittsburg. For the purpose of turning the tide of settlers from this old channel into the unsettled parts of the state, the government and landed interest of Pennsylva­nia have been, and are still busy in cutting convenient roads. Dur­ing the summer of 1788 they run a road north, from the former roads beyond Bethlehem, to the north portage between Delaware and Susquehannah; and thence north 80 degrees west to the mouth of the Tyoga, the first seventy miles, and the last above sixty. It is now in contemplation to cut a road from Sunbury, at the forks of the east and west branches of Susquehannah; west, 150 miles, to the mouth of Toby's creek, which empties into the Allegany river, from the east. This road will be through a tract of rich land, now for sale by the state. A road is also cut from the mouth of the Tyoga, southward, to the mouth of Loyal, a branch of the west branch of Susquehan­nah. Another road is cut from Huntingdon town, on Franks town branch of the Juniata, westward thirty miles, to Conemagh, a naviga­ble branch of the Allegany.

Thus the well judged policy of this state, is paving the way for the settlement of all their waste lands. And to evidence their benevo­lence, and their wishes to have the advantages of education increased and more extensively enjoyed, they have allotted 60,000 acres of these waste lands for the use of public schools; and above 60,000 more have been granted for that purpose, and to the societies established for the promotion of knowledge, the arts, religion, &c. A considerable part of the lands of this state remain at present for sale, by the public. The Pennsylvanians having no disputes with the Indians about boun­daries, and all the lands within the State, being purchased at a fair and open treaty, and their being some settlements westward of the Penn­sylvania line, there is little apprehension of the Indians any where, and inmost parts of the state no danger at all.

Among the natural advantages of Pennsylvania, her almost innume­rable mill seats ought not to be omitted. They are conveniently dis­tributed by Providence throughout the state, and afford the means of establishing every species of mill work and labour-saving machines, to meet the produce and raw materials almost at the farmers doors. In the present situation of this country, wanting hands for farming, and in the present state of manufactures, when ingenious machanism is every day and every where invented to lessen the necessity for man­ual labour, this natural advantage must appear of inestimable import­ance. Hemp and flax are among the most profitable productions of the rich midland and new counties, the Cream of which is yet to be skimmed. It is therefore a most pleasing fact, that they have in this state the full sized and complete movements or works of a water mill and machinery, to sliver, rove and spin flax and hemp into threads or yarns, fit for linen of 30 cuts to the pound, or any coarser kind, sheet­ings, toweling, sail cloth, [...]znabrigs, twine, and the strans or yarns for cordage. The same machinery is calculated for the roving or prepar­ing, and spinning of combed wool into worsted yarn. They have also the movements and complete machinery of Sir Richard A [...]kwright's water mill for spinning yarns of cotton. And though the climate of [Page 477] the state is not fit for cultivating that raw material, yet cotton can be raised with profit in every state in the Union southward of Penn­sylvania, and imported from the East and West Indies.

It is certain that this extraordinary capacity of our country for me­chanical works has either called forth, in an unusual degree, the me­chanical powers of the human mind, or that Providence has bestowed upon the people of this and our sister states an uncommon portion of this talent, which its nature and situation require. Rittenhouse and Franklin stand unrivalled in mechanical philosophy; and those who know our country are well informed, tha [...] to these two great names we could add a considerable list of philosophical and practical mechani­ [...]i [...]s, in a variety of branches.

So many of the necessary and convenient arts and trades depend upon the plenty and cheapness of fuel▪ that it appears proper to take notice of this article. Till the revolution, the dependence of the people was almost entirely upon wood fuel, of which, in the most populous places, there is still a great abundance, and in all interior situations immense quantities; but the increase of manufactures has occasioned them to turn their attention to coal. Of this useful fossile Providence has given them very great quantities in the middle and western country. In the vicinity of Wyoming, on the Susquehan­nah, is one bed of the open burning kind, and of the most intense heat. On the head waters of Schuylkill and Lebigh are some consid­erable bodies. At the head of the western branch of Susquehannah is a most extensive body, which stretches over the country southwest­wardly, so as to be found in the greatest plenty at Pittsburgh, where the Allegany and Youghiogeny unite, and form the head of the Ohio. All the coal has hitherto been accidentally found on the surface of the earth, or discovered in the digging of common cellars or wells, so that when the wood fuel shall become scarce, and the European methods of boring shall be skilfully pursued, there can be no doubt of its being found in many other places. At present, the ballasting of ships from [...] countries abroad, and the coal mines in Virginia, which he con­venient to ship navigation, occasion a good deal of coal to be brought [...]o the Philadelphia market. From this great abundance and variety of fuel it results, that Pennsylvania, and the United States in general, are well suited to all manufactories, that are effected by fire, such as furnaces, foundaries, forges, glass houses, breweries, distilleries, steel works, smiths shops, and all other manufactories in metal, soap boil­ing, chandlers shops, pot ash works, sugar and other refineries, &c. &c.

Ship building is a business in which the port of Philadelphia ex­ceeds most parts of the world. Masts, spars, timber and plank, not only from their own state and the other states on the Delaware, are constantly for sale in their market, but the mulberry of the Chesapeak, and the evergreen or live oak and red cedar of the Carolinas and Georgia, are so abundantly imported, that nine tenths of their vessels are built of them. No vessels are better than these. A live oak and cedar ship of 200 tons, carpenter's measurement, can be fitted to take i [...] a cargo for 14l. currency per ton; and there is not a port in Eu­rope in which an oak ship can be equally well built and fitted for 20l. [...] ton currency, or 12l. sterling. This fact may appear doubt­ful or extraordinary, but it is certainly true; and it is greatly in fa­vour [Page 478] of the ship carpenters and other tradesmen employed in fitting and building ships, as well as merchants and farmers, whose interests are so much connected with navigation.

The distance of Philadelphia from the sea has been made an object­ion by some, and the closing of the river by the ice, which happens almost every winter. Amsterdam, the greatest port in Europe, is in­accessible in the winter. But it is a fact, that, notwithstanding these objections, their vessels make as many West India voyages as those of the two other principal sea ports of the middle states; and though the river is frozen from three to nine weeks almost every winter, yet there are occasional openings, which give opportunities for fleets of merchantmen to go out and come in. The fine corn and provision country which lies near Philadelphia, enables the merchants to load their vessels in the winter, and the market is regularly supplied with flour, pork, beef, lumber, staves, iron, and many other of their prin­cipal articles of exportation. Little time is therefore lost, and their trade increases. The crop of 1789, and other exports from the harv­est of that year to that of 1790, it was supposed, would load 1200,00 tons of shipping. A very extensive back country; and many large bodies of new lands, are settling fast, which must send their produce to the Philadelphia market.

PRODUCTIONS, MANUFACTURES, AGRICULTURE, EXPORTS, &c.} We mention these articles together, because it is diffi­cult to separate them. Under the foregoing head, we have anticipated some things, that might be naturally mentioned here. The produce, manufactures and exports of Pennsylvania are very many and various; viz. wheat, flour, middlings, ship stuff, bran, shorts, ship bread, white water biscuit, rye, rye flour, Indian corn or maize, Indian meal, buck­wheat, buck wheat meal, bar and pig iron, steel, nail rods, nails, iron hoops, rolled iron, tire, gunpowder, cannon ball, iron cannon, mus­quets, ships, boats, oars, handspikes, masts, spars, ship timber, ship blocks, cordage, square timber, scantling, plank, boards, staves, h [...]d­ing▪ shingles, wooden hoops, tanners bark, corn fans, coopers wa [...], bricks, coarse earthen or potters ware, a very little ordinary stone ware, glue, parchment, shoes, boots, foal leather, upper leather, dressed [...] and sheep skins, and gloves and garments of the same, fine hats, many common, and a few coarse; thread, cotton, worsted and yarn hosiery, writing, wrapping, blotting, sheathing and hanging paper, stationery, playing cards, copper, silver and gold, clocks and watches, musical in­struments, snuff, manufactured tobacco, chocolate, mustard seed and mustard, starch, hairpowder, flaxseed, flaxseed oyl, flax, hemp, wool and cotton cards, pickled beef, pork, shad, herrings, tongues and stur­geon, hams and other bacon, tallow, hogs lard, butter, cheese, candles, soap, bees wax, loaf sugar, pot and pearl ash, rum and other strong waters, beer, porter, hops, winter and summer barley, oats, spelts, on­ions, potatoes, turnips, cabbages, carrots, parsnips, red and white clo­ver, timothy, and most European vegetables and grasses, apples, peach­es, plumbs, pears, apricots, grapes, both native and imported, and other European fruits, working and pleasurable carriages, horses, black cattle, sheep, hogs, wood for cabinet makers, lime-stone, coal, free­stone and marble.

Some of these productions are fine, some indifferent; some of the manufactures are considerable, for a young country circumstanced [...] [Page 479] this has been, some inconsiderable; but they are enumerated, to show the general nature of the state, and the various pursuits of the inhab­itants. In addition to them we may mention, that a lead mine and two or three salt springs have been discovered in the new country, which will no doubt be worked, as soon as the demand for these articles to the westward increases. We ought also to notice the great forests for making pot and pearl ash. Marble is found in many parts of the state.

The manufactures of Pennsylvania have encreased exceedingly within a few years, as well by master workmen and journeymen from abroad, as by the encreased skill and industry of their own citizens. Household or family manufactures have greatly advanced, and valuable acquisitions have been made of implements and machinery to save labour, either imported, or invented in the United States. The hand machines for carding and spinning cotton have been introduced by foreigners, and improved upon; but they have lately obtained the water mill for spinning cotton, and a water mill for flax, which is ap­plicable also to spinning hemp and wool. These machines promise an early establishment of the cotton, linen and hempen branches, and must be of very great service in the woolen branch. Additional em­ployment for weavers, dyers, bleachers and other manufacturers must be the consequence. Paper mills, gun-powder mills, steel works, roll­ing and flitting mills, printing figured goods of paper, linen and cot­ton, coach making, book printing, and several other branches, are wonderfully advanced, and every month seems to extend the old man­ufactures, or to introduce new ones. There are upwards of 50 paper mills in Pennsylvania which work materials of no intrinsic value. The manu­factures from the mills are computed at 250,000 dollars. The hands em­ployed in them, do not exceed 300. It is calculated that their paper mills alone indemnify them for five eighths of their quota of the expenses of the general government, and the interest of the public debt.

The advancement of the agriculture of Pennsylvania is the best proof [...] can be given of the comfort and happiness it affords to its farm­ing, manufacturing and trading citizens. In the year 1786 their ex­ports of flour were 150,000 barrels (exclusive of many other articles;) in 1787 they were 202,000 barrels; in 1788 they were 220,000 bar­rels; and in 1789 they were 369,618 barrels; which exceeds any ex­port ever made in the times of the province or in the times of the Commonwealth. The produce of flax in encreased in a much greater degree, and that of wool is considerably more than it was before the revolution. A new article is likely to be added to the list of their productions, which is a well tasted and wholesome sugar, made of the Maple Tree. It has been proved by many fair and careful experiments, that it is in the power of a substantial farmer, that has a family about him, easily to make twelve hundred weight of this sugar every season, without hiring any additional hands, or any utensils, but those that are necessary for his family and farm use. The time is which it can [...] made is from the middle of February to the end of March, when [...]mers in this country have very little to do, as it is too early to though or dig. The price of sugar being lower here than in Europe, this article may be reckoned at 100 Mexican dollars per annum to very careful and skilful farmer, that owns land bearing the sugar people. Of these there are some millions of acres in Pennsylvania and [...] adjacent states, and at least one or two millions belonging to this [Page 480] state, for sale. It seems also highly probable that this valuable tree may be transplanted, and thus be obtained by almost any farmer in the state, and that men of property, who will purchase kettles and hire hands for the above short period, may make large quantities.

No difficulty lies in the way of any person, who desires to become a free and equal citizen. On the day of his landing he may buy a farm, a house, merchandize, or raw materials; he may open a work shop, a counting house, an office, or any other place of lawful busi­ness, and pursue his calling without any hindrance, or the payment of any sum of money to the public. The right of electing and being e­lected (which does not affect his business or his safety) is not granted till the expiration of two years, which prudence requires.

A privilege, almost peculiar to this state, has been granted to for­eigners by the legislature—that of buying and holding lands and hous­es within this commonwealth, without relinquishing their allegiance to the country in which they were born. They can sell on bequeath the lands, receive the rents, and, in short, have every territorial and pecu­niary right, that a natural born Pennsylvanian has; but no civil right. As they profess to owe allegiance to a foreign prince or government, and reside in a foreign country, where they of course have civil rights, they cannot claim them, nor ought they to desire them here; since no man can serve two masters. If they chuse, at any time after purchase, to come out to this country, and make themselves citizens; of if they chuse to give their estate to a child, or other person, who will do so; either of them may become citizens to all intents and purposes.

Such is the present situation of things in Pennsylvania which is more or less the same in several other of the American states, viz. District of Main, New Hampshire, Vermont, New York, Vir­ginia, the Carolinas and Georgia; but though not so in the [...]est, the principal difference is, that they are so fully people that there are few new lands of any value unsold, and farming lan [...], that are improved, are of course dearer. In those states, however, agriculture, commerce, manufactures, the fisheries, and navigation afford comfortable subsistence and ample rewards of profit to the in­dustrious and well disposed, amidst the blessings of civil and religious liberty.

POPULATION AND CHARACTER.] The population of this [...] is mentioned in the table. It is nearly 10 for every square miles. The number of militia is estimated at upwards of 90,000, between [...] and 53 years of age.

The inhabitants are principally the descendants of the English, Irish, and Germans, with some Scotch, Welch, Swedes, and a few Dutch▪ There are also many of the Irish and Germans, who emigrated wh [...] young, or middle aged. The Friends and Episcopalians are chiefly of English extraction, and compose about one third of the inhabitants. They live principally in the city of Philadelphia, and in the count [...] of Chester, Philadelphia, Bucks and Montgomery. The Irish are mostly Presbyterians, but some Catholics. Their ancestors came from the north of Ireland, which was originally settled from Scotland hence they have sometimes been called Scotch Irish, to denote their double descent. But they are commonly and more properly called Irish, or the descendants of people from the north of Ireland. They inhabit the western and frontier counties, and are numerous.

[Page 481] The Germans compose about one quarter of the inhabitants of Pennsylvania. They are most numerous in the north parts of the city of Philadelphia, and the counties of Philadelphia, Montgomery, Bucks, Dauphin, Lancaster, York and Northampton; mostly in the four last, and are spreading in other parts. They consist of Luther­ans, (who are the most numerous sect) Calvinists or Reformed Church, Mo [...]avians▪ Catholics, Mennonists▪ Tunkers (corruptly called Dunkers) and Zwingfelters, who are a species of Quakers. These are all dis­tinguished for their temperance, industry and economy.

The Germans have usually fifteen of sixty nine members in the assem­bly; and some of them have arisen to the first honours in the state, and now fill a number of the higher offices. Yet the body of them want education. A literary spirit has however of late been in­creasing among them.

The Baptists (except the Mennonist and Tunker Baptists, who are Germans) are chiefly the descendants of emigrants from Wales, and are not numerous. A proportionate assemblage of the national prejudic­es, the manners, customs, religions and political sentiments of all these, will form the Pennsylvanian character. As the leading traits in this character, thus constituted, we may venture to mention industry, fru­ [...]lity, bordering in some instances on parsimony, enterprize, a taste and ability for improvements in mechanics, in manufactures, in agri­culture, in public buildings and institutions, in commerce and in the [...]ral sciences; temperance, plainness and simplicity in dress and manners; pride and humility in their extremes; inoffensiveness and intrigue; and in regard to religion, variety and harmony. Such ap­pear to be the distinguishing traits in the collective Pennsylvanian character.

RELIGION.] The situation of religion and religious rights and liberty in Pennsylvania, is a matter that deserves the attention of all [...]ber and well disposed people, who may have thoughts of this coun­try. This state always afforded an asylum to the persecuted sects of Europe. No church or society ever was established here, no tythes or tenths can be demanded; and though some regulations of the crown of England excluded two churches from a share in the government of the province, these are now done away with regard to every religious so­ciety whatever, except the Hebrew church. But a convention of special representatives of the citizens of Pennsylvania have had un­der consideration all the errors that have inadvertently crept into their constitution and frame of government, and, in the act they have pub­lished for the examination of the people, they have rejected the half­ [...]y doctrine of TOLERATION, and have established, upon firm and per­ [...]ly equal ground, all denominations of religious men. By the pro­ [...] of the new code▪ a Protestant, a Roman Catholic and a He­ [...] may elect or be elected to any office in the state, and pursue any [...] calling, occupation or profession.

LITERARY, HUMANE, AND OTHER USEFUL SOCIETIES.] These [...] more numerous and flourishing in Pennsylvania, than in any of the [...] States. The names of these improving institutions, the times when they were established, and a summary of the benevolent de­ [...] they were intended to accomplish, will be mentioned in their or­ [...].

[Page 482] 1. THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, HELD AT PHILA­DELPHIA, FOR PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. This society was formed January 2d, 1769, by the union of two other literary societies that had subsisted for some time in Philadelphia; and were created one body corporate and politic, with such powers▪ privileges, and immuni­ties as are necessary for answering the valuable purposes which the so­ciety had originally in view, by a charter granted by the common­wealth of Pennsylvania, on the 15th of March, 1780. This society have already published two very valuable volumes of their transactions; one in 1771, the other in 1786.

In 1771, this society consisted of nearly 300 members; and up­wards of 120 have since been added; a large proportion of which, are foreigners of the first distinction in Europe.

Their charter allows them to hold lands, gifts, &c. to the amount of the clear yearly value of ten thousand bushels of wheat. The number of members is not limited.

2. THE SOCIETY FOR PROMOTING POLITICAL EXQUIRIES; con­sisting of fifty members, instituted in February, 1787.

3. THE COLLEGE OF PHYSICIANS, instituted in 1787, for the promotion of medical, anatomical and chemical knowledge, incorpo­rated by act of Assembly, March, 17 [...]9.

4. THE PENNSYLVANIA HOSPITAL, a humane institution, which was first meditated in 1750, and carried into effect by means of a liber­al subscription of about 3000l. and by the assistance of the assembly, who, in 1751, granted as much more for the purpose. The present building was begun in 1754, and finished in 1756. This hospital is under the direction of twelve managers, chosen annually, and is visit­ed every year by a committee of the assembly. The accounts of the managers are submitted to the inspection of the legislature. Six phy­sicians attend gratis, and generally prescribe twice or three times in a week, in their turns. This hospital is the general receptacle of luna­tics and madmen, and of those affected with other disorders, and are unable to support themselves. Here they are humanely treated and well provided for.

5. THE PHILADELPHIA DISPENSARY, for the medical relief of the poor. This benevolent institution was established on the 12th of April 1786, and is supported by annual subscriptions of thirty five shillings each person. No less than 1800 patients were admitted, with [...] sixteen months after the first opening of the dispensary. It is under the direction of twelve managers, and six physicians, all of whom attend gr [...]tis. This institution exhibits an application of something like the mechanical powers, to the purposes of humanity. The greatest quantity of good is produced this way with the least money. Five hundred pounds a year defrays all the expenses of the institu­tion. The poor are taken care of in their own houses, and pro­vide every thing for themselves, except medicines, cordial drinks▪ &c.

6. THE PENNSYLVANIA SOCIETY for promoting the ABOLITI [...] OF SLAVERY, and the relief of FREE NEGROES unlawfully held in [...] age. This society was begun in 1774, and enlarged on the 23d of April, 1787. The officers of the society consist of a president, two vice-presidents, two secretaries, a treasurer, four counsellors, an elect­ing committee of twelve, and an acting committe [...] of six members; all [Page 483] of whom, except the last, are to be chosen annually be ballot, on the first Monday in January. The society meet quarterly, and each mem­ber contributes ten shillings annually, in quarterly payments, towards defraying its contingent expenses.

The legislature of this state, have favoured the humane designs of this society, by "An Act for the gradual Abolition of Slavery;" passed on the first of March, 1780, wherein, among other things, it is ordained that no person born within the state, after the passing of the act, shall be considered as a servant for life; and all perpetual slavery, is by this act, forever abolished. The act provides, that those who would, in case this act had not been made, have been born ser­vants or slaves, shall be deemed such, till they shall attain to the age of twenty-eight years; but they are to be treated in all respects as servants bound by indenture for four years.

7. THE SOCIETY OF THE UNITED BRETHREN for propagating the gospel among the heathens, instituted in 1787, to be held statedly at Beth­ [...]hem. An act, incorporating this society, and investing it with all necessary powers and privileges for accomplishing its pious designs, was passed by the legislature of the state, on the 27th of February, 1788. They can hold lands, houses, &c. to the annual amount of two thousand pounds.

These pious Brethern, commonly called Moravians, began a mission among the Mahikan, Wampano, Delaware, Shawanoe, Nantikok and other Indians, about fifty years ago, and were so successful as to add [...] than one thousand souls to the christian church by baptism. [...] hundred of these have died in the christian faith; about 300 live with the missionaries near Lake Erie, and the rest are either dead, or apostates in the wilderness.

8. THE PENNSYLVANIA SOCIETY for the encouragement of manufac­tures and useful arts▪ instituted in 1787, open for the reception of ev­ery citizen in the United States, which will fulfil the engagements of a member of the same. The society is under the direction of a pre­sident, four vice-presidents▪ and twelve managers, besides subordinate officers. Each member, on his admission, pays ten shillings at least [...] the general fund; and the same sum annually, till he shall cease to [...] a member.

[...]sides these, a very respectable Insurance Company has lately been established in Philadelphia, with a capital of 600,000 dollars, who have commenced business to advantage—There is also a SOCIETY [...] ALLEVIATING THE MISERIES O [...] PRISONS; and a HUMANE SOCIETY, for the recovering and restoring to life the bodies of drown­ [...] persons; instituted in 1770, under the direction of thirteen man­agers. And a SOCIETY for the aid and protection of Irish emigrants.

Also, an Agricultural Society; a Society for German emigrants; a Marine [...]ery, consisting of Captains of vessels; a Charitable Society for [...] support of widows and families of Presbyterian clergymen; and St. George's, [...] Andrew's and the Hibernian charitable Societies. Most of these so­ [...]ies are in the city of Philadelphia.

COLLEGES, ACADEMIES AND SCHOOLS.] From the enterprizing and literary spirit of the Pennsylvanians, we should naturally conclude, [...] is fact, that these are numerous.

[Page 484] In Philadelphia is the University of Pennsylvania, founded and en­dowed by the legislature during the war. Professorships are establish­ed in all the liberal arts and sciences, and a complete course of educa­tion may be pursued here from the first rudiments of literature to the highest branches of science.

The college and academy of Philadelphia, was founded by charter be­tween 30 and 40 years ago, and endowed, by subscriptions of liberal minded persons. Though this institution was interrupted in its pro­gress for several years during the late war, yet being re-established since the peace, it has rapidly recovered its former state of prosperity, and to the bench of professors has lately been added one of common and federal law, which renders it in reality, though not in name, a university. An act to unite these two institutions has passed the le­gislature. By their union they will constitute one of the most respect­able seminaries of learning in the United States.

DICKINSON COLLEGE, at Carlisle, 120 miles westward of Phila­delphia, was founded in 1783, and has a principal, three professors, a philosophical apparatus, a library consisting of nearly 3000 volumes, four thousand pounds in funded certificates, and 10,000 acres of land; the last, the donation of the state. In 1787, there were eighty students belonging to this college. This number is annually increasing. It was named after his Excellency John Dickinson▪ author of the Pennsylva­nia Farmer's letters, and formerly president of the supreme executive council of this state.

In 1787, a college was founded at Lancaster, 66 miles from Phila­delphia, and honoured with the name of FRANKLIN COLLEGE, after his Excellency Dr. Franklin. This college is for the Germans; in which they may educate their youth in their own language, and in con­formity to their own habits. The English language, however, is taught in it. Its endowments are nearly the same as those of Dickinson col­lege. Its trustees consist of Lutherans, Presbyterians, Calvinists and Eng­lish; of each an equal number. The principal is a Lutheran, and the vice principal is a Calvinist.

The Episcopalians have an academy at Yorktown, in York county. There are also academies at Germantown, at Pittsburg, at Washington, at Allen's town, and other places; these are endowed by do­nations from the legislature, and by liberal contributions of individ­uals.

The schools for young men and women in Bethlehem and Nazareth, under the direction of the people called Moravians, are upon the best establishment of any schools in America. Besides these, there are private schools in different parts of the state; and to promote the ed­ucation of poor children, the state have appropriated a large tract of land for the establishment of free schools. A great proportion of the labouring people among the Germans and Irish, are, however, ex­tremely ignorant.

CHIEF TOWNS.] The city of Philadelphia, capital of the state of Pennsylvania, and the present seat of government of the United States of America, lies in latitude 39° 56′ North, and longitude 73° West from the meridian of London, upon the western bank of the river Delaware, which is here but a mile in breadth, about 120 miles from the Atlantic Ocean, by the course of the bay and river, and about 55 or 60 miles from the sea, in a south eastward direction.

[Page 485] It was laid out by William Penn, the first proprietary and founder [...] the province, in the year 1683, and settled by a colony from Eng­land, which arrived in that and the preceding years, and was increas­ed, by a constant and regular influx of foreigners, to so great a degree, that in less than a century, and within the life time of the first per­son born within it of European parents, it was computed to contain 6,000 houses and 40,000 inhabitants in the city and suburbs.

The ground plot of the city is an oblong square, about one mile North and South, and two miles East and West, lying in the narrowest part of the isthmus between the Delaware and Schuylkill rivers, a­bout five miles in a right line above their confluence. The plain is so nearly level, except upon the bank of the Delaware, that art and labour were necessary to dig common sewers and water courses in many places to drain the streets. In the beginning of this settlement it was expected, that the fronts on both rivers would be first improved for the convenience of trade and navigation, and that the buildings would extend gradually in the rear of each, until they would meet and form one town extending from east to west; but experience soon convinced the settlers that the Delaware front was alone sufficient for quays and landing places, and that the Schuylkill lay at too great a [...]stance [...] form part of the town on its banks; whence it followed that the town increased northward and southward of the original plot, on the Delaware front, and now occupies a space near three miles in length, north and south, while the buildings in the middle, where they are most extended, do not reach a mile from the Dela­ware.

The city has been twice incorporated, and the limits thereof re­strained to the oblong, originally laid out by William Penn, without including the Northern or Southern suburbs. This plot is intersect­ed by a number of streets at right angles with each other, nine of which run East and West from Delaware to Schuylkill, and twenty three North and South, crossing the first at right angles, forming one hundred and eighty four squares of lots for buildings. The streets [...]ning East and West are named (except High Street near the middle of the city) from the trees found in the country upon the ar­rival of the colony; Vine, Sa [...]a [...]ras, Mulberry, High, Chesnut, Wal­nut, Spruce, Pine and Cedar Streets, and those running North and South from their numeral order, Front, Second, Third, Fourth, &c. [...] Broad Street, which is midway between the two rivers. In deeds and other descriptive writings which require exactness, these streets have the Delaware or Schuylkill prefixed to their numeral names, to distinguish to which front they belong; as Delaware Second Street, &c. but as there [...]e very few buildings Westward of Broad Street, this addition is never made in common conversation, but when they [...] named they are understood of the Delaware front, unless Schuyl­kill be added.

Of these, High Street is 100 feet, Broad Street 113, Mulberry 60, and all the others 30 feet wide. Within the improved parts of the [...] they are paved, in the middle with pebble stones, for carts and [...]riages, [...] usually contains three fi [...]ths of the whole breadth, [...] [...] each side with bricks for foot passengers; between the brick and stone pavements, are gutters, paved with brick, to carry off the [Page 486] water, and the foot ways are defended from the approach of carriages, by rows of posts placed without the gutters, at the distance of 10 or 12 feet from each other.

Besides the forementioned main streets, there are many others not originally laid down in the plot, the most public of which are Water Street and Dock Street. Water Street is 30 feet wide, running be­low the bank, at the distance of about 40 feet Eastward from and paral­lel to Front Street, extending from the North line of the city, South­ward to the bridge over the Dock, which was formerly a draw bridge, and retains that name in common use, although it was converted in­to a stone arch above 30 years since; from the bridge it is 40 feet wide in a right line to Pine Street, and leaves a row of houses without yards, on the bank, in its whole length, between it and Front Street; Southward of Pine Street, there is an offset of about 80 feet Eastward, and the street from thence to Cedar Street is 45 feet wide and called Penn Street. This street, in the original plan, was intended only for a call way to accommodate the wharves and stores to be erected under the bank and not to rise more than four feet above it, so as to leave the river open to the view from the west side of Front Street; but the inhabit­ants were soon convinced that the ground, on both streets, was too valuable to be kept unimproved, in any degree, merely for the [...]ake of a prospect, and it is closely built with lofty houses (except a very few vacancies here and there) throughout the whole front on both sides, and commodious wharves are extended into the river, at which the largest ships that use the port, can lie in safety to discharge and receive their cargoes, and are defended from the ice in winter by the piers, made of logs extending into the river, sunk with stone and filled with earth, so as to be equally firm with the main land.

Dock Street is the only crooked street in the city; beginning at the bridge in Front Street, and extending Northwestward in a serpentine tract, through two squares, across Second and Walnut Streets, and terminates at Third Street; another branch of it extends South West­ward across Spruce Street, and terminates at Second Street. The ground occupied by this street, and by an open space between it and Spruce street, below the bridge, was formerly a swamp, and was given by William Penn to the corporation for the use of the city; it was in­tended as a place to dig a bason and docks to shelter the shipping, but experience proved that ships could be defended from the ice by the piers extended into the river, and that the dock could not be kept clean but at an expense far beyond its utility, wherefore it was neglected till it became a nuisance offensive to the smell and injuri­ous to the health of the inhabitants, and was by act of assembly, or­dered to be arched over and covered with earth, whereby the city acquired a beautiful street more than 100 feet in breadth towards the water, and not less than 90 feet in the narrowest part.

The number of the streets, lanes and alleys, laid out by the owners of the lots before they were built on, is too great to be enumerated here, there being scarce a square that is not intersected by one or more of them, some of them, continued in a right line through sever­al squares, and so spacious as to be easily mistaken for main streets, others only through one square.

[Page 487] The city was first incorporated by charter under the great seal of the province, in the year 1701: before that period it was called the town of Philadelphia. By this charter William Penn nominated the first mayor, recorder, aldermen and common councilmen, and granted them, among other privileges and franchises, that of electing others to supply vacancies, and even to encrease their own number at plea­sure; the public grounds were granted to them by the name of the [...] and commonalty of the city of Philadelphia, but the common­ [...]y had no share in the government or estate of the city, the whole body being self elective, and not accountable to the citizens in any re­ [...]ct. It would be difficult to account for so extraordinary a charter [...] the wisdom of William Penn, did not tradition inform us that among the first settlers were a considerable number from the city of Bristol in England, whose charter, granted at an early period, before the rights of the commonalty were well understood, had been famil­iarized by habit, which induced them to request a similar one; a copy of the Bristol charter was accordingly procured, and with little varia­tion adopted. It was not long however, before the commonalty be­g [...]n to be dissatisfied with it, and to make frequent complaints to the assembly, of the abuses that were practised under it; many of which appear upon the minutes of the house. At at an early period after the charter, the legislative powers of this corporation were very lim­ited, they could not levy a shilling by taxes, for any use whatever, and could employ the income of the city estates only for the use and em­bolishment of the city; wherefore we see few monuments raised to preserve the memory of that corporation. Although the first men for integrity and abilities to be found in the city were elected into the office of the body politic, yet such is the nature of unlimited power, not accountable to the people, that it will divert the best men from purposes, which, before they were invested with the power, they would have highly approved. The jealousy which the citizens [...]tained of the corporation, pervaded the general assembly of the province, and when the lighting, watching and paving the city became a desirable object, the representatives of the freemen would not en­ [...] the corporation alone with the power of raising or expending the [...]ey necessary for these purposes; they could not however cast such a reflection on the respectable characters of which that body was composed as wholly to vest these powers with others; they pursued a middle line, and constituted two separate bodies by the names of ci­ty wardens and street commissioners, to the former of whom the light­ing and watching, and to the latter the paving of the streets was com­mitted; the mayor or recorder and four of the aldermen concurring with each body, in laying the taxes and prescribing the mode of ex­pending them; thus the city legislation for these purposes became a [...]pounded of two branches, the wardens and commissioners imme­diately elected by the people, in the same manner as their representatives in assembly, constituted the democratic, and the mayor and aldermen the aristocratic branch. These bodies, thus compounded, conducted the business committed to them, with great harmony, nor is there the [...]st recollection of any disagreement between them; the taxes were [...] with equality, collected with moderation, and expended for the [...] use and improvement of the city; one complaint only had foun­dation, which arose from the nature rather than from any abuse of the [Page 488] powers; the number of wardens and street commissioners was [...] great, as at very moderate wages, to render those boards too expen­sive.

For the honour of the late corporation it ought not to be emitted, that the mayor's court was always filled with an able lawyer for the re­corder, and another for the prosecution of criminal offences; and such was the orderly and upright administration of justice in it, that no court in the province, or perhaps in any other country, exceed­ed it.

The prejudices under which the old corporation laboured from its original constitution, were so strong, that upon the revolution, the gen­eral assembly declared by an act passed during their first session, "That the powers and jurisdiction hitherto exercised by the mayor, recorder and aldermen of the city of Philadelphia, were not founded on the authority of the people, and are therefore become null and void." Wherefore by that and several subsequent acts, the powers of the cor­poration were distributed between the supreme executive council, the city magistrates, and the wardens and street commissioners, who ex­ercised them from the year 1777, to 1789. The prejudices, which had no foundation as against corporations in general, but only against the constitution of the late corporation of the city, were however so strong, that it was with difficulty the people could be prevailed upon to submit to a new incorporation of the city. The defects in the ad­ministration of justice and governing the police of the city at length became so glaring, that they were seen by all classes of people, and their minds prepared for an act of incorporation. The general assem­bly, in the winter sessions of 1789, favouring the wishes of the citi­zens, passed an act, entitled, an act to incorporate the city of Philadel­phia, which, with a supplement passed in 1790, constitutes the present city charter. By these acts

The common council consists of two branches; fifteen aldermen are chosen by the freeholders to continue in office for seven years, they chuse a recorder from the citizens at large, for seven years, and a mayor from their own number for one year. Thirty common coun­cilmen are chosen by the citizens at large, entitled to vote for repre­sentatives in assembly, to continue in office for three years; these were intended to form a balanced government, upon the principle that the choice by freeholders, and for a longer term, would produce a more select body of aldermen, and that the citizens at large would chuse characters fitter to represent and form the popular branch of ci­ty government. Eight aldermen and sixteen common councilmen form a quorum or board, to transact business, at which the mayor or recorder presides; they sit and deliberate together, but no act is legal, unless a majority of the aldermen, a majority of the common coun­cilmen present, and the mayor or recorder concur.

There is not perhaps in the world a more liberal plan of city gov­ernment; every class of citizens have an opportunity of representing and being represented. The body is sufficiently numerous to contain some of every description, and of every species of talents and infor­mation necessary for deliberation and execution, and yet not so large as to be encumbered with its own weight; it possesses the powers of legislation and taxation in all cases necessary for the well governing and improving the city, except in contradiction to acts of the general [Page 489] assembly; and from the many improvements already introduced, there is reason to hope that its police will be equal to that of any modern city.

A city court is held by the mayor, recorder and aldermen four times a year, and holds cognizance of all crimes and misdemeanors committed within the city.

A court of aldermen, having cognizance of debts above forty shil­lings, and not exceeding ten pounds, is held every week, beginning on Monday morning, and setting by adjournments until the business of the week is finished.

Each alderman has separate cognizance of debts under forty shil­lings.

The number of inhabitants within the city and suburbs (including the district of Southwark and the compactly built part of the North­ern Liberties, which to every purpose but as to their government, are considered as parts of the city) is found by the late census to be 42,520, and the number of houses 6,65 [...], and stores or work shops 415.

The houses for publick worship are numerous, and are as follows:

The Friends or Quakers▪ have 5 * The Swedish Lutherans, 1
The Presbyterians, and Seceders, 6 The Moravians, 1
The Episcopalians, 3 The Baptists, 1
The German Lutherans, 2 The Universal Baptists, 1
The German Calvinists, 1 The Methodists, 1
The Catholics, 4 The Jews. 1

The other publick buildings in the city, besides the university and college, already mentioned, are the following, viz.

[...] state house and offices, Two incorporated banks,
The city court houses, A house of correction,
A county court house, A dramatic theatre,
A carpenters hall, A publick observatory,
A philosophical society's hall, A medical theatre and elabaratory,
A dispensary, Three brick market houses,
A hospital, and offices, A fish market,
[...] alms house, A publick gaol,

The state house is in Chesnut street, between fifth and sixth streets, and was erected as early as 1735. The building is rather magnificent [...] elegant▪ but when it is remembered that it was built within 53 years after the first European cabin was erected in Pennsylvania, its architecture is justly admired. The state house yard is a neat, ele­gant and spacious publick walk, ornamented with rows of trees; but a high brick wall, which encloses it, limits the prospect.

In 1787, an elegant court house was erected on the left of the state house; and on the right, the town hall or [...]ew court house, and a phi­losophical hall. These add much to the beauty of the square.

South of the state house is the publick goal, built of stone. It has a ground half story, and two stories above it. Every apartment is [Page 490] arched with stone against fire and force. It is a hollow square, 100 feet in front, and is the neatest and most secure building of the kind in America. To the gaol is annexed a work house, with yards to each, to separate the sexes, and criminals from debtors. There have lately been added apartments in the yards for solitary confinement of crimi­nals according to the new penal code. Of 4060 debtors, and 4000 criminals, in the whole 8060 who were confined in this new gaol, be­tween the 28th of September 1780, and the 5th of September 1790, 12 only died a natural death, in the gaol.

The hospital and poor house, in which are upwards of 300 poor peo­ple, whether we consider the buildings, or the designs for which they were erected, are unrivalled in America.

The German church, lately erected, is one of the most elegant church­es in America. Mr. D. Taneberger, one of the united brethren's so­ciety at Litiz, a great mechanical genius, has completed and erected a large organ, for this church.

The market house in High street is acknowledged by Europeans, to exceed any thing they have seen of the kind, in extent, neatness, variety and abundance of provisions. That at Callow Hill, at the north and of the city, and that at the north end, do honour to the citizens and their police.

The city is provided with a number of public and private charita­ble institutions; the principal of which are, the house of employ­ment, a large commodious building, where the poor of the city and some adjoining townships are supported and employed in coarse manufactures to aid in defraying their expenses, under the care of the overseers and guardians of the poor, who are a corporate body creat­ed for this purpose by act of assembly, with power to lay taxes for its further support.

The Pennsylvania hospital, already mentioned.

The Quaker's alms house is supported by that society for the use of their own poor; it is divided into a number of separate houses and rooms for families or single persons who have fallen into decay; most of them contribute by their industry towards their own support, but are supplied with whatever their industry falls short of procuring, by, a committee of the society, and live more comfortably than many who in full health and unhurt by accident, provide for their own subsist­ance; there is a considerable garden belonging to this house, from which the city is supplied, at very moderate prices, with every kind of medicinal herbs common to the climate.

A house founded by the late Dr. John Kearsley the elder, for the support of twelve elderly widows of the Protestant Episcopal com­munion, in which a number of persons of that description, who have seen better days, are very comfortably and decently provided for.

The humane society for recovering persons supposed to be dead by drowning, established upon similar principles with those of the same name in most sea ports in Europe; it is under the care of twelve managers, annually chosen by the subscribers; the physicians afford their aid to this institution gratis, a number of these being appointed for the purpose by the managers.

Almost every religious society has a fund under proper direction, some of which are incorporated for the relief of the widows and [Page 491] children of their clergy or other distressed members of their commu­nion.

There are also societies formed for the relief of particular descrip­tions of persons, with funds raised by subscriptions or otherwise, for the purpose, such as the sea captains society, the Delaware pilots soci­ety, separate societies for the relief and assistance of emigrants and o­ther distressed persons, from England, Scotland, Ireland, Germany, [...] some of which are incorporated, [...]o that there can scarce happen an instance of individual distress, for which a mode of advice, assistance or relief is not provided without resort to public beg­ [...]g.

Seminaries of learning are established upon the most enlarged and liberal principles, of which the principal are, the university of Penn­sylvania and college of Philadelphia already noticed.

Almost every religious society have one or more schools under their immediate direction, for the education of their own youth of both sex­es, as well of the rich, who are able to pay, as of the poor, who are [...]ught and provided with books and stationary gratis; besides which, there are a number of private schools under the direction of masters and mistresses, independent of any public body; and there are sever­al private academies for the instruction of young ladies in all the branches of polite literature, suitable to the sex, and there is no indi­vidual, whose parents or guardians, masters or mistresses will take the [...]ble to apply, but will be admitted into some one of these schools, and if they are unable to pay, will be taught gratis; it ought not to [...]mitted, that there is a school for the Africans of every shade or colour, kept under the care and at the expense of the Quakers, into which are admitted gratis, slaves as well as free persons of whatever age, of both sexes, and taught reading, writing, arithmetic, knit­ting, sewing and other useful female accomplishments; this school [...] originally instituted by private subscriptions of the society, with [...] to prepare that degarded race for a better situation in civil life; [...] the will of the late Antony Benezet, of benovelent memory, a considerable donation from the society in England, and some other [...]able devises, have provided funds adequate to its future support, [...] it will no longer be burthensome to individuals.

[...]nday schools, for the instruction of children who would otherwise [...]end that day in idleness or mischief, have lately been instituted, and [...] i [...] to be hoped will tend to amend the morals and conduct of the rising generation.

The public library of Philadelphia is a most useful institution; it contains near ten thousand volumes, well selected, for the information and improvement of all ranks of the citizens; they are deposited [...]n [...] elegant building lately erected, in a modern style, and are accessa­ble every day in the week, except Sunday. Here the man of learn­ing may consult the work of the remotest ages, and trace histories, arts [...] sciences from their infancy to this present state of improvement, [...] the mechanic, the labourer, the student or apprentice may be sup­ [...] with books to improve their minds or amuse them in their va­ [...] hours at home. The company consists of some hundreds of proprietors, incorporated by charter, who pay ten shillings annually [...] the purchase of new books and defraying incidental expenses; [...]lve directors are annually chosen, who manage the concerns of [Page 492] the company and keep a correspondence with Europe, from whence they are regularly supplied with new publications of reputation and merit.

The corporation have lately ordered the streets, lanes and alleys to be marked at every intersection of each other, and the houses to [...] numbered. The names painted on boards, with an index hand point­ing to the progression of the numbers, are already affixed at the cor­ners of the streets, so that with the aid of the directory, a stranger may find without difficulty, any house whose street and number is known.

The city within a few years past has experienced a very remarka­ble revolution in respect to the healthiness of its inhabitants; the bill of mortality proves that the number of deaths has considerably de­creased since the year 1783, notwithstanding the great increase of its population; this change in favour of health and life is ascribed by physicians to the co-operation of the following causes. 1st, The arch­ing the dock, whereby a very noxious and offensive nuisance was re­moved. 2d, The cultivation of the lots adjoining and partly sur­rounding the city, whereby another extensive source of putrid exhala­tions is dried up. 3d, An increased care in cleansing the streets. 4th, An increase of horticulture, and consequently greater consump­tion of vegetable aliments. 5th, The institution of the dispensary, which has extended medical and to many hundreds in a year, who ei­ther perished for the want of it or were sacrificed by quacks. 6th, The more improved state of physic, whence several diseases formerly fatal in most instances are better understood and treated, and therefore more generally cured. And 7th, From a general diffusion of know­ledge among all classes of people, from their libraries, their numerous societies, monthly, weekly and daily publications, whence the people at large are better acquainted than formerly with the means of pre­serving their health, as may be exemplified in one instance; there was but one death in the summer of 1792 from drinking cold water, whereas some years ago twenty has not been an uncommon number from this single cause.

No city can boast of so many useful improvements in manufactures, in the mechanical arts, in the art of healing, and particularly in the science of humanity▪ as Philadelphia. The tradesmen and manufac­turers have become so numerous, that they are beginning to associate for mutual improvement, and to promote regularity and uniformity in their several occupations. The carpenters, the cordwainers, the tailors, the watch makers, the joiners and hair dressers, have alrea­dy associated, and others are forming into companies upon the same plan.

The Philadelphians have exerted their endeavours with happy and growing success, to prevent the intemperate use of spirituous liquors. In accomplishing this benevolent purpose, on which so much of the prosperity and glory of our empire depend, every good citizen in the union ought cheerfully to send his aid and influence. As one impor­tant step towards effecting their design, they are encouraging brewe­ries which are fast increasing. There are 14 already in the city and 7 or 8 in the country. The increase of the consumption of beer, in the course of a few years past▪ in every part of America, and partic­ularly in Pennsylvania, has been astonishing. It has become a fash­ionable [Page 493] drink, and it is not improbable but that in a few years, it will [...] into universal use among all classes of people. In proportion [...] the use of beer increases, in the same proportion will the use of [...] liquors decrease. This will be a happy change. The Phi­ladelphia porter, which is exported to various parts, is reckon­ [...] equal to that which is manufactured in London.

In short, whether we consider the local situation, the size the beau­ty, the variety and utility of the improvements, in mechanics, in ag­riculture and manufactures, or the industry, the enterprize▪ the human­ity and the abilities of the inhabitants of the city of Philadelphia, it merits to be viewed as the capital of the flourishing EMPIRE OF UNITED AMERICA.

The borough of LANCASTER is the largest inland town in the Unit­ed States. It is the seat of justice in Lancaster county, and stands on C [...]oga creek, 66 miles, a little to the north of the west from Phi­ladelphia. Its trade is already large; and must increase in proportion at the surrounding country populates. It contains about 7 or 800 [...]ses, besides a most elegant court house, a number of handsome [...]rches and other public building, and about 5000 souls, a great proportion of whom are manufacturers.

CARLISLE is the seat of justice in Cumberland county, and is 120 [...]es westward of Philadelphia. It contains upwards of 1500 inhab­itants, who live in more than 300 stone houses, and worship in three [...]ches. They have also a court house and a college. Thirty eight years ago, this spot was a wilderness, and inhabited by Indians and [...] beasts. A like instance of the rapid progress of the arts of civ­ [...] life is scarcely to be found in history.

PITT [...]UGH, on the western side of the Allegany mountains, 320 [...] westward of Philadelphia, is beautifully situated on a large [...], which is the po [...]t of land between the Allegany and Mononga­ [...] river, and about a quarter of a mile above their confluence, in [...] 40° 26′ north. It contains about 200 houses, stores and shops, [...] 8 or 900 inhabitants, who are chiefly Presbyterians and Episcopa­lians. The surrounding country is very hilly, but good land, [...]d well [...] with excellent coal. The rivers abound with fine fish, such as [...], perch▪ and cat fish, which are all much larger than the same spe­ [...] on the eastern side of the mountains.

This town is laid out on Penn's plan, and is a thoroughfare for the [...] from the eastern and middle states, to the settlements on the [...].

SUMBURY, the shire town of Northumberland county, is situated on the east side of Susquehannah river, just below the junction of the E. and W. branches, in about latitude 40° 53′ and about 120 miles [...]. W. from Philadelphia, and contains about 100 houses.

BET [...]LEHEM is situated on the river Lehign▪ a western branch of [...] [...] are, fifty three miles north of Philadelphia▪ in latitude 40° [...]. The town being built partly on high rising ground, and partly [...] [...] lower banks of the Manakes, (a fine creek, which affords trout [...] other [...]sh) has a very pleasant and healthy situation, and is fre­quently visited in the summer season by gentry from different parts. [...] prospect is not extensive, being bounded very near by a chain of the Lehigh hills. To the northward is a tract of land called the dry [...].

[Page 494] In the year 1787, the number of inhabitants amounted to between 500 and 600, and the houses were about sixty in number, mostly [...] strong buildings of limestone. The town has since considerably in­creased.

Besides the church public meeting-hall, there are three large [...] ­cious building, viz.

1. The single brethren's or young men's house, facing the [...] street or public road. Here the greatest part of the single [...] journeymen and apprentices of the town are boarded at a mode­rate, under the inspection of an elder and warden, and have, be [...] the public meetings, their house for devotions, morning and eve [...] prayers. Different trades are carried on in the house for the benefit of the same.

2. The single sister's, or young women's house, where they live un­der the care of female inspectors. Such as are not employed in pri­vate families, earn their bread mostly by spinning, sewing, fine [...] work, knitting and other female occupations.

Though this house has its particular regulations to preserve [...] and decorum, and may perhaps bear some resemblance to a nu [...]ery▪ (being sometimes improperly so called) yet the plan is very different. The ladies are at liberty to go about their business in the town, or to take a walk for recreation; and some are employed in private famili [...] or live with their parents; neither are they bound to remain in the single state, for every year some of them enter into the [...] state.

As to their almost uniform dress, the women in general for the sake of avoiding extravagance, and the follies of fashion, have hitherto kept to a particular simple dress, introduced among them in Germany many years ago.

3. The house for the widow women; where such as have not a house of their own, or means to have their own house furnished, [...] nearly in the same way as do the single sisters. Such as are poor, in firm and superannuated, are assisted or maintained by the congrega­tion, as is the case with other members of the same, that are not [...] to obtain subsistence for themselves.

There is, besides, an institution of a society of married men, begun since the year 1770, for the support of their widows. A considera­ble fund or principal has been raised by them, the interest of which, as well as the yearly contributions of the members, is regularly divid­ed among the widows, whose husbands have been members of the in­stitution.

In the house adjoining the church, is the school for girls; and [...] the year 1787, a boarding school for young ladies from different part▪ who are instructed in reading and writing, (both English and Ger­man) grammar, arithmetic, history, geography, needle-work, [...] ­sic, &c.

The minister of the place has the special care and inspection of this as well as of the boys school, which is kept in a separate house, [...] to that purpose, and are taught reading and writing in both language▪ the rudiments of the Latin tongue, arithmetic, &c. These schools, es­pecially that for the young ladies, are deservedly in very high [...] and scholars more than can be accommodated, are offered from all [...] of the United States.

[Page 495] Besides the different houses for private tradesmen, mechanics and [...], there is a public tavern at the north end of the town, with good [...]modations; also a store, with a general assortment of goods; [...]thecary's shop; and large farm-yard; and on the lower part, on [...]kes creek, is a large tanyard, a carriers and dyers shop, a grist [...] fulling mill, oil mill and saw mill; and on the banks of the [...], a brewery.

[...] town is supplied with good water from a spring, which being in [...]wer part of the town, is raised up the hill by a machine of a my [...]ple construction, to the height of upwards of 100 feet, into [...], whence it is conducted by pipes into the several streets and [...] buildings of the town.

The ferry across the river is of such particular contrivance, that [...] large enough to carry a team of six houses, runs on a strong [...] fixed and stretched across; and, by the mere force of the [...], without any other assistance, crosses the river backwards and [...]ds; the flat always being put in an oblique direction, with its [...] end verging towards the line described by the rope.

The greater part of the inhabitants, as well as the people in the neighbourhood, being of German extraction, this language is more in [...] the English. The latter, however, is taught in the schools, [...] divine service performed in both languages.

NAZARETH is ten miles north from Bethlehem, and sixty three [...] from Philadelphia. It is a tract of good land, containing about [...], purchased originally by the Rev. Mr. George Whitfield, [...], and sold two years after to the brethren. The town was laid [...] almost in the center of this tract, in 1772. Two streets cross each [...] at right angles, and form a square, in the middle, of 340 by 200 [...]. The largest building is a stone house, erected in 1755, named [...] Hall, 98 feet by 46 long, and 54 in height. In the lower­ [...] story is a spacious meeting-hall, or church; the upper part of [...] is chiefly fitted for a boarding school, where youth, from [...]ent parts, are under the care and inspection of the minister of [...] and several tutors, and are instructed in the English, Ger­man Latin and French languages; in history geography, book keep­ [...] mathematics, music, drawing and other sciences. The front of the [...] faces a large square open to the south, adjoining a fine piece of [...] ground, and commands a most beautiful and extensive pros­ [...]. Another elegant building on the east side of Nazareth Hall is [...]ited by single sisters, who have the same regulations and way of [...] as those in Bethlehem. Besides their principal manufactory for [...] and twisting cotton, they have lately begun to draw wax [...].

At the southwest corner of the aforesaid square, in the middle of the [...] in the single brethren's house, and on the east southeast corner a [...]. On the southermost end of the street is a good tavern. The [...] are, a few excepted, built of lime stone, one or two stories high, [...] by tradesmen and mechanics mostly of German extraction. [...] inhabitants are supplied with water conveyed to them by pipes [...] fine spring near the town. The place is noted for having an [...]ngly pleasant situation, and enjoying a pure and salubrious air. [...]mber of inhabitants in the town and farms belonging to it, [...] included) constituting one congregation, and meeting for [Page 496] divine service on Sundays and holidays at Nazareth hall, was, [...] that year 1788, about 450.

LITIZ is in Lancaster county, and Warwick township; eight miles from Lancaster, and seventy miles west from Philadelphia. This set­tlement was begun in the year 1757. There are now, besides [...] el­egant church, and the houses of the single brethren and single [...] which form a large square, a number of houses for private [...] with a store and tavern, all in one street. There is also a good farm and several mill works belonging to the place. The number of inhabit­ants, including those that belong to Litiz congregation, living [...] [...] farms in the neighbourhood, amounted, in 1787, to upwards of [...].

The three last mentioned towns are settled chiefly by Moravians, [...] the United Brethren.

HARRISBURGH, as it is commonly called, but legally styled Louisburgh, is the principal town in Dauphin county, is a very flourishing [...] about 100 miles W. by N. from Philadelphia. It contained in [...] 130 dwelling houses, a stone goal, and a German church. At that period it had been settled but about three years.

Washington, 300 miles west of Philadelphia, and beyond the [...] has been settled since the war, and is remarkable for the variety of [...] manufactures, for so young and interior a town. It has 32 manufac­turers of 22 different kinds.

CURIOUS SPRINGS.] In the neighbourhood of Reading, it a spring about fourteen feet deep, and about 100 feet square. A [...] mill stream issues from it. The waters are clear and full of [...]. From appearances it is probable that this spring is the outlet of [...] considerable river, which a mile and an half or two miles abov [...] place, sinks into the earth, and is conveyed to this outlet in a [...] [...]anean channel.

In the northern parts of Pennsylvania there is a creek called [...] creek, which empties into the Allegany river. It issues from a sp [...] on the top of which floats an oil, similar to that called Barbadoes [...] and from which one man may gather several gallons in a day. The troops sent to guard the western posts, halted at this spring, coll [...] some of the oil, and bathed their joints with it. This gave [...] great relief from the rheumatic complaints with which they were af­fected. The waters, of which the troops drank freely, operated [...] a gentle cathartic.

REMARKABLE CAVES.] There are three remarkable grott [...] [...] caves in this state; one near Carlisle, in Cumberland county; [...] in the township of Durham, in Bucks county, and the other at Swetata, in Lancaster county. The latter is on the east bank of Swetata riv­er, about two miles above its confluence with the Susquehannah. [...] aperture is under a pretty high bank, and from fifteen to twenty feet wide, and from seven to ten in height. You enter, by a gradual de­scent, so low as that the surface of the river is rather higher than the bottom of the cave, and in your progress pass through a number [...] passages and apartments of various dimensions, some low and [...] others very high and spacious, vaulted by magnificent canopies, [...] ­ted with a variety of depending petrifactions, some of which are [...] to a great length by means of the constant exudation and accretion of petrifying matter, till solid pillars have been gradually formed. These appear as supports to the roof, which is of solid limestone, perhaps [...] [Page 497] [...] thick. Thirty years ago there were ten such pillars, each six in­ches in diameter, and six feet high; all so ranged that the place [...] enclosed resembled a sanctuary in a Roman church. No royal [...] ever exhibited more grandeur than this lusus naturoe. The re­ [...]tances of several monuments are found indented in the walls on [...] sides of the cave, which appear like the tombs of departed heroes. [...]ded from the roof is 'the bell' (which is nothing more than a [...] projected in an unusual form) so called from the sound it occa­ [...] [...]hen struck, which is similar to that of a bell.

[...] of the stalactites are of a colour like sugar candy, and others [...] loaf sugar; but their beauty is much defaced by the smoke of the torches which are frequently employed in conducting the cu­ [...] traveller though this gloomy recess. The water which is exu­ [...] through the roof, runs down the declivity, and is both pleasant wholesome to drink. There are several holes in the bottom of [...], descending perpendicularly, perhaps, into an abyss below, [...] renders it dangerous to walk without a light. At the end of [...] is a pretty brook, which, after a short course, looses itself a­ [...] the rocks. Beyond this brook is an outlet from the cave by a [...] narrow aperture. Through this the vapours continually pass [...] with a strong current of air and ascend, resembling, at night, [...] smoke of a furnace. Part of these vapours and fogs appear, on [...], to be condensed at the head of this great alembic, and the [...] [...]atile parts to be carried off through the aperture communicat­ion with the exterior air before mentioned, by the force of the air in [...].

[...]UITIES.] On a high hill, near the Tyoga river, a little to [...]ward of the line which divides New York from Pennsylva­nia [...] to be seen the remains of an ancient fortification. The form [...] [...]cular, and it is encompassed with an entrenchment. The [...]ment only remains. The Indians are entirely ignorant of the [...] of these works. The hill is an excellent situation for a fort, [...]ands a delightful view of the country around it, which is [...] fertile. There is a fortification, of a similar kind, at Unadil­ [...] in the flat lands, and they are numerous in the western coun­ [...].

CONSTITUTION.] The supreme executive power of the common­ [...] i [...] vested in a governour; the legislative, in a general assembly, [...] of a senate and a house of representatives. The governour [...] for three years, but cannot hold his office more than nine [...] twelve. A plurality of votes makes a choice. The represen­ [...] are elected for one year; the senators for four. The latter [...] into four classes. The time of one class expires each [...] whose seats are then filled by new elections. Each county [...] its representatives separately. The senators are chosen in dis­ [...] formed by the legislature. There is to be an enumeration of the [...] once in seven years. The number of senators and repre­ [...]s, i [...], after each enumeration, to be fixed by the legislature, [...]portioned among the several counties and districts, according [...] number of taxable inhabitants. There can be never fewer than [...] more than one hundred representatives. The number of [...] cannot be less than one fourth, nor greater than one third of representatives. The elections are made on the second Tuesday of [Page 498] October. The general assembly meets on the first Tuesday of Decem­ber, in each year, unless sooner convened by the governor. A major­ity of each house makes a quorum to do business, and a less number may adjourn from day to day and compel the attendance of [...] ­bers. Each house chooses its speaker and other officers, judges the qualifications of its members, and establishes the rules of [...] [...] ­ceedings. Impeachments are made by the house of representatives and tried by the senate. All bills for raising revenue origi [...] [...] the lower house, but the senate may propose amendments. [...] sen­ators and representatives are free from arrests, while [...] public business, except in cases of treason, felony and breach [...] peace; and are not liable to be questioned concerning any thing [...] in public debate. They are compensated out of the public [...] from which no money can be drawn but in consequence of [...] ­ation by law. The journals of both houses are published [...] their doors kept open, unless the business require secrecy. All [...] which have passed both houses, must be presented to the gover [...]. If he approve he must sign them, but if he does not approve [...] [...] return them within ten days, with his objections, to the house in [...] they originated. No bill, so returned, shall become a law, unless [...] repassed by two thirds of both houses. The governour is [...] in chief of the military force; may remit fines and forfeit [...] [...] grant reprieves and pardons, except in cases of impeachment [...] require information from all executive officers; may, on extra [...] ­ry occasions, convene the general assembly, and adjourn it, [...] term not exceeding four months, in case the two branches [...] [...] on the time themselves. He must inform the general assembly [...] state of the commonwealth; recommend such measures as [...] judge expedient; and see that the laws are faithfully exec [...] case of vacancy in the office of governour, the speaker of the [...] exercises that office.—The judicial power is vested in a [...] inferior court, the judges of which, and justices of the peace, ap­pointed by the governour, and commissioned during good [...] but are removeable on the address of both houses. The other [...] of the state are appointed, some by the governour, some by the [...] ­al assembly, and some by the people.—The qualifications for [...] [...] are 21 years of age, 2 years residence, and payment of taxes▪ [...] are privileged from arrests in civil actions, while attending [...] Those for a representative are, 21 years of age, and three years [...] [...] ­itancy. For a senator, 25 years of age, and 4 years inhabitant [...] a governour, 30 years of age and 7 years inhabitancy. The [...] can hold no other office. The senators and representatives [...] of attorney at law, and in the militia. No person, holding [...] [...] of [...]rust, or profit, under the United States, can hold any [...] state, to which a salary is by law annexed. All the officers [...] state are liable to impeachment, and are bound by oath, or [...] to support the constitution, and perform the duties of [...] ­sices.

The declaration of rights asserts the natural freedom and [...] of all; liberty of conscience; freedom of elections, and of the [...] subordination of the military to the civil powers; trial by [...]ry [...] ­curity from unreasonable searches and seizures; a right to [...] distribution of justice; to be heard in criminal prosecutions; to [...] [Page 499] [...] for the redress of grievances; to bear arms; and to emigrate from [...]. It declares that all power is inherent in the people, and [...] they may, at any time, alter their form of government; that no [...] shall be obliged [...]o maintain religious worship, or support any [...] that all persons believing in the being of a God, and a fu­ [...] of rewards and punishments, are eligible to office; that laws [...] be suspended but by the legislature; that all persons shall be baila­ [...] [...]ess for capital offences, when the proof is evident, or presumption [...] th [...] every deotor shall be released from prison, on delivering [...] to his creditors, according to law, except there be strong [...]tion of [...]raud; that the privileges of the writ of habe [...]s corpus [...] be suspended but in time of rebellion, or public danger; that [...] law shall be made; that no person shall be attainted by [...]ature, or forfeit his estate for longer term than his own life; [...] title of nobility, or hereditary distinction, shall ever be [...].

[...]egoing constitution was ratified in 1790.

[...] other useful laws of this state, of a public nature, are, one [...] all rivers and creeks to be high ways—a law for the [...] of negroes, already mentioned—a bankrupt law, nearly model of the bankrupt laws of England—a law commuting [...] for a long term of years, for death, as a punishment for [...] which are made capital by the laws of England. Mur­ [...], and one or two other crimes, are yet punished with death.

INVENTIONS.] These have been numerous and useful. [...] others are the following: A new model of the planetary [...] Mr. Rittenhouse, commonly, but improperly called an or­ [...] quadrant, by Mr. Godfrey, called by the plagiary name of [...] quadrant—a steam boat, so constructed, as that by the assist­ [...] steam, operating on certain machinery within the boat, it [...] with considerable rapidity against the stream, without the aid [...] M [...]ssrs. Fitch and Rumsay, contend with each other, for [...] of this invention. Besides these there have been invent­ [...] manufacturing machines, for carding, spinning, winnowing, [...] perform an immense deal of work with very little manual [...]

[...].] Pennsylvania was granted by king Charles II. to Mr. [...] Penn, son of the famous admiral Penn, in consideration of [...] services to the crown. * Mr. Penn's petition for the [...] presented to the king in 1680; and after considerable delays, [...] by Lord Baltimore's agent, who apprehended it might in­ [...] with the Maryland patent, the charter of Pennsylvania receiv­ [...] [...] signature on the 4th of March 1681. To secure his title [...] claims and prevent future altercation, Mr. Penn procured [...] deed from the duke of York, of all the lands, covered by [...], to which the duke could have the least pretensions. [...] hearts date, August 21, 1682. On the 24th of the same month, [...] from the duke, by deed of fooffment, Newcastle, with [Page 500] twelve miles of the adjacent territory, and the lands south to the H [...] kills. In December following, Mr. Penn effected a union of the [...] ­er counties with the province of Pennsylvania. *

The first frame of government for Pennsylvania, is dated in, [...]. By this form, all legislative powers were vested in the governor [...] freemen of the province, in the provincial council, and a gen [...] as­sembly. The council was to consist of seventy two members, [...] by the freemen; of which the governor or his deputy was [...] president, with a treble vote. One third of this council we [...]t [...] office every year, and their seats were supplied by new elections.

The general assembly was at first to consist of all the freemen [...] ­wards of two hundred, and never to exceed five hundred.

In 1683, Mr. Penn offered another frame of government, in [...] the number of representatives was reduced, and the governor [...] a negative upon all bills, passed in assembly. By several [...] [...] ­guments the people were persuaded to accept this frame of gove [...].

Not long after, a dispute between Mr. Penn and Lord Balti [...] [...] ­quired the former to go to England, and he committed the ad [...] ­tion of government to five commissioners, taken from the [...] In 1686, Mr. Penn required the commissioners to dissolve the [...] of government; but not being able to effect his purpose, he [...] appointed Capt. John Blackwell his deputy. From this [...] proprietors usually resided in England, and administred the [...] ­ment by deputies, who were devoted to their interest. [...] arose between the people and their governors, which never [...] the late revolution. The primary cause of these jealousies, [...] [...] ­tempt of the proprietary to extend his own power, and [...] the assembly; and the consequence was, incessant disputes [...] sensions in the legislature.

In 1689, governor Blackwell, finding himself opposed in his [...] had recourse to artifice, and prevailed on certain members [...] council to withdraw themselves from the house; thus defe [...] measures of the legislature. The house voted this to be [...] and addressed the governor on the occasion.

In 1693, the king and queen assumed the government into the [...] hands. Col. Fletcher was appointed governor of New York [...] Pennsylvania by one and the same commission, with equal [...] both provinces. By this commission, the number of coun [...] Pennsylvania was reduced.

Under the administration of governor Markham in 1696, [...] form of government was established in Pennsylvania. The [...] the council and assembly now became annual, and the legislature their powers and forms of proceeding, was new modelled.

In 1699, the proprietary arrived from England and [...] reins of government. While he remained in Pennsylvania [...] charter of privileges or frame of government, which continued [...] revolution, was agreed upon and established. This was [...] and delivered to the people by the proprietary, October 28, 17 [...], [Page 501] to his embarking for England. The inhabitants of the Territory, as it [...] th [...]n called, or the lower counties, refused to accept this charter, [...] [...] separated themselves from the province of Pennsylvania. They afterwards had their own assembly, in which the governor of Pennsylvania used to preside.

[...] September 1700, the Susquehannah Indians granted to Mr. Penn­sylvania lands on both sides the river. The Susquehannah, Shawan­ [...] [...] Patomak Indians, however, entered into articles of agreement [...] Mr. Penn, by which, on certain conditions of peaceable and [...] [...] behaviour, they were permitted to settle about the head of [...] [...], in the province of Pennsylvania. The Conostoga chiefs al­ [...], ratified the grant of the Susquehannah Indians, made the [...] year.

[...] Mr. Penn obtained from the Sachems of the country, a [...]tion of the grants made by former Indians, of all the lands [...] [...] creek to the mountains, and from the Delaware to the [...]anah. In this deed, the Sachems declared that 'they had [...] heard read divers prior deeds which had been given to Mr. [...] by former chiefs.'

[...] Mr. Penn was in America, he erected Philadelphia into a [...]tion. The charter was dated October 25,1701; by which [...] of the city was vested in a mayor, recorder, alderman and [...] council, with power to enquire into treasons, murders and [...]; and to enquire into and punish smaller crimes. The [...]tion had also extensive civil jurisdiction; but it was dissolved [...] revolution, and Philadelphia was governed like other coun­ [...] the state, till 1789, when it was again incorporated.

[...] the favourable terms which Mr. Penn offered to settlers, and an [...] toleration of all religious denominations, the population of [...] was extremely rapid. Notwithstanding the attempts of [...]etary or his governors to extend his own power, and accu­ [...] property by procuring grants from the people, and exempting [...] from taxation, the government was generally mild, and the [...] of the people by no means oppressive. The selfish de­ [...] the proprietaries were vigorously and constantly opposed by the [...], whose firmness preserved the charter rights of the province. [...] the revolution, the government was abolished. The proprie­ [...] were absent, and the people by their representatives, formed a [...] [...]ituation on republican principles. The proprietaries were [...] from all share in the government, and the legislature offered [...] one hundred and thirty thousand pounds in lieu of all quit rents, [...] was finally accepted. The proprietaries however still possess in Pennsylvania many large tracts of excellent land.

[...] to be regretted that among all the able writers in this important [...] none has yet gratified the publick with its interesting history. As [...] not professedly the province of a geographer, a more particular [...] of historical facts, than has already been given, will not be ex­ [...]. We shall therefore conclude with the following list of gov­ [...].

[Page 502]

A List of the several PROPRIETORS, GOVERNORS, LIEUTENANT GOVERNORS, and PRESIDENTS of the Province, with the times of their respective administration.

PROPRIETORS.
The Honorable William Penn, born 1644, died 1718.
Thomas Penn, and Richard Penn, died 1771.
John Penn, sen. and John Penn, jun.
GOVERNORS, &c.
Lieut. Governor, William Penn, Propr. from Oct. 1682, to Aug. 16 [...]
President, Thomas Lloyd, Aug. 1684. to Dec. [...]
Dept. Lt. Governor, John Blackwell, Dec. 1688, to Feb. 1689-90
President and council governed, Feb. 1689-90 to April 26, [...]
Dept. Governor, Benjamin Fletcher, 26 April 1693, to 3 June 169 [...]
Lt. Governor, William Markham, 3 June 1693, to Dec. 16 [...]
Lt. Governor, William Penn. Prop. 3 Dec. 1699 to 1 Nov. 1701
Dept. Lt. Governor Andrew Hamilton, 1 Nov. 1701, to Feb. 1702-3
President and Council, governed, Feb. 1702-3 to Feb. 1703-4
Dept. Lt. Governor, John Evans, Feb. 1703-4, to Feb. 17 [...]- [...]
  Charles Gookin, March 1708-9. to 1717
Sir William Keith, Bart. 1717 to June 17 [...]
Patrick Gordon, June, 1726 to 173 [...]
George Thomas, 1738 to 17 [...]
President. Anthony Palmer, 1747 to 17 [...]
Dept. Lt. Governor. James Hamilton, 1748 to Oct. 1754
Robert Hunter Morris, Oct. 1754 to 19 Aug. 1756
William Denny, 19 August 1756 to 17 Nov. 175 [...]
James Hamilton 17 Nov. 1759 to 31 Oct. 17 [...]
John Penn, 31 Oct. 1763 to 6 May 1771
President. James Hamilton, 6 May 1771 to 16 Oct. 177 [...]
Lt. Governor. Richard Penn, 16 Oct. 1771.
Presidents of the Supreme Executive Council of the State of Pennsylvania. Thomas Wharton, March 1777, to April 17 [...]
Joseph Reed, Oct. 1778 to Oct. 17 [...]
William Moore, Nov. 1781 to Nov. 17 [...]
John Dickinson, Nov. 1782 to Oct. 17 [...]
Benjamin Franklin, Oct. 1785 to Oct. 17 [...]
Thomas Mifflin, Oct. 1788 to Oct. 17 [...]
Governor. Thomas Mifflin, Oct. 1790
[Page 503]

DELAWARE.
SITUATION AND EXTENT.

Length 92 Miles. between 38° 30′ and 40° N. Lat. Square Miles. 2,000
Breadth 24 Miles. 0° and 1° 45′ W. Lon. Square Miles. 2,000

BOUNDARIES AND NAME.] BOUNDED on the east, by the river and bay of the [...] name, and the Atlantic ocean; on the south, by a line [...] Fenewick's Island, in latitude 38° 29′ 30″, drawn west till it inter­ [...] what is commonly called the tangent line, dividing it from the state [...] Maryland; on the west, by the said tangent line, passing north­ [...] up the peninsula, till it touches the western part of the territo­ [...] circle; and thence on the north, by the said circle, described [...] a radius of twelve miles about the town of Newcastle.

This state appears to have derived its name from Lord Delawar, who [...]cted the settlement of Virginia.

CIVIL DIVISIONS.] This state is divided into three counties, which are subdivided into hundreds.

Counties. No. Inhab. Slaves. Chief Towns.
NEW CASTLE 19,686 2562 Newcastle
[...] 18,920 2300 DOVER
[...] 20,488 4025 Lewes
Total 59,091 8887  

Before the revolution this district of country was denominated, The three tower counties."

RIVERS AND CREEKS.] The eastern side of the state is indented [...] a large number of creeks, or small rivers, which generally have [...] course, soft banks, numerous shoals, and are skirted with ve­ [...] [...]ensive marshes, and empty into the river and bay of Delaware. The southern and western parts of this state, spring the head waters [...]comoke, Wicomico, Nanticoke, Choptank, Chester, Sassafras [...] Bohemia rivers, all falling into Chesapeak bay, and some of them [...] navigable 20 or 30 miles into the country, for vessels of 50 or 60 [...]

PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS.] Just before the commencement of the [...], a work of considerable importance was begun at Lewes, in the Southern part of the state, viz. the erection of a bridge and causeway [...] the town, over the creek and marsh to the opposite cape. This [...]ensive work was just completed when the British ships first came [...] the road of Lewes. In order to prevent too easy a communica­tion, they partially removed it; and it being afterwards neglected, it [...] in complete ruins at the close of the war. A bridge upon the [...]plan, but upon a new foundation, has lately been erected, at the [...] expense of individuals. It extends about a quarter of a mile, from the town to the beach, over a wide creek and marsh. The in­habitants are compensated for their expense, by the facility of the com­munication between the town and the cape.

[Page 504] Several canals in different parts of this state, are contemplated, one of which is down the waters of the Brandywine.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.] The state of Delaware, the upper parts of the county of Newcastle excepted, is, to speak generally, extremely low and level. Large quantities of stagnant water, at particular seasons of the year, overspreading a great proportion of the land, render it equally unfit for the purposes of ag­riculture, and injurious to the health of the inhabitants. The spine, or highest ridge of the peninsula, runs through the state of Delaware, inclined to the eastern of Delaware side. It is designated in Suffax, Kent, and part of Newcastle county, by a remarkable chain of swa [...], from which the waters descend on each side, passing, on the east, to the Delaware, and on the west to the Chesapeak. Many of the shrubs and plants, growing in these swamps, are similar to those seconds on the highest mountains.

Delaware is chiefly an agricultural state. It includes a very [...] tract of country; and scarcely any part of the union can be selected more adapted to the different purposes of agriculture, or in which a greater variety of the most useful productions can be so conveniently and plentifuly reared. The foil along the Delaware river, and from 8 to 10 miles into the interior country, is generally a rich clay, pro­ducing large timber, and well adapted to the various purposes of ag­riculture. From thence to the swamps above mentioned, the soil is light, sandy and of an inferior quality.

The general aspect of the country is very favourable for cultivation. Excepting some of the upper parts of the county of Newcastle, the surface of the state is very little broken or irregular. The heights of Christiana are lofty and commanding; some of the hills of Brandy­wine are rough and stony; but descending from these, and a [...] o­thers, the lower country is so little diversified as almost to form one extended plain. In the county of New castle, the soil consists of a strong clay; in Kent, there is a considerable mixture of sand; and in S [...]ssex, the quantity of sand altogether predominates. Wheat is the staple of this state. It grows here in such perfection as not only to be particularly sought by the manufacturers of flour throughout the union, but also to be distinguished and preferred, for its superior qual­ities, in foreign markets. This wheat possesses an uncommon softness and whiteness, very favourable to the manufacture of superfine flour, and in other respects, far exceeds the hard and flinty grains raised in general on the high lands. Besides wheat, this state generally produces plentiful crops of Indian corn, barley, rye, oats, flax, buckwheat, and potatoes. It abounds in natural and artificial meadows containing a large variety of grasses. Hemp, cotton, and silk, if properly attended to, doubtless would flourish very well.

The county of S [...]ssex, besides producing a considerable quantity of grain, particularly of Indian corn, possesses excellent grazing lands. This county also exports very large quantities of lumber, obtained chiefly from an extensive swamp, called the Indian River or Cypress Swamp, lying partly within this state, and partly in the state of Ma­ryland. This morass extends six miles from the east to west, and nearly twelve from north to south, including an area of nearly fifty thousand acres of land. The whole of this swamp is a high and level bason, very wet, though undoubtedly the highest land between the sea and the [Page 505] [...], whence the Pokomoke descends on one side, and Indian River and St. Martin's on the other. This swamp contains a great variety of plants, trees, wild beasts, birds and reptiles.

CHIEF TOWNS.] DOVER, in the county of Kent, is the seat of government. It stands on Jones' creek, a few miles from the Dela­ware river, and consists of about 100 houses, principally of brick. [...] streets intersect each other at right angles, whose incidencies form [...]cious parade, on the east side of which is an elegant state house of brick. The town has a lively appearance and drives on a consider­able trade with Philadelphia. Wheat is the principal article of ex­port. The landing is five or six miles from the town of Dover.

NEWCASTLE is 35 miles below Philadelphia, on the west bank of Delaware river. It was first settled by the Swedes, about the year say, and called Stockholm. It was afterwards taken by the Dutch, and called New Amsterdam. When it fell into the hands of the English, it was called by its present name. It contains about 60 hous­es which have the aspect of decay, and was formerly the feat of government.—This is the first town that was settled on Delaware river.

WILMINGTON is situated a mile and a half west of Delaware river, of Christiana creek, 28 miles southward from Philadelphia. It is much the largest and pleasantest town in the state, containing upwards of [...]00 houses, which are handsomely built upon a gentle ascent of an [...]tnence, and show to great advantage as you sail up the Delaware. [...] contains about 2400 inhabitants. In this town are a Presbyterian [...]—a Swedish Episcopal church—a Baptist and a Quaker [...]—and a few methodists. There is also a flourishing academy of about 40 or 50 scholars, who are taught the languages, and some of the sciences. This academy, in proper time, is intended to be erected [...] a college. There is another academy at Newark, in this county, which was incorporated in 1769. These academies were interrupted sharing the war, and their funds ruined by the depreciation of Conti­ [...] paper money. Since the peace learning seems to revive and [...]

[...]ILFORD, is situated at the source of a small river, 15 miles from Delaware bay, and 150 southward of Philadelphia. This town, which contains about 80 houses, has been built, except one house, [...] evolution. It is laid out with much good taste, and is by no means disagreeable. The inhabitants are Episcopalians, Quakers and Methodists.

DUCK [...]REEK CROSS ROADS, is 12 miles northwest from Dover, and has 80 or 90 houses, which stand on one street. It carries on a considerable trade with Philadelphia, and is one of the largest wheat markets in the state. Kent is also a place of considerable trade.

LEWES is situated a few miles above the light house, on Cape Hen­ [...]. It contains about 150 houses, built chiefly on a street which [...] more than three miles in length, and extending along a creek which separates the town from the pitch of the cape. The situation is high, and commands a full prospect of the light house, and the sea. The court house and goal are commodious buildings, and give an air of importance to the town. The situation of this place, must at some [...] time render is considerably important. Placed at the entrance of a bay, which is crowded with vessels from all parts of the world, [Page 506] and which is frequently closed with ice a part of the winter season, necessity seems to require, and nature seems to suggest, the forming this port into a harbour for shipping. Nothing has prevented this heretofore, but the deficiency of water in the creek. This want can be cheaply and easily supplied by a small canal, so as to afford a pas­sage for the waters of Rehoboth into Lewes creek, which would [...] ­sure an adequate supply. The circumjacent country is beautifully di­versified with hills, wood, streams and lakes, forming an agreeable contrast to the naked sandy beach, which terminates in the cape; but it is greatly infested with musketoes and sand flies.

TRADE AND MANUFACTURES.] We have already mentioned wheat as the staple commodity of this state. This is manufactured in­to flour and exported in large quantities. The exports from the part of Wilmington, where a number of square rigged vessels are owned, for the year 1786, in the article of flour, was 20,783 barrels superfine, 457 do. common, 256 do. middlings, and 346 do. ship stuff. The manufacture of flour is carried to a higher degree of perfection in this state, than in any others in the Union. Besides the well con­structed mills on Red clay and white clay creeks, and other streams in different parts of the state, the celebrated collection of mills at Brandywine merit a particular description. Here are to be seen, at one view, 12 merchant mills (besides a saw mill) which have double that number of pairs of stones, all of superior dimensions, and excel­lent construction. These mills are 3 miles from the mouth of the creek on which they stand, half a mile from Wilmington, and 27 from Philadelphia, on the post road from the eastern to the southern states. They are called the Brandywine mills, from the stream on which they are erected. This stream rises near the Welch mountains in Penn­sylvania, and after a winding course of 30 or 40 miles through falls, which furnish numerous seats (130 of which are already occupied) for every species of water works, empties into Christiana creek, near Wil­mington. The quantity of wheat manufactured at these mills, annu­ally, is not accurately ascertained. It is estimated, however, by the best informed on the subject, that these mills can grand 400,000 bushels in a year. But although they are capable of manufacturing this quan­tity yearly, yet from the difficulty of procuring a permanent supply of grain, the instability of the flour market and other circumstances, there are not commonly more than from about 290 to 300,000 bushels of wheat and corn manufactured here annually. In the fall of 1789, and spring of 1790, there were made at the Brandywine mills 50,000 barrels of superfine flour, 1354 do. of common, 400 do. middlings, as many of ship stuff, and 2000 do. corn meal. The quantity of wheat and corn ground, from which this flour &c. was made, was 308,000 bushels, equal to the export in those articles, from the port of Philadelphia for the same year.

These mills give employment to about 200 persons, viz. about 40 to tend the mills, from 50 to 70 coopers, to make casks for the flour, a sufficient number to man 12 sloops of about 30 tons each, which are employed in the transportation of the wheat and flour, the rest in va­rious other occupations connected with the mills. The navigation quite to these mills is such, that a vessel carrying 1000 bushels of wheat may be laid along side of any of these mills; and beside some of them the water is of sufficient depth to admit vessels of twice the a­bove [Page 507] size. The vessels are unloaded with astonishing expedition. There have been instances of 1000 bushels being carried to the height [...] stories in 4 hours. It is frequently the case that vessels with 1000 [...] of wheat come up with flood tide, unlade and go away the suc­ [...]ing ebb with 300 barrels of flour on board. In consequence of the machines introduced by the ingenious Mr. Oliver Evans, three quar­ [...] of the manual labour before found necessary is now sufficient for [...] purpose. By means of these machines, when made use of in the full extent proposed by the inventor, the wheat will be received on the shallop's deck—thence carried to the upper loft of the mill—and a considerable portion of the same returned in flour on the lower some, ready for packing, without the assistance of manual labour but in a very small degree, in proportion to the business done. The transporta­tion of flour from these mills to the port of Wilmington, does not re­quire half an hour, and it is frequently the case that a cargo is taken [...] the mills and delivered at Philadelphia the same day. The situ­ation of these mills is very pleasant and healthful—The first mill was [...] here about 50 years since. There is now a small town of 40 houses, principally stone and brick, which, together with the mills and the vessels loading and unloading beside them, furnish a charming prospect from the bridge, from whence they are all in full view.

Besides the wheat and flour trade this state exports lumber and va­rious other articles. The amount of exports for the year ending Sep­tember 30th 1791, was 199,840 dollars.

LIGHT HOUSE.] The Light House, near the town of Lowes, was [...] in 1777. Since the war it has been completed and handsomely [...]. It is a fine stone structure, 8 stories high; the annual ex­ [...] of which is estimated at about 650l. currency.

RELIGION.] In this state there is a variety of religious denomina­ [...]. Of the Presbyterian sect, there are 24 churches—of the Epis­copal, 14—of the Baptist, 7—of the Methodist, a considerable num­ber, especially in the two lower counties of Kent and Sussex, the number of their churches is not exactly ascertained. Besides these there [...] Swedish Church at Wilmington, which is one of the oldest church­ [...] the United States.

POPULATION.] See table of divisions.

MINERALS.] In the county of Sussex, among the branches of the [...]ticoke river, large quantities of bog iron ore are to be found. Before the revolution, this ore was worked to considerable extent; it was thought to be of a good quality, and peculiarly adapted to the purposes of castings. These works have chiefly fallen to decay.

CONSTITUTION.] The constitution of this state begins by de­claring some of the rights of the people, and enumerates nearly the some that are mentioned in the declaration of rights of Pennsylvania. It then delegates the legislative power to a general assembly consisting of a senate and a house of representatives; and the executive, to a gov­ernor. All these are chosen by the people on the first Tuesday of Oc­tober—the governor for 3 years; but he is not eligible for the next above. He must be thirty years old, and have been an inhabitant of the state 6 years, and of the United States 12 years. A plurality, of votes makes a choice. The Senators are chosen for 3 years, must be 27 years old, freeholders of 200 acres of land, or possessed of 100l. property, and have been inhabitants of the state 3 years. They are divided in­to [Page 508] 3 classes, the time of one class expiring each year, and their found being filled by new erections.—The representatives are chosen [...] one year, must be 24 years old, freeholders, and have been [...] ­tants 3 years. The constitution provides that there shall be 7 represen­tatives and 3 senators chosen by each county; but the general [...] ­bly has power to increase the number, where two thirds of each [...] shall think it expedient; provided the number of senators shall [...] [...] be greater than one half, nor less than one third, of the number [...] representatives. The general assembly meets on the first Tuesday of January annually, unless sooner convened by the governor. Each branch has all the powers necessary for a branch of the legislative of a free and independant state. A majority of each constitution quorum to do business, and a less number may adjourn from day [...] day and compel the attendance of members. They are [...] from arrests while attending on public business, except in [...] treason, felony and branch of the peace, and for things said in [...] [...] bate, are not questionable elsewhere. They are compensated out of the public treasury, from which no money can be drawn but in [...] ­quence of appropriation by law. Impeachments are made by the [...] ­er house, and tried by the senate. Revenue bills originate [...] [...] house for representatives, but the senate may propose alteration [...] journal is kept of their proceedings, and published at the and of [...] session, and the doors of both houses are kept open unless the [...] require secrecy.—The governor is commander in chief of the [...] force; may remit fines and forfeitures and grant reprieves and [...] except in cases of impeachment; may require information from all [...] [...] ­tive officers, may convene the general assembly on extraordinary [...] ­sions, and adjourn them to any time not exceeding 3 months, [...] [...] cannot agree on the time themselves. He must inform them of [...] concerning the state, recommend to them such measures as [...] judge expedient, and see that the laws are faithfully executed. [...] speaker of the senate, and after him, the speaker of the house [...] re­presentatives, shall exercise the office of governor, in case of [...]—The Judicial power is vested in a court of chancery, and [...] common law courts. The judges are appointed by the government, [...] commissioned during good behaviour, and the justices of the [...] for 7 years; all removable on the address of two thirds of both [...] of assembly. The other officers of the state are appointed, some by the gov­ernor, some by the general assembly, and some by the people. No [...] ­son concerned in any army or navy contract, or holding any [...], [...] ­cept the attorney general, officers usually appointed by the courts of justice, attornies at law, and officers in the militia, can be a senate [...] representative. The governor can hold no other office. No [...] ­al officer can hold an office in this state to which a salary is by [...] annexed. The clergy are excluded from all civil offices. All [...] are impeachable and are bound by oath or affirmation to support [...] constitution, and perform the duties of their officers. All free [...] ­men, 21 years old, having been [...] years inhabitants, and paid [...] are electors; and are privileged from arrests in civil actions [...] [...] ­tending elections. The general assembly, with the approbation [...] [...] governor, have a right under certain regulations and restrictions [...] make amendments to this constitution. A convention may also [...] [...] ­ed where a majority of the people shall signify their wish for it.

The foregoing constitution was ratified on the 12th of June, 179 [...].

[Page 509] HISTORY.] The reader will find a well written sketch of the his­ [...] of this state in the American Edition of the Encyclopedia, [...]shing by Thomas Dobson, in Philadelphia.

TERRITORY N. W. OF THE OHIO.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 900 Miles. between 37° and 50° N. Lat. Square Miles. 411,000
Breadth 700 Miles. 6° and 23° W. Lon. Square Miles. 411,000.

BOUNDARIES.] THIS extensive tract of country is bounded north, by part of the northern boundary [...] of the United States; east, by the lakes and Pennsylvania; south, [...] the Ohio river; West, by the Mississippi. Mr. Hutchins, the [...] geographer of the United States, estimates that this tract contains [...]40,000 acres, of which 43,040,000 are water; the deducted, [...] will remain 220,000,000 of acres, belonging to the federal gov­ernment, to be sold for the discharge of the national debt; except a [...] strip of land bordering on the south of Lake Erie, and stretch­ [...] [...] miles west of the western limit of Pennsylvania, which be­ [...] to Connecticut.

[...] a small proportion of these lands is yet purchased of the na­ [...], and to be disposed of by congress. Beginning on the meridian [...] which forms the western boundary of Pennsylvania, seven rang­ [...] townships have been surveyed and laid off by order of congress. [...] a north and south line strikes the Ohio in an oblique direction, the [...]tion of the 7th range falls upon that river, 9 miles above [...] Muskingum, which is the first large river that falls into the Ohio. [...] this junction 172 miles below Fort Pitt, including the wind­ [...] of the Ohio, though in a direct line it is but 90 miles.

The lands in which the Indian title is extinguished, and which are [...] purchasing under the United States, are defined within the lim­ [...] mentioned page 148, to which the reader is referred. On these [...] several settlements are commencing, one at Marietta, at the [...] of Muskingum, under the direction of the Ohio company— [...] between the Miami rivers, under the direction of Colonel [...]; and a French Settlement at Galliopolis. There are several other tracts, delineated on the map, which have been granted by con­ [...] to particular companies, and other tracts for particular uses, which [...] without any English settlements.

CIVIL DIVISIONS.] That part of this territory in which the In­ [...] title is extinguished, and which is settling under the govern­ment of the United States, is divided into four counties as follows,

Counties. When erected.
Washington 1788 July 26th
Hamilton 1790 Jan. 2d
St. Clair 1790 April 27th
Knox 1790 June 20th

These counties have been organized with the proper civil and mili­tary officers. The county of St. Clair is divided into three districts, [Page 510] viz. the district of Cahokia, the district of Prairie-du-rochers, and the district of Kaskaskias. Courts of general quarter sessions of the peace, county courts of common pleas, and courts of probate, to be held in each of these districts, as if each was a distinct county; the officers of the county to act by deputy, except in the district where they reside.

RIVERS.] The Muskingum is a gentle river, confined by banks so high as to prevent its overflowing. It is 250 yards wide at its confid­ence with the Ohio, and navigable by large batteaux and barges to the Three Legs; and, by small ones, to the lake at its head. From thence, by a portage of about one mile, a communication is opened to Lake Erie, through the Cayahoga, which is a stream of great utility, nav­igable the whole length, without any obstruction from falls. From Lake Erie, the avenue is well known to the Hudson, in the state of New York.

The Hockhocking resembles the Muskingum, though somewhat in­ferior in size. It is navigable for large boats about 70 miles, and for small ones much further. On the banks of this very useful stream are found inexhaustible quarries of free stone, large [...] iron ore, and some rich mines of lead. Coal mines and salt [...] are fre­quent in the neighbourhood of this stream, as they are in every part of the western territory. The salt that may be obtained from those springs will afford an inexhaustible store of that necessary article. Beds of white and blue clay, of an excellent quality, are likewise found here, suitable for the manufacture of glass, crockery and other earthen wares. Red bole and many other useful fossils have been ob­served on the branches of this river.

The Scioto is a larger river, than either of the preceding, and opens a more extensive navigation. It is passable for large barges for [...] miles, with a portage of only 4 miles to the Sandusky, a good naviga­ble stream that falls into the Lake Erie. Through the Sandusky and Scioto lies the most common pass from Canada to the Ohio and Mis­sissippi; one of the most extensive and useful communications that are to be found in any country. Prodigious extensions of territory are here connected; and, from the rapidity with which the western parts of Canada, Lake Erie and the Kentucky countries are settling, we may anticipate an immense intercourse between them. The lands on the borders of these middle streams, from this circumstance alone, aside from their natural fertility, must be rendered vastly valuable. The flour, corn, flax, hemp, &c. raised for exportation in that great country between the Lakes Huron and Ontario, will find an outlet through Lake Erie and these rivers, or down the Mississippi. The Ohio merchant can give a higher price than those of Quebec, for these commodities; as they may be transported from the former to Florida and the West India islands, with less expense, risk and insur­ance, than from the latter; while the expense from the place of growth to the Ohio will not be one fourth of what it would be to Quebec, and much less than even to the Oneida lake. The stream of Scioto is gentle, no where broken by falls: At some places, in the spring of the year, it overflows its banks, providing for large natural rice plantations. Salt springs, coal mines, white and blue clay, and free stone, abound in the country adjoining this river.

[Page 511] The Little Miami is too small for batteaux navigation. Its banks are good land, and so high as to prevent, in common, the overflowing of the water.

The Great Miami has a very stoney channel, and a swift stream, but no falls. It is formed of several large branches, which are passable for boats a great distance. One branch comes from the west, and [...] in the Wabash country: Another rises near the head waters of Miami river, which runs into Lake Erie; and a short portage divides another branch of Sandusky river. It also interlocks with the Scioto.

The Wabash in a beautiful river, with high and fertile banks. It empties into the Ohio, by a mouth 270 yards wide, 1020 miles below fort Pitt. In the spring, summer and autumn, it is passable with bat­teaux drawing three feet water, 412 miles, to Ouitanon, a small French settlement, on the west side of the river; and for large canoes 197 [...] further, to the Miami carrying place, 9 miles from Miami village. This village stands on Miami river, which empties into the northwest part of Lake Erie. The communication between Detroit, and the Illinois, and Ohio countries, is up Miami river to Miami vil­lage, thence, by land, 9 miles, when the rivers are high—and from 18 to 30 when they are low, through a level country to the Wabash, and through the various branches of the Wabash to the places of destination.

A [...]lver mine has been discovered about 28 miles above Quiatanon, [...] the northern side of the Wabash. Salt springs, lime, free-stone, [...], yellow and white clay, are found in plenty upon this river.

The rivers A Vase and Kaskaskias empty into the Mississippi from the northeast; the former is navigable for boats 60, and the latter about 130 miles. They both run through a rich country, which has exten­sive [...]adows.

Between the Kaskaskias and Illinois rivers, which are 84 miles a­part, is an extensive tract of level, rich land, which terminates in a high ridge, about 15 miles before you reach the Illinois river. In this delightful vale are a number of French villages which, together with those of St. Genevieve and St. Louis, on the western side of the Mississippi, contained in 1771, 1273 fencible men.

One hundred and seventy six miles above the Ohio, and 18 miles a­bove the Missouri, the Illinois empties into the Mississippi from the northeast by a mouth about 400 yards wide. This river is bordered with fine meadows, which in some places extend as far as the eye can reach: This river furnishes a communication with Lake Michigan, by the Chicago river, between which and the Illinois, are two portages, the longest of which does not exceed four miles. It receives a num­ber of rivers which are from 20 to 100 yards wide, and navigable for boats from 15 to 180 miles. On the northwestern side of this river is a coal mine, which extends for half a mile along the middle of the back of the river, and about the same distance below the coal mine are the salt ponds, 100 yards in circumference, and several feet in depth. The water is stagnant, and of a yellowish colour; but the French and natives make good salt from it. The soil of the Illinois country it, in general, of a superior quality—Its natural growth consists of [...], hicory, cedar, mulberry, &c. hops, dying drugs, medicinal plants of several kinds, and excellent wild grapes. In the year 1769, the French settlers made 110 hogsheads of strong wine from these grapes.

[Page 512] These are many other rivers of equal size and importance with those we have been describing, which are not sufficiently known for accurate descriptions.

POPULATION.] The number of souls in this large tract of country has not been ascertained. From the best data the Author has receiv­ed, the population may be estimated as follows.

Indians, (suppose) 65,000 * 1792.
Ohio Company purchase, 2,500 Do.
Col. Symmes' settlements, 2,000 Do.
Galliopolis, (French settlement) opposite the Kanhawa river, 1,000 Do.
Vincennes and its vicinity, on the Wabash, 1,500 Do.
Kaskaskias and Cahokia, 680 1790.
At Grand Ruisseau, village of St. Phillip and Prairie-du-rochers, 240 Do.
Total 72,820  

In 1790, there were, in the town of Vincennes, about 40 Ameri­can families, and 31 slaves; and on the Missisippi 40 American families and 73 slaves, all included in the above estimate. On the Spanish or western side of the Missisippi, there were in 1790, about 1800 souls, principally at Genevieve and St. Louis.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.{ To the remarks on these heads, interspersed in the description of the rivers, we will add some observations from an annonymous pam­phlet published not long since, which we presume are the most au­thentic, respecting that part of that country which has been purchased of the Indians, of any that have been given.

'The undistinguished terms of admiration, that are commonly used in speaking of the natural fertility of the country on the western wat­ers of the United States, would render it difficult, without acc [...] attention in the surveys, to ascribe a preference to any particular part; or to give a just description of the territory under consideration, without the hazard of being suspected of exaggeration: But in this we have the united opinion of the geographer, the surveyors, and ev­ery traveller that has been intimately acquainted with the country, and marked every natural object with the most scrupulous exactness—That no part of the federal territory unites so many advantages, in point of health, fertility, variety of production, and foreign inter­course, as that tract which stretches from the Muskingum to the Scio­to and the Great Miami rivers.

'Colonel Gordon, in his journal, speaking of a much larger range of country, in which this is included, and makes unquestionably the finest part, has the following observation:—The country on the Ohio [Page 513] is every where pleasant, with large level spots of rich land; and re­markably healthy. One general remark of this nature will serve for the whole tract of the globe comprehended between the western skirts of the Allegany mountains; thence running southwestwardly to the distance of 500 miles to the Ohio falls; then crossing them northerly to the heads of the rivers that empty themselves into the Ohio; thence last along the ridge that separates the lakes and Ohio streams, to French Creek—This country may, from a proper knowledge, be af­ [...]ed to be the most healthy, the most pleasant, the most com­modious and most fertile spot of earth, known to the European peo­ple."

"The lands on the various streams abovementioned, which fall into the Ohio, are now more accurately known, and may be described with confidence and precision. They are interspersed with all the va­riety of soil which conduces to pleasantness of situation, and lays the foundation for the wealth of an agricultural and manufacturing peo­ple. Large level bottoms, or natural meadows, from 20 to 50 miles in circuit, are every where found bordering the rivers, and variegat­ing the country in the interior parts. These afford as rich a soil as and be imagined, and may be reduced to proper cultivation with very little labour. It is said, that in many of these bottoms, a man may clear an acre a day, fit for planting with Indian corn; there being no under wood; and the trees, growing very high and large, but not thick [...]ther, need nothing but girdling.

"The prevailing growth of timber and the more useful trees are, [...] or sugar tree, sycamore, black and white mulberry, black and white walnut, butternut, chesnut; white, black, Spanish and chesnut [...], hiccory, cherry, buckwood or herse chesnut, honey locust, [...] cucumber tree, lynn tree, gum tree, iron wood, ash, as­ [...], sassafras, crab apple tree, paupaw or custard apple, a variety of [...] trees, nine bark spice, and leather wood bushes. General Par­ [...] measured a black walnut tree, near the Muskingum, whose circum­ [...]encee, at five feet from the ground, was 22 feet. A sycamore, near [...] same place, measured 44 feet in circumference, at some distance from the gound. White and black oak, and chesnut, with most of [...] abovementioned timbers, grow large and plenty upon the high [...]. Both the high and low lands produce vast quantities of [...] grapes of various kinds, of which the settlers universally make a sufficiency for their own consumption of rich red wine. It [...] asserted in the old settlement of St. Vincent, where they have had opportunity to try it, that age will render this wine preferable to most [...] the European wines. Cotton is the natural production of this country, and grows in great perfection.

"The sugar maple is a most valuable tree for an inland country. Any number of inhabitants may be forever supplied with a sufficiency of [...], by preserving a few trees for the use of each family. A tree [...] yield about ten pounds of sugar a year, and the labour is very [...]: The sap is extracted in the months of February and March, and granulated, by the simple operation of bo [...]ling, to a sugar equal in [...] and whiteness to the best Muscovado.

"Springs of excellent water abound in every part of this territory; [...] small and large streams, for mills and other purposes, are actually [...]ersed, as if by art, that there be no deficiency in any of the [...]eniences of life.

[Page 514] "Very little waste land is to be found in any part of this [...] country. There are no swamps but such as may be readily [...] and made into arable and meadow land; and though the hills are [...] [...] ­quent, they are gentle and swelling, no where high or incap [...] tillage. They are of a deep, rich soil, covered with a heavy [...] of timber, and well adapted to the production of wheat, rye, [...] tobacco, &c.

"The communications between this country and the sea, [...] principally in the four following directions.

"1. The route through the Scioto and Muskingum to Lake [...] so to the river Hudson; which has been already described.

"2. The passage up the Ohio and Monongahela to the [...] [...] ­bovementioned, which leads to the navigable waters of the [...]. This portage is thirty miles, and will probably be rendered [...] [...] by the execution of the plans now on foot for opening the nav [...] of those waters.

"3. The Great Kanhaway, which falls into the Ohio from [...] Virginia shore, between the Hockhocking and the Scioto, [...] [...] extensive navigation from the southeast, and leaves but 18 miles [...] age from the navigable waters of James river, in Virginia. This [...] [...] ­munication, for the country between Muskingum and Scioto, [...] probably be more used than any other, for the exportation of [...] [...] ­factures, and other light and valuable articles; and, especially, [...] importation of foreign commodities, which may be brought [...] Chesapeek to the Ohio, much cheaper than they are now carried [...] Philadelphia to Carlisle, and the other thick settled back [...] Pennsylvania. *

"4. But the current down the Ohio and Missisippi, for heavy [...] ­cles that suit the Florida and West India markets, such as corn [...] beef, lumber, &c. will be more frequently loaded than any [...] earth. The distance from the Scioto to the Missisippi is 800 [...] from thence to the sea is 900. This whole course is easily run [...] days; and the passage up those rivers is not so difficult as has [...] been represented. It is found, by late experiments, that fails are [...] to great advantage against the current of the Ohio: And it is [...] of observation, that in all probability stream beats will be found [...] infinite service in all our extensive river navigation.

"The design of Congress and of the Ohio Company is, [...] [...] settlements shall proceed regularly down the Ohio; and north [...] [...] Lake Erie. And it is probable that not many years will elapse [...] ­fore the whole country above Miami will be brought to that [...] cultivation, which will exhibit all its latent beauties, and justify [...] descriptions of travellers which have so often made it the garden [...] the world, the seat of wealth, and the centre of a great empire."

ANIMALS, &c.] "No country is better stocked with wild [...] of every kind: Innumerable herds of deer, and wild cattle, [...] [...] ­tered in the groves, and fed in the extensive bottoms that every [...] abound: an unquestionable proof of the great fertility of [...] Turkies, geese, ducks, swans, teal, pheasants, partridges, &c. [...] observation, believed to be in greater plenty here, than the tam [...] [...] try are in any part of the old settlements in America.

[Page 515] [...] are well stored with fish of various kinds, and many [...] of an excellent quality. They are generally large, though of [...] sites. The cat fish, which is the largest, and of a delicious [...] weighs from 6 to 80 pounds."

[...]ITIES AND CURLO [...]IT [...]ES.] The number of old forts, [...] the Kentucky country, are the admiration of the curious, and [...] of much speculation. They are mostly of an oblong form, [...] strong, well chosen ground, and contiguous to water. [...] whom, and for what purpose, these were thrown up, is un­ [...] [...] they are undoubtedly very ancient, as there is not the least visi­ [...] in the age or size of the timber growing on or within [...] and that which grows without; and the oldest natives have [...] tradition respecting them. Dr. Cutler, who has accurately ex­ [...] the ones on these forts, and which he thinks, from appearan­ [...] [...] second growth, is of opinion that they must have been [...] upwards of 1000 years ago. They must have been the efforts of [...] church more devoted to labour than our present race of In­ [...] it is difficult to conceive how they could be constructed [...] use of iron tools. At a convenient distance from these [...] stands a small mound of earth, thrown up in the form of a [...], and seems in some measure proportioned to the size of its adja­ [...] [...]casion. On examination, they have been found to con­ [...] [...] substance, supposed to be bones, and of the human kind. [...] [...] this head we may mention the extensive meadows, or as the [...] them Prairie, which answer to what, in the southern states, [...]. They are a rich plain, without trees and cover­ [...] grass. Some of these, between St. Vincennes and the Mis­ [...] 30 or 40 miles in extent. In passing them, as far as the eye [...] there is not a tree to be seen; but there is plenty of deer, [...] little, bears, and wolves, and innumerable flocks of turkies; these, [...] green grass, form a rich and beautiful prospect.

[...].] The posts established for the protection of the frontiers, [...] Franklin, on French Creek—Harmar, at the mouth of [...]—Stub [...]n, at the rapids of the Oirio—Fayette, Hamilton, [...], St. Clair, Marietta, and St. Vincennes.

[...]NMENT. &c.] By an ordinance of congress, passed on the [...] July 1787, this country, for the purposes of temporary gov­ [...] was erected into one district, subject, however, to a division, [...] circumstances shall make it expedient.

[...] same ordinance it is provided, that congress shall appoint a [...], whose commission shall continue in force three years, unless [...].

[...] governor must reside in the district, and have a freehold es­ [...], in 1000 acres of land, while in the exercise of his office. [...], from time to time, are to appoint a secretary, to con­ [...] office four years, unless sooner removed, who must reside [...] district, and have an estate of 500 acres of land, while in [...].

[...] of the secretary is, to keep and preserve the acts and [...] legislature, and the public records of the district, and the [...] [...] governor, in his executive department; and to [...] [...] copies of such acts and proceedings, every six [...] in the secretary of congress.

[Page 516] The ordinance provides that congress shall appoint three judges, possessed each of 500 acres of land in the district in which they are to reside, and to hold their commissions during good behaviour, any two of whom shall form a court, which shall have a com­mon law jurisdiction. The governor and judges are authorized to adopt and publish in the district, such laws of the original states, criminal and civil, as may be necessary and best suited to the circum­stances of the district, and report them to congress, and, if approved, they shall continue in force, till the organization of the general as­sembly of the district, who shall have authority to alter them. The governor is to command the militia, and appoint and commission their officers, except general officers, who are to be appointed and commissioned by congress.

Previously to the organization of the assembly, the governor is to appoint such magistrates and civil officers, as shall be deemed necessary for the preservation of peace and order.

So soon as there shall be 5000 free male inhabitants of full age, in the district, they shall receive authority to elect representatives, one for every 500 free male inhabitants, to represent them in the general assembly; the representation to increase progressively with the num­ber of free male inhabitants till there be 25 representatives; af­ter which the number and proportion of the representatives shall be regulated by the legislature. A representative must possess, in fee simple, 200 acres of land, and be a resident in the district—and must have been a citizen of the United States, or a resident in the district, three years preceding his election. An elector must have [...] acres of land in the district, must have been a citizen of one of the states, and must be a resident in the district, or must possess the same freehold and have been two years a resident in the district. The representa­tives, when duly elected, are to continue in office two years.

The general assembly, or legislature, shall consist of the governor, legislative council and house of representatives. The legislative coun­cil shall consist of five members, to continue in office five years, un­less sooner removed by congress. Three make a quorum. The coun­cil are to be thus appointed: The governor and representatives, when met, shall nominate ten persons, residents in the district, and each posses­sed of a freehold in 500 acres of land, and return their names to congress, who shall appoint and commission five of them to serve as aforesaid.

All bills passed by a majority in the house, and in council, shall be referred to the governor for his assent; but no bill, or legislative act whatever, shall be of force without his assent. The governor shall have power to convene, prorogue, and dissolve the general assembly, when, in his opinion, it shall be expedient.

The legislature, when organized, shall have authority, by joint [...] ­lot, to elect a delegate to congress, who shall have a seat in congress with a right of debating, but not of voting, during this temporary government.

And for extending the fundamental principles of civil and religion liberty, which form the basis whereon these republicks, their laws and constitutions, are erected; to fix and establish those principles as the basis of all laws, constitutions and governments, which forever here­after shall be formed in the said territory; to provide also for the es­tablishment of state and permanent government thereof, and for their admission to share in the federal councils on an equal footing with [...] [Page 517] original states, at as early periods as may be consistent with the gen­eral interest:

It is hereby ordained and declared by the authority aforesaid, That the following articles shall be considered as articles of compact, be­tween the original states and the people, and states in the said ter­ritory, and forever remain unalterable, unless by common consent, to wit:

Article 1st, No person, demeaning himself in a peaceable and order­ly manner, shall ever be molested on account of his mode of worship or religious sentiments in the said territory.

Article 2d. The inhabitants of the said territory shall always be articled to the benefits of the writ of habeas corpus, and of the trial by jury, of a proportionate representation of the people in the legisla­ture, and of judicial proceedings, according to the course of the com­mon law: all persons shall be bailable unless for capital offences, where the proof shall be evident or the presumption great: all fines shall be moderate, and no cruel or unusual punishment shall be inflict­ed; no man shall be deprived of his liberty or property but by the judgment of his peers, or of the law of the land; and should the public exigences make it necessary for the common preservation to take any person's property, or to demand his particular services, full compensation shall be made for the same; and in the just preservation of the rights and property, it is understood and declared, that no law ought ever to be made, or have force in the said territory, that shall in any manner whatever interfere with, or affect private contracts or en­gagements bona fide and without fraud previously formed.

Article 3d. Religion, morality and knowledge, being necessary to good government and the happiness of mankind, schools and the [...] of education shall forever be encouraged; the utmost good faith shall always be observed towards the Indians; their lands and proper­ly shall never be taken from them without their consent; and in their property, rights and liberty, they shall never be invaded or disturbed, unless in just and lawful wars authorized by congress; but laws founded in justice and humanity shall from time to time be made, for preventing wrongs being done to them, and for preserving peace and friendship with them.

Article 4th. The said territory, and the States which may be formed therein, shall forever remain a part of this confederacy of the United States of America, subject to the articles of confederation, and to such alterations therein as shall be constitutionally made; and to all the acts and ordinances of the United States, in congress assembled, [...]formable thereto. The inhabitants and settlers in the said terri­tory, shall be subject to pay a part of the federal debts contracted, or to be contracted, and a proportionable part of the expenses of govern­ment, to be apportioned on them by congress, according to the same common rule and measure, by which apportionments thereof shall be made on the other states, and the taxes for paying their proportion, shall be laid and levied by the authority and direction of the legisla­tion of the district or districts, or new states, as in the original [...], within the time agreed upon by the United States, in congress [...]bled. The legislatures of those districts, or new states, shall nev­er interfere with the primary disposal of the soil by the United States, [...] congress assembled, nor with any regulations congress may find nec­essary [Page 518] for securing the title in such soil to the bona side purchase [...] [...] tax shall be imposed on lands the property of the United States, [...] [...] no case shall nonresident proprietors be taxed higher than [...] [...]. The navigable waters leading into the Missisippi St. [...] [...] the carrying places between the same, shall be common high ways [...] forever free, as well to the inhabitants of the said territory; [...] [...] ­izens of the United States, and those of any other states that may [...] [...] ­mitted into the confederacy, without any [...]x, import or [...] [...].

Article 5th. There shall be formed in the said [...] than three, nor more than five states; and the boundaries [...] as soon as Virginia shall alter her act of [...] and consents [...] same, shall become fixed and established as follows, viz. That [...] state in the said territory, shall be bounded on the Missisippi [...] [...] and Wabash rivers; a direct line drawn from the Wabash [...] [...] Vincents due north to the territorial line between the United States and Canada, and by the said territorial line to the Lake of the [...] and Missisippi. The middle state shall be bounded by [...] line, the Wabash from Post Vincents to the Ohio [...] by a direct line drawn due north from the mouth of [...] Miami to the said territorial line, and by the said territorial [...]. The eastern state shall be bounded by the last [...] line, the Ohio, Pennsylvania, and the said territorial line: [...] however, and it is further understood and declared, [...] boundaries of these three states, shall be subject so [...] that if congress hereafter shall find it expedient, they [...] thority to form one, or two states, in that part of the [...] which lies north of an east and west line drawn through the [...] bend or extreme of lake Michigan; and when any [...] shall have 60,000 free inhabitants therein, such state shall be [...] [...] by its delegates into the congress of the United States, on an [...] with the original states in all respects whatever; and shall [...] liberty to form a permanent constitution and state government [...] [...] ­vided the constitution and government [...] to be formed, shall be [...] ­lican, and in conformity to the principles contained in [...] [...] ­cles, and so far as it can be consistent with the general [...] confederacy, such admission shall be allowed at an earlier [...] [...] when there may be a less number of free inhabitants in the [...] 60,000.

Article 6th. There shall be neither slavery nor involuntary [...] [...] ­vitude in the said territory, otherwise than in the punish [...] [...] crimes, whereof the party shall have been only convicted [...] always, that any person escaping into the same, from without [...] service is lawfully claimed in any one of the original staves, [...] [...] ­ [...]ive may be lawfully reclaimed and conveyed to the person [...] or her labour or service as aforesaid.

Such is the present government of the Western Territory, [...] the political obligations of the adventures into this fertile and [...] ­ful part of the United States.

In the ordinance of congress, for the government of the [...] it is provided, that after the said territory acquires a [...] population, it shall be divided into states. The eastern state, [...] [...] thus provided to be made, is bounded on the Great Miami [...] west, and by the Pennsylvania line on the east. The [...] state will fall between the Scioto and the Hockhocking. At the [...] [Page 519] [...] of these rivers will probably be the seat of government for this [...]: And, if we may indulge the sublime contemplation of behold­ [...] whole territory of the United States settled by an enlightened [...], and continued under one extended government—on the river [...] and not far from this spot, will be the seat of empire for the [...] [...]minion. This is central to the whole; it will best accom­ [...] every part; it is the most pleasant, and probably the most [...]!

[...] settlement of this country has been checked, for several years [...] the unhappy Indian war, an amicable termination of which [...] [...] wished, might speedily take place.

SOUTHERN STATES.
THIRD, and much the largest GRAND DIVISION of the UNITED STATES comprehends.

MARYLAND, VIRGINIA, KENTUCKY, NORTH CAROLINA, TERRITORY SOUTH of OHIO, SOUTH CAROLINA, and GEORGIA.

[...] extensive division is bounded north, by Pennsylvania and the [...] river; west, by the Missisippi; south, by East and West Flor­ [...] [...], by the Atlantic ocean and the Delaware state. It is inter­ [...] [...] a N. E. and S. W. direction by the range of Allegany [...] [...] which give rise to many noble rivers, which fall either [...] Atlantic, on the east, or the Missisippi on the west. From [...] [...] coast, 60, 80, and in some parts 100 miles back towards the [...] [...], the country, generally speaking, is nearly a dead level, and [...] large proportion of it is covered, in its natural state, with pitch [...]. In the neighbourhood of stagnant waters, which abound in [...] country, the inhabitants are sickly. In the back, hilly and [...] [...] country, they are as healthy as in any part of [...].

[...] district of the Union contains upwards of one [...] nine [...] thousand inhabitants, of whom 648,439 are slaves, which is [...] fourteenths of the whole numbers of slaves in the United [...]. The influence of slavery has produced a very distinguishing [...] [...] the general character of the inhabitants, which, though [...] [...] to their disadvantage, has been softened and [...] by the benign effects of the revolution, and the progress of lib­ [...] humanity.

[...] following may be considered us the principal productions of [...] [...]—tobacco, rice, indigo, wheat, corn, cotton, tar, pitch, [...] and lumber.

[...] district is fixed the permanent seat of the general government.

[Page 520]

MARYLAND.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 134 Miles. between 37° 56′ and 39° 44′ N. Lat. Sq. Miles. 14,000 one fourth of which is water.
Breadth 110 Miles. 0° and 4° 30′ W. Lon. Sq. Miles. 14,000 one fourth of which is water.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Pennsylvania; east, by Delaware state, and the Atlantic ocean; south and west, by Virginia.

CIVIL DIVISIONS AND POPULATION.] This state is divided in­to 19 counties, 11 of which are on the Western, and 8 on the Eastern shore of Chesapeek Bay.

Counties. No. Inhabitants.
Western Shore. Harford 14,976
Baltimore 25,434
Do. Town & Precincts 13,503
Ann Arundel, 22,598
Frederick 30,791
Allegany 4,809
Washington 15,822
Montgomery 18,003
Prince George 21,344
Calvert 8,652
Charles 20,613
St. Mary's 15,544
Total 212,089
Counties No. Inhabitants.
Eastern Shore. Cecil 13,625
Kent 12,836
Queen A [...]n 15,463
Caroline 9,500
Talbot 13,084
Somerset 15,610
Dorchester 15,875
Worcester 11,640
Eastern Shore 107,639
Western Shore 212,089
Total in the state 319,728

Number of Slaves in the state 103,036.

Each of the counties sends four representatives to the house of delegates, besides which the city of Annapolis, and town of Balti­more, send each two.

BAYS AND RIVERS.] Chesapeek Bay, as we have already hinted, divides this state into the eastern and western divisions. This bay, which is the largest in the United States, was particularly described in the general account of the United States. It affords many good fish­eries, and is remarkable for the excellence of its crabs, and also for a particular species of wild duck, called, "Canvas back". In a com­mercial view, it is of immense advantage to the state. It receives a number of large rivers. From the eastern shore in Maryland, among other smaller ones, it receives Pokomoke, Nanticoke, Choptank, Ches­ter and Elk rivers. From the north, the rapid Susquehannah; and from the west, Patapsco, Severn, Patuxent and Patomak, half of which is in Maryland, and half in Virginia. Except the Susquehannah and Patomak, these are small rivers. Patapsco river is but about 30 or 40 yards wide at the ferry, just before it empties into the bason upon which Baltimore stands. Its source is in York county in Pennsylva­nia. Its course is southwardly, till it reaches Elk ridge landing, about 8 miles westward of Baltimore; it then turns eastward, in a broad bay­like stream, by Baltimore, which it leaves on the north, and passes in­to the Chesapeek.

[Page 521] The entrance into Baltimore harbour, about a mile below Fell's Point, is hardly pistol shot across, and of course may be easily defend­ed against naval force.

Severn is a short, inconsiderable river, passing by Annapolis, which it leaves to the south, emptying, by a broad mouth, into the Chesa­peek.

Patuxent is a larger river than the Patapsco. It rises in Ann Arun­del county, and runs southeastwardly, and then east into the bay, 15 or 20 miles north of the mouth of Patomak. There are several small rivers, such as Wighcocomico, Eastern Branch, Monocasy and Con­togcheague, which empty into Patomak river from the Maryland side.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY, CLIMATE, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.} East of the blue ridge of mountains, which stretches across the western part of this state, the land, like that in all the south­ern states, is generally level and free of stones; and appears to have been made much in the same way; of course the soil must be similar, and the natural growth not remarkably different.

The ground is uniformly level and low in most of the counties on the eastern shore, and consequently covered in many places with stag­nant water, except where it is intersected by numerous creeks. Here also are large tracts of marsh, which, during the day, load the atmos­phere with vapour, that falls in dew, in the close of the summer and salt seasons, which are sickly. The spring and summer are most healthy.

The soil of the good land in Maryland, is of such a nature and quality as to produce from 12 to 16 bushels of wheat, or from 20 to 30 bushels of Indian corn per acre. The bushels of wheat, and 15 bushels of corn per acre, may be the annual average crops in the state at large.

Wheat and tobacco are the staple commodities. Tobacco is gener­ally cultivated in sets, by negroes, in the following manner: The [...] is sown in beds of fine mould, and transplanted the beginning of May. The plants are set at the distance of 3 or 4 feet from each o­ther, and are hilled and kept continually free of weeds. When as many leaves have shot out as the soil will nourish to advantage, the up of the plant is broken off, which prevents its growing higher. It a carefully kept clear of worms, and the suckers, which put out be­tween the leaves, are taken off at proper times, till the plant arrives at perfection, which is in August. When the leaves turn of a brownish colour, and begin to be spotted, the plant is out down and hung up to dry, after having sweat in heaps one night. When it can be hand­led without crumbling, which is always in most weather, the leaves are stripped from the stalk, and tied in bundles, and packed for expor­tation in hogsheads containing 800 or 900 pounds. No suckers nor ground leaves are allowed to be merchantable. An industrious person any manage 6000 plants of tobacco, (which yield a 1000 lb.) and four acres of Indian corn.

In the interior country, on the uplands, considerable quantities of hemp and flax are raised. As long ago as 1751, in the month of Oc­tober, no less than 60 waggons, loaded with flaxseed, came down to Baltimore from the back country.

[Page 522] Two articles are said to be peculiar to Maryland. viz. the genuine white, wheat, which grows in Kent, Queen Anns and Talbot counties, on the eastern shore, and which degenerates in other places—and the bright [...]ate's foot tobacco, which is produced at Elkridge, on the Patux­ent, on the Western Shore.

Among other kind, of timber is the oak, of several kinds, which is of a strait grain and easily rives into staves, for exportation. The black walnut is in demand for cabinets, tables, and other furniture. The apples of this state are large, but mealy; their peaches plenty and good. From these the inhabitants distil cyder brandy and peach brandy.

The forests abound with nuts of various kinds, which are collect­ively called mast. On this mast vast numbers of swine are fed, which run wild in the woods. These swine, when fatted, are caught, killed, barrelled and exported in great quantities. This traffic formerly was carried on to a very considerable extent. Douglas, says, that "in the year 1733, which was a good masting year, one gentleman, a pla [...] and merchant, in Virginia, salted up 3000 barrels of pork".

POPULATION AND CHARACTER.] The population of this state is exhibited in the foregoing table. By that it appears that the [...] ­ber of inhabitants in the state, including the negroes, is 319.728; which is nearly 23 for every square mile. The inhabitants, except in the populous towns, live on their plantations, often several miles distant from each other. To an inhabitant of the middle, and espe­cially of the eastern states, which are thickly populated, they appear to live very retired and unsocial lives. The effects of thus compara­tive solitude are visible in the countenances, as well as in the manners and dress of many of the country people. You observe comparative­ly little of that cheerful sprigtliness of look and action, which as the invariable and genuine offspring of social intercourse. Nor do you find that attention paid to dress, which is common, and which decen­cy and propriety have rendered necessary, among people who are lia­ble to receive company almost every day. Unaccustomed, in a great measure, to frequent and friendly visits, they often suffer too much negligence in their dress. As the negroes perform all the man­ual labour, their masters are left to saunter away life in sloth, and too often in ignorance. These observations, however, must in justice be limited to the people in the country, and to those particularly, whose poverty or parsimony prevents their spending a part of their time in populous towns, or otherwise mingling, with the world. And with these limitations, they will equally apply to all the southern states. The inhabitants of the populous towns, and those from the country who have intercourse with them, are in their manners and custom genteel and agreeable.

That pride which grows on slavery, and is habitual to those, who, from their infancy, are taught to believe and to feel their superiority, is a visible characteristic of the inhabitants of Maryland. But [...] this characteristic we must not fall to connect that of hospitality to strangers, which is equally universal and obvious. Many of the wo­men possess all the amiable, and many of the elegant accomplishments of their sex.

The inhabitants are made up of various nations of many different religious sentiments; few general observations, therefore, of a char­acteristical [Page 523] kind will apply. It may be said, however, with great [...], that they are in general very federal, and friends to good gov­ernment. They owe little money as a state, and are willing and able to discharge their debts. Their credit is very good; and although they have so great a proportion of slaves, yet a number of influenc [...]al gen­tlemen, have evinced their humanity and their disposition to abolish so disreputable a traffic, by forming themselves into a society for the [...]ition of negro slavery.

CHIEF TOWNS.] ANNAPOLIS (city) is the capital of Maryland, and the wealthiest town of its size in America. It is situated at the mo [...]th of Severn river, on a healthy spot, 30 miles south of Baltimore. It is a place of little note in the commercial world. The houses, a­bout 260 in number, are generally large and elegant, indicative of great wealth. The number of inhabitants does not exceed 2000. The de­ [...] of those who planned the city. was to have the whole in the form in a circle, with the streets like radii, beginning at the center where [...] House stands; and thence diverging in every direction. The principal part of the buildings are arranged agreeably to this awk­ [...] plan. The State House is an elegant building.

BALTIMORE has had the most rapid growth of any town on the eminent, and is the fourth in size and the fifth in trade in the Unit­ed States, * It lies in lat. 39° 21′, on the north side of Pitapsco river, round what is called the Bacon, in which the water at common tides, is about five or six feet deep. Baltimore is divided into the town and Fell's point, by a [...] over which are two bridges; but the houses extend, in a soa [...]se [...] on, from one to the other. At Fell's wint the water is deep enough for ships of burden; but small vessels only go up to the town. The situation of the town is low and was [...] unhealthy; but the increase of houses, and of course, of smoke, the tendency or which is to destroy or to dispel damp and [...] wholesome vapours, and the improvements that have been made, particularly that of passing the sheets, have rendered it tolerably [...]lthy. The houses were numbered in 1787, and found to be 1955; about 1200 of which were in the town, and the rest at Fell's point. The present number is about 2300. The number of ware houses and [...] is 164, and of churches nine, which belong to German [...]inists and Lutherans, Episcopalians, Presbyterians, Roman Cath­ [...]ks, Baptists, Methodists. Quakers, Nicolites, or New Quakers. The number of inhabitants in the town and precincts, according to the [...] of 1790 was 13,503. There are many very respectable fami­ [...] in Baltimore, who five genteely—are hospitable to strangers, and contain a friendly and improving intercourse with each other; but [...] of the inhabitants, recently collected from almost all quarters of [...] world—bent on the pursuit of wealth—varying in their habits, their [...]ners and their religions, have yet their general character to form. Market street is the principal street in the town, and runs nearly [...] and west, a mile in length, parallel with the water. This is cros­ [...] by several other streets leading from the water, a number of which, particularly Calvert, South and Gay streets, are well built. North and east of the town the land rises and affords a fine prospect of the town and bay. Belvidera, the seat of Col. Howard, [Page 524] exhibits a fine landscape. The town—the point—the shipping both in the bason and at Fell's point—the bay as far as the eye can reach—rising ground on the right and left of the harbour—a grove of trees on the declivity at the right—a stream of water breaking over the rocks at the foot of the hill on the left, all conspire to complete the beauty and grandeur of the prospect.

GEORGETOWN stands on the bank of the River Patomak, about 160 miles from its entrance into Chesapeek Bay. The ground on which it stands is very broken, being a cluster of little hills, which, though at present elevated considerably above the surface of the river, were probably, at some former period overflowed, as at the depth of 8 or 10 feet below the surface, marine shells have been found. Dr. Martin, concludes an account of the climate and diseases, of this town, in the following words—

"Upon the whole, Georgetown and its vicinity may be considered as a healthy part of America; and in any disputes about the propriety of the seat of the general government being fixed here, no objection can be urged against it on account of its diseases."

FREDERICKTOWN is a fine flourishing inland town, of upwards of 300 houses, built principally of brick and stone, and mostly on one broad street. It is situated in a fertile country, about 4 miles south of Catokton mountain and is a place of considerable trade. It has four places for public worship, one for Presbyterians, two for Dutch Luther­ans and Calvinists, and one for Baptists; besides a public goal and a brick market house.

HAGARSTOWN is but little inferior to Fredericktown, and is situated in the beautiful and well cultivated valley of Conegocheague, and carries on a considerable trade with the western country.

ELLTON is situated near the head of Chesapeek bay, on a small river which bears the name of the town. It enjoys great advantages from the carrying trade between Baltimore and Philadelphia. The tides ebb and flow to this town.

The city of WASHINGTON, in the territory of COLUMBIA, was ceded, by the states of Virginia and Maryland, to the United States, and by them established as the seat of their government, after the year 1800. This city, which is now building, stands at the junction of the rivers Pato­mak and the Eastern branch, latitude 38° 53′ North, extending nearly four miles up each, and including a tract of territory, exceeded, in point of convenience, salubrity, and beauty, by none in America. For al­though the land in general, appears level, yet by gentle and gradual swellings, a variety of elegant prospects are produced, and a sufficient descent formed for conveying off the water occasioned by rain. Within the limits of the city are a great number of excellent springs; and by digging wells, water of the best quality may readily be h [...]d. Besides, the never failing streams, that now run through that territory, may also be collected for the use of the city. The waters of Reedy branch, and of Tiber creek, may be conveyed to the President's house. The source of Tiber creek is elevated about 236 feet above the level of the tide in said creek. The perpendicular height of the ground on which the capital is to stand, is 78 feet above the level of the tide in Tiber creek. The water of Tiber creek, may, therefore, be conveyed to the capital, and, after watering that part of the city, may be destined to other useful purposes.

[Page 525] The Eastern branch is one of the safest and most commodious har­bours in America, being sufficiently deep for the largest ships, for a­bout four miles above its mouth, while the channel lies close along the bank adjoining the city, and affords a large and convenient har­bour—The Patomak, although only navigable for small craft, for a considerable distance from its banks next to the city (excepting a­ [...] half a mile above the junction of the rivers) will nevertheless af­ford a capacious summer harbour; as an immense number of ships by ride in the great channel, opposite to, and below the city.

The situation of this metropolis is upon the great post road, equi­ [...]ant from the northern and southern extremities of the Union, and nearly so from the Atlantic and Pittsburg, upon the best naviga­ [...], and in the midst of a commercial territory, probably the rich­est, and commanding the most extensive internal resources of any is America. It has therefore many advantages to recommend it, as is eligible place for the permanent seat of the general government; [...] as it is likely to be speedily built, and otherwise improved, by the public spirited enterprize of the people of the United States, and [...] by foreigners, it may be expected to grow up with a degree of [...]lity hitherto unparalleled in the annals of cities.

The plan of this city appears to contain some important improve­ments upon that of the best planned cities in the world, combining, in a remarkable degree, convenience, regularity, elegance of prospect, and a free circulation of air.—The positions for the different public [...], and for the several squares and areas of different shapes as lay are laid down, were first determined on the most advantageous stand, commanding the most extensive prospects, and from their [...]tion, susceptible of such improvements as either use or ornament [...] hereafter require. The Capitol will be situated on a most beau­tiful eminence, commanding a complete view of every part of the ci­ [...] and of a considerable part of the country around. The Presr­ [...]'s house will stand on a rising ground, possessing a delightful wa­ [...] prospect, together with a commanding view of the Capitol, and the most material parts of the city. Lines, or avenues, of direct com­munication, have been devised to connect the most distant and impor­tant objects. These transverse avenues, or diagonal streets, are laid [...] on the most advantageous ground for prospect and convenience, [...] are calculated not only to produce a variety of charming pros­ [...], but greatly to facilitate the communication throughout the ci­ [...]—North and south lines, intersected by others running due east and west, make the distribution of the city into streets, squares, &c. and those lines have been so combined as to meet at certain given [...]ints, with the divergent avenues, so as to form, on the spaces first strained, the different squares or areas.—The grand avenues, and [...] streets as lead immediately to public places, are from 130 to 160 feet wide, and may be conveniently divided into footways, a walk [...] with trees on each side, any a paved way for carriages. The [...] streets are from 90 to 110 feet wide.

In order to execute this plan, Mr. Elhcott draw a true meridionad [...] by celestial observation, which passes through the area intended [...] the Capitol. This line he crossed by another, running due east and west, which passes through the same area. These lines were ac­ [...]ely measured, and made the bases on which the whole plan was [...]ted. He ran all the lines by a transit instrument, and deter­mined [Page 526] the acute angles by actual measurement, leaving nothing to the uncertainly of the compass. *

MINES AND MANUFACTURIES.] Mines of iron ore, of a superior quality, abound in many parts of the state. Furnaces for running this ore into pigs and hollow ware, and forges to refine pig iron into bars, are numerous, and worked to great extent and profit. This is the only manufacture of importance carried on in the state, except it be that of wheat into flour and curing tobacco.

TRADE.] The trade of Maryland is principally carried on from Baltimore, with the other states, with the West Indies, and with some parts of Europe. To these places they send annually about 30,000 hogsheads of tobacco, besides large quantities of wheat, flour, pig iron, lumber and corn—beans, pork and flax seed in smaller quantities [...] and receive in return, clothing for themselves and negroes, and other dry goods, wines, spirits, sugars and other West India commodities. The balance is generally in their favour.

The total amount of exports from Baltimore Dols. Cts.
from Oct. 1, 1739, to Sept. 30, 1790, was 2,027,777 64
Value of imports for the same time, 1,945,899 55
Exports from Oct. 1, 1790, to Sept. 30, 1791. 3,131,227 55

During the last mentioned period, the quantity of wheat exported was 205,571 bushels—Indian corn 205,643 do.—buck wheat 4,286 do. peas, 10,619 do. besides 151,445 barrels of wheat flour, 4,325 do. Indian meal, 6,761 do. bread, and 3,10½ kegs of crackers.

RELIGION.] The Roman Catholics, who were the first settled i [...] Maryland, are the most numerous religious sect. Besides these the [...] are Protestant Episcopalians, English, Scotch and Irish Presbyterians, German Calvinists, German Lutherans, Friends, Baptists, Methodist, Mennonists, Nicolites or new Quakers; who all enjoy liberty of conscience.

SEMINARIES OF LEARNING, &c.] Washington academy, in So [...] ­erset county, was instituted by law in 1779. It was founded and is supported by voluntary subscriptions and private donations, and is au­thorized to receive gifts and legacies, and to hold 2000 acres of land. A supplement to the law, passed in 1784, increased the number of trus­tees from eleven to fifteen.

In 1782, a college was instituted at Chestertown, in Kent county, and was honoured with the name of WASHINGTON COLLEGE, after President Washington. It is under the management of 24 visitors or governors, with power to supply vacancies, and hold estates whose yearly value shall not exceed 6000l. current money. By a law enact­ed in 1787, a permanent fund was granted to this institution of 1250l. a year, currency, out of the monies arising from marriage licenses, fines and forfeitures on the Eastern Shore.

St. John's College was instituted in 1784, to have also 24 trustees, with power to keep up the succession by supplying vacancies, and to receive an annual income of 9000l. A permanent fund is assigned this college, of 1750l. a year, out of the monies arising from marriage licenses, ordinary licenses. fines and forfeitures on the Western Shore. This college is to beat Annapolis, where a building is now prepared for [Page 527] it. Very liberal subscriptions were obtained towards founding and carry­ing on these seminaries. The two colleges constitute one university, by the name of 'the University of Maryland,' whereof the governor of the State, for the time being, is chancellor, and the principal of one of them, vice chancellor, either by seniority or by election, as may [...]easter be provided for by rule or by law. The chancellor is em­ [...]ered to call a meeting of the trustees, or a representation of men of each, and two of the members of the faculty of each, (the principal being one) which meeting is stiled 'The Convocation of the university of Mary land,' who are to frame the laws, preserve uni­versity of manners and literature in the colleges, confer the higher [...] determine appeals, &c.

The Roman Catholics have also erected a college at Georgetown, [...]mak river, for the promotion of general literature.

In 1 [...]85, the Methodists instituted a college at Abington, in Harford [...] by the name of Cokesbury college, after Thomas Coke, and [...] Asbury, bishops of the Methodist Episcopal Church. The [...] edifice is of brick, handsomely built, on a healthy spot; enjoy­ [...] a fine air, and a very extensive prospect.

The students, who are to consist of the sons of travelling preachers, [...] sons of annual subscribers, the sons of the members of the Method [...] [...]ciety and orphans, are instructed in English, Latin, Greek, Logic, [...]ric, History, Geography, Natural Philosophy and Astronomy; [...] when the finances of the college will ad [...], they are to be taught [...] Hebrew, French and German languages.

[...] college was erected and is supported wholly by subscription [...] voluntary donations.

The students have regular hours for rising, for prayers, for their meals, [...]udy and for recreation. They are all to be in bed precisely at [...] o'clock. Their recreations, (for they are to be 'indulged in [...] which the world calls play') are gardening walking, riding [...] bathing without doors; and within doors, the carpenters, joiners [...] makers or turners' business. Suitable provision is made for the several occupations, which are to be considered, not as masters [...]ugery and constraint, but as pleasing and healthful recreations, [...] for the body and mind. Another o [...] their rules, which though [...] and singular, is favourable to the health and vigour of the body [...] mind, is, that the students shall not sleep on feather beds, but on [...]resses, and each one by himself. Particular attention is paid to [...] morals and religion of the students.

There are a few other literary institutions, of inferior note, in dif­ferent parts of the state, and provision is made for free schools in most of the counties; though some are entirely neglected, and very few [...] on with any success: so that a great proportion of the lower [...] of people are ignorant; and there are not a few who cannot write [...] names. But the revolution, among other happy effects, has [...] the spirit of education, which is salt spreading its salutary influ­ence over this and the other southern states.

[...]TURAL CURIOSITIES.] There are several remarkable caves in [...]estern part of this state, but particular and accurate descriptions [...]em, have not been received.

[Page 528] EXPENSES OF GOVERN­MENT AND TAXES.} The annual expenses of government are estimated at about 20,000l. currency. The revenue arises chiefly from taxes on real and personal property.

CONSTITUTION.] The legislature is composed of two district branches, a Senate and house of Delegates, and stiled The General assembly of Maryland. The senators are elected in the following manner. On the first of September, every fifth year, the freemen choose two men in each county to be electors of the senate, and the elector for the city of Annapolis, and one for the town of Baltimore. These electors must have the qualifications necessary for county [...] gates. These electors meet at Annapolis, or such other place on [...] be appointed for convening the legislature, on the third Monday [...] September, every fifth year, and elect by ballot fifteen senators one of their own body or from the people at large. Nine of these must [...] residents on the western shore, and six on the eastern—they must [...] more than twenty five years of age—must have resided in the [...] more than three years next preceding the election, and have [...] [...] personal property above the value of a thousand pounds. The [...] ­ate may originate and bills, except money bills, to which they can [...] ­ly give their assent of dissent. The senate choose their president [...] ballot. The house of delegates is composed of four members for each county, chosen annually the first Monday in October. The [...] of Annapolis and town of Baltimore send each two delegates. The qualifications of a delegate, are, full age, one year's residence in [...] county where be is chosen, and real and personal property above the value of five hundred pounds. Both houses choose their own [...] and judge of the election of their members. A majority of [...] [...] quorum. The election of senators and delegates is viva voce, and [...] ­iffs the returning officers, except in Baltimore town, where the [...] missioners superintend the elections and make returns. The [...] session of the legislature is on the first Monday in November.—The qualifications of a freeman are full age, a freehold estate of fifty [...] of land, and actual residence in the county where he offers to [...] property to the value of thirty pounds in any part of the [...] and a year's residence in the county where he offers to vote.

On the second Monday in November, annually, a governor is ap­pointed by the joint ballot of both houses, taken in each house re­spectively, and deposited in a conference room; where the boxes [...] examined by a joint committee of both houses, and the number [...] votes severally reported. The governor cannot continue in offi [...] longer than three years successively, nor be reelected until the expira­tion of four years after he has been out of office.—The qualification for the chief magistracy, are twenty five years of age, five years [...] ­dence in the state, next preceding the election, and real and persb [...] estate above the value of five thousand pounds, one thousand on which must be freehold estate.—On the second Tuesday of November, an­nually, the senators and delegates elect by joint ballot, five able [...] discreet men, above twenty five years of age, residents in the [...] three years next preceding the election, and possessing a freehold [...] lands and tenements above the value of a thousand pounds, to be [...] council for assisting the governor in the duties of his office.—Senators delegates and members of council, whilst such, can hold no other office of profit, nor receive the profits of any office exercised by another.—The governor with the advice of his council, appoints the chancellor [Page 529] [...] all judges and justices, the attorney general, naval and militia [...], registers of the land office, surveyors, and all other civil offi­ [...] except constables, assessors and overseers of the roads.—A [...] of appeals is established for the final determination of all causes, [...] may be brought from the general court * of admiralty, or of [...]ery

This constitution was established by a convention of delegates, at [...], August 14, 1776.

HISTORY.] Maryland was granted by king Charles I. to George [...], baron of Baltimore, in Ireland, June 20, 1632. The gov­ernment of the province, was by charter, vested in the proprietary; [...] it appears that he either never exercised these powers alone, or but [...]ort time; for we find that in 1637, the freemen rejected a body [...] drawn up in England, and transmitted by his lordship, in or­ [...] be passed for the government of the province. In the place of [...] they proposed forty two bills to be enacted into laws, by the [...] of the proprietary. These were however never enacted; at [...] they are not on record.

[...] Honourable Leonard Calvert, Esq Lord Baltimore's brother, [...] first governor, or lieutenant general. In 1638, a law was [...], constituting the first regular House of Assembly, which was to [Page 530] consist of such representatives, called [...], as should be elected pursuant to writs issued by the governor. These burgesses possessed all the powers of the persons electing them; but any other freemen, who did not assent to the election, might take their seats in person. Twelve burgesses or freemen, with the lieutenant general and secretary, con­stituted the assembly or legislature. This assembly sat at St. Mary's, one of the southern counties, which was the first settled part of Mary­land.

In 1642, it was enacted that 10 members of the assembly, of whom the governor and six burgesses were to be 7, should be a house; and [...] sickness should prevent that number from attending, the members present should make a house.

In 1644▪ one Ingle excited a rebellion, forced the governor to fly to Virginia for aid and protection, and seized the records and the great seal; the last of which, with most of the records of the prov­ince, were lost or destroyed. From this period, to the year 1647, when order was restored, the proceedings of the provinces are involv­ed in obscurity.

In July, 1646, the house of assembly, or more properly the burgesses requested that they might be separated into two branches—the burgesses by themselves, with a negative upon bills. This was not granted by the lieutenant general at that time; but in 1650, an act was passed di­viding the assembly into two houses. The governor, secretary, and any one or more of the council, formed the Upper House; the delegated from the several hundreds, who now represent the freemen, formed the Lower House. At this time there were in the province but two counties, St. Mary's and the Isle of Kent; but Ann Arundel was added the same session. This was during the administration of gov­ernor Stone.

In 1654, during Cromwell's usurpation in England, an act was pas­sed, restraining the exercise of the Roman Catholic religion. The must have been procured by the mere terror of Cromwell's power for the first and principal inhabitants were Catholic. Indeed the power of Cromwell was not established in Maryland without force and bloodshed. His friends and foes came to an open rupture, an engage­ment ensued, governor Stone was taken prisoner and condemned [...] be shot. This sentence however was not executed, but he was ke [...] a long time confinement.

In March, 1658, Josiah Fendall, Esq was appointed lieutenant general of Maryland by commission from Oliver Cromwell. He dis­solved the upper house, and surrendered the powers of government in to the hands of the delegates.

Upon the restoration in 1660, the Honourable Phillip Calvert, [...] was appointed governor; the old form of government was revived Fendall, and one Gerrard, a counsellor, were indicted, found guilty and condemned to banishment, with the loss of their estates; but up on petition they were pardoned.

In 1689, the government was taken out of the hands of Lord Bal­timore by the grand convention of England; and in 1692 [...] [...]opley was appointed governor by commission from William [...] Mary.

In 1692, the Protestant religion was established by law.

In 1699, under the administration of governor Blackiston, it [...] enacted that Annapolis should be the seat of government.

[Page 531] In 1716, the government of this Province was restored to the pro­prietary, and continued in his hands till the late revolution, when, [...]ough a minor, his property in the lands was confiscated, and the government assumed by the freemen of the province, who formed the constitution now existing. At the close of the war, Henry Harford, Esq the natural son and heir of Lord Baltimore, petitioned the legis­lature of Maryland for his estate; but his petition was not granted. [...] Harford estimated his loss of quit-rents, valued at twenty years [...]chase and including arrears, at £259,488:5:0, dollars at 7 [...]6—and the value of his manors and reserved lands at £327,441 of the [...] money.

LIST of GOVERNORS, with the date of their appointments.
[...] Leonard Calvert. Esq appointed Governor, 1637
Thomas Green, Esq 1647
William Stone, Esq 1649
The government remained in the hands of the parliament commissioners during the time of Oliver Cromwell's usur­pation 1654
The commissioners, by certain articles of agreement then en­ [...]ed into, delivered up the government into the hands of Jo­siah Fendale, Esq then governor 1658
[...] Phillip Calvert made Governor 1660
Charles Calvert, Esq 1662
Upon the death of Cecilius, the government descended to Charles, Lord Baltimore, who came into the province 1675
[...]mas Notly, Esq Governor 1678
Who continued till his Lordship returned a second time to [...] province in 1681
King William and Queen Mary took upon them the gov­ernment, and appointed Lyonel Copley, Esq Governor 1692
[...]ncis Nicholson, Esq 1694
Upon the death of Queen Mary, the government was altoge­ther in the hands of King William the III. 1696
Daniel Blackiston, Esq Governor 1699
By the death of King William III. Queen Ann took upon [...] the government—and the same governor was continued 1701-2
[...]mas Finch, Esq President 1703
[...] Seymour, Esq Governor 1704
[...]ard Lloyd, Esq President 1704
[...] Hart, Esq Governor 1714
Upon the death of Queen Ann, King George the I. took [...] him the government—and the same governor was con­ [...]ed 1715
The government was restored to Charles, Lord Baltimore, [...] issued a new commission to John Hart, Esq 1716
[...]rles Calvert, Esq Governor 1720
[...]edict Leonard Calvert, Esq Governor 1727
[...] Proprietor came into the province in 1733
[...] returned to England 1734
[...] Ogle, Esq Governor 1737
[...] Bladen, Esq Governor 1742
[...] Ogle, Esq Governor 1747
By the Death of Charles, Lord Baltimore, the province de­scended to his son Frederick.—Governor Ogle died the same year 1752
Benjamin Tasker, Esq President 1751
Horatio Sharp, Esq Governor 1753
Robert Eden, Esq Governor 1769
Frederick, Lord Baron of Baltimore, died 1771
Robert Eden, Esq Governor 1773

Some of the governors since the revolution have been—

  • Thomas Johnson, Jun.
  • William Paca
  • Thomas Sim Lee
  • William Smallwood
  • John Eager Howard
  • George Plater

VIRGINIA. *

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 446 Miles. between 0° and 8° W. Lon. Square Miles. 70,000
Breadth 224 Miles. 36° 30′ and 40° 30′ N. Lat. Square Miles. 70,000

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Maryland, part of Pennsylvania and Ohio river; west, by Kentucky; south, by North Carolina; east, by the Atlantic ocean.

CIVIL DIVISIONS AND POPULATIONS.] This state is divided in­to 82 counties, (and by another division into parishes) which, with the number of inhabitants, according to the census of 1790, are mentioned in the following table.

TABLE.
  Counties. Slaves. Tot. Inhab.
West of the Blue Ridge. Ohio 281 5212
Monongalia 154 4768
Washington 450 5625
Montgomery 2087 23752
Wythe
Botetourt
Greenbria [...] 319 6015
Kanawa
Hampshire 454 7346
Berkley 2932 19713
Frederick 4250 19681
Shenendoah 512 10510
Rockingham 772 7449
Augusta 1222 10886
Rockbridge 682 6548

[Page]

MAP of the States of VIRGINIA NORTH CAROLINA SOUTH CAROLINA and GEORGIA Comprehending the Spanish Provinces of EAST and WEST FLORIDA Exhibiting the boundaries between the United States and Spanish Dominions as fixed by the Treaty of Paris in 1783 Comp [...]ed from [...] Observations

[Page 533]

  Counties Slaves Total Inhab.
[...] Loudoun 4030 18962
Fauquier 6642 17892
Culpepper 8226 22105
Spotsylvania 5933 11252
Orange 4421 9921
Louisa 4573 8467
Goochland 4656 9053
Flavania 1466 3921
Albemarle 5579 12585
Amherst 5296 13703
Buckingham 4168 9779
Bedford 2754 10531
Henry 1551 8479
Pittsylvania 2979 11579
Halifax 5565 14722
Charlotte 4816 10078
Prince Edward 3986 8100
Cumberland 4434 8153
Powhatan 4325 6822
Amelia 11307 18097
Nottaway
Lunenburg 4332 8959
Mecklenburg 6762 14733
Brunswick 6776 12827
[...] Greensville 3620 6362
Dinwiddie 7334 13934
Chesterfield 7487 14214
Prince George 45 [...]9 8173
Surry 3097 6227
Sussex 5387 10554
Southampton 5993 12864
Isle of Wight 3867 9028
Nansemond 3817 9010
Norfolk 5345 14524
Princess Ann 3202 7793
[...] Henrico 5819 12000
Hanover 8223 14754
New Kent 3700 6239
Charles City 3141 5518
James City 2405 4070
Williamsburg 2760 5233
York
Warwick 990 1690
Elizabeth City 1876 3450
Caroline 10292 17489
[...] King William 5151 8128
King and Queen 5143 9377
Essex 5440 9122
Middlesex 2558 4140
Gloucester 7063 13498
Between Rappa­hannoc and Pato­mak rivers. Fairfax 4574 12320
Prince William 4704 11615
Stafford 4036 9588
King George 4157 7366
Richmond 3984 6985
Westmoreland 4425 7722
Northumberland 4460 9163
Lancaster 3236 5638
East shore Accomac 4262 13959
Northampton 3244 6889

The following are new counties.

Counties. Slaves. Total Inhab.
Camphell 2488 7685
Franklin 1073 6842
Harrison 67 2080
Randolph 19 951
Hardy 369 7336
Pendleton 73 2452
Russell 190 3338
Total amount 292,627 454,983

The whole number of Inhabitants 747,610

Kentucky, which till lately belonged to this state, contains 73,677 inhabitants, which, added to 747,610, makes 821,287.

In the year 1781, a very inaccurate census was taken, several coun­ties made no return: but supplying by conjecture the deficiencies, the population of Virginia was then computed at 567,614—The increase then is 258,673, and is as 9 to 13 in 10 years.

The increase of slaves, during those 10 years, has been less than it had been observed for a century before—The reason is, that about 30,000 slaves perished with the small pox or camp fever caught from the British army, or went off with them while Lord Cornwallis was roving over that state.

CLIMATE.] In an extensive country, it will be expected that the climate is not the same in all its parts. It is remarkable that, proceed­ing on the same parallel of latitude westwardly, the climate becomes colder in like manner as when you proceed northwardly. This con­tinues to be the case till you attain the summit of the Allegany, which is the highest land between the ocean and the Missisippi. From thence, descending in the same latitude to the Missisippi, the changes reverses; and, if we may believe travellers, it becomes warmer there than it is in the same latitude on the sea side. Their testimony is strengthened by the vegetables and animals which submit and multiply there natur­ally, and do not on the sea coast. Thus catalpas grow spontaneously on the Missisippi, as far as the latitude of 37°, and feeds as far as 3 [...]°. Parroquets even winter on the Scioto, in the 39th degree of lat­itude.

The S. W. winds, east of the mountains, are most predominant. Next to these, on the sea coast, the N. E. and at the mountains, the N. W. winds prevail. The difference between these winds is very great. The N. E. is loaded with vapour, insomuch that the salt man­ufacturers have found that their chrystals would not shoot while that blows; it occasions a distressing chill, and a heaviness and depression of the spirits. The N. W. is dry, cooling, elastic and animating. [Page 535] The E. and S. E. breezes come on generally in the afternoon. They have advanced into the country very sensibly within the memory of people now living. Mr. Jefferson reckons the extremes of heat and cold to be 98° above, and 6° below 0, in Farenheit's Thermom­eter.

That fluctuation between heat and cold, so destructive to fruit, pre­vails less in Virginia than in Pennsylvania, in the spring season; nor is the overflowing of the rivers in Virginia so extensive or so frequent at that season, as those of the New England states; because the snows in the former do not lie accumulating all winter, to be dissolved all at once i [...] the spring, as they do sometimes in the latter. In Virginia, below the mountains, snow seldom lies more than a day or two, and seldom a [...]; and the large rivers seldom freeze over. This fluctuation on of [...]ther, however, is sufficient to render the winters and spring [...] very an wholesome, as the inhabitants have to walk in almost perpetual [...].

The months of June and July, though often the hottest, are the must healthy in the year. The weather is then dry and less liable to change than in August and September, when the rain commences, and sudden variations take place.

On the sea coast, the land is low, generally within 12 feet of the level of the sea, intersected in all directions with salt creeks and riv­ers, the heads of which form swamps and marshes, and fenny ground, covered with water, in wet seasons.—The uncultivated lands are cov­ered with large trees, and thick underwood. The vicinity of the sea, and salt creeks and rivers, occasion a constant moisture and warmth of the atmosphere, so that although under the same latitude, 100 or 150 miles in the country, deep snows, and frozen rivers frequently happen, for a short season, yet here such occurrences are considered as pheno­mena for these reasons, the trees are often in bloom as early as the last of February; from this period, however, till the end of April, the inhabitants are incommoded by cold rains, piercing wind, and sharp frosts, which subjects them to the inflammatory diseases, known [...] under the names of pleurisy and peripneumony.

RIVERS AND CANALS.] An inspection of the map of Virginia, will give a better idea of the geography of its rivers, than any description [...] writing. Their navigation may be imperfectly noted.

Roanoke, so far as it lies within this state, is no where navigable, but for canoes, or light batteaux; and even for these, in such detached parcels as to have prevented the inhabitants from availing themselves of it at all.

James River, and its waters, afford navigation as follows. The whole of Elizabeth River, the lowest of those which run into James River, is a harbour, and would contain upwards of 300 ships. The channel is from 150 to 200 fathoms wide, and at common flood tide, affords 18 feet water to Norfolk. The Strafford, a 60 up ship, went there, lightening herself to cross the bar at Sowell's point. The [...] Rodrigue, pierced for 64 guns, and carrying 50, went there with­out lightening. Craney island, at the mouth of this river, commands the channel tolerably well.

Nansemond River is navigable to Sleepy Hole, for vessels of 250 tons; [...] Suffolk, for those of 100 tons; and to Milner's, for those of 25. [Page 536] Pagan Creek affords 8 or 10 feet water to Smithfield, which admits ves­sels of 20 tons. Chickahominy has at its mouth a bar, on which is on­ly 12 feet water at common flood tide. Vessels passing that, may go 8 miles up the river; those of ten feet draught may go four miles further, and those of 6 tons burthen, 20 miles further.

Appamattox may be navigated as far as Broadways, by any vessel which has crossed Harrison's bar in James river; it keeps 8 or 9 feet water a mile or two higher up to Fisher's bar, and four feet on that and upwards to Petersburg, where all navigation ceases.

James river itself affords harbour for vessels of any size in Hampton Road, but not in safety through the whole winter; and there is nav­igable water for them as far as Mulberry island. A forty gun ship goes to Jamestown, and, lightening herself, may pass to Harrison's bar, on which there is only 15 feet water. Vessels of 250 tons may go to Warwick; those of 125 go to Rocket's, a mile below Richmond; from thence is about seven feet water to Richmond; and about the centre of the town, four feet and a half, where the navigation is in­terrupted by falls, which in a course of six miles descend about 80 feet perpendicular: Above these it is resumed in canoes and batteaux, and is prosecuted safely and advantageously to within 10 miles of the Blue Ridge; and even through the Blue Ridge a ton weight has been brought; and the expense would not be great, when compared with its object, to open a tolerable navigation up Jackson's river and Carpenter's creek, to within 25 miles of Howard's creek of Green Bri­ar, both of which have then water enough to float vessels into the Great Kanhaway. In some future state of population, it is possible that its navigation may also be made to interlock with that of Patomak, and through that to communicate by a short portage with the Ohio. It is to be noted, that this river is called in the maps James river, only to its confluence with the Rivanna; thence to the Blue Ridge it is called the Fluvanna, and thence to its source; Jackson's river. But in common speech it is called James river to its source.

The Rivanna a branch of James river, is navigable for canoes and batteaux to its intersection with the South West mountains, which is about 22 miles; and may easily be opened to navigation through those mountains, to its fork above Charlottesville.

York River, at Yorktown, affords the best harbour in the state for vessels of the largest size. The river there narrows to the width of a mile, and is contained within very high banks, close under which the vessels may ride. It holds four fathom water at high tide for 25 miles above York to the mouth of Po [...]opotank, where the river is a mile and a half wide, and the channel only 75 fathom, and passing under a high bank. At the confluence of Pamunkey and Mattapony, it is re­duced to three fathom depth, which continues up Pamunkey to Cum­berland, where the width is 100 yards, and up Mattapony to within two miles of Frazier's ferry, where it becomes two and a half fathom deep, and holds that about five miles. Pamunkey is then capable of navigation for loaded flats to Brockman's bridge, 50 miles above Han­over town, and Mattapony to Downer's bridge, 70 miles above its mouth.

Piankatank, the little rivers making out of Mobjack Bay and those of the Eastern shore, receive only very small vessels, and these can but enter them. Rappahannok affords 4 fathom water to Hobb's Hole, and two fathom from thence to Fredericksburg, 110 miles.

[Page 537] Patomak is 7½ miles wide at the mouth; 4frac12; at Nomony Bay; 3 at Aq [...]ia; 1½ at Halloing Point; 1¼ at Alexandria. Its soundings aro, 7 fathom at the mouth; 5 at St. George's Island; 4 and a half at lower Matchodic; 3 at Swan's Point, and thence up to Alexandria; thence 10 feet water to the falls, which are 13 miles above Alexan­dria. The tides in the Patomak are not very strong, excepting after great rains, when the ebb is pretty strong—then there is little or no flood—and there is never more than 4 or 5 hours flood, except with long and strong south winds.

The distance from the Capes of Virginia to the termination of the tide water in this river is above 300 miles; and navigable for ships of the greatest burthen, nearly that distance. From thence this river, ob­structed by four considerable falls, extends through a vast tract of in­habited country towards its source. These falls are, 1st, The Little folk, three miles above tide water, in which distance there is a fall of of feet: 2d, The Great Falls, six miles higher, where is a fall of 76 feet in one mile and a quarter: 3d, The Seneca Falls, six miles above the former, which form short, irregular rapids, with a fall of about 10 feet; and 4th, the Shenandoah Falls, 60 miles from the Seneca, where is a fall of about 30 feet in three miles: From which last, Fort Cumber­land is about 120 miles distant. The obstructions, which are opposed to the navigation above and between these falls, are of little conse­quence

Early in the years 1785, the legislature of Virginia and Maryland passed acts to encourage opening the navigation of this river. It was estimated that the expense of the works would amount to 50,000l. ster­ling and ten years were allowed for their completion. The president and directors of the incorporated company have since supposed that [...] would be adequate to the operation, and that it will be ac­complished in a shorter period than was stipulated. Their calculations as sounded on the progress already made, and the summary mode es­tablished for enforcing the collection of the dividends, as the money may become necessary.

According to the opinion of the president and directors, locks * will be necessary at no more than two places—the Great and the Little Falls: Six at the former, and three at the latter. At the latter nothing had been attempted in 1789. At the Great Falls, where the difficulties were judged by many to be insurmountable, the work is nearly or quite completed. At the Seneca Falls, the laborious parts of the business [Page 538] is entirely accomplished, by removing the obstacles and making the descent more gradual; so that nothing remained, in 1789, but to finish the channel for this gentle current in a workmanlike manner. At the Shenandoah, where the river breaks through the Blue Ridge, through [...] prodigious quantity of labour has been bestowed, yet the passage is not yet perfected. Such proficiency has been made, however, that an avenue for a partial navigation has been opened from Fort Cumber­land to the Great Falls, which are within nine miles of a shipping port. *

As soon as the proprietors shall begin to receive toll, they will doubtless find an ample compensation for their pecuniary advances. By an estimate made many years ago, it was calculated that the amount, in the commencement, would be at the rate of 11,875l. Virginia cur­rency, per annum. The toll must every year become more productive; as the quantity of articles for exportation will be augmented is a ra­pid ratio, with the encrease of population and the extention of settle­ments. In the mean time the effect will be immediately seen in the agriculture of the interior country; for the multitude of horse now employed in carrying produce to market, will then be used altogether for the purpose of tillage. But, in order to form just conceptions of the utility of this inland navigation, it would be requisite to notice the long rivers which empty into the Patomak, and even to take a survey of the geographical position of the western waters.

The Shenandoah, which empties just above the Blue Mountains, may, according to report, be made navigable, at a trifling expense, more than 150 miles from its confluence with the Patomak; and will receive and bear the produce of the richest part of the state. Com­missioners have been appointed to form a plan, and to estimate the ex­pense of opening the channel of this river, if on examination it should be found practicable. The South Branch, still higher, is navigable i [...] its actual condition nearly or quite 100 miles, through exceedingly fertile lands. Between these, on the Virginia side, are several smaller rivers, that may with ease be improved, so as to afford a passage for boats. On the Maryland side are the Monocasy, Antietam, and co [...] ­egocheague, some of which pass through the state of Maryland, and have their sources in Pennsylvania.

From Fort Cumberland, (or Wills' Creek) one or two good waggon roads may be had (where the distance is said by some to be 35 and [...] other 40 miles) to the Youghiogany, a large and navigable branch of the Monongahela, which last forms a junction with the Allegany at Fort Pitt.

But, by passing farther up the Patomak, than Fort Cumberland, which may very easily be done, a portage by a good waggon road to Cheat river, another large branch of the Monongahela, can be obtain­ed through a space which some say is 20, others 22, others 25, and none more than 30 miles.

When we have arrived at either of these western waters, the navigation through that immense region is opened by a thousand directions, and to the lakes in several places by portages of less than 10 miles; and by one portage, it is asserted, of not more than a sin­gle mile.

[Page 539] Notwithstanding it was sneeringly said by some foreigners, at the beginning of this undertaking, that the Americans are fond of en­gaging in splendid projects which they could never accomplish; yet it is hoped the success of this first essay towards improving their in­ [...] navigation, will, in some degree, rescue them from the reproach [...]ded to have been fixed upon their national character, by the un­marked imputation.

The Great Kanhawa is a river of considerable note for the fertility of its lands, and still more, as leading towards the head waters of James river. Nevertheless, it is doubtful whether its great and nume­ [...] rapids will admit a navigation, but at an expense to which it will require ages to render its inhabitants equal. The great obstacles be­ [...] at what are called the Great Falls, 90 miles above the mouth, be­ [...] which are only five or six rapids, and these passable, with some difficulty even at low water. From the falls to the mouth of Green [...] is 100 miles, and thence to the lead mines 120. It is 280 yards [...] at its mouth.

The Little Kanhawa is 250 yards wide at the mouth. It yields a navigation of 10 miles only. Perhaps its northern branch, called [...]us' Creek, which interlocks with the western waters of Monon­gahela, may one day admit a shorter passage from the latter into the Ohio.

MOUNTAINS.] It is worthy notice, that the mountains are not [...]tary and scattered confusedly over the face of the country; but [...]ence at about 150 miles from the sea coast, are disposed in ridges [...] behind another, running nearly parallel with the sea coast, though [...] approaching it as they advance northeastwardly. To the south­west as the tract of country between the sea coast and the Missisippi becomes narrower, the mountains converge into a single ridge, which, [...] it approaches the Gulph of Mexico, subsides into plain country, [...] gives rise to some of the waters of that Gulph, and particularly [...] a river called Apalachicola, probably from the Apalachies, an In­ [...] nation formerly residing on it. Hence the mountains giving rise [...] river, and seen from its various parts, were called the Apalachian mountains, being in fact the end or termination only of the great ridges [...]ing through the continent. European geographers, however, ex­ [...]ed the name northwardly as far as the mountains extended; [...] giving it after their separation into different ridges, to the Blue [...], others to the North Mountains, others to the Allegany, others to the Laurel Ridge, as may be seen in their different maps. But none of these ridges were ever known by that name to the inhabitants, either native or emigrant, but as they saw them so called in European maps. In the same direction generally are the veins of lime stone, coal and other minerals hitherto discovered; and so range the falls of the great rivers. But the courses of the great rivers are at right angles with these. James and Patomak penetrate through all the ridges of mountains eastward of the Allegany, that is broken by no water course. It is in fact he spine of the country between the Atlantic on one side, and the Missisippi [...] St. Lawrence on the other. The passage of the Patomak through [...] blue ridge is perhaps one of the most stupendous scenes in nature. [...] stand on a very high point of land. On your right comes up the [...]nandoah, having ranged along the foot of the mountain an hun­dred miles to seek a vent. On Your left approaches the Patomak, in­quest [Page 540] of a passage also. In the moment of their junction they rush to­gether against the mountain, rend it asunder, and pass off to the sea. The first glance of this scene hurries our senses into the opinion, that this earth has been created in time, that the mountains were formed first, that the rivers began to flow afterwards, that in this place partic­ularly they have been dammed up by the Blue ridge of mountains, and have formed an ocean, which filled the whole valley; that continuing to rise they have at length broken over at this spot, and have torn the mountain down from its summit to its base. The piles of rock on each hand, but particularly on the Shenandoah, the evident marks of their disruption and avulsion from their beds by the most powerful a­gents of nature, corroborate the impression. But the distant fin­ishing which nature has given to the picture, is of a very different cha­racter. It is a true contrast to the fore ground. It is as placid and delightful, as that is wild and tremendous. For the mountain, being cloven asunder, presents to the eye, through the cleft, a small catch of smooth blue horizon, at an infinite distance, in the plain country, inviting you, as it were, from the riot and tumult roaring around, to pass through the breach and participate of the clam below. Here the eye ultimately composes itself; and that way too, the road actually leads. You cross the Patomak above the junction, pass along its side through the base of the mountain for three miles, its terrible precipices hanging in fragments over you, and within about twenty miles reach Fredericktown and the fine country round that. This scene is worth a voyage across the Atlantic. Yet here, as in the neighbourhood of the Natural Bridge, are people who have passed their lives within half a dozen miles, and have never been to survey these monuments of a war between rivers and mountains, which must have shaken the earth it­self to its centre.—The height of the mountains has not yet been esti­mated with any degree of exactness. The Allegany being the great ridge which divides the waters of the Atlantic from those of the Mis­sisippi, its summit is doubtless more elevated above the ocean than that of any other mountain. But its relative height, compared with the base on which it stands, is not so great as that of some others, the country rising behind the successive ridges like the steps of stairs. The moun­tains of the Blue Ridge, and of these, the Peaks of Otter, are thought to be of a greater height measured from their base, than any others in Virginia, and perhaps in North America. From data, which may found a tolerable conjecture, we suppose the highest peak to be about 4000 feet perpendicular, which is not a fifth part of the height of the mountains of South America, nor one third of the height which would be necessary in our latitude to preserve ice in the open air unmelted through the year. The ridge of mountains next beyond the Blue Ridge, called the North Mountain, is of the greatest extent; for which reason they are named by the Indians the Endless Mountains.

The Ouasioto mountains, are 50 or 60 miles wide at the Gap. These mountains abound in coal, lime and free stone; the summits of them are generally covered with a good soil, and a variety of timber; and the low, intervale lands are rich and remarkably well watered.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY, SOIL, PRODUCTIONS, &c.} The whole country below the mountains, which are about 150, some say 200 miles from the sea, is level, and seems from various ap­pearances to have been once washed by the sea. The land between [Page 541] York and James rivers is very level, and its surface about 40 feet above high water mark. It appears from observation, to have arisen to its present height, at different periods far distant from each other, and [...] at these periods it was washed by the sea; for near Yorktown, [...] the banks are perpendicular, you first see a stratum, intermixed with small shells resembling a mixture of clay and sand, and about five feet thick; on this lies horizontally, small white shells, cockle, [...], &c. an inch or two thick; then a body of earth similar to that first mentioned, 18 inches thick; then a layer of shells and another [...] of earth; on this a layer of 3 feet of white shells mixed with sand, on which lay a body of oyster shells 6 feet thick, which were [...] with earth to the surface. The oyster shells are so united by a very strong cement that they fall, only when undermined, and then in large bodies from 1 to 20 tons weight. They have the appearance of large rocks on the shore. *

These appearances continue in a greater or less degree in the banks of James river, 100 miles from the sea; the appearances then vary, [...] the banks are filled with sharks' teeth, bones of large and small [...], petrified, and many other petrifactions, some resembling the [...] of land and other animals, others vegetable substances. These appearances are not confined to the river banks, but are seen in vari­ous places in gullies at considerable distances from the rivers. In one part of the state for 70 miles in length, by sinking a well, you appar­ently come to the bottom of what was formerly a water course. And even [...]s high up as Botetourt county, among the Allegany mountains, there is a tract of land, judges to be 40,000 acres, surrounded on every side by mountains, which is entirely covered with oyster and cockle shells, and, from some gullies, they appear to be of considerable depth. A plan­tation at Day's Point, on James river, of as many as 1000 acres, appears at a distance as if covered with snow, but on examination the white appearance is found to arise from a bed of clam shells, which by re­p [...]ed plowing have become fine and mixed with earth.

The soil below the mountains, seems to have acquired a character for goodness which it by no means deserves. Though not rich it is well suited to the growth of tobacco and Indian corn, and parts of it, for wheat. Good crops of cotton, flax and hemp are also raised; and i [...] some counties they have plenty of cyder, and exquisite brandy, dis­ [...] from peaches, which grow in great abundance upon the nu­merous rivers of the Chesapeak.

The planters, before the war, paid their principal attention to the cul­ture of tobacco, of which there used to be exported, generally, 55,000 hogs­ [...]ds a year. Since the revolution they are turning their attention more to the cultivation of wheat, Indian corn, barley, flax and hemp. It is expected that this state will add the article of rice to the list of her [...]rts; as it is supposed, a large body of swamp in the easternmost [...], is capable of producing it.

[...] or neat cattle are bred in great numbers in the western [...]ties of Virginia, as well as in the states south of it, where they [...] an extensive range, and mild winters, without any permanent [...].—They run at large, are not housed, and multiply very fast.—'In the lower parts of the state a disease prevails among the neat cat­ [...] which proves fatal to all that are not bred there. The oxen, from [Page 542] the more northern states, which were employed at the siege of York­town in October 1781, almost all died, sometimes 40 of them in a night, and often suddenly dropped down dead in the roads. It is said that the seeds of this disease were brought from the Havanna to South Ca­rolina or Georgia in some hides, and that the disease has progressed northward to Virginia. Lord Dunmore imported some cattle from Rhode Island, and kept them confined in a small pasture, near his seat, where no cattle had been for some years, and where they could not intermix with other cattle, and yet they soon died.'

The gentlemen, being fond of pleasure, have taken much pains to raise a good breed of horses, and have succeeded in it beyond any of the States. They will give 1000l. sterling for a good seed horse. Horse racing has had a great tendency to encourage the breeding of good horses, as it affords an opportunity of putting them to the trial of their speed. They are more elegant, and will perform more service, than the horses of the northern states.

An intelligent gentlemen, and inhabitant of Virginia, informs, that caves among the mountains, have lately been discovered which yield salt petre in such abundance, that he judges 500,000 pounds of it might be collected from them annually.

This state does not abound with good fish. Sturgeon, shad, and herring are the most plenty—pearch, sheepshead, drum, rock fish and trout, are common—Besides these they have oysters in abundance, crabs, shrimps, &c.

CASCADES, CURIOSITIES AND CAVERNS.] The only remarkable cascade in this state is that of Falling Spring, in Augusta. It is a water of James river, where it is called Jackson's river, risi ROLE="label"ng in the warm spring mountains about 20 miles southwest of the warm spring, and flowing into that valley. About three quarters of a mile from i [...] source, it falls over a rock 200 feet into the valley below. The sheet of water is broken in its breadth by the rock in two or three places, but not at all in its height. Between the sheet and rock, at the bottom, you may walk across dry. This, cataract will bear no comparison with that of Niagara, as to the quantity of water compos­ing it; the sheet being only 12 or 15 feet wide above, and somewhat more spread below; but it is half as high again.

In the lime stone country, there are many caverns of very consider­able extent. The most noted in called Madison's cave, and is on the north side of the blue ridge, near the intersection of the Rockingham and Augusta line with the south fork of the southern river of Shenan­doah. It is in a hill of about 200 feet perpendicular height, the as­cent of which, on one side, is so steep that you may pitch a biscuit from its summit into the river which washes its base. The entrance of the cave is, in this side, about two thirds of the way up. It extends into the earth about 300 feet, branching into subordinate caverns, some­times ascending a little, but more generally descending, and at length terminates in two different places, at basons of water of unknown ex­tent, and which appear to be nearly on a level with the water of the river. It is probably one of the many reservoirs with which the in­terior parts of the earth are supposed to abound, and which yield sup­plies to the fountains of water, distinguished from others only by [...] being accessible. The vault of this cave is of solid lime stone, from [Page 543] [...] to 40 or 50 feet high, through which water is continually exudat­i [...]. This, trickling down the sides of the cave, has incrusted them over i [...] the form of elegant drapery; and dripping from the top of the vault, [...]rates on that, and on the base below, stalactites of a conical form, [...] of which have met and formed massive columns.

Another of these caves is near the North Mountain, in the county of Frederick. The entrance into this is on the top of an extensive ridge­ [...] descend 30 or 40 feet, as into a well, from whence the cave then [...], nearly horizontally, 400 feet into the earth, preserving a [...] of from 20 to 50 feet, and a height of from 5 to 12 feet.—After entering this cave a few feet, the mercury, which in the open [...] was at 50°, rose to 57° of Farenheit's thermometer.

At the Panther gap, in the ridge which divides the waters of the [...] and the Calf pasture, is what is called the Blowing cave. It is i [...] the side of a hill, is of about 100 feet diameter, and emits constant­ly a current of air of such force, as to keep the weeds prostrate to the distance of twenty yards before it. This current is strongest in dry [...] weather, and in long spells of rain weakest. Regular inspira­tions and expirations of air, by caverns and fissures, have been proba­bly enough accounted for, by supposing them combined with inter­ [...]ing fountains, as they must of course inhale the air while the re­servoirs are emptying themselves, and again emit it while they are [...]. But a constant issue of air, only varying in its force as the [...]ther is drier or damper, will require a new hypothesis. There is [...]ther blowing cave in the Cumberland mountain, about a mile from [...] it crosses the Carolina line. All we know of this is, that it is [...]constant, and that a fountain of water issues from it.

The Natural Bridge, is the most sublime of nature's works. It is [...] the ascent of a hill, which seems to have been cloven through its [...] by some great convulsion. The fissure, just at the bridge, is [...] admeasurements, 270 feet deep, by others only 205. It is a­ [...] 45 feet wide at the bottom, and 90 feet at the top; this of course [...]ines the length of the bridge, and its height from the water [...]readth in the middle is about 60 feet, but more at the ends, and the thickness of the mass at the summit of the arch, about 40 feet. A [...] of this thickness is constituted by a coat of earth, which gives [...] to many large trees. The residue, with the hill on both sides, [...] rock of lime stone. The arch approaches the semi elliptical [...] but the larger axis of the ellipsis, which would be the cord of [...] each, is many times longer than the transverse. Though the side of this bridge are provided in some parts with a parapet of fixed [...]cks, yet few men have resolution to walk to them and look over in­to the abyss. You involuntarily fall on your hands and feet, creep to the parapet and peep over it. If the view from the top be pain­ful and intolerable, that from below is delightful in an equal extreme. [...] impossible for the emotions arising from the sublime, to be felt [...] what they are here: so beautiful an arch, so elevated, so light, [...] springing as it were up to Heaven, the rapture of the spectator is [...] indescribable! The fissure continuing narrow, deep and streight [...] considerable distance above and below the bridge, opens a short [...] very pleasing view of the North mountain on one side, and [...] Ridge on the other, at the distance each of them of about five [...]. This bridge is in the county of Rockbridge, to which it has [Page 544] given name, and affords a public and commodious passage over a val­ley, which cannot be crossed elsewhere for a considerable distance. The stream passing under it is called Cedar creek. It is a water of James river, and sufficient in the driest seasons to turn a grist mill, though its fountain is not more than two miles above. * There is a natural bridge similar to the above over Stock creek, a branch of Peleson riv­er, in Washington county.

MINES AND MINERALS.] Virginia is the most pregnant with minerals and fossils of any state in the union. A single lump of gold ore has been found, near the falls of Rappahannock river, which yielded 17 dwt. of gold, of extraordinary ductility. No other indi­cation of gold has been discovered in its neighbourhood.

On the great Kanhawa, opposite to the mouth of Cripple creek, and also about 25 miles from the southern boundary of the state, in the country of Montgomery, are mines of lead. The metal is mixed, sometimes with earth, and sometimes with rock, which requires the force of gunpowder to open it; and is accompanied with a portion of silver, too small to be worth separation under any process hitherto attempted there. The proportion yielded is from 50 to 80 lb. of pure metal from 100 lb. of washed ore. The most common is that of 60 to the 100 lb. The veins are at sometimes most flattering; at others they disappear suddenly and totally. They enter the side of the hill, and proceed horizontally. Two of them have been wrought by the public. These would employ about 50 labourers to advantage. Thir­ty men, who have at the same time raised their own corn, have produc­ed 60 tons of lead in the year; but the general quantity is from 20 to 25 tons. The present furnace is a mile from the ore bank, and on the opposite side of the river. The ore is first waggoned to the river, a quarter of a mile, then laden on board of canoes and carried across the river, which is there about 200 yards wide, and then again taken into waggons and carried to the furnace. This mode was originally adopted, that they might avail themselves of a good situation on a creek, for a pounding mill; but it would be easy to have the furnace and pounding mill on the same side of the river, which would yield water, without any dam, by a canal of about half a mile in length. From the furnace the lead is transported 130 miles along a good road leading through the peaks of Otter to Lynch's ferry or Winston's on James river, from whence it is carried by water about the same distance to Westham. This land carriage may be greatly shortened, by delivering the lead on James river, above the Blue Ridge, from whence a ton weight has been brought in two canoes. The Great Kanhawa has considerable falls in the neighbourhood of the mines. About seven miles below are three falls, of three or four feet perpen­dicular each; and three miles above is a rapid of three miles contin­uance, which has been compared in its descent to the great fall of James river. Yet it is the opinion, that they may be laid open for useful navigation, so as to reduce very much the portage between the Kanhawa and James river.

[Page 545] A mine of copper was opened in the county of Amherst, on the [...] of James river, and another in the opposite county, on the [...]. However, either from bad management or the poverty of [...] they were discontinued. A few years ago there were six [...] worked in this state. Two of them made about 150 tons [...] each—the others made each from 600 to 1600 tons of pig iron [...]. Besides these, a forge at Fredericksburgh, made about 300 [...] of bar iron, from pigs imported from Maryland; and a [...] Neapsco of Patomak, worked in the same way. The indi­ [...] of iron in other places are numerous, and dispersed through [...] middle country. The toughness of the cast iron of some of [...] [...]ces is very remarkable. Pots and other utensils, cast thin­ [...] usual, of this iron, may be safely thrown a into or out of the [...] in which they are transported. Salt pans made of the same, [...] longer wanted for that purpose, cannot be broken up in order [...] melted again, unless previously drilled in many parts.

[...] the western part of the state, we are [...]old of iron mines on Ches­ [...] a branch of the Great Kanhawa [...], near where it crosses the [...] [...]ne; and in other places.

[...] considerable quantities of black lead are taken occasionally for [...]. Winterham, in the county of Amelia. There is no [...] established at it, those who want, going and procuring it for [...].

[...] country on both sides of James river, from 15 to 20 miles above [...], and for several miles northward and southward, in replete [...] coal of a very excellent quality. Being in the hands [...] proprietors, pits have been opened and worked to an ex­ [...] to the demand. The pits which have been opened, lie 150 [...] feet above the bed of the river, and have been very little in­ [...] with water. The first discovery of the coal, is said to [...] made by a boy, digging after a cray fish; it has also been [...] she bottom of trees blown up. In many places it lies with­ [...] 4 feet of the surface of the ground. It is conjectured that [...] bushels might be raised from one pit in 12 months.

[...] western country coal is known to be in so many places, as [...] induced an opinion, that the whole tract between the Laurel [...], Missisippi, and Ohio, yields coal. It is also known in ma­ [...] on the north side of the Ohio. The coal at Pittsburgh is of [...] superior quality. A bed of it at that place has been a fire [...] year 1765. Another coal hill on the Pil [...]e Run of Monon­ [...] has been a fire ten years; yet it has burnt away about 20 yards [...].

[...] known one instance, says Mr. Jefferson, of an emerald found [...] country. Amethysts have been frequent, and chrystals [...]; yet not in such numbers any of them as to be worth [...].

[...] is very good marble; and in very great abundance, on James [...] at the mouth of Rockfish. Some white and as pure as one [...] expect to find on the surface of the earth; but generally vari­ [...] with red, blue and purple. None of it has ever been worked. [...] a very large precipice, which hangs over a navigable part of [...].

[Page 546] But one vein of lime stone is known below the Blue Ridge. Its first appearance is in Prince William, two miles below the Pignut ridge of mountains; thence it passes on nearly parallel with that, and crosses the Rivanna about five miles below it, where it is called the southwest Ridge. It then crosses Hardware, above the mouth of Hudson's creek, James river at the mouth of Rockfish, at the marble quarry before spoken of, probably runs up that river to where it ap­pears again at Ross's iron works, and so passes off southwestwardly by Flat creek of Otter river. It is never more than 100 yards wide. From the Blue ridge westwardly the whole country seems to be found­ed on a rock of lime stone, besides infinite quantities on the surface, both loose and fixed. This is cut into beds, which range, as the mountains and sea coast do, from southwest to northeast.

MEDICINAL SPRINGS.] There are several medicinal springs, some of which are indubitably efficacious, while others seem to owe their reputation as much to fancy, and change of air and regimen, as to their real virtues. None of them have undergone a chymical analysis in skilful hands, nor been so far the subject of observations as to have produced a reduction into classes of the disorders which they relieve; it is in my power to give little more than an enumeration of them.

The most efficacious of these are two springs in Augusta, near the sources of James river, where it is called Jackson's river. They [...] near the foot of the ridge of mountains, generally called the Warm spring mountain, but in the maps Jackson's mountains. The one is distinguished by the name of the Warm Spring, and the other of the Hot Spring. The Warm Spring issues with a very bold stream, suffi­cient to work a grist mill, and to keep the waters of its bason, which is 30 feet in diameter, at the vital warmth, viz. 96° of Farenheit's ther­mometer. The matter with which these waters is allied in very vola­tile; its small indicates it to be sulphureous, as also does the circum­stance of turning silver black. They relieve rheumatisms. Other complaints also of very different natures have been removed of lessen­ed by them. It rains here four or five days in every week.

The Hot Spring is about six miles from the Warm, is much smaller, and has been so hot as to have boiled an egg. Some believe its degree of heat to be lessened. It raises the mercury in Farenheit's thermom­eter to 112 degrees, which is fever heat. It sometimes relieves where the Warm Spring fails. A fountain of common water issuing within a few inches of its margin, gives it a singular appearance. Compar­ing the temperature of these with that of the hot springs of Kan­schatka, of which Krachininnikow gives an account, the difference is very great, the latter rising the mercury to 200 degrees, which is with­in 12 degrees of boiling water. These springs are very much resorted to in spite of a total want of accommodation for the sick. Their wa­ters are strongest in the hottest months, which occasions their being visited in July and August principally.

The Sweet Springs are in the county of Botetourt, at the eastern foot of the Allegany, about 42 miles from the warm springs. They are still less known. Having been found to relieve cases in which the others had been ineffectually tried, it is probable their composition is different. They are different also in their temperature, being as cold as common water; which is not mentioned, however, as a proof of [Page 547] a distinct impregnation. This is among the first sources of James [...].

[...] Patomak river, in Berkeley county, above the North Mountain, [...] Medicinal springs, much more frequented than those of Augusta. [...] powers, however, are less, the waters weakly mineralized, and [...] warm. They are more visited, because situated in a fertile, [...], and populous country, provided with better accommo­ [...], always safe from the Indians, and nearest to the more popu­ [...] states.

[...] Louisa county, on the head waters of the South Anna branch of [...] river, are springs of some medicinal virtue. They are however [...] much used. There is a weak chalybeate at Richmond; and [...] others in various parts of the country, which are of too lit­ [...] north, or too little note to be enumerated after those before men­ [...].

We are told of a Sulphur Spring on Howard's creek of Green Bri­ [...] in the low grounds of the Great Kanhaway, 7 miles above the [...] of Elk river, and 67 above that of the Kanhaway itself, is a [...] in the earth of the capacity of 30 or 40 gallons, from which is­ [...] constantly a bituminous vapour in so strong a current, as to give [...] sand about its orifice the motion which it has in a boiling spring­ [...] presenting a lighted candle or torch within 18 inches of the hole, [...] up in a column of 18 inches diameter, and four or five feet [...] height, which sometimes burns out in 20 minutes, and at other times [...] known to continue three days, and then has been left burn­ [...]. The flame is unsteady, of the density of that of burning spirits, [...] smells like burning pit coal. Water sometimes collects in the ba­ [...] which is remarkably cold, and is kept in ebullition by the vapour [...] through it. If the vapour be fired in that state, the water soon [...] so warm that the hand cannot bear it, and evaporates wholly [...] short time. This, with the circumjacent lands, is the property of [...]dent Washington and of General Lewis.

There is a similar one on Sandy river, the flame of which is a column [...] about 12 inches diameter, and 3 feet high. General Clarke kind­ [...] vapour, staid about an hour, and left it burning.

The mention of uncommon springs leads to that of Syphon foun­ [...]. There is one of these near the intersection of the lord Fair­ [...] boundary with the North mountain, not far from Brock's gap, on the stream of which is a grist mill, which grinds two bushels of [...] at every flood of the spring. Another near the Cow pasture [...], a mile and a half below its confluence with the Bull pasture [...], and 16 or 17 miles from the Hot Springs, which intermits [...] in every twelve hours. One also near the mouth of the North Hol [...]ton.

After these may be mentioned the Natural Well, on the lands of a [...]. Lewis in Fredertick county. It is somewhat larger than a com­ [...] well; the water rises in it as near the surface of the earth as in [...] neighbouring artificial well [...] and is of a depth as yet unknown. [...] said there is a current in it tending sensibly downwards. If this [...] true, it probably feeds some fountain, of which it is the natural re­ [...], distinguished from others, like that of Madison's cave, by being [...]ssible. It is used with a bucket and windlass as an ordinary well.

POPULATION.] See table.

[Page 548] MILITIA.] Every able bodied freeman, between the ages of 16 and 50 is enrolled in the militia. Those of every county are formed into companies, and these again into one or more battalions, accord­ing to the numbers in the county. They are commanded by colonels, and other subordinate officers, as in the regular service. In every county is a county lieutenant, who commands the whole militia in has county, but ranks only as a colonel in the field. They have no gen­eral officers always existing. These are appointed occasionally, when an invasion or insurrection happens, and their commission determines with the occasion. The governor is head of the military as well as civil power. The law requires every militia man to provide him­self with the arms usual in the regular service. But this injunction was always indifferenly complied with, and the arms they had have been so frequently called for to arm the regulars, that in the lower parts of the country they are entirely disarmed. In the middle coun­try a fourth or fifth part of them may have such firelocks as they had provided to destroy the noxious animals which infest their farms; and on the western side of the Blue Ridge they are generally armed with rifles.

The intersection of Virginia by so many navigable rivers, renders it almost incapable of defence. As the land will not support a great number of people, a force cannot soon be collected to repel a sudden invasion. If the militia bear the same proportion to the number of inhabitants now, as in 1782, they amount to about 68,000.

CHIEF TOWNS.] They have no townships in this state, nor any towns of consequence, owing probably to the intersection of the coun­try by navigable rivers, which brings the trade to the doors of the in­habitants, and prevents the necessity of their going in quest of it to a distance.

Williamsburgh, which till the year 1780 was the seat of government, never contained above 1800 inhabitants, and Norfolk, the most popu­lous town they ever had in Virginia, contained but 6000. The towns, or more properly villages or hamlets, are as follows.

On James river and its waters, Norfolk, Portsmouth, Hampton, Suffolk, Smithfield, Williamsburg, Petersburg, Richmond the seat of government, Manchester, Charlottesville, New London.—On York River and its waters, York, Newcastle, Hanover.—On Rappahannock, Urbanna, Port Royal, Fredericksburg, Falmouth.—On Patomak and its waters, Dumfries, Colchester, Alexandria, Winchester, St [...] ­ton.

There are places, at which, like some of the foregoing, the [...] have said there shall be towns; but nature has said there shall [...] and they remain unworthy of enumeration. Norfolk will probably become the emporium for all the trade of the Chesapeak Bay and its waters; and canal of 8 or 10 miles, which is contemplated, and will probably soon be completed, with bring it to all that of [...] ­marle sound and its waters. Secondary to this place, are the towns of the head of the tide waters, to wit, Petersburg on Appamattox, Rich­mond on James river, Newcastle on York river, Fredericksburgh [...] Rappahannock, and Alexandria on Patomak. From these the distri­bution will be to subordinate situations of the country. Accidental cir­cumstances however may control the indications of nature, and in [...] instances do they do it more frequently than in the rise and fall of to [...].

[Page 549] To the foregoing general account, we add the following more par­ticular descriptions.

ALEXANDERIA stands on the south bank of Patomak river in Fair­ [...] county. Its situation is elevated and pleasant. The soil is clay. The original settlers, anticipating its future growth and importance, [...] out the streets upon the plan of Philadelphia. It contains about [...] [...]ses, many of which are handsomely built, and nearly 3000 in­habitants. This town, upon opening the navigation of Patomak river, [...] consequence of its vicinity to the city of Washington, will [...] be one of the most thriving commercial places on the conti­nent.

[...]OUNT VERNON, the celebrated seat of President Washington, [...]santly situated on the Virginia bank of the river Patomak, [...] it is nearly two miles wide, and is about 280 miles from the sea, [...] 127 from point Look out, at the mouth of the river. It [...] miles below Alexandria, and four above the beautiful seat of [...] Col. Fairfax; called Bellevoir. The area of the mount is [...] feet above the surface of the river, and, after furnishing a lawn [...] acres in front, and about the same in rear of the buildings, falls [...]ber abruptly on those two quarters. On the north end it sub­ [...] gradually into extensive pasture grounds; while on the south it [...] more steeply, in a shorter distance, and terminates with—the [...] house, stables, vineyard and nurseries. On either wing is a [...] grove of different, flowering forest trees. Parallel with them, [...] land side, are two spacious gardens, into which one is led by [...] serpentine gravel walks, planted with weeping willows and shady [...]. The Mansion house itself (though much embellished by, yet [...] perfectly satisfactory to the chaste taste of the present possessor) ap­ [...] venerable and convenient. The superb banquetting room has [...] finished since he returned home from the army. A lofty portico, [...] in length, supported by eight pillars, has a pleasing effect when [...] from the water; the whole assemblage of the green house, [...] house, offices and servant's halls, when seen from the land side, [...] a resemblance to a rural village—especially as the lands on that [...] are laid out somewhat in the form of English gardens, in meadows [...] grass grounds, ornamented with little copses, circular clumps and [...] trees. A small park on the margin of the river, where the En­ [...] fallow deer, and the American wild deer are seen through the [...], alternately with the vessels as they are sailing along, add a [...] and picturesque appearance to the whole scenery. On the [...]site side of a small creek to the northward, an extensive plain, [...]ting cornfields and cattle grazing, affords in summer a luxuriant [...]; while the blended verdure of woodlands and cultivated [...], on the Maryland shore, variegates the prospect in a charm­ [...] manner. Such are the philosophic shades to which the late Com­ [...] in chief of the American Armies retired from the tumultuous [...] of a busy world, and which he has since left to dignify, by his [...]alled abilities, the most important office in the gift of his fellow [...].

FREDERICKSBURGH, in the county of Spotsylvania, is situated on [...] side of Rappahannock river, 110 miles from its mouth; and [...] about 200 houses, principally on one street, which runs near­ [...] [...]llel with the river, and 1500 inhabitants.

[Page 550] RICHMOND, in the county of Henrico, is the present seat of govern­ment, and stands on the north side of James river, just at the foot of the falls, and contains between 400 and 500 houses, and nearly 4000 inhab­itants. Part of the houses are built upon the margin of the river, convenient for business; the rest are upon a hill which overlooks the lower part of the town, and commands an extensive prospect of the river and adjacent country. The new houses are well built. A large state house or capitol, has lately been erected on the hill. The lower part of the town is divided by a creek, over which is a convenient bridge. A bridge between 300 and 400 yards in length, has lately been thrown across James river at the foot of the fall, by Col. Mayo. That part from Manchester to the island is built on 15 boats. From the island to the rocks was formerly a floating bridge of rafts; but Col. Mayo has now built it of framed log piers, filled with stone. From the rocks to the landing at Richmond, the bridge is continued on framed piers filled with stone. This bridge connects Richmond with Manchester; and as the passengers pay toll, it produces a hand­some revenue to Col. Mayo, who is the sole proprietor.

The falls above he bridge are seven miles in length. A noble canal is cutting and nearly completed on the north side of the river, which is to terminate in a bason of about two acres, in the town of Richmond. From this bason to the wharves in the river, will be a land carriage of about a mile. This canal is cutting under the direction of a company, who have calculated the expense at 30,000l. pounds, Virginia money. This they have divided into 500 shares of 60l. each. The opening of this canal promises the addition of much wealth of Richmond.

PETERSBURG, 25 miles southward of Richmond, stands on the south side of Appamattox river, and contains upwards of 300 houses in two divisions; one is upon a clay cold soil, and is very dirty, the oth­er upon a plain of sand or loam. There is no regularity and very little el [...] ­gance in Petersburg, it is merely a place of business. The Free Masons have a hall tolerably elegant. It is very unhealthy, * being shut out from the access of the winds by high hills on every side. This confined sit­uation has such an effect upon the constitutions of the inhabitants, that they very nearly resemble those of hard drinkers; hence, in the opinion of physicians, they require a considerable quantity of stimu­lating aliments and vinous drinks, to keep up a balance between the several functions of the body.

About 2200 hogsheads of tobacco are inspected here annually. Like Richmond, Williamsburg, Alexandria and Norfolk, it is a cor­poration; and what is singular, Petersburg city comprehends a part of three counties. The celebrated Indian queen, Pocahonta, from whom descended the Randolph and Bowling families, formerly resided at this place. Petersburg and its suburbs contain about 3000 inhab­itants.

WILLIAMSBURGH is 60 miles eastward of Richmond, situated be­tween two creeks; one falling into James, the other into York [...]. The distance of each landing place is about a mile from the [...] which, with the disadvantage of not being able to bring up large ves­sels, and want of enterprize in the inhabitants, are the reasons why [...]t never flourished. It consists of about 200 houses, going fast to [...] [Page 551] [...] has about 1400 inhabitants. It is regularly laid out in parallel [...], with a square in the center, through which runs the principal [...], E. and W. about a mile in length, and more than 100 feet wide. A [...] the ends of this street are two public buildings, the college and [...]. Besides these there is an Episcopal church, a prison, a hospit­al for lunatics, and the palace; all of them extremely indifferent. In the capital is a large marble statue, in the likeness of Narbone Berk­ [...], Lord Botetourt, a man distinguished for his love of piety, litera­ture and good government, and formerly governor of Virginia. It [...] erected at the expense of the state, sometime since the year 1771. The capitol is little better than in ruins, and this elegant statue is ex­posed to the rudeness of negroes and boys, and is shamefully de­ [...].

Every thing in Williamsburgh appears dull, forsaken and melancho­ly no trade—no amusements, but the infamous one of gaming—no industry, and very little appearance of religion. The unprosperous [...] of the college, but principally the removal of the seat of govern­ment, have contributed much to the decline of this city.

YORKTOWN, 13 miles eastward from Williamsburgh, and 14 from Monday's point at the mouth of the river, is a place of about 100 [...], situated on the south side of York river, and contains about [...] inhabitants. It was rendered famous by the capture of Lord [...]wallis and his army, on the 19th of October, 1781, by the united [...] of France and America.

COLLEGES, ACADEMIES, &c.] The college of William and Ma­ [...] was founded in the time of king William and queen Mary, who [...] to it 20,000 acres of land, and a penny a pound duty on cer­ [...] tobaccoes exported from Virginia and Maryland, which had [...] levied by the statute of 25 Car. 2. The assembly also gave it, [...] temporary laws, a duty on liquors imported, and skins and furs ex­ [...]. From these resources it received upwards of 3000l. The buildings are of brick, sufficient for an indifferent accommodation of perhaps 100 students. By its charter it was to be under the govern­ment of 20 visitors, who were to be its legislators, and to have a pres­ident and six professors, who were incorporated. It was allowed a representative in the general assembly. Under this charter, a professor­ship of the Greek and Latin languages, a professorship of mathemat­ics, one of moral philosophy, and two of divinity, were established. To these were annexed, for a sixth professorship, a considerable dona­ [...] by a Mr. Boyle of England, for the instruction of the Indians, and their conversion to christianity. This was called the professor­ship of Brafferton, from an estate of that name in England, purchased [...] the monies given. The admission of the learners of Latin and [...] filled the college with children. This rendering it disagreeable [...] degrading to young gentlemen already prepared for entering on [...] sciences, they were discouraged from resorting to it, and thus the [...] for mathematics and moral philosophy, which might have [...] of some service, became of very little. The revenues too were [...]sted in accommodating those who came only to acquire the ru­ [...]ts of science. After the present revolution, the visitors, having [...] power to change those circumstances in the constitution of the [...] which were fixed by the charter, and being therefore confin­ [...] the number of professorships, undertook to change the objects [Page 552] of the professorships. They excluded the two schools for divinity, and that for the Greek and Latin languages, and substituted others; so that at present they stand thus—A professorship for law and police,—anatomy and medicine—natural philosophy and mathematics—mo [...] ­ral philosophy, the law of nature and nations, the fine arts—modern languages—for the Brafferton.

Measures have been taken to increase the number of professorships▪ as well for the purpose of subdividing those already instituted, [...] of add­ing others for other branches of science. To the professorships usually established in the universities of Europe, it would seem proper to add one for the ancient languages and literature of the north, on account of their connection with our own language, laws, customs, and history. The purposes of the Brafferton institution would be better answered by maintaining a perpetual mission among the Indian tribes, the ob­ject of which, besides, instructing them in the principles of christiani­ty, as the founder requires, should be to-collect their traditions, laws, customs, languages, and other circumstances which might lead to a discovery of their relation to one another, or descent from other na­tions. When these objects are accomplished with one tribe, the mis­sionary might pass on to another.

The college edifice is a huge, misshapen pile. 'Which but that it has a roof, would be taken for a brick kiln.' In 1787, there were a­bout 30 young gentlemen members of this college, a large proportion of which were law students. The Academy in Prince Edward coun­ty has been erected into a college by the name of 'Hampden Sy [...]ney College.' It has been a flourishing seminary, but is now said to be on the decline.

There are several academies in Virginia—one at Alexandria—one at Norfolk—one at Hanover, and others in other places.

Since the declaration of independence, the laws of Virginia have been revised by a committee appointed for the purpose, who have re­ported their work to the assembly; one object of this revisal was [...] diffuse knowledge more generally through the mass of the people. The bill for this purpose 'proposes to lay off every county into small districts of five or six miles square, called hundreds, and in each of them to establish a school for teaching reading, writing, and arith­metic. The tutor to be supported by the hundred, and all persons in it entitled to send their children 3 years gratis, and as much longer as they please, paying for it. These schools to be under a visitor, who is annually to chuse the boy of best genius in the school, of those whose parents are too poor to give them further education, and to send him forward to one of the grammar schools, of which twenty are proposed to be erected in different parts of the country, for teach­ing Greek, Latin, geography, and the higher branches of numerical arithmetic. Of the boys thus sent in any one year trial is to be m [...]de at the grammar schools one or two years, and the best genius of the whole selected and continued six years, and the residue dismissed▪ by this means twenty of the best geniusses will be raked from the rub [...] annually, and instructed, at the public expense, so far as the gram­mar schools go. At the end of six years instruction, one half are to be discontinued (from among whom the grammar schools will proba­bly be supplied with future masters,) and the other half, who are to be chosen for the superiority of their parts and disposition, are to be sent [Page 553] [...] continued three years in the study of such sciences as they shall [...], at William and Mary college, the plan of which is pro­ [...] to be enlarged, as will be hereafter explained, and extended [...] the useful sciences. The ultimate result of the whole scheme of [...] would be the teaching all the children of the state reading, [...], and common arithmetic; turning out ten annually of superior [...] well taught in Greek Latin, geography, and the higher branches [...] arithmetic; turning out ten others annually, of still superior parts, [...] [...]o those branches of learning, shall have added such of the scien­ [...] their genius shall have led them to; the furnishing to the [...] part of the people convenient schools, at which their chil­dren may be educated, at their own expense—The general objects of [...] are to provide an education adapted to the years, to the ca­ [...]y, and the condition of every one, and directed to their freedom [...]ppiness. Specific details were not proper for the law. These [...] be the business of the visitors entrusted with its execution. The [...] of this education being the schools of the hundreds, wherein [...] mass of the people will receive their instruction, the princi­ [...] foundations of future order will be said here. The first elements [...]lity may be instilled into their minds; such as, when further [...]dopted as their judgments advance in strength, may teach them how [...] their own greatest happiness, by shewing them that it does [...] on the condition of life in which chance has placed them, [...] always the result of a good conscience, good healthy occupation, [...] freedom in all just pursuits. Those whom either the wealth of [...] parents or the adoption of the state shall destine to higher degrees [...], will go on to the grammar schools, which constitute the [...] [...]age, there to be instructed in the languages. As soon as they [...] a sufficient age, it is supposed they will be sent on from the [...] schools to the university, which constitutes the third and [...], there to study those sciences which may be adapted to [...] views. By that part of the plan which prescribes the selection [...] youths of genius from among the classes of the poor, the state [...] itself of those talents which nature has sown as liberally a­ [...] the poor as the rich, but which perish without use, if not sought [...] and cultivated. But of all the views of this law none is more im­ [...]t, none more legitimate, than that of rendering the people the [...] as they are the ultimate, guardians of their own liberty. For this [...], the reading in the first stage, where they will receive their [...] education, is proposed, as has been said, to be chiefly historical. [...]ry, by apprising them of the past, will enable them to judge of the [...]; it will avail them of the experience of other times and other [...]; it will qualify them as judges of the actions and designs of [...]; it will enable them to know ambition under every disguise it [...] assume; and knowing it to defeat its views. In every govern­ [...] [...] earth is some tra [...]e of human weakness, some germ of cor­ [...] and degeneracy, which cunning will discover, and wickedness [...] open, cultivate and improve. Every government degener­ [...] when trusted to the rulers of the people alone. The people them­ [...] therefore are its only safe depositories. And to render even [...], their minds must be improved to a certain degree. This in­ [...] [...] not all that is necessary, though it be essentially necessary. [...] influence over government must be shared among all the people.

[Page 554] If every individual which composes their mass participates of the [...] ­mate authority, the government will be safe; because the corrupting the whole mass will exceed any private resources of wealth; and pub­lic ones cannot be provided but by levies on the people. In this [...] every man would have to pay his own price. The government of Great Britain has been corrupted, because but one man in ten has a right to vote for members of parliament. The sellers of the govern­ment therefore get nine tenths of their price clear.

The excellent measures for the diffusion of useful knowledge, which the forementioned bill proposes, have not yet been carried into off [...]. And it will be happy if the great inequality in the circumstances of the citizens—the pride, the independence, and the indolence of [...] class—and the poverty and depression of the other, do not pro [...]e [...] superable difficulties in the way of their universal operation.

RELIGION.] The first settlers in this country were emigrants from England, of the English church, just at a point of time when it was flushed with complete victory over the religious of all other persuasions Possessed, as they became, of the powers of making, administering and executing the laws, they shewed equal intolerance in this country with their Presbyterian brethren, who had emigrated to the northern government. The Quakers were flying from persecution in England. They cast their eyes on these new countries, as asylums of civil and religious freedom; but they found them free only for the reigning sect. Several acts of the Virginia assembly of 1659, 1662, and 166 [...] had made it penal in their parents to refuse to have their children baptized; had prohibited the unlawful assembling of Quakers; had made it penal for any master of a vessel to bring a Quaker into the state; had ordered those already here, and such as should come thereafter, to be imprisoned till they should abjure the country; pro­vided a milder punishment for their first and second return, but [...] for the third; had inhibited all persons from suffering their [...] in or near their houses, entertaining them individually, or disposing of books which supported their tenets. If no capital execution [...] place here, as did in New England, it was not owing to the modera­tion of the church, or spirit of the legislature, as may be inferred from the law itself; but to historical circumstances which have not been handed down to us. The Episcopalians retained full possession of the country about a century. Other opinions began to creep in; and the great care of the government to support their town church, having begotten an equal degree of indolence in its clergy, two thirds of the people had become dissenters at the commencement of the present rev­olution. The laws indeed were still oppressive on them, but the spirit of the one party had subsided into moderation, and of the other had risen to a degree of determination which commanded respect.

The present denominations of christians in Virginia are, Presbyterians, who are the most numerous, and inhabit the western parts of the state; Episcopalians, who are the most ancient settlers, and occu [...] the eastern and first settled parts of the state. Intermingled with [...] are great numbers of Baptists and Methodists.

CHARACTER, MANNERS AND CUSTOMS.} Virginia prides itself in being. "The Ancient Dominion." It has produced some of the most distinguished and influential men that have been ac­tive in effecting the two late grand and important revolutions in A­merica. [Page 555] Her political and military character will rank among the [...] in the page of history. But it is to be observed that this charac­ter has been obtained for the Virginians by a few eminent men, who [...] taken the lead in all their public transactions, and who in [...] govern Virginia; for the great body of the people do not con­ [...] themselves with politics—so that their government, though nom­ [...] republican, is, in fact, oligarchal or aristrocratical.

The Virginians, who are rich, are in general sensible, polite and hos­ [...]ble, and of an independent spirit. The poor are ignorant and ab­ [...]—and all are of an inquisitive turn. A considerable proportion of the people are much addicted to gaming, drinking, swearing, horse [...]ing, cock fighting, and most kinds of dissipation. There is a much [...]er disparity between the rich and the poor, in Virginia, than in any of the northern states. The native inhabitants are too generally [...] acquainted with business, owing to their pride, and false notions of [...]ness. Before the revolution they considered it as beneath a [...]ntleman to attend to mercantile matters, and devoted their time prin­ [...]y to amusement. By th [...]e means the Scotch people, and other [...]ners who came among them, became their merchants, and sudden­ly grew rich. The influence of slavery here is equally pernicious to [...] morals of the citizens as in the other southern states.

CONSTITUTION, COURTS AND LAWS.] The executive powers [...] lodged in the hands of a governor, chosen annually, and incapa­ [...] of acting more than three years in seven. He is assisted by a coun­ [...] of eight members. The judiciary powers are divided among sev­ [...] courts, as will be hereafter explained. Legislation is exercised by [...] houses of assembly, the one called the house of delegates, compos­ed of two members from each county, chosen annually by the citizens, [...]ssing an estate for life in 100 acres of uninhabited land, or 25 a­ [...] with a house on it, or in a house or lot in some town; the other [...] the senate, consisting of 24 members, chosen quadrennially by [...] same electors, who for this purpose are distributed into 24 districts. The concurrence of both houses is necessary to the passing of a law. [...] have the appointment of the governor and council, the judges of the superior courts, auditors, attorney general, treasurer, register of the land office, and delegates to Congress.

This constitution was the first that was formed in the whole United [...].

There are three superior courts, to which appeals lie from the courts [...], to wit, the high court of chancery, the general court, and [...] of admiralty. The first and second of these receive appeals [...] the county courts, and also have original jurisdiction where the [...]ject of controversy is of the value of ten pounds sterling, or where it concerns the title or bounds of land. The jurisdiction of the ad­miralty is original altogether. The high court of chancery is com­ [...] of three judges, the general court of five, and the court of ad­miralty of three. The two first hold their sessions at Richmond at stated [...], the chancery twice in the year, and the general court twice for [...]ness civil and criminal, and twice more for criminal only. The [...] of admiralty [...]its at Williamsburg whenever a controversy arises. There is one supreme court, called the Court of Appeals, composed of the judges of the three superior courts, assembling twice a year at [...] times at Richmond. This court receives appeals in all civil [Page 556] cases from each of the superior courts, and determines them finally. But it has no original jurisdiction.

All public accounts are settled with a board of auditors, consisting of three members, appointed by the general assembly, any two of whom may act. But an individual, dissatisfied with the determination of that board, may carry his case into the proper superior court.

In 1661, the laws of England were expressly adopted by an act of the assembly of Virginia, except so far as 'a difference of condition' render them inapplicable. To these were added a number of acts of as­sembly, passed during the monarchy, and ordinances of convention, and acts of assembly since the establishment of the republic. The follow­ing variations from the British model are worthy of notice.

Debtors unable to pay their debts, and making faithful delivery of their whole effects, are released from their confinement, and their per­sons forever discharged from restraint for such previous debts: But any property they may afterwards acquire will be subject to their creditors.—The poor, unable to support themselves, are maintained by an assessment on the titheable persons in their parish.—A foreigner of any nation, not in open war, becomes naturalized by removing to the state to reside, and taking an oath of fidelity; and thereby acquires every right of a native citizen.—Slaves pass by descent and dower as lands do.—Slaves as well as lands, were entailable during the monar­chy: But, by an act of the first republican assembly, all donees in tail, present and future, were vested with the absolute dominion of the en­tailed subject. Gaming debts are made void, and monies actually paid to discharge such debts (if they exceed 40 shillings) may be recovered by the payer within three months, or by any other person afterwards.—Tobacco, flour, beef, pork, tar, pitch and turpentine, must be inspected by persons publicly appointed before they can be exported.

In 1785, the assembly enacted that no man should be compelled to support any religious worship, place or minister whatsoever, nor be enforced, restrained, molested or burdened in his body or goods, nor otherwise suffer on account of his religious opinions or belief; but that all men should be free to profess, and by argument to maintain their opinion, in matters of religion; and that the same should in no wise diminish, enlarge or affect their civil capacities.

In October 1786, an act was passed by the assembly prohibiting the importation of slaves into the commonwealth, upon penalty of the for­feiture of the sum of 1000l. for every slave. And every slave import­ed contrary to the true intent and meaning of this act, becomes free.

MANUFACTURES AND COMMERCE.] Before the war, the inhabit­ants of this state paid but little attention to the manufacture of their own clothing. It has been thought they used to import as much as seven eighths of their clothing, and that they now manufacture three quar­ters of it. We have before mentioned that considerable quantities of iron are manufactured in this state.—To these we may add the manufacture of lead; besides which they have few others of consequence. The people are much attached to agriculture, and prefer foreign manufac­tures.

[Page 557] Before the war this state exported, communibus annis, according to the best information that could be obtained, as follows:

Articles. Quantity. Amo. in dols.
Tobacco 55,000 hhds. of 1000 lb. 1,650,000
Wheat 800,000 bushels 666,666 [...]
Indian corn 600,000 bushels 200,000
Shipping   100,000
Ma [...]ts, planks, skantling, shingles, staves   66,666 [...]
Tar, pitch, turpentine 30,000 barrels 40,000
Paltry, viz. skins of deer, bea­vers, otters, musk rats, ra­coons, foxes 180 hhds. of 600 lb. 42,000
lark 4,000 barrels 40,000
Flaxseed, hemp, cotton   8,000
Pitcoal, pig iron   6,666⅔
[...] 5,000 bushels 3,333 [...]
[...] 1,000 barrels 3,333⅓
[...]geon, white shad, herring   3,333⅓
[...]andy from peaches and apples, and whiskey   1,666 [...]
[...]rses   1,666⅔
    2,833,333⅓

This sum is equal to 850,000l. Virginia money, 657,142 guineas.

The amount of exports from this state in the year succeeding Octo­ber 2, 1790, consisting chiefly of articles mentioned in the foregoing table, was 3,131,227 dollars. About 40,000 hogsheads of tobacco only were exported this year.

In the year 1758 this state exported seventy thousand hogsheads of to­bacco, which was the greatest quantity ever produced in this country in [...] year. But its culture has fast the declined since the commencement of the war, and that of wheat taken its place. The price which it com­mands at market will not enable the planter to cultivate it. Were the apply still to depend on Virginia and Maryland alone, as its culture [...] more difficult this price would rise, so as to enable the planter [...] surmount those difficulties and to live. But the western country [...] the Missisippi, and the midlands of Georgia, having fresh and fer­tile lands in abundance▪ and a hotter sun, are able to undersell these [...] states, and will oblige them in time to abandon the raising tobac­co altogether. And a happy obligation for them it will be. It is a culture productive of infinite wretchedness. Those employed in it are [...] continued state of exertion beyond the powers of nature to support. Little food of any kind is raised by them; so that the men and animals [...] these farms are badly fed, and the earth is rapidly impoverished. The cultivation of wheat is the reverse in every circumstance. Be­sides clothing the earth with herbage, and preserving its fertility, it feeds the labourers plentifully, requires from them only a moderate toil, ex­cept in the season of harvest, raises great numbers of animals for food [...] service, and diffuses plenty and happiness among the whole. It is [Page 558] easier to make an hundred bushels of wheat than a thousand weight of tobacco, and they are worth more when made.

It is not easy to say what are the articles either of necessity, com­fort, or luxury, which cannot be raised here, as every thing hardier than the olive, and as hardy as the fig, may be raised in the open air. Sugar, coffee and tea, indeed, are not between these limits; and habit having placed them among the necessaries of life with the wealthy, an long as these habits remain, they must go for them to those countries which are able to furnish them.

HISTORY.] We have already given a brief historical account of the first settlement of Virginia, till the arrival of Lord Delaware in 1610. His arrival with a fresh supply of settlers and provisions, re­vived the drooping spirits of the former company, and gave perma­nency and respectability to the settlement.

In April 1613, Mr. John Rolf, a worthy young gentleman, was married to Pocahontas, the daughter of Powhatan, the famous Indian chief. This connection, which was very agreeable both to the Eng­lish and Indians, was the foundation of a friendly and advantageous commerce between them.

In 1616, Mr. Rolf, with his wife Pocahontas, visited England, where she was treated with that attention and respect which she had merited by her important services to the colony in Virginia. She di­ed the year following at Gravesend, in the 22d year of her age, just as she was about to embark for America. She had embraced the christian religion; and in her life and death evidenced the sincerity of her profession. She left a little son, who, having received his ed­ucation in England, came over to Virginia, where he lived and died in affluence and honour, leaving behind him an only daughter. Her descendants are among the most respectable families in Vir­ginia.

Tomocomo, a sensible Indian, brother in law to Pocahontas, accom­panied her to England; and was directed by Powhatan to bring him an exact account of the numbers and strength of the English. For this purpose, when he arrived at Plymouth, he took a long stick, in­tending to cut a notch in it for every person he should see. This he soon found impracticable, and threw away his stick. On his return, being asked by Powhatan, how many people there were, he is said to have replied, 'Count the stars in the sky, the leaves on the trees, and the sands on the sea shore; for such is the number of the people in England'.

In pursuance of the authorities given to the company by their sev­eral charters, and more especially of that part in the charter of 1609, which authorised them to establish a form of government, they, on the 24th July, 1621, by charter under their common seal, declared, That from thenceforward there should be two supreme councils in Virginia, the one to be called the council of state, to be placed and displaced by the treasurer, council in England, and company, from time to time, whose office was to be that of assisting and advising the governor; the other to be called the general assembly, to be convened by the governor once yearly, or oftener, which was to consist of the council of state, and two burgesses out of every town, hundred, or plantation, to be respectively chosen by the inhabitants. In this all matters were to be decided by the greater part of the votes present [Page 559] [...]serving to the governor a negative voice; and they were to have [...]wer to treat, consult and conclude all emergent occasions concern­ing the public weal, and to make laws for the behoof and govern­ment of the colony, imitating and following the laws and policy of [...]ngland as nearly as might be: Provided that these laws should [...] no force till ratified in a general quarter court of the company [...] England, and returned under their common seal, and declaring that, [...] the government of the colony should be well framed and settled, [...] orders of the council in England should bind the colony unless [...] by the said general assembly. The King and company quar­ [...]d, and by a mixture of law and force, the latter were ousted of [...] their rights, without retribution, after having expended 100,000l. [...] establishing the colony, without the smallest aid from government. [...] James suspended their powers by proclamation of July 15, 1624, [...] Charles I. took the government into his own hands. Both sides [...] their partisans in the colony: But in truth the people of the col­ [...] in general thought themselves little concerned in the dispute. [...] being three parties interested in these several charters, what [...] between the first and second it was thought could not affect the [...]. If the King seized on the powers of the company, they only [...] into other hands, without increase or diminution, while the [...] of the people remained as they were. But they did not re­ [...] so long. The northern parts of their country were granted a­ [...] to the Lords Baltimore and Fairfax, the first of these obtain­ing also the rights of separate jurisdiction and government. And [...] 1650 the parliament, considering itself as standing in the place of their deposed king, and as having succeeded to all his powers, with­out [...] well as within the realm, began to assume a right over the col­ [...], passing an act for inhibiting their trade with foreign nations. This succession to the exercise of the kingly authority gave the first col­ [...] for parliamentary interference with the colonies, and produced [...] fatal precedent which they continued to follow after they had re­ [...], in other respects, within their proper functions. When this [...], therefore, which still maintained its opposition to Cromwell and the parliament, was induced in 1651 to lay down their arms, the [...] [...]ously secured their most essential rights by a solemn conven­ [...].

This convention, entered into with arms in their hands, they sup­ [...] had secured the ancient limits of their country—its free trade—its exemption from taxation but by their own assembly, and ex­ [...] of military force from among them. Yet in every of these [...] was this convention violated by subsequent kings and parlia­ments, and other infractions of their constitution, equally dangerous, committed. The general assembly, which was composed of the coun­ [...] of state and burgesses, sitting together and deciding by plurality of [...], was split into two houses, by which the council obtained a [...] negative on their laws. Appeals from their supreme court, which had been fixed by law in their general assembly, were arbitrari­ [...] [...] to England, to be there heard before the king and council. [...] of 400 miles on the sea coast, they were reduced, in the space [...] years, to about 100 miles. Their trade with foreigners was to­ [...] [...]ppressed, and, when carried to Great Britain, was there load­ [...] imposts. It is unnecessary, however, to glean up the several [Page 560] instances of injury, as scattered through American and British history; and the more especially, as, by passing on to the accession of the present king, we shall find specimens of them all, aggravated, multiplied and crowded within a small compass of time, so as to evince a fixed design of considering the rights of the people, whether natural, conventional o [...] chartered, as mere nul [...]ties. The colonies were taxed internally; their essential interests sacrificed to individuals in Great Britain; their legisla­tures suspended; charters annulled; trials by juries taken away; their persons subjected to transportation across the Atlantic, and to trial before foreign judicatories; their supplications for redress thought be­neath answer; themselves published as cowards in the councils of their mother country and courts of Europe; armed troops sent among them to enforce submission to these violences; and actual hostilities com­menced against them. No alternative was presented but resistance or unconditional submission. Between these could be no hesitation. They closed in the appeal to arms. They declared themselves inde­pendent states. They confederated together into one great republic; thus securing to every state the benefit of an union of their whole force. They fought—they conquered—and obtained an honourable and glorious peace.

LIST of PRESIDENTS and GOVERNORS of VIRGINIA, from its first settlement to the year 1624. *
Edward Maria Wingfield, from May, 1607, to Sept▪ 1607.
John Ratcliffe, Sept. 1607, to July, 1608.
Mat. S [...]ivener, Vice President, July, 1608, to Sept. 1608.
John Smith, Sept. 1608, to Sept. 1609.
George Percy, Governor, Sept. 1609, to May, 1610.
Sir Thomas Gates, May, 1610, to June, 1610.
Lord Delaware, June, 1610, to March, 1611.
George Percy, March, 1611, to May, 1611.
Sir Thomas Dale, May, 1611, to Aug. 1611.
Sir Thomas Gates, August 1611, to 1614.
Sir Thomas Dale, 1614, to 1616.
George Yeardley, 1616, to 1617.
Samuel Argall, 1617, to 1619.
George Yeardley, 1619, to Nov. 1621.
Sir Francis Wyat, Nov. 1621, to 1624.
[Page 561]

INDIANA

INDIANA, so called, is a tract of land lying on the Ohio river, in the state of Virginia, ceded to William Trent and twenty two others, by the Six Nations and the Shawanese, Delaware and Huron tribes, [...] a compensation for the losses they had sustained by the depreda­tions of the latter, in the year 1763. This session was made in a [...]gress of the representatives of the Six Nations, at Fort Stanwix, by an indenture, signed the 3d of November, 1768, witnessing, 'That for and in consideration of £85,916:10:8, York currency, (the same being the amount of the goods seized and taken by said Indians from said Trent, &c.) they did grant, bargain, sell, &c. to his majesty, his [...] and successors, for the only use of the said William Trent, &c. all that tract or parcel of land, beginning at the southerly side of the [...] Kanhaway creek, where it empties itself into the river Ohio; and running thence southeast to the Laurel Hill; thence along the [...] Hill until it strikes the river Monongahela; thence down the [...] of the said river, according to the several courses thereof, to the southern boundary line of the province of Pennsylvania; thence westwardly along the course of the said province boundary line as far [...] the same shall extend; thence by the same course to the river Ohio, and then down the river Ohio to the place to beginning, inclusively. This indenture was signed by six Indian chiefs, in presence of Sir William Johnson, Governor Franklin of New Jersey, and the Com­missioners from Virginia, Pennsylvania, &c. making twelve in the whole.

Since the Indians had an undisputed title to the above limited terri­tory, either from pre-occupancy or conquest, and their right was ex­ [...]ly acknowledged by the above deed of cession to the crown, it is very evident that Mr. Trent, in his own right, and as attorney for the [...]ders, has a good, lawful and sufficient title to the land granted by the said deed of conveyance.

This matter was laid before congress in the year 1782, and a com­mittee appointed to consider it, who, in May, reported as follows: 'On the whole, your committee are of opinion that the purchases of [...] Croghan and the Indian company, were made bona fide for a valuable consideration, according to the then usage and customs of purchasing Indian lands from the Indians, with the knowledge, con­ [...] and approbation of the crown of Great Britain, the then gov­ernment of New York and Virginia, and therefore do recommend [...] it be

Resolved, That if the said lands are finally ceded or adjudged to the United States in point of jurisdiction, that congress will confirm to [...] of the said purchasers who are, and shall be, citizens of the United States, or either of them, their respective shares and propor­ [...] of said lands, making a reasonable deduction for the value of [...] [...] rents reserved by the crown of England.'

Notwithstanding this report of the committee, the question could never [...]ught to a decision before congress. The federal constitution has, [...], made provision for the determination of this business before the [...] federal court. But previous to an appeal to this court, the [Page 562] proprietors thought proper, by their agent, Colonel Morgan, (who is also a proprietor) to present a memorial to the legislature of Virginia, setting forth their claims, and praying that the business might be equi­tably settled. This memorial was presented in November, 1790; and thus the Indiana business rests for the present.

KENTUCKY.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 230 Miles. between 80 and 15° W. Lon. Square Miles. 5,000
Breadth 200 Miles. 360 30' and 39° 30′ N. Lat. Square Miles. 5,000

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED northwest, by the river Ohio; west, by Cumberland river; south, by North Carolina; east, by Sandy river, and a line drawn due south from its source, till it strikes the northern boundary of North Carolina.

CIVIL DIVISIONS.] Kentucky was originally divided into two counties, Lincoln and Jefferson. It has since been subdivided into nine, which follow:

Counties. No. Inhab. Chief Towns. No. Inhab.
Jefferson, 4,565 LOUISVILLE, 200
Fayette, 17,576 LEXINGTON, 834
Bourbon, 7,837    
Mercer, 6,941 Danville, 150
Nelson, 11,099 Beardstown, 216
Madison, 5,772    
Lincoln, 6,548    
Woodford, 9,210    
Mason, 2,267 Washington, 462
Total 73,677 of whom 12,430 are slaves.  

As most of these counties are very large, it is probable that subdi­visions will continue to be made, as population increases.

RIVERS.] The river Ohio washes the northwestern side of Ken­tucky, in its whole extent. Its principal branches, which water this fertile tract of country, are Sandy, Licking, Kentucky, Salt, Green and Cumberland rivers. These again branch in various directions, into rivulets of different magnitudes, fertilizing the country in all its parts. At the bottoms of these water courses the limestone rock, which is common to this country, appears of a greyish colour; and where it lies exposed to the air, in its natural state, it looks like brown freestone. On the banks of these rivers and rivulets, this stone has the appearance of fine marble, being of the same texture, and is found in the greatest plenty.

Sandy, Licking and Kentucky rivers rise near each other, in the Cumberland mountains. Of these, Sandy river only breaks through the mountain. This river constitutes a part of the eastern boundary of Kentucky.

[Page 563] Licking river runs in a northwest direction, upwards of 100 miles, [...] is about 100 yards broad at its mouth.

Kentucky is a very crooked river, and after running a course of more than 200 miles, empties into the Ohio by a mouth 150 yards broad.

Salt river rises at four different places near each other. The wind­ings of this river are curious. The four branches, after a circuitous course round a fine tract of land, unite; and after running about 15 miles, empty into the Ohio, 20 miles below the falls. Its general course is westward—its length about 90 miles—and at its mouth is 80 yards wide.

Green river pursues a western course upwards of 150 miles, and by a mouth 80 yards wide, falls into the Ohio, 120 miles below the rapids:

Cumberland river interlocks with the northern branch of Ken­tucky, and rolling round the other arms of Kentucky, among the mountains in a southern course, 100 miles—then in a southwestern course for above 200 more—then in a southern and southwestern course for about 250 more, finds the Ohio, 413 miles below the falls. At Nashville, this river is 200 yards broad, and at its mouth 300. The river in about half its course, passes through North Carolina.

These rivers are navigable for boats almost to their sources, with­out rapids, for the greatest part of the year. The little rivulets which checker the country, begin to lessen in June, and quite disap­pear in the months of August, September and October. The autum­nal rains, however, in November replenish them again. The method of getting a supply of water in the dry season is by sinking wells, which are easily dug, and afford excellent water. The want of wa­ter in autumn, is the great complaint. Mills that may be supplied with water eight months in a year, may be erected in a thousand dif­ferent places. Wind mills and horse mills may supply the other four months.

The banks of the rivers are generally high and composed of lime [...]. After heavy rains, the water in the rivers rises from 10 to 30 feet.

SPRINGS.] There are five noted salt springs or licks in this coun­try; viz. the higher and lower Blue Springs, on Licking river, from [...] of which, it is said, issue streams of brinish water—the Big Bone lick, Drennon's licks; and Bullet's lick, at Salisburgh. The last of these licks, though in low order, has supplied this country and Cum­berland with salt at 20 shillings he bushel, Virginia currency; and [...] is exported to the Illinois country. The method of procuring [...] from these licks, is by sinking wells from 30 to 40 feet deep. The water drawn from these wells is more strongly impregnated with [...] than the water from the sea. A strait road, 40 feet wide, has [...] cut from Saltsburgh to Louisville, 24 miles.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY, SOIL AND PRODUCE.} This whole country, as far as has yet been discovered, lies upon a bed [...] stone, which in general is about six feet below the furface, ex­cept in the vallies, where the soil is much thinner. A tract of about [...] miles wide, along the banks of the Ohio, is hilly, broken land, in­terspersed with many fertile spots. The rest of the country is [...]ably uneven, gently ascending and descending at no great dis­tances. [Page 564] The angles of ascent are from eight to twenty four degrees, and sometimes more. The vallies in common, are very narrow, and the soil in them is very thin, and of an inferior quality; and that along the ascending ground is frequently not much better; for where you see a tree blown up, you find the roots clinging to the upper parts of the rock. The soil, on these agreeable ascents, (for they cannot be called hills) is sufficiently deep, as is evident from the size of the trees. The soil is either black, or tinged with a lighter or deeper vermillion, or is of the colour of dark ashes. In many places there are appear­ances of potter's clay, and coal in abundance. The country prom­ises to be well supplied with wholesome, well tasted water. In Nel­son county, northwest of Rolling fork, a branch of Salt river, is a tract of about 40 miles square, mostly barren, interspersed with plains and strips of good land, which are advantageous situations for raising cattle, as the neighbouring barrens, as they are improperly styled, are covered with grass, and afford good pasturage. The lands east of Nolin creek a branch of Green river, are in general of [...]n inferior quality; but the banks of Green river afford many desirable situations.

Towards the head waters of Kentucky river, which interlock with the waters of Cumberland and Sandy rivers, and the whole country eastward and southward as far as the Holstein river, is broken, moun­tainous and almost impenetrable; and from the description given by hunters▪ it is much doubted whether it will even be practicable to make a passable road from Kentucky across to Winchester, in Virginia, on the east side of the mountains, which, on a straight line, is not perhaps more than 400 miles, and the way now travelled is 600. No country will admit of being thicker settled with farmers, who confine them­selves to agriculture, than this.

Elkhorn river, a branch of the Kentucky, from the southeast, waters a country fine beyond description. Indeed, the country east and south of this, including the head waters of Licking river, Hickman's and Jessamine creeks, and the remarkable bend in Kentucky river, may be called an extensive garden. The soil is deep and black, and the natural growth, large walnuts, honey and black locust, poplar, elm, oak, hickory, sugar tree, &c. Grape vines run to the tops of the trees; and the surface of the ground is covered with clover, blue grass and wild rye. On this fertile tract, and the Licking river, and the head waters of Salt river, are the bulk of the settlements in this country. The soil within a mile or two of Kentucky river is general­ly of the third and fourth rates; and as you advance towards the O­hio, the land is poor and hilly.

Dick's river runs through a great body of first rate land, abounding with cane, and affords many excellent mill seats. Salt river has good lands on its head waters, except that they are low and unhealthy, but for 25 miles before it empties into the Ohio, the land on each side is level and poor, and abounds with ponds.

Cumberland river, so much of it as passes through Kentucky, trav­erses, some parts excepted, a hilly poor country.

Green river overflows its banks a considerable way up, at the season when the Ohio swells, which is in April. This swell in Green river o ccasions several of its branches to overflow, and cover the low grounds with water, leaves and vegetable substances, which, in sum­mer, become noxious and unhealthy. Its banks are fine and fertile. [Page 565] There is a great body of good land near the falls and rapids in the O­hio, called Bare grass; but the climate is rendered unhealthy by ponds of stagnant water, which may be easily drained.

This country in general is well limbered. Of the natural growth which is peculiar to this country, we may reckon the sugar, the coffee, the papaw and the cucumber tree. The two last are soft wood, and [...] a fruit of the shape and size of a cucumber. The coffee tree re­sembles the black oak, and bears a pod, which encloses a feed, of which a drink is made not unlike coffee. Besides these there is the [...] locust, black mulberry, wild cherry, of a large size. The buck­ [...], an exceedingly soft wood, is the horse chesnut of Europe. The [...]olia bears a beautiful blossom of a rich and exquisite fragrance, [...]uch is the variety and beauty of the flowering shrubs and plants which grow spontaneously in this country, that in the proper season the wilderness appears in blossom.

The accounts of the fertility of the soil in this country, have, in some instances, exceeded belief; and probably have been exaggerat­ed.—That some parts of Kentucky, particularly the high grounds, are remarkably good, all accounts agree. The lands of the first rate are [...] rich for wheat, and will produce 50 and 60, and in some instances, it is affirmed, 100 bushels of good corn, and acre. In common, the [...] will produce 30 bushels of wheat or rye an acre. Barley, oats, cotton, flax, hemp, and vegetables of all kinds common in this cli­mate, yield abundantly. The old Virginia planters say, that if the climate does not prove 100 moist, few soils known, will yield more [...] better tobacco. Experience has proved, that the climate is not 100 moist. Great quantities of this article have been exported to France and Spain, through New Orleans; and it is a well known [...] that Philadelphia is a profitable market for the Kentucky planter, notwithstanding all the inconveniences and expenses of reshipment a New Orleans, under a Spanish government. What advantages [...] may not this country expect from a free navigation of the Missi­sippi, unrestrained by Spanish policy!

In the rivers are plenty of buffalo, pike and catfish of uncommon [...], salmon, mullet, rock, perch, garfish, eel, sucke [...]s, sunfish, &c.— [...] have not been caught in the western waters.

Swamps are ra [...]e in Kentucky; and of course the reptiles which they produce, such as snakes, frogs, &c. are not numerous. The hon­ [...]y bee may be called a domestic infect, as it is said not to be found but in civilized countries. This is confirmed by a saying which is common among the Indians, when they see a swarm of bees in the [...], 'Well brothers, it is time for us to decamp, for the white peo­ple are coming.' Nevertheless bees, of late years, have abounded, to their amazement, even 200 miles N. and N. W. of the Ohio.

The quadrupeds, except the buffalo, are the same as in Virginia and the Carolinas.

CLIMATE.] Healthy and delightful, some few places in the neigh­bourhood of ponds and low grounds excepted. The inhabitants do not experience the extremes of heat and cold. Snow seldom falls [...], or lies long.—The winter, which begins about Christmas, is [...] longer than three months, and is commonly but two, and is so [...] as that cattle can subsist without fodder.

[Page 566] CHIEF TOWNS.] LEXINGTON, which stands on the head waters of Elkhorn river, is reckoned the capital of Kentucky. Here the courts are held, and business regularly conducted. In 1786, it con­tained about 100 houses, and several stores, with a good assortment of dry goods. It has greatly increased since, and contains about 900 in­habitants.

WASHINGTON, the shire town of Mason county, is the second town in this state, containing about 500 inhabitants.

LEESTOWN is west of Lexington, on the eastern bank of Kentucky river. It is regularly laid out, and is flourishing. The banks of Ken­tucky river are remarkably high, in some places 3 and 400 feet, com­posed generally of stupendous perpendicular rock; the consequence is, there are few crossing places. The best is at Leestown, which is a circumstance that must contribute much to its increase.

LOUISVILLE, is at the rapids of the Ohio, in a fertile country, and promises to be a place of great trade. It has been made a port of en­try. Its unhealthiness, owing to stagnated waters back of the town, has considerably retarded its growth. Besides these there is Beardstown, in Nelson county, and Harrodsburg, in Mercer county, both on the head waters of Salt river; Danville, Boonsborough and Granville are also increasing towns.

POPULATION AND CHARACTER.] The population of this state in 1790, is given in the preceding table. In 1783, in the county of Lincoln * only, there were, on the militia rolls, 3570 men, chiefly em­igrants from the lower parts of Virginia. In 1784, the number of in­habitants were reckoned at upwards of 30,000. It is asserted that at least 20,000 migrated here in the year 1787. These people, collected from different states, of different manners, customs, religions, and po­litical sentiments, have not been long enough together to form a uni­form national character. Among the settlers there are many gentle­men of abilities, and many genteel families, from several of the states, who give dignity and respectability to the settlement. They are, in general, more regular than people who generally settle new coun­tries.

RELIGION.] The Baptists are the most numerous religious sect in Kentucky. There are several large congregations of Presbyterians, and some few of other denominations.

CONSTITUTION.] By the constitution of this state, formed and a­dopted in 1792, the powers of government are divided into 3 distinct departments; legislative, executive, and judiciary. The legislative power is vested in a general assembly, consisting of a senate and house of representatives; the supreme executive, in a governor; the judi­ciary, in the supreme court of appeals, and such inferior courts as the legislature may establish. The representatives are chosen annually, by the people; the senators and governor are chosen four years, by electors appointed for that purpose; the judges are appointed during good behaviour, by the governor, with advice of the senate. An enu­meration of the free male inhabitants, above 21 years old, is to be made once in four years. After each enumeration, the number of senators and representatives is to be fixed by the legislature, and ap­portioned among the several counties, according to the number of in­habitants. [Page 567] There can never be fewer than 40, nor more than 100 repre­sentatives. The senate at first consisted of 11 members; and for the addition of every four representatives, one senator is to be added. The representatives must be 24 years old; the senators 27; the gov­ernor 30, and all of them must have been inhabitants of the state two years. The governor can hold no other office. The members of the general assembly none, but those of attorney at law, justice of the peace, coroner, and in the militia. The judges, and all other officers, must be inhabitants of the counties for which they are appointed. The governor, members of the general assembly, and judges, receive stated salaries out of the public treasury, from which no money can be drawn but in consequence of appropriation by law. All officers take an oath of fidelity to discharge the duties of their offices, and are liable to impeachment for misconduct. Elective officers must swear that they have not used bribery in obtaining their elections. All free male cit­i [...]ns 21 years old, having resided in the state 2 years, or in the coun­ty where they offer to vote, one year, have a right to vote for rep­resentatives, and for electors of senators and governor, and are privileged from arrest, in civil actions, while attending that business. The general assembly meets on the first Monday in November, in each year, unless sooner convened by the governor. Each house chooses its speaker and other officers, judges of the qualifications of its mem­bers, and determines the rules of its proceedings, of which a journal i [...] kept and published weekly, unless secrecy be requisite. The doors of both houses are kept open. The members of the legislature, while attending the public business, are privileged from arrests in civil ac­tions, and may not be questioned elsewhere for any thing said in pub­lic debate. Impeachments are made by the lower house, and tried by the upper. All revenue bills originate in the house of representatives, and are amendable by the senate, like other bills. Each bill passed by both houses is presented to the governor, who must sign it if he ap­prove it; if not, he must return it within ten days, to the house in which it originated; if it be not returned, or if, when returned, it be repassed by two thirds of both houses, it is a law without his signature. The governor has power to appoint most of the executive officesd of the state; to remit fines and forfeitures, and grant reprieves an pardons, except in cases of impeachment; to require information from executive officers; to convene the general assembly on extraordinary occasions, and adjourn them in case they cannot agree on the time themselves. He must inform the legislature, of the state of the com­monwealth; recommend to them such measures as he shall judge ex­pedient; and see that the laws are faithfully executed. The speaker of the senate exercises the office of governor in case of vacancy. The legislature has power to forbid the farther importation of slaves, but not to emancipate those already in the state, without the consent of the owner, or paying an equivalent. Treason against the common­wealth consists only in levying war against it, or in adhering to its en­emies, giving them aid and comfort.

The declaration of rights asserts the civil equality of all; their right to alter the government at any time; liberty of conscience; freedom of elections and of the press; trial by jury; the subordination of the military to the civil power; the rights of criminals to be heard in their own defence; the right of the people to petition for the redress of [Page 568] grievances, to bear arms, and to emigrate from the state. It prohibits unreasonable searches and seizures; excessive bail; confinement of debtors, unless there be presumption of fraud; suspension of habeas cor­pus writ, unless in rebellion or invasion; ex post facto laws; attainder by the legislature; standing armies; titles of nobility and hereditary dis­tinction.

LITERATURE AND IMPROVEMENTS.] The legislature of Virginia, while Kentucky belonged to that state, made provision for a college in it, and endowed it with very considerable landed funds. The Rev. John Todd gave a very handsome library for its use. Schools are es­tablished in the several towns, and in general, regularly and handsome­ly supported. They have a printing office, and publish a weekly [...]a­zette. They have erected a paper mill, an oil mill, fulling mills, saw mills, and a great number of valuable grift mills. Their salt works are more than sufficient to supply all their inhabitants, at a low price. They make considerable quantities of sugar from the sugar trees. Labourers, particularly tradesmen, are exceedingly wanted here.

CURIOSITIES.] The banks, or rather precipices, of Kentucky and Dick's river, are to be reckoned among the natural curiosities of this country. Here the astonished eye beholds 300 or 400 feet of solid perpendicular rock, in some parts, of the lime stone kind, and in others of fine white marble, curiously checkered with strata of aston­ishing regularity. These rivers have the appearance of deep artifi­cial canals. Their high rocky banks are covered with red cedar groves.

Caves have been discovered in this country of several miles in length, under a fine lime stone rock, supported by curious arches and pillars. Springs that emit sulphureous matter have been found in several parts of the country. One is near a salt spring, in the neigh­bourhood of Boonsborough. There are three springs or ponds of bitumen near Green river, which do not form a stream, but empty themselves into a common reservoir, and when used in lamps, answer all the purposes of the best oil. Copperas and allum are among the minerals of Kentucky. Near Lexington are found curious [...] ­chres full of human skeletons. It has been asserted that a man, in or near Lexington, having dug 5 or 6 feet below the surface of the ground, came to a large flat stone, under which was a well of com­mon depth, regularly and artificially stoned.

HISTORY.] See our general account of the discovery and settle­ment of North America, page 117 and 118.

[Page 569]

NORTH CAROLINA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 300 Miles. between 1° and 6° 30′ W. Long. Sq. Miles. 34,000
Breadth 120 Miles. 33° 50′ and 36° 30′ N. Lat. Sq. Miles. 34,000.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Virginia; east, by the Atlantic ocean; south, by South Carolina and Georgia; west, by a chain of Mountains a few miles to the west­ [...] of the great Appalachian mountain. This chain of mountains, [...] the whole for a part, has occasionally been called the great Iron [...]. All that vast country which lies on the west of the Iron [...] was surrendered to the United States by the State of North [...] in the year 1789. It has since been erected into a separate [...]nment, commonly called the Territory South of Ohio, or the [...] government. *

CIVIL DIVISIONS.] This state is divided into eight districts, which are subdivided into 54 counties, as follows: [Page 570]

TABLE
Districts. Counties.
These 3 distr. are on the se [...] coast, extend. from the Virgin. line southward to S. Carolina. EDENTON. 9 counties, 53.770 inhabitants. Chief town, Edenton. Chowan,
Currituck,
Camden,
Pasquotank,
Perquimins,
Gates,
Hertford,
Bertie,
Tyrrel,
WILMING­TON. 5 counties. 26,035 inh. Ch. town Wilmingt. N. Hanover,
Brunswick,
Duplin,
Biaden,
Onslow,
NEWBERN. 9 counties, 55 540 inhabitants. Chief town, Newbern. Craven,
Beaufort,
Carteret,
Johnston,
Pitt,
Dobbs,
Wayne,
Hyde,
Jones,
These 5 districts, beginning on the Virginia line, cover the whole state west of the 3 mar [...]time districts before mentio.; and the greater part of them extend quite across the state from N. to S. HALIFAX. 7 counties, 64630 inh. Ch. Town Halifax. Halifax,
Northampton
Martin,
Edgecomb,
Warren,
Franklin,
Nash,
HILLSBORO' 6 coun. 59,983 inh. Ch. town Hillsborough. Orange,
Chatham,
Granville,
Caswell,
Wake,
Randolf,
SALISBURY. 8 coun. 66,480 inh. Chief town Salis­bury. Rowan,
Mecklenburg,
Rockingham,
Iredell,
Surry,
Montgomery,
Stokes,
Guilford,
MORGAN 4 counti. 33,293 inhab. Burke,
Ruthford,
Linclon,
Wilkes,
Cumberland,
FAYETTE. 6 coun. 340 [...]0 inh. Ch. town Fayetteville. Moore,
Richmond,
Robison,
Sampson,
Anson,

RIVERS.] Chowan river is formed by the confluence of three rivers, viz. the Meherrin, Nottaway and Black rivers; all of which rise in Virginia. It falls into the northwest corner of Albemarle sound, and is three miles wide at its mouth, but narrows fast as you ascend it.

Roanoke is a long rapid river, formed by two principal branches, Staunton river, which rises in Virginia, and Dan river, which rises in North Carolina. The low lands on this river are subject to in [...] ­dations. It is navigable only for shallops, nor for these, but about 60 or 70 miles, on account of falls, which in a great measure obstruct the water communication with the back country. It empties, by several mouths, into the southwest end of Albemarle sound. The planters on the banks of this river are supposed to be the wealthiest in North Carolina. One of them, it is said, raises about 3000 barrels of corn, and 4000 bushels of peas, annually.

Cushal is a small river, which empties into Albemarle found between Chowan and the Roanoke.

[Page 571] Pamlico or Tar river opens into Pamlico sound. Its course is from northwest to southeast. It is navigable for vessels drawing nine feet water to the town of Washington, about 40 miles from its mouth; and for scows or flats, carrying 30 or 40 hogsheads, 50 miles further, to the town of Tarborough. Beyond this place the river is inconsider­able and is not navigable.

Nous river empties into Pamlico sound below Newbern. It is nav­igable for sea vessels about 12 miles above the town of Newbern; for scows 50 miles, and for small boats 200 miles.

Trent river, from the southwest, falls into the Neus at Newbern. It is navigable for sea vessels about 12 miles above the town, and for boats thirty.

There are several other rivers of less note, among which are the Pasq [...]otank, Perquimins, Little river, Alligator, &c. which discharge themselves into Albemarle sound. All the rivers in North Carolina, and, it may be added, in South Carolina, Georgia, and the Floridas, which empty into the Atlantic ocean, are navigable by any vessel that can pass the bar at their mouth. While the water courses continue [...]ide enough for vessels to turn round, there is generally a sufficient depth of water for them to proceed.

Cape Fear, more properly Clarendon river, opens into the sea at Cape Fear, in about lat▪ 33° 45′. As you ascend it, you pass Bruns­wick on the left, and Wilmington on the right. The river then di­vides into northeast and northwest branches, as they are called. It is navigable for large vessels to Wilmington, and for boats to Fayetteville, near 90 miles further. This river affords the best navigation in North Carolina. Yadkin river rises in this state, and running southeast­wardly, crosses into South Carolina, where it takes the name of Pe­ [...]e, and passes to sea below Georgetown.

This state would be much more valuable, were it not that the rivers are barred at their mouths, and the coast furnishes no good harbours. These circumstances will prevent the state from building large ships, for which they have an abundance of excellent timber. Several caus­es have been assigned for all the harbours and rivers being barred, south of the Chesapeak. Some suppose the bars are formed by the current of the long rivers, throwing up the sands where their rapidi­ty terminates—Others say that a bank is thrown up by the Gulf Stream, which runs near these shores.

The banks of the rivers in this, and the other neighbouring states, often overflow after great rains; which does much damage to the plantations. A gentleman on the spot asserts, that he has seen the water 30 feet below the banks of the river, just after it had been 10 feet above them. This is owing to the narrowness of the mouths of the rivers, which do not afford a sufficient channel for the waters, accu­ [...]lating every mile, to discharge themselves into the ocean.

SOUNDS, CAPES, INLETS, &c.] Pamlico sound is a kind of lake [...] inland sea, from 10 to 20 miles broad, and nearly 100 miles in length. It is separated from the sea, in its whole length, by a beach of sand hardly a mile wide, generally covered with small trees or bushes. Through this bank are several small inlets, by which boats may pass. But Ocrecok inlet is the only one that will admit vessels [...] burden into the districts of Edenton and Newbern. This inlet is in latitude 35° 10′, and opens into Pamlico sound, between Ocrecok [Page 572] island and Core bank; the land on the north is called Ocrecok; and on the south Portsmouth. A bar of hard sand crosses this inlet, on which, at low tide, there are 14 feet water. Six miles within this bar, is a hard sand shoal, called the Swash, lying across the channel. On each side of the channel are dangerous shoals, sometimes dry. There is from 8 to 9 feet water at full tide, according to the winds, on the Swash. Common tides rise 18 inches on the bar, and ten on the Swash. Between the bar and the Swash is good anchoring ground, called the Upper and Lower anchorages. Ships drawing 10 feet water do not come farther than the first anchorage, till light­ened. Pew mariners, though acquainted with the inlets, choose to bring in their own vessels, as the bar often shifts during their absence on a voyage. North of Pamlico sound, and communicating with it, is Albemarle sound, 60 miles in length, and from 8 to 12 in breadth.

Core sound lies south of Pamlico, and communicates with it. These sounds are so large when compared with their inlets from the sea, that no tide can be perceived in any of the rivers which empty into them; nor is the water salt even in the mouths of these rivers.

Cape Hatteras is in latitude 35° 15′. At the time of Sir Walter Raleigh's approaching the American shores, the shoals in the vicinity of Hatteras were found to be extremely dangerous, and no vessels, in that latitude, ventured within 7 leagues of the land. From a survey of the ancient drafts of this part of the coast, there can be no doubt but the fears of former navigators were not without foundation, as these shoals are laid down very large in extent, and in many places covered with not more than 5 or 6 feet water, at a great distance from the land.

The constant experience of the coasting trade of the United States demonstrates, either that the ancient drafts were purposely falsified in order to deter seamen from venturing too near a coast, with which they had as yet a very slender acquaintance, or (which is the most prob­able) that by the strong currents hereabouts, which are only counter currents of the Gulph Stream, the sands, which were originally heap­ed up in this part of the ocean by some ancient convulsion of nature, have been gradually wearing away, and diminishing to what we find them to be at this time.

At present the out shoals, which lie about 14 miles southwest of the Cape▪ are but of 5 or 6 acres extent, and where they are really dan­gerous to vessels of moderate draught, not more than half that number of acres. On the shoalest part of these is, at low water, about 10 feet, and here at times the ocean breaks in a tremendous manner, spouting, as it were, to the clouds, from the violent agitations of the Gulf Stream, which touches the eastern edge of the banks, from whence the declivity is sudden, that is to say, from ten fathoms to no soundings. On the spot abovementioned, which is firm sand▪ it has been the lot of many a good vessel to strike, in a gale of wind, and to go to pieces. In moderate weather, however, these shoals may be passed over, if nec­essary, at full tide, without much danger, by vessels not drawing more than 8, 9, or 10 feet water.

From this bank, which was formerly of vast extent, and called the Full Moon Sh [...]al, a ridge runs the whole distance to the Cape, about a N. W. course: This ridge, which is about half a mile wide, has on it at low tide generally 10, 11, and 12 feet water, with gaps at equal in­tervals, [Page 573] affording good channels of about 15 or 16 feet water. The most noted of these channels, and most used by coasting vessels, is about one mile and an half from the land, and may easily be known by a range of breakers which are always seen on the west side, and a br [...]ker head or two on the eastern side, which however are not so constant, only appearing when the sea is considerably agitated. This channel is at least two and an half miles wide, and might at full sea be [...]ly passed by the largest ships. These, however, rarely attempt it. The common tides swell about 6 feet, and always come from the S. E. A little north of the Cape is good anchoring in 4 or 5 fathoms, and with the wind to the westward, a boat may land in safety, and even [...] off casks of fresh water, plenty of which is to be found every [...] on the beach, by digging a foot or two, and putting a barrel into the [...].

Cape Lookout is south of Cape Hatteras, opposite Core sound, and [...] already been mentioned as having had an excellent harbour en­ [...]ly filled up with land since the year 1777.

Cape Fear is remarkable for a dangerous shoal called, from its form, the Frying pan. This shoal lies at the entrance of Cape Fear river, the south part of it, 6 miles from Cape Fear pitch, in latitude 33° 32′.

SWAMPS.] There are two swamps that have been called Dismal. Great Dismal is on the dividing line between Virginia and North Carolina. It is chiefly owned by two companies. The Virginia com­pany, of whom the President of the U. States is one, own 100,000 acres. The North Carolina company owns 40,000 acres. In the midst of this dismal there is a lake about seven miles long, called Drummond's [...]. The waters of that lake in rainy seasons discharge themselves to the southward into Pasquotank of North Carolina, and to the north and eastward into the branches of the Nansemond, Elizabeth river, and a river which runs into Currituck found; a navigable canal is to be dug from the head of Pasquetank to the head of Eli­zabeth river in Virginia, the distance about 14 miles. This canal will pass about a mile to the eastward of Drummond's pond, and will [...]ive water from that lake: To pass through the lake would not be [...] for low sided vessels. The company by whom this canal is to be cut, [...] been incorporated by the concurring laws of Virginia and North Carolina. In September, 1791, the subscription being nearly full, the [...]pany chose their directors and other officers. By the canal the [...]ports of Norfolk must be greatly increased.

The other dismal is in Currituck county on the south side of Al­bemarle sound. This dismal had not drawn the public attention as a object of importance before the end of the late war, at which time it was chiefly taken up. It is now supposed to contain one of the most [...]able rice estates in America. In the midst of this dismal there is [...]lake of about 11 miles long, and 7 miles broad. In the year 1785, [...] 1786, Josiah Collins, Esq of Edenton, in company with Messrs. Al­ [...] and Dickinson of that place, having taken up near 100,000 acres of land round the lake, resolving to make a navigable canal from the [...] to the head of Skuppernong river: The distance five and a half miles. This canal, 20 feet wide, was finished in 1790, and the com­pany in 1791 raised above 120 acres of rice on the margin. The [...] channel by which the lake used to discharge its waters is now [Page 574] stopped, and the waters pass off by the canal. About 500 yards [...] the lake: The company have erected several saw mills. The [...] in the lake is higher than the surface of the ground for about half [...] from the lake on both sides of the canal; whence it follows that [...] company, can at any time, lay under water about ten thousand [...] of a rich swamp, which proves admirably fitted for rice.

PRINCIPAL TOWNS.] Newbern, Edenton, Wilmington, [...] Hillsborough, Salisbury and Fayetteville, each in their turns have [...] the seat of the general assembly. At present they have no [...]. According to the constitution of this state, the general assembl [...] [...] to meet at any place they think fit on their own adjournments▪ [...] effect of this power was such as might be expected, in a state [...] there is no very large city or town nearly central; it was the [...] of constant intrigue and disquietude. The assembly seldom sat [...] in succession in the same place. The public officers were [...] over every part of the country. You could seldom visit the govern [...] the secretary, the treasurer or the comptroller, in less riding than [...] or three hundred miles. Hence records were loft, accounts were [...] ­ly kept, and the state from that single misfortune is supposed to [...] lost more than a million of dollars. It was equally clear to all par­ties that the government should not be itinerant, and the convention which met in the year 1788, to consider of the new federal constitu­tion, according to their instructions, took this part of their own con­stitution into their consideration, and by a very small majority resolv­ed that the seat of government should be fixed at some place to [...] agreed on by commissioners, within ten miles of Wake court [...]. This is a healthy and central situation. But an act of the legislat [...] became necessary to give effect to this ordinance, and in subsequent assemblies, there has generally been a similar majority, that is to [...] majority of one or two to oppose the ordinance. The profits that might arise to a few publicans and shop keepers at some other town in which the assembly might meet, occasioned more activity and pro­cured more votes than the patriotic desire of terminating disputes and securing a quiet orderly and good government. For the honour of reason, by which we should be governed rather than by passion, it is to be wished that other legislatures, in similar circumstances, had not acted in a similar manner.

The general assembly of the state, at their session in December 1791, passed a law for carrying the ordinance into effect, and appropriated 10,000l. towards erecting public buildings.

NEWBERN is the largest town in the state. It is stands on a flat, sandy point of land, formed by the confluence of the rivers Neus on the north, and Trent on the south. Opposite the town, the Neus is about a mile and a half, and the Trent three quarters of a mile wide. The town contains about 400 houses, * all built of wood, excepting the palace, the church, the goal and two dwelling houses, which are of brick. The palace is a building erected by the province before the revolution, and was formerly the residence of the governors. It is large and elegant, two stories high, with two wings for offices, a little advanced in front towards the town; these wings are connected with the principal building by a circular arcade. This once handsome and [Page 575] [...] [...]ished building is now much out of repair. One of the halls [...] for a dancing, and another for a school room—which are the, [...] present uses of this palace. The arms of the king of the Great Brit­ [...] appear in a pediment in front of the building. The Episco­ [...] is a small brick building, with a bell. It is the only house [...] public worship in the place. A rum distillery has lately been [...] in this town. It is the county town of Craven county, and [...] house and gaol. The court house is raised on brick arches [...] render the lower part a convenient market place; but the [...] marketing is done with the people in their canoes and boats [...] river side.

[...]NTON is situated on the north side of Albemarle Sound; and [...] 150 indifferent wood houses, and a few handsome buildings. [...] a brick church for Episcopalians, which for many years has [...] neglected, and serves only to shew that the people once [...] regard, at least, for the externals of religion. Its local situation [...]tageous for trade, but not for health. It is the county town [...]ow an county, and has a court house and goal. In or near the [...] lived the proprietary, and the first of the royal governors.

WILMINGTON is a town of about 180 houses, situated on the east [...] of the eastern branch of Cape Fear or Clarendon river, 34 miles [...] the sea. The course of the river, as it passes by the town, is [...] north to south, and is about 150 yards wide.

In 1786 a fire broke out, supposed to have been kindled by ne­ [...], and consumed about 25 or 30 houses. The town is rebuilding [...].

HILLSBOROUGH is an inland town, situated in a high, healthy and [...] country, 180 miles north of the west from Newbern. It is set­tled by about 60 or 70 families.

SALISBURY is agreeably situated, about 5 miles from Yadkin river, [...] contains about 90 dwelling houses.

HALIFAX is a pretty town, and stands on the western bank of the Ro­ [...], about 6 miles below the falls, and has about 30 or 40 dwelling [...].

FAYETTEVILLE stands on the west side of Clarendon, commonly called Cape Fear river, and about a mile from its banks. It is well built on both sides of a creek, from which the town was formerly call­ed Cross Creek. Two small creeks unite near the town, and an island, just below the junction, divides the creek. Some person took it into his head that the creeks crossed each other without mixing their waters; and the strangeness or improbability of the thing, as [...] many other cases, seems to have been the reason, why it was be­ [...]ved. Since the peace, this town has flourished, but a considerable part of it was burnt in 1792. It is situated in a settlement of Scotch [...]ghlanders.

WASHINGTON is situated in the county of Beaufort, on the north [...] of Tar river, in latitude 35° 30′, distant from Ocrecok inlet 90 miles. From this town is exported tobacco of the Petersburgh quan­ [...] pork, beef, Indian corn, peas, beans, pitch, tar, turpentine, rosin, [...] and pine boards, shingles and oak staves. About 130 vessels en­ [...] annually at the custom house in this town.

G [...]ENRVILLE, so called after Major General Nathaniel Greene, is situated in Pitt county, on the south bank of Tar river, in latitude 35° 35′, [Page 576] distant from Ocrecok inlet 110 miles. At this town there is an acad­emy established, called the Pitt Academy.

TARBOROUGH is situated in the county of Edgecomb, on the south bank of Tar river, in latitude 35° 45′, distant from Ocrecok inlet 14 [...] miles. At this town large quantities of tobacco of the Petersburgh quality, pork, beef, and Indian corn, are collected for exportation.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.} North Carolina, in its whole width, for 60 miles from the [...] is a dead level. A great proportion of this tract lies in forest, and is barren. On the banks of some of the rivers, particularly of the Roa [...]ok [...], the land is fertile and good. Interspersed through the other parts, [...] glades of rich swamp, and ridges of oak land, of a black, fertile soil. In all this champagne country, marine productions are found by digging [...] or 20 feet below the surface of the ground. The sea coast, the sounds, inlets and the lower parts of the rivers, have uniformly a mud­dy, soft bottom. Sixty or eighty miles from the sea, the country rises into hills and mountains, as described under this head is South Carolina and Georgia.

Wheat, rye, barley, oats and flax grow well in the black hilly country. Indian corn and pulse of all kinds in all parts. Ground peas run on the surface of the earth, and are covered by hand with a light mould, and the pods grow under ground: They are [...] raw or roasted, and taste much like a hazlenut. Cotton and hemp are also considerably cultivated here, and might be raised in much greatly plenty. The cotton is planted yearly: The stalk dies with the f [...]st. The labour of one man will produce 1000 pounds in the seeds, or 230 [...] for manufacturing. The country is generally friendly to the raising of sheep, which yield from [...] to 2½ pounds of wool, which is short and not very fine.

It is no uncommon thing for the farmer to mark from 500 to 1000 calves in a year. No farther attention is paid to them till they are fit for slaughter; then they are taken up, killed, barrelled and sent to the West India market. Their pork is raised with as little trouble, large quantities of which, before the war, were sent to New England, particularly to Boston and Salem.

TARDE.] A great proportion of the produce of the back country, consisting of tobacco, wheat, Indian corn, &c. is carried to market is South Carolina and Virginia. The southern interior countries, carry their produce to Charleston; and the northern to Petersburgh in Virginia. The exports from the lower parts of the state, are tar, pitch, turpentine, rosin, Indian corn, boards, scantling, staves shingles, furs, tobacco, pork, lard, tallow, beeswax, myrtle wax, and a few other ar­ticles, amounting in the year, ending September 30th 1791, to 524,54 [...] dollars. Their trade is chiefly with the West Indies and the northern states. From the latter they receive flour, cheese, cyder, apples, pota­toes, iron wares, cabinet wares, hats and dry goods of all kinds, im­ported from Great Britain, France and Holland, teas, &c. From the West Indies, rum, sugar and coffee.

CLIMATE, DISEASES, &c.] In the flat country, near the sea coast, the inhabitants, during the summer and autumn, are subject to inter­mitting fevers, which often prove fatal, as bilious or nervous symptoms prevail. These fevers are seldom immediately dangerous to the na­tives who are temperate, or to strangers who are prudent. They, how­ever, [Page 577] if suffered to continue for any length of time, bring on other disorders, which greatly impair the natural vigor of the mind, debili­tate the constitution, and terminate in death. The countenances of the inhabitants during these seasons, have generally a pale yellowish [...], occasioned by the prevalence of bilious symptoms. They have very little of the bloom and freshness of the people in the northern states.

It has been observed that more of the inhabitants, of the men specially, die during the winter, by pleurisies and peripn [...]umonies, [...] during the warm months by bilious complaints. These pleuri­sies are brought on by intemperance, and by an imprudent exposure to [...] weather. Were the inhabitants cautious and prudent in these [...]pects, it is alleged by their physicians, that they might in general [...] the danger of these fatal diseases. The use of flannel next to [...] skin during the winter, is reckoned an excellent preventative of the [...]ses incident to this climate. The western hilly parts of the [...] are as healthy as any of the United States. That country is fer­ [...], full of springs and rivulets of pure water. The air there is [...]ene a great part of the year, and the inhabitants live to old [...], which cannot so generally be said of the inhabitants of the flat country. Though the days in summer are extremely hot, the nights [...] cool and refreshing. Autumn is very pleasant, both in regard to the temperature and serenity of the weather, and the richness and va­riety of the vegetable productions which the season affords. The [...]ers are so mild in some years, that autumn may be said to continue [...] spring. Wheat harvest is the beginning of June, and that of In­dian corn early in September.

NATURAL HISTORY, MANUFACTURES, &c.] The large natural growth of the plains in the low country, is almost universally pitch pine, which is a tall, handsome tree, far superior to the pitch pine of the northern states. This tree may be called the staple commodity of [...]th Carolina. It affords pitch, tar, turpentine, and various kinds of [...]ber, which together, constitute at least one half of the exports of this state. This pine is of two kinds, the common and the long [...]ved. The latter has a leaf shaped like other pines, but is nearly half a yard in length, hanging in large clusters. No country pro­duces finer white and red oak for staves. The swamps abound with [...]prus and bay trees. The latter is an evergreen, and is food for the cattle in the winter. The leaves are shaped like those of the peach tree, but larger. The most common kinds of timber in the [...] country, are, oak, walnut and pine. A species of oak grows in the [...]ist, sandy soil, called black jack. It seldom grows larger than 8 or [...] inches diameter. It is worthy of remark, that the trees in the low country, near the sea coast, are loaded with vast quantities of a long species of moss, which, by absorbing the noxious vapour that is exhal­ [...] from stagnated waters, contributes much, it is supposed, to the healthiness of the climate. This hypothesis is confirmed by experience, since it is commonly observed, that the country is much less healthy for a few years after having been cleared, that while in a state of nature.

The Missletoe is common in the back country. This is a shrub which differs in kind, perhaps, from all others. It never grows out of the earth, but on the tops of trees. The roots (if they may be so call­ed) [Page 578] run under the bark of the tree, and incorporate with the wood. It is an evergreen, resembling the garden box wood.

The principal wild fruits are plums, grapes, strawberries and black­berries.

The country is generally covered with herbage of various kinds, and a species of wild grass. It abounds with medicinal plants and roots. Among others are the ginseng; Virginia snake root; Seneca snake root, an herb of the emetic kind, like the epicacuana; Lyons hart, which is a sovereign remedy for the bite of a serpent. A species of the sensitive plant is also found here; it is a sort of brier, the stalk of which dies with the frost, but the root lives through the winter, and shoots again in the spring. The lightest touch of a leaf causes it to turn and cling close to the stalk. Although it so easily takes the alarm, and apparently shrinks from danger, in the space of two minutes after it is touched, it perfectly recovers its former situation. The mucipu­la veneris is also found here. The rich bottoms are overgrown with canes. The leaves are green all the winter, and afford an excellent food for cattle. They are of a sweetish taste, like the stalks of green corn, which they in many respects resemble.

There is a long ridge of lime stone, which, extending in a southwest­erly direction, crosses the whole state of N. Carolina. It crosses Dan river to the westward of the Saw [...]o towns, crosses the Yadkin about 50 miles N. W. from Salisbury, and thence proceeds by the way of Kings mountain to the southern states. No limestone has been found to the eastward of that ridge. A species of rock has been found in several places, of which lime is made, which is obviously a concretion of marine shells. The state is traversed nearly in the same direction by another stratum of rocks which passes near Warrenton. It is a circumstance worthy of observation that the springs of water on the northwest side of the ridge are apt to fail in dry seasons; on the southwest side they seldom fail.

The river Yadkin, where it passes Salisbury, is about 400 yards broad, but it is reduced between two hills, about 25 miles to the southward of that town, to the width of 80 or 100 feet. For 2 miles it is narrow and rapid, but the most narrow and most rapid part is not above half a mile in length. In this narrow part, shad are caught in the spring of the year, by hoop nets, in the eddies, as fast as the strongest men are able to throw them out. Perhaps there is not in the United States a more eligible situation for a large manufacturing town. Boats with 40 or 50 hogsheads pass easily from these rapids to Georgetown.

The late war, by which North Carolina was greatly convulsed, put a stop to several iron works. At present there are four or five furnaces in the state that are in blast, and a proportionable number of forges. There is one in Guilford county, one in Surry, and one in Wilkes, all on the Yadkin—and one in Lincoln. The quality of the iron is excellent.

One paper mill has lately been erected at Salem by the Moravians to great advantage.

RELIGION.] The western parts of this state, which have been set­tled within the last 40 years, are chiefly inhabited by Presbyterians from Pennsylvania, the descendants of people from the North of Ire­land, and are exceedingly attached to the doctrines, disciplines and usa­ges of the church of Scotland. They are a regular industrious peo­ple. [Page 579] Almost all the inhabitants between the Catawba and Yadkin rivers are of this denomination, and they are in general well supplied with a sensible and learned ministry. There are interspersed some set­tlements of Germans, both Lutherans and Calvinists, but they have may few ministers.

The Moravians have several flourishing settlements in this state. In [...], they purchased of Lord Granville one hundred thousand acres of [...] between Dan and Yadkin rivers, about 10 miles south of Pilot mountain, in Surry county, and called it Wachovia, after an estate of [...]ount Zinzendorf, in Austria. In 1755, this tract, by an act of assem­bly, was made a separate parish by the name of Dobb's parish. The first settlement, called Bethabara, was begun in 1753, by a number of the brethren from Pennsylvania, in a very wild, uninhabited country, which, from that time; began to be rapidly settled by farmers from the middle states.

In 17 [...]9, Bethany, a regular village, was laid out and settled. In 1766, Salem, which is now the principal settlement, and nearly in the center of Wachovia, was settled by a collection of tradesmen. The same constitution and regulations are established here, as in other regular settlements of the united brethren. Besides, there are i [...] Wachovia three churches, one in Friedland, one in Friedburg, and another at Hope, each of which has a minister of the brethren's church. These people, by their industry and attention to vari­ous branches of manufacture; are very useful to the country around [...].

The Friends or Quakers have a settlement in New Garden, in Guil­ford county, and several congregations at Perquimins and Pasquotank. The Methodists and Baptists are numerous and increasing. Besides in denominations already mentioned, there is a very numerous body of people, in this, and in all the southern states, who cannot properly [...] classed with any sect of christians, having never made any profession of christianity.

The inhabitants of Wilmington, Newbern, Edenton and Halifax districts, making about three fifth of the state, once professed them­selves of the Episcopal church. The clergy, in these districts, were [...]ly missionaries; and in forming their political attachments, at the commencement of the late war, personal safety, or real interest, or perhaps a conviction of the impolicy of opposing Great Britain, from whence they received their salaries, induced them almost universally [...] declare themselves in favour of the British government, and to em­i [...]te. There may be one or two of the original clergy remaining, [...] at present they have no particular pastoral charge. Indeed the inhabitants in the districts abovementioned seem now to be making the experiment, whether christianity can exist long in a country have where there is no visible christian church. The Baptists and Method­ists have sent a number of missionary preachers into these districts; [...] some of them have pretty large congregations. It is not improb­able that one or the other of these denominations, and perhaps both, [...] acquire consistency, and establish permanent churches.

COLLEGES AND ACADEMIES.] The general assembly of North [...], in December, 1789. passed a law incorporating 40 gentle­men, 5 from each district, as Trustees of the University of North Car­olina. To this university they gave, by a subsequent law, all the [Page 580] debts due to the state, from sheriffs or other holders of public money, and which had been due before the year 1783. They also gave it all escheated property within the state. Whenever the trustees shall have collected a sufficient sum of the old debts, or from the sale of escheat­ed property, the value of which is considerable, to pay the expense of erecting buildings, they are to fix on a proper place, and proceed to finish the buildings. A considerable quantity of land has already been given to the university. The general assembly in December, 1791, loaned five thousand pounds to the trustees, to enable them to proceed immediately with their buildings.

There is a very good academy at Warrenton, another at Williams­borough in Granville, and three or four others in the state, of consid­erable note.

POPULATION, CHARACTER, MANNERS AND CUSTOMS.] From the Marshals return, it ap­pears that the number of inhabit­ants in the year 1791, was 393,751, of whom 293,179 were citizens. Perhaps there are few instances of such a rapid increase of inhabit­ants as we find in this state. In the year 1710, we are well assured that the number of inhabitants in North Carolina did not exceed six thousand. This extraordinary increase must arise, in a great measure, from the migration of inhabitants from other states, or from distant countries; but this will not fully account for the present state of pop­ulation in North Carolina. By examining the return, we find there are 147.494 white male inhabitants; we also find that the number of males under 16 years exceeds the number above 16 by 7518, which i [...] about one nineteenth of the whole. This is a very remarkable fact, as it respects the increase of the human species. We find a small differ­ence in the states of Delaware, Virginia and Georgia, in favour of those under 16. The difference in Kentucky is similar to that in North Carolina. In the other states, the number above 16 is greatest, and in the several kingdoms in Europe, as far as our information reaches, the inhabitants above 16 are universally much more nume­rous than those under that age. The great difference that appears in North Carolina in favour of children, cannot be explained by sup­posing that the climate is sickly; for we know that such climates are equally fatal to young and old. The idea too of a sickly climate, does not accord with the prodigious increase of inhabitants in this state, nor with another fact, viz. that there is a considerable proportion of very old inhabitants in the state. To explain this we must observe that the human species, and all other animals, are found of increase in proportion to the comforts of life, and the ease with which they can support their progeny. Remove the rigors of an inhospitable climate, and the more uniform dissuasive to matrimony, the apprehended difficulty of supporting a family, and the human species would double, not in 20, but in 15 years. In North Carolina, neither the cold of winter, not the heat of summer, are in the back country, at all disagreeable; land continues to be plenty and cheap; grain is raised with so much [...]se, and the trouble of providing for cattle in winter so trifling, that a man supports his family with half the labour that is required in the cold climates. Under these advantages, we are not to wonder that people in all ranks of life should marry very young. We have heard of grandmothers in that state who were not more than 27 years old.

The North Carolinians are mostly planters, and live from half a [Page 581] mile to 3 and 4 miles from each other, on their plantations. They have a plentiful country—no ready market for their produce—little intercourse with strangers, and a natural fondness for society, which induce them to be hospitable to travellers.

The general topics of conversation among the men, when cards, the bottle, and occurrences of they day do not intervene, are negroes, the prices of indigo, rice, tobacco, &c. They appear to have little [...] for the sciences. Political inquiries, and philosophical disquisi­tions are attended to but by a few men of genius and industry, and [...] too laborious for the minds of the people at large. Less attention [...] respect are paid to the women here, than in those parts of the United States where the inhabitants have made greater progress in the arts of civilized life. Indeed, it is a truth, confirmed by observation, that in proportion to the advancement of civilization, in the same pro­portion will respect for the women be increased; so that the progress of civilization in countries, in states, in towns and in families, may be marked by the degree of attention which is paid by husbands to their wives, and by the young men to the young women.

Temperance and industry are not to be reckoned among the virtues of the North Carolinians. The time which they waste in drinking, [...] and gambling, leaves them very little opportunity to improve their plantations or their minds. The improvement of the former is [...] to their overseers and negroes; the improvement of the latter is too often neglected. Were the time, which is thus wasted, spent in cultivating the soil, and in treasuring up knowledge, they might be [...] wealthy and learned; for they have a productive country, and are by no means destitute of genius.

Time that is not employed in study or useful labour, in every country, is generally spent in hurtful or innocent exercises, according in the custom of the place or the taste of the parties. The citizens of North Carolina, who are not better employed, spend their time in drinking, or gaming at cards and dice, in cock fighting or horse rac­ing.

We are told that a strange and very barbarous practice prevailed among the lower class of people before the revolution in the back parts of Virginia, North and South Carolinas, and Georgia; it was [...]ed gouging, and was neither more nor less than a man, when box­ing, putting out the eye of his antagonist with his thumb. How quick, under a mild government, is the reformation of manners. We have lately been told that in a particular county, where, at the quarter­ly court 20 years ago, a day seldom passed without 10 or 15 boxing [...]ches, it is now a rare thing to hear of a fight.

North Carolina, as already observed, has had a rapid growth. In the year 1710, it contained but about 1200 fencible men. It is now, in point of numbers, the fourth state in the union. During this [...]ing progress in population, which has been greatly aided by immigrations from Pennsylvania, Virginia and other states, while each has been endeavouring to increase his fortune, the human mind, like an [...]weeded garden, has been suffered to shoot up in wild disorder. But when we consider, that, during the late revolution, this state pro­duced many distinguished patriots and politicians, that she sent her thousands to the defence of Georgia and South Carolina, and gave [...]easional succours to Virginia—when we consider too the difficulties [Page 582] she has had to encounter from a mixture of inhabitants, collected from different parts, strangers to each other, and intent upon gain, we shall find many things worthy of praise in her general char­acter.

CONSTITUTION.] By the constitution of this state, which was ratified in December, 1776, all legislative authority is vested in two distinct branches, both dependent on the people, viz. a Senate and House of Commons, which when convened for business, are styled the General Assembly.

The senate is composed of representatives, one for each county, chosen annually by ballot.

The house of commons consists of representatives chosen in the same way, two for each county, and one for each of the towns of Ed­enton, Newbern, Wilmington, Salisbury, Hillsborough, Halifax and Fayetteville.

The qualifications for a senator, are one year's residence imme­diately preceding his election, in the county in which he is chosen, and 300 acres of land in fee.

A member of the house of commons must have usually resided in the county in which he is elected, one year immediately preceding his elec­ction, and for six months shall have possessed, and continue to possess, in the county which he represents, not less than 100 acres of land in fee, or for the term of his own life.

A free man of 21 years of age, who-has been an inhabitant in the state twelve months immediately preceding the day of any election, and who had possessed a freehold of fifty acres of land within the county for six months next before, and at the day of election, is en­titled to vote for a member of the senate.

All freemen of 21 years of age, who have been inhabitants of the state the year next before the election, and have paid public taxes, may vote for members of the house of commons.

The senate and house of commons, when convened, choose each their own speaker, and are judges of the qualifications and elections of their members. They jointly, by ballot, at their first meeting after each annual election, choose a governor for one year, who is not eli­gible to that office longer than three years, in six successive years; and who must posses a freehold of more than 1000l. and have been an inhabitant of the state above five years. They, in the same man­ner, and at the same time, elect seven persons to be a council of state for one year, to advise the governor, in the execution of his office. They appoint a treasurer or treasures for the state. They triennially choose a state secretary. They jointly appoint judges of the supreme courts of law and equity—judges of admiralty, and the attorney gen­eral, who are commissioned by the governor, and hold their offices during good behaviour. They prepare bills—which must be read three times in each house, and be signed by the speaker of both houses, before they pass into laws.

Judges of the supreme court—members of the council—judges of admiralty—treasurers—secretaries—attorney generals for the state—clerks of record—clergymen—persons denying the being of a God, the truth of the protestant religion, or the divine authority of the old and New Testament—receivers of public monies, whose accounts are unsettled—military officers in actual service, are all ineligible to a sent [Page 583] either in the senate or house of commons—justices of the peace, being recommended by the representatives, are commissioned by the govern­or, and hold their offices during good behaviour. The constitution allows of no religious establishment, the legislature are authorized to regulate entails so as to prevent perpetuities. A majority of both houses is necessary to do business.

HISTORY.] The history of North Carolina is less known than that of any of the other states. From the best accounts that history af­fords, the first permanent settlement in North Carolina was made a­bout the year 1710, by a number of Palatines from Germany, who had been reduced to circumstances of great indigence, by a calamitous war. The proprietors of Carolina, knowing that the value of their lands depended on the strength of their settlements, determined to give every possible encouragement to such grants. Ships were accordingly provided for their transportation—and instructions were given to governor Tynte to allow an hundred acres of land for eve­ry man, woman and child, free of quit rents, for the first ten years; but at the expiration of that term, to pay one penny per acre, annual [...]nt forever, according to the usages and customs of the province. Upon their arrival, governor Tynte granted them a tract of land in North Carolina, since called Albemarle and Bath precincts, where they settled, and flattered themselves with having found, in the hideous wilderness, a happy retreat from the desolations of a war which then raged in Europe.

In the year 1712, a dangerous conspiracy was formed by the Coree and Tuscorora tribes of Indians, to murder and expel this infant col­ony. The foundation for this conspiracy is not known. Probably they were offended at the encroachments upon their hunting ground. They managed their conspiracy with great cunning and profound se­crecy. They surrounded their principal town with a breast work to secure their families. Here the warriors convened to the number of 1200. From this place of rendezvous they sent out small parties, by different roads, who entered the settlement under the mask of friendship. At the change of the full moon all of them had agreed to begin their murderous operations the same night. When the night came, they entered the houses of the planters, demanding pro­visions, and pretending to be offended, fell to murdering men, women and children without mercy or distinction. One hundred and thirty seven settlers, among whom were a Swiss baron, and almost all the poor Palatines that has lately come into the country, were slaughter­ed the first night. Such was the secrecy and dispatch of the Indians in this expedition, that none knew what had befallen his neighbour, until the barbarians had reached his own door. Some few, how­ever, escaped and gave the alarm. The militia assembled in arms, and kept watch day and night, until the news of the sad disaster had reached the province of South Carolina. Governor Craven lost no time in sending a force to their relief. The assembly voted 4000l. for the service of the war. A body of 600 militia, under the command of colonel Barnwell, and 366 Indians of different tribes, with different commanders, marched with great expedition, through a hideous wilderness, to their assistance. In their first encounter with the In­dians, they killed 300 and took 100 prisoners. After this defeat, the Tuscororas retreated to their fortified town—which was shortly after [Page 584] surrendered to colonel Barnwell. In this expedition it was computed that near a thousand Tuscororas were killed, wounded and taken. The remainder of the tribe soon after abandoned their country, and joined the Five Nations, with whom they have ever since remained. After this, the infant colony remained in peace, and continued to flourish under the general government of South Carolina, till about the year 1729, when seven of the proprietors, for a valuable considera­tion, vested their property and jurisdiction in the crown, and the colony was erected into a separate province, by the name of North Carolina, and its present limits established by an order of George II. From this period to the revolution in 1776, the history of North Car­olina is unpublished, and of course unknown, except to those who have had access to the records of the province. Some of the most important events that have since taken place, have been already men­tioned in the general history of the United States.

TERRITORY S. OF OHIO. OR THE TENNESSEE GOVERNMENT.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 360 Miles. between 6° 20′ and 16° 30′ W. Lon.
Breadth 105 Miles. 35° and 36° 30′ N. Lat.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Kentucky and part of Virginia; east, by the Stone, Yellow, Iron and Bald mountains, which divides it from North Carolina; south, by South Carolina and Georgia; west, by the Missisippi. *

CIVIL DIVISIONS AND POPULATION.] This extensive district is divided into the following counties:

Counties. No. Inhab.
WASHING­TON district. Washington, 5872
Sullivan, 4447
Green, 7741
Hawkins, 6970
South of French Broad 3619
MERO dis­trict. Davidson, 3459
Summer, 2196
Tennessee, 1387
Total 35691

The above is according to the returns made by the governor of this territory, in 1791. Owing to imperfect returns made to him, it does not comprehend the whole number of inhabitants. We have no data, on which to calculate the probable deficiency. In 1788, the number of inhabitants were reckoned at about 40,000. They must have great­ly increased since that period. In 1765, there were but about 10 fam­ilies, settled west of the Kanhaway. So many had joined them, in 1773, that the settlement west of the Kanhaway was erected into a county, and in 1776, subdivided into three counties.

The inhabitants of this district emigrated chiefly from Pennsylva­nia, and that part of Virginia that lies west of the Blue Ridge. The ancestors of these people were generally of the Scotch nation, some [Page 585] of whom emigrated first to Ireland, and from thence to America. A few Germans and English are intermixed.—The proportion of the whites to the blacks in this district, judging from the foregoing imper­fect census, is as ten to one. In 1788, it was thought there were [...]o white persons to one negroe. The erection of this territory into a separate government, it is believed, will tend to lessen the negroe pop­ulation.

CLIMATE.] Moderate and healthy. In the tract lying between the Great Island, as it is called, and the Kanhaway, the summers are remarkably cool, and the air rather moist. Southwest of this as far as the Indian towns, the climate is much warmer, and the soil better adapted to the productions of the southern states.

The diseases to which the adult inhabitants are most liable, are preu­ [...]sies, rheumatisms, and rarely agues and severs. So healthy have been the inhabitants, that from the first settlement of the country, to 1788, not a single physician had settled among them. It is to the inhab­itants a real advantage, that they are almost beyond the reach of those luxuries which are enjoyed, and those epidemical diseases which are consequently frequent, in populous towns on the sea coast. An in habitant of this district writes, "Our physicians are, a fine climate, healthy robust mothers and fathers, plain and plentiful diet, and enough of exercise. There is not a regular bred physician residing in the whole district."

RIVERS AND MOUNTAINS.] The Tennessee, called also the Cherokee, and absurdly the Hogohege river, is the largest branch of the Ohio. It rises in the mountains of Virginia, latitude 37° and pur­sues a course of about 1000 miles south and southwest, nearly to lati­tude 34°, receiving from both sides a number of large tributary streams. It then wheels about to the north, in a circuitous course, and mingles with the Ohio, nearly 60 miles from its mouth. From its entrance into the Ohio, to the Muscle shoals, 250 miles, the current is very gen­tle, and the river deep enough, at all seasons, for the largest row boats. The Muscle shoals are about 20 miles, in length. At this place the river spreads to the width of 3 miles, and forms a number of islands, and is of difficult passage, except when there is a swell in the river. From these shoals to the whirl or suck, the place where the river breaks through the Great ridge, or Cumberland mountain, is 250 miles, the navigation all the way excellent.

The Cumberland mountain, in its whole extent, from the Great Kanhaway to the Tennessee, consists of the most stupendous piles of craggy rocks of any mountain in the western country. In several parts of it, for miles, it is inaccessible even to the Indians on foot. In one place particularly, near the summit of the mountain, there is a most remarkable ledge of rocks, of about 30 miles in length, and 200 feet thick, shewing a perpendicular face to the S. E. more noble and grand than any artificial fortification in the known world, and appar­ently equal in point of regularity. Through this stupendous pile, ac­cording to a modern hypothesis, had the waters of all the upper branches of the Tennessee to force their way. The attempt would have been impracticable at any other place than the one mentioned, for more than 100 miles eastwardly. Here then seems to have been the chasm, left by the Creator, to convey off those waters, which must otherwise have overflowed, and rendered useless a vast tract of [...]able country, encompassed within the mountains.

[Page 586] The Whirl, as it is called, is in about latitude 35°. It is reckoned a greater curiosity than the bursting of the Patomak through the Blue Ridge, which is so inimitably described by Mr. Jefferson. The river, which a few miles above is half a mile wide, is here compressed to the width of about 100 yards. Just as it enters the mountain, a large rock projects from the northern shore, in an oblique direction, which renders the bed of the river still narrower, and causes a sudden bend; the water of the river is of course thrown with great rapidity against the southern shore, whence it rebounds around the point of the rock, and produces the whirl, which is about 80 yards in circumference. Canoes have often been carried into this whirl, and escaped by the dexterity of the rowers, without damage.—In less than a mile below the whirl, the river spreads into its common width, and, except Muscle shoals, already mentioned, flows beautiful and placid, till it mingles with the Ohio.

Six miles above the whirl are the Chiccamogga towns, on the banks of the river, and of a large creek of the same name. From these towns of the mouth of the Hiwassee, is 60 miles by water, and about 40 by land. This river is a south branch of the Tennessee, and nav­igable till it penetrates the mountains on its south side. Up this river, in these mountains, a mine has been discovered, and ore taken, from which it is said gold was extracted by an artist, while the British were in possession of Georgia. It is ce [...]n but few Indians know the spot, and those who do are very anxious to keep it a secret. The gentlemen who gave the author this information, has been within view of the place. The mountain is very high and barren, and has several of the appearances described by minera [...]sts. The discovery was made by means of the river's undermining the base of a large cliff or spur of the mountain, which occasioned a great column of the earth or rock to tumble into the river. This disrupture discovered the vein of yellow metal at a great depth. This climate, the fine springs, and fertile plains, render the banks of this river a most delight­ful place of settlement. From a branch of the Hiwassee, called Amoia, there is but a short portage to a branch of the Mobile, and the road all the distance firm and level.

Passing up the Tenessee, sixty miles from the mouth of the Hiwassee, you come to the mouth of Peleson or Clinch river, from the north, which is large and navigable for boats upwards of 200 miles, receiving in its course, besides inferior streams, Powell's river, which is nearly as large as the main river, and boata­ble 100 miles. This last mentioned river runs through Powell's valley, an excellent tract of country, abounding with fine springs.

From the Peleson to the junction of the Holstein and Tennessee, is computed 40 miles. This last is the branch which formerly gave its name to the main river, not from its size, but from its notoriety, having on its banks a vast number of Indian villages, and the Chief town of the Cherokee Indians, called Chota, and was therefore called [...] river; but the name of Tennessee has of late obtained. It crosses the valley at nearly right angles with the mountains, and has on its banks a number of beautiful plains, which are chiefly improved as corn fields by the Indians. In 1788, the whites had advanced their settlements within 10 miles of the Indian villages. Forty miles from the [...], up the Holstein branch, comes in Frank river, vulgar­ly [Page 587] called French Broad, 4 or 500 yards wide; thence, pursuing the Holstein, 200 miles, you come to Long Island, which is the highest navigation yet used—thence about 100 miles is the source of the river. The miles below Long Island comes in North Holstein; and 20 miles [...]re it, the Wattago; the former is 100 yards wide at its mouth, and, with a small expense, might be made navigable to Campbell's Salmes, [...] miles further up. On the banks of the Holstein are many mines [...] iron ore, of the best kind, some of which have been opened and [...] to advantage; and enough might be made to supply the whole [...]stern country; and these mines are the more valuable, as there is [...] to be none of this ore near the Missisippi, and very little north of [...] Ohio. In the Tennessee and its upper branches, are great num­bers of fish, some of which are very large and of an excellent flavour.

The head waters of the Great Kanhaway, are in the western part of North Carolina, in the most eastern ridge of the Allegany or Ap­ [...]chian mountains, and south of the 36th degree of latitude. Its [...] branches encircle those of the Holstein, from which they are [...]rated by the Iron mountain, through which it passes, 10 miles above the lead mines; thence steering its course along the foot of the [...] any mountain, until it receives Little river from the east, it turns [...] the north, which is its general course till it meets the Ohio. About [...] miles from Little river, it receives Green Briar river, from the east, which is the only considerable tributary stream in all that distance. About forty miles below the mouth of Green Briar river, (in Virgin­ia) in the Kanhaway, is a remarkable cataract. A large rock, a little [...]evated in the middle, crosses the bed of the river, over which the water shoots and falls about 50 feet perpendicularly, except at one side, where the descent is more gradual.

The Shawanee, now called Cumberland river, of the southern [...] of the Ohio, is next in size to the Tennessee, and extends eastward nearly as far, but runs a much more direct course. It is navigable for small craft as far as Nashville. From the south it re­ceives Harper's, Convey, Obey's and Clear Fork rivers; and from the north, Red and Rock Castle rivers, besides many smaller streams.

It would take a volume to describe particularly the mountains of this territory, above half of which is covered with those which are [...]inhabitable. Some of these mountains, particularly the Cumber­land, or Great Laurel Ridge, are the most stupendous piles in the United States. They abound with ginseng, and stone coal. Clinch mountain is south of these; in which Burk's Garden and Morris [...]ob, might be described as curiosities.

The Iron mountain, which constitutes the boundary between this district and North Carolina, extends from near the lead mines, on the Kanhaway, through the Cherokee country, to the south of Chota, and terminates near the sources of the Mobile.—The caverns and cascades in these mountains are innumerable.

ANIMALS.] A few years since, this country abounded with large [...]ds of wild cattle, improperly called buffaloes; but the improvi­dent or ill disposed among the first settlers, have destroyed multitudes of them out of mere wantonness. They are still to be found on some of the south branches of Cumberland river. Elk or moose, are seen in many places, chiefly among the mountains. The deer are become [Page 588] comparatively scarce; so that no person makes a business of hunting them for their skins only. Enough of bears and wolves yet remain. Beavers and otters are caught in plenty in the upper branches of Cum­berland and Kentucky rivers.

The mammoth, the king of the land animals, was formerly as in­habitant of this country, as appears from his bones, which have been dug up by labourers, at Campbell's Salines, on North Holstein, when sinking salt pits. They were from three to seven feet below the sur­face of the earth.

SALINES, MINES, SPRINGS, &c.] Campbell's Salines, just men­tioned, are the only ones that have yet been discovered on the upper branches of the Tennessee and on this side the wilderness, though [...] search has been made for them. The tract which contains these sa­lines is a great natural curiosity. It was discovered by Capt. Charles Campbell, about 1745, who was one of the first explorers of the west­ern country. In 1753, he procured a patent for it from the governor of Virginia.—His son the late Gen. William Campbell, the same who behaved so gallantly in the American war in the years 1780 and 1781, became owner of it on his death. But it was not till the time of his death, when salt was very scarce and dear, that salt water was discov­ered and salt made by a poor man. Since that time, under the di­rection of Col. Arthur Campbell, it has been improved to a consider­able extent, and many thousands of inhabitants are supplied from it, with salt of a superior quality, and at a low price. The tract consists of about 300 acres of flat marsh land, of as rich a soil as can be imag­ined. In this flat, pits are sunk, in order to obtain the salt water. The best is found from 30 to 40 feet deep; after passing through the rich soil or mud, from six to ten feet, you come to a very brittle lime stone rock, with cracks or chasms, through which the salt water issues into the pits, whence it is drawn by buckets, and put into the boilers, which are placed in furnaces adjoining the pits. The hills that surround this flat are covered with fine timber, and not far distant a coal mine has been discovered.

On Frank river, about 30 miles in a direct line from its mouth, a large, clear, medicinal spring has lately been discovered, which, on ex­periment, has been found to relieve various complaints of the human body. Its temperature rather exceeds blood heat.

On the same river, nearer its mouth, a valuable lead mine has lately been discovered.

COMMERCE.] This country furnishes many valuable articles of export, such as fine waggon and saddle horses, beef, cattle, ginseng, deer skins and furs, cotton, hemp and flax, which may be transported by land; also, iron, lumber, pork and flour, which might be exported in great quantities, if the navigation of the Missisippi were opened; but there are few of the inhabitants who understand commerce, or are possessed of proper capitals; of course it is badly managed. The wicked practice of land jobbing engrosses too much of the attention of the inhabitants. The degraded state of commerce has rendered neces­sary a general attention to home manufactures; and it is to be hoped that the eyes of the people will soon be opened to their true interest, and agriculture, commerce and manufactures, each receive proper at­tention.

[Page 589] RELIGION.] The presbyterians are the prevailing denomination [...] christians in this district. They have a presbytery, called the Ab­ingdon Presbytery, established by act of synod, which, in 1788, con­ [...] of 23 large congregations, who were then supplied by only six misters. There are also some of the Baptist and Methodist denom­inations.

ACADEMY AND SOCIETY.] The inhabitants of this district have [...] been inattentive to the interests of science. An academy and [...] grammar schools have been established; and a society, who [...] themselves, "A Society for promoting Useful Knowledge." It is [...] modern date, but much good is expected from it. A taste for [...]ture is increasing among them.

GOVERNMENT.] Similar to that established by congress, in the territory of the United States Northwest of the Ohio. The gov­ [...] is the executive (and in his absence, the secretary) and the gov­ [...] and three judges the legislative power, in the district.

CHARACTER, MANNERS AND DRESS.] There is nothing in the [...]cter of this people, that distinguishes them from the settlers of [...] countries of general. Among the bulk of the inhabitants a [...] simplicity of manners prevails. Duplicity or the etiquette of [...] and populous places is unknown among them. If a man de­ [...] another, he is deemed and called a liar; and it frequently hap­ [...] that 'a bloody nose' is the consequence. Wrestling, jumping, [...]ing foot races, and playing at ball, are the common diversions. [...]eing is coming into fashion. Card playing is a rare amusement. The hunting shirt is still worn by the militia on duty, and by hunt­ [...] in pursuit of game. At home and at public assemblies, they dress [...] the Virginians.

DAMAGE BY THE WAR.] Great was the damage sustained by the inhabitants of this district, during the war, occasioned by the incur­sions of the Indians; and it is much to the honor of this patriotic people, that when they were offered protection by the British, in the only stage of the war, they nobly refused it.

PRINCIPAL TOWNS.] Nashville, the shire town of Davidson [...]ty, is the largest town in the territory. The courts are held have; and it has two houses for public worship, and a handsomely [...]dowed academy, established in 1786.

Abingdon is the county town of Washington county. It contained, in 1788, about 20 houses, and was rapidly increasing. It is about 260 miles from Richmond in Virginia, in a direct line, and 310 to as the road [...], bearing a little to the south of west, latitude 36° 30′.

MILITIA.] In 1788, the militia of this district amounted to be­tween 7 and 8000 effective men, who were principally armed with rises. It is supposed that their number is increased nearly one half since that period.

REVENUE.] The public revenue amounts to about 5 or 6000 pounds, raised chiefly by a tax on slaves, lands and horses.

ROADS.] The following are the distances on the new road from Nashville, in Davidson county, to Fort Campbell, near the junction of [...]in river with the Tennessee.

[Page 590]

  Miles.
From Nashville to Stony river 9
Big Spring 6
Cedar Lick 4
Little Spring 6
Barton's creek 4
Spring creek 5
Martin's Spring 5
Blair's Spring 5
Buck Spring 12
Fountaines 8
Smith's creek 6
Coney river 11
Mine Lick 9
Falling creek 9
War Path 7
Bear creek 18
Camp creek 8
King's Spring 16
From Grovet's creek 7
The foot of Cumber­land Mountain 2
Through the mountain to Emmery's river, a branch of the Peleson 11
To the Pappa Ford of the Peleson or Clinch river 1 [...]
To Campbell's station near Holstein 10
To the Great Island 100
To Abingdon in Wash­ington county 35
To Richmond in Vir­ginia 310
Total 635

By this new road, a pleasant passage may be had to the western coun­try with carriages, as there will be only the Cumberland moun­tain to pass; and that is easy of ascent—and beyond it, the road is generally level and firm, abounding with fine springs of water.

INDIANS.] The Indian tribes within and in the vicinity of this district are the Cherokees and Chicasaws. The Cherokees have been a warlike and numerous nation; but by continual wars, in which it has been their destiny to be engaged, with the northern Indian tribes, they were reduced at the commencement of the last war to a­bout 2000 fighting men; since which they have been reduced more than one half, and have become weak and pusillanimous.

The Chicasaws, of all the Indian tribes within the limits of the U­nited States, merit the most from the Americans, having at all times maintained a brotherly attachment to them. They glory in saying that they never shed the blood of an Anglo American. There is so great and affinity between the Chicasaw and Choctaw languages, that the common people can converse together, each speaking in his own dialect. They are a personable people, and have an openness in their countenances and behaviour, uncommon among savages. These nations say they are the remnant of a great nation that once lived far to the west, which was destroyed by the Spaniards, for whom they still retain an hereditary hatred. Would it not be the policy of congress to treat with these nations? and might not their friendship be greatly ser­viceable to the Union?

HISTORY.] The eastern parts of this district, were explored by Cols. Wood, Patton, Buchanan, Capt. Charles Campbell, and Dr. T. Walk­er, (each of whom were concerned in large grants of land from the government) as early as between the years of 1740 and 1750. In 1754, at the commencement of the French war, not more than 50 families had settled here, who were either destroyed or driven off by the Indians before the close of the following year. It remained uninhabited till 1765, when the settlement of it recommenced, and in 1773, (such was [Page 591] the vast accession of emigrants) the country as far west as the Long Is­land of Holstein, an extent of more than 120 miles in length from east [...] west, was well peopled.

In 1774, a war broke out with the northern Indians, over the Ohio, which issued in their suing for peace, which was granted them on [...] terms.

The year 1776 was signalized by a formidable invasion of the Cherokees, contrived by the British superintendant, Mr. Steuart. Their intention was to depopulate the country as far as the Kanhaway, because this brave people had rejected, with a noble firmness and [...]ignation, the proposals of Henry Steuart and Alexander Camer­ [...] for joining the British standard, and were almost unanimous in their resolution to support the measures of congress. This invasion [...]ued in a total defeat of the Indians.

In 1780, the tor [...]es of the western parts of North Carolina and Vir­ginia, emboldened by the reduction of Charleston by the British, em­bodied in armed parties, and proceeded towards the lead mines on the Kanhaway, to take possession of some lead stores at that place, but were defeated in their attempt by the vigilance of Col. A. Campbell and Col. Chockett.

Various other movements took place in the course of this year, but the most interesting and brilliant was the battle of King's mountain, which was fought and won by about 900 Mountaineers, (as the vete­ [...] sons of this district were called) commanded by the brave Gen. William Campbell, against a party of the British under the command of Col. Ferguson. Upwards of 1100 of the enemy were either killed, [...]nded or taken; among the former was Col. Ferguson, and officer of distinguished merit. * In arousing the inhabitants, issuing orders, collecting the forces, and in arranging and animating the men, at the place of rendezvous, previous to this successful expedition, much was done by the activity and decision of Col. Arthur Campbell, the se­nior officer of the district, to whom much praise is due.

Soon after this, to defeat a meditated invasion of the Cherokee In­dians, which was discovered by Nancy Ward, an Indian woman, call­ed, from this circumstance, the western Pocahonta, Col. A. Campbell, with 700 Mountaineers, well mounted, penetrated far into the Cherokee country; introduced the new and successful mode of fighting In­ [...] on horseback; accomplished his designs, and returned in Jan. 1781.

In the celebrated battle at Guilford, March 15, 1781, the Mountaineers, under Gen. W. Campbell, who on that day command­ed with great applause the left wing of the army, behaved with their usual gallantry. This nearly closed the active part which the Moun­tain men took in the American war.

In 1782, the legislature of North Carolina appointed commission­ers to explore the western part of the state, (by which is meant as well [...] lands included in Davidson county, as those between the south boundary of this county and those between the rivers Missisippi and Tennessee) and report to the succeeding legislature, which part was best for the payment of the bounty promised to the officers and soldiers of the continental line of that state; and they accordingly did ex­plore in the before described tract of country, and reported to the legis­lature in the spring of the year 1783.—Although this country was [Page 592] not established by law before the last mentioned period, yet a few families had settled in the year 1780, principally under the guidance of Col. James Robertson, on Cumberland river, and called the place Nashville, in honor of brigadier general Francis Nash, who fell at Germantown; in the year 1777; but he had but few followers until the year 1783, after the peace had taken place, and after an act had passed directing the military or bounty warrants of the officers and soldiers to be located in this county. These circumstances induced many officers and soldiers to repair immediately thither, to secure and settle their lands; and such as did not choose to go, sold their warrants to citizens who did go: In consequence of this, many peo­ple from almost every state in the union became purchasers of these mil­itary warrants, and are since become residents of this county; and many valuable and opulent families have removed to it from the Natches.—Col. Robertson, when he settled at Nashville, was up­wards of 200 miles distant (to the westward) from any other settle­ment in his own state, and was equally distant from the then settled parts of Kentucky. Hence it will readily be supposed that himself and party were in danger every hour of being cut off by the Indians, against whom his principal security was, that he was as far distant from them as from the white people; and slender as this se­curity may appear, his party never sustained any damage from the In­dians but what was done by parties of hunters, who happened to [...]nd out his settlements.—The face of this country is in general level, and the soil very rich, equal to any other part of America, and produce in abundance every thing that can be expected from so temperate a climate and so rich a soil. It is common for the planter to gather from his fields, upon an average, sixty bushels of Indian corn per acre. This county is well watered by the rivers Tennessee and Cumberland, and their branches. Both of these rivers empty into the Ohio shortly after they pass the north boundary of the state. As the waters of the Cumberland from Nashville, and of the Tennessee from this Muscle shoals to the Ohio, are navigable to the Ohio and Missisippi, the peo­ple of course, who live in this county or the adjacent country, have the same advantages of water conveyance for trade, as those who live on the Ohio or Missisippi, to New Orleans or elsewhere.

Besides, there is another probable avenue through which trade will be carried on with this county and the adjacent country, which is from Mobile, up the waters of the Mobile river as far as it is navigable, thence by a land carriage of about 50 miles (at most) to Ocochapp [...] creek, which empties into the Tennessee at the lower end of the Muscle shoals. The mouth of this creek, is the center of a piece of ground, the diameter of which is 5 miles, ceded by the southern Indians at the treaty of Hopwell, on Keeowee, to the United States, for the establishment of trading posts.

In 1785, in conformity to the resolves of congress of April 23, 1784, the inhabitants of this district essayed to form themselves into a body politic, by the name of the "State of Frankland;" but, differing among themselves as to the form of government, and about other matters, in the issue of which some blood was shed; and being opposed by some leading characters in the eastern parts, the schemes was given up, and the inhabitants remained in general peaceable until 1790, when con­gress [Page 593] established their present government. Since this period, some late incursions of the Indians excepted, the inhabitants have been peaceable and prosperous.

SOUTH CAROLINA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 200 Miles. between 4° and 9° W. Long. Sq. Miles. 20,000
Breadth 125 Miles. 32° and 35° N. Lat. Sq. Miles. 20,000

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by North Carolina, and the Tennessee Government; east, by the Atlantic ocean; south, and southwest, by Savannah river, and a branch of its head waters, called Tugulo river, which divides this [...] from Georgia. *

CIVIL DIVISIONS AND POPULATION.] The proprietors who [...] sent settlers to Carolina, divided it into counties and parishes. The counties are generally named after the proprietors. No county q [...]ts, however, were established, and this division, though for a long [...] kept up in the province, became in a great measure obsolete pre­ [...] to the revolution. Since the revolution, county courts have [...] established, where a majority of the inhabitants have petitioned [...] them, and the state is now divided into districts and counties; and [...] counties are subdivided, in the lower country, into parishes; and i [...] the upper country, into smaller or voting districts.

There are 7 districts, in which are 36 counties, as follows:

Districts. Counties.
[...] 18,753 inhabitants. Hilton,
Lincoln,
Granville,
Shrewsbury.
[...] inhabitants. Charleston,
Washington,
Marion,
Berkley,
Colleton,
Bartholomew.
ORANGEBURGH, district, west of-Beauf [...]rt district. Chief town ORANGE­BURGH. 18,513 inhab. Lewisburgh,
Orange,
Lexington,
Winton.
CAMDEN district, west of Georgetown district. Chief town CAMDEN. 38,065 inhabitants. Clarendon,
Richland,
Fairfield,
Claremont,
Lancaster,
York,
Chester.
GEORGETOWN district, between S [...]ntee river and North Caroli­na Chief town GEORGE­TOWN. 22,122 Inhabitants. Winyah,
Williamsburgh,
Kingston,
Liberty.
NINETY SIX district, compre­hend [...] other parts of the state, not included in the other dist­rict. Ch. Town, CAMBRIDGE. 73,729 inhabitants. Abbeville,
Edgefield,
Newbury,
Union,
Laurens,
Spartanburgh,
Greenville,
Pendleton,
[...] district, west of Georgetown district. Ch. town—10,706 inhabitants. Marlborough,
Chesterfield,
Darlington,

Total number of inhabitants in 1791 249,073, of whom 107,094 were slaves.

The committee, appointed by act of assembly to divide the districts into counties, were directed to lay them as nearly 40 miles square as was practicable, due regard being paid to situations, natural bounda­ries, &c.

As the lower country was originally sfettled by people from Europe under the proprietary government and influence, all the then coun­ties were divided into parishes. And even now, although the old coun­ties are done away, the boundaries altered, and new ones established, the division of parishes subsists in the three lower districts, the peo­ple choose their senators and representatives by parishes, as formerly. But in the middle and upper districts, which were settled by people of various nations from Europe, but principally by northern emigrants, parishes are hardly known, except perhaps in Orangeburgh district. In these districts the people vote in small divisions, as convenience dictates.

CLIMATE.] The climate is different in different parts of the state. Along the sea coast bilious diseases and severs of various kinds are prevalent between July and October. The probability of dying is much greater between the 20th of June and the 20th of October, than in the other 8 months in the year.

One cause of these diseases is, a low marshy country, which is over­flowed for the sake of cultivating rice. The exhalations from these stagnated waters, from the rivers, and from the neighbouring ocean, and the profuse perspiration of vegetables of all kinds, which cov­er the ground, fill the air with moisture. This moisture falls in fre­quent rains and copious dews. From actual observation it has been found that the average annual fall of rain for ten years was 42 inches; without regarding the moisture that fell in fogs and dews. The great heat of the day relaxes the body, and the agreeable coolness of the evening invites to an exposure to these heavy dews.

[Page 595] The disagreeable effects of this climate, experience has proved, might in a great measure be avoided, by those inhabitants whose cir­cumstances will admit of their removal from the neighbourhood of the rice, swamps, to healthier situations, during the months of the July, August, September and October; and in the worst situations, by tempe­rance and care. Violent exercise on horseback, chiefly, exposure to the meridian rays of the sun, sudden showers of rain, and the night air, are too frequently the causes of fevers and other disorders. Would the sportsmen deny themselves, during the fall months, their favourite amusements of hunting and fishing, or confine themselves to a very few hours, in the morning or evening—would the industri­ous planter visit his fields only at the same hours—or would the poor­er class of People pay due attention to their manner of living, and observe the precautions recommended to them by men of knowledge and experience, much sickness and many distressing events might be prevented. The upper country, situated in the medium between ex­treme heat and cold, is as healthful as any part of the United States.

RIVERS.] This state is watered by four large, navigable rivers, besides a great number of smaller ones, which are passable in boats. The river Savannah washes it in its whole length from southeast to northwest. The Edisto rises in two branches from a remarkable ridge in the interior part of the state. These branches unite below Orange­burgh, which stands on the North Fork, and form Edisto river, which, having passed Jacksonsburgh, leaving it on the south, branches and embraces Edisto island.

Santee is the largest and longest river in this state. It empties in­to the ocean by two mouths, a little south of Georgetown. About 120 miles in a direct line from its mouth, it branches into the Congaree and Wateree; the latter or northern branch passes the Catabaw na­tion of Indians, and bears the name of the Catabaw river from this settlement to its source. The Congaree branches into Saluda and Broad rivers. Broad river again branches into Enoree, Tyger and Pacolet rivers; on the latter of which are the celebrated Pacolet Springs.

Pedee river rises in North Carolina, where it is called Yadkin river. In this state, however, it takes the name of Pedee, and, receiving the waters of Lynches creek, Little Pedee, and Black river, it joins the Wakkamaw river, near Georgetown. These united streams, with the accession of a small creek, on which Georgetown stands, form Win­yaw bay, which about 12 miles below communicates with the ocean. All the forementioned rivers, except Edisto, rise from various sources in that ridge of mountains which divides the waters which flow into the Atlantic Ocean from those which fall into the Missisippi.

The rivers of a secondary size, as you pass from N. to S. are Wak­kamaw, Black river, Cooper, Ashepoo, and Combahee. These rivers afford to the proprietors of their banks a considerable quan­tity of tide swamp, or rice land, flowable from the rivers, except in extraordinary droughts.

In the third class are comprehended those rivers which extend but a short distance from the ocean, and serve, by branching into number­less creeks, as drains to take off the quantity of rain water, which [...] down from the large inland swamps; or are merely arms of the [Page 596] sea. Of this kind, are Ashley, Stono, Coosaw, Broad, Colleton, May, New, and Right's rivers. The tide, in no part of the state, flows more than 25 miles from the sea.

CANAL.] A company has been incorporated for the purpose of connect­ing Cooper and Santee rivers by a Canal of 21 miles in length. The sum supposed to be necessary to complete this extensive work is 55,620l. sterling. Twenty five per cent. are allowed by the legislature in tolls for all monies advanced by stockholders. The advantage of a canal at this place, to one who inspects a map of the Carolinas, must appear to be great, both to the public and to the proprietors.

MOUNTAINS.] Except the High Hills of Santee, the Ridge, and some few other hills, this country is like one extensive plain, till you reach the Tryon and Hogback mountains, 220 miles northwest of Charleston. The elevation of these mountains above their base, is 3840 feet, and above the sea coast 4640. There is exhibited from the top of these mountains an extensive view of this state, North Caroli­na and Georgia. And as no object intervenes to obstruct the view, a man with telescopic eyes might discern vessels at sea. The mountains west and northwest rise much higher than these, and form a ridge, which divides the waters of Tennessee and Santee rivers.

HARBOURS.] The only harbours of note are those of Charleston, Port Royal, and Georgetown. Charleston harbour is spacious, conve­nient and safe. It is formed by the junction of Ashley and Cooper riv­ers. Its entrance is guarded by Fort Johnson. Twelve miles from the city is a bar, over which are four channels: One by the name of Ship Channel, has 18 feet water; another 16½, the other two are for smaller vessels. The tides rise from 5 to 8 feet. Port Royal has an excellent harbour, of sufficient extent to contain the largest floot in the world.

The bar at the entrance of Winyaw bay, which leads to George­town, does not admit of vessels drawing more than. 11 feet water; and is in many respects a very dangerous place. This circumstance has proved injurious to the growth of Georgetown, which is other­wise exceedingly well situated, for all the purposes of an extensive trade.

ISLANDS.] The sea coast is bordered with a chain of fine sea is­lands, around which the sea flows, opening an excellent inland navi­gation, for the conveyance of produce to market.

North of Charleston harbour, lie Bull's Dewee's, and Sullivan's islands, which form the north part of the harbour. James island lies on the other side of the harbour, opposite Charleston, containing about 50 families. Farther S. W. is John's island, larger than James; Stono river, which forms a convenient and safe harbour, divides these islands. Contiguous to John's island, and connected with it, by a bridge, is Wadmeiaw; east of which are the small isles of Keywaw and Simmon. Between these and Edisto island, is N. Edisto inlet, which also affords a good harbour for vessels of easy draft of water. South of Edisto island, is S. Edisto inlet, through which enter, from the northward, all the vessels bound to Beaufort, Asheepoo, Combahac [...] and Coosaw.

On the S. W. side of St. Helena island, lies a cluster of islands, one of the largest of which is Port Royal. Adjacent to Port Royal lie St. Helena, Ladies Island, Paris Island, and the Hunting Islands, 5 or [Page 597] 6 in number, bordering on the ocean, so called from the number of deer and other wild game sound upon them. All these islands and some others of less note belong to St. Helena parish.

Crossing Broad river, you come to Hilton Head, the most southern sea island in Carolina. West and southwest of Hilton Head, lie Finckney's, Bulls, Dawfuskies and some smaller islands, between which and Hilton Head, are Calibogie river and sound, which form the out­let of May and New rivers.

The soil on these islands, is generally better adapted to the culture of indigo than the main, and less suited to rice. Cotton grows very well upon them. The natural growth is the live oak, which is so ex­cellent for ship timber, and the palmetto or cabbage tree, the utility of which, in the construction of forts, was experienced during the late war.

CHIEF TOWNS.] CHARLESTON is the only considerable town in South Carolina. It is situated on the tongue of land which is form­ed by the confluence of Ashley and Cooper rivers, which are large and navigable. These rivers mingle their waters immediately below the town, and form a spacious and convenient harbour, which communicates with the ocean just below Sullivan's island, which it leaves on the north, seven miles southeast of the town. In these riv­ers the tide rises, in common about 6½ feet. * The continued agita­tion which this occasions in the waters which almost surround Charles­ton—the refreshing sea breezes which are regularly felt, and the smoke rising from so many chimneys, render Charleston more healthy than any part of the low country in the southern states. On this ac­count it is the resort of great numbers of gentlemen, invalids from the West India islands, and of the rich planters from the country, who come and here to spend the sukly months, as they are called, in quest of health and of the social enjoyments which the city affords. And is no part of America are the social blessings enjoyed more rationally and liberally than in Charleston. Unaffected hospitality—affability— [...]se in manners and address—and a disposition to make their guests welcome, easy and pleased with themselves, are characteristics of the respectable people in Charleston.

The land on which the town is built is flat and low, and the water brackish and unwholesome. The streets from east to west extend from river to river, and, running in a straight line, not only open beau­tiful prospects each way, but afford excellent opportunities, by means of subterranean drains, for removing all nuisances, and keeping the city clean and healthy. These streets are intersected by others, near­ly at right angles, and throw the town into a number of squares, with dressing houses in front, and office houses and little gardens behind. [...]me of the streets are conveniently wide, but most of them are much [...] narrow, especially for so populous a city, in so warm a climate. [...] their being a nursery for various diseases from their confined [...], they have been found extremely inconvenient in case of fires, the destructive effects of which have been frequently felt in this city. The houses, which have been lately built, are brick, with tiled roofs. [Page 598] Some of the buildings in Charleston are elegant, and most of them are neat, airy and well furnished. The public buildings are, an exchange, state house, lately rebuilt, armoury, poor house, two large churches for Episcopalians, two for Congregationalists or Independents, one for Scotch Presbyterians, one for Baptists, one for German Lutherans, two for the Methodists, (a large house for worship, being lately finished by them)—one for French Protestants—besides a meeting house for Quak­ers, a Roman Catholic chapel, and a Jewish synagogue.

But little attention is paid to the public markets. A great propor­tion of the most wealthy inhabitants have plantations, from which they receive supplies of almost every article of living. The country abounds with poultry and wild ducks. Their beef, mutton and veal, are not of the best kind. Few fish are brought to market.

In 1787, it was computed that there was 1600 houses in this city, and 9600 white inhabitants, and 5400 negroes; and what evinces the healthiness of the place, upwards of 200 of the white inhabitants were above 60 years of age. In 1791, there were 16,859 inhabitants, of whom 7684 were slaves.

Charleston was incorporated in 1783, and divided into 13 wards, which choose as many wardens, from among whom the citizens elect an Intendant of the city. The Intendant and wardens form the city council, who have power to make and enforce bye laws for the regu­lation of the city.

BEAUFORT, on Port Royal Island, is a pleasant little town, of about 50 or 60 houses, and, 200 inhabitants, who are distinguished for their hospitality and politeness. The courts which were formerly held here, are now held at Coosawhatchie.

GEORGETOWN, the seat of justice in Georgetown district, stands, on a spot of land near the junction of a number of rivers, which, when united in one broad stream, by the name of Winyaw, fall into the ocean 12 miles below the town.

COLUMBIA, which has lately been made the seat of government, by the legislature, stands, just below the junction of Saluda and Broad rivers, on the Congaree. The public offices have, however, in some instances been divided, for the accommodation of the inhabitants of the lower counties, and a branch of each retained in Charles­ton.

CAMDEN, on the Wateree, N. W. of Santee Hills, 130 miles west of north from Charleston, is regularly built, upon a good plan; but a small part of it is yet executed.

PURYSBURGH is a hilly village, about 20 miles above Savannah, on the north bank of the river of the same name. It was early settled by foreigners, with a view to the culture of silk, which for a while they attended to with spirit. The mulberry trees are yet standing, and some attention is still paid to the making of silk. But the profits of the rice and indigo, soon diverted the original planters from almost every other; pursuit. Besides these, are Jacksonborough, Orangeburgh, Wynnsborough and Cambridge, which are all inconsiderable villages of from 30 to 60 dwelling houses.

GENERAL FACE OF THE COUNTRY.] The whole state, to the dis­tance of 80 miles from the sea, is level, and almost without a stone. In this distance, by a gradual ascent from the sea coast, the land rises about 190 feet. Here, if you proceed in a W. N. W. course from Charles­ton, [Page 599] commences a curiously uneven country. The traveller is con­stantly ascending or descending little sand hills, which nature seems [...] have disunited in a frolic. If a pretty high sea were suddenly ar­rested, and transformed into sand hills, in the very form the waves [...]isted at the moment of transformation, it would present they eye with just such a view as is here to be seen. Some little herbage, and a few small pines grow even on this soil. The inhabitants are few, and have but a scanty subsistence on corn and sweet potatoes, which grow here tolerably well. This curious country continues for 60 miles, till you arrive at a place called The Ridge, 140 miles from Charleston. This [...] is a remarkable tract of high ground, as you approach it from the sea, but level as you advance northwest from its summit. It is a fine high, healthy belt of land, well watered, and of a good soil, and extends from the Savannah to Broad river, in about 6° 30′ west lon­gitude from Philadelphia. Beyond this ridge, commences a country [...]tactly resembling the northern states. Here hills and dales, with all their verdure and variegated beauty, present themselves to the eye. Wheat fields, which are rare in the low country, begin to grow common. Here Heaven has bestowed its blessings with a most bounteous hand. The air is much more temperate and healthful, than nearer to the sea. The hills are covered with valuable woods—the vallies watered with beautiful rivers, and the fertility of the soil is equal to every vegetable production. This, by way of distinction, is called the upper country, where are different modes and different articles of cultivation; where the manners of the people, and even their language, have a different tone. The land still rises by a gradual ascent; each succeeding hill overlooks that which immediately precedes it, till, having advanced [...] miles in a northwest direction from Charleston, the elevation of the land above the sea coast is found by mensuration to be 800 feet. Here commences a mountainous country, which continues rising to the western terminating point of this state.

SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.] The soil may be divided into four kinds; first, the pine barren, which is valuable only for its timber. Interspers­ed among the pine barren, are tracts of land free of timber, and every kind of growth but that of grass. These tracts are called Savan­nah, constituting a second kind of soil, good for grazing. The third kind is that of the swamps and low grounds on the rivers, which is a mixture of black loam and fat clay, producing naturally canes is great plenty, cypress, bays, loblolly pines, &c. In these swamps rice is cul­tivated, which constitutes the staple commodity of the state. The high lands, commonly known by the name of oak and hiccory lands, constitute the fourth kind of soil. The natural growth is oak, hic­cory, walnut, pine and locust. On these lands, in the low country, are cultivated Indian corn principally; and in the back country, besides these, they raise tobacco in large quantities, wheat, rye, barley, oats, hemp, flax, cotton and silk. *

There is little fruit in this state, especially in the lower parts of it. They have oranges, which are chiefly sour, and figs in plenty, a few li [...]es and lemons, pomegranates, pears and peaches; apples are scarce, [...] are imported from the northern states, Melons, (especially the water melon) are raised here in great perfection.

[Page 600] The river swamps, in which rice can be cultivated with any toler­able degree of safety and success, do not extend higher up the rivers than the head of the tides; and in estimating the value of this species of rice land, the height which the tide rises is taken into consideration, those lying where it rises to a proper pitch for overflowing the swamps being the most valuable. The best inland swamps, which constitute a second species of rice land, are such as are furnished with reserves of water. These reserves are formed by means of Tares banks thrown up at the upper parts of the swamps, whence it is conveyed, when needed, to the fields of rice.

At the distance of about 110 miles from the sea, the river swamps terminate, and the high lands extend quite to the rivers, and form banks, in some places, several hundred feet high from the surface of the water, and afford many extensive and delightful views. These high banks are interwoven with layers of leaves and different coloured earth, and abound with quarries of free stone, pebbles, flint, chrystals, iron ore in abundance, silver, lead, sulphur and coarse diamonds.

The swamps above the head of the tide, are occasionally planted with corn, cotton and indigo. The soil is very rich, yielding from 40 to 50 bushels of corn an acre.

It is curious to observe the gradations from the sea coast to the up­per country, with respect to the produce, the mode of cultivation, and the cultivators. On the islands upon the sea coast, and for 40 or 50 miles back (and on the rivers much farther) the cultivators are all slaves. No while man, to speak generally, ever thinks of settling a farm and improving it for himself without negroes. If he has no negroes, he hires himself as overseer to some rich planter, who has more than he can or will attend to, till he can purchase for himself. The articles cultivated are corn and potatoes, which, with the small rice, are food for the negroes; rice, indigo and cotton, for exporta­tion. The culture of this last article, is capable of being increased equal to almost any demand. The soil was cultivated, till lately, al­most wholly by manual labour. The plough, till since the peace was scarcely used. Now, the plough and harrow and other improvements are introduced into the rice swamps with great success, and will no doubt become general. In the middle settlements, negroes are not so numerous. The master attends personally to his own business. The land is not properly situated for rice. It produces moderately good indigo weed, and some tobacco is raised for exportation. The farmer is contented to raise corn, potatoes, oats, rye, poultry, and a little wheat.—In the upper country, there are but sew negroes; generally speaking, the farmers have none, and depend, like the inhabitants of the northern states, upon the labour of themselves and families for sub­sistence; the plough is used almost wholly. India corn in great quantities, wheat, rye, potatoes, &C. are raised for food, and much tobacco and some wheat, cotton and indigo for exportation.

MODE OF CULTIVATING RICE.] Rice ground is prepared only by effectually securing it from the water, except some higher parts of it, which are sometimes dug up with a hoe, or mellowed by a plough or harrow. When the rice is young the overflowing of the water does not prevent its growth. Those who have water in reserve, commonly let it in upon their rice, after first going through with the hoe, while it is young, though it is deemed best to keep out the grass [Page 601] without this aid, by the hoe only. The water is commonly kept on the rice eight or ten days after hoeing. When the ear is formed, the water is continued on till it is ripe. It is hoed three or four times. When the grass is very thick, a negroe cannot hoe more than one six­ [...]ch of an acre in a day. From three pecks to a bushel is sown an [...]. It produces from 50 to 80 bushels of rough rice an acre—120 [...] of rough rice have been produced on one acre; 20 bushels of which make about 500 pounds, or eight and a quarter bushels clean [...] for market. After it is threshed, it is winnowed, and then [...] in a mill, constructed of two blocks in a simple manner—then [...]owed by a fan constructed for that purpose—then beat in a mor­ [...] by hand, or now generally by horse or water machines—then sift­ed to separate the whole rice from that which is broken and the flour. [...] whole rice is then barrelled in casks of about 500 pounds, or eight [...] a quarter bushels.—The small rice serves for provisions, and the [...] for provender, the chaff for manure, and the straw for fodder. The blade is green and fresh while the ear is ripe. The price is [...] [...]4 to 10S6 a hundred—dollars 4S8.

MANUFACTURES.] In the middle, and especially in the upper country, the people are obliged to manufacture their own cotton and we [...]llen clothes, and most of their husbandry tools; but in the lower country, the inhabitants, for these articles, depend almost entirely on [...] merchants. Late accounts from the interior parts of this state inform, that the inhabitants manufacture, entirely in the family way, as much as they have occasion for; that cotton, hemp and flax are plenty; that they have a considerable stock of good sheep; that [...] exertions are made, and much done in the household way; that may have long been in the habit of doing something in family man­ufactures, but within a few years past great improvements have been made. The women do the weaving and leave the men to attend to agriculture.

This state furnishes all the materials, and of the best kind, for his building. The live oak, and the pitch and yellow pines, are of imperior quality. Ships might be built here with more ease, and to much greater advantage, than in the middle and eastern states. A [...] of seamen, is one reason why this business is not more generally attended to.

So much attention is now paid to the manufacture of indigo, in this [...], that it bids fair to rival that of the French. It is to be regret­ [...], that it is still the practice of the merchants concerned in the Car­ [...] trade, to sell at foreign markets, the Carolina indigo of the first p [...]lity, as French.

CONSTITUTION.] The legislative authority is vested in a general assembly, consisting of a senate and house of representatives. There are [...] representatives, and 35 senators appointed among the several districts. The representatives are chosen for two years, must be free white men, 21 years old, and have been inhabitants of the state three years. If resident in the district, they must have a freehold of 500 [...] of land, and ten negroes, or real estate worth 150l. sterling, dept of debt; if nonresident, must have a freehold in the district w [...]th 500l. sterling, clear of debt. The senators are chosen for four years, and divided into two classes, one class being chosen every second year. They must be free white men, 30 years old, and have [Page 602] been inhabitants five years. If resident in the district, they must have a freehold worth 300l. sterling, clear of debt; if nonresident, a free hold worth 1000l. sterling, clear of debt. Every free white man, 21 years old, having been an inhabitant of the state two years, and been a freeholder of 50 acres of land, or a town lot, six months, or having been resident in the district six months, and paid a tax of [...] sterling has a right to vote for members of the legislature. The general as­sembly is chosen on the second Monday of October, and meets [...] the fourth Monday in November annually. Each house chooser its own officers, judges of the qualifications of its members, and [...] negative on the other. A majority of each makes a quorum from [...] to day, and compel the attendance of members. They are protec [...], in their persons and estates, during the sessions, and ten days before and after; except in cases of treason, felony, and breach of the pence. They are paid out of the public treasury, from which no money [...] drawn but by the legislative authority. Revenue bills originate in the lower house, but may be altered or rejected by the senate. Army and navy contractors, and all officers excepting officers in the militia, justices of the peace, and justices of the county courts which have no salaries, are excluded from the general assembly. The clergy are ex­cluded from civil offices. The executive authority is vested in a governor, chosen for two years, by both houses of assembly jointly; but he cannot be reelected till after four years. He must be thirty years old, have been an inhabitant of the state ten years, and have as estate in it worth 1500l. sterling, clear of debt. He can hold no oth­er office, except in the militia. A lieutenant governor is chosen in the same manner, for the same time, and possessing the same qualifications; and holds the office of governor in case of vacancy. The gov­ernor is commander in chief of the military force; has power to remit fines and forfeitures, and grant reprieves and pardons, except in cases of impeachment; to require information of executive officers; to convene the general assembly on extraordinary occasions, and to ad­journ them to any time not beyond the fourth Monday in November next ensuing, in case they cannot agree on the time themselves. His must inform the general assembly of the condition of the state; recom­mend such measures as he shall judge expedient; and take care that the laws are faithfully executed in mercy. The legislature has power to vest the judicial authority in such courts as it shall think proper. The judges hold their commission during good behaviour. Those of the superior courts are elected by the joint ballot of both houses of as­sembly; have a stated salary, and can hold no other office. All of­ficers take an oath of fidelity to their duty, and to the constitution of this state, and of the United States; and, for malconduct, may be impeach­ed by the house of representatives, and tried by the senate.—This con­stitution asserts the supreme power of the people; liberty of con­science; trial by jury; and subordination of the military to the civil power. It excludes ex post facto laws; bills of attainder; excessive bail; and titles of nobility and hereditary distinction.

The legislature has power, under certain regulations, to make a­mendments to the constitution. And a convention may be called by vote of two thirds of both branches of the whole representation.

This constitution was ratified June 3d, 1790.

[Page 603] LAWS.] The laws of this state have nothing in them of a particul­ar nature, excepting what arises from the permission of slavery. The evidence of a slave cannot be taken against a white man; and the neither who kills his slave is not punishable otherwise than by a pe­ [...]iary mulct, and 12 months imprisonment.

A committee was appointed, at the session of the legislature in 1792, to put in train the business of revising and amending the negro act, or the their for governing the slaves. The issue we hope will meliorate the [...]tition of the slaves, and afford an evidence to the world of the en­ [...]ened policy, and increasing humanity, of the citizens of this state. [...] anticipate an issue of this nature the rather, because a dispo­ [...] to soften the rigors of slavery has of late been manifested, by drawing them fish, tobacco and summer clothing, which formerly was not customary.

A [...]aw, altering the mode of the descent of intestate estates, which [...] descended according to the laws of England, was passed in 1792. According to the present law, a more equal partition takes place and were conformable to a republican government, and to the dictates of natural affection.

By a late regulation, the judges of the court, who before had a sal­ary of 500l. each, and fees, have now 600l. and no fees. The chief justice has 800l.

STATE or LITERATURE.] Gentlemen of fortune, before the late [...], sent their sons to Europe for education. During the war and since, they have generally sent them to the middle and north­ [...] states. Those who have been at this expense in educating their [...], have been but comparatively few in number, so that the litera­ [...] of the state is at a low ebb. Since the peace, however, it has be­ [...] to flourish. There are several respectable academies in Charles­ [...]—one at Beaufort, on Port Royal island—and several others in different parts of the state. Three colleges have lately been incor­porated by law—one at Charleston—one at Winnsborough, in the district of Camden—the other at Cambridge, in the district of Nine­ty Six. The public and private donations for the support of these three colleges, were originally intended to have been appropriated jointly, for the erecting and supporting of one respectable college. The division of these donations has frustrated this design. Part of the [...] barracks in Charleston has been handsomely fitted up, and con­verted into a college, and there are a number of students; but it does not yet merit a more dignified name than that of a respectable academy. The Mount Sion college, at Winnsborough, is supported by a respect­able society of gentlemen, who have long been incorporated. This institution flourishes and bids fair for usefulness. The college at Cambridge is no more than a grammar school. That the literature of this state might be put upon a respectable footing, nothing is wanting but a spirit of enterprize among its wealthy inhabitants.

CHARITABLE AND OTHER SOCIETIES.] These are the South Carolina, Mount Sion, Library and St. Cecillia Societies—a society for the relief of the widows and orphans of clergymen, a Medical society lately instituted in Charleston, and a musical society. At Beaufort and on St. Helena are several charitable societies, incorporated with funds to a considerable amount, designed principally for the education of poor children, and which promise, at a future day, to be of great [Page 604] public utility. What are called Jockey clubs, have increased within a few years.

INDIANS.] The Catabaws are the only nation of Indians in this state. They have but one town, called Catabaw, situated on Catah [...] river, in latitude 34° 49′, on the boundary line between North and South Carolinas, and contains about 450 inhabitants, of which th [...] 150 are fighting men.

It is worthy of remark, that this nation was long at war with the six nations, into whose country they often penetrated, which it is said no other Indian nation from the south or west ever did. The [...] Nations always considered them as the bravest of their enemies, [...] they were surrounded by the settlements of white people, whole neighbourhood, with other concurrent cause, have rendered them corrupt and nerveless.

RELIGION.] Since the revolution, by which all denomination were put on an equal footing, there have been no disputes between different religious sects. They all agree to differ.

The upper parts of this state are settled chiefly by Presbyterians Baptists and Methodists. From the most probable calculations, it is supposed that the religious denominations of this state, as to numbers may be ranked as follows: Presbyterians, including the Congregations and Independent churches—Episcopalians, Baptists, Methodists, &c.

CHARACTER.] There is no peculiarity in the manners of the in­habitants of this state, except what arises from the mischievous influ­ence of slavery; and in this, indeed, they do not differ from the in­habitants of the other southern states. Slavery, by exempting great numbers from the necessities of labour, leads to luxury, dissipating and extravagance. The absolute authority, which is exercised other their slaves, too much favors a haughty supercilious behaviour [...] disposition to obey the christian precept, 'Do to others as you would that others should do unto you,' is not cherished by a daily exhib [...]ion of many made for one. The Carolinians sooner arrive at maturity, both in their bodies and minds, than the natives of colder climates. They possess a natural quickness and vivacity of genius, superior in the inhabitants of the north; but too generally want that enterpti [...] and perseverance, which are necessary for the highest attainments in the arts and sciences. They have, indeed, few motives to enterprise. Inhabiting a fertile country, which, by the labour of the slaves, pro­duces plentifully, and creates affluence—in a climate which favour indulgence, ease, and a disposition for convivial pleasures, they too generally rest contented with barely knowledge enough to transact the common affairs of life. There are not a few instances, however, in this state, in which genius has been united with application, and the effects of their union have been happily experienced, not only by this state, but by the United States.

The wealth produced by the labour of the slaves, furnishes their pro­prietors with the means of hospitality; and no people in the world use these means with more liberality. Many of the inhabitants spare as pains nor expense in giving the highest polish of education to their children, by enabling them to travel, and by other means unattainable by those who have but moderate fortunes.

The Carolinians are generally affable and easy in their manners, and polite and attentive to strangers. The ladies want the bloom of [Page 605] the north, but have an engaging softness and delicacy in their appear­ance and manners, and many of them possess the polite and elegant accomplishments.

Munting is the most fashionable amusement in this state. At [...] the country gentlemen are extremely expert; and with sur­ [...]ting dexterity pursue their game through the woods. Gaming of all kinds is more discountenanced among fashionable people in this, [...] in any of the southern states. Twice a year, statedly, a class of active gentlemen, in this and the neighbouring states, have their [...] races. Bets of terror fifteen hundred guineas have been some­ [...] said on these occasions.

There is no instance, perhaps, in which the richer class of people [...] more on the rules of propriety than in the mode of conduct­ing their funerals. That a decent respect be paid to the dead, is the [...] dictate of the refined humanity; but this is not done by sumptu­ [...] expensive entertainments, splendid decorations and pompous [...], which a misguided fashion has here introduced and ren­de [...]d necessary. In Charleston and other parts of the state, no persons [...] a funeral any more than a wedding, unless particularly invit­ed. Wine, punch and all kinds of liquors, tea, coffee, cake, &c. in pro [...]ection, are handed round on these solemn occasions. In short, one would suppose that the religious proverb of the wise man, 'It is bet­ween to go to the house of mourning than to the house of feasting,' would be unintelligible and wholly inapplicable here, as it would be [...] to distinguish the house of mourning from the house of feasting.

MILITARY STRENGTH.] There are between 20,000 and 30,000 [...]ting men in this state. About 10 men are kept to guard Fort [...], on James island, at the entrance of Charleston harbour, by [...] no vessel can pass, unless the' master or mate make oath that there is no malignant distemper on board. The militia laws, enacting [...] every freeman between 16 and 50 years of age shall be prepared [...] war, have been but indifferently obeyed since the peace. An un­ [...]sful degree of military spirit, however, seems lately to have arisen [...] the citizens of Charleston. Noless than eight volunteer uniform de [...]nies have lately formed in this city, besides a troop of horse, and the ancient battalion of artillery.

PUBLIC REVENUE AND EXPENSES.] The public Revenue of this state is, nominally, 90,000l. sterling. But a great part of this is [...] not collected, or paid in securities, which are much de­pre [...]ted. The expenses of government are about 16,000l. sterling.

MUDE OF LEVYING TAXES.] The great bulk of the revenue of the state is raised by a tax on lands and negroes. The lands, for the purpose of being taxed according to their value, are divided into their grand divisions; the first reaches from the sea coast to the ex­ [...] of the flowing of the tides; the second, from these points to the [...] of the rivers; and thence to the utmost verge of the western set­tlement makes the third. These grand divisions, for the sake of more [...]acty ascertaining the value of the lands, are subdivided into 21 [...] species. The most valuable of which is estimated at six [...], and the least valuable at one shilling per acre. One per cent. on the value thus estimated, is levied from all granted lands in the [...]. The collection of taxes is not annexed to the office of sheriff, but is committed to particular gentlemen appointed for that purpose, [Page 606] who are allowed two and a half per cent. in Charleston, and five per cent. in the other parts of the state, on all they collect.

BANES.] Besides a branch of the national bank, a bank by the name of the South Carolina bank, was established in 1792, in Charleston.

DAMAGE BY THE [...]ATE WAR.] The damages which this states sustained in the late war are thus estimated—The three entire crops of 1779, 1780 and 1781, all of which were used by the British—The crop of 1782, taken by the Americans—About 25,000 negroes—Many thousands of pounds worth of plate, and household furniture in abundance—The villages of Georgetown and Camden burnt.—The loss to the citizens directly by the plunderings and devastations of the British army—and indirectly by American impressments, and by the depreciation of the paper currency, together with the heavy d [...]bt of 1,200,000l. sterling, incurred for the support of the war, in own aggregate view, make the price of independence to South Carolina, exclusive of the blood of its citizens, upwards of 3,000,000l. sterling.

COMMERCE.] The little attention that has been paid to manufac­tures, occasions a vast consumption of foreign imported articles; but the quantities and value of their exports generally leave a balance in favour of the state, except when there are large importations of negroes.

The amount of exports from the port of Charleston, in the year, ending November 1787, was then estimated, from authentic documents, at £.505,279:19:5 sterling money. The number of vessels cleared from the custom house the same year, was 947, measuring 62,118 tons; 735 of these, measuring 41,531 tons, were American; the others belong­ed to Great Britain, Spain, France, the United Netherlands and Ireland.

The principal articles exported from this state, are rice, indigo, to­bacco, skins of various kinds, beef, pork, cotton, pitch, tar, rosin, tur­pentine, myrtle wax, lumber, naval stores, cork, leather, pink [...], snake root, ginseng, &c. In the most successful seasons, there have been as many as 140,000 barrels of rice, and 1,300,000 pounds of in­digo, exported in a year. From the 15th Dec. 1791, to September, 1798, 108,567 tierces of rice, averaging 550 lb. nett weight each, were export­ed from Charleston. In the year ending September, 30th, 1791, exclu­sive of two quarters for which no returns were made, the amount of exports from this state was 1,866,0 [...]1 dollars.

PRACTICE OF LAW, COURTS, &c.] From the first settlement of this country in 1669, to the year 1769, a single court, called the Court of Common Pleas, was though sufficient to transact the judicial business of the state. This court was invariably held at Charleston, where all the records were kept, and all civil business transacted. As the province increased, inconveniences arose, and created uneafina [...] among the people.

To remedy these inconveniences an act was passed in 1769, by which the province was divided into seven districts, which have been mentioned. The court of common pleas (invested with the powers of the same cour in England) sat four times a year is Charleston. By the abovementioned act, the judges of the court of common pleas were empowered to fit as judges of the court of sessions, invested with the powers of the court of king's bench, in England, in the criminal ju­risdiction. The act likewise directed the judges of the courts of com­mon pleas and sessions, in Charleston district, to divide, and two of the judges to proceed on what is called the northern circuit, and the [Page 607] [...]her two on the southern circuit, distributing justice in their progress. This was to be done twice in the year. This mode of administring jus­ [...] [...]nti [...]ed till 1785, when, by the unanimous exertions of the two [...] districts, an act was passed, establishing county courts in all the [...]ties of the four districts of Camden, Ninety Six, Cheraws, and [...]geburgh. The county courts are empowered to sit four times in [...]. Before the establishment of county courts, the lawyers all [...] at Charleston, under the immediate eye of government; and [...] Carolina bar was as pure and genteel as any in the United States. [...] this establishment, lawyers have flocked in from all quarters, [...]s [...]ttled in different parts of the country, and law suits have been [...]plied beyond all former knowledge.

[...]TORY.] The reformation in France occasioned a civil war be­ [...] the Protestant and Catholic parties in that kingdom. During [...] domestic troubles Jasper de Coligni, a principal commander of the Protestant army, fitted out two ships, and sent them with a colony America, under the command of Jean Ribaud, for the purpose of spring a retreat from prosecution. Ribaud landed at the mouth of [...] now called Albemarle river, in North Carolina. This colony, [...], enduring incredible hardships, were extirpated by the Spaniards. I [...] further attempts were made to plant a colony in this quarter, till the [...]eign of Charles II. of England. Mention is, however, made of [...] Robert Health's having obtained a grant of Carolina, from Charles [...] in 1630; but no settlements were made in consequence of this grant.

In 1662, after the restoration of Charles II. Edward, earl of Clar­ [...], and seven others, obtained a grant of all lands lying between the [...] and 36th degrees of north latitude.

A second charter, given two years after, enlarged their boundaries, and comprehended all that province, territory, &c. extending east­ [...] as far as the north end of Currituck inlet, upon a straight line [...]derly to Wyonoke creek, which lies within or about latitude 36° [...] end so west, in a direct line as far as the South Sea; and south and westward as far as 29° north latitude, inclusive, and so west in [...]rect lines to the South Sea. * Of this large territory, the king con­stituted [Page 608] these eight persons absolute Lords Proprietors—investing [...] with all necessary powers to settle and govern the same.

Nothing was successfully done towards the settlement of this coun­try till 1609. At this time, the proprietors, in virtue of their pow­ers, engaged the famous Mr. Locke to frame for them a constitution and body of laws. This constitution, consisting of 120 articles, was aristocratical, and though ingenious in theory, could never be success­fully reduced to practice.

Three classes of nobility were to be established, (viz.) barons, enssrq [...] and landgraves. The first to possess twelve—the second twenty [...]—the third forty eight thousand acres of land, which was to be [...] enable.

In 1669, William Sayle, being appointed first governor of [...] country, embarked with a colony, and settled on the neck of [...] where Charleston now stands.

During the continuance of the proprietary government, a period [...] 50 years (reckoning from 1669 to 1719) the colony was involved of perpetual quarrels. Oftentimes they were harassed by the [...]—sometimes infested with p [...]rates—frequently invaded by the [...] and Spanish fleets—constantly uneasy under their injudi [...]ous govern­ment—and quarrelling with their governors.—But their most [...] dissensions were respecting religion. The Episcopalians being [...] numerous than the dissenters, attempted to exclude the latter [...] [...] [Page 609] seat in the legislature. These attempts were so far succeeded, as that the church of England, by a majority of votes, was established by law. This illiberal act threw the colony into the utmost confusion, and was followed by a train of evil consequences, which proved to be the prin­cipal cause of the revolution which soon followed. Notwithstanding the act establishing the church of England was repealed, tranquillity was not restored to the colony. A change of government was generally desired by the colonists. They found that they were not sufficiently protected by their proprietory constitution, and effected a revolution about the year 1719, and the government became regal.

In 1728, the proprietors accepted 22,500l. sterling from the crown, for the property and jurisdiction, except Lord Granville, who reserv­ed his eighth of the property, which has never yet been formally [...]en up. At this time the constitution was new modelled, and the [...]ritory, limited by the original charter, was divided into North and South Carolinas.

From this period the colony began to flourish. It was protected by a government formed on the plan of the English constitution. Under the fostering care of the mother country, its growth was aston­ishingly rapid. Between the years 1763 and 1775, the number of in­habitants was more than doubled. No one indulged a wish for a [...]ange in their political constitution, till the memorable stamp act, [...] in 1765.

From this period till 1775, various attempts were made by Great Britain to tax her colonies without consent. These attempts were [...]riably opposed. The congress, who met at Philadelphia this year, [...]nimously approved the opposition, and on the 19th of April war [...]enced.

During the vigorous contest for independence, this state was a great sufferer. For three years it was the seat of the war. It feels and la­ [...]nts the loss of many respectable citizens. Since the peace, it has been [...]ging from that melancholy confusion and poverty, in which it was generally involved by the devastations of a relentless enemy. The inhabitants are fast multiplying by immigrations from other states—the agricultural interests of the state are reviving—commerce is flour­ishing—economy is becoming more fashionable—and science begins to [...] her salutary influences among the citizens. And under the op­ [...]ion of the present government, this state, from her natural, com­mercial and agricultural advantages, and the abilities of her leading characters, promises to become one of the richest in the union.

See Ramsay's Hist. Revol. in S. Carolina, and Hist. of Carolina and Georgia, anonymous, supposed to be by Hewet [...].

[Page 610]

GEORGIA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 600 Miles. between 5° and 16° W. Lon.
Breadth 250 Miles. 31° and 35° N. Lat.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED east, by the Atlantic ocean; south, by East and West Floridas; West, by the river Missisippi: north and northeast, by South Carolina, and by lands ceded to the United States by South Carolina.

CIVIL DIVISIONS AND POPULATION.] That part of the state which has been laid out in counties, is divided into three districts, which are subdivided into 11 counties, which, with the number of in­habitants, are as follows:

Districts. Counties. Ch. Towns.
Lower district. 21,566 Inhabitant. Camden, St. Patrick's,
Glyn, Brunswick,
Liberty, Sunbury,
Chatham, SAVANNAH,
Essingham. Ebenezer.
Upper district. 37,946 inhabi. Wilkes, Washington,
Franklin,  
Green. Greensburgh.
Middle district. 25,336 Inhabitants. Richmond, AUGUSTA,
Burke, Wayne [...]bo. Louisville,
Washington. Golphinton.

Total number of inhabitants in the state, 82,548, of whom 29,264 are slaves.

Before the revolution, Georgia, like all the southern States, was di­vided into parishes; but this mode of division is now abolished, and that of counties has succeeded in its room.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY.] The eastern part of the state, between the mountains and the ocean, and the rivers Savannah and St. Mary's, a tract of country more than 120 miles from north to south, and 40 or 50 east and west, is entirely level, without a hill or stone. At the distance of about 40 or 50 miles from the sea board, or salt marsh, the lands begin to be more or less uneven. The ridges gradually rise one above another into hills, and the hills successively increasing in height, till they finally terminate in mountains. That vast chain of moun­tains which commences with the Katts Kill, near Hudson's river, in the state of New York, known by the names of the Allegany and Apal­achian mountains, terminate in this state, about 60 miles south of its northern boundary.—From the foot of this mountain, spreads a wide extended plain, of the richest soil, and in a latitude and climate well adapted to the cultivation of most of the East India produc­tions.

CLIMATE, DISEASES, &c.] In some parts of this state, at partic­ular seasons of the year, the climate cannot be esteemed salubrious. [Page 611] In the low country near the rice swamps, bilious complaints and fevers of various kinds are pretty universal during the months of July, Au­gust and September, which, for this reason, are called the sickly months.

The disorders peculiar to this climate originate partly from the badness of the water, which in the low country, except in and about Savannah and some other places, where good springs are found, is generally brackish, and partly from the noxious putrid vapours which are exhaled from the stagnant waters in the rice swamps. Besides, the long continuance of warm weather produces a general relaxation of the nervous system, and as a great proportion of the inhabitants have no necessary labour to call them to exercise, a large share of in­dolence is the natural consequence; and indolence, especially amongst a luxurious people, is ever the parent of disease. The immense quan­tities of spirituous liquors, which are used to correct the brackishness of the water, form a species of intemperance which too often proves minous to the constitution. Parents of infirm, sickly habits, often, in more senses than one, have children of their own likeness. A consid­erable part of the diseases of the present inhabitants may therefore be considered as hereditary.

Before the sickly season commences, many of the rich planters of this state remove with their families to the sea islands, or some ele­ [...]ated healthy situation, where they reside three or four months, for the benefit of the fresh air. In the winter and spring, pleurisies, pe­ [...]umonies and other inflammatory disorders, occasioned by sudden and violent colds, are considerably common and frequently fatal. Consumptions, epilepsies, cancers, palsies and apoplexies, are not so common among the inhabitants of the southern as northern cli­mates.

The winters in Georgia are very mild and pleasant. Snow is sel­dom or never seen. Vegetation is not frequently prevented by severe frosts. Cattle subsist tolerably well through the winter, without any other food than what they obtain in the woods and savannas, and are fatter in that season than in any other. In the hilly country, which begins about 50 and in some places 100 miles from the sea, the air is pure and salubrious, and the water plenty and good. From June to September, the mercury in Farenheit's thermometer commonly fluc­ta [...]tes from 76° to 90°—in winter, from 40° to 60°.—The most pre­vailing winds, are S. W. and E—in winter, N. W. The east wind is warmest in winter and coolest in summer. The south wind, in sum­mer and fall particularly, is damp, sultry, unelastic, and of course un­healthy.

In the southeast parts of this state, which lie within a few degrees of the torrid zone, the atmosphere is kept in motion by impressions from the trade wines. This serves to purify the air, and render if fit for respiration; so that it is found to have a very advantageous effect [...] persons of consumptive habits.

RIVERS.] Savannah river divides this state from South Carolina. Its course is nearly from northwest to southeast. It is formed princi­pally of two branches, by the names of Tugulo and Keowee, which [...] from the mountains, and unite 15 miles N. W. of the northern boundary of Wilkes county. It is navigable for large vessels up to Savannah, and for boats of 100 feet keel as far as Augusta. After [Page 612] rising a fall just above this place, it is passable for boats to the month of Tugulo river. After it takes the name Savannah, at the confluence of the Tugulo and Keowee, it receives a number of tributary streams, from the Georgia side, the principal of which is Broad river, which rises in the county of Franklin, and runs S. E. through part of Wilkes county, and mingles with Savannah at the town of Petersburgh, and might, with a trifling expense, be made boatable 25 or 30 miles through the best settlement in Wilkes county. Tybee bar, at the entrance of Savannah river, in lat. 31° 57′, has 16 feet water at half tide.

Ogeechee river, about 18 miles south of the Savannah, is a smaller river, and nearly parallel with it in its course.

Alatamaha, * about 60 miles south of Savannah river, has its source in the Cherokee mountains, near the head of Tugulo, the great west branch of Savannah, and, before it leaves the mountains, is joined and aug­mented by innumerable rivulets; thence it descends through the hilly country, with all its collateral branches, and winds rapidly amongst the hills two hundred and fifty miles, and then enters the flat, plain coun­try, by the name of the Oakmulge; thence meandering 150 miles, it is joined on the east side by the Ocone, which likewise heads in the lower ridges of the mountains. After this confluence, having now gained a vast acquisition of waters, it assumes the name of Alatamahs, when it becomes a large majestic river, flowing with gentle windings through a vast plain forest, near 100 miles, and enters the Atlantic by several mouths. The north channel, or entrance, glides by the height, of Darien, on the east bank, about ten miles above the bar, and run­ning from thence with several turnings, enters the ocean between S [...] ­pello and Wolf islands. The south channel, which is esteemed the largest and deepest, after its separation from the north, descends gent­ly, winding by M [...]lntosh's and Broughton islands; and lastly, by the west coast of St. Simon's island, enters the ocean, through St. Simon's Sound, between the south end of the island of that name and the north end of Jekyl island. On the west banks of the south channel, ten or twelve miles above its month, and nearly opposite Darien, are to be seen the remains of an ancient fort, or fortification; it is now a regular tetragon terrace, about four feet high, with bastions at each angle; the area may contain about an acre of ground, but the fosse which surrounded it is nearly filled up. There are large live oaks, pines, and other trees, growing upon it, and in the old fields adjoining. It is supposed to have been the work of the French or Spaniards. A large swamp lies betwixt it and the river, and a considerable creek runs close by the works, and enters the river through the swamp, a small distance above Broughton island. About 70 or 80 miles above the confluence of the Oakmulge and Ocone, the trading path from Augusta to the Creek nation, crosses these fine rivers, which are there forty miles apart. On the east banks of the Oakmulge, this treading road runs nearly two miles through ancient Indian fields, which are called the Oakmulge fields; they are the rich low lands of the river. On the heights of these low grounds are yet visible monuments or traces of an ancient town, such as artificial mounts or terraces, squares and banks, encircling considerable areas. Their old fields and plan­ning land extend up and down the river, fifteen or twenty miles from this site. And, if we are to give credit to the account the Creeks [Page 613] [...] of themselves, this place is remarkable for being the first town [...] settlement, when they sat down (as they term it) or established themselves, after their emigration from the west, beyond the Missisippi, [...] original native country.

Besides these, there is Turtle river, Little Sitilla or St. Ille, Great Sitilla, Crooked river, and St. Mary's, which forms a part of the [...] boundary of the United States. St. Mary's river has its [...] from a vast lake, or rather marsh, called Ouaquaphenogaw, [...] described, and flows through a vast plain and pine forest, about 150 miles to the ocean, with which it communicates between the points of Amelia and Talbert's islands, lat. 30° 44′, and is naviga­ [...] vessels of considerable burthen for 90 miles. Its banks afford [...] quantities of fine timber, suited to the West India market. [...] this river, every four or five miles, are bluffs convenient for [...] to haul to and load.

The rivers in the middle and western parts of this state are, Apal­ [...]cols, which is formed by the Chatahouchee and Flint rivers, Mo­ [...] pascagoula and Pearl rivers. All these running southwardly, [...] into the Gulf of Mexico. The forementioned rivers abound [...] a great variety of fish, among which are the mullet, whiting, [...], cat, rock, trout, drum, bass, brim, white, shad and stur­ [...]. The bays and lagoons are stored with oysters, and other shell [...] crabs, shrimps, &c. The clams, in particular, are large, their [...] white, tender and delicate. The shark and great black stingray, [...]tiable cannibals, and very troublesome to the fishermen.

[...] AND SWAMPS.] The lake, or rather marsh, called Ouaqua­ [...]gaw, lies between Flint and Oakmulge rivers, and is nearly 300 [...] in circumference. In wet seasons it appears like an inland sea, [...] several large islands of rich land; one of which the present [...] of Creek Indians represent as the most blissful spot on [...]. They say it is inhabited by a peculiar [...]ace of Indians, whose [...] are incomparably beautiful. They tell you also that this ter­ [...] paradise has been seen by some enterprising hunters, when in [...] of their game, who being lost in inextricable swamps and bogs, [...] on the point of perishing, were unexpectedly relieved by a com­ [...] of beautiful women, whom they call daughters of the Sun, who [...] gave them such provisions as they had with them, consisting [...]uit and corn cakes, and then enjoined them to fly for safety to [...] own country, because their husbands were fierce men and cruel [...]gers. They further say that these hunters had a view of their [...]ents, situated on the elevated banks of an island, in a beautiful [...]; but that in their endeavours to approach it, they were involved [...]petual labyrinths, and, like enchanted land, still as they imag­ [...] they had just gained it, it seemed to fly before them. They de­ [...]ined at length to quite the delusive pursuit, and with much difficul­ [...]sted a retreat. When they reported their adventures to their countrymen, the young warriors were inflamed with an irresistable [...] to invade and conquer so charming a country, but all their at­ [...] had hitherto proved fruitless, they never being able again to [...] spot. They tell another story concerning this sequestered [...], which seems not improbable, which is, that the inhabitants the posterity of a fugitive remnant of the ancient Yamases, who [...] massacre after a bloody and decisive battle between them and [Page 614] the Creeks, (who, it is certain, conquered and nearly exterminated that once powerful people) and here found an asylum, remote and secure from the fury of their proud conquerors.

The rivers St. Mary, Sitilla or St. Ille, and the beautiful Little St. Juan, which empties into the Bay of Appalachi at St. Mark's, are said to flow from this lake. *

About 16 miles from the mouth of Broad river, on its south side, is what is called the Goosepond, a tract of about 180 acres, covered with living water about two feet deep. It discharges into the river, and is fed by two springs.

CHIEF TOWNS.] The present seat of government in this state is AUGUSTA. It is situated on the southwest bank of Savannah river, which is here about 500 yards wide, about 144 miles from the sea, and 127 northwest of Savannah. The town, which in 1787 contained 200 houses, is on a fine large plain, at the foot of the first falls in the river, which in a dry season are 4 to 5 feet in height; and as it en­joys the best soil, and the advantage of a central situation between the upper and lower counties, is rising fast into importance. In 1782 there were but 3 or 4 houses in the town.

SAVANNAH, the former capital of Georgia, stands on a high sandy bluff, on the south side of the river of the same name, and 17 miles from its mouth. The town is regularly built in the form of a paral­lellogram, and, including its suburbs, contained, in 1787, 227 dwelling houses, one Episcopal church, a Presbyterian church, a Synagog [...] and Court house. The number of its inhabitants, exclusive of the blacks, amounted at that time to about 830, 70 of whom were Jews.

In Savannah, and within a circumference of about 10 miles from it, there were, in the summer of 1787, about 2300 inhabitants. Of these 192 were above 50 years of age, and all in good health. The ages of a lady and her six children, then living in the town, amounted to 385 years. This computation, which was actually made, serves to shew that Savannah is not really so unhealthy as has been commonly represented.

SUNBURY is a sea port town, favoured with a safe and very conve­nient harbour. Several small islands intervene, and partly obstruct a direct view of the ocean; and, interlocking with each other, render the passage out to sea winding, but not difficult. It is a very pleasant, healthy town, and is the resort of the planters from the adjacent places of Midway and Newport, during the sickly months. It was burnt by the British in the late war, but has since been rebuilt. An academy was established here in 1788, which, under an able instructor, has proved a very useful institution.

BRUNSWICK, in Glynn county, latitude 31° 10′, is situated at the mouth of Turtle river, at which place this river empties itself into St. Simon's sound. Brunswick has a safe and capacious harbour; and the bar, at the entrance into it, has water deep enough for the largest vessel that swims. The town is regularly laid out, but not yet built. From its advantageous situation, and from the fertility of the back country, it promises to be hereafter one of the first trading towns in Georgia.

[Page 615] FREDERICA, on the island of St. Simon, is nearly in latitude 31° 15′. It is the first town that was built in Georgia, and was founded by General Oglethorpe. The fortress was regular and beautiful, construct­ed chiefly with brick, and is now in ruins. The town contains but few houses, which stand on an eminence, if considered with regard to the marshes before it, upon a branch of Alatamaha river, which washes the west side of this agreeable island, and forms a bay before the town, affording a safe and secure harbour for vessels of the largest burthen, which may lie along the wharf.

WASHINGTON, the chief town in the county of Wilkes, is situated in latitude 33° 22′, about 50 miles northwest of Augusta. It had, in 1788, a court house, gaol, 34 dwelling houses, and an academy, whose funds amounted to about 800l. sterling, and the number of students to between 60 and 70.

The town of LOUISVILLE, which is designed as the future seat of government in this state, has been laid out on the bank of Ogeechee river, about 70 miles from its mouth, but is not yet built.

SOIL, PRODUCTIONS, &c.] The soil and its fertility are various, according to situation and different improvement. The islands on the sea board, in their natural state, are covered with a plentiful growth of pine, oak, and hiccory, live oak, (an uncommonly hard and a very valuable wood,) and some red cedar. The soil is a mixture of sand and black mould, making what is commonly called a grey soil. A considerable part of it, particularly that whereon grow the oak, hic­cory, and live oak, is very rich, and yields, on cultivation, good crops of indigo, cotton, corn and potatoes. These islands are surrounded by navigable creeks, between which and the main land is a large ex­tent of salt marsh, fronting the whole state, not less, on an average, than 4 or 5 miles in breadth, intersected with creeks in various direc­tions, admitting, through the whole, an inland navigation, between the islands and main land, from the northeast to the southeast corners of the state. The east sides of these islands are, for the most part, clean, hard, sandy beaches, exposed to the wash of the ocean. Between these islands are the entrances of the rivers from the interior country, winding through the low salt marshes, and delivering their waters into the sounds, which form capacious harbours of from three to eight miles over, and which communicate with each other by par­allel salt creeks. The principal islands are Skidaway, Wassaw, Ossa­h [...]w, St. Catharine's, Sapelo, Frederica, Jekyl, Cumberland and Amelia.

The soil of the main land, adjoining the marshes and creeks, is near­ly of the same quality with that of the islands; except that which borders on those rivers and creeks which stretch far back into the country. On these, immediately after you leave the salts, begin the valuable rice swamps, which, on cultivation, afford the present princi­pal staple of commerce. The most of the rice lands lie on rivers, which, as far as the tide flows, are called tide lands; or on creeks and particular branches of water, flowing in some deeper or lower parts of the lands, which are called inland swamps, and extend back in the country from 15 to 25 miles, beyond which very little rice is planted, though it will grow exceedingly well, as experiment has proved, 120 miles back from the sea. The intermediate lands, between these creeks and rivers, are of an inferior quality, being of a grey soil, cov­ered [Page 616] chiefly with pine, and a sort of wild grass and small reads, which afford a large range of feeding ground for stock both summer and winter. Here and there are interspersed oak and hiccory ridges, which are of a better soil, and produce good crops of corn and indigo, but these are very little elevated above the circumjacent lands. The lands adjoining the rivers, and, for an hundred miles in a direct line from the sea, continue a breadth from 2 to 3 or 4 miles, and wherever, in that distance, you find a piece of high land that extends to the bank of the river on one side, you may expect to find the low­er or swamp ground proportionably wide on the opposite side of the riv­er. This seems to be an invariable rule till you come to that part where the river cuts and mountains.

The soil between the rivers, after you leave the sea board and the edge of the swamps, at the distance of 20 or 30 miles, changes from a grey to a red colour, on which grows plenty of oak and hiccory, with a considerable intermixture of pine. In some places it is grav­elly, but fertile, and so continues for a number of miles, gradually deepening the reddish colour of the earth, till it changes into what is called the Mulatto soil, consisting of a black mould and red earth. The composition is darker or lighter according as there is a larger or smaller portion of the black or red earth in it. The mulatto lands are generally strong, and yield large crops of wheat, tobacco, corn, &c. To this kind of land succeeds by turns a soil nearly black and very rich, on which grow large quantities of black walnut, mulberry, &c. This succession of different soils continues uniform and regular, though there are some large veins of all the different soils intermixed; and what is more remarkable, this succession, in the order mentioned, stretches across this state nearly parallel with the sea coast, and ex­tends through the several states, nearly in the same direction, to the banks of Hudson's river. In this state are produced, by culture, rice, indigo, cotton, silk, (though not in large quantities) Indian corn, po­tatoes, oranges, figs, pomegranates, &c. Rice, at present, is the staple commodity; and as a small proportion only of the rice ground is un­der cultivation, the quantity raised in future must be much greater than at present. But the rapid increase of the inhabitants, chiefly by immigrations, whose attention is turned to the raising of tobacco, and the vast extent of land, with a richness of soil suited to the culture of that plant, renders it probable, that tobacco will shortly become the staple in this state. Cotton was formerly planted only by the poor­er classes of people, and that only for family use. They planted of two kinds, the annual and the West Indian; the former is low and planted every year. The balls of this are very large, and the phlox long, strong and perfectly white. The latter is a tall perennial plant, the stalk somewhat shrubby, several of which rise up from the root for several years successively, the stems of the former year being kill­ed by the winter frosts. The balls of West India cotton are not quite as large as the other, but the phlox or wool is long, extremely fine, silky and white. A plantation of this kind will last several years, with moderate labour and care. The culture of cotton is now much more attended to—several indigo planters have converted their plantations into cotton fields. The tobacco lands are equally well adapted to wheat, which may hereafter make an important article of commerce.

[Page 617] On the dry plains, grow large crops of sweet potatoes, which are found so afford a wholesome nourishment, and from which is made, by distillation, a kind of whisky, tolerably good, but inferior to that [...] of rye. It is by properly macerating and washing this root that a sediment or starch is made, which has obtained the name of [...] and answers all the purposes of the India sago.

Most of the tropical fruits would flourish in this state with proper [...]. The rice plant has been transplanted, and also the tea plant, of which such immense quantities are consumed in the United States, was introduced into Georgia, by Mr. Samuel Bowen, about the year 17 [...] from India. The seed was disseminated, and the plant now [...], without cultivation, in most of the fenced lots in Savannah.

From many considerations we, may perhaps venture to predict, that the south western part of the state, and the parts of East and West Florida, which lie adjoining, will, in some future time, become the [...]yard of America.

REMARKABLE SPRING.] In the county of Wilkes, within a mile and a half of the town of Washington, is a medicinal spring, which rises from a hollow tree, four or five feet in length. The in­side of the tree is covered with a coat of matter, an inch thick, and the leaves around the spring are incrusted with a substances as white as snow. It is said to be a sovereign remedy for the scurvy, scrofulous disorders, consumptions, gouts, and every other disease arising from honours in the blood.—A person, who had a severe rheumatism in his right arm, having, in the space of ten minutes, drank two quarts of the [...], experienced a momentary chill, and was then thrown into a perspiration, which, in a few hours, left him entirely free from pain, and in perfect health.

This spring, situated in a fine healthy part of the state, in the neighbourhood of Washington, where are excellent accommodations, will no doubt prove a pleasant and salutary place of resort for inva­lids from the maritime and unhealthy parts of this and the neigh­bouring states.

CURIOSITIES.] One of the greatest curiosities in this state is the bank of oyster shells in the vicinity of Augusta, 90 miles from the sea, already described page 165.

COMMERCE, MANUFACTURES AND AGRICULTURE.} The chief articles of export are rice, tobacco, (of which the county of Wilkes only exported in 1788 about 3000 hogsheads) in­digo, sago, lumber of various kinds, naval stores, leather, deer skins, snake root, myrtle and bees wax, corn, and live stock. The planters and farmers raise large stocks of cattle, from 100 to 1500 head, and some more.

The value, in sterling money, of the exports of Georgia, for eight­ [...] years, from 1755 to 1772, was as follows:

  £
1755, 15,744
1756, 16,776
1757, 15,649
1758, 8,613
1759, 12,694
1760, 20,852
1761, 15,870
1762, 27,021
1763, 47,551
1764, 55,025
1765, 73,426
1766, 81,228
1767, 67,092
1768, 91,284
1769, 86,485
1770, 99,383
1771, 106,337
1772, 121,677

[Page 618] Statement of the number of vessels cleared out of Georgia, from 1755 to 1772.

Square rigged. Sloops. tons.
1755, 9 43 1,899
1756, 7 35 1,799
1757, 11 33 1,559
1758, 4 17 665
1759, 13 35 1,981
1760, 7 30 1,457
1761, 9 36 1,604
1762, 22 35 2,784
1763, 34 58 4,761
1764, 36 79 5,586
1765, 54 94 7,685
1766, 68 86 9,974
1767, 62 92 8,465
1768, 77 109 10,406
1769, 87 94 9,276
1770, 73 113 10,514
1771, 64 121 9,553
1772, 84 133 11,246

The amount of exports in the year ending September 30th, 17 [...], was 491,472 dollars. In return for the enumerated exports are im­ported West India goods, teas, wines, various articles of clothing, any dry goods of all kinds—From the northern states, cheese, fish, potatoes, apples, cyder and shoes. The imports and exports of this state are principally to and from Savannah, which has a fine harbour, and is a place where the principal commercial business of the state is transacted. The trade with the Indians in furs and skins was very con­siderable before the war, but has since been interrupted by the wars in which they have been involved. The manufactures of this state have hitherto been very inconsiderable, if we except indigo, silk and sago. The manner in which the indigo is cultivated and manufactured is as follows.—The ground, which must be a strong rich soil, is thrown into beds of 7 or 8 feet wide, after having been made very mellow, and is then raked till it is fully pulverized. The seed is then sown, in April, in rows at such a distance as conveniently to admit of hoeing between them. In July the first crop is fit to cut, being commonly two and a half feet high. It is then thrown into vats, constructed for the purpose, and steeped about 30 hours; after which the liquor is drawn off into other vats, where it is beat, as they call it, by which means it is thrown into much such a state of agitation as cream is by churning. After this process, lime water is put into the liquor, which causes the particles of indigo to settle at the bottom. The liquor is then drawn off, and the sediment, which is the indigo, is taken out and spread on cloths, and partly dried; it is then put into boxes and pressed, and while it is yet soft, cut into square pieces, which are thrown into the sun to dry, and then put up in casks for the market. They have commonly three cuttings a season. A middling crop for 30 acres in 1300 pounds.

The culture of silk and the manufacture of sago are at present but little attended to. The people in the lower part of this state manu­facture none of their own clothing for themselves or their negroes. For almost every articles of their wearing apparel, as well as for their husbandry tools, they depend on their merchants, who import them from Great Britain and the northern states. In the upper parts of the country, however, the inhabitants manufacture the chief part of their clothing from cotton, hemp and flax.

CHARACTER AND MANNERS.] No general character will apply to the inhabitants at large. Collected from different parts of the world, as interest, necessity or inclination led them, their character [Page 619] [...] manners must of course partake of all the varieties which distin­guish the several states and kingdoms from whence they came. There [...] so little uniformity, that it is difficult to trace any governing prin­ciples among them. An aversion to labour is too predominant, [...] in part to the relaxing heat of the climate, and partly to the [...] of necessity to excite industry. An open and friendly hospitali­ty particularly to strangers, is an ornamental characteristic of a great [...] of this people.

Their diversions are various. With some, dancing is a favourite [...]. Others take a fancied pleasure at the gaming table, which, however, frequently terminates in the ruin of their happiness, [...], and constitutions. In the upper counties, horse racing and [...] sighting prevail, two cruel diversions imported from Virginia, and the Carolinas, from whence those who practice them principally [...]grated. But the most rational and universal amusement is hunt­ [...] and for this Georgia is particularly well calculated, as the woods [...] with plenty of deer, racoons, rabits, wild turkies, and other [...]; at the same time the woods are so thin and free from obstruc­tions, that you may generally ride half speed in chace without danger. [...] this amusement pleasure and profit are blended. The exercise, more than any other, contributes to health, fits for activity in business and expertness in war; the game also affords them a palatable food, and the skins a profitable article of commerce.

RELIGION.] The inhabitants of this state, who profess the chris­ [...], religion, are of the Presbyterian, Episcopalian, Baptist and [...]thodist denominations. They have but a few regular ministers among them.

CONSTITUTION.] The present constitution of this state was armed and established in the year 1789, and is nearly upon the plan [...] the constitution of the United States.

STATE OF LITERATURE.] The literature of this state, which is yet [...] its infancy, is commencing on a plan which affords the most flat­ [...]ing prospects. It seems to have been the design of the legislature of this state, as far as possible, to unite their literary concerns, and pro­vide for them in common, that the whole might feel the benefit and no part be neglected or left a prey to party rage, private prejudices and contentions, and consequent ignorance, their inseparable at­tendant. For this purpose, the literature of this state, like its policy, appears to be considered as one object, and in the same man­ner subject to common and general regulations for the good of the whole. The charter containing their present system of education, was passed in the year 1785. A college, with ample and liberal en­dowments, is instituted in Louisville, a high and healthy part of the country, near the center of the state. There is also provision made for the institution of an academy, in each county in the state, to be supported from the same funds, and considered as parts and mem­ber of the same institution, under the general superintendence and [...]ction of a president and board of trustees, appointed, for their literacy acomplishments, from the different parts of the state invest­ed with the customary powers of corporations. The institution [...] composed, is denominated 'The University of Georgia.'

That this body of literati, to whom is intrusted the direction of the general literature of the state, may not be so detached and indepen­dent, [Page 620] as not to possess the confidence of the state; and in order to secure the attention and patronage of the principal officers of govern­ment, the governor and council, the speaker of the house of assembly, and the chief justice of the state, are associated with the board of trustees, in some of the great and more solemn duties of their offices, such as making the laws, appointing the president, settling the prop­erty, and instituting academies. Thus associated, they are denomi­nated 'The Senate of the University,' and are to hold a stated, an­nual meeting, at which the governor of the state presides.

The senate appoint a board of commissioners in each county, for the particular management and direction of the academy, and the other schools in each county, who are to receive their instructions from, and are accountable to the senate. The rector of each academy is an officer of the university, to be appointed by the president, with the advice of the trustees, and commissioned under the public seal, and is to attend with the other officers at the annual meeting of the senate, to deliberate on the general interests of literature, and to de­termine on the course of instruction for the year, throughout the uni­versity. The president has the general charge and oversight of the whole, and is from time to time to visit them, to examine into their order and performances.

The funds for the support of their institution are principally in lands, amounting in the whole to about fifty thousand acres, a great part of which is of the best quality, and at present very valuable. There are also nearly six thousand pounds sterling in bonds, houses and town lots in the town of Augusta. Other public property to the amount of 1000l. in each county, has been set apart for the purposes of building and furnishing their respective academies.

INDIANS.] The Muskogee or Creek Indians inhabit the middle parts of the state, and are the most numerous tribe of Indians of any within the limits of the United States. Their whole number some years since was 17,280, of which 5,860 were fighting men. They are composed of various tribes, who, after bloody wars, thought it good policy to unite and support themselves against the Chactaws, &c. They consist of the Appalachies, Alibamas, Abecas, Cawittaws, Coosas, Conshacks, Coosactees, Chacsihoomas, Natchez, Oconies, Oakmulgies, Okohoy [...], Pakanas, Taensas, Talepoosas, Weetumkas, and some others. Their union has rendered them victorious over the Chactaws, and formidable to all the nations around them. They are a well made, expert, hardy, sagacious, politic people, extremely jealous of their rights, and averse to parting with their lands. They have abundance of tame cattle and swine, turkeys, ducks and other poultry; they cultivate tobacco, rice, Indian corn, potatoes, beans, peas, cabbage, melons, and have plenty of peaches, plumps, grapes, strawberries, and other fruits. They are faithful friends, but inveter­ate enemies—hospitable to strangers, and honest and fair in their dealings. No nation has a more contemptible opinion of the white men's faith in general than these people, yet they place great confi­dence in the United States, and wish to agree with them upon a per­manent boundary, over which the southern states shall not trespass.

The country which they claim is bounded northward by about the 34th degree of latitude; and extends from the Tombeckbee, or Mo­bile river, to the Atlantic ocean, though they have ceded a part of [Page 621] this tract on the sea coast, by different treaties, to the state of Georgia. Their principal towns lie in latitude 32° and longitude 11° 20′ from Philadelphia. They are settled in a hilly but not mountainous coun­try. The soil is fruitful in a high degree, and well watered, abound­ing in creeks and rivulets, from whence they are called the Creek In­dians. *

The Chactaws, or flat heads, inhabit a very fine and extensive tract of hilly country, with large and fertile plains intervening, between the Alabama and Missisippi rivers, in the western part of this state. This nation had, not many years ago, 43 towns and villages, in three divisions, containing 12,123 souls, of which 4,041 were fighting men.

The Chicasaws are settled on the head branches of the Tombeckbee, Mobile and Yazoo rivers, in the northwest corner of the state. Their country is an extensive plain, tolerably well watered from springs, and of a pretty good soil. They have seven towns, the central one of which is in latitude 34° 23′, and longitude 14° 30′ west. The number of souls in this nations have been formerly reckoned at 1725, of which 575 were fighting men.

HISTORY.] The settlement of a colony between the rivers Savan­nah and Alatamaha, was meditated in England in 1732, for the accom­modation of poor people in Great Britain and Ireland, and for the further security of Carolina. Private compassion and public spirit conspired to promote the benevolent design.—Humane and opulent men suggested a plan of transporting a number of indigent families, to this part of America, free of expense. For this purpose they ap­plied to the King, George the II. and obtained from him letters pat­ [...], bearing date June 9th, 1732, for legally carrying into execution what they had generously projected. They called the new province GEORGIA, in honor of the King, who encouraged the plan. A cor­poration, consisting of 21 persons, was constituted by the name of the trustees, for settling and establishing the colony of Geor­gia; which was separated from Carolina by the river Savannah.—The trustees having first set an example themselves, by largely contrib­uting to the scheme, undertook also to solicit benefactions from others, and to apply the money towards clothing, arming, purchasing utensils for cultivation, and transporting such poor people as should consent to go over and begin a settlement. They did not confine their charita­ [...] views to the subjects of Britain alone, but wisely opened a door, for the indigent and oppressed protestants of other nations. To pre­vent a misapplication of the money, it was deposited in the bank of England.

About the middle of July, 1732, the trustees for Georgia, held their first meeting, and chose Lord Percival president of the corporation—and ordered a common seal to be made.—In November following, 116 [Page 622] settlers embarked for Georgia, to be conveyed thither free of expense, furnished with every thing requisite for building and for cultivating the soil. James Oglethorpe, one of the trustees, and an active pro­moter of the settlement, embarked as the head and director of these settlers. They arrived at Charleston early in the next year, where they met a friendly reception from the governor and council. Mr. Oglethorpe, accompanied by William Bull, shortly after his arrival, visited Georgia, and after reconnoitering the country, marked the spot on which Savannah now stands, as the fittest to begin a settle­ment. Here they accordingly began and built a small fort, and a num­ber of small huts for their defence and accommodation.—Such of the settlers as were able to bear arms, were embodied, and well ap­pointed with officers, arms and ammunition.—A treaty of friendship was concluded between the settlers and their neighbours, and the Creek Indians, and every thing wore the aspect of peace and future prosperity.

In the mean time the trustees of Georgia had been employed in framing a plan of settlement, and establishing such public regulations as they judged most proper for answering the great end of the cor­poration. In the general plan they considered each inhabitant both as a planter and a soldier, who must be provided with arms and am­munition for defence, as well as with tools and utensils for cultivation. As the strength of the province was the object in view, they agreed to establish such tenures for holding lands in it as they judged most favourable for a military establishment. Each tract of land granted was considered as a military fief, for which the possessor was to ap­pear in arms, and take the field, when called upon for the public de­fence. To prevent large tracts from falling, in process of time, to one person, they agreed to grant their lands in tail male in preference to tail general. On the termination of the estate in tail male, the lands were to revert to the trust; and such lands thus reverting were to be granted again to such persons, as the common council of the trust should judge most advantageous for the colony; only the trus­tees in such a case were to pay special regard to the daughters of such persons as had made improvements on their lots, especially when not already provided for by marriage. The wives of such persons as should survive them, were to be, during their lives, entitled to the mansion house, and one half of the lands improved by their husbands. No man was to be permitted to depart the province without license. If any of the lands granted by the trustees shall not be cultivated, cleared, and fenced round about with a worm fence, or pales, six feet high, within eighteen years from the date of the grant, such part was to revert to the trust, and the grant with respect to it to be void. All forfeitures for nonresidences, high treasons, felonies, &c. were to the trustees for the use and benefit of the colony. The use of negroes was to be absolutely prohibited, and also the importation of rum. None of the colonists were to be permitted to trade with the In­dians, but such as should obtain a special license for that purpose.

These were some of the fundamental regulations established by the trustees of Georgia, and perhaps the imagination could scarcely have framed a system of rules worse adapted to the circumstances and sit­uation of the poor settlers, and of more pernicious consequence to the prosperity of the province. Yet, although the trustees were great­ly [Page 623] mistaken, with respect to the plan of settlement, it must be ac­knowledged their views were generous. As the people sent out by them were the poor and unfortunate, who were to be provided with necessaries at their public store, they received their lands upon con­dition of cultivation, and (by their personal residence) of defence. Silk and wine being the chief articles intended to be raised, they judged negroes were not requisite for these purposes. As the colony was designed to be a barrier to South Carolina, against the Spanish settlement at Augustine, they imagined that negroes would rather weaken then strengthen it, and that such poor colonists would run in debt, and ruin themselves by purchasing them. Rum was judged pernicious to health, and ruinous to the infant settlement. A free trade with Indians was a thing that might have a tendency to involve the people in quarrels and troubles with the powerful savages, and expose them to danger and destruction. Such were probably the motives which induced those humane and generous persons to im­pose such foolish and ridiculous restrictions on their colony. For by granting their small estates in tail male, they drove the settlers from Georgia, who soon found that abundance of lands could be obtained in America upon a larger scale, and on much better terms. By the pro­hibition of negroes, they rendered it impracticable in such a climate to make any impression on the thick forests, Europeans being utterly unqualified for the heavy task. By their discharging a trade with the West Indies, they deprived the colonists of an excellent and con­venient market for their lumber, of which they had abundance on their lands. The trustees like other distant legislators, who framed their and mistakes; and however good their design, their rules were stand improper and impracticable. The Carolinians plainly per­ceived that they would prove insurmountable obstacles to the progress and prosperity of the colony, and therefore from motives of pity be­gan to invite the poor Georgians to come over Savannah river, and little in Carolina, being convinced that they could never succeed under such impolitic and oppressive restrictions.

Besides the large sums of money which they trustees had expended for the settlement of Georgia, the parliament had also granted during the two last years 36,000l. towards carrying into execution the hu­mane purpose of the corporation. But after the representation and memorial from the legislature of Carolina reached Britain, the nation considered Georgia to be of the utmost importance to the British set­tlements in America, and began to make still more vigorous efforts for in speedy population. The first embarkations of poor people from England, being collected from towns and cities, were found equally ille and useless members of society abroad as they had been at home. An hardy and bold race of men, inured to rural labour and [...]tigue, they were persuaded would be much better adapted both for cultivation and defence. To find men possessed of these qualifications, they turned their eyes to Germany and the Highlands of Scotland, and resolved to send over a number of Scotch and German labourers to their infant province. When they published their terms at Inver­ness, an hundred and thirty Highlanders immediately accepted them, and were transported to Georgia. A township on the river Alatama­ha, [Page 624] which was considered as the boundary between the British and Spanish territories, was allotted for the Highlanders, in which dan­gerous situation they settled, and built a town, which they called New Inverness. About the same time an hundred and seventy Ger­mans embarked with James Oglethorpe, and were fixed in another quarter; so that, in the space of three years, Georgia received above four hundred British subjects, and about an hundred and seventy foreigners. Afterwards, several adventurers, both from Scotland and Germany, followed their countrymen, and added further strength to the province, and the trustees flattered themselves with the hope of soon seeing it in a promising condition.

Their hopes, however, were vain. Their injudicious regulations and restrictions—the wars in which they were involved with the Span­iards and Indians—and the frequent insurrections among themselves, threw the colony into a state of confusion and wretchedness too grant for human nature to endure. Their oppressed situation was represent­ed to the trustees by repeated complaints; till at length, finding that the province languished under their care, and weary with the com­plaints of the people, they, in the year 1752, sur [...]endered their charter to the king, and it was made a royal government. In consequence of which, his majesty appointed John Reynolds, an officer of the nave, governor of the province, and a legislature, similar to that of the other royal governments in America, was established in it. Great had been the expense which the mother country had already incurred, besides private benefactions, for supporting this colony; and small had been the returns yet made by it. The vestiges of cultivation were scarce­ly perceptible in the forests, and in England all commerce with it was neglected and despised. At this time the whole annual exports of Georgia did not amount to 10 000l. sterling. Though the people were now favoured with the same liberties and privileges enjoyed by their neighbours under the royal care, yet several years more elapsed before the value of the lands in Georgia was known, and that spirit of industry broke out in it, which afterwards diffused its happy influ­ence over the country.

In the year 1740, the Rev. George Whitefield founded and orphan house academy in Georgia, about 12 miles from Savannah.—For the support of this, in his Itinerations, he collected large sums of money of all denominations of christians, both in England and America. A part of this money was expended in erecting proper buildings to accommodate the students, and a part in supporting them. In 1768, it was proposed that the orphan house should be erected into a college. Whereupon Mr. Whitefield applied to the crown for a charter. In consequence of some dispute, the affair of a charter was given up, and Mr. Whitefield made his assignment of the orphan house in trust to the Countess of Huntington. Mr. Whitefield died at Newbury Port, in New England, September [...]th, 1770, in the 56th year of his age and was buried under the Presbyterian church in that place.

Soon after his death, a charter was granted to his institutions in Georgia, and the Rev. Mr. Percy was appointed president of the college. Mr. Percy accordingly came over to execute his office, but unfortu­nately, on the 30th of May, 1775, the orphan house building caught fire, and was entirely consumed, except the two wings, which are still remaining. The American war soon after came on, and put every thing [Page 625] into confusion, and the funds have ever since lain in an unproductive state. It is probable that the college estate, by the consent of the countess of Huntington, may hereafter be so incorporated with the university of Georgia, as to subserve the original and pious purposes of its founder.

From the time Georgia became a royal government, in 1752, till the peace of Paris, in 1763, she struggled under many difficulties, arising from the want of credit from friends, and the frequent molestations of enemies. The good effects of the peace were sensibly felt in the province of Georgia. From this time it began to flourish, under the fatherly care of Governor Wright. To form a judgment of the rap­id growth of the colony, we need only attend to its exports, in the foregoing table.

During the late war, Georgia was overrun by the British troops, and the inhabitants were obliged to flee into the neighbouring states for safety. The sufferings and losses of her citizens were as great, in proportion to their numbers and wealth, as in any of the states. Since the peace, the progress of the population of this state has been rapid. Its growth in improvement and population, has been checked by the hostile irruptions of the Creek Indians, which have been frequent, and very distressing to the frontier inhabitants. Treaties have been [...], and a cessation of hostilities agreed to between the parties; and it is expected that a permanent peace will soon be concluded and [...]quillity restored to the state. See Hewett's Hist. S. Carolina and Georgia.

Spanish Dominions.
EAST AND WEST FLORIDA.

Length 600 Miles. between 25° and 31° N. Lat.
Breadth 130 Miles. 5° and 17° W. Lon. from Philadelphia.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Georgia; east, by the Atlantic ocean; south, by the Gulf of Mexico▪ west, by the Missisippi; lying in the form of an L.

RIVERS, LAKES AND SPRINGS.] Among the rivers that fall into [...] Atlantic, St. John's and Indian rivers are the principal. St. [...] river rises in or near a large swamp, in the heart of East Flor­ [...] and pursues a northern course, in a broad, navigable stream, which in several places spreads into broad bays or lakes. Lake [...], which is only a dilatation of the river, is a beautiful piece of [...], generally about 15 miles broad, and from 15 to 20 feet deep. It is ornamented with several charming islands, one of which is a [...] orange grove, interspersed with magnolias and palm trees­ [...] Long Lake, which is two miles long and four wide, which [Page 626] communicates with St. John's river by a small creek, is a vast foun­tain of warm or rather hot mineral water, issuing from a high bank on the river. It boils up with great force, forming immediately a vast circular bason, capacious enough for several shallops to ride in, and runs with rapidity into the river, three or four hundred yards distance. The water is perfectly clear; and the prodigious number and variety of fish in it, though many feet deep, appear as plainly as though lying on a table before your eyes. The water has a disagreea­ble taste, and smells like bilge water. This river enters into the At­lantic, north of St. Augustine.

Indian river rises a short distance from the sea coast, and runs from north to south, forming a kind of inland passage for many miles along the coast.

Seguana, Apalachicola, Chatahatchi, Escambia, Mobile, Pascagoula and Pearl rivers, all rise in Georgia, and run southerly into the Gulf of Mexico.

CLIMATE.] Very little different from that of Georgia.

SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.] There are, in this country, a great variety of soils.—The eastern part of it, near and about St. Augustine, is far the most unfruitful; yet even here two crops of Indian corn a year are produced. The banks of the rivers which water the Flori­das, and the parts contiguous, are of a superior quality, and well a­dapted to the culture of rice and corn, while the more interior country, which is high and pleasant, abounds with wood of almost every kind; particularly white and red oak, live oak, laurel magnolia, pine hicco­ry, cypress, red and white cedar. The live oaks, though not tall, con­tain a prodigious quantity of timber. The trunk is generally from 12 to 20 feet in circumference, and rises 10 or 12 feet from the earth, and then branches into 4 or 5 great limbs, which grow in nearly a hori­zontal direction▪ forming a gentle curve. "I have stepped," says Bartram, * "above 50 paces, on a straight line, from the trunk of one of these trees to the extremity of the limbs." They are ever green, and the wood almost incorruptible. They bear a great quantity of small a­corns, which is agreeable food, when roasted, and from which the Indians extract a sweet oil, which they use in cooking homminy and rice.

The laurel magnolia is the most beautiful among the trees of the forest, and is usually 100 feet high, though some are much higher. The trunk is perfectly erect, rising in the form of a beautiful column, and supporting a head like an obtuse cone. The flowers are on the extremities of the branches—are large, white, and expanded like a rose, and are the largest and most complete of any yet known; when fully expanded▪ they are from 6 to 9 inches diameter, and have a most delicious fragrance. The cypress is the largest of the American trees. "I have seen trunks of these trees," says Bartram, "that would meas­ure 8, 10 and 12 feet in diameter, for 40 and 50 feet straight shaft." The trunks make excellent shingles, boards, and other timber; and, when hollowed, make durable and convenient canoes. "When the planters fell these mighty trees, they raise a stage round them, as high as to reach above the buttresses; on this stage 8 or 10 negroes ascend with their axes, and fall to work round its trunk."

The intervals between the hilly part of this country are extremely rich, and produce spontaneously the fruits and vegetables that are com­mon [Page 627] to Georgia and the Carolinas. But this country is rendered val­ [...]ble in a peculiar manner, by the extensive ranges for cattle.

CHIEF TOWNS.] ST. AUGUSTINE, the capital of East Florida, is [...] on the sea coast, latitude 29° 45′—is of an oblong figure, and intersected by four streets, which cut each other at right angles. The town is fortified with bastions, and enclosed with a ditch. It is like­wise defended by a castle, called Fort St. John, which is well ap­pointed as to ordnance. The north and south breakers, at the en­trance of the harbour, form two channels, whose bars have eight feet water.

The principal town in West Florida is PENSACOLA, latitude 30° 22′. It lies along the beach, and, like St. Augustine, is of an oblong form. The water approach to the town, except for small vessels, is obstruct­ed by a low and sandy shore. The bay, however, on which the town lands, forms a very commodious harbour, and vessels may ride here secure from every wind. The exports from this town, consisting of [...], logwood, dying stuff, and silver dollars, amounted, while in the possession of the British, to 63,000l. annually; the average value of [...]ports, for 3 years, from Great Britain, was 97,000l.

HISTORY.] The Floridas have experienced the vicissitudes of [...], and frequently changed masters, belonging alternately to the French and Spaniards. West Florida, as far east as Perdido river, was owned and occupied by the French; the remainder, and all East Florida by the Spaniards, previous to their being ceded to the English [...] the peace of 1763. The English divided this country into East and West Florida. They were ceded by Spain to the English at the peace of 1763. During the last war they were reduced by the arms of his Catholic majesty, and guaranteed to the crown of Spain by [...] definitive treaty of 1783.

LOUISIANA.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED by the Missisippi east; by the Gulf of Mexico south; by New Mexico [...]st; and runs indefinitely north. Under the French government Louisiana included both sides of the Missisippi, from its mouth to the [...]mo [...]s, and back from the river, east and west indefinitely.

RIVERS.] It is intersected by a number of fine rivers, among which are St. Francis, which empties into the Missisippi, at Kappas [...] Fort, navigable about 250 or three hundred miles; its course is nearly parallel with the Missisippi, and from 20 to 30 miles distant [...] it. The Natchitoches, which empties into the Missisippi above [...] Coupee, and the Adayes or Mexicano river, emptying into the [...] of Mexico, and the river Rouge, on which, it is well known, [...] [...] rich silver mines as any in Mexico. This is supposed to be one principal reason, why the exclusive navigation of the Missisippi has [...] so much insisted on by Spain.

CAPITAL.] NEW ORLEANS. It stands on the east side of the Missisippi, 105 miles from its mouth, in latitude 30° 2′ north. In the [...]ning of the last year it contained about 1100 houses, seven eighths [Page 628] of which were consumed by fire, in the space of five hours, on the 19th of March, 1788. It is now fast rebuilding. Its advantages for trade are very great. Situated on a noble river, in a fertile and healthy country, within a week's sail of Mexico, by sea, and as near to the British, French and Spanish West India islands, with a moral certain­ty of its becoming the general receptacle for the produce of that ex­tensive and valuable country, on the Missisippi and Ohio, these cir­cumstances are sufficient to ensure its future growth and commercial importance.

RELIGION, GOVERNMENT, &c.] The greater part of the white in­habitants are Roman Catholics. They are governed by a Viceroy from Spain, and the number of inhabitants is unknown.

CLIMATE, SOIL AND PRODUCE.] Louisiana is agreeably situated between the extremes of heat and cold. Its climate varies as it ex­tends towards the north. The southern parts, lying within the reach of the refreshing breezes from the sea, are not scorched like those un­der the same latitudes in Africa; and its northern regions are colder than those of Europe under the same parallels, with a wholesome se­rene air. To judge of the produce to be expected from the soil of Louisiana, let us turn our eyes to Egypt, Arabia Felix, Persia, India, China and Japan, all lying in corresponding latitudes. Of these, China alone has a tolerable government; and yet it must be acknowl­edged they all are, or have been, famous for their riches and fertility. From the favourableness of the climate, two annual crops of Indian corn may be produced; and the soil, with little cultivation, would furnish grain of every kind in the greatest abundance. Their timber is as fine as any in the world, and the quantities of live oak, ash, mul­berry, walnut, cherry, cypress and cedar, are astonishing. The neigh­bourhood of the Missisippi, besides, furnishes the richest fruits in great variety; the soil is particularly adapted for hemp, flax and to­bacco; and indigo is at this time a staple commodity, which common­ly yields the planter three or four cuttings a year. In a word, what­ever is rich and rare in the most desirable climates in Europe, seems to be the spontaneous production of this delightful country. The Missisippi and the neighbouring lakes, furnish in great plenty several forts of fish, particularly perch, pike, sturgeon and eels.

In the northern part of Louisiana, 45 miles below the mouth of the Ohio river, on the west bank of the Missisippi, settlement i [...] commencing, conducted by Colonel Morgan of New Jersey, under the patronage of the Spanish king. The spot on which the city in proposed to be built is called New Madrid, after the capital of Spain, and is in north latitude 36° 30′.

The limits of the new city of Madrid, are to extend four miles south, and two miles west from the river; so as to cross a beautiful, liv­ing▪ deep lake, of the purest spring water one hundred yards wide, and several miles in length, emptying itself, by a constant rapid narrow stream, through the center of the city. The banks of this lake, which is called St. Ann [...]s, are high, beautiful, and pleasant; the wa­ter deep, clear, and sweet; the bottom a clear sand, free from woods, shrubs, or other vegetables, and well stored with fish. On each side of this delightful lake, streets are to be laid out, 100 feet wide, and a road to be continued round it, of the same breadth; and the streets are directed to be preserved forever, for the health and pleasure of the [Page 629] citizens. A street 120 feet wide, on the banks of the Missisippi, is laid out; and the trees are directed to be preserved for the same pur­pose. Twelve acres, in a central part of the city, are to be reserved in like manner, to be ornamented, regulated, and improved by the magistracy of the city for public walks; and 40 half acre lots for oth­er public uses; and one lot of twelve acres for the King's use.

New Madrid, from its local situation and adventitious privileges, is in prospect of being the great emporium of the western country, un­less the free navigation of the Missisippi should be opened to the United States. And even should this desired event take place, which probably will not without a rupture with Spain, this must be a place of great trade. For here will naturally center the immense quanti­ties of produce that will be borne down the Illinois, the Missisippi, the Ohio, and their various branches; and if the carriers can find as good a market for their cargoes here, as at New Orleans or the West Indies, and can procure the articles they desire, they will gladly save themselves the difficulties and dangers of navigating the long Missi­sippi.

The country in the vicinity of this intended city is represented as excellent, in many parts beyond description. The natural growth consists of mulberry, locust, sassafras, walnut, hiccory, oak, ash, dog wood, &c. with one or more grape vines running up almost every [...]; the grapes yield, from experiment, good red wine in plenty, and with little labour. In some of the low grounds grow large cypress trees. The country is interspersed with prairies and now and then a [...] patch of 100, and some of 1000 acres. These prairies have [...] trees on them, but are fertile in grass, flowering plants, strawber­ries, and, when cultivated produce, good crops of wheat, barley, In­dian corn, flax, hemp and tobacco, and are easily tilled. The climate is said to be favourable for health and to the culture of fruits of vari­ous kinds, and particularly for garden vegetables. Iron and lead [...] and salt springs, it is asserted, are found in such plenty as to af­ford and abundant supply of these necessary articles. The banks of the Missisippi, for many leagues in extent, commencing about 20 miles above the mouth of Ohio, are a continued chain of lime stone. A [...] tract of high, rich, level land, S. W. W. and N. W. of New Madrid, about 25 miles wide, extends quite to the river St. Francis.

It has been supposed by some that all settlers who go beyond the Missisippi, will be forever lost to the United States. There is, I be­lieve, little danger of this, provided they are not provoked to with­draw their friendship. The emigrants will be made up of the citizens of the United States. They will carry along with them their man­ [...] and customs, their habits of government, religion and education; and as they are to be indulged with religious freedom, and with the privilege of making their own laws, and of conducting education up­on their own plans, these American habits will undoubtedly be cher­ished. If so they will be Americans in fact, though nominally the subjects of Spain.

It is true Spain will draw a revenue from them, but in return they will enjoy peculiar commercial advantages, the benefit of which will be experienced by the United States, and perhaps be an ample com­pensation for the loss of so many citizens as may migrate thither. In [...], this settlement, if conducted with judgment and prudence, may [Page 630] be mutually serviceable both to Spain and the United States. It may prevent jealousies—lessen national prejudices—promote religious tol­eration—preserve harmony, and be a medium of trade reciprocally advantageous.

Besides, it is well known that empire has been travelling from east to west. Probably her last and broadest seat will be America. Here the sciences and the arts of civilized life are to receive their highest improvements. Here civil and religious liberty are to flourish, un­checked by the cruel hand of civil or ecclesiastical tyranny. Here genius, aided by all the improvements of former ages, is to be ex­erted in humanizing mankind, in expanding and enriching their minds with religious and philosophical knowledge, and in planning and executing a form of government, which shall involve all the excel­lencies of former governments, with as few of their defects as is con­sistent with the imperfection of human affairs, and which shall be calculated to protect and unite, in a manner consistent with the natural rights of mankind, the largest empire that ever existed. El­evated with these prospects, which are not merely the visions of fancy, we cannot but anticipate the period, as not [...] distant, when the American Empire will comprehend millions of souls west of the Missisippi. Judging upon probable grounds, the Missisippi was never designed as the western boundary of the American empire. The God of nature never intended that some of the best part of his earth should be inhabited by the subjects of a monarch 4000 miles from them. And may we not venture to predict, that, when the rights of mankind shall be more fully known, (and the knowledge of them is fast increasing both in Europe and America) the power of European potentates will be confined to Europe, and their present. American dominions become, like the United States, free, sovereign and inde­pendent empires.

It seems to depend on a timely adoption of a wise and liberal poli­cy on the part of Spain, whether or not there shall be a speedy revo­lution in her American colonies. It is asserted by the best inform­ed on the subject, that there are not a hundred Spanish families in all Louisiana and West Florida; the bulk of the inhabitants are French people, who are inimical to the Spaniards, and emigrants from the United States, and a few English, Scots, Dutch and Irish. This was the case in 1791; and as all emigrations to this country have since been, and will probably in future be from the United States, and these emigrations are numerous, the time will soon come, when the Anglo Americans in this country will far exceed the number of all other nations.

The wretched and wicked policy of New Orleans, unless changed, will hasten a revolution in the Spanish colonies. So long as the governor can dictate laws and dispense with them at his pleasure, and create monopolies in trade for his own and his favourites' advan­tage, as is now the case, there can be no stability in the commerce of this place. The exclusive right, even of supplying the market with fresh beef, pork, veal and mutton is monopolized. No farmer or planter is allowed to kill his own beef, swine, calf or sheep, and send it to market; he must sell it to the King's butcher, as he is called, at the price he is pleased to give; and this man retails it out at a cer­tain price agreed upon by the governor, in just such pieces as he [Page 631] thinks proper, through a window or grate. Ask for a roasting piece, and he will give you a shin or brisket of beef; point to the piece you want, and he will tell you it is engaged to your superior. From sim­ilar conduct, turkies now sell for four or five dollars a piece, which, under the French government, were in abundance for half a dollar. The monopol [...] of flour is, if possible, on still a worse footing for the inhabitant— [...] the tobacco inspection yet more discouraging to the planter. The governor, or the crown, as it is called, must have an undefined advantage in every thing. Hence all are ripe for a revolu­tion the moment one shall offer with prospect of being supported, whether it shall come from the United States, England, France, or in­ternally from the inhabitants.

It is said to be the fixed resolution of the British ministry, to seize on New Orleans, in the first instance, in case of a rupture with Spain, [...] a necessary prelude to an attack on the Spanish possessions in the West Indies and on the main—It has been their policy uniformly, and orders have been given accordingly at different times. For this purpose every bend of the river, every bay and harbour on the coast, have been surveyed and founded with the utmost exactness, and all of them are better known to the British than to the Spaniards them­selves.

Whilst the United States were engaged in the revolution war a­gainst England, the Spaniards attacked and possessed themselves of all the English posts and settlements on the Missisippi, from the Iber­ville up to the Yazoos river, including the Natchez country; and by virtue of this conquest are now peopling and governing an extent three degrees north of the United States' south boundary, claiming the ex­clusive navigation of the other. This alone will probably be deem­ed sufficient cause for the United States to unite with any other power against Spain, the first opportunity, as both of right, they conceive, belong to them by treaty. It is asserted that the Kentucky country alone, could, in one week, raise a sufficient force to conquer all the Spanish possessions on the Missisippi; whilst one thousand men would be equal to defend the whole country of New Orleans and Louisiana from any enemy approaching it by sea. The greater [...] hostile fleet entering the Missisippi, the greater and more certain would be their destruction if opposed by men of knowledge and reso­lution. *

[Page 632] HISTORY.] The Missisippi, on which the fine country of Loui­siana is situated, was first discovered by Ferdinand de Soto, in 1541. Monsieur de la Salle was the first who traversed it. He, in the year 1682, having passed down to the mouth of the Missisippi, and survey­ed the adjacent country, returned to Canada, from whence he took passage to France.

[Page 633] From the flattering accounts which he gave of the country, and the consequential advantages that would accrue from settling a colony in those parts, Louis XIV. was induced to establish a company for the purpose. Accordingly a squadron of four vessels, amply provid­ed with men and provisions, under the command of Monsieur de la Salle, embarked, with an intention to settle near the mouth of the Missisippi. But he unintentionally sailed a hundred leagues to the westward of it, where he attempted to establish a colony; but through the unfavourableness of the climate, most of his men miserably perish­ed, and he himself was villainously murdered, not long after by two of his own men. Monsieur Ibberville succeeded him in his laudable attempts. He, after two successful voyages, died while preparing for a third. Crozat succeeded him; and in 1712, the King gave him Louisiana. This grant continued but a short time after the death of Louis XIV. In 1763 Louisiana was ceded to the King of Spain to whom it now belongs.

MEXICO OR NEW SPAIN.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 2100 Miles. between 9° and 40° N. Lat.
Breadth 1600 Miles. 18° and 50° W. Lon.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by unknown regions; east, by Louisiana, and the Gulf of Mexico; south, by the Isthmus of Darien, which separates it from Terra Fir­ [...] in South America; west, by the Pacific ocean.

GRAND DIVISIONS.] This vast country is divided as follows: [Page 634]

Grand Divisions. Audiences. Provinces. Chief Towns.
OLD MEXICO. Galicia, 7 Guadalaxara,
Mexico, 9 MEXICO, N. lat. 19° 26′
Guatimala. 6 Guatimala. *
NEW MEXICO PROPER. Apacheira,   ST. FE, N. lat. 36° 30′
Sonora.  
CALIFORNIA, on the west, peninsula. ST. JUAN.

RIVERS, LAKES AND FOUNTAINS.] The land is in great part ab­rupt and mountainous, covered with thick woods, and watered with large rivers. Some of these run into the Gulf of Mexico, and others into the Pacific ocean. Among the first, are Alvarado, Coat­zacualco▪ and Tabasco. The Alvarado, has its principal source in the mountains of the Zapotecas, and after making a circuit through the province of Mazaltan▪ and receiving other smaller rivers and streams, is discharged into the Gulf by three navigable mouths, at thirty miles distance from Vera Cruz. The river Coatzacualco, which is also nav­igable▪ empties into the ocean near the country of Onohualco. The river Tabasco begins its course from the mountains which separate the diocese of Chiapan from that of Guatimala, and afterwards that of Onohualco, where it runs into the sea.

Amongest the rivers which run into the Pacific ocean the principal is the river Guadalaxara▪ or great river. It takes its raise in the moun­tains of the Valley of Toloccan, waters the country of Tonollan, where at present stands the city of Guadalaxara, the capital of New Gallicia; and after running a course of more than 600 miles, dis­charges itself into the ocean, in the latitude of 22 degrees.

There are several lakes, which do not less embellish the country than give convenience to the commerce of the people. The lakes of Nicaragua. Chapallan, and Pazquaro, are among the largest. The lakes Tetzcuco and Chalco occupy a great part of the vale of Mexico, which is the finest tract of country in New Spain. The waters of Chalco are sweet, those of Tetzcuco are brackish. A canal unites them. The lower lake, (Tetzcuco) was formerly as much as 20 miles long and 17 broad, and, lying at the bottom of the vale, is the reservoir of all the waters from the surrounding mountains. The city of Mex­ico stands on an island in this lake. These two lakes, whose circum­ference was not less than 90 miles, represented the figure of a camel. At present the extent of these lakes is much less, for the Spaniards have diverted into new channels many rivers which formerly ran in­to them. All the water which is collected there is at first sweet, and becomes salt afterwards, from the nitrous bed of the lake, where it is received. M. De Bomare says, that the salt of the Mexican lake may proceed from the waters of the ocean in the north being filtered through the earth. But this is truly a gross error, because that lake is 180 miles distant from the ocean; besides, the bed of this lake is so elevated, that it has at least one mile of perpendicular height above the level of the sea. The lake of Tocktlan makes a fine prospect, and its banks a most delightful dwelling.

In this country are interspersed many fountains, of different quali­ties. There are an infinity of nitrous, sulphureous, vitriolic, and al­luminous [Page 635] mineral waters, some of which spring out so hot, that in a short time any kind of fruit or animal food is boiled in them. There are also petrifying waters, namely, those of Tehuacan, a city about 1 [...]0 miles S. E. from Mexico; those of the spring of Pucuaro, in the states of the Conte di Miravalles, in the kingdom of Michuacan, and that of a river in the province of the Queleni. With the waters of Pucuaro they make little white smooth stones, not displeasing to the taste; scrapings from which taken in broth, or in gruel made of In­dian corn, are most powerful diaphoretics, and are used with remark­able success, in various kinds of fevers. The citizens of Mexico, dur­ing the time of their kings, supplied themselves with water from the great spring of Chapoltepec, which was conveyed to the city by an aqueduct.

We might here describe the stupendous falls or cascades of several rivers, particularly that in the river Guadalaxara, 15 miles south of that city; and the famous Ponti di Dio, which is a natural bridge thrown over the deep river Atoyaque, 100 miles S. E. of Mexico, over which coaches and carriages conveniently pass.

CLIMATE.] The climate of this extensive country is various. The maritime parts are hot, and for the most part moist and unhealthy. Their heat, which occasions sweat even in January, is owing to the perfect flatness of the coasts compared with the inland country; or from the mountains of sand that gather upon the shore. Lands which are very high, or very near to high mountains, which are perpetually covered with snow, are cold; there has been white frosts and ice, in the dog days. All the other inland parts which are the most populous, enjoy a climate mild and benign, that they neither feel the rigour of winter, nor the heats of summer. No other fire than the sun's rays, is necessary to give warmth in winter; no other relief is wanted in the seasons of heat, than the shade; the same clothing which covers a man in the dog days, defends him in January; and the animals sleep all the year under the open sky.

The mildness and agreeableness of the climate under the torrid zone is the effect of several natural causes, entirely unknown to the ancients, who believed it uninhabitable; and not well understood by some moderns, by whom it is esteemed unfavourable to those who live in it. The purity of the atmosphere, the smaller obliquity of the so­lar rays, and the longer stay of this luminary upon the horizon in win­ter, in comparison with other regions farther removed from the equa­tor, concur to lessen the cold, and to prevent all that horror which disfigures the face of nature in other climes. During that season, a serene sky, and the natural delights of the country are enjoyed; where­as under the frigid, and even for the most part under the temperate zones, the clouds rob man of the prospect of heaven, and the snow buries the beautiful productions of the earth. No less causes com­bine to temper the heat of summer. The plentiful showers which fre­quently water the earth after midday, from April or May, to Septem­ber or October; the high mountains continually loaded with snow, scattered here and there through the country; the cool winds which breathe from them in that season; and the shorter stay of the sun up­on the horizon, compared with the circumstances of the temperate zone, transform the summer of those happy countries into a cool and cheerful spring.

[Page 636] But the agreeableness of the climate is counterbalanced by thunder storms, which are frequent in summer, and by earthquakes, which at all seasons are felt, although with less danger than terror.

MOUNTAINS.] The fire kindled in the bowels of the earth by the sulphureous and bituminous materials, has made vents for itself in some of the mountains, or volcanos, from whence flames are often seen to issue, and ashes and smoke. There are five mountains in the district of the Mexican empire, where, at different times, this dreadful phenomenon has been observed.

Pojauhtecal, called by the Spaniards Volcan de Orizaba, began to send forth smoke in the year 1545, and continued to do so for 20 years; but after that, for the space of more than two centuries, there has not been observed the smallest sign of burning. This celebrated moun­tain, which is of a conical figure, is indisputably the highest land in all Mexico; and, on account of its height, is the first land descried by seamen who are steering that way, at the distance of fifty leagues. It is higher than the peak of Toneriffe. Its top is always covered with snow, and its border adorned with large cedars, pine and other trees, of valuable wood, which make the prospect of it every way beautiful. It is distant from the capital upwards of 90 miles to the eastward.

The Popocatepu and Tztaceihuatl, which lie near each other, 33 miles S. E. from Mexico, are also of a surprising height. Popocate­pu, for which they have substituted the name Volcan, has a mouth or vent more than half a mile wide, from which in the time of the Mexican kings, it frequently emitted flames; and in the last century many times threw out great quantities of ashes upon the places adja­cent; but in this century, hardly any smoke has been observed. Tzta­ceihuatl, or Seirra Nevada, threw out also at some times smoke and ashes. Both mountains have tops always covered with snow, in such quantities, as to supply, with what precipitates on the neighbouring rocks, the cities of Mexico, Gilopoli, Cholula, and the adjoining places, to the distance of forty miles from these mountains, where an incredible quantity is yearly consumed in cooling and congealing liquors.

The mountain Juruyo, situated in the valley of U [...]echo, is a great curiosity. Before the year 1760, there was nothing of it but a small hill, where there was a sugar plantation. But on the 29th of Sep­tember, 1760, it burst with furious shocks, and entirely ruined the su­gar works, and the neighbouring village of Guacana; and from that time has continued to emit fire and burning rocks, which have form­ed themselves into three high mountains, whose circumference was nearly six miles in 1766; according to the account communicated by the governor of that province, who was an eye witness of the fact. The ashes, at the irruption, were forced to the almost incredible dis­tance of 150 miles. In the city of Valadolid, 60 miles distant, it rained ashes in such abundance that they were obliged to sweep the yards of the houses two or three times during the day.

Besides these there are others also, which though not burning moun­tains, are yet of great celebrity for their height.

STONES AND MINERALS.] The mountains of Mexico abound in ores of every kind of metal, and a great variety of fossils. The Mexicans found gold in various parts of their country. They gathered [Page 637] this precious metal chiefly in grains among the sand of the river. Silver was dug out of the mines of [...]lachco, and others; but it was not so much prized by them as it is by other nations. Since the con­quest, so many silver mines have been discovered in that country, es­pecially in the provinces which are to the northwest of the capital, it is quite impossible to enumerate them. Of copper they had two forts; one hard, which they used instead of iron to make axes, hatchets, mattocks, and other instruments of war and agriculture; the other flexible, for making of basons, pots and other vessels. Of tin they made money, and lead was sold at market. There are also mines of iron, quicksilver, and in many places mines of sulphur, alum, vitriol, [...]abar, ochre, and a white earth strongly resembling white lead. Of [...]ber and asphaltum, or bitumen of Judea, there was and still is great abundance on both coasts; amber was used to set in gold for ornaments; asphaltum was employed in certain incense offerings.

With respect to precious stones there were, and still are, diamonds, though few in number; amethysts, cats eyes, turquoises, cornelians, and some green stones resembling emeralds, and not much inferior to them. There are quarries of jasper, and marble of different colours in the mountains of Calpolalpan. The stone Tetzontli is generally of a dark red colour, pretty hard, porous and light, unites most firmly with lime and sand, and is therefore more in demand than any other, for the buildings of the capital, where the foundation is marshy. There are besides, entire mountains of loadstone, and among others one very considerable between Tcoiltylan and Chilapan, in the coun­try of the Cohuixcas.

PRODUCTIONS.] However plentiful and rich and mineral king­dom of Mexico may be, the vegetable kingdom is still more various and abundant. The celebrated Dr. Hernandez, the Pliny of New Spain, describes, in his natural history, about twelve hundred plants, natives of that country; but as his description is confined to medicinal plants, he has hardly comprized one half of what provident nature has produced there for the benefit of mankind. With regard to the other vegetables, some are esteemed for their flowers, some for their fruit, some for their leaves, some for their roots, some for their trunk or their wood, and others for their gum▪ resin, oil or juice. Many flowers which embellish the meads, and adorn the gardens of the Mexicans, are worthy to be mentioned (would our limits permit) either on account of the singular beauty of their colours, their exqui­site fragrance, or the extraordinariness of their form.

The fruits which are original in Mexico, are the pine apple, plums, dates, and a great variety of others. There are also many others that are not original in the country, viz. water melons, apples, peaches, quinces, apricots, pears, pomegranates, figs, black cherries, walnuts, almonds, olives, chesnuts and grapes.

The cocoa nut, vainilla, chia, great pepper, tomati, the pepper of Tabasco, and cotton, are very common with the Mexicans. Wheat, barley, peas, beans and rice, have been successfully cultivated in this country.

With respect to plants which yield profitable resins, gums, oils, or juices, the country of Mexico is singularly fertile. Of the Elastic Cum, the Mexicans make their foot balls, which, though heavy, re­bound more than those filled with air.

[Page 638] ANIMALS.] The animal kingdom of Mexico, is not very well known. Of the quadrupeds, some are ancient, and some are modern. Those are called modern which were transported from the Canaries and Europe into that country in the sixteenth century. Such are horses, asses, bulls, sheep, goats, hogs, dogs, and cats, which have all multiplied. Of the ancient quadrupeds, by which is meant those that from time immemorial have been in that country; some were common to both the continents of Europe and America, some peculiar to the new world, others natives only of the kingdom of Mexico. The ancient quadrupeds common to Mexico and the old continents are, lions, tygers, wild cats, bears, wolves, foxes, the common stage and white stags, bucks, wild goats, badgers, pole cats, weazles, mar­tins, squirrels, rabbits, hares, otters, and rats. There are many other kinds of animals in this country, too numerous to mention.

BIRDS OF MEXICO.] Their prodigious number, their variety, and many valuable qualities, have occasioned some authors to observe that, as Africa is the country of beasts, so Mexico is the country of birds. It is said there are two hundred species peculiar to that kingdom. There are a prodigious number of geese; at least, twenty species of ducks; several kinds of herons; with vast numbers of swans, water rails, divers, king fishers, pelicans, and others. The multitude of ducks is sometimes so great, as quite to cover the fields, and to appear at a distance like flocks of sheep. The pelican is re­markable in assisting the sick or wounded of its own species, a cir­cumstance which the Americans sometimes take advantage of, to procure fish without trouble. They take a live pelican, break its wing, and after tying it to a tree, conceal themselves in the neighbour­hood; there they watch the coming of the other pelicans with their provisions, and as soon as they see these throw up the fish from their pouch, run and seize them, and after leaving a little for the captive bird, they carry off the rest.

In the other classes of birds, some are valuable on account of their flesh, some for their plumage, and some for their song; while others engage our attention by their extraordinary instinct, or some other remarkable quality: Of birds which afford a wholesome and agreea­ble food, there are more than seventy species. There are 35 species of Mexican birds that are superlatively beautiful. The talking birds, or those which imitate the human voice, are to be found in equal abun­dance in this country; of these the parrot holds the first place.

FISH.] The fish common to both oceans are, whales, dolphins, sword fish, saw fish, tiburones, manitis, mantas, porpoises, bonat [...], cod, mullets, thornbacks, barbels, flying fish, shad, lobsters, soles, and many others, together with several species of tortoises, polypus, crabs, spunges, &c. The Mexican gulf, besides those already mentioned, affords sturgeons, pike, congers, cuttle fish, anchovies, carp, eels, nau­tiluses, turbot, &c. In the Pacific ocean, besides those common to the two seas, there are salmon, tunnies, sea scorpions, herrings, and others. In the lakes and rivers are three or four kinds of white fish, carp, mullet, trout, barbels, eels, and many others.

Shells have been found in prodigious numbers, and of great variety, and some of them of extraordinary beauty, especially those of the Pacific ocean. Pearls also have been fished, at different times, along all the coasts of that ocean.

[Page 639] GOVERNMENT AND RELIGION.] The civil government of Mexico is administered by tribunals, called audiences. In these courts the viceroy of the King of Spain presides. His employment is the greatest trust and power his Catholic Majesty has at his disposal, and is perhaps the richest government entrusted to any subject in the world. The vice­roy continues in office three years.

The clergy are extremely numerous in Mexico. The priests, [...]nks and nuns of all orders, make a fifth part of the white inhabit­ants, both here and in other parts of Spanish America.

CHIEF TOWNS AND COMMERCE.] Mexico is the oldest city in A­merica of which we have any account. The Abbe Clavigero, who is our authority for the preceding account of this country, dates its foundation [...] far back as 1325. It is situated in the charming vale of Mexico, on several small islands, in lake Tetzcuco, in N. lat. 19° 26′ and 276° 34′ W. long. from Ferro. This vale is surrounded with lofty and ver­ [...]t mountains, and formerly contained no less than 40 eminent cities, besides villages and hamlets. The city is subject to frequent inunda­ [...]s, as is easily accounted for from its local situation, the lake in which it stands being the reservoir of the waters flowing from the neighbouring mountains.

Concerning the ancient population of this city there are various opinions. The historians most to be relied on say that it was near­ly nine miles in circumference, and contained upwards of 60,000 houses, containing each from 4 to 10 inhabitants. Some historians [...]kon 120 000 and some 130,000 houses. By a late accurate enu­meration, made by the magistrates and priests, it appears that the pres­ent number of inhabitants exceeds 200,000. We may form some [...] of its populou [...]ness from the quantity of pulque * and tobacco which are daily consumed in it, ascertained from the custom house [...]ks February 23, 1775. Every day upwards of 190,000 pounds of pulque are carried into the city, which is almost solely consumed by the Indians and mulattoes, who drink this beverage. The tax upon it amounts annually to about 280,000 crowns. The daily consump­tion of tobacco is reckoned at 1250 crowns.

The greatest curiosity in the city of Mexico is their floating gar­dens. When the Mexicans, about the year 1325, were subdued by the Colhuan and Tepanecan nations, and confined to the small islands in the [...]ke, having no land to cultivate, they were taught by necessity to form moveable gardens, which floated on the lake. Their construc­tion is very simple. They lake willows and the roots of marsh plants, and other materials which are light, and twist them together, and so firmly unite them as to form a fort of platform, which is capable of supporting the earth of the garden. Upon this foundation they lay the light bushes which float on the lake, and over them spread the [...] and dirt which they draw up from the bottom of the lake. Their regular figure is quadrangular; their length and breadth vari­ous, but generally about 8 rods long and 3 wide; and their elevation from the surface of the water is less than a foot. These were the first fields that the Mexicans owned after the foundation of Mexico; [Page 640] there they first cultivated the maize, great pepper, and other plants nec­essary for their support. From the industry of the people these fields soon became numerous. At present they cultivate flowers and every sort of garden herbs upon them. Every day of the year, at sunrise, innu­merable vessels or boats, loaded with various kinds of flowers and herbs which are cultivated in these gardens, are seen arriving by the canal at the great market place of Mexico. All plants thrive in them surprisingly; the mud of the lake makes a very rich soil, which requires no water from the clouds. In the largest gardens there is commonly a little tree, and a little hut to shelter the cultivator, and defend him from the rain or the sun. When the owner of a garden, or the Chinampa, as he is called, wishes to change his situation, to g [...]t out of a bad neighbourhood, or to come nearer to his family, he gets into his little boat, and, by his own strength alone, if the garden is small, or with the assistance of others, if it is large, conducts it wherever he pleases, with the little tree and hut upon it. That part of the island where these floating gardens are, is a place of delightful recreation, where the senses receive the highest possible gratifica­tion.

The buildings, which are of stone, are convenient, and the public edifices, especially the churches, are magnificent, and the city has the appearance of immense wealth.

The trade of Mexico consists of three great branches, which extend over the whole world. It carries on a traffic with Eu­rope, by La Vera Cruz, situated on the Gulf of Mexico, or North Sea; with the East Indies, by Acapulco o [...] the South Sea, 210 miles S. W. of Mexico; and with South America, by the same port. These two sea ports, Vera Cruz and Acapulco, are admirably well sit­uated for the commercial purposes to which they were applied. It is by means of the former that Mexico pours her wealth over the whole world; and receives in return the numberless luxuries and necessaries, which Europe affords her. To this port the fleet from Cadiz, called the Flota, consisting of three men of war, as a convoy, and 14 la [...] merchant ships, annually arrives about the beginning of November. Its cargo consists of almost every commodity and manufacture of Eu­rope; and there are few nations but have more concern in it than th [...] Spaniards, who send out little else except wine and oil. The profit of these, with the freight and commission to the merchants, and duty [...] the king, is all the advantage which Spain derives from the Ameri­can commerce. When all the goods are landed and disposed of at La Vera Cruz, the fleet takes in the plate, precious stones, and other commodities for Europe. Some time in May they are ready to [...] ­part. From La Vera Cruz they sail to the Havannah, in the Isle of Cuba, which is the rendezvous where they meet the galleons, anoth­er fleet which carries on the trade of Terra Firma by Carthage [...] and of Peru by Panama and Porto Bello. When all are collected [...] provided with a convoy necessary for their safety, they steer for Old Spain.

Acapulco is the sea port, by which the communication is kept [...] between the different parts of the Spanish empire in America and the East Indies. About the month of December, the great galleon, at­tended by▪ a large ship as a convoy▪ which make the only communi­cation between the Philippines and Mexico, annually arrive here. [Page 641] The cargoes of these ships, (for the convoy, though in a clandestine man­ner, likewise carries goods) consist of all the rich commodities and manu­factures of the east. At the same time the annual ship from Lima, the capital of Peru, comes in, and is computed to bring not less than two [...]ions of pieces of eight in silver, besides quicksilver, and other valu­able commodities, to be laid out in the purchase of the galeons cargoes. Several other ships, from different parts of Chili and Peru, meet upon the [...] occasion. A great fair, in which the commodities of all parts of the world are bartered for one another, lasts thirty days. The galeon them [...]ares for her voyage, loaded with silver and such European goods [...] have been thought necessary. The Spaniards, though this trade be [...] on entirely through their hands, and in the very heart of their [...]ions, are comparatively but small gainers by it. For as they al­ [...] the Dutch, Great Britain, and other commercial states, to fur­ [...] the greater part of the cargo of the flota, so the Spanish inhab­itants of the Philippines, tainted with the indolence which ruined [...] European ancestors, permit the Chinese merchants to furnish the [...] part of the cargo of the galeon. Notwithstanding what has [...] said of Vera Cruz, and Acapulco, the city of Mexico, the capi­ [...] of the empire, ought to be considered as the center of commerce [...] this part of the world; for here the principal merchants reside, [...] the greatest part of the business is negociated. The East India [...] from Acapulco, and the European from Vera Cruz, also pass [...] this city. Hither all the gold and silver come to be coined, [...] the king's fifth is deposited, and here are wrought all those [...] and ornaments in plate which are every year sent into Europe.

HISTORY.] The empire of Mexico was subdued by Cortes in [...] year 1521. Montezuma was at that time emperor of Mexico. In [...] course of the war, he was treacherously taken by Cortes, and [...] as a prisoner. During the imprisonment of Montezuma, Cor­tes and his army had made repeated attacks on his subjects, but with­ [...] success. Cortes was now determined as his last resource to try [...] effect the interposition of Montezuma might have to soothe or [...] his subjects. This unfortunate prince, at the mercy of the [...]cherous Spaniards, and reduced to the sad necessity of becoming [...] instrument of his own disgrace, and of the slavery of his sub­ [...] advanced to the battlements in his royal robes, in all the pomp which he used to appear on solemn occasions. At fight of their [...]reign, whom they had long been accustomed to honour, and al­ [...] to revere as a god, the weapons dropped from their hands, ev­ [...] tongue was silent, all bowed their heads, and many prostrated themselves on the ground. Montezuma addressed them with every [...]ent that could mitigate their rage, or persuade them from hostil­ [...]. When he ended his discourse, a sullen murmur of disapproba­ [...] [...]an through the crowd; to this succeeded reproaches and threats; [...] their fury rising in a moment, they violently poured in whole [...] of arrows and vollics of stones upon their unhappy monarch; [...] of the arrows struck him in his body, which with the blow of a [...] on his temple, put an end to his life. Guatimozin succeeded [...]uma, and maintained a vigorous opposition against the assaults [...] Cortes. But he, like his predecessor, after a noble defence, was [...] to submit. Previous to this, being aware of his impending fate, [...] ordered that all his treasures should be thrown into the lake. [Page 642] While a prisoner, on suspicion of his having concealed his treasure, he was put to the torture, which was done by laying him on burning coals; but he bore whatever the refined cruelty of his tormentors could inflict, with the invincible fortitude of an American warrior. One of his chief favourites, his fellow sufferer, being overcome by the violence of the anguish, turned a dejected eye towards his master, which seemed to implore his permission to reveal all that he knew.—But the high spirited prince▪ darted on him a look of authority, mingled with scorn, and checked his weakness by asking, 'Am I repos­ing on a bed of flowers?' Overawed by the reproach, he persevered in dutiful silence, and expired. Cortes, ashamed of the scene so horrid, rescued the royal victim from the hands of his torturers, and prolong­ed a life for new indignities and sufferings. Cortes died in Spain, in the year 1547, in the 62d year of his age. Envied by his contempo­raries, and ill requited by the court which he served, he has been ad­mired and celebrated by succeeding ages. By his own desire he was carried to Mexico, and buried there.

Cortes, the great conqueror of Mexico, discovered the extensive peninsula of California in the year 1536, after enduring incredible hardships, and encountering dangers of almost every species. During a long period it continued to be so little frequented, that even its form was unknown, and in most maps it was represented as an island. Sir Francis Drake was the first who took possession of it in 1578, and his right was confirmed by the principal king or chief in the whole country.

SOUTH AMERICA.

WE now enter upon the description of that part of the globe, where the human mind will be successively surprised with the sublime and astonishing works of nature; where rivers of amazing breadth flow through beautiful and widely extended plains, and where lofty mountains, whose summits are covered with eternal snow, inter­cept the course of the clouds and hide their heads from the view of mortals. In some parts of this extensive region, nature hath bounti­fully bestowed her treasures, and given every thing necessary for the convenience and happiness of man. We have only to regret that a set of avaricious men have successively drenched with innocent blood these plains, which are so beautifully formed and enriched by the hand of nature; and that the rod of Spanish despotism has pre­vented the population of a country which might have supported mil­lions of beings in affluence.

DIVISIONS.] South America, like Africa, is an extensive penin­sula, connected with North America by the Isthmus of Darien, and divided between Spain, Portugal, France, Holland, and the Aborig­ines, as follows:

    Chief Towns.
Spanish Domin­ions. Terra Firma, Panama and Carthagena,
Peru, Lima,
Chili, St. Jago,
Paragua, Buennos Ayres.

[Page]

SOUTH AMERICA

[Page 643]

    Chief Towns.
Portu­guese. Br [...]zil. St. Salvador.
French. Cayenne. Caen.
Dutch. Surrinam. Paramaribo.
Aborig­ines. Amazonia, Patagonia.  

Of these countries we shall treat in their order. *

Spanish America.
TERRA FIRMA, OR CASTILE DEL ORO.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 1400 Miles. between 60° and 82° West Longitude.
Breadth 700 Miles. The Equator, and 12° North Lat.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by the Atlantic ocean, here called the North Sea; east, by the same ocean and Surrinam; south, by Amazonia and Peru; west, by the Pacific ocean.

It is divided into

  Chief Towns.
Terra Firma proper, or Darien, Porto Bello,
Panama.
Carthagena, Carthagena,
St. Martha,  
Venezeula,  
Comana,  
Paria,  
New Granada,  
Popayan. Popayan.

BAYS.] In the South Sea the principal bays are those of Panama and St. Michael; in the North Sea are the bays of Porto Bello, Si­ [...]o, Guiara, &c.

[Page 644] RIVERS.] The principal rivers are the Darien, Chagre, Santa Maria, Conception, and Oronoko. The Peculiarities of this last mentioned river require a particular description.

It was Columbus, who, in 1498, first discovered the Oronoko, the borders of which have since been named Spanish Guiana. This great river takes its rise among the Cordeleras mountains, and is said to dis­charge itself into the ocean by forty openings, after it hath been in­creased, throughout an immense tract, by the afflux of a prodigious number of rivers more or less considerable. Such is its impetuosity that it stems the strongest tides, and preserves the freshness of its waters to the distance of twelve leagues form the mouth of that vast and deep channel within which it was confined. Its rapidity, however, is not always the same, which is owing to a circumstance perhaps en­tirely peculiar. The Oronoko, which begins to swell in April, con­tinues rising for five months, and during the sixth remains at its great­est height. From October, it begins gradually to subside, till the month of March, throughout the whole of which it remains in the fixed state of its greatest diminution. These alternate changes are regular, and even invariable. Perhaps the rising of the waters of the Oronoko may depend entirely on the rainy season.

This river is not so easily navigated as might be presumed from its magnitude; its bed being in many places filled up with rocks; which oblige the navigator, at times, to carry both his boats and the mer­chandize they are laden with, by land round the obstruction.

CLIMATE, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.] The climate here, especial­ly in the northern parts, is extremely hot and sultry during the whole year. From the month of May to the end of November, the season called winter by the inhabitants, is almost a continual succession of thunder, rain and tempests; the clouds precipitating the rains with such impetuosity, that the low lands exhibit the appearance of an ocean. Great part of the country is of consequence almost continu­ally flooded; and this, together with the excessive heat, so impreg­nates the air with vapours, that in many provinces, particularly about Popayon and Porto Bello, it is extremely unwholesome. The soil of this country is very different, the inland parts being extremely rich and fertile, and the coasts sandy and barren. It is impossible to view without admiration the perpetual verdure of the woods, the luxuri­ancy of the plains, and the towering height of the mountains. This country produces corn, sugar, tobacoo, and fruits of all kinds; the most remarkable is that of the manzanillo tree. It bears a fruit re­sembling an apple, but which, under this specious appearance, con­tains the most subtile poison. The bean of Carthagena is the fruit of a species of willow, about the bigness of a bean, and is an excellent remedy for the bite of the most venomous serpents, which are very frequent all over this country. Among the natural merchandize of Terra Firma, the pearls found on the coast, particularly in the bay of Panama, are not the least considerable. An immense number of ne­gro slaves are employed in fishing for these, and have arrived at a wonderful dexterity in this occupation. They are sometimes, howev­er, devoured by sharks, while they dive to the bottom, or are crushed against the shelves of the rocks.

[Page 645] CHIEF TOWNS.] CARTHAGENA is the principal seaport town in Terra Firma. It is situated on the Atlantic ocean in N. Lat. 10° 26′, and about three degrees west of the meridian of Philadelphia. The bay on which it stands is seven miles wide from north to south—abounds with a variety of good fish—and has a sufficient depth of water, with good anchorage, and so smooth that ships are no more agitated than on a river. The many shallows at its entrance, howev­er, make the help of a good pilot necessary. The town and its sub­urbs are fortified in modern style—the streets are straight, broad and well paved. The houses are principally brick, and one story high. All houses have balconies and lattices of wood. This city is the res­idence of the governor of the province of Carthagena, and of a bishop, whose spiritual jurisdiction extends over the whole province. There is here also a court of inquisition—several convents and nun­ [...]ies—a church, a chapel of case, and a college of Jesuits. The city is well peopled with Indians, Europeans, Negroes, and Creoles. The Europeans, who are not numerous, and the Creoles, manage the whole trade of the place; the other inhabitants are poor, and work hard for subsistence. The inhabitants are universally fond of choco­late and tobacco—and the most sober seldom fail of drinking a glass of brandy in the morning.

PANAMA is the capital of Terra Firma Proper, and is situated upon a capacious bay to which it gives its name. It is the great re­ceptacle of the vast quantities of gold and silver, with other rich merchandize, from all parts of Peru and Chili; here they are lodged in store houses, till the proper season arrives to transport them to Eu­rope.

PORTO BELLO is situated close to the sea, on the declivity of a mountain which surrounds the whole harbour. The conveni­ence and safety of this harbour is such, that Columbus, who first discovered it, gave it the name of Porto Bello, or the Fine Harbour.

HISTORY.] This part of South America was discovered by Co­lumbus, in his third voyage to this continent. It was subdued and settled by the Spaniards about the year 1514, after destroying, with great inhumanity, several millions of the natives. This country was called Terra Firma, on account of its being the first part of the con­tinent which was discovered, all the lands discovered previous to this being islands.

PERU.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 1800 Miles. between the Equator and 25° S. lat.
Breadth 500 Miles. 60° and 81° W. longitude.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Terra Firma; west, by the Pacific ocean; south, by Chili; and east, by the mountains called the Andes.

[Page 646] DIVISIONS.] Peru is divided into the following provinces:

Provinces. Chief Towns.
Quito, Quito, Payta,
Lima, Lima, latitude 12° 11′ S.
Los Charcos. Potosi, Porco.

RIVERS.] There is a number of rivers which rise in the Andes, but most of them run to the eastward. Among these are the Grande, Oronoko, Amazon and Plate. The Amazon rises in Peru, but directs its course eastward, and after running between 3 and 4000 miles, falls into the Atlantic ocean, under the equator. This river, like others between the tropics, annually overflows its banks, at which time it is 150 [...]es wide at its mouth. It is supposed to be the largest river in the world, either with regard to the length of its course, the depth of its waters, or its astonishing breadth. There is one river in Peru, the waters of which are said to be as red as blood; but this is doubted by some. It is probable, however, that there may be qualities in the earth through which this river runs, which may tinge the waters and give them some resemblance to blood.

CLIMATE, AIR AND SOIL.] From the situation of this country, which is within the torrid zone, it is natural to suppose that it would be almost uninhabitable; but the Andes mountains being on the one side, and the South sea on the other, it is not so prodigiously hot as tropi­cal countries in general are; and in some parts it is disagreeably cold. In one part are mountains of a stupendous height and magnitude, having their summits covered with snow; on the other, volcanos flaming within, while their summits, chasms and apertures are involved in ice. The plains are temperate, the beaches and vallies hot; and lastly, according to the disposition of the country, its high or low situation, we find all the variety of gradations of temperature between the two extremes of heat and cold. It is remarkable, that in some places it never rains, which defect is supplied by a dew, that falls every night, and sufficiently refreshes the vegetable creation; but in Quito they have prodigious rains, attended by dreadful storms of thunder and lightning. In the inland parts of Peru, and by the banks of the rivers, the soil is usually very fertile; but along the sea coast it is a barren sand.

ANIMAL AND VEGETABLE PRODUCTIONS.} Vast numbers of cattle were im­ported by the Spaniards into Peru, when they took possession of that country; these are now so amazingly increased, that they run wild and are hunted like game. The most remarkable animals in this country are the Peruvian sheep, called the lamas and vicunnas. The lama, in several particulars, resembles the camel, as in the shape of the neck, head and some other parts; but has no bunch, is much smaller, and is cloven footed. Its upper lip is cleft like that of a hare, through which, when enraged, it spits a venomous juice, that inflames the part on which it falls. The wool with which it is covered is of different colours; but generally brown. These animals are generally docile, so that the Indians use them as beasts of burden. Formerly they used to eat their flesh▪ and still continue to make that use of such as are past labour, esteeming it preferable to mutton. The vicunna resembles the lama in shape, but is much smaller, and its wool shorter and finer. The most remarkable birds found in Peru are the condors and [...]ummers. The condor is pro­digiously [Page 647] large and carnivorous, and very voracious, frequently seizing the lambs as they are feeding upon the heath. The hummer is a night bird, peculiar to the mountainous deserts of Peru. They are seldom seen, though frequently heard, both by their singing and a strange humming made in the air by the rapidity of their flight, which when near makes a noise like that of a rocket. The insects found in Peru are musquetoes in prodigious numbers, miguas, and sev­eral others equally venomous; also a variety of beautiful butterflies. This country produces fruits peculiar to the climate and most of those in Europe. The culture of maize, of pimento and of cotton, which was found established there, has not been neglected; and that of wheat, barley, cassava, potatoes, sugar, and of the olive and vine is at­tended to. The goat has thriven very well; but the sheep have degenerated, and their wool is become extremely coarse.

MINES.] In the northern parts of Peru are several gold mines; but those of silver are found all over the country, particularly in the neighbourhood of Potosi. Nature never offered to the avidity of mankind, in any country on the globe, such rich mines as those of Potosi. 'These famous mines were accidentally discovered in the year 1545, in this manner; an Indian, named Hualpa, one day following some deer, they made directly up the hill of Potosi; he came to a steep craggy part of the hill, and the better to enable him to climb up, laid hold of a shrub, which came up by the roots, and laid▪ open, a mass of silver ore—He for some time kept it a secret, but afterwards revealed it to his friend Guanca, who because he would not discov­er to him the method of refining it, acquainted the Spaniard his mas­ter, named Valaroel, with the discovery. Val [...]ro [...]l registered the mine in 1545; and from that time till 1638 these mines of Potosi had yield­ed 395,619,000 pieces of eight, which is about 4,255,000 pieces a year. Potosi is about 20 or 25 leagues from the city of La Plata. The hill, and also the country for a considerable distance round is quite barren and desert, and produces neither tree, plant nor herb, so that the inhabitants of Potosi, which is situated at the foot of the hill, on the south side, are obliged to procure all the necessaries of life from Peru. These mines begin to decrease, and others rise in rep­utation.

MANUFACTURES, TRADE AND CITIES.] We join these articles here because of their intimate connection; for, except in the cities we shall describe, there is no commerce worth mentioning. The city of Lima is the capital of Peru, and of the whole Spanish em­pire: Its situation, in the middle of a spacious and delightful valley, was fixed upon by the famous Pizarro, as the most proper for a city, which he expected would preserve his memory. It is so well water­ed by the R [...]mac, that the inhabitants, like those of London, com­mand a stream, each for his own use. There are many very mag­nificent structures, particularly churches, in this city; though the houses in general are built of slight materials, the equality of the climate, and want of rain, rendering stone houses unnecessary; and besides it is found, that these are more apt to suffer by shocks of the earth, which are frequent and dreadful all over this province. Lima is about two leagues from the sea, extends in length two miles, and in breadth one and a quarter. One remarkable fact is sufficient to dem­onstrate the wealth of the city. When the viceroy, the duke de la [Page 648] Palada, made his entry into Lima in 1682, the inhabitants, to do him honour, caused the streets to be paved with ingots of silver, amounting to seventeen millions sterling. All travellers speak with amazement of the decorations of the churches with gold, silver, and precious stones, which load and ornament even the walls. The only thing that could justify these accounts, is the immense richness and exten­sive commerce of the inhabitants. The merchants of Lima may be said to deal with all the quarters of the world, and that both on their own accounts, and as factors for others. Here all the products of the southern provinces are conveyed, in order to be exchanged at the harbour of Lima for such articles as the inhabitants of Peru stand in need of; the fleet from Europe and the East Indies land at the same harbour, and the commodities of Asia, Europe, and America, are there bartered for each other. What there is no immediate vent for, the merchants of Lima purchase on their own accounts, and lay up in warehouses, knowing that they must soon find an outlet for them, since by one channel or other they have a communication with al­most every commercial nation. But all the wealth of the inhabit­ants, all the beauty of the situation, and the fertility of the climate of Lima are not sufficient to compensate for one disaster, which al­ways threatens and has sometimes actually befallen them. In the year 1747, a most tremendous earthquake laid three fourths of this city level with the ground, and entirely demolished Caliao, the port town belonging to it. Never was any destruction more perfect, not more than one of three thousand inhabitants being left to record this dreadful calamity, and he, by a providence the most singular and ex­extraordinary imaginable—This man, who happened to be on a fort which overlooked the harbour, perceived in one minute the inhabit­ants running from their houses in the utmost terror and confusion; the sea, as is usual on such occasions, receding to a considerable dis­tance, returned in mountainous waves, foaming with the violence of the agitation, buried the inhabitants forever in its bosom, and im­mediately all was silent: But the same wave which destroyed the town, drove a little boat by the place where the man stood, into which he threw himself, and was saved.

Cusco, the ancient capital of the Peruvian empire, lies in the moun­tainous country, at a distance from the sea, and has long been on the decline, but it is yet a very considerable place. The inhabitants, three parts of whom are Indians, are very industrious in manufacturing baize, cotton and leather. They have also both here and in Quito, a particular taste for painting; and their productions in this way, some of which have been admired in Italy, are dispersed all over South A­merica. Quito is next of Lima in populousness, if not superior to it. It is like Cusco, an inland city, and having no mines in its neighbour­hood, is chiefly famous for its manufactures of cotton, wool, and flax, which supply the consumption over all the kingdom of Peru.

INHABITANTS, MANNERS AND GOVERNMENT.} It is impossible to ascertain with any degree of precision the num­ber of inhabitants in Peru. The city of Lima is said to contain 54,000; Guagaquill 20,000; Potosi 25,000; La Paz 20,000, and Cusco 26,000. Among all the inhabitants of Peru, pride and laziness are said to be the most predominant passions. Avarice may likewise be attributed to some of them with a great deal of propriety.

[Page 649] The Indians and negroes are forbidden, under the severest penalties, to intermarry; for division between these two classes, is the great instrument in which the Spaniards trust for the preservation of the colonies. Peru is governed by a viceroy, who is absolute; but it being impossible for him to superintend the whole extent of his government, he delegates a part of his authority to the several audi­ences and courts, established at different places throughout his territo­ries. At Lima there is a treasury court for receiving a fifth of the mines, and certain taxes paid by the Indians, which belong to the king of Spain.

NATURAL HISTORY.] There are certain waters in this country, which in their course turn into stone; and fountains of liquid matter, called coppey, resembling pitch and tar, and used by seamen for the same purpose. On the coasts of Guagaquill and Guatimala are found a certain species of snails, which yield the purple dye so celebrated by the ancients, and which the moderns have supposed to have been loft. The shell that contains them is fixed to rocks, watered by the sea. It is of the size of a large nut. Various methods are used to extract the purple matter from the animal. There is no colour that can be compared to this either in lustre or permanence.

Under this head it may not be improper to make some observations upon that new substance called the Platina, and which may be consid­ered as an eighth metal. In its native state it is mixed with gold and iron, and this at first gave rise to a suspicion that it was nothing more than a combination of these two metals; but late experiments of chymists a fully prove, that it is a pure and simple metal, with proper­tions peculiar to itself. It cannot be affected by any simple acid, or by any known solvent, except the aqua regia; it will not tarnish in the air, neither will it rust; it unites to the fixedness of gold, and to the property it has of not being susceptible of destruction, a hardness almost equal to that of iron, and a much greater difficulty of fusion. It is of an intermediate colour between that of iron and silver; it can be forged and extended into thin plates; and when dissolved in aqua regia, it may be made to assume, by precipitation, and infinite diversity of colours; and Count Milbey has succeeded in varying these precipitates so much, that he has had a picture painted, in the colour­ing of which, there is scarce any thing but platina made use of. Up­on the whole, from considering the advantages of the platina, we can­not but conclude that this metal deserves, at least, from its superi­ority to all others, to share the title of king of the metals, of which gold has so long been in possession. The Peruvian bark, so famous at present for curing intermittent fevers, may likewise be mentioned in this place. The tree from which it is taken grows upon the slope of mountains, and is about the size of a common cherry tree. It is distinguished into three kinds; the red, yellow, and the white; but the red is found to be the best and most efficacious. The Jesu­its carried this bark to Rome as early as 1639; but the natives are supposed to have been acquainted with its medicinal qualities many ages before.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.] In treating of this country the mind is naturally led back to the barbarous and cruel conquerors of it, who, coming from the old world in quest of gold to satisfy their avarice, displayed scenes shocking to humanity. After the conquest, the [Page 650] country scarcely preserved any thing but its name, every thing assumed a new face. There were other edifices, other inhabitants, other oc­cupations, other prejudices, and another religion. See Robertson's History of America.

CHILE

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 1260 Miles. between 25° and 44° S. Lat.
Breadth 580 Miles. 65° and 85° W. Lon.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED on the north, by Peru; by Para­gua or La Plata on the east; by Patagonia on the south; and by the Pacific ocean on the west. It lies on both sides of the Andes; Chili Proper lies on the W. and Cuyo or Cutio, on the east.—The principal towns in the former are St. Jago and Baldivia; in the latter, St. John de Frontlora.

CLIMATE AND SOIL.] The climate of Chili is one of the most delightful in the world, being a medium between the intense heats of the torrid, and the piercing colds of the frigid zones. Along the coast of the Pacific ocean, they enjoy a fine temperate air, and a clear serene sky, most part of the year; but sometimes the winds that blow from the mountains, in winter, are exceedingly sharp. There are few places in this extensive country where the soil is not exuberantly rich; and were its natural advantages seconded by the industry of the in­habitants, Chili would be the most opulent kingdom in Amer­ica.

ANIMAL AND VEGETABLE PRODUCTIONS.] The horses and mules of Chili are in great esteem, particularly the former. This breed of horses was originally carried from Old Spain, and instead of degener­ating, have now become superior to the Spanish horses themselves. In beauty and gracefulness, they are not inferior to the famous Andalu­ [...]ian horses; and such is their value that one of them is thought a present worthy the acceptance of a crowned head.

Prodigious numbers of oxen, goats and sheep, are fattened in the luxuriant pastures of Chili, and indeed this is the only part of hus­bandry to which the inhabitants pay any considerable attention. An ox well fattened may be purchased for four dollars. Turkeys, geese, and all kinds of poultry are found here in the same profusion. Wild fowl are also common, among which are wood pigeons, turtle doves, partridges, and royal cirapicos. A very particular species of bird is sound in Chili, called the awakener: It is about the size of a middling fowl; its plumage is black and white; has a thick neck; the head rather large, erect, and beautifully adorned with a tuft of feathers; its eyes are large, sharp and lively. On the fore part of its wings are two spurs, about an inch in length; these are its weapons of defence against all other birds. It has obtained the name of the awakener from the notice it gives to all birds in time of danger; and this it does, by making a loud chattering noise, which immediately induces the other to fly from the enemy.

[Page 651] The coasts abound with many excellent fish; there are also vast numbers of whales and sea wolves. The soil produces Indian and European corn, hemp, grapes, and all other fruits. The European fruit trees are obliged to be propped to enable them to sustain the weight of the fruit. The orchards in particular yield great quanti­ties of all sorts of apples, the strawberries are very large and most commonly red, but sometimes white and yellow. In many plac­es orange trees are in bloom, and beat fruit throughout the year. Olives also, and almond trees thrive exceedingly well; and the inhab­itants press a kind of muscadee wine from their grapes, which far ex­ceeds any of the kind made in Spain. The trunks of the vines are in some places said to be as thick as a man's body, and the grapes are amazingly large.

MINES.] Mines of gold, silver, copper, tin, quicksilver, iron and lead, abound in this country. Vast quantities of gold are washed down from the mountains by brooks and torrents; the annual amount of which, when manufactured, is estimated at no less than 800,000 dollars.

COMMERCE.] Chili has always had commercial connections with the neighbouring Indians on its frontiers, with Peru and with Para­gua. The Indians in their transactions are found to be perfectly honest. Chili supplies Peru with hides, dried fruit, copper, salt meat, horses, hemp and corn: and receives in exchange tobacco, sugar, co­coa, earthen ware, some manufactures made at Quito, and some arti­cles of luxury brought from Europe. The ships sent from Calao on this traffic, which is reciprocally useful, were formerly bound for Con­ception bay, but now come to Valparaiso. During the course of near a century, no navigator in these tranquil seas would venture to lose sight of land, and then these voyages lasted a whole year. A pilot of the old world, having at length observed the winds, performed the navigation in one month. He was considered as a wizard, and was taken up by order of the inquisition, whose ignorance becomes an ob­ject of ridicule, when its cruelty doth not excite our abhorrence. The journal he produced was his vindication; and it plainly appeared that to perform the same voyage it was only necessary to keep clear of the coasts. His method was therefore universally adopted.

Chili sends to Paragua wines, brandy, oil, and chiefly gold; and re­ceives in payment mules, wax, cotton, the herb of Paragua, negroes, and also much of the merchandize of the ancient hemisphere, before the merchants of Lima had obtained, either by bribery, or by their influence, that this last branch of commerce should be prohibited. The commerce between the two colonies is not carried on by sea; it hath been found more expeditious, safer, and even less expensive to go by land, though it is 354 leagues from St. Jago to Buennos Ayres, and more than forty leagues of the way are amidst the snows and precipices of the Cordeleras.

INHABITANTS, MANNERS AND CUSTOMS.] The Indians in this country are still in a great measure unconquered; they live scattered in the desetts and the forests, and it is impossible to ascertain their numbers. It has already been mentioned, that those Indians, which are not subject to the Spanish yoke, are very honest in their commer­cial transactions, performing to a punctilio whatever they have prom­ised; but, like almost all other Indians, they are very fond of spiritu­ous liquors, and are eager to purchase them from every quarter. They [Page 652] live in small huts which they build in the course of a day or two at farthest; and which they abandon when hard pushed by an enemy. They are brave and warlike, and all the attempts of the Spaniards to subdue them have proved ineffectual. It is almost equally difficult to ascertain the number of Spaniards in Chili. The Abbe Rayanl says, there are 40,000 in the city of St. Jago; if this be true, the aggre­gate number in all the provinces of Chili must be more considerable than has been generally supposed. The character and manners of these people do not differ materially from those in Peru.

GOVERNMENT.] St. Jago is the capital of the state and the seat of the empire. The commandant there is subordinate to the viceroy of Peru in all matters relating to the government, to the finances, and to war; but he is independent of him as chief administrator of justice, and president of the royal audience. Eleven inferior officers distrib­uted in the province, are charged, under his orders, with the details of administration.

PARAGUA, OR LA PLATA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 1500 Miles. between 12° and 37° S. Latitude.
Breadth 1000 Miles. 50° and 75° W. Longitude.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED by Amazonia on the north; by Brasil east; by Patagonia south; and by Peru and Chili west.

It contains the following provinces:

Paragua, Parana, Guira, Uragua, Tucuman, Rio de la Plata.

RIVERS.] Besides a vast number of smaller rivers which water this country, there is the grand river La Plata, which deserves a partic­ular description. A Modenese Jesuit, by the name of P. Cattanco, who sailed up this river, speaks in the following language concerning it: "While I resided in Europe, and read in books of history or ge­ography that the river De la Plata was 150 miles in breadth, I consid­ered it as an exaggeration, because in this hemisphere, we have no ex­ample of such vast rivers. When I approached its mouth, I had the most vehement desire to ascertain the breadth with my own eyes, and I have found the matter to be exactly as it was represented. This I deduce particularly from one circumstance: When we took our de­parture from Monte Viedo, a fort situated more than 100 miles from the mouth of the river, and where its breadth is considerably di­minished, we sailed a complete day before we discovered the land on the opposite bank of the river; and when we were in the middle of the channel, we could not discover land on either side, and saw nothing but the sky and water, as if we had been in some great ocean. Indeed we should have taken it to be sea, if the fresh water of the river, which was turbid like the Po, had not satisfied us that it was a river."

[Page 653] CLIMATE, SOIL AND PRODUCE.] From the situation of this coun­try, some parts of it must be extremely hot, from the almost vertical influence of the rays of the sun; while other parts must be pleasant and delightful. But the heat is in some measure abated by the gentle breezes, which generally begin about 9 or 10 o'clock in the morning and continue the greatest part of the day. Some parts of the country are very mountainous; but in many others you find extensive and beau­tiful plains, where the soil is very rich, producing cotton, tobacco, and the valuable herb called Paragua, together with a variety of fruits. There are also prodigiously rich pastures, in which are bred such herds of cattle, that it is said the hides are the only part exported; while the flesh is left to be devoured by the ravenous beasts of the wilderness. Not long since, a horse might be purchased here for one dollar, and an ox, chosen out of several hundred, for a still more trif­ling sum.

COMMERCE AND CHIEF CITY.] Paragua sends annually into the kingdom of Peru as many as 1500 or 2000 mules. They travel over dreary deserts for the distance of 8 or 900 leagues. What is not man capable of doing when necessity, resolution and avarice are unit­ed. Neither deep and miry swamps, nor summits of lofty mountains covered with eternal snow, can bar his progress. The province of Tucuman furnishes to Potosi, annually, 16 or 18,000 oxen, and 4 or 5000 horses, brought forth and reared upon its own territory. Para­gua sends several articles of commerce to Spain, but they are all brought from neighbouring districts. The only article it furnishes from its own territory is hides.

Buennos Ayres is the capital of this country. Its situation on the river La Plata, is healthy and pleasant, and the air temperate. It is regularly built. Its streets are wide, the houses are extremely low; and each of them is accommodated with a garden. The public and private buildings, which, sixty years ago, were all made of earth, are of more solid and commodious construction, since the natives have learned the art of making brick and lime. The number of inhabit­ants is about 30,000. One side of the town is defended by a fortress with a garrison of 6 or 700 men. The town stands 180 miles from the sea. The ships get to it by sailing up a river that wants depth, is full of islands, shoals and rocks, and where storms are more frequent and more dreadful than on the ocean. It is necessary to anchor every night on the spot where they come to; and on the most moderate days a pilot must go to sound the way for the ship. After having surmounted these difficulties, the ships are obliged, at the distance of three leagues from the town, to put their goods on board some light vessel, and to go to refit, and to wait for their cargoes at Incunado de Barragan, situated seven or eight leagues below.

INHABITANTS.] As to the number of inhabitants in this country, from the best information that can be obtained, there are not more than 100,000. including Spaniards, Indians, Negroes and the mixed blood or Creoles. The Spaniards exhibit much the same character here as in the other kingdoms already described.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.] It is a circumstance well known to all who are acquainted with the history of South America, that long ago the Jesuits introduced themselves into this country, and made great efforts to civilize and christianize the natives. Their conduct [Page 654] and institutions open an abundant source of reflection. We are naturally led to inquire what could induce men to abandon the seat of ease and tranquillity; to traverse immense deserts; to climb the crag­gy cliffs of lofty mountains; to plunge into deep and miry swamps; to subject themselves to hunger, to thirst, to danger and misery of eve­ry kind; surrounded by fierce and unknown savages, whose charac­ters they were unacquainted with, and whose suspicions might have armed them with vengeance in an instant; who neither knew nor cared to know the errand on which these missionaries came; whose manner of life was independent, and whose minds disdained the bur­dens of civilized life: I say, we wish to know what powerful motives could have inclined these missionaries to leave cultivated society, and encounter all these dangers. Was it the love of riches, a thirst for glory, or the good of mankind, that influenced their conduct? or were they influenced by a blind and misguided superstition? Whatever may have been their motives, if history speaks the truth, they have really made the inhabitants of this part of the new world more virtuous, more civil, and more happy.

Portuguese America.
BRAZIL.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 2500 Miles. between the Equator and 35° S. Lat.
Breadth 700 Miles. 35° and 60° W. Longitude.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED by the mouth of the river Amazon and the Atlantic ocean on the north; and by the same ocean on the east; on the south, by the river Plata; on the west, by morasses, lakes, torrents, rivers and mountains; which sepa­rate it from Amazonia, and the Spanish possessions. On the coast are three small islands, where ships touch for provisions on their voyage to the South Seas, viz. Fernando, St. Barbaro, and St. Catherine's.

BAYS, HARBOURS AND RIVERS.] These are the harbours of Panambuco, All Saints, Rio Janeiro, the port of St. Vincent, the harbour of Gabriel, and the Port of St. Salvador. There is a great number of noble streams, which unite with the rivers Amazon and Platz; beside others which fall into the Atlantic ocean.

CLIMATE, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.] The climate of Brazil has been described by two eminent naturalists, Piso and Margrave, who observed it with a philosophical accuracy, to be temperate and mild, when compared with that of Africa. They ascribe this chiefly to the refreshing wind, which blows continually from the sea. The air is not only cool, but chilly through the night, so that the natives kindle a fire every evening in their huts. As the rivers in this coun­try annually overflow their banks, and leave a sort of slime upon the lands, the soil here must be in many places amazingly rich; and this [Page 655] corresponds with the best information upon the subject. The veg­etable productions are Indian corn, sugar canes, tobacco, indigo, hides, specacuana, balsam, Brazil wood, which is of a red colour, hard and dry; and is chiefly used in dying, but not the red of the best kind. Here is also the yellow fustic, of use in dying yellow; and a beautiful piece of speckled, wood made use of in cabinet work. Here are five different sorts of palm trees, some curious ebony, and a great variety of cotton trees. This country abounds in horned cattle, which are hunted for their hides only, 20,000 being sent annually into Eu­rope. There is also a plenty of deers, hares and other game. A­mongst the wild beasts found here, are tygers, porcupines, janouveras, and a fierce animal, somewhat like a greyhound; monkey, sloths and the topirassou, a creature between a bull and an ass, but without horns and entirely harmless; the flesh is very good and has the flavour of beef. There is a numberless variety of fowl, wild and tame in this country. Among these are turkeys, fine white hens and ducks. The remarkable birds are the humming bird; the lankima, sometimes called the unicorn bird, from its having a horn two or three inches long growing out of its forehead; the guira famous for often changing its colour, being first black, then ash coloured, next white, afterwards scarlet, and last of all crimson; which colours grow richer and deeper the longer the bird lives. Among the abundance of fish with which the seas, lakes and rivers of this country are stored, is the globe fish, so called from its form, which is so beset with spines like a hedgehog that it bids defiance to all fish of prey. But the most remarkable creature is the sea bladder, so called because it greatly resembles one, and swims on the surface of the waves; the inside is filled with air, except a small quantity of water, that serves to poise it. The skin is very thin and transparent, and, like a bubble raised in the water, re­flects all the colours of the sky. Brazil breeds a great variety of ser­pents and venomous creatures, among which are the Indian salaman­der, a four legged infect, the sting of which is mortal; the ibivaboca▪ a species of serpent about seven yards long and half a yard in circumference, whose poison is instantaneously fatal: the rattle snake, which there attains an enormous size; the liboyd or roe buck snake, which authors inform us are capable of swallowing a roe buck whole with its horns, being between twenty and thirty feet in length and two yards in circumference. Besides those there are many other insects and serpents of a dangerous and venomous nature.

COMMERCE AND CHIEF TOWNS.] The trade of Brazil is very great, and increases every year; which is the less surprising, as the Portuguese have opportunities of supplying themselves with slaves for their several works, at a much cheaper rate than any other Eu­ropean power that has settlements in America; they being the only European nation that has established colonies in Africa, and from whence they import as many as 40,000 negroes annually. The ex­ports of Brazil are diamonds, sugar, tobacco, hides, drugs and medi­cines; and they receive in return, woollen goods of all kinds, linens, laces, silks, hats, lead, tin, pewter, copper, iron, beef and cheese. They also receive from Maderia a great quantity of wine, vinegar and brandy; and from Azores, 25,000l. worth of other liquors.

ST. SALVADOR is the capital of Brazil. This city, which has a no­ble, spacious and commodious harbour, is built on a high and steep [Page 656] rock, having the sea upon one side, a lake forming a crescent on the other. The situation makes it in a manner impregnable by nature; and they have besides added to it very strong fortifications. It is populous, magnificent, and beyond comparison the most gay and op­ulent in all Brazil.

MINES.] There are gold mines in many parts of this country, which have been wrought with considerable profit to government. The extraction of gold is neither very laborious nor dangerous in Brazil. It is sometimes on the surface of the soil, and this is the purest kind, and at other times it is necessary to dig for it 18 or 20 feet, but seldom lower. It is found in larger pieces upon the mountains and barren rocks than in the valleys or on the borders of the river. Every man who discovers a mine, must give notice of it to the government. If the vein be thought of little consequence by persons appointed to examine it, it is always given up to the pub­lic. If it be declared to be a rich vein, the government reserve a portion of it to themselves. Another share is given to the com­mandant; a third to the intendant; and two shares are secured to the discoverer. The mines are obliged to deliver to the king of Por­tugal a fifth part of all the gold which is extracted. There are also many diamond mines, which have been discovered in this country; they are of all colours and also of every shade. The diamond has the red of the ruby, the orange of the hyacinth, the blue of the sap­phire, and the green of the emerald. The last is the most scarce and dearest when it is of a beautiful tint. Transparency and clearness are the natural essential properties of the diamond.

NATIVES.] The native Brazilians are about the size of the Eu­ropeans, but not so stout. They are subject to fewer distempers, and are long lived. They wear no clothing; the women wear their hair extremely long, the men cut their's short; the women wear brace­lets of bones of a beautiful white, the men necklaces of the same; the women paint their faces, and the men their bodies. The food of the Brazilians is very simple; they live upon shell fish by the sea side; along the rivers by fishing; and in the forests by hunting; and when these fail, they live upon Cassava and other roots. They are extremely fond of dancing and other amusements; and these amusements are not interrupted by the worship of a Supreme Being, for it is said they know of none; nor is their tranquillity dis­turbed by the dread of a future state, of which they have no idea. They have however their magicians, who, by strange contortions, so far work upon the credulity of the people, as to throw them into violent convulsions. If the impostures of these magicians are detect­ed, they are immediately put to death, which serves in some measure to check the spirit of deceit. Every Brazilian takes as many wives as he chooses, and puts them away when he gets tired of them. When the women lie in, they keep their bed but a day or two; then the mother, hanging the child to her neck in a cotton scarf, returns to her usual occupation, without any kind of inconvenience. Travel­lers are received with distinguished marks of civility by the native Brazilians. Wherever they go they are surrounded with women, who wash their feet, and welcome them with the most obliging ex­pressions. But it would be an unpardonable affront if they should leave the family where they were first entertained, in hopes of bet­ter [Page 657] accomodation in another. Some of these virtues, however, were more applicable to these natives, before they were corrupted by an intercourse with Europeans.

RELIGION.] Though the king of Portugal, as grand master of the order of Christ, be solely in possession of the titles; and though the produce of the crusade belongs entirely to him; yet in this ex­tensive country, six bishoprics have been successively founded, which acknowledge for their superior the archbishopric of Bohia, established in the year 1552. The fortunate prelates, most of them Europeans, who fill these honourable sees, live in a very commodious manner, upon the emoluments attached to the function of their minis­try, and upon a pension of 50l. and from that to 1250l. granted to them by the government. Among the inferior clergy, none but the missionaries, who are settled in the Indian villages, are paid; but the others find sufficient resources among the superstitious people, whom they are to edify, to instruct, and to comfort. Besides an annual tribute, paid by every family to the clergyman, he is entitled to two shillings for every birth, for every wedding, and every burial. Though there be not absolutely an inquisition in Brazil, yet the peo­ple of that country are not protected from the outrages of that barbar­ous institution.

GOVERNMENT.] The government of Brazil is in the viceroy, who has two councils: one for criminal the other for civil affairs, in both of which he presides; but there is no part of the world where the lawyers are more corrupt, or the chicanery of their profession more practised.

Only half of the 16 Captainries, into which this country is divided, belong to the crown; the rest being fiefs made over to some of the nobility, in reward of their extraordinary services, who do little more than acknowledge the sovereignty of the king of Portugal.

HISTORY, &c.] The Portuguese discovered this country in the year 1500, but did not plant it till the year 1549, when they took possession of All Saints Bay, and built the city of St. Salvador, which is now the residence of the viceroy and archbishop. The Dutch in­vaded Brazil in 1623, and subdued the northern provinces; but the Portuguese agreed in 1661, to pay the Dutch eight tons of gold to relinquish their interest in this country, which was accepted, and the Portuguese remained in peaceable possession of all Brazil till about the end of 1762, when the Spanish governor of Buennos Ayres, hearing of a war between Portugal and Spain, took, after a month's siege, the Portuguese frontier fortress, called St. Sacrament; but by the treaty of peace it was restored.

FRENCH AMERICA.
CAYENNE.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north and east, by the Atlantic ocean; south, by Amazonia; and west, by [Page 658] Guiana, or Surrinam. It extends 240 miles along the coast of Guia­na, and nearly 300 miles within land; lying between the equator and the 5th degree north latitude.

CLIMATE, SOIL AND PRODUCE.] The land along the coast is low, marshy and very subject to inundations during the rainy seasons, from the multitude of rivers which rush down from the mountains with great impetuosity. Here the atmosphere is very hot, moist and un­wholesome, especially where the woods are not cleared away; but on the higher parts where the trees are cut down and the ground laid out in plantations, the air is more healthy and the heat greatly miti­gated by the sea breezes. The soil in many parts is very fertile, pro­ducing sugar, tobacco, Indian corn, fruits and other necessaries of life.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.] The French have taken possession of an island, upon this coast, called also Cayenne. It is about 30 miles in circumference, and is very unhealthy; but having some good harbours, they have here some settlements, which raise sugar, coffee, and some other kinds of produce. The French established themselves here, in 1635; but they afterwards abandoned the island, and the English took possession of it. Soon after the French returned and drove out the English; but were expelled in their turn by the Dutch, who kept their conquest but a short time, and then were subdued by the French, who still keep possession of it. The whole of Cayenne is an inconsiderable province, and therefore very little is related of it.

Dutch America.
SURRINAM, OR DUTCH GUIANA.

THIS province, the only one belonging to the Dutch, on the Con­tinent of America, is situated between 5° and 7° N. Lat. Hav­ing the mouth of the Oronoko and the Atlantic on the north; Cay­enne east: Amazonia south; and Terra Firma west.

The Dutch claim the whole coast from the mouth of the Oronoko to the river Marowyne, on which are situated their colonies of Esse­quebo, Demerara, Berbice, and Surrinam. The latter begins with the river Saramacha, and ends with the Marowyne, including a length of coast of 120 miles.

RIVERS.] A number of fine rivers pass through this country, the principal of which are Essequebo, Surrinam, Demerara, Berbice and Conya. Essequebo is nine miles wide at its mouth, and is more than 300 miles in length. Surrinam is a beautiful river, three quarters of a mile wide, navigable for the largest vessels 4 leagues, and for small [...] vessels 60 or 70 miles further. Its banks, quite to the water's edge, are covered with evergreen mangrove trees, which render the passage up this river very delightful. The Demerara is about three quarters of a mile wide where it empties into the Surrinam, is navigable for [Page 659] large vessels 100 miles; a hundred miles further are several falls of easy ascent, above which it divides into the Southwest and South­east branches.

CLIMATE.] In the months of September, October, and Novem­ber, the climate is unhealthy, particularly to strangers. The common diseases are putrid and other fevers, the dry belly ach, and the dropsy. 100 miles back from the sea, you come to quite a different soil, a hilly country, a pure, dry, wholesome air, where a fire sometimes would not be disagreeable. Along the sea coast, the water is brack­ish and unwholesome—the air damp and sultry.—The thermometer ranges from 75° to 90° through the year. A Northeast breeze never fails to blow from about 9 o'clock in the morning through the day, in the hottest seasons. As the days and nights, throughout the year, are very nearly of equal length; the air can never become extremely heated, nor the inhabitants so greatly incommoded by the heat, as those who live at a greater distance from the equator. The seasons were for­merly divided regularly into rainy and dry; but of late years so much dependence cannot be placed upon them, owing probably to the coun­try's being more cleared, by which means a free passage is opened for the air and vapours.

WATER.] The water of the lower parts of the rivers is brackish, and unfit for use; and the inhabitants are obliged to make use of rain water, which is here uncommonly sweet and good. It is caught in cisterns, placed under ground, and before drinking, is set in large earthen pots to settle, by which means it becomes very clear and wholesome. These eastern are so large and numerous, that water is seldom scarce.

CHIEF TOWNS AND POPULATION.] Paramaribo, situated on Surrinam river, 4 leagues from the sea, N. Lat. 6° W. Lon. 55° from London, is the principal town in Surrinam. It contains about 2,000 whites, one half of whom are Jews, and 8,000 slaves. The houses are principally of wood; some few have glass windows, but generally they have wooden shutters. The streets are spacious and straight, and plant­ed on each side with orange or tamarind trees.

About seventy miles from the sea, on the same river, is a village of about 40 or 50 houses, inhabited by Jews. This village and the town above mentioned, with the intervening plantations, contain all the in­habitants in this colony, which amount to 3,200 whites, and 43,000 slaves. The buildings on the plantations are many of them costly, convenient and airy. The country around is thinly inhabited with the native Indians, a harmless friendly set of beings. They are, in general, short of stature, but remarkably well made, of a light copper colour, straight black hair, without beards, high cheek bones, and broad shoulders. In their ears, noses and hair, the women wear ornaments of silver, &c. Both men and women go naked. One nation or tribe of them [...] the lower part of the leg of the female children, when young, with a cord bound very tight for the breadth of 6 inches about the ancle, which cord is never afterwards taken off but to put on a new one; by which means the flesh, which should otherwise grow on that part of the leg, increases the calf to a great size, and leaves the bone below nearly bare. This, though it must render them very weak, is reckoned a great beauty by them. The language of the Indians ap­pears to be very soft. They are mortal enemies to every kind of la­bour; [Page 660] but nevertheless, manufacture a few articles, such as very fine cotton hammocks, earthen water pots, baskets, a red or yellow dye called Roucau, and some other trifles, all which they bring to town and exchange for such articles as they stand in need of.

They paint themselves red, and some are curiously figured with black. Their food consists chiefly of fish and crabs and cassava of which they plant great quantities, and this is almost the only produce they attend to. They cannot be said to be absolutely wandering tribes, but their huts being merely a few cross sticks, covered with branches, so as to defend them from the rain and sun, they frequent­ly quit their habitations, if they see occasion, and establish them else­where. They do not shun the whites, and have been serviceable against the runaway negroes.

Dr. Bancroft observes, that the inhabitants of Dutch Guiana are either whites, blacks or the reddish brown aboriginal natives. The promiscuous intercourse of these different people, have generated several intermediate casts, whose colours depend on their degree of consanguinity to either whites, blacks, negroes, or Indians.

SOIL, PRODUCTIONS, TRADE, &c.] Through the whole coun­try runs a ridge of oyster shells, nearly parallel to the coast, but three or four leagues from it, of a considerable breadth, and from four to eight feet deep, composed of shells exactly of the same nature as those which form the present coast: From this and other circum­stances, there is great reason to believe that the land, from that dis­tance from the sea, is all new land, rescued from the sea, either by some revolution in nature, or other unknown cause.

On each side of the rivers and creeks are situated the Plantations, containing from 500 to 2000 acres each, in number about 550 in the whole colony, producing at present annually about 16,000 hhds. of sugar, 12,000,000lb. coffee, 700,000lb. cocoa, 850,000lb. cotton: All which articles (cotton excepted) have fallen off within 15 years, at least one third, owing to bad management, both here and in Hol­land, and to other causes. Of the proprietors of these plantations, not above 80 reside here. The sugar plantations have many of them water mills, which being much more profitable than others, and the situation of the colony admitting of them, will probably become general; of the rest, some are worked by mules, others by cattle, but from the lowness of the country norse by the wind. The estates are for the greatest part mortgaged for as much or more than they are worth, which greatly discourages any improvements which might otherwise be made. Was it not for the unfortunate situation of the colony, in this and in other respects, it is certainly capable of being brought to a great height of improvement; dyes, gums, oils, plants for medical purposes, &c. might and undoubtedly will, at some future period, be sound in abundance. Rum might be distilled here; indi­go, ginger, rice, tobacco, have been and may be farther cultivated; and many other articles. In the woods are found many kinds of good and durable timber, and some woods for ornamental purposes, partic­ularly a kind of mahogany called copic. The soil is perhaps as rich and as luxuriant as any in the world; it is generally a rich, fat, clayey earth, lying in some places above the level of the rivers at high water (which rises about 8 feet) and in most places below it. Whenever from a continued course of cultivation for many years, a piece of land [Page 661] becomes impoverished (for manure is not known here) it is laid un­der water for a certain number of years, and thereby regains its fer­tility, and in the mean time a new piece of wood land is cleared. This country has never experienced those dreadful scourges of the West Indies, hurricanes: and droughts from the lowness of the land, it has not to fear; nor has the produce ever been destroyed by infects or by the blast. In short, this colony, by proper management, might be­come equal to Jamaica or any other. Land is not wanting; it is finely intersected by noble rivers, and abundant creeks; the soil is of the best kind, it is well situated, and the climate is not very unhealthy, and is growing better, and will continue so to do the more the coun­try is cleared of its woods, and cultivated.

ANIMALS, FISH, SERPENTS, &c.] The rivers abound with fish, some of which are good; at certain seasons of the year there is plenty of turtle. The woods abound with plenty of deer, hares, and rabbits, a kind of buffaloe, and two species of wild hogs, one of which (the pec­cary) is remarkable for having its navel on the back.

The woods are infested with several species of tygers, but with no other ravenous or dangerous animals. The rivers are rendered dan­gerous by alligators from four to seven feet long, and a man was a short time since crushed between the jaws of a fish, but its name is not known. Scorpions and tarantulas are found here of a large size and great venom, and other insects without number, some of them very dangerous and troublesome. The torporific eel also, the touch of which, by means of the bare hand or any conductor, has the effect of a strong electrical shock. Serpents also, some of which are venomous, and others, as has been asserted by many credible per­sons, are from 25 to 50 feet long. In the woods are monkeys, the sloth, and parrots in all their varieties; also some birds of beautiful plumage, among others the flamingo but few or no singing birds.

MILITARY STRENGTH, GOVERNMENT, &c.] The river Surri­nam is guarded by a fort and two redoubts at the entrance, and a fort at Paramaribo, but none of them of any strength, so that one or two frigates would be sufficient to make themselves masters of the whole colony; and never was there a people who more ardently wished for a change of government than the inhabitants of this colony do at this time. The many grievances they labour under, and the immense burthen of taxes, which almost threaten the ruin of the colony, make them in some measure excusable in their general desire to change the Dutch for a British or French government. The colony is not imme­diately under the states general, but under a company in Holland, called the Directors of Surrinam, (a company first formed by the states general, but now supplying its own vacancies) by them are ap­pointed the governor and all the principal officers both civil and military. The interior government consists of a governor and a su­preme and inferior council, the members of the latter are chosen by the governor from a double nomination of the principal inhabitants, and those of the former in the same manner. By these powers, and by a magistrate presiding over all criminal affairs, justice is executed and laws are enacted necessary for the interior government of the colony; those of a more general and public nature are enacted by the directors, and require no approbation here by the court.

[Page 662] The colony is guarded farther by about 1600 regular troops paid by the directors. These troops, together with a corps of about 250 from negroes, paid by the court here, and another small corps of chas­seurs, and so many slaves as the court thinks fit to order from the planters from time to time, are dispersed at posts placed at proper dis­tances on a Cordon, surrounding the colony on the land side, in order, as far as possible, to defend the distant plantations and the colony in general from the attacks of several dangerous bands of runaway slaves, which from very small beginnings have, from the natural prolificacy of the negro race, and the continual addition of fresh fugitives, arrive at such an height as to have cost the country very great sums of money and much loss of men, without being able to do these negroes any ef­fectual injury. *

HISTORY.] This colony was first possessed by the French as ear­ly as the year 1630 or 40, and was abandoned by them on account of its unhealthy climate. In the year 1650 it was taken up by some Englishmen, and in 1662 a charter was granted by Charles II. A­bout this time it was considerably augmented by the settlement of a number of Jews, who had been driven out of Cayenne and the Bra­zils, whose descendants (with other Jews) compose at present one half of the white inhabitants of the colony, and are allowed great privileges. In 1667 it was taken by the Dutch, and the English having got possession about the same time of the then Dutch colony of New York, each party retained its conquest, the English planters most of them retired to Jamaica, leaving their slaves behind them, whose lan­guage is still English, but so corrupted as not to be understood at first by an Englishman.

Aboriginal America. Or that Part which the ABORIGINAL INDIANS possess.
AMAZONIA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 1400 Miles. between the Equator and 20° South Latitude.
Breadth 900 Miles.  

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Terra Firma and Gui­ana; east, by Brazil; south, by Paragua; and west, by Peru.

RIVERS.] The river Amazon is the largest in the known world. This river, so famous for the length of its course, that great vassal of the sea, to which it brings the tribute it has received from so many of its own vassals, seems to be produced by innumerable torrents, which rush down with amazing impetuosity from the eastern declivity of the Andes, and unite in a spacious plain to form this immense river. In its progress of 3300 miles, it receives [Page 663] the waters of a prodigious number of rivers, some of which come from far, and are very broad and deep. It is interspersed with an infinite number of islands, which are too often overflowed to ad­mit of culture. It falls into the Atlantic ocean under the Equator, and is there 150 miles broad.

CLIMATE, SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.] The air is cooler in this country than could be expected, considering it is situated in the mid­dle of the torrid zone. This is partly owing to the heavy rains which occasion the rivers to overflow their banks one half of the year, and partly to the cloudiness of the weather, which obscures the sun great part of the time he is above the horizon. During the rainy season on the country is subject to dreadful storms of thunder and lightning.

The soil is extremely fertile, producing cocoa nuts, pine apples, bananas, plaintains, and a great variety of tropical fruits; cedar, red­wood, pak, ebony, logwood, and many other sorts of dying wood; together with tobacco, sugar canes, cotton, potatoes, balsam, honey, &c. The woods abound with tygers, wild boars, buffaloes, deer and game of various kinds. The rivers and lakes abound with fish. Here are also sea cows and turtles; but the crocodiles and water serpents render fishing a dangerous employment.

WOMEN.] As early as the time of Hercules and Theseus the Greeks had imagined the existence of a nation of Amazons; with this fable they embellished the history of all their heroes, not ex­cepting that of Alexander; and the Spaniards, infatuated with this dream of antiquity, transferred it to America. They reported that a republic of female warriors actually existed in America, who did not live in society with men, and only admitted them once a year for the purposes of procreation. To give the more credit to this roman­tic story, it was reported, not without reason, that the women in Amer­ica were all so unhappy, and were treated with such contempt and in­humanity by the men, that many of them had agreed to shake off the yoke of their tyrants. It was further said, that being accustomed to follow the men into the forests, and to carry their provisions and baggage when they went out to sight or to hunt, they must neces­sarily have been inured to hardships, and rendered capable of form­ing so bold a resolution. Since this story has been propagated, in­finite pains have been taken to find out the truth of it, but no traces could ever be discovered.

NATIVES.] These natives, like all the other Americans, are of a good stature, have handsome features, long black hair, and [...]pper complexions. They are said to have a taste for the imitative arts, es­pecially painting and sculpture; and make good mechanics. Their cordage is made of the barks of trees, and their sails of cotton, their hatchets of tortoise shells or hard stones, their chissels, plains and [...]imbles, of the horns and teeth of wild beasts; and their canoes are [...] hollowed. They spin and weave cotton cloth; and build their houses with wood any clay, and thatch them with reeds. Their arms in general are darts and javelins, bows and arrows, with targets of cane or fish skins. The several nations are governed by their chiefs or cachiques; it being observable that the monarchical [...] of government has prevailed almost universally, both among the ancient and modern barbarians, doubtless, on account of its requiring [Page 664] a much less refined policy than the republican system. The regalia, which distinguish the chiefs are a crown of parrots feathers, a chain of tygers' teeth or claws, which hangs round the waist, and a wooden sword.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS.] The mind of a good man is pleased with the reflection, that any part of South America has escaped the ravages of European conquerors. This country has hitherto re­mained unsubdued. The original inhabitants enjoy their native freedom and independence.

PATAGONIA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 1100 Miles. between 35° and 54° South Latitude.
Breadth 350 Miles.  

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED north, by Chili and Paragua; east, by the Atlantic ocean; south by the Straits of Magellan; west by the Pacific ocean.

CLIMATE, SOIL AND PRODUCE.] The climate is said to be much colder in this country, than in the north, under the same parallels of latitude; which is imputed to its being in the vicinity of the Andes, which pass through it, being covered with eternal snow. It is al­most impossible to say what the soil would produce, as it is not at all cultivated by the natives. The northern parts are covered with wood, among which is an inexhaustible fund of large timber; but towards the south it is said there is not a single tree large enough to be of use to mechanics. There are, however, good pastures, which feed in­credible numbers of horned cattle and horses, first carried there by the Spaniards, and now increased in an amazing degree.

INHABITANTS.] Patagonia is inhabited by a variety of Indian tribes, among which are the Patagons, from whom the country takes its name; the Pampas and the Cossores. They all live upon fish and game and what the earth produces spontaneously. Their huts are thatched, and, notwithstanding the rigor of the climate, they wear no other clothes than a mantle made of seal skin, or the skin of some beast, and that they throw off when they are in action. They are exceedingly hardy, brave and active, making use of their arms, which are bows and arrows headed with flints, with amazing dexterity.

Magellan, who first discovered the straits which bear his name, and after him Commodore Biron, have reported. that those exists, in these regions, a race of giants; but others, who have sailed this way, contradict the report. Upon the whole we may conclude that this story is like that of the female republic of Amazons.

The Spaniards once built a fort upon the straits, and lest a garrison in it to prevent any other European nation passing that way into the Pacific Ocean: but most of the men perish­ed by hunger, whence the place obtained the name of Port Fam­ine; and since that fatal event, no nation has attempted to plant [Page 665] colonies is Patagonia. As to the religion or government of these sav­ages, we have no certain information. Some have reported, that these people believe in invisible powers, both good and evil; and that they pay a tribute of gratitude to the one, and deprecate the wrath and vengeance of the other.

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS UPON SOUTH AMERICA.

We have now traversed the several provinces of that extensive re­gion, which is comprehended between the Isthmus of Darien and the fifty fourth degree of S. latitude. We have taken a cursory view of the rivers, the soil, the climate, the productions, the commerce, the in­habitants, &c. It only remains now, that we should make such other general observations as naturally occur upon the subject.

The history of Columbus, together with his bold and adventurous actions in the discovery of this country, are sufficiently known to all who have paid any attention to history. His elevated mind suggested to him ideas superior to any other man of his age, and his aspiring genius prompted him to make greater and more noble efforts for new dis­coveries. He crossed the extensive Atlantic, and brought to view a world unheard of by the people of the ancient hemisphere. This ex­cited an enterprising, avaricious spirit among the inhabitants of Europe; and they flocked to America for the purposes of carnage and plun­der. Accordingly, a scene of barbarity has been acted, of which South America has been the principal theatre, which shocks the human mind, and almost staggers belief. No sooner had the Spaniards set foot upon the American continent, than they laid claim to the soil, to the mines, and to the services of the natives, wherever they came. Countries were invaded, kingdoms were overturned, innocence was attacked, and happiness had no asylum. Despotism and cruelty with all their terrible scourges attended their advances in every part. They went forth, they conquered, they ravaged, they destroyed. No deceit, no cruelty was too great to be made use of, to satisfy their avarice. Justice was disregarded, and mercy formed no part of the character of these inhuman conquerors. They were intent only on the prose­cution of schemes most degrading and most scandalous to the human character. In South America, the kingdoms of Terra Firma, of Pe­ru, of Chili, of Paragua, of Brazil and of Guiana successively fell a sacrifice to their vicious ambition. The history of their several re­ductions is too lengthy to be inserted in a work of this kind. * Let us then turn from these distressing scenes—let us leave the political world, where nothing but spectacles of horror are presented to our view; where scenes of blood and carnage distract the imagination—where the avarice, injustice and inhumanity of men furnish noth­ing but uneasy sensations—let us leave these, I say, and enter the natural world, whose laws are constant and uniform, and where beautiful, grand and sublime objects continually present themselves to our view.

We have already given a description of those beautiful and spa­cious rivers which every where intersect this country; the next thing that will engage our attention is that immense chain of moun­tains, which runs from one end of the continent to the other. At sight of these enormous masses, which rise to such prodigious heights [Page 666] above the humble surface of the earth, where almost all mankind have fixed their residence; of those masses, which in one part are crowned with impenetrable and ancient forests, that have never re­sounded with the stroke of the hatchet, and in another, raise their towering tops and stop the clouds in their course, while in other parts they keep the traveller at a distance from their summits, either by ramparts of ice that surround them, or from volleys of flame issu­ing forth from the frightful and yawning caverns; masses giving rise to impetuous torrents descending with dreadful noise from their open sides, to rivers, fountains and boiling springs: At these ap­pearances, I say, every beholder is fixed in astonishment.

The height of the most elevated point in the Pyrences is, according to Mr. Coss [...]ni, 6,646 feet. The height of the mountain Gemmi, in the Canton of Berne, is 10,110 feet. The height of the pike of Ten­eriffe is 13,178 feet. The height of the Chimborazo, the most ele­vated point of the Andes, is 20,280 feet. Upon comparison, the highest part of the Andes is 7,102 feet higher than the pike of Ten­eriffe, the most elevated mountain known in the ancient hemisphere.

West India Islands.

BETWEEN North and South America, lie a multitude of islands, which are called the West Indies, and which, such as are worth cultivation, now belong to five European powers, as Great Britain, Spain, France, Holland, and Denmark, as follows:

The BRITISH claim.
Jamaica, St. Vincent,
Barbadoes, Nevis,
St. Christopher's, Montserrat,
Antigua, Barbuda,
Grenada, and the Grena­dines, Anguilla,
  Bermudas,
Dominica, The Bahama Islands.

SPAIN claims
Cuba, Trinidad,
Part of St. Domingo, or Hispaniola, Margaretta,
Porto Rico, Juan Fernandes, in the Pa­cific Ocean.

The FRENCH claim
Part of St. Domingo, St. Bartholomew, Deseada and Marigalante,
Martinico,  
Gaudalupe, Tobago.
St. Lucia,  

The DUTCH claim
The Islands of St. Eu­statia, Curassou, or Curacoa, Saba.

DENMARK claims
The Islands of St. Croix, St. Thomas, and St. John's,

[Page]

WEST INDIES Acccording to the best AUTHORITIES

[Page 667] The climate in all the West India islands is nearly the same, al­lowing for these accidental differences which the several situations and qualities of the lands themselves produce. As they lie within the tropics, and the sun goes quite over their heads, passing beyond them to the north, and never returning farther from any of them than about 30 degrees to the south, they would be continually subjected to an extreme and intolerable heat, if the trade winds, rising gradually as the sun gathers strength, did not blow in upon them from the sea, and refresh the air in such a manner, as to enable them to attend their concerns even under the meridian sun. On the other hand, as the night advances, a breeze begins to be perceived, which blows smartly from the land, as it were from the centre, towards the sea, to all points of the compass at once.

By the same remarkable Providence in the disposing of things, it is that when the sun has made a great progress towards the tropic of Cancer, and becomes in a manner vertical, he draws after him such a vast body of clouds, which shield them from his direct beams; and dissolving into rain, cool the air, and refresh the country, thirsty with the long drought, which commonly prevails from the beginning of January to the latter end of May.

The rains in the West Indies are like floods of water, poured from the clouds with a prodigious impetuosity; the rivers suddenly rise; new rivers and lakes are formed, and in a short time all the low country is under water. * Hence it is, that the rivers which have their source within the tropics, swell and overflow their banks at a certain season; but so mistaken were the ancients in their idea of the torrid zone, that they imagined it to be dried and scorched up with a con­tinual and fervent heat, and to be for that reason uninhabitable; when, it reality, some of the largest rivers of the world have their course within its limits, and the moisture is one of the greatest in­conveniencies of the climate in several places.

The rains make the only distinction of seasons in the West Indies; the trees are green the whole year round; they have no cold, no frosts, no snows, and but rarely some hail; the storms of hail are, how­ever, very violent when they happen, and the hailstones very great and heavy. Whether it be owing to this moisture, which alone does not seem to be a sufficient cause, or to a greater quantity of a sul­phureous acid, which predominates in the air of this country, metals of all kinds that are subject to the action of such causes rust and can­ker in a very short time; and this cause, perhaps, as much as the heat itself, contributes to make the climate of the West Indies un­friendly and unpleasant to an European constitution.

It is in the rainy season (principally in the month of August, more rarely in July and September) that they are assaulted by hurricanes, the most terrible calamity to which they are subject (as well as the people in the East Indies) from the climate; this destroys, at a stroke, the labours of many years, and prostates the most exalted hopes of the planter, and at the moment when he thinks himself out of danger. It is a sudden and violent storm of wind, rain, thunder and lightning, at­tended with a furious swelling of the seas, and sometimes with an earthquake; in short, with every circumstance which the elements can assemble, that is terrible and destructive. First, they see as a pre­lude [Page 668] to the ensuing havock, whole fields of sugar canes whirled into the air, and scattered over the face of the country. The strongest trees of the forest are torn up by the roots, and driven about like stubble; their windmills are swept away in a moment; their utensils, the fixtures, the ponderous copper boilers, and stills of several hun­dred weight are wrenched from the ground, and battered to pieces; their houses are no protection; the roofs are torn off at one blast; whilst the rain, which in an hour raises the water five feet, rushes in upon them with an irresistible violence.

The grand staple commodity of the West Indies in sugar; this com­modity was not at all known to the Greeks and Romans, though it was made in China, in very early times, from whence was derived the first knowledge of it; but the Portuguese were the first who culti­vated it in America, and brought it into request, as one of the materials of a very universal luxury in Europe. It is not determined whether the cane, from which this substance is taken, be a native of America, or brought thither to their colony of Brazil, by the Portuguese, from In­dia and the coast of Africa; but, however that matter may be, in the beginning they made the most, as they still do the best, sugars which come to market in this part of the world. The juice within the su­gar cane is the most lively, excellent, and the least cloying sweet in na­ture; which, sucked raw, has proved extremely nutritive and whole­some. From the molasses, rum is distilled, and from the scummings of the sugar a meaner spirit is procured. The tops of the canes, and the leaves which grow upon the joints, make very good provender for their cattle; and the refuse of the cane, after grinding, serves for fire; so that no part of this excellent plant is without its use.

They compute that, when things are well managed, the rum and molasses pay the charges of the plantation, and the sugars are clear gain. However, a man cannot begin a sugar plantation of any con­sequence, not to mention the purchase of the land, which is very high, under a capital of at least 5000l.

The quantity of rum and molasses exported from all the British West India islands, in 1787, 1788 and 1789, to all parts, was, accurately, as follows:

Gallons. Gallons.
1787 Rum 5,496,147 of which 1,660,155 came to the United States.
Molasses 30,580 do. 4,200 do.
1788 Rum 6,770,332 do. 1,541,093 do.
Molasses 28,812 do. 3,928 do.
1789 Rum 9,492,177 do. 1,485,461 do.
Molasses 21,192 do. 1,000 do. *

The negroes in the plantations are subsisted at a very easy rate. This is generally by allotting to each family of them a small portion of land, and allowing them two days in the week, Saturday and Sun­day, to cultivate it; some are subsisted in this manner, but others find their negroes a certain portion of Guinea or Indian corn, and to some a salt herring, or a small portion of bacon or salt pork, a day. All the rest of the charge consists in a cap, a shirt, a pair of breeches, [Page 669] and a blanket; and the profit of their labour yields 10 or 12l. annually. The price of men negroes, upon their first arrival, is from 30 to 36l. Wo­men and grown boys 50l. less; but such negro families as are acquaint­ed with the business of the islands generally bring above 40l. upon an average one with another; and there are instances of a single negro man, expert in the business, bringing 150 guineas; and the wealth of a planter is generally computed from the number of slaves he possesses.

The islands of the West Indies lie in the form of a bow, or semi­circle, stretching almost from the coast of Florida north, to the river Oronoko, in the main continent of South America. Some call them the Carribbees, from the first inhabitants; though this is a term that most geographers confine to the Leeward Islands. Sailors distinguish them into the Windward and Leeward islands, with regard to the usual courses of ships, from Old Spain, or the Canaries, to Carthagena, or New Spain and Porto Bello. The geographical tables and maps dis­tinguish them into great and little Antilles.

BRITISH WEST INDIES.
JAMAICA.

THIS island, the most valuable appendage to the British domin­ions in America, is 180 miles long and 60 broad; of an oval form, lying between 17° 34′ N. lat. and about the longitude of Phila­delphia; containing 3,500,000 acres of land; 600,000 of which are cleared, and about 400,000 cultivated.

DIVISIONS AND POPULATION.] Jamaica is divided as follows:

Counties. Parishes. Towns and Villages. Acres. Inhabitants.
Middlesex 8 15 1,305,285  
Surry 7 12 672,616 23,000 Whites.
Cornwall 5 10 1,512,149 300,000 Negroes.
Total Three 20 37 3,500,000 323,000 *

This island is intersected with a ridge of steep rocks, tumbling, by the frequent earthquakes, in a stupendous manner upon one another. From the rocks issue a vast number of small rivers of pure wholesome water, which fall down in cataracts, and, together with the stupen­dous height of the mountains, and the bright verdure of the trees through which they flow, form a most delightful landscape. On each side of this chain of mountains are ridges of lower ones, which di­minish as they remove from it. On these, coffee grows in great plen­ty. The vailies and plains between these ridges are level, and the soil is prodigiously fertile.

The longest day in summer is about 13 hours, and the shortest in winter about eleven; but the most usual divisions of the seasons in the West Indies are into the dry and wet seasons. The air of this island is in most places excessively hot, and unfavourable to Euro­pean constitutions; but the cool sea breezes, which sot in every morning at ten o'clock, render the heat more tolerable; and the air upon the high grounds is temperate, pure, and cooling. It lightens [Page 670] almost every night, but without much thunder, which when it happens is terrible, and roars with astonishing loudness; and the lightning in these violent storms frequently does great damage. In February or March, they expect earthquakes. During the months of May and October, the rains are extremely violent, and continue sometimes for a fortnight together. In the plains are found several salt foundations; and in the mountains, not far from Spanish Town, is a hot bath, of great medicinal virtues. It gives relief in the dry belly ach, which, excepting the bilious and yellow fever, is one of the most terrible en­demial distempers of Jamaica.

Sugar is the greatest and most valuable production of this island. In 1787—824,706 cwt. of this article was exported to Great Britain, and in 1790—1,185,519 cwt. Cocoa was formerly cultivated in it to great extent. It produces also ginger and the pimento, or, as it is called, Jamaica pepper, and vulgarly allspice; the wild cinnamon tree, whose bark is so useful in medicine; the machineel, whose fruit, though uncommonly delightful to the eye, contains one of the worst poisons in nature; the mahogany, and of the most valuable quality; but this wood begins to be scarce, and of late is very dear. Excel­lent cedars, of a large size and durable; the cabbage tree, remarkable for the hardness of its wood, which, when dry, is incorruptible, and hardly yields to any kind of tool; the palma, affording oil, much es­teemed by the savages, both in food and medicine; the soap tree, whose berries answer all purposes of washing; the mangrove and ol­ive bark, useful to tanners; the fustic and redwood to the dyers; and lately the logwood. The indigo plant was formerly much cultivated, and the cotton tree it still so. They have maize, or Indian corn, Guinea corn, peas of various kinds, with a variety of roots. Fruits grow in great plenty; citrons, Seville and China oranges, common and sweet lemons, limes, shadocks, pomegranates, mamees, soursops, papas, pine apples, prickly pears, allicada pears, melons, pompions, guavas, and several kinds of berries; also garden stuffs in great plen­ty, and good. The cattle bred on this island are but few; their beef is tough and lean; the mutton and lamb are tolerable; they have plenty of hogs; many plantations have hundreds of them, and their flesh is exceedingly sweet and delicate. Their horses are small, mettle­some and hardy, and when well made generally sell for 30 or 40l. Ster­ling. Jamaica likewise supplies the apothecary with guaiacum, sarsa­parilla, china, cassia, and tamarinds. Among the animals are the land and sea turtle, and the alligator. Here are all sorts of fowl, wild and tame, parrots, parroquets, pelicans, snipes, teal, Guinea hens, geese, ducks, and turkies, the humming bird, and a great variety of others. The rivers and bays abound with fish. The mountains breed num­berless adders, and other noxious animals, as the fens and marshes do the guana and gallewasp; but these last are not venomous. Among the insects are the ciror, of chegoe, which eat into the nervous and membranous parts of the flesh of the negroes, and the white people are sometimes plagued with them. These insects get into any part of the body, but chiefly the legs and feet, where they breed in great numbers, and shut themselves up in a bag as soon as the person feels them, which is not perhaps till a week after they have been in the body; they pick them out with a needle, or the point of a penknife, taking care to destroy the bag entirely, that none of the breed, which [Page 671] are like nits, may be left behind. They sometimes get into the toes and eat the flesh to the very bone.

Port Royal was formerly the capital of Jamaica. It stood upon the point of a narrow neck of land, which, towards the sea, formed part of the border of a very fine harbour of its own name. The convenience of this harbour, which was capable of con­taining a thousand sail of large ships, and of such depth as to allow them to load and unload with the greatest ease, weighed so much with the inhabitants, that they chose to build their capital on this spot, though the place was a hot dry sand, and produced none of the necessaries of life, not even fresh water. But the advantage of its harbour, and the resort of pirates, made it a place of great consid­eration. These pirates were called Buccaneers; they fought with a desperate bravery, and then spent their fortune in this capital with as inconsiderable dissipation. About the year 1692, no place for its size could be compared to this town for trade, wealth and an entire cor­ruption of manners. In the month of June, in this year, an earth­quake, which shook the whole island to its foundations, totally over­whelmed this city, so as to leave, in one quarter, not even the small­est vestige remaining. In two minutes the earth opened and swallow­ed up nine tenths of the houses, and two thousand people. The water gushed out from the openings of the earth, and tumbled the people on heaps; but some of them had the good fortune to catch the beams and rafters of houses, and were afterwards saved by boats. Several ships were cast away in the harbour; and the swan frigate, which lay in the dock to careen, was carried over the tops of sinking houses, and did not overset, but afforded a retreat to some hundreds of people, who saved their lives upon her. An officer who was in the town at this time, says, the earth opened and shut very quick in some places, and he saw several people sink down to the middle, and others appeared with their heads just above ground and were squeez­ed to death. At Savannah, above a thousand acres were sunk, with the houses and people in them; the place appeared for some time like a, lake, was afterwards dried up, but no houses were seen. In some parts, mountains were split; and at one place a plantation was removed to the distance of a mile. They again rebuilt the city; but it was a second time, ten years after, destroyed by a great fire. The extraordinary convenience of the harbour tempted them to build it once more; and once more, in 1782, was it laid in rubbish by a hur­ricane the most terrible on record. Such repeated calamities seemed to mark out this place as a devoted spot; the inhabitants therefore resolved to forsake it forever, and to reside at the opposite bay, where they built Kingston, which is now the capital of this island. It consists of upwards of one thousand houses, many of them handsome­ly built, and in the taste of these islands, as well as the neighbouring continent, one story high, with porticoes, and every convenience for a comfortable habitation in that climate. Not far from Kingston stands St. Jago de le Vega, or Spanish town, which, though at present in­ferior to Kingston, was once the capital of Jamaica, and is still the seat of government, and the place where the courts of justice are held.

On the 3d of October, 1780, was a dreadful hurricane, which al­most overwhelmed the little seaport town of Savannah la Mer, in Ja­maica, and part of the adjacent country. Very few houses were [Page 672] left standing, and a great number of people were killed. Much dam­age was also done and many lives lost, in other parts of the island.

The whole product of the island may be reduced to these heads. First, sugars, of which they exported in 1787 824,706 cwt.—1788 1,124,017 cwt.—1789 1,236,603 cwt.—1790 1,185,519 cwt. Most of this goes to London, Bristol and Glasgow, and some part of it into the United States, in return for the beef, pork, cheese, corn, peas, staves, planks, pitch and tar, which they have from thence. Second, ruin, of which they export about 4000 puncheons annually. The rum of this island is generally esteemed the best, and is the most used in Great Britain. Third, molasses, in which they formerly made their remittances for the produce of the grand staple the sugar cane. Ac­cording to the late testimony of a respectable planter in Jamaica, that island hath 280,000 acres in canes, of which 210,000 are annually cut, and make from 68 to 70,000 tons of sugar, and 4,200,000 gallons of rum. Fourth, cotton, of which they send out two thousand bags. The indigo, formerly much cultivated, is now inconsiderable; but some cocoa and coffee are exported, with a considerable quantity of pepper, ginger, drugs for dyers and apothecaries, sweetmeats, mahog­any and machineel planks. But some of the most considerable arti­cles of their trade are with the Spanish continent of new Spain and Terra Firma; for in the former they cut great quantities of logwood, and both in the former and latter they carry on a vast and profitable trade in negroes and all kinds of European goods.

This island was originally a part of the Spanish empire in America. Several descents had been made upon it by the English, prior to 1656; but it was not till this year that Jamaica was reduced under the Brit­ish dominion. Cromwell had fitted out a squadron, under Penn and Venables, to reduce the Spanish island of Hispaniola, but there this squadron was unsuccessful. The commanders, of their own accord, to atone for this misfortune, made a descent on Jamaica, and having carried the capital, St. Jago, soon compelled the whole island to sur­render. Ever since it has been subject to the English, and the gov­ernment of it is one of the richest places, next to that of Ireland, in the disposal of the crown, the standing salary being 2,500l. per annum, and the assembly commonly voting the governor as much more; which, with the other perquisites, make it on the whole little inferior to 10,000l. per annum.

BARBADOES.

THIS island, the most easterly of all the Carribbees, is situ­ated in 59 degrees west longitude, and 13 degrees north latitude. It is 21 miles in length, and 14 in breadth. When the English, some time after the year 1625, first landed here, it had not the least appear­ance of ever having been peopled even by savages. There was no kind of beasts, no fruit, no herb nor root, fit for supporting the life of man. Yet as the climate was so good, and the soil appeared fer­tile, some gentlemen of small fortunes in England, resolved to become adventurers thither. The trees were so large, and of a wood so hard and stubborn, that it was with great difficulty they could clear as much ground as was necessary for their subsistence. By unremitting perse­verance, however, they brought it to yield them a tolerable support; [Page 673] and they found that cotton and indigo agreed well with the soil, and that tobacco, which was beginning to come into repute in Eng­land, answered tolerably well. These prospects, together with the storm between the king and parliament, which was beginning to break out in England, induced many new adventures to transport themselves to this island. And what is remarkable, 25 years after its first settle­ment, in 1650, it contained more than 50,000 whites, and a much greater number of negro and Indian slaves; the latter they acquired by means not at all to their honour; for they seized upon all those unhappy men, without any pretence, in the neighbouring isl­ands, and carried them into slavery—a practice, which has rendered the Carribbee Indians irreconcilable to the English ever since. They had begun, a little before this, to cultivate sugar to great advantage. The number of the slaves was, in consequence of their wealth, still aug­mented; and in 1676, it is supposed that their number amounted to 100,000, which, together with 50,000 whites, make 150,000 on this small spot, a degree of population unknown in Holland, in China, or any other part of the world most renowned for numbers.

At this time Barbadoes employed 400 sail of ships, one with an­other of 150 tons, in their trade. Their annual exports in sugar, indigo, ginger, cotton, and citron water, were about 350,000l. and their circulating cash at home was 200,000l. Such was the increase of population, trade, and wealth, in the course of 50 years. But since that time, this island has been much on the decline, which is to be attributed partly to the growth of the French sugar colonies, and partly to the other English establishments in the neighbouring isles. Their numbers at present are said to be 20,000 whites, and 100,000 slaves. Their commerce consists in the same articles as formerly, though they deal in them to less extent. In 1787 they exported to Great Britain upwards of 130,000 cwt. of sugar, and in 1790, but about 113,000 cwt. Their capital is Bridgetown, where the governor resides, whose em­ployment is said to be worth 5000l. per annum. They have a college, founded and well endowed by colonel Codrington, who was a native of this island. Barbadoes, as well as Jamaica, has suffered much by hurricanes, fires, and the plague. On the 10th of October, 1780, a dreadful hurricane occasioned vast devastation in Barbadoes, great numbers of the houses were destroyed, not one house in the island was wholly free from damage, many persons were buried in the ruins of the buildings, and great numbers were driven into the sea, and there perished.

ST. CHRISTOPHER's.

THIS island, commonly called by the sailors St. Kitt's, is situated in 62 degrees west longitude, and 17 degrees north latitude, about 14 leagues from Antigua, and is 20 miles long, and 7 broad. It has its name from the famous Christopher Columbus, who discovered it for the Spaniards. That nation, however, abandoned it, as unworthy of their attention; and, in 1626, it was settled by the French and English conjunctly; but entirely ceded to the latter by the peace of Utrecht. Besides cotton, ginger, and the tropical fruits, it produced, in 1787, 231, 397 cwt. of sugar, and in 1790, but about 113,000 cwt. It is computed that this island contains 6000 whites and 36,000 ne­groes. In February, 1782, it was taken by the French, but restored to England by the treaty of 1783.

[Page 674]

ANTIGUA,

SITUATED in 61 degrees west lon. and 17 degrees north lat. is of a circular form, near 20 miles over every way. This island, which was formerly thought useless, has now got the start of the rest. It has one of the best harbours in the West Indies; and its capital St. John's, which, before the fire in 1769, was large and wealthy, is the ordinary seat of the governor of the Leeward islands. Antigua is sup­posed to contain about 7000 whites, and 30,000 slaves. In 1787, 254,706 cwt. of sugar was sent from this island to Great Britain, and in 1790, only 65,022 cwt.

GRENADA, AND THE GRENADINES,

GRENADA is situated in 12° north lat. and 62° west lon. about 30 leagues S. W. of Barbadoes, and almost the same distance north of Andalusia, or the Spanish main. This island is said to be 30 miles in length, and 15 in breadth. Experience has proved; that the soil of this island is extremely proper for producing sugar, coffee, tobacco, and indigo; and upon the whole it carries with it all the appearance of becoming as flourishing a colony as any in the West Indies, of it, dimensions. A lake on the top of a hill, in the middle of the island, supplies it plentifully with fine rivers, which adorn and fertilize it. Several bays and harbours lie round the island, some of which may be fortified with great advantage, which render it very convenient for shipping; and has the happiness of not being subject to hurri­canes. St. George's bay has a sandy bottom, and is capacious, but open. In its harbour, or careening place, 100 large vessels may be moored with perfect safety. This island was long the theatre of bloody wars between the native Indians and the French, during which these handful of Carribbees defended themselves with the most resolute bravery. In the last war but one, when Grenada was attack­ed by the English, the French inhabitants who were not very numerous, were so amazed at the reduction of Gaudalupe and Martinico, that they lost all spirit, and surrendered without making the least opposi­tion; and the full property of this island, together with the small islands on the north, called the Grenadines, which yield the same produce, were confirmed to the crown of Great Britain, by the trea­ty of Paris in 1763. But in July, 1779▪ the French made themselves masters of this island, though it was restored to Great Britain by the late treaty of peace. In 1787, 172,880 cwt. of sugar was exported from these islands to Great Britain, and in 1790, 191,625 cwt.

DOMINICA,

SITUATED is 16 [...] N. lat. and in 62 W. lon. lies about half way between Gaudalupe and Martinico. It is near 28 miles in length, and 13 in breadth; it obtained its name from being discovered by Columbus on a Sunday. The soil of this island is thin, and better adapted to the rearing of cotton than sugar; but the sides of the hills bear the finest trees in the West Indies, and the island is well supplied with rivulets of good water. By the peace of Paris, in 1763, it was ceded to the English; but they have derived little advantage from this conquest, the island being, till lately, no better than a harbour for the natives of the other Carribbees, who being expelled their own settlements, have taken refuge here. But, on account of its situation between the prin­cipal French islands, and Prince Rupert's bay being one of the most [Page 675] capacious in the West Indies, it has been judged expedient to form Dominica into a government of itself, and to declare it a free port. It was taken by the French in 1778; but it was restored again to Great Britain by the late peace. It exported to Great Britain, in 1790, upwards of 50,000 cwt. of sugar, and considerably more in 1787.

ST. VINCENT,

SITUATED in 13° N. lat. and 61° W. lon. 50 miles northwest of Barbadoes, 30 miles south of St. Lucia, is about 24 miles in length, and 18 in breadth. It is very fruitful, being a black mould upon a strong loam, the most proper for the raising of sugar. Indigo thrives here remarkably well, but this article is less cultivated than formerly throughout the West Indies. Many of the inhabitants are Carribbe­ans, and many here also fugitive, from Barbadoes and the other islands.

The Carribbeans were treated with so▪ much injustice and barbarity, after this island came into possession of the English, to whom it was ceded by the peace, in 1763, that they greatly contributed towards enabling the French to get possession of it again in 1779; but it was restored to Great Britain by the late treaty of peace. It sent to Great Britain in 1790, 76,747 cwt. of sugar.

NEVIS, AND MONTSERRAT,

TWO small islands, lying between St. Christopher's and Antigua, neither of them exceeding 18 miles in circumference, and are said to contain 5000 whites, and 10,000 slaves. The soil in these four islands is pretty much alike, light and sandy, but notwithstanding fertile in an high degree; and their principal exports are derived from the su­gar cane. Both these islands were taken by the French in 1782, but were restored at the peace. They sent to Great Britain, in 1787, 108,324 cwt. of sugar, but much less in 1790.

BARBUDA,

SITUATED 17° 49′ N. lat. 61° 50′ W. lon. 35 miles north of Antigua, is 20 miles in length, and 12 in breadth. It is fertile, and has a good road for shipping, but no direct trade with England. The inhabitants are chiefly employed in husbandry, and raising fresh pro­visions for the use of the neighbouring isles. It belongs to the Cod­rington family, and the inhabitants amount to about 1500.

ANGUILLA,

SITUATED in 18° N. lat. 60 miles N. W. of St. Christopher's, is about 50 miles long, and 10 broad. This island is perfectly level, and the climate nearly the same with that of Jamaica. The inhabit­ants, who are not numerous, apply themselves to husbandry and feeding of cattle.

BERMUDAS, ON SOMMERS' ISLANDS.

THESE received their first name from their being discovered by John Bermudas, a Spaniard; and were called Sommers' Islands, from Sir George Sommers, who was shipwrecked on their rocks, in 1609, in his passage to Virginia. They are situated, at a vast distance [Page 676] from any continent, in 32° N. lat. and in 65° W. lon. Their dis­tance from the Madeiras is about 1200 leagues, and from Carolina 300. They are nearly in the form of a shepherd's crook; the main island is about 16 miles in length, and from one to two in breadth. The parish of St. George's, is an island to the eastward of the main land, on which stands the town of St. George's, containing about 500 hous­es. Contiguous to this is the island of St. David's, which supplies the town with butter, milk, vegetables, poultry, and fresh meat. In the bosom of the crook, lie a vast number of small islands, uninhabit­ed. The island is rocky, and the ground hilly. In the main road a sulky may pass; and even there, in many places, with difficulty; but turn to the right or left, and it is passable only on horse back. The air is healthy; a continual spring prevails. Cedars, mantled in green, always adorn the hills. The pasture ground is ever verdant; the gardens ever in bloom. Most of the productions of the West Indies might here be cultivated. The houses are built of a soft stone, which is sawn like timber; when exposed to the weather, and wash­ed with lime, it becomes hard. The houses are white as snow; which, beheld from an eminesice, contrasted with the greenness of the cedars and pasture ground, and the multitude of islands, full in view, realize what the Poets have feigned concerning the Ely [...]an fields. The inhabitants are numerous; the whole island is a contin­ued village; no less, perhaps, than 15 or 20,000; are collected on this small spot. The blacks are twice as numerous as the whites. Happy for the country, were the colour unknown among them. The Bermudians are chiefly seafaring people; few of the men are ever at home; 3 or 400 go annually to Turks' Island, to rake salt, which is carried to America for provisions, or sold to such as may call at Turk's Island, for cash. However industrious the men are abroad, at home they are indolent; much given, particularly of late, to gam­ing and luxury. They women are generally handsome and comely; they love their husbands, their children, and their dress. Dancing is their favourite amusement. The men must be equipped in taste when they appear in company, should they not have a dollar in the pound to pay their creditors; the women must array themselves like the belles of Paris, should they not have a morsel of bread to pre­serve their blooming complexion. They are thoroughly acquainted with one anothers families, and from their tea tables, as from their at­mosphere, arises constant gusts of scandal and detraction. To stran­gers they are kind, but among themselves are quarrelsome. Their friendly intercourse is too much confined within a narrow circle, bounded by cousins of second cousins.

The common food of the Bermudians is coffee, fish of different kinds, a sweet potatoe, Indian corn, and American flour. Their water is rain preserved in cisterns; the general drink is grog. The men are amphibious animals▪ from their being a yard long they swim out of their depth: and fishing is their favourite amusement when grown up. The government is conducted under a governor named by the crown of England, a council, and general assembly. The established religion is episcopacy. There are nine churches; three clergymen have the charge of these nine. There is one presby­terian church. A regard for religion is not the characteristic of the [Page 677] Bermudians. They seldom go to church, except it be to attend a fu­neral, or get their children baptised, or to hear a stranger. *

LUCAY's, OR BAHAMA ISLANDS,

THE Bahamas are situated between 22 and 27 degrees north lat. and 73 and 81 degrees west lon. They extend along the coast of Florida quite down to Cuba; and are said to be 500 in number, some of them only rocks; but twelve of them are large and fertile; all are, however, uninhabited; except Providence, which is 200 miles east of the Floridas; though some others are larger and more fertile, on which the English have plantations.

These islands were the first fruits of Columbus's discoveries; but they were not known to the English till 1667. The Isle of Provi­dence became an harbour for the buccaneers, or pirates, who for a long time infested the American navigation. This obliged the gov­ernment, in 1718, to send out captain Woodes Rogers with a fleet to dislodge the pirates, and for making in a settlement. This the captain effected; a fort was erected, and an independent company was sta­tioned in the island. Ever since this last settlement, these islands have been improving, though they advance but slowly. In time of war, people gain considerably by the prizes condemned there; and and at all times by the wrecks, which are frequent in this labyrinth of rocks and shelves. The Spaniards and Americans captured these islands during the last war, but they were retaken by a detachment from St. Augustine, April 7th, 1783.

FALKLAND ISLANDS.

THOUGH these are not among the West India Islands, we shall mention them in this place. They lie in the 52d degree of south latitude, near the Straits of Magellan, at the utmost extremity of South America.

Falkland Islands were first discovered by Sir Richard Hawkins in 1594; the principal of which he named Hawkins' Maidenland, in honour of queen Elizabeth. The present English name Falkland was probably given them by captain Strong, in 1689, and, being adopted by Halley, it has from that time been received into maps. Captain M'Bride, who visited them in 1766, thus describes them. "We found, says he, a mass of islands and broken lands, of which the soil was nothing but a bog, with no better prospect than that is barren mountains, beaten by storms almost perpetual. Yet this is summer; and if the winds of winter hold their natural proportion, those who lie but two cables length from the shore, must pass weeks without any communication with it." The plants and vegetables which were planted by Mr. Byron's people, and the fir trees, a native of rugged and cold climates, had withered away; but goats, sheep, and hogs, that were carried thither, were found to thrive and increase as in oth­er places. Geese, of a fishy taste, snipes, foxes, sea lions, penguins, plenty of good water, and, in the summer months, wild celery and sorrel, are the natural luxuries of these islands. But though the soil be barren, and the sea tempestuous, an English settlement was made here, of which they were dispossessed by the Spaniards in 1770.

[Page 678]

SPANISH WEST INDIES.
CUBA.

THE island of Cuba is situated between 19° and 23° N. lat. and be­tween 74° and 87° W. lon. 100 miles to the south of Cape Flor­ida, and 75 miles north of Jamaica, and is nearly 700 miles in length, and generally about 70 miles in breadth. A chain of hills runs-through the middle of the island form east to west; but the land near the sea is in general level and flooded in the rainy season, when the sun is vertical. This noble island is supposed to have the best soil, for so large a country, of any in America. It produces all the commodities known in the West Indies, particularly ginger, long pepper, and other spices, cassia, fistula, mastich, and al­oes. It also produces tobacco and sugar; but from the want of hands, and the laziness of the Spaniards, not in such quantities as might be expected. It is owing to the same cause that this large island does not produce, including all its commodities, so much for exportation as the small island of Antigua.

The course of the rivers is too short to be of any consequence to navigation; but there are several good harbours in the island, which belong to the principal towns, as that of St. Jago, facing Jamaica, strongly situated and well fortified, but neither populous nor rich. That of the Havannah, facing Florida, which is the capital of Cuba, and a place of great strength and importance, containing about 2000 houses, with a great number of churches and convents. It was tak­en, however, by the English in the year 1762, but restored in the subsequent treaty of peace. Besides these, there is also Cumberland harbour, and that of Santa Cruz, and considerable town thirty miles east of the Havannah.

HISPANIOLA, OR ST. DOMINGO.

THIS island was at first possessed by the Spaniards alone; but by far the most considerable part is now in the hands of the French. However, as the Spaniards were the original possessors, and still con­tinue to have a share in it, Hispaniola is commonly regarded as a Spanish island.

It is situated between the 17th and 21st degrees N. lat. and the 67th and 74th of W. long. lying in the middle between Cuba and Porto Rico, and is 450 miles long, and 150 broad. When Hispaniola was first discovered by Columbus, the number of its inhabitants was computed to be at least one million. But such was the cruelty of the Spaniards, and to so infamous a height did they carry their oppres­sion of the poor natives, that they were reduced to sixty thousand in the space of fifteen years. The face of the island presents an agree­able variety of hills, vallies, woods and rivers; and the soil is allow­ed to be extremely fertile, producing sugar, cotton, indigo, tobacco, maize, and cassava root. The European cattle are so multiplied here, that they run wild in the woods, and as in South America, are hunted for their hides and tallow only. In the most barren parts of the rocks, [Page 679] they discovered formerly silver and gold. The mines, however, are not worked now. The northwest parts, which are in the possession of the French, consist of large fruitful plains, which produce the articles already mentioned in vast abundance. This indeed is the best and most fruitful part of the best and most fertile island in the West In­dies, and perhaps in the world.

The most ancient town in this island, and in all America, built by Europeans, is St. Domingo. It was founded by Bartholo­mew Columbus, brother to the admiral, in 1504, who gave it that name in honour of his father Dominic, and by which the whole isl­and is sometimes name. It is situated on a spacious harbour, and is a large well built city, inhabited, like the other Spanish towns, by a mixture of Europeans, creoles, mestizos and negroes.

The French towns are Cape Francois, the capital, containing, sev­eral years ago, about 8000 whites and blacks. Leogane, though in­ferior in point of size, is a good port, a place of considerable trade, and the seat of the French government in that island. They have two other town, considerable for their trade, Petit Guaves, and Port Louis.

The following is said to be an exact statement of the product, pop­ulation, and commerce of the French colony of Hispaniola, in the year 1788, and may serve to shew the immense losses sustained by the late insurrection of the negroes.

POPULATION.] White people 27,717; viz. 9,699 men; 2401 males above 12 years old; 2,296 under 12 years; 1,269 husbandmen of plantations; 1,832 plantation managers; 325 sugar refiners; 308 physicians; 510 mechanics; 614 clerks; 2 white servants; 8,511 women and girls.

Free people of colour 21,809; of which 3,493 were men; 2,892 males above 12 years; 2,892 under 12; 2,700 servants; 9,833 wom­en, or girls; slaves, 405,528.

PLANTATIONS AND MANUFACTORIES.] Sugar 792; indigo 3,097; cotton 705; coffee 2,810; distilleries 173; brick and por­ter's ware 63; cocoa 69; tanners 3.

PRODUCTIONS EXPORTED TO FRANCE.
  • 70,227,709 pounds of White Sugar,
  • 93,177,518 do. Brut do.
  • 68,151,181 do. Coffee,
  • 930,016 pounds of Indigo,
  • 6,286,126 do. Cotton.
  • 12,995 Dressed Skins.
SOLD TO AMERICAN, ENGLISH AND DUTCH SMUGGLERS.
  • 25,000,000 pounds of Brut Sugars,
  • 12,000,000 do. Coffee,
  • 3,000,000 pounds of Cotton.

The molasses exported in American bottoms, valued at 1,000,000 dollars; precious wood, exported in French ships, 200,000 dollars.

TRADE.] Five hundred and eighty large ships, carrying 189,679 tons, in which the imports amounted to 12,000,000 dol­lars, of which more than 8,000,000 dollars were in manufactured goods of France, and the other 4,000,000 in French produce.

The Spanish ships exported in French goods or money 1,400,000 dollars, for mules imported by them into the colony.

Ninety eight French ships, carrying 40,130 tons, imported 29,506 negroes; which sold for 8,000,000 dollars.

[Page 680] The negroes in the French division of this island have for several years past been in a state of insurrection. In the progress of these disturbances, which have not yet subsided, the planters and others, have sustained immense losses. As this unhappy affair has engaged much of the attention of the public, we are happy in being able to give a summary statement of the causes of this insurrection. *

"The situation of the French colonies early attracted the attention of the constituent assembly. At this time all was as tranquil as such a state of oppression would permit. Political health can only be attrib­uted to a country with a free constitution. The situation of the islands, is that of a paralytic: One part is torpid, whilst the other is affected with the frantic motions of St. Vitus's dance.

The first interference of the National Assembly in the affairs of the colonies was by a decree of the 8th March, 1790, which declared "That all free persons, who were proprietors and residents of two years standing, and who contributed to the exigencies of the state, should exercise the rights of voting, which constitute the quality of French citizens."

This decree, though in fact it gave no new rights to the people of colour, was regarded with a jealous eye by the white planters; who evidently saw that the generally of the qualification included all de­scriptions of proprietors. They affected, however, to impose a dif­ferent construction upon it. The people of colour appealed to com­mon justice and common sense; it was to no purpose. The whites repelled them from them assemblies. Some commotions ensued, in which they mutually fell a sacrifice to their pride and resentment.

These disturbances again excited the vigilance of the National Assembly. A decree was passed on the 12th day of October, 1790, by which the assembly declared, as a constitutional article, "That they would establish no regulations respecting the internal government of the colonies, without the precise and formal request of the colonial assemblies."

Peace however was not the consequence of this decree. The pro­prietors, it is true, had obtained a legal right of tyrannizing; but the unfortunate question still recurred, Who should be permitted to ex­ercise that right? On this head the decree was silent. New disten­sions arose; each of the parties covered under a factions patriotism the most atrocious designs. Assassination and revolt became frequent. Mauduit, a French officer of rank, lost his life by the hands of his own countrymen. The unfortunate Oge, a planter of colour, who had exerted himself in France in the cause of his brethren, resolved to support by force their just pretensions. He landed in the Spanish territory of St. Domingo, where he assembled about 600 mulattoes. Before he proceeded to hostilities, he wrote to the French general, that his desire was for peace, provided the laws were enforced. His letter was absurdly considered as a declaration of war. Being attack­ed and vanquished, he took refuge amongst the Spaniards, who de­livered him up to his adversaries. The horrors of his death were the harbingers of future crimes. These disturbances still increasing, the National Assembly found it necessary, at length, to decide between the contending parties.

[Page 681] On the 15th of May, 1791, a decree was made consisting of two ar­ticles, by the first of which the assembly confirmed that of the 12th of October, so far as respected the slaves in their islands. It is true that the word slave was cautiously omitted in this document, and they are only characterized by the negative description of 'men not free,' as if right and wrong depended on a play of words, or a mode of ex­pression.

This part of the decree met with but little opposition, though it pass­ed not without severe reprehension from a few enlightened members. The second article respecting the people of colour was strongly con­tested. Those who were before known by the appellation of patriots divided upon it. It was, however, determined in the result, that the people of colour born of free parents should be considered as active citizens, and be eligible to the offices of government in the islands.

This second article, which decided upon a right that the people of colour had been entitled to for upwards of a century, instead of restor­ing peace, may be considered as the cause or rather the pretext of all the subsequent evils that the colony of St. Domingo has sustained.—They arose not indeed from its execution, but from its counteraction by the white colonists. Had they, after the awful warnings they had already experienced, obeyed the ordinances of an assembly they pre­tended to revere; had they imbibed one drop of the true spirit of that constitution to which they had vowed an inviolable attachment; had they even suppressed the dictates of pride in the suggestions of, prudence; the storm that threatened them had ben averted, and in their obedience to the parent state they had displayed an act of patri­otism, and preserved themselves from all possibility of danger.

But the equalization of the people of colour stung the irritable nerves of the white colonists. The descendants of slaves might have lost the resentments of their fathers; but the hatred of a despot is he­reditary. The European maxim allows, 'That they never pardon who have done the wrong;' but in the colonies this perversity attains a more monstrous growth, and the aversion to African blood descends from gen­eration to generation. No sooner had the decree passed, than deputies from the islands to the National Assembly withdraw their attendance. The colonial committee, always under the influence of the planters, sus­pended their labours. Its arrival in the island struck the whites with consternation. They vowed to sacrifice their lives rather than suffer the execution of the decree. Their rage bordered upon phrenzy. They proposed to imprison the French merchants then in the island, to tear down the National flag, and hoist the British standard in its place. Whilst the joy of the mulattoes was mingled with apprehensions and with fears, St. Domingo reechoed with the cries of the whites, with their menaces, with their blasphemies against the constitution. A motion was made in the streets to fire upon the people of colour, who sled from the city, and took refuge in the plantations of their friends and in the woods. They were at length recalled by a proclamation; but it was only to swear subordination to the whites, and to be wit­nesses of fresh enormities. Amidst these agitations the slaves had re­mained in their accustomed subordination. Nor was it till the month of August, 1791, that the symptoms of the insurrection appeared a­mongst them.

[Page 682] A considerable number, both of whites and people of colour, had lost their lives in these commotions before the slaves had given indications of disaffection—they were not, however, insensible of the opportu­nities of revolt afforded by the dissensions of their masters. They had learnt that no alleviation of their miseries was ever to be expected from Europe; that in the struggle for colonial dominion, their humble in­terests had been equally sacrificed or forgotten by all parties. They felt their curb relaxed by the disarming and dispersion of their mu­latto masters, who had been accustomed to keep them under rigorous discipline. Hopeless of relief from any quarter, they rose in differ­ent parts, and spread desolation over the island. If the cold cruelties of despotism have no bounds, what shall be expected from the parox­isms of despair?

On the 11th of September, 1791, a convention took place, which produced the agreement called the Concordat, by which the white planters stipulated that they would no longer oppose the law of the 15th of May, which gave political rights to the people of colour. The colonial assembly even promised to meliorate the situation of the people of colour, born of parents not free, and to whom the decree of the 15th of May did not extend. An union was formed between the planters, which, if it had sooner taken place, had prevented the insurrection. The insurgents were every where dispirited, repulsed and dispersed; and the colony itself preserved from total destruction.

By a decree of the National Assembly the 24th of September, the people of colour were virtually excluded from all right of colonial legislation, and expressly placed in the power of the white colonists.

If the decree of the 15th of May could instigate the white colonists to the frantic acts of violence before described, what shall we suppose were the feelings of the people of colour on that of the 24th of Sep­tember, which again blasted those hopes they had justly founded on the constitutional law of the parent state, and the solemn ratification of the white colonists? No sooner was it known in the islands, than those dissensions which the revolt of the negroes had for a while ap­peased, broke out with fresh violence. The apprehensions enter­tained from the slaves had been allayed by the effects of the Concor­dat; hut the whites no sooner found themselves relieved from the terrors of immediate destruction, that they availed themselves of the decree of the 24th of September; they formally revoked the Concordat, and treacherously refused to comply with an engagement to which they owed their very existence. The people of colour were in arms; they attacked the whites in the southern provinces; they possessed themselves of Fort St. Louis, and defeated their op­ponents in several engagements. A powerful body surrounded Port au Prince, the capital of the island, and claimed the execution of the Concordat. At three different times did the whites assent to the re­quisition, and as often broke their engagement. Gratified with the predilection for aristocracy, which the constituent assembly had in its dotage avowed, they affected the appellation of patriots, and had the address to transfer the popular odium to the people of colour, who were contending for their indisputable rights, and to the few white colonists who had virtue enough to espouse their cause. Under this pretext, the municipality of Port au Prince required M. Grimoard, the captain of the Boreas, a French line of battle ship, to bring his [Page 683] guns to bear upon, and to cannonade the people of colour assembled near the town: He at first refused, but the crew, deluded by the cry of patriotism, enforced his compliance. No sooner was this measure adopted, than the people of colour gave a loose to their indignation; they spread over the country, and set fire indiscriminately to all the plantations; the greatest part of the town of Port au Prince soon af­ter shared the same fate. Nothing seemed to remain for the white inhabitants but to seek their safety in quitting the colony.

In the northern parts the people of colour adopted a more mag­nanimous and perhaps a more prudent conduct. "They begun," says Mr. Verniaud, "by offering their blood to the whites. We shall wait, said they, till we have saved you, before we assert our own claims." They accordingly opposed themselves to the revolted ne­groes with unexampled courage. They endeavoured to soothe them by attending to their reasonable requisitions; and if the colony of St. Domingo be preserved to the French nation, it will be by the ex­ertions of the people of colour."

After this recital of authentic and indisputable facts, it is not diffi­cult to trace the causes of the insurrection. The effects of this dread­ful insurrection we leave to be described by the professed historian.

PORTO RICO,

SITUATED between 64 and 67 degrees W. long. and in 18 de­grees N. lat. lying between Hispaniola and St. Christopher's, is 100 miles long, and 40 broad. The soil is beautifully diversified with woods, vallies and plains; and is very fertile, producing the same fruits as the other islands. It is well watered with springs and rivers; but the island is unhealthy in the rainy seasons. It was on account of the gold that the Spaniards settled here; but there is no longer any considerable quantity of this metal found in it.

Porto Rico, the capital town, stands in a little island on the north side, forming a cap [...]ious harbour, defended by forts and batteries, which render the town almost inaccessible. It was, however, taken by Sir Francis Drake, and afterwards by the Earl of Cumberland. It is better inhabited than most of the Spanish towns, because it is the centre of the contraband trade carried on by the English and French with the King of Spain's subjects.

VIRGIN ISLANDS, situated at the east end of Porto Rico, are ex­tremely small.

TRINIDAD,

SITUATED between 59 and 62 degrees W. long. and in 10 degrees N. lat. lies between the island Tobago and the Spanish Main; from which it is separated by the straits of Paria. It is about 90 miles long, and 60 broad, and is an unhealthful but fruitful spot, produc­ing sugar, fine tobacco, indigo, ginger, a variety of fruit, and some cotton trees, and Indian corn. It was taken by Sir Walter Raleigh in 1595, and by the French in 1676, who plundered the island, and extorted money from the inhabitants.

[Page 684]

MARGARETTA.

SITUATED in 64 degrees W. long. and 11-30 N. lat. separated from the northern coast of New Andalusia, in Terra Firma, by a strait of 24 miles, and is about 40 miles in length, and 24 in breadth; and being always verdant, affords a most agreeable prospect. The island abounds in pasture, maize and fruit; but there is a scarcity of wood and water. There was once a pearl fishery on its coast.

There are many other small islands in these seas, to which the Spaniards have paid no attention. We shall therefore proceed round Cape Horn into the South Seas, where the first Spanish island of any importance is CHILOE, on the coast of Chili, which has a governor, and some harbours well fortified.

JUAN FERNANDES,

LYING in 83 degrees W. long. and 33 S. lat. 300 miles west of Chili. This island is uninhabited; but having some good harbours, it is found extremely convenient for the English cruisers to touch at and waters. This island is famous for having given rise to the cele­brated romance of Robinson Crusoe. It seems once Alexander Sel­kirk, a Scotsman, was left ashore in this solitary place by his captain, where he lived for some years, until he was discovered by captain Woodes Rogers, in 1709; when taken up, he had almost forgotten his native language. He was dressed in goat's skins, and would drink nothing but water. During his abode in this island, he had killed 500 goats, which he caught by running them down; and he marked as many more on the ear, which he let go. Some of these were caught 30 years after, by lord Anson's people; their venerable aspect and majestic beards discovered strong symptoms of antiquity.

Selkirk, upon his return to England, was advised to publish an ac­count of his life and adventures in his little kingdom. He is said to have put his papers into the hands of Daniel Defoe, to prepare them for publication. But that writer, by the help of those papers, and a lively fancy, transformed Alexander Selkirk into Robinson Crusoe, and returned Selkirk his papers again; so that the latter derived no advantage from them. They were probably too indigested for pub­lication, and Defoe might derive little from them but those hints, which might give rise to his own celebrated performance.

FRENCH WEST INDIES.

THE French were among the last nations who made settlements in the West Indies; but they made ample amends by the vig­our with which they pursued them, and by that chain of judicious and admirable measures which they used in drawing from them ev­ery advantage that the nature of the climate would yield; and in the contending against the difficulties which it threw in their way.

We have already mentioned the French colony upon the Spanish island of Hispaniola, or St. Domingo, as the most important of all their foreign settlements. We shall next proceed to the islands of which the French have the sole possession, beginning with the large and important one of

[Page 685]

MARTINICO,

WHICH is situated between 14 and 15 degrees of N. lat. and in 61 degrees W. long. lying about 40 degrees N. W. of Barbadoes, is about 60 miles in length and 30 in breadth. The inland part of it is hilly, from which are poured out upon every side, a number of agree­able and useful rivers, which adorn and enrich this island in a high degree. The produce of the soil is sugar, cotton, indigo, ginger and such fruits as are found in the neighbouring islands. But sugar is here, as in all the West India islands, the principal commodity of which they export a considerable quantity annually. Martinico is the residence of the governor of the French islands in these seas. Its bays and harbours are numerous, safe and commodious, and well fortified. In the year 1756, this island was added to the British em­pire, but it was given back at the treaty of peace.

GAUDALUPE,

SO called by Columbus, from the resemblance of its mountains to those of that name in Spain, is situated in 16 degrees N. lat. and in 62 W. long. about 30 leagues north of Martinico, and almost as many south of Antigua; being 45 miles long, and 38 broad. It is divided into two parts by a small arm of the sea, or rather a narrow chan­nel, through which no ships can venture; but the inhabitants pass it in a ferry boat. Its soil is equally fertile and in the same productions with that of Martinico. This island is in a flourishing condition, and its exports of sugar almost incredible.

ST. LUCIA,

SITUATED in 14 degrees N. lat. and in 61 degrees W. long. 80 miles northwest of Barbadoes, is 23 miles in length, and 12 in breadth. It received its name from being discovered on the day dedicated to the virgin martyr St. Lucia. The English first settled on this island in 1637. From this time they met with various misfortunes from the natives and French; and at length it was agreed on between the lat­ter and the English, that this island, together with Dominica and St. Vincent, should remain neutral. But the French, before the war of 1756 broke out, began to settle these islands; which by the treaty of peace were yielded up to Great Britain, and this island to France. The soil of St. Lucia, in the vallies, is extremely rich. It produces excellent timber, and abounds with pleasant rivers and well situated harbours; and is now declared a free port under certain restrictions. The English made themselves masters of it in 1778; but it was restored again to the French in 1783.

TOBAGO.

THIS island is situated 11 degrees odd minutes, N. lat. 120 miles south of Barbadoes, and about the same distance from the Spanish Main. It is about 32 miles in length, and 9 in breadth. The climate here is not so hot as might be expected so near the equator; and it is said that it lies out of the course of those hurricanes that have some­times [Page 686] proved so fatal to the other West India islands. It has a fruit­ful soil, capable of producing sugar and indeed every thing else that is raised in the West Indies, with the addition (if we may believe the Dutch) of the cinnamon, nutmeg, and gum copal. It is well watered with numerous springs; and its bays and rivers are so dis­posed as to be very commodious for all kind of shipping. The val­ue and importance of this island appears from the expensive and formidable armaments sent thither by European powers in support of their different claims. It seems to have been chiefly possessed by the Dutch, who defended their pretensions against both England and France with the most obstinate perseverance. By the treaty of Aix la Chapelle, in 1748, it was declared neutral; though, by the treaty of peace in 1763, it was yielded up to Great Britain; but in June, 1781, it was taken by the French, and ceded to them by the treaty of 1783.

ST. BARTHOLOMEW, DESEADA, AND MARIGALANTE,

ARE three small islands lying in the neighbourhood of Antigua and St. Christopher's, and are of no great consequence to the French, except in time of war, when they give shelter to an incredible number of privateers, which greatly annoy the British West India trade. St. Bartholomew is now to be considered as belonging to the crown of Sweden, being ceded to it by France, 1785.

DUTCH WEST INDIES.
ST. EUSTATIUS, OR EUSTATIA.

SITUATED in 17° 29′ N. lat. and 63° 10′ W. lon. and three leagues northwest of St. Christopher's, is only a mountain, about 29 miles in compass, rising out of the sea, like a pyramid, and almost round. But, though so small and inconveniently laid out by nature, the industry of the Dutch have made it to turn to very good account; and it is said to contain 5000 whites, and 15,000 negroes. The sides of the mountains are laid out in very pretty settlements; but they have neither springs nor rivers. They raise here sugar and tobacco; and this island, as well as Curassou, is engaged in the Spanish contra­band trade, for which, however, it is not so well situated; and it has drawn the same advantage from its constant neutrality. But when hostilities were commenced by Great Britain against Holland, admiral Rodney was sent with a considerable land and sea force a­gainst St. Eustatius, which, being incapable of any defence, surrender­ed at discretion, on the 3d of February, 1781. The private property of the inhabitants was confiscated, with a degree of rigour very un­common among civilized nations, and very inconsistent with the hu­manity and generosity by which the English nation used to be charac­terised. The reason assigned was, that the inhabitants of St. Eusta­tius had assisted the United States with naval and other stores. But on the 27th of November, the same year, St. Eustatius was retaken by the French, under the command of the marquis de Bouille, though their force consisted of only three frigates and some small craft, and about 300 men.

[Page 687]

CURASSOU,

SITUATED in 12 degrees north lat. 9 or 10 leagues from the con­tinent of Terra Firma, is 30 miles long, and 10 broad. It seems as if it were fated, that the ingenuity and patience of the Hollanders should every where, both in Europe and America, be employed in fighting against an unfriendly nature; for the island is not only bar­ren, and dependent on the rains for its water, but the harbour is na­turally one of the worst in America; yet the Dutch have entirely remedied that defect; they have upon this harbour one of the largest and by far the most elegant and cleanly towns in the West Indies. The public buildings are numerous and handsome; the private houses commodious; and the magazines large, convenient, and well filled. All kind of labour is here performed by engines; some of them so well contrived, that ships are at once lifted into the dock.

Though this island is naturally barren, the industry of the Dutch has brought it to produce a considerable quantity both of tobacco and su­gar; it has, besides, good salt works, for the produce of which there is a brisk demand from the English islands, and the colonies on the continent. But what renders this island of most advantage to the Dutch, is the contraband trade which is carried on between the in­habitants and the Spaniards, and their harbour being the rendezvous to all nations in time of war.

The Dutch ships from Europe touch at this island for intelligence, or pilots, and then proceed to the Spanish coasts for trade, which they force with a strong hand, it being very difficult for the Spanish guarda costas to take these vessels; for they are not only stout ships, with a number of guns, but are manned with large crews of chosen seamen, deeply interested in the safety of the vessel and the success of the voyage. They have each of a share in the cargo, of a value pro­portioned to the station of the owner, supplied by the merchants up­on credit, and at prime cost. This animates them with an uncom­mon courage, and they fight bravely, because every man fights in de­fence of his own property. Besides this, there is a constant inter­course between this island and the Spanish continent.

Curassou has numerous warehouses, always full of the commodities of Europe and the East Indies. Here are all sorts of woollen and linen cloth, laces, silks, ribands, iron utensils, naval and military stores, brandy, the spices of the moluccas, and the calicoes of India, white and painted. Hither the Dutch West India, which is also their African Company, annually bring three or four cargoes of slaves; and to this mart the Spaniards themselves come in small vessels, and carry off not only the best of the negroes, at a very high price, but great quantities of all the above sorts of goods; and the seller has this advantage, that the refuse of warehouses and mercers' shops, and every thing that is grown unfashionable and unsaleable in Europe, go off here extremely well; every thing being sufficiently recommended by its being European. The Spaniards pay in gold or silver, coined or in bars, cocoa, vanilla, jesuits bark, cochineal, and other valuable commodities.

The trade of Curassou, even in times of peace, is said to be annu­ally worth to the Dutch no less than 500,000l. but in time of war the profit is still greater, for then it becomes the common emporio [...] [Page 688] of the West Indies; it affords a retreat to ships of all nations, and at the same time refuses none of them arms and ammunition to destroy one another. The intercourse with Spain being then interrupted, the Spanish colonies have scarcely any other market from whence they can be well supplied either with slaves or goods. The French come hither to but the beef, pork, corn, flour, and lumber, which are brought from the continent of North America, or exported from Ire­land; so that, whether in peace or in war, the trade of this island flourishes extremely.

The trade of all the Dutch American settlements was originally carried on by the West India company alone; at present, such ships as go upon that trade, pay two and a half per cent, for their licenses; the company, however, reserve to themselves the whole of what is carried on between Africa and the American islands.

The other islands, BONAIRE and ARUBA, are inconsiderable in themselves, and should be regarded as appendages to Curassou, for which they are chiefly employed in raising cattle and other provisions.

The island of SABA, situated at no great distance from St. Eusta­tius, is small and hardly deserves to be mentioned.

DANISH WEST INDIES.
ST. THOMAS,

AN inconsiderable member of the Carribbees, situated in 64 de­grees West lon. and 18 degrees North lat. about 15 miles in cir­cumference, and has a safe and commodious harbour.

ST. CROIX, OR SANTA CRUZ,

ANOTHER small and unhealthy island, lying about five leagues east of St. Thomas, ten or twelve leagues in length, and three or four where it is broadest. These islands, so long as they remained in the hands of the Danish West India Company, were ill managed, and of little consequence to the Danes; but that wife and benevolent prince, the late king of Denmark, bought up the company's stock, and laid the trade open; and since that time the island of St. Thomas, as well as this, has been so greatly improved, that it is said to produce up­wards of 3000 hogsheads of sugar of 1000 weight each, and other of the West India commodities in tolerable plenty. In time of war, privateers bring in their prizes here for sale; and a great many vessels trade from hence along the Spanish Main, and return with money in specie or bars, and valuable merchandise. As for Santa Cruz, from a perfect desert a few years since, it is beginning to settle fast; several persons from the English islands, some of them of great wealth, have gone to settle there, and have received very great encouragement to do so.

These two nations, the Dutch and the Danes, hardly deserve to be mentioned among the proprietors of America; their possessions there are comparatively nothing. But notwithstanding, they appear ex­tremely [Page 689] worthy of the attention of these powers, as the share of the Dutch only is worth to them at least 600,000l. a year.

There seems to be a remarkable providence (says an ingenious and political writer) in casting the parts, if I may use that expression, of the several European nations who act upon the stage of America. The Spaniard, proud, lazy, and magnificent, has an ample walk in which to expatiate, a soft climate to indulge to indulge his love of ease, and a profusion of gold and silver to procure him all those luxuries his pride demands, but which his laziness would refuse him.

The Portuguese, naturally indigent at home, and enterprising rath­er than industrious abroad, has gold and diamonds as the Spaniard has, wants them as he does, but possesses them in a more useful though a less oftentatious manner.

The English, of a reasoning disposition, thoughtful and cool, and men of business rather than of great industry, impatient of much fruitless labour, abhorrent of constraint, and lovers of a country life, have a lot which indeed produces neither gold nor silver; but they have a large tract of a fine continent; * a noble field for the exercise of agriculture, and sufficient to furnish their trade without laying them under any great difficulties. Intolerant as they are of the most useful restraints, their commerce flourishes from the freedom every man has of pursuing it according to his own ideas, and directing his life after his own fashion.

The French, active, lively, enterprising, pliable, and politic; and though changing their pursuits, always pursuing the present object with eagerness, are, notwithstanding, tractable, and obedient to rules and laws, which bridle their dispositions, and wind and turn them to proper courses—These people have a country (when Canada was in their possession) where more is to be effected by managing the peo­ple than by cultivating the ground; where a peddling commerce, that requires constant motion, flourishes more than agriculture, or a regular traffic; where they have difficulties which keep them alert by struggling with them, and where their obedience to a wise government (meaning the excellent regulations respecting the French colonies in America) serves them for personal wisdom. In the islands, the whole is the work of their policy, and a right turn their government has taken.

The Dutch have a rock or two, on which to display the miracles of frugality and diligence (which are their virtues) and on which they have exerted these virtues, and shewn those miracles.

New Discoveries.

OUR knowledge of the globe has been considerably augmented by the late discoveries of Russian, British, and American navi­gators, which have been numerous and important. Of these discov­eries we have already given some account, page 98. To the account we have given we add the following.

[Page 690]

NORTHERN ARCHIPELAGO.

THIS consists of several groups of islands, which are situated be­tween the eastern coast of Kamtschatka and the western coast of the continent of America. *

Some of these islands are only inhabited occasionally, and for some months in the year, and others are very thinly peopled; but others have a great number of inhabitants, who constantly reside in them. The inhabitants of these islands are, in general, of a short stature, with strong and robust limbs, but free and supple. They have lank black hair, and little beard, slattish faces, and fair skins. They are for the most part well made, and of strong constitutions, suitable to the boisterous climate of their isles.

The Fox Islands, one of the groups, are so called from the great number of black, grey, and red foxes, with which they abound. The dress of the inhabitants consists of a cap and a fur coat which reaches down to the knee. Some of them wear common caps of a partycoloured bird skin, upon which they leave part of the wings and tail. On the fore part of their hunting and fishing caps, they place a small board like a skreen, adorned with the jaw bones of sea bears, and ornamented with glass beads, which they receive in barter from the Russians. At their festivals and dancing parties they use a much more shewy sort of caps. They feed upon the flesh of all sorts of sea animals, and generally eat it raw. But if at any time they choose to dress their victuals, they make use of a hollow stone; having placed the fish or flesh therein, they cover it with another, and close the interstices with lime or clay. They then lay it horizontally upon two stones, and light a fire under it. The provision intended for keeping is dried without salt in the open air. Their weapons con­sist of bows, arrows, and darts, and for defence they use wooden shields.

The most perfect equality reigns among these islanders. They have neither chiefs nor superiors, neither laws nor punishments. They live together in families, and societies of several families unit­ed, which form what they call a race, who, in case of an attack, or defence, mutually help and support each other. The inhabitants of the same island always pretend to be of the same race; and every person looks upon his island as a possession, the property of which is common to all the individuals of the same society. Feasts are very common among them, and more particularly when the inhabitants of one inland are visited by those of the others. The men of the village meet their guests beating drums, and preceded by the women, who dance. At the conclusion of the dance, the hosts serve up their best provisions, and invite their guests to partake of the feast. They [Page 691] feed their children when very young with the coarsest flesh, and for the most part law. If an infant cries, the mother immediately car­ries it to the sea side, and, whether it be summer or winter, holds it naked in the water until it is quiet. This custom is so far from doing the children any harm, that it hardens them against the cold, and they accordingly go barefooted through the winter without the least inconvenience. They seldom heat their dwellings; but, when they are desirous of warming themselves, they light a bundle of hay, and stand over it; or else they set fire to train oil, which they pour into a hollow stone. They have a good share of plain natural sense, but are rather slow of understanding. They seem cold and indiffer­ent in most of their actions; but let an injury or even a suspicion only rouse them from this phlegmatic state, and they become inflexi­ble and furious, taking the most violent revenge, without any regard to the consequences. The least affliction prompts them to suicide; the apprehension of even an uncertain evil often leads them to despair; and they put an end to their days with great apparent insensibility.

THE PELEW ISLANDS.

THE existence and situation of these islands were probably known to the Spaniards at a distance period; but from a report among the neighbouring islands, of their being inhabited by a savage race of cannibals, it appears that there had never been the least communica­tion between them and any of the Europeans, till the Antelope Pack­et, (belonging to the East India Company) was wrecked on one of them, in August 1783. From the accounts given of these islands, by Captain Wilson, who commanded the packet, it appears that they are situated between the 5th and 9th degrees north latitude, and be­tween 130 and 136 degrees of east longitude from Greenwich, and lie in a N. E. and S. W. direction; they are long but narrow, of a moderate height, and well covered with wood; that climate temperate and agreeable; the lands produce sugar cane, yams, coca nuts, plan­tains, bananas, oranges, and lemons; and the surrounding seas abound with the finest and greatest variety of fish.

The natives of these islands are a stout, well made people, above the middle stature; their complexions are of a far deeper colour than what is understood by the Indian copper, but not black. The men go entirely naked, and the women wear only two small aprons, one behind and one before, made of the husks of the cocoa nut, dyed with different shades of yellow.

The government is monarchical, and the king is absolute, but his power is exercised more with the mildness of a father than a sove­reign. In the language of Europeans, he is the fountain of honour. He occasionally creates his nobles, called Rupacks or Chiefs, and con­fers a single honour of knighthood, called the Order of the Bone, the members of which are distinguished by wearing a bone on their arm.

The idea of these islanders, as communicated in the published ac­count of Captain Wilson, is that of a people, who, though totally ignorant of the arts and sciences, and living in the simplest state of nature, yet possess all that genuine politeness, that delicacy and chasti­ty of intercourse between the sexes, that respect for personal property, that subordination to government, and those habits of industry, which are so rarely united in [...] [...] civilized societies of modern times.

[Page 692] It appears that when the English were thrown on one of these islands, they were received by the natives with the greatest humanity and hospitality; and till their departure, experienced the almost cour­tesy and attention, "They felt our people were distressed, and in consequence wished they should share whatever they had to give. It was not that worldly munificence, that bestows and spreads its favours with a distant eye to retribution. It was the pure emotion of native benevolence. It was the love of man to man. It was a scene that pictures human nature in triumphant colouring, and whilst their liber­ality gratified the sense, their virtue struck the heart."

THE MARQUESAS ISLANDS,

ARE five in number, first discovered by Quiros, in 1595, and their situation better ascertained by Captain Cook, in 1774. St. Domini­ca is the largest, about 16 leagues in circuit. The inhabitants, their language, manners and clothing, with the vegetable productions, are nearly the same as at the Society Isles.

INGRAHAM's ISLANDS.

THESE islands were discovered by Captain JOSEPH INGRAHAM, of Boston, commander of the Brigantine Hope, on the 19th of April, * 1791. They lie N. N. W. from the Marquesas islands, from 35 to 50 leagues distant, and are seven in number, which Captain In­graham named as follows, viz.

Names. Lat. S. Long. from Lon. Circuit.
Washington, 8° 52′ 140° 19′ These 5, except Federal 1st. which is smaller, are about 10 leagues in cir­cuit.
Adams, 9° 20′ 140° 54′
Lincoln, 9° 24′ 140° 54′
Federal, 8° 55′ 140° 50′
Franklin, 8° 45′ 140° 49′
Hancock, 8° 3′ 141° 14′ 6 or 7 leagues,
Knox. 8° 5′ 141° 18′ 5 do.

Most if not all these islands are inhabited; and appear generally to be diversified with hills and vallies, and to be well wooded, and very pleasant. The people resemble those of the Marquesas islands, at do their canoes, which are carved at each end. They appeared friendly.

OTAHEITE, OR KING GEORGE'S ISLAND.

THIS island was discovered by Capt. Wallis, in the Dolphin, on the 19th of June, 1767. It is situated between the 17th degree 28 minutes, and the 17th degree 53 minutes, south latitude, and between the 149th degree 11 minutes, and the 149th degree 39 minutes, west longitude. It consists of two peninsulas, of a somewhat circular form, joined by an isthmus, and is surround­ed by a reef of coral rocks, which form several excellent bays and harbours, where there is room and depth of water for almost any number of the largest ships. The face of the country is very ex­traordinary, for a border of low land almost entirely surrounds each peninsula, and behind this border the land rises in ridges that run up into the middle of these divisions, and these form mountains that may be seen at sixty leagues distance. The soil, except upon the very tops of the ridges, is remarkably rich and fertile, watered by a great number of rivulets, and covered with fruit trees of various kinds, forming the most delightful groves. The border of low land that lies between the ridges and the sea, is in few places more than a mile and a half broad, and this together with some of the vallies are the only parts that are inhabited.

[Page 693] Some parts of the island of Otaheite are very populous; and Capt. Cook was of opinion that the number of inhabitants on the whole island amounted to 204,000, including women and children. They are of a clear olive complexion; the men are tall, strong, well limbed, and finely shaped; the women are of an inferior size, but handsome and very amorous, and indeed generally somewhat licen­tious. Their clothing consists of cloth or matting of different kinds; and the greatest part of the food eaten here is vegetable, as cocoa nuts, bananas, bread fruit, plantains, and a great variety of other fruit.

They have no tools among them made of metal; and those they use are made of stone, or some kind of bones. The inhabitants of Otaheite are remarkable for their cleanliness; for both men and women constantly wash their whole bodies in running water three times every day. Their language is soft and melodious, and abounds with vowels.

There were no tame animals on this island but hogs, dogs, and poultry; and the only wild animals are tropical birds, paroquets, pig­eons, ducks, a few other birds, rats, and a very few serpents. The sea, however, supplies the inhabitants with a great variety of the most excellent fish, and by the kindness of the English and the Spaniards, they have now bulls and cows, sheep, goats, a horse and mare, geese, ducks, peacocks, and turkeys, and also cats.

The inhabitants of Otaheite believe in one Supreme Deity, but at the same time acknowledge a variety of subordinate deities: They offer up their prayers without the use of idols, and believe the exist­ence of the soul in a separate state, where there are two situations, of different degrees of happiness. Among these people a subordination is established, which somewhat resembles the early state of the Eu­ropean nations, under the feudal system. If a general attack hap­pens to be made on the island, every district is obliged to furnish its proportion of soldiers for the common defence. Their weapons are slings which they use with great dexterity, and clubs of about six or seven feet long, and made of a hard heavy wood. They have a great number of boats, many of which are constructed for warlike operations, Otaheite is said to be able to send out 1720 war canoes, and 68,000 fighting men.

SOCIETY ISLANDS.

OF the several islands so called in honour of the Royal Society, which were discovered by Capt. Cook, in the year 1769. the prin­cipal are, HUAHEINE, ULITEA, OTAHA, and BOLABOLA. Hua­heine is about 31 leagues to the northwest of Otaheite, and its pro­ductions are the same. The inhabitants seem to be larger made and more stout than those of Otaheite. Mr. Banks measured one of the men, and found him to be six feet three inches and a half high; yet they are so indolent, that he could not persuade one of them to go up the hills with him; for they said if they should attempt it, the fatigue would kill them. Ulitea is about seven or eight leagues to the southwestward of Huaheine, and is a much larger island, but appears neither so fertile nor so populous. Otaha is divided from Ulitea by a strait that in the narrowest part is not above two miles broad. About four leagues to the northwest of Otaha lies Bolabola, which is surrounded by a reef of rocks, and several small islands, all which are no more than eight leagues in compass. To these islands, and those of Maura, which lie about 14 miles to the westward of Bolabo­la, containing six in all, Capt. Cook gave the name of Society Islands.

[Page 694]

THE FRIENDLY ISLANDS.

THESE islands were so named by Capt. Cook, in the year 1773, on account of the friendship which appeared to subsist among the in­habitants, and from their courteous behaviour to strangers.

The plantations on some of these islands are both more numerous and more extensive; and enclosed by fences which, running paral­lel to each other, form fine, spacious public roads, which would ap­pear beautiful in countries where rural conveniencies have been carried to the greatest perfection. They are, in general, highly cul­tivated, and well stocked with the several roots and fruits which whose islands produce; and Capt. Cook endeavoured to add to their number by planting Indian corn, and the seeds of melons, pumpkins, and the like.

Eooa, when viewed from the ship at anchor, formed one of the most beautiful prospects in nature; and very different from the others of the Friendly Isles, which, being low and perfectly level, exhibit nothing to the eye but the trees which cover them; where­as here, the land rising gently to a considerable height, presents us with an extensive prospect, where groves of trees are only inter­spersed at irregular distances, in beautiful disorder, and all the rest is covered with grass, except near the shores, where it is covered with fruit and other trees; amongst which are the habitations, of the natives.

We are informed that the bulk of the people of these islands are satisfied with one wife, but the chiefs have commonly several women, though it appeared as if one only was looked on as a mistress of the family. Though female chastity was frail enough in some, it is high­ly probable that conjugal fidelity is seldom violated; as it does not appear that more than one instance of it was known to our voyagers; and in that, the man's life who was the cause of it paid the for­feit for his crime. Nor were those of the better sort who were un­married more liberal of their favours; those who were being obvi­ous prostitutes by profession. When they are afflicted by any disor­der which they deem dangerous, they cut off the joint of one of their little fingers; fondly believing that the Deity will accept of that, as a fort of sacrifice efficacious enough to procure the recovery of their health. It was supposed from some circumstances, that though they believe in a future state, they have no notion of future rewards nor punishments for the things done here. They believe in a Supreme Being; but they believe also in a number of inferior ones; every island has its peculiar god, as every European nation has its peculiar saint. Capt. Cook thinks he can pro­nounce that they do not worship any thing that is the work of their own hands, or any visible part of the creation. They make no of­fering of hogs, dogs, or fruit, to the Otooa, as at Otaheite; but it is ab­solutely certain that even this mild, humane and beneficent people use human sacrifices. The government, as far as could be discovered, ap­pears to approach nearly to the feudal system, formerly established all over Europe. When any person of consequence dies, his body is washed and decorated by some women, who are appointed on the occasion; and these women are not, by their customs, to touch any food with their hands for many months afterwards; and it is re­markable, that the length of the time they are thus proscribed is the greater in proportion to the rank of the chief they had washed. Their great men are fond of a singular piece of luxury, which is to have [Page 695] women sit beside them all night, and beat on different parts of their body until they go to sleep; after which they relax a little of their labour, unless they appear likely to awake, in which case they re­double their drumming, until they are again fast asleep. These are some of the most remarkable opinions, customs, laws and ceremonies observed at the Friendly Islands, and which we have endeavoured to collect into one point of view, for the information of our more inquisitive readers.

NEW ZEALAND.

THIS country was first discovered by Tasman, the Dutch naviga­tor, in the year 1642, who gave it the name of Staten Land, though it has been generally distinguished, in our maps and charts, by the name of New Zealand, and was supposed to be part of a southern continent; but it is now known, from the late discoveries of Capt. Cook, who sailed round it, to consist of two large islands, divided from each other by a strait 4 or 5 leagues broad. They are situated be­tween the latitudes of 34 and 48 degrees S. and between the longi­tudes of 166 and 280 degrees E. of Greenwich. One of these island▪ is for the most part mountainous, rather batten, and but thinly in­habited; but the other is much more fertile, and of a better appear­ance. In the opinion of Sir Joseph Banks and Dr. Solander, every kind of European fruits, grain, and plants, would flourish here in the utmost luxuriance. From the vegetables found here, it is supposed that the winters are milder than those of England, and the sum­mers not hotter, though more equally warm; so that it is imagined that if this country were settled by people from Europe, they would, with moderate industry, be soon supplied not only with the neces­saries but the luxuries of life in great abundance. Here are forests of vast extent, filled with very large timber trees; and near four hundred plants were found here that had not been described by naturalists. The inhabitants of New Zealand are stout and robust and equal in stature to the largest Europeans. Their colour in gen­eral is brown, but in few deeper than that of a Spaniard who has been exposed to the sun, and in many not so deep; and both sexes have good features. Their dress is very uncouth, and they mark their bodies in a manner similar to those of Otaheite, which is called tattowing. Their principal weapons are lances, darts, and a kind of battle axes; and they have generally shewn themselves very hostile to the Europeans who have visited them. As to their religious principles, they believe that the souls of such as are killed in battle, and their flesh afterwards eaten by the enemy, are doomed to perpetual [...]; while the souls of those who die a natural death, or whole bodies are preserved from such ignominious treatment, ascend to the habitations of the gods. The common method of disposing of their dead is by interment in the earth; but if they have more of their slaughtered enemies than they can eat, they throw then into the sea. They have no such things as morals, or other places of public worship; nor do they ever assemble together with this view.

We conclude this article with the following character of Captain Cook, to perpetuate the memory and services of so excellent a navi­gator and commander.

Perhaps no science ever received greater additions from the labours of a single man, than geography has done from those of Capt. Cook. In his first voyage to the South Seas, he discovered the Society [Page 696] Islands; determined the insularity of New Zealand; discovered the straits which separate the two islands, and are called after his name; and made a complete survey of both. He afterwards explored the Eastern coast of New Holland, hitherto unknown; an extent of 27 degrees of latitude, or upwards of 2000 miles.

In his second expedition he solved the great problem of a southern continent, having traversed that hemisphere between the latitude of 40° and 70°, in such a manner as not to leave a possibility of its ex­istence, unless near the pole, and out of the reach of navigation. During this voyage, he discovered New Caledonia, the largest island in the Southern Pacific, except New Zealand; the island of Georgia; and an unknown coast, which he named Sandwich Land, the [...] hule of the southern hemisphere; and having twice visited the tropical seas, be settled the situations of the old, and made several new discoveries.

But the last voyage is distinguished above all the rest by the extent and importance of its discoveries. Besides several smaller islands in the Southern Pacific, he discovered, to the north of the Equinoxial Line, the group called the Sandwich Islands, which, from their situa­tion and productions, bid fairer for becoming an object of consequence in the system of European navigation, than any other discovery in the South Sea. He afterwards explored what had hitherto remained unknown of the Western coast of America, from the latitude of 43° to 70° North, containing an extent of 3,500 miles; ascertained the proximity of the two great continents of Asia and America; passed the straits between them, and surveyed the coast on each side, to such a height of northern latitude, as to demonstrate the impracticability of a passage, in that hemisphere, from the Atlantic into the Pacific ocean, either by an eastern or a western course. In short, if we except the Sea of Amur, and the Japanese Archipelago; which still remain im­perfectly known to Europeans, [...]e has completed the hydrography of the habitable globe.

As a navigator, his services were not, perhaps, less splendid; certainly not less important and meritorious. The method which he discover­ed, and so successfully pursued, of preserving the health of seamen, forms a new era in navigation, and will transmit his name to future ages, among the friends and benefactors of mankind.

Those who are conversant in naval history need not be told at how dear a rate the advantages which have been sought, through the medi­um of long voyages at sea, have always been purchased. That dread­ful disorder which is peculiar to their service, and whose ravages have marked the tracts of discoverers with circumstances almost too shocking to relate, must, without exercising an unwarrantable tyra­ny over the lives of our seamen, have proved an insuperable obstacle to the prosecution of such enterprizes. It was reserved for Captain Cook to shew the world, by repeated trials, that voyages might be protracted to the unusual length of three or even four years, in un­known regions, and under every change and rigour of the climate, not only without affecting the health, but even without diminishing the probability of life, in the smallest degree.

END OF PART 1.

[Page]

EUROPE
PART II.
[Page]

THE AMERICAN UNIVERSAL GEOGRAPHY, OR, A VIEW OF THE PRESENT STATE OF ALL THE Empires, Kingdoms, States, and Republics IN THE KNOWN WORLD, AND OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA IN PARTICULAR.

IN TWO PARTS.

The FIRST PART

Treats of Astronomical Geography, and other useful preliminaries to the study of Geography, in an enlarged and improved Introduction of the WESTERN, or AMERICAN CONTINENT—of its Discovery—its Aboriginal Inhabitants, and whence they came—its Divisions—but more par­ticularly of the United States of America, generally and Individually—of their Situation, Dimensions, Civil Divisions, Rivers, Lakes, Climate, Moun­tains, Soil, Produce, Natural History, Commerce, Manufactures, Population, Character, Curiosities, Springs, Mines and Minerals, Military Strength, Constitutions, Islands, History of the War, and the succeeding Events.—With a View of the British, Spanish, French, Portuguese, and other Dominions, on the Continent, and in the West Indies.

The SECOND PART

Describes at large, and from the latest and best Authorities, the Present State, in respect to the above mentioned Particulars, of the EASTERN CONTINENT—and its Islands—as divided into EUROPE, ASIA, and AFRICA and subdivided into Empires, Kingdoms, and Republics.

TO WHICH ARE ADDED,

An improved CATALOGUE of NAMES of PLACES, and their GEOGRAPHICAL SIT­UATION, alphabetically arranged—an enlarged CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE of RE­MARKABLE EVENTS, from the Creation to the present Time—and, LIST of Ancient and Modern Learned and Eminent MEN, in AMERICA, as well as EUROPE.

The whole comprehending a complete and improved SYSTEM of MODERN GEOGRAPHY. Calculated for AMERICANS.

Illustrated with MAPS of the Countries described.

BY JEDIDIAH MORSE, A. M.

Published according to Act of Congress.

PART II.

Containing a GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION of the EASTERN CONTINENT and ISLANDS.

PRINTED AT BOSTON

BY YOUNG AND ETHERIDGE, FOR THE AUTHOR AND THOMAS AND ANDREWS.

Sold at the Bookstore of said THOMAS and ANDREWS, Faust's Statue, No. 45 New­bury Street, BOSTON; by said THOMAS, in WORCESTER, by BERRY, ROGERS and BERRY, in NEWYORK; by H. and P: RICE, in PHILADELPHIA and by W. P. YOUNG, in CHARLESTON.

MDCCXCIII.

[Page]

ADVERTISEMENT.

THIS SECOND PART of the AMERICAN UNIVERSAL GEOGRAPHY, which the Author has thought proper to add, for the reasons mentioned in the Preface, is compiled principally from Chambers' Quarto Dublin Edition of Guthrie's Geographical Grammar, which, it is believed, is the best Edition of that valuable work which has been published. The Historical and less interesting parts have been omitted, to give room for more recent and important matters. In the Account of Europe, Zimmerman's Political Sur­vey has been incorporated, as containing the most com­plete and authentic information, on those interesting subjects of which he treats. Various other improvements, too numerous to particularize, have been introduced, from the latest Geographical Publications, State Pa­pers, Travels, Histories, &c. &c. so that it ought to be, and the Author hopes the Reader will find it to be, the best General Account of the Eastern Continent that has yet appeared in America.

[Page]

CONTENTS OF PART II.

EUROPE.
  • Page
  • GENERAL Remarks, 1
  • Public Revenue and Land Forces of the Principal States in Europe, 3
  • Naval Forces of the different Powers, 4
  • Grand Divisions, Situation, Boundaries, &c. of Europe, 5
  • Denmark, 7
  • East and West Greenland, Iceland, and the Islands in the At­lantic Ocean, ibid.
  • Norway, 14
  • Denmark Proper, or Jutland, 21
  • Lapland, 30
  • Sweden, 35
  • Muscovy, or the Russian Empire in Europe and Asia, 49
  • The British Empire, 73
  • England, 75
  • Scotland, 125
  • Ireland, 149
  • Isle of Man, 185
  • Isle of Wight, 186
  • Scilly Isles, 187
  • Jersey, Guernsey, &c. 188
  • Germany, 189
  • Prussia, 205
  • Austria, 213
  • Hungary, 219
  • Transylvania, Hungary, Sclavonia, &c. 224
  • Poland, 227
  • Switzerland, 241
  • Netherlands, 249
  • France, 267
  • Spain, 317
  • Protugal, 339
  • Italy, 346
  • Turkey in Europe, 375
ASIA.
  • Its Situation, Boundaries, Grand Divisions, and History, 384
  • Turkey in Asia, 387
  • Tartary in Asia, 403
  • China, 411
  • Indostan, Hindoostan, or India on this side the Ganges, 425
  • India beyond the Ganges, 450
  • Persia, 457
  • Arabia, 466
  • Indian and Oriental Islands, 475
AFRICA.
  • [Page]Situation, Boundary, Grand Divisions, &c. 483
  • Egypt, 489
  • The States of Barbary, 497
  • Africa, from the Tropic of Cancer to the Cape of Good Hope 506
  • African Islands, 516
  • New Discoveries, [524]
  • A new Geographical Table, containing the Names and Situ­ations of all the chief Places in the known World. 521
  • An improved Chronological Table of Remarkable Events, Dis­coveries and Inventions from the Creation to the present Time, 533
  • List of Ancient and Modern Learned and Ingenious Men, in America as well as Europe. 548

DIRECTIONS to the BOOKBINDER for PLACING the MAPS, &c.

PART I.
  • 1. The World, to face Title Page, Page
  • 2. Aruficial Sphere, &c. to face. 32
  • 3. Northern and Middle States to face. 309
  • 4. District of Maine to face. 345
  • 5. Map of Pennsylvania to face. 469
  • 6. Map of Virginia, North Carolina, &c. to face. 532
  • 7. South America to face. 642
  • 8. West Indies to face. 666
PART II.
  • 1. Europe to face Page [...]
  • 2. Asia to face. 3 [...]4
  • 3. Africa to face. 435

PART II.

[Page]

From AMERICA we pass to the Eastern Continent, in the description of which we begin with EUROPE.

EUROPE is the least extensive quarter of the globe, containing only about 2,627,574 square miles, * whereas the habitable parts of the World in the other quarters, are estimated at 36,666,806 square miles. Here the arts of utility and ornament, the sciences, both mili­tary and civil, have been carried to the greatest perfection. If we except the earliest ages of the world, it is in Europe that we find the greatest variety of character, government, and manners, and from whence we draw the greatest number of facts and memorials, both for our entertainment and instruction.

Two circumstances have had a considerable tendency in giving Eu­rope its present high rank in the world. First, the happy temperature of its climate, no part of it lying within the torrid zone; and, second­ly, the great variety of its surface. The effect of a moderate climate, both on plants and animals, is well known from experience. The immense number of mountains, rivers, seas, &c. which divide the different countries of Europe from each other, is likewise extremely commodious for its inhabitants. These natural boundaries check the progress of conquest, which has always been so rapid in the extensive plains of Africa and the East: The seas and rivers facilitate the inter­course and commerce between different nations; and even the barren rocks and mountains are more favourable for exciting human industry and invention, than the natural unsolicited luxuriancy of more fertile soils. There is no part of Europe so diversified in its surface, so inter­rupted by natural boundaries and divisions, as Greece: And we have seen that it was there the human mind began to known and to avail itself of its strength, and that many of the arts, subservient to utility or pleasure, were invented, or at least greatly improved. What Greece therefore is with regard to Europe, Europe itself is at present with regard to the rest of the globe. Though most of the European gov­ernments are monarchical, we may discover, on due examination, that there are a thousand little springs which check the force, and soften the rigour of monarchy. In proportion to the number and force of these checks, the monarchies of Europe, such as Russia, Spain, and Denmark, differ from one another. Besides monarchies, is which one [Page] man bears the chief sway, there are in Europe aristocracies or govern­ments of the nobles, and democracies or governments of the people.—Venice is an example of the former; Holland, and some states of Italy and Switzerland, afford examples of the latter. There are, likewise, mixed governments, which cannot be assigned to any one class. Great Britain, which partakes of all the three, is the most singular instance of this kind we are acquainted with. The other mixed governments in Europe are composed only of two of the simple forms, such as Poland, several states of Italy, &c. all which shall be explained in their proper places.

The Christian religion is established throughout every part of Eu­rope, except Turkey; but from the various capacities of the human mind, and the different lights in which speculative opinions are apt to appear, when viewed by persons of different educations and passions, that religion is divided into a number of different sects, but which may be comprehended under three general denominations; 1st, The Greek church; 2d, The Roman Catholic; and 3d, Protestantism: Which fast is again divided into Lutheranism and Calvinism, so called from Luther and Calvin, the two distinguished reformers of the 16th century.

It may, perhaps, be an object of curiosity, to compare the proportions of ground now occupied, and formerly disputed, by the Roman Catho­lic and Protestant religions, with the numbers of their adherents. The proportion of the surface of the countries, in which the Protestant religion is established, to those in which the Roman Catholic religion prevails, is nearly as 3 to 4: The number of Roman Catholics, accord­ing to the best calculations, is about 90,000,000; the number of Prot­estants only 24,000,000, which is a proportion of nearly 4 to 1. In addition to this account of the European religions, it may be observed, that an inconsiderable number of the ignorant Laplanders may, with propriety, be called Pagans.

The languages of Europe are derived from the six following: The Greek, Latin, Teutonic or old German, the Celtic, Sclavonic, and Gothic.

The greatest part of Europe being situated above the 45th degree of northern latitude, and even its most southern provinces being far dis­tant from the torrid zone, the species of organized bodies are much less numerous in Europe than in the other parts of the globe. Thus, for instance, upon an equal number of square miles, the number of species of quadrupeds in Europe, is to the number of them in Asia as 1 to 2⅕ to that in America as 1 to 2 [...]; and to that in Africa as 1 to 10, and the number of the vegetable species in the other three divisions of the globe, is greatly superior to that in Europe. But nature has enriched the European continent with every species of minerals, diamonds and platina, perhaps, excepted. Gold, the first of metals, is not found in Europe as plentifully as in the other continents. However, as the European nations have the skill of making the best use of their natural productions, and have taken care to transplant into their own soil as many of the foreign productions as their nature will permit, Europe, upon the whole, must be allowed to be one of the richest parts of the globe.

[Page 3]

PUBLIC REVENUE OF THE PRINCIPAL STATES IN EUROPE.
  £. Sterl.
1. Great Britain, 14,500,000
2. Austria, 12,400,000(112 million florins)
3. France, 18,000,000(Necker Compte Rendu)
4. Spain, 5,000,000 of Old Spain alone.
5. Russia, 5,800,000
6. Turkey, 5,000,000
7. Prussia, 3,600,000
8. Protugal, 1,800,000
9. Sicily, 1,400,000 medium.
10. Holland, 4,000,000
11. Sweden, 1,300,000
12. Venice, 1,000,000
13. Denmark, 1,000,000
14. Electorate of Saxony, 1,100,000
15. Electorate of Hanover, 900,000
16. Joint Elect. Of Palat.&Bavaria, 1,100,000
17. Sardinia, 1,000,000

The preceding statement in round numbers is intended merely to give the reader a general idea of the relative state of European finances. It would, however, he very improper to judge of the power of states merely by their finances, because, in some countries, the value of money is much higher than in others: Thus, for instance, the whole Russian army costs the state less than two millions of rubles. Russia, Denmark, England, Sweden, and others, have paper money.

LAND FORCES OF THE EUROPEAN STATES IN THE YEAR 1783.
France, 300,000
Austria, 282,000
Russia (450,000 in all) in Europe, 290,000
Prussia, 224,000
Turkey (210,000 in all) but in Europe only 170,000
Spain, 60,000 including militia.
Denmark, 72,000
Great Britain, 58,000 including militia,
Sweden, 50,000
Sardinia, 40,000
Holland, 37,000
Naples and Sicily, 30,000
Electorate of Saxony, 26,000
Portugal, 20,000
Electorate of Bavaria and the Palatinate, 24,000
Hesse Cassel, 15,000
Hanover, 20,000
Poland, 15,000
Venice, 8,000
Wurtemberg, 6,000
The Ecclesiastical Estate, 5,000
Tuscany, 3,000

Having stated here the forces of the principal states only, passing over a considerable part of Germany, Italy, and Switzerland, we may [Page 4] calculate the armies of all the countries in Europe to amount to 2 mill­ions of men; so that supposing 140 millions of inhabitants in Europe, no more than of 1/70 the whole population are soldiers. The present military establishment of every kingdom, in a time of general peace, differs somewhat from the above statement. France, Austria, and Prussia, have by far the most formidable armies: As to Russia, the immense extent of its provinces can never allow an army of more than 120,000, or 130,000 men to act against an enemy; and as to the Turkish forces, they are at present much inferior to any other well­disciplined army. The different proportions, in different countries, between the population and the number of soldiers, is not unworthy of observation. There are in Germany, nearly 500,000 soldiers, con­sequently 1/52 of the whole population are engaged in the military pro­fession: In Italy, on the contrary, even supposing the standing armies of that country to amount to 120,000 men, this number makes only 1/132 of the whole population, which amounts to 16 millions.

NAVAL FORCES.NUMBER OF SHIPS OF THE LINE, FRIGATES, CUTTERS, SLOOPS, &c.
1. England, 465
2. France, 266
3. Spain, 130
4. Holland, 95
5. Sweden, 85
6. Denmark, 60
7. Turkey, 50 commonly reckoned 60.
8. Russia, 63
9. Sardinia, 32
10. Venice, 30
11. Sicily, 25
12. Portugal, 24
Total 1325

Several of these numbers, taken from the naval lists in the year 1783, are at present reduced. This gives, however, some idea of the re­spective naval strength of the different powers of Europe. Some of them, as for instance, Denmark, Sweden, Sicily, Portugal, having had no war for many years past, and having, for that reason, built but a small number of ships, are capable of maintaining a much larger navy than they now have; and they would, undoubtedly, increase their naval forces very considerably in case of a war.

The greatest part of Europe is under the influence of a climate, which, being tempered with a moderate degree of cold, forms a race of men strong, bold, active and ingenious; forced by necessity to make the best use they can of the smaller share of vegetable and animal treas­ures, which their soil produces. In hotter and richer parts of the globe, the profusion of spontaneous natural productions, and the heat of the atmosphere, relax the bodily and mental powers of the inhabit­ants, check their spirit of enterprise, and confine the compass of their thought. The torrid zone has never been able, nor is over likely, to boast of a Newton, a Caesar, or a Frederic.

[Page 5] Great ridges of mountains, the chief of which are the Alps, the Ap­ennines, the Pyrenean, the Carpathian, Sudetic, and Saxon mountains, effect not only a great variety in the climate, but pour out many large and navigable rivers, and contain every species of minerals. It is like­wise no small convenience and encouragement to commerce, that Eu­rope is intersected by several seas, and that it is contiguous to the At­lantic Ocean.

The seeming natural disadvantages of Europe have, by dint of the ingenuity and perseverance of the inhabitants, given rise to numberless arts and sciences, which have been carried to a great degree of perfec­tion. Asia and Africa, have immense deserts, such as are no where to be found in Europe; deserts of many thousand square miles, and which are partly owing to natural and insuperable disadvantages of situation, partly to want of industry, which is at once both cause and effect of desolation. America is yet in its infancy, so that the sciences of Eu­rope far excel those of the other quarters of the globe, excepting those parts into which European knowledge and civilization have been trans­planted. Europe may also boast of the greatest number of useful in­ventions and institutions, to preserve and to propagate acquired know­ledge. It has, at present, about 130 universities, and an almost infinite number of literary societies, or academies of sciences, arts, and lan­guages.

The states of Europe considered with respect to their intrinsic pow­er and influence abroad, may be divided into three classes: France, Great Britain, Austria, Prussia, and Russia, belong to the first. Sec­ondary powers are those of Turkey, Spain, Holland, Denmark, Swe­den, and Sardinia: The third class comprehends Portugal, Naples, and Sicily, Poland, the Joint Electorate of the Palatinate and Bavaria, the Electorate of Saxony, Switzerland and Venice. For the last three centuries past, the cabinets of Europe, and chiefly that of France, have endeavoured to keep up a constant equilibrium between the dif­ferent states. France and England endeavoured to preserve the bal­ance of power in the west, Prussia, Austria, and Russia that in the east of Europe: Russia has, by its late extraordinary increase of power, gained a great ascendency in the north, after a successful struggle with the rival power of Sweden.

GRAND DIVISIONS OF EUROPE.

THIS grand division of the earth is situated between the 10th de­gree west. and the 65th degree east longitude from London; and between the 36th and 72d degree of north latitude. It is bounded on the north, by the Frozen Ocean; on the east, by Asia; on the south, by the Mediterranean Sea, which divides it from Africa; and on the west, by the Atlantic Ocean, which separates it from America: Being 3000 miles long, from Cape St. Vincent in the west, to the mouth of the river Oby in the north east; and 2500 broad, from north to south, from the north Cape in Norway to Cape Cayha or Metapar in the Mo­rea, the most southern promontory in Europe. * It contains the fol­lowing kingdoms and states.

[Page 6]

Kingdoms. Len. Bth. Chief City. Dist. and Bearing from London. Diff. of Time from London. Religions.
        Miles. H. M.  
England 380 300 London *** *** L [...]th. Calvinists,&c.
Scotland 300 150 Edinburgh 400 N. 0 12 aft. Calvinists, &c.
Ireland 285 16 [...] Dublin 270 N. W. 0 26 aft. Lat. Gal. & R. Ca.
Norway 1000 300 Bergen 540 N. 0 24 bef. Lutherans
Denmark 240 180 Copenhagen 500 N. E. 0 50 bef. Lutherans
Sweden 800 500 Stockholm 750 N. E. 1 10 bef. Lutherans
Russia 1500 1000 Petersburg 1140 N. E. 2 4 bef. Greek Church
Poland 700 680 W. saw 760 E. 1 24 bef. R. C. [...]uth. &c. Calv.
K. of Pr. Dom. 609 350 Eerlin 540 E. 0 99 bef. Luth. and Calv.
Germany 600 500 Vienna 600 E. 1 5 bef. R. C. Luth.&Calv.
Bahemia 300 250 Prague 600 E. 1 4 bef. R. Cath.
[...] Holland 150 100 Amster [...]am 180 E. 0 18 bef. Calvinists.
Flanders 200 200 Brussers 180 S. E. 0 16 bef. R. Cath.
France 600 500 Paris 200 S. E. 0 9 bef. R. Cath.
Spain 700 500 Ma [...]rin 800 S. 0 17 aft. R. Cath.
Portugal 300 100 [...] 850 S. W. 0 38 aft. R. Cath.
Switzerland 260 100 Bern, Coir. &c. 420 S. E. 0 28 bef. Calv. & R. Cath.
[...] Several small States Piedmont, Monserrat, Milan, Parma, Modena, Mantua, Venice, Genoa, Tuscany, &c. Turin, Casal, Milan, Parma, Modena, Mantua, Venice Genoa, Florence.
Popedom 240 120 Rome 820 S. E. 0 5 [...] bef. R. Cath.
Naples 280 120 Naples 870 S. E. 1 0 bef. R. Cath.
Hungary 300 200 Buda 780 S. E. 1 17 bef. R. C. & Prote [...]tan [...]
Europe Danubian Provinces 600 420 Constan­tinople 1320 S. E. 1 58 bef. Mahometans and Greek Church.
[...] Tartary * 380 240 Precop 1500 E. 2 24 bef.
Greece 400 240 Athens 1360 S. E. 1 37 bef.

Exclusive of the British isles, Europe contains the following principal islands:

Islands. Chief Towns Subject to
In the Nor­thern Ocean. Iceland, Skalholt. Denmark
  Zealand, Funed, Alsen, Fal­ster, Langland, Laland, Fe­mernen, Mona, Bornholm,   Denmark
Baltic Sea. Zealand, Funed, Alsen, Fal­ster, Langland, Laland, Fe­mernen, Mona,   Denmark
Gothland, Aland, Rugen,   Sweden
Osel, Dagho,   Russia
Usedom, Wollm,   Prussia
  • Mediterranc­an Sea.
    • Ivica,
    • Majorca,
    • Minorca,
    • Corsica,
    • Sardinia,
    • Sicily
  Ivica, Spain
  Majorca, Ditto
  Port Mahon, Ditto
  Bastia, France
  Cagliari, K. of Sard.
  Palermo, K. of 2 Sic.
Adriatic, or Gulf Venice. Lusiena, Corfu, Cephalonia, ant, Leucadia,   Venice.
Archipelago, and Levant Seas. Candia, Rhodes, Negropont, Lemnos, Tenedos, Scyros, Mytelene, Scio, Samo [...], Pat­mos, Paros, Cerigo, Santo­rin, &c. being part of an­cient an modern Greece.   Turkey.
[Page 7]

DENMARK.

I SHALL, according to my plan, begin this account of his Danish Majesty's dominions, with the most northerly situations, and di­vide them into four parts: 1st, East and West Greenland, Iceland and the islands in the Atlantic Ocean; 2d, Norway; 3d, Denmark Prop­er; and 4th his German territories.

The dimensions of these countries may be seen in the following table.

Denmark.   Square Miles. Length. Breadth. Chief Cities.
Denmark Proper. North Jutland, 9,600 155 98 Wyburg.
South Jutland, or Sleswick, 2,115 70 63 Sleswick.
Islands at the entrance of the Baltic Sea. zealand, 1,935 60 60 COPENHACEN.
Funen, 768 38 32 Odensee,
Falstar and 220 27 12 Nikoping. Naxkaw.
Langland,        
Femeren, 50 13 8 Borge.
Alsen, 54 15 6 Sonderborge.
Mona, 39 14 5 Stege.
Bornholm, 160 20 12 Roftcomby.
In the North Seas, Iceland, Island, 46,000 435 185 Skalholt.
  Norway, 71,400 750 170 Bergen.
  Danish Lapland, 28,400 285 172 Wardhuys.
Westphalia, Oldenburg, 1260 62 32 Oldenburg.
Lower Saxony, Stormar, Danish Holstein. 1000 52 3 [...] Gluckstadt.
  Total 163,041      

The reader may perceive, that in the preceding table no calculation is made of the dimensions of East and West Greenland; because in fact, they are not yet known, or known very imperfectly: We shall proceed to give the latest accounts of them, and from the best author­ities that have come to our hands.

EAST AND WEST GREENLAND, ICELAND, AND THE ISLANDS IN THE ATLANTIC OCEAN.

EAST GREENLAND.

THE most northerly part of his Danish majesty's dominions; or as others call it, New Greenland, and the country of Spitzbergen, lies between 10 and 11 deg. E. long. and 76 and 80 deg. N. lat. Though it is now claimed by Denmark, it certainly was discovered by Sir Hugh Willoughby in 1553; and is supposed to be a continua­tion of Old Greenland. It obtained the name of Spitzbergen from the height and ruggedness of its rocks. Few animals or vegetables are to be found here, and the fish and fowl are said to forsake the coast in winter. The Russians of Archangel have formed within the last 30 years, settlements for hunting in several places of the island of Spitz­bergen. The Aurora Borealis and the northern lights reflected from [Page 8] the snow, enable them to pursue the chace during the long winter nights of those gloomy regions; and they take a great number of [...]ea­lions which serve them for food. There is a whole-fishery, chiefly prosecuted by the Dutch and some British vessels, on its coast. It likewise contains two harbours; one called South Haven, and the other Maurice-Bay; but the inland parts are uninhabited.

WEST GREENLAND

LIES between the Meridian of London, and 50 deg. W. long. and between 60 and 76 deg. N. lat.

INHABITANTS.] By the latest accounts from the missionaries em­ployed for the conversion of the Greenlanders, their whole number does not amount to above 957 stated inhabitants: M. Crantz, how­ever, thinks that the roving southlanders of Greenland may amount to about 7000. There is a great resemblance between the aspect, man­ners, and dress of those natives, and the Esquimaux Americans, from whom they naturally differ but little, even after all the pains which the Danish and German missionaries have taken to convert and civi­lize them. They are low of stature, few exceeding five feet in height, and the generality are not so tall. The hair of their heads is long, straight, and of a black colour; but they have seldom any beards, be­cause it is their constant practice to root them out. They have high breasts and broad shoulders, especially the women, who are obliged to carry great burdens from their younger years. They are very light and nimble of foot, and can also use their hands with much skill and dexterity. They are not very lively in their tempers, but they are good-humoured, friendly, and unconcerned about futurity. Their most agreeable food is the flesh of rein-deer; but that is now scarce among them, and their best provisions are fish, seals, and sea-fowl. Their drink is clear water, which stands in the house in a great cop­per-vessel, or in a wooden tub, which is very neatly made by them, or­namented with fish bones and rings, and provided with a pewter la­dle or dipping dish. The men make their hunting and fishing imple­ments, and prepare the wood-work of their boats; and the wom­en cover them with skins. The men hunt and fish, but when they have towed their booty to land, they trouble themselves no farther about it; nay, it would be accounted beneath their dignity only to draw the seal up upon the shore. The women are the butchers and cooks, and also the curriers to dress the pelts, and make clothes, shoes, and boots, out of them; so that they are likewise both shoemakers and taylors. The women also build and repair the houses and tents, so far as relates to the masonry, the men doing only the carpenter's work. They live in huts during their winter, which is incredibly se­vere; but Mr. Crantz, who has given us the latest and best accounts of this country, says, that in their longest summer days it is so hot that the inhabitants are obliged to throw off their summer garments. They have no trade, though they have a most improveable fishery upon their coasts; but they employ all the year either in fishing or hunting, in which they are very dexterous, particularly in catching and killing seals.

CURIOSITIES.] The taking of whales in the seas of Greenland, among the fields of ice that have been increasing for ages, is one of [Page 9] the greatest curiosities in nature. These fields, or pieces of ice, are frequently more than a mile in length, and upwards of 100 feet in thickness; and when they are put in motion by a storm, nothing can be more terrible: The Dutch had 13 ships crushed to pieces by them in one season.

There are several kinds of whales in Greenland; some white and others black. The black sort, the grand bay whale, is in most esteem, on account of his bulk, and the great quantity of fat or blubber he af­fords, which turns to oil. His tongue is about 18 feet long, inclosed in long pieces of what we call whale-bone, which are covered with a kind of hair like horse hair; and on each side of his tongue are 250 pieces of this whale-bone. As to the bones of his body they are as hard as an ox's bones, and of no use. There are no teeth in his mouth; and he is usually between 60 and 80 feet long; very thick about the head, but grows less from thence to that tail.

When the seamen see a whale spout, the word is immediately given, fall, fall, when every one hastens from the ship to his boat; six or eight men being appointed to a boat, and four or five boats usually belong to one ship.

When they come near the whale, the harpooner strikes him with his harpoon (a barbed dart) and the monster, finding himself wounded, runs swiftly down into the deep, and would carry the boat along with him if they did not give him line fast enough; and to prevent the wood of the boat taking fire by the violent rubbing of the rope on the side of it, one wets it constantly with a mop. After the whale has run some hundred fathoms deep, he is forced to come up for air, when he makes such a terrible noise with his spouting, that some have com­pared it to the firing of cannon. As soon as the appears on the surface of the water, some of the harpooners six another harpoon in him, whereupon he plunges again into the deep; and when he comes up a second time, they pierce him with spears in the vital parts till he spouts out streams of blood instead of water, beating the waves with his tail and fins till the sea is in a foam, the boats continuing to follow him some leagues, till he has lost his strength; and when he is dying he turns himself upon his back, and is drawn on shore, or to the ship if they be at a distance from the land. There they cut him in pieces, and boiling the blubber extract the oil, if they have conveniencies on shore; otherwise they barrel up the pieces, and bring them home; but nothing can smell stronger than these ships do. Every fish is com­puted to yield between 60 and 100 barrels of oil, of the value of 3l. or 4l. a barrel. Though the Danes claim the country of East and West Greenland, where these whales are taken, the Dutch have in a manner monopolized this fishery. Of late the English have also been very successful in it.

ICELAND.

THIS island, which receives its name from the great masses of ice that are seen near it, lies between 63 and 67 deg. N. lat. and between 11 and 27 deg. W. long. It extends four hundred miles in length, and an hundred and sixty in breadth, containing about 46000 square miles. In April, 1783, the inhabitants of Iceland observed something risen and flaming in the sea, to the south of Grinbourg, at eight miles [Page 10] distant from the rocks des Oiseaux, which afterwards was found to be a new Island. The fact is authentic, but its dimensions and situa­tion are not well ascertained. The information brought by the last ship from thence, was, that the Island was still increasing, and that great quantities of fire issued from two of its eminences.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MANNERS, AND CUSTOMS.] It ap­pears that a Norwegian colony, among which there were many Sweden, settled in Iceland in the ninth century. They found there inhabitants who were Christians, and whom they called Papas. It is said, that the Norwegians also found among them Irish books, bells, and crosiers [...]. And it is conjectured, that the people who were there, when the Norwegians arrived in the island, originally came from England and Ireland. The inhabitants long retained their freedom; but they were at last obliged to submit to the kings of Norway, and afterwards became subject, together with Norway, to the kings of Denmark. They were at first governed by an admiral, who was sent there every year to make the necessary regulations: But that mode has now been changed for many years, and a governor appointed, who is styled Stiftsamtmans, and who constantly resides in the country.

The number of the inhabitants of Iceland is computed at about 60,000, which is by no means adequate to the extent of the country. It has been much more populous in former times, but great numbers have been destroyed by contagious diseases. The plague carried off ma­ny thousand from 1402 to 1404. Many parts of Iceland have also been depopulated by famine: For though the Icelanders cannot in general be said to be in want of necessary food, yet the country has several times been visited by great famines. These have been chiefly occasion­ed by the Greenland floating ice; which, when it comes in great quan­tities, prevents the grass from growing, and puts an entire stop to their fishing. The small pox has likewise been very fatal here; for in the year 1707 and 1708 that disease destroyed 16,000 persons.

The Icelanders in general are middle-sized, and well-made, though not very strong. They are an honest, hospitable well intentioned peo­ple, moderately industrious, and very faithful and obliging. Theft is seldom heard of among them. Their chief employment is fishing, and taking care of their cattle. On the coasts, the men employ their time in fishing both winter and summer; and the women prepare the fish, and sew and spin. The men also prepare leather, work at several mechanic trades, and some few work in gold and silver. They like­wise manufacture a coarse kind of cloth, which they call Wadmal.—They have an uncommonly strong attachment to their native country, and think themselves no where else so happy. An Icelander, there­fore, seldom settles in Copenhagen, though the most advantageous conditions should be offered him. Their dispositions are serious, and they are much inclined to religion. They never pass a river, or any other dangerous place, without previously taking off their hats, and imploring the divine protection; and they are always thankful for their preservation, when they have passed the danger. When they meet together, their chief pastime consists in reading their history.—The master of the house begins, and the rest continue in their turns when he is tired. They are famous for playing at chess; and one of their pastimes consists in reciting verses. Sometimes a man and women [Page 11] take one another by the hand, and by turns sing stanzas, which are a kind of dialogue, and in which the company occasionally join in cho­rus. The dress of the Icelanders is not elegant or ornamental, but it is neat, cleanly, and suited to the climate. On their fingers the women wear several gold, silver, or brass rings. The poorer women dress in the coarse cloth, called wadmal, and always wear black: Those who are in better circumstances wear broadcloth, with silver ornaments, gilt. The houses of the Icelanders are generally bad: In some places they are built of drift wood, and in others they are raised of lava, with moss stuffed between the lava. Their roofs are covered with sods laid over rafters, or sometimes over ribs of whales, which are both more durable and more expensive than wood. They have not even a chim­ney in their kitchens, but only lay their fuel on the earth, between three stones; and the smoke issues from a square hole in the roof.—Their food principally consists of dried fish, sour butter, which they consider as a great dainty, milk mixed with water and whey, and a little meat. Bread is so scarce among them, that there is hardly any peasant who eats it above three or four months in the year.

RELIGION.] The only religion tolerated in Iceland is the Lutheran. The churches on the east, south, and west quarters of the island, are under the jurisdiction of the bishop of Skalholt, (the capital of the island) and those of the north quarter are subject to the bishop of Hoolum. The island is divided into 189 parishes, of which 127 be­long to the see of Skalholt, and 62 to that of Hoolum. All the minis­ters are natives of Iceland, and receive a yearly salary of four or five hundred rix-dollars from the king, exclusive of what they have from their congregations.

LANGUAGE.] The language of Iceland is the same as that formerly spoken in Sweden, Denmark, and Norway, and has been preserved so pure, that any Icelander understands their most ancient traditional histories.

LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN.] It is said that poetry formerly flourished very much in Iceland; and we are informed that Egil Skal­lagrimson, Kormak Ogmundson, Glum Geirson, and Thorlief Jarlaa were celebrated as great poets. But the art of writing was not much in use till after the year 1000; though the Runic characters were known in that country before that period, and most probably brought thither from Norway. After the reception of the Christian religion, the Latin characters were immediately adopted, as the Runic alphabet, which only consists of sixteen letters, was found insufficient. The first Icelandic bishop, Itself, founded a school at Skalholt; and soon after they founded four other schools, in which the youth were in­structed in the Latin tongue, divinity, and some parts of theoretic phi­losophy. And from the introduction of the Christian religion here, till the year 1264, when Iceland became subject 10 Norway, it was one of the few countries in Europe, and the only one in the North, wherein the sciences were cultivated and held in esteem.

But this period of time seems to have produced more learned men in Iceland than any other period since. It appears from their ancient chronicles, that they had considerable knowledge in morality, philoso­phy, natural history, and astronomy. Most of their works were writ­ten in the 11th, 12th, 13th, and 14th centuries; and some of them [Page 12] have been printed. Mr. Banks, now Sir Joseph Banks, presented [...] hundred and sixty-two Icelandic manuscripts to the British Muse [...]. That gentleman visited Iceland in 1772, accompanied by Dr. Soland [...] Dr. Van Troil, and Dr. Lind. Dr. Van Troil, who published an [...] count of their voyage, observes, that he found more knowledge among the lower class in Iceland, than is to be met with in most other place [...] that many of them could repeat the works of some of their poets by heart; and that a peasant was seldom to be found, who, besides being well instructed in the principles of religion, was not also acqurain [...] with the history of his own country; which proceeds from the fre­quent reading of their traditional histories, that being one of their principal amusements.

John Aroson, bishop of Hoolum, employed John Matthiesson, a na­tive of Sweden, in establishing a printing-press in Iceland, about the year 1530; and the first book printed by him there was the [...] viarium Nidarosiense. He also printed an ecclesiastical manual, La­ther's catechism, and other books of that kind. The Icelandic [...] of laws appeared in 1578, and the Icelandic bible in 1584. A [...] privileged printing-office has lately been established at Hrappsey in this island, and at which several valuable books have been printed.

MOUNTAINS, VOLCANOES, AND NATURAL CURIOSITIES.] Though this island is situated so far to the north, earthquakes and volcanoes and more known than in many countries in much warmer climates. The former have several times laid the country almost desolate, particularly in the years 1734, 1752, and 1755, when fiery eruptions broke out of the earth, and produced very fatal consequences. Many of the snow as mountains have also gradually become volcanoes. Of these burning mountains Heckla is the best known, especially to foreigners. This mountain is situated in the southern part of the island, about four miles from the sea-coast, and is divided into three points at the top, the high­est of which is that in the middle; and which is computed to be above 5000 feet higher than the sea. This mountain has frequently sent for the flames, and a torrent of burning matter. Its eruptions were particu­larly dreadful in 1693, when they occasioned terrible devastations, the ashes being thrown all round the island to the distance of 180 English miles. The last eruption of mount Heokla happened in 1766. Is began on the 5th of April, and continued to the 7th of September fol­lowing. Flames proceeded also from it in December 1771, and in September 1772; but no eruptions of lava.

But amongst all the curiosities of Iceland, nothing is more worthy of attention than the hot spouting water-springs with which this island abounds. The hot springs at Aix-la-Chapelle, Carlsbad, Bath, and Switzerland, and several others found in Italy, are considered as very remarkable: But, excepting in the last mentioned country, the water no where becomes so hot as to boil; nor is it any where known to be thrown so high, as the hot spouting water-springs in Iceland. All those water-works that have been contrived with so much art, and [...] so enormousan expense, cannot by any means be compared with these. The water-works at St. Cloud, which are thought the greatest among all the French water-works, cast up a thin column eighty feet into the and While some springs in Iceland spout columns of water, of several feet in thickness, to the height of many fathoms; and, as many affir [...] [Page 13] of several hundred feet. These springs are of unequal degrees of heat. From some, the water flows gently as from other springs, and it is then called a bath: From others, it spouts boiling water with a great noise, and it is then called a kettle. Though the degree of heat is unequal, yet Dr. Van Troll says, that he does not remember ever to have observ­ed it under 188 of Fahrenheit's thermometer. At Geyser, Roeyhum, and Laugarvatn, he found it at 212; and in the last place, in the ground, at a little hot current of water, 213 degrees. It is very com­mon for some of the spouting-springs to cease, and others to rise up in their stead. Frequent earthquakes, and subterranean noises, heard at the time, cause great terror to the people who live in the neighbour­hood. In several of these hot springs, the inhabitants who live near them, boil their victuals, only by hanging a pot into which the flesh is put in cold water, in the water of the spring. They also bathe in the rivulets that run from them, which, by degree, become luke-warm, or are cooled by their being mixed with rivulets of cold water. The cows that drink of these springs are said to yield an extraordinary quan­tity of milk; and it is likewise esteemed very wholesome when drank by the human species.

The largest of all the spouting-springs in Iceland is called Geyser. It is about two days journey from Heckla, and not far from Skalholt. In approaching towards it, a load roaring noise is heard, like the rush­ing of a torrent, precipitating itself from stupendous rocks. The water here spouts several times a day, but always by starts, and after certain intervals. Some travellers have affirmed, that is spouts to the height of sixty fathoms. The water is thrown up much higher at some times than at others; when Dr. Van Troil was there, the utmost height to which it amounted was computed to be 92 feet.

Basaltine pillars are likewise very common in Iceland, which are supposed to have been produced by subterranean fires. The lower fort of people imagine these pillars to have been piled upon one anoth­er by giants, who made use of supernatual force to effect it. They have generally from three to seven sides, and are from four to six feet in thickness, and from twelve to sixteen yards in length, without any horizontal divisions. In some places they are only seen here and there among the lava in the mountains: But, in some other places, they ex­tend two or three miles in length without interruption.

There are immense masses of ice, by which every year great damage is done to this country, and which affect the climate of it; they ar­rive commonly with a N. W. or N. N. W. wind from Greenland.—The field-ice is of two or three fathoms thickness, is separated by the winds, and less dreaded than the rock or mountain-ice, which is often seen fifty feet and more above water, and is at least nine times the same depth below water. These prodigious masses of ice are frequently left in shoal water, fixed, as it were, to the ground, and in that state remain many months, nay, it is said, even years, undissolved, chilling all the ambient part of the atmosphere for many miles round. The ice caused so violent a cold in 1753 and 1754, that horses and sheep perished on account of it. A number of bears arrive yearly with the ice, which commit great ravages, particularly among the sheep. The Icelanders attempt to destroy these intruders as soon as they get sight of them; and sometimes they assemble together, and drive them back [Page 14] to the ice, with which they often float off again. For want of fire­arms, they are obliged to make use of spears on these occasions. The government encourages the natives to destroy these animals, by paying a premium of ten dollars for every bear that is killed. Their skins are also purchased for the king, and are not allowed to be sold to any other person.

It is extraordinary that no wood grows successfully in Iceland; nay, there are very few trees to be found on the whole island, though there are certain proofs that wood formerly grew there in great abundance. Nor can corn be cultivated here to any advantage; though cabbages, parsley, turnips, and peas, may be met with in five or six gardens, which are said to be all that are in the whole Island.

TRADE.] The commerce of this island is monopolized by a Danish company. The soil upon the sea-coast is tolerably good for pasture; and though there is not any considerable town in the whole island, the Icelanders have several frequented ports. Their exports consist of dried fish, salted mutton and lamb, beef, butter, tallow, train-oil, co [...] woolen-cloth, stockings, gloves, raw wool, sheep-skins, lamb-skin [...], fox-furs of various colours, eider-down, and feathers. Their impost consist of timber, fishing-lines and hooks, tobacco, bread, horse-shoes, brandy, wine, salt, linen, and a little silk; exclusive of some necessa­ries and superfluities for the more wealthy.

STRENGTH AND REVENUE.] As Iceland affords no bait for avari [...] or ambition, the inhabitants depend entirely upon his Danish majesty's protection; and the revenue he draws from the country amounts to about 30,000 crowns a year.

THE FARO OR FERRO ISLANDS,

SO called from their lying in a cluster, and the inhabitants ferrying from one island to another. They are about 24 in number, and his between 61 and 63 deg. W. long. from London. The space of this cluster extends about 60 miles in length, and 40 in breadth 300 miles to the westward of Norway; having Shetland and the Orkneys on the south-east, and Greenland and Iceland upon the north and north-west. The trade and income of the inhabitants, who may be about 3000 or 4000, add little or nothing to the revenues of Denmark.

NORWAY.

NAME, BOUNDARIES, AND EXTENT.] THE natural signification of Norway is, the Northern-way. It is bounded on the south by the entrance into the Baltic, called the Scaggerac, as Categate; on the west and North, by the northern ocean; and on the east it is divided from Sweden by a long ridge of mountains, call­ed at different parts by different names; as Fillefield, Dofrefield, Rundfield, and Dourfield. The reader may consult the table of di­mensions in Denmark for its extent; but it is a country so little known to the rest of Europe, that it is difficult to fix its dimension with precision.

CLIMATE.] The climate of Norway varies according to its extend and its position towards the sea. At Bergen the winter is modern and the sea is navigable. The eastern parts of Norway are commonly [Page 15] covered with snow; and the cold generally sets in about the middle of October, with intense severity, and continues so the middle of April; the waters being all that time frozen to a considerable thick­ness. In 1719, 7000 Swedes, who were on their march to attack Drontheim, perished in the snow, on the mountains which separate Sweden from Norway; and their bodies were found in different postures. But even frost and snow have their conveniencies, as they facilitate the conveyance of goods by land. As to the more northerly parts of this country, called Finmark, the cold is so intense, that they are but little known. At Bergen, the longest day is about 19 hours, and the shortest about six. In summer, the inhabitants can read and write and midnight by the light of the sky; and in the most northerly parts, about midsummer, the sun is continually in view. In those parts, however, in the middle of winter, there is only a faint glimmering of light at noon for about an hour and an half; ow­ing to the reflection of the sun's rays on the mountains. Nature, not­withstanding, has been so kind to the Norwegians, that in the midst of their darkness, the sky is serene, and the moon and the aurora borealis so bright, that they can carry on their fishery, and work at their several trades in open air. Sudden thaws, and snow-falls, have sometimes dreadful effects, and destroy whole villages.

MOUNTAINS.] Norway is reckoned one of the most mountainous countries in the world. It contains a chain of unequal mountains running from south to north: To pass that of Hardanger, a man must travel about seventy English miles; and to pass others, upwards of fifty. Dofrefield is counted the highest mountain, perhaps in Europe. The rivers and cataracts which intersect those dreadful preci­pices, and that are passable only by slight tottering wooden bridges, render travelling in this country very terrible and dangerous; though the government is at the expense of providing, at different stages, houses accommodated with fire, light, and kitchen furniture. De­tached from this vast chain, other immense mountains present them­selves all over Norway; some of them with reservoirs of water on the top; and the whole forming a most surprising landscape. The activity of the natives, in recovering their sheep and goats, when penned up, through a false step, in one of those rocks, is wonderful. The owner directs himself to be lowered down from the top of the mountains, sitting on a cross stick, tied to the end of a long rope; and when he arrives at the place where the creature stands, he fastens it to the same cord, and it is drawn up with himself. The caverns that are to be met with in these mountains, are more wonderful than those, perhaps, in any other part of the world, though less liable to observation. One of them, called Dolsteen, was, in 1750, visited by two clergymen; who reported, that they proceeded in it till they heard the sea dashing over their heads; that the passage was as wide and high as an ordinary church, the sides perpendicular, and the roof vaulted: That they descended a flight of natural stairs: but when they arrived at another, they durst not venture to proceed, but re­turned; and that they consumed two candles going and returning.

FORESTS.] The chief wealth of Norway lies in its forests, which furnish foreigners with masts, beams, planks, and boards: And serve beside for all domestic uses; particularly the construction of houses, [Page 16] bridges, ships, and for charcoal to the founderies. The chief timber grow­ing here are sir and pine, elm, ash, yew, benreed (a very curious wood), birch, beech, oak, eel or alder, juniper, the aspin-tree, the comol or flow-tree, hafel, elder, and even ebony (under the mountains of Kolen) lime or linden tree and willows. The sums which Norway receives for timber are very considerable; but the industry of the inhabit­ants is greatly assisted by the course of their rivers, and the situation of their lakes; which afford them not only the conveniency already mentioned, of floating down their timber, but that of erecting saw mills, for dividing their large beams into planks and deals. A tenth of all sawed timber belongs to his Danish Majesty, and forms no in­considerable part of his revenue.

STONES, METALS, AND MINERALS.} Norway contains quarries of excellent mar­ble, as well as many other kinds of stones; and the magnet is found in the iron mines. The amianthus, or abestos, in found here. It is of an incombustible nature, and when its delicate fibres are woven into cloth, is cleaned by burning. Besides this curi­ous mineral, Norway produces crystals, granates, amethysts, agate, thunder-stones, and eagle-stones. Gold found in Norway has been coined into ducats. His Danish majesty is now working, to great ad­vantage, a silver mine at Konsberg; other silver mines have been found in different parts of the country; and one of the many silver masses that have been discovered, weighing 560 pounds, is to be seen at the Royal Museum at Copenhagen. The lead, copper, and iron mines, are common in this country: One of the copper-mines at R [...] ­raas is thought to be the richest in Europe. Norway likewise pro­duces quicksilver, sulphur, salt, and coal mines; vitriol, alum, and various kinds of loam; the different manufactures of which bring in a large revenue to the crown.

RIVERS AND LAKES.] The rivers and fresh water lakes in this country are well stocked with fish, and navigable for vessels of con­siderable burden. The most extraordinary circumstance attending the lakes is, that some of them contain floating islands, formed by the cohesion of roots of trees and shrubs; and thought torn from the main land, bear herbage and trees. So late as the year 1702, the noble fam­ily-feat of Borge, near Fredericstadt, suddenly sunk, with all its tow­ers and battlements into an abyss a hundred fathoms in depth; and its site was instantly filled with water, which formed a lake 300 ells in length, and about half as broad. This melancholy accident, by which 14 people and 200 head of cattle perished, was occasioned by the foundation being undermined by the waters of a river.

UNCOMMON ANIMALS, FOWLS, AND FISHES.} All the animals that are natives of Den­mark are to be found in Norway, besides the elk, the rein-deer, the hare, the rabbit, the bear, the wolf, th [...] lynx, the fox, the glutton, the leming, the ermine, the martin and th [...] beaver. The elk is a tall, ash-coloured animal, its shape partaking [...] once of the horse and the stag; it is harmless, and, in the winter, spe­cial; and the flesh of it tastes like venison. The rein-deer is [...] species of stag, and will be described hereafter.

The hares are small; and are said to live upon mice in the winter time, and to change their colour from brown to white. The Norway [...] ­gian bears are strong and sagacious: They are remarkable for [...] [Page 17] hurting children; but their other qualities are in common with the rest of their species in northern countries; nor can we much credit the very extraordinary specimens of their sagacity, recorded by the natives: They are hunted by little dogs; and some prefer bear hams to those of Westphalia. The Norwegian wolves, though fierce, are shy even of a cow or goat, unless impelled by hunger: The natives are dexterous in digging traps for them, in which they are taken or killed. The lynx, by some called the goupes, is smaller than a wolf, but as dangerous: They are of the cat kind, and have claws like ty­gers: They dig under ground, and often undermine sheep-folds, where they make dreadful havock. The skin of the lynx is beautiful and valuable; as is that of the black fox. White and red foxes are likewise found in Norway, and partake of the nature of that wily an­imal in other countries; they have a particular way of drawing crabs ashore, by dipping their tails in the water, which the crab lays hold of.

The glutton, otherwise called the erven, or vielfras, resembles a dog; with a long body, thick legs, sharp claws and teeth; his fur, which is variegated, is so precious, that he is shot with blunt arrows, to pre­serve the skin unhurt: He is bold, and so ravenous, that it is said he will devour a carcase larger than himself, and unburthens his stom­ach by squeezing himself between two close-standing trees: When taken, he has been even known to eat stone and mortar. The ermine is a little creature, remarkable for its shyness and cleanliness. Their fur forms a principal part even of royal magnificence. There is little difference between the martin and a large brown forest cat, only its head and snout are sharper; it is very fierce, and its bite dangerous. The beaver has been described in our account of the United States of America.

Norway produces a great variety of birds. The alks build upon rocks; their numbers often darken the air, and the noise of their wings is like that of a storm; their size is the bigness of a large duck: They are an aquatic fowl, and their flesh is much esteemed. No fewer than thirty different kinds of thrushes are said to reside in Nor­way; with various kinds of pigeons, and several sorts of beautiful wild ducks. The Norwegian cock-of-the-wood is of a black or dark grey colour, his eye resembling that of a pheasant; and he is said to be the largest of all eatable birds. In Norway are two kinds of eagles, the land and the sea; the former is so strong, that he has been known to carry off a child of two years old: The sea, or fish eagle, is larger than the other; he subsists of aquatic food; and sometimes darts on large fishes with such force; that, being unable to free his talons from their bodies, he is dragged into the water and drowned.

Nature seems to have adapted these aerial inhabitants for the coast of Norway; and industry has produced a species of mankind pecu­liarly fitted for making them serviceable to the human race: These are the birdmen, or climbers, who are amazingly dexterous in mount­ing the steepest rocks, and bringing away the birds and their eggs: The latter are nutritive food: The flesh is eaten by the peasants, who generally relish it; while the feathers and down form a profitable commodity. Even the dogs of the farmers, in the northern districts are trained up to be assistants to these birdmen in seizing their prey.

The Scandinavian lakes and seas abound in most kinds of fish that are found on the sea-coasts of Europe. Stock-fish in great numbers are [Page 18] caught and dried upon the rocks without salting. Some fishes in those seas, however, have their peculiarities. The haac-moren is a species of shark, said to be ten fathoms in length, and its liver yields three oasks of train oil. The tuellaflynder is a very large turbot, which has been known to cover a man who had fallen overboard, to keep him from rising. The season for herring-fishing is announced to the fisher­men by the spouting of water from the whales (of which seven different species are mentioned) in following the herring shoals. The large whale resembles a cod, with small eyes, a dark marble skin, and white belly: They spout out the water, which they take in at the mouth through two holes or openings in the head. They copulate like land-animals, standing upright in the sea. A young whale, when first produced, is about nine or ten feet long; and the female sometimes brings forth two at a birth. The whale devours an incredible number of small fish. They however have their revenge; some of them fasten on his back, and incessantly beat him; others, with sharp horns, or rather bones, on their beaks, swim under his belly, and sometimes rip it up; some are provided with long sharp teeth, and tear his flesh. Even the aquatic birds of prey declare war against him when he comes near the surface of the water; and he has been known to be so tortured, that he has beat himself to death on the rocks. The coasts of Norway may be said to be the native country of herrings.—Innumerable are the shoals that come from under the ice at the north pole; and about the latitude of Iceland divide themselves into three bodies: One of these supplies the Western Isles and coasts of Scot­land, another directs its course round the eastern part of Great Britain down the Channel, and the third enters the Baltic through the Sound. They form great part of the food of the common people; and the cod, ling, kabcliau, and torsk-fishes follow them, and feed upon their spawn; and are taken in prodigious numbers in 50 to 60 fathoms of water; these, especially their roes, and the oil extracted from their livers, are exported and sold to great advantages; and above 150,000 people are maintained by the herring and other fishing on the coast of Norway. The sea-devil is about six feet in length, and is so called from its mon­strous appearance and voracity. The sea-scorpion is likewise of a hideous form, its head being larger than its whole body, which is about four feet in length; and its bite is said to be poisonous.

The accounts of the ancients, concerning sea-monsters, seemingly the most fabulous, are rendered credible by the productions of the Norwegian seas; and the sea-snake, or serpent of the ocean, is no longer counted a chimera. In 1756, one of them was shot by a master of a ship; its head resembled that of a horse; the mouth was large and black, as were the eyes, a white mane hanging from its neck: It floated on the surface of the water, and held its head at least two feet, out of the sea; between the head and neck were seven or eight folds, which were very thick; and the length of this snake was more than a hundred yards, some say fathoms. They have a remarkable aversion, to the smell of castor; for which reason, ship, boat, and bark mastery provide themselves with quantities of that drug, to prevent being overset; the serpent's olfactory nerves being remarkably exquisi [...]. The particularities related of this animal would be incredible, were [Page 19] they not attested upon oath. Egede (a very reputable author) says, that on the 6th day of July, 1734, a large and frightful sea-monster raised itself so high out of the water, that its head reached above the main-top-mast of the ship; that it had a long sharp snout, broad paws, and spouted water like a whale [...] that the body seemed to be covered with scales; the skin was une [...] wrinkled, and the lower part was formed like a snake. The body of this monster is said to be as thick as a hogshead; his skin is variegated like a tortoise-shell; and his excrement, which floats upon the surface of the water, is corrosive, and blisters the hands of the seaman if they handle it.

I am under great difficulty in mentioning the kraken, or korven, whose existence is said to be proved so strongly, as seems to put it out of all doubt. I insert the common description, leaving every one to judge of its truth. Its bulk is said to be a mile and a half in circum­ference; and when part of it appears above the water, it resembles a number of small islands and sand-banks, on which fishes disport them­selves, and sea-weeds grow: Upon a farther emerging, a number of pellucid antennae, each about the height, form, and size of a moderate mast, appear; and by their action and re-action he gathers his food, con­sisting of small fishes. When he sinks, which he does gradually, a dangerous swell of the sea succeeds, and a kind of whirlpool is naturally formed in the water. In 1680, a young kraken perished among the rocks and cliffs of the parish of Alstahong; and his death was attended by such a stench, that the channel where it died was impassable.—Without entering into any romantic theories, we may safely say, that the existence of this fish being proved, accounts for many of these phae­nomena of floating islands, and transitory appearances in the sea, that have hitherto been held as fabulous by the learned, who could have no idea of such an animal.

The mer-men and mer-women reside in the Norwegian seas. The mer-man is about eight spans long, and has some resemblance to the human species; a high forehead little eyes, a flat nose, and large mouth, without chin or ears, characterize its head; its arms are short, but without joints or elbows, and they terminate in members resembling a human hand, but of the paw kind, and the fingers connected by a membrane: The parts of generation indicate their sexes: Their under parts, which remain in the water, terminate like those of fishes. The females have breasts, at which they suckle their young ones.

CURIOSITIES.] Those of Norway are all natural curiosities. On the coast, latitude 67, is that dreadful vortex, or whirlpool, called by navigators the navel of the sea, and by some Malestrom, or Moskoestrom. The island Moskoe, from whence this stream derives its name, lies be­tween the mountain Hesleggen in Lofoden; and the island Ver, which are about one league distant; and between the island and coast on each side, the stream makes its way. Between Moskoe and Lofoden it is near 400 fathoms deep; but between Moskoe and Ver, it is so shallow as not to afford passage for a small ship. When it is flood, the stream runs up the country between Lofoden and Moskoe with a boisterous rapidity; and when it is ebb, returns to the sea with a violence and noise unequalled by the loudest cataracts. It is heard at the distance of many leagues, and forms a vortex or whirlpool of great depth and extent; so violent, that if a ship comes near it, it is immediately drawn [Page 20] irresistibly into the whirl, and there disappears, being absorbed and carried down to the bottom in a moment, where it is dashed to pieces against the rocks; and just at the turn of ebb and flood, when the water becomes still for about a quarter of an hour, it rises again if scat­tered fragments. When it is agitated by a storm, it has reached vessels at the distance of more than a Norway mile, where the crews have thought themselves in perfect feburity. Perhaps it is hardly in the power of fancy to conceive a situation of more horror, than that of being thus driven forward by the sudden violence of an impetuous torrent to the vortex of a whirlpool, of which the noise and turbulence still increasing as it is approached, are an earnest of quick and inevita­ble destruction; while the wretched victims, in an agony of despair and terror, cry out for that help which they know to be impossible; and see before them the dreadful abyss in which they are about to be plunged, and dashed among the rocks at the bottom,

Even animals, which have come too near the vortex, have expressed the utmost terror when they find the stream irresistible. Whales are frequently carried away; and the moment they feel the force of the water, they struggle against it with all their might, howling and bel­lowing in a frightful manner. The like happens frequently to bears, who attempt to swim to the island to prey upon the sheep.

It was the opinion of Kircher, that the Malestrom is a sea vortex, which attracts the flood under the shore of Norway, and discharges it again in the gulf of Bothnia: But this opinion is now known to be erroneous, by the return of the shattered fragments of whatever hap­pens to be sucked down by it. The large stems of firs and pines rises again so shivered and splintered, that the pieces look as if covered with bristles. The whole phaenomena are the effects of the violence of the daily ebb and flow, occasioned by the contraction of the stream in its course between the rocks.

PEOPLE, LANGUAGE, RELIGION, AND CUSTOMS OF NORWAY.} The Norwegians are of a mid­dle character, between the simple Greenlanders and Icelanders, and the more polished Danes. Their religion is Lutheran; and they have bishops, as those of Denmark, without temporal jurisdiction. Their viceroy, like his master, is abso­lute; but the farmers and common people in Norway are much less oppressed than those in Denmark.

The Norwegians in general are strong, robust, and brave; but quick in resenting real or supposed injuries. The women are handsome and courteous; and the Norwegian forms, both of living and enjoying property, are mild, and greatly resembling the Saxon ancestors of the present English. Every inhabitant is an artisan, and supplies his fami­ly in all its necessaries with his own manufactures; so that in Norway there are few by profession who are hatters, shoe-makers, taylors, tan­ners, weavers, carpenters, smiths, or joiners. The lowest Norwegian peasant is an artist, a gentleman, and even a poet. They often mix with oat-meal, the bark of the fir, made into a kind of flour; being re­duced to very extraordinary shifts for supplying the place of bread, or farinaceous food. The middle class of Norwegians live in plenty; but, what is singular, they are neither fond of luxury, nor do they dread penury: And this middle state prolongs their ages surprisingly. Though their dress is in many respects accommodated to their climate, [Page 21] yet, through custom, instead of guarding against the inclemency of the weather, they outbrave it; for they expose themselves to cold, without any cover upon their breasts or necks. A Norwegian of a hundred years of age is not accounted past his labour: And in 1733, four cou­ples were married, and danced before his Danish Majesty at Frederic­shall, whose ages, when joined, exceeded 800 years.

The funeral ceremonies of the Norwegians contain vestiges of their former paganism: They play on the violin at the head of the coffin, and while the corpse is carried to the church, which is often done in a boat. In some places the mourners ask the dead person why he died; whether his wife and neighbours were kind to him, and other such questions; frequently kneeling down and asking forgiveness, if ever they had offended the deceased.

COMMERCE.] We have little to add to this head, different from what shall be observed in our account of Denmark. The duties on their exports, most of which have been already recounted, amount to about 100,000 rix-dollars a year.

STRENGTH AND REVENUE.] By the best calculations, Norway can furnish out 14,000 excellent seamen, and above 30,000 brave soldiers, for the use of their king. The royal annual revenue from Norway amounts to near 200,000l. and till his present majesty's accession, the army, instead of being expensive, added considerably to his income, by the subsidies it brought him in from foreign princes.

HISTORY.] We must refer to Denmark likewise for this head.—The ancient Norwegians certainly were a very brave and powerful people, and the hard [...]st seamen in the world. If we are to believe their histories, they were no strangers to America long before it was discovered by Columbus. Many customs of their ancestors are yet discernible in Ireland and the north of Scotland, where they made frequent descents, and some settlements, which are generally confound­ed with those of the Danes. From their being the most turbulent, they are become now the most loyal subjects in Europe; which we can easily account for, from the barbarity and tyranny of their kings, when a separate people. Since the union of Calmar, which united Norway to Denmark, their history, as well as interests, are the same with that of Denmark.

DENMARK PROPER, OR JUTLAND EXCLUSIVE OF THE ISLANDS IN THE BALTIC.

EXTENT AND SITUATION.
Length 240 Miles. between Degrees. 54 and 58 North latitude.
Breadth 114 Miles. Degrees. 8 and 11 East longitude.

BOUNDARIES AND DIVISIONS.} IT is divided on the north from Norway by the Scaggerac sea; and from Sweden on the east by the Sound; on the south by Germany and the Baltic; and the Ger­man sea divides it from Great Britain on the west.

Denmark Proper is divided into two parts: The peninsula of Jut­land, anciently called Cimbria Chersonesus, and the islands at the entrance of the Baltic, mentioned in the table. It is remarkable, that though all these together constitute the kingdom of Denmark, yet not any one of them is separately called by that name.

[Page 22] CLIMATE.] The climate is more temperate in this country, on ac­count of the vapours from the surrounding sea, than it is in many more southerly parts of Europe. Spring and autumn are seasons scarcely known in Denmark, on account of the sudden transitions from cold to heat, and from heat to cold, which distinguish the climate of this king­dom. In all the northern provinces of Denmark the winters are very severe, so that the inhabitants often pass arms of the sea in fledges upon the ice; and during the winter all their harbours are frozen up.

RELIGION.] In Denmark, as in Sweden, the established religion is the Lutheran, which was introduced in the year 1536. Christians of all other professions, and Jews, are tolerated. Missions for the conversion of pagans are established in the more remote possessions of this crown, in Lapland, Greenland, and Tranquebar. The Danish clergy consists of bishops, provosts, and ministers. The bishops, called in public acts superintendants, are six in number, of whom the bishop of Seeland is the first in rank. All ecclesiastical affairs are subject to the regulations and the jurisdiction of the college of Supreme Inspec­tors; the provosts convene every six months a subordinate meeting of the ministers under their inspection, in which they preside, and over which they exercise a jurisdiction; from which an appeal lies to the Supreme Inspectors.

LANGUAGE AND LEARNING.] The language of Denmark is a dia­lect of the Teutonic; but High Dutch and French are spoken at court; and the nobility have lately made great advances in the English, which is now publickly taught at Copenhagen as a necessary part of educa­tion. A company of English comedians occasionally visit that capital, where they find tolerable encouragement. Denmark has two univer­sities, that of Copenhagen, and that of Kiel; two academical colleges, at Soroe and Odensee; and thirty-two other great schools in the prin­cipal towns. There is at Copenhagen a royal society of sciences; an historical society for the study of Northern history; another of Ice­landic history and literature; and academy for painting and architecture; a college of physicians and surgeons; and another society of sciences at Drontheim. This kingdom shares with Sweden the praise of pro­moting sciences, by sending numbers of learned men, at the public ex­pense, to all parts of the globe, in order to make useful discoveries.

CAPITAL.] Copenhagen is the capital of Denmark, and the resi­dence of the king. It lies in N. Lat. 55°, 41, and E. Lon. 12°, 50, and stands on a low, marshy ground, on the margin of the Baltic sea, and has a beautiful and commodious harbour, which admits only one ship to enter it at a time, but is capable of containing 500. The road for the shipping begins about two miles from the town, and is defended by 90 pieces of cannon. On the land side are some lakes which fur­nish the inhabitants with plenty of fresh water. The adjacent coun­try is pleasant; and opposite the city lies the island of Amac, which is very fruitful, and forms the harbour. It is joined to the town by two bridges.

This city is more than six miles in circumference, and makes a fine appearance at a distance. It contains 11 squares and markets, nearly 200 streets, 4 royal castles, 10 parish, and 9 other churches, several pala­ces, between 4 and 5000 burghers houses, some of which are inhabited by 10 or more families, and about 87,000 inhabitants. This city is di­vided [Page 23] into Old Copenhagen, New Copenhagen, and Christians-Hafen, which lies in the isle Amac. The two last divisions being more mod­ern than the first, are laid out in broad streets, running in a strait line. Since the last great fire, the streets of Old Copenhagen, have been alter­ed for the better. There are in some parts of the city, broad and deep canals, into which large ships may enter, and lade and unlade close to the ware houses.

Among the most remarkable public buildings are 1st, The great War­tow Hospital in the west quarter of Old Copenhagen, containing up­wards of 300 beds for the sick and poor, each of whom has his lodging gratis, and a weekly allowance of half a rix dollar. Close to this hos­pital is a small church, so contrived, that the bed-ridden may hear di­vine service in their beds.—2d, The Orphan house, which takes up one entire side of the New-Market, and is a great ornament to it. 3d, The city prison, which has its particular church. 4th, A largeedifice, in the strand quarter of the old city, in the first story of which is the Arsenal; in the second the king's library; in the third the picture gallery, the royal cabinet of curiosities, and the cabinet of medals; and in the fourth the cabinet of models. Between Christian-Hafen and Copenha­gen is a high pillar, erected in the middle of the water, on which is the statue of a naked woman, with a swan on her left side, that extends its neck behind her back, and bringing its head over her right shoulder, puts its bill into her mouth.

The inhabitants of this city are mostly Lutherans—the Calvinists have a church to themselves: The Jews have their synagogues; and the Roman Catholics resort to the chapels of the foreign ministers of their religion. The magistracy of Copenhagen consists of a president, three burgomasters, and some vice-burgomasters, and common council­men.

WEALTH AND COMMERCE.] If the cold and barren kingdom of Nor­way did not require large supplies of corn from Denmark, the latter would be able to export a considerable quantity of it. Sleswic, Jutland, Seeland, and Leland, are very rich corn countries. Black cattle, which is in great abundance, and of great excellence in these provinces, is a most valuable article of commerce with the neighbouring provinces of Germany: Between 60 and 80,000 head of cattle are annually sold.—Denmark is rather deficient in sheep, with which the climate does not agree so well. The chief produce of Norway is wood and timber; the annual exports of masts, planks, balks, and fir-wood, amount to the value of 1,000,000 rix-dollars: This trade is chiefly carried on by the towns of Christiana, and Drontheim; one district in the govern­ment of Drontheim supplies annually 535,000 planks. Norway ex­ports great variety of peltry, consisting of skins of bears, lynxes, wolves, ermine, grey squirrels, and several sorts of foxes, rein-deer, elks, &c. The mines of Norway are very valuable; there is but little gold found, except at Edsfort, in the government of Christiana. The mines at Konsberg and Jarisberg produce silver to the value of 300—350,000 rix-dollars annually; and they employ upwards of 4000 miners: Gov­ernment, however, does not derive any revenue from these mines, the expenses of which exceed the profits. The iron-works in this king­dom produce an annual profit of 60,000 rix-dollars. About 4—5000 ship-pound of copper are exported; the greatest mine of this metal is [Page 24] at Roeraa, in the government of Drontheim. The number of miners in Norway amounts to about 8000. Norway has very valuable fisheries. According to Pontoppidan, upwards of 100 species of fishes are caught in these seas; of which the articles of cod, herrings, and whales, are valued at near two million of rix-dollars. The same author informs us, that Norway exports large quantities of train oil. The imports of Denmark consist chiefly in corn; as to Norway, only, 1/14 part of it is fit for agriculture; besides corn, the articles of salt, flax, linen, wool, brandy, wine, fruits, silk, spices, hardware, and luxuries, are imported. Norway being thinly peopled, and little acquainted with luxury, and possessing the above-mentioned valuable articles of exportation, has, upon the whole, the balance of trade in its favour, which is against the kingdom of Denmark. The whole of the exports of Denmark and Holstein, amounted in 1768 to 1,382,681 rix-dollars; the imports to 1,976,800 r. d. The exports of Norway, to 1,711,369, and the imports to 1,238,284 dollars. (Busching). There are at present two trading companies, an East-India, and a Guinea and West-India company; an Insurance company, and a paper bank. The passage through the Sund, between Helsingoer and Helsingborg, is very much frequented: In 1783,11,161 ships passed it; the number of ships is at present more than double the number of those which passed it in 1750. Manufac­tures do not thrive in Denmark; there are, however, several manu­factures of cloth, hardware, china, gloves, &c. refineries of sugar, salt-petre-works, &c. For the encouragement and convenience of inland trade, a navigable canal has been drawn lately from Kiel, through Hol­stein, to the river Eyder; by means of which the Baltic and the German sea are connected. The chief commercial towns in this king­dom are▪ Copenhagen, Flensburg, and Kiel; and Bergen and Dron­theim, in Norway. Of late the Danes have a commercial intercourse with the United States of America, whence they have received, in one year, from October 1790, in various commodities, to the amount of 277,273 Dols. 53 Cents.

CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.] Denmark Proper, af­fords fewer of these than the other parts of his Danish majesty's do­minions, if we except the contents of the Royal Museum at Copenha­gen, which consists of a numerous collection of both. It contains sev­eral good paintings, and a fine collection of coins, particularly those of the Consuls in the time of the Roman Republic, and of the Emperors after the seat of empire was divided into the East and West. Besides artificial skeletons, ivory carvings, models, clock-work, and a beautiful cabinet of ivory and ebony, made by a Danish artist, who was blind, here are to be seen two famous antique drinking vessels; the one of gold, the other of silver, and both in the form of a hunting-horn: That of gold seems to be of Pagan manufacture; and from the raised hie­roglyphical figures on its outside, it probably was made use of in relig­ious ceremonies: It is about two feet nine inches long, weighs 102 ounces, contains two English pints and a half, and was found in the dio­cese of Ripen, in the year 1639. The other, of silver, weighs about four pounds, and is termed Cornu Oldenburgicum; which, they say, was pre­sented to Otho I. duke of Oldenburg, by a ghost. This museum is likewise furnished with a prodigious number of astronomical, optical, and mathematical instruments; some Indian curiosities, and a set of [Page 25] medals ancient and modern. Many curious astronomical instruments are likewise placed in the round tower at Copenhagen; which is so contrived that a coach may drive to its top. The village of Anglen, lying between Flensburg and Sleswick, is also esteemed a curiosity, as giving its name to the Angles, or Anglo-Saxon inhabitants of Great­Britain, and the ancestors of the bulk of the modern English.

The greatest rarities in his Danish majesty's dominions are omitted, however, by geographers; I mean those ancient inscriptions upon rocks, that are mentioned by antiquaries and historians; and are gener­ally thought to be the old and original manner of writing, before the use of paper of any kind, and waxen tables, was known. These char­acters are Runic, and so imperfectly understood by the learned them­selves, that their meaning is very uncertain; but they are imagined to be historical. Stephanus, in his notes upon Saxo-Grammaticus, has exhibited specimens of several of those inscriptions.

GOVERNMENT.] The ancient kings of Denmark exercised a power limited by the very considerable rights and privileges possessed by the estates of the kingdom▪ viz. the nobility, the clergy and the commons. It was no longer ago than the beginning of 1661, that the estates, an­noyed by dissensions among themselves, and guided by leaders indif­ferent to the inestimable blessings of liberty, took the rash step of sur­rendering their native rights to their monarch. Since this servile act of submission, the kings of Denmark have been possessed of an absolute and uncontroled authority, subject to the conditions of their profess­ing the established protestant religion, and preserving the dominions of the kingdom undivided. The order of succession was settled in 1665, by the Lex Regia, which renders women capable of succeeding to the throne. The law of Indigenate, which excludes foreigners, not natur­alized, from holding any employment of trust or profit, was introduc­ed by the present king. Christian V. published an excellent code of civil and criminal laws, for the use of the kingdoms of Denmark and Norway; Iceland retaining its very ancient and peculiar customary law. The Roman or civil law is not in force in this kingdom, nor is any regard paid to other foreign systems of law. Justice is administer­ed in the several courts with great fairness and dispatch, according to the simple and excellent regulations of the code of laws. The high­est department of administration is the cabinet, or supreme council, composed, at present, of the hereditary prince and six ministers of state, presidents of the subordinate departments; among which that of for­eign affairs is considered as the most honourable. There are two chanceries, one for the Danish, and the other for the German lan­guage. Each province has a particular governour presiding over the provincial departments.

PUNISHMENTS.] The common method of execution in Denmark is beheading and hanging: In some cases, as an aggravation of the pun­ishment the hand is chopped off before the other part of the sentence is executed. For the most atrocious crimes, such as the murder of a fa­ther or mother, husband or wife, and robbery upon the highway, the malefactor is broken upon the wheel. But capital punishments are not common in Denmark: And the other principal modes of punish­ment are branding in the face, whipping, condemnation to the rasp­house, to houses of correction, and to public labour and imprisonment; [Page 26] all which are varied in duration and rigour, according to the nature of the crime.

FINANCES.] Seven millions of dollars. In the year 1769, 6,272,000 dollars.

1. Denmark 3,106,000
2. Norway 1,600,000
3. Sleswick and Holstein 1,328,000
4. Oldenburg, Delmenhorst, and Ploen 390,007
5. West India Islands 133,000
The King's private Chatoulle.
1. The custom of the Sund 700,000
2. From the town of Altona 18,000

The debts were in 1770 only about 1,400,000 dollars, and since that time they have been still more dimished.

ARMY.] According to the new plan of 1785, which has been al­most executed, the number of the army will be as follows: 1. Caval­ry, 6073 men. 2. Infantry, 33,475 men. 3. For Norway, 35,715. To­tal of the army, 75,263.

The expenses of the army will amount to only 1,663,922 rix-dollars. There is a military school at Copenhagen.

NAVY.] (1779) Sixty-one sail, viz.

Thirty-one ships of the line.

Nine ditto of 50 guns.

Twenty-one frigates, besides some sloops, bombs, and fire-ships.—Only 25 ships of the line and 15 frigates are fit for service. There have been some more built lately. There are employed in the King's ships 5000 sailors, besides a corps of marines. At Copenhagen there is a naval academy.

HISTORY.] Denmark was little known till the year 714, when Gormo was king. There can be no doubt that the Scandinavians or Cimbri, and the Teutones (the inhabitants of Denmark, Norway, and Sweden) were Scythians by their original. By Scythia may be under­stood all those northern countries of Europe and Asia (now inhabited by the Danes, Norwegians, Swedes, Russians, and Tartars) whose in­habitants overturned and peopled the Roman empire, and continued so late as the 13th century to issue forth in large bodies, and naval ex­peditions, ravaging the more southern and fertile kingdoms of Europe; hence by Sir William Temple, and other historians, they are termed the northern Hive, the Mother of Nations, the Storehouse of Europe.

In the eleventh century under Canute the Great, Denmark may be said to have been in its zenith of glory, as far as extent of Dominion can give sanction to the expression. Few very interesting events in Denmark preceded the year 1387, when Margaret mounted that throne; and partly by her address, and partly by hereditary right, [...] formed the union of Calmar, anno 1397, by which she was acknowl­edged sovereign of Sweden, Denmark, and Norway. She held [...] dignity with such firmness and courage, that she was justly styled [...] Semiramis of the North. Her successors being destitute of her great qualifications, the union of Calmar, by which the three kingdoms were in future to be under one sovereign, fell to nothing. Norway, how­ever, still continued annexed to Denmark. About the year 144 [...] the crown of Denmark fell to Christian, count of Oldenburg, [...] [Page 27] whom the present royal family of Denmark is descended. About the year 1536, the protestant religion was established in Denmark, by that wise and politic prince Christian III.

Christian IV. of Denmark, was chosen head of the protestant league, formed against the house of Austria in 1629, and died in 1648, and was succeeded by his son Frederic III; who was persuaded by the Dutch, to declare war against Charles Gustavus, king of Sweden, which had almost cost him his crown, in 1657. Frederic, who was a man of great abilities, both civil and military, was succeeded in 1670, by his unfortunate son Christian V. who died 1699. His successor was the brave and war-like Frederic IV. who died 1730, having, two years be­fore, seen his capital reduced to ashes by an accidental fire. His son and successor Christian VI. made no other use of his power and the advant­ages with which he mounted the throne, than to cultivate peace with all his neighbours, and to promote the happiness of his subjects; whom he eased of many oppressive taxes.

In 1734, after guaranteeing the Pragmatic Sanction, * Christian sent 6000 men to the assistance of the Emperor, during the dispute of the succession to the crown of Poland. Though he was pacific, yet he was jealous of his rights, especially over Hamburg. He obliged the Ham­burgers to call in the mediation of Prussia, to abolish their bank, to admit the coin of Denmark as current, and to pay him a million of silver marks. Christian died in 1746, with the character of being the father of his people.

His son and successor, Frederic V. had, in 1743, married the princess Louisa, daughter to his Britannic majesty George II. He improved upon his father's plan, for the happiness of his people. Upon the death of his first queen, who was mother to his present Danish majesty, he married a daughter of the duke of Brunswic-Wolfenbuttle; and died in 1766. His son, Christian VII. was born the 29th of January, 1749; and married his present Britannic majesty's youngest sister, the princess Carolina-Matilda. In 1768, he visited England, and travelled through the principal states of Europe: And from his return from this tour, in 1769, may with propriety be dated that memorable Revolution which took place in the court of Denmark in 1772. An authentic, interesting, and affecting history of this Revolution, and of the melancholy fates of Queen Carolina-Matilda, and Counts Struensee and Brandt, was written by a "Personage principally interested," and translated from the German, by B. H. Latrobe, and printed for J. Stockdale, 1789. To this valuable work the curious reader is referred.

In 1780, his Danish majesty acceded to the armed neutrality proposed by the Empress of Russia. He appears at present to have such a debili­ty of understanding as to disqualify him for the proper management of public affairs. On the 16th of April, 1784, another court revolution took place. The queen-dowager's friends were removed, a new coun­cil formed under the auspices of the prince royal, some of the former old members restored to the cabinet, and no regard is to be paid for the future to any instrument, unless signed by the king, and countersigned by the Prince Royal.

[Page 28]

DANISH GERMAN DOMINIONS.

Holstein, a duchy of Lower Saxony, about 100 miles long [...] 50 broad, and a fruitful country, was formerly divided between the Empress of Russia (termed ducal Holstein) the king of Denmark and the imperial cities of Hamburg and Lubeck; but on the [...] of November, 1773, the Ducal Holstein, with all the rights, p [...] ­rogatives, and territorial sovereignty, was formally transferred [...] the king of Denmark, by virtue of a treaty between both cou [...]. The duke of Holstein Gottorp, is joint sovereign of great part [...] it now, with the Danish monarch. Kiel is the capital of Du [...] Holstein, and is well built, has a harbour, and neat public [...] ­fices. The capital of the Danish Holstein is Gluckstadt, a well [...] town and fortress, but in marshy situation on the right of the [...] and has some foreign commerce.

Altena, a large, populous, and handsome town, of great traffic, [...] commodiously situated on the Elbe, in the neighbourhood of Hamburg. It was built professedly in that situation by the kings of Denmark, [...] it might share in the commerce of the former. Being declared a [...] port, and the staple of the Danish East India company, the mer­chants also enjoying liberty of conscience, great numbers flock to [...] ­tena from all parts of the North, and even from Hamburg itself.

HAMBURG, a celebrated imperial city, is situated on the north [...] of the river Elbe▪ in N. lat. 5 [...]° 16′ and E. long. 10° 38′, in the Du [...] of Holstein, in his Danish Majesty's German dominions. It [...] nearly circular, and six miles in circumference. Besides its natural strength, it is as well fortified by art as a place of such magnitude [...] be. It has six gates and four entrances by water, two from the [...] and two from the Alster. The wall is defended by bulwarks, [...] out works, and a deep ditch. A line with other works runs from [...] largest bason of the Alster to the Elbe, about half a mile above [...] town: And on the other side of the bason below the town, is the [...] Leonce, an almost impregnable fortification. The walls and other fortifications that lie open to view, are planted with rows of [...] trees in such a manner that on that side of the wall next to Altena, [...] houses cannot be seen. The number of houses are reckoned at [...] than 30,000, and the inhabitants at 180,000.

The public buildings are but indifferent. The churches which [...] ancient structures, stand open every day, and in some of them [...] book sellers shops. They have six large market places. Of the [...] ­ny hospitals in this city, are the Hospital for Orphans, which has a rev­enue of between £60 and 70,000 a year. There is a large hospital for poor travellers that fall sick; another for the relief of ancient maimed and decayed seamen, where care is also taken of the [...] and children of those who lose their lives in the service of the pub­lic. Another for the poor old blind and dumb people; another [...] the veneral disease, and a pest house. The prison for malefactors [...] the hangman's house. The criminal, after sentence, is carried to [...] upper room, where he is allowed a good bed, with all comforts [...] to his melancholy condition, and is there constantly attended by [...] of the city Clergymen. Among the several convents, which are [...] Lutheran, one is obliged to offer a glass of wine to every malefactor that is carried by it to the place of execution.

[Page 29] The government of Hamburg is vested in the Senate and three Col­leges of burghers. The principal persons of the Republic have a right to exercise every act of sovereignty; but the management of the financ­es is solely intrus [...]ed to the burghers. The Hamburghers (though nom­inally and politically the subjects of the King of Denmark, who still lay claim or certain privileges within the walls of the city) are sub­ject to the general laws of the Germanic body, but have neither seat nor vote in the General Diet of the Empire. They pay to the Empe­ror, for their protection, the annual tribute of 80,000 crowns.

Hamburgh from its situation has several advantages for trade. The ships come to their doors to lade and unlade. Besides the Elbe, which enters the German ocean a little below the town, a canal is opened into the Trave, for the sake of a communication with Lubec and the Baltic Sea. The Elbe, and the many navigable rivers that fall into it, running through the richest and most trading parts of Germany, fur­nish this city with the produce and manufactures of upper and lower Saxony, Austria and Bohemia. By the Flavel and Spree rivers, it trades with the Electorate of Brandenburg; and by a canal from the Spree and the Ader, its commerce is extended into Silesia, Moravia, and Poland. It has two spacious harbours, formed by the river Elbe, which runs through the town, and 84 bridges are thrown over its ca­nals. The Hamburghers maintain 12 companies of foot, and one troop of dragoons, besides an artillery company.

Lubec, an imperial city, with a good harbour, and once the capital of the Hans Towns, and still a rich and populous place, is also in this dutchy, and governed by its own magistrates. It has 20 parish church­es, besides a large cathedral. Lutheranism is the established religion of the whole Dutchy.

In Westphalia, the king of Denmark has the counties of Oldenburg and Delmenhurst, about 2000 square miles, they lie on the south-side of the Weser; their capitals have the same name; the first has the remains of a fortification, and the last is an open place. Oldenburg gave a ti­tle to the first royal ancestor of his present Danish majesty. The country abounds with marshes and heaths, but its horses are the best in Germany.

DANISH POSSESSIONS IN THE OTHER PARTS OF THE GLOBE.} ASIA. Settlements in Coro­mandel 20,000 inhabitants.1. Tranquebar, with the 2. Fort of Dansborg. 3. The Nicobar, or Frederick's Islands, north of Sumatra. 4. Some factories or lodges.

AFRICA, 1. Christiaansbourg, 2. Fredensbourg (on the coast of Guinea.) 3. Some factories, near Axim.

AMERICA. 1. Greenland, divided into East or Old Greenland, and West Greenland, a very extensive country, of many thousand square miles, but very thinly inhabited. Crantz, and after him Fab­ [...]icius, give the best description of this country. 2. The islands of St. Croix, St. Thomas, and St. John, in the West-Indies. Here the Moravian brethren have useful establishments.

The whole of Denmark contains 68 towns, 22 smaller towns, or [...]o [...]oughs, 15 earldoms, 16 baronies, 932 estates of the inferior nobility, [...]000 villages.

Norway contains only 18 towns, two earldoms, and 27 estates of the other nobility.

[Page 30]

LAPLAND.

THE northern situation of Lapland, and the division of its property render it proper, that it should be here described under a distinct head.

SITUATION, EXTENT, DIVISION, AND NAME.] The whole country of Lapland extends, so far as it is known, from the North Cape in 71° 30′ N. lat. to the White Sea, under the arctic circle. Part of Lapland belongs to the Danes, and is included in the government of Wardhuys▪ part to the Swedes, which is by far the most valuable; and some parts in the east, to the Muscovites or Russians. It is impossible to point out the dimensions of each. That belonging to the Swedes, may be seen in the table of dimensions given in the account of Sweden: But other accounts say, that it is about 100 German miles in length, and 90 in breadth; it comprehends all the country from the Baltic, to the mountains that separate Norway from Sweden. The Muscovite part lies towards the east, between the lake Enarak and the White Sea.—Those parts, notwithstanding the rudeness of the country, are divided into smaller districts; generally taking their names from rivers: But, unless the Swedish part, which is subject to a Prefect, the Laplanders can be said to be under no regular government. The Swedish Lapland, therefore, is the object chiefly considered by authors in describing this country. It has been generally thought, that the Laplanders are the descendants of Finlanders driven out of their own country, and that they take their name from Lappes, which signifies exiles. The reader, from what has been said in the Introduction, may easily con­ceive that in Lapland, for some months in the summer, the sun never sets; and during winter, it never rises: But the inhabitants are so well assisted by the twilight and the aurora borealis, that they never discon­tinue their work on account of the darkness.

CLIMATE.] The winters here, as may easily be concluded, are ex­tremely cold. Drifts of snow often threaten to bury the traveller, and cover the ground four or five feet deep. A thaw sometimes takes place, and then the frost that succeeds, presents the Laplander with a smooth level of ice, over which he travels with a rein-deer in a sledge with inconceivable swiftness. The heats of summer are excessive for a short time; and the cataracts, which dash from the mountains, often present to the eye the most picturesque appearances.

MOUNTAINS, RIVERS, LAKES, ANE FORESTS.] The reader must form in his mind a vast mass of mountains, irregularly crowded together to give him an idea of Lapland: They are, however, in some interstices, separated by rivers and lakes, which contain an incredible number of islands, some of which form delightful habitations; and are believed by the natives to be the terrestrial Paradise: Even roses and other flowers grow wild on their borders in the summer; though this is [...] a short gleam of temperature, for the climate in general is excessively severe. Dusky forests, and noisome, unhealthy morasses, and barr [...] plains cover great part of the flat country, so that nothing can be [...] uncomfortable than the state of the inhabitants.

METALS AND MINERALS.] Silver and gold mines, as well as these of iron, copper and lead, have been discovered and worked in Lap­land to great advantage; beautiful crystals are found here, as are some [Page 31] amethysts and topazes; also various sorts of mineral stones, surprisingly polished by the hand of nature; valuable pearls have likewise been sometimes found in the rivers, but never in the seas.

ANIMALS, QUADRUPEDS, BIRDS, FISHERS, AND INSECTS.] We must refer to our accounts of Denmark and Norway for great part of this article, as its contents are in common with all the three countries.—The zibelin, a creature resembling the marten, is a native of Lapland; and its skin, whether black or white, is so much esteemed that it is fre­quently given as presents to royal and distinguished personages. The Lapland hares grow white is the winter; and the country produces a large black cat, which attends the natives in hunting. By far the most remarkable, however, of the Lapland animals, is the rein-deer, which nature seems to have provided to solace the Laplanders for the priva­tion of the other comforts of life. This animal, the most useful per­haps of any in the creation, resembles the stag, only it somewhat droops the head, and the horns project forward. All who have described this animal have taken notice of the cracking noise that they make when they move their legs, which is attributed to their separating and afterwards bringing together the divisions of the hoof. The under part is entirely covered with hair, in the same manner that the claw of the Ptarmigan is with feathery bristles, which is almost the only bird that can endure the rigour of the same climate. The hoof, however, is not only thus protected; the same necessity which obliges the Laplanders to use snow shoes, makes the extraordinary width of the rein's hoof to be equally convenient in passing over snow, as it prevents their sinking too deep, which they continually would, did the weight of their body rest only on a small point. This quadruped hath therefore an instinct to use a hoof of such a form in a still more advantageous manner, by separating it when the foot is to touch the ground so as to cover a larger surface of snow. The instant however the leg of the animal is raised, the hoof is immediately contracted, and the collision of the parts occasions the snapping which is heard on every motion of the rein, and probably the cracking which they perpetually make, may serve to keep them together when it is remarkably dark.—In summer, the rein-deer provide themselves with leaves and grass, and in the winter they live upon moss: They have a wonderful sagacity at finding it out, and when found, they scrape away with their feet the snow that covers it. The scantiness of their fare is inconceivable, as is the length of the journies which they can perform without any other support. They fix the rein-deer to a kind of sledge, shaped like a small boat, in which the traveller, well secured from cold, is laced down, with the reins in one hand, and a kind of bludgeon in the other, to keep the carriage clear of ice and snow. The deer, whose harnessing is very simple, sets out, and continues the journey with prodigious speed; and is so safe and tractable, that the driver is at little or no trouble in directing him. At night they look out for their own prov­ender; and their milk often helps to support their master. Their instinct in choosing their road, and directing their course, can only be accounted for by their being well acquainted with the country during the summer months, when they live in woods. Their flesh is a well tasted food, whether fresh or dried: Their skin forms excellent cloth­ing both for the bed and the body: Their milk and cheese are nutritive [Page 32] and pleasant; and their intestines and tendons supply their masters with thread and cordage. When they run about wild in the fields▪ they may he shot at as other game. But it is said, that if one is killed in a flock, the survivors will gore and trample him to pieces; there­fore single stragglers are generally pitched upon. With all their ex­cellent qualities, however, the rein-deer have their inconveniencies.

It is difficult in summer to keep them from straggling; they are sometimes buried in the snow; and they frequently grow restive, to the great danger of the driver and his carriage. Their surprising speed (for they are said to run at the rate of 200 miles a day) seems to be ow­ing to their impatience to get rid of their [...]ncumbrance. None but a Laplander could bear the uneasy posture in which he is placed, when he is confined in one of those carriages or pulkhas; or would believe that, by whispering the rein-deer in the ear, they know the place of their destination. But after all these abatements, the natives would have difficulty to subsist without their rein-deer, which serve them for so many purposes.

PEOPLE, CUSTOMS AND MANNERS.] The language of the Lapland­ers comprehends so many dialects, that it is with difficulty they un­derstand each other. They have neither writing nor letters among them, but a number of hieroglyphics, which they make use of in their Rounes, a sort of sticks that they call Pistave, and which serve them for an almanack. These hieroglyphics are also the marks they use in­stead of signatures, even in matters of law. Missionaries, from the christianised parts of Scandinavia, introduced among them the Christ­ian religion; and they have among them some religious seminaries, instituted by the king of Denmark. The majority of the Laplanders however may be called pagans. The number and oddities of their su­perstitions have induced the northern traders to believe, that they are skilled in magic and divination. For this purpose it is said their ma­gicians, who are a peculiar set of men, make use of what they call a drum, made of the hollow trunk of a fir, pine, or birch-tree, one end of which is covered with a skin; on this they draw, with a kind of red colour, the figures of their own gods, as well as of Jesus Christ, the apostles, the sun, moon, stars, birds and rivers; on these they place one or two brass rings, which, when the drum is beaten with a little hammer, dance over the figures; and according to their progress the sorcerer prognosticates. These frantic operations are generally per­formed for gain; and the northern ship-masters are such dupes to the arts of these impostors, that they often buy from them a magic cord, which contains a number of knots, by opening of which, accord­ing to the magician's directions, they gain what wind they want. This is also a very common traffic on the banks of the Red Sea, and is managed with great address on the part of the sorcerer, who keeps up the price of his knotted talisman. The Laplanders still retain the wor­ship of many of the Teutonic gods; but have among them great remains of the druidical institutions. They believe the transmigration of the soul; and have festivals set apart for the worship of certain genii, called Jeuhles, who they think inhabit the air, and have great power over human actions; but being without form or substance, they assign [...] them neither images nor statues.

Agriculture is not much attended to among the Laplanders. They are chiefly divided into Lapland fishers, and Lapland mountaineers. [Page 33] The former always make their habitations on the brink, or, in the neighbourhood of some lake, from whence they draw their subsistence. The others seek their support upon the mountains, and their environs. They are excellent and very industrious herdsmen, and are rich in comparison to the Lapland fishers. Some of them possess six hundred or a thousand rein-deer, and have often money and plate besides. They mark every rein-deer on the ears, and divide them into classes; so that they can perceive whether any one is strayed, though they cannot count to so great a number as that [...]o which their flock often amounts. The Lapland fishers, who are also called Laplanders of the woods, be­cause in summer they dwell upon the borders of the lakes, and in winter in the forests, live by fishing and hunting, and choose their situation by its convenience for either. The greatest part of them, however, have some rein-deer. They are active and expert in the chace: And the introduction of fire-arms among them has almost en­tirely abolished the use of the bow and arrow. Besides looking after the rein-deer, the fishery, and the chace, the men employ themselves in the construction of their canoes, which are small, light, and com­pact. They also make sledges, to which they give the form of a canoe, harness for the rein-deer, cups, bowls, and various other utensils, which are sometimes neatly carved, and sometimes ornamented with bones, brass, or horn. The employment of the women consists in mak­ing nets for the fishery, in drying fish and meat, in milking the rein-deer, in making cheese, and in tanning hides: But it is understood to be the business of the men to look after the kitchen; in which, it is said, the women never interfere.

The Laplanders live in huts in the form of tents, from twenty-five to thirty feet in diameter, and not much above six in height. They cov­er them according to the season, and the means of the possessor; some with briars, bark of birch, and linen; others with turf, coarse cloth, or felt, or the old skins of rein-deer. The door is of felt, made like two curtains, which open asunder. A little place surrounded with stones is made in the middle of the hut for fire, over which a chain is suspended to hang the kettle upon. In winter, at night, they put their naked feet into a fur bag. The rein-deer supply the Laplanders with the greatest part of their provisions; the chace and fishery supply the rest. Their principal dishes are the flesh of the rein-deer, and pudding which they make of their blood. But the flesh of the bear is considered by them as their most delicate meat. They eat every kind of fish, even the sea dog; as well as all sorts of wild animals, not ex­cepting birds of prey, and carnivorous animals. Their winter provi­sions consist chiefly of flesh and fish dried in the open air, both of which they eat raw, and without any sort of dressing. Their common drink is water, sometimes mixed with milk: They make also broths and fish­soups. Brandy is very scarce with them, but they are extremely fond of it. Whenever they are inclined to eat, the head of the family spreads a mat on the ground; and then men and women squat round this mat, which is covered with dishes. Every Laplander always car­ries about him a knife, a spoon, and a little cup for drinking. Each has is portion separately given him, that no person may be injured; for they are great eaters. Before and after the meal they make a short prayer: And, as soon as they have done eating, each gives the other his hand.

[Page 34] In the dress of the Laplanders they use no kind of linen. The men wear close breeches, reaching down to their shoes, which are made of untanned skin, pointed, and turned up before; and in winter they put a little hay in them. Their doublet is made to fit their shape, and open at the breast. Over this, they wear a close coat with narrow sleeves, whose skirts reach down to the knees, and which is fastened round them by a leathern girdle, ornamented with plates of tin or brass. To this girdle they tie their knives, their instruments for getting fire, their pipes, and the rest their smoking apparatus. Their clothes are made of fur, of leather, or of cloth, the close coat of cloth or leather, always bordered with fur, or bindings of cloth of different colours. Their caps are edged with fur, pointed at top, and the four seams adorned with lists of a different colour from that of the cap. The women wear breeches, shoes, doublets, and close coats, in the same manner as the men; but their girdle, at which they carry likewise the implements for smoking tobacco, is commonly embroidered with brass wire. Their close coat has a collar, which comes up somewhat higher than that of the men. Besides these, they wear handkerchiefs, and little aprons, made of painted cloth, rings on their fingers, and ear-rings, to which they sometimes hang chains of silver▪ which pass two or three times round the neck. They are often dressed in caps folded after the manner of turbans. They wear also caps fitted to the shape of the head; and, as they are much addicted to finery, they are all ornament­ed with the embroidery of brass wire, or at least with list of different colours.

Lapland is but poorly peopled, owing to the general barrenness of its soil. The whole number of its inhabitants may amount to about 60,000. Both men and women are in general considerably shorter than more southern Europeans. Maupertuis measured a woman, who was suckling her child, whose height did not exceed four feet two in­ches and a half; they make, however▪ a much more agreeable appear­ance than the men, who are often ill shaped and ugly, and their heads too large for their bodies. Their women are complaisant, chaste, often well-made, and extremely nervous; which is also observable among the men, although more rarely.

When a Laplander intends to marry a female, he, or his friends, court her father wi [...]h brandy; when with some difficulty, he gains ad­mittance to his fair one, he offers her a beaver's tongue, or some other eatable, which she rejects before company, but accepts of in private. Cohabitation often precedes marriage; but every admittance to the fair one is purchased from her father by her lover with a bottle of brandy, and this prolongs the courtship sometimes for three years. The priest of the parish at last celebrates the nuptials; but the bride­groom is obliged to serve his father-in-law for four years after. He then carries his wife and her fortune home.

COMMERCE.] Little can be said of the commerce of the Laplanders. Their exports consist of fish, rein-deer, furs, baskets and toys; with some dried pikes, and cheeses made of rein-deer milk. They receive for these rix-dollars, woollen cloths, linen, copper, tin, flour, oil, hides needles, knives, spirituous liquors, tobacco, and other necessaries.—Their mines are generally worked by foreigners, and produce no in­considerable profit. The Laplanders travel in a kind of caravan, with [Page 35] their families, to the Finland and Norway fairs. And the reader may make some estimate of the medium of commerce among them, when he is told, that fifty squirrel skins, or one fox skin, and a pair of Lapland shoes, produce one rix-dollar, but no computation can be made of the public revenue, the greatest part of which is allotted for the mainten­ance of the clergy. With regard to the security of their property, few disputes happen; and their judges have no military to enforce their decrees, the people having a remarkable aversion to war; and, so far as we know, are never employed in any army.

SWEDEN.

EXTENT AND SITUATION.
Length 800 Miles. between Degrees. 50 and 70 North latitude.
Breadth 500 Miles. Degrees. 10 and 30 East longitude.

BOUNDARIES.} THIS country is bounded by the Baltic Sea, the Sound, and the Categate, or Scaggerac, on the south; by the impassable mountains of Norway, on the west; by Da­nish or Norwegian Lapland, on the north; and by Muscovy, on the east.

DIVISIONS AND POSSESSIONS.] An authentic account of these is contained in the following table.

DIVISIONS, POSSESSIONS. Sq. Miles. Population. Populs. for [...]. sq. mile. CHIEF TOWNS. Number of Inhabitants.
SWEDEN 230 528 3 millions.    
Divided into Sweden, properly so called, and Gothland. Both together 64,000 2,100,000 33  
A. SWEDEN contains Upland, Soeder­manland, Westmanland, Nerike Dalecarlien       Stockhol [...], about 80,000 Upsal Univers, and second in rank. Nykeeping.
B. GOTHLAND contains. Ostgothland Smaeland, Oeland and Gottland Westgottland, Wermeland, Dahland Bohleha, Sudgothland, viz. Scho­nen, Halland, Bleckingen       Fulun, a famous mining place, 7,000 Norkioping, [...],150. Lynkioping. Calmat, trading town. Gothenburg▪ [...],800,
C. NORDLAND 95,472 150,000 not yet 2 Land, university.
D. LAPPLAND, divided into 7 districts called Marken, viz. Jemteland Lappmark, Asele, Umea, Pitea Lulla, Tornea, Keml       Helsingberg, near the Sand. Ca [...]ls [...]ron, Admiralty seat. Tornea.
E. FINNLAND 48,780 624,000 12 Abo, university, 8,750.
F. The Swedish Part of Pomerania, viz. Pomerania, Island of Rugen, the District of Wismar 1,440 100,550 70 Stralsund▪ 10,840. Griessw [...]ld, university. Bergen (Isle of Rugen) 1,402. Wismar, 6,000.
G. In the West India, Sweden obtained in the Year 1 [...]85▪ from France the Island of St. Barthelemi 30     The whole Kingdom contains only 104 towns, [...]0,250 villages, and 1,200 estates of the nobility.

The face of Sweden is pretty similar to that of the neighbouring countries; except that it has the advantage of them in navigable riv­ers.

CLIMATE AND SEASONS.] The same may be said with regard to this article. Summer bursts from winter; and vegetation is more [Page 36] speedy than in southern climates; for the sun is here so hot, as some­times to set forests on fire. Stoves and warm furs mitigate the cold of winter, which is so intense that the noses and extremities of the in­habitants are sometimes mortified; and in such cases, the best remedy that has been found out, is rubbing the affected part with snow.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} A few leagues from [...]otten­burg there is a hideous preci­pice, down which rushes a dreadful cataract of water with such impet­uosity, and into such a depth of water, that large masts, and other bod­ies of timber, that are precipitated down it, disappear, some for half an hour, and others for an hour, before they are recovered: The bottom of this water has never been found, though sounded by lines of several hundred fathoms. A remarkable slimy lake, which singes things put into it, has been found in the southern part of Gothland: And several parts of Sweden contain a stone, which being of a yellow colour, in­termixed with several streaks of white, as if composed of gold and sil­ver, affords sulphur, vitriol, alum, and minium. The Swedes pretend they have a manuscript copy of a translation of the Gospels into Goth­le, done by a bishop 1300 years ago.

SEAS.] Their seas are the Baltic, and the Gulfs of Bothnia and Finland, which are arms of the Baltic; and on the west of Sweden are the Categate sea, and the Sound, a strait about four miles over, which divides Sweden from Denmark.

These seas have no tides, and are frozen up usually four months in the year; nor are they so salt as the ocean, never mixing with it, be­cause the current sets always out of the Baltic sea into the ocean.

QUADRUPEDS, BIRDS, AND FISHES.] These differ little from those already described in Norway and Denmark. The fishes found in the rivers and lakes of Sweden, are the same with those in other northern countries, and taken in great quantities. Their pikes particularly are salted and pickled for exportation. The train-oil of the seals, taken in the Gulf of Finland, is a considerable article of exportation.

INHABITANTS, MANNERS, AND CUSTOMS.] There is a great diversi­ty of characters among the people of Sweden. Their peasants are strong and hardy, and appear to have no other ambition than that of subsisting themselves and their families. The mercantile classes are much of the same cast; but great application and perseverance is dis­covered among them all. One could, however, form no idea that the modern Swedes are the descendants of those, who, under Gustavus Adolphus and Charles XII. carried terror in their names through dis­tant countries, and shook the foundations of the greatest empires. The principal nobility and gentry of Sweden are naturally brave, polite, and hospitable; they have high and warm notions of honour, and are jealous of their national interests. The dress, exercises, and diversions of the common people, are almost the same with those of Denmark: The better sort are infatuated with the French modes and fashions. The women, plough, thresh, row upon the water, serve the brick layers, carry burdens, and do all the common drudgeries in husbandry.

RELIGION.] Christianity was introduced here in the ninth centu­ry. The established religion in Sweden is the Lutheran, which the sovereign must profess, and is engaged to maintain in the kingdom. Calvinists, Roman Catholics and Jews are tolerated. The superi [...] [Page 37] clergy of Sweden have preserved the dignities of the Roman Catholic church; it is composed of the archbishop of Upsal, of 14 bishops, and of 192 presidents. The jurisdiction in ecclesiastical matters is in the hands of 19 consistories. The number of the inferior clergy, compre­hending the ministers of parishes, &c. amounts only to 1387. No clergyman has the least direction in the affairs of state; but their mor­als, and the sanctity of their lives, endear them so much to the people, that the government would repent making them its enemies. Their churches are neat, and often ornamented. A body of ecclesiastical laws and canons direct their religious economy.

LANGUAGE, LEARNING, AND LEARNED MEN.] The Swedish language is a dialect of the Teutonic, and resembles that of Denmark. The Swedish nobility and gentry are, in general, more conversant in polite literature than those of many other more flourishing states. They have of late exhibited some noble specimens of their munificence for the improvement of literature; witness their sending at the expense of private persons, that excellent and candid natural philosopher▪ Hassel­quist, into the eastern countries for discoveries, where he died. This noble spirit is eminently encouraged by the royal family; and her Swedish majesty purchased, at no inconsiderable expense, for that country, all Hasselquist's collection of curiosities. That able civilian, statesman and historian, Puffendorf, was a native of Sweden; and so was the late celebrated Linnaeus, who carried natural philosophy, in some branches at least, particularly botany, to the highest pitch. The passion of the famous queen Christina for literature, is well known to the public; and she may be accounted a genius in many branches of knowledge. Even in the midst of the late distractions of Sweden, the fine arts, particularly drawing, sculpture, and architecture, were encouraged and protected. Agricultural learning, both in theo­ry and practice, is now carried to a considerable height in that king­dom; and the character given by some writers, that the Swedes are a dull, heavy people, fitted only for bodily labour, is in a great measure owing to their having no opportunity of exerting their talents. The importance of Sweden is greatly diminished, since the unfortunate wars of Charles XII. by which it lost its richest provinces. And not­withstanding all the encouragement given to agriculture, mining and commerce, the population is yet so▪ thin, and the climate so severe, that this kingdom is not likely to receive soon any cosiderable and rapid additions of power. The fate of the sciences in Sweden has been much more fortunate. Good schools are established in every part of the kingdom; there are three very useful universities at Upsal, Lund and Abo; and the German university of Gr [...]efswald, in the Province of Pomerania. At Stockholm, Gothenburg, and Upsal, there are royal societies of sciences; academies for antiquities, the belles lettres, painting, and music, are established in the capital. There is also a particular and very valuable institution for promoting the study of Swedish geography and topography, called Landmeter college; and a physiographical society at Lund. Sweden has many men of learn­ing, distinguished for their knowledge of natural philosophy, chemis­try, political economy, &c. The ancient connexion of this king­dom with France has been confirmed by the late king, who open­ed forever a free harbour to the French in consideration of the [Page 38] island of St. Barthelemi, in the West-Indies, ceded to him by France, in the year 1784. The neighbouring states of Russia and Denmark are very attentive to the motions of Sweden, which in former times prov­ed to them an enemy of the greatest consequence.

WEALTH AND COMMERCE.] Though Sweden is by no means fa­voured with respect to climate, though the greater part of it is barren, (the uncultivated parts being estimated at upwards of 110,000 square miles) yet the industry of the inhabitants, in arts and agriculture, has raised Sweden to the rank of a secondary European power. Howev­er, notwithstanding the great encouragement given to agriculture, Sweden is still obliged to import 300,000 tons of corn, and 4,535 hogs­heads of spirituous liquors. It imports, likewise, hemp, flax, salt, wine, beef, silk, paper, leather, and East and West-India goods. The exports consist chiefly in wood and minerals. In 1781, Sweden exported 27,819 dozen of planks, 795 beams, and 1,258 balks of beech, 95,657 tons of tar, and 15,868 tons of pitch; some cod, upwards of 150,000 tons of herrings, of which England bought for more than 12,000l. sterling; blubber or train-oil to the value of 28,468 silver dol­lars.—Of the produce of the whale fishery, there was exported, in 1781, 606 tons of train-oil, and 68,000 pounds of whale­bone. The most valuable among the productions of Sweden are its minerals, principally copper and iron. Gold is found at Adel­fort, in the province of Smaeland, to the amount of 850 ducats; but the expenses of working this mine exceed the profits: A small quanti­ty of gold is found in Westmanland. The mines at Sala, in the same province, produce silver to the amount of upwards of 600 lb. there are also silver mines in Dalecarlia and Northfinnland. The total amount of the silver obtained from the Swedish mines, in 1774, was 2,700 lb. The copper mines at Falun and Garpenberg, in Dalecarlia, are very rich: The exportation of copper does, however, not exceed 6,000 ship-pound. Of the iron found in Nerike, Upland, Dalecarlia, &c. 320,000 ship-pound are exported. No less than 450 forges, hammering mills, and smelting houses, are employed in the iron manufacture.—Sweden produces 35,000 lies-pound of salt-petre, 5,500 tons of alum; and it has likewise vitriol and sulphur works. The value of the whole of exported minerals amounts to 2,300,000 German dollars. The ex­portation of wood is valued at 1 million; and that of tar, pitch, and pot-ash, at 300,000 German dollars. Sweden exports also, peltry, or furs of grey squirrels, bears, wolves, foxes, ermine, martins, rein-deer, gluttons, &c. in great quantities. All the exported goods amounted, in 1768, to up­wards of 13 millions, and the imports to little more than 10 millions of sil­ver dollars. The Swedes trade to all parts of Europe, to the Levante, the East and West-Indies, to Africa and China. There is a Swedish East-India Company, who have advanced 3 millions of dollars to the crown, and pay a duty to the king on every voyage: There is likewise a Levante Company. The bank of Sweden is a loan and paper bank: Its profits are estimated at between 2 and 3 millions of dollars annually. The crown ow­ed to this bank, in 1772, upwards of 45 millions of silver dollars. There are 38 commercial towns in the kingdom, among whom Stockholm, Gothen­burg, and Marstrand, are the principal. Sweden has endeavoured to avoid paying the disagreeable duty in the Sound, by joining the is­land lakes with the sea, by a canal beginning not far from Stockholm from the gulf of Bothnia, and extending to the German ocean [...] Gothenburg; but the attempt has not yet succeeded.

[Page 39] GOVERNMENT.] Since the memorable revolution in the year 1772, Sweden may, with great propriety, be called a monarchy. The sen­ate it is true, claims still some share in the administration; but its members are chosen by the king himself. On coming to the throne, the sovereign engages to observe the fundamental laws of the kingdom: He has the absolute disposal of the army, and has the power of calling together as well as of dissolving the assembly of the states; but he can­not impose any new tax without consulting the diet, whose consent is necessary to levy them from the subject. The senate is the highest court or council in the kingdom, and is composed of 17 senators or su­preme counsellors. The diet is formed by the deputies of the four es­tates, or orders of the nation, viz. the order of the nobility, the clergy, the citizens and the peasants; each order has its speaker, who presides over the respective deputies. The senate is divided into two depart­ments; one of them has the supreme inspection over the administra­tion of justice, over the mines, being the chief source of the national wealth, and the revision of all public accounts: The other depart­ment transacts all other branches of public and foreign business. The provinces are under governors, called provincial captains. Justice is administered in every town by the civil magistrates. The whole king­dom is divided into 82 districts of jurisdiction, each of which has its own court of justice, called Heeradsting: In these country courts the judge is assisted by a jury of twelve peasants. From the decisions of these courts, their lies appeal to 21 superior courts, called Lagman­sting: and from the latter to four supreme courts of judicature, estab­lished at Stockholm, Jönköping, Abo, and Wasa. The Roman, or Civil law, is not in force in Sweden: Justice is administered, without the delays usual in other countries, according to the regulation of the code of laws published in the year 1736. Other departments for the transaction of public business are the following: The War Office, the Exchequer, the Court of Admiralty, the Chancery, the Board of Trade, and the Board of Mines.

FINANCES.] The revenue amounted, in 1772, to 11,089,122 silver dollars, the public expenditure, to 11,466,125 silver dollars; and the national debt, exceeded, at that time, the sum of 60 millions. Since the late revolution, the revenue has been increased, by appropriating to the crown the lucrative monopoly in spirituous liquors, which is valued at upwards of 7 millions of silver dollars. Mr. Tunberg esti­mates the ordinary revenue, in 1784, at 4 millions of rix-dollars. The revenue accruing from the German province of Pomerania, amounted, in 1781, to 234,287 German dollars; and, in 1782, that of Pomerania and Wismar to 249,000 German dollars. The chatoulle; or private purse of the king, is estimated at 200,000 rix-dollars.

ARMY AND NAVY.] In 1784, it consisted of 50,421 men. The Swedish forces are divided into national troops; and levied troops, who are mostly foreigners: The first, being supplied by the Swedish nation, and consisting of country people, who serve only during the season of the reviews, have some resemblance to a national militia: They are, however, much better disciplined than militias commonly are, The infantry must be supplied and maintained by the order of the pea­sants, the cavalry by the order of the nobility. The levied troops, most of whom are foreigners, are perpetually on duty, and receive continual pay.

[Page 40]

NATIONAL TROOPS. Infantry.
22 national regiments of different strength, 1 battalion 1,284 together 25,125
1—of Chasseurs 128

Covalry.
Horse Guards 1,5 [...]
The noble Guard (6 companies) [...]9 [...]
5 regiments 5,000
Dragoons, 2 regiments besides 2,000
1 Escadr. of Dragoons of 400
1— 300
1 Comp.— 100

LEVIED, ON STANDING TROOPS. Infantry.
King's Guards 2,800
[...] regiment, some of 1,260 men, some of less 5,960
Sawolax Chasscurs 400

Cavalry.
Hussars 300
Light Dragoons 200

Artillery.
5 Brigades 3,230
5—(Fortificats.) 2,706
  50,42 [...]
NAVY.
  • 25 ships of the line.
  • 12—14 frigates.
  • 50 galleys.
  • 15—17,000 Seamen.

Two regiments of marines, together 1400 men. Some new ships of the line have been lately built, so as to make up the number of 30.

CAPITAL.] Stockholm, the capital of Sweden, and the residence of the king, is situated in N. lat. 59°. 20′. and E. long. 19°. 30′. 760 miles N. E. from London. Standing at the junction of the Baltic sea, and the Lake Maler, it has the convenience both of salt and fresh wa­ter. It is built, partly on islands and partly on peninsulas, and its cir­cuit is computed at 12 miles. Most of the streets are broad, and the market places spacious. In the quarter of the town properly called the city, are above 5000 houses, most of them standing on piles. They are built entirely of stone, and are four or five stories high; but some are covered with copper or iron plates, and others with tiles. The islands on which this city is built are six, viz. Stockholm, on which among other public buildings, are the new-palace, the senate house, the town house and the bank—Ritterholm, on which is St. Francis' Church, where lie interred, many of the Swedish kings and queens—Schiffsholm, on which is the dock yard—Helgandsholm, or the island of the Holy Ghost—Ronigsholm—Landugard-island, on which is the king's orchard, park and orangery, and an orphan house, founded by Free-Masons, in 1750.

[Page 41] All parts of this city are connected by bridges. It affords a fine prospect of the Lake Maler, on one side, and of the harbour, on the other. The number of inhabitants who pay taxes, is computed at 60,000.

In this city are, a Board of Admiralty, an Office of the Revenue, a National Bank, with a capital of £466,666,134 sterling, a Custom­house, a Naval-office, an Insurance-office, an Office where goods manufactured in the kingdom are examined, and disputes between manufactures decided—a commodious dock, various kinds of manu­factories—a Royal Academy of Sciences, a College of Physicians, a Royal Library, a chemical and mechanical Elabaratory, an Academy for Painting and Sculpture, and others for Military Architecture and Land Surveying.

PUNISHMENTS.] The common method of execution in Sweden is beheading and hanging; for murder, the hand of the criminal is first chopped off, and he is then beheaded and quartered; women, after beheading, instead of being quartered, are burned. No capital pun­ishment is inflicted without the sentence being confirmed by the king. Every prisoner is at liberty to petition the king, within a month after the trial. The petition either complains of unjust condemnation, and in such a case demands a revisal of the sentence; or else prays for par­don, or a mitigation of punishment. Malefactors are never put to death except for very atrocious crimes, such as, murder, housebreak­ing, robbery upon the highway, or repeated thefts. Other crimes, many of which in some countries are considered as capital, are chiefly punished by whipping, condemnation to live upon bread and water, imprisonment and hard labour, either for life, or for a stated time, ac­cording to the nature of the crime. Criminals were tortured to ex­tort confession till the reign of the present king; but, in 1773, his Swedish majesty abolished this cruel and absurd practice.

ROYAL STYLE.] The king's style is king of the Goths and Vandals, great prince of Finland, duke of Schonen, Pomeran, &c.

ORDERS OF KNIGHTHOOD.] These are, the order of the Nor [...] Star, consisting of 24 members; the order of Vasa, and the order of the Sword; the last created in 1772.

HISTORY.] The Goths, the ancient inhabitants of this country, joined by the Normans, Danes, Saxons, Vandals, &c. have had the reputation of subduing the Roman empire, and all the southern nations of Europe. The introduction of Christianity by Ansgatius, bishop of Brenem, in 829, seems to present the first certain period of the Swed­ish history.

The history of Sweden, and indeed of all the northern nations, even during the first ages of Christianity, is confused and uninteresting, and even doubful; but sufficiently replete with murders▪ malsacres, and ravages. That of Sweden is void of consistency, till about the middle of the fourteenth century, when it assumes an appearance more regular, and affords wherewith to recompense the attention of those who choose to make it an object of their studies.

Magnus Ladulus, crowned in 1276, seems to have been the first king of Sweden who pursued a regular system to increase his authori­ty; and to succeed in this, he made the augmentation of the revenues of the crown his principal object. He was one of the ablest princes [Page 42] who had ever sat on the Swedish throne; by his art and address he pre­vailed upon the convention of estates to make very extraordinary grants to him for the support of his royal dignity. The augmentation, of the revenues of the crown was naturally followed by a proportion­able increase of the regal power. The successors of Magnus did not maintain their authority with equal ability; and several commotions and revolutions followed, which threw the nation into great disorder and confusion, and the government was for a long time in the most un­settled state.

In the year 1387, Margaret, daughter of Valdemar, king of Den­mark, and widow of Huguin, king of Norway, reigned in both these kingdoms. That princess, to the ordinary ambition of her sex, added a penetration and enlargement of mind, which rendered her capable of conducting the greatest and most complicated designs. She has been called the Semiramis of the North, because, like Semiramis, she found means to reduce by arms, or by intrigue, an immense extent of territory; and became queen of Denmark, Norway, and Sweden, be­ing elected to this last in 1394. She projected the union of Calmar, so famous in the North, by which these kingdoms were for the future to remain under one sovereign, elected by each kingdom in its turn, and who should divided his residence between them all. Several revolu­tions ensued after the death of Margaret; and at length Christian II. the last king of Denmark, who, by virtue of the treaty of Calmar, was also king of Sweden, engaged in a scheme to render himself entirely absolute. The barbarous policy by which he attempted to effect this design no less barbarous, proved the destruction of himself, and afford­ed an opportunity for changing the face of affairs in Sweden. In or­der to establish his authority in that kingdom, he laid a plot for massa­cring the principal nobility. This horrid design was actually carried into execution, November 8, 1520. Of all those who could oppose the despotic purposes of Christian, no one remained in Sweden, but Gustavus Vasa, a young prince, descended of the ancient kings of that country, and who had already signalized his arms against the king of Denmark. An immense price was laid on his head. The Danish soldiers were sent in pursuit of him; but by his dexterity and address he eluded all their attempts, and escaped, under the disguise of a pea­sant, to the mountains of Dalecarlia. This is not the place to relate his dangers and fatigues, how to prevent his discovery he wrought in the brass mines, how he was betrayed by those in whom he reposed his confidence, and in fine, surmounting a thousand obstacles, engaged the savage, but warlike inhabitants of Dalecarlia, to undertake his cause, to oppose, and to conquer his tyrannical oppressor. Sweden, by his means, again acquired independence. The ancient nobility were mostly destroyed. Gustavus was at the head of a victorious army, who admired his valour, and were attached to his person. He was created therefore first administrator, and afterwards king of Sweden, by the universal consent, and with the shouts of the whole nation. His circumstances were much more favourable than those of any for­mer prince who had possessed this dignity. The massacre of the nobles, had rid him of those proud and haughty enemies, who had so long been the bane of all regular government in Sweden. The clergy, in­deed, were no less powerful and dangerous; but the opinions of [...], [Page 43] which began at this time to prevail in the North, the force with which they were supported, and the credit which they had acquired among the Swedes, gave him an opportunity of changing the religious system of that country; and the exercise of the Roman Catholic relig­ion was prohibited in the year 1544, under the severest penalties, which have never yet been relaxed. Instead of a Gothic aristocracy▪ the most turbulent of all governments, and, when impoisoned by religious tyranny, of all governments the most wretched, Sweden, in this man­ner, became a regular monarchy. Some favourable effects of this change were soon visible: Arts and manufactures were established and improved; navigation and commerce began to flourish; letters and civility were introduced▪ and a kingdom, known only by name to the rest of Europe, began to be known by its arms, and to have a certain weight in all public treaties or deliberations.

Gustavus died in 1559, and was succeeded by his on Eric, who was deposed 1566. His brother John succeeded him, and entered into a ruinous war with Russia. John attempted, by the advice of his queen, to re-establish the Catholic religion in Sweden; but, though he made strong efforts for that purpose, and even reconciled himself to the pope, he was opposed by his brother Charles, and the scheme proved inef­fectual. John's son Sigismund, was, however, chosen king of Poland in 1587, upon which he endeavoured again to restore the Roman Catholic religion in his dominions; but he died in 1592.

Charles, brother to king John, a strenuous protestant, was chosen administrator of Sweden; and afterwards crowned in 1599. The reign of Charles, through the practices of Sigismund, was turbulent; which gave the Danes encouragement to invade Sweden. Their con­duct was checked by the great Gustavus Adolphus, though then a minor, and heir apparent to Sweden. Upon the death of his father, which happened in 1611, he was declared of age by the states, though then only in his eighteenth year. Gustavus, soon after his accession, found himself through the power and intrigues of the Poles, Russians, and Danes, engaged in a war with all his neighbours, under infinite disadvantages; all which he surmounted. He had almost become master of Russia; but the Russians were so tenacious of their indepen­dency, that his scheme was hassled. In 1617 he made a peace, under the mediation of James I. of England, by which he recovered Livonia, and four towns in the prefecture of Novogorod, with a sum of money besides.

The ideas of Gustavus began now to extend. He had seen a vast deal of military service, and he was assisted by the counsels of La Gardie, one of the best generals and wisest statesmen of his age. His troops, by perpetual war, had become the best disciplined and most warlike in Europe; and he carried his ambition farther than historians are willing to acknowledge. The princes of the house of Austria were, it is certain, early jealous of his enterprising spirit, and supported his ancient implacable enemy Sigismund, whom Gustavus defeated.—In 1627, he formed the siege of Dantzick, in which he was unsuccess­ful; but the attempt, which was defeated only by the sudden rise of the Vistula, added so much to his military character, that the protest­ant cause placed him at the head of the confederacy for reducing the house of Austria. His life, from that time, was a continued chain of [Page 44] the most rapid and wonderful successes: Even the mention of each would exceed our bounds. It is sufficient to say, that after taking Riga, and over-running Livonia, he entered Poland, where he was victorious; and from thence in 1630, he landed in Pomerania, drove the Germans out of Mecklenburgh, defeated the famous count Tilly the Austrian general, who was till then thought invincible; and over ran Franconia. Upon the defeat and death of Tilly, Wallenftein, another Austrian general, of equal reputation, was appointed to com­mand against Gustavus, who was killed upon the plain of Lutzen in 1632, after gaining a battle; which, had he survived, would probably have put a period to the Austrian greatness.

The amazing abilities of Gustavus Adolphus, both in the cabinet and the field, never appeared so fully as after his death. He left behind him a set of generals, trained by himself, who maintained the glory of the Swedish army with most astonishing valour and success. His chan­cellor Oxenstiern, was as consummate a politician as he was a warrior▪ and during the minority of his daughter Christina, he managed the affairs of Sweden with such success, that she in a manner dictated the peace of Westphalia, 1648, which threw the affairs of Europe into a new system.

Christina was but six years of age when her father was killed. She received a noble education; but her fine genius took an uncommon and indeed romantic turn. She invited to her court, Descartes, S [...] ­masius, and other learned men. Being resolved not to marry, she resigned her crown to her cousin Charles Gustavus, son to the duke of Deux-Ponts, in 1654. He died of a fever in 1660. His son and suc­cessor, Charles XI. was not five years of age at his father's death; and this rendered it necessary for his guardians to conclude a peace with their neighbours, by which the Swedes gave up the island of Bornholm, and Drontheim, in Norway. All differences were accommodated at the same time with Russia and Holland; and Sweden continued to make a very respectable figure in the affairs of Europe.

Charles XI. died in 1697, and was succeeded by his minor son, the famous Charles XII. The history of no prince is better known than that of this hero. Soon after his accession, the kings of Denmark and Poland, and the czar of Muscovy, formed a powerful confederacy against him, encouraged by the mean opinion they had of his youth and abilities. He made head against them all; and besieging Copen­hagen, he dictated the peace of Travendahl to his Danish majesty, by which the duke of Holstein was re-established in his dominions. The czar Peter was at this time ravaging Ingria, at the head of 80,000 men and had besieged Narva. The army of Charles did not exceed 20,000 men; but such was his impatience, that he advanced at the head of 8000, entirely routed the main body of the Russians, and raised the siege. Such were his successes, and so numerous his prisoners, th [...] the Russians attributed his actions to necromancy. Charles from thence marched into Saxony, where his warlike atchievements equalled, [...] they did not excel, those of Gustavus Adolphus. He dethroned A [...] ­gustus king of Poland; but stained all his laurels, by putting the bra [...] count Patkul to a death equally painful and ignominious. He raised Stani [...]aus to the crown of Poland in 1705, and his name carried with it such terror, that he was courted by all the powers of Europe; [...] [Page 45] among others, by the duke of Marlborough, in the name of queen Anne, amidst the full career of her successes against France. His stubbornness and implacable disposition, however, were such, that he cannot be con­sidered in a better light than that of an illustrious madman; for he lost in the battle of Pultowa, 1709, which he sought in his march to de­throne the czar, more than all he had gained by his victories. His brave army was ruined, and he was forced to take refuge among the Turks at Bender. His actions there, in attempting to defend himself with 300 Swedes against 30,000 Turks, prove him to have been worse than frantic. The Turks found it however convenient for their affairs to set him at liberty. But his misfortunes did not cure his military madness; and after his return to his dominions, he prosecuted his re­venge against Denmark, till he was killed by a cannon-shot, as it is generally said, at the siege of Fredericfhall, in Norway, belonging to the Danes, in 1718, when he was no more than thirty-six years of age. It has been supposed, that Charles was not in reality killed by a shot from the walls of Fredericshall, but that a pistol from some nearer hand, from one of those about him, gave the decisive blow, which put an end to the life of this celebrated monarch. This opinion is said to be very prevalent among the best informed persons in Sweden. And it appears, that the Swedes were tired of a prince, under whom they had lost their richest provinces, their bravest troops, and their national riches; and who yet untamed by adversity, pursued an unsuccessful and pernicious war, nor would ever have listened to the voice of peace, or consulted the internal tranquillity of his country.

Charles XII. was succeeded by his sister, the princes Ulrica Eleo­nora, wife to the hereditary prince of Hesse. Adolphus Frederic, married the princess Ulrica, sister to the king of a mild and gen­tle temper, and much harrassed by the contending Swedish factions, and found his situation extremely troublesome, in consequence of the restraints and opposition which he met with from the senate.—He passed the greatest part of his reign very disagreeably, and was at length, through the intrigues of the queen, brought over to the French party. He died in February, 1771, and was succeed­ed by his son, Gustavus the Third. He possessed abilities greatly superior to those of his father, and had much more ambition. He was about five and twenty years of age when he was proclaimed king o [...] Sweden; his understanding had been much cultivated, he had an insinuating address, and a graceful and commanding elocution. He was at Paris at the time of his father's death, from whence he wrote in the most gracious terms to the senate, repeatedly assuring them that he designed to govern according to the Laws. In consequence of the death of his father, an extraordinary diet was called to regulate the affairs of the government, and to settle the form of the corona­tion oath. Some time after his arrival in Sweden, on the 28th of March, 1772, his majesty solemnly signed, and swore to observe twenty-four articles, relative to his future administration of gov­ernment. This was termed a capitulation; and among the articles were the following: "The king promises before God to support the government of the kingdom as then established; to maintain the rights and liberties of the states, the liberties and security of all his subjects, [Page 46] and to reign with justice and equity according to the laws of the king­dom, the form of the regency as it was established in the year 1720, and conformably to the present act of capitulation. In consequence of the declaration of the states, the king shall regard any person, who shall openly or clandestinely endeavour to introduce absolute sover­eignty, as an enemy of the kingdom, and as a traitor to his country, and every person must take an oath respecting this matter, before [...] can take possession of any employment. With regard to the affairs of the cabinet and the senate, the king promises to follow the regulations of the year 1720 upon that head, which are to be directed always by a majority of votes, and never to do any thing therein without, [...] much less against, their advice. To the end that the council of [...] may be so much the more convinced of the inviolable designs of [...] majesty, and of his sincere love for the good of his people, he declare them to be entirely disengaged from their oath of fidelity, in case th [...] he wilfully acts contrary to his coronation-oath, and to this capitula­tion. And lastly, the king threatens any person with his highest dis­pleasure, who shall be so inconsiderate as to propose to him a greatest degree of power and splendor than is marked out in this act of capit­ulation, as his majesty desires only to gain the affection of his faithful subjects, and to be their powerful defender against any attempts [...] may be made upon their lawful liberties."

But scarcely had the king taken these solemn oaths to rule accord­ing to the then established form of government, and accepted the crown upon these conditions, before he formed the plan to govern as [...] thought proper, regarding these oaths only as matters of ceremo [...] ▪ And he made use of every art, the most profound dissimulation, [...] the utmost dexterity and address, in order to render this hazardous en­terprise successful. At his first arrival at Stockholm he adopted ev­ery method which could increase his popularity. Three times a [...] he regularly gave audience to all who presented themselves. Neither rank, fortune, nor interest, were necessary to obtain access to him. It was sufficient to have been injured, and to have a legal cause of complaint to lay before him. He listened to the meanest of his sub­jects with affability, and entered into the minutest details that concern­ed them; he informed himself of their private affairs, and seemed to interest himself in their happiness. This conduct made him consider­ed as truly the father of his people, and the Swedes began to ido [...] him. In the warmth of their gratitude they forgot that motives of am­bition might have some share in forming a conduct which to them ap­peared to proceed from principles of the purest benevolence. At the same time that he laboured to render himself generally popular, he [...] endeavoured to persuade the leading men of the kingdom, that he w [...] sincerely and inviolably attached to the constitution of his country, that he was perfectly satisfied with the share of power the constitu­tion had allotted to him, and he took every opportunity to declare, that he considered it as his greatest glory to be the first citizen of a [...] people. He seemed intent only on banishing corruption, and promot­ing union; he declared he would be of no party but that of the nations and that he would ever pay the most implicit obedience to whatever the diet should enact. These professions lulled the many into a [...] security, though they created suspicions among a few of greater pene­tration, [Page 47] who thought his majesty promised too much to be in earnest. In the mean time, there happened some contentions between the dif­ferent orders of the Swedish states; and no methods were left untried to foment these jealousies. Emissaries were likewise planted in every part of the kingdom, for the purpose of sowing discontent among the inhabitants, of rendering them disaffected to the established govern­ment, and of exciting them to an insurrection. At length, when the king found his scheme ripe for execution, having taken the proper measures for bringing a considerable number of the officers and sold­iers * into his interest, on the 19th of August, 1772, he totally over­turned the Swedish constitution of government. In less than an hour he made himself master of all the military force of Stockholm. He planted grenadiers, with their bayonets fixed, at the door of the coun­cil-chamber, in which the senate were assembled, and made all the members of it prisoners. And that no news might be carried to any other part of Sweden, of the transaction in which the king was engag­ed, till the scheme was completed, cannon were drawn from the arse­nal, and planted at the palace, the bridges, and other parts of the town, and particularly at all the avenues leading to it. Soldiers stood over these with matches ready lighted; all communication with the coun­try was cut off, no one without a passport from the king being allowed to leave the city. The senators were then confined in separate apart­ments in the palace, and many others who were supposed to be zeal­ously attached to the liberties of Sweden, were put under arrest. The remainder of the day the king employed in visiting different quarters of the town, in order to receive oaths of fidelity to him from the mag­istrates, the colleges, and city militia. Oaths were also tendered the next day to the people in general, to whom he addressed a speech, which he concluded by declaring, that his only intention was to re­store tranquillity to his native country, by suppressing licentiousness, overturning the aristocratic form of government, reviving the old Swedish liberty, and restoring the ancient laws of Sweden, such as they were before 1680. "I renounce now," said he, "as I have al­ready done, all idea of the abhored absolute power, or what is called sovereignty, esteeming it now, as before, my greatest glory to be the first citizen among a trust free people." Heralds then went through the different quarters of the town, to proclaim an assembly of the states for the following day. This proclamation contained a threat, that if any member of the diet should absent himself, he should be considered and treated as a traitor to his country.

On the morning of the 21st of August, a large detachment of guards was ordered to take possession of the square, where the house of nobles stands. The palace was invested on all sides with troops, and cannon were planted in the court, facing the hall where the states were to be assembled. These were not only charged, but soldiers stood over them [Page 48] with matches ready lighted in their hands. The several orders of the states were here compelled to assemble by the king's orders, and these military preparations were made in order to assist their deliberatio [...]. The king being seated on his throne, surrounded by his guards, and a numerous band of officers, after having addressed a speech to the sta [...] he ordered a secretary to read a new form of government, which he ref­fered to the states of their acceptance. As they were surrounded by an armed force, they thought proper to comply with what was requ [...] ­ed of them. The marshal of the diet, and the speakers of the other orders, signed the form of government; and the states took the [...] to the king, which he dictated to them himself. This extraordinary transaction was concluded in a manner equally extraordinary. The king drew a book of psalms from his pocket, and taking off his [...] began to sing Te Deum, in which he was joined by the assembly. [...] afterwards gave them to understand, that he intended in six years [...] again to convene an assembly of the states. Thus was this great revo­lution completed without any bloodshed, in which the Swedes surren­dered that constitution, which their forefathers had bequeathed [...] them after the death of Charles the Twelfth, as a bulwark against any despotic attempts of their future monarchs.

The Swedes, it some periods, have discovered an ardent love of lib­erty; at others, they have seemed fitted only for slavery; and what they were labouring to render themselves free, they have wanted that sound political knowledge, which would have pointed out to the [...] proper methods for securing their future freedom. The most capital defect of the Swedish constitution was the total want of all balance of its parts: And the division of the Swedish nation into three distin [...] classes of nobles, burghers, and peasants, whose interests were perpet­ually clashing, has been a circumstance very unfavorable to the liberty of the Swedes. The power of their kings was much restrained; but no sufficient regulations were adopted for securing the personal [...] ­dom of the subject. These defects in the Swedish constitution pawl the way for the late revolution: But it is notwithstanding a just sub­ject of surprise, that a bold and hardy people, who had so cautiously limited the power of their prince, should, at once, without a struggle, suffer him to proceed to so great an extension of his authority. It ap­pears, however, that the exorbitant power which Gustavus the Third thus assumed, he exercised with some degree of moderation.

Gustavus, of Holstein-Gottorp, late king of Sweden, was born in 1746. He was married in 1766, to Sophia Magdalene, the princess royal of Denmark, by whom he had issue a prince, Gustavus Adol­phus, born Nov. 1, 1778.

Gustavus III. the Swedish Monarch, died, March 29th, 1792, [...] 45, of the wounds he received from Capt. Aukenstrom, a most daring and desperate assassin—who discharged the contents of a pistol into his body, on the 16th of March, at the Opera House.—The Prince Royal who is but 14 years old, and has promising abilities, immediately on his father's death, was proclaimed King of Sweden, by the name of Gus­tavus Adolphus IV. The Duke of Sudermania, in compliance with his late Majesty's will, was declared "sole regent," or guardian of the young King, till he attains his majority, which is fixed at the age of eighteen.

[Page 49]

RUSSIA
MUSCOVY, OR THE RUSSIAN EMPIRE IN EUROPE AND ASIA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length unknown Miles. between Degrees. 23 and 180 East longitude.
Breadth 1500 Miles. Degrees. 44. 40′ and 72 N. latitude.

THIS immense Empire stretches from the Baltic sea and Sweden on the west, to Kamtskatka and the Pacific Ocean on the east: And from the Frozen Ocean on the north to about the 44th degree of lat. on the south, on which side it is bounded by Poland, Little Tartary, Turkey, Georgia, the Euxine and Caspian Seas, Great Tartary, Chi­nese Tartary, and other unknown regions in Asia.

The country now comprised under the name of Russia or the Rus­sias, is of an extent nearly equal to all the rest of Europe, and greater than the Roman empire in the zenith of its power, or the empire of Darius subdued by Alexander, or both put together.

Russia is, at present, divided into 42 governments, which are com­prehended again under 19 general governments, viz.

A. European Part of RUSSIA, 30 GOVERNMENTS.
    TOWNS.
1. Government of St. Petersburg, divided into 7 Parts or Circles Petersburg 170,000 inhab. 191,000 (1784) 126,700 (Coxe)
Narva 3,580
Kronstadt 5,000
2. Government of Wiburg, divid­ed into 6 Circles Wiburg  
Fridricksham  
3. Government of Riga, properly of Livonia Riga 27,938
Dorpt  
Pernau  
4. Government of Reval, proper­ly of Estland Reval 10,000
5. Government of Moskow divid­ed into Moskow 277,000 (Coxe)
12,550 houses, and 153,000 inhab­itants
6. Government of Wolodimer 14 Wolodimer  
7.—Pereslaw Pereslau-Saleskoi  
8. Government of Kaluga, di­vided into 12 Circles. Kaluga  
9.—of Tula 12 Tula  
10.—of Jaraslaw 12 Jaraslaw 30,000 inhab▪
11.—of Kostroma 15 divi­sions. Kostroma  
12.—of Nowogorod, 15 Circles. Nowogorod 6,000
13.—of Twer 13 Twer 10,000
14.—of Wologda 19 Wologda 8,000
Archangel,  
15.—of Nishnie Nowogorod Nishnei Nowogorod  
16. Gov. of Woronesh 15 Woronesh  
17.—of Tanbow 14 Tanbow  
18.—of Kursk 15 Kursk  
19.—of Orel 13 Orel  
20.—of Charcow 15 Charcow  
21.—of Kiew (Cosac Coun­try, or the Ukraine) about 1 million of people 11 Kiew  
22.—of Tshernigo 11 Tshernigo  
23.—of Nowogrod Sewersk 11 Nowogrod Sewersk  
24.—of Smolensk (White Russia) 13 Smolensk 4,000
25.—of Pleskow 10 Pleskow  
26.—of Polotzka 11 Polotzka  
27.—of Mohilow 12 Mohilow  
28.—of Ekatarinoslow (New Russia) 20 Pultawa  
Charson  
Asow  
29.—of Tauria (or Crimea) 7 Caffa 4,000
Perekov  
30.—Wiaetka 10 Wiaetka  

B. ASIATIC RUSSIA. 12. GOVERNMENTS.
  TOWNS.
1. Govern. of Caucasia (Kuban) Ta [...]n  
2.—of Casan, divided into 13 Circles Casan, 2,5000
3.—of Permia (Catarinb [...]) 16 Circles Perm  
Ekatarinenberg  
4.—of Pensa 7 Pensa  
5.—of Sinbirsk 12 Sinbirsk  
Samara  
6.—of Saratow 9 Saratow  
7.—of Astrachan Astrachan 70,000
8.—of Orenburg Orenburg  
Gurjew  
9.—of Ufa Ufa  
10.—of Tobolsk, 3 Divisions Tobolsk 2000 houses  
Jeniscisk  
11.—of Irkutzk, 17 Circles Irkutzk 1,113  
Jakutzk 600  
Kiechta  
Oihotz  
12.—of Kolywan 5 Kolywan  
Tomsk 2,000  
C. Tributary ISLANDS in the Great South Sea, between Asia and America.
  • 1. The A [...]EUTIAN ISLANDS.
  • 2. The ANDREAN ISLANDS.
  • 3. The FOX ISLANDS.
  • 4. The KUHILIAN ISLANDS.

[Page 51]

Whole RUSSIA square Miles. Population. Popu. for every square Mile.
A and B 4,880,000 24,000,000 5
A 1,194,976 20,000,000 20
B 3,695,024 4,000,000 for the ancient limits 1
Livonia 16,000 525,300 32
Estronia 6,400 200,000, 31
Crimea 24,368 200,000, according to some accounts only or only
  60,000 2
By the Division of Poland, Russia acquired 31,000 1,800,000 57

According to the former division into governments, which is pre­served in most of the maps, the European part of Russia contains only 1,008,000 square miles.

The superiority of the European part over the vast but uncultivated provinces of Asia, is striking.

The provinces acquired by the division of Poland, are highly valua­ble to Russia, to which the acquisition of Crimea is by no means com­parable in value.

This immense empire comprehends upwards of fifty different na­tions. They may be reduced to the following classes: 1. Slavonian nations, viz. Russians, Polanders, Cosaks, 2. Lettonian (in Livonia.) 3. Finnian, viz. Laplanders, Tshorkis, Estonians, Lieffs, Wotjaks, Tchermisses, Tshowashes, Permekian, Wogolian, Morduines, Samo­jedes, Ostiaks, Yuraks. 4. Tartarian, viz. Nogaitz, Tshulyms, Bash­kirians, Kirgis, Yakutes, Bazabins, &c. Tartars. 5. Mongolian, viz. Kalmucs, Buraets, Telcuts, &c. 6. Tungusian, Koriakes, Kamtskadaly, Kurilian, &c. 7. Migrated Europeans from every part of Europe, chiefly Germans. 8. Armenians, Indians, Persians. It is supposed, that the number of languages cannot well be less than the number of different nations.

CLIMATE.] In the southern parts of Russia, or Muscovy, the long­est day does not exceed fifteen hours and a half; whereas, in the most northern, the sun is seen in summer two months above the hori­zon. The reader from this will naturally conclude, that there is in Muscovy a vast diversity of climate, and that the extremes of heat and cold are felt in this vast empire.

The severity of the climate, however, in Russia properly so called, is very great. Dr. John Glen King, who resided eleven years in Russia, observes, that the cold in St. Petersburgh, by Farenheit's scale, is, during the months of December, January, and February, usually from 8 to 15 or 20 degrees below o; that is, from 40 to 52 degrees below freezing point: Though commonly, in the course of the winter, it is for a week or ten day some degrees lower. The same writer re­marks, that it is almost difficult for an inhabitant of our temperate climate to have any idea of a cold so great: But it may help to give some notion of it to inform the reader, that when a person walks out in that severe weather, the cold makes the eyes water, and that water [Page 52] freezing, hangs in little icicles on the eye-lashes. As the common peasants usually wear their beards, you may see them hanging at the chin like a solid lump of ice. But, even in that state, the beard is found very useful in protecting the glands of the throat: And the soldiers, who do not wear their beards, are obliged to tie a handkerchief under the chin to supply their place. All the parts of the face, which are exposed, are very liable to be frozen: Though it has often been observed, that the person himself does not know when the freezing begins; but is commonly told of it first, by those who meet him, and who call out to him to rub his face with snow, the usual way to thaw it. It is also remarked, that the part, which has once been frozen, is ever after most liable to be frozen again. In some very severe win­ters, sparrows, though a hardy species of birds, have been seen quite numbed by the intense cold, and unable to fly: And drivers, wh [...] sitting on their loaded carriages, have sometimes been found frozen to death in that posture. When the thermometer has stood as 25 degrees below [...], boiling water, thrown up into the air by an engine, so as to spread, has fallen down perfectly dry, formed into ice. A pint bottle of common water was found by Dr. King, frozen into a solid piece of ice in an hour and a quarter. A bottle of strong ale has also been frozen in an hour and a half: But in this substance there was about a tea-cup full in the middle unfrozen, which was as strong and inflam­mable as brandy of spirits of wine. But notwithstanding the severity of the cold in Russia, the inhabitants have such various means and provisions to guard against it, that they suffer much less from it than might be expected. The houses of persons in tolerable circumstances are so well protected, both without doors and within, that they are seldom heard to complain of cold. The method of warming the houses in Russia is by an oven constructed with several flues, and the country abounds with wood, which is the common fuel. These ovens con­sume a much smaller quantity of wood than might be imagined, and yet they serve at the same time for the ordinary people to dress their food. They put a very moderate faggot into them, and suffer it to burn only till the thickest black smoke is evaporated; they then shut down the chimney to retain all the rest of the heat in the chamber; by this chimney to retain all the rest of heat in the chamber; by this method the chamber keeps its heat 24 hours, and is commonly so warm, they sit with very little covering, especially children, who are usually in their shirts. The windows in the huts of the poor are very small, that as little cold may be admitted as possible: In the houses of persons of condition, the windows are caulked up against winter, and common­ly have double glass frames. In short, they can regulate the warmth in their apartments by a thermometer with great exactness, opening or shutting the flues to increase or diminish the heat. When the Rus­sians go out, they are clothed so warmly, that they almost bid defiance to frost and snow; and it is observable, that the wind is seldom violent in the winter; but when there is much wind, the cold is exceed­ingly piercing.

One advantage which the Russians derive from the severity of their climate is, the preserving provisions by the frost. Good housewives, as soon as the frost sets in for the winter, about the end of October, kill their poultry, and keep them in tubs packed up with a layer of snow between them, and then take them out for use as occasions re­quires: [Page 53] By which means they save the nourishment of the animal for several months. Veal frozen at Archangel, and brought to Petersburg, is esteemed the finest they have; nor can it be distinguished at the table from what is fresh killed, being equally juicy. The markets in Petersburg are by this means supplied in winter with all manner of provisions, at a cheaper rate than would otherwise be possible; and it is not a little curious to see the vast stacks of whole hogs, sheep, fish, and other animals, which are piled up in the markets for sale. The method of thawing frozen provisions in Russia, is by immerging them in cold water: For when the operation of thawing them is effected by heat, it seems to occasion a violent fermentation, and almost a sudden putrefaction: But when produced by cold water, the ice seems to be attracted out of the body, and forms a transparent incrustation round it. If a cabbage, which is thoroughly frozen, be thawed by cold water, it is as fresh as if just gathered out of the garden; but if it be thawed by fire of hot water, it becomes so rancid and strong that it cannot be eaten. Vegetation in Russia is very rapid.

WEALTH AND COMMERCE OF RUSSIA.] In so vast a tract of coun­try as the empire of Russia, spreading under many degrees of latitude, watered by more than eight rivers, which run through the space of 2000 miles, and crossed by an extensive chain of mountains, we many expect to find an infinite number of natural productions, though we must make some allowances for the great deserts of Siberia, and the many other parts of this immense empire not yet thoroughly investigated by natur­al historians. The species of plants peculiar to this part of the globe, which have been already discovered, amount to many thousands. The soil contains almost all minerals, tin, platina, and some semimetals ex­cepted, which have not yet been found. Yet in the mines of all the these large provinces not half the number of miners is employed, nor even half as many mines have been explored as in Germany or even in En­gland. Animals of every species are here likewise in such abundance, that a great quantity of them remain undescribed. As to the useful productions of the animal kingdom, Russia can boast of the greatest variety of the finest furs, as it has plenty of sables, martins, ermine, black, white, blue, and red foxes, white and common lynxes, bears, wolves, and several animals of the spotted cat kind. It abounds like­wise in camels, horses, asses, and cattle both wild and tame; it has in­numerable stocks of more than one species of hares and squirrels, wild and tame sheep, wild goats, different sorts of deer, rein-deer, elks, the musk animal, the musk beaver, different antelopes, &c. The follow­ing data may give the reader a general idea of their value to the coun­try. In 1781, there were exported, from the harbour of Petersburg alone, 428,877 skins of hares, 36,904 skins of grey squirrels, 1354 of bears, 2018 of ermine, 5639 of foxes, 300 of wild cats, besides those of wolves and of the suslic (a beautiful animal of the rat kind) exclusive of the exportation of the same articles from Archangel, Riga, and the Caspian Sea. In one year there were exported from Archangel 783,000 pud of tallow (a pud is equal to 40 lb.) 8602 pud of candles, and 102 pud of butter. In 1781, from Petersburg 148,990 pud of red leather, 10,885 pud of leather for soles, 530,646 pud of candles, 50,000 pud of soap, 27,416 pud of ox bones, 990 calve-skins. The sheep of some Russian provinces are very profitable to their owners; [Page 54] the most esteemed on account of their wool and skins, are the sheep of the Calmucks and Kirgis Tartars. These nations sell the skins of the young, and even of the unborn lambs, which are the softest in the world, and feel like sattin. The Kirgis and Bashkires carry on a great trade in horses and camels, the former of which are much valued; there are individuals among them who posses sometimes 2000 horses. The cattle of the Ukraine are reckoned the best in Europe. In the year 1768, wax was exported to the value of 72,000 rubles; yet the vast quantity of honey, produced by the wild bees of Astrachan, Casan, and Orenburg, is not sufficient for the inland consumption of this arti­cle, which in Russia is very generally used instead of sugar. Birds are very plentiful in Russia; but the advantages to be derived from them do not seem to have been sufficiently attended to, as Russia continues to import feathers, goose-quills, and down. The fisheries of the Bal­tic and Caspian Sea, of the lakes Onega and Ladoga, are of great im­portance. The different sorts of sturgeon caught in great plenty in these waters, viz▪ the common sturgeon, the beluga, the sterlid, &c. serve not only for food, but supply also the fish-gum, of which there were exported 3000 pud from Petersburg in the year 1781. From the spawn of these fishes caviar is made; one single beluga contains some­times 120 lb. of spawn. The caviar is prepared in different manners and is mostly exported. The seals, walrosses, and cod, caught in the Russian seas, are likewise very important articles.

Of the productions of the vegetable kingdom, the most valuable to Russia are its immense forests of fir-trees. Oaks and beeches do not commonly grow to a useful size beyond the 60th degree of north lati­tude. In 1768, the value of timber exported amounted to 585,000 rubles, of pitch and tar to 82,000 rubles, pot-ash to 37,000 rubles, masts to 59,000 rubles. In 1760, an English merchant contracted with the Russian government for leave to export annually, for the space [...] 30 years, 250,000 large pieces of timber, 10,000 masts, 10,000 smaller pieces of timber, 200,000 planks, 5000 fathom of birch-wood, and 200,000 small beams. This branch of trade is carried on chiefly by the towns of Petersburg, Wiburg, Narva, Archangel, and Kola. The plant kali, Salsola Linnoei, from which alkali, is extracted, grows near Astrachan and Assow.

The European part of the Russian dominions, and chiefly the prov­ince of Livonia, is distinguished for the quantity of corn of all sorts it produces. The value of the rve and wheat exported annually amounts to upwards of 7 [...]4,000 rubles. Tobacco is cultivated in several parts of Russia. Hemp, flax, and sail-cloth, Russia exports to the amount of [...]00,000 rubles. In 1768, Russia received for hemp-seed exported 93,000 rubles; for hemp-oil, commonly called linseed-oil, 255,000, rubles; for flax-seed 483,000 rubles. Archangel sent abroad in 1777, 62,043 cwt. of flax-seed, 71,783 pud of hemp, 105,928 arschien (yards) of linen, and 3210 popes.

The mineral stores of this empire would be much more valuable, i [...] there was a greater population and more liberty: Yet the gold mines near Catharinchurg produce annually no less than 240 lb. of gold-dust. Among the richest mines are those of Kolivan, which yielded some years ago from 200 to 400 pud of silver, but of late from 400 to 800 pud [...] or about 30,000 pounds of silver; every 100 lb. of silver containing [Page 58] 3lb. of gold. The silver mines at the Schlangenberg, and the copper, lead, and iron mines, (especially those of the Altai, and of the several branches of the Ural,) produce great riches. The mines in the neigh­bourhood of Nertschinsk, near the borders of China, yield annually 16,000 pounds of silver and some quick-silver. In 1781, there was exported from Petersburg 3,589,869 shippound of iron, and 280,000 shippound of copper; lead to the value of 96,000 rubles, and sugar of lead (saccharum Saturni) to the value of 6000 rubles. There are sever­al manufactures of sulphur in the empire; one of them, established at Sernoi Gorodoc, near the river Wolga, produces 1500 pud. Salt abounds in Russia, but as there is not a sufficient number of salt-works, a considerable quantity of salt is still imported. Isinglass (mica mem­branacea, Cronstadt) is a famous mineral production of Russia; it is found in Siberia, especially in the neighbourhood of Irkutzk in the Ural mountains, and in the island of Solowezkoi, in the government of Ast­mihen; the largest and most valuable plates are found in the province of Wologda, 3037 pud of it were exported from Petersburg in 1779. There are besides many sorts of jasper, marble, and granit; the latter be­ing found in very large masses, is of great use in ornamental architecture.

The whole of the exports of Russia amounted in 1783 to near 13 million of rubles; the imports did not much exceed the sum of 12 millions. So much has commerce been encouraged of late, that in the course of five years the value of the exports increased at the rate of nearly a million each year. The imports consist chiefly of wine, spices, fruits, fine cloth, and other manufactured commodities and articles of luxury. The English, and next to them the Dutch, have the most considerable share in the Russian trade. The value of the exports from Russia into Great-Britain, amounted in 1785 to 1,606,6881. the value of the imports from Great-Britain, &c. to 233,9981. sterling. (Custom-house Account, presented to the House of commons 1787.)

The commerce of the Black Sea has considerably increased since the late war with the Turks. The value of the imports in the several harbours on the Black Sea, amounted in 1785 to 806,330 piasters, the piaster computed at 40 paras each, nearly equal to 241,849l. sterling. The exports from the same harbours amount to 735,177 rubles.

It is apparently owing to the want of hands that there are at present no more than 484 manufactures in the whole empire. Some of them, however, are brought to a degree of perfection, which proves the skill and ingenuity of the nation: As the manufacture of musquets and other arms at Tula, which employs 6000 people, and supplies and Russian dominions.

There are some useful canals, viz. that of Ladoga, Twer, and others.

MOUNTAINS, RIVERS, AND FACE OF THE COUNTRY.] Russia is in general a flat, level country, except toward the north, where lie the Zimnopoias mountains, thought to be the famous Montes Riphaei of the ancients, now called the Girdle of the Earth. On the western side of the Dnieper comes in part of the Carpathian mountains, and be­tween the Black Sea and the Caspian, Mount Caucasus borders a range of vast plains extending to the sea of Oral. And here we may observe, that from Petersburg to Pekin, one shall hardly meet with a mountain on the road through Independent Tartary, and from Pe­tersburg [Page 56] to the north part of France, by the road of Dantaic, Ham­burg, and Amsterdam, we scarcely can perceive the smallest hill.

The most considerable rivers are the Wolga, or Volga, running east and south, which, after traversing the greatest part of Muscovy, and winding a course of 3000 English miles, discharges itself into the Cas­pian sea: It is not only reckoned the largest, but one of the most fer­tile rivers of Europe: It produces all kinds of fish; and fertilizes [...] the lands on each side, where grow the richest trees, fruits, and vegeta­bles; and it is remarkable, that in all this long course there is not [...] single cataract to interrupt the navigation, but the nearer it approaches to its mouth, multiplies its quantity of isles, as it divides itself into [...] greater number of arms than any known river in the world: And all these arms divide themselves into others still less, which join and meet again, so that the Wolga discharges itself into the Caspian sea by more than 70 mouths. By means of this noble river, the city of Mos­cow preserves a communication, not only with all the southern parts of Russia, but even with Persia, Georgia, Tartary, and other countries bordering on the Caspian sea. The Don, or Tanais, divides the most eastern part of Russia from Asia; and in its course towards the east, comes so near the Wolga, that the late czar had undertaken to have cut a communication between them by means of a canal: This grand project, however, was defeated by the irruptions of the Tartars. This river, exclusive of its turnings and windings, discharges itself into the Palus Maeotis, or sea of Asoph, about four hundred miles from its rise. The Borysthenes, or Dnieper, is among the largest rivers in Eu­rope, and runs through Lithuania, the country of the Zaporog Cossacs, and that of the Nagaisch Tartars, and falls into the Euxine, or Black Sea, at Kinbourne, near Oczakow; it has thirteen cataracts within a small distance. To these may be added the two Dwinas, one of which empties itself at Riga into the Baltic; the other has its source near Ustiaga, and dividing itself into two branches near Archangel, there falls into the White Sea.

POPULATION, MANNERS, AND CUSTOMS.] According to the fore­going table, Russia contains 24,000,000 inhabitants. As her imperial majesty of all the Russias possesses many of the countries from when [...] the prodigious swarms of barbarians who overthrew the Roman em­pire issued, there is the strongest reason to believe, that her dominions must have been better peopled formerly than they are at present;—twenty-four millions, are but a thin population for the immense tract of country she possesses. As the like decrease of inhabitants is obser­vable in many other parts of the globe, we are to look for the reason in natural causes, which we cannot discuss here.

The Russians, properly so called, are in general a personable people, hardy, vigorous, and patient of labour, especially in the field, to an incredible degree. Their complexions differ little from those of the English or Scots; but the women think that an addition of red heigh­tens their beauty. Their eye-sight seems to be defective, occasioned, probably, by the snow, which for a long time of the year is continual­ly present to their eyes. Their officers and soldiers always possessed a large share of passive valour; but in the late war with the king of Prussia, they proved as active as any troops in Europe; and in the late war with the Turks they greatly distinguished themselves. They [Page 57] are implicitly submissive to discipline, let it be ever so severe; they endure extreme hardships with great patience; and can content them­selves with very hard fare.

Before the days of Peter the Great, the Russians were in general bar­barous, ignorant, mean, and much addicted to drunkenness; no less than 4000 brandy shops have been reckoned in Moscow. Not only the common people but many of the boyards, or nobles, lived in a continual state of idleness and intoxication; and the most complete objects of misery and barbarity presented themselves upon the streets, while the court of Moscow was by far the most splendid of any upon the globe. The czar and the grandees dressed after the most superb Asiatic manner; and their magnificence exceeded every idea that can be conceived from modern examples. The earl of Carlisle, in the ac­count of his embassy, says, that he could see nothing but gold and prec­ious stones in the robes of the czar and his courtiers. The manufac­tures, however, of those, and all other luxuries, were carried on by Italians, Germans, and other foreigners. Peter saw the bulk of his subjects, at his accession to the throne, little better than beasts of bur­den to support the pomp of the court. He forced his great men to lay aside their long robes, and dress in the European manner; and he even obliged the laity to cut off their beards. The Russians, before his days, had hardly a ship upon their coasts. They had no conveni­encies for travelling, no pavements in their streets, no places of public diversion; and they entertained a sovereign contempt for all improve­ments of the mind. At present, a French or English gentleman may live as comfortably and sociably in Russia, as in most other parts of Eu­rope. Their polite assemblies, since the accession of the present em­press, have been put under proper regulations; and few of the an­cient usages remain. It is, however, said that they are yet addicted to intemperance.

The Russians were formerly noted for so strong an attachment to their native soil, that they seldom visited foreign parts. The Russian nobility, however, besides those who are in a public character, are now found at every court in Europe. Her imperial majesty even interests herself in the education of young men of quality in the knowledge of the world, and foreign services.

It is said that the Russian ladies were formerly as submissive to their husbands in their families, as the latter are to their superiors in the field; and that they thought themselves ill-treated if they were not often reminded of their duty by the discipline of a whip, manufactured by themselves, which they presented to their husbands on the day of their marriage. Their nuptial ceremonies are peculiar to themselves; and formerly consisted of some very whimsical rites, many of which are now disused. When the parents are agreed upon a match, though the parties perhaps have never seen each other, the bride is examined stark naked by a certain number of females, who are to correct, if possi­ble, any defects they find in her person. On her wedding-day she is crowned with a garland of wormwood; and after the priest has tied the nuptial knot, his clerk or sexton throws a handful of hops upon the head of the bride, wishing that she may prove as fruitful as that plant. She is then led home, with abundance of coarse, and indeed indecent ceremonies, which are now wearing off even among the lowest [Page 58] ranks; and the barbarous treatment of wives by their husbands, which extended even to scourging or broiling them to death, is either guard [...] against by the laws of the country, or by particular stipulations in [...] marriage contract.

FUNERALS.] The Russians entertain many fantastic notions [...] regard to the state of departed souls. After the dead body is dress [...] a priest in hired to pray for his soul, of purify it with incense, [...] to sprinkle it with holy water while it remains above ground, wh [...] among the better sort, it generally does for eight or ten days. Wh [...] the body is carried to the grave, which is done with many gesti [...] ­tions of sorrow, the priest produces a ticket, signed by the bishop [...] another clergyman, as the deceased's passport to heaven. When [...] is put into the coffin between the fingers of the corpse, the comp [...] returns to the deceased's house, where they drown their sorrow [...] intoxication; which lasts, among the better sort, with a few interval for forty days. During that time, a priest every day says prayers [...] the grave of the deceased; for though the Russians do not believe [...] purgatory, yet they imagine that their departed friend may be assi [...] by prayer, in his long journey, to the place of his destination [...] this life.

PUNISHMENTS.] The Russians are remarkable for the severity barbarism and variety of their punishments, which are both inflict [...] and endured with a wonderful insensibility. Peter the Great used [...] suspend the robbers upon the Wolga, and other parts of his dominions by iron hooks fixed to their ribs, on gibbets, where they writhed them­selves to death, hundreds, nay thousands, at a time. The single [...] double knout were lately inflicted upon ladies, * as well as men [...] [Page 59] quality. Both of them are excruciating; but, in the double knout, the hands are bound behind the prisoner's back, and the cord being fixed to a pulley, lifts him from the ground, with the dislocation of both his shoulders; and then his back is in a manner scarified by the executioner, with a hard thong, cut from a wild ass's skin. This pun­ishment has been so often fatal, that a surgeon generally attends the patient, to pronounce the moment that it should cease. It is not al­ways the number of the strokes, but the method of applying them, which occasions the death of the criminal; for the executioner can kill him in three or four blows, by striking him upon the ribs; though persons are sometimes recovered, in a few weeks, who have received three hundred strokes, moderately inflicted. The boring and cutting out the tongue, are likewise practised in Russia; and even the late empress Elizabeth, though she prohibited capital punishments, was forced to give way to the supposed necessary of those tortures.

According to the strict letter of the law, there are no capital punish­ments in Russia, except in the case of high treason: But when this matter is thoroughly investigated, there is much less humanity in it than has been supposed. For there are many felons who die under the knout, and others die of fatigue in their journies to Siberia, and from the hardships they suffer in the mines; so that there is reason to believe, that not fewer criminals suffer death in Russia than in those countries wherein capital punishments are authorised by the laws.

Felons, after receiving the knout, and having their cheeks and fore­heads marked, are sometimes sentenced for life to the public works at Cronstadt, Vishnei Voloshok, and other places: But the common practice is to send them into Siberia, where they are condemned for life to the mines at Nershink. There are upon an average from 1600 to 2000 convicts at these mines. The greatest part are confined in barracks, excepting those who are married: The latter are permitted to built huts, near the mines, for themselves and families.

TRAVELLING.] Among the many conveniencies introduced of late into Russia, that of travelling is extremely remarkable, and the ex­pense very trifling. The Russians perform the longest and most un­comfortable journies, with the greatest facility and dispatch. Like their Scandinavian and Lapland neighbours, they travel in sledges made of the bark of the linden-tree, lined with thick felt, drawn by rein-deer, when the snow is frozen hard enough to bear them. In the internal parts of Russia, horses draw their sledges; and the sledge▪ way towards February, becomes so well beaten, that they erect a kind of coach upon the sledges, in which they may lie at full length, and so sleep and travel night and day, wrapped up in good furs; thus they often perform a journey of about 400 miles, such as that between Petersburg and Mos­cow, in three days and three nights. Her imperial majesty, in her journies, is drawn in a house which contains a bed, a table, chairs, and other conveniencies for four people, by 24 post▪ horses; and the house itself is fixed on a sledge.

DIFFERENT NATIONS SUBJECT TO RUSSIA.] As the present subjects of the Russian empire, in its most extensive sense, are the descend­ants of many different people, and inhabit prodigious tracts of country, so we find among them a vast variety of character and manners; and the great [...] introduced of late years, as well as the discov­eries [Page 60] made, render former accounts to be but little depended upon [...] Many of the Tartars, who inhabit large portions of the Russian domin­ions, now live in fixed houses and villages, cultivate the land, and [...] ­tribute like other subjects. Till lately, they were not admitted into the Russian armies: but they now make excellent soldiers. Other Russian Tartars retain their old wandering lives. Both sides of the Wolga are inhabited by the Tscheremisses and Morduars; a peaceable industrious people. The Baskirs are likewise fixed inhabitants of the tract that reaches from Kasan to the frontiers of Siberia; and have certain privileges, of which they are tenacious. The wandering Kal­mucs occupy the rest of the tract of Astrachan and the frontiers of the Usbecs; and in consideration of certain presents they receive from [...] imperial majesty, they serve in her armies without pay, but are apt [...] plunder equally friends and foes.

The Cossaks, who lately made a figure its the military history of Eu­rope, were originally Polish peasants, and served in the Ukraine [...] militia against the Tartars. Being oppressed by their unfeeling lord a part of them removed to the uncultivated banks of the Don, [...] Tanais, and there established a colony. They were soon after joined in 1637, by two other detachments of their countrymen; and the reduced Asoph, which they were obliged to abandon to the Turk [...] after laying it in ashes. They next put themselves under the protec­tion of the Russians, built Circaska, on an island in the Don; [...] their possessions, which consisted of thirty-nine towns on both sides that river, reached from Ribna to Asoph. They there lived in a fruit­ful country, which they took care to cultivate; and they were [...] wedded to their original customs, that they were little better th [...] nominal subjects of the czars, till the time of Peter the Great. Th [...] professed the Greek religion; their inclinations were warlike, and they occasionally served against the Tartars and Turks on the Pal [...] Maeotis.

The internal government of the Cossacs approaches very near [...] the idea we form of that of the ancient Germans, as described by Tartars. The captains and officers of the nation choose a chief, whom they call hauptman, and he resides at Circaska; but this choice is con­firmed by the czar; and the hauptman holds his authority during life. He acts as superior over the other towns of the nation, each of which is formed into a separate commonwealth, governed by its own hetman who is chosen annually. They serve in war, in consideration of th [...] enjoying their laws and liberties. They indeed have several time rebelled, for which they suffered severely under Peter the Great. [...] the Russian yoke was so much easier than that of the Poles, that, [...] 1654, the Cossacs of the Ukraine put themselves likewise under [...] protection of Russia. They complained, however, that their liberties had been invaded; and in the war between Charles XII. and Peter their hetman Mazeppa, joined the former; but he found him [...] unable to fulfil the magnificent promises he had made to Charles. He brought over, however, some of the Zaparovian Cossacs, who [...] settled about the falls of the river Nieper, but most of them were [...] in pieces.

The mien and character of the Tartars of Kasan, and of those deriv [...] from them, are very uniform, and may serve for the character [Page 61] marks of all the Mahometan Tartars in their neighbourhood. Very few of them are tall; but they are generally straight and well-made, have small faces, with fresh complexions, and a sprightly and agreeable air. They are haughty and jealous of their honour, but of a very moderate capacity. They are sober and frugal, dexterous at mechani­cal trades, and fond of neatness. The Tartarian women are of a whole­some complexion rather than handsome, and of a good constitution: From their earliest infancy they are accustomed to labour, retirement, modesty, and submission. The Tartars of Kasan take great care of the education of their children. They habituate their youth to labour, to sobriety, and to a strict observance of the manners of their ancestors. They are taught to read and write, and are instructed in the Arabic tongue, and the principles of their religion. Even the smallest village has its chapel, school, priest, and school master; though some of these priests and school-masters are not much skilled in the Arabic language. The best Tartarian academies in the Russian empire are those of Kasan, Tobolsk, and Astrachan, which are under the direction of the Gagouns, or high-priests. It is not uncommon to find small collections of his­torical anecdotes in manuscript, in the huts of the boors; and their merchants, besides what these little libraries contain, are pretty exten­sively acquainted with these history of their own people, and that of the circumjacent states, with the antiquities of each. Such as choose to make a progress in theology, enter themselves into the schools of Bougharia, which are more complete than the others.

The Tartar citizens of Kasan, Orenberg, and other governments, carry on commerce, exercise several trades, and have some manufac­tories. Their manner of dealing is chiefly by way of bartar: Coin is very rarely seen among them, and bills of exchange never. They are not in general very enterprising; but, as they extend their connex­ions by partners and clerks, many of them carry on a great deal of bu­siness, which their parsimonious way of life renders very lucrative. At Kasan they make a trade of preparing what is called in England, Morocco leather. The villages of these people comprehend from ten to one hundred farms. These villages were at first composed of troops of wandering shepherds; but being drawn gradually closer together by successive population, they found themselves under the necessity of cultivating the earth, and erecting fixed habitations. They never [...]eave their fields fallow; for which reason they use more manure than the Russians. They are much attached to the cultivation of bees; many of them are perfect masters of this part of rural economy, and [...]eap great profit from it. Most of the villages also contain tanners, shoe-makers, taylors, dyers, smiths, and carpenters. The laborious fe­males spin, and make cloth from the fleece of their flocks, and thread from hemp of their own cultivation.

The moveables of these Tartars are, for the most part, only such as are necessary to the real wants of life. Their catalogue of kitchen and table furniture is very short; and they have but few utensils of agri­culture and mechanics. A chest or two, some carpets and pieces of [...], mats made of the bark of trees, with which they cover broad [...]nches that they use instead of beds, with a few chairs and tables, are commonly all the furniture to be seen in their houses; though some [...] the principal people have stuffed cushions and pillows on their [Page 62] sleeping benches. But chairs and tables are only seen in towns; and even there, never but in the houses of such as have business with for­eigners. They commonly make four meals a day, at which their bench serves them for table and chairs; for on this they place them­selves round the dishes, each person sitting on his heels, after the ori­ental manner. They make ablutions, and say prayers, at the beginning and end of all their meals. The Tartars of Kasan, as well as most of the Mahometan Tartars, are very polite, both among one another and towards strangers. Old men, who have maintained good characters, are held in great veneration among them: And a grey beard is consid­ered as naturally entitling a man to respect. They are fond of asking advice of their old men, who have always preference and precedence, and are the arbitrators in all disputes.

The habitations and manner of living of the Tartar citizens and villages of Astrachan are perfectly similar to those of the Tartars of Kasan. In the city of Astrachan they have a large magazine for goods, built of bricks, and several shops upon arches. They carry on an im­portant commerce with the Armenians, Persians, Indians, and Bough­arians: And their manufactories of Morocco leather, cottons, came­lots, and silks, are in a very thriving state.

The Finns are of Asiatic origin, and have a close resemblance to the Laplanders, only they are more civilized, and better informed. They live in towns and villages, have schools and academies, and make some progress in the arts and sciences. They profess the Lutheran faith, and use the christian aera in their chronology. They carry on com­merce, and exercise most of the common trades. The boors are chief­ly employed in agriculture, hunting and fishing. They are great eat­ers, making five meals a day, and are immoderately fond of brandy. They enjoy a considerable degree of freedom, as the Russian govern­ment has continued to them the enjoyment of the privileges which they formerly had under the crown of Sweden.

The Wotjaks, who are a Finnish race, chiefly inhabit the province of Viaitk, in the government of Kasan. This nation was one of those who were formerly under the protection of the Tartars; but, since it has been subjected to Russia, it has preferred the quiet and security which agriculture affords, to the ambulatory life of herdsmen and shepherds, and fixed habitations to their ancient tents. The Wotjaks are of a middle stature, and generally red haired; they are honest, peaceable, and hospitable▪ but superstitious, and very credulous. They are as­siduous in rural economy, neglecting neither the culture of bees, not, the chace▪ in the latter they use indifferently the bow or fire-arms. In their leisure hours many of them employ themselves in making all sorts of turnery, such as cups, spoons and shuttles; and others varnish all kinds of cups and bowls. The women are employed in sewing, in making linen, coarse cloths, and ornaments of embroidery. Some of the Wotjaks are Christians, but a great part of them are heathens and idolaters; though even these believe the doctrine of a future state of rewards and punishments.

The Ostiaks, who are likewise a Finnish race, are one of the most, numerous nations of Siberia. Before they were in subjection to Rus­sia, they were governed by princes of their own nation, and their de­scendants are still reputed noble. As these people divide themselves [Page 63] into different stocks or tribes, they choose their chiefs from among the progeny of their ancient rulers. These maintain peace and good or­der, and superintend the payment of the taxes. They are entirely un­acquainted with the use of letters, and are extremely ignorant; they can reckon as far as ten, but no farther, as is the case with other Fin­nish nations. These people have a singular custom, that the daughter-in-law never uncovers her face in the presence of her father-in-law; nor is the son-in-law allowed to appear before the mother-in-law till his wife has had a child. They are most of them idolators; and one of their opinions is, that bears enjoy after death a happiness at least equal to that which they except for themselves. Whenever they kill one of these animals, they sing songs over him, in which they ask his pardon for the injury they have done him. They also hang up his skin, to which they shew many civilities, and pay many fine compli­ments, to induce him not to take vengeance on them in the world of spirits. Indeed, it appears that bears are in great estimation among all the Pagan nations of the north and north-east.

The Wogolians are rather below the middle stature, have generally black hair, and a scanty beard. They are of a gay disposition, honest, laborious, and acute; but slovenly and sickle, and inclined to be ex­tremely passionate. Their women are well made, robust, civil, and laborious. They are unacquainted with the use of letters, as well as some of their kindred nations: They do not reckon their time by years, though they mark the months, and name them after the various revolutions of nature which they observe in their forests. They dis­tinguish themselves into tribes or races: And a Wougoul village is commonly composed only of one family, whose chief or elder per­forms the functions of staroste, or magistrate of the village. Their principal occupation is the chace, in which they discover much eager­ness and address; using indiscriminately fire-arms, the bow, and the spear. They are also skilful in contriving traps, snares, and gins, and all the lures of game.

The Tschouwasches dwell along the two sides of the Wolga, in the governments of Nischnei-Nowogrod, Kasan and Orenberg. They never live in towns, but assemble in small villages, and choose the forests for their habitations. They are very fond of hunting, and procure for that purpose screw-barrel muskets, which they prefer to the bow. One of their marriage ceremonies is, that, on the wedding night, the bride is obliged to pull off her husband's boots. A late writer says, "Among the Tschouwasches the husband is master of the house; he orders every thing himself; and it is the duty of the wife to obey without reply: A custom calculated to prevent domestic broils. Accordingly quarrels are very uncommon in the families of the Tschouwasches."

The Kirguisians have a frank and prepossessing air, similar to that which characterizes the Tartars of Kasan. They have a sharp, but not a fierce look, and smaller eyes than those Tartars. They have good natural sense, and are affable, and high-spirited; but fond of their ease, and voluptuous. They dwell always in portable huts, wandering about their deserts in search of pasturage for their flocks and herds, which constitute their principal occupation. As their courses are reg­ulated by necessity, in summer they traverse the northern deserts, and in winter the southern parts. It is only when they have nothing else [Page 64] to do that they follow hunting and fishing, and agriculture is absolute­ly unknown to them. Their troops of cattle consist of horses, camels, cows, goats, and sheep, which supply them both with food and [...] ­ment. Camels are of great service to them throughout their whole economy, carrying their huts and furniture at every change of station, which they do to the weight of nine hundred pounds. The Kirgui­sians dress in the eastern manner, but their clothes are for the most part better than those worn by the other Tartars. The decoration of their horses employs them almost as much as that of their persons; they having generally elegant saddles, handsome housings, and ornamental bridles. They are great eaters; and they also smoke tobacco to exce [...] Men, women, and children, all smoke, and take snuff: They keep the latter in little horns fastened to their girdles. The great and wealthy live perfectly in the same manner as the rest of the people, and are distin­guished only by the numerous train that accompanies them in their cav­alcades, and the quantity of huts which surround their quarters, inhab­ited by their wives, children and slaves.

The Tungusians from one of the most numerous nations of Siberia. They are of a middle stature, well made, and of a good mien. Their sight and hearing are of a degree of acuteness and delicacy that is al­most incredible; but their organs of smelling and feeling are consider­ably more blunt than ours. They are acquainted with almost every tree and stone within the circuit of their usual perambulations; and they can even describe a course of some hundred miles by the con­figurations of the trees and stones they meet with, and can enable others to take the same route by such descriptions. They also dis­cover the tracks of the game by the compression of the grass of most. They learn foreign languages with case, are alert on horseback, good hunters and dexterous at the bow.

The Kalmucs are a courageous tribe, and numerous; for the most part raw-boned and stout. Their visage is so flat that the skull of a Kalmuc may easily be known from others. They have thick lips, a small nose, and a short chin, their complexion a reddish and yellowish brown. The women are of the same shape and make with the men, and the skin of their face a wholesome white and red; they are lively, agreeable, and industrious. The standing character of this tribe is, rough, but less dissolute and base than they are commonly supposed to be. They are much attached to their chiefs or masters, but their, active spirit, and their improvidence and carelessness, make them thievish and dirty. In their robberies, they use more stratagem than violence, and as they believe in the nocturnal wandering of dead men's spirits, they are seldom accompanied with murder. They are super­stitious about good and bad days, and have written laws which are founded on reason, custom, and the will of the prince. Their code is very favourable to females, and never looks upon a women as the author of any crime. A rape and adultery is punished with a mulct of nine head of cattle. Their speech is a mongrel dialect with many. Tartarian words, but their religious books are in the Tangut or Tibe­tan. The sole profession among them is the breeding of cattle; they pursue the chace as an amusement; their dwelling is in tents, on yourts of felt, which they call gar, and the Russians kibilka, and much resemble the Kirguisians. Their clothing is oriental, and their heads [Page 65] are exactly Chinese. Some of their women wear a large golden ring in their nostrils. Their principal food consists of animals tame and wild, and even their chiefs will feed upon cattle that have died of distemper or age, and let it stink ever so much; so that in every hord the flesh market hath the appearance of a laystall of carrion; they eat likewise the roots and plants of their deserts. They are great eat­ers, but can endure want for a long time without complaint. Both sexes smoke continually. During the summer they keep to the north, and in the winter to the southern deserts. They sleep upon felt or carpeting, and cover themselves with the same.

The Kamtschadales have a lively imagination, a strong memory, and a great genius for imitation. Their chief employments are hunting and fishing. The chace furnishes them with sables, foxes, and other game. They are very expert in fishing, and are well acquainted with the proper seasons for it. Their nets are made of the stamina of net­tles. When they are not engaged in hunting and fishing, they some­times employ themselves in building huts, forming different wooden utensils, cutting wood for fuel and building, and making bows and arrows: But much of their time is passed in absolute idleness; for they are generally extremely indolent. Poverty gives them no con­cern; and nothing but the calls of hunger can drive them to the chace. They live in villages, consisting of a few small houses, and situated in general near some river. When a village becomes too populous, they separate and form a new village. They eat and drink great quanti­ties; but as what they eat is always cold, and their teeth are very fine. Dogs are their only domestic animals, and they put a high value upon them. Some of them travel in small carriages drawn by dogs; and a complete Kamtschadalian equipage, dogs, harness, and all, costs in that country 4l▪ 10, or near twenty rubles. The Kamtschadales be­lieved the immortality of the soul, before they were prevailed upon to embrace the Christian religion. They are superstitious to extrava­gance; and extremely singular and capricious in the different enjoy­ments of life, particularly their convivial entertainments.

The manners of the Siberians were formerly so barbarous, that Peter the Great thought he could not inflict a greater punishment upon his capital enemies, the Swedes, than by banishing them to Siberia. The effect was, that the Swedish, officers and soldiers introduced European usage and manufactures into the country, and thereby acquired a com­fortable living. In this wide and forlorn region, that was so long un­known to Europe, some new mines have lately been discovered, which, upon their first opening, have yielded 45.000 pounds of fine silver, and which is said to have been obtained with little difficulty or expense. But Kamtschatka is now considered as the most horrid place of exile in the vast empire of Russia, and here some of the greatest criminals are sent.

RELIGION.] The religion established in the Russian empire is the Greek. The most essential point in which their profession of faith differs from that of the Latin church, is the doctrine, that the Holy Ghost proceeds from the Father only. The Greek church keeps Lent and other days of fast, which are very numerous, with the utmost strictness; its liturgy in Russia continues to be read in the old Sclavo­nian language; and its from of worship is at least as much overloaded [Page 66] with rites as the Roman Catholic. Saints are held in veneration painted images of them, but no statues are suffered in the churches. There is a sect of dissenters, who call themselves Christians of the old faith, but who are called apostates by the orthodox church; the differ­ences between them relate chiefly to ceremonies. The church has been governed since the time of Peter the Great by a national council, called the Holy Synod, composed of a president, two vice-presidents, and nine other members. The Russian clergy consists of three metro­politans, viz. those of Kiew Tobolsk, and the new-appointed metro­politan of Georgia; of 28 bishops, independent of the metropolitan and subject only to the authority of the Synod, who preside over dioce­ses called Eparchies, and of protopopes, popes, and deacons. Mar­riage is forbid to the archbishops and bishops, but is allowed to the in­ferior clergy. There are 479 convents for men, and 74 for women, con­taining about 70,000 persons; the convents of monks are governed by presidents, called Archimandrites; those of nuns by women, cal­led Igumenias. Above 900,000 peasants belong to the estates in pos­session of the clergy.

Besides the Greek religion, all other religious professions are tolerat­ed, and enjoy the free exercise of their worship. Livonia and some other provinces, which formerly belonged to Sweden, are of the Lu­theran religion. The Roman Catholics in the Polish provinces, in which the order of Jesuits is still tolerated, are under the government of the Catholic Archbishop of Mohilow. The Jews are tolerated on­ly in or near the Polish provinces. The Armenians have a bishop of their own, residing at Astrachan. In the province of Saratow there are several flourishing settlements of Moravian brethren. [...] the Asiatic nations belonging to this vast empire, some are Mahome­dans, others worship the Dela [...] Lama of Tibet, or the great Kutuch [...] of the Calmucks, and others, as the Kamskadales and Kurilians [...] a form of Pagan superstition peculiar to themselves.

LANGUAGE.] The common language of Russia is a mixture of the Polish and S [...]lavonian; their priests, however, and the most learned of their clergy, make use of what is called modern Greek; and (it is said) those who know that language in its purity, are at no loss for un­derstanding it in its corrupted state. The Russians have thirty-six let­ters, the forms of which have a strong resemblance to the old Greek alphabet.

LEARNING, &c.] Sciences and arts, introduced by Peter the Great, are highly encouraged by the present empress. There are in Russia three universities, at Petersburg, Moscow, and Kiew; the latter [...] which is merely a seminary for the clergy; an academy of sciences, an academy of arts, and an academy of the Russian language. The present empress is actually employed in founding a number of school [...], for the education of the lower classes of her subjects, throughout the best inhabited parts of the empire; an institution of the most benefi­cial tendency, which, if rightly executed, will entitle the great Catharine, more than any of her predecessors, to the gratitude of the Rus­sian nation.

GOVERNMENT.] The emperor, or autocrator of Russia, (the [...] ­ent empress styles herself autocratrix) is absolute. He must be of [...] Greek church by the ancient custom of the empire. The only wri [...] [Page 67] fundamental law existing is that of Peter the First, by which the right of succession to the throne depends entirely on the choice of the reigning monarch. Some writers, however, consider the indivisibility of the empire as a second fundamental law of the monarchy. The nobility and gentry have no rights and privileges to protect them against the arbitrary will of the sovereign, who has unlimited power over their lives and property, as well as over all the rest of his Russian subjects. Yet some of the conquered provinces, as Livonia and Esthonia, enjoy, by the peace of Nystadt, some valuable privileges. The Cossacks and some other Asiatic nations are likewise in a state of less servile subjec­tion.

The management of public affairs is entrusted to several depart­ments. At the head of all those concerned in the regulation of inter­nal affairs (the synod or ecclesiastical convocation excepted) is the senate, under the presidency of a chancellor and vice-chancellor. The sovereign himself nominates the members of this supreme court, which is divided into six chambers, four of which are at Petersburg, and two at Moscow. The provinces are ruled by governors appointed by the sovereign; each government, containing on an average 400,000 subjects, has two courts of justice, one of which is appropriated to civ­il and the other to criminal causes. Under the control of the senate are the following departments: The war department; the board of admiralty; the supreme court of appeals at Moscow, of which the court of judicature at Petersburg is a branch: The latter has the con­trol of the civil magistrates in the cities, and of the court of Relief, established for the benefit of those who have not the means of suing for redress in the other courts. From all courts of justice there lies an appeal to the senate. The other departments are: The board of the treasury; the board of commerce; the board of the mines, including the inspection of the mint; the board of manufacture; the court of exchequer (or chamber of finances); the board of revision of all pub­lic accounts; the salt-revenue office; the post-office; the medical court; the department of police, and the chamber of seizures and for­feitures.

FINANCES.] The public revenue in 1765 amounted to only 20 millions. The present revenue is a very large one, considering the [...]ow price of all the necessaries of life, which are at least four time cheaper than in England: The revenue commonly exceeds the ex­pense of the government.

This s [...]un is raised, 1. From a capitation tax, which at present has been extended to the provinces of Livonia, Esthonia, and Finnland, contrary to the privileges granted to them by Peter the Great. The produce of this tax in 1768 was seven millions of rubles, but it is [...]nce greatly increased. 2. From the customs, amounting to upwards [...] three million of rubles, and increasing with the extension of com­merce. 3. From the monopoly invested in the crown of vending all parts of spirituous liquors, which yields likewise upwards of three million of rubles. 4. From the salt works, which produce one mill­ion and a half. 5. From taxes on lands, on sales of gentlemen's es­ [...]es, fisheries, and licences of public houses. 6. From the profits profits of [...] mint. 7. From the mines.

[Page 68] The public debts are computed to amount to about 40 million [...] rubles.

ARMY.] The army is generally calculated to amount to from [...] to 450,000 men; according to Busching the amounted in 177 [...], [...] above 600,000.

Regular and Irregular, 1783.
Regular cavalry 56, [...]
Irregular cavalry 48, [...]
Regiments of infantry 160, [...]
Garrisons 8 [...], [...]
Militia cavalry 26, [...]
Artillery of the camp [...]
—of the garrisons [...]
Train [...]
  [...]
The army in 1784 amounted to 368,901, viz.
Guards [...]
Cavalry 59, [...]
Infantry 149, [...]
Artillery 29, [...]
Garrisons 87, [...]
Cossacs, &c. [...]
  Total 368, [...]

NAVY.] Sixty three armed ships, of which 24 are of the [...] 20,000 sailors. It has been related, that (in 1785) there were 48 [...] of the line at Cronstadt, and 12 ships of the line in the Black Sea [...] other accounts the strength of the Russian navy is much less consid­erable.

The chief harbours are, 1. Cronstadt, not far from Petersburg, [...] the gulf of Finnland, where there is a fine dock-yard. 2. Reval, [...] the province of Livonia, on the Baltic Sea. 3. Archangel, on [...] White Sea. 4. Cherson, on the Black Sea, in the province of Ekatar­inoslow. The admiralty consists of one high-admiral, three admi [...] three vice-admirals, and four countre admirals.

The whole army was, in the year 1784▪ divided into nine di [...] divisions and three corps, the Caucasian that of Orenburg and of [...] beria. All the war affairs are under the war department of Peters­burg, where there is also founded an academy for cadets and for [...] ­ry. Tulo, the capital of the province of the same name, is famous [...] great manufacture of muskets. The expenses of the whole [...] amount only to about two millions of rubles.

CITIES, TOWNS, PALACES, AND OTHER BUIEDINGS.} Petersburg naturally takes the [...] in this division. It lies at the [...] ­tion of the Neva with the lake Ladoga, already mentioned, [...] latitude 59° 57′. and E. long. 31°; but the reader may have a [...] idea of its situation, by being informed that it stands on both [...] river Neva, between that lake and the bottom of the Finland [...]. In the year 1703, this city consisted of a few small fishing huts, [...] spot so marshy, that the ground was formed into nine island [Page 69] which, according to Voltaire, its principal quarters are still divided. Without entering into too minute a description of this city, it is suf­ficient to say, that it extends about six miles every way, and contains every structure for magnificence, the improvement of the arts, reve­nue, navigation, war and commerce, that are to be found in the most celebrated cities in Europe. There is but one bridge over the Neva, which joins the Dock yard to Basil's island—It is constructed with flat bottomed boats, which in the spring are laid across the river, and re­moved in autumn before the frost begins. There is a convent which deserves particular notice, in which 440 young ladies are educated at the empress's expense; 200 of them of superior rank, and the others, daughters of citizens and tradesmen, who, after a certain time allotted to their education, quit the convent with improvements suitable to their conditions of life, and those of the lower class are presented with a sum of money as a dowry if they marry, or to pro­cure ot themselves a proper livelihood. Near to this convent is a Foundling Hospital, assistant to the noble established at Moscow, and where the mother may come to be delivered privately, and then after the utmost attention to her, she leaves the child to the state, as a parent more capable of promoting its welfare.

As Petersburg is the emporium of Russia, the number of foreign ships trading to it in the summer time is surprising. In winter, 3000 one-horse sledges are employed for passengers in the streets. It is supposed, that there are 170,000 inhabitants in this city; and it is ornamented with thirty-five great churches; for in it almost every sect of the Christian religion is tolerated. It also contains five palaces, some of which are superb, particularly that which is called the New Summer Palace, near the Triumphal Port, which is an elegant piece of architecture. This magnificent city is defended on that side next the sea by the fortress of Cronstadt; which, considering the difficulty and danger of navigating a large naval force through the gulf of Finland, is sufficient to guard it on that side from the attempts of any enemy. Petersburg is the capital of the province of Ingria, one of Peter the Great's conquests from the Swedes. All the neighbourhood of this city is covered with country houses and gardens.

The city of Moscow, formerly the capital of this great empire, stands on a pleasant plain, in N. lat. 55° 40′ E. long. 38° 1414 miles N. E. of London. The river Moskwa running through it in a winding course, and several eminences, interspersed with gardens, groves and lawns, form most delightful prospects. It seems rather to be a cultivated country than a city. The ancient magnificence of this city would be incredible, were it not attested by the most unques­tionable authors: But we are to make great allowances for the uncul­tivated state of the adjacent provinces, which might have made it ap­pear with a great lustre in the eyes of a traveller. Busching speaks of it as the largest city in Europe; but that can be only meant as to the ground it stands on, computed to be 16 miles in circumference. It is generally agreed, that Moscow contains 1600 churches, among which are 11 Cathedrals, and 271 parish churches. Around the ex­change, according to Busching, are about 6000 fine shops, which dis­play a vast parade of commerce, especially to and from China. No city displays a greater contrast than Moscow, of magnificence and [Page 70] meanness in building. The houses of the inhabitants in general are miserable timber booths; but their palaces, churches, convents, and other public edifices, are spacious and lofty. The grand imperial palace, is mentioned as one of the most superb structures in the world. It stands in the Kremelin, one of the interior circles of the city, and contains the old imperial palace, pleasure-house, and stables, a victu­alling-house, the palace which formerly belonged to the patriarch [...] nine cathedrals, five convents, four parish churches, the arsenal with the public colleges, and other offices. All the churches in the Kremelin have beautiful spires, most of them gilt, or covered with silver: The architecture is in the Gothic taste; but the insides of the churches are richly ornamented; and the pictures of the saints [...] decorated with gold, silver, and precious stones. Mention is made of the cathedral, which has no fewer than nine towers, covered with copper double gilt, and contains a silver branch with forty-eight lights, said to weigh 2800 pounds. A volume would scarcely suf [...] to recount the other particulars of the magnificence of this city. I [...] sumptuous monuments of the great dukes and czars, the magazine, the patriarchal palace, the exchequer, and chancery, and noble structures. The public is not unacquainted with the barbarous anecdote, that the czar John Basilides, ordered the architect of the church of Jerusalem to be deprived of his eye-sight, that he might never contrive its equal. The story is improbable, and might take its rise from the arbitrary dis­position of that great prince. I shall have occasion hereafter to mon­tion the great bell of Moscow. The inhabitants are so distractedly fond of bells, that they are always tinkling in every quarter. The jewels and ornaments of an image of the Virgin Mary, in the Kreme­lin church, and its other furniture, can be only equalled by what [...] seen at the famous Holy House of Loretto in Italy. Voltaire says, that Peter, who was attentive to every thing, did not neglect Moscow at the time he was building Petersburg; for he caused it to be paved, adorned it with noble edifices, and enriched it with manufactures.

The founding Hospital at Moscow is an excellent institution, and appears to be under very judicious regulations. It was founded by the present empress, and is supported by voluntary contributions, legacies and other charitable endowments. It is an immense pile of building, of a quadrangular shape, and contains 3000 foundlings: When the establishment is completed, it is intended to contain 8000. They are taken great care of; and at the age of fourteen, they have the liberty of choosing any particular branch of trade; and for this purpose there are different species of manufactures established in the hospital. When they have gone through a certain apprenticeship, or about the age of twenty, they are allowed the liberty of setting up for themselves: A sum of money is bestowed upon each foundling for that purpose, and they are permitted to carry [...] trade in any part of the Russian empire. This is a very considerable privilege in Russia, where the peasants are slaves, and cannot leave their villages with out the permission of their masters.

Nothing can be said with certainty as to the population of Moscow. When lord Carlisle was the English ambassador there, in the reign of Charles II. this city was 12 miles in compass, and the number [...] houses was comprised at 40,000. Voltaire says, that when he wr [...] [Page 71] Moscow was twenty miles in circumference, and that its inhabitants amounted to 5000,000: Later and more authentic accounts say, that the number of inhabitants in Moscow is about 150,000; consisting of noble families, merchants, priests, monks, mechanics, labourers, car­riers, fledge-drivers and servants, belonging to the church.

CURIOSITIES.] This article affords no great entertainment, as Russia has but lately been admitted into the rank of civilized nations. She can, however, produce many stupenduous monuments of the public spirit of her sovereign; particularly the canals made by Peter the Great, for the benefit of commerce. Siberia is full of old sepul­chres of an unknown nation, whose instruments and arms were all made of copper. In the cabinet of natural history at Petersburg, is a rhinoceros dug up on the banks of the river Valui, with his skin, and hair upon it perfect. I have already hinted at the passion the Russians have for bell-ringing; and we are told that the great bell of Moscow, the largest in the world, weighs 443,772 pounds. It is 19 feet high, and 23 in diameter; and was cast in the reign of the em­press Anne; but the beam on which it hung, being burnt, it fell, and a large piece is broken out of it; so that it lately lay in a manner use­less. Mr Bruce, in his late Memoirs, mentions a bell at Moscow, founded in Czar Boris's time, 19 feet high, 23 in diametre, 64 in cir­cumference, and two in thickness, that weighed 336,000 pounds, The building of Petersburg, and raising it of a sudden from a few fishing-huts to be a populous and rich city, is perhaps a curiosity hardly to be paralleled since the erection of the Egyptian pyramids. The same may be said of the fortress of Cronstadt, in the neighbour­hood of Petersburg, which is almost impregnable. This fortress and city employed, for some years, 300,000 men, in laying its founda­tions, and driving piles, night and day; a work which no monarch in Europe (Peter excepted) could have executed. The whole plan, with a very little assistance from some German engineers, was drawn by his own hand. Equally wonderful was the navy which he raised to his people, at the time when they could hardly be said to have possessed a ship in any part of the globe. What is more wonderful than all, he often wrought in person in all these amazing works, with the same assiduity as if he had been a common labourer.

GENERAL REMARKS.] Russia is indebted for its present flourishing state to the efforts of two great monarchs, succeeding each other at no great distance of time. Had the intermediate sovereigns between Pe­ter the Great and Catharine the Second, who filled up the interval of 37 years, been capable of following the steps of the first of these mon­archs, who found, about 90 years ago, his native country uncivilized and desolate, this rising empire would have been much farther ad­vanced in wealth and prosperity. The present condition of this country requires, that the increase of its population should be the principal object of the attention of government. It is the obvious policy of Russia to avoid wars, to encourage marriages, and to pro­mote agriculture, manufactures, and commerce. Though its provin­ces are of an enormous extent, though its army is the largest in Eu­rope, the Russian empire is not yet become formidable to the other great European powers. Its vast dominions, peopled in the more re­mote parts by numerous, fierce, and restless barbarians, contain as [Page 72] many domestic enemies, who, in a great measure, engage the attention and occupy the power of the state. The neighbouring Persian and Turkish dominions, easily provoked to hostilities, require large bodies of troops to guard the frontiers, which cannot be withdrawn with­out endangering the safety of the whole empire.

The present Empress of Russia, notwithstanding the very unfa­vourable circumstances which attended her taking possession of the government of that empire, has, since the commencement of her reign, filled her high station with distinguished reputation and ability. She has encouraged learning and the arts, and endeavoured greatly to extend the commerce of her subjects: Though the extreme despo­tism of the Russian government is a great impediment to the progress of the arts and sciences, and to the real prosperity of this empire. Her imperial majesty has, however, effected many beneficial and im­portant regulations in the interior police of her vast empire, and par­ticularly in the courts of justice. One of these is, the abolition of the use of torture; and she has also adopted an excellent plan for the reformation of prisons. The new code of laws, for which she hath given her instructions, is yet wanting to give political felicity to an oppressed people. But one of the most remarkable transactions of her reign, is her establishment of an armed neutrality, for the protection of the commerce of nations not at war, from any attacks or insults from belligerent powers. By the code of maritime law, which her imperial majesty has endeavoured to enforce, neutral ships are to en­joy a free navigation, even from port to port, and on the coasts of bel­ligerent powers; and all effects belonging to the subjects of belligerent powers are looked upon to be as free, on board such neutral ships, ex­cepting only such goods as are expressly stipulated contraband in her treaty of commerce with Great Britain. It was in 1780 that her im­perial majesty invited the powers not at war to accede to this armed neutrality. Those who engaged in it were to make a common cause of it at sea, against any of the belligerent powers who should violate, with respect to neutral nations, these principles of maritime law. The armed neutrality was acceded to, the same year, by the kings of Sweden and Denmark, and by the States-General.

Catherine II. Empress of all the Russias, princess of Anhalt Zerbst, was born in 1729, and ascended the throne in 1762, upon the deposi­tion and death of her husband. She was married to that prince whilst duke of Holstein Gottorp, in 1745, by whom she had issue Paul Petrowitz, great duke of Russia, born in 1754, who has been twice married, and by his present duchess, the princess of Wirte [...] ­berg, has had two sons, Alexander and Constantine, and a daughter Alexandrina Pawlcona.

[Page 73]

THE BRITISH EMPIRE.

TABLE
GREAT-BRITAIN AND IRELAND
Areas in Square Miles. Population. Population for each single Sq. Mile.
92,294 Kitchin According to some Authors only 9,000,000  
104,701 Guthrie, or Templeman To others 11,800,000 115
100, [...]28 St. Ueb. Probably 11,000,000 109
A. GREAT-BRITAIN.
Extent and Divisions. Areas in Sq. Miles. Population. Population for every square Mile
Long.2°east, 6° 20 [...] W. Kitchin 70,096 9,300,000 but more probably 8,300,000 105
[...]at, 49°—58° 50 [...] [...]he Shetland Islands to above 61°. St. U. 79,712    
ENGLAND and WALES 54,112 8,000,000  
    5,500,000 Dr. Price  
    8,477,200 Chalmer  
    7,000,000 the most probable statement 129
In England are 28 Cities, above 650 Towns, & 1,586,000 Dwellings. CHAIMER.
SCOTLAND 25,600 1,300,000 51
    1,500,000 according to others  
B. IRELAND.
  21,216 2,500,000 2,161,514 B. 117

ENGLAND is divided into the following 40 Counties or Shires.

CHIEF TOWNS.
      Houses
1. Middlesex London 800,000 inhab. 900,000 accord. to Entick. 130,000 & is con­stantly in­creasing.
2. Surrey Southwark 1,000,000 Busching 750,000 Wendeborn
    862,500 medium.
3. Essex Colchester, Harwich
4. Hertfordshire Hertford
5. Kent Canterbury, Dover
6. Sussex Chichester, Winchelsea
7. Buckinghamshire Buckingham
8. Bedfordshire Bedford
9. Huntingdonshire Huntingdon
10. Cambridgeshire Cambridge, 6000 Ely
11. Suffolk Ipswich, Bury, Newmarket
12. Norfolk Norwich, Yarmouth
13. Oxfordshire Oxford
14. Berkshire Reading, Windsor
15. Gloucestershire Gloucester
16. Worcestershire Worcester, 25,000
17. Monmouthshire Monmouth
18. Herefordshire Hereford
19. Shropshire Shrewsbury
20. Staffordshire Stafford, Lichfield,
21. Warwickshire Warwick, Coventry 25,000, Birming­ham 50,000
22. Leicestershire Leicester
23. Derbyshire Derby
24. Nottinghamshire Nottingham, 17,000
25. Lincolnshire Lincoln
26. Rutlandshire Okeham
27. Northamptonshire Northampton
28. Somersetshire Bath, Bristol, 90,000
29. Wiltshire Salisbury
30. Hampshire Winchester, Portsmouth, Southampton.
31. Dorsetshire Dorchester
32. Devonshire Exeter, Plymouth
33. Cornwall Launceston
34. Yorkshire York, Hull, Halifax, Leeds
35. Cheshire Chester, 14,000
36. Durham Durham
37. Lancashire Lancaster, Manchester 28,000, Liver­pool 40,000
38. Westmoreland Appleby
39. Northumberland Newcastle, 40,000
40. Cumberland Carlisle, Whitehaven

WALES contains 7011 square miles, and about 300,000 people. [...] is divided into 12 counties: Pembrokeshire, Carmarthenshire, Gl [...] ­morganshire, Brecknockshire, Cardiganshire, Radnorshire, Mont­gomeryshire, Merionethshire, Flintshire, Denbighshire, Carnarvon­shire, Anglesea.

SCOTLAND is divided into 31 shires and two stewardships; [...] counties belonging to South Scotland, 15 to North Scotland. Their names are the following: 1. Midlothian (or Edinburg) 2. West Lo­thian. 3. East Lothian. 4. Merse or Berwick. 5. Roxborough. 6. Selkirk. 7. Peebles. 8. Dumfries. 9. Galloway. 10. Air. 11. Lanerk. 12. Dumbarton. 13. Renfrew. 14. Stirling. 15. Cla [...] ­mannan. 16. Fife. 17. Kinross. 18. Bute. 19. Argyle. 20. Pert [...] 21. Forfar. 22. Kinkardin. 23. Aberdeen. 24. Bamff. 25. Nair [...]. [Page 75] 26. Elgin. 27. Inverness. 28. Cromarti [...]. 29. Ross. 30. Su­therland. 31. Caithness, and the two stewarties: 32. Kirbud­bright, and 33. Orkney and Shetland Islands. The chief towns are Edinburg, 81,865 inhabitants, Glasgow 30,000, Perth 11,000, Aber­deen 18,000, Inverness 11,000, Dumfries 5000.

IRELAND is divided into four provinces, those of Leinster, Ulster, Connought, and Munster. Leinster contains the following 12 coun­ties: 1. Dublin. 2. Louth. 3. Wicklow. 4. Wexford. 5. Long­ford. 6. East Meath. 7. West Meath. 8. King's County. 9. Queen's County. 10. Kilkenny. 11. Kildare. 12. Carlow. Ulster contains nine counties: 13. Down. 14. Armagh. 15. Mo­naghan. 16. Cavan. 17. Antrim. 18. Londonderry. 19. Ty­rone. 20. Fermanagh. 21. Donegall.—T [...] Connaught belong 5 counties: 22. Leitrim. 23. Roscommon. 24. Mayo. 25. Sligo. 26. Galway.—Munster contains 6 counties: 27. Clare. 28. Corke. 29. Kerry. 30. Limerick. 32. Tipperary. 32. Waterford. The chief towns of this kingdom are the following: Dublin, the capital of Ireland, contains about 160,000 inhabitants, (See Kutner's Let­ters) Corke 87,000, Limerick 32,000, Waterford and Gallway.

British Possessions beyond the Seas.

1. In EUROPE the fortress of Gibraltar, on the coast of Spain, 3,200 inhabitants.

2. In AFRICA, Cabo Corse, on the coast of Guinea, and some other forts there and near the Gambia, and the island of St. Helena.

3. In ASIA the extensive countries of Bengal, Bahar, and part of Orixa: The capital of Bengal is Calcutta, or Fort William, the resi­dence of the governor-general of the English East-India settlements. These territories are computed to contain 10,000,000 inhabitants, and to be in extent near 150,000 square miles. 2. Large settlements on the coast of Coromandel, of which Madras is the capital, containing 80,000 inhabitants. 3. The settlements of Bombay and Surat, on the Malabar coast, and many other forts and factories on the continent of India, and the Islands of Sumatra, Bally, Banca.

4. In AMERICA the extensive provinces of Canada, 1. Nova Scotia; settlements in Labrador and Hudson's Bay, the islands of Newfound­land, Cape-Breton, and St. John. 2. In the West-Indies, the Bahama islands, Bermudas, Jamaica, Barbadoes, St. Christopher's, Antigua, Montserat, Nevis, Grenada, and the Grenadines, Barbuda, Dominica, St. Vincent, Anguilla. These appendages to the British Empire, we shall describe more particularly in their proper places, and shall pro­ceed to consider separately the three grand divisions of the British Em­pire, ENGLAND, SCOTLAND, and IRELAND.

ENGLAND.

EXTENT AND SITUATION.
Length 380 Miles. between Degrees. 50 and 56 North latitude.
Breadth 300 Miles. Degrees. 2 East and 6-20 West longitude.

CLIMATE AND BOUNDARIES.] THE longest day in the northern parts, contains 17 hours 30 minutes; and the shortest in the southern, near 8 hours. It is bounded on the north, by that part of the island called Scotland; on the east, by the German Ocean; on the west, by [Page 76] St. George's Channel; and on the south, by the English Channel, which parts it from France.

The insular situation of England, renders it liable to a great unc [...] ­tainty of weather, so that the inhabitants on part of the sea coasts are often visited by agues and fevers. On the other hand, it prevents the extremes of heat and cold, to which other places, lying in the same degree of latitude, are subject; and it is, on that account, friendly [...] the longevity of the inhabitants in general, especially those who live on a dry soil. To this situation likewise is to be ascribed that perpet­ual verdure for which England is remarkable, occasioned by refreshing showers and the warm vapours of the sea.

NAME AND DIVISIONS ANCIENT AND MODERN.] Antiquaries are divided with regard to the etymology of the word England; some de­rive it from a Celtic word, signifying a level country; others, and with more probability, from Anglen, a province now subject to his Danish majesty, which furnished a great part of the original Saxon adventurers into this island. In the time of the Romans, the whole island went by the name of Britannia. The word Brit, according to Mr. Camden, signified painted or stained; the ancient inhabitants being famous for painting their bodies: Other antiquaries, however, do not agree in this etymology. The western tract of England, which is almost separated from the rest by the rivers Severn and Dee, is called Wales; or the land of strangers, because inhabited by the Belgis Gauls, who were driven thither by the Romans, and were stranger, to the old natives.

The Romans divided England into,

1. Britannia Prima, which contained the southern parts of the kingdom.

2. Britannia Secunda, containing the western parts, comprehend­ing Wales; and,

3. Maxima Caesariensis, which reached from the Trent as far north­ward as the wall of Severus, between Newcastle and Carlisle, and sometimes as far as that of Adrian in Scotland, between the Forth and Clyde.

To these divisions some add the Flavia Caesariensis, which they sup­pose to contain the midland counties.

When the Saxons invaded England about the year 450, and when they were established in the year 582, their chief leaders appropriated to themselves, after the manner of the other northern conquerors, the countries which each had been the most instrumental in conquering; and the whole formed a heptarchy, or political republick, consisting of seven kingdoms. But in time of war, a chief was chosen out of the seven kings; for which reason it has been called a political republic, its constitution greatly resembling that of ancient Greece.

Kingdoms erected by the Saxons, usually stiled the Saxon Heptarchy.

Kingdoms. Counties.
1. Kent founded by Hengist in 475, and ended in 823. Kent.
2. South Saxons, founded by Ella in 491, and ended in 600. Sussex
Surry
3. East Angles, founded by Uffa in 575, and ended in 793. Norfolk
Suffolk
Cambridge
With the Isle of Ely
4. West-Saxons, founded by Cer­die in 512, and ended in 1060. Cornwall
Devon.
Dorset
Somerset
Wilts
Hants
Berks
5. Northumberland, founded by Ida in 574, and ended in 792. Lancaster
York
Durham
Cumberland
Westmoreland
Northumberland, and Scotland to the Frith of Edinburgh
6. East-Saxons, founded by Erche­win in 527, and ended in 746. Essex
Middlesex, and part of Hertford
7. Mercia, founded by Cridda in 582, and ended in 874. The other part of Hertford
Gloucester
Hereford
Worcester
Warwick
Leicester
Rutland
Northampton
Lincoln
Huntingdon
Bedford
Buckingham▪
Oxford
Stafford
Derby
Salop
Nottingham
Chester.

We preserve these divisions, as they account for different local cus­toms, and many very essential modes of inheritance, which to this day prevail in England, and which took their rise from different institu­tions under the Saxons. Since the Norman invasion, England has been divided into counties, a certain number of which, excepting Middlesex and Cheshire, are comprehended in six circuits, or annual progress of the judges, for administering justice to the subjects who are at a distance from the capital. These circuits are: 1. Home circuit. 2. Norfolk circuit. 3. Oxford circuit. 4. Middland circuit. 5. Western circuit. 6. Northern circuit.

Middlesex is not comprehended; and Cheshire is left out of these circuits, because, being a county palatine, it enjoys municipal laws and privileges. The same may be said of Wales, which is divided in­to four circuits. The circuits of Wales are: 1. North-East circuit. 2. North-West circuit. 3. South-East circuit. 4. South-West cir­cuit.

[Page 78]

IN ENGLAND.
40 Counties, which send up to parliament 80 knights.
25 Cities (Ely none, London four.) 50 citizens.
167 Boroughs, two each 334 burgesses.
5 Boroughs (Abingdon, Banbury, Bewdley, Higham-Ferrars, and [...]onmouth,(one each) 5 burgesses.
2 Universities. 4 representatives.
8 Cinque ports Hastings, Dover, Sandwich, Romney, Hythe, & their three dependents, Rye, Winchelsea, and Seaford,) two each. 16 barons.
WALES
12 Counties 12 knights.
12 Boroughs (Pembroke two, Merioneth none) one each 12 burgesses.
SCOTLAND.
33 Shires 30 knights.
67 Cities and Boroughs 15 burgesses.
  Total 558

Besides the 52 counties into which England and Wales are divided, there are counties corporate, consisting of certain districts, to which the liberties and jurisdictions peculiar to a county have been granted by royal charter. Thus the city of London is a county distinct from Middlesex; the cities of York, Chester, Bristol, Norwich, Worcester, and the towns of Kingston upon Hull, and Newcastle upon Tyne, and counties of themselves, distinct from those in which they lie. The same may be said of Berwick upon Tweed, which lies in Scotland, and hath within its jurisdiction a small territory of two miles on the north-side of the river.

Under the name of a town, boroughs and cities are contained; for every borough or city is a town, though every town is not a borough or city. A borough is so called, because it sends up burgesses to par­liament; and this makes the difference between a village or town, and a borough. Some boroughs are corporate, and some not corporate; and though decayed, as Old Sarum, they still send burgesses to parlia­ment. A city is a corporate borough, that hath had, or at present hath, a bishop, for if the bishopric be dissolved, yet the city remains. To have suburbs proves it to be a city. Some cities are also counties, as before mentioned.

SOIL, AIR, SEASONS, AND WATER.] The soil of England and Wales differs in each county, not so much from the nature of the ground, though that must be admitted to occasion a very considerable altera­tion, as from the progress which the inhabitants of each country have made in the cultivation of lands and gardens, the draining of marshes, and many other local improvements, which are here carried to a much greater degree of perfection than they are perhaps in any other part of the world if we except China. If no unkindly seasons happen, Eng­land produces corn, not only sufficient to maintain her own inhabit­ants, but to bring large sums of ready money for her exports. No nation exceeds England in the productions of the garden, which have come to such perfection, that the rarest of foreign fruits have been [Page 79] cultivated here with success. If any farther proof of this should be required, let it be remembered, that London and its neighbourhood, though peopled by about 1,000,000 inhabitants, is plentifully supplied with all kinds of fruits and vegetables from grounds within 12 miles distance.

The soil of England seems to be particularly adapted for rearing tim­ber; and the plantations of trees round the houses of noblemen and gentlemen, and even of peasants, are delightful and astonishing.

The air in many places is loaded with vapours wafted from the At­lantic Ocean by westerly winds; but they are ventilated by winds and storms, so that in this respect England is to foreigners, and people of delicate constitutions, more disagreeable than unhealthy. It cannot, however, be denied, that in England the weather is so excessively capri­cious, and unfavourable to certain constitutions, that many of the in­habitants are induced to fly to foreign countries for health.

The spring begins sometimes in February, and sometimes in April. In May the face of the country is often covered with hoary frost in­stead of blossoms. The beginning of June is sometimes as cold as in the middle of December, yet at other times the thermometer rises in that month as high as it does in Italy. Even August has its vicissi­tudes of heat and cold, and upon an average September, and next to it October, are the two most agreeable months in the year. The na­tives sometimes experience all the four seasons within the compass of one day, cold, temperate, hot and mild weather. The inconstancy of the seasons, however, is not attended with the effects that might be naturally apprehended. A fortnight, or at most three weeks, general­ly make up the difference with regard to the maturity of the fruits of the earth: And it is hardly ever observed that the inhabitants suffer by a hot summer. Even the greatest irregularity and the most unfa­vourable appearances of the seasons, are not, as in other countries, at­tended with famine, and very seldom with scarcity.

The champain parts of England are generally supplied with excel­lent springs and fountains of water; though a discerning palate may perceive, that they frequently contain some mineral impregnation. The constitutions of the English, and the diseases to which they are liable, have rendered them extremely inquisitive after salubrious wa­ters, for the recovery and preservation of their health; so that England contains as many mineral wells, of known efficacy, as perhaps any country in the world. The most celebrated are the hot baths of Bath and Bristol in Somersetshire, and of Buxton and Matlock in Derby­shire; the mineral waters of Tunbridge, Epsom, Harrowgate, and Scarborough.

FACE OF THE COUNTRY AND MOUNTAINS.] The industry of the English has in a good degree supplied the absence of those favours which nature has so lavishly bestowed upon some foreign climates. The cultivated parts of England abound in the most beautiful scenes. Bar­ren spots are not without their verdure; but nothing can give us a high­er idea of the English industry, than observing that some of the pleas­antest counties in the kingdom are naturally the most barren, but ren­dered fruitful by labour. Perhaps it may be safely affirmed, that no country in Europe surpasses England in the beauty of its prospects, or the opulence of its inhabitants.

[Page 80] Though England is full of delightful hills and rising grounds, yet [...] contains few mountains. The most noted are the peak in Derbyshire, and the Endle in Lancashire. Wales, and the northern parts may be called mountainous.

RIVERS AND LAKES.] The rivers in England add greatly to [...] beauty, as well as its opulence. The Thames▪ a noble river, rises on the confines of Gloucestershire, a little S. W. of Cirencester, and [...] receiving the many tributary streams of other rivers, it passes to O [...] ­ford, then by Abingdon, Wolingford, Reading, Marlow, and Wind­for. From thence to Kingston, where formerly it met the tide, which since the building of Westminster bridge, is said to flow no high [...] than Richmond; thence it flows to London, and after dividing the counties of Kent and Essex, it widens in its progress, till it falls into the sea at the Nore, whence it is navigable for large ships to London bridge: For many ages, there were but two bridges over the Thames, those of London and Kingston. The great increase of riches, com­merce, and inland trade, is however now multiplying them, and [...] commodiousness, architecture, and workmanship, those lately erected at Westminster and Black Friars, are equalled perhaps by none in the world.

The river Medway, which rises near Tunbridge, falls into the Thames at Sheerness, and is navigable for the largest ships as far as Chatham. The Severn, reckoned the second river for importance [...] England, and the first for rapidity, rises at Plinlimmon-hill in North Wales▪ becomes navigable at Welch-Pool; and discharges itself [...] the Bristol channel, near King-road; and there lie the great [...] which cannot get up to Bristol. The Trent rises in the Moorlands [...] Staffordshire, and running south-east by Newcastle-under-line, divi [...] that county into two parts; and being joined by the Ouse, and seve [...] other rivers towards the mouth, obtains the name of the Humber, fall­ing into the sea south-east of Hull.

The other principal rivers in England, are the Ouse (a Gaelic [...] signifying water in general) which falls into the Humber, after receiv­ing the water of many other rivers. Another Ouse rises in [...] and falls into the sea near Lynn in Norfolk. The Tine runs [...] west to east through Northumberland, and falls into the German [...] at Tinmouth, below Newcastle. The Tees runs from west to east, [...] ­viding Durham from Yorkshire, and falls into the German sea [...] Stockton. The Tweed runs from west to east on the borders of S [...] ­land▪ and falls into the German sea at Berwick. The Eden runs [...] south to north through Westmoreland and Cumberland, and pass [...] by Carlisle, falls into Solway Frith below that city. The Lower [...] runs west through Wiltshire to Bath, and then dividing Somerset [...] from Gloucestershire, runs to Bristol, falling into the mouth of [...] Severn below that city. The Derwent, which runs from east to [...] through Cumberland, and passing by Cockermouth, falls into the [...] sea a little below. The Ribble, which runs from east to west [...] Lancashire, and passing by Preston, discharges itself into the Irish [...]. The Mersey, which runs from the south-east to the north-west [...] Cheshire, and then dividing Cheshire from Lancashire, passes by [...] pool, and falls into the Irish sea a little below that town; and the [...] rises in Wales, and divides Flintshire from Cheshire, falling [...] [...] Irish channel below Chester.

[Page 81] The lakes of England are few; though it is plain from history and antiquity, and indeed, in some places from the face of the country, that meres and fens have been frequent in England, till drained and converted into arable land. The chief lakes remaining, are Soham mere, Wittlesea mere, and Ramsay more, in the isle of Ely, in Cam­bridgeshire. All these meres in a rainy season are overflowed, and form a lake of 40 or 50 miles in circumference. Winander mere lies in Westmoreland, and some small lakes in Lancashire go by the name of Derwent waters.

FORESTS.] The first Norman kings of England, partly for political purposes, that they might the more effectually enslave their new sub­jects, and partly from the wantonness of power, converted immense tracts of grounds into forests for the benefit of hunting, and these were governed by laws peculiar to themselves: So that it was necessary, about the time of passing the Magna Charta, to form a code of the forest laws; and justices in Eyre▪ so called from their fitting in the open air, were appointed to see them observed. By degrees those vast tracts were disforested; and the chief forests, properly so called, remaining out of no fewer than 69, are those of Windsor, New Forest, the Forest of Dean, and Sherwood Forest.

METALS AND MINERALS.] Among the minerals, the tin mines of Cornwall deservedly take the lead. They were known to the Greeks and Phoenicians, the latter especially, some ages before that of the Christian AEra; and since the English have found the method of manu­facturing their tin into plates, and white iron, they are of immense benefit to the nation. An ore called Mundic is found in the beds of tin, which was very little regarded till about 70 years ago; Sir Gil­bert Clark, discovered the art of manufacturing it, and it is said now to bring in 150,000l. a year, and to equal in goodness the best Spanish copper, yielding a proportionable quantity of lapis calaminaris for making brass. Those tin-works are under peculiar regulations, by what are called the stannary laws; and the miners have parliaments and privileges of their own, which are in force at this time. The number of Cornish miners are said to amount to 100,000. Some mines of copper have lately been discovered in Wales, which are of consider­able extent, yield great profit, and have much reduced the price of that metal. Some gold has likewise been discovered in Cornwall, and the English lead is impregnated with silver. The English coined silver is particularly known by roses, and that of Wales by that prince's cap of feathers. Devonshire, and other counties of England, produce marble; but the best kind, which resembles Egyptian granite, is ex­cessively hard to work. Quarries of freestone are found in many places. In Northumberland and Cheshire are allum and salt pits. The English fullers earth is of such consequence to the clothing trade, that its exportation is prohibited under severe penalties. Pit and sea coal is found in many counties of England; but the city of London, to encourage the nursery of seamen, is chiefly supplied from the pits of Northumberland, and the bishopric of Durham. The cargoes are shipped at Newcastle and Sunderland, and the exportation of coals to other countries is a valuable article.—See article Wealth and Commerce.

VEGETABLE AND ANIMAL PRO­ [...]CTIONS BY SEA AND LAND.} Nothing can be laid with [...]y certainty concerning the quanti­ties of wheat, barley, rye, peas, beans, vetches, oats, and other grain [Page 82] growing in this kingdom. Excellent institutions for the improvement of agriculture are now common in England, and their members are [...] public-spirited as to print periodical accounts of their discoveries and experiments, which serve to shew that agriculture and gardening may be carried to a much higher state of perfection than they are in at pres­ent. Honey and saffron are natives of England. The cyder of Devon and Herefordshire, when kept, and made of proper appl [...] and in a particular manner, is often preserved by judicious palates, [...] French white wine. The English have made the different fruits of the world their own, sometimes by simple culture, but often by [...] beds, and other means of forcing nature. The English pine-apples [...] delicious and now plentiful. The same may be said of other natives of the East and West Indies, Persia, and Turkey.

Woad for dying is cultivated in Bucks and Bedfordshire, as [...] and flax are in other counties. In nothing, however, have the English been more successful than in the cultivation of clover, cinque [...] trefoil, saintfoin, lucern, and other meliorating grasses for the soil.

With regard to ANIMAL PRODUCTIONS, we shall begin with the quadrupeds. The English oxen are large and fat, but some prefer for the table the smaller breed of the Scotch and the Welch cattle, after grazing in English pastures. The English horses are among the best in the world, whether we regard their spirit, strength, swiftness, or docility▪ Incredible have been the pains taken, by all ranks, for improving the breed of this favourite and noble animal, and the success has been answerable: for they now unite all the qualities and beauties of In­dian. Persian, Arabian, Spanish, and other foreign horses. The irre­sistible spirit and weight of the English cavalry, render them superior to all others in war: And an English hunter will perform incredible things in a fox or stag-chace. Those which draw equipages on the streets of London, are often particularly beautiful. The exportation of horses has of late become a considerable article of commerce. The breed of asses and mules begins likewise to be improved and encouraged in England.

The English sheep are of two kinds; those that are valuable for their fleece, and those that are proper for the table. The former and very large, and their fleeces constitute original staple commodity of England. The large fat sheep are very rank eating. It is thought that in England, twelve millions of fleeces are shorn annually, which, at a medium of as▪ a fleece, makes 1,200,000l.

The English mastiffs and bull-dogs are said to be the strongest and fiercest of the canine species in the world.

With regard to reptiles, such as adders, vipers, snakes, and worms; and insects▪ such as ants, gnats, wasps, and sties, England is pretty much upon a par with the rest of Europe.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MAN­NERS, CUSTOMS, AND DIVERSONS.} For the population of Eng­land the reader is referred at the Table.

Englishmen, in their persons are generally well sized, regula [...] featured, commonly fair rather than otherwise, and florid in the [...] complexions. It is, however, to be prefumed, that the vast number of foreigners that are intermingled and intermarried with the nati [...] have given a cast to their persons and complexions different from the [...] of their ancestors 150 years ago. The women, in their shapes, [...] [...] ­ [...]ures, [Page 83] and complexion, appear graceful and lovely. But beside their external graces, they are still more to be valued for their thorough cleanliness, and all the engaging duties of domestic life.

The English are remarkable for their cleanliness. Their nerves are very delicate, and people of both sexes are sometimes even mortally affected by imagination. This over-sensibility has been considered as one of the sources of those singularities, which so strongly characterize the English nation. They sometimes magnify the slightest appearances into realities, and bring the most distant dangers immediately home [...]o themselves; and yet when real danger approaches, no people face it with greater resolution, or constancy of mind. A groundless para­graph in a news-paper, has been known to affect the stocks, and con­sequently public credit, to a considerable degree; and their credulity goes so far, that England may be termed the paradise of quacks and empiries, in all arts and professions. In short, many of the English feel, as if it really existed, every evil in mind, body, and estate, which they form in their imagination. At particular intervals, they are sensible of this absurdity, and run into a contrary extreme, striv­ing to banish it by dissipation, riot, intemperance, and diversions. They are fond, for the same reason, of clubs and convivial associa­tions; and when these are kept within the bounds of temperance and moderation, they prove the best cures for those mental evils, which are so peculiar to the English, that foreigners have pronounced them to be national.

The same observations hold with regard to the higher orders of life, which have undergone a remarkable change since the accession of the House of Hanover, especially of late years. The English nobility and gentry of great fortunes, now assimilate their manners to those of foreigners, with whom they cultivate a more frequent intercourse than did their forefathers. They do not now travel only as pupils, to bring home the vices of the countries they visit, under the tuition perhaps of a despicable pedant, or family dependant; but they travel for the purposes of society, and at the more advanced ages of life, while their judgments are mature, and their passions regulated. This has enlarged society in England, which foreigners now visit as com­monly as Englishmen visited them, and the effects of the intercourse become daily more visible, especially as it is not now, as formerly, confined to one sex.

Such of the English noblemen and gentlemen, as do not strike into those high walks of life, affect rather what we call a snug, than a splendid way of living. They study and understand conveniency in their houses, gardens, equipages, and estates, and they spare no cost to purchase it. It has, however, been observed, that this turn ren­ders them less communicative than they ought to be: But, on the other hand, the few connexions they form, are sincere, cheerful, and indissoluble. The like habits descend pretty far into the lower ranks, and are often discernible among tradesmen. This love of snugness and conveniency may be called the ruling passion of the English people, and is the ultimate end of all their great application, and severe la­bours and fatigues. A good oeconomist, with a brisk run of trade, is generally, when turned of 50, in a condition to retire from business; that is either to purchase as estate, or to settle his money in the funds. He then commonly resides in a comfortable house in the country, of­ten [Page 84] his native country, and expects to be treated on the footing of a gentleman; but his style of living is judiciously suited to his circum­stances.

Wendeborn in his view of England observes that "There are in no country such large contributions raised for the support of the poor, a [...] in England; yet there is no where so great a number of them; and their condition, in comparison with the poor of other countries, ap­pears truly the most miserable: They never seem to be apprehensive▪ or to think of making any provision for a time of want. In Germany and other northern countries of Europe, the poor keep always in mind, that it is cold in winter, and that no harvest or fruits can be reaped from the earth, while it is covered with snow. On this ac­count, they consider in time the warmer clothing they will then re­quire, and lay up such a store of provisions as their circumstances al­low, in order to prepare themselves in the best manner possible, for the inclemency of that season. But in England, it seems as if the poor and necessitous never looked forward, or would not trouble themselves to think of what may happen to them in future. They neither fore­see the winter's cold, nor the scarcity of that season; and, therefore, when it arrives▪ are the most forlorn beings imaginable. The lower class of people have no disposition to be frugal or provident: When trade becomes dull, and employment scanty, they who maintained themselves by their labour, must either beg, or obtain support for themselves and their families, from the parish. The watermen of the Thames, whose gains are very sufficient for their livelihood, when the river is frozen or covered with shoals of ice, are often seen drag­ging a boat or little ship through the streets of London, and begging alms of the public. In those counties and towns where manufactures are carried on, there is, for this very reason, the greatest number of poor; for as soon as any particular branch of them is on the decline, the workmen▪ who were employed in it, are threatened with want, and in danger of starving. The number of the poor in such counties, raises the poor-rates very high, and consequently makes both land and houses less eligible to purchase; for according to the value or rent of houses, the poor rates are levied; so that the tenant of a mid­dling house of about forty pounds yearly rent, in a county where four shillings in the pound are demanded for the support of the poor, much pay a yearly tax of eight pounds for poor-rates.

In Germany, there is a great difference, as to value, between the dresses of the different ranks of people: But in England, this distinc­tion bolds in a much smaller degree. The clothing manufactured for the poor and common people, is in small proportion to their number; and few or none of them like to wear it. Even in country places, it is but little used; and in London or the great towns, it is seldom or never to be seen. All do their best to wear fine clothes; and those who cannot purchases them new, buy the old at second-hand, that they may at least have the appearance of finery. Servants in general, [...] nearly as well as their masters and mistresses; and when servant [...] or maids marry, they frequently begin the married state with a life [...] more expense, or rather profusion, than their circumstances will [...] and continue the same, until children and want force them to apply [...] [...] and their parish. The English thieves and rogues usually [...] [Page 85] "we can be but hanged at last." In like manner, servants and others, who, by their extravagance and mismanagement, bring poverty upon themselves, feel as little contrition, and say, "the parish must maintain us." Such instances, however, of worthlessness and depravity, render the wealthy and industrious not very willing to contribute to the sup­port of the poor: And the poor themselves generally thank neither God nor man, for the charity that feeds them.

The number of those who are born poor, and of those who from mis­fortune or misconduct become so in time, is very great. The first are brought up by charities; the latter are maintained, and at last buried out of the same fund. No person, therefore, need wonder that the taxes which are yearly collected under act of parliament for the support of the poor, should, in England alone, amount to three millions sterl­ing; * a sum which must appear altogether extraordinary, when it is considered, that the revenues of many kingdoms do hardly, by half, amount to so much. At the same time it ought to be remembered that the extremely necessitous poor only, are supported by it; that the streets of London, notwithstanding all this, are crowded with beggars; that the poor blind, led by dogs, beg charity, and that this is equally the case, in proportion, in the country.

It is supposed, that a million of poor people are maintained at the public expense; but I should think there were a great many more: Their number increases every year. From a very accurate calcula­tion, made in the year 1680, it appears, that the annual sum, requisite to provide for the poor, amounted to 665,392 pounds sterling. In the year 1764, it had risen to upwards of 1,200,000 pounds; and, in the 1773, it exceeded, as before-mentioned, three millions; but even this sum was not sufficient for the purpose.

People who live on the continent, when they see a traveller who speaks either good or broken English, generally suppose him to be a Briton, whose pockets are lined plentifully with money. They bow to him, and make him pay, if an opportunity offers, accordingly. But I can assure my countrymen, if what I have said before has not already altered their opinion, that there are numbers of British-born subjects, such as the inhabitants of some of the western islands, who are unac­quainted with any coin; nay, others, who, perhaps, during their whole lives, never tasted a morsel of bread. An old man from one of the Ork­neys, arrived on the northern coast of Scotland, and tasting there some bread, which he found, according to his palate, very delicious, cried out, "Oh! how luxuriously the people live here!" Is there any one, even of the poorest, in Germany, of whom the same could be said, as of this old man, who, in all probability, had gone through life as hap­pily as many London epicures, and grown old, without those distem­pers that attend luxury. He, according to his way of living, hardly stood a chance of becoming a beggar; and even as such, he could not be very burdensome to his community.

I am almost of opinion with doctor Franklin, that this enormous sum, collected annually for the poor in England, increases their num­ber as well as their wretchedness, and that, perhaps, it might be for [Page 86] the benefit of the nation, if poor-rates were entirely abolished, and the distribution of charities left to every man's own discretion."

The English are dupes in several respects. They attend to projec­tors, and no scheme is so ridiculous that will not find abettors in Eng­land. They listen to the voice of misfortunes in trade, whether real or pretended, deserved or accidental, and generously contribute to the relief of the parties, sometimes even by placing them in a more cred­itable condition than ever; but they often make an oftentatious dis­play of their own merits, which diminishes their value. There is a­mong the generality of the English of all ranks, an unpardonable preference given to wealth, above most other considerations. Riches, both in publick and private, are often thought to compensate for the absence of almost every good quality. This offensive failing, arises partly from the people being so much accustomed to trade and com­merce, the great object of which is gain; and partly from the demo­cratical part of their constitution, which makes the possession of property a qualification for the legislature, and for almost every other species of magistracy, government, honours, and distinctions.

Men of learning, and genius, while living, often meet not with suitable regard even from the Patrons of literature: And it is not un­usual for them to throw aside the best productions, if they are not ac­quainted with the author. We scarcely have an instance, even in the munificent reign of Queen Anne, or of her predecessors, who owed so much to the press, of a man of genius as such, being made easy in his circumstances. Mr. Addison had about 300l. a year of the public money to assist him in his travels, and Mr. Pope, though a Roman catholic, was offered, but did not accept of, the like pension from Mr. Craggs, the whig secretary of state; and it was remarked, that history friend and companion the earl of Oxford, when sole minister, did nothing for him, but bewail his misfortune in being a papist.

The unevenness of the English in their conversation is very re­markable: Sometimes it is delicate, sprightly, and replete with true wit; sometimes it is solid, ingenious, and argumentative; sometimes it is cold and phlegmatic, and borders upon disgust, and all in the same person. They possess a great share of courage, and make the best of soldiers. The English are not remarkable for invention, though they are for their improvements upon the inventions of oth­ers, and in the mechanical arts they excel perhaps all nations in the world. The intense application which an Englishman gives to a fa­vourite study is incredible.

All that has been said concerning the English, is to be understood of them in general, as they are at present; for it is not to be dissem­bled, that every day produces strong evidence of great alterations in their manners. The great fortunes made during the late and the pre­ceding wars, the immense acquisitions of territory by the peace of 1763, and above all, the amazing increase of territorial as well as commercial property in the East Indies, introduced a species of people among the English, who have become rich without industry, and by diminishing the value of gold and silver, have created a new system of finances in the nation. The plain, frugal manners of men of business, which prevailed so lately as the accession of the present family to the crown, are now disregarded for tasteless extravagance in dress and [Page 87] equipage, and the most expensive amusements and diversions, not on­ly in the capital, but all over the trading towns of the kingdom.

Even the customs of the English have, since the beginning of this century, undergone an almost total alteration. Their ancient hospi­tality subsists but in few places in the country, or is revived only up­on electioneering occasions. Many of their favourite diversions are now disused. Those remainining, are operas, dramatic exhibitions, ridottos, and sometimes masquerades in or near London; but con­certs of music, and card and dancing assemblies, are common all over the kingdom. The barbarous diversions of boxing and prize-fighting, though prohibited, are as frequent in England, as the shews of gladi­ators were in Rome. The game acts have taken from the common people a great fund of diversion, though without answering the pur­poses of the rich: For the farmers and country people destroy the game in their nests, which they dare not kill with the gun.

The people of England love rather to be neat than fine in their ap­parel. Few even of the lowest tradesmen, on Sundays, carry about them less than 10l. in clothing, and even many beggars in the stre [...] appear decent in their dress. In short, none but the most abandoned of both sexes are otherwise; and the appearance of an artisan or manufacturer on holidays, is commonly an indication of his industry.

RELIGION.] The established religion in that part of Great-Brit­ain called England, is the episcopal church of England, a particular branch of protestantism, which in its liturgy, and still more in its government, differs from the continental protestant churches. It has preserved much more of the ancient hierarchy of the Roman Catholic church, together with its dignities and jurisdiction. The king is the head of the church, but he has no spiritual powers; he has the right of calling together and dissolving the convocation, or ecclesiastical parliament, by which the church was formerly governed, but which has, for many years past, not been allowed to meet. England is di­vided into two ecclesiastical provinces, that of Canterbury and York: The archbishop of Canterbury, who is primate of England, has 21 bishoprics belonging to his province; and three bishoprics are under the archbishop of York. All these prelates are lords of parliament, in which they represent the clergy; they have their seats in the House of Lords. There is, besides, the bishop of Sodor and Man, belong­ing to the province of York, who has no seat in the House of Peers. The other dignitaries of the church are the deans and prebendaries of the chapters, archdeacons, and rural deans; the inferior clergy con­sist of priests and deacons, who, according to the church benefices they occupy, are called rectors, vicars, and curates of parishes.

The revenues of the church of England are large; the present value of the sees and livings is supposed to amount to 3,000,000l. sterling. This income arises chiefly from the tythes, the value of which increases with the improvements of lands.

All other denominations of Christians, called Dissenters and Jews, are very liberally tolerated. There are many other Protestant sects in England, among whom the Unitarians, Baptists, Quakers, and Meth­odists, are the most conspicuous. The number of Roman Catholics in England is estimated at 60,000; they have about 350 priests; some peers of the kingdom, and several other ancient and opulent families [Page 88] belong to that communion, whose exercise of religion is under gentle [...] ­strictions; their number is said to be decreasing. There are about 60 [...] Quakers and 12,000 Jewish families. The numerous French and Gentle­man inhabitants in London form several Lutheran and Calvinisti [...] parishes.

LEARNING.] With respect to the state of knowledge and scien [...] England is entitled to an eminent rank among the first nations of Eu­rope. It must, however, be owned, that its superiority with resp [...] to sciences was more conspicuous in the beginning of the present [...] ­tury than now; though it has, upon the whole, not gone backwa [...] in the sciences, it has not been able, amidst the great exertions of [...] ­er countries, to leave them behind at the same distance. England [...] but two universities, or rather collections of universities, at Oxford and Cambridge, in which the wealth and splendor of the foundation [...] is deserving of admiration, and is a proof of the estimation in which learning has always been held in this country. It cannot be deni [...] [...] [...] universities, though gradually much reformed, preserve still too much of the spirit of the age of Alfred, and that they have [...] long ago, the lead in science and national literature, which is at p [...] ­ent transferred to the metropolis. Schools are very numerous [...] England: Besides some colleges of ancient foundation, there are [...] private schools and academies. As government does not in the least concern itself in the education of youth, any person, however qual­ified, is at liberty to open a school, a liberty which does often a great deal of mischief. The lower classes of people are much neglected [...] their education, and much more so in England than in Scotland. [...] this source of corruption we must trace the frequency of cri [...] equally injurious to the prosperity and glory of this great nation; [...] evil which is constantly increasing, and which the horrors of New­gate and Botany Bay will not be able to counteract. The zeal of [...] ­ny well-meaning persons, in establishing charitable institutions of edu­cation, called Sunday schools, is very laudable; and it is to be hoped these and other charity schools will be improved into permanent and effectual remedies of the evil beforementioned.

London has, besides the Royal Society of Sciences, an Antiq [...] Society▪ a Society for promoting Arts and Manufactures, an Academy of Painting and Sculpture, a grand collection of natural curiositi [...] books, and MSS. called the British Museum. Oxford and Cambridge possess large libraries; of which the Bodleian library, at Oxford, it the most celebrated. England abounds with magnificent seats of no­blemen and gentlemen, adorned with excellent collections of [...] pieces of painting, and surrounded by parks and gardens, which both by nature and art, form some of the most beautiful pieces of [...]enery in Europe. [ For the names of the most distinguished liter [...] character, which England has produced, the reader is reserved to the [...] of [...] men at the close of this work.]

UNIVERSITIES.] We have already mentioned the two universities of Oxford and Cambridge, which have been the seminaries of [...] numbers of learned men for many ages, and rank amongst the hig [...] [...] ­est literary institutions in Europe. It is certain that their mag [...] ­gent buildings, which in splendour and architecture rival the [...] superb royal edifices, the rich endowments, the liberal ease and [...] quality enjoyed by those who inhabit them, surpass all the ideas which [Page 89] foreigners, who visit them, conceive of literary societies. So respecta­ble are they in their foundations, that each university sends two mem­bers to the British parliament, and their chancellors and officers have ever a civil jurisdiction over their students, the better to secure their independency. Their colleges, in their revenues and buildings, ex­ceed those of many other universities. In Oxford there are twenty colleges and five halls: The former are very liberally endowed, but in the latter the students chiefly maintain themselves. The university is of great antiquity: It is supposed to have been a considerable place even in the time of the Romans; and Camden says that "wise an­tiquity did, even in the British age, consecrate this place to the Muses." It is said to have been styled an university before the time of king Al­fred; and the best historians admit, that this most excellent prince was only a restorer of learning here. Alfred built three colleges at Ox­ford; one for divinity, another for philosophy, and a third for gram­mar.

The number of officers, fellows, and scholars, maintained at present by the revenues of this university, is about 1000▪ and the number of such scholars as live at their own charge is usually about 2000; the whole amounting to 3000 persons, besides a great number of inferior officers and servants, belonging to the several colleges and halls. Here are four terms every year for public exercises, lectures, and disputa­tions, and set days and hours when the professors of every faculty read their lectures; and in some of the colleges are public lectures, to which all persons are admitted.

There are libraries belonging to the several colleges, but besides these, there are two other public libraries, the university library, and the Rad­cliffe library. The university library is usually called the Bodleian libra­ry, from Sir Thomas Bodley, its principal founder. It is a large lofty struc­ture, in the form of a Roman H, and is considered as one of the finest libraries in Europe, from the number and value of its books. The orig­inal library has been prodigiously increased, by many large and valua­ble collections of Greek and Oriental manuscripts, as well as other choice and curious books. The Radcliffe library is a sumptuous pile of building; and was built at the sole expense of that eminent physician, Dr. John Radcliffe, who bequeathed forty thousand pounds for this pur­pose. The theatre at Oxford is also a very magnificent structure, which was erected by Sir Christopher Wren, at the expense of Archbishop Shel­don. In this edifice are held the public acts of the university; and when the theatre is properly filled, the vice chancellor being seated in the centre of the semi-circular part, the noblemen and doctors on his right and left-hand, the proctors and curators in their robes, the mas­ters of arts, bachelors, and under-graduates, in their respective habits and places, together with strangers of both sexes, it makes a most august appearance.

The whole number of fellows in the university of Cambridge are four hundred; and six hundred and sixty-six scholars, with about two hun­dred and thirty-six officers and servants of various kinds who are main­tained upon the foundation. These, however, are not all the students of the university; there are also two sorts of students called pen­sioners, the greater and the less; the greater pensioners are sons of the nobility, and of gentlemen of large fortunes, and are called [Page 90] fellow-commoners, because, though they are scholars, they dine with [...] fellows; the lesser pensioners dine with the scholars that are on the foun­dation, but live at their own expense. There are also a considerably number of poor scholars, called sizars, who wait upon the fellows [...] scholars, and the pensioners of both ranks, by whom they are in a [...] degree maintained: But the number of pensioners and sizars cannot [...] ascertained, as it is in a state of perpetual fluctuation.

The senate-house at Cambridge is a most elegant edifice, executed en­tirely in the Corinthian order, and is said to have cost sixteen thousand pounds. Trinity college library is also a very magnificent structure and in Corpus Christi college library is a valuable collection of [...] manuscripts, which were preserved at the dissolution of the monasheri [...] and given to this college by archbishop Parker.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} The antiquities of England [...] either British, Roman, Saxon, [...] ­nish, and Anglo-Normanic; but these, excepting the Roman, [...] no great light upon ancient history. The chief British antiquities [...] those circles of stones, particularly that called Stonehenge, in Wilt [...]ing which probably were places of worship in the times of the Drui [...] Stonehenge is, described as a regular circular structure. The body [...] the work consists of two circles and two ovals, which are thus co [...] ­sed: The upright stones are placed at three feet and a half dist [...] from each other, and joined at the top by over-thwart stones, with [...] ­ons fitted to the mortises in the uprights, for keeping them in their [...] position. Some of these stones are vastly large, measuring two [...] in breadth, one in thickness, and above seven in height; others are [...] in proportion. The uprights are wrought a little with the chisel, [...] sometimes tapered; but the transomes, or over-thwart stones, are [...] plain. The outside circle is near one hundred and eighty feet in di­ameter; between which and the next circle there is a walk of [...] hundred feet in circumference, which has a surprising and awful [...] upon the beholders.

Monuments of the same kind are to be met with in Cumberland, [...] ­fordshire, Cornwall, and other parts of England, as well as Scotland, [...] the isles.

The Roman antiquities in England, consist chiefly of alters and [...] ­umental inscriptions, which instruct us as to the legionary stations [...] the Romans in Britain, and the names of some of their command [...]. The Roman military ways give us the highest idea of the civil as [...] as military policy of those conquerors. Their vestiges are numer [...] [...]. The remains of many Roman camps are discernible all over England [...] one particularly very little defaced, near Dorchester in Dorsetsh [...] where also is a Roman amphitheatre. The private cabinets of [...] men and gentlemen, as well as the public repositories, contain [...] number of Roman arms, coins, fibulae, trinkets, and the like, which have been found in England; but the most amazing monument of [...] Roman power in England, is the praetenture, or wall of Severus, [...] ­monly called the Picts wall, running through Northumberland and Cum­berland; begining at Tinmouth, and ending at Solway Frith, [...] about eighty miles in length. The wall at first consisted only of [...] and turf, with a ditch; but Severus built it with stone forts, and [...] ­ [...]ets at proper distances, so that each might have a speedy commu [...] ­tion [Page 91] with the other, and it was attended all along by a deep ditch, or vallum, to the north, and a military highway to the south. This prodig­ious work, however, was better calculated to strike the Scots and Picts with terror, than to give any real security to the Roman possessions. In some places, the wall, the vallum, and the road, are plainly discerni­ble▪ and the latter serves as a foundation for a modern work of the [...] kind carried on at the publick expense.

The Saxon antiquities in England consist chiefly in ecclesiastical edi­fices, and places of strength. The cathedral of Winchester served as the burying-place of several Saxon kings, whose bones were collected together by bishop Fox, in six large wooden chests. The British Mu­ [...] contains several striking original specimens of their learning. Many Saxon characters, signed by the king and his nobles, with a plain cross instead of their names, are still to be met with. The writing is ne [...]t and legible, and was always performed by a clergyman, who affix­ed the name and quality of every donor, or witness, to his respective cross.

All England is full of Anglo-Normanic monuments so called because, though the princes under whom they were raised were of Norman origin, yet the expense was defrayed by Englishmen, with English money. Yorkminister and Westminister hall and abbey, are perhaps the finest specimens to be found in Europe, of that Gothic manner which prevailed in building, before the recovery of the Greek and Ro­man architecture. All the cathedrals, and old churches in the king­dom, are more or less in the same taste, if we except St. Paul's.

The natural curiosities of England are so various, that we can touch upon them only in general; as there is no end of describing the sever­al medicinal waters and springs which are to be found in every part of the country. They have been analysed with great accuracy and care by several learned naturalists, who, as their interests or inclinations led them, have not been sparing in recommending their salubrious qualities. The most remarkable of these wells have been divided into those for bathing and those for purging. The chief of the former lie in Somersetshire: and the Bath waters are famous through all the world both for drinking and bathing. Spaws of the same kind are found at Scarborough, and other parts of Yorkshire; at Tunbridge in Kent; Epsom and Dulwich in Surry, and at Action and Islington in Middle­sex. There also are many remarkable springs, whereof some are im­pregnated either with salt, as that at Droitwich in Worcestershire; or sulphur, as the famous well of Wigan in Lancashire; or hituminous matter, as that at Pitchford in Shropshire. Others have a petrifying quality, as that near Lutterworth in Leicestershire; and a dropping well in the west-riding of Yorkshire. And finally, some ebb and flow, as those of the Peak in Derbyshire, and Laywell near Torbay, whose waters rise and fall several times in an hour. To these we may add that remarkable fountain near Richard's castle in Herefordshire, commonly called Bonewell, which is generally full of small bones, like those of frogs or fish, though often cleared out. At Ancliff, near Wigan in Lancashire, is the famous burning well; the water is cold, neither has it any smell; yet there is so strong a vapour of sulphur issuing out with the stream, that upon applying a light to it, the top of the water is cov­ered with a flame, like that of burning spirits, which lasts several hours, [Page 92] and emits so fierce a heat that meat may be boiled over it. The [...] itself will not burn when taken out of the well. *

Derbyshire is celebrated for many natural curiosities. The [...] Tor, or Mother Tower, is said to be continually mouldering away [...] never diminishes. The Elden Hole, about four miles from the [...] place: This is a chasm in the side of a mountain, near seven yards [...] and fourteen long, diminishing in extent within the rock, [...]ut of [...] depth is not known. A plummet once drew 884 yards of line [...] whereof the last 80 were wet, without finding a bottom. The entran [...] Poole's hole near Buxton, for several paces, is very low, but soon [...] into a very lofty vault, like the inside of a Gothic cathedral. The [...] is certainly very great, yet much short of what some have asserted, [...] reckon it a quarter of a mile perpendicular, though in length it [...] that dimension; a current of water, which runs along the middle, [...] by its sounding stream, re-echoed on all sides, very much to the [...] ­ishment of all who visit this vast concave. The drops of water [...] l [...]ng from the roof, and on the sides have an amusing effect; for [...] not only reflect numberless rays from the candles carried by the gui [...] but, as they are of a petrifying quality, they harden in several pla [...] to various forms, which, with the help of a strong imagination, [...] pass for lions, fonts, organs, and the like. The entrance into that [...] ­ural wonder at Castleton, which is from its hideousness named the [...] ­il's Arse, is wide at first, and upwards of thirty feet perpendicular. [...] ­eral cottagers dwell under it, who seem in a great measure to subsist [...] guiding strangers into the cavern▪ which is crossed by four strea [...] water, and then is thought impassable. The vault, in several [...] makes a noble appearance, and is particularly beautiful by being [...] ­uered with various coloured stones.

Some spots of England are said to have a petrifying quality. We [...] told, that near Whitby in Yorkshire are found certain stones, res [...] ­ling the folds and wreaths of a serpent; also other stones of [...] ­fia [...]s, and so exactly round, as if artificially made for cannon [...] which being broken, do commonly contain the form and likeness [...] serpents, wreathed in circles, but generally without heads. In [...] parts of Gloucestershire, stones are found, resembling cockles, oys [...] and other testac [...]ous marine animals. Those curiosities, however, [...] often magnified by ignorance and credulity.

CITIES, TOWNS, FORTS, AND OTHER EDIFICIES, PUBLIC AND PRIVATE.} This head is so very exten­sive, that we can only [...] upon objects that may assist in giving the reader some idea of its im­portance, grandeur, or utility.

London▪ the metropolis of the British empire, naturally takes [...] lead in this division. It appears to have been founded between [...] reigns of Julius Caesar and Nero, but by whom is uncertain; for [...] are told by Tacitus, that it was a place of great trade in Nero's [...] [Page 93] and soon after became the capital of the island. It was first walled about with hewn stones, and British bricks, by Constantine the Great, and the walls formed an oblong square, in compass about three miles, with seven principal gates. The same emperor made it a bishop's see; for it appears that the bishops of London and York, and another English bishop were at the council of Arles, in the year 3 [...]4: He also settled a mint in it, as is plain from some of his coins.

London in its large sense, including Westminister, Southwark, and part of Middlesex, is a city of a very surprising extent, of prodigious wealth, and of the most extensive trade. This city, when considered with all its advantages, is now what ancient Rome once was; the seat of liberty, the encourager of arts, and the admiration of the whole world. London is the centre of trade; it has an intimate connexion with all the counties in the kingdom; it is the grand mart of the na­tion, to which all parts send their commodities, from whence they are again sent back into every town in the nation, and to every part of the world. From hence innumerable carriages by land and water are con­stantly employed; and from hence arises that circulation in the nation­al body, which renders every part healthful, vigorous, and in a pros­perous condition; a circulation that is equally beneficial to the head, and the most distant members. Merchants are here as rich as noble­men; witness their incredible loans to government; and there is no place in the world where the shops of tradesmen make such a noble and elegant appearance, or are better stocked.

It is situated on the banks of the Thames, a river, which though not the largest, is the richest and most commodious for commerce in the world. It being continually filled with fleets, sailing to or from the most distant climates; and its banks extend from London-bridge to Blackwall, almost one continued great magazine of naval stores, con­taining three large wet docks, 32 dry docks, and 33 yards for the build­ing of ships, for the use of the merchants, besides the places allotted for the building of boats and lighters; and the king's yards lower down the river for the building of men of war. As this city is about sixty miles distant from the sea, it enjoys by means of this beautiful river, all the benefits of navigation, without the danger of being sur­prised by foreign fleets, or of being annoyed by the moist vapours of the sea. It rises regularly from the water-side, and extending itself on both sides along its banks, reaches a prodigious length from east to west in a kind of amphitheatre towards the north, and is continued for near 20 miles on all sides, in a succession of magnificent villas, and popu­lous villages, the country seats of gentlemen and tradesmen; whither the latter retire for the benefit of fresh air, and to relax their minds from the hurry of business. The regard paid by the legislature to the prop­erty of the subject, has hitherto prevented any bounds being fixed for its extension.

The irregular form of this city makes it difficult to ascertain its ex­tent. However, its length from east to west, is generally allowed to be above seven miles from Hydepark corner to Poplar, and its breadth in some places three, in others two; and in others again not much above half a mile. Hence the circumference of the whole is almost 18 miles; or according to a modern measurement, the extent of continued build­ings, is 35 miles two furlongs and 39 roods. But it is much easier to [Page 94] form an idea of the large extent of a city so irregularly built, by [...] number of the people, who are computed to be near 4 million; and from the number of edifices devoted to the service of religion.

Of these, besides St. Paul's cathedral, and the collegiate church [...] Westminister, here are 102 parish churches, and 69 chapels of the estab­lished religion; [...] French protestant chapels; 11 chapels belonging to the Germans, Dutch, Dan [...], &c. 26 independent meetings, 34 pre [...] ­terian meetings; 10 baptist meetings; 19 Roman Catholic chap [...] and meeting houses for the use of foreign ambassadors, and people [...] various sects; and 3 Jews synagogues. So that there are 305 plac [...] devoted to religious worship, in the compass of this vast pile of build­ings, without reckoning the [...] out-parishes usually included in [...] bills of mortality, and a great number of methodist tabernacles.

There are also in and near this city 100 alms houses, about 20 hospit­als and infirmaries, 3 colleges, 10 public prisons, 15 flesh markets; [...] market for live cattle, 2 other markets more particularly for her [...] and 23 other markets for corn, coals, hay, &c. 15 inns of court, of public squares, besides those within single buildings as the Temple, [...] 3 bridges, 49 halls for companies, 8 public schools, called free schools and 131 charity-schools which provide education for 5034 poor child­ren; 207 inns, 447 taverns, 661 coffee houses, 5975 alehouses; [...] hackney-coaches; 400 ditto chairs; 7000 streets, lanes, courts, and alleys, and 150,000 dwelling-houses, containing, as has been already observed, about 1,000,000 inhabitants, who, according to a late [...] ­mate, consume annually the following articles of provisions. *

Black Cattle 98,244
Sheep and Lambs 711,1 [...]
Calves 194,76 [...]
Swine 186,932
Pigs 52,000
Poultry, and wild fowl innumerable  
Mackarel sold at Billingsgate 14,740,000
Oysters, bushels 115,536
Small boats with cod, haddock, whiting, &c. over and above those brought by land-carriage, and great quantities of river and salt-fish 1,39 [...]
Butter, pounds weight, about 16,000,000
Cheese, ditto. about 20,000,000
Gallons of milk 7,000,000
Barrels of strong beer 1,172,494
Barrels of small beer 798,495
Tons of foreign wines 30,044
Gallons of rum, brandy, and other distilled waters, above 11,000,000
Pounds weight of candles, above 11,000,000

London Bridge consists of 20 arches, and is 900 feet long, 60 [...] and 74 feet broad. London Bridge was first built of timber, about the year 994, by a College of Priests—It was repaired or new-built [...] 1 [...]63. The stone bridge was begun by king Henry, in 1 [...]76, [...] [Page 95] finished by king John, in 1209. The architect was Peter of Cole­church, a priest.

Westminster-bridge is reckoned one of the most complete and ele­gant structures of the kind in the known world. It is built entirely of stone, and extended over the river at a place where it is 1,223 feet broad; which is above 300 feet broader than at London bridge. On each side is a fine ballustrade of stone with places of shelter from the rain. The width of the bridge is 44 feet, having on each side a fine foot-way for passengers. It consists of 14 piers, and 13 large, and two small arches, all semi-circular, that in the centre being 76 feet wide, and the rest decreasing four feet each from the other; so that the two least arches of the 13 great ones, are each 52 feet. It is computed that the value of 40,000l. in stone, and other materials, is always under wa­ter. This magnificent structure was begun in 173 [...], and finished in 1750, at the expense of 389,000l. defrayed by the Parliament.

Black-friars-bridge, situated near the centre of the city, built accord­ing to a plan of Mr. Robert Mylne, is a light elegant structure. It has but 9 arches, which are very large, and of an eliptical form. The cen­tre arch is 100 feet wide—the others decrease in regular gradation. It has an open ballustrade at the top, and a foot way on each side, with room for three carriages a breast in the middle. It has also recesses on the sides for foot passengers, each supported by two lofty Ionic col­umns. This bridge was begun in 1760, and finished in 1770, at the expense of 152,840l. to be discharged by a toll upon the passengers. It is situated almost at an equal distance between those of Westminster and London, commands a view of the Thames from the latter to Whitehall, and discovers the majesty of St. Paul's in a very striking manner.

The cathedral of St. Paul's is the most capacious, magnificent, and regular Protestant church in the world. The length within is 500 feet; and its height, from the marble pavement to the cross, on the top of the cupola, is 340. It is built of Portland stone, according to the Greek and Roman orders, in the form of a cross, after the model of St. Peter's at Rome, to which, in some respects it is superior. St. Paul's church is the principal work of Sir Christopher Wren, and undoubtedly the only work of the same magnitude that ever was com­pleted by one man. He lived to a great age, and finished the build­ing 37 years after he himself laid the first stone. It takes up six acres of ground, though the whole length of this church measures no more than the width of St. Peter's. The expense of rebuilding it after the fire of London, was defrayed by a duty on coals, and is computed at a million sterling.

Westminster-abbey, or the collegiate church of Westminster, is a venerable pile of building, in the Gothic taste. It was first built by Edward the Confessor; king Henry III. rebuilt it from the ground, and Henry VII. added a fine chapel to the east end of it; this is the repository of the deceased Birtish kings and nobility; and here are also monuments erected to the memory of many great and illustrious per­sonages, commanders by sea and land, philosophers, poets, &c. In the reign of queen Anne, 4000l. a year out of the coal duty, was granted by parliament for keeping it in repair.

The Banquetting-house at Whitehall, is but a very small part of a noble palace, designed by Inigo Jones, for the royal residence, and as [Page 96] it now stands, under all its disadvantages, its symmetry, and ornament are in the highest stile and execution of architecture.

Westminster-hall, though on the outside it makes a mean, and no v [...]ry advantageous appearance, is a noble Gothic building, and is said to be the largest room in the world, whose roof is not supported with pillars, it being 200 feet long, and 70 broad. Its roof is the finest of its kind that can be seen. Here are held the coronation feasts of our kings and queens; also the courts of chancery, king's-bench, and common-pleas, and above stairs, that of the exchequer.

That beautiful column, called the Monument, erected at the char [...] of the city, to perpetuate the memory of its being destroyed by fire, it justly worthy of notice. This column, which is of the Doric order, exceeds all the obelisks and pillars of the ancients, it being 202 feet high, with a stair-case in the middle to ascend to the balcony, which i [...] about 30 feet short of the top, from whence there are other steps, [...] for persons to look out at the top of all, which is fashioned like [...] ­urn, with a flame issuing from it. On the base of the monument [...] the street, the destruction of the city, and the relief given to the suffer­ers by Charles II. and his brother, is emblematically represented [...] bass relief. The north and south sides of the base have each a [...] inscription, the one describing its dreadful desolation, * and the other its splendid resurrection; and on the east side is an inscription, she [...] ­ing when the pillar was begun and finished. The charge of erection this monument, which was begun by Sir Christopher Wren, in [...] and finished by him in 1677, amounted to upwards of 13,000l.

The Royal Exchange is a large noble building, and is said to have cost above 80,000l.

The terrace in the Adelphi is a very fine piece of architecture, and has laid open one of the finest prospects in the world.

We might here give a description of the Tower, Bank of England, the new Treasury, the Admiralty-Office, and the Horse-Guards at [Page 97] Whitehall, the Mansion-house of the lord mayor, the Custom-house, Excise-office, India-house, and a vast number of other public buildings, besides Montague-house, * in Bloomsbury, with a number of others of the nobility and gentry; but these would be sufficient to fill a large volume.

This great and populous city is happily supplied with abundance of fresh water from the Thames and the New River; which is not only of inconceivable service to every family, but by means of fire plugs ev­ery where dispersed, the keys of which are deposited with the parish [Page 98] officers, the city is in a great measure secured from the spreading of fire; for these plugs are no sooner opened than there are vast quanti­ties of water to supply the engines.

This plenty of water has been attended with another advantage, it has given rise to several companies, who insure houses and goods from fire. The premium is small, and the recovery in case of loss, is easy and certain. Every one of these officers keep a set of men in pay, who are ready at all hours to give their assistance in case of fire; and who are on all occasions extremely bold, dexterous, and diligent.

Before the conflagration in 1666, London was totally inelegant, in­convenient, and unhealthy, of which latter misfortune many melan­choly proofs are authenticated in history, and which, without doubt, proceeded from the narrowness of the streets, and the unaccountable projections of the buildings, that confined the putrid air, and joined with other circumstances, such as the want of water, rendered the city seldom free from pestilential devastation. The fire which consumed the greatest part of the city, dreadful as it was to the inhabitants of that time, was productive of consequences, which made ample amends for the losses sustained by individuals; a new city arose on the ruins of the old; but though more regular, open, convenient, and healthful than the former, yet it is ever to be lamented (such was the infatuation of those times) that the magnificent, elegant, and useful plan of the great Sir Christopher Wren, was totally disregarded and sacrificed [...] the mean and selfish views of private property. Views which did ir­reparable injury to the citizens themselves, and to the nation in general; for had that great architect's plan been followed, what has often been asserted, must have been the result; the metropolis of this kingdom would incontestably have been the most magnificent and elegant city in the world.

In fine, London unites in itself all the benefits arising from naviga­tion and commerce, with those of a metropolis at which all the public business of a great nation is transacted; and is at the same time the mercantile and political head of the whole Empire. It is also the seat of many considerable manufactures. The most important of its pecu­liar manufactures is the silk weaving, established in Spital-fields by refugees from France. A variety of works in gold, silver, and jewelry; the engraving of prints; the making of optical and mathematical instru­ments, are likewise principally or solely executed here, and some of them in greater perfection, than in any other country. The porter brewery, a business of very great extent, is also chiefly carried on in London. To its port are likewise confined some branches of foreign commerce, as the vast East-India trade, and that to Turkey and Hudson's Bay.

Bristol city, in Somersetshire, is situated at the conflux of the river Avon, with the small stream of the Froom, at the distance of about 10 miles from the place where the Avon empties into the Seve [...] mouth, in point of wealth, trade and population has long been rech [...] ­ed, second to London, within this kingdom. The great trade of British is supported by its extensive inland communications with the Seve [...] and all its branches, the Avon, the Wye, and various other stream. Hence it enjoys the export and import traffic of a large part of [...] kingdom, and is enabled to find a market for a great variety of its [...] [Page 99] manufactures, such as glass ware, hard soap, hats, leather, white lead, gun-powder, earthen ware. &c. The refining of sugar, which they import from the West-Indies, is one of the principal manufactures of Bristol. They have 70 or 80 ships constantly employed in the West-India trade. The city is compactly built; but is now extending itself, like other large cities, into its suburbs, by new and more airy streets.

The city of York has always been considered as the capital of the north, and in point of rank, as the second in the kingdom. Its minister or cathedral is one of the most elegant gothic structures in the kingdom. From its top is seen a vast extent of country. This city has a stone bridge, with five arches over the river Ouse. Though in wealth and populousness, this city falls behind several newer trading towns, it still supports a considerable degree of consequence, and is inhabited by many genteel families. It is in the county of Yorkshire.

Exeter, the capital of Devonshire, is the principal city for size and consequence in the west of England, and the seat of an extensive for­eign and domestic commerce. The trade of Exeter consists principally in the exportation of coarse woollen goods manufactured in the coun­ties of Devon, Cornwall, and part of Somerset. These are sold as they come from the loom, to the merchants at Exeter, who procure them to be milled, dyed and finished, and then export them. These goods consist chiefly of articles little consumed in England, as druggets, duroys, longells, and serges. The markets for them are first Italy, then Spain, Germany, Holland, Portugal, and lately France. The average annual value exported is reckoned at £.600,000 sterling. Besides which £.105,000 worth of longells are purchased by the East-India company. For making these woollens, about 4000 bags of wool are imported from Kent.

Gloucester, the capital of Gloucestershire, stands on a pleasant hill, and has lately been much improved. Its four principal streets have been much admired for the regularity of their junction in the centre of the town. A pin-manufactury affords the principal employment to the inhabitants of this city. It has also several Glass houses. They riv­er Severn washes it on one side, by which it carries on a considerable traffic.

Birmingham, is situated in the north-western part of Warwickshire, and is noted for its vast variety of useful and ornamental articles, such as metal buttons, buckles, plated goods of all kinds, japanned and pa­per ware, and other hard ware manufactures; in consequence of which it has risen to be superior in populousness to any other of the mod­ern trading towns in England, and has filled the surrounding country with its industrious inhabitants. It is plentifully supplied with coals by means of a canal to Wednesbury in Staffordshire; and it has a com­munication with the great trunk from the Trent to the Severn, by means of a branch passing by Wolverhampton. The Birmingham goods are dispersed about the kingdom, but chiefly sent to London, by land carriage. They are exported in great quantities to foreign coun­tries, where, in point of cheapness and show united, they are unrival­ed; so that Birmingham has become, according to the emphatical ex­pression of a great Orator, the toy-shop of Europe.

Poole, in Dorsetshire, is situated on a peninsula, projecting into a capacious bay, branching into many creeks, and forming several islands. [Page 100] The harbour admits vessels of moderate size only, but for them it is v [...] ­ry secure. Poole rose to some consequence several centuries ago, when the ancient town of Wareham fell into decay. It now ranks high among the seaports of England, and its trade and population are rapid­ly increasing. The principal branch of business here, is the New­foundland fishery, to which it sends annually a large number of vessels, which carry out provisions and commodities, and bring back cargoes of fish, caught on the great cod banks, which are carried to Spain, Por­tugal and Italy. This port has also a large importation of deals from Norway and a general commerce to America, and various parts of Eu­rope. Great quantities of corn are sent from it in coasters, and it im­ports Newcastle coal for all the eastern part of the country. Near the mouth of Poole harbour lies an Oyster bank, upon which are employ­ed, during the season, a number of smacks, which carry away vast quantities of them, to be fattened in the Essex and Thames Creek for the London market.

Burton, upon the river Trent, at the head of its navigation, in Staffordshire, is noted for the excellence of its malt liquor, great quantities of which are sent down the river to Hull, and thence ex­ported to other parts of the kingdom and abroad. The longest bridge in England is that over the Trent at this place, built by Barnard, Ab­bot of Burton, in the 12th century. It is all of squared free-stone, and 1545 feet long, consisting of 34 arches. This, however, comes far short of the wooden bridge over the Drave, a river of Germany, which, according to Dr. Brown, is 5 miles long.

Dover, in the county of Kent, formerly a place of the greatest im­portance, and accounted the key of the island, is at present known chiefly as the station of the French and Flemish pacquets, and the shortest passage to the continent. The distance from Dover to Calais is but 27 miles; and in the narrowest part of the straits the two lands are only 21 miles apart. The harbour of Dover is formed by a gap i [...] the cliffs, which are here of sublime height, though some what exagge­rated in the most picturesque description of Shakespeare. Dover i [...] the principal of those ancient port towns, called Cinque ports, former­ly of great consequence, now become almost insignificant. The country inland from Dover, consists chiefly of open downs, excellent for the feeding of sheep.

The city of Bath took its name from some natural hot baths, for the medicinal waters of which this place has been long celebrated, and much frequented. The seasons for drinking the Bath waters and the spring and autumn: The spring season begins with April, and ends with June; the autumn season begins with September, and [...] till December, and some patients remain here all the winter. In [...] spring, this place is most frequented for health, and in the autu [...] for pleasure, when at least two-thirds of the company, consisting chiefly of persons of rank and fortune, come to partake of the amusements of the place. In some seasons there have been no [...] than 8000 persons at Bath, besides its inhabitants. Some of [...] buildings lately erected here are extremely elegant, particularly Qu [...] Square, the North and South Parade, the Royal Forum, and [...] Circus.

No nation in the world can shew such dock-yards, and all co [...] ­niencies for the construction and repair of the royal navy at Ports [...] [Page 101] (the most regular fortification in England) Plymouth (by far the best dock-yard) Chatham, Woolwich, and Deptford. The royal hospital at Greenwich, for superannuated seamen, is scarcely exceeded by any royal palace for its magnificence and expense.

WEALTH, COMMERCE, REVENUE AND NAVIGATION OF GREAT-BRITAIN.} The two divisions of Great-Britain, England and Scot­land, differ exceedingly with respect to their natural fertility and to the wealth of their inhabitants. South-Britain, or England, abounds with all the useful productions of those countries of Europe which are situated in the same climate with it, wine, silk, and some wild ani­mals excepted. The genius and industry of the inhabitants have in­creased and improved many of the natural productions to a degree which leaves the efforts of all neighbouring nations at a distance. Agriculture, the art of gardening, the cultivation of all those plants which are most useful for feeding cattle as well as breeding horses and sheep, are carried in England to an astonishing height. Of about 42,000,000 acres, which England contains, only 8,500,000 produce corn; the rest is either covered with wood, or laid out in meadows, gardens, parks, &c. and a considerable part is still waste land. Yet out of the crops obtained from the fifth part of the lands, there have been exported, during the space of five years, from 1745 to 1750, quantities of corn to the value of 7,600,000l. sterling. About the year 1766 it was found, that the exportation of corn was carried too far, and proved prejudicial to the country; it was consequently en­tirely prohibited, and the importation of corn permitted. The net produce of the English corn-land is estimated by Mr. Young at 9,000,000l. sterling; the rents of pasture-ground, meadows, woods, commons, &c. at 7,000,000l. the number of people engaged in and maintained by farming is stated by him to amount to 2,800,000 per­sons. Among the other useful plants, hops, saffron, wood, and madder, are become very important articles of commerce. Malt­liquor and cyder are brought in England to a very high degree of perfection, and render wine a superfluity; yet luxury deems the latter essentially necessary.

The counties of Cheshire, Lancashire, Yorkshire, Leicestershire, Derbyshire, Norfolk, Suffolk, Kent, Gloucestershire, and Somer­setshire, are most distinguished for their excellent cattle. They city of Chester exports annually 22,000 tons of cheese, 14,000 of which are sent to London. One of the greatest sources of the riches of England is wool, the great staple commodity of this country. The stock of the best sort of the present English sheep came over from Spain; Ed­ward the IVth had 3000 Spanish sheep brought over, which he or­dered to be distributed among the several parishes of England; and ever since that time, great care has been taken to continue and to im­prove the breed: There are instances, that a single ram, of extraordi­nary beauty and strength, has been purchased with 100 guineas. The counties of Herefordshire, Gloucestershire, Somersetshire, Hampshire, Dorsetshire, Derbyshire, Leicestershire, Lincolnshire, Durham, and the East-riding of Yorkshire, are most famous for their large and ex­cellent flocks. At the beginning of the present century, the number of sheep was computed to amount to 12 millions, and there is no doubt but that this number has been greatly increased since that time. [Page 102] In the years 1769, 1770, and 1771, the value of the woollens ex­ported from England amounted to upwards of 10,500,000l. sterling, exclusive of the woollens of Yorkshire, the value of which, in the same period of time, amounted to upwards of 3,000,000l. sterling. The English horses, the breed of which as before observed, has been much improved by Arabian, Spanish, and Barbary horses, are famous all over Europe for their beauty and swiftness. The best race-horses run 82½ feet in one second, or nearly an English mile in one minute.

Though neither gold nor silver is found in the English mines, or only in quantities too insignificant to be mentioned, yet the other minerals are great sources of wealth. Copper, tin, lead, and iron, are found in great abundance, and the first two metals of the very best quality. The copper annually obtained from the mines of Cornwall is estimated at 4000 tons; the number of Cornish miners is said to a­mount to 80,000 people. The tin of Cornwall is valued at 200,000l. sterling annually. Northumberland, Durham, Lancashire, Cumber­land, Shropshire, Staffordshire, Wales, and Devonshire, produce large quantities of iron, which is, however, of an inferior quality to the iron of Sweden, Sti [...]ia, Carinthia, and Russia; it is therefore necessary to import from these countries upwards of 25,000 tons, for the manufactures of finer tools and hardware. The most important manufactures of the latter sort are at Sheffield, where it is supposed upwards of 40,000 workmen are employed by about 600 owners and manufacturers. One company of iron manufacturers in Shropshire use every day 500 tons of coals in their works. In Great-Britain there is made every year 50—60,000 tons of pig-iron, and 20—30,000 tons of bar-iron.

England possesses a very great treasure in its inexhaustible coal mines, which are worked chiefly in the northern counties, from whence they are conveyed by sea and by the inland canals to every other part of the kingdom. The mines of Northumberland alone send every year upwards of 600,000 chaldron of coals to London, and 1500 vessels are employed in carrying them to that harbour, along the eastern coast of England. This trade and navigation is one of the great nurseries of seamen, and, in that respect, of the utmost importance to the commerce and preservation of the empire.

Manufacrtures in England have been carried to higher perfection than in any other country. An enumeration of them would compre­hend almost every contrivance of mechanism in its most improved state, which ever was invented by the ingenuity of any age or coun­try for the convenience and use of man. Their surprising perfection must be accounted for from many circumstances, which no where co­incided so happily to promote their progress as they do in this island. It seems they are nearly equally indebted to the national character, to the situation of the country, and the excellence of its constitution. Nothing could be more favourable to the progress of the mechanical arts, than the English reflection and perseverance, and the exclusive attention they are able to bestow on favourite pursuits, often wi [...] the neglect of every other concern, and their enterprising spirit, [...] desponding under the bad success of first trials, animated by the pros­pect of ample rewards, and by the certainty of enjoying the glo [...] and the fruits of their labours. The insular situation of England [Page 103] taught its inhabitants to consider the surrounding ocean as the bulwark of their safety, the theatre of their power, and the source of their wealth. Navigation with its appendages, distant acquisitions and colonization, gave an astonishing extent to commerce, and an air of grandeur and importance to the occupations of a merchant, which flattered ambition as well as the love of gain. The mere natural pro­ductions of the country were insufficient for so large a market; it was deficient in articles of luxury and the precious metals. Manu­facturing industry was therefore called forth, in order to supply mate­rials for commerce; and every new invention of mechanical genius sound liberal support and encouragement from the great number of people who had acquired wealth. The English government, favour­able to liberty and to every exertion of genius, has provided by wise and equitable laws for the secure enjoyment of property acquired by ingenuity and labour, and has removed obstacles to industry, by pro­hibiting the importation of such articles from abroad which could be manufactured at home. Next to the woollen manufactory, that of cot­ton is the most considerable, as it is reckoned to employ in the north­ern and middle counties not less than 500,000 persons, women and children included.

Among the advantages the British islands are possessed of, with respect to navigation, the following are worthy of attention: The great extent of the coasts, the sea-line of which, including both Great-Britain and Ireland, extends near 3800 miles, whereas the sea­coast of France has but 1000 miles; the neighbourhood to the conti­nent; the number of excellent harbours; the number of navigable canals which form a communication between the sea-ports on the eastern and western coasts of England.

The constant increase of this immense commerce is astonishing. In the years 1783 and 1784, the ships cleared outwards, amounting to 950,000 tons, exceed the number of tons of the ships employed 24 years ago (1760) by upwards of 400,000 tons. The value of the car­goes exported in 1784, amounted to upwards of 15,000,000l. sterling; and the net customs paid for them into the Exchequer were upwards of 3,000,000l. sterling; and even this sum was exceeded the follow­ing year, 1785, by upwards of 1,000,000l.

The balance of trade in favour of England is estimated by some au­thors at 3,000,000l. sterling. Far more considerable is the inland trade, valued at upwards of 42,000,000l. sterl.—As the quantity of cir­culating specie may in some measure indicate the extent of commerce, we may judge of the increase of the latter, by comparing the sums which the three last monarchs found necessary to coin. By George I. 8,725,921l. sterling were coined. In the long reign of George II. 11,965,576l. sterling, and in the first 24 years of his present majesty's reign, the sums coined amounted to 33,089,274l. sterling.

The coasting trade is said to give employment to about 100,000 people; but this number seems to be exaggerated. Yet some branch­es of the fisheries require a great number of hands. About 10,000 people are employed in the oyster-fishery along the coasts of England. On the coasts of Scotland great fisheries are carried on; there have been sometimes upwards of 300 vessels employed in the herring-fishe­ry. About 40,000 tons of herrings are annually imported into the port of Yarmouth by 1100 vessels: the whole annual quantity of [Page 104] salt-herrings and cured pilchards amounts to 150,000 tons. [...] Newfoundland there have been carried to foreign markets [...] quintals of fish in 1785; this fishery is another great nursery of [...] men. The English whale-fishery on the coasts of Greenland em­ploys more ships than are sent thither for the same purpose by [...] Dutch.

By far the most important part of foreign commerce is carried [...] privileged trading companies, among which the East-India Company is the most distinguished, by its very brilliant and extraordinary [...] ­cess, and by its influence on the general interests of the whole [...] [...] ­pire. It dates its origin from the time of queen Elizabeth; its [...] [...] ­ress was for a long time gradual and disputed by a rival comp [...] with which it was at length incorporated, and obtained the [...] of parliament for an exclusive trade to the East-Indies and [...] for a limited number of years, in consideration of a large sum ad­vanced to the public. These privileges were afterwards renew [...]. Within these last thirty years the company has made vast territ [...] acquisitions in India, which increased in an extraordinary [...] the trade, power. and importance of this company. Its trade em­ploys 110 ships and about 8000 men; the articles exported to [...] consist in woollens of all sorts, bullion, hardware, lead, and [...] silver; the imports in gold, diamonds, raw silk, spices, tea, [...] ­petre, arrack, and China porcelaine. The revenues of the comp [...] are said to amount to upwards of 3,000,000l. sterling annually; [...] the expense of governing and defending their acquisitions; the [...] in which they are often involved, and the peculations of their ser­vants, have been very great drawbacks upon their profits. The [...] fairs of the East-India Company are under the management of 2 [...] [...] rectors, residing in England, and chosen by the court of propri [...] of East-India stock. The directors formerly appointed their serv [...] abroad; but the conduct of these servants, and the large domin [...] acquired by the company, covering upwards of 280,000 square miles and containing 30 millions of inhabitants, rendered an alteration [...] the constitution of this great commercial body. and the interfe [...] of government in its affairs, necessary. An act of parliament, posses in 1773, among other regulations, gave the presidency of Bengal [...] superiority over the other presidencies in India, vested the right of nominating a governor-general in the crown, and established a [...] of justice in India. Yet this regulation was found insufficient to an­swer the intended purposes, and to repress the enormous abuses com­mitted by the company's servants. After the failure of Mr. [...] plan for the government of the East-India Company in 1783, an [...] of parliament passed in 1784, which established a board of contr [...] in England, to be nominated by the crown, which was calculated [...] connect the civil and military government in India with that over [...] whole empire, to superintend the regulations and orders made [...] the directors of the company, and to call the conduct of its servants [...] account. Time must shew, whether the provisions of Mr. Pitt's [...] will be an adequate cure of the evils which have affected the prosp [...] and stability of this extraordinary commercial society.

The Levant Company is at present of no great consequence, as [...] trade to the Levant has been laid open, and as the French have acqui [...] a great superiority in the commerce of the Mediterranean.

[Page 105] The South-Sea Company is only nominally a commercial company; it is rather an incorporated society of stockholders, to whom govern­ment is indebted. Its affairs are managed by a governour, two sub­governours, and one and twenty directors.

The Hudson's-Bay Company carries on an extensive trade in peltry with very considerable profits: But in all probability its interests will be materially affected by the separation of the American colonies from Great-Britain, and by the late commercial schemes of the French in the Pacific Ocean, especially between Kamtskatka and North-America.

The Bank of England was incorporated in 1694; this company deals, by the sanction of parliament, in bills of exchange, it buys and fells bullion, and manages government annuities paid at its office. The credit of this company is the most extensive of any company in Europe. It is one of the principal creditors of the nation; and the value of the shares in its stock runs very high. There are besides eight insurance companies in England.

State of the Trade of England at different periods with the several Nations of the World. [Extracted from Playfair's Tables.]

IRELAND. Guern. Jerf. &Ald. GERMANY.
Years Imports Exports Imports Exports Imports Exports
1700 270,000 240,000 30,000 9,000 575,000 995,000
1710 300,000 270,000 25,000 25,000 610,000 895,000
1720 335,000 370,000 20,000 27,000 620,000 1,000,000
1730 340,000 600,000 18,000 45,000 680,000 1,105,000
1740 475,000 760,000 39,000 50,000 700,000 1,115,000
1750 660,000 950,000 55,000 40,000 715,000 1,405,000
1760 870,000 1,450,000 57,000 50,000 705,000 1,615,000
1770 1,230,000 1,870,000 51,000 46,000 680,000 1,820,000
1780 1,470,000 1,890,000 61,000 64,000 670,000 1,240,000
Baltic & the East Country. Denm. & Norway. SWEDEN.
Years Imports Exports Imports Exports Imports Exports
1700 136,000 110,000 70,000 35,000 197,000 57,000
1710 130,000 85,000 81,000 59,000 160,000 46,000
1720 188,000 86,000 96,000 76,000 154,000 35,000
1730 198,000 118,000 97,000 65,000 183,000 29,000
1740 230,000 133,000 93,000 67,000 186,000 33,000
1750 250,000 154,000 90,000 79,000 196,000 30,000
1760 210,000 175,000 79,000 115,000 212,000 25,000
1770 220,000 135,000 85,000 163,000 209,000 57,000
1780 280,000 70,000 93,000 185,000 198,000 95,000
RUSSIA. GREENLAND. HOLLAND.
Years Imports Exports Imports Exports Imports Exports
1700 109,000 135,000 570,000 2,150,000
1710 140,000 100,000 510,000 2,100,000
1720 195,000 50,000 200 100 590,000 1,920,000
1730 235,000 45,000 2,000 50 510,000 1,840,000
1740 335,000 75,000 2,800 420,000 2,200,000
1750 440,000 85,000 10,000 200 370,000 1,930,000
1760 570,000 98,000 16,000 330 400,000 1,810,000
1770 890,000 133,000 22,000 60 480,000 1,780,000
1780 1,185,000 290,000 38,000 70 490,000 1,570,000

[Page 106]

STATE OF THE TRADE OF ENGLAND CONTINUED.
FLANDERS. FRANCE. Portugal & [...]
Years Imports Exports Imports Exports Imports Exports
1700 7,000 80,000 20,000 30,000 250,000 630, [...]
1710 20,000 150,000 50,000 75,000 275,000 700, [...]
1720 51,000 245,000 48,000 175,000 350,000 800, [...]
1730 125,000 270,000 51,000 255,000 365,000 1,070, [...]
1740 150,000 290,000 57,000 305,000 340,000 1,140, [...]
1750 70,000 345,000 31,000 285,000 350,000 1,200, [...]
1760 70,000 420,000 55,000 275,000 300,000 1,110,0 [...]
1770 175,000 840,000 80,000 165,000 360,000 680, [...]
1780 225,000 1,050,000 45,000 155,000 370,000 590, [...]
SPAIN & CANARIES. STRAIGHTS. Venice and Italy.
Years Imports Exports Imports Exports Imports Exports
1700 225,000 220,000 2,000 250,000 22,000 15,50 [...]
1710 280,000 320,000 25,000 300,000 32,200 17,500
1720 420,000 565,000 70,000 475,000 46,500 18, [...]
1730 480,000 650,000 135,000 625,000 52,500 14, [...]
1740 190,000 450,000 40,000 675,000 50,000 14, [...]
1750 90,000 400,000 80,000 535,000 56,000 18, [...]
1760 525,000 1,150,000 60,000 425,000 64,000 50, [...]
1770 510,000 1,040,000 20,000 90,000 71,000 72, [...]
1780 440,000 860,000 300 85,000 15,500 8 [...], [...]
TURKEY. AFRICA. EAST-INDIES.
Years Imports Exports Imports Exports Imports Exports
1700 250,000 170,000 14,000 11,000 440,000 140, [...]
1710 287,000 195,000 18,000 7,000 595,000 95, [...]
1720 295,000 220,000 30,000 12,000 880,000 120,000
1730 270,000 185,000 50,000 18,000 965,000 145,000
1740 187,000 155,000 32,000 15,000 970,000 360,000
1750 155,000 100,000 27,000 16,000 930,000 700,000
1760 137,000 83,000 43,000 30,000 1,005,000 880,000
1770 126,000 89,000 53,000 48,000 1,515,000 1,330,000
1780 142,000 109,000 73,000 53,000 1,550,000 840,000
WEST INDIES. Spainsh W. Indies. BERMUDA.
Years Imports Exports Imports Exports Imports Exports
1700 580,000 30 [...],000 500 6 [...]
1710 750,000 335,000 600 1,000
1720 1,060,000 435,000 34,000 84,000 1,900 3,0 [...]
1730 1,260,000 450,000 37,000 83,000 1,500 2,2 [...]
1740 1,290,00 515,000 12,000 11,000 800 1,500
1750 1,460,000 770,000 1,600 7, [...]
1760 2,105,000 865,000 13,000 1,000 1,800 10, [...]
1770 2,995,000 1,190,000 26,000 3,000 1,700 13, [...]
1780 2,210,000 1,220,000 28,000 7,000 1,700 15, [...]

[Page 107]

STATE OF THE TRADE OF ENGLAND CONTINUED.
All North America. U. S. of America. ALL AMERICA.
Years Imports Exports Imports Exports Years Imports Exports
1700 280,000 200,000 238,000 240,000 1770 1,480,000 4,550,000
1710 370,000 250,000 310,000 280,000 1771 1,430,000 4,630,000
1720 520,000 350,000 450,000 410,000 1772 1,445,000 3,600,000
1730 630,000 500,000 590,000 540,000 1773 1,465,000 2,465,000
1740 780,000 620,000 700,000 760,000 1774 1,435,000 3,840,000
1750 820,000 930,000 760,000 1,110,000 1775 2,065,000 985,000
1760 950,000 1,750,000 940,000 1,610,000 1776 245,000 1,190,000
1770 1,480,000 4,550,000 900,000 1,660,000 1777 230,000 1,880,000
1780 300,000 1,805,000 540,000 1,050,000 1778 265,000 1,150,000
          1779 295,000 1,370,000
          1780 300,000 1,805,000
          1781 385,000 1,545,000
          1782 295,000 905,000
TOTAL TRADE WITH ALL THE WORLD.
Years Imports Exports Balance
1700 4,550,000 6,300,000 1,950,000
1710 4,900,000 7,000,000 2,100,000
1720 5,350,000 8,600,000 3,350,000
1730 7,500,000 10,900,000 3,400,000
1740 7,550,000 12,000,000 4,450,000
1750 7,250,000 12,650,000 5,400,00
1760 10,300,000 14,250,000 3,950,000
1770 11,850,000 16,300,000 4,650,000
1780 10,750,000 12,400,000 1,650,000
1771 12,800,000 17,150,000 4,350,000
1772 13,300,000 16,150,000 2,850,000
1773 11,400,000 14,750,000 3,350,000
1774 13,250,000 15,900,000 2,650,000
1775 3,550,000 15,200,000 1,650,000
1776 11,700,000 13,700,000 2,000,000
1777 11,850,000 12,650,000 800,000
1778 10,250,000 11,550,000 1,300,000
1779 10,650,000 12,650,000 2, [...]00,000
1780 10,750,000 12,550,000 [...],800,000
1781 11,900,000 10,550,000 1,350,000
1782 9,500,000 12,350,000 2,850,000

We shall conclude this article, with the following comparative view of shipping, which till a better table can be formed, may have its uses.

If the shipping of Europe be divided into twenty parts, then,

Great-Britain, &c. is computed to have 6
The United Provinces 6
Denmark, Sweden, and Russia 2
The trading cities of Germany, and the Austrian Netherlands 1
France 2
Spain and Portugal 2
Italy, and the rest of Europe 1

In a pamphlet, entitled "A brief examination into the increase of the revenue, commerce and navigation of Great-Britain," (published 1792)—Among other causes which have contributed to the prosperity of the nation since the peace of 1783, the writer mentions an Act for auditing public accounts. "Losses to an immense amount," he ob­serves, "had been sustained by the public, from persons to whom large sums of money had been issued, and who had not rendered any account: * A very large proportion of them had never been called [Page 108] upon; the few who were, with those who voluntarily tendered them­selves, passed their accounts for millions, before a deputy or clerk ap­pointed by an auditor, who always considered his own office [...] sinecure. To remedy this evil, an act was passed in 1785, for [...] examining and auditing the public accounts of the kingdom; [...] which, they have been examined with attention and scrupulous [...] ­ness. The effects of this law will not, however, be felt in its [...] extent, till a period, which it is to be hoped is a very distant one, [...] we may have the misfortune to be again embarked in a war. [...] beyond all belief to persons not experienced in such matters, [...] have been saved, if such an institution had been provided previ [...] the two last wars,"

"It must be in the recollection of every one," continues this [...] "how universal a persuasion prevailed, that the separation of the Ame­rican Colonies from Great-Britain would be felt as a great and [...] wound, injuring our resources, and lessening our navigation. [...] cannot, therefore, but contemplate with some degree of pleasure on [...] effects produced by the measures before alluded to, and by [...] other causes which have contributed to the general prosperity of [...] country. To compare the revenue at different periods, before [...] since the separation, would not alone be admitted as a criterion, [...] new taxes have been since added to a large amount; although it [...] equivocal proof of the energy of the country, that, under an imm [...] accumulation of debt and taxes, it has been able to effect most [...] fully what was never before attempted, the gradual and certain [...] ­tion of the debt.

A more direct argument will however arise from an inquiry into [...] state of our navigation and commerce during the years of our [...] prosperity in the last peace, and at this time. In this inquiry [...] occurs some difficulty as to the navigation; it is to be lamented, [...] previous to 1786, no ships were registered in Great-Britain, [...] those which traded to the Plantations: Entries of ships outwards [...] till then made very loosely; there was no sort of check on the [...] or owner, who invariably represented the vessels of a less burthen [...] the real tonnage, to save the payment of light duties and other charg [...] notwithstanding which, a tolerable judgment may be formed of [...] increase of our navigation, by comparing the numbers of the [...] cleared out at the different periods, having in view that, previo [...] the separation of the Colonies from Great-Britain, all American [...] ­ping was deemed British, and that the size of our ships is now [...] than at that time.

[Page 109]

Number of British Ships entered Inwards to Great-Britain.
  *Ships. Tonnage.
1772 7,698 757,800
1773 8,259 796,000
1774 8,587 820,000
1775 9,247 943,000
1787 9,969 1,058,000
1788 11,121, 1,328,000
1789 11,907 1,401,000
1790 12,294 1,442,000
Number of British Ships entered Outwards from Great-Britain.
  Ships. Tonnage.
1772 9,408 923,811
1773 9,396 874,042
1774 9,524 808,904
1775 9,719 888,854
1787 11,762 1,211,199
1788 12,936 1,412,689
1789 13,648 1,515,021
1790 12,762 1,424,912
Total Value of Imports into Great-Britain.
1772 £▪14,500,000
1773 12,675,000
1774 13,346,000
1775 14,816,000
1787 £.17,804,000
1788 18,027,000
1789 17,821,000
1790 19,130,000
Total Value of Exports from Great-Britain.
Foreign Manufactures. British Manufactures. Total.
1772 £.6,746,000 £10,973,000 £17,719,000
1773 7,114,000 9,417,000 16,531,000
1774 6,729,000 10,556,000 17,285,000
1775 6,253,000 10,072,000 16,325,000
1787 £.4,815,000 £.12,054,000 £.16,869,000
1788 4,747,000 12,724,000 17,471,000
1789 5,561,000 13,779,000 19,340,000
1790 5,199,000 14,921,000 20,120,000

[Page 110] The following Abstract shews the comparative situation of Great-Britain, in respect to the particulars mentioned, at the periods annexed—Taken from the fore-mentioned pamphlet.

Price of £.3 per Cents Consol. January 27th, 1784. £55. Prince of £.3 per Cents Consol. February 10th, 1792. £93 [...]
Price of India Stock, January 27th, 1784. £121. Price of India Stock, February 10,1792. £197 [...]
Value of Imports, 1783, £13,325,000 Value of Imports, 1790. £19,130,000.
Value of Exports, 1783. Value of Exports, 1790.
British Manufacture. Foreign Produce. Total. British Manufacture. Foreign Produce. Total.
£.10,409,00 £.4,332,000 £.14,741,00 £.14,921,000 £.5,199,000 £20,120,000
No. of British Ships entered Inwards to Great-Britain in 1783. 7,690 No. of British Ships entered Inwards to Great-Britain in 1790. 12,294.
No. of British Ships cleared Outwards from Great-Britain in 1783. 7,329. No. of British Ships cleared Outwards from Great-Britain in 1790. 12,762.
Amount of the Permanent Taxes in 1783. £.10,194,259. Amount of the Permanent Taxes in 1791. £.14,132,000.
In 1783 the whole of the Revenue (including the Land and Malt) below the Expenditure on a Peace Establishment. £2,000,000 In 1791 the whole of the Revenue above the Expenditure on the reduced Peace Establishment. £1,000,000.

[Page 111] NATIONAL DEBT.] The Nation­al Debt of Great-Britain in 1755, previous to the French War was £72,289,000; the Interest £.2,654,000

In January 1776, before the American War it was £.123,964,000; ditto £.4,411,000

In 1786, till which time the whole Debt of the last War was not funded, it was £.239,154,000; * ditto £.9,275,000.

No permanent provision has ever been made for the progressive and certain reduction of this immense Debt, until 1786—when Parliament had the wisdom and the firmness to pass an Act for vesting unalienably, i [...] Commissioners, the sum of one million annually; in which Act every possible precaution was taken that could be devised for prevent­ing the surplus from being diverted at any future time, and for carrying to the account of the Commissioners for the purposes of the Act, the interest of such stock as should be purchased, and such temporary an­nuities as should fall in. Under the provisions of this Act, Eight Millions Two Hundred Thousand Pounds of the capital of the debt has been purchased; and the amount of the annual sum, now applicable for the reduction of it is £.1,360,000.

[Page 112] REVENUE.] The state of the Revenue will appear from the following Report of the Select Committee, &c. 1786.

1. Total net payments into the Exchequer, from January 5, 1785, to January 5, 1786, £.12,499,916
Deduct therefrom the respited duties paid by the East-India Company £.401,118 457,219
Excess beyond the future amount of the window duties 56,101
  £.12,042,697
2. Further produce of the window duty, imposed by the 24th Geo. III. 253,534
3. Further produce of the duty on two-wheel and four-wheel carriages 107,186
4. To complete the former duty on male servants 42,444
5. Further produce of the duties on horses, waggons, and carts 73,610
6.—taxes imposed in 1784 22,000
7.—taxes imposed in 1785, including the improvement of the medicine duty 242,000
8. Paid at the Excise and Alienation Office, in part of civil list 14,000
9. Produce of the land and malt 2,600,000
  15,397,471
EXPENDITURE.
10. Interest and charges of the public debts £.9,275,769
11. Exchequer bills 258,000
12. Civil list 900,000
13. Charges on the aggregate fund 64,600
14. Navy 1,800,000
15. Army 1,600,000
16. Ordnance 348,000,
17. Militia 91,000
18. Miscellaneous services 74,274
19. Appropriated duties 66,538
  24,478,18 [...]
  [...]

[Page 113] What has been the total improvement of the Revenue from the year 1783 to the present time, will appear from the following statement:

Produce of all the PERMANENT TAXES.
From 5th January 1783 to 5th January 1784 * 10,194,259
1784 to 1785 10,356,996
1785 to 1786 12,104,798
1786 to 1787 11,867,055
1787 to 1788 12,923,134
1788 to 1789 13,007,642
1789 to 1790 13,433,068
1790 to 1791 14,072,978
1791 to 1792 14,132,000

From the above it appears, that the revenue has almost gradually risen, in the course of the last nine years, from £.10,194,259 to £.14,132,000.

GOVERNMENT.] The government of Great-Britain may be called a limited monarchy. It is a combination of a monarchical and popular government. The king has, or at least is understood to have, only the executive power; the legislative is shared by him and the parliament, or more properly speaking, by the people. Notwithstand­ing the limitations of regal power provided by the constitution, the prerogative of the king is still very great. In consequence of pos­sessing the executive power of the state, he appoints his privy council and his ministers, by whom the national business is to be carried on; he has the right of calling together and dissolving the parliament; he can withhold his assent from any bill which has passed both houses, and by that means prevent it from passing into a law; his person is sacred and inviolable; he cannot, in the eye of the law, do wrong, but the blame of his measures falls always on his ministers and advis­ers; he nominates all the great officers of the state and church; he confers honours, dignities, and titles, especially that of the peerage; he pardons criminals; he is the supreme commander of the army and navy, and the head of the church. His income is very ample, amount­ing annually to 900,000l. sterling.

The crown is hereditary; both male and female descendants are capable of succession. By a fundamental law the king must profess the Protestant religion.

The legislative power belongs to the king and parliament, or the great senate of the nation. This parliament is composed of the peers and commons, and divided into two assemblies, called the House of Lords and the House of Commons. The House of Lord is compo­sed, 1. Of the temporal peers, or the hereditary nobility of the kingdom of England, distinguished by the different ranks of dukes, [Page 114] marquises, earls, viscounts, and barons; who have by birth-right [...] creation, a seat in the House of Lords, and are hereditary counsellors of the king. 2. Of the spiritual lords, or the two archbishops and 24 bishops of England, who have seats in the house by virtue of th [...] dignities. 3. Of 16 Scotch peers, the representatives of the peerage of Scotland. The House of Commons is composed of such persons of fortune and interest as are chosen representatives for the several counties, cities and boroughs of the kingdom. The number of these representatives is 558, chosen in the following manner:

For the 40 counties of England, two members for each [...]
For the 12 counties of Wales, one for each [...]
For the counties of Scotland [...]
For the cities in England [...]
For the boroughs in England [...]
For the two universities [...]
For the cinque ports [...]
For the boroughs of Wales [...]
For the boroughs of Scotland [...]
  [...]

This plan of representation, founded on the ancient state of [...] kingdom, is at present liable to many objections. Among the pl [...] which are represented in parliament, there are many which was formerly flourishing, but which are at present sunk into insignificance and many towns, now opulent and populous, which at that time was not yet risen into consequence, have not acquired the right of send [...] representatives. Several boroughs are become private property; [...] others the number of electors is very small, and of course easily influen­ced by powerful individuals; so that upon the whole the representa­tion is very unequal and defective: But its present state is so nearly connected with the rights of private property and the interest of [...] great families, that it is a very difficult matter to render it equal [...] independant. The duration of parliaments is at present extended [...] seven years, after the expiration of which a new general election [...] representatives takes place. Many of those who are zealous for [...] rights of the people, wish to shorten the septennial parliaments, beca [...] experience teaches that they give two much influence to the [...] over the members, and diminish that of the constituents over their rep­resentatives. To be chosen a representative, certain qualification [...] necessary, as the possession of landed property of the annual valun [...] 300l. if it be for a borough, and of 500l. a year if it be for a count [...]. No foreigner, though naturalized, can be chosen a member of [...] House of Commons. In the House of Lords the lord chancellor [...] ­sides; in the House of Commons an elective president, called [...] Speaker. Any member of either house has the right of bringing [...] biil; which, before it can pass into an act a parliament, and [...] the force of a law, must be agreed to by a majority of both [...] and afterwards receive the assent of the king. Bills relating to [...] ­tion, revenue, and its administration, originate always in the [...] of Commons, who, by the invaluable privilege of granting or [...] sing supplies, have the power of promoting or stopping any [...] [Page 115] of government: The Commons have likewise the privilege, that none of their money bills can be altered or amended by the Lords. The upper house of parliament have the supreme judicial authority in the state, to which appeals may be made from the decisions of the courts of Westminster. The power of parliament is the highest in the state, and is unlimited; it has even altered more than once the established religion, and the order of succession to the crown.

In consequence of the mixed character of the English constitution, there have been, since the time of the Stuarts, two parties in the na­tion of opposite political principles; one of which favours the power of the crown, and the other the democratical, or aristocratical power in the constitution. They were originally distinguished by the names of Cavaliers and Roundheads; afterwards they were called Tories and Whigs, and at present the Court Party and the Opposition. The mu­tual jealousy of these parties, when founded in principle, is beneficial to the constitution; but their dissensions must often be attributed to private views, disappointed ambition, and struggle for power: Yet, notwithstanding the divisions of party, the influence which the king has over the parliament, by his constitutional prerogative, and the nu­merous favours and rewards he has it in his power to bestow, is ex­ceedingly great.

Besides the parliament, the king has the assistance of his ministers, or privy-counsellors, nominated by himself, and responsible for their advice and conduct. Among these privy-counsellors are the great officers of the state, who hold their places during the king's pleasure, and who retain the dignity of privy-counsellors, though removed from their officers. The offices of Lord Chamberlain and Earl Marshal are hereditary to the ducal families of Ancaster and Norfolk. Among the privy-counsellors, those ministers who compose the cabinet are the principal; the Lord Chancellor, the first Lord of the Treasury, the Chancellor of the Exchequer, who, when he is at the same time first Lord of the Treasury, is considered as the first minister, the two Secre­taries of State for the northern and southern department, the Lord President of the Council, and Lord Privy Seal, to which must be added, the first Lord of the Admiralty: These ministers are presidents of the principal state departments. Scotland has its own officers of state and courts of justice.

The administration of justice in England is, as it may be expected in a constitution so favourable to liberty, famous for its fairness, inde­pendence, and impartiality. The laws of England have been least of any influenced by the Roman laws, the admission of which the nation has firmly opposed. They are divided into the unwritten, or common law, and the statute law: The first is not founded on any known act of the legislature, but transmitted down by tradition. Its principles are collected from the judgements which have passed according to it, from time immemorial, and which are carefully preserved under the name of records. Its legal force is, probably, founded on acts of par­liament, prior to the reign of Richard I. the originals of which are now lost. The written, or statute law, is the collection of acts of par­liament, the originals of which have been preserved, especially since the time of Edward III. The chief courts of common law are, 1. the Court of King's Bench, 2. the Court of Common Pleas, and 3. the [Page 116] Court of Exchequer; each of these courts has four judges, who [...] not be deprived of their places but on an accusation by parliament. To obtain legal remedy in cases to which the jurisdiction of the com­mon law courts did not extend, the courts of equity have been added viz. the Court of Chancery, under the Lord High Chancellor, and the Court of Exchequer Chamber. In important and difficult causes, the twelve judges, joined sometimes by the Lord Chancellor, meet [...] deliberate on the judgments passed in the courts. There are, besides many provincial and subordinate courts, the ecclesiastical courts, [...] courts martial, and admiralty court; into the three latter, the princi­ples and proceedings of the Roman law have been admitted. From all courts of justice appeals can be made to the House of Lords, [...] highest judicial tribunal in the kingdom.

It is chiefly in the criminal judicature that the laws of England dif­fer so greatly and so honourably from those of other counties. Wh [...] a person is charged with a crime, he is first examined by a magistrate, who may discharge him if the accusation should be evidently futile [...] false; but if it appears to have sufficient weight, he binds the party to give bail for his appearance to answer to the charge; and, in capital cases, he commits him to prison. Before the party is brought to a trial, the accusation undergoes a second discussion by the grand jury of the county, consisting of more than 12, and less than 24, persons of charac­ter and respectability; if twelve or more of them are of opinion that the charge is well grounded, the prisoner is indicted. He is then brought to the bar of the court to take his trial, in a public manner, before the judge and petty jury. The latter is composed of twelve impartial persons of the same rank with the prisoner, any of whom, as far as twenty persons successively, the prisoner may challenge, if he has any objection to be tried by them; and this jury are finally to judge the prisoner, according to the evidence produced in the trial. When the jury have taken their oaths, the indictment is read to the prisoner, who pleads either guilty, or not guilty, to it. In the first case, no trial is necessary; in the other, the evidence of the witnesses, who are on their oath, is produced in presence of the prisoner, who is allowed to question them himself, or by his counsel, and to bring wit­nesses in his defence. When the evidence is before the court, the judge, in a speech, sums it up, points out the preci [...]e state of the ques­tion, and gives his opinion concerning the evidence and the point of law. By this opinion the jury are no further bound than as it coin­cides with their own; and they agree among themselves on the deci­sion or verdict which they are to give, and which must be unanimous it is either that the prisoner is guilty, or not guilty, of the fact of which he stands accused: If they acquit him, he is immediately discharged from prison; if he is found guilty, the judge pronounces the sentence of the law incurred by the crime, and the prisoner is sent back to prison till the sentence is put in execution. If any extenuating circumstances appear in the trial, the jury may recommend the convict to mercy; and the king has the power either to grant him a free pardon, or [...] mitigate the rigour of his punishment.

Such are the proceedings of criminal justice in England, which manifest the greatest attention to the liberty and life of the subject which remove every fear of oppression from the poorest and weal [...] [Page 117] and which give innocence the fairest chance of vindicating itself from unjust and malicious accusation.

The laws of Scotland are different from those of England; and they partake much more of the principles and forms of the civil law. The trial by jury in Scotland may, perhaps, be considered as an improve­ment on that mode of trial: It differs from that in England, by re­quiring only a majority of two-thirds, not a unanimity of the jury, in order to give a decisive verdict.

The government of Ireland resembles, in every respect, that of Great-Britain, with which it has now no other connexion than that of being subject to the same king. Ireland has its own parliament, framed on the same plan with the British; its officers of state, courts of justice, &c. but it is protected by the British army and navy.

ARMY.] In time of peace the Army consists of about 40,000 men.

CAVALRY.
  • Horse Guards, 2 troops.
  • Horse Grenadier Guards, 2 troops.
  • Royal regiment of Horse Guards.
  • 4 Regiments of Horse.
  • 3 Regiments of Dragoon Guards.
  • 6 Regiments of Dragoons.
  • 13 Regiments of Light Dragoons.
INFANTRY.
  • 3 Regiments of Foot Guards.
  • 73 Regiments of Foot.
  • Artilery Regiment in England.
  • —Ireland.
  • Engineers in England.
  • —Ireland.
  • Marines.
  • Invalids.

In time of peace, most regiments consist of only one battalion, com­posed of ten companies; in time of war additional companies are rais­ed, and the number of regiments increased. The whole of the army last war, including the foreign troops in English pay, amounted to about 135,000 men. Twelve regiments of cavalry, and 20 of infantry, are usually in Ireland, and are maintained by that kingdom, amounting to about 12,000 to 14,000 men: For the service of Great-Britain, the garrisons, and colonies, about 17,000 men are voted annually by par­liament, exclusive of marines.

A militia of about 40,000 men.

NAVY.] The number of Ships in and out of commission, building, &c. in 1787, were as follows, viz.

Ships of the line 157
Fifties 19
Frigates 143
Sloops 128
Total 447

Ships actually in commission, in 1786, as guard-ships in the princi­pal ports, and on the several stations, the Channel, North Seas, West-Indies, [Page 118] America, East-Indies, Africa, and the Mediterranean, [...] out, &c.

Ships of the line 12
Frigates 27
Sloops 69

The usual complement in time of peace, voted by parliament, 18, [...] seamen, including about 3,500 marines.

The principal ports of the navy are Portsmouth, Plymouth, [...] Chatham, where there are excellent dock-yards.

In times of war, as in 1782. the ships fit for actual service [...] according to the Admiralty Lift,

Ships of the line 114
Fifties 11
Frigates 111
Sloops 42
Guard-Ships 24
Total 302

The whole of the fleet carried upwards of 20,000 guns, and [...] manned by 116,546 seamen.

The Royal Navy of Great-Britain, as it stood at August, 31, 1784.

Rates of Ships. Complement of Men. Weight of [...]
Guns. No. of each rate. Men. Metals.
1st. 100 and upwards 5 875 to 850 42 24 12 6
2d. 98 to 00 20 750 to 700 32 18 12 6
3d. 80 to 64 130 650 to 500 32 18 9 6
4th. 60 to 50 27 420 to 380 24 12 6&18 9
5th. 44 to 32 102 300 to 220 18 9 6&12 6
6th. 30 to 20 50 200 to 160 9 4
  334    
Sloops, 18 to 14 143 124 to 110  
Bombs, Fireships, &c. 19    
Total 496    

In commission 25 of the line, 7 fifties, 36 frigates, and 105 [...]. When a ship of war becomes old, or unfit for service, the same [...] transferred to another, which is built, as it is called, upon her [...].

While a single beam of the old ship remains, the name cannot [...] changed unless by act of parliament.

The pay of the Officers of the Royal Navy in each Rate. FLA [...]

FICERS, and the CAPTAINS to Hags. Per [...]
Admirals and Commanders in Chief of the Fleet £.5 [...]
An Admiral 3 10
Vice Admiral 2 10
Rear Admiral 1 15
First Captain to the Commander in Chief 1 [...]
Second do. and Captain to other Admirals 1 [...]
—to V. Admirals if first or second Rates, to have the Pay of such Rates 0 16
—to R. Admirals if first or second Rates, to have the Pay of such Rates 0 [...]

HISTORY.] For this interesting article, the reader is referred [...] Home, Goldsmith, Macauley or some other professed Historian [...] [Page 119] shall here set down a chronology of English kings, from the time that this country became united under one monarch, in the person of Eg­bert, who subdued the other princes of the Saxon heptarchy, and gave the name of the Angle-land to this part of the island, the Saxons, and An­gles having about four centuries before, invaded and subdued the an­cient Britons, whom they drove into Wales and Cornwall.

Began to reign.

Sax Princes.
  • 800 Egbert
  • 838 Ethelwulf
  • 857 Ethelbald
  • 860 Ethelbert
  • 866 Ethelred
  • 871 Alfred the Great
  • 901 Edwards the Elder
  • 925 Athelstan
  • 941 Edmund
  • 946 Edred
  • 955 Edwy
  • 959 Edgar
  • 975 Edward the Mar.
  • 978 Ethelred II.
  • 1016 Edmund II. or (Ironside.
Danish.
  • 1017 Canute, king of Denmark
  • 1035 Harold
  • 1039 Hardicanute
Saxon.
  • 1041 Edward the Confessor
  • 1065 Harold
1066 William I. (Commonly called the conqueror) duck of Norman­dy, a province facing the south of England, now an­nexed to the French monarchy.
1087 William II. Sons of the Conqueror.
1100 Henry I.
1135 Stephen, grandson to the Conqueror, by his 14th daughter Adela.
1154 Henry II. (Plantagenet) grandson of Henry I. by his daughter the empress Matilda, and her 2d husband, Geoffroy Plantagenet.
1189 Richard I. Sons of Henry II.
1199 John
1216 Henry III. son of John.
1272 Edward I. son of Henry III.
1307 Edward II. son of Edward I.
1327 Edward III. son of Edward II.
1377 Richard II. grandson of Edward III. by his eldest son, the Black Prince.
1399 Henry IV. Son to John of Gaunt, duke of Lancaster, 4th son to Edw. III. Houses of Lancaster.
1423 Henry V. son of Henry IV.
1422 Henry VI. son of Henry V.
1461 Edward IV. descended from Edward III. by Lionel his 3d son. House of York.
1483 Edward V. son of Edward IV.
1483 Richard III. brother of Edward IV.
1485 Henry VII. (Tudor son of the coun­tess of Richmond, of the Houses of Lancaster. Houses of Tudor, in whom were united the Houses of Lan­caster and York, by Henry VII.'s marri­age with Elizabeth, daug. of Edward IV.
1509 Henry VIII. son of Henry VII.
1547 Edward VI. son of Henry VIII.
1553 Mary Daugthers of Henry VIII.
1558 Elizabeth
1603 James I. Great grandson of James IV. king of Scotland, by Margaret, daughter of Henry VII. and first of the Stuart family in England.
1625 Charles I. son of James I. Common wealth, and protectorate of Cromwell.
1649 Charles II. Sons of Charles I.
1685 James II.
1688 William III. nephew and son-in-law of James II. and Mary Daughters of James II. in whom ended the Prot­estant line of Charles I. for James II. upon [...] abdicating the throne, carried with him his infant son (the late Pretender) who was excluded [...] act of parliament, which settled the succession [...] the next Protestant heirs of James I. The surviv­ing issue of James, at the time of his death, [...] a son and a daughter, viz. Charles, who succeed­ed him, and the Princess Elizabeth, who married the Elector Palatine, who took the title of king of Bohemia, and left a daughter, the Princes Sophia, who married the Duke of Brunswick Lunenburgh, by whom she had George, elec [...] of Hanover, who ascended the throne, by act of parliament, expressly made in favour of his mother.
1702 Anne
1714 George I.   Houses of Hanover.
1727 George II. son of George I.
1760 George III. grandson of George II.

WALES.

THE principality of Wales, long an independent and separate country from England, and still entirely differing from it in languages and, in some respects, in manners and customs, is strongly marked [...] by nature, as a detached district, characterised by an almost continu [...] range of mountains more or less wild and lofty, and interjacent vallies more or less extensive and fertile. It occupies all the central part of the western coast, and the country inland to a moderate distance; li [...] ­ing its northern and southern limits well defined by the projecting line of coast from the Dee to Anglesea on the one hand, and the wide en­trance of the Bristol channel on the other. The ancient internal di­mensions of Wales have been contracted, by taking from it the whole county of Monmouth, and a part of the several adjacent English coun­ties. At present it consists of 12 middle sized counties; * six of which are reckoned to belong to north, and six to south Wales. In general population and fertility the latter division has the superiority. All the Welsh counties, except three, touch the sea coast in some part of their boundary.

EXTENT AND SITUATION.
Length 130 Miles. between Degrees. 51 and 54 North latitude.
Breadth 96 Miles. Degrees. 2,41 and 4,56 West longitude.

Area in square miles 7011.

[Page 121] NAME AND LANGUAGE.] The Welch, according to the best anti­quaries, are descendants of the Belgic Gauls, who made a settlement in England about fourscore years before the first descent of Julius Caesar, and thereby obtained the name of Galles or Wall [...]s (the G and W being promiscuously used by the ancient Britons) that is, Strangers. Their language has a strong affinity with the Celtic or Phoenician. and is highly commended for its pathetic and descriptive powers by those who understand it. [For Divisions, see England.]

CLIMATE, SOIL, AND WATER.] The seasons are pretty much the same as in the Northern parts of England, and the air is sharp, but wholesome. The soil of Wales, especially towards the North, is mountainous, but contains rich vallies, which produce crops of wheat, rye and corn. Wales contains many quarries of free-stone and slate, several mines of lead, and abundance of coal-pits. This country is well supplied with wholesome springs; and its chief rivers are the Clywd, the Wheeler, the Dee, the Severn, the Elwy, and the Allen, which, near Mold, sinks under ground, and is lost for a short space. These rivers furnish Flintshire with great quantities of fish.

MOUNTAINS.] It would be endless to particularize the mountains of this country. Snowdon, in Caernarvonshire, and Plinlimmon, which lies partly in Montgomery and partly in Cardiganshire, are the most famous; and their mountainous situation greatly assisted the na­tives in making so noble and long a struggle against the Roman, An­glo-Saxon, and Norman, powers.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MANNERS AND CUSTOMS. The inhabitants of Wales are sup­posed to amount to about 300,000, and though not in general wealthy, they are provided with all the necessaries, and many of the conveniencies of life. The Welsh are, if possible, more jealous of their liberties than the English; and they are remarkable for their sincerity and fidelity. The Welch may be called an unmixed people, as may be proved by their keeping up the ancient hospitality, and their strict adherence to ancient customs and manners. This appears even among gentlemen of fortune, who in other countries commonly follow the stream of fashion. We are not however to im­agine, that many of the nobility and gentry of Wales do not comply with the modes and manner of living in England and France. All the better sort of the Welch speak the English language, though num­bers of them understand the Welch.

RELIGION.] The Welch clergy, in general, are but poorly provid­ed for; and in many of the country congregations they preach both in Welch and English. Their poverty was formerly a vast discourage­ment to religion and learning, but the measures taken by the society for propagating christian knowledge, have in a great degree removed the reproach of ignorance from the poorer sort of the Welch. In the year 1749, a hundred and forty-two schoolmasters were employed, to remove from place to place for the instruction of the inhabitants; and their scholars amounted to 72,264. No people have distinguished themselves more, perhaps, in proportion to their abilities, than the Welch have done by acts of national munificence. They print, at a vast expense, bibles, common-prayers, and other religious books, and distribute them gratis to the poorer sort. Few of their towns are un­provided with a free-school. The established religion is that of Eng­land.

[Page 122] LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN.] Wales was a seat of learning at a very early period; but it suffered an eclipse by the repeated massa­cres of the bards and clergy. Wickliffism took shelter in Wales, when it was persecuted in England. The Welch and Scotch dispute about the nativity of certain learned men, particularly four of the name of Gildas. Giraldus Cambrensis, whose history was published by C [...] ­den, was certainly a Welchman; and Leland mentions several learned men of the same country, who flourished before the reformation.

With regard to the present state of literature among the Welch, it is sufficient to say, that some of them make a considerable figure in the republic of letters, and that many of their clergy are excellent schol [...].

CITIES, TOWNS, FORTS, AND OTHER EDIFICES, PUBLIC AND PRIVATE.} Wales contains no cities or towns that are remarkable either for populousness or magnificence. Beaumaris, a neat well [...] place, is the chief town of Anglesey, * and has a harbour for ships, [...] a castle founded by Edward I. It has no trade. Brecknock has a trade in the woollen branches. It is moderately large▪ well built, and inhabited by several families of gentry. Cardigan is a large populous town, lying in the neighbourhood of lead and silver mines, on the mouth of the river Towy. Caermarthen has a large bridge, is [...] built and populous, and is reckoned the first town in South Wale. Its river, the Towy, admits of vessels of moderate burden, which [...] it a considerable trade. Pembroke, situated on a creek which co [...] ­nicates with Milford Haven, is well inhabited by gentlemen [...] tradesmen, but on the decline, the navigation to it being injuried by the rubbish of the lime stone quarries near it. A part of the country is so fertile and pleasant, that it is called Little England.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} Wales abounds in remains of antiquity; but the remains of the Druidical institutions, and places of worship, are chiefly disce [...] ­ble in the isle of Anglesey, the ancient Mona, mentioned by Tacitus, who describes it as being the chief seminary of the Druidical rites and religion.

[Page 123] Among the natural curiosities of this country, are the following. In Flintshire is a famous well, known by the name of St. Winifred's well, at which, according to the legendary tales of the common people, miraculous cures have been performed. The spring boils with vast impetuosity out of a rock at the foot of a high hill, and is formed into a beautiful polygonal well, covered with a rich arch supported by pil­lars, and the roof is most exquisitely carved in stone. Over the spring is also a chapel, a neat piece of Gothic architecture, but in a very ru­inous state. This spring is supposed to be one of the finest in the British dominions, and is now applied to the purpose of turning several mills, for the working of copper, making brass wire, paper and snuff, and spinning cotton; which branches give great employment to the town and neighbourhood, and by two different trials and calculations lately made, is found to sling out about twenty-one tons of water in a minute. It never freezes, or scarcely varies in the quantity of water in droughts, or after the greatest rains. After a violent fall of rain, it becomes discoloured by a wheyish tinge. The small town adjoining to the well, is known by the name of Holywell. In Caernarvonshire is the high mountain of Penmanmawr, across the edge of which the public road lies, and occasions no small terror to many travellers; from one hand the impending rock seems ready every minute to crush them to pieces, and the great precipice below, which hangs over the sea, is so hideous, and, till very lately, when a wall was raised on the side of the road, was so dangerous that one false step was on dismal con­sequence. Snowdon hill is by triangular measurement 1240 yards per­pendicular height.

There are a great number of pleasing prospects and picturesque views in Wales; and this country is highly worthy the attention of the curious traveller.

COMMERCE AND MANUFACTURES.] The Welch are on a footing, as to their commerce and manufactures, with many of the western and northern counties of England. Their trade is mostly inland, or with England, into which they import numbers of black cattle. Milford­haven, which is reckoned the finest in Europe, lies in Pembrokeshire; but the Welch have hitherto reaped no great benefit from it, though of late considerable sums have been granted by parliament for its forti­fication. The town of Pembroke employs near 200 merchant ships, and its inhabitants carry of an extensive trade. In Brecknockshire are several woollen manufactures; and Wales in general carries on a great coal trade with England and Ireland.

CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT.] Wales was united, and in­corporated with England, in the 27th of Henry VIII. when, by act of parliament, the government of it was modelled according to the-Eng­lish form; all laws, customs, and tenures, contrary to those of England, being abrogated▪ and the inhabitants admitted to participation of all the English liberties and privileges, particularly that of sending mem­bers to parliament, viz. a knight for every shire, and a burgess for every shire-town, except Merioneth.

REVENUE.] As to the revenues, the crown has a small property, in the product of the silver and lead mines; but it is said that the revenue accruing to the prince of Wales from his principality, does not exceed 7 or 8,000l. a year. The land tax of Wales brought in several years ago about £.43,700 a year.

[Page 124] HISTORY.] The ancient history of Wales is uncertain, on account of the number of petty princes who governed it. That they were sovereign and independent, appears from the English history. It was formerly inhabited by three different tribes of Britons; the Silu [...] the Dimetoe, and the Ordovices. These people appear never to [...] been entirely subdued by the Romans; though part of their country from the ruins of castles, was bridled by garrisons. The Saxons con­quered the counties of Monmouth and Hereford, but never penetra [...] ­ed farther, and the Welch remained an independent people, govern­ed by their own princes and their own laws. About the year [...] Roderic, king of Wales, divided his dominions among his three [...] and the names of these divisions were, Demetia, or South Wales; [...] ­vesia, or Powis-land; and Venedotia, or North Wales. This divisions gave a mortal blow to the independency of Wales. About the [...] 1112, Henry I. of England, planted a colony of Flemings on the [...] ­tiers of Wales, to serve as a barrier to England, none of the [...] princes being powerful enough to oppose them. They made however many vigorous and brave attempts against the Norman kings of Eng­land to maintain their liberties; and even the English historians [...] ­mit the injustice of their claims. In 1237, the crown of England [...] first supplied with a handle for the future conquest of Wales; [...] old and infirm prince Llewellin, in order to be safe from the pres [...] ­tions of his undutiful son Griffyn, having put himself under subjecting and homage to king Henry III.

But no capitulation could satisfy the ambition of Edward I. who resolved to annex Wales to the crown of England; and Llewellin, prince of Wales, disdaining the subjection to which old Llewellin [...] submitted, Edward raised an irresistible army at a prodigious [...] with which he penetrated as far as Flint, and taking possession of [...] isle of Anglesey, he drove the Welch to the mountains of Snowdon and obliged them to submit to pay a tribute. The Welch, however made several efforts under young Llewellin; but at last, in 1285, [...] was killed in battle. He was succeeded by his brother David, the [...] independent prince of Wales, who, falling into Edward's [...] through treachery, was by him most barbarously and unjustly hang [...] and Edward from that time pretended that Wales was annexed to [...] crown of England. It was about this time, probably, that Edward perpetrated the inhuman massacre of the Welch bards. Perceiving that his cruelty was not sufficient to complete his conquest, he [...] his queen in the year 1282, to be delivered in Caernarvon castle, that the Welch having a prince born among themselves, might the [...] readily recognise his authority. This prince was the unhappy Ed­ward II. and from him the title of prince of Wales has always [...] descended to the eldest sons of the English kings. The history of Wales and England, from this period, becomes the same. It is prop [...] however, to observe, that the kings of England have always found [...] their interest to soothe the Welch with particular marks of their [...] ­gard. Their eldest sons not only held the titular dignity, but act [...] kept a court at Ludlow; and a regular council, with a president, [...] named by the crown, for the administration of all the affairs of [...] principality. This was thought so necessary a piece of policy, [...] when Henry VIII. had no son, his daughter Mary was created [...] ­cess of Wales.

[Page 125]

SCOTLAND.
EXTENT AND SITUATION.

Length 300 Miles. between Degrees. 54 and 59 North latitude.
Breadth 190 Miles. 1 and 6 West longitude.

NAMES.] THE word Scot is no other than a corruption of Scuyth, or Scythian, being originally from that immense country, called Scythia by the ancients. It is termed, by the Italians, Scotia; by the Spaniards, Escotia; by the French, Ecosse; and by the Scots, Germans, and English, Scotland.

BOUNDARIES.] Scotland, which contains an area of 27,794 square miles, is bounded on the south by England; and on the north, east, and west, by the Deucaledonian, German, and Irish seas, or, more prop­erly, the Atlantic Ocean.

DIVISIONS AND SUBDIVISIONS.] See England.

CLIMATE, SOIL, AIR, AND WATER.] In the northern parts, day­light, at midsummer, lasts eighteen hours and five minutes. The air of Scotland is more temperate than could be expected in so northerly a climate. This arises partly from the variety of its hills, vallies, rivers, and lakes; but still more, as in England, from the vicinity of the sex, which affords those warm breezes, that not only soften the natural [...]eness of the air, but, by keeping it in perpetual agitation, render it pure and healthful, and prevent those epidemic distempers that pre­vail in many other countries. In the neighbourhood of some high mountains, however, which are generally covered with snow, the air is keen and piercing for about nine months in the year. The soil in general is not so fertile as that of England; and in many places less fitted for agriculture than for pasture. At the same time, there are particular plains and vallies of the most luxuriant fertility. The finer particles of earth, incessantly washed down from the mountains, and deposited in these vallies, afford them a vegetative nourishment, which is capable of carrying the strongest plants to perfection: Though ex­perience has proved, that many vegetables and hortulane productions do not come so soon to maturity in this country as in England. There is, indeed, a great variety of soils in Scotland, the face of which is agreeably diversified by a charming intermixture of natural objects. The vast inequalities of the ground, if unfavourable to the labours of the husbandman, are particularly pleasing to a traveller, and afford those delightful situations for country-houses, of which many of the Scottish nobility and gentry have so judiciously availed themselves. It is their situation, more than any expensive magnificence, that occasions the seats of the dukes of Argyle and Athol, of Lord Hopton, and ma­ny others, to six the attention of every traveller. The water in Scot­land, as every where else, depends on the qualities of the soil through which it passes. Water passing through a heavy soil is turbid and noxious, but filtrating through sand or gravel, it is clear, light, and salutary to the stomach. This last is in general the case in Scot­land, where the water is better than that of more southern climates, in proportion as the land is worse.

MOUNTAINS.] The principal mountains in Scotland are the Gram­pion hills, which run from east to west, from near Aberdeen to Cowal in Argyleshire, almost the whole breadth of the kingdom. Another [Page 126] chain of mountains, called the Pentland hills, runs through Lothian [...] joins those of Twcedale. A third, called Lammar-Muir, rises [...] the eastern coast, and runs westward through the Merse. [...] those continued chains, among which we may reckon the Chevi [...] [...] Tiviot Hills, on the borders of England, Scotland contains many [...] ­tached mountains, which, from their conical figure, sometimes [...] the Celtic word Laws. Many of them are stupendously high, [...] beautiful forms; but too numerous to be particularized here.

RIVERS, LAKES, AND FORESTS.] The largest river in Scotland, i [...] [...] Forth, which rises in Monteith near Callendar, and passing by Sti [...] after a number of beautiful meanders, discharges itself near Edin [...] into that arm of the German sea to which it gives the name of Fr [...] Forth. Second to the Forth is the Tay, which issues out of Loc [...] [...] in Broadalbin, and running south east, passes the town of Perth, [...] falls into the sea at Dundee. The Spey, which is called the most [...] ­id river in Scotland, issues from a lake of the same name in Bad [...] and, running from south-west to south-east, falls into the sea near [...] ­gin; as do the rivers Dee and Don, which run from west to east, [...] disembogue themselves at Aberdeen. The Tweed rises on the [...] of Lanerkshire, and, after many beautiful serpentine turnings, [...] charges itself into the sea at Berwick, where it serves as a [...] between Scotland and England, on the eastern side. The Clyde [...] large river on the west of Scotland, and falls into the Frith of [...] opposite to the isle of Bute. Besides those capital rivers, Scotland [...] ­tains many of an inferior sort, well provided with salmon, trout, [...] other fishes, which equally enrich and beautify the country. [...] of those rivers go by the name of Esh, which is the old Celtic [...] water. The greatest improvement for inland navigation that has [...] attempted in Great Britain, was undertaken at a very considerable [...] ­pense, by a society of public-spirited gentlemen, for joining the [...] Forth and Clyde together; by which a communication has been [...] ­ed between the east and west seas, to the advantage of the whole [...] ­dom.

The lakes of Scotland (there called Lochs) are too many to be par­ticularly described. Those called Loch Tay, Loch Lomond, Loch [...] Loch Au, and one or two more, present us with such picturesque [...] as are scarcely equalled in Europe, if we except Ireland. Seve [...] [...] ­tness lakes are beautifully fringed with woods, and contain [...] fresh-water fish. The Scots sometimes give the name of a loch [...] arm of the sea; for example, Loch Fyn, which is 60 miles long [...] four broad, and is famous for its excellent herrings. The Loch [...] Spi [...]ie, near Elgin, is remarkable for its number of swans and cy [...] which often darken the air with their flights; owing, as some thi [...] the plant olorina, which grows in its waters, with a straight stal [...] a cluster of seeds at the top. Near Lochness is a hill almost two [...] perpendicular, on the top of which is a lake of cold fresh water, [...] 30 fathoms in length, too deep ever yet to be fathomed, and [...] never freezes; whereas, but 17 miles from thence, the lake Loch [...] or Green Lake, is covered with ice all the year round. Besides [...] rivers and lochs, and others two numerous to mention, the co [...] Scotland are in many parts indented with large, bold, and [...] bays or arms of the sea; as the bay of Gl [...]nluce and Wigtown [...] [Page 127] sometimes they are called Friths, as the Solway Frith, which separates Scotland from England on the west; the Frith of Forth, Murray Frith, and those of Cromarty and Dornock.

The face of Scotland, even where it is most uninviting, presents us with the most incontrovertible evidences of its having been formerly over-run with timber. The deepest morasses, contain large logs of wood; and their waters being impregnated with turpentine have a preserving quality, as appears by the human bodies which have been discovered in those morasses. Fir trees grow in great perfection al­most all over Scotland, and form beautiful plantations. The Scotch [...]k is excellent in the Highlands, where some woods reach 20 or 30 miles in length, and four or five in breadth but without being of much emolument to the proprietors, being at too great a distance from water carriage.

METALS AND MINERALS.] Though Scotland does not at present boast of its gold mines, yet it is certain, that it contains such, or at least that Scotland formerly afforded a considerably quantity of that met­al for its coinage. James V. and his father contracted with certain Germans for working the mines of Crawford-Moor; and it is an un­doubted fact, that when James V. married the French king's daughter, a number of covered dishes, filled with coins of Scotch gold, were presented to the guests by way of desert. The civil wars and trou­bles which followed, under his daughter, and in the minority of his grandson, drove those foreigners, the chief of whom was called Corne­lius, from their works, which since that time have never been re­covered.

Several landholders in Scotland derive a large profit from their lead mines, which are said to be very rich, and to produce large quan­tities of silver; but we know of no silver miner that are worked at present. Some copper mines have been found near Edinburgh; and many parts of Scotland, in the east, west, and nothern counties produce excellent coal of various kinds, large quantities of which are exported, to the vast emolument of the public. Lime-stone is here in great plen­ty, as is free-stone; so that the houses of the better fort are constructed of the most beautiful materials. The indolence of the inhabitants of many places in Scotland, where no coal is found, prevented them from supplying that defect by plantations of wood; and the peat-mos­ses being in many parts, of the north especially, almost exhausted, the inhabitants are put to great difficulties for fuel; however the taste for plantations, of all kinds, that now prevails, will soon remedy that in­convenience.

Lapis lazuli is said to be dug up in Lanerkshire; alum mines have been found in Bamffshire; crystal, variegated pebbles, and other transparent stones, which admit of the finest polish for seals, are found in various parts; as are talc, flint, sea-shells, potters clay, and fullers earth. The stones which the country people call elf-arrow heads, and [...]o which they assign a supernatural origin and use, were probably the flint-heads of arrows made use of by the Caledonians and ancient Scots. No country produces greater plenty of iron-ore both in mines and stones, than Scotland; of which the proprietors now begin to partake of the profits.

[Page 128] VEGETABLE AND ANIMAL PRO­DUCTIONS BY SEA AND LAND.} It is certain, that the soil [...] Scotland, may be rendered, in [...] ­ny parts, nearly as fruitful as that of England. It is even said, [...] some tracts of the low countries at present exceed in value English [...] ­tates of the same extent, because they are far less exhausted and [...] out than those of the southern parts of the island; and agriculture [...] now perhaps as well understood, both in theory and practice, [...] many of the Scotch landlords and farmers, as it is in any part of [...] ­rope.

The merchants of Glasgow, who are the life and soul of [...] part of the kingdom, and into whose hands a very considerable part of the landed property has lately fallen, while they are daily [...] ­troducing new branches of commerce, are no less attentive to the [...] ­ress of agriculture, by which they do their country in particular, [...] the whole island in general, the most essential service. The [...] genius of these people extends even to moors, rocks, and mar [...] which being hitherto reckoned useless, were consequently negle [...] but are now brought to produce certain species of grain or timber, [...] which the soil is best adapted.

But the fruits of skill and industry are chiefly perceivable in [...] counties lying upon the river Forth, called the Lothians, where [...] culture is thoroughly understood, and the farmers, who generally [...] from 3 to 500l. per ann. are well fed, well clothed, and comfort [...] lodged. The reverse, however, may be observed of a very consid [...] part of Scotland, which still remains in a state of nature, and [...] the landlords, ignorant of their real interest, refuse to grant such [...] ­es as would encourage the tenant to improve his own farm. In [...] places the husbandmen barely exist upon the gleanings of a [...] farm, seldom exceeding 20 or 30l. per ann. the cattle are lean and [...] the houses mean beyond expression, and the face of the country [...] ­hibits the most deplorable marks of poverty and oppression. [...] from a mistaken notion of the landed people in general, the [...] part of the kingdom lies naked and exposed, for want of such [...] rows and planting as adorn the country of England. They co [...] hedges as useless and cumbersome, as occupying more room than [...] they call stone inclosures, which, except in the Lothians already [...] ­tioned, are generally no other than low paltry walls, huddled up [...] loose stones, without lime or mortar, which have a black and mean ap­pearance.

The soil in general produces wheat, rye, barely, oats, hemp, flax, [...] and pasture. In the southern counties the finest garden fruits, partic­ularly apricots, nectarines, and peaches, are said to fall little, if at [...] short of those in England; and the same may be said of the [...] fruits. The uncultivated parts of the Highlands abound in various [...] of salubrious and pleasant-tasted berries; though many extensive [...] are covered with a strong heath. The sea-coast produces the al [...] [...] ­rina, dulse or dulish, a most wholesome nutritive weed, in great quanti­ties, and other marine plants.

The Scots have improved in their fisheries as much as they have [...] their manufactures and agriculture: For societies have been [...] which have carried that branch of national wealth to a per [...] that never was before known in that country; and bids fair to [...] [Page 129] late the Dutch themselves in curing, as well as catching, their fish. In former times, the Scots seldom ventured to fish above a league's distance from the land; but they now ply in the deep waters as bold­ly and successfully as any of their neighbours. Their salmons, which they can send more early, when prepared, to the Levant and southern markets, than the English or Irish can, are of great service to the na­tion, as the returns are generally made in specie, or beneficial commod­ities.

The numbers of black cattle that cover the hills of Scotland to­wards the Highlands, and sheep that are fed upon the beautiful moun­tains of Tweedale, and other parts of the south, are almost incredible, and formerly brought large sums into the country; the black cattle especially, which, when fattened on the southern pastures, have been reckoned superior to English beef. This trade is now said to be on the decline, in consequence of the vast increase of manufacturers in Scot­land, whose demand for butchers meat must lessen the exportation of cattle into England. Some are of opinion, that a sufficient stock, by proper methods, may be raised to supply both markets, to the great e [...]olument of the nation.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MANNERS, AND CUSTOMS. If we consult the most ancient and creditable histories, the popu­lation of Scotland in the thirteenth century, must have been excessive, as it afforded so many thousands to fall by the swords of the English. For the present number of inhabitants in Scotland, see the General Table of Great Britain.

The people of Scotland are generally raw-boned; and a kind of a characteristical feature, that of high-cheek bones, is observable in their faces; they are lean, but clean limbed, and can endure incredible fa­tigues. Their adventuring spirit was chiefly owning to their laws of succession, which invested the elder brother, as head of the family, with the inheritance, and left but a very scanty portion for the other sons. This obliged the latter to seek their fortunes abroad, though no people have more affection for their native soil than the Scots have in general. It is true, this disparity of fortune among the sons of one family prevails in England likewise; but the resources which young­er brothers have in England are numerous, compared to those of a country so narrow, and so little improved, either by commerce or agri­culture, as Scotland was formerly.

It remains perhaps a question, whether that lettered education, for which the Scots were noted among the neighbouring nations, was not of prejudice to their country, while it was of the utmost service to ma­ny of its natives. Their literature, rendered them acceptable and agreeable among foreigners; but at the same time it drained the na­tion of that order of men, who are the best fitted for forming and exe­cuting the great plans of commerce and agriculture for the public emolument.

With regard to gentlemen who live at home, upon estates of 300l. [...] year and upwards, they differ little or nothing in their manners, and [...] of living, from their English neighbours of the like fortunes.

The peasantry have their peculiarities; their ideas are confined; but no people can conform their tempers better than they do to their [...] They are taughs from their infancy to bridle their passions, [Page 130] to behave submissively to their superiors, and live within the boun [...] of the most rigid economy. Hence they save their money and [...] constitutions, and few instances of murder, perjury, robbery and other atrocious vices, occur at present in Scotland. They seldom enter [...] ­ly upon any daring enterprise; but when they act in concert, the secresy, sagacity, and resolution, with which they carry on any despe­rate undertaking, is not to be paralleled; and their fidelity to one another, under the strongest temptations arising from their poverty, [...] still more extraordinary. Their mobs are managed with all the [...] ­tion of conspiracies; witness that which put Porteus to death in 17 [...] in open defiance of law and government, and in the midst of 20, [...] people; and, though the agents were well known, and some of then tried, with a reward of 500l. annexed to their conviction, yet no [...] ­dence could be found sufficient to bring them to punishment. The fidelity of the Highlanders of both sexes, under a still greater tempta­tion, to the young Pretender after his defeat at Culloden, could sc [...] ­ly be believed were it not well attested.

The inhabitants of those parts of Scotland, who live chiefly by [...] ­ture, have a natural vein for poetry; and the beautiful simplicity of the Scotch tunes is relished by all true judges of nature. Love is gen­erally the subject, and many of the airs have been brought upon [...] English stage with variations, under new names, but with this disadvant­age, that, though rendered more conformable to the rules of [...] they are mostly altered for the worse, being stripped of that [...] simplicity, which, however irregular, is their most essential character­istic, which is so agreeable to the ear, and has such powers over [...] human breast. Those of a more lively and merry strain have had [...] fortune, being introduced into the army in their native dress, by the fife, an instrument for which they are remarkably well suited.

Dancing is a favourite amusement in this country, but little [...] is paid to art or gracefulness; the whole consists in agility, and i [...] keeping time in their own tunes, which they do with great exactness. One of the particular diversions practised by the gentlemen, is the [...] which requires an equal degree of art and strength; it is played [...] bat and a ball; the latter is smaller and harder than a cricket ball; [...] bat is of a taper construction, till it terminates in the part that [...] the ball, which is loaded with lead, and faced with horn. The diver­sion itself resembles that of the Mall, which was common in England in the middle of the last century. An expert player will send the [...] an amazing distance at one stroke; each party follows his ball upon [...] open heath, and he who strikes it in fewest strokes into a hole, who the game. The diversion of Curling is likewise, I believe, peculiar [...] the Scots. It is performed upon ice, with large flat stones, often [...] twenty to two hundred pounds weight each, which they hurl from a common stand to a mark at a certain distance; and whoever is [...] ­est the mark is the victor. These two may be called the standing [...] ­mer and winter diversions of Scotland. The natives are expert [...] the other diversions common in England, cricket excepted, of [...] they have no notion; the gentlemen considering it as too athle [...] mechanical.

LANGUAGE.] The language of the Highlanders, especially [...] Lochaber and Baden [...]ch, is radically Celtic.

[Page 131] RELIGION.] Ancient Scottish historians, with Bede, and other writers, generally agree that Christianity was first taught in Scotland by some of the disciples of St. John the apostle, who fled to this nor­thern corner to avoid the persecution of Domitian, the Roman empe­ror; though it was not publickly professed till the beginning of the third century, when a prince, whom Scotch historians call Donald the First, his queen, and several of his nobles, were solemnly baptised. It was farther confirmed by emigration from South Britain, during the persecutions of Aurelius and Dioclesian, when it became the establish­ed religion of Scotland, under the management of certain learned and pious men, named Culdees, who seem to have been the first regular clergy in Scotland▪ and were governed by overseers or bishops chosen by themselves, from among their own body, and who had no pre-emi­ [...]ce or rank over the rest of their brethren.

Thus, independent of the church of Rome, Christianity seems to have been taught, planted, and finally confirmed in Scotland as a na­tional church, where it flourished in its native simplicity, till the arrival of Palladius, a priest sent by the bishop of Rome in the fifth century, who found means to introduce the modes and ceremonies of the Rom­ish church, which at last prevailed, and Scotland became involved in that darkness which for many ages overspread Europe; though their dependence upon the Pope was very slender, when compared to the implicit subjection of many other nations.

The Culdees, however, long retained their original manners, and re­mained a distinct order, notwithstanding the oppression of the Roman Clergy, so late as the age of Robert Bruce, in the 14th century, when they disappeared. But it is worthy of observation, that the opposition to the old Religion in this island, though it ceased in Scotland upon the extinction of the Cludees, was in the same age revived in England by John Wickliffe, a man of abilities and learning, who was the forerun­ner, in the work of reformation, to John Huss, and Jerome of Prague, as the latter were to Martin Luther, and John Calvin.

The reformation in Scotland began in the reign of James V. made great progress under that of his daughter Mary, and was at length completed through the preaching of John Knox, who had adopted the doctrines of Calvin, and in a degree was the apostle of Scotland.

The bounds of this work do not admit of entering at large upon the doctrinal and oeconomical part of the church of Scotland. It is suffi­cient to say, that its first principle is a parity of ecclesiastical authority among all its presbyters; and it is modelled principally after the Cal­vinistical plan established at Geneva. The power of the Scotch clergy is at present very moderate, or at least very moderately exercised. They have been ever since the Revolution, firm adherents to civil liberty, and the house of Hanover; and acted with remarkable intrepidity dur­ing the rebellion in 1745. They dress without clerical robes; but some of them appear in the pulpit in gowns, after the Geneva form, and bands. They make no use of set forms in worship. The rents of the bishops, since the abolition of episcopacy, are paid to the king, who commonly appropriates them to pious purposes. A thousand pounds a year is always sent by his majesty for the use of the protestant schools erected by act of parliament in North Britain, and the Western Isles; and the Scotch clergy, of late, have planned out funds for the support [Page 132] of their widows and orphans. The number of parishes in Scotland are eight hundred and ninety, whereof thirty-one are collegi [...] churches, that is, where the cure is served by more than one mini [...].

The highest ecclesiastical authority in Scotland is the general assem­bly, which we many call the ecclesiastical parliament of Scotland. [...] consists of commissioners, some of which are laymen, under the title [...] ruling elders, from presbyteries, royal burghs, and universities. A pres­bytery, consisting of under twelve ministers, sends two ministers, [...] one ruling elder: If it contains between twelve and eighteen ministers it sends three, and one ruling elder: If it contains between eighteen and twenty-four ministers, it sends four ministers and two ruling [...] ­ders; but if the presbytery has twenty-four ministers, it [...] five ministers and two ruling elders. Every royal burgh sends [...] ruling elder, and Edinburgh two; whose election must be attested by the respective kirk-sessions of their own burghs. Every univer [...] sends one commissioner, usually a minister of their own body. [...] commissioners are chosen yearly, six weeks before the meeting of [...] assembly. The ruling elders are often of the first quality of the country.

The king presides by his commissioner (who is always a noble [...] in this assembly, which meets once a year; but he has no voice in [...] deliberations. The order of their proceedings is regular, though [...] number of members often creates a confusion; which the mod [...] who is chosen by them to be as it were speaker of the house, h [...] [...] sufficient authority to prevent. Appeals are brought from all the [...] ecclesiastical courts in Scotland to the general Assembly; and [...] ­peal lies from its determinations in religious matters.

Provincial synods are next in authority to the general Assembly▪ They are composed of a number of the adjacent presbyteries, [...] whom they have a power; and there are fifteen of them in Scotland. But their acts are reversible by the general Assembly.

Subordinate to the synods, are presbyteries, sixty-nine of which [...] in Scotland, each consisting of a number of contiguous parishes. The ministers of these parishes, with one ruling elder, chosen half-yearly out of every kirk-session, compose a presbytery. These presbyteri [...] meet in the head town of that division; but have no jurisdiction be­yond their own bounds, though within these they have cognisance of all ecclesiastical causes and matters. A chief part of their business [...] the ordination of candidates for livings, in the which they are regular [...] solemn. The patron of a living is bound to nominate or present in [...] months after a vacancy, otherwise the presbytery fills the place [...] devoluto; but that privilege does not hold in royal burghs.

A kirk-session is the lowest ecclesiastical judicatory in Scotland and its authority does not extend beyond its own parish. The mem­bers consist of the minister, elders, and deacons. The deacons [...] laymen, and have the superintendency of the poor, and take [...] of other parochial affairs. The elder, or, as he is called, the ruling [...] is a place of great parochial trust, and he is generally a lay person [...] quality or interest in the parish. They are supposed to act in [...] of co-ordinancy with the minister, and to be assisting to him in [...] of his clerical duties, particularly in catechising, visiting the sick, [...] at the communion-table.

[Page 133] The office of ministers, or preaching presbyters, includes the offices of deacons and ruling-elders; they alone can preach, administer the sacraments, catechise, pronounce church censures, ordain deacons and ruling-elders, assist at the imposition of hands upon other ministers, and moderate or preside in all ecclesiastical judicatories.

The other sects of dissenters in Scotland are episcopalians, a few quakers, many Roman Catholics and some sectaries, who are denomi­nated from their preachers. Episcopacy, from the time of the restora­tion in 1660, to that of the Revolution in 1688, was the established church of Scotland. The partisans of the duke of York, retained the episcopal religion; and king William's government was rendered so unpopular in Scotland, that in queen Anne's time, the episcopalians were more numerous in some parts than the Presbyterians; and their meetings, which they held under the act of Toleration, as well attend­ed. A Scotch episcopalian thus becoming another name for a Jacobite, they received some checks after the rebellion in 1715; but they re­covered themselves so well, that at the breaking out of the rebellion in 1745, they became again numerous, after which the government found means, to invalidate the acts of their clerical order. Their meet­ings, still subsist, but thinly.

Scotland, during the time of episcopacy, contained two archbishop­ricks, St. Andrews and Glasgow; and twelve bishopricks.

LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN.] For this article we may refer to the literary history of Europe for 1400 years past. The western parts and isles of Scotland produced St. Patrick, the celebrated apostle of Ireland; and many others since, whose barn names would make a long article. Charles the Great, or Charlemagne, most unquestionably held a correspondence by letters with the kings of Scotland, with whom he formed a famous league; and employed Scotchmen in planning, settling, and ruling his favourite universities, and other seminaries of learning, in France, Italy, and Germany. It is an undoubted truth, though a seemingly paradoxical fact, that Barbour, a Scotch poet. Phi­losopher, and historian, though prior in time to Chaucer, having flour­ished in the year 1638, wrote, according to the modern ideas, as pure English as that bard, and his versification is perhaps more harmonious. The destruction of the Scotch monuments of learning and antiquity have rendered their early annals lame, and often fabulous: but the Latin style of Buchanan's history is, to this day, the most classical of all modern productions. The letters of the Scotch kings to the neigh­bouring princes, are incomparably the finest compositions of the times in which they were written, and are free from the barbarisms of those sent them in answer. This has been considered as a proof, that classi­cal, learning was more cultivated at the court of Scotland, than at any other in Europe.

The discovery of the logarithms, a discovery, which in point of in­genuity and utility, may vie with any that has been made in modern times, is the indisputable right of Napier of Merchiston. And since his time, the mathematical sciences have been cultivated in Scotland with great success. Keil, in his physico-mathematical works, to the clearness of his reasoning, has added the colouring of a poet, which is the more remarkable, not only as the subject is little susceptible of or­nament, but as he wrote in an ancient language. Of all writers on as­tronomy, [Page 134] Gregory is allowed to be one of the most perfect and elegant Maclaurin, the companion and the friend of Sir Isaac Newton, [...] endowed with all that precision and force of mind, which rendered him peculiarly fitted for bringing down the ideas of that great man [...] the level of ordinary apprehensions, and for diffusing that light through the world, which Newton had confined within the sphere of the learned. His Treatise on Fluxions is regarded by the best judges, in Europe, as the clearest account of the most refined and subtle sp [...] ­lations on which the human mind ever exerted itself with succ [...] While Maclaurin pursued this new career, a geometrician, no less [...] ­mous, distinguished himself in the sure, but almost deserted track of antiquity. This was the late Dr. Simson, so well known over Eu­rope, for his illustration of the ancient geometry. His Elements of Euclid, and above all, his Conic Sections, are sufficient, of themselves, to establish the scientific reputation of his native country.

This, however, does not rest on the character of a few mathemati­cians and astronomers. The fine arts have been called sisters to do note their affinity. There is the same connexion between the scien­ces, particularly those which depend on observation. Mathematics and physics, properly so called, were in Scotland accompanied by the oth­er branches of study to which they are allied. In medicine, partic­ularly, the names of Pitcairn, Arbuthnot, Monro, Smellie, and Whyt, hold a distinguished place.

Nor have the Scots been unsuccessful in cultivating the Belles Let­tres. Foreigners who inhabit warmer climates, and conceive the nor­thern nations incapable of tenderness and feeling, are astonished at the poetic genius and delicate sensibility of Thomson.

But of all literary pursuits, that of rendering mankind more virt [...] and happy, which is the proper object of what is called morals, [...] to be regarded with peculiar honour and respect. The philosophy of Dr. Hutcheson▪ * not to mention other works more subtle and [...] but less convincing and less instructive, deserves to be read by all [...] know their duty▪ or who would wish to practise it. Next to Loch [...] Essay on the Human Understanding, it is perhaps the best dissection of the human mind, that hath appeared in modern times; and it is [...] wise the most useful supplement to that essay.

It would be endless to mention all the individuals, who have dis­tinguished themselves in the various branches of literature; particu­larly as those who are alive (some of them in high esteem for histeri [...] ­ethical, and sermonic composition) dispute the palm of merit [...] the dead, the cover their country with unfading laurels.

UNIVERSITIES.] The universities of Scotland are four, viz. St. [...] ­drews, [Page 135] founded in 1411.—Glasgow about 1453.—Aberdeen, § 1494.—And Edinburgh, 1582.

SOCIETY.] A Society was incorporated by patent, in the year 1708, for erecting schools in North-Britain and the Isles; and in 1716, an act passed for their establishment, and a fund of £.20,005 was ap­propriated, and made a stock, for carrying on the design. The Socie­ty applied to George II. for an additional charter to erect work houses for employing children in manufactures, house wifery and husbandry, in the Highlands and Isles, and obtained from him not only a patent, but a revenue of £.1000 a year, and they have now upwards 100 schools, in which between 4 and 5000 boys and girls are educated.

[Page 136] CITIES, TOWNS, AND OTHER EDIFICES PUBLIC AND PRIVATE.} Edinburgh. This city is [...] ­ated in W. long. 3°, N. lat. [...] near the southern [...]ank of the river Forth, upon a sleep hill, [...] from E. to W. and terminating in a high rock, on which the [...] ­stands. It is the metropolis of Scotland. It has lately been estab­lished with a great number of fine houses in modern taste. Its [...] street is the noblest in the world: It is broad enough for five [...] to pass abreast. This street is exceedingly well paved, and rises [...] the middle, with canals on each side. The houses are very lofty [...] ­pecially in the High-street; some are not less than fourteen stori [...] height. This is owning to their being straitened for room, which [...] ­ing two small for great foundations, they are forced to make up [...] that scantiness by the superstructures. Most of the houses being [...] ­ed into tenements, they have as many landlords as stories, without de­pendence on one another. The excessive height of buildings has [...] ­ly been prohibited. The city is watered by leaden pipes bro [...] from a neighbouring spring. It contains besides churches, [...] magnificent buildings, among which are, the castle already mentioned situated at the west end of the city, inaccessible on the north, [...] and west, and at the entrance from the city is defended by an out [...] and a round battery: It is furnished with water by two wells [...] rock. In this place are kept the regalia and records of State.

The hospital, founded by George Herriot, stands to the south- [...] of the castle, in a noble situation. It is the finest and most [...] specimen which Ignio Jones has left us of his Gothic manner, and [...] exceeding any thing of that kind to be seen in England. It was [...] for the maintenance and education of poor children belonging to [...] citizens and tradesmen of Edinburgh, and is under the direction of [...] city magistrates.

The Parliament Square, or, as it is there called, Close, was for [...] the most ornamental part of this city; it is formed into a very [...] quadrangle, part of which consists of lofty buildings; and in the [...] ­dle is a fine equestrian statue of Charles II. The room built [...] Charles I. for the parliament house, though not so large, is better [...] ­portioned than Westminster-hall; and its roof, though executed [...] the same manner, has been by good judges held to be superior. [...] now converted into a court of law, where a single judge, called [...] lord ordinary, presides by rotation; in a room near it, fit the [...] judges; and adjoining are the public offices of the law, exchequer, [Page 137] chancery, shrievalty, and magistracy of Edinburgh; and in it is kept the valuable library of the lawyers. This equals any thing of the like kind to be found in England, or perhaps in any part of Eu­rope, and was at first entirely founded and furnished by lawyers.—The number of printed books it contains is amazing; and the collec­tion has been made with great taste and judgment. It contains like­wise the most valuable manuscript remains of the Scotch history, char­tularies, and other papers of antiquity, with a series of medals. Ad­joining to the library is the room where the publick records are kept; but both it and that which contains the library, though lofty in the roof, are miserably dark and dismal. It is said that preparations are now carrying on, for lodging both the books and the papers in rooms far better suited to their importance and value.

The modern edifices in and near Edinburgh, such as the exchange, public offices, its hospitals, bridges, and the like, demonstrate the vast improvement of the taste of the Scots in their public works. Parallel to the city of Edinburgh, on the north, the nobility, gentry, and others, have begun to build a new town, upon a plan which does hon­our to the present age. The streets and squares are laid out with the utmost regularity, and the houses are to be built of stone, in an elegant taste. The fronts of some are superbly finished in all the beauties of architecture, displaying at the same time the judgment of the builder, and the public spirit of the proprietor.

Between the old and the new town, is a narrow vale, which, agreea­bly to the original plan was to have been formed into a sheet of water, bordered by a terrace walk, and the ascent towards the new town covered with pleasure gardens, shrubberies, &c. But this elegant de­sign was frustrated, through the narrow ideas of the magistrates, who, finding greater benefits by letting the grounds to inferior tradesman up­on building leases; this spot, formed by nature as an agreeable open­ing to a crowded city, became a nuisance to those gentlemen who had been so liberal in ornamenting the buildings upon the summit. A de­cision of the House of Lords (in which a certain great luminary of the law, equally distinguished for his taste and good sense, heartily con­curred) put a stop to these mean erections. At the west, or upper end of this vale, the castle, a solid rock, not less than twenty stories high, looks down with awful magnificence. The eastern extremity is bound­ed by a lofty bridge, the middle arch being ninety feet high, which joins the new buildings to the city, and renders the descent on each side the vale (there being no water in this place) more commodious for carriages.

Edinburgh contains a play-house, which has now the sanction of an act of parliament; and concerts, assemblies, balls, musick-meetings, and other polite amusements, are as frequent and brilliant here, as in any part of his majesty's dominions, London and Bath excepted.

Edinburgh is governed by a lord provost, four baillies, a dean of guild, and a treasurer, annually chosen from the common-council.

Leith, though near two miles distant, may be properly called the harbour of Edinburgh, being under the same jurisdiction. The neigh­bourhood of Edinburgh is adorned with noble seats, which are daily increasing; some of them yield to few in England; but they are too numerous to be particularized here. About four miles from Edin­burgh [Page 138] is Roslin, noted for a stately Gothic chapel, considered as [...] of the most curious pieces of workmanship in Europe: Founded in the year 1440, by William St. Clair, prince of Orkney, and [...] of Oldenburgh.

Glasgow, in the shire of Lanerk, situated on a gentle declivity, [...] ­ing towards the river Clyde, 44 miles west of Edinburgh, is, for [...] ­lation, commerce, and riches, the second city of Scotland, and, [...] ­sidering its size, the first in Great-Britain, and perhaps in Europe [...] to elegance, regularity, and the beautiful materials of its building [...] ▪ The streets cross each other at right angles, and are broad, stra [...] well paved, and consequently clean. The houses make a grand [...] ­pearance, and are in general four or five stories high, and many [...] them, towards the centre of the city, are supported by arcades, [...] form piazzas, and give the whole an air of magnificence. Some of [...] modern built churches are in the finest style of architecture; and [...] cathedral is a stupendous Gothic building, hardly to be paralleled [...] that kind of architecture. It contains three churches, one of [...] stands above another, and is furnished with a very fine spire spring [...] from a tower; the whole being reckoned a masterly and a matc [...] [...] fabric. It was dedicated to St. Mungo or Kentigern, who was [...] of Glasgow in the 6th century. The cathedral is upwards of [...] years old, and was preserved from the fury of the rigid Reformers by the resolution of the citizens. The town-house is a lofty building and has very noble apartments for the magistrates. The university [...] esteemed the most spacious and best built of any in Scotland, and i [...] [...] present in a thriving state. In this city are several well-endowed hos­pitals; and it is particularly well supplied with large and conveni [...] ­i [...]ns. The number of inhabitants in this city has been estimated by some, at 30,000, by others, at 50,000, and others, at 60,000.

Aberdeen bids fair to be the third town in Scotland for improve­ment and population. It is the capital of a shire, to which it gives [...] name, and contains two towns, New and Old Aberdeen. The [...] is the shire town, and evidently built for the purpose of commerce. [...] is a large well-built city, and has a good quay, or tide harbour: In [...] are three churches, and several episcopal meeting-houses, a considera­ble degree of foreign commerce and much shipping, a well frequent­ed university, and above 12,000 inhabitants. Old Aberdeen, near [...] mile distant, though almost joined to the New, by means of a long vil­lage, has no dependence on the other; it is a moderately large mar­ket-town, but has no haven. In each of these two places there is a well-endowed college, both together being termed the university [...] Aberdeen, although quite independent of each other.

Perth, the capital town of Perthshire, lying on the river Tay, [...] to Norway and the Baltic: It is finely situated, has an improving [...] manufactory, and lies in the neighbourhood of one of the most [...] spots in Great-Britain, called the Carse of Gowry Dundee, by the [...] ­eral computation, contains about 11,000 inhabitants: It lies [...] [...] month of the river Tay; it is a town of considerable trade, exp [...] much linen, grain, herrings, and peltry, to foreign parts; and [...] three churches, Montrose, Aberbrothie and Brechinlie; also, in the county of Angus: The first has a large and increasing trade, and [...] manufactures of the other two are flourishing.

[Page 139] Two Pictish monuments, as they are thought to be, of a very extraor­dinary construction, were lately standing in Scotland; one of them at Abernethy in Perthshire, the other at Brechin in Angus; both of them are columns, hollow in the inside, and a stair-case without: That of Brechin is the most entire, being covered at the top with a spiral roof of [...]one, with three or four windows above the cornice: It consists of [...] regular courses of hewn freestone, laid circularly and regularly, and [...]pering towards the top. If these columns are really Pictish, that people must have had among them architects that far exceeded those of any coeval monuments to be found in Europe, as they have all the appearance of an order; and the building is neat, and in the Roman style of architecture. It is, however, difficult to assign them to any but the Picts, as they stand in their dominions; and some sculptures upon that at Brechin, denote it to be of Christian origin. It is not indeed impossible that these sculptures are of a later date. Besides these two pillars, many other Pictish buildings are found in Scotland, but not in the same taste.

The vestiges of erections by the ancient Scots, are not only curious but instructive, as they regard many important events of their history. That people had amongst them a rude notion of sculpture, in which they transmitted the actions of their kings and heroes. At a place called Aberlemno, near Brechin, four or five ancient obelisks are still to be seen, called the Danish stones of Aberlemno. They were erected as commemorations of the Scotch victories over that people; and are adorned with has-reliefs of men on horseback, and many emblematical figures and hieroglyphics, not intelligible at this day. There is a stone near the town of Forres, or Fortrose, in Murray, which far surpasses all the others in magnificence and grandeur, "and is (says Mr. Gor­don) perhaps one of the most stately monuments of that kind in Eu­rope. It rises about 23 feet in height, above ground, and is, as I am credibly informed, no less than 12 or 15 feet below; so that the whole height is at least 35 feet, and its breadth near five. It is all one single and entire stone; great variety of figures in relievo are carved thereon, and some of them still distinct and visible; but the injury of the weather has obscured those towards the upper part."

At Sandwick, in Rose-shire, is a very splendid ancient obelisk, sur­rounded at the base with large, well cut flag stones, formed like steps. Both sides of the column are covered with various ornaments, in well finished carved work. The one face presents a sumptuous cross, with a figure of St. Andrew on each hand, and some uncouth animals and flowerings underneath. The central division on the reverse, exhibits a variety of curious figures, birds, and animals.

Besides these remains of Scotch antiquities, there are many Roman, Pictish, and Danish remains, and many Druidical monuments and tem­ples are discernible in the northern parts of Scotland, as well as in the isles, where we may suppose that paganism took its last refuge. They are easily perceived by their circular forms; but though they are equal­ly regular, yet none of them are so stupendous as the Druidical erec­tions in South-Britain. There is in Perthshire a barrow which seems to be a British erection, and the most beautiful of the kind perhaps in the world; it exactly resembles the figure of a ship, with the keel up­permost. The common people call it Ternay, which some interpret [Page 140] to be terroe navis, the ship of earth. It seems to be of the most [...] antiquity, and perhaps was erected to the memory of some British prince, who acted as auxiliary to the Romans▪ for it lies near Auc [...] ­terarder▪ not many miles distant from the great scene of Agrico [...] operations.

The traces of ancient volcanoes are not unfrequent in Scotland. The hill of Finehaven is one instance; and the hill of Bergonium, [...] Dunstastage castle, is another, yielding vast▪ quantities of pu [...]i [...] [...] scoria of different kinds, many of which are of the same species with those of the volcanic Iceland.

COMMERCE AND MANUFACTURES.] In addition to what we have said on this article in the account of England, we observe [...] Scotland, in respect to her commerce and manufactures, has, [...] some years past, been in a very improving state. The expedition of the Scots to take possession of Darien, (of which we gave some acco [...] in the general description of America) and to carry on an East and West-India trade, was founded upon true principles of comme [...], and (so far as it went) executed with a noble spirit of enterprise. The miscarriage of that scheme, after receiving the highest and most sole [...] sanctions, is a disgrace to the annals of that reign in which it happen­ed; as the Scots has then a free, independent, and unconnected par­liament. We are to account for the long langour of the Scottish com­merce, and many other misfortunes which that country sustained, by the disgust the inhabitants conceived on that account, and some inv [...] ­sions of their rights afterwards, which they thought inconsistent with the articles of union.

The bounties and encouragement granted to the Scots, for the bene­fit of trade and manufactures, during Mr. Pelham's administration made them sensible of their own importance. Mr. Pitt, a succeeding minister, pursued Mr. Pelham's wise plan; and justly boasted in par­liament, that he availed himself of the courage, good sense, and spirit of the Scots, in carrying on the most extensive war that Great-Britain ever was engaged in. Let me add, to the honour of the British govern­ment, that the Scots have been suffered to avail themselves of all the benefits of commerce and manufactures they can claim, either in right of their former independency, the treaty of union, or posterior [...] of parliament.

The increase of their shipping within these 30 years past, has [...] very considerable. The exports of those ships are composed chiefly of Scotch manufactures, fabricated from the produce of the soil, and the industry of its inhabitants. In exchange for these, they import tobac­co, rice, cotton, sugar, and rum, from the British plantations, from the United States of America, and from other countries, their produce, to the immense saving of their nation. The prosperity of Glasgow and its neighbourhood hath been greatly owing to the connexion and trade with Virginia, and some other of the American States.

The fisheries of Scotland are not confined to their own co [...], [...] they have a great concern in the whale fishery, carried on upon [...] coast of Spitsbergen; and their returns are valuable; as the govern­ment allows them a bounty of 40 [...]. for every ton of shipping employ [...] in that article.

[Page 141] The busses, or vessels employed in the great herring fishery on the western coasts of Scotland, are fitted out from the north-west parts of England, the north of Ireland, as well as the numerous ports of the Clyde and neighbouring islands. The grand rendezvous is at Camp­bletown, a commodious port in Argyleshire, facing the north of Ireland, where sometimes 300 vessels have been assembled.

The benefits of the fisheries are perhaps equalled by various manu­factures, particularly that of iron at Carron, in Sterlingshire. The [...] manufactory, notwithstanding a strong rivalship from Ireland, is in a flourishing state. The thread manufacture of Scotland is equal, if not superior, to any in the world; and the lace fabricated from it, has [...] deemed worthy of royal wear and approbation. It has been said, [...] years ago, that the exports from Scotland to England, and the British plantations, in linen, cambricks, checks, Osnzburgs, inckle, and the like commodities, amounted annually to 400,000l. exclusive of their home comsumption; and there is reason to believe that the sum is considerably larger at present. The Scots are likewise making very promising efforts for establishing woollen manufactures; and their exports of caps, stockings, mittens, and other articles of their own wool, begin to be very considerable.

Among the other late improvements of the Scots, we are not to for­get the vast progress they have made in working the mines, and smelt­ing the ores of their country. Their coal trade to England is very considerable, and of late they have turned even their stones to account, by their contracts for paving the streets of London. If the great trade in cattle, which the Scots carried on of late with the English, is now diminished, it is owing to the best of national causes, that of an increase of home consumption.

The trade carried on by the Scots with England, is chiefly from Leith, and the eastern ports of the nation; but Glasgow was the great emporium for the American commerce, before the commencement of the unhappy breach with the colonies. The late junction of the Forth to the Clyde will render the benefits of trade of mutual advantage to both parts of Scotland.

With regard to other manufactures, not mentioned, some of them are yet in their infancy. The town of Paisley alone employs an incred­ible number of har [...]ds, in fabricating a particular kind of flowered and striped lawns, which are a reasonable and elegant wear. Sugar-houses, glass-works of every kind, delf-houses, and paper-mills, are erected every-where, and the Scotch carpeting makes neat furniture.

REVENUES.] See England.

GOVERNMENT.] The ancient constitution of government in Scot­land has been highly applauded, as excellently adapted to the preser­vation of liberty; and it is certain, that the power of the king was greatly limited, and that there were many checks in the constitution upon him, which were well calculated to prevent his assuming or ex­ercising a despotic authority. But the Scottish constitution of govern­ment was too much of the aristocratic kind, to afford to the common people that equal liberty which they had a right to expect. The king's authority was sufficiently restrained; but the nobles, chieftains, and great landholders, had it too much in their power to tyrannize over and oppress their tenants, and the common people.

[Page 142] The ancient kings of Scotland, at their coronation, took the follow­ing oath, containing three promises, viz.

"In the name of Christ, I promise these three things to the Christian people my subjects: First, That I shall give order, and employ [...] force and assistance, that the church of God, and the Christian people may enjoy true peace during our time, under our government. [...] ­ondly, I shall prohibit and hinder all persons, of whatever [...] from violence and injustice. Thirdly, In all judgements I shall [...] the prescriptions of justice and mercy, to the end that our element [...] merciful God may shew mercy unto me, and to you."

The parliament of Scotland anciently consisted of all who held [...] portion of land, however small, of the crown by military service. The parliament appointed the times of its own meeting and adjournment and committees to superintend the administration during the inter [...] of parliament; it had a commanding power in all matters of govern­ment; it appropriated the public money, ordered the keeping of [...] and called for the accounts; it armed the people, and appointed com­manders; it named and commissioned ambassadors; it granted and [...] ­ited pardons; it appointed judges and courts of judicature; it [...] ­ed officers of state and privy-counsellors; it annexed and alienated the revenues of the crown, and restrained grants by the king. The king of Scotland had no negative voice in parliament; nor could [...] declare war, make peace, or conclude any other public business of im­portance, without the advice and approbation of parliament. The prerogative of the king was so bounded, that he was not even entr [...] ­ed with the executive part of the government. In short, the constitu­tion was rather aristocratical than monarchical.

The privy-council of Scotland before the revolution, had, or ass [...] ­ed, inquisitorial powers, even that of torture; but it is now sunk in the parliament and privy-council of Great-Britain; and the civil and criminal causes in Scotland are chiefly cognizable by two courts of ju­dicature.

The first is, that of the college of justice, which was instituted [...] James V. after the modal of the French parliament. This court con­sists of a president and fourteen ordinary members, besides extraordi­nary ones named by the king, who may sit and vote, but have no sal [...] ­ries, and are not bound to attendance. This court may be called a standing jury in all matters of property that lie before them. The civ­il law is their directory in all matters that come not within the [...] ­nicipal laws of the kingdom.

The justice court is the highest criminal tribunal in Scotland; but in its present form it was instituted so late as the year 167 [...], when [...] lord justice general, removeable at the king's pleasure, was appointed. This lucrative office still exists in the person of one of the chief n [...] ­ity; but the ordinary members of the court, are the justice-clerk [...] five other judges, who are always nominated from the lords of [...]. In this court the verdict of a jury condemns or acquits; but without any necessity of their being unanimous.

Besides these two great courts of law, the Scots, by the articles of [...] Union, have a court of exchequer, with the same power, authority, [...] ­ilege, and jurisdiction, over the revenue of Scotland, as the court [...] exchequer, in England, has over the revenues there; and all [...] [Page 143] and things competent to the court of exchequer in England relating thereto, are likewise competent to the exchequer of Scotland.

The court of admiralty in Scotland, was, in the reign of Charles II. by act of parliament, declared to be a supreme court, in all causes com­petent to its own jurisdiction; and the lord high admiral is declared to be the king's lieutenant and justice-general upon the seas, and in all ports, harbours, and creeks of the same; and upon fresh waters and navigable rivers, below the first bridge, or within flood-mark; so that nothing competent to his jurisdiction can be meddled with, in the first instance, but by the lord high admiral and the judges of his court. Sentences passed in all inferior courts of admiralty, may be brought again before his court; but no appeal lies from it to the lords of the session, or any other judicatory, unless in cases not maritime. Causes are tri­ed in this court by the civil law, which, in such cases, is likewise the common law of Scotland, as well as by the laws of Oleron, Wisby and the Hanse towns, and other maritime practices and decisions common upon the continent. The place of Lord admiral of Scotland is little more than nominal, but the salary annexed to it is reckoned worth 1000l. a year; and the judge of the admiralty is commonly a lawyer of distinction▪ with considerable perquisites pertaining to his office.

The college or faculty of advocates, which answers to the English inns of courts, may be called the seminary of Scotch lawyers. They are within themselves an orderly court, and their forms require great precision and examination to qualify its candidates for admission. Sub­ordinate to them is a body of inferior lawyers, or, as they may be call­ed, attorneys, who call themselves writers to the signet, because they alone can subscribe the writs that pass the signet; they likewise have a bye government for their own regulation. Such are the differ­ent law courts that are held in the capital of Scotland.

One thing, which we must not omit to mention, proves the similari­ty between the English and Scotch constitutions. In old times, all the Freeholders in Scotland met together in presence of the king, who was seated on the top of a hillock, which, in the old Scotch constitu­tions, is called the Moot, or Mute-hill; all national affairs were here transacted; judgements given, and differences ended. This Moon-hill is probably of the same nature with the Saxon Pole-mote, and may signify no more than the hill of meeting.

HISTORY.] The Caledonians were, probably, the first inhabitants of Scotland; the Picts, undoubtedly, were the Britons, who were forced northwards by the Belgic Gauls, above fourscore years before the descent of Julius Caesar; and who settling in Scotland were joined by great numbers of their countrymen, that were driven northwards by the Romans. The Scots, most probably, were a nation of adven­turers from the ancient Scythia, who had served in the armies of the continent, and, after conquering the other inhabitants, gave their own name to the country.

Christianity was introduced into Scotland, about the year 201 of the Christian aera, by Donald'I.

Mary, daughter and successor of James V. was but a few hours old at the time of her father's death. Her beauty, her misconduct, and her misfortunes, are alike famous in history. During her minority, and while she was wife to Francis II. of France, the reformation ad­vanced [Page 144] in Scotland. Being called to the throne of her ancestors [...] a widow, she married her own cousin german, the lord Darnley, [...] untimely death hath given rise to much controversy. The [...] ­quence of her husband's death, and of her marriage with Both [...] who was considered as his murderer, was an insurrection of her sub­jects, from whom she sled into England, where she was ungen [...] detained a prisoner for eighteen years, and afterwards on motiv [...] state policy beheaded by queen Elizabeth in 1587, in the forty [...] year of her age.

Mary's son, James VI. of Scotland, succeeded in right of his [...] from Henry VII. upon the death of queen Elizabeth, to the [...] crown, after shewing considerable abilities in the government of [...] land. This union of the two crowns, in 1603, destroyed the indepen­dency, as it impoverished the people of Scotland: James, [...] [...] splendid, but troublesome reign over his three kingdoms, left [...] 1625, to his son, the unfortunate Charles I. That prince, by [...] ­potic principles and conduct, induced both his Scottish and his [...] subjects to take up arms against him: And indeed, it was in Scotland that the sword was first drawn against Charles. But when the [...] party was totally defeated in England, the king put himself [...] power of the Scottish army: They at first treated him with respe [...] afterwards delivered him up to the English parliament, on cond [...] of their paying 400,000 pounds to the Scots, which was said to [...] to them for arrears. However, the Scots afterwards made [...] bloody, but unsuccessful attempts, to restore his son, Charles II. [...] Robertson's History of Scotland.

ISLANDS OF SCOTLAND.

THE Islands of Scotland are the Shetland, Orcades or Orkney, [...] the Hebrides, or Western isles.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.] The islands of Shetland lie north [...] of the Orcades or Orkney-islands, between 60 and 61 degrees of north latitude; and are part of the shire of Orkney.

The Orcades lie north of Dungsby-head, between 59 and 60 deg [...] of north latitude; divided from the continent by a tempestuous [...] called Pentland Frith, 24 miles long and 12 broad.

The Hebrides, or Western isles are very numerous, and [...] them large; situated between 55 and 59 degrees of north latitude.

CLIMATE.] There is very little difference in the climate of [...] islands, the air being keen, piercing, and salubrious; son that many of the natives live to a great age. In the Shetland and Orkney [...] they see to read at midnight in June and July; and during four of the summer months, they have frequent communications, both for [...] ­ness and curiosity, with each other, and with the continent: The [...] of the year, however, they are almost inaccessible, through fogs, [...] ­ness, and storms.

CHIEF ISLANDS AND TOWNS.] The largest of the Shetland [...] which are forty-six in number (though many of them are uninha [...] is Mainland, which is 60 miles in length, and 20 in breadth. Its [...] ­cipal town is Larwick, which contains 300 families; the whole [...] ­ber of families in the island does not exceed 500. Skalloway is [...] ­er town, where the remains of a castle are still to be seen, and it [...] seat of a presbytery.

[Page 145] The largest of the Orkney islands, which are about thirty in num­ber (though several of them are unpeopled) is called Pomona. Its length is 33 miles, and its breadth, in some places, 9. It contains nine parish churches, and four excellent harbours.

The isle of Mull, in the Hebrides, is 24 miles long, and, in some places, almost as broad. It contains two parishes, and a castle, called Duart, which is the chief place in the island. The other principal western islands are Lewis, or Harries (for they both form but one island) which belongs to the shire of Ross, and is 100 miles in length, and 13 or 14 in breadth, its chief town is Stornvay. Sky, belonging to the shire of Inverness, is 40 miles long, and, in some places, 30 bread; fruitful and well peopled. Bute, which is about ten miles long, and three or four broad, is famous for containing the castle of Rothsay, which gave the title of duke to the eldest sons of the kings of Scotland; as it now does to the prince of Wales. Rothsay is like­wise a royal burgh; and the islands of Bute and Arran form the shire of Bute. The isles of Ila and Jura, are part of Argyleshire, and con­tain together about 370 square miles, but they have no towns worthy notice. North Uist contains an excellent harbour, called Lochmaddy. [...]mous for herring-fishing. The famous isle of Iona, was once the se [...]t and sanctuary of western learning, and the burying place of many kings of Scotland, Ireland, and Norway. It is still famous for its re­ [...]iques of sanctimonious antiquity.

INHABITANTS, CUSTOMS, POPULATION, AND RELIGION.] It is not to be expected, that the inhabitants of the islands belonging to Scotland can be minutely described here. Those of Shetland and Orkney were formerly subject to the Normans, who conquered them in 1099. In the year 1263 they were in possession of Magnus of Norway, who sold them to Alexander, king of Scots. After this, they were claimed by, and became subject to the crown of Denmark. Christian I. in the reign of James III. conveyed them in property to the crown of Scot­land, as a marriage portion with his daughter Margaret, and all future pretensions were entirely ceded on the marriage of James VI. of Scot­land with Anne of Denmark. The isles of Shetland and Orkney form a [...]ewartry, or shire, which sends a member to parliament. At present the people in general differ little from the Lowlanders of Scotland. Men of fortune there, have greatly improved their estates of late years, and have introduced into their families many elegancies and luxuries. They build their dwelling and other houses, in a modern taste; and are remarkable for the fineness of their linen. As to the common peo­ple, they live upon butter, cheese, fish, sea and land fowl (of which they have great plenty) particularly geese; and their chief drink is whey, which they have the art to ferment, so as to give it a vinous quality. In some of the northern islands, the Norwegian, which is called the Norse language, is still spoken. Their vast intercourse with the Dutch, during the fishing season, renders that language common in the Shetland and Orkney islands. The people there are as expert [...] the Norwegians, already described, in seizing the nests of sea-fowls, who build in the most frightful precipices and rocks. The people's [...]rance preserves them from any diseases known to luxury. They care the scurvy and the jaundice, to which they are subject, with the [...]der of snail-shells and scurvy-grass, of which they have plenty.— [Page 146] Their religion is protestant, and according to the discipline of the church of Scotland; and their civil institutions are much the [...] with those of the country to which they belong.

Nothing certain can be mentioned, as to the population of the [...] three divisions of islands. We have the most undoubted evidences of history, that about 400 years ago, they were much more populous [...] they are now: For the Hebrides themselves were known often to send 10,000 fighting men into the field, without prejudice to their agri­culture. At present, their numbers are said not to exceed 48,000.—The people of the Hebrides are clothed, and live like the Scotch Highlanders.

The religion professed in the Hebrides is chiefly presbyterian, as es­tablished in the church of Scotland; but the Roman Catholic religion still prevails among some of the islanders.

SOIL, MINES, AND QUARRIES.] It is certain that the soil, both of the northern and western islands belonging to Scotland, has suffered an amazing alteration. It is evident, that many of these islands [...] been the habitations of the Druids, whose temples are still visible [...] most of them; and those temples were surrounded by groves, though little or no timber now grows in the neighbourhood. The stumps of former trees, however, are discernible, as are many vestiges of [...] ­deur, even since the admission of the Christian religion; which [...] the decrease of the riches, power, and population of the inhabitants. Experience daily shews, that if the soil of the northern and [...] islands till of late were barren, cold, and uncomfortable, it was [...] to their want of culture; for such spots of them as are now cultivat­ed, produce corn, vegetables, and garden-stuff, more than sufficient [...] the inhabitants; and even fruit-trees are now brought to maturity. Tin, lead, and silver mines; marl, slate, free-stone, and even quar [...] of marble, have been found upon these islands, They are not desti [...] of fine fresh water; nor of lakes and rivulets that abound with ex­cellent tront. At the same time it must be owned, that the [...] face of the soil is bare, and unornamented with trees, excepting a few that were reared in gardens.

TRADE AND MANUFACTURES.] These are all in their infancy i [...] these islands. The reader can easily suppose, that their staple com­modities consist of fish, especially herrings, which are equal to any in the world, and, when properly cured, are equal even to those of [...] Dutch. They carry on likewise a considerable trade in down and feathers; and their sheep afford them wool, which they manufa [...] into coarse cloths; and even the linen manufactures make no [...] progress in these islands. They carry their black cattle alive to [...] adjacent parts of Scotland, where they are disposed of in sale or [...] ­ter; as are large quantities of their mutton, which they salt [...] [...] hide. Upon the whole, application and industry, with some [...] of public encouragement, are only wanting to render these [...] once ornamental and beneficial to their mother-country, as well [...] their inhabitants.

HORSES.] The Shetland isles are famous for a small breed of [...] ­es, which are incredibly active, strong and hardy, and frequently [...] in the streets of London, yoked to the splendid carriages of the [...] or wealthy.

[Page 147] RARITIES AND CURIOSITIES, ARTIFICIAL AND NATURAL} These islands exhibit many preg­nant proofs, in their churches, the vestiges of old forts, and other buildings both sacred and civil, of what hath been already observed, that they were formerly more populous than they are now. The use and construction of some of those works are not easily accounted for at present. In a gloomy valley belonging to Hoy, one of the western islands, is a kind of hermitage, cut out of a stone, called a dwarf-stone, 36 feet long, 18 broad, and nine thick; in which is a square hole, about two feet high, for an entrance, with a stone of the same size for a door. Within this entrance is the resem­blance of a bed, with a pillow cut out of the stone, big enough for two men to lie on: At the other end is a couch, and in the middle a hearth, with a hole cut out above for a chimney.

The gigantic bones found in many burial-places here, give room to believe, that the former inhabitants were of larger size than the pres­ent. It is likewise probable, from some ancient remains, particularly catacombs, and nine silver fibulae or clasps, found at Stennis, one of the Orkneys, that the Romans were well acquainted with these parts.

The cathedral of kirkwall, the capital of the Orkneys, is a fine Gothic building, dedicated to St. Magnus, but now converted into a parish church. Its roof is supported by 14 pillars on each side, and its steeple, in which is a good ring of bells, by four large pillars. The three gates of the church are chequered with red and white polished stones, embossed and elegantly flowered.

The Hebrides are still more distinguished than the Orkney or Shet­land isles, for their remains of antiquity; and it would far exceed the bounds allotted to this head, were we even to mention every noted monument found upon them, dedicated to civil, religious, or warlike purposes. Innumerable are the inscriptions of ancient customs and ceremonies that are discernible upon this island; and which give countenance to the well-known observation, that when learning was nearly extinct on the continent of Europe, it found a refuge in Scot­land, or rather in these islands.

But some of the most astonishing appearances in nature have re­mained undescribed, and, till lately, unobserved even by the natives of these islands. A discovery reserved for the inquisitive genius of Sir Joseph Banks, who, in relating his voyage through the Hebrides, in 1772, says, "We were no sooner arrived, than we were struck with a scene of magnificence which exceeded our expectations, though founded, as we thought, upon the most sanguine foundations; the whole of that end of the island ( viz. Staffa, a mile [...]n length, and half a mile in breadth) supported by ranges of natural pillars, mostly above fifty feet high, standing in natural colonnades, according as the bays or points of land formed themselves: Upon a firm basis of solid, un­formed rock, above these, the stratum which reaches to the soil or sur­face of the island, varied in thickness as the island itself formed into hills or vallies; each hill, which hung over the columns below, form­ed an ample pediment; some of these, above sixty feet in thickness from the base to the point, formed by the sloping of the hill on each side, almost into the shape of those used in architecture.

"Compared to this, what are the cathedrals or palaces built by man? Mere models or play-things. Imitations as diminutive, as his works [Page 148] will always be, when compared to those of nature. When is no [...] the boast of the architect? Regularity, the only part in which he fan­cied himself to exceed his mistress, Nature, is here found in her pos­session; and here it has been for ages undescribed. Proceeding far­ther to the N. W. you meet with the highest ranges of pillars, the magnificent appearance of which is past all description: Here they are bare to their very bases, and the stratum below them is also visible."

Mr Banks particularizes sundry other appearances in this and a neighbouring island, which is wholly composed of pillars without any stratum. In some parts of Staffa, instead of being placed upright, the pillars were observed to lie on their sides, each forming a segment of a circle; but the most striking object in this field of scenery is Fingal's Cave, which Mr. Banks describes in the following manner: "With our minds full of such reflections, we proceeded along the shore, treading upon another Giant's Causeway, every stone being regularly formed into a certain number of sides and angles; till, in a short time, we arrived at the mouth of a cave, the most magnificent, I suppose, that has ever been described by travellers. * The mind can hardly form an idea more magnificent than such a space, supported on each side by ranges of columns, and rooted by the bottoms of those which have been broken off in order to form it; between the angles of which a yellow stalagmitic matter has exuded, which serves to define the an­gles precisely, and at the same time vary the colour, with a great deal of elegance; and to render it still more agreeable, the whole is lighted from without; so that the farthest extremity is very plainly seen from without: And the air within being agitated by the flux and reflux of the tide, is perfectly dry and wholesome, free entirely from the damp of vapours with which natural caverns in general abound."

Mr. Pennant, who also made a voyage to these islands in the same year, had a glance of Staffa, in his passage from Iona to Mull, but was prevented by stormy weather from approaching it. "On the west," says he, "appears the beautiful groupe of the Treashunish isles.—Nearest lies Staffa, a new Giant's Causeway, rising amidst the waves, but with columns of double the height of that in Ireland; glossy and resplendent, from the beams of the eastern sun."—And in the isle of Sky, a considerable way northward, he resumes the subject. "We had in view a fine series of genuine basaltic columns, resembling the Giant's Causeway; the pillars were above twenty feet high, consisting of four, five, and six angles, but mostly of five. At a small distance from these, on the slope of a hill, is a tract of some roads entirely formed of the tops of several series of columns, even and close set, forming a reticulated surface of amazing beauty and curiosity. This is the most northern basaltes I am acquainted with; the last of four in the British dominions, all running from north to south, nearly in a meridian: The Giant's Causeway appears first; Staffa, &c. succeeds; the rock [Page 149] Humbla about twenty leagues farther, and, finally, those columns of Sky: The depth of the ocean, in all probability, conceals the vast links of this chain."

IRELAND

SITUATION BOUNDARIES, AND EXTENT.

THE Island of Ireland is situated on the west side of England, between 6 and 10 degrees of west longitude, and between 51 and 55 degrees 30 minutes north latitude, or between the middle parallel of the eighth clime (where the longest day is 16½ hours) and the 24th parallel, or the end of the tenth clime, where the longest day is 17½ hours.

It is 285 miles from Fairhead, north, to Misenhead, south; and from the east part of Down, to the west part of Mayo (where the island stretches most in opposite directions) 160 miles, and contains 11,042,642 Irish plantation acres, or about 17,900,000 acres of English statute measure.

This island is bounded on the north by the Deucaledonian Sea; on the south and west by the Atlantic Ocean; and on the east by the Irish Sea, or St. George's Channel, which divides it from the western shores of Great-Britain, from which it is distant in some places, not more than 19 or 20 leagues.

DIVISIONS.] See general account of Great-Britain.

NAME.] The Irish Antiquarians generally agree, that the ancient name of Ireland was Scotia, and that, at different periods, it has also been called Ierne, Juverna, Hibernia, &c.

CLIMATE, SOIL, AND FACE OF THE COUNTRY.] The climate of Ire­land, though it does not generally differ much from that of England, is however found to possess an atmosphere more moist, with more fre­quent returns of rain. From the reports of various registers it appears, that the number of days on which rain had fallen in Ireland was much greater than in the same years in England. But without the evidence of registers, it is certain, that moisture (even without rain) is not only more Characteristic of the climate of this island than that of England, but is also one of its worth and most inconvenient circumstances.—This is accounted for in observing, that "the westerly winds, so fa­vourable to other regions, and so benign even in this, by qualifying the rigour of the northern air, are yet hurtful in the extreme. Meeting with no lands on this side of America to break their force, and proving in the general too powerful for the counteraction of the shifting winds from the eastern and African Continents, they waft hither the vapours of an immense ocean. The sky is hereby much obscured; and, from the nature of rest and condensation, these vapours descend in such constant rains, as threaten destruction to the fruits of the earth in some seasons. This unavoidable evil from natural causes is aggravated by the increase of it from others, which are absolutely either moral or political. The hand of industry hath been long idle in a country where almost every advantage must be obtained from its labour, and where discouragements on the labourer must necessarily produce a state of languor, equally hurtful to the prosperity and manners of every [Page 150] nation. Ever since the neglect of agriculture in the ninth century, the rains of so many ages subsiding on the lower grounds, have con­verted most of our extensive plains into mossy morasses, and near a tenth part of this beautiful Isle is become a repository for stagnated waters, which, in the course of evaporation, impregnate our air with noxious exhalations. * But, in many respects, the climate of Ireland is more agreeable than that of England; the summers being cooler and the Winters less severe. The piercing frosts, the deep snows, and the dreadful effects of thunder and lightning, which are so frequently observed in the later kingdom, are never experienced here.

The dampness above alluded to, being peculiarly favourable to the growth of grass, has been used as an argument why the inhabitants should confine their attention to the rearing of cattle, to the total de­sertion of tillage, and injury to the consequent growth of population; but the soil is so infinitely various, as to be capable of almost every species of cultivation suited to such latitudes, with a fertility equal to its variety. This is so conspicuous, that it has been observed by a [...] spectable English traveller, that "Natural fertility, acre for acre, over the two kingdoms, is certainly in favour of Ireland; of this I believe there can scarcely be a doubt entertained, when it is considered, that some of the more beautiful, and even best cultivated counties in Eng­land, owe almost every thing to the capital art and industry of [...] inhabitants."

We shall conclude this article with the further sentiments of the same author (Mr. Young) whose knowledge of the subject, acquaint­ance with the kingdom, and candour, are unimpeachable.

The circumstance which strikes me as the greatest singularity of Ireland, is the rockiness of the soil, which should seem at first fight against that degree of fertility; but the contrary is the fact. Stone is so general, that I have great reason to believe the whole island is o [...] vast rock of different strata and kinds rising out of the sea. I have rarely heard of any great depths being sunk without meeting with is. In general it appears on the surface in every part of the kingdom; the flattest and most fertile parts, as Limerick, Tipperary, and Meath, have it at no great depth, almost as much as the more barren ones. May we not recognize in this the hand of bounteous Providence, which has given, perhaps, the most stoney soil in Europe to the moistest cli­mate in it? If as much rain fell upon the clays of England (a soil very rarely met with in Ireland, and never without much stone) as fall upon the rocks of her sister island, those lands could not be cultivated. But the rocks here are clothed with verdure; those of lime-stone with only a thin covering of mould, have the softest and most beauti­ful turf imaginable.

The rockiness of the soil in Ireland is so universal, that it pre­dominates in every sort. One cannot use, with propriety, the [...] clay, loam, sand. &c. it must be a stoney clay, a stoney loam, a gravest said. Clay, especially the yellow, is much talked of in Ireland, but it is for want of proper discrimination. I have once or twice see [...] almost a pure clay upon the surface, but it is extremely rare. The true yellow clay is usually found in a thin stratum, under the surface [Page 151] mould, and over a rock; harsh, tenacious, stoney, strong loams, diffi­cult to work, are not uncommon, but they are quite different from English clays.

Friable sandy loams, dry, but fertile, are very common, and they form the best soils in the kingdom for tillage and [...]eep. Tipperary and Roscommon abound particularly in them. The most fertile of all are the bullock-pastures of Limerick, and the banks of the Shannon in Clare, called the Corcasses. These are mellow, putrid, friable loam.

Sand, which is so common in England, and yet more common through Spain, France, Germany, and Poland, quite from Gibraltar to Petersburgh, is no where met with in Ireland, except in narrow slips of hillocks, upon the sea coast. Nor did I ever meet with, or hear of, a chalky soil.

RIVERS AND MOUNTAINS.] Few countries can be better watered by large and beautiful rivers than Ireland; and it is remarkable, that by much the finest parts of the kingdom are on the banks of these rivers. Witness the Suir, Blackwater, the Lissey, the Boyne, the Nore, the Barrow, and part of the Shannon: they wash a scenery that can hardly be exceeded. From the rockiness of the country, however, there are few of them that have not obstructions, which are great impediments to inland navigation.

The mountains of Ireland give to travelling that interesting varie­ty, with which a flat country can never abound. And, at the same time, they are not in such number as to confer the usual character of poverty, which attends them. I was either upon or very near the most considerable in the kingdom. Mangerton and the Reeks, in Kerry; the Calties in Cork; those of Mourne," and Iseah in Down, are rec­koned the highest in the kingdom, particularly that called Slieu Donard, which is said to be 1050 yards in perpendicular height; "Crow Patrick and Nephin, in Mayo; these are the principal in Ire­land, and they are of a character in height and sublimity, which should render them the objects of every traveller's attention. *

BAYS, HARBOURS, AND LAKES.] Perhaps no country of the same extent is more bountifully watered by the finest rivers and lakes, or more perfectly indented by the noblest harbours; so as to possess in an eminent degree those great requisites for agriculture, manufactures and the most extended commerce. The rivers, besides abounding with an infinite variety of fish, communicate uncommon fertility to the lands which they beautify, and afford a multitude of the best situations for the machinery of manufactures. The harbours are not only numerous, but, in some instances, capable of containing. in the utmost security, the greatest sleets; stretching out their protecting arms, and courting the pompous ornament of regal navies, or the cheerful signs of far­extended commerce. These, however, have been long solitary and unfrequented, as the illiberal spirit of trading jealousy had, for many ages, with successful injustice, rendered all these distinguished blessings of Providence of no value, except to the adventurous mariner, whom distress or tempest had driven to experience their seasonable protection.

[Page 152] It would be difficult to enumerate the many bays, havens, har [...] and creeks, which indent every part of the coast. The following the principal: Waterford, Carlingford, and Strangford-havens, [...] bay of Carrickfergus, on the east; Lough-Foyle and Lough- [...] Ship-haven, Killybegs-harbour, Donegal-haven, on the north; [...] way-haven, the mouth of the Shannon, Sherwick or St. Mary [...] haven, Dingle-bay, on the west; Kenmare-bay or river, Bantry, [...] ­manus, and Baltimore-bays, Castle-haven, Glendore-haven, [...] and Cork-havens, on the south and south-east. These are the princi­pal unbarred havens. There are likewise a great many barred [...] some of which have been much improved by Acts of Parliament, par­ticularly that of Dublin.

The Lakes or Loughs of Ireland have so many properties, in [...] respects peculiar to themselves, that their singularities, their extent [...] their beauties, have long engaged the pens of the traveller, and [...] poet; and have attracted the curiosity and excited the admiration people of taste from every part of Europe. The most remarkable [...] the Lake of Killarney, Lough-Erne and Lough-Neagh.

The Lakes of Killarney hold the first place. They are [...] number. The northern or lower Lake, is six miles in length, [...] from three to four in breadth. The Town of Killarney is situated [...] its northern shore.

The upper lake is four miles in length, and from two to thr [...] breadth—it is almost surrounded with mountains. The islands in [...] lake are numerous, and afford an amazing variety of pictura [...] views.

The third, or centre lake, communicates with the upper—it [...] small in comparison of the other two. The eastern boundary is [...] ­ed by the base of Mangerton, down the steep side of which [...] a cascade, visible for a hundred and fifty yards. This fall of [...] supplied by a circular lake, near the summit of the mountain, [...] the Devil's Punch-Bowl; which, on account of its immense [...] and the continual overflow of water, is considered as one of the [...] curiosities of Killarney.

There are various situations, on this and the neighbouring [...] ­tains, that command extensive prospects of the lakes, with [...] Islands, Bays, and Promontories—these views are wild and grand [...] an astonishing degree.

Lough-Erne is the largest lake in Ireland, being forty miles in len [...] and in some parts fifteen in breadth. In this lake is an island on [...] stands the Town of Inniskillen—the communication with the [...] land being preserved by two bridges. No town in Ireland can [...] of such an advantageous situation for inland commerce, the lake [...] ­fording it an intercourse, by water, with several counties; and [...] circumstance in its favour might be further improved, by cutting canal and building locks, from Belleck to Bally-Shannon, [...] would open a passage into the Atlantic Ocean.

Lough-Neagh is of an oval figure, but considerably indented [...] sides; it is near twenty miles in length, and about ten in brea [...] and abounds with a variety of fish, particularly the Pullein, or, as [...] call it, the fresh-water herring, greatly admired for the uncomm [...] delicacy of its flavour.

[Page 153] This Lough is distinguished for the mineral and petrifying qualities which it is supposed to possess.

Whether the petrifying quality imputed to this lake, exists in the water, or the soil, has been a subject of much inquiry; that it exists in one or the other is generally believed from the numerous specimens, which are constantly discovered on the shores, of different species of wood, either wholly converted into stone, or which are found to be partly in one state and partly in the other; which latter afford the most conclusive evidence of the existence of this petrifying property. It has been justly observed that whatever particular quality water is impregnated with, must be derived from the soil through which it runs; now, in the neighbouring grounds, even at the distance of two or three miles, and in situations considerably higher than the Lough, specimens of wood, perfectly and imperfectly, converted into stone are frequently found; sometimes on the banks of many of those streams which fall into the lake, and sometimes in situations more remote.—On the shores are also frequently found a variety of beautiful peb­bles, cornelians, agates, and other valuable stones, which have long been objects of curiosity to the virtuosi.

CAVES AND GLENS.] About two miles from the city of Kilken­ny, in the neighbourhood of the Park-house of Donmore, are a number of caves, which are supposed to be equal to any in the world; those of Antiparos, in the Archipelago, excepted. The following descrip­tion of them, being written by a gentleman on the spot, we shall give it in his own words: "After a difficult descent of about one hundred feet, the entrance into this subterraneous world is gained. The ap­pearance of the first cavern is uncommonly awful, and gives rise to an idea of a grand Gothic structure in ruins. The solemnity of this place is not a little increased by the gaiety of those scenes that present themselves on every side, previous to our entering it. The floor is uneven, and stones of various sizes are promiscuously dispersed upon it. The sides are composed of ragged work, in some parts covered with moss, and in others curiously frosted; and from the roof, which is a kind of arch, several huge rocks project beyond each other, in such a manner, that they seem to threaten instant ruin. The circumference of this cave is not less than two hundred feet, and its height about fif­ty. Here is a small, but continually dropping water from the ceiling, and a few petrifactions resembling icicles. This place is not destitute of inhabitants, for immediately on entering into it, you are surprised with a confused noise, which is occasioned by a multitude of wild pid­geons. Hence there is a passage towards the lest, where, by a small as­cent, a kind of hole is gained, much larger, but in form greatly resem­bling the mouth of an oven, which introduces the spectator to a place, where, by the help of candles (day-light being entirely excluded) a broken and surprising scene of monstrous stones, heaped on each oth­er, chequered with various colours, inequality of rocks over head, and an infinity of stalactical stones, presents itself. Here the traveller is threatened from a thousand vast rocks rudely piled on each other, that compose the sides, which seem bending in, and a multitude of no small­er size we pendent from the roof in the most extraordinary manner; add to this, that by one false step, he would be dashed from precipice to precipice; Indeed it would be matter of much difficulty, or rather [Page 154] impracticable, to walk over this apartment, had not nature, as if sti [...] ­ous for the safety of the curious, caused branches, as it were, to [...] from the surface of the rocks, which are remarkably smooth, very [...] equal, and always damp. These branches are from four to six inches in length, and nearly as thick. They are useful on the summits of [...] rocks to prevent slipping, and in the sides are ladders, whereby to [...] ­scend and ascend with tolerable facility. This astonishing and fra [...] ­ous passage leads to a place far more curious than the rest. On [...] ­ing into it, one is almost induced to believe oneself situated in an an­cient temple, decorated with all the expense of art; yet, notwith­standing the beauty and splendour that catches the eye on every [...] there is something of solemnity in the fashion of the place, [...] must be felt by the most inattentive spectator. The floor, in [...] parts, is covered with a crystalline substance; the sides, in many [...] ­es, are incrusted with the same, wrought in a taste not unlike [...]. Gothic style of ornament, and the top is almost entirely covered [...] inverted pyramids of the same elegantly white and lucid matter, [...] the points of these stalactical streets, are perpetually hanging drops pellucid water, for when one falls, another succeeds. These pen [...] gems contribute not a little to the glory of the roof, which, when [...] place is properly illuminated, appears as if formed of the purest [...] ­tal. Here are three extraordinary and beautiful congelations, wh [...] without the assistance of a strong imagination, may be taken for as [...] ­gan, altar, and cross. The former, except when strictly exam [...] appears to be a regular work of art, and is of a considerable size: [...] second is of a simple form, rather long than square; and the [...] reaches from the floor to the roof, which must be about twenty [...]. These curious figures are owing to water that falls from the [...] parts of the cave to the ground, which coagulates into stone from [...] to time, till it acquires those forms which are now so pleasing; [...] an exsudation or extillation of petrifying juices out of the earth; [...] perhaps they partake of the nature of spar, which is a kind of [...] plant. The former appears to be the most probable supposition these figures, in colour and consistence, appear exactly like the [...] on the top, which are only seen from the wet parts of the cave [...] and in this place, there is a great oozing of water, and a much lar [...] number of petrifactions, than in any other. When you quit this [...] ­rious apartment, the guides lead you for a considerable way thro [...] winding places, until a glimmering light agreeably surprises. [...] the journey, of above a quarter of a mile, through those parts in [...] ­ed: But upon returning into the first cavern, the entrance into [...] apartments, less curious indeed, but as extensive as those we have [...] ­scribed, offers itself. The passages into some of these are so very [...] that there is a necessity of creeping through them; by these we [...] ­ceed until the noise of a subterraneous river is heard, but farther [...] have ventured."

Amongst the numerous glens in Ireland, distinguished for partic [...] beauty, are two in the county of Wicklow. The Glen of the [...] is a pass between two vast ridges of mountains covered with [...] which have a very noble effect; the vale is no wider than to [...] the road, a small gurgling river almost by its side, and narrow slips [...] rocky and shrubby ground which part them: In the front all [...] [Page 155] [...] denied by an immense conical mountain, which rises out of the [...]len, and seems to fill it up. The scenery is of a most magnificent character.

The Dargle is a narrow vale, formed by the sides of two opposite mountains; the whole thickly spread with oak at the bottom: It is [...] to the mere channel of the river, which tumbles from rock [...] [...]ock. The extent of wood that hangs to the eye in every direction [...], the depth of the precipice immense, which, with the roar of [...] water, forms a scene truly interesting. In less than a quarter of a [...], the road passing through the wood leads to another point of [...] [...] the right; it is the crown of a vast projecting rock, form which [...] down a precipice absolutely perpendicular, and many hund­ [...] [...] deep, upon the torrent, which finds its noisy way over large [...] of rocks. At some distance below is a vast chasm in the [...], which seems torn asunder, to let the torrent through, that comes [...]bling over a rocky bed far sunk in a channel embosomed in wood. [...] a bellow, formed of rock and wood, the torrent breaks forth from [...] of rock, and tumbles through the chasm, rocks bulging over [...] if ready to fall into the channel. The shade is so thick as to ex­ [...] the heavens; all is retired and gloomy; it is a spot for melan­ [...] to muse on.

FORESTS, OR WOODS.] Tradition and history both inform us, that [...] countries of equal extent, were better timbered than Ireland; [...] woods were so abundant, * as to occasion her being called by some [...] ancient writers the woody island; and their quality was of such [...] [...] to become an article of traffic, and often employed in the [...] conspicuous buildings of the sister kingdom. But the natives, re­ [...]dly harrassed by the inroads and encroachments of the English, [...]ently found an asylum in their forests. These became therefore [...] object of equal jealously and vengeance, and the destroying axe gen­ [...]ly accompanied the sword, in the joint extirpation of woods and [...], till the island became almost distorested. For many ages it has [...] in this state. The encouragement of the Dublin Society, [...] ever, and the example of many noble individuals, promise again to [...] the land with its most valuable ornaments.

VEGETABLE AND ANIMAL PRODUC­TIONS BY LAND AND SEA.} These are in general similar to those in Great-Britain. [...]-dogs (once so useful and celebrated) were perhaps peculiar to [...]; but that species is now nearly extinct. Although the coasts [...] the neighbouring islands may be furnished with the same varieties [...]; yet those of Ireland have them in much greater abundance, [...] of a larger and more excellent quality.

METALS, MINERALS, AND MEDICINAL WATERS] The mines of [...], until the destruction of her woods, were worked to a very [...] extent. At present, although abundance of the various species [...], lead, silver, and copper ores are to be found in every direction [Page 156] through the kingdom, yet the want of capital, or skill, or [...] is such, that few are worked to any important extent or pro [...] except the great copper mines of the country Wicklow, which the hands of an English company.

In several counties are noble quarries of the finest marble, [...] Kerry are of various colours, green, red, yellow, and white; [...] of Kilkenny black and white; each of which takes the most [...] polish, and are calculated for all the purposes of building or [...].

Many parts of the kingdom abound with free stone, some [...] sparkling colour, others of a grey or ash colour, and some [...] to a blue. Those of Ardbracken, Garrycorris, and the [...] Wicklow and Dublin, are particularly admired, and much public buildings; but the want of inland water carriage, pre [...] being sent to the metropolis, in such sizes as are necessary [...] columns, &c. which induces a considerable expense for the [...] Portland stone.

Various species of coal, and in the greatest abundance, [...] found in different parts of the kingdom. The pits of Kilkenny a coal possessing many peculiar properties; it is very hard, b [...] ­ly, emits little or no smoak, is of a bright black, and is foun [...] admirably adapted for malting, and various purposes of man [...]. The pits of Ballycastle (in the county Antrim) produce abun [...] coal, yet the want of a safe and commodious harbour to ship [...] ­vents their being worked to an extent fully equal to the supply [...] nation. The collieries of Tyrone produce a very fine species, [...] of considerable capacity; they lie in the heart of a populous [...] manufacturing country, where other fuel is very scarce; but [...] of a more perfect inland water carriage contracts the operat [...] numerous benefits which the situation of these collieries pres [...] pits of Lough Allen are probably of most importance, as th [...] [...] such magnitude, and so happily circumstanced by situation, [...] fine a quality, and so intermixed with strata of the purest [...] other ores, as promise, with attention and capital, to be a [...] great profit and advantage to the nation—placed at the [...] Shannon, which is almost navigable to the sea, were canals [...] from the capital and other parts, communicating with this [...] would, in a few years, render the cutting of bogs unnecessary large sums now annually sent for foreign coals, and establish [...] ­factures on different parts of these lines of the greatest [...] extent.

MINERAL WATERS.] There are great numbers of minerals [...] in this kingdom of the various classes recommended for medi [...] [...] ­poses: Such as the vitriolic, alkaline and absorbent, saline [...] [...]ative, sulphureous, chalybeate, and sulphureae chalybeate [...] which those of the two latter kinds are most powerfully [...] by the benevolent hand of Providence, as efficacious remedy [...] one of the most prevalent endemics of its northern and [...] the scurvy; of these the most generally resorted to, from [...] [...] ­enced good effects, are the waters of Swanlinbar and [...] the north west quarter, and of Lucan, six miles from the capi [...] [...] [Page 157] [...] also some tepid springs here, the temperature of which, however, [...] very moderate, that of Mallow in the county of Cork, the warmest of them, not raising Farenheit's thermometer above the 68°; but from [...] mild, soft, and specifically light nature, and being considerably im­pregnated with an absorbent earth, and a portion of other medicinal [...]tter, has been found serviceable in several classes of diseases.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES.] The natural curiosities of Ire­land have long occupied the attention of travellers and philosophers. [...] Giant's Causeway being the most distinguished, we shall give the [...]wing account of it as the most recent and accurate.

The Causeway itself is generally described as mole of Quay, project­ [...] from the base of a steep promontory, some hundred feet into the [...] and is formed of perpendicular pillars of basaltes, which stand in [...] with each other, exhibiting an appearance not much unlike a [...] honeycomb. The pillars are irregular prisms, of various de­terminations from four to eight sides; but the hexagonal columns are [...]mmerous as all the others put together.

On a minute examination, each pillar is found to be separable into [...] joints, whose articulation is neat and compact beyond expres­ [...]; the convex termination of one joint, always meeting a concave [...]ket in the next; besides which, the angles of one frequently [...] over those of the other, so that they are completely locked to­ [...]her, and can rarely be separated without a fracture of some of their [...].

The sides of each column are unequal among themselves, but the [...]tiguous sides of adjoining columns are always of equal dimensions, [...] as to touch in all their parts.

Though the angles be of various magnitudes, yet the sum of the con­ [...] angles, of adjoining pillars, always makes up four right ones. [...] there are no void spaces among the basaltes, the surface of the [...]seway exhibiting to view a regular and compact pavement of po­ [...] stones.

The outside covering is soft, and of a brown colour, being the earthy [...] of the stone nearly deprived of its metallic principle by the [...] of the air, and of the marine acid which it receives from the [...]. *

These are the obvious external characters of this extraordinary pile [...] basaltes, observed and described with wonder by every one who has [...] it. But it is not here that our admiration should cease; whatev­er the process was by which nature produced that beautiful and cu­ [...]ous arrangement of pillars so conspicuous about the Giant's Cause­way; the cause, far from being limited to that spot alone, appears to have extended through a large tract of country, in every direction, in [...] much that many of the common quarries, for several miles around, [...] to be only abortive attempts towards the production of a Giant's Causeway.

From want of attention to this circumstance, a vast deal of time and [...] have been idly spent in minute examinations of the Causeway [...];—in tracing its course under the ocean—pursuing its columns [Page 158] into the ground—determining its length and breadth and the [...] of its pillars—with numerous wild conjectures concerning its [...] all of which cease to be of any importance, when this spot is [...] ­ed only as a small corner of an immense basalt quarry, extending [...] ­ly over all the neigbhbouring land.

The basaltes of the Giant's Causeway is a black, ponderous grained stone; which does not effervesce in any of the min [...].

Its specific gravity is to that of water, nearly in the prope [...] 2,90 to 1,00—and to that of the finest marble as 2,90 to 2,70.

Though its texture be compact, it is not absolutely homo [...] for if ground to a smooth surface, its bright jet-black polish [...] ­ed several small pores.

It strikes fire imperfectly with a steel.

When exposed to a moderate heat in a common fire, it assu [...] dish colour, which is more vivid on its natural outside cover [...] loses about 1-50th part of its weight. *

In a more intense heat it readily melts, and is, as the chy [...] press it, fusible per se.

With the assistance of an alkali flux it may be vitrified, and [...] an opake glass of a black or blueish colour.

Its principal component parts are iron in a metallic state, [...] chiefly with siliceous and argillaceous earths.

Its metallic principle may be demonstrated by a very simple [...] ­ment. Let a small fragment of basaltes, in its natural state, be [...] into contact, or very near to a good magnetical needle, and it [...] made to detain the needle at a considerable distance from its [...]. Let this fragment be touched by a magnet, and it will acquire [...] strong polarity, capable of attracting or repelling the needle at [...] ­tance of an inch or more. From hence it is proved to contain [...] a metallic state, because the calx of that metal is incapable of [...] any magnetical phaenomena whatever.

To determine the quantity and quality of each constituent [...] quires a very slow and laborious operation, which would be [...] equally tedious in the description. I shall therefore just ment [...] results from the experiments of that able chymist, Sir Tor [...]e [...] man.

  Basaltes 100 parts.
Contains siliceous earth 50
Argillaceous earth 15
Calcareous earth 8
Magnesia 2
Iron 25
  100

From these elements we shall easily be enabled to account [...] [...] ­al of its properties.

Hence it comes to pass that its specific gravity is so [...] exceeding that of many stones, which, when polished, appe [...] [Page 159] more compact, the quantity of phlogisticated iron easily making com­pensation.

We see also why it answers so well for a touchstone, the hardness of its iron particles easily rubbing and fretting off the parts of any softer metal which may be applied to it, and its black ground serving to dis­play these of greater advantage.

Hence too arises its fusibility without addition; for though flint, [...], and calcareous earth are separately refractory, in any degree of [...]cial heat, yet when mixed together they are readily fusible, and [...] more easily when united with phlogisticated iron.

From the metallic state of its iron element we are enabled to infer, a [...]ri, that the columns of the Giant's Causeway are all natural mag­ [...], whose lower extremity is their north-pole. For having stood [...]ring many ages in a perpendicular position, they must have acquired that polarity which is peculiar to all iron substances, in a similar situa­tion; and like natural magnets, every fragment, when broken, will have its north and south-pole. And this has been found true by ex­perience; each pillar of the Giant's Causeway, and each fragment of a pillar, which was applied near to the needle, having its attractive and repellent point. *

POPULATION.] Few kingdoms have experienced greater variation in population than Ireland. At some remote period there are reasons to believe that its inhabitants were extremely numerous. In several parts of the island (in rough or mountainous ground) difficulty of ac­cess, and now in a barren state, are evident traces of cultivation; but at what time it prevailed, tradition or history does not inform us.

At the commencement of the present century the numbers in Ire­land were thought to be about two millions, whereas in 1672, there were, according to Sir William Petty, no more than 1,100,000.—The following data are afforded, from which we may ascertain the pres­ent number.

From the accounts laid before the House of Commons in 1786 (as returned by the hearth-money collectors) the number of houses in Ire­land amounted to 474,234. Now, adding to that the increase since, and also the numbers intentionally or unavoidably overlooked in such returns, we may reasonably conclude that the present actual amount is 500,000.

We are next to consider what average number of persons we should allow to each house. In the peasants cottages in Ireland (perhaps the most populous in the world) Mr. Young in some parts found the aver­age 6 and 6½; others have found it in different places to be 7; and Dr. Hamilton, in his account of the island of Raghery, enumerates the houses, and discovered the average therein to be 8. In the cities and principal towns, the houses, particularly in the manufacturing parts, generally contain several families; and from different accounts, the members in such are from ten up so high as seventy. The averages, however, of different writers on the population of cities vary between 10 and 13.

[Page 160] From such data then, it will not perhaps be erroneous, if we [...] average for the whole island at eight persons to each house, which [...] ­tiplied by the number of houses, makes the population of [...] amount to four millions.

LANGUAGE.] The antiquarians and critics agree, that the [...] ­rupted native language of the Irish is the Gaedhlic, or Scotic, the [...] ­est and most ancient of all the Celtic dialects. It appears from [...] ­tionable testimony, that arts, navigation and letters were first [...] in Europe by the Phoenicians, who had a very early intercourse [...] the Iberian Spaniards. From that nation the Gaedelian or [...] colony derived their original, who amongst other arts, introduce [...] elements of letters into the island, at a remote period before the [...] ­tian AEra. This fact will easily account for the early use of [...] Ireland, where great security from foreign conquest retained the [...] where the manners of the people and the form of government [...] the cultivation of them necessary.

AGRICULTURE.] The agriculture of Ireland, though great, [...] ­tended and improved within these twenty or thirty years past, [...] in a very backward state: For though the quantity of corn [...] creased to such a degree, that instead of depending, as formerly, [...] precarious importation of foreign grain, for the supply of the [...] ­ants; they only have a sufficiency for home consumption; but [...] ­bled to export large quantities; yet the mode of cultivation [...] defective, the Irish not having yet introduced those improved [...] of culture, which have long been pursued with such advanta [...] England, and some other parts of Europe.

FISHERIES.] Ireland has advantages in the several fisheries [...] enjoyed by any other country in Europe, particularly in situation, [...] in her numerous creeks and harbours. Her shores are stored with the varieties of fish, her fishermen a hardy and adventurous race, [...] the opportunity of curing on contiguous shores, gives them a [...] superiority.

The north-west and western coasts of this kingdom abounding, [...] superior degree, with herrings, have long attracted the national [...] ­tion legislative encouragement. In 1786, no less than 17, [...] barrels of herrings were exported from Ireland. The same year [...] vessels, whose tonnage amounted to 15,336, were employed [...] fishery.

LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN.] The corroborating testi [...] of natives and foreigners represent the ancient Irish as a people [...] learned and pious, and who were resorted to by men of the most [...] [...]uished ranks of distant nations. Camden, Bede, and other [...] enumerate the benefits diffused through various parts of Euro [...] the numbers of learned men from Ireland, who imparted the [...] lights of science and of christianity, and founded monasteries [...] [...] ­ous parts of Britain, France, and Italy. It is observable, that [...] ­ton saints of several nations on the continent are acknowle [...] Irish, as were the first professors in the university of Paris, [...] those placed by Alfred in his newly-founded college of Oxford.

Few of the writings of the ancient Irish have reached the [...] times, from the long continuance of civil discord amonst them [...] [Page 161] few however as have been published or remain in the hands of the cu­rious, confirm the reputation of their genius and learning. The po­ [...] of Columb-cil, several miscellaneous pieces translated by the learn­ed Colonel Vallancey and others, but above all the poems of Ossian (which are unquestionably the original production of this country) place the ancient literary same of Ireland in the highest rank.

A long night of mental darkness, owing to various causes, succeeded this luminous period. In modern times, however, the genius of the nation, encouraged by peace and harmony, appears again in the repub­lic of letters.

The limits of our work, will not permit us to give a minute detail of Irish writers and their works, and therefore we shall present the [...]der with the following sketch.

Usher was a scholar, second to none these islands can boast of, unless we except Selden. Berkley, bishop of Cloyne, was a writer of very superior talents. He has been called the Irish Hato. His Minute Philosopher is among the standards of the English language. His essay on Vision has extended the boundaries of science. King. archbishop of Dublin, was a less fanciful, but a more consistent, philosopher than Berkley. His book upon the Origin of Evil, is a master piece▪ He was a man of wit, and of a sarcastic vein. Dr. Dodwell, the famous Canden professor of history in the university of Oxford, was of this country. He was a man of universal erudition, but of an enthusiastio turn of mind. Leslie of Glaslough, was a man of great reading, pro­digious memory, and voluminous composition. His short and easy method with the Deists, is esteemed one of the best pieces extent on the subject. Toland was a writer of opposite principles. A catholic priest originally, he became a deist in religion, and a republican in politicks. His scholarship has been arraigned by his antagonists, but he is commended by Mr. Locke as a man of parts and learning. Clay­ton, bishop of Clogher, wrote and essay on Spirit, and Analysis of the Works of Lord Bolingbroke, and other books. Mr. Molyneux * (the friend of Mr. Locke, and champion for the independence of his native country) was a philosopher and mathematician, and reckoned among the first of that scientific age. His Dioptrics are highly commended by Dr. Halley. Dr. Helsham published an elegant and learned course of lectures, upon the several branches of physicks and mechanick [...].—Dr. Brian Robinson wrote an essay upon that Ethereal Fluid to which Newton alludes in his queries: And also a treatise on the Animal Economy, in which he appears happily to have applied his great math­ematical knowledge to the extension of medical science. Sir Hans S [...]ane, no less remarkable for his museum than his genius. Dr. Mac­bride, who has so successfully applied the theory of fixed air to prac­tice in the cure of the sea scurvy. Dr. Young's inquiry into the prin­cipal phaenomena of Sounds, is a work of great scientific knowledge. [...] [...]ilton, whose philosophical account of the county of Antrim, [...] Basaltes, is highly esteemed. O'Gallagher, author of an essay on the first Principles of Nature. Dr. Sullivan's treatise on the Feudal [Page 162] Law and Constitution of England, is making its way in the good [...] ­ion of the world; notwithstanding this avenue to fame had been [...] occupied by Dr. Blackstone's Commentaries. Dr. Hutcheson is [...] principal Ethic writer of this country. Whilst a teacher of an [...] in Dublin, he wrote his books on the origin of our ideas of bea [...] and on the passions. These raised his reputation so high, that he [...] invited to accept the moral chair in the university of Glasgow, [...] he filled with such celebrity, as to lay the foundation for that [...] which Glasgow [...]ow enjoys as an Ethic school. Two of the [...] divines of this country were dissenters from the established [...] Mr. Abernethy and Dr. Leland. The sermons of the former upon [...] Attributes are held to be one of the best systems of natural those [...]. He was deputed by the dissenters of Ulster to address the Duke [...] ­mond, in a tour he made when Lord Lieutenant; and his Grace [...] afterwards heard to say, that, of all the men who ever approached [...] on like occasions, he was most pleased with "the young man of An­trim." And Dr. Leland's view of Deistical Writers, and other [...] are equally known and admired. Dr. Duchal wrote presumptive [...] ­guments in favour of Revelation, and several volumes of ser [...] which have been well received. The writers who have done the [...] ­tion most honour in theology are, Synge, Story, Brown, Delany, [...] ­son, Orr. Skelton, and Ryan, author of "The Effects of Religion [...] Mankind." Bishop Synge is said to have been a man of great [...] and learning; he was author of the Religion of a Gentleman. [...] bishop of Kilmore, published only some occasional sermons, but [...] treatise on the Priesthood, deep erudition and christian moderation [...] equally conspicuous. Brown, bishop of Cork, published some [...] ­umes of sermons; he is, however, more celebrated for his deli [...] than his composition. Delany's sermons on the Social Duties, are ex­cellent. Dr. Lawson was a most celebrated preacher. His Lec [...] upon Oratory, which he delivered in Trinity College Dublin, he [...] to the world himself; they shew a nice classical taste, a fine poet [...] vein, and a thorough knowledge of the art of preaching.

Swift, whose literary character is well known, was a native of I [...] ­land. The other principal miscellaneous writers in this kingdom [...] Roscommon, author of the ingenious Essay on translated verse, and [...] excellent translation of Horace's Art of Poetry. Parnell, the [...] delicioe musarum, of whose poetry, above all others, it may be said [...] repetita placebit. Burke, on the sublime, &c. Lord Molesworth [...] Lord Orrery. Earl Nugent. Mr. and Mrs. Millar. Dr. Arb [...] writer of Hibernicus's, letters, &c. Molloy, author of a period [...] paper in London, called Common Sense, &c. Ogle, who moder [...] Chaucer's Tales. Dr. Dunkin, author of a quarto collection of ha [...] ­ous poems, some of which are in three languages, Greek, Latin, and English. Wood, who published Ruins of Palmyra and Balbec, and Essay on the genius and writings of Homer. Robertson, author of [...] attempt to explain the words reason, substance, &c. Sterne, bishop Clogher, of a book de visitatione infirmorum. Sterne, the ini [...] Sterne, whose Sermons, Tristram-Shandy, and Sentimental Jour [...] will be admired whilst feeling and sentiment remain among mank [...] Webb, who inquired into the beauties of painting, &c. [...] author of several admired Tracts, theological and poetical. Pill [...] [Page 163] who published a Dictionary of Painters. Cunningham, author of sever­al poetical pieces, particularly his natural and deservedly admired Pastorals. Preston, author of several miscellaneous poems: His "Ir­regular ode to the moon," claims a first rank in English poetry. Dr. Clancy, author of the Templum Veneris, &c. Bush, of Socrates.—Johnston, author of Chrysal. Brooke, of the Farmer's Letters, Fool of Quality, Gustavus Vasa, &c. Dr. Sheridan (in whose family genius seems as hereditary as the name) author of several pieces for the im­provement of the English language, particularly a pronouncing Dic­tionary; he also published a Life of Swift. His sons are not less cele­brated; Brindsley's genius, unconfined to the praise of having rivalled the Ciceros and Demonsthenes of antiquity, has added new treasures to the Drama, in his Duenna, School for Scandal, &c. and Charles Fran­cis, his brother, has acquired great credit for his History of the late Revolution of Sweden. Usher, author of Clio, a very ingenious Essay on Taste. To these we might add a list of female writers; Mrs. Sheri­dan, Mrs. Pilkington, Mrs. Grierson, Mrs. Barber, Mrs. Davies, Mrs. Griffith, Miss Brooke, &c.

Ireland now produces a catalogue of celebrated scenic writers.—Of her late writers in this line are some, whose names are not yet for­gotten; and others whose works will last as long as the English stage shall hold the mirror up to nature: Earl of Orrery; N. Tate; Con­cannen; John Kelly, author of the Married Philosopher, &c. Dr. Madden, of Themislocles; Jones, of the Earl of Essex; Morgan, of Philocles; Hartson. of the Countess of Salisbury, &c. A Philips; Mrs. Centlivre; Sir R. Steele; Farquhar; Southerne, Congreve, Brooke, and Kelly.

It would perhaps be injurious to the memory of Dr Goldsmith, to draw his poetical character from his the [...]rical pieces, though they are replete with the true vis comica. His same must be founded upon his Traveller, Deserted Village, Vicar of Wakefield, and Citizen of the World.

UNIVERSITY.] Ireland contains but one university, which is called Trinity-College. It was founded in 1591, in the reign of Elizabeth; but its original constitution being found imperfect, in 1637, it received a new charter, and another set of statures, compiled by archbishop [...]. This prelate made several essential alterations in the constitu­tion of the college, the most material of which was the depriving the follows of the election of their provost, the appointment to that import­ant office being from thenceforth reserved to the crown. To make the fellows some amends for the loss of their first privilege, it was appointed by the new charter that they should be tenants for life in their fellow­ships, if they remained unmarried, or unprovided with a benefice of more than 10l. in the king's books, whereas by the first charter they were to quit their office in seven years after they became of master's [...]ding. At the same time the number of fellows was enlarged from seven to sixteen, distinguished into seven senior fellows and nine juni­ [...], and the number of scholars was augmented to seventy. The gov­ernment of the college was placed in the provost and major part of [...] senior fellows, from whose decisions an appeal was given to the [...]sitors, which are the chancellor of the [...]iversity, or his vice-chan­cellor, and the archbishop of Dublin. [...] provost has a negative voice [Page 164] in all the proceedings of the board of seniors; and to him is also [...] ­mitted the extraordinary power of nominating any candidate to [...] ­lowship (who shall have sustained the whole previous examination) even against the unanimous sense of the other examiners.

The number of fellowships fixed at present, is twenty-two, [...] senior, and fifteen junior. The emoluments of a senior fellow [...] are supposed at present to exceed 600l. yearly.

A spirit of emulation to excel in their studies is scarcely in any [...] of education so well supported as among the students of Dublin [...] ­lege, owing to the excellent institution of public quarterly examina­tions. Three of the four terms of the year are closed with a vac [...] of from three to four weeks each, and the fourth with a long [...] of four months, during which the students have time to prepare [...] selves for a public examination, that begins the business of the [...] ensuing term. Two days are allotted to this examination, four [...] each day. The examiners are the fellows under the degree of [...] and the resident masters; the examined are all the undergr [...] distributed into four classes, and each class into divisions of two [...] thirty persons, according to the number of students and examinations. The subjects of examination are all the sciences in which the [...] have been instructed to that time, together with the particular [...] of the Greek and Latin classicks appointed to be read by each [...] during the term preceding the examination: A Latin theme [...] demanded of each person, the second morning of the examination a subject given out by the examiner the evening before. The [...] ­ers are furnished with lists of the names of the persons they are [...] ­amine, with separate columns for every branch of the examinations which columns they distinguish by technical marks the respecting [...] ­swering of the students, and after the examination make a report [...] same to the senior lecturer. These reports, which are called [...] ­ments, being submitted to the inspection of the board, are read [...] ­ly, a few days after the examinations in the college hall, wh [...] [...] operate powerfully to the credit or disgrace of the parties [...]. Some of these judgments are of so humbling a nature, that the [...] who has deserved them is not accounted as having answered a [...] [...] ­ination for that time, a certain number of which examinations [...] sustain before he is admitted to the first degree in arts. In [...] term, the best answerer in each division receives a premium of [...] stamped with the college arms, to the value of forty shillings; [...] other three examinations, if the person who has before obtained [...] ­mium in that year, appears to be the best answerer again, he is [...] ­ed with a certificate on vellum in lieu of a premium, which is [...] judged to the second best in the division, in order to spread [...] of emulation more widely. The effect of this judicious distrib [...] rewards and censures is great, almost beyond conception: [...] anything seem wanting to the perfection of such a system, [...] provision for augmenting the number of examiners in prop [...] [...] the daily increasing demand for them. The whole number [...] graduates in Dublin College fearcely ever falls short of four [...] (the entire number of collegiates on the books being usually [...] hundred) and of the undergraduates, if more than twenty be [...] into a division, it becomes difficult, if not impossible, to [...] their merits justly within the time allotted to the examination.

[Page 165] Besides the two and twenty fellowships, there are on the foundation five royal professorships, divinity, common law, civil law, physic and Greek; besides professors of mathematics, Oriental tongues, modern languages, oratory, history, and natural philosophy. The late Sir Pat­rick Dunn, knight, bequeathed a considerable estate for the support of three professors in medicine, viz. theory and practice of physic, surge­ry, and midwifery, pharmacy, and the materia medica. The students are classed under three ranks, fellow-commoners, pensioners, and si­ [...]rs. The necessary annual expense of a fellow-commonner, clothing and books included, is about 100l. of a pensioner about 70l. A sizar receives his commons and instructions gratis: The number of these last is commonly about thirty.

As to the college edifice, it is unquestionably one of the noblest of the kind in Europe. It extends in front above 300 feet, and in depth 600, and is divided into two nearly equal squares. The principal front, opposite College-green, which was erected in 1759, is in the Corinthian order, and built of mountain stone, as are all the buildings in the first square, the east side of which is intended to be ornament­ed with an elegant steeple and spire near 150 feet high. On the north side is the refectory, or dining hall, a spacious room, with the front ornamented with Ionic pilasters. Connected with this, and project­ing into the square, there is now building a chapel whose front is in­tended to correspond with that of the opposite theatre. This chapel is connected with the west front by a regular range of buildings for the students; as are those on the south side, till joined with the theatre, which projects into the square. The front of this theatre is ornament­ed with four columns in the Corinthian order, and pediment, and is greatly admired for its delicacy and elegance. It is intended for lec­tures, examinations, &c. The ornaments of the inner part, particu­larly the stucco work, are much admired, and in ten compartments therein are placed full length portraits of their present majesti [...]s, Queen Elizabeth (the foundress) Primate Usher, Archbishop King, Bishop Berkeley, Dean Swift, Doctor Baldwin, Mr. Molyneux (au­thor of the Case of Ireland) and Mr. Grattan.

The inner square is partly composed of plain brick buildings con­taining apartments for the students. The south-side is entirely taken up by a superb library, supported by a piazza erected in 1732. The inside of the library is beautiful and commodious, and embellished with busts in white marble of Plato, Socrates, Aristotle, Cicero, De­mosthenes, Homer, Shakespeare, Milton, Bacon, Newton, Locke, Boyle, Swift, Usher. Earl of Pembroke, and the doctors Delany, Law­son, Gilbert and Baldwin.

Few public bodies have been so much indebted to the munificence of their members, as the university of Dublin has been to the two last mentioned gentlemen, who were contempories for many years in the respective offices of provost and vice-provost. Dr. Baldwin, after gov­erning the college for the space of two and forty years, died in 1758, aged upwards of ninety. By his will he bequeathed to the college in real and personal property, to the amount of near 100,000l. out of which his executors shortly after purchased, for the use of the body, two advowsons, and founded two new fellowships. Dr. Gilbert en­riched the library by a bequest of his books, 12,000 volumes, chosen by [Page 166] himself in a long course of years for this purpose, without regard [...] expense, by a valuable collection of MSS. prints, and medals; and lastly, by 14 marble busts (enumerated above) of ancient and modern worthies, executed by the best masters at a considerable cost. The shelves of the library will contain by computation 60,000 volumes Two thirds of them are at present full, containing, besides Dr. Gil­bert's (which is the best) the entire libraries of the great archbishop Usher, one of the original members of this university, and about [...] volumes, part of the collection of another fellow of the college, [...] late Right Reverend Dr. Palliser, archbishop of Cashel.

The printing office is a neat structure, built in the modern [...]. The anatomy house is worthy of inspection, as among other curiosi­ties, it contains a set of figures in wax, representing women in every state of pregnancy. They are executed from real skeletons, and [...] the product of almost the whole life of an ingenious French [...]. They were purchased by the late Earl of Shelburne, who made a [...] ­ent of them to the college.

The ROYAL IRISH ACADEMY of Science, Polite literature, and An­tiquities, was incorporated by letters parent in 1786, under the [...] age of his majesty, and is composed of some of the most learned and ingenious men in the kingdom. They have published two volumes of their transactions, which consist of several curious and valuable pa­pers, on various subjects, presented by different members; wh [...] have been received by the literary world with much applause. The institution certainly forms a new aera in the History of Irish Literature and will doubtless be productive of the most distinguished conse­quences, in the promotion of science and general erudition amongst [...].

CHARACTER AND MANNERS.] The Irish are inferior to none in bodily strength and beauty, they are equal to any in pliability and [...] ­ity of limbs.

Always inclined to manly and martial exercises, they readily con­front any undertaking; their bodies are fitted to any climate, or to [...] difficulty, and from the same source might perhaps be derived, [...] spirit of heroism which has so eminently characterised them.

Strong intellects, warm fancies, and acute feelings, have generally carried them beyond the line of mediocrity; and whether the depths of science were to be explored, the heights of heroism attained, [...] sympathy awakened in the inmost soul, Irishmen would be equal to the task. In virtue too they take an uncommon range, and in the paths of vice they are not slow or backward. Even the blunders with which they have been charged by their good neighbours, may have some foundation in truth, if by blunders we are to understand, those quick sallies by which the regular concordance of worms is broken and overleaped for something bold and expressive in the thought. But what peculiarly distinguishes the Irish character is, a comprehen­sion of qualities which are seldom found compatible. Sudden ard [...] unabating perseverance; universal aptitude; firm adherence; [...] ­tience of injury; a long remembrance of it; strength of resolution tenderness of affection. These outlines of the Irish character, may [...] filled by the full grown lineaments, which the writers of differe [...] ­ges, and of different countries, have affixed to it. The Irish have been represented, strongly actuated by a thirst of glory; Prodigal of [...] [Page 167] impetuous, vindictive, generous, hospitable, curious, credulous, alive to the charms of music, constant in love or hatred.

A respectable English traveller, * gives the following character of the Irish nation, which, as it appears to have been written with great fairness, and impartiality, we are happy to afford a place in this work.

It is but an illiberal business for a traveller, who designs to pub­lish remarks upon a country, to sit down cooly in his closet and right a satire on the inhabitants. Severity of that sort must be enli­vened with an uncommon share of wit and ridicule, to please. Where very gross absurdities are found, it is fair and manly to note them; but to enter into character and disposition is generally uncandid, since there are no people but might be better than they are found, and none but have virtues which deserve attention, at least as much as their failings; for these reasons this section would not have found a place in my observations, had not some persons, of much more flippancy than wisdom, given very gross misrepresentations of the Irish nation. It is with pleasure, therefore, that I take up the pen, on the present occasion, as a much longer residence there enables me to exhibit a very different picture; in doing this, I shall be free to remark, wherein I think the conduct of certain classes may have given rise to general and consequently injurious condemnation.

There are three races of people in Ireland, so distinct, as to strike the least attentive traveller: These are the Spanish, which are found in Kerry, and a part of Limerick and Cork, tall and thin, but well made, a long visage, dark eyes, and long black hair. The time is not remote when the Spaniards had a kind of settlement on the coast of Kerry, which seemed to be overlooked by government. There were many of them in Queen Elizabeth's reign, nor were they entirely driv­en out till the time of Cromwell. There is an island of Valentia on that coast, with various other names, certainly Spanish. The Scotch race is in the north, where are to be found the features which are sup­posed to mark that people, their accent, and many of their customs. In a district, near Dublin, but more particularly in the baronies of Bargie and Forth in the county of Wexford, the Saxon tongue is spoken without any mixture of the Irish, and the people have a variety of customs, which distinguish them from their neighbours. The Milesian race of Irish, which may be called native, are scattered over the kingdom, but chiefly found in Connaught and Munster; a few considerable fami­lies, whose genealogy is undoubted, remain, but none of them with considerable possessions, except the O'Briens, and Mr. O'Neil, O'Ha­ra and M'Dermot are great names in Connaught, and O'Donnohue a considerable one in Kerry; but the O'Connors, and O'Drischals in Corke, claim an origin prior in Ireland to any of the Milesian race.

The only divisions which a traveller, who passed through the kingdom without any residence, could make, would be into people of considerable fortune and mob. The intermediate division of the scale, so numerous and respectable in England, would hardly attract the least notice in Ireland. A residence in the kingdom convinces one, how­ever, that there is another class, in general of small fortune—country gentlemen and renters of land. The manners, habits and customs of [Page 168] people of considerable fortune, are much the same every wh [...] least there is very little difference between England and Ireland, [...] among the common people one must look for those traits by whi [...] discriminate a national character. The circumstances which [...] me most in the common Irish were, vivacity, and a great and [...] volubility of speech. They are infinitely more cheerful and lively [...] any thing we commonly see in England, having nothing of that [...] ­vility of sullen silence, with which so many Englishmen seem to [...] themselves up, as if retiring within their own importance. [...] work, but so spiritedly active at play, that at hurling and other [...] exercises, they shew the greatest feats of agility. Their love of [...] ­ty is as remarkable as their curiosity is insatiable; and their [...] ­ity to all comers, be their own poverty over so pinching, has the [...] merit to be forgotten. Pleased to enjoyment with a joke, or [...] repartee, they will repeat it with such expression, that the laugh [...] be universal. Warm friends and revengeful enemies; they are [...] ­lable in their secrecy, and inevitable in their resentment; with [...] notion of honour, that neither threat not reward would induce [...] to betray the secret or person of a man, although that man we [...] [...] ­pressor. Hard drinkers and quarrelsome; but civil, submissive [...] obedient. Dancing is so universal among them, that there are [...] where itinerant dancing-masters, to whom the cotters pay six [...] quarter for teaching their families. Besides the Irish jig, which [...] can dance with a most luxuriant expression, minuets and country [...] ­es are taught; and I even heard of cotillons coming in. Many [...] in their character are evidently to be ascribed to the extreme opp [...] ­ion under which they live. If they are as great thieves and [...] [...] they are reported, it is most certainly owing to this cause.

But I must now come to another class of people, to whose con­duct it is almost entirely owing, that the character of the nation [...] [...] that lustre abroad, which I dare assert, it will soon very gener [...] merit: This is the class of little country gentlemen, * tenants [...] drink their claret by means of profit rents; jobbers in farms; [...] your follows with round hats, edged with gold, who hunt in the [...] trunk in the evening, and fight the next morning. I shall [...] [...]well on a subject so perfectly disagreeable, but remark that these [...] the men among whom drinking, duelling, ravishing, &c. &c. [...] found as in their native soil; once to a degree that made them the [...] of society; they are growing better, but even now, one or two [...] them got by accident (where they have no business) into better com­pany, are sufficient to derange the pleasures that result from a lib [...] conversation. A new spirit; new fashions; new modes of politeness exhibited by the higher ranks are imitated by the lower, which will it is to be hoped, put an end to this race of beings; and either [...] their sons and cousins into the army or navy, or sink them into [...] tradesmen or farmers like those in England, where it is common [...] men with much greater property without pretending to be gentlemen [Page 169] [...] it from the intelligence I received, that even this class are very different from what they were twenty years ago, and improve so fast that the time will soon come when the national character will not be degraded by any set.

That character is upon the whole respectable: It would be unfair to attribute to the nation at large the vices and follies of only one class of individuals. Those persons from whom it is candid to take a general estimate do credit to their country. That they are a people learned, lively and ingenious, the admirable authors they have produced will [...] on eternal monument, witness their Swift, Sterne, Congreve, Boyle, Berkeley, Steele, Fa [...]quhar, Southerne, and Goldsmith. Their talent [...] eloquence is felt, and acknowledged in the parliaments of both the kingdoms. Our own service both by sea land, as well as that (unfor­tunately for us) of the principal monarchies of Europe, speak their [...]eady and determined courage. Every unprejudiced traveller who [...] them will be as much pleased with their cheerfulness, as oblig­ed by their hospitality; and will find them a brave, polite, and liberal people.

RELIGION.] The established religion of Ireland is the Protestant; [...] [...] discipline is similar to that of England, and is under [...] archbishops and eighteen bishops. The four archbishoprics, are Armagh, Dublin, Cashal, and Tuam; and the eighteen bishoprics are Cl [...]gher, Clonfert, Clov [...]e, Cork, Derry, Down, Dromore, Elphin, Kildare, Killala, Killaloe, Kilmore, Leighlin and Ferns, Limerick, Mouth, Ossory, Raphoe, and Waterford.

The dissenters are almost as various here as in England: but the most prevailing are the Roman-Catholics, Presbyterians, Quakers, An­abaptists, Moravians, and Methodists, all of whom are tolerated by law.

CONSTITUTION AND LAWS.] Ireland is at present a distinct inde­pendent kingdom, and its imperial crown is inseparably annexed by an Irish act of parliament, to that of Great-Britain. From the time of the accession of the sovereignty of Ireland, to the kings of England, until the tenth year of the reign of Henry VII. the mode of enacting laws within the English pale in the parliaments of this country, was nearly the same as in England; the king's viceroy summoning and holding parliaments at pleasure, in which were enacted such statutes as were then thought expedient or necessary. But an ill use (as it was then termed) having been made of this power, a set of acts were pass­ed in the reign of Henry VII. one of which, viz. 10 Henry VII. c. 4. provided, "That no parliament [...] hereafter summoned or holden, unless the king's lieutenant then being, shall previously certify to the king, under the great seal of Ireland, the causes and considerations thereof, and the articles proposed to be passed therein; and that after the king in his council of England, shall have considered and approv­ed, or altered said acts, or any of them, and certified them back under the great seal of England, and shall have given licence to summon and [...]old a parliament, then the same shall be summoned and held, and the said acts of certified, and none other, shall be therein introduced, passed, [...] rejected.

By another law, viz. 10 Henry VII. c. 2 [...], it was enacted that "all [...] before that time passed in England, should be of force in Ire­land." [Page 170] From the making of which law, all subsequent English [...] were absurdly supposed to have bound Ireland, if therein names, [...] included under general words.

About the beginning of the reign of George I. in consequ [...] of its being a question, whether England had a right to make laws to bind this country, which was ready to be disputed by the Irish [...] act was passed in the British parliament (6th of George I. e. 5.) [...] by it was declared, "That the kingdom of Ireland ought to be [...] ­dinate to, and dependent upon, the imperial crown of Great-Britain as being inseparably annexed and united thereto, and that the king majesty, with the consent of the lords and commons of Great-Britain in parliament assembled, hath power to make laws to bind Ireland.

However, this illiberal and unjust usurpation of the legislative [...] of Ireland was of short duration. For after the emancipation [...] trade of this kingdom in the year 1779, the 10th statute of Henry [...] c. 4. before mentioned, was very much altered, by an act passed in [...] Irish parliament. in the twenty-first and twenty-second years of [...] present majesty George III. &c. namely. statute the twenty-first and twenty second Geo. III. cap. 47. By which it is enacted, "That [...] lord lieutenant and council of Ireland shall certify under the [...] seal of the same, to his majesty, without addition, alteration, &c. [...] such hills, and no other, as the parliament of Ireland shall judge to [...] expedient: that all bills so certified and returned back again [...] the great seal of England, without any alteration whatever, and [...] other, shall pass in the Irish parliament." "And that no bill [...] be certified into Great-Britain, as a cause or consideration of [...] [...] ­ing any parliament. Provided always that no parliament [...] [...] ­moned or holden, until a licence be obtained from his majesty, [...] that purpose," And this act of the Irish legislature was followed [...] declaration of rights under the form of an address to the thro [...] [...] a little strengthened by the spirited and united efforts of the [...] Irish nation, who, with one voice, and with the very arms in [...] hands with which they defended themselves from the enemies of [...] empire, when destitute of their own established forces, who at [...] time were bleeding in every quarter of the world in the support [...] British standard, firmly demanded and insisted on, from the [...] parliament, the restoration of those rights which the tyrannic oppres­sion of their predecessors had wrested from them. While on the [...] hand, that senate restored to the Irish their legislative, as they [...] fore done their commercial rights, not only repealing the 6th [...] c. 5. but passing and act renunciatory of their former groundless [...] to what they now declared to be the rights of their hitherto oppor [...] and injured neighbours.

At present, therefore, as was before mentioned. the Irish [...] governed by parliaments of its own, which consist of the king in [...] legislative capacity, the lords spiritual (22) and lords (tempo [...] [...] 165) who together with the king (or his viceroy) sit in one houses [...] the commons (300) composed of knights, citizens, and burgesses ( [...] [...] ­ed by the people) who sit in another; and these in conjunction [...] the Irish parliament, which alone is empowered with, alone [...] and alone hath right to exert the privilege of making new, or [...] or repealing those laws already made, for the government of this [...] [Page 171] In which the manner of proceeding from the first introduction of a hill into either house till it is transmitted to England by the lord lieu­tenant in order to receive the royal assent, is nearly the same with that of the British parliament.

In respect of duration, the parliaments of the two countries differ, the parliament of Ireland is at present octennial, and before the be­ginning of the reign of his present majesty, was perpetual: Whereas that of Great-Britain i [...] septennial.

The common law of England was adopted here by the council of Lismore, in the reign of Henry II. and ever since has been the com­mon law of Ireland; between which and that of England there is hard­ly and difference, except where the alterations made in it by the stat­ute law of either country, may have produced a slight variation. But, to speak generally, the principles of both are the same, and the deci­sions of the courts at Westminster, are of high authority in guiding the determinations (in similar cases) of the king's courts at Dublin, which in number, superiority, and extent of jurisdiction are similar to those at Westminster, some few and trivial deviations, in the peculiar prac­tice of each court, excepted.

In consequence of the above mentioned restoration of the constitu­tional immunities of this country, a writ of error no longer lies from the King's Bench in Ireland, to that at Westminster, and the ultimate appeal must now be brought before the Irish House of Peers, whole sentence is final and irreversible.

There are likewise ecclesiastical, and admiralty courts here, as in England, also for the general distribution of justice. The kingdom is divided into five circuits; the principal county towns in each of these are visited twice a year by two of the twelve judges who sit as judges of assize and gaol delivery alternately, for the hearing and deciding of suits by [...] Prius, and for the trial of prisoners.

To attempt to enter more minutely into a subject, which the ingenuity of the most able lawyers, that have wrote on it, could scarcely contract into a few volumes, would at present be inconvenient, or rather im­possible, in a work of this kind, wherein a desire to give a general view of many branches will not permit any enlargement on one.

INLAND NAVIGATION.] The important consequences arising from the extension of inland water carriage seem now to be generally felt and promoted in Ireland.

Among the canals completed or now prosecuting in Ireland, the most distinguished in consequence and extent (and the only one which the limits of our work will permit us to notice particularly) is that called the Grand Canal. This canal was commenced in the year 177 [...], under the direction of parliament and the navigation board, and d [...]ster [...]owrd [...] grants were made from time to time for carrying it on. But after some years it was observed that little effectual progress was made there­in, which led the legislature to hold out encouragement to private subscribers to undertake the prosecution of the work, by granting an aid of one sixth part of the sum which should be necessary to [...] thereon. Accordingly several noblemen and gentlemen subscribed a capital of one hundred thousand pounds, and were incorporated by parliament in 1772, by the name of the company of undertakers of the Grand Canal, who were put in possession of all the works which had [Page 172] been previously done at the public expense, and invested with [...] powers for the better carrying into execution this important object. After combating a variety of difficulties, enlarging their capital, [...] further aids by loan, &c. the line was completed from Dublin to [...] astereven in 1786.

This noble canal proceeds from the west end of the metropolis, passes through Sallins, Roberts-town, and Rathangan, and in the neigh­bourhood of several other towns and villages. It crosses the Li [...] an aqueduct bridge of seven arches (constructed on the most ingen [...] and permanent principles) pierces the hill of Downings several hun­dred yards—runs through a great part of the Bog of Allen—and [...] into the River Barrow at Monastereven, after a course of 31½ [...]. It is navigated by boats of from 30 to 50 tons burthen; and supplie [...] with water throughout the different levels from numerous streams [...] rivers, viz. the Black-wood-mill, Loughlewhelnan, Brockasa [...] Fouraunfan streams on the North; and on the South by the [...] Bog, Miler's-town and Donore streams, and the Mill-town [...] which is made navigable four miles from the great trunk, [...] terminates near the Curragh; but that which supplies the [...] with such abundance of most excellent water, is the Great [...] taken in at the fifteenth lock about twelve miles from Dublin; [...] are 26 locks on this navigation (6 double and 20 single) the falls [...] which vary from 4 feet 3 inches, to 19 feet 7 inches. The [...] level is 202 feet 4 inches above the James's-street harbour; 82 [...] inches above the river Barrow at Monastereven; and 265 feet [...] the tide in the Lisfy at Dublin.

These works have been principally conducted and effected by [...] and Evans, Esq. engineer, whose integrity and zeal have been riv [...] only by the ingenuity and resources he displayed in the course of the of the most arduous undertakings in the history of inland navigation.

From this canal a collateral cut to Naas is completed by the ki [...] company, and several others are meditated; particularly one to the Prosperous—another to Athy, and the tide water in the Barrow—of another towards the Shannon at Banagher by Edenderry, &c.

The completion of this canal has communicated the most es [...] advantages to the country through which it passes, and its vici [...] and through a considerable extent of the adjoining countries, rec [...] ­ing large tracts of land and bog, increasing their value, extending agri­culture and manufactures, and convening the important supp [...] all flour, corn, coal, turf, &c. &c. by a cheap and expeditious [...] to the metropolis; from whence it transports in return those [...] ­ries which render the intercourse of the city and country of such [...] [...] ­ciprocal benefit.—To these advantages are to be added, the m [...]y conveniencies afforded to travelling, &c. by the establishing of com­modious pacquet boats on this line, which passing rapidly to different stages every day at stated hours, afford one of the cheapest, most expe­ditious and social modes of conveyance yet known in any part of Eu­rope.

From the tolls on this navigation, and the profits arising from [...] pacquets, a very considerable revenue accrues to the company, whi [...] fortitude and perseverance in effecting this great national work, un­der the most discouraging circumstances, claim the praise a [...] [...] [Page 173] of their countrymen. Their success has at length proved from experience, that the effectual mode of conducting canals, is by compa­nies, subscribing rateably to the expense, and procuring from parlia­ment such aid as their importance and utility may entitle them to claim.

DUBLIN SOCIETY.] Ireland has the honour of having formed the first agricultural society in Europe, and has continued to maintain the precedence of its merit also unrivalled. This society originated about the year 1731, and was supported solely by the voluntary subscriptions of its members, amounting to about 1000l. per annum; with this fund, and the animating zeal of several individuals, particularly Dr. Madan, and Mr. Prior (two of the most valuable patriots which and country has produced) they communicated many of those benefits to which the present improving appearance of the nation is in a great degree in­debted. For several years past, the legislature have given them the most liberal grants, which have enabled them to extend their views as well to arts and manufactures as to agriculture. The school for por­trait, ornament, and architect drawing, under the direction of this so­ciety, has proved a prolific nursery for the fine arts; having produced a number of genuisses, the boast and ornament of their country, and the admiration of foreigners.

TRADE AND MANUFACTURES.] This subject has at length become of consequence to the people of Ireland. Through the concurrence of various favourable circumstances, the revolution in America, and the embarrassment of Great-Britain, Providence seconding the courage and virtue of the people, broke the chains, which trading jealousy and national injustice, had so long imposed upon this country. Whilst the sun of commerce and power in Venice, in Genoa, in Holland, the Netherlands, and other countries rose and set; the kingdom of Ire­land, more fruitful in soil, more powerful in people, more fortunate in situation, and more strong in natural resources, was compelled for sev­eral hundred years to look on these events a joyless and indifferent spectator. During that long night of misery to Ireland, where her fields stained with the blood of insurrections rapidly treading on the heels of each other; raised either by a sense of oppression, or foment­ed by the interested artifices of English ministers and their creatures.—These produced perpetual change and consequent insecurity of proper­ty; and confiscation being often the object, was generally the effect of excited disorder. In a country so distracted, manufactures could not take root, and commerce could not flourish. These are the off­spring of peace and settlement, which were here experienced but for short intervals till the revolution.

From the latter part of the reign of William III. to the late eman­cipation of the trade of Ireland in 1779, this unfortunate country ex­perienced a series of the most wanton and impolitic restrictions * from England, equally injurious to the intercourse and prosperity of both.

In 1698 the lords and commons of England addressed King William, to employ his influence in Ireland to "suppress the woollen manu­facture [Page 174] therein;" to which he answered the lords, "that his [...] will take care to do what their lordships have desired"—and to [...] commons he answered "I shall do all that in me lies to discourage [...] woollen trade in Ireland"—And indeed so successfully was this [...] influence employed upon the legislature, that they passed an act lay [...] heavy duties on the export of their woollens to England, where a [...] was also made in the following year prohibiting our exports to oth [...] countries, so that between the two legislatures the manufacture [...] completely annihilated as it could be by law.

The immediate consequences to Ireland shewed the value of [...] she lost; many thousand manufactures were obliged to leave this king­dom for want of employment; many parts of the southern and [...] [...] ­tern counties were so depopulated, that they have not yet recove [...] reasonable number of inhabitants; and the whole kingdom was [...] [...] ­ed to the greatest poverty and distress.

In consideration of this loss, the Irish were to get full and unrivalled possession of the linen trade; as if one manufacture was sufficient [...] the employment of a whole nation, especially where a large major [...] of it were totally ignorant of the process or habits of the trade, [...] possessing but little of the necessary material; whilst in the other, [...] hands were formed even to enviable perfection, and the materials [...] possessed at home in abundance. The Irish women were to [...] spinners for the English manufactures, and the richer were to [...] the clothiers for the poorer nation.

Several years had elapsed before the promised encouragement [...] linen was granted; and so wretched a state was it in, in the year 17 [...] that the exports of linen amounted in value but to 14,112l.

The people of Ireland, deprived as we have mentioned, of [...] Woollen, were obliged to confine their sole attention to the manufac­ture of Linen. As with individuals so with nations, when the [...] lie mind is exclusively bent to one object, it cannot avoid succe [...] in its pursuit to a considerable degree. An Act of Parliament was [...] [...] ­ed in Ireland in 1709, enabling the Lord Lieutenant to appoint [...] [...] ­tees for the disposal of the revenue granted for the encouragement [...] the linen manufacture. From this Board, called the Trustees of the [...] [...] ­en and hempen manufactures in Ireland, has the important object of the [...] appointment received the most zealous and unremitting attention [...] and to them this kingdom is principally indebted for the flourishing state to which the manufacture has attained, and for the character [...] maintains in all countries. The province of Ulster was the first wherein it was extended; here it was actively taken up by the industry illus­trious descendants of the hardy Scotch Colonies settled therein, [...] still it continues the principal seat of the manufacture. The [...] provinces have but a small comparative share, although that of Con­naught has been making considerable advances in the coarser branch [...] for some years.

To give the reader a more perfect idea of the progress and import­ance of this manufacture, we have annexed a view of the quanti [...] exported at different periods; and, as the export of Linen-Yarn in [...] some degree connected with the subject, we have also given a similar view of it▪

[Page 175]

EXPORTS.
Years. Linen Cloth. Linen Yarn.
  Yards. Ct. qrs. lb.
17 [...]3 1,819,816¾ 11,802 2 17
17 [...]3 4,878,545 15,672 3
17 [...] 4,777,076 13,357 2 21
1743 6,058,041 14,16 [...] 1 10
1 [...]3 10,493,858 23,238 4
1763 16,013,105 34,468 7
1778 1 [...],450,700 [...] 28,078 3 25
17 [...]3 16,039,705 [...] 35,812 3 23
1784 24,961,898 33,013 2 15
17 [...]5 26,677,647 28,842 1 5
17 [...] 28,168,866 31,062 20
1787 30,728,728 31,0 [...] 2 0

The Lawn, Cambrick, and other finer branches of manufacture, [...] of them are in a flourishing state.

The Woollen manufacture has been in possession of this country from [...] early period; but the restrictions under which it had laboured [...]ove a century, has confined its extent to little more than the [...] of the peasantry; and although the emancipation of trade was [...] to produce powerful effects upon this manufacture, yet the restrained export of Wool and Yarn, and the home market remain­ing unprotected, have caused, and must continue to cause, this valua­ble trade to remain in a very torpid state. Considering however the [...] of difficulties under which the manufacture struggles, it is sur­prising to observe the pitch of excellence to which it has arrived.—The best Broad-Cloths of Ireland are little inferior to the English, and [...] Dr [...]ggits are much admired. Her Blanketing and Flannels are in [...] esteem, and the Worsted branches have been brought to great [...]ction, and many become fit articles for extensive exportation.

Another branch of trade is in the produce of Cattle, which brings very large returns into this kingdom. The exports in this line con­sist of beef, butter, cheese, candles, tallow, hides (tanned and untanned) [...]cks and cows, hogs, bacon, hog's-lard and pork.—The last article [...] one of the most increasing and valuable exports, it is the principal among the very few resources of the numerous poor peasantry, as it is almost the only article which brings them money, and being reared without expense, trouble or attention, the returns must be considered as so much clear gain to the nation. The average export for five years, ending 1767, was about 40,000 barrels.—The like ending 1774, was 46,924 Barrels.—The like ending 1782, was 87,085, and in the year 17 [...]7 it rose to 101,859.

The silk manufacture is of great importance, but principally confi­ [...] to the metropolis, probably from its connexion with the fashions. [...]eral branches have been brought to the highest perfection; their [...] and lutestrings are excellent, and their handkerchiefs are not [...]ly superior to English, but are also unrivalled by any nation in Eu­rope. [Page 176] The mixed goods, or tabinets and poplins, have been long cel­ebrated.

The cotton manufacture is of late introduction, but yet has arrival at great perfection and considerable extent. Considerable sums [...] been expended on the erection of noble mills and machinery.

The glass manufacture has arisen to considerable consequence wi [...] a few years.

The manufacture of paper has been advancing by silent, but [...] steps, to great improvement and importance; and from the nu [...] hands it employs, and the small proportion the value of the [...] bears to the labour, it is certainly of the first consequence to a manu­facturing nation.

These are some of the principal manufactures of Ireland; [...] which appear, from the best evidence, to be daily increasing in [...] and improvement.

Having enumerated the leading manufactures, exports, of this king­dom &c. it is necessary to observe on the principal articles which [...] ­pose her imports; these generally come from or through Great [...] ­ain, * and consist of her manufactures of various denominations, [...] lens, silks, cottons, mixed goods, haberdashery, manufactures of [...] steel and other metals, groceries, hops, bark, earthen-ware, beer, [...] and an infinite number of other articles; besides the produce [...] East and West Indies to a considerable amount. The table [...] will shew the comparative value of this intercourse; but whilst it [...] the balance to be generally in favour of Ireland, there must be th [...] into the opposite scale, the remittances to absentees, interest of [...] on Irish estates, pensions, freight and insurance of ships, remittances regiments on the Irish establishment, &c. &c. amounting in [...] above a million and a half, or perhaps two millions sterling.

The annexed table is extracted from the Irish Custom House [...] counts.

[Page 177]

Value of Goods Exported to, and Imported from Great-Britain, at different periods.
  Exports. Imports.
  £ s. d. £ s. d.
1700 814,745 15 0 792,473 3 2¼
1705 516,771 17 0¼ 497,794 1 9½
1710 712,497 2 6½ 554,247 12 4
1715 1,529,765 14 1¾ 972,688 9 11½
1720 1,038,381 7 1½ 891,678 5 6½
1725 1,053,782 13 11½ 819,761 13 3¼
1730 992,832 7 0½ 929,896 1 2
1735 1,248,410 16 0¾ 935,849 8 9½
1740 1,259,853 6 8 7/ [...]; 849,678 7 10½
1745 1,390,930 8 9 [...] 949,603 15 10
1750 1,069,864 1 2 5/ [...]; 920,340 17 0¾
1755 1,312,176 2 6¾ 1,039,911 10 4 [...]
1760 1,450,757 8 67/8; 1,094,752 12 11¼
1765 1,693,197 5 7 1,439,969 4 8 [...]
1770 2,408,838 12 2¾ 1,878,599 6 11
1775 2,379,858 9 8¼ 1,739,543 18 4½
1780 2,384,898 16 7¾ 1,576,635 13 5¾
1781 2,187,406 15 0¼ 2,432,417 13 10
1782 2,709,766 18 1¼ 2,277,946 10 8¼
1783 1,989,290 6 9 2,320,455 18 7¼
1784 2,337,273 11 10¾ 2,400,456 16 4¾
1785 2,764,75 [...] 1 11½ 1,949,074 0 11 [...]
1786 3,039,531 3 5¾ 2,346,024 1 6¾
1787 3,299,523 12 10¼ 2,326,756 19 2⅙

Since the opening of the Irish trade, the intercourse with the Unit­ed States of America, the British colonies, and also to the West-India islands, has been an accession of considerable consequence. To the latter the exports are principally composed of produce, and manufac­tures of various sorts, and is a trade that promises to increase to a great extent, if not restrained by the illiberal construction of the navigation laws, which prevent their sending the redundancy of their imports in­to the English markets. The trade to the British colonies is compos­ed of similar exports as to the islands, and will probably rise to equal importance; but with the American States it is expected to be much superior.

The trade of Portugal is one of the most important to the kingdom, and constantly produces a considerable balance in her favour: In some years the export of butter alone has been equal to the whole of her imports from that country, which principally consist of wine, salt, [...], oil, pat-ash and cork; for which are sent in return butter, beef, [...], tallow, cheese, shoes, new and old drapery and fine linens, &c.

The trade with Spain consists of nearly the same articles of import and export as to Portugal.

The exports to France generally consist of beef, butter, pork, hides, [...] tallow, wheat, flour, biscuit, lin [...]s, woollens, shoes, and sun­dry [Page 178] other manufactures;—and the imports of wine, brandy, [...] capers, oil, cork, salt, gloves, cambrick, &c. The balance of [...] trade, though fluctuating, has been generally in favour of Ireland.

The trade with Holland and Flanders, consists principally of [...] port of beef, butter, hides, tallow, linen, new and old drapery, [...] ­nels, frize, woollen yarn, &c. and the imports of flax, thread, [...] and linseed oil, paper, garden-seeds, Geneva, snuff, drugs, [...] stuffs, &c.

The trade with the East Country, including Denmark, [...] Sweden, Russia, the Baltic, consists of an export nearly similar [...] preceding, and the imports, of iron, timber, deals, tar, train-oil, [...] flax, bark, [...]amp;c.

Value of the Exports and Imports of Ireland, to and from all parts, from 1700 to 1787 inclusive, with the balance of trade for and against.
Average of 10 years. Exports. Imports. Balance for. Balance against.
  £ s. d. £ s. d. £ s. d. £ s. d.
From 1700 to 1710 553023 16 0 513657 17 2½ 39365 18 9½  
From 1710 to 1720 1126670 6 11¾ 852905 7 11½ 273764 19 0¼  
From 1720 to 1730 1019809 3 2 [...] 856936 6 8 162872 16 6¼  
From 1730 to 1740 1190253 3 4½ 835044 8 2 305208 15 2½  
From 1740 to 1750 1485110 18 3 1123373 1 8 361737 16 7  
From 1750 to 1760 2002354 5 10¼ 1594164 7 1½ [...]08189 18 8¾  
From 1760 to 1770 258900 [...] 19 2 2035023 4 2 553979 15 0  
From 1770 to 1780 3125396 8 8 2544264 2 6 [...]81132 6 2  
1780 3012178 13 9 [...] 2127579 9 7 [...] [...]84599 4 1¾  
1781 2896035 7 1 3123031 9 7½ ——— 226996 2 6½
1782 3400598 10 8¾ 2994265 17 8 406332 13 0 [...]4;  
1783 2935707 17 6¼ 3007236 17 1¼ ——— 71528 19 9
1784 3326211 16 6 3343031 13 9¾ ——— 16819 17 3 [...]4
1785 3737068 0 7 [...] 3056394 14 11 680673 5 8½  
1786 3957396 18 11 [...] 3480387 0 2½ 527009 18 9  
1787 [...] 1 [...] [...] [...] [...]4 [...]7289 11 5 [...]4; 8 [...]10 [...]6 [...] 6  

[Page 179] COINS.] The coins of Ireland are at present of the same denomi­nations and the like fabric with those of England, only an English shilling passes in Ireland for thirteen pence, and so in proportion in the other coins.

BANK OF IRELAND.] The subscribers to the national banks were incorporated by charter in 1783, by the name of the Governor and Company of the Bank of Ireland, and proceeded to business on the 25th June, in the same year, upon a capital stock of 600,000l. which consisted of 4 per cent. government debentures deposited at par.—These debentures were cancelled by government, agreeably to act of parliament, and an annuity at the rate of 4 per cent. granted in lieu thereof. In addition to their capital they borrowed 60,000l. Previ­ous to the opening of the bank, for which they issued debentures at 5 per cent. and in 1784 a further sum of 40,000l. on the like terms.

In this bank are deposited, certain monies received into his majesty's treasury; and by an act passed in 1784, all money lodged in the courts of chancery and exchequer are also to be deposited in the bank.

The governors, directors, and officers are annually elected in the month of April. Of the 15 directors 5 must be new. The qualifica­tion of governor, is the actual possession of 5000l. stock; of the deputy governor 3000l. and of each of the directors 2000l.

Under the direction of this company, an office was opened in June 1787, for purchasing light guineas and half guineas, of terms so high­ly advantageous to the public, that it has proved of the utmost utility.

MILITARY STRENGTH.] The military establishment of Ireland consists of

Four regiments of dragoon guards 684 men
Eight regiments of dragoons 1416
Twenty-eight regiments of foot 13132
Total 15,232

To this is to be added the ordnance, which is on a distinct establish­ment, and is composed of 6 companies, of 50 men each, making in the whole 300.

Of this force, Great-Britain may employ seven regiments (or 3283 men) on foreign service at the expense of Ireland; but during the late war the principal part of the army was withdrawn, so that in the year 1777 there were little more than 3000 men left for the protection of the kingdom.

CITIES, PUBLIC EDIFICES, &c.] Dublin, the capital of Ireland, is in extent, beauty and number of inhabitants, the second city in the British dominions. It is situated on the east side of the island, on the [...] Liffey, near its junction with the sea, in latitude 53° 20′ and is about 270 miles N. W. of London.

Dublin is equal in magnitude to above one-fourth of London. It is two miles and a half long, and its greatest breadth is nearly equal; so that the circumference may be about eight Irish miles. It lies mostly [...] a level, or rather low, in respect to the adjacent country; a great [...] of the old town being built on a marshy foundation. Its increase [...] last twenty years, is almost incredible: In the year 1754, the re­ [...] of houses was 12,857, and in 1766, it was 13,194. It now con­tains [Page 180] at a moderate computation, about 15,000 houses, mostly [...] inhabitants, who are estimated at near 200,000 souls, and is dairy [...] creasing both in extent and population.

Dublin would have had a commodious and secure station for ship­ping, if the entrance of the bay had not been so choaked up, that ves­sels of great burthen cannot come over the bar: But the defects of [...] harbour are greatly remedied, by a prodigious work of stone and [...] of wood, extending about three miles into the bay.

At the end of the piles, there is a light house erected, curiously [...] con­structed of hewn stone. The approach to the city from the harbour exhibits a most beautiful prospect. It is a spacious amphith [...] bounded mostly by a high shore; and the country all round is [...] [...] ­spersed with white villas, which have a pleasing effect.

The river Liffey, though navigable for ships of a moderate but bu [...] as far as the old Custom-house, is but narrow, the breadth being [...] some parts 250 feet, in others only 140. It runs for two miles [...] straight through the city, dividing it nearly into two equal parts, [...] ­ing spacious quays, wasted in the whole length of the city. At [...] breadth of a wide street from the river on each side, the houses [...] built opposite each other, which has a grand effect. Over the [...] are erected five bridges, two of them, Essex and the Queen's, are [...] ­gant structures; the other three, Ormond, Arran, and Bloody-bridge [...] have but little to recommend them, besides affording the convenien [...] of passage.

This city is the see of an archbishop, and sends two members to par­liament; and the university sends two more. Besides two cathedral (Christ's and St. Patrick's) there are eighteen parish churches, [...] meeting-houses for Presbyterians, one for Baptists, three for Me [...] ­dists, one for Moravians, two for Quakers; fifteen Roman- [...] chapels, three nunneries, one Jewish synagogue, and fourteen hospit [...]. The linen and yarn halls, fifteen public markets for every species [...] provisions, of which Ormond market is perhaps the first in Eu [...] and seven public prisons. The Four Courts, consisting of the [...] Court of Chancery, King's-bench, Common-pleas, and Exchequer, [...] held here, as also Courts of Prerogative, Delegate, Consistory, [...] Admiralty; several halls for corporation, &c. one theatre, [...] coffee-houses, besides a number of elegant hotels for the accom [...] ­tion of foreigners.

The east end of the town on each side of the Liffey is extending [...] by several new streets, on a noble scale; and when the bridge which is in contemplation for uniting the line from Grafton to Sackv [...] street is built, and the various avenues intended to be opened ther [...] are completed, Dublin will be unrivalled in Europe.

The municipal government of the city of Dublin is vested in a [...] mayor, 24 aldermen, 2 sheriffs, and 97 common council, who are ele [...] by the several corporations. The various departments of its [...] are partly in the hands of this corporation, and partly in several [...] instituted for the purpose within these few years. In the for [...] the care of the water, which they are to see carefully and con­sist distributed to every part of the metropolis, from two principal [...] one from a bason at the west end of the city, on the south side of [...] street, which affords a noble head of water, being chiefly supp [...] [...] [Page 181] the grand canal; and the other from the Liffey at Island-bridge, where arcing engine is employed to raise the water to a proper level for the better supply of the north side of the city: From these sources it is supplied, in a degree, perhaps, superior to any other in Europe.

Cork is the second city in the kingdom, and capital of the province of Munster, governed by a mayor and other magistrates, and sends two members to parliament. It is seated on an island in the river Lea, which branching into two arms about a mile above the scite of the city, one runs on its north and the other on its south side, over which are placed neat bridges, by which the communication with the opposite continents is preserved. The island is intersected by several canals, [...]her natural or artificial, which being banked in, bring up ships almost to every street, and greatly facilitate their trade. The situation of the city is partly of a rising ground on the north and south, and the middle on a level; it is three miles long and near two broad, and is uncom­monly populous for its extent, containing above 80,000 inhabitants. Formerly the streets and houses were as narrow and inelegant as those of equal antiquity in Ireland; but the public and private buildings of late years are in the stile of modern elegance, and alike declare the im­proved taste, spirit, and riches of the inhabitants, who have been at all times distinguished for their liberal hospitality and agreeable suavity of manners. Here are seven Protestant churches, eleven Catholic chap­els, and four dissenting meeting-houses, belonging to Presbyterians, Baptists, Quakers and French Protestants. The Custom house, Ex­change, Market-house, County-Court-house and the Theatre, are hand­some buildings; and the charity schools and similar foundations are numerous and well supported; upon the whole, this city very justly ranks as the second in the kingdom, and is 124 miles S. W. of Dublin. The trade of Cork is very considerable, and its exports are in some articles much superior to those of metropolis. In time of war it is the great market for provisions, from whence the British navy draw an inexhaustible supply. The other articles of export consist of corn, wool, hay and woollen yarn, camblets, serges, hides, butter, candles, [...], tallow, herrings, &c. Wool-combing is carried on to such ex­tent in this county, that half the wool of Ireland is said to be combed have; the manufactures consist of camblets, serges, ratteens, frizes, d [...]ggets, narrow cloths, coarse linen, stockings, &c. but when agri­culture and manufactures are more widely diffused through this fruit­ful province, their trade will be more valuable, as being derived from the enlarged industry and ingenuity of the people.

Limerick is situated on the Shannon, one of the noblest rivers which any European island can boast, and placed in one of the most fertile counties of the kingdom. It is a flourishing city, and composed of what is called the Irish and the English town. The latter stands upon the south part of a piece of ground three miles in circumference, called the King's Island, formed by the Shannon, which divides itself about half a mile above the city. The Irish town is on the south or opposite side of the river, and both are united by an old bridge, called Baal's.—These towns in their ancient state consisted but of one wide well built [...] out at right angles by many narrow lanes; at present the city [...], populous and regular; three miles in circumference; is sup­posed to contain above 40,000 inhabitants, and is 92 miles, S. W. by W. [Page 182] from Dublin, and about 60 miles from the sea. It is governed [...] mayor, sheriffs and other magistrates; is a city and county in [...] and sends two members to parliament. Its trade is considerable, par­ticularly in the export of beef, pork, butter, hides, rape-seed, &c. [...] and the manufactures of linen, woollen and paper are carried [...] some extent; that of gloves is no less celebrated abroad than at [...] for their uncommon delicacy and beauty.

Belfast, though a few years since of inferior or second rate conse­quence, now ranks amongst the first towns in Ireland; to which [...] im­portance it has arrived by the most rapid progress, and for which [...] indebted to the enterprizing activity of its merchants, the uncom [...] industry of its people, and from its situation, being the medium th [...] which are conveyed the imports and exports of a populous and [...] manufacturing country. Belfast is in the county of Antri [...], on [...] river Lagan, at its junction with the Lough of Belfast, is supposed [...] contain at least 30,000 inhabitants, governed by a Sovereign and [...] Burgesses, sends two members to parliament, and is 80 miles north [...] Dublin. The streets are broad, the houses generally modern and [...] built. The Exchange, Hall, and other public buildings are suited [...] the purposes of their erection, and worthy the consequence of [...] town. Their trade has risen (and is daily rising) into conside [...] value; the exports of linen, manufactured cotton, glass, corn, [...] pork, and sundry other articles, are great; and their various manufac­tures form some of the most important in the kingdom.

Waterford stands on the south side of the Suire, a broad and [...] river without by bridge, and about four miles and a half from its j [...] ­tion with the Nore and Barrow, all which united form the harbour [...]. This city is about eight miles from the sea, and 74 miles south-south- [...] from Dublin; it is a most convenient port for foreign traffic, and its har­bour runs almost 12 miles up the country, nearly in a strait line, all [...] way deep and clear. This city is the capital of the county of the [...] name, governed by a Mayor and other magistrates, and sends two [...] ­bers to parliament; there are, a cathedral of great extent and eleg [...] three churches (one of which is extremely beautiful and spacious, [...] rivals any which even the capital can boast) four Catholic chap [...] and places of worship for French Protestants, Presbyterians, Qua [...] and Baptists. The Bishop's palace is a fine building of hewn [...] with two fronts. The Court-house, Exchange, Custom-house, [...] Barracks, are neat handsome buildings, and the new Theatre and as­sembly Rooms are fitted up in a very fine taste. There are [...] charity schools and humane foundations, well supported. The [...] glass and other manufactures of Waterford are in a flourishing st [...] and its export of beef, pork, butter, hides, tallow, corn, &c. is consider­able; to which the extensive inland navigation it has by means of [...] Nore, Suire, and Barrow greatly contributes; as they also do to [...] import trade, from the demand for foreign commodities in the [...] rich counties and flourishing towns through which these rivers [...]. The trade it carries on with Newfoundland, and of which it enjoy [...] principal share, is of the utmost importance, as upwards of [...] sail of shipping are employed in the supply of the banks with fish [...] ­sions, &c. and return from thence and the West-Indies with fish, [...] sugar, cotton, &c. Some idea of the provision trade here may [...] [Page 183] by the vast number of large hogs killed, which amount to upwards of [...]000 per week, for many weeks together, and of butter there have been exported from hence from 60, to 80,000 casks a year.

Kilkenny is one of the best inland cities in this kingdom, pleasantly situated on the river Nore, distant 57 miles south-west from Dublin. It is governed by a Mayor, Recorder, and Aldermen. It comprises two towns, Kilkenny, so called, and Irish-Town, each of which sends two members to parliament; and, together, are computed to contain about 20,000 inhabitants. It has two churches, and several Catholic Chapels—The cathedral stands in a sequestered situation, is a venerable Gothic pile, and built above five hundred years ago; close to it is one of those remarkable round towers, which have so much engaged the atten­tion of travellers. There are two very fine bridges of cut marble over the Nore; John's particularly, which consists of three elliptic arches, is beautifully proportioned, and might serve as a model of lightness and elegance. The only manufactures of consequence in this city are [...]arse woollen cloths, blankets of extraordinary fine quality, and con­siderable quantities of starch; in the neighbourhood also are manufac­tured those beautiful chimney-pieces, which are known all over the kingdom by the name of Kilkenny marble; which are cut and polish­ed by water, a mill (the only one of its kind probably in Europe) having been invented by the late ingenious Mr. Colles for this purpose.

Galway is the most considerable town in Conaught, and seated on the noble bay of Galway, on the Western Ocean, 120 miles west from Dublin. It has but one parish church, an Exchange, three nunneries, three monasteries, a charter-school, and an hospital. It is county in itself, governed by a Mayor, or his Deputy, two Sheriffs and a Re­corder, and sends two members to parliament. The town is surround­ed with walls, and including its suburbs, contains about 15,000 inhabit­ants. The salmon and herring fisheries are carried on here with great spirit, and employ several hundred boats; the quantity of kelp manu­factured and exported is considerable.

Londonderry is 115 miles north-north-west from Dublin, in the province of Ulster, and capital of the county of the same name; sends two members to parliament, and is governed by a Mayor and other Magistrates. It is seated on an eminence or declivity of an oval form, being almost a peninsula at the bottom, and on a narrow part of Lough Foyle, which surrounds, for a quarter of a mile broad, two thirds or more of the eminence, and by which they have an open navigation to the sea on the very north of the kingdom. This situation is not more advantageous than beautiful; the city is extremely well built and neat, and a general appearance of order, industry and sobriety prevails throughout. Its trade is considerable; the exports consist of linen, linen-yarn, grain, &c. and their exertions in the Greenland and other fisheries, have been successful. The ground plot of this city is the property of the corporations of London, from which circumstance it has compounded its former name, which was Derry.

The other considerable towns in Ireland are, Newry in the county Down, 50 miles N. from Dublin, and seated on the Newry Water, which is rendered navigable for large vessels into the bay of Carling­ford; and by a noble canal which joins the Banan river, has a com­munication with Lough Neagh and all the circumjacent neighbour­hood.— [Page 184] Drogheda, seated on the river Boyne, which is navig [...] ships of burden to the Quay; 23 miles N. from Dublin, gover [...] a Mayor, Sheriffs, Recorder, and Aldermen; is a county in [...] sends two members to parliament.—Wexford, capital of the co [...] the same name, 67 miles S. from Dublin; governed by a may [...] [...] other magistrates, and sends two members to parliament; [...] the sea, upon the river Slaney.—And Armagh, which is not only [...] of the greatest markets for linen, but is perhaps unrivalled [...] other of equal extent, for the beauty of its public buildings, for [...] it is indebted to the unexampled munificence of its primate.

REVENUE AND EXPENSES.
  £ s.
Hereditary Revenue 262249 9 [...]
Additional duties on Customs and Excise in­wards and outwards 516695 4 [...]
Duties on stamped paper and parchment 39893 3 [...]
Revenue arising from the Post Office 14171 9 [...]
Pells and Poundage received at the Treasury 25301 [...] [...]
Surplus from the public coal yards 864 16 [...]
Lottery offices [...]cences 233 18 [...]
Rent of New Geneva County Waterford 738 14 [...]
Regimental Balance 1500 0 [...]
Absentee Tax 6308 9 [...]
  867956 13 [...]
Expenses of Ireland for one year, ending March 25, 1787
Civil List 197727 [...]
Military Establishment 501289 [...]
Extraordinary Charges 533221 [...]
The Total Gross Expense 1232237 15 [...]
From whence deducting lot­tery payments 160000 0 0
The militia expense of one year 20000 0 0
And sums repaid out of the pro­duce of the tillage duties 4228 17 11¾
  184228 17
The Actual Expense 1048008 17 [...]

NATIONAL DEBT. *] The debt of Ireland is considered as [...] originated in 1715, when a vote of credit for 50,000l. was passed [...] threatened invasion of the kingdom.—From that period its [...] though regular and fluctuating, was considerable, and in the you [...] it amounted to 205,117l. However, through the exercise of [...] oeconomy, or an increase of revenue, this debt was extinguished the nation was in credit from the year 1750 to 1760, when the [...] again engaged in debt, which, accumulated from £.223,438, [...] in 1761, to £.2,302,146, the debt in 1787.

[Page 185] HISTORY.] See Ireland's History of Ireland—O'Conor's Disserta­tions on the History of Ireland—And Historical Tracts by Sir John [...], Attorney-General and Speaker of the House of Commons in Ireland.

ISLE OF MAN.

THE Mona, mentioned by Tacitus was the isle of Anglesea, not this [...]and. It lies in St. George's Channel, and is almost at an equal dis­tance from the kingdoms of England, Scotland, and Ireland. Its length from north to south is rather more than thirty miles, its breadth from eight to fifteen; and the latitude of the middle of the island is fifty-four degrees sixteen minutes north. It is said, that on a clear day the three Britannic kingdoms may be seen from this island. The [...] here is wholesome, and the climate, only making allowance for the situation, pretty much the same as that in the north of England, from which it does not differ much in other respects. The hilly parts are b [...]ren, and the champaign fruitful in wheat, barley, oats, rye, flax, [...], roots, and pulse. The ridge of mountains, which, as it were, divides the island, both protects and fertilizes the vallies, where there [...] good pasturage. The better sorts of inhabitants have good sizeable houses, and a small kind, which are swift and hardy; nor are they enabled with any noxious animals. The coasts abound with sea-fowl; [...] the puffins, which breed in rabbit-holes, are almost a lump of fat, [...] esteemed very delicious. It is said, that this island abounds with [...], lead, and copper mines, though unwrought; as are the quarries of marble, slate and stone.

The Isle of Man contains seventeen parishes and four towns on the [...]-coasts. Castle-town is the metropolis of the island, and the seat of its government; Peele, which of late years begins to flourish; Dou­glas has the best market and best trade in the island, and is the richest and most populous town, on account of its excellent harbour, and its fine mole, extending into the sea▪ Ramsey has likewise a considerable commerce, on account of its spacious bay, in which ships may ride safe from all winds excepting the north-east. The reader, by throw­ing his eyes on the map, may see how conveniently this island is situat­ed for being the storehouse of smugglers, which it was till within these few years, to the inexpressible prejudice of his majesty's rev­enue.

The crown of Great-Britain purchased this island 1765 from the A [...]hol family to whom it then belonged, for 70,000l. The Duke of A [...]hol, however, retains his territorial property in the island, though the form of its government is altered; and the king has now the same rights, powers, and prerogatives, as the duke formerly enjoyed. The inhabitants, also, retain many of their ancient constitutions and customs.

The [...] established religion in Man is that of the Church of England. The bishop of S [...]dor and Man enjoys all the spiritual rights and pre­ [...]ces of other bishops, but does not set in the British house of [...]; his see never having been erected into an English barony.— [...] of the most excellent prelates who ever adorned the episcopal [Page 186] character, was Dr. Thomas Wilson, bishop of Man, who presided [...] that diocese upwards of fifty-seven years, and died in the year 17 [...] aged ninety-three. He was eminently distinguished for the piety and exemplariness of his life, his benevolence and hospitality, and [...] unremitting attention to the happiness of the people entrusted to him care. He encouraged agriculture, established schools for the instruc­tion of the children of the inhabitants of the island, translated some of his devotional pieces into the Mank's language to render them [...] generally useful to them, and founded parochial libraries in every publ­ish in his diocese. Some of his notions respecting government and church discipline were not of the most liberal kind: But his fai [...] were so few, and his virtues so numerous and conspicuous, that he [...] a great blessing to the Isle of Man, and an ornament to human [...] Cardinal Fleury had so much veneration for his character, that out [...] regard to him, he obtained an order from the court of France, that [...] privateer of that nation should ravage the Isle of Man.

The ecclesiastical government is well kept up in this island, and [...] livings are comfortable. The language, which is called the Ma [...] and is spoken by the common people, is radically Erse, or Irish, [...] with a mixture of other languages. The New Testament and [...] ­mon Prayer Book have been translated into the Manks language. [...] natives, who amount to above 20,000, are inoffensive, charitable, [...] hospitable. The better sort live in stone houses, and the poorer [...] thatched; and their ordinary bread is made of oatmeal. Their [...] ­ducts for exportation consist of wool, hides, and tallow; which [...] exchange with foreign shipping for commodities they may have co [...] ­sion for from other parts. Before the south promontory of Man, [...] little island called the Calf of Man: It is about three miles in cir [...] and separated from Man by a channel about two furlongs broad.

This island affords some curiosities which may amuse an antiquity. They consist chiefly of Runic sepulchral inscriptions and monu [...] of ancient brass daggers, and other weapons of that metal, and [...] of pure gold, which are sometimes dug up, and seem to indicate [...] splendour of its ancient possessors.

ISLE OF WIGHT.

THIS island is situated opposite the coast of Hampshire, from which it is separated by a channel, varying in breadth from [...] to seven miles; it is considered as port of the county of Southampton and is within the diocese of Winchester. Its greatest length, ex [...] ­ing from east to west, measures nearly twenty-three miles; its breadth from north to south about thirteen. The air is in general [...] particularly the southern parts; the soil is various, but so great [...] fertility, it was many years ago computed, that more wheat was [...] here in one year, than could be consumed by the inhabitants in [...]. And it is supposed that its present produce, under the great improve­ments of agriculture, and the additional quantity of land lately [...] into tillage, has more than kept pace with the increase of popula [...]. A range of hills, which affords fine pasture for sheep, extends from [...] to west, through the middle of the island. The interior parts of [...] [Page 187] [...], as well as its extremities, afford a great number of beautiful and p [...]esque prospects, not only in the pastoral, but also in the great and romantic style. Of these beauties, the gentlemen of the island have availed themselves, as well in the choice of situation of their [...], as in their other improvements. Domestic fowls and poultry are bred here in great numbers; the outward-bound ships and ves­ [...] Spithead, the Mother-bank, and Cowes, commonly furnishing themselves from this island.

Such is the purity of the air, the fertility of the soil, and the beauty and variety of the landscapes of this island, that it has been called the [...]len of England; it has some very fine gentlemen's seat's;— [...] it is often visited by parties of pleasure on account of its delight­ful scenes.

The island is divided into thirty parishes. And, according to a very [...]ate calculation made in the year 1777, the inhabitants then a­ [...]ted to eighteen thousand and twenty-four, exclusive of the [...] quartered there. Most of the farm-houses are built with [...], and even the cottages appear neat and comfortable, having each [...] garden.

[...] town of Newport stands nearly in the centre of the island, of [...] it may be considered as the capital. The river Medina empties [...] into the channel at Cowes harbour, distant above five miles, and [...] navigable up to the quay, renders it commodious for trade.—The three principal streets of Newport extend from east to west, and [...] [...]ssed at right angles by three others, all which are spacious, clean and well paved.

Carisbrooke castle, in the Isle of Wight, has been rendered remark­able by the confinement of king Charles I. who taking refuge here, was detained a prisoner, from November 1647, to September 1648.— [...]er the execution of the king, this castle was converted into a place [...]co [...]finement for his children; and his daughter, the princess Eliza­beth, died in it. There are several other sorts in this island, which [...] all erected about the 36th year of the reign of Henry VIII. when many other forts and block houses were built in different parts of the [...]st of England.

The SCILLY ISLES, anciently the SILURES, are a cluster of dan­gerous rocks, to the number of 140, lying about 30 miles from the La [...]d's End in Cornwall, of which county they are reckoned a part. By their situation between the English channel and St. George's chan­ [...], they have been the destruction of many ships and lives. Some of the [...]ands are well inhabited, and have large and secure harbours.

In the English channel are four islands subject to England: These [...] Jersey, Guernsey, Alderney, and Sark; which, though they lie [...] nearer to the coast of Normandy than to that of England, are [...] the diocese of Winchester. They lie in a cluster in Mount St. [...] [...] bay, between Cape la Hogue in Normandy, and Cape Fre­ [...] in Brittany. The computed distance between Jersey and Sark [...] leagues; between that and Guernsey, seven leagues; and be­ [...] the same and Alderney, nine leagues.

[Page 188] JERSEY, anciently CAESAREA, was known to the Rom [...] [...] lies farthest within the bay, in forty-nine degrees seven minutes [...] latitude, and in the second degree twenty-six minutes west [...] eighteen miles west of Nomandy, and eighty-four miles [...] Portland. The north side is inaccessible through lofty, [...] the south is almost level with the water; the high [...] [...] in its midland part, is well planted, and abounds with [...] ­ards, from which is made an incredible quantity of [...] cyder. The vallies are fruitful and well cultivated, and con [...] [...] ­ty of cattle and sheep. The inhabitants neglect tillage too much [...] intent upon the culture of cyder, the improvement of comm [...] particularly the manufacture of stockings. The honey in [...] remarkably fine: And the island is well supplied with fish and [...] fowl almost of every kind, some of both being peculiar to the [...] and very delicious.

The island is not above twelve miles in length; but the [...] salubrious, that, in Camden's time, it was said there was here [...] ­ness for a physician. The inhabitants in number are about [...] and are divided into twelve parishes. The capital town is St. [...] or Hilary, which contains above 400 houses, has a good harbour castle, and makes a handsome appearance. The property of [...] belonged formerly to the Carterets, a Norman family, who [...] always attached to the royal interest, and gave protection to [...] both when king and prince of Wales, at a time when no part [...] British dominions durst recognise him. The language of the in [...] ­ants is French, with which most of them intermingle English [...] Knit stockings and caps form their staple commodity; but they [...] on a considerable trade in fish with Newfoundland, and disp [...] their cargoes in the Mediterranean. The governor is appointed [...] crown of England, but the civil administration rests with a [...] assisted by twelve jurats. As this island is the principal rema [...] duchy of Normandy depending on the kings of England, it pre [...] the old feudal forms, and particularly the assembly of states, [...] as it were a miniature of the British parliament, as settled in the [...] of Edward I.

GUERNSEY, is thirteen miles and a half from south-west to [...] east, and twelve and a half where broadest, east and west; has [...] ten parishes, to which there are but eight ministers, four of the [...] being united, and Alderney and Sark, which are appendages of [...] ­sey, having one a-piece. Though this is a much finer island [...] of Jersey, yet it is far less valuable; because it is not so well cul [...] nor is it so populous. It abounds in cyder; and the inhabitants [...] French: But want of siring is the greatest inconveniency [...] islands labour under. The only harbour here is at St. Pet [...] [...] which is guarded by two forts; one called the Old-Castle, [...] other Castle-Cornet. Guernsey is likewise part of the an [...] man patrimony.

ALDERNEY is about eight miles in compass, and is by [...] nearest of all these islands to Normandy, from which it is sep [...] a narrow strait, called the race of Alderney, which is a dang [...] ­sage in stormy weather, when the two currents meet; other [...] [Page 189] [...]a [...]e, and has depth of water for the largest ships. This island is healthy, and is remarkable for a fine breed of cows.

SARK is a small island depending upon Guernsey; the inhabitants are long-lived, and enjoy from nature all the conveniencies of life;— [...] number is about 300. The inhabitants of the three last-mentioned [...]nds together, are thought to be about 20,000. The religion of all [...] four islands is that of the church of England.

GERMANY.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 600 Miles. between Degrees. 5 and 19 E. long. Sq. Miles. 191,571
Breadth 520 Miles. Degrees. 45, 4 and 54, 40 N. lat. Sq. Miles. 191,571

BOUNDARIES.] THE empire of Germany, properly so called, is bounded by the German ocean, Denmark, and the Baltic, on the North; by Poland and Hungary, including Bohemia, [...] the East; by Switzerland and the Alps, which divide it from Italy, [...] the South; and by the dominions of France and the Low Coun­tries, on the West, from which it is separated by the Rhine, Moselle, and the Maese.

GRAND DIVISIONS.] The divisions of Germany, according to Zimmermann, are as follows:

Divisions. Areas in Square Miles. Population. Populat. for every sq. Mile.
1. Upper Saxony 3 [...],000 3,700,000 115
2. Lower Saxony 20,480 2,100,000 102
3. Westphalia 20,000 2,300,000 115
4. Upper Rhine 8,000 1,000,000 225
5. Lower Rhine 7,328 1,100,000 163
6. Burgundy 7,504 1,880,000 255
7. Franconia 7,744 1,000,000 125
8. Swabia 11,664 1,800,000 154
9. Bavaria 16,320 1,600,000 98
10. Austria 34,320 4,182,000 121
11. Bohemia 15,376 2,266,000 148
12. Moravia 6,336 1,137,000 179
13. Silesia 11,520 1,800,000 157
14. Lusatia 2,880 400,000 136
    Total 26,265,000  

[Page 190]

Subdivisions of each of the Ten Circles, viz.

1. Circle of Upper Saxony.
SUBDIVISIONS.

1. Duchy of Pomerania. 2. Duchy of Saxe-Weimar. 3. [...] of Gotha. 4. Coburg. 5. Meinungen, 6. Hildburghanson▪ 7. [...] Eisenach. 8. Thuringia. 9. Anhalt. 10. Schwarzburg. 11. Elec­torate of Brandenburg. 12. Electorate of Saxony. 13. Co [...] Mansfeld. 14. Werningerode. 15. Barby. 16. Hohenstein. 17. [...] Hazfeld. 18. Reus. 19. Shaumburg. 20. Merseburg. 21. [...] ­burg Zeitz. 22. Walkenried. 23. Abbey of Quedlingburg.

2. Circle of Lower Saxony.
SUBDIVISIONS.

1. Bishopric of Hildesheim. 2. Bishopric of Lubec. 3. Ab [...] Gandersheim. 4. Duchy of Magdeburg. 5. Duchy of Hal [...] 6. Duchy of Bremen. 7. Duchy of Celle. 8. Duchy of Cr [...] ­gen. 9. Duchy of Calenberg. 10. Duchy of Lauenburg. 11. [...] of Wolsenbuttel. 12. Duchy of Mecklenburg. 13. Duchy of [...] stein. 14. County of Rantzau. 15. Principality of Blankenburg. 16. [...] Principality of Schwerin. 17. Principality of Ratzeburg. 18. [...] ­rial Cities: Hamburg. 19. Lubec. 20. Goslar, 21. Miilhau [...]. 22. Nordhausen. 23. Bremen.

3. Circle of Westphalia.
SUBDIVISIONS.

1. Bishopricks of Munster. 2. Osnaburg. 3. Paderborn. 4. [...]. 5. Duchies of Cleves. 6. Juliers. 7. Bergen. 8. Principalities Minden. 9. Verden. 10. Oostfriesland. 11. Nassau. 12. [...] ­burg. 13. Counties of Lippe. 14. Bentheim. 15. Tekl [...]. 16. Hoya. 17. Diepholz. 18. Wied. 19. Sayn. 20. [...] 21. Limburg. 22. Seven Abbies. 23. Imperial Cities, [...]. 24. Aix la Chapelle. 25. Dortmund, besides some smaller [...] and lordships.

4. Circle of the Upper Rhine.
SUBDIVISIONS.

Bishopricks of Worms, Spire, Strasburg, Basel, Fulda; Great [...] tership of the Knights of St. John, at Heitersheim; 3 Provosti [...] Landgraviates of Hesse Cassel; Darmstadt, Homberg, Rotenbu [...] Principalities of Nassau, Deux Ponts, Sponheim, Veldenz, Si [...] Lautern, Waldec, Salm; Counties, Hanau, Lichtenberg, [...] Munzenberg, Sponheim, Iseburg, Witgenstein, Falkenstein, [...] ­gen, &c. Imperial towns, Worms, Spire, Frankfort on the [...] Wezlar.

5. Circle of the Lower Rhine, also called Electoral Circle
SUBDIVISIONS.

Four Electorates of Mentz, Trier, Cologne, and the Palatin [...] ­chy of Aremberg, Balley of Coblenz, belonging to the Teutonic [...] Counties of Beilstein, Lower Isenburg. The Prince of Turn [...] is, Postmaster-general of the Empire, is one of the states of this [...] but his estates are not situated in this circle.

[Page 191]
6. Circle of Burgundy.
SUBDVISIONS.

Formerly 17 provinces of the Netherlands belonged to it; the re­maining parts of this circle are those provinces which belong at pres­ent to the house of Austria, viz. Duchies of Brabant, Limburg, Lux­emburg, Cueldre; counties of Flanders, Hennegau, Namur; marquis­ate of Antwerp, Malines.

7. Circle of Franconia.
SUBDIVISIONS.

The bishopricks of Bamburg, Wurzburg, Eichstedt, the territory of the great master of the Teutonic order, Mergentheim; marquisate of Anspach, Bareuth; counties of Schwarzenberg, Wertheim, Hohen­ [...]he Castell, &c. The Imperial towns of Nurenberg, Rothenburg, Windsheim, Schweinfurt, Weissenburg.

8. Circle of Swabia.
SUBDIVISIONS

Bishopricks of Costanz and Augsburg; abbies, Elwangen, Kemp­ten, Lindau, Buchau, &c. and twenty more; duchy of Wurtemberg; marquisate of Baaden; Principalities of Hohenzollern (the origin of the house of Prussia) Furstenburg, Oettingen; counties of Konigsegg, [...]ar Hohenembs, &c. and many baronies; twenty Imperial towns, the principal of which are: Augsburg, Nordling, Ulm, Heilbronn, Hall, Reutling, &c.

9. Circle of Bavaria.
SUBDIVISIONS.

The archbishoprick of Salzburg; the bishopricks of Freisingen, Passau, Regensburg; the provosty of Bertolsgaden; the abbies of St. [...]meran, Lower and Upper Munster; the duchy of Bavaria; the up­per palatinate, Neuburg; the principalities of Sulzbach, Leuchten­berg; counties of Sternstein, and seven others; the Imperial town of Regensburg.

10. Circle of Austria.
SUBDIVISIONS.

1. Archduchy of Austria, or Lower Austria. 2. Duchy of Stiria. 3. Carinthia. 4. Carniola. 5. The Austrian Friaul, or Coritia. 6. The Littorale, or the government of Trieste. 7. Tyrol. 8. Upper Austria. 9. The bishopricks of Trident or Trent. 10. Brixen. 11. [...]lley, Austria. 12. Bal. of Trasp.

Besides these ten circles, there belong also to the German empire: 1. The kingdom of Bohemia, divided into sixteen circles. 2. The marquisate to Moravia, divided into five circles (both Austrian prov­inces.) 3. The marquisate of Lusatia (belonging to the elector of Saxony.) 4. Silesia, only the smaller part of it, subject to the house of Austria, belongs at present to the Roman empire. 5. The three circles of immediate lordships or fignories, called the estates of the independent and immediate knighthood of the empire, viz. I. that of [...]; 2 of Franconia; 3 of the Rhine; they have no vote at the [...], but are under the protection of the empire; each of these circles, which consist of smaller counties, baronies, abbies, small towns, &c. [...] its own directors: The Mundfruck belongs to the third circle.— [Page 192] 6. The lordships of Jever, Kniphausen, Rheda, Mumpelgard, [...] and twenty-eight more. 7. Some lordships, which are gover [...] common by more than one ancient noble family, and which are [...] Immediate Villages of the Empire.

MOUNTAINS.] The chief mountains of Germany are the [...] which divide it from Italy, and those which separate Saxony, [...] and Moravia from Bohemia. But many other large tracts of [...] ­tains are found in different parts of the empire.

FORESTS.] The vast passion which the Germans have for [...] the wild boar, is the reason why perhaps there are more woods [...] chaces yet standing in Germany than in most other countries. [...] Hercynian forest, which in Caesar's time was nine days journals length, and six in breadth, is now cut down in many places, or p [...] ­ed out into woods, which go by particular names. Most of the [...] are pine, fir, oak and beech. There is a vast number of forests [...] note in every part of this country; almost every count, baron, or [...] ­tleman, having a chace or park adorned with pleasure-houses, [...] well-stocked with game, viz. deer, of which there are seven or [...] sorts, as roebucks, stags, &c. of all sizes and colours, and many [...] vast growth; plenty of hares, conies, foxes, and boars. They [...] so much also with wild fowl, that in many places the peasants [...] them, as well as venison, for their ordinary food.

RIVERS AND LAKES.] No country can boast a greater variety of [...] large rivers than Germany. At their head stands the Danube or [...] ­naw, so called from the swiftness, of the current, and which some [...] tend to be naturally the finest river in the world. From Vien [...] Belgrade in Hungary, it is so broad, that in the wars between [...] Turks and Christians, ships of war have been engaged on it; [...] conveniency for carriage to all the countries through which it [...] inconceivable. The Danube, however, contains a vast number of [...] ­aracts and whirlpools; its stream is rapid, and its course, [...] reckoning turnings and windings, is computed to be 1620 miles. [...] other principal rivers are the Rhine, Elbe, Oder, Weser and Mos [...].

The chief lakes of Germany, not to mention many inferior once, [...] those of Constance and Bregentz. Besides these are the Chiemse [...] the lake of Bavaria; and the Zirnitzer-see in the duchy of Car [...] whose waters often run off and return again in an extraordinary [...] ­ner.

Besides those lakes and rivers, in some of which are found [...] Germany contains large noxious bodies of standing water, which [...] next to pestilential, and afflict the neighbouring natives with [...] [...] ­plorable disorders.

PRODUCTIONS MINERAL, VEGETABLE, AND ANIMAL, COMMERCE, &c.} From the advan [...] situation and the [...] tent of Germany, from the various appearance of the soil, the [...] of its mountains, forests, and large rivers, we must naturally [...] we actually find an extraordinary variety and vast plenty of us [...] ­ductions. The northern, and chiefly the north-east parts, furn [...] sorts of peltry, as skins of foxes, bears, wolves, squirrels, lyn [...] cats, boars, &c. the southern parts produce excellent wines [...] [...] the middle provinces great plenty of corn, cattle, and minerals. [...] have been explored in Germany from the earliest times, and [...] [Page 193] derived from them were in a great measure the cause and the support of the former celebrated trade of the Venetians. The Hartz-mountains in Lower Saxony contain gold, silver, copper, lead, iron, zinc, cobalt, vitriol, sulphur, and other minerals: gold, however, is found only in the lower Hartz, to the amount of some hundred ducats; silver is coin­ed annually in the upper Hartz, to the amount of 600,000, of accord­ing to other statements, 655,000 dollars: And the value of all the min­erals of the Hartz amounts to near double that sum. The mountains of Upper Saxony are still richer; they have yielded not less than [...]4,000 lb. of silver annually; and the famous Saxon cobalt, chiefly [...]ed in making the blue colour called smalte, is reckoned to be nearly equal in value to the above quantity of silver. The quantity of iron and lead Germany supplies is extraordinary: The iron-works and founderies of Smalkalden, Iserlohe, Herzberg, Solingen, &c. are very [...]tle inferior to the iron-works in England. Hesse Cassel, as well as Hesse Darmstadt, the principalities of Nassau, and some neighbouring provinces, abound in copper, iron and lead. The palatinate is re­markable for its minerals, chiefly for its quick-silver, of which Deux­ [...]ts alone produces 50,000 lb. a year. The minerals of the provin­ces belonging to the house of Austria, the value of which is remarkably [...], and those of the Prussian provinces, neither of which are here spoken of, will be noticed hereafter, when we treat of Prussia and Aus­tria. Salt is found in Germany in such abundance and so great purity, as is found in few other countries. The salt-works of Salzbourg, in the circle of Bavaria, are immense; the Durnberg yields annually 750,000lb. Not to mention those of Swabia, of Allendorf, Naunheim, Hall, in Upper Saxony, Creuznach, Schoenebeck, which are per­haps the greatest salt-works that either now are or ever were; but we must not omit to take notice, that the best or purest salt we know of is that of Lunenburg, in the Hanoverian dominions. The articles of less use, as for instance, topazes, garnets, emeralds, crystals, do not de­serve any particular mention; but the fine clay of Upper and Lower Saxony, of Hesse, and the Palatinate, forms a very considerable object of commerce, as it is used in making the porcelaine of Dresden, Berlin, F [...]rstenberg, Frankenthal, &c. superior to all other sorts of porcelaine, except that of Japan and China. Pitcoal is found in Silesia, in the circles of Burgundy, and of Westphalia, and in Hesse. The small bishopric of Liege exports annually to the value of near 100,000 due­ [...]ts. In other parts plenty of fuel is supplied by the forests. The mineral waters of Germany are in high repute, and prove considerable articles of trade. The electorate of Treves gains 80,000 florins an­nually by that of Selt [...]e; the prince of Waldeck 40,000 dollars by that of Pyrmont. The Spa waters produce a revenue of 60,000 dol­lars; and those of Aix la Chapelle, Wisbaden, the Schlangenbath, [...], [...]berg, &c. sums proportioned to their reputation and their [...] effects. There are in Germany exceedingly fine materials for [...]; the mountains near the Rhine furnish the best basaltes, and [...] strong and useful sorts of lava, the greatest part of which is sold [...] Dutch: the mountains of Saxony and Franconia contain excel­lent [...]ite, porphyry, and marble quarries.

Notwithstanding the northerly situation of Germany, vines prospe [...] [...] the greatest part of it, viz. in both the circles of the Rhine, Swabia, [Page 194] Franconia, Upper Saxony, Westphalia, Bohemia, and [...]. Among the German wines, those of the Rhine and Swabia claim the first rank; the best sorts are that of Hochheim, commonly called [...] hock; that of Johannesberg, Rudesheim, and Bacharach, &c. Excel­lent fruits are found in great abundance in the southern provinces; thus, for instance, Lankheim, a small village in the circle of the R [...], sells sometimes in one year, dried plumbs to the amount of 50,000 [...] ­ins. The apples of Leipzick, are a considerable article of exporta­tion. Tobacco is cultivated in large quantities: The Palatinate, ex­ports to the amount of 800,000 florins annually Baireuth 50, [...] cwt. of the same article. The richest corn countries are both [...] ­ies, Holstein, Mecklenburg, Bavaria, and Pomerania: Flax and [...] are produced chiefly in Lower Saxony, Westphalia, and Silefia. [...] great value of this branch of trade is too well known to need any par­ticular mention. The greatest trading towns of Germany are at [...] ­ent, in general, the Imperial cities, Hamburg, Lubeck, [...], Frankfurt on the Main: none of them a seaport town; yet they [...] situated on large rivers, and the three first not far from the sea. Formerly these three cities commanded, in a greater measure, the tra [...] all Europe, while they were at the head of the famous Han [...] league; and though their present power and opulence is no [...] equal to their influence in former ages, they still may be consid [...] [...] the greatest factories or emporiums of Germany. A considerable [...] land trade is carried on at the fairs of Leipzic, Brunswic Frankfurt [...] the Oder, and Frankfurt on the Main. As to the national industry, we observe, that there are scarce any articles of trade, conven [...] and luxury not manufactured in Germany. If the Germans are infe­rior to the English in the manufactures of cloth, hardware, and in the articles of luxury, the causes must perhaps entirely be looked for [...] the political situation of this country: The great number of [...] the variety of the forms of government, the different interests and [...] ­tual jealousy of the petty states, are great checks on the commerce and prosperity of the whole. The great number of courts require [...] sums of money, which might be appropriated to useful purposes, and the encouragement of industry; they keep up a predilection [...] court and military life among the nobility and gentry, and a [...] for the employments of a tradesman and a manufacturer. The [...] of surrounding neighbours can greatly confine the market of a [...] country, whose industry is greater than theirs; and the difficulty of obtaining their concurrence in measures of general utility, is frequent­ly the cause why there are so few canals and good roads, to [...] travelling and inland trade.

CITIES, TOWNS, [...]ORTS, AND OTHER EDIFICES, PUBLIC AND PRIVATE; with occasional esti­mates of REVENUES AND POPULATION.} This is a [...] ­pious head in all countries, [...] more particularly so in Germany, on account of the numerous inde­pendent states it contains. The reader therefore must be [...] with the mention of the most capital places, and their peculiarities.

Though Berlin is accounted the capital of all his Prussian [...] dominions, and exhibits perhaps the most illustrious example of [...] ­den improvement that this age can boast of; yet during the late [...] it was found a place of no strength, and fell twice, almost with [...] [Page 195] [...]tance, into the hands of the Austrians, who, had it not been for the politeness of their generals, and their love of the fine arts, which al­ways preserves mankind from barbarity and inhumanity, would have levelled it to the ground.

Berlin lies on the river Spree, and, besides a royal palace, has many other superb palaces; it contains fourteen Lutheran, and eleven Cal­vinist churches, besides a Roman Catholic one. Its streets and squares are spacious, and built in a very regular manner. But the houses, though neat without, are ill-furnished and ill-finished within, very indifferently provided with inhabitants. The king's palace here, and that of prince Henry, are very magnificent buildings. The ope­ [...]-house is also a beautiful structure: And the arsenal, which is hand­somely built in the form of a square, contains arms for 200,000 men. There are sundry manufactures in Berlin, and several schools, libraries, and charitable foundations. The number of its inhabitants, accord­ing to Busching, in 1755, was 126,661, including the garrison. In the same year, and according to the same author, there were no fewer than 443 silk-looms, 149 of half-silks, 2858 for woollen stuffs, 453 for cotton, 248 for linen, 454 for lace-work, 39 frames for silk stockings, and 310 for worsted ones. They have here manufactures of tapestry, gold and silver lace, and mirrors.

The electorate of Saxony is, by nature, the richest country in Ger­many, if not in Europe: It contains 210 walled towns, 61 market­towns, and about 3000 villages, according to the latest accounts of the Germans themselves; and the revenue, estimating each rix-dollar at four shillings and six-pence, amounts to 1,350,000l. This sum is so moderate, when compared to the richness of the soil, which, accord­ing to Busching, produces even diamonds, and almost all the precious stones to be found in the East-Indies and elsewhere, and the variety of splendid manufactures, that the Saxon princes must have been the most moderate and patriotic of any in Germany.

We can say little more of Dresden, the elector of Saxony's capital, that can be said of all fine cities, that its fortifications, palaces, pub­lick buildings, churches, and charitable foundations, and, above all, its suburbs, are magnificent beyond all expression; that it is beautifully situated on both sides the Elbe; and that it is the school of Germa­ny for statuary, painting, enamelling, and carving; not to mention its [...]rors, and founderies for bells and cannon, and its foreign commerce carried on by means of the Elbe. The inhabitants of Dresden, by the [...]est accounts, amount to 110,000.

The city of Leipsic in Upper Saxony, 46 miles distant from Dres­den, is situated in a pleasant and fertile plain on the Pleisse, and the in­habitants are said to amount to about 40,000. There are also large and well-built suburbs, with handsome gardens. Between these sub­urbs and the town is a fine walk of lime-trees, which was laid out in the year 1702, and encompasses the city. Mulberry-trees are also planted in the town-ditches; but the fortifications seem rather calcula­ted for the use of the inhabitants to walk on, than for defence. The streets are clean, commodious, and agreeable, and are lighted in the [...]ight with seven hundred lamps. They reckon 436 merchants houses, and 192 manufactures of different articles, as brocades, paper, cards, &c. Leipsic has long been distinguished for the liberty of conscience [Page 196] allowed here to persons of different sentiments is religious matters [...]. Here is an university, which is still very considerable, with six churches for the Lutherans, theirs being the established religion, one for the Calvinists, and a chapel in the castle for those of the Romish church. The university-library consists of about 26,000 volumes, 6000 of which are folios. Here is also a library for the magistrates, which consists of about 36,000 volumes, and near 2000 manuscripts, and contains [...] of urns, antiques, and medals, with many curiosities of art and [...]. The Exchange is an elegant building.

The city of Hanover, the capital of that electorate, stands on the river Leine, and is neat, thriving, and agreeable city. It contain [...] about twelve hundred houses, among which there is an electoral [...] ace. It carries on some manufactures; and in its neighbourhood [...] the palace and elegant gardens of Herenhausen. The dominions of the electorate of Hanover contain about seven hundred and fifty thou­sand people, who live in fifty-eight cities, and sixty market-towns, be­sides villages. The city and suburbs of Bremen, belonging by pur­chase to the said elector, contain about fifty thousand inhabitants, [...] have a considerable trade by the Weser. The other towns belonging to this electorate have trade and manufactures; but in general, it [...] be remarked, that the electorate has suffered greatly by the access [...] of the Hanover family to the crown of Great-Britain. Osnaburg [...] chief city of the bishopric of Osnaburg, lying between the rivers We­ser and Ems, has been long famous all over Europe for the manufacture known by the name of the dutchy, and for the manufacture of the [...] Westphalia h [...]ms. The whole revenue of the bishopric amounts [...] about 30,000l.

Breslau, the capital of Silesia, which formerly belonged to the king­dom of Bohemia, lies on the river Oder, and is a fine city, where a [...] ­sects of Christians and Jews are tolerated, but the magistracy is Luthe­ran. Since Silesia fell under the Prussian dominion, its trade is greatly improved, being very inconsiderable before. The manufactures of Silesia, which principally centre at Breslau, are numerous. The reve­nue of the whole is by some said to produce for his Prussian majesty, near a million sterling: but this sum seems to be exaggerated; if, as other authors of good note write, it never brought in to the house of Austria above [...]00,000l. yearly.

Frankfurt is situated in an healthful, fertile, and delightful country along the Meine, by which it is divided into two parts, distinguished by the names of Frankfurt and Saxenhausen. The former of these, being the largest, is divided into twelve wards, and the latter into [...] and both are computed to contain about three thousand houses.—Frankfurt is the usual place of the election and coronation of the king of the Romans, and is also a free and imperial city. It is of a circular form, without any suburbs; but the streets are generally narrow, and the houses are mostly built of timber and pla [...]ster, and covered with state; though there are some handsome private structures, of a kind [...] ­red marble, that deserve the name of palaces; as the buildings called the Compestel and Fronhof, the Triershof, the Cullenhof, the [...] house, an august edifice, situated near the bridge over the Maine, [...] Hesse-Darmstadthof, the palace of the prince de la Tours, and [...] [Page 197] houses of the counts of Solms, Schauenburg, and Schonborn; and there are three principal squares.

GOVERNMENT, LAWS, COURTS, &c.] The German empire, which, till the year 843, was connected with France, now forms a state by itself, or may be considered as a combination of upwards of three hundred sove­reignties, independent of each other, but composing one political body [...] an elective head, called the emperor of Germany, or the Ro­man emperor. Otho the Great, who possessed several Italian provinc­es, formerly parts of the western empire, left to his successors the title of Roman emperor inseparably annexed to the kingdom of Germany; and in consequence of the ancient respect entertained for the Roman [...], all the other sovereigns have allowed the emperor the first rank [...] the European monarchs. Eight princes of the empire, called electors, have the right of electing the emperor. By a fundamental law, known under the name of the Golden Bull, the number of elec­tors was limited to only seven; two new electoral dignities have been [...] afterwards, one of which is extinct since the year 1777. The electors are divided into ecclesiastical and temporal: The ecclesiastical electors are the following, 1. The archbishop of Mentz, great chancel­lor of the empire, and director of the electoral college. In conse­quence of this presidency, he has the prerogative, on a vacancy of the [...]perial throne, to give notice of the death of the emperor to the states of the empire, to convoke the diet during the interregnum, and to proclaim the new-elected successor. 2. The archbishop of Treves, [...] chancellor of France and Arelat, a dignity, which, since the sep­aration of France from the empire is merely nominal. 3. The arch­bishop of Cologne, great chancellor of Italy, a mere title also. The temporal electors are, 4. The king or elector of Bohemia, cup-bearer of the emperor. 5. The elector of the Palatinate and of Bavaria. great steward. 6. The elector of Saxony, great-marshal. 7. The elector of [...]enburg, great-chamberlain. 8. The elector of Brunswic (Han­over) arch-treasurer of the empire.

As soon as an emperor is elected, he is obliged to confirm by oath the capitulation he has signed, and which is proposed to him by the elec­tors: He engages likewise by oath to protect the Roman Catholic re­ligion and the Holy See. It is not absolutely necessary that the em­peror should be a Roman Catholic, though hitherto no Protestant has been seated on the Imperial throne. The prerogatives the empe­ror acquires by his accession to that dignity, and which are called his asser [...]ata, are chiefly the following: He is the supreme lord [...] of the Roman empire, of whom the princes are supposed to [...] their dominions in fee: He has the power of calling together the [...], over which he presides in person, or by his commissary, and of [...]ifying their resolutions by his confirmation. He is the supreme judge, in whose name justice is administered in the high courts of the empire: He can, however, exempt the subordinate states from the ju­risdiction of these tribunals, by granting them the privilege de non ap­p [...]. He is the fountain of honour, and has the power of confer­ring titles of nobility, such as baron, count, prince, duke, &c. he claims [...] right of establishing post-offices all over the empire; this right, [...]ever, is subject to some limitations: he grants charters to the uni­versities, [Page 198] and confers academical degrees. He is not allowed to raise any taxes, nor to begin an offensive war, or to conclude a peace, [...] to alter any law of the empire without the consent of the diet, which may be considered as the supreme power of the German empire. The revenues of the emperor are at present reduced to a very trifling [...] they arise chiefly from the contributions of some Imperial towns, and amount to little more than 20,000 florins. In times of war, or [...] unusual emergencies, the diet allows the emperor extraordinary [...] or supplies, called Roman months, and valued at 50,000 florins [...]. The diet is composed of the emperor and of the immediate states of the empire; the latter are those individuals or societies which [...] the supreme legislative and executive power of the confederation, [...] the right of voting in this assembly. Since the year 1663, the [...] which used to assemble formerly at unequal intervals of time, [...] been held, without interruption, to the present day. The diet [...] ­cises all the acts of sovereignty, as far as they concern the inter [...] the whole confederate political body; it levies taxes, it gives la [...], it makes war, and concludes treaties of peace by which the whole em­pire is bound. It has the power of conferring this right of parti [...] ­tion in the government, or of voting at the diet; and can take it [...] by way of punishment, from such members as have violated the pub­lic peace. In consequence of the difference of religion prevailing [...] the German empire, the states are divided into the Catholic and [...] ­estant bodies ( Corpus Catholicorum & Corpus Evangelicorum.) [...] respect to rank and privilege, they are divided into three college. The electoral college; that of the princes, including the immed [...] prelates and counts; and the college of the Imperial cities. Each of these colleges holds separate deliberations, in which the maj [...]ty of votes decides. That of the electors is under the direction of [...] [...] ­tor of Mentz. The college of the princes is subdivided into the ec­clesiastical and temporal bench: On the first are seated those archbish­ops who are not electors, the grand masters of the Teutonic order, and of the order of St. John, the archduke of Austria, and the duke of Burgundy, the bishops and the prelates; the latter have no pers [...] but two collective votes. The Protestant bishop of Lubeck, and the bishop of Osnaburg, when a Protestant, have a separate bench to them­selves. On the secular bench, the first seats are held by those princ [...] are related to the electors; next to them are seated the ancient [...] ­ly families; next, those families, who, in later times have been raised [...] the princely dignity; and last of all, the independent counts of the empire, who have only four collective votes. The votes of the eccle­siastical bench amount to 35, those of the temporal to 65. The [...] of the imperial cities is divided into two benches, that of the cir [...] [...] the Rhine, and that of the circle of Swabia; the first has 14, the [...] 37 votes. Th [...]se propositions, which are to pass into a law of [...] ­pire, must be agreed to by the three colleges; when this is done, [...] are called Resolutions of the empire. The resolutions must be pr [...] ­ed to the emperor for his confirmation, which he has it in his [...] give or to refuse; when the confirmation is obtained, the [...] are called Acts or Statutes of the empire, and acquire the force of [...]. At the conclusion of every diet, a collection is made of all the acts [...] during the sessions, called the Recess of the Empire.

[Page 199] The fundamental laws, or those which settle the constitution of the empire, are, [...] Such acts of the diet as are of a public nature. The [...] remarkable among them are the following: 1. The golden bull ( [...] called on account of the great gold seal of the emperor affixed to it) which was published at the diet of Nurnberg in the year 1356, and in the reign of Charles IV. It settles every thing relating to the election [...] coronation of the emperor, and the rights of the electors. The Latin original is preserved at Frankfurt on the Maine. 2. The public [...]; a collection of regulations for the preservation of the peace between the members of the empire. It was calculated [...] put a period [...] the feudal dissensions which harrassed Germany in the middle ages. This law was promulgated under Maximilian I. in the year 1495— [...]. The convention of Passau in 1552, and the peace of religion in 1555, by which the Protestant religion as well as the Roman Catholic are acknowledged to be established in the empire. 4. The last recess of the empire of 1654, containing several public acts, which finally settle several points incompletely arranged in the Westphalian peace.— [...]. The capitulation of the emperor, by which the emperor engages [...]self to govern according to the laws of the empire, and under the conditions and restrictions imposed on him by the electors, who have [...] valuable right to check every stretch of imperial power, or to re­ [...]s grievances crept in, by imposing new conditions at the beginning of a new reign. III. The peace of Westphalia, concluded in the year 16 [...]9, which serves for the basis of all subsequent treaties of peace, and, in a great measure, for the foundation of the present political sys­tem of Europe. This famous act determines likewise, with great pre­ [...], the civil, political, and religious rights of each individual state in [...]many.

There are two supreme courts of judicature, which have a concur­ring jurisdiction in the Roman or German empire. 1. The Imperial Chamber, established in 1495, and kept at pre [...]t Wetzlar, an Impe­rial city in the circle of the Upper Rhine. The emperor has the right of nominating the first judge and the two presidents of this court: 27 [...]ssors or counsellors are nominated by the states of the empire.—2. The Aulic Council, depending entirely on the emperor, is established as Vienna, the imperial residence. It consists of a president and 18 counsellors, and is divided into a noble and a learned bench. Seven of the members of this council are Protestants. The judges of the Imperial Chamber receive their salaries from the states of the empire, who have appropriated to their maintenance a particular tax, which amounts annually to about 90,000 florins. The judges of the Aulic Council are paid by the emperor. In all cases where the statute or fundamental laws of the empire are defective, these two courts adopt the regulations of the Roman law, which is in general introduced into the German courts of justice, except where it is limited or superseded by the particular statutes of each state. To both courts appeals may [...] made from the decisions of the courts of justice, or of the sovereigns of the German states. In criminal cases, in matters of religion, and [...] pecuniary lawsuits, in which the contested property does not ex­ [...]ed the sum of 400 rix dollars, the decision of the territorial courts [...] of the sovereign is final. In these cases, however, the party who thinks himself aggrieved by a sentence, is allowed to submit the decis­ion, [Page 200] given by the judges of his own country, to the examination of the juridical faculty of one or more impartial German universities, by which the decree may be confirmed or reversed. In the [...] of the electors and other princes, who are exempted from [...] the supreme courts of the empire, courts of appeal are established, [...] which the decrees of the courts of justice, especially in causes between the sovereign and the subject, may be revised, and if excepti [...], may be set aside.

The states of the empire, considered in their separate capacity, enjoy sovereign power in their respective dominions, limited only by the laws before-mentioned, and the jurisdiction of the Imperial [...], from which, however, the chief among them are exempted. The constitution of the different states is very different; most of them on governed by single persons, as the electorates, principalities, [...], &c. and some have a republican form of government, as the [...] cities. As to the exercise of power, the sovereigns are limited by the states of their countries, who must give their consent to taxes, and to new laws: and who may appeal to the high courts of the empire, [...] to the courts of appeal within their own country, in case of any dif­ference between them and the sovereign. In extreme cases, the [...] may lay their complaints before the diet. This mode of redressing grievances, provided by the constitution of the German empire, at a time when no standing armies were yet kept, is, it must be owned, of little avail in states where military power is preponderant; yet it is a very effectual check on the tyranny of petty sovereigns. The [...] possess some considerable political advantages, besides the right of [...] ­ing the emperor; their concurrence and consent is necessary to the emperor, whenever he declares war or concludes treaties; they [...] a particular confederation among themselves, called the Electoral [...] they claim the honours allowed to kings, and their ambassadors in for­eign courts are in possession of the next rank after those of king [...].—With regard to foreign countries, each independant German sovereign has the right of entering into treaties, or engaging in wars with them, provided it does not affect the peace of the whole empire, or of [...] other state of it. The government of most of the Imperial cities is a mixture of Democracy and Aristocracy. The best governed among them are Hamburg, Lubeck, and Frankfurt: in others, especially in Nurnberg, a rigorous oligarchy prevails.

The power of the two greatest potentates of Germany, whose reli­gious and political interests are opposite, is at present pretty equally balanced. For though Austria is certainly in itself superior in strength to Prussia, yet the combination of the latter, with the mightiest princes in Germany, gives it a sufficient weight to counterbalance that supe­riority. It may not be improper to observe, that the connexions of some parts of Germany with foreign countries, under one sovereign, though they seemed to promise an accession of power to these provin­ces, have commonly proved disadvantageous, involving Germany i [...] wars and calamities which would otherwise not have reached [...]. [...], for instance, the connexion of Hungary with Austria has been the cause of several bloody wars with the Turks; that of Poland [...] Saxony, and that of England with Hanover, have proved no [...] judicial to Germany, than to the countries thus united with it.

[Page 201] ARMY OF THE EMPIRE.] There is, properly speaking, no standing army of the empire; but in time of war the states of the empire must furnish their respective quotas of soldiers, according to an agreement made in the year 1681. At present the army of the empire, when complete, must amount to 28,000 infantry and 12,000 cavalry. The quotas for the different circles are regulated as follows:

  Infantry. Cavalry.
Circle of Austria 5507 2521
—Burgundy 2707 1321
—Bavaria 1494 800
—Franconia 1902 980
—Swabia 2707 1321
—Lower Rhine 2707 600
—Upper Rhine 2853 491
—Westphalia 2707 1321
—Upper Saxony 2707 1321
—Lower Saxony 2707 1321
Total 27,998 11,997

In case 1½ million of florins should be necessary to be raised for the war and for the army of the empire, the shares of this sum stand thus:

  Florins. Krcutzer.
Circles of Austria 306,390 20
—Burgundy 156,360 15
—Bavaria 91,261 5
—Franconia 113,481 25
—Swabia 156,360 15
—Lower Rhine 105,654 5
—Upper Rhine 101,411 30
—Westphalia 156,360 15
—Upper Saxony 156,360 15
—Lower Saxony 156,360 15
Total 1,499,999 40

RELIGION.] Since the year 1555, the three following denomina­tions of Christians are the established religions of the empire: The Roman Catholic, the Lutheran, and Calvinist, generally called the re­formed religon. The first prevails in the South of Germany, the Lu­theran in the North, and the reformed near the Rhine. In the sub­sequent civil wars, of which religious bigotry was the principal cause, the rights of these rival religions, as established by the religious peace of 1555, had undergone great alterations whenever the provinces had changed masters; and the confusion arising from the claims of the op­pressed parties, and from the encroachments of the victorious, was be­come extreme. It was at length settled by the peace of Westphalia, that the religion of the different states should remain as it had been in the year 1624, which is, on that account, called the definitive year, Annus normalis. According to this agreement, the sovereign is oblig­ed to leave each of these religions, established, or tolerated, or exclud­ed, as they were at that period; yet the right of correcting abuses in the public worship, was reserved to him. The Jews are tolerated [Page 202] throughout the empire. There are likewise in the empire [...] of all the denominations mentioned under the article of the Eur [...] religions. The Roman Catholic church acknowledges the supre [...] of the pope; and in consequence of an agreement between the [...] church and the Holy See, the latter acquired the right of [...] firming all the prelates of the empire. Their superior clergy [...] of eight archbishops, forty bishops, and many abbots; some of which as well as most of the archbishops and bishops, are sovereign [...]. There is a very great number of Roman Catholic convents, and seve [...] commanderies of the knights of the Teutonic Order, as well as of the Order of St. John. The grand masters of these Orders must be [...] Catholic noblemen; the residence of the first is Mergentheim, in [...] ­conia; that of the latter is Heitersheim, in the circle of the Upper Rhine.

The Protestant clergy is governed by assemblies, called Consi [...] under the control of the sovereign of each state. It is compos [...] superintendents general, who are commonly members of the Consi [...] superintendents or inspectors, and ministers of the parishes. All [...] Roman Catholics, or the Corpus Catholicorum, is under the dire [...] of the elector of Mentz: the Corpus Evangelicorum, or the Protes [...] under the direction of the elector of Saxony. These directors [...] [...] the concerns of religion at the diet. To balance the rights and in­fluence of the Catholics and Protestants, of which the former [...] majority of votes on the diet, the states of either party have the [...] of succession (jus eundi in partes.) In consequence of this right, [...] Protestants or Catholics, if they are afraid that their interests, as a [...] might be affected by a majority of votes, may come to a separate [...] l [...]tion, agreed upon amongst themselves, which cannot be anni [...] by the ordinary manner of voting; and by this mean [...] they can [...] any attack upon their religious and political rights.

GENERAL REMARKS, RESPECTING THE MILITARY, POLITICS, AND LITERATURE OF GERMANY.} The German empire, [...] considered as one single power or state, at the head of which the em­peror stands, is of no great political consequence in Europe, bec [...] from the inequality and weak connexion of its parts, and the different nature of their government, from the insignificancy of its ill-comp [...]d army, and above all, from the different views and interests of its [...] ­ters, it is next to impossible its force should be united, compact, and uniform. There are, however, in this empire, two potentates [...] to tank among the first deciding powers of Europe; and the intri [...] power of Germany, in some sense, is superior to that of any Europ [...] country. The number of soldiers in the service of all the [...] princes amount to 500,000, even after deducting from the [...] army 45,000 men for the provinces not belonging to the German em­pire, and 76,000 men of the Austrian army, for the kingdom of [...] ­gary and the Italian dominions of Austria. The actual [...] [...] German states (exclusive of the kingdom of Prussia, and the [...] dominions not belonging to Germany) amount annually to [...] [...] millions of dollars, or near 18,000,000l. sterling. Considering [...] cheapness of victuals and labour in most parts of Germany, this [...] [...] astonishing; yet the effects of so much national wealth is [...] [...], than it would be in France or England, where [...] [...] [Page 203] metropolis would collect it, as it were, into a focus, and assist its circu­lation throughout the provinces. Germany neither has, or can have, properly speaking, a capital, while it is divided among so great a num­ber of sovereigns.

The Germans can boast of a greater number of useful discoveries and inventions in arts and sciences, than any other European nation. They have the honour of discovering the Art of Printing about the year 1450. It would be easy to enumerate nearly one hundred of their inventions without filling up the lift with mere improvements in ma­chines and mechanical arts. Improvements of this sort are greatly fa­ [...]ted by a concurrence of favourable circumstances, such as an advan­tageous situation for commerce, long and uninterrupted peace, great and easy influx of wealth, and the concomitant increase of luxury. An open and extensive market for the productions of manufacturing industry, and the frequent calls of luxury for gratifications of new-imagined wants, multiply the arts; the latter assist each other in perfecting their respective instruments, and afford many opportunities for ingenious [...]binations of mechanism. In a country, whose commerce is con­fined by natural and political limits, where the reward of genius and industry is not always opulence and splendour, the national character [...] with chance alone the claim to a number of important inven­tions, some of which have been productive of the principal revolutions of modern life. Literature and the sciences are arrived in Germany at a very high degree of eminence, both with respect to universality and solidity. Within these fifty years their improvements have been rapid and astonishing. The German language has been greatly culti­vated and enriched with many excellent compositions in all branches of polite and useful literature, which have been marked with the ap­plause, and translated into the languages of neighbouring nations.—Many branches of useful knowledge, hitherto confined to particular classes of men, and difficult to be acquired, have been reduced to a scientific form in Germany; they form indispensible parts of polite education, and are publicly taught in the universities. The theory of trades and mechanical arts, the principles of private and public oecon­omy, of internal administration, and the science of finances; the knowledge of the political situation, resources and wealth of every state, have been added to the established list of academical sciences, and they employ the talents of a great number of writers, under the name of Technology, Oeconomy, Science of Finances, and Statistic.

Many other sciences have undergone considerable changes. Their principles have been more thoroughly investigated, their proper limits assigned; they have received great improvements with respect to me­thodical arrangement and practical utility. The science of education has experienced a total and most advantageous revolution. In no other country this important science is so universally and so success­fully attended to; nor can any country boast of so many institutions of education. Upwards of 50 writers, possessed of laudable zeal and great abilities, assisted by practical experience, and encouraged by some of the wisest and most patriotic sovereigns, have for some years past applied their talents entirely to the improvement of the method of instructing, and to the establishing of institutions, calculated to pro­mote the happiness of future generations. The beneficial labours of [Page 204] these men extend to the lowest ranks of society. Several [...] schools are established, in which this numerous and valuable [...] people are instructed in religion, in the duties of their station, and [...] proper use of their reason; and where they are brought up in [...] of industry, which attach them to their situation in life. The [...] plan these friends of mankind pursue, is to render education, so [...] neglected by statesmen, an essential part of internal polities. [...] inculcate the necessity of bestowing no less pains on the formation [...] active habits, the early impression of religious and moral princip [...] the developement of the bodily and mental powers, by the cas [...] [...] most natural steps, the preservation of the health of young people, [...] on their progress in classical and scientifical knowledge.

The progress of the Germans in natural philosophy and mathe [...] is better known abroad, than their progress in metaphysics and div [...] ­ty, which has, at least, kept pace with the former. The general [...] for literature and scientific inquiry, which is the bent the genius and the industry of the nation has taken, in consequence of the singu [...] political constitution, has diffused a vast mass of knowledge through Germany, especially through its northern parts. In these provin [...] the number of literati is exceedingly great; they may be said to [...] a particular republic of letters, distinguished by liberality of manners by a considerable degree of independence, and a very perceptible in­fluence on the government of the states, by the direction of the public opinion. The number of readers in the German empire, and in the neighbouring countries, especially in the north of Europe, where the German language has an extensive circulation, is large enough to [...] ­courage the publication of no less than 5000 annual literary produc­tions, of which two-thirds are original performances, and one-third translations from other languages. It is true, this rage of writing [...] of reading has some disadvantages; among which, the publication [...] a great number of wretched books is one of the most conspicuous.—Yet these are either calculated for a particular public, or they are [...] buried in the oblivion they deserve; while, on the other side, the beneficial consequences resulting from this universal application to literature are greatly preponderant. Besides the obvious advantages of destroying ignorance and prejudice, of spreading liberality of senti­ment, it keeps up the connexion, otherwise not sufficiently binding between the different parts of the empire, it excites a spirit of emula­tion, it inspires a salutary dread to sovereigns to commit such actions as might draw public censure upon them, it acquaints the different classes of men with their rights, and gives energy to the voice and the complaints of the public. The sciences in Germany appear in no un­important point of view, when considered as the means of affording a comfortable subsistence to an astonishing number of people employed in teaching, or in writing on the sciences, and to many thousands of paper-manufacturers, printers, and booksellers. The book-trade is [...] where equally important; at the Leipzick fair books are sold and ex­changed to the value of several hundred thousand dollars.

There are [...]8 universities in Germany, of which 19 belong to the Protestants, and 17 to the Roman Catholics; though the latter ought to have many more, considering the proportion of their numbers [...] [Page 205] those of the Protestants, which is as two to one. Of all the German institutions of education, the universities are still the most faulty, con­sidering the wants of our age; yet most of the Protestant universities in Germany are the least exceptionable institutions of that kind in Eu­rope. The number of literary and scientifical societies, public libra­ries, academies of arts, collections of pictures, military academies, &c. is greater in Germany than in any other country.

HISTORY.] Charlemagne, or Charles the Great, king of France, was the founder of the German Empire in A. D. 800. Leopold II. late Emperor died Feb. 1792. The German Diet was to meet the 4th of July following for the Election of a Successor to the crown.

Those who wish to acquaint themselves with the history of the Ger­man Empire are referred to the Universal History. See also Ency­clopedia, Brittannica, Article, Germany—Publishing in Philadelphia, by Mr. Thomas Dobson.

MONARCHY OF PRUSSIA.

BOUNDARIES AND NAME.] THIS country is bounded on the north by part of Samogitia; south, by Poland proper and Masovia; east by part of Lithuania; west by Polish Prussia and the Baltics.

The name of Prussia is probably derived from the Borussi, the an­cient inhabitants of the country.

The following Table from Zimmerman will furnish the reader with the best information concerning the Divisions, Extent, Popula­tion, and Towns of the Prussian Monarchy.

[Page 206]

TABLE
As the Countries belonging to this Monarchy are scattered, and without any natural Connexion, one cannot ascertain very accurately their boundaries. The latitude of Prussia goes to 55° lat. N. Square Miles. Population. Population for every square mile. Chief Towns and Number of Inhabitants.
DIVISIONS.       570 Towns.
A. Countries which are independent of the German Empire 57,600 but in another place Mr. Hertzberg reckons 64,000 6,000,000 104 Capital Berlin 145,136
B. Countries which are dependent 6,400,000 100  
A. 1. Kingdom of Prussia, viz. 22,144 1,500,000 68 Towns 69—Villages 1,260
East Prussia 12,048 940,000 78 Königsberg * 54,000 Memel 5,765
West Prussia 10,096 560,000 55 (44 Towns.) Elbing 14,400 Graudenz 5,200
2. Duchies of Silesia and Glatz 10,240 1,582,000 154 (161 Towns.) Breslau 51,000
        Glatz 4,250
        Brig 5,000
        Schweidenitz 6,250
        Liegnitz 4,810
3. Principalities of Neufchatel and Valengin 240 40,500 169 ( [...] Towns.) Neufchatel 6,000

[Page 207]

DIVISIONS. Square Miles. Population. Population for every square mile. Chief Towns and Number of Inhabitants.
B. 1. The March of Bra [...]denburg, viz. 10,624 1,057,000 99  
2. The Electoral March 7,10 [...] 795,000 112 Berlin, 6300 houses
  Potsdam 20,000
Spandau 3,800
Brandenburg 9,200
Frankf. on the Oder 10,000
Salzwedel 4,150
Stendal 4,300
b. The New March 3,520 262,000 74 Cüstrin 4,400
  Landsberg 6,000
2. Duchy of Pomerania. 8,112 465,000 132 (39 Towns.)Stettin 15,485
  Colberg 4,090
Anklam 3,185
3. Duchy of Magdeburg. 1,664 280,000 168 Magdeburg 26,300 and 10,000 G.
  Halle 15,202 and 5,000 G.
4. Principality of Halberstadt. 672 132,000 196 Halberstadt 11,200 M.
5. The possess. in Westphalia, viz. 3,904 590,000 151

[Page 208]

DIVISIONS. Square Miles. Population. Population for every square mile. Chief Towns and Number of Inhabitants.
1. Duchy of Minden and County of Ravensberg 816 130,000 159 (6 Towns.) Minden 5,178
  Bielefeld 2,900
2. Counties of Fecklenburg and Lingon 208 45,000 216 (4 Towns.) Fecklenburg Lingen 1,800
3. Principality of Ostfriesland or Frisra 864 103,000 119 (4 Towns.) Emden 7,900M.
4. Duchy of Cleve 640 95,000 149 (24 Towns.) Cleve 5,300
  Wesel 4,600
Duisburg
5. County of Mark 896 125,000 140 Soerst 5,020
  Lippstadt
Iserlohe 5,000
6. Principal. of Moeurs 96 17,000 177 Moeurs
  C [...]es [...]ld 5, [...]00
7. [...] [...] [...] [...] [...]

[Page 209] WEALTH, COMMERCE, &c.] The different provinces of the Prus­sian monarchy are by no means equal to one another with respect to fertility and the articles of their produce. The kingdom of Prussia, being the most northern part of the monarchy, is rich in corn, timber, ma [...]nagrass, flax and peltry of all sorts, and exports these articles.—Amber is exported annually, to the value of 20,000 dollars. Prussia wants salt, and has no metals but iron. The profits of its fisheries are considerable. Silesia has silver, lead, tin, and iron; but its mines are still in an infant state: It has likewise a great plenty of pit-coal, dif­ferent sorts, of salt, precious stones, and quarries of excellent free-stone. The sheep and goats of this province are remarkably good. Of vege­tables it produces large quantities of madder, some tobacco, wine, and corn, sufficient for the consumption of this province. The Marche of Brandenburg has excellent sheep, timber, flax, silk, salt-petre, allum, and a very fine sort of clay, used in the china manufacture. Pomera­nia exports timber, cattle, and corn. Halberstadt and Magdeburg are remarkable for corn and silk, and Westphalia for corn and minerals. The provinces of Westphalia have iron, calamine, pit-coal, and some lead and copper. The industry of the Prussian nation, encouraged chiefly by the late king, the wonder of the age, is at present so great, that not only 1,200 vessels and 12,000 seamen are employed, in the maritime provinces, where trade was formerly at a very low ebb, no more than 500 fishermen being employed in the herring fishery, but that the produce of the mines is made to amount to 1,300,000 dollars, and gives bread to 90,000 families. The sum accruing to the king from the mines amounts to 800,000 dollars, and the profits of private proprietors to 500,000 dollars. Before the commencement of the late reign, Prussia (according to Count Herzberg) had but a few silk man­ufactures: At present they employ upwards of 5,000 hands; and the value of goods manufactured, amounts to 2,000,000 dollars annually, one fourth of which is exported. Of 70,000lb. of raw silk, required for this manufacture, 13,432 lb, are produced in the Prussian domin­ions. Large water-mills are erected for spinning silk, wool and thread. The articles supplied by these mills are of very great commercial con­sequence. Prussia exports linen, to the value of six millions of dollars, chiefly to Spain and Italy, and woollens to the value of four millions, some of which finds its way even to China, through Russia. Eastern Prussia exports, annually, 100,000 stein of flax, 10,000 stein of hemp, besides some thousand tons of flax and hemp-seed. West Prussia ex­ports linen thread to the value of 500,000 dollars, and 49,000 stein of flax. The iron works and founderies of the county of Mark bring into circulation about one million of dollars. These articles added to the timber and corn of Brandenburg and Pomerania, each of which articles is exported to the value of one million of dollars: To the flax and timber of Prussia, and to the important Polish trade carried on by the way of Koenigsberg, Memel, Elbing, Dantzick, and Stettin, turn the balance of trade considerably in favour of the Prussian dominions. There are in all about 123,000 hands employed in the manufactures of cloth, silk, linen, leather, &c. The manufacture of porcelaine em­ploys 5,000 people. The cotton manufacture, with respect to the fine­ness and beauty of its goods, is one of the best in Europe. Besides [Page 210] the above, there are many manufactures of glass, white lead, hard-war, vitriol, allum, paper, sugar, tobacco, &c. The number of people work­ing in the principal manufactures of Prussia, is upwards of 165,000, and the produce of their industry is estimated at upwards of 30 mil­lions of dollars. The small manufactures of starch, allum, vinegar, bleached wax, tobacco pipes, arms, tapestry, gloves, are not included in this calculation, yet they produce many millions of dollars. At Embden, an East-India Company has been established with tolerable success.

ARMY.] In 1783, the Army of Prussia amounted to 224, [...] men, viz.

  Infantry. Cavalry.
In the March 46,488 4,189
In Prussia 33,947 12,229
In Pomerania 12,670 8,430
In Magdeburg 16,907 3,790
In Westphalia 13,990  
In Silesia 40,168 13,860

In 1785 the army amounted to 192,377.

At Berlin there is an Ecole Militaire, and a school for cadets; Each regiment has its court of justice. The Prussian troops are said to be the best disciplined of any in the world.

FINANCES.] The Finances of Prussia amount to 23 millions of dol­lars: According to Busching to 18,500,000 only.

From the Electorate or March of Brandenburg 6½millions.
From Prussia
From Pomerania 2
From Magdeburg and Halberstadt 2
From Westphalia 2
From Silesia 6
23
According to Busching.
Pomerania 2,000,000
Prussia 4,000,000
Silesia 4,500,000
March of Brandenburg 3,300,000
Magdeburg 1,400,000
Halberts [...]adt 500,000
Clove, Mark, and Mocurs 1,000,000
Minden and Raves [...]berg 900,000
Ostfriesland 900,000
  18,500,000

The revenues arise from demesnes of the king▪ his duties of custo [...] and tolls, and the subsidies yearly granted by the several states. [...] alone is said to bring him in 26,000 dollars annually.

GOVERNMENT.] His Prussian Majesty is absolute through [...] dominions: The government of this kingdom is exercised by a [...] of four Chancellors of State, viz. 1. The Great Master: 2. The Great Burgrave: 3. The Great Chancellor: And 4. The Great [...] ­shal. There are also some other councils, and 17 Bailiwicks. [...] [Page 211] states consist: 1. Of Counsellors of State: 2. Of Deputies from the Nobility: And 3. From the Commons. Besides these institutions, his Majesty has erected a board for commerce and navigation.

GENERAL REMARKS.] The present flourishing state of Prussia, a country by no means remarkable for its natural riches, is an astonish­ing proof of what a single great man is able to effect, who unites extra­ordinary strength of genius, with laborious and persevering activity.—This monarchy resembles a very complicated machine, which, by its ingenious and admirable construction, produces the greatest effects with the greatest case, but in which the yielding of a wheel, or the relaxation of a spring, will put a stop to the motion of the whole. The united effects of flourishing finances, of prudent oeconomy, of accuracy and dispatch in every branch of administration, and of a formidable military strength, have given to this state such a consequence, that the tranquillity and security, not only of Germany, but of all Europe, depend in a great measure on the politics of the Prussian cabinet. The administration of justice is likewise admirably simplified and executed with unparalleled quickness. Upon the whole, the reign of Frederick the Great may, indeed, be considered as the most specious argument in favour of monarchical government. Improvements have been made in one single reign, which, in a country where the governing powers are less united and more limited, would have required several ages, and the most favourable circumstances. Difference of religion in a state, is commonly the cause of many disturbances: Under the late king, all professions of faith lived peaceably together, because the established religion, which is the reformed, had no power to oppress those of a different persuasion▪ Roman Catholics and Jews are very numerous in the Prussian dominions; they enjoy the most perfect freedom in the exercise of their religion.

The progress which the arts and sciences, and especially elegant litera­ture, have made during the reign of this great man, is very considerable. It is no more than about 40 years ago, that the Germans, though great proficients in every branch of scientific knowledge, paid proper atten­tion to the refinement of their taste, and the cultivation of their lan­guage. Yet such is the application peculiar to the Germans, and so well were they prepared for every species of composition, by their in­timate acquaintance with the best ancient and modern writers of all nations, that having once laid aside the fashion of writing in Latin, they were able to enumerate, in a short period, many excellent poets and elegant writers in their native language. This is the more to be won­dered at, as the late king of Prussia, greatly neglected in his education, and afterwards constantly surrounded by foreigners, was unacquainted with, and indifferent to the energy and copiousness of his own lan­guage, and to the progress his countrymen made in taste and composi­tion. He had, however, the merit of encouraging the sciences and some branches of literature; and such is the connexion between the different branches, that if some of them are patronized by great and powerful men, all the other branches will partake of the animating influence.

HISTORY.] Prussia was anciently inhabited by an idolatrous and cruel people. The barbarity and ravages they were continually making [...] their neighbours, obliged Conrad, duke of Masovia, about the [Page 212] middle of the thirteenth century, to call to his assistance the knights of the Teutonic order, who were just returned from the holy land.—These knights chose a grand master, attached those people with success, and after a bloody war of fifty years reduced them to obedience, and obliged them to embrace christianity. They maintained their con­quest till 1525, when Albert, Margrave of Blandenburg, their last grand master, having made himself master of all Prussia, ceded the western part to the king of Poland, and was acknowledged duke of the eastern part, but to be held as a fief of that kingdom. The elector, Frederick-William, surnamed the Great, by a treaty with Poland in 1656, obtained a confirmation of this part of Prussia to him and his heirs, free from vassalage, and in 1663, he was declared independent and sovereign duke. With these titles, and as grand master of the Teutonics, they continued till 1701, when Frederick, son of Frederick-William the Great, and grand-father of the late king, raised the duchy of Prussia to a kingdom, and on January 18, 1701, in a solemn assem­bly of the states of the empire, placed the crown with his own hand [...] upon his head; soon after which, he was acknowledged as king of Prussia by all the other European powers. Frederick III. died August 17, 1786, and was succeeded by his nephew, Frederick-William who was born 1744.

[Page 213]

MONARCHY OF AUSTRIA.

THE Divisions, Extent, Population, and Chief Towns of this Monarchy, are noticed in the following Table.

Division of all the Austrian dominions. Areas in square miles. Population. Population for each single square mile. CHIEF TOWNS. Names. Num. of inhabitants.
  180,496 20,000,000 111 Vienna 206,000
    19,611,000 St. T. 109 St. T. Linz 15,200
A. Countries belonging to the Ger­man empire.       Gratz 55,000
1. Circle of Austria       Clagenfurt 7,000
        Laubach 9,500
  34,320 4,182,000 122 Foria 1,900
      B. Triest 9,000
2. Kingdom of Bohemia 15,376 2,266,000 148 Prague, 80,000
        Carlsbad  
        Eger  
3. Marquisate of Moravia 6,336 1,137,000 179 Olmuz 11,000
        Brunn 13,000
4. Part of Silesia 1,296 200,000 154 Troppau 8,000
        Teschen  
5. Austrian Netherlands 7,504 1,880,000 250 Brussels 80,000
  Louvaines 40,000
Antwerp 40,000
Malines 20,000
Ghent 40,000
Ostende 12,000
Mons 10,000
Namur 20,000
Luxemburg 8,000
Limburg 8,000

[Page 214]

B. Countries independent of the Ger­man empire. Areas in squ. miles. Population. Population for each single square mile. CHIEF TOWNS.
1. Lomba [...]dia (Italy) 3,07 [...] 1,324,000 431 Names. Number of inhabitants.
  Milan 132,000
Pavia 27,600
Gremona 25,000
Mantua 23,000
[...]. Hungary 59,536 3,170,000 53 Ofen 21,000
  Presburg 27,000
Oedenburg 11,000
Therefienstadt 15,000
Pest 13,500
Chemnitz 8,000
Tyrnau 7,300
3. Illyria 12,928 620,030 49 Nartstadt, Peterwaradein  
4. Transylvania 16,800 1,250,000 74 Hemanstadt 15,000
        Kronstadt  
5. Buckowina 22,848 130,000 46 Czernowiz, Suezowa  
6. Gall [...], and Lodomiria 20,480 2,800,000 126 Lemberg 20,000
[...]       [...] [...],000

[Page 215] WEALTH, COMMERCE, &c.] The provinces of the Austrian mon­archy are not only favourably situated as to climate, but they may be reckoned among the most fertile in Europe. There is scarce any valuable product which is not to be met with in them. Bohemia pro­duces and exports flax, wool, hides, skins, hops, iron, steel, tin, cobalt, vitriol, brimstone, allum, garnets, and other precious stones; it imports salt, wine, silk, cotton, spices, &c. upon the whole, the value of exports exceeds that of the imports by two millions of florins. Silesia exports large quantities of linen, and Moravia has a great number of manufac­tures of all sorts, chiefly of cloth, the produce of which amounts to the value of 13 millions of florins. Austria is certainly one of the most fertile provinces of Germany. The lower division of it produces up­wards of 60,000cwt. of salt, value 4½ millions of florins, the expenses of the works not exceeding one million. The saffron of this province is remarkably good. The woollen manufacture at Lintz is very consi­derable, and employs upwards of 25,000 people. There are besides many other manufactures, viz. of glass, of hardware, &c. The art of making iron-wire is carried to such a degree of perfection, that 6130 fish-hooks, worth 26 florins, are made of half an ounce of metal.—Austria produces 2,000,000 eymers of wine, of which a great part is exported. The exports of Lower Austria to the Levant, are comput­ed at six millions; but the imports, consisting of the articles of cotton, goats or camel hair, spices and coffee, at nine millions. The district comprehending the provinces of Stiria, Carinthia, and Carniola, called by the German geographers Interior Austria, is famous for its minerals. Besides some gold, upwards of 1000 lb. of silver, 300,000 lb. of quick­silver, one million cwt. of iron, 150,000 cwt. of salt, 1500 cwt. of salt­petre, and great quantities of lead, copper, vitriol, cobalt, brimstone, are the produce of these rich mines. In Carniola the linen manufac­tures produce to the value of 400,000 florins of that article. The centre of the Austrian trade is the harbour of Trieste, declared a free port by the present emperor, who is desirous to establish there an East-India company. Here is the market to which all the European nations resort for the productions of the Austrian dominions. The province of Tyrol has also rich mines; it produces wine, and has manufactures of glass, leather, and silk. Lombardy, the population of which is pro­digious, produces vast quantities of silk, to the amount of 4,500,000 florins. It exports also corn and rice for 700,000 linen for 400,000 cattle and horses for 1,500,000 florins. All the various articles of produce, scattered through the other provinces, are found united, and in a much greater proportion, in the kingdom of Hungary, which, if it was not too thinly peopled, would he the richest country of Europe. It produces annually 25,000 lb. of silver, containing gold. In 1779, the mines of Schemnitz and Cremnitz yielded 1215 lb. of gold. The gold-wash of the Bannat yields upwards of 1000 ducats. It is suppos­ed, that Hungary and Transylvania together produce gold and silver to the value of 7,000,000 florins annually, 34,000 cwt. of copper, be­sides iron, quicksilver, salt, and marble. The value of the mines of [...] Austrian Monarchy is computed to amount to 19,000,000 florins. It is well known that Hungary produces an incredible quantity of ex­cellent wines, the most delicious of which is the famous Tokay. If several sorts of the Hungarian wines could be longer kept, and if the [Page 216] duties on them, and the expenses of carriage were not so very high, the riches accruing from them to this country would be immense. Among the other valuable productions of Hungary, we shall men [...] hemp, flax, and even cotton, baril [...]a, rice, and tobacco. In 1779, [...] were exported from Trieste 100, 759 lb. of snuff, and upwards of 3,000,000 lb. of tobacco in leaves, exclusive of 2,500,000 lb. ex­ported from Flume and Buhary. This province, rich in every in­spect, sells every year 150,000 head of live cattle, and 40,000 [...] Gallieia, besides abounding in other minerals, is famous for its im­mense falt-works at Wielitzka. This mine of salt-rock has been wok­ed these 600 years past; it extends, according to Mr. Coxe, [...] 669 feet in length, 1115 in breadth, and 743 in depth. It yielding the crown of Poland, to which it belonged till 1773, a revenue of three millions and a half of Polish florins annually: it has been [...] to the emperor by the late treaty of partition. The quantity of [...] dug out every year, amounted some years ago to 700,000 cwt. The falt works of Sambor and Bochnia are also very rich, they yield [...] the value of one million of florins. The few proceding fact [...] [...] clearly the value of these provinces. When population shall be [...] creased, and manufactures established, in proportion to the [...] riches of the country, the wealth of the Austrian Monarchy [...] to be superior to that of any nation in Europe. At present [...] great want of navigable canals and other conveniencies for i [...] ­merce. Many of the spontaneous productions are not sufficiently at­tended to, as for instance, Oil. The Austrian Netherlands have been long famous for their fisheries, corn, madder, and flax of a [...] fineness, of which the Brabant lace is made, which brings a great [...] of money into the country.

Vienna is the capital of the circle of Austria, and, bring the [...] of the emperor, is supposed to be the capital of Germany. It is a [...] and a strong city, and the princes of the house of Austria have [...] nothing that could contribute to its grandeur and riches. [...] contains an excellent university, a bank, which is in the management of her own magistrates, and a court of commerce immediately [...] to the aulic council. Its religious buildings, with the walks and [...] dens, occupy a sixth part of the town; but the suburbs are larger [...] the city. It would be endless to enumerate the many palaces of [...] capital, two of which are imperial; its squares, academies, and [...] ­ries; and, among others, the fine one of prince Eugene, with [...] the imperial cabinets of curiosities. Among its rich convents is [...] for the Scotch nation, built in honour of their countryman, St. [...] the patron of Austria; and one of the six gates of this city is called the Scots gate, in remembrance of some notable exploit performed them [...] the troops of that nation. The inhabitants of Vienna, including [...] suburbs, are computed at about three hundred thousand; and the en­couragement given them by their sovereigns, has rendered this [...] rendezvous of all the nations around.

After all that has been said of this magnificent city, the most [...] and sensible of those who have visited it, are far from being [...] its praise. The streets, excepting those in the suburbs, are [...] dirty; the houses and furniture of the citizens are greatly [...] ­tioned to the magnificence of the palaces, squares, and [...] [...] [Page 217] buildings; but above all, the excessive imposts laid by the house of Austria upon every commodity in its dominions, must always keep the manufacturing part of their subjects poor. His late imperial majesty was sensible of these truths which were plain to all the world but his predecessors and their counsellors: He examined things with his own eyes, and descended from that haughtiness of demeanour which rendered the imperial court so long disagreeable, and indeed ridiculous, to the rest of Europe. In general, the condition of the Austrian subjects has been greatly meliorated since the accession of his late majesty to the imperial throne; great encouragement hath been given to the protestants, and many of the Catholic religious houses, convents, &c. were suppressed by him.

FINANCES.] The Finances of the Austrian monarchy amount to above 90 millions of florins, exclusive of the revenues of Galicia, Lo­domiria, and Buckowina, viz.

Of Bohemia 15,736,069
Silesia 557,209
Austria 23,014,276
Moravia 5,793,120
Stiria 5,889,221
Carintia 2,386,834
Carniola 2,089,952
Friaul 357,368
Tyrol 3,658,712
Austria Interior 2,876,177
Hungary 18,004,153
Transylvania 3,941,707
Lombardia 2,909,171
Netherlands 3,184,135
Illyria 1,000,000 Schloez.
Buckowina 300,000
Gallicia and Lodomiria 12,000,000

The debts of the Austrian monarchy amount to about 200 millions of florins. In 1770, the public expenditure amounted to 83½ millions, and was exceeded by the revenue by upwards of six millions remain­ing in the treasury.

ARMY.] The Austrian army, according to the new regulations of 1779, amount to 283,000 men. The infantry consists of 37 regiments, of 3120 men each, or in all 177,840 men.

Grenadiers 13,182
Cavalry 44,100
Artillery 11,000
Croats 400,000
Wallachian
Sclavonian troops
Pontoniers 600
Mineurs 640
Sappeurs 280
Tchaiki [...]ts 1200
Engineers 200

There are besides the general, staff, or field engineers, &c. Accord­ing to others 300,000 men (in 1783).

[Page 218]

Another statement.
Infantry 170,000
Cavalry 50,000
Garrisons and other corps 60,000
  280,000

There is at Wienerish Neustadt a famous military academy for 400 cadets; at Vienna an academy of engineers, and each regiment [...] school, in which forty sons of soldiers are educated.

GENERAL REMARKS.] The Austrian monarchy wants nothing but a long peace to increase in population and industry. In both respec [...] the country has already gained much by the wisdom of one of the [...] emperors, who removed one of the greatest obstacles to internal im­provement, religious intolerance. The Roman Catholic religion [...] the established religion of the monarchy: There are, however, at [...] 80,000 Protestants in the provinces belonging to the German emp [...]. In Hungary the number of Protestants is so great, that since the act of toleration has been published, no less than 200 churches have been al­lowed to them. There are, besides many thousand Greeks, 223, [...] Jews, and about 50,000 Egyptians or Gypsies, in the Austrian domin­ions. At the beginning of the present reign, there were upwards of 2000 convents of monks and nuns, which are now wisely reduced to 1143. The arts and sciences, hitherto greatly neglected, begin to [...] considerable progress. The emperor Joseph appropriated the greatest part of the revenues, arising from the estates of the [...]ecularised con­vents, to the improvement of the schools, and the encouragement [...] literary merit. The universities of the Austrian dominions are [...] yet equal to those of the Protestant countries of Germany; they are [...] in number, at Vienna, Prague, Pest, Lemberg, Louvain, and Fr [...] ­bourg, in Brisgau. The government is, in certain respects, stri [...] monarchical; however, in the provinces of Hungary, Illyria, Tran­sylvania, Tyrol, and the Netherlands, the states have preserved so [...] of their ancient consequence, as to prevent new taxes from being im­posed on those provinces without their consent. The cities of Bru [...] and Milan are the seats of the two viceroys, or governor-generals [...] the Netherlands and the Italian provinces. Joseph II. rendered [...] essential service to humanity, in abolishing the servitude or vill [...] of the peasants of Bohemia.

[Page 219]

KINGDOM OF BOHEMIA, BELONGING TO THE AUSTRIAN MONARCHY.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 478 Miles. between Degrees. 48 and 52 north latitude.
Breadth 3 [...]2 Miles. Degrees. 12 and 19 east longitude.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED by Saxony and Brandenburg, on the North; by Poland and Hungary, on the East; by Austria and Bavaria, on the South; and by the palatinate of Bava­ [...] on the West; formerly comprehending, 1. Bohemia Proper; 2. Silesia; and, 3. Moravia.

To what we have already said of Bohemia under the head of Austria, we add the following particulars:—

MOUNTAINS AND RIVERS.] Bohemia, though almost surrounded with mountains, contains none of note or distinction: Its woods are many, and the chief rivers are the Elbe, Muldaw, and Eger.

ARCHBISHOPRICS AND BISHOPRICS.] Prague is the only Bohe­mian archbishopric. The bishoprics are Koningsgratz, Breslaw, and C [...]tz.

LANGUAGE.] The proper language of the Bohemians is a dialect of the Sclavonian, but they generally speak German and High Dutch.

UNIVERSITY.] The only university in Bohemia is that of Prague.

CITIES AND TOWNS.] Prague, the capital of Bohemia, is one of the [...] and most magnificent cities in Europe, and famous for its noble [...]idge. Its circumference is so large, that the grand Prussian army, in [...] last siege, never could completely invest it. For this reason it is [...] [...] make a vigorous defence in case of a regular siege. The in­habitants are thought not to be proportioned to its capaciousness, be­ing computed at 80,000. It contains 92 churches and chapels, and 40 [...]isters. It is a place of little or no trade, and therefore the middling inhabitants are not wealthy; but the Jews are said to carry on a large [...]erce in jewels. Bohemia contains many other towns, some of which are fortified, but they are neither remarkable for strength nor manufactures. Olmutz is the capital of Moravia: It is well fortified, and has manufactures of woollen, iron, glass, paper, and gunpowder. [...]re [...]law, the capital of Silesia, hath been already described.

COMMERCE AND MANUFACTURES.] See Austria.

CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT.] The forms, and only the [...], of the old Bohemian constitution still subsist; but the govern­ment, under the emperor, is despotic. Their states are composed of [...] clergy, nobility, gentry, and representatives of towns.

HISTORY.] The Bohemian nobility used to elect their own princes, [...]ugh the emperors of Germany sometimes imposed a king upon them, [...] at length usurped that throne themselves. In the year 1438, Al­ [...] II. of Austria, received three crowns, that of Hungary, the Em­ [...]re, and Bohemia.

In 1414 John Huss and Jerome of Prague, two of the first reformers, [...] Bohemians, were burnt at the council of Constance, though the [...]mperor of Germany had given them his protection. This occasioned [...] insurrection in Bohemia: The people of Prague, threw the empe­ror's [Page 220] officers out of the windows of the council-chamber; and the fa­mous Zisca, assembling an army of 40,000 Bohemians, defeated the emperor's forces in several engagements, and drove the Imp [...]ali [...] of the kingdom. The divisions of the Hussites among themselves en­abled the emperors to keep possession of Bohemia, though an [...] was made to throw off the Imperial yoke, by electing, in the year [...] a protestant king, in the person of the Prince Palatine, son-in-law [...] James I. of England. He was driven from Bohemia by the emperor's generals, and, being stripped of his other dominions, was forced [...] ­pend on the court of England for a subsistence. After a war of [...] years duration, which desolated the whole empire, the Bohem [...] since that time, have remained subject to the house of Austria.

HUNGARY.
BELONGING TO THE AUSTRIAN MONARCHY.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 300 Miles. between Degrees. 17 and 23 east longitude.
Breadth 200 Miles. Degrees. 45 and 49 north latitude.

BOUNDARIES.] THAT part of Hungary which belongs to [...] house of Austria (for it formerly [...] Transylvania, Sclavonia, Croatia, Morlachia, Servia, Walachia, and other countries) is bounded by Poland, on the North; by Transylva­nia and Walachia, East; by Sclavonia, South; and by Aust [...] [...] Moravia, West.

The kingdom of Hungary is usually divided into the Upper and Lower Hungary.

UPPER HUNGARY, NORTH OF THE DANUBE. LOWER HUNGARY, SOUTH OF THE DANUBE.
Chief Towns. Chief Towns.
Presburg, situated on the Danube, E. lon. 17-30. N. lat. 48-20. Buda, on the Danube, E. lon [...] 20. N. lat. 17-40.
Newhausel, N. W. Gran, on the Danube, above [...].
Leopolsladt, N. W. Comorra, on the Danube, [...]
Chremnits, N. W. island of Schut.
Schemnits, in the middle. Raab, on the Danube, oppo [...]
Esperies, N. island of Schut.
Chaschaw. N. Atlenburg, W. opposite [...]
Tokay, N. E. the island of Schut.
Zotmar, N. E. Weissenburg, or Alba Rega [...] [...] ­uated E. of the lake, call [...] [...]
Unguar, N. E.  
Mongats, N. E. Platten sea.
Waradin Great, E. Kanisba, S. W. of the Pla [...] [...]
Segedin, S. E. Five Churches. N. of the [...]
Agria, in the middle. Drave.
Pest, on the Danube, opposite to Buda.  

To which may be added Temeswar, which has been consid [...] [...] distinct from Hungary, because it was formerly governed by an [...] [Page 221] pendent king; and it has several times been in possession of the Turks: but the Austrians gaining possession of it, it was incorporated into the kingdom of Hungary in 1778. The province of Temeswar is 94 miles long, and 67 broad, containing about 3850 square miles: It has been divided into four districts, Csadat, Temeswar, Werschez, and Lugos. Temeswar, the principal town, is situated E. lon. 22-15. N. lat. 45- [...]4.

AIR, SOIL, AND PRODUCE.] The air, and consequently the cli­mate of the southern parts of Hungary, is found to be unhealthful, ow­ing to its numerous lakes, stagnated waters, and marshes; but the nor­thern parts being mountainous and barren, the air is sweet and whole­some. No country in the world can boast a richer soil, than that plain which extends three hundred miles from Presburg to Belgrade, and produces corn, grass, esculent plants, tobacco, saffron, asparagus, mel­ [...], hops, pulse, millet, buck-wheat, delicious wine, fruits, of various kinds, peaches, mulberry-trees, chesnuts, and wood: Corn, is in such plenty, that it sells for one sixth part of its price in England.

RIVERS.] These are the Danube, Drave, Save, Teysse, Merish and the T [...]mes.

WATER.] Hungary contains several lakes, particularly four among the Carpathian mountains of considerable extent, and abounding with fish. The Hungarian baths and mineral waters are esteemed the most sovereign of any in Europe; but their magnificent buildings, raised by the Turks, when in possession of the country, particularly those of [...], are suffered to go to decay.

MOUNTAINS.] The Carpathian mountains which divide Hunga­ry from Poland on the north, are the chief in Hungary, though many detached mountains are found in the country. Their tops are gene­rally covered with wood, and on their sides grow the richest grapes in the world.

METALS AND MINERALS.] Hungary is remarkably well stocked with both. It abounds not only with gold and silver mines, but with plenty of excellent copper, vitriol, iron, orpiment, quicksilver, cryso­colla, and terra sigillata. Before Hungary became the seat of destruc­tive wars between the Turks and Christians, or fell under the power of the house of Austria, those mines were furnished with proper works and workmen, and produced vast revenues to the native princes.—The Hungarian gold and silver employed mint-houses, not only in Hungary, but in Germany, and the continent of Europe; but all those mines are now greatly diminished in their value, their works being de­stroyed or demolished; some of them however still subsist, to the great emolument of the natives.

VEGETABLE AND ANIMAL PRODUCTIONS.] Hungary is remarka­ble for a fine breed of horses, generally mouse-coloured, and highly esteemed by military officers, so that great numbers of them are export­ed. There is a remarkable breed of large rams in the neighbourhood of Presburg. Its other vegetable and animal productions are in general the same with those of Germany, and the neighbouring countries.—The Hungarian wines, however, particularly Tokay, are preferable to these of any other country, at least in Europe.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MANNERS, CUSTOMS, AND DIVERSIONS.] Before the Turks got possession of Constantino­ple, it is said, that Hungary was one of the most populous and power­ful [Page 222] kingdom in Europe; and if the house of Austria should [...] proper encouragement to the inhabitants to repair their works, and clear their fens, it might become so again a century hence. Hungary at present, is thought to contain about three millions 170,000 in­habitants.

The Hungarians have manners peculiar to themselves. They pipe themselves on being, descended from those heroes, who formeds the bulwark of Christendom against the infidels. In their persons they are well made. Their fur caps, their close-bodied coats, girded by fash, and their cloak, or mantle, which is so contrived as to buch [...] ­der the arm, so that the right hand may be always at liberty, give [...] an air of military dignity. The men shave their beards, but [...] their whiskers on their upper lips. Their usual arms are a broad- [...] and a kind of pole-ax, besides their fire-arms. The ladies are rech [...] handsomer than those of Austria, and they have a sable dress, with sleeves strait to their arms, and their stays fastened before with [...] pearl, or diamond little buttons. Both men and women, in what they call the mine towns, wear fur and even sheep-skin, dresses. The [...] upon the roads are most miserable hovels, and even those seldom to be met with. The hogs, which yield the chief animal food for [...] peasants, and their poultry, live in the same apartment with their [...] ­ers. The gout and the fever, owing to the unwholesomeness of the air, are the predominant diseases in Hungary. The natives in general lease trade and manufactures to the Greeks and other strangers [...] in their country, the flatness of which renders travelling comm [...]d [...] either by land or water. The diversions of the inhabitants are of the warlike and athletic kind. They are in general a brave and maga [...] ­mous people. Their ancestors, even since the beginning of the [...] century, were so jealous of their liberties, that rather than submit to the tyranny of the house of Austria, they often put themselves under the protection of the Ottoman court; but their fidelity to the [...] empress queen, notwithstanding the provocations they received [...] her house, will be always remembered to their honour.

The inhabitants of Temeswar, a province lately incorporated into the kingdom of Hungary, are computed at about 450,000. There [...] in this country many faraons, or gyrsies, supposed to be real des [...]n­ants of the ancient Egyptians. They are said to resemble the ancient Egyptians in their features, in their propensity to melancholy, and it many of their manners and customs; and it is asserted, that the lasc [...] ­ous dances of Isis, the worship of onions, many famous Egyptain [...] ­perstitions and specifies, and the Egyptian method of hatching eggs by means of dung, are still in use among the female gypsies in Temeswar.

RELIGION.] The established religion of the Hungarians in the Roman Catholic, though the major part of the inhabitants are pr [...] ­ants, or Greeks; and they now enjoy the full exercise of their [...] ­ous liberties.

ARCHBISHOPRICS, AND BISHOPRICS.] The archbishoprics are [...] ­burg, Gran, and Colocza. The bishoprics are, Great Waradin, [...] Vesprin, Raab, and five Churches.

LANGUAGE.] As the Hungarians are mixed with Germans, [...] vonians, and Walachians, they have a variety of dialects, and [...] them is said to approach near the Hebrew. The better and [...] [Page 223] [...] speak German, and almost all even of the common people speak Latin, either pure or barbarous, so that the Latin may be said to be [...] still a living language.

UNIVERSITIES.] In the universities (if they can properly be so called) of Firnan, Buda, Raab, and Caschaw, are professors of the several arts and sciences, who used generally to be Jesuits; so that the Lutherans and Calvinists, who are more numerous than the Roman Catholics in Hungary, go to the German and other universities.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} The artificial curiosities of this country consist of its bridg­es, baths, and mines. The bridge of Esseck, built over the Danube, and Drave, is properly speaking, a continuation, of bridges, five miles it length, [...]ortified with towers at certain distances. It was an impor­tant pass during the wars between the Turks and Hungarians. A [...]idge of boats runs over the Danube, half a mile long, between Buda and Pest; and about twenty Hungarian miles distant from Belgrade, are the remains of a bridge, erected by the Romans, judged to be the must magnificent of any in the world. The baths and mines here have nothing to distinguish them from the like works in other coun­tries.

One of the most remarkable natural curiosities of Hungary, is a cav­ [...] in a mountain near Szelitze; the aperture of this cavern, which [...] the south, is eighteen fathoms, high, and eight broad; its subter­ [...]eous passages consist entirely of solid rock, stretching away farther [...] than has been yet discovered; as far as it is practicable to go, the [...] is found to be 50 fathoms, and the breadth 26. Many other wonderful particulars are related of this cavern, which is an article in natural philosophy.

CITIES, TOWNS FORTS, AND OTHER IDIFICES, PUBLIC AND PRIVATE.} These are greatly decaved from their ancient magnifi­ [...]ce but many of the fortifications are still very strong, and kept in good order. Presburg is fortified. In it the Hungarian regalia were kept, but were lately removed to Vienna. The crown was sent in the year 1000 by pope Sylvester II. to Stephen, king of Hungary, and was made after that of the Greek emperors; it is of solid gold, weighing nine marks and three ounces, ornamented with 53 saphires, 50 rubies, one large emerald, and 338 pearls. Besides these stones are the images of the apostles and the patriarchs. The pope added to this crown a sil­ver patriarchal cross, which was afterwards inserted in the arms of Hun­gary. At the ceremony of the coronation, a bishop carries it before the king. From the cross is derived the title of apostolic king: the use of which was renewed under the reign of the empress queen Maria The­resa. The sceptre and the globe of the kingdom are of Arabian gold: the mantle, which is of fine linen, is the work of Gisele, spouse of St. Stephen, who embroidered in gold the image of Jesus Christ crucified, and many other images of the patriarchs, and apostles, with a number of inscriptions. The sword is two edged, and rounded at the point. [...], formerly the capital of Hungary, retains little of its ancient mag­nif [...]ce but its strength and [...]ortifications; and the same may be said of [...], which lies on the opposite side of the Danube. Raab is like­ [...]ise a strong city, as are Gran and Cormorra. Tokay has been alrea­dy mentioned for the excellency of its wines.

[Page 224] COMMERCE AND MANUFACTURES.]See Austria.

CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT.] The Hungarians dislike the term of Queen, and even called their late sovereign king Theresa [...] Their government preserved the remains of many checks upon the [...] ­gal power. They have a diet or parliament, a Hungary-office, which resemble out chancery, and which resides at Vienna; as the [...] ­der's council, which comes pretty near the British privy-council, [...] has a municipal jurisdiction, does at Presburg. Every royal town [...] its senate: and the Gespan chafts resembles the English justices of the peace. Besides this, they have an exchequer and nine chambers, and other subordinate courts.

MILITARY STRENGTH AND REVENUE.] See Austria.

HISTORY.] The Huns, after subduing this country in the middle of the third century, communicated their name to it, being then [...] of the ancient Pannonia. They were succeeded by the Goths; the Goths were expelled by the Lombards; they by the Avari, and the Sclavi were planted in their stead in the beginning of the 9th century. At the close of it, the Anigours emigrated from the banks of the Volga, and took possession of the country. Hungary was formerly an assemblage of different states, and the first who assumed the title of king, was Stephen, in the year 997, when he embraced christianity. In his reign, the form of government was established, and the crown [...] be elective. About the year 1310, king Charles Robert ascended [...] throne, and subdued Bulgaria, Servia, Croatia, Dalmatia, Scla [...] and many other provinces; but many of those conquests were after­wards reduced by the Venetians, Turks, and other powers. In the 15th century. Huniades, who was guardian to the infant king L [...] ­laus, bravely repulsed the Turks, when they invaded Hungary; and upon the death of Ladislaus, the Hungarians, in 1438, raised [...] Corvinus, son of Huniades, to their throne. Lewis, king of Hunga­ry, in 1526, was killed in a battle, fighting against Solyman, emperor of the Turks. This battle had almost proved fatal to Hungary; but the archduke Ferdinand, brother to the emperor Charles V. having married the sister of Lewis, he claimed the title of Hungary, in which he succeeded, with some difficulty, and that kingdom has ever [...] belonged to the house of Austria, though by its constitution, its [...] ought to be elective.

TRANSYLVANIA, SOLAVONIA, CROATIA, AND HUNGARIAN DALMATIA.

WE have thrown those countries under one division, for several reasons, and particularly because we have no account [...] ­siciently exact of their extent and boundaries. The best account of them follows: Transylvania, belongs to the house of Austria, and is bounded on the North, by the Carpathian mountains, which [...] from Poland; on the East, by Moldavia and Walachia; on the [...] by Walachia; and on the West, by Upper and Lower Hungary. [...] lies between 22 and 25 degrees of east longitude, and 45 and [...] north latitude. Its length is extended about 185, and its [...] [...] miles: and contains nearly 14,400 square miles, but it is surrounded [Page 225] on all sides by high mountains. Its produce, vegetables and animals, are almost the same with those of Hungary. The air is wholesome and temperate; but their wine, though good, is not equal to the Hunga­rian. Its chief city is Hermanstadt, and its interior government still partakes greatly of the ancient feudal system, being compos­ed of many independent states and princes. They owe not much more than a nominal subjection to the Austrians, who leave them in possession of most of their privileges. Catholics, Lutherans, Calvin­ists Socinians, Arians, Greeks, Mahometans, and other sectaries, here enjoy their several religions. Transylvania is thought to add but little to the Austrian revenue, though it exports some metals and salt to Hungary. The other large places are Sageswar, Millenback, and [...]ark. All sorts of provision are very cheap, and excellent in their kinds. Hermanstadt is a large, strong, and well built city, as are Clau­ [...]burg and Weissenburg. The seat of government is at Hermanstadt, and the governor is assisted by a council made up of Roman Catholics, Calvinists, and Lutherans. The diet, or parliament, meets by sum­ [...] and received the commands of their sovereign, to whom of late they have been more devoted than formerly. They have a liberty of making remonstrances and representations in case of grievances.

Transylvania is part of the ancient Dacia, the inhabitants of which [...] employed the Roman arms, before they could be subdued. It was over-run by the Goths on the decline of the Roman empire, and then by the Huns. Their descendants retain the same military charac­ter. The population of the country is not ascertained; but if the Transylvanians can bring to the field, as has been asserted, 30,000 troops, the whole number of inhabitants must be considerable. At present its military force is reduced to six regiments of 1500 men each; [...] it is well known, that during the last two wars, in which the house of Austria was engaged, the Transylvanians did great services. Her­manstadt is its only bishopric; and the Transylvanians at present seem to trouble themselves little either about learning or religion, though the Roman Catholic is the established church. Stephen I. king of Hungary, introduced Christianity there about the year 1000, and it was afterwards governed by an Hungarian vaivod, or viceroy. The various revolutions in their government prove their impatience under slavery; and though the treaty of Carlowitz in 1699, gave the sove­reignty of Transylvania, as also of Sclavonia, to the house of Austria, yet the natives enjoy what we may call a loyal aristocracy, which their sovereigns do not think proper to invade. In October, 1784, on ac­count of the real of feigned oppressions of the nobility, near 16,000 as­sembled and committed great depredations on those whose conduct had been resented. Several had their palaces burnt, and were glad to escape with their lives. The revolters were disappointed in their at­tempt on Clausenburg; and afterwards offered to separate and go [...] in peace, on the terms of a general pardon, better treatment from the nobility, and a freedom from vassalage. Little is known of the [...]nation of this revolt, further than the account of several of the [...] having been taken and executed, and the application of some [...] measures, by which tranquillity was restored.

Salvonia lies between the 16th and 23d degrees of east longitude, and the 45th and 47th of north latitude. It is thought to be about [Page 226] 200 miles in length, and 60 in breadth, and contains about [...] [...] square miles. It is bounded by the Drave on the North, by the [...] ­nube on the East, by the Save on the South, and by Kiria in [...] on the West. The reason why Hungary, Transylvania, Sclavo [...], and the other nation, subject to the house of Austrian in those parts, [...] a surprising variety of people, differing in name, language, and [...] ­ners, is because liberty here made its last stand against the Roman [...] which they degrees forced the remains of the different nations they [...] conquered into those quarters. The thickness of the woods, the [...] ­pidity of the rivers, and the strength of the country, favoured their [...] ­ance; and their descendants notwithstanding the power of the [...] the Austrians, the Hungarians, and the Poles, still retain the same [...] ­rit of independency. Without minding the arrangements made [...] the sovereigns of Europe, they are quiet under the government [...] leaves them most at liberty. That they are generous, as well as [...] appears from their attachment to the house of Austria, which, [...] last two wars, never was sensible of their value and valour; [...] that it is well known, that they preserved the pragmatic sanction, [...] kept the imperial crown in that family. The Sclavonians [...] gave so much work to the Roman arms, that it is thought the [...] slave took its original from them, on account of the great number [...] them who were carried into bondage, so late as the reign of [...] ­magne. Though Sclavonia yields neither in beauty nor fertili [...] Hungary and Transylvania, yet the ravages of war are still [...] the face of the country, which lies in a great measure unimproved [...]. The Sclavonians are zealous Roman Cacholics, though Greeks [...] Jews are tolerated. Here we meet with two bishoprics; that of [...] ­ga, which is the capital of the country, and Zagrab, which lies on the Drave; but we know of no universities. Essek is a large and [...] town, remarkable, as before noticed, for a wooden bridge over the Drave, and adjoining marshes five miles long, and fifteen paces [...], built by the Turks. Wa [...]adin and Peterwaradin are places noted in the wars between the Austrian and Turks. The inhabitants are composed of Servians, Radzians, Croats, Walachians, Germans, Hun­garians, and a vast number of other people, whose names were [...] known even to the Austrians themselves, but from the military [...] rolls, when they poured their troops into the field during the two [...] wars. In 1746, Sclavonia was united to Hungary, and the states [...] representatives to the diet of Hungary.

Croatia lies between the 15th and 17th degrees of east longitude and the 45th and 47th of north latitude. It is 80 miles in length, and 70 in breadth, and contains about 2,500 square miles. The [...] government, religion, language, and customs of the Croats, are similar [...] those of the Sclavonians and Transylvania, who are their neighbours. They are excellent irregular troops and as such are famed in [...] history, under the name of Pandours, and various other designation. The truth is, the house of Austria finds its interest in suffering than and the neighbouring nations to live in their own manner. Their towns are blended with each other, there scarcely being any distin [...] of boundaries. Carol [...]adt is a place of some note, but Zagrab is the capital of Croatia. All the sovereignty exercised over them by the Austrians seems to consist in the military arrangements for [...] [Page 227] [...] occasionally into the field. A viceroy presides over Croatia, joi [...]ly with Sclavonia, and

[...] DALMATIA: This lies in the upper part of the Adriatio [...] and consists of five districts, in which the most remarkable places [...] the two following: Segna, which is a royal free town, fortified both by nature and by art, and is situated near the sea, in a bleak, [...]tainous and barren soil. The bishop of this place is a suffragan [...] the archbishop of Spalatro. Here are twelve churches, and two [...]. The governor resides in the old palace, called the Royal [...]. 2. Ottoschatz, a frontier fortification on the river Gatzka. [...] part of the fortress where the governor, and the greatest part of garison reside, is surrounded with a wall, and some towers: But the rest of the buildings, which are mean, are erected on piles in the [...]; so that one neighbour cannot visit another without a boat.

[...]ear Segna dwell the Uscocs, a people, who being galled by op­ [...], escaped out of Dalmatia, from whence they obtained the [...] of Uscocs, from the word Scoco, which signifies a deserter. They [...] also called springers, or leapers, from the agility with which they [...] rather than walk, along this rugged and mountainous country, [...] of them live in scattered houses, and others in large villages. They are a rough, savage people, large bodied, courageous, and given [...]; but their visible employment is grazing. They use the Walachian language, and in their religious sentiments and mode of [...]ship approach nearest to the Greek church; but some of them are [...] Catholics.

A part of Walachia belongs also to the emperor, as well as to the Turks, which lies to the east of Transylvania, and its principal towns [...] Tregonitz, Bucharest, and Scverin.

POLAND, INCLUDING LITHUANIA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 700 Miles. between Degrees. 16 and 34 east longitude.
Breadth 680 Miles. Degrees. 46 30 and 57 35 north latitude.

BOUNDARIES.] BEFORE the late extraordinary partition of this country, the kingdom of Poland, with the great [...]chy of Lithuania annexed (anciently called Sarmatia) was bounded on the North by Livonia, Muscovy, and the Baltic sea; on the east by Muscovy; on the South by Hungary, Turkey, and Little Tartary; on the West by Germany: And had the form of its government been as [...] as its situation was compact, it might have been probably one of the most powerful kingdoms in the world. Its grand divisions are [...] in the following Table.

[Page 228]

TABLE
Extent and Divisions. Square Miles. Population. Populat. for ev. sq. mile. Chief Towns and Number of Inhabitants.
46° 30°—57° 30° latitude. 160,800 8,350,000 B.    
16—34 east longitude.   8,500,000 medium 53 230 Towns
    9,000,000 C.    
A. Kingdom of POLAND 137,600     155 Towns
a. Great Poland, divided into 12 Districts called Woldwodships.       Warsaw, 50,000 inhabitants (8,000 Dissidents B.)
  Posen, 4,650
Fraustadt, 4,000
Gnesen,
b. Little Poland, divided into   563 houses B.
1. Three Woidwodships Krakow, 18—20,000 with the suburbs B.
2. Polachia, properly Podlachin, divided into 3 Counties Sandonicerz, 2,060
3. Chelm, the remaining part of Red Russia Lubbin, 26,614
4. Podolia and Bratzsaw Chelm, 875
5. Kow Koresk, 2,000
6. Volhynia Kaminiek, 1,120 B.
B. Great Duchy of LITHUANIA 23,000      
1. Lithuania, properly divided into two Woid­wodships   Wilna, 20,925
White Russia, only a Woidwodships remain­ing after the partition Grodno, 2,400
Black Russia, divided into 3 districts Kowno, 2,250
4. [...] [...], 2,790
5. [...] [...]

[Page 229] The following states are also generally considered as belonging to Poland, notwithstanding they are not its subjects.

1. The Republic of Danzig, 33 villages. The town contains about [...],000 inhabitants.

2. The Republic of Thorn, 42 villages, almost all under the sover­eignty of Prussia. The town contains 20,000 inhabitants.

3. The Duchy of Courland and Semgallen.

  Square Miles. Population Population for every square mile. Towns.
[...]. C [...]rlandia [...]. Semgallen 4,112 300,000 73 Goldingen
  Liebau Mitau, the resi­dence, has 11,000 inhabit.
There are in Poland 2,377 villages
Noblemen's estates 22,032
Abbeys 37
Convents of Monks 579
—Nuns 86
Houses in general 1,674,328
Peasants 1,243,000
Jews 500,000

CLIMATE.] The air of Poland is such as may be expected from so [...]sive but level a country. In the north parts it is cold, but wealthy. The Carpathian mountains, which separate Poland from Hungry, are covered with everlasting snow, which has been known [...] in the midst of summer. Upon the whole, however, the climate in Poland is temperate, and far from being so unsettled, either in win­ter or summer, as might be supposed from so northerly a situation, but [...] is rather insalubrious by reason of the numerous woods and [...]sses.

SOIL, PRODUCE AND WATERS.] Poland is in general a level coun­try, and the soil is fertile in corn, as appears from the vast quantities [...] are sent from thence down the Vistula, to Dantzic, and which are [...]ght up by the Dutch, and other nations. The pastures of Poland, [...]pecially in Podolia, are rich beyond expression: and it is said one [...] hardly see the cattle that graze in the meadows. Here are mines [...] silver, copper, iron, salt and coals. Lithuania abounds in iron [...] black agate, several species of copper and iron pyrites, and red [...] gray granite; false precious stones, and marine petrefactions. The [...] parts of Poland contain forests, which furnish timber in such [...] quantities, that it is employed in house building, instead of [...] stone, and tiles. Various kinds of fruits and herbs, and some [...] are produced in Poland, and are excellent when they meet [...]lture but their wine seldom or never comes to perfection, [...] produces various kinds of clays fit for pipes and earthen ware. [Page 230] The water of many springs is boiled into salt. The virtues of a spring in the palatinate of Cracow, which increases and decreases with the moon, are said to be wonderful for the preservation of life; and it is reported, that the neighbouring inhabitants commonly live to [...] some of them 150 years of age. This spring is inflammable, and by applying a torch to it, it flames like the subtlest spirit of wine. The flame however dances on the surface, without heating the water; and if neglected to be extinguished, which is easily effected, it [...] ­cates itself, by subterraneous conduits, to the roots of trees, in a [...] ­bouring wood, which it consumes; and about 35 years ago, the [...] are said to have lasted for three years, before they could be [...] ex­tinguished.

RIVERS.] The chief rivers of Poland are, the Vistula or [...] the Neister, Neiper or Boristhenes, the Bog, and the Dwina.

LAKES.] The chief of the few lakes contained in Poland, is [...] in the palatinate of Byzesty; and Birals, or the White Lake, [...] is said to dye those who wash in it of a swarthy complexion.

ANIMAL PRODUCTIONS.] The forests of Warsovia or [...] contain plenty of uri, or buffaloes, whose flesh the Poles [...] and esteem it an excellent dish. Horses, wolves, boars, the [...] lynx, elks, and deer, all of them wild, are common in the [...] forests; and there is a species of wild horses and asses, [...] oxcn, that the nobility of the Ukraine, as well as native, [...] fond of. A kind of wolf, resembling a hart, with spots on his [...] and legs, is found here, and affords the best furs in the [...] but the elk which is common in Poland, as well as in some [...] northern countries, is a very extraordinary animal. The [...] the Polish elk forms the most delicious part of their greatest [...] His body is of the deer make, but much thicker and longer; [...] legs high, the feet broad and cloven, the horns large, rough [...] broad, like a wild goat's. Naturalists have observed, that upon [...] ­secting an elk, there was found in its head some large flies, [...] brains almost eaten away; and it is an observation sufficiently [...] that in the large woods, and wildernesses of the North, this [...] ­mal is attacked, towards the winter chiefly, by a larger fort of [...] that, through its ears, attempt to take up their winter, quarter in head [...]. This persecution is thought to affect the elk with the [...] sickness, by which means it is taken, which would otherwise [...] easy matter.

Poland produces a creature called bohac: It resembles a [...] but seems to be of the beaver kind. They are noted for digging [...] in the ground, which they enter in October, and do not come [...] ­cept occasionally for food, till April: They have separate [...] for their provisions, lodgings, and their dead; they live together 10 or 12 in a herd. Lithuania is rich in ornitholygy; [...] birds of prey are the eagle and vulture. The remix, or little [...] of titmouse, is frequently found in these parts, famous for [...] ­drous structure of its pendent nest, formed in the shape of a [...] with amazing art.

The Poles, in their persons, make a noble appearance; [...] [...] ­plexion is fair, and their shapes are well proportioned. [...] brave, honest, and hospitable: And their women sprightly, [...] [Page 231] and submissive to their husbands. Their diversions are warlike and [...]: vaulting, dancing, and riding the great horse, hunting, skait­ing, bull and bear baiting. They usually travel on horseback.

The Poles before the late revolution, were divided into nobles, cler­gy, citizens, and peasants: The peasants were divided into two sorts, [...] of the crown, and those belonging to individuals.

WEALTH AND COMMERCE.] Poland has been considered as one of the weakest states in Europe, on account of the oppression of the [...]people in the towns, and the slavery of the peasantry. The cir­ [...] specie is valued at only 13 millions and a half of German dol­ [...]; and interest is still as high as from 7 to 10 per cent. If the skill of the natives in agriculture bore any proportion to the fertility of the soil, Poland must needs be one of the richest countries in the world; for though a large part of it lies uncultivated, it exports no inconsider­able quantity of corn: The forests and mines of Poland, if duly at­tended to, and also its furs and cattle, might produce a very large sum. There are few manufactures in this kingdom excepting those at Grod­new. Want of industry and of freedom, have been the chief reasons [...] the balance of trade has been so much against Poland. The ex­ [...] are corn, hemp, flax, horses, some of the them wild horses, cattle, [...] (about 100,000 oxen every year) peltry, timber, metals, manna, wax, [...], and some other less considerably articles: The value of them, [...] year 1777, amounted to nearly 30 millions of dollars: The im­ [...] consisting chiefly in wine, cloth, silk, hardware, gold, silver, [...] and West-India goods, were supposed to amount to no less than [...] millions of dollars.

LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN.] Though Copernicus, the great [...] of the true astronomical systems. Vorstius, and some other [...] men, were natives of Poland, yet its soil is far from being fa­vourable to learning. Latin is spoken, though incorrectly, by the com­mon people in some provinces. But the contempt which the nobility, who heretofore placed their chief importance in the privileges of their [...] have ever shewn for learning; the servitude of the lower people, and the universal superstition among all ranks of men, these circum­stances have greatly retarded the progress of letters in this kingdom.—However, of late, a taste for science hath spread itself among the nobles, [...] begins to be regarded as an accomplishment.

UNIVERSITIES.] The universities of Poland are those of Cracow, [...] and Posna or Posen. The first consists of eleven colleges, and [...] the supervisorship of 14 grammar schools dispersed through the [...] the number of students in 1778, amounted to 600. Wilna was [...] the superintendance of the Jesuits, but since their suppression [...] king hath established a committee of education, who appoint pro­ [...] and direct their salaries and studies: That of Posna was rather [...] college than an university.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.] The frequent incursions of the Tartars, and other barbari­ [...] nations, into Poland, probably forced the women sometimes to [...] their children exposed in the woods, where we must suppose [...] were nursed by bears and other wild beasts, otherwise it is difficult [...] for their subsistence. It is certain that such beings have [...] found in the woods both of Poland and Germany, divested of al­most [Page 232] all the properties of humanity but the form. When taken, they generally went on all-fours; but it is said that some of them have, by proper management, attained to the use of speech.

The salt mines of Poland consist of wonderful caverns, several hun­dred yards deep, at the bottom of which are many intricate windings and labyrinths. Out of these are dug four different kinds of salt; [...] extremely hard, like crystal; another softer, but clearer; a third [...], but brittle; these are all brackish; but the fourth is somewhat [...]. These four kinds are dug in different mines, near the city Cracow; on one side of them is a stream of salt-water, and on the other, one of [...]. The revenue arising from those, and other salt mines, is very consider­able, and formed part of the royal revenue before seized by Aus [...]; the annual average profit of those of Wiclit [...]ka, eight miles from C [...] ­cow was about 98,000l. sterling. Out of some mines at Itza, about 70 miles north-east of Cracow, are dug several kinds of earth, which are excellently adapted to the potter's use, and supply all Poland with earthen were. Under the mountains adjoining to Kiow, in the de [...] of Podolia are several grottos, where a great number of human bodies are preserved, though buried a great number of years since, being [...]i­ther so hard nor so black as the Egyptian mummies. Among them [...] two princes, in the habits they used to wear. It is thought that this preserving quality is owing to the nature of the soil, which is dry and sandy. Poland can boast of few antiquities, as old Sarmatia was never perfectly known to the Romans themselves. Its artificial rarities are but few, the chief being the gold, silver, and enamelled vessels, present­ed by the kings and prelates of Poland, and preserved in the cathed [...] of Gnesna.

CITIES, TOWNS, [...]ORIS, AND OTHER EDIFICES, PUBLIC AND PRIVATE.] Warsaw lies on the Vis­tula, and almost in the cen­tre of Poland. It is the royal residence; and contains many magnifi­cent places and other buildings, besides churches and convents. It contains about 50,000 inhabitants, some say more, among whom is a great number of foreigners. The streets are spacious but ill paved, and the greatest part of the houses, particularly in the suburbs, are mean wooden hovels. The city exhibits a strong contract of wealth and poverty, as did every part of this (till the late happy revolutions in favour of liberty) unhappy and oppressed country. It has little or no commerce. The same may be said of Cracow, which is the capital (though that honour is disputed by Warsaw); for we are told, that notwithstanding it lies in the neighbourhood of the rich salt-mines, and is said to contain fifty churches and convents, its commerce is inconsi­derable. The city stands in an extensive plain, watered by the vistula, and with the suburbs occupies a vast space of ground, but all together contains no more than 18 or 20,000 souls. It is surrounded with high brick walls, strengthened with round and square towers in the ancient style of fortification, and is garrisoned with 600 Russians. [...] though not the capital, is the principal town in Lithuania, but a [...] and straggling place, containing ruined palaces, falling houses, and wretched hovels, with about 2,200 inhabitants. [Zimmerma [...].]—(Guthrie says 7,000.) A large proportion of these are employed in new manufactures of cloths, camblets, linen, cotton, silk, stuffs, &c. established there by the king in 1776. He hath also established in this [Page 233] place, an academy of physic for Lithuania, in which 10 students are instructed for physic, and so for surgery, all taught and maintained at his own expense.

Dantzic is the capital of Polish Prussia, and is famous in history on many accounts, particularly that of its being formerly at the head of the Hanseatic association, commonly called the Hanse-towns. It is situated on the Vistula, near five miles from the Baltic, and is a large, beautiful, populous city; its houses generally are five stories high; and many of its streets are planted with chesnut-trees. It has a fine harbour, and is still a most eminent commercial city, although it seems to be some what past its meridian glory, which was probably about the time that the president de Thou wrote his much esteemed Historia [...] Temporis. wherein, under the year 1607, he so highly celebrated its commerce and grandeur. It is a republic, claiming a small adjacent territory about forty miles round it, which were under the protection of the king and the republic of Poland. Its magistracy, and the majo­rity of its inhabitants, are Lutherans; although the Romanists and Calvinists are equally tolerated in it. It is rich, and has 26 parishes, with many convents and hospitals. The inhabitants have been com­puted to amount to 200,000; but later computations fall very consider­ably short of it; as appears by its annual bill of mortality, exhibited by Dr. Busching, who tells us, that in the year 1752, there died but 1846 persons. Its own shipping is numerous; but the foreign ships constantly resorting to it are more so, whereof 1014 arrived there in the year 1752; in which year also 1288 Polish vessels came down the Vistula, chiefly laden with corn, for its matchless grainaries; from whence that grain is distributed to many foreign nations: Poland being justly deemed the greatest magazine of corn in all Europe, and Dantzic the greatest port for distributing it every where: Besides which, Dantzic exports great quantities of naval stores, and a vast variety of other articles. Dr. Busching, affirms, that it appears from ancient re­cords, as early as the year [...]7, that Dantzic was a large commercial city, and not a village or inconsiderable town, as some pretend.

The inhabitants of Dantzic have often changed their masters, and have sometimes been under the protection of the English and Dutch; but generally have shewn a great predilection for the kingdom and re­public of Poland, as being less likely to rival them in their trade, or abridge them of their immunities, which reach even to the privilege of coining money. Though strongly fortified, and possessed of 150 large brass cannon, it could not, through its situation, stand a regular [...], being surrounded with eminences. In 1734, the inhabitants discovered a remarkable attachment and fidelity towards Stanislaus, king of Poland, not only, when his enemies, the Prussians, were at their gates, but even in possession of the city.

The reason why Dantzic, Thorn, and Elbing, have enjoyed privi­leges, both civil and religious, very different from those of the rest of [...]land, is, because not being able to endure the tyranny of the Teu­ [...]ic knights, they put themselves under the protection of Poland, re­serving to themselves large and ample privileges.

This city, as well as that of Thorn, were exempted by the king of Prussia from those claims which he lately made on the neighbouring countries; notwithstanding which, his Prussian majesty, soon after, [Page 234] thought proper to seize on the territories belonging to Dantzic, [...] pretence of their having been formerly part of Polish Prussia. He [...] proceeded to possess himself of the port-duties belonging to that [...] and erected a custom-house in the harbour, where he laid ari [...] and insupportable duties upon goods exported or imported. To com­plete the system of oppression, custom-houses were erected at the they gates of Dantzic, so that no persons should go in or out of the [...] without being searched in the strictest manner. Such is the [...] which the city of Dantzic has received from the king of Prussia, though few cities have ever existed, which have been comprehended in, [...] many general and particular treaties, and whose rights and liberties have been so frequently secured and guaranteed by so many great powers, and by such a long and regular succession of public acts, in that of Dantzic has been. In the year 1784, it was blockaded by his troops, on various pretences; by the interposition of the [...] Russia, and of the king of Poland, they were withdrawn, and a [...] ­ciation carried on by deputies at Warsaw; which was concluded in the 7th of September, by which, if acceeded to by the citizens, [...] place and trade of the city are to be restored to its former [...]. The city of Thorn was also treated by the king of Prussia in the same unjust and oppressive manner with that of Dantzic, and is now [...] to his dominions.

ARMY.] In the year 1784, the Army of Poland consisted of 17,404 men.

A. Army of the Crown, or of Poland.  
General Staff 27
Cavalry 5,483
Infantry 7,762
  13,272
B. Army of Lithuania.  
General Staff 26
Cavalry 2,425
Infantry 1,681
  4,132

According to an act of the senate, in 1776, the crown army ought to amount to 13,409, and that of Lithuania to 4770 men. The whole military establishment is subject to the regulations of the [...] permanent.

FINANCES.] The Revenue and Expenses on a medium of three year 1782—1784—are as follows.

Revenue 3,193,635 German dollars.
Expenses 2,825,453

Private chatuolle of the king, 1,333,000 florins.

The debts of Poland run high; the whole amount is [...] 130 million of florins, of which only 1,144,000 florins were acknowl­edged by the diet, and half a million of florins every year is appro­priated to the payment of them.

RELIGION.] The established religion is the Roman Catholic [...] Protestants, to whom the name of Dissidents is now confined, [...] [...] ­erated. In former times, the rights and numbers of the [...] [Page 235] were so great, that they claimed equal authority with the Roman Cath­olics; and about 1573, both parties were called dissidentes quoad re­ [...]. Yet afterwards, the Protestants suffered very great oppres­sion till after the late civil wars; their rights were, at length, settled in 1778, by the interference of the neighbouring powers. Besides Calvinists and Lutherans, there are, in Poland, congregations of Greeks, Unitarians and Arians, all of whom are now comprehended under the name of Dissidents. In Poland, the power of the priests, and the au­thority of the Pope, was lately very great. The Pope's nuncio had a very extensive ecclesiastical jurisdiction. At the head of the Roman Catholic clergy is the primate of Poland, who is archbishop of Gnesen: He stiles himself a prince: He had the first rank among the senators, and is legalus natus of the Holy Sec. There were (1787) in Poland, 12 bishopricks, 37 abbeys, 579 convents of men, and 86 of women.—The knights of Malta, residing in Poland, belong likewise to the clergy. The Lutheran church, is governed by a Presbytery, or considerably of the Antistites of the church and the ministers: There are great contests subsisting between the adherents of this church and the Catholics.—The Calvinists have one senior general and three seniors, to whom the government of their church is entrusted.

CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT.] Whole volumes have been written upon this subject. Before the last revolution, it differed little from an aristocracy; hence Poland hath been called a kingdom and commonwealth. The king was the head of the republic, and was elected by the nobility and clergy in the plains of Warsaw. They minority, the majority had no control over them, but to cut them in pieces with their sabrcs, but if the minority were sufficiently strong, a civil war ensued. Immediately after his election, he was to sign the pacta conventa of the kingdom, by which he engaged to introduce no foreigners into the army or government; so that in fact he was no more than president of the senate, which war composed of the primate, the archbishop of Lemburg, fifteen bishops, and 130 laymen, consist­ing of the great officers of state, the Palatines, and Castellants.

The diets of Poland was ordinary and extraordinary: The former metonce in two, and sometimes three years; the latter was summoned by the king upon critical emergencies; but one dissenting voice ren­dered all their deliberations ineffectual. But this form of government no longer exists in Poland. A glorious revolution has lately been ef­fected without bloodshed, and almost without opposition, in favour of civil and religions liberty. Its commencement may be dated from the 14th of April 1791, a day which will hereafter be memorable in the annals of Poland. In the session of that day a law was unanimously passed by the diet relative to cities and their inhabitants, which restores them to their primitive rights, associates them with the legislative pow­er, and will serve as a basis for still more extensive regulations, to re­duce the different orders of citizens, to that relative equality, which constitutes the very soul of a solid and just constitution. Upon this occasion, the plan of M. Suchorzewskia, member from Kalish, was adopted. The substance of the principles which have been decreed agreeable to this project, is, "To destroy the difference of orders and classes; to grant liberty to all citizens, without distinction; to restore [Page 236] Nobility to its true origin, that is, to the prerogative of merit and vir­tue: But at the same time, to effect these different changes by degrees, and with such precautions as will procure the success of them." Po­land may therefore date her restoration from that day; for, with such principles as these, uniformly followed up, she will become powerful from her external strength, and will be truly independent.

When the National Assembly of France reduced the Nobility to an equality with the citizens, the greater number of its members consisted of the Tiers [...]; but when Poland raised her citizens to that equality, the diet consisted of Nobility only. And yet there was no division within doors, nor commotion without. Eloquent and persuasive as the king is on all occasions, on this he seemed to out do himself. The subject touched his heart; he spoke with an uncommon degree of fire and enthusiasm, and his hearers caught the flame.

Count Malachowsky and Prince Sapaicha, marshals of the diet, [...] particularly animated and happy in the arrangement and solidity of their arguments. Prince Adam Czartoryski Wawrzecki, and [...] ­cewicz, members for Livonia, also distinguished themselves in a re­markable manner: "None of us," said this last gentlemen, speaking of the exclusion of all such as are not Nobles, from offices of trust and honours, "knows who were the ancestors, or what was the religion of WASHINGTON and FRANKLIN; but all of us know what important services these illustrious characters rendered to their country. Let not, therefore, the modesty of citizens prescribe limits to our generosity. Let us not ask, nor look into old papers to ascertain, what they have a right to demand; but let us grant them, out of our own free accord, all that the welfare of our own country requires that they should possess."

The new constitution for substance is as follows.

1. The Catholic Religion shall be the governing religion of the States, and the king shall profess it. But all other forms of worship shall be admitted, and a general toleration, civil and religious, shall be a fun­damental law of the kingdom.

2. The ancient privileges and rights of the noblesse are approved and confirmed.

3. At the same time all the rights and privileges of the people as­serted, renewed or granted to them during the present diet, are equally ratified and confirmed.

4. All strangers who arrive and settle in Poland, shall enjoy full and entire liberty.

5. The peasantry are taken under the protection of the laws and of government. They are relieved from all arbitrary impositions, and do not depend henceforth, in what regards their rights and labours, only on the contracts which they shall make with their seigniors. All for­eign labourers are free to enter and settle in Poland, or to depart, ful­filing only the obligations of the contracts they may have made with the proprietors of the soil.

6. The government of Poland, shall be composed of three branches, or distinct parts; the legislative power, the executive power, and the judicial power.

7. The legislative power belongs exclusively to the states assembled in the diet, and composed of the two connected chambers, viz. the senate and the chamber of Nuncios.

[Page 237] 8. The king shall exercise the executive power with his council. This council shall be composed of the primate and five ministers, who shall each have a department. No order of the king can be put in execution unless it is signed by the ministers, whose lives and for­tunes shall be responsible to each diet for the orders they shall sign. As soon at two thirds of the diet shall demand the change of ministers, the king shall be bound to dismiss them, and to name others in their place.

9. The election of king shall never fall hereafter on an individual. A whole family shall be elected when the royal family shall be ex­tinct

10. In case of the minority of the king, his tutelage and the regen­cy, shall be in the hands of the queen mother and the council, respon­sible to the diet.

11. The education of the King's children is confided in like man­ner.

12. The judicial power shall be fixed for each, palatinate, territory, and district. The judges shall be elected at the dictines.

The following articles were afterwards added to the new constitu­tion, and have received the unanimous sanction of the diet.

"No government, though it were the most perfect that can be im­agined, can subsist unless the executive power be enabled to act with the fullest energy.

Just and equitable laws are the foundation of national happiness. All the good effects to be expected from them, must depend on their having been vigorously executed.

Experience has taught us, that to a want of this executive energy; Poland owes all its misfortunes.

For those reasons, after having insured liberty to the Polish nation, and having made it independent; after having secured to it the right of making laws, and of watching over the executive authority, and also of choosing all public magistrates; we entrust the king, and his council, with the supreme execution of the laws.

The executive power shall be under a strict obligation to superin­tend the execution of the laws, and exemplar [...]ly to conform to them. It shall act in all cases permitted by the law: In all such cases which require a superintendance, execution, and even a coercive force. All magistrates are bound to obey it implicitly; and by it they are liable to be punished for neglect of duty of disobedience.

The executive power shall neither make laws nor explain them. I shall not impose taxes, or lay contributions. It shall not contract debts, not make the least alteration in the collection of the revenue, and finally, it shall neither declare war, not make peace; nor make any treaties with other powers. It shall only be enabled to have a temporary correspondence with foreign courts, so far as the safety and tranquillity of the state may require; and for this it shall be accounta­ble to the following legislature."

The king declared that the constitution had been, formed out of the English and American forms of government.

REMARKABLE EVENTS.] During the years 1760, 1770, and 1771, confusion, devastation, and civil war, raged in Poland, by which they whole face of the country was almost destroyed; many of the princi­pal [Page 238] Polish families retired into foreign states with their effects; and had it not been for a body of Russian troops which acted as [...] [...] the king at Warsaw, that city had likewise exhibited a scene of plunder and massacre. To these complicated evils, were added, in the year 1770, that most dreadful scourge the pestilence, which spread from [...] frontiers of Turkey, to the adjoining provinces of Podolia, Volhinia [...] the Ukraine; and in these provinces it is said to have swept off 250,000 of the people. Meanwhile, some of the Polish confederates inter [...] with the Turks to assist them against their powerful oppressors; [...] war ensued between the Russians and the Turks on account of Poland. But it has been observed, that the conduct of the Grand Signi [...] [...] of the Ottoman Porte towards the distressed Poles, were strictly [...] and honourable, and the very reverse of that of their Christian, Catho­lic, and Apostolic neighbours.

In 1764, the empress of Russia transmitted to the court of [...] an act of renunciation, singed with her own hand, and sealed with [...] seal of the empire, wherein she declares, "That she did by no [...] arrogate either to herself, her heirs and successors, or to her empire any right or claim to the districts or territories, which were actually by possession, or subject to the authority of the kingdom of Poland [...] great duchy of Lithuania; but that, on the contrary, her said majesty would guarantee to the said kingdom of Poland and duchy of Lithuan [...] all the immunities, lands, territories, and districts, which the said king­dom and duchy ought by right to possess, or did now actually possess and would at all times, and for ever, maintain them in full and [...] enjoyment thereof, against the attempts of all and every one who should at any time, or on any pretext, endeavour to dispossess then of the same," In the same year did the king of Prussia sign, with his own hand, an act, wherein he declared, that he had no claims, [...] no pretensions on Poland, or any part thereof: That he renounced all claims on that kingdom, either as king of Prussia, elector of Bran­denburg, or duke of Pomerania," In the same instrument he guaran­tees, in the most solemn manner, the territories and rights of Poland against every power whatever. The empress-queen of Hungary, so late as the month of January 1771, wrote a letter with her-own hand to the king of Poland, in which she gave him the strongest assurances. "That her friendship for him and the republic was firm and una [...] ­ble: That the motion of her troops ought not to alarm him: That [...] had never entertained a thought of seizing any part of his dominions, nor would even suffer any other power to do it." From which, ac­cording to the political creed of princes, we may infer, that to guaran­tee the rights, liberties, and revenues of a state, means to anni [...] those liberties, seize upon those rights, and appropriate those reven [...] to then own use. Such is the faith of princes, the instability of human polities, and of human affairs.

On September 3d, 1791, an attempt was made by Kozinski, an of­ficer among the Polish confederates, and several others, to assassinate the king of Poland, in the streets of Warsaw. His majesty receive two wounds on his head, one from a ball, and the other from a [...] notwithstanding which he had the good fortune to escape with [...] by Kozinski's relenting, for which his own life was saved, and he now resides in the papal teritories, with an annual pension [...] [Page 239] the king. Pulaski, another of the conspirators, distinguished himself in the American service, and was killed in attacking the British lines at Savannah, in 1779.

The following year, 1772, it appeared, that the king of Prussia, the [...] and empress-queen, and the empress of Russia, had entered into an alliance to divide and dismember the kingdom of Poland: though Prussia was formerly in a state of vassalage to Poland, and the those of king of Prussia was never acknowledged by the Poles till 1764. Prussia in the beginning of the 17th century saw its capital and throne possessed by the Poles, while Austria in 1683 was indebted to a king of [...] for the preservation of its metropolis, and almost for its very [...]ence. The three allied powers, acting in concert, set up their for­ [...]al pretensions to the respective districts which they had allotted for and guaranteed to each other: Polish, or Western Prussia, and some districts bordering upon Brandenburgh, for the king of Prussia; almost all of the south-east parts of the kingdom bordering upon Hungary, to­gether with the rich salt-works of the crown, for the empress queen of Hungary and Bohemia; * and a large district of country about Mo­ [...], upon the banks of the Dnieper, for the empress of Russia. —But though each of the powers pretended to have a legal title to the [...]ortories which were allotted them respectively, and published man­ [...] in justification of the measures which they had taken, yet as they were conscious that the fallacies by which they supported their pretensions were too gross to impose upon mankind, they forced the [...] to call a new diet, and threatened them, that if they did not consent unanimously to sign a treaty for the ceding of those provinces as them respectively, the whole kingdom would by laid under a milita­ry execution, and treated as a conquered state. In this extremity of [...]stress several of the Polish nobility protested against this violent act of tyranny, and retired into foreign states, choosing rather to live in [...]ile, and to have all their landed property confiscated, than be the instruments of bringing their country to utter ruin; but the king of Poland was prevailed upon to sign this act, and his example was follow­ed by many of his subjects.

As to the king of Prussia, his conduct in Poland was the most tyran­ [...]cal and oppressive that can be conceived. It was in the year 1771 that his troops entered into Great Poland, and during the space of that year be carried off from that province, and its neighbourhood, at a moderate computation, 12,000 families. On the 29th of October, in the same year, an edict was published by his Prussian majesty, com­monding every person, under the severest penalties, and even corporal punishment, to take in payment for forage, provisions, corn, horses, [Page 240] &c. the money offered by his troops and commissaries. This mone [...] was either silver bearing the impression of Poland, and exactly want one-third of its nominal value, or ducats struck in imitation of [...] ducats, seventeen per cent, inferior to the real ducats of Holland. With this base money he bought up corn and forage enough, not [...] ­ly to supply his army for two whole years, but to stock magani [...] in the country itself, where the inhabitants were forced to [...] and re-purchase corn for their daily subsistence at an advanced [...], and with good money, his commissaries refusing to take the [...] coin they had paid. At the lowest calculation he gained, by [...] most wicked manoeuvre, seven millions of dollars. Having [...] ­ped the country of money and provisions, his next attempt was to [...] it still more of its inhabitants. To people his own dominions, at the expense of Poland, had been his great aim; for this purpose he his upon a new contribution; every town and village was obliged to [...] ­nish a certain number of marriageable girls; the parents to give as a portion, a feather-bed, four pillows, a cow, two hogs, and three [...] in gold. Some were bound hand and spot, and carried off as criminals. His exactions from the abbeys, convents, cathedrals, and nobles, wen [...] so heavy, and exceeded at last their abilities so much, that their pri [...]sh abandoned their churches, and the nobles their lands. These exac­tions continued with unabated rigour, from the years 1771, to the aims the treaty of partition was declared, and possession taken of the prov­inces usurped. From these proceedings it would appear that his Prus­sian majesty knew no rights but his own; on pretentions but those of Brandenburgh; no other rule of justice but his own pride and [...] ­tion.

The violent dismemberment and partition of Poland * has justly been considered as the first great beach in the modern political system of Europe. The surprise of a town, the invasion of an insignificant prov­ince, or the election of a prince, who had neither abilities to be feared, nor virtues to be loved, would some years age have armed one half of Europe, and called forth all the attention of the other. But the di­struction of a great kingdom, with the consequent derangement of power, dominion, and commerce, has been beheld by the other na [...]on of Europe with the most astonishing indifference and unconcern. The courts of London, Paris, Stockholm, and Copenhagen, remonstrated against the usurpations, but that was all. Poland was forced to sub­mit, and the partition was ratified by their diet, held under the bribes and threats of the three powers. In the senate there was a majority of six, but in the lower house, the assembly of nuncios, there was but one vote in favour of the measure, 54 against 53. This is a very alar­ming circumstance, and shews that a most important, though not happy change, has taken place in that general system of policy, and arrangement of power and dominion, which had been for some ages no object of unremitting attention with most of the states of Europe. Former kings might, perhaps, on some occasions, discover rather [...] anxiety about preserving the balance of power in Europe than was [Page 241] [...]: but it has been well remarked, that the idea of considering Europe as a vast commonwealth, of the several parts being distinct and separate, though politically and commercially united, of keeping them Independent, though unequal in power, and of preventing any one, by any means, from becoming too powerful for the rest, was great and [...], and, though the result of barbarism, was sounded upon the most [...]nlarged principles of the wisest policy.

[...]nistans Augustus, the present king of Poland, whose memory is [...] to all lovers of liberty, by the late memorable Revolution, was been in 1732, and crowned king of Poland in 1764. This prince, while a private nobleman, resided some time in London, and is a follow of the Royal Society. Long may he live!

SWITZERLAND.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 260 Miles. between Degrees. 6 and 11 east longitude.
Breadth 100 Miles. Degrees. 46 and 48 north latitude.

BOUNDARIES.] IT is bounded by Alsace and Suabia, in Germany, on the North; by the lake of Constance, Tirol, and T [...]nt on the East; by Italy, on the South; and by France, on the West.

DIVISIONS.] Switzerland is divided into thirteen cantons, which send in point of precedency as follows: 1. Zurich; 2. Berne; 3; Lucerne; 4. Uri; 5. Schweitz; 6. Underwalden; 7. Zug; 8. Glaris; 9. Basil; 10. Fribourg; 11. Soleure; 12. Schaffhausen; 13. Ap­p [...]nsel.

The best account we have of the dimensions and principal towns of each canton, is as follows: [Page 242]

Switzerland. Countires Names. Square Miles. Length. Breadth. Chief Cities.
Calvinists. Berne 2,346 111 87 Berne
Zurich 728 34 33 Zurich
Schaffhausen 140 23 9 Schaffhausen
Basil 240 21 18 BASIL 47-4 [...],7-40E [...]
Catholics. Lucerne 460 33 35 Lucerne
Underwalden 270 23 16 Stantz
Uri 612 48 21 Altorf
Suisse 250 27 13 Suisse
Fribourg 370 24 21 Fribourg
Zug 112 18 10 Zug
Soleure 253 31 24 Soleure or Sol [...]th [...]
Calvinists and Catholics. Appen [...]el 270 23 21 Appen [...]el
Glaris 257 24 18 Glaris
The subjects of the Swiss, Cal­vinists and Catholics. Baden 216 26 12 Baden
Bremgarten Bremgarten
Mellingen Mellingen
Rheinthal 40 20 5 Rheineck
Thurgau 119 18 11 Frowanfield
Lugano 850 52 30 Lugano
Locarno Locarno
Mendris Mendris
Maggia Magia
Swiss Allies.          
Calvinists Grisons 2,270 100 62 Coire
Subjects of the Grisons. Cal­vinists & Cath. Chiavnna 472 42 34 Chiavanna
Bormio & Valteine 360 27 19 Sondrio
Calvinists. Tockenburg 168 27 8 Liechtensteg
Geneva 160 13 11 Geneva
Neufchatel 320 32 20 Neufchatel
Catholics. Valais 1,287 80 30 Sion
Basle 270 13 16 Delsperg
St. Gall 144 20 10 St. Gall Mulhausen, in [...] is also united to [...]
  Total 12,884      

AIR, CLIMATE, SOIL, AND FACE OF THE COUNTRY.} This being a mountainous country, lying upon the Alps, (which form an amphitheater of more than 100 miles) the fresh on consequently bitter in winter, the hills being covered with some­times all the year. In summer the inequality of the soil readens the same province very unequal in its seasons; on one side of those main­tains the inhabitants are often reaping, while they are sowing an [...] other. The vallies, however, are warm and fruitful, and well [...] ­vated, and nothing can be more delightful than the summer [...] this charming country. It is subject to rains and tempests; for [...] [Page 243] [...]nson public granaries are every where erected to supply the failure of their crops. The water of Switzerland is generally excellent, and often descends from the mountains in large of small cataracts, which have a delightful effect.

There is, perhaps, no country in the world wherein the advanta­geous effects of unwearied and persevering industry are more remarka­bly ocaspicuous than in Switzerland. In passing over the mountain­ous parts of it, the traveller is struck with admiration, to observe rocks that were formerly barren, now planted with vines, or abounding with rich pasture; and to mark the traces of the plough along the sides of precipices so steep, that a horse could not even ascend them without great difficulty. In short, the inhabitants seem to have sur­mounted every obstruction which soil, situation, and climate had thrown in their way, and to have spread fertility over various spots of the country, which nature seemed to have consigned to everlasting [...]renness. The feet of the mountains, and sometimes also the very summits, are covered with vineyards, cornfields, meadows, and pas­ture-grounds. Other parts of this country are more dreary, consisting almost entirely of barren and inaccessible rocks, some of which are continually covered with snow or ice. The vallies, between these icy and snowy mountains, appear like so many smooth frozen lakes, and from them vast fragments of ice frequently fall down into the more fruitful spots beneath. In some parts, there is a regular gradation from extreme wildness, to high cultivation; in others the transitions me very abrupt, and very striking. Sometimes a continued chain of cultivated mountains, richly clothed with wood, and studded all over with hamlets cottages above the clouds, pastures, which appear sus­pended in the air, exhibit the most delightful landscape that can be conceived; and in other places appear rugged rocks, cataracts, and mountains of a prodigious height, covered with ice and snow. In short, Switzerland abounds with the most picturesque scenes; and here are to be sound some of the sublime exhibitions of nature, in her most awful and tremendous forms.

RIVERS AND LAKES.] The chief rivers are the Rhine, which rises is the chain of mountains bordering on St. Gothard, the Aar, the R [...]uss, the Tesin, the Oglio, and the Rhone. The lakes are those of Geneva, Constance, Thun, Lucerne, Zurich, Biel, and Brien.

METALS AND MINDRALS.] The mountains contain mines of iron, crystal, virgin sulphur, and springs of mineral waters.

VIGETABLE AND ANIMAL PRODUCTIONS.] Switzerland produces sheep and cattle, wine, wheat, barley, oats, rye, flax, and hemp; plenty of apples, pears, nuts, cherries, plums, and chesnuts; the parts towards [...]ly abound in peaches, almonds, figs, citrons, and pomegrantes; and must of the cantons abound in timber. Besides game, fish, and fowl, any also found, in some of the higher and more inaccessible parts of the Alps, the bouquetin and the chamois; whose activity in scouring along the steep and craggy rocks, and in leaping over the precipices, [...]irdly conceivable. The blood of both these animals is of so hot [...]ature, that the inhabitants of some of these mountains, who are why subject to pleurisies, take a few drops of it, mixed with water, (in remedy for that disorder. The flesh of the chamois is esteemed [...] delicious. Among the Alps is likewise found a species of hares, [Page 244] which in summer is said perfectly to resemble other hares, but in winter becomes all over white, so that they are scarcely distinguishable among the snow. But this idea hath been lately exploded, not is it certain whether the two species ever couple together. The white hare seld [...] quits his rocky residence. Here are also yellow and white [...] which in winter sometimes come down into the vallies.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MANNERS, CUSTOMS, AND DIVERSIONS.} According to the [...] accounts, the cantana [...] Switzerland contain about 2,000,000 of inhabitants, who are a brave hardy, industrious people, remarkable for their fidelity, and their [...] attachment to the liberties of their country. Like the old Roman they are equally inured to arms and agriculture. A general simpli [...] of manners, an open and unaffected frankness, together with an [...] spirit of freedom, are the most distinguishing characteristicks of the inhabitants of Switzerland. They are in general a very enlighten­ed nation; their common people are far more intelligent then the [...] rank of men in most other countries; a taste for literature is very pu [...] ­alent among those who are in better circumstances, and even among many of the lowest rank; and a genuine and unartful good breeding is very conspicuous in the Swiss gentry. On the first entrance into this country, the traveller cannot but observe the air of cont [...] and satisfaction which appears in the countenances of the inhabitants. The cleanliness of the houses, and of the people, is peculiarly strikings and in all their manners, behaviour, and dress, some strong out [...] may be traced, which distinguish this happy people from the neigh­bouring nations, who labour under the oppressions of despotic govern­ment. Even the Swiss cottages convey the liveliest image of cl [...] ­ness, ease, and simplicity, and cannot but strongly impress upon [...] observer a most pleasing conviction of the peasant's happiness. [...] some of the cantons, each cottage has its little territory, consisting gen­erally of the field or two of sine pasture ground, and frequently skirted with trees, and well supplied with water. Sumptuary laws are in force in most parts of Switzerland; and no dancing is allowed, except upon particular occasions. Silk, lace and several other articles of luxury, are totally prohibited in some of the cantons; and even the head-dresses of the ladies are regulated. All games of hazard are also strictly prohibited; and in other games, the party who loses above six florins, which is about nine shillings of our money, incurs a considera­ble sine. Their diversions, therefore, are chiefly of the active and warlike kind; and as their time is not wasted in games of chance, many of them employ part of their leisure hours in reading, to the great improvement of their understandings. The youth are diligently traic [...] ­ed to all the martial exercises, such as running, wrestling, throwing the hammer, and shooting both with the cross bow and musket.

RELIGION.] Though all the Swiss cantons form but one political republic, yet they are not united in religion, as the reader, in the [...] prefixed, may perceive. Those differences in religion formerly [...] many republican commotions, which seem now to have subsided [...] Zuinglius was the apostle of protestantism in Switzerland. He [...] a moderate reformer, and differed from Luther and Calvin only [...] few speculative points; so that Calvinism is said to be the relig [...] the protestant Swisses. But this must be understood chiefly [...] [Page 245] [...]pect to the mode of church government; for in some doctrinal points they are far from being universally Calvinistical. There is, however, we much religious bigotry prevalent among them; and though they are ardently attached to the interests of civil liberty, their sentiments on the subject of religious toleration are, in general, much less liberal.

LANGUAGE.] Several languages prevail in Switzerland; but the most common is German. The Swisses who border upon France speak a bastard French, as those near Italy do a corrupted Latin or Indian.

LEAENING AND LEARNES MEN.] Calvin, whose name is so well [...]own in all protestant countries, institused laws for the city of Gene­raly, which are held in high esteem by the most learned of that country. The ingenious and eloquent, but deistical J. J. Rousseau too, whose works the present age have received with so much approbation, was a [...]tiaen of Geneva. Rousseau gave a force to the French language, which it was thought incapable of receiving. In England he is gener­ally known as a prose-writer only, but the French admire him as a poet­ [...] opera of Devin du Village in particular is much esteemed. M. [...]net, and Mess. de Saussure, De Luc, De Lolme, the Marquis Bec­ [...]ia and Lavater, also deserve to be mentioned with applause, and will be remembered till the Alps shall be no more.

UNIVERSITIES.] The university of Basil, which was founded in 1459, has a very curious physic-garden, which contains the choicest exotics; and adjoining to the library, which contains some valuable manuscripts, is a Museum well furnished with natural and artificial curiosities, and with a great number of medals or paintings. In the cabinets of Erasmus and Amerbach, which also belong to this universi­ty, there are no less than twenty original pieces of Holbein; for one of which, representing the death of our blessed Saviour, a thousand ducats have been ostered. The other universities, which indeed are commonly only stiled colleges, are those of Bern, Lausanne, and Zurich.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} Every district of a canton in this mountainous country, presents the traveller with a natural curiosity; sometimes in the shape of wild but beautiful prospects, interspersed with lofty buildings, and wonderful hermitages, especially one, two leagues from Friburg.—This was formed by the hands of a single hermit, who laboured on it far 25 years, and was living in 1709. It is the greatest curiosity of the kind perhaps in the world, as it contains a chapel, a parlour 28 paces in length, 12 in breadth, and 20 feet in height, a cabinet, a kitch­en, a cellar, and other apartments, with the altar, benches, flooring, ceiling, all cut out of the rock. At the famous pass of Pierre Pertuis, the road is carried through a solid rock, near 50 feet thick, the height of the arch 26, and its breadth 25. The marcafites, false diamonds, and other stones, found in those mountains, are justly ranked among the natural curiosities of the country. The ruins of Caesar's wall, [...] extended 18 miles in length, from Mount Jura to the banks of [...] Lemon, are still discernible. Many monuments of antiquity have [...] discovered near the baths of Baden, which were known to the [...] in the time of Tacitus. Switzerland boasts of many noble re­ [...] buildings, particularly a college of jesuits; and many cabinets [Page 246] of valuable manuscrip's, antiques, and curiosities of all kinds. New Rosiniere, is a famous spring which rises in the midst of a natural before of 12 square feet: The force that acts upon it must be prodigious; after a great shower of rain, it carries up a column of water as thick as a man's thigh, nearly a foot above its surface. Its temperature never varies; its surface is clear as crystal, and its depth unfathomable; probably the end of some subterraneous lake, that bath here found an issue for its waters.

CITIES.] Of these the most considerable is the city o Born, stand­ing on the river Aar. This city and canton, it is said, forms almost a third of the Helvetic confederacy, and can, upon occasion, fit out 100,000 armed men. All the other cities in Switzerland are except lently well provided with arsenals, bridges, and public edifices. Basil is accounted by some the capital of all Switzerland. It is situated in a fertile and delightful country, on the banks of the Rhine, and the confines of Alsace and the empire. It contains two hundred and twenty streets, and six market-places. The town-house, which stands on the river Birsec, is supported by very large pillars, and its great hall is finely painted by the celebrated Hans Holbein, who was a na­tive of this city. The situation of Basil is pleasing: The Rhine di­vides it into the upper and lower town, and it is considered as one of the keys of Switzerland. Baden is famous for its antiquity and baths. Zurich is far less considerable than Bern, but in the arsenal is shown the bow of the famous William Tell, and in the library is a manufacturing of excellent letters, written by the unfortunate Lady Jane Grey, to the judicious reformer Bullinger, in elegant Latin and German.

To prevent a repetition, I shall here mention the city of Geneva, which is an associate of Switzerland, and is under the protection of the Helvetic body, but within itself is an independent state, and repub­lic. The city is well built, and well fortified, and contains 24,000 inhabitants, most of whom are Calvinists. It is situated upon the afflux of the Rhone from the large fine lake of Geneva. It is celebrat­ed for the learning of the professors of its university, and the good government of its colleges, the purity of its air, and the politeness of its inhabitants. By its situation, it is a thoroughfare from Germany, France, and Italy. It contains a number of fine manufactures and artists; so that the protestants, especially such as are of a liberal turn, esteem it a most delightful place. But the fermentation of their poli­tics, and particularly the usurpation of the Senate, bath divided the citizens into parties, and the late struggle of Patricians and Ple­beians had nearly ruined all. The city is now under the protections of France, or rather its magistrates and council, the partizans of aristo­cracy; many of its valuable citizens have accordingly let the place, and sought refuge and protection in Ireland and other parts.

COMMERCE AND MANUFACTCRES.] The productions of the [...] linen, dimity, lace, stockings, handkerchiefs, ribands, silk, and painted cottons, and gloves, are common in Switzerland, and the inhabitants are now beginning, notwithstanding their sumptuary laws, to fabri [...] silks, velvets, and woollen manufactures. Their great progress in these manufactures, and in agriculture, gives them a prospect of being able soon to make considerable exports.

CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT.] These are very complicated heads, though belonging to the same body, being partly aristocra [...], [Page 247] and partly democratical. Every canton is absolute in its own jurisdic­tion, but those of Bern, Zurich, and Lucerne, with other dependencies, are aristocratical, with a certain mixture of democracy, Bern excepted. These of Uri, Schweitz, Underwald, Zug, Glaris, and Appenzel, are democratical. Basil, though it has the appearance of an aristocracy, [...]ther inclines to a democracy. But even those aristocracies and de­mocracies differ in their particular modes of government. However, in all of them the real interests of the people appear to be much attend­ed [...], and they enjoy a degree of happiness not to be expected in de [...] ­ [...]tic governments. Each canton hath prudently reconciled itself to [...] errors of its neighbour, and cemented, on the basis of affection, a [...] of mutual defence.

The confederacy, considered as a republic, comprehends three divi­sions. The first are the Swisses, properly so called. The second are the Grisons, or the states confederated with the Swisses, for their common protection. The third are those prefectures, which, though subject to the other two, by purchase or otherwise, prefer [...]e each its [...] particular magistrates. Every canton forms within itself a little republic; but when any controversy arises that may affect the whole confederacy, it is referred to the general diet, which fits at Baden, where each canton having a vote, every question is decided by the majority. The general diet consists of two deputies from each canton, besides a deputy from the abbot of St. Gall, and the cities of St. Gall [...]. It is observed by Mr. Coxe, to whom the public have been [...]ted for the best account of Switzerland that has appeared, that there is no country in which happiness and content more universally [...] among the people: For whether the government be aristocratical, democratical, or mixed, a general spirit of liberty pervades and actuates the several constitutions; so that even the oligarchical states (which, of all others, are usually the most tyrannical) are here peculiarly mild; and the property of the subject is securely guarded against every kind of violation. A harmony is maintained by the con­currence of their mutual felicity; and their sumptuary laws, and equal division of their fortunes among their children, seem to ensure its con­tinuance. There is no part of Europe which contains, within the [...] extent of region, so many independent commonwealths, and such a variety of different governments, as are collected together in this remarkable and delightful country; and yet, with such wisdom was the Helvetic union composed, and so little have the Swiss, of late yours, been actuated by the spirit of conquest, that since the firm and complete establishment of their general confederacy, they have scarcely over had occasion to employ their arms against a foreign enemy; and have had no hostile commotions among themselves, that were not very [...] happily terminated.

REVENUES AND TAXES.] The variety of cantons that constitute the Swiss confederacy, renders it difficult to give a precise account of their revenues. Those of the canton of Bern are said to amount an­nually to 300,000 crowns, and those of Zurich to 150,000; the other [...] in proportion to their produce and manufactures. Whatever [...] [...], after defraying the necessary expenses of government, is [...]id up as a common stock; and it has been said, that the Swisses [...] possessed of 500,000l. sterling in the English funds, besides those [...] other banks.

[Page 248] The revenues arise, 1. From the profits of the demesne lands; 2. The tenth of the produce of all the lands in the country; 3. Customs and duties on merchandise; 4. The revenues arising from the salt of salt, and some casual taxes.

MILITARY STRENGTH.] The internal strength of the Swiss canton, independent of the militia, consists of 13,400 men, raised according to the population and abilities of each. The oeconomy and wisdom [...] which this force is raised and employed, are truly admirable, as [...] the arrangements which are made by the general diet, for keeping [...] that great body of militia, from which foreign states and princes [...] supplied, so as to benefit the state, without any prejudice to its popu­lation. Every burgher, peasant, and subject, is obliged to [...] himself in the use of arms; to appear on the stated days for shooting [...] mark▪ to furnish himself with proper clothing, accoutrements, powder, and ball; and to be always ready for the defence of his country. The Swiss engage in the service of foreign princes and states, either merely as guards, or as marching regiments. In the latter case, the govern­ment permits the enlisting volunteers, though only for such states [...] they are in alliance with, or with whom they have entered into a previous agreement on that article. But no subject is to be forced into foreign service, or even to be enlisted without the concurrence of the magistracy.

HISTORY.] The present Swisses and Grisons, as has been already mentioned, are the descendants of the ancient Helvetii, subdued by Ju­lius Caesar. Their mountainous, uninviting situation, formed a better security for their liberties, than their forts or armies; and the same [...] the case at present. They continued long under little better than a nominal subjection to the Burgundians and Germans, till about the year 1300, when the emperor Albert I. treated them with so much rigour, that they petitioned him against the cruelty of his governors. This served only to double the hardships of the people; and one of Albert's Austrain governors, Gresler, in the wantonness of tyranny, set up a hat upon a pole, to which he ordered the natives to pay as much respect as to himself. One William Tell, being observed to pass frequently without taking notice of the hat, and being an excel­lent marksman, the tyrant condemned him to be hanged, unless he cl [...]ft an apple upon his son's head, at a certain distance, with an ar­row. Tell cleft the apple; and Gresler asking him the meaning of another arrow he saw stuck in his belt, he bluntly answered, that it was intended for his [Gersler's] heart, if he had killed his son. Tell was condemned in prison upon this; but making his escape, he watched his opportunity. and shot the tyrant, and thereby laid the foundations of the Helevic liberty.

It appears, however, that before this event, the revolt of the Swiss from the Austrain tyranny had been planned by some noble patriots among them. Their measures were so just, and their course so intrep­id, that they soon effected a union of several cantons.

Zurich, driven by oppression, sought first an alliance with Lucerne, Uri, Suisse, and Underwald, on the principles of mutual defence; and the frequent successes of their arms against Albert, duke of Austria, in­sensibly formed the grand Helvetic union. They first Conquered Glaris and Zug, and admitted them to an equal participation of their [Page 249] rights. Berne united itself in 1353: Friburg and Soleure, 130 years after; Basil and Scaffhausen, in 1501; and Appenzel in 1513, com­pleted the confederacy, which repeatedly defeated the united powers of France and Germany; till by the treaty of Westphalia in 1648, their confederacy was declared to be a free and independent state.

Neufchatel, since the year 1707, hath been under the dominion of the king of Prussia, but the inhabitants are free to serve any prince what­ever, and by no means bound to take an active part in his wars. The king hath the power of recruiting among them, and of naming a gov­ernor, but the revenue he derives is not above 5000l. yearly, great part of which is laid out on the roads and other public works of the coun­try. With regard to the military character, and great actions of the Swisses, we refer the reader to the histories of Europe.

NETHERLANDS.

THE seventeen provinces, which are known by the name of the Netherlands, were formerly part of Gallia Belgica, and after­wards of the circle of Belgium or Burgundy, in the German empire. They obtained the general name of Netherlands, Pais-Bas, or Low Countries, from their situation in respect of Germany.

EXTENT, SITUATION, AND BOUNDARIES OF THE SEVENTEEN PROVINCES.

Length 360 between 49 and 54 North lat.

Breadth 260 between 2 and 7 East lon.

They are bounded by the German sea on the North: by Germany, East; by Lorrain and France, South; and by the British Channel, West.

We shall, for the sake of perspicuity, and to avoid repetition, treat of the seventeen provinces under two great divisions: First, the Nor­thern, which contains the seven United Provinces, usually known by the name of HOLLAND: Secondly, the Southern, containing the Austrian, and French Netherlands.

DIVISIONS, POPULATION, &c. of the Seven United Provinces, are as in the following Table.

[Page 250]

Extent, Divisions, and Possessions. Areas in squ. miles. Population Population for each sin­gle sq. mile. CHIEF TOWNS.
51°. 20′.—53°. 30′. Latitude 10,000 2,000,000 Pestel. 200 113 Towns—1400 Villages.
2°—7. East Longitude   2,758,632 according to a public acc. given in 1785. 272  
1. Province of GRIDER. Subdivided into the districts of Nimwe­guen, Zutphen, and Arnheim 1840     20 Towns in all. inhabitants.
    Nimweguen 12,000
Nutphen
Arnheim 8000
2. HOLLAND, Viz, 2000 980,000 Pestel. 490 Amsterdam 212,000
North Holland       Rotterdam 50,000
South Holland       Hang or Hague 37,000
Westfriesland       Leyden 48,000
  Dordrecht 19,000
Haarlem 39,000
Delft 20,000
Alckmar 7,800
Horn 12,000
Gouda 17,000
3. ZEELAND. 480 85,000 177 37 Towns—400 Villages.
1. Part near the East Scheld   5 Towns—110 Villages.
2. Part near the West— Utrecht [...]0,000 [...]
  [...]

[Page 251]

Extent, Divisions, and Possessions. Areas in squ. miles. Population. [...] for each sin­gle sq. mile. CHIEF TOWNS.
4. UTREOHT. 512 75,000 Busching. 144 Towns. Inhabitants.
1. The towns   Middleburg 24,000
2. The flat country Vlissingen (Flushing) 8,000
        [...]i [...]kzee 10,500
5. FRIESLAND. 880 140,000 Busching. 159 11 Towns—306 Villages.
1. The towns   Leuwarden
2. Ostfriesland Franeker
3. Westergo  
4. Zeven Wonden
6. OVERYESSEL. 1791     Deventer
1. Sallard       Zwool
2. Twent  
3. Vollenhoven
7. GROENINGEN. 640 100,000 156 Groeningen
1. Town of Groeningen   Delfzyl
2. Ommeland 3 Towns—165 Villages
Country of Drenthe, Under the protection of the United provinces       K [...]eronden (Fortress) [...]7 Villages
Lands of the Generality. (Generalyteits Landen) Commonly Call­ed Dutch Brabant 2000 435,000 217 Boisle Due 12,000
  Breda 9,500
Bergen op Zoom 6,500
Mastricht 18,060  
Venloo  
Sluis  
Hulst 2500
[Page 252]

POSSESSIONS.

1. IN ASIA.

1. THE coasts of the island of Java; the capital of which is [...] ­via, the seat of the governor-general of all the East Indian settlements of the Dutch. 2. Some settlements on the coasts of Sumatra. 3. The greatest part of the Molucca or Spice Islands, chiefly Amboyna, [...], Ternate, Tidor, Motyr, Bachian; settlements or factories on the island of Celebes, &c. 4. On the coasts of Malabar and Coromandel; S [...] ­patam, Bimlipatam. Tegapatam, Cochin, and Canannore; factories Surat, Petra, &c. also in the gulf of Persia, at Gamron, Baffora, [...]. 5. On the island of Ceylon: The chief place is Colombo; they [...] besides Trinconomale, Jafnapatam, Negambo, and a great number of lodges or factories.

2. IN AFRICA.

1. The Cape of Good Hope, a large settlement, of which the Cape [...], with its fortress, is the capital. There is also a French colony at [...] Cape, called Nouvelle Rochelle. The governor of the Cape does [...] depend on the governor of Batavia, but is under the immediate con­trol of the states of Holland. 2. George de la Mina, and other for­tresses and factories in Guinea.

3. IN AMERICA.

1. The Islands of St. Eustatia, Saba, Curacoa. 2. The colonies of Essequibo, Demerara, Surinam, and Berbice, on the continent of Guiana.

RIVERS AND HARBOURS.] The rivers are an important considera­tion to the United Provinces; the chief of which are the Rhine, [...] of the largest and finest rivers in Europe; the Maese, the Scheld, and the Vecht. There are many small rivers that join these, and a pro­digious number of canals; but there are few good harbours in the United Provinces; the best, are those of Rotterdam, Helvoetsluys, and Flushing; that of Amsterdam, though one of the largest and safest i [...] Europe, has ab [...] at the entrance of it, over which large vessels can [...] pass without being lightened.

WEALTH AND COMMERCE.] The Seven United Provinces afford a striking process that unwearied and persevering industry is capable of conquering every disadvantage of climate and situation. The air and the water any here nearly equally bad: The soil produces natur­ally scarcely any thing but turf; and the possession of this very [...] is disputed by the Ocean, who rising considerably above the level of the land, can only be prevented by strong and expensive dy [...], from overflowing a spot which seems to be stolen from his natural domains. Notwithstanding these difficulties, which might seem in­surmountable to a less laborious race of inhabitants, the infinite labours of the patient Dutchmen have rendered this small, and seemingly is significant territory, in fact, one of the richest spots in Europe, [...] with respect to population and property. In other countries, which [Page 253] are possessed of a variety of natural productions, we are not surprised to find manufactures employed in multiplying the riches which the bounty of the soil bestows. But to see, in a country like Holland, large woollen manufactures, where there are scarce any flocks; num­berless artists employed in metals, where there is no mine; thousands of saw-mills, where there is scarce any forest; an immense quantity of corn, exported from a country where there is not agriculture enough [...] support one-half of its inhabitants, is what must strike every atten­tive observer with admiration. Among the most valuable natural productions of the United Netherlands, we may reckon their excellent cattle. Of vegetables they export large quantities of madder, which i [...] chiefly cultivated in the province of Zeeland. The island of Schou­wen produces annually 2,000,000 lb. Formerly, England bought of this article to the value of almost 300,000l. sterling. The most con­siderable revenue arises from the fisheries. Sir William Temple says, that in his time, the Dutch fisheries yielded a clear profit of many mill­ions of florins. At present, however, some branches of the fisheries, for instance, the whale fishery, are become so insignificant, that, in order to keep them up in some degree, the states are obliged to allow a bounty of 30 florins for every man employed in the whale fishery. This branch, which formerly employed 250 vessels, requires, at present [...] more than 100. The number of ships formerly engaged in the [...]ring fishery is reduced from upwards of 2000 to less than 200. and the profits earned by them do not quite amount to one million of flor­ins. This fishery maintains, however, even now, no less than 20,000 people. Cod, another important article of the fishery, is caught near the Dogger Bank, and near the coast of Holland. About 140 vessels are employed in that branch.

The Dutch were formerly in possession of the coasting trade and [...]ight of almost all other trading nations: They were also the bankers for all Europe: advantages by which they have gained immense sums. Yet these advantages did not continue to be so lucrative, when the other European nations began to open their eyes so far as to employ their own shipping in their trade, and to establish banks of their own. Notwithstanding these deductions, the Dutch trade is still immense: In consequence of their vast wealth, they regulate still the exchange for all Europe; and their country is, as it were, the universal ware­house of the commodities of every quarter of the globe.

The trade of Holland extends to every country of the world; and, i [...] some of its branches, they have totally excluded their European competitors. To begin with the countries of Europe, the trade of the Dutch to Russia is considerable: They exported to Petersburg alone, in 1754, goods to the value of 420,000 rubles, besides what was sent to Archangel, Riga, &c. They imported goods from Russia to the value of about 300,000 rubles. The exports of the Dutch to Dantzick, the centre of the Polish trade, amounted, in 1771, to upwards of five mill­ions of florins; their imports from Dantzick to 2,500,000 florins. A considerable trade is carried on with Sweden and Denmark. The [...] trade in the Baltic, if not equal to the English, is, at least, next [...] in importance; yet, in proportion as the other European nations [...] endeavouring to share in the profits of the trade to the Baltic sea, the profits of the Dutch have naturally decreased. In the Atlantic [Page 254] Ocean, the Dutch trade is of very great extent: From Portugal and Spain they draw ready money, but to France, on the contrary, they pay a large balance of it. They supply Italy with most European and Indian goods; their trade to the Levant, though at present on the decline, is still very profitable. A particular board of the Levant trade was erected in 1624. The good fortune of the Dutch, i [...] rendering themselves the exclusive masters of the spice-trade, and of very large territories in the East-India will enable them to support for a long while, a very extensive trade in Europe. Their East-India Company was erected in the year 1602, by uniting several small [...] ­ing societies into one, to whom the states granted the privilege of an exclusive trade. The original capital did not exceed 6,459,840 [...], divided into shares of 3000 florins each: with this small sum they formed settlements, and conquered several provinces in Asia, much larger than the Seven United Provinces together. The Company is now divided into six chambers of proprietors, established at A [...] ­dam, Middleburg, Delft, Rotterdam, Hoorn, and Enkhuizen, each of which is under the management of their own directors, called Bewi [...] ­hebbers. The Stadtholder is the first of the directors of each chamber, and consequently the head of the East-India Company. The gov­ernor-general of the Dutch possessions in the East-Indies, is appointed by the Company, and residing at Batavia, is invested with very [...] powers: He is president of the council of Batavia, called the [...] or Council of India. Among the monopolies of the East-India Com­pany, the spice-trade, comprehending the articles of cloves, mace nut­meg, cinnamon, &c. is the most valuable, and forms a very great branch of the Asiatic as well as European commerce of Holland: 750,000 lb. of cloves are annually fold in India, and 360,000 carried to Europe: The Company pays on the spot only eight stivers per pound, but the freight and other charges raise this price to 43 stivers and the Company sells it at no less than 75 stivers. 250,000 lb [...]f nutmeg, the produce of the island of Banda, are sold in Europe, and 100,000 lb. in India: The prime cost is somewhat more than one sti­ver per pound; including charges, the pounds stands the Company i [...] about 25 stivers, and is sold by the Company at upwards of 50 sti­vers west of the Cape of Good Hope, and at about 40 stivers east of it. Of cinnamon, 200,000 lb. are sold in India, and 400,000 in Europe.—The Java coffee is the best we know of after that of Mecca i [...] Arabia. Other great branches of this trade are rice, cotton, pep­per, &c. articles of great importance, but not in the exclusive posses­sion of the Dutch. The whole profits of the trade of the East-India Company is computed at 12,700,000 florins annually; but this state­ment seems to fall short of the real produce: Yet, upon the [...], the affairs of the East-India Company are very much on the [...]. The Dutch have hitherto been the only European nation permitted [...] carry on a direct trade to Japan: The profits of this trade, however have also declined, and are supposed to amount, at present, to no [...] than 20,000 florins. The West-India Company is, by no [...] considerable as the East-India Company. It carries on a trade [...] the West-Indies and to the Coast of Guinea; on the latter chiefly [...] slaves. Distinct from this company are the two companies [...] trade to Surinam and Berbice: The Scadtholder is the head of [...] these trading companies.

[Page 255] The town of Amsterdam has more than one-half of the trade of Hol­land; and in this celebrated center of immense commerce, a bank is established of that species called a Giro-bank, of very great wealth and greater credit.

In Holland, the inland trade is very much facilitated by means of the numerous canals, which cross the country in every direction.—The number of manufactures established in the United Provinces is astonishing. Saardam, for instance, a village in North Holland, con­ [...] about 900 windmills, partly corn-mills, partly saw and paper-mills, and mills for the making of white lead, &c. In former times, the Dutch were the exclusive possessors of several ingenious manufac­tures and arts; for instance, the refining of camphor and borax, the cutting and polishing of diamonds, the refining of sugar, &c. but at present these mysteries, very few of them excepted, are in the hands of many other nations; to whose commercial ignorance and want of industry in former times, the Dutch were indebted for immense gains, which have decreased with their causes: Among the rest, the woollen manufactory has suffered a prodigious decrease. From these facts it appears, that the Dutch trade is no longer in its ancient flourishing state, to which, even if the frugality and industry of the nation had not been diminished by too great wealth, the rivalship of other nations, and the commercial knowledge of the age, will never suffer it to rise again.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MAN­NERS, CUSTOMS, AND DIVERSIONS,} The Seven United Provin­ces are perhaps the best peo­pled of any spot of the same extent in the world. This will appear from the table which is prefixed.

The manners, habits, and even the minds of the Dutch (for so the inhabitants of the United Provinces are called in general) seem to be formed by their situation, and to arise from their natural wants. Their country which is preserved by mounds and dykes, is a perpetual in­centive to labour; and the artificial drains with which it is every where intersected, must be kept in perpetual repair. Even what may be called their natural commodities, their butter and cheese, are pro­duced by a constant attention to the laborious arts of life. Their prin­cipal food they earn out of the sex, by their herring fisheries; for they dispose of most of their valuable fishes to the English, and other na­tions, for the sake of gain. The air and temperature of their climate incline them no Phlegmatic, flow dispositions, both of body and mind.

Their tradesmen in general are reckoned honest in their dealings, and very sparing of their words. Smoaking tobacco is practised by old and young of both sexes; and as they are generally plodding upon [...]ys and means of getting money, it is said no people are so unsociable.

In whatever relates to the management of pecuniary affairs, the Dutch are certainly the most expert of any people; as to the knowl­edge of acquiring wealth, they unite the no less necessary science of preserving it. It is a kind of general rule for every man to spend less than his income, be that what it will; not does it often enter into the [...] of this sagacious people, that the common course of expences should equal the revenue; and when this happens, they think at least they have lived that year to know purpose; and the report of it used to [...] a man among them, as much as any vicious or prodigal extrava­ [...] does in other countries. But this rigid frugality is not so universal [Page 256] among the Dutch as it was formerly; for a greater degree of luxury and extravagance has been introduced among them, as well as the other na­tions of Europe. Gaming is likewise practised by many of their [...] ­ionable ladies, and some of them discover more propensity to gall [...] than was known here in former times. No country can vie with Holland in the number of those inhabitants, whose lot, if not riches, is at least a comfortable sufficiency; and where fewer failures or bankruptcies oc­cur. Hence, in the midst of a world of taxes and contributions, [...] as no other country does experience, they flourish and grow rich. From this systematic spirit of regularity and moderation, joined to the most obstinate perseverance, they succeeded in the stupendous [...] of draining their country of those immense deluges of water, that [...] overflowed so large a part of it during many ages, while at the [...] time they brought under their subjection and command the rivers and seas that surround them, by dykes of incredible thickness and strength and made them the principal bulwarks on which they rely for the [...] ­tection and safety of their territories against the danger of an [...]. This they have done by covering their frontiers and cities with i [...] ­erable sluices; by means of which, at the shortest notice, the most [...] inundations are let in, and they become in a few hours inacce [...]. From that frugality and perseverance, by which they have been [...] much characterised, they were enabled, though labouring [...] the difficulties, not only to throw off the Spanish yoke, [...] attack that powerful nation in the most tender parts, by [...] her rich galleons, and forming new establishments in Africa, and [...]. East and West Indies, at the expence of Spain, and thereby beco [...] from a despicable province, a most powerful and formidable [...]. Equally wonderful was the rise of their military and marine establish­ments, maintaining, during their celebrated contention with [...] XIV. and Charles II, of England, not less than 150,000 men, and [...] wards of 80 ships of the line. But a spirit of frugality being [...] ­less universal among them, the rich traders and mechanics begin [...] approximate to the luxuries of English and French dressing and [...] ­ing; and their nobility and high magistrates, who have retired [...] trade, rival those of any other part of Europe in their table, buildings, furniture and equipages.

The diversions of the Dutch differ not much from those of the [...] ­glish, who seem to have borrowed from them the neatness of [...] drinking-booths, skittle and other grounds, and small pieces of [...] which form the amusements of the middling ranks, not to [...] their hand-organs, and other musical inventions. They are the [...] skitters upon the ice in the world. It is amazing to see the crowds i [...] a hard frost upon the ice, and the great dexterity both of men and women in darting along, or rather flying, with inconceivable vol [...]

LANGUAGE.] The natural language of the United Provinces is [...] Dutch, which is a corrupt dialect of the German; but the people [...] fashion speak English and French.

LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN.] Erasmus and Grotius, who [...] both natives of this country, stand at the head almost of learning it­self, as Boerhaave does of medicine. Hearlem disputes the inventing of printing with the Germans, and the magistrates keep two copies of a book entitled Speculum Salvationis, printed by Koster in 1440; [...] [Page 257] the most elegant editions of the classics came from the Dutch presses of Amsterdam, Rotterdam, Utrecht, Leyden, and other towns. The Dutch have excelled in controversial divinity, which insinuated itself so much into the state, that before principles of universal toleration prevailed, it had almost proved fatal to the government; witness the [...] disputes about Arminianism, free-will, predestination, and the like. Besides Boerhaave, they have produced excellent writers, in all branches of medicine. Graevius and Burman stand at the head of their numerous commentators upon the classics.

The scientific and literary state of Holland seems to be involved in the decline of its political consequence. Its universities were former­ [...] [...] more attractive and frequented, but their improvements have [...] kept pace with the progress and the wants of the age. They are [...] number, at Leyden, Franeker, Utrecht, Groeningen, and Har­ [...]yck; and some of their regulations are deserving of much praise. [...]des the universities, there are several good schools in the United provinces, among which the Academical Gymnasium, or Athenaeum of Amsterdam, is entitled to particular notice. Many respectable sci­ [...] societies are established in Holland, and one at Batavia. The [...] libraries of the universities were more celebrated while scarce [...] and manuscripts were held in more general estimation, but in [...] and extent, they are not to be compared with the great libraries [...] countries: Yet numerous private libraries supply their defi­ [...]cies, and facilitate the researches of the studious. Public and pri­ [...] collections of natural curiosities, antiquities, paintings, &c. are [...] numerous in a country were the habit of collecting has been ren­ [...] general by the spirit of commerce.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} The prodigious dykes, some of which are said to be 17 ells of thickness; mounds, and canals, constructed by the Dutch, to pre­ [...] their country from those dreadful inundations by which it for­ [...] suffered so much, are stupendous and hardly to be equalled.— [...] quarry near Ma [...]stricht, under a hill, is worked into a kind [...]raneous palace, supported by pillars twenty feet high. The [...] of Amsterdam is perhaps the best building of that kind in [...]: It stands upon 13,659 large piles, driven into the ground; [...] inside is equally convenient and magnificent. Several mu­ [...], containing antiquities and curiosities, artificial and natural, are [...] found in Holland and the other provinces, particularly in the [...] of Leyden; such as the effigies of a peasant of Russia, who [...] a knife ten inches in length, and is said to have lived eight [...] it was cut out of his stomach; but the truth of this seems [...] doubtful. A shirt made of the entrails of a man. Two Egyp­ [...] [...] being the bodies of two princes of great antiquity. All [...] and tendons of the human body, curiously set up, by pro­ [...]talpert Vander-Well.

[...] TOWNS, AND OTHER EDI­ [...], PUBLIC AND PRIVATE.} Amsterdam, which is built upon piles of wood, is thought [...] [...] to London, the most commercial city in the world. Its [...] and the grandeur of its public works. [...]. In this, and all [...] of the [...] provinces, the [...] of the canals, and [...] trees [Page 258] planted on their borders, are admirable; but above all, we are [...] with the neatness and cleanliness that is every where observed with [...] doors. This city, however, labours under two great disadvantages▪ bad air, and the want of fresh wholesome water, which obliges the in­habitants to preserve the rain water in reservoirs. Rotterdam is next to Amsterdam for commerce and wealth. The Hague, though but a village, is the seat of government in the United Provinces, and is cel­ebrated for the magnificence and beauty of its buildings, the re [...]t of foreign ambassadors and strangers of all distinctions who live in it, the abundance and cheapness of its provisions, and the politeness of its in­habitants. It is no place of trade, but it has been for many years [...] ­ed as an emporium of pleasure and politics. Leyden and Utrecht [...] fine cities, as well as famous for their universities. Saardam, though a wealthy trading place, is mentioned here as the workshop where [...] ­ter the Great of Muscovy, in person, served his apprenticeship to [...] building, and laboured, as a common handicraft. The upper part of Gelderland is subject to Prussia, and the capital city Gelder.

INLAND NAVIGATION, CANALS, AND MANNER OF TRAVELLING.} The usual way of passing from town to town is by cov­ered boats, called treckscuits, which are dragged along the canals by horses, on a slow uniform trot, so that passengers reach the different towns where they are to stop, precisely at the appointed instant of time. This method of travelling, though to strangers rather [...] is extremely convenient to the inhabitants, and very cheap. By means of these canals, an extensive inland commerce is not only [...] ­ried on through the whole country, but as they communicate with the Rhine and other large rivers, the productions of the whole earth are conveyed, at a small expense, into various parts of Germany, and the Austrian and French Netherlands. A treckscuit is divided into [...] different apartments, called the roof and the ruim; the first for gentle­men, and the other for common people, who may read, smoke, [...], drink, or converse with people of various nations, dresses, and lan­guages. Near Amsterdam and other large cities, a traveller is aston­ished when he beholds the effects of an extensive and flourishing com­merce. Here the canals are lined for miles together with elegant, neat, country-houses, seated in the midst of gardens and pleasure grounds intermixed with figures, busts, statues, temples, &c. to the v [...] ­ry water's edge. Having no objects of amusement beyond the limits of their own gardens, the families in fine weather spend much of their time in these little temples, smoking, reading or viewing the passengers, to whom they appear complaisant and polite.

GOVERNMENT.] Since the great confederation of Utrecht, made in the year 1579, the Seven United Provinces must be looked upon [...] one political body, united for the preservation of the whole, of which each single province is governed by its own laws, and exercises most of the rights of a sovereign state. In consequence of the union, [...] Seven Provinces guarantee each other's rights, they make war [...] peace, they levy taxes, &c. in their joint capacity; but as to [...] government, each province is independent of the other provinces, [...] of the supreme power of the republic. The Seven Provinces [...] the same order in which they are placed in the proceeding table. Th [...] send deputies, chosen out of the provincial states, to the general- [...] [Page 259] [...], called the States-General, which is invested with the supreme le­gislative power of the confederation. Each province has the right to send as many deputies as it pleases, but it has only one voice in the assembly of the States. According to the latest regulations, that assem­bly is composed of 58 deputies. In affairs of great consequence, such as declaring war and making peace, a secret committee is chosen out of these deputies, called the Secrette Besoigne, in which the province of Holland has two voices.

At the head of this republican government there has usually been, and is at present, the Prince Stadtholder or governor, who exercises a very considerable part of the executive power of the state. It appears from history, that the United Provinces were, at different times, with­out a Stadtholder; but these periods were usually very turbulent; and whenever a war broke out, the republic was always under the necessity of choosing again a Stadtholder. It should seem, therefore, that the dignity and the power of a Stadtholder, is essential and salutary to the constitution of the United Provinces. There have, however, constant­ly been, and there are now, two opposite parties in the state, one of which, who call themselves the patriots, are averse, and the other are attached to the power of the Stadtholder. This dignity, though here­ditary and of the greatest weight in the state, cannot be considered otherwise than the first office entrusted to a subject of the republic, and falls considerably short of the most limited sovereignty. The Stadthol­der is not entitled to a voice in the supreme legislative assembly, but he may be present at their meetings. He is captain-general and high-admiral of the land and naval forces of the republic; and he enjoyed, before the late troubles, a very ample patronage in consequence of this military command. He is president of the East and West-India Companies, and Stadtholder of each single province, but with unequal prerogatives. In some of the provinces he has the exclusive right of [...]minating the magistrates of the towns, and the power of pardoning criminals; in some he has a share in the legislative power, and a voice in the assembly of the states of the province; in others he has either not all or none of these rights. The party of the patriots have, within these few years, been much intent on curtailing and restraining within narrow limits the power of the Stadtholder. Another great dignity in the republic, the influence of which is usually opposed to the Stadt­holder's interest, is the place of Grand Pensionary, formerly called the advocate of the republic. The Grand Pensionary is, by virtue of his place, perpetual member of the highest legislative assemblies, the states-general and the secret committee.

The departments which are employed in such public affairs as con­cern all the Seven Provinces are the following: 1. The Council of State, composed of twelve members, chosen by the Seven Provinces, under the presidency of the Stadtholder. It has its treasurer and secretary, and is next in rank to the States-General. 2. The Department of the Revenue, consisting of fourteen members. 3. The Army and Navy Treasury: This department has the revision of the accounts of the military expenditure, and is composed of four members. Each prov­ [...] is governed by the assembly of its respective states. These states are, i [...] almost all the provinces, composed of the nobility, or great land­holders, and of the towns. In the assembly of the states of the prov­ince [Page 260] of Holland, the Great pensionary presides: The towns are gov­erned by their own elective magistrates, whose jurisdiction is confined within the walls of the towns: Certain districts in the provinces have their courts of justice, and each province has a general court, to which appeal lies from the inferior courts and the town magistrates. These tribunals are called by the name of the provinces in which they are established, de Hof van Holland, de Hof van Geldren, &c. each of then makes use of a particular code of laws, adapted to the ancient customs and rights of the provinces: where these laws are deficient, recourse must be had to the Roman law.

FINANCES.] The public revenue is to be considered in tow differ­ent points of view, as it is raised for the use of the whole consideration, or for the expenditure of each single province. According to the latest account, which is believed to be authentic, the annual income of all the Seven Provinces amounts to upwards of forty-five millions of flor­ins, or nearly 4,500,000l. Sterling. The revenue of the province of Holland, which is by far the richest, and the most powerful of the Seven, is computed at upwards of twenty millions of florins. Thirteen millions and a half of this sum, making the ordinary redinary revenue of Holland, arise from the house and land-tax, and from the excise and stamp-duties: the remainder, or the extraordinary revenue of this province, is made up by contributions of the hundredth, two hundredth and four hundredth parts of the income of lands, annuities and capitals. The general finances of the republic, for the support of the whole po­litical body, arise, 1. From the revenues of Dutch Brabant, or the lands of the generality: 2. From the duties on exports and imports: 3. From confiscated goods, and the sums paid by the privileged trading com­panies: 4. From the yearly contributions of the different provinces, according to the following rates: Of every 100 florins contributed,

  Flor. Stivers. Doits.
The Province of Guelder pays 5 11 2
—Holland 57 14 8
—Zeeland 9 1 10
—Utrecht 5 15 5
—Friesland 11 10 11
—Overyssel 3 10 8
—Groeningen 5 15 6
—County of Drenthe 0 19 10
  100 0 0

The debts of the republic exceed 2000 millions of florins. The province of Holland alone owed, in 1768, 450 millions, but almost the whole of this sum to its own subjects; but, on the other side, has lent, on very advantageous conditions, large sums of money to other states. In the year 1781, there were due the following sums:

1. From England, 165 million of florins.
2.—France, 170
3.—Germany, Denmark, Sweden and Russia 250
  585

The United Provinces draw more than 25 millions per annum from these countries as the interest on the large capitals sent them.

[Page 261] ARMY.] In time of peace, the standing army is as follows:

CAVAIRY.
  Men.
Regiments.—Escadrons.  
—1. Guard of the Stadtholder 174
—3. Dutch Guards 258
6.—Cavalry (336 men each) 2016
3.—Dragoons 1008
  3456
INFANTRY.
1 Regiments of Dutch Guards 1,116
1—of Swiss Guards 1,120
19—of national and Germ. troops (710 men each) 20,880
1—of Walloons 1,080
3—of Scotchmen 2,1 [...]0
5—of Swiss 3,600
1—of Marines 720
1—of Artillery 1,800
[...] companies of Miners 208
Crops of Engineers 97
  36,281

Some of the guards, and the three Scotch regiments, are at present [...]sbanded. In the year 1784. when Holland was threatened with a war by the Emperor, the army was increased to upwards of 50,000 men. Besides the Stadtholder, who is the head of the Army, in times of war and danger, a field marshal general is appointed.

NAVY.] The Navy of Holland, in 1782, consisted of 42 ships of the line—43 frigates, and to cutte▪ s—

RATES.]

8 ships of 70—71 guns.
22— —64
12— 50mdash;56
14— 40mdash;44
13— 36—
16— 20mdash;24 Hist. Port. 1783.
(In 1784) 43 ships of the line.
43 frigates.  

The five chambers of the admiralty have the management of all naval affairs. The Stadtholder, in the capacity of high-admiral of the re­public, presides in the five chambers of admiralty. He formerly ap­pointed the flag officers, but this privilege has been of late disputed by the States-general. He has a tenth share of all the prizes made during a war. The fleet, which is divided into three squadrons, is distributed between the harbours of Amsterdam, called the Texel, and that of Rotterdam, in the province of Holland, and the sea-port towns of Zee­land.

RELIGION.] The Calvinist, or reformed religion, is established in Holland; the Lutheran, the Roman Catholic, many other Christian sects, and the Jews, are tolerated. The Synod of Dordrecht, or Dort held in 1618, made the strictest notion of predestination an essential article of [Page 262] faith in the Dutch church. None but Calvinists can hold any em­ployment of trust or profit. There is, properly speaking, no difference of rank among the clergy: The church is governed by synods, com­posed of the ministers and antistites, or presbyters. Besides nine sy­nods for single provinces, there is one great national synod; subject, however, to the control of the States-general, which are considered as the head of the church. The French and Walloon Calvinist churches have synods of their own. There are, in the Seven Provin­ces, 1579 pastors or ministers of the established church, 90 of the Wal­loon church, 800 Roman Catholic, 53 Lutheran, 43 Arminian, and 312 Anabaptist ministers. In the East-Indies there are 46, and in the West-Indies nine clergymen of the established church.

GENERAL REMARKS.] The natural and political situation of the Dutch nation may be compared with the colonies of Canadian beavers, who, by unwearied labour and mutual assistance, are enabled to build secure habitations on the banks of rapid rivers, and to form societies rendered durable and invincible by the tie of firm union: Yet their wonderful fabric would, by dissension and separation, soon sink into insignificance or annihilation. When we consider what Holland was before the union of Utrecht, and when we afterwards see the inhabit­ants of that swampy spot assume, for no inconsiderable period of time, the arbitrium of Europe and the Indies, it is not without regret we wit­ness the decay of their power, that most admirable monument of hu­man exertion and industry. An impartial observer, however, who cannot wish to see the benefits of activity confined to one spot, and ex­torted from the ignorance and weakness of other nations, will be com­forted by the consideration, that Holland's exclusive advantages are lessened by the general increase of industry and happiness throughout all the states of Europe, and not by any of those great calamities or revolutions, which have put a period to the power of other commer­cial states. Its decline is gentle and gradual: Yet so high was the em­inence Holland was arrived at, that it is still possessed of great power and consequence. It may long continue to be the centre of union of the great European commerce and the asylum of religious and civil liberty, if the most dangerous enemies of this state, civil dissensions, and the extinction of public virtue, do not hasten its gliding down the slope of ruin, and render it an easy prey to an insidious neighbour, who seems even now to be willingly acknowledged as their master, by a mistaken and corrupted part of the nation.

HISTORY.] These provinces were originally an assemblage of sev­eral lordships, dependent upon the kings of Spain; from whose yoke they withdraw themselves during the reign of Phillip II. in the year 1579, under the conduct of the Prince of Orange, and formed the re­public now called the Seven United provinces, or Holland. The of­fice of Stadtholder, or Captain-general of the United Provinces, was made hereditary in the Prince of Orange's family, not excepting fe­males 1747.

[Page 263]

AUSTRIAN AND FRENCH NETHERLANDS.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 200 Miles. between Degrees. 49 and 52 north latitude.
Breadth 200 Miles. Degrees. 2 and 7 east longitude.

BOUNDARIES. BOUNDED by the United Provinces, on the North; by Germany, East; by Lorrain, Cham­paign, and Picardy, in France, South; and by another part of Picardy, and the English sea, West.

As this country belongs to three different powers, the Austrians, French, and [...], we shall be more particular in distinguishing the provinces and towns belonging to each state.

1. Province of BARABANT.
Subdivisions. Chief Towns.
1. Dutch Brabant Boisleduc N.
Breda
Bergen-op-Zoom
Grave, N. E.
Lillo N. W.
Steenbergen
2. Austrian Brabant Brussels, E. lon. 4 deg. 6 min. N. lat. 50-50.
Louvain in the middle.
Vilvorden
Landen

2. ANTWERP; and, 3. MALINES, are provinces independent of Brabant, though surrounded by it, and subject to the house of Austria.

4. Province of LIMBURGE, S. E.
Chief towns Limburg, E. lon. 6-5. N. lat. 50-37 subject to Aus.
Maestricht subject to the Dutch.
Dalem
Fauguemont, or Valkenburg
5. Province of LUXEMBURG.
Subdivisions. Chief Towns.
Austrian Luxemburg Luxemburg, E. lon.6-8. N. lat. 49-45.
French Luxemburg Thionville S. E.
Montmedy
6. Province of NAMUR, in the middle, subject to Austria.
Chief towns Namur, on the Sambre and Maese, E. lon. 4-50. N. lat. 50-30.
Charleroy on the Sambre.

[Page 264]

7. Province of HAINAULT.
Subdivisions. Chief Towns.
Austrian Hainault Mons, E. lon. 3-53. N. lat. 50-30 in the mid­dle.
Aeth Enguien
French Hainault Valenciennes Bouchain Conde S. W.
Landrecy
8. Province of CAMBRESIS.
Subject to France. Cambray, E. of Arras, F. lon. 3-15. N. lat. 50-15.
Crevecour, S. of Cambray.
9. Province of ARTOIS.
Subject to France. Arras, S. W. on the Scrape, E. lon. 2-5. N. lat. 51-20.
St. Omer, E. of Boulogne
A [...]ie. S. of St. Omer
S. Venant. E. of Aire
Bethune, S. E. of Aire
Terouen, S. of St. Omer.
10. Province of FLANDERS.
Subdivisions. Chief Towns.
Dutch Flanders Sluys, N. Axel, N. Hulst. N. Sas van Ghent, N.
Austrian Flanders Ghent, on the Scheld, E. lon. 3-36. N. lat. 51.
Bruges N. W. near the sea.
Ostend
Newport
Oudenard on the Scheld.
Courtray on the Lis.
Dixmude
Ypres. N. of Lisle
Tournay on the Scheld
Menin on the Lis.
French Flanders Lisle, W. of Tournay
Dunkirk, on the coast E. of Calais
Douay, W. of Arras
Mardike, W. of Dunkirk
St. Amand, N. of Valenciennes
Gravelin, E. of Calais.

AIR, SOIL, AND PRODUCE.] The air of Brabant, and upon the coast of Flanders, is bad; that in the interior parts is more healthful, and the seasons more settled, both in winter and summer, than they are in England. The soil and its produce are rich, especially in corn and fruits. They have abundance of pasture; and Flanders itself has been reckoned the granary of France and Germany, and sometimes of England. The most barren parts for corn rear far more profitable crops of flax, which is here cultivated to great perfection. Upon the whole, the Austrian Netherlands, by the culture, commerce, and in­dustry of the inhabitants, was formerly the richest and most beautiful spot in Europe, whether we regard the variety of its manufactures, the magnificence and riches of its cities, the pleasantness of its roads and [Page 265] villages, or the fertility of its land. If it has fallen off in later times, it is owing partly to the neglect of its government, but chiefly to its vicinity to England and Holland; but it is still a most desirable and agreeable country. There are few or no mountains in the Nether­lands: Flanders is a slat country, scarcely a single hill in it. Brabant, and the rest of the provinces, consist of little hills and vallies, woods, inclosed grounds, and champaign fields.

RIVERS, AND CANALS.] The chief rivers are the Maese, Sambre, Demer, Dyle, Nethe, Geet, Sanne, Ruppel, Scheld, Lis, Scarpe, Deule, and Dender. The principal canals are those of Brussels, Ghent, and offend.

METALS AND MINERALS.] Mines of iron, copper, lead and brim­stone, are found in Luxemburgh, and Limburg, as are some marble quarries; and in the province of Namur there are coal-pits, and a species of bituminous fat earth, proper for fuel, with great plenty of [...]o [...]ile nitre.

INHABITANTS, POPULATION, MAN­NERS, CUSTOMS, AND DIVERSIONS.} The Flemings (for so the in­habitants of Flanders and the Austrian Low Countries are generally called) are said to be a heavy, Munt, honest people; but their manners are somewhat indelicate.—Formerly they were known to sight desperately in defence of their country; at present they make no great figure. The Austrian Neth­erlands are extremely populous; but authors differ as to their num­bers. Perhaps we may six them at a medium at a million and a half. They are ignorant, and fond of religious exhibitions and pageants.—Their other diversions are the same with those of the peasants of the neighbouring countries.

DRESS AND LANGUAGE.] The inhabitants of French Flanders are mere Frenchmen and women in both these particulars. The Flem­ings on the frontiers of Holland, dress like the Dutch boors, and their language is the same; but the better sort of people speak French, and dress in the same taste.

RELIGION.] The established religion here is the Roman Catholic; but Protestants, and other sects, are not molested.

LEARNING, LEARNED MEN, AND ARTISTS.] The society of Jesuits formerly produced the most learned [...] in the Austrian Low Countries, in which they had many comfortable settlements. Works of theology, and the civil and canon law, Latin poems and plays, were their chief productions. Strada is an elegant historian and poet. The Flemish painters and sculptors have great merit, and form a school by themselves. The works of Rubens and Vandyke cannot be sufficiently admired. Fiamingo, or the Flemings models for heads, particularly those of children, have never yet been equalled; and the Flemings formerly engrossed tapestry-weaving to themselves.

UNIVERSITIES.] Louvain, Douay, Tournay, and St. Omer. The first was founded in 1426, by John IV. duke of Brabant, and enjoys great privileges. By a grant of pope Sixtus IV. this university has the privilege of presenting to all the livings in the Netherlands, which right they enjoy, except in Holland.

[Page 266] ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} Some Roman monuments of temples and other buildings are to be found in these provinces. Many curious bells, churches, and the like, ancient and modern, are also found here; and the magnifi­cent old edifices of every kind, seen through all their cities, give evi­dences of their former grandeur. In 1607, some labourers found 1600 gold coins, and ancient medals of Antoninus Pius, Aurelius, and L [...] ­cius Verus.

CITIES.] This article has employed several large volumes, pub­lished by different authors, but in times when the Austrian Nether­lands were far more flourishing than now. The walls of Ghent, for­merly the capital of Flanders, and celebrated for its linen and woollen manufactures, contain the circuit of ten miles; but now unoccupied, and great part of it in a manner avoid. Bruges, formerly so [...] for its trade and manufactures, but above all for its fine canals, is [...] dwindled to an inconsiderable place. Ostend is a tolerably convenient harbour for traders; and soon after the late rupture between Great Britain and Holland, became more opulent and populous. In 1781 it was visited by the emperor, who granted to it many privileges and franchises, and the free exercise of the protestant religion. Y pres is only a strong garrison town. The same may be said of Charleroy and Namur, which lie in the Austrian Hainault.

Louvain, the capital of the Austrian Brabant, instead of its flourish­ing manufactories and places of trade, now contains pretty gardens, walks, and arbours. Brussels retains somewhat of its ancient manu­factures; and being the residence of the governor or viceroy of the Austrian Netherlands, it is a populous, lively place. Antwerp, once the emporium of the European continent, is now reduced to be a tapestry and thread lace-shop, with the houses of some bankers, jewel­lers, and painters adjoining. One of the first exploits of the Dutch, soon after they threw of the Spanish yoke, was to ruin at once the commerce of Antwerp, by sinking vessels, loaded with stone, in the mouth of the Scheld; thus shutting up the entrance of that river to ships of large burden. This was the more cruel, as the people of Ant­werp had been their friends and fellow-sufferers in the cause of liber­ty, but they foresaw that the prosperity of their own commerce was at stake.

It may be observed here, that every gentleman's house is a castle or cháteau; and that there are more strong towns in the Netherlands then in all the rest of Europe; but since the decline of their trade, by the rise of the English and Dutch, these towns are considerably dimin­ished in size, and whole streets, particularly in Antwerp, are in ap­pearance uninhabited. In the Netherlands, provisions are extremely good and cheap. A stranger may dine in Brussels, on seven or eight dishes of meat, for less than a shilling English. Travelling is safe, rea­sonable and delightful in this luxurious country. The roads are gen­erally a broad causeway, and run for some miles in a straight line, till they terminate with the view of some noble buildings. At Cassel, in the French Netherlands, may be seen thirty-two towns, itself being on a hill.

COMMERCE AND MANUFACTURES.] The chief manufactures of the French and Austrian Netherlands, are their beautiful linens and laces; in which, notwithstanding the boasted improvements of their neigh­bours, [Page 267] they are yet unrivalled; particularly in that species called cambrics, from Cambray, the chief place of its manufacture. These manufactures form the principal article of their commerce.

CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT.] The Austrian Netherlands are still considered as a circle of the empire, of which the archducal house, as being sovereign of the whole, is the sole director and sum­moning prince. This circle contributes its share to the imposts of the empire, and sends an envoy to the diet, but is not subject to the judi­catories of the empire. It is under a governor-general, appointed by the court of Vienna, who, at present, is his serene highness, prince Charles of Lorrain, uncle to the late emperor. The face of an assem­bly, or parliament, for each province is still kept up, and consists of the clergy, nobility, and deputies of towns, who meet at Brussels.—Each province claims particular privileges, but they are of very little effect; and the governor seldom or never finds any resistance to the will of his court. Every province has a particular governor, subject to the regent: And causes are here decided according to the civil and canon law.

REVENUES.] These rise from the demesne lands and customs; but so much is the trade of the Austrian Flanders now reduced, that they are said not to defray the expense of their government; but by the late reductions of the garrisons, this is now altered. The French Netherlands bring in a considerable revenue to the crown.

MILITARY STRENGTH.] The troops maintained here by the em­peror are chiefly employed in the frontier garrisons. Though, by the barrier treaty, the Austrians were obliged to maintain three-fifths of those garrisons, and the Dutch two; yet both of them were [...]serably deficient in their quotas, the whole requiring at least 30,000 men, and in time of war above 10,000 more. but the present emperor has de­molished the fortifications of most of the places, and rendered the gar­risons useless.

HISTORY.] Flanders, originally the country of the ancient Belgae, was conquered by Julius Caesar, forty-seven years before Christ; pass­ed into the hands of France. A. D. 412; and was governed by its earls, subject to that crown, from 8 [...] to 1369. By marriage it then came into the house of Austria; but was yielded to Spain in 1556. Shook off the Spanish yoke 1572, and in the year 1725, by the treaty of Vi­enna, was annexed to the German empire. See Universal History.

FRANCE.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 600 Miles. between Degrees. 5 west and 8 East longitude.
Breadth 500 Miles. Degrees. 42 and 51 North latitude.

BOUNDARIES. IT is bounded by the English channel and the Nether­lands, North; by Germany, Switzerland, and Italy, East; by the Mediterranean and the Pyrenean mountains, which di­vide it from Spain, South; and by the Bay of Biscay, West.

DIVISIONS.] As in the following Table.

[Page 268]

EXTENT AND DIVISIONS. Areas in square miles. Population. Num. of Inhab­itants on each square mile. TOWNS.
42°—51° Latitude 163,200 St. Ueb. 25,300,000 Schloez 150 400 Cities.
5°—8° East Longitude 160,000 Busch. [...]6,000,000 Busch. 162 1500 Smaller towns.
  157,924 Necker. 24,800,000 Necker. 157 43,000 Parishes.
        100,000 Villages.
France (without Corsica) 155,332 Necker. 24,076,000 Necker. 160  
Generalities according to Necker.       Names. Num. Inh.
1. Aix Province 6,601 754,400 41 Marseille 80,500
        Aix 24,000
        Toulon 38,000
2. Amiens 2,038 533,000 71 Amiens 43,500
The greatest part of Picardie       Calais 6,500
        Abbeville 19,000
        St. Quentin 10,500
3. Auch and Pau 7,761 813,000 40 Auch 7,500
Oriental part of Guienne       Pau 9,000
4. Besancedil;on 5,019 678,800 49 Besancedil;on 25,500
Franche Comté        
5. Bourdeaux and Bayonne 9,362 439,000 55 Bourdeaux 84,000
Western part of Guienne       Bayonne 11,000
6. Bourges 3,954 512,500 47 Bourges 25,000
Berry and two little districts, one in the prov­ince of Bourbonnois, the other in that of Nivernois        
7. Chalons 7,063 812,800 44 Rheims 31,000
The greatest part of Champagne and part of Brie       Chalons 12,000
        Troyes 32,000
8. Dijon 6,821 087,300 57 Dijon 20,300
Bourgogne, Macedil;onnois, Gex, Bugey Bresse, Dombe       Macedil;on 9,000
9. Grenoble 5,898 664,600 40 Grenoble 24,300
Orange, Dauphiné        
10. La Rochelle 2,672 479,700 64 La Rochelle 16,000
Saintonge, Aunis, part of Angoumois       Rochefort 16,000
11. Lisle 2,385½ 734,600 110 Lisle 67,000
Artois, and almost the whole of Flanders       Dunkirk 27,000
        Arras 21,500
        Douay 19,500
12. Limoges 4,919 646,500 47 Limoges 22,000
Limousin, and the greatest part of Angoumois       Angouleme 13,000
13. Lyons 2,397½ 633,600 95 Lyon 160,000
Lyonnois, Forez, Beaujolois       St. Etienne 27,000
14. Metz 2,960 349,300 119 Metz 40,000
Metz, Toul, Verdun, the French Luxembourg. Sedan, Raucour, and some districts of Alsace and Loraine       Sedan 17,500
15. Montauban 3,362 530,200 160 Montauban 20,000
Rouergue and Guercy       Cahors above 9,000
16. Montpellier 12,330 699,200 138 Montpellier 32,000
Languedoc       [...]oulouse 56,000
        Nimes 50,000
17. Moulins 5,166 564,400 109 Moulins 16,500
Bourbonnois, the greatest part of Nivernois, and a small part of Auvergne       Nevers 14,000
18. Nancy 5,149 834,600 162 Nancy 34,000
Lorraine, Bar-le-Due       Luneville 16,500
        Bar-le-Due 10,800
19. Orleans 5,882 709,400 121 Orleans 39,500
Orleannois, Sologne, Blaisois, Vendomois, Lower Perche, Dunois, Beaucé, Chartres, great part of Gatinois, a small part of Nivernois       Blois 12,000
20. Paris 6,664 1,781,700 266 Paris 680,000
The greatest part of the Isle de France and la Brie       Versailles 60,000
21. Perpignan Roussillon, Foix 1,649 188,900 114 Perpignan 15,200
22. Poitiers Upper and Lower Poiou 6,089 690,500 113 Poitiers 17,300
23. Rennes 10,221 [...],276,000 222 Rennes 35,500
Bretagne       Port l'Orient 16,500
        St. Malo 17,500
        Nantes 57,000
        [...] [...]0,000
24. Riom 3,749 681,500 181 [...]ermont 24,000
        Riom 14,800
25. Normandy Rouen 3,384 740,700 219 Rouen 72,500
Caen 3,361 644,000 1 [...]0 Caen 32,000
Alencedil;on 2,672 528,300 198 Alencedil;on 13,500
        Dieppe 17,000
26. Soissons Soissonnois, Laonnois, Thierache, part of Brie 2,566 437,200 174 Soissons 7500
27. Starsbourg 3,050 626,400 205 Strasbourg 46,000
Alsace       Colmar 12,500
28, Tours 8,096 1,338,700 165 Tours 21,600
Touraine, Anjou, Maine, a small part of Lower       Angers 30,000
Poitou       Le Mans 13,500
29. Valenciennes 1,481 265,200 179 Valenciennes 19,500
Hainault, Cambresis, and a small part of Flanders       Cambrai 15,000
Total 155,333 24,676,000    
Island of Corsica 2,592 124,000 48 Bastia 600
        Ajaccio 4000
        Corte 3000
[Page 272]

POSSESSIONS IN THE OTHER PARTS OF THE GLOBE.

1. In ASIA.

Some districts on the coast of Coromandel, of which Pondicherry is the capital. Some less considerable settlements on the Malabar coast and in Bengal, and several factories.

2. In AFRICA.

In Barbary, Bastion de France. The island of Goree, part of Se [...]e­gambia, Fort [...] on the Senegal, and Podar, Galam, Portendic, Fort Arguin. On the coast of Guinea, Fran [...]ois. In the Indian Sea, the islands of Bourbon and Isle de France.

3. In AMERICA.

The North-American islands of St. Pierre and Miqueion. In the West Indies, the largest part of the island of St. Domingo, the islands of Mar­tinique, Guadaloupe, St. Lucia, Maria Galante, St. Martin and Tobago. In South-America, some settlements in Guiana and the island of Cayenne.

All these possessions, according to Neckar, contain about 600,000 in­habitants.

Since the Revolution, a new division of the kingdom has been made as follows: "Each district to be divided into cantons of about four square leagues each, with at least one primary assembly in each can­ton. If the number of citizens in a canton do not amount to 900, there is to be only one assembly; but if they amount to that number, there are to be two assemblies of 450 each. Each ordinary assembly to consist, as nearly as possible, of 600, which shall be the mean number; the least to be 440. The number of deputies sent to the national as­sembly by each district, to be in proportion to the population, taxes and territory, jointly considered."

This new political division of France, corresponds, in some respects, with the divisions of New England: Districts in France answer to counties in New-England—cantons to townships, and assemblies to town-meetings.

NAME.] France took its name from the Frances or Freemen, a German nation, restless and enterprising, who conquered the Gauls, the ancient inhabitants; and the Roman force not being able to repress them, they were permitted to settle in the country by treaty.

WATER.] No nation is better supplied than France is with whole­some springs and water; of which the inhabitants make excellent use, by the help of art and engines, for all the conveniencies of life.

MOUNTAINS.] The chief mountains in France, or its borders, are, the Alps, which divided France from Italy; the Pyren [...]es, which divide France from Spain; Va [...]ge, which divided Lorrain from Burgundy and Alsace: Mount Juta, which divides Franche Compte from Swit­zerland; the Cevennes, in the province of Languedoc; and Mount Dor, in the province of Auvergne.

RIVERS AND LAKES.] The principal rivers in France are the Loire, the Rhone, the Garonne, and the Seine. The Loire, takes its course north and north-west, being, with all its windings, from its source to the sea, computed to run about 500 miles. The Rh [...]ne flows a [...] south-west to Lyons, and then runs on due south till it falls into the Mediterranean. The Garronne rises in the Pyrenean mountains, takes [Page 273] [...]s course, first, north-east, and has a communication with the Mediter­ranean by means of a canal, the work of Lewis XIV. The Seine, sum after its rise, runs to the north-west, visiting Troyes, Paris, and Rouen, in its way, and falls into the English channel at Havre. To these we may add, the Saone, which falls into the Rhone at Lyons; the C [...]arente, which rises near Havre de Grace, and discharges itself in the Bay of Biscay at Rochfort. The Rhine, which rises in Switzerland, is the eastern boundary between France and Germany, and receives the M [...]selle and the Sarte in its passage. The Somme, which runs north-east through Picardy, and falls into the English channel below Abbe­ville. The Var, which rises in the Alps, and runs south, dividing France from Italy, and falling into the Mediterranean, west of Nice. The Adour runs from east to west, through Cascoigne, and falls into the Bay of Biscay, below Bayonne.

The vast advantage, both in commerce and conveniency, which ari­ses is France from those rivers, is greatly improved by the artificial rivers and canals which form the chief glory of the reign of Lewis XIV. That of Languedoc was begun in the year 1666, and completed in [...]: It was intended for a communication between the ocean and the Mediterranean, for the speedier passage of the French fleet; but though it was carried on at an immense expense, for 100 miles, over hills and val­lies, and even through a mountain in one place, it has not answered that purpose. By the canal of Calais, travellers easily pass by water from [...]ce to St. Omer, Gravoline, Dunkirk, Ypres, and other places.—The canal of Orleans is another noble work, and runs a course of eighteen leagues, to the immense benefit of the public and the royal [...]. France abounds with other canals of the like kind, which [...]der her inland navigation inexpressibly commodious and benefi­ted.

Few lakes are found in this country. There is one at the top of a [...] near Alegre, which the vulgar report to be bottomless. There is another at Issoire in Auvergne; and one at La Besse, in which if you [...] a stone, it causes a noise like thunder.

MINERAL WATERS AND REMARKABLE SPRINGS.} The waters of Bareges, which lie near the borders of Spain, under the Pyrenean mountains, have of late been preferred to all the others of France, for the recovery of health. Some think, however, that the cures per­sumed by them, are more owing to their accidental success, and the [...]rity of the air and soil, than to the virtues of the waters. The [...] of Sultzabach in Alsace are said to be cure the palsy, weak nerves, and the stone. At Bagueits, not far from Hareg [...]s, are several whole­some minerals and baths, to which people resort at spring and autumn. [...], in Normandy, is celebrated for its mineral waters; and those [...]. Amand cure the gravel and obstructions. It would be endless [...]erate all the other real or pretended mineral wells in France. There is a spring near Aigne in Auvergne, which boils violently, and [...] a noise like water thrown upon lime; it has little or no taste, [...] a poisonous quality, and the birds that drink of it die in­ [...]y.

METALS AND MINERALS.] Languedoe is said to contain veins of [...] and silver. Alsace has mines of silver and copper, but they are [...]sive to be wrought. Alabaster, black marble, jasper, and [Page 274] coal, are found in many parts of the kingdom. Bretagne abounds is mines of iron, copper, tin, and lead. At Laverdau, in Cominges, [...] is a mine of chalk. At Berry there is a mine of oker, which serves for melting of metals, and for dying, particularly the best drab-cl [...] and in the province of Anjou are several quarries of fine white [...]. Some excellent turquoises (the only gem it is said that France p [...] ­ces) are found in Languedoc; and great care is taken to keep the mines of marble and free-stone open all over the kingdom.

FORESTS.] The chief forests of France and those of Orl [...] which contain 14,000 acres of wood of various kinds, oak, elm, [...] &c. and the forest of Fontainbleau near as large; and near Mo [...]moir is a forest of tall, straight timber, of 4000 trees. Besides [...] large numbers of woods, some of them deserving the name of forest lie in different provinces; but too remote from sea carriage to be [...] much national utility.

WEALTH AND COMMERCE.] France is situated in a very mild climate; its soil is, in most parts, very fertile; it is bound­ed by high ridges of mountains, the lower branches of which cross the greatest part of the kingdom; it consequently about with large rivers, 200 of which are navigable, and it is contigu­ous to two oceans. These united advantages render this kingdom one of the richest countries of Europe, both with respect to na­tural productions and commerce. One of the most valuable articles [...] produce is wine, the great staple commodity of France, 1,600,000 [...] ground are laid out in vineyards; and the net profits from each [...] are estimated at from 4l. to 7l. sterling. According to other [...] ­ments, the yearly value of all the wine made in France amounts to [...] millions of livres; and that of the wine exported annually, to 24 million. The best sorts of French wine are, champaign, burgundy, pon [...] muscat, frontigniac, eremitage, cote roti, &c. of the inferior [...] brandy and vinegar is made in large quantities. Vines prosper, thou [...] not equally, in almost every province of France, except Norma [...] and Picardy.

Great efforts are making to encourage and improve agriculture; yet there is still a large portion of the ground in an uncultivated state. No more than about 36 millions of acres are cultivated. France is therefore obliged to import corn. During the administration of [...] Necker this disadvantage was partly obviated; and there are [...] some provinces which export corn, for instance, Alsace and Lan­guedoc. Flax and hemp which is imported from the north, might [...] more profitably cultivated in the kingdom in larger quantities than hitherto. The silk raised in considerable quantities in some provinces does not however sufficiently supply the numerous man­ufactures; about 200,000lb. are produced in Languedoc, and not much less in Province. The most important silk manufactures are [...] Lyons and Tours; at the last mentioned place there are said to be 7000 looms, and at the first as many as 18,000. This must be under­stood however of the times preceding the repeal of the Edict of [...]. By this unjust and impolitic measure a very great number of [...] ­tant manufactures were expelled the kingdom, and carried their val­uable arts to more liberal countries. Next to these two cities, [...] of Paris, Chatillon, and Nimes, are distinguished for their fist [...] [Page 275] [...]ures. The first silk manufacture was established at Tours by Louis II, in the year 1470. At the large fair of Beaucaire there used to be [...], in a few days, goods to the value of 6,000,000 livres, by far the [...]est part of which were silks. Even now this trade is of an amaz­ [...] extent; 7000 balls of silk, of 160lb. each, of which however a [...] part is imported from abroad, are conveyed annually to Lyons.

Olive oil is one of the principal commodities of France; most of [...] is produced in the provinces of Provence and Languedoc. The [...]ty of Rousillon alone gains annually 200,000 livres by this article; the consumption of it in France is however so great, that some oil is [...] imported from Italy. The inferior sort of oil is used in making [...] there are at Merseilles alone thirty-six soap manufactures. France abounds in excellent and high-flavoured fruits, as grapes, apples, lem­ [...], oranges, chesnuts, &c. and likewise in manna, saffron, and woad. A great quantity of kermes and soda in produced in the most souther­ly parts. Salt is obtained in great plenty; the duties on this article, though very oppressive to the subject, are one of the largest branches of the revenue: They are farmed at 54 millions of livers annually. The salt however is not remarkable for its purity. The consumption of tobacco in France amounts to 20 millions of pounds; 15 millions is raised in the country, and five millions imported by smuggling.

Horses, cattle, and asses, are not remarkably good, except in a few districts. The stocks of sheep, though numerous, are not able to sup­ [...] the large woollen-manufactures. Picardy, alone, however, pro­ [...] annually 600,000lb. of wool; and so many live sheep have [...] smuggled over from England into Normandy and Bretagne, that [...] flocks of those two provinces are thought to be not inferior to [...] of England. By the same clandestine traffick English wool is [...]orted to the value of 100,000l. sterling. The French cloth-man­ufactures are risen to very great consequence; the most considerable [...]ng them are those at Amiens, Abbeville, Lyons, Sedan, Paris, [...] Ryssel, &c. In the government of Lyons woollens are manu­factured to the value of 13,000,000 livres, two thirds of which are ex [...]d. In Bretagne there are 800 looms for light stuffs; the manu­factures at Abbeville have considerably injured those of England; [...] likewise those in Languedoc and Provence, especially by their [...]currence and superior demand in the Levant market.

The mineral kingdom in France has hitherto not afforded very [...] treasures. Some silver is found in Alsace, at St. Marie aux [...], and Moncrif; copper and iron, almost sufficient for the de­mand of the manufactures, is found in Roussillon, Bigorre, Foix, Na­ [...] Gascogne, Normandie, Bretagne, and Orleanois. Many of [...] mines contain lead. However, steel is annually imported to the [...] of 3,000,000 livres. Mineralogy has hitherto been in an infant [...]; but when duly attended to, the mines of France are likely to [...] very ample profits.

There are manufactures of allum, vitriol, and saltpetre; in Franche [...] 1,200,000 lb. of the latter article are annually obtained.

Thence has very important fisheries. About 50,000 tons of herrings [...]ght annually by the French fishermen; the fishery of ancho­ [...] is said to be worth two million of livres. The French fisheries on [...] North-American coasts were estimated, before the year 1744, at [Page 276] 1,000,000l. sterling; they have since decreased, but it is likely they will be soon worth nearly as much as before, in consequence of the cessions made to France by the peace of 1783. In 1768, the French sent 114 vessels to Newfoundland, which brought home a cargo of cod, worth 3,000,000 livres; but the profits arising from this [...] of fishery are not very considerable.

To enumerate the many manufactures of articles of luxury establish­ed in France, would exceed the limits of this book; it is sufficiently known, that France has long ago taken the lead in fashions, and [...] had the good fortune of seeing them imitated and adopted by [...]st other nations of Europe. This fortunate pre-eminence is a very great source of profits. In the year 1773, there were in France 1500 silk­mills, 21,000 looms for silk stuffs, 12,000 for ribbands and lace, 20,00 [...] for silk stockings; and the different silk manufactures employed 2,000,000 persons.

As a commercial state, France follows immediately after England and Holland. Its trade is carried on with all Europe; that branches, it which was carried on publickly with England was hitherto not ve­ry considerable. It exported to England in the year 1785, goods by the value of 117,366l. sterling, and imported from England to the val­ue of 358,244l. sterling. But the smuggling trade between both coun­tries is carried on to a great amount. It was publickly stated in [...] House of Commons, that only 60,000 cags of spirits paid the [...] and 3,000,000 cags were smuggled; the greatest part of which [...] French spirits. The French have made themselves masters of [...] manufactures, chiefly woollens, and West Indian goods, from [...] seilles to Constantinople, Smyrna, Syria, and Egypt. They [...] however, so large quantities of the produce of these countries in [...] turn, that they are obliged to pay a balance in read money. The French enjoy some valuable commercial privileges in Turkey. Th [...] African and East-India trade is likewise unprofitable; but their W [...] India possessions, which are admirably cultivated and governed, make ample amends for these losses by the many articles of commerce they supply, which are valued at 125,000,000 livres. Before the [...] American war, the balance of commerce in favour of France was es­timated at 70,000,000 livres, and it is said, that it has not diminished since. Inland trade is greatly facilitated by numerous navigable canals in several parts of the kingdom. The principal trading towns [...] Paris, Lyons, Marseilles, Bourdeaux, Nantes, Rouen, St. Ma [...]o, R [...] ­chelle, Ryssel, Havre de Grace, Dunkirk. &c.

The land trade of France to Switzerland and Italy is carried on by [...] of Lyons—To Germany, through Metz and Strasburgh—To the Ne­therlands, through Lisle—To Spain (a most profitable one,) through Bayonne and Pcrpignan. As for the naval commerce, her ports in the channel, and on the western ocean, are frequented by all the trading nations in Europe, to the great advantage of France, more especially respecting what is carried on with England, Holland, and Italy. The trade from her Mediterranean ports (more particularly from Mar soil [...]d with Turkey and Africa has long been very considerable.

The West India islands, before the late disturbances, produced an­nually, on an average, Sugar, 224,000,000lbs—Coffee, 62,000,000lb [Page 277] Cotton, 7,700,000lbs—Indign, 2,2000,000lbs with many other arti­cles. Total value o West-India products, 190,000,000 livers, or [...],000l. Sterling. France exports to the amount of 102,000,000 rivers, which deducted from 190,000,000 livres, (the whole value) [...]res 88,000,000 livres or 400,000l. sterling for home consumption.

The New foundland Fisheries employ annually 264 ships, containing [...],439 tons, and 9,403 men. Total value of the Fishery, 6,000,000 [...] 270,000l. Sterling.

The East-India importation is valued at 18,000,000 livers, or [...],000l. Sterling.

Total Exports of France 332,000,000 livers, or £.15,000,000 Sterl.
Imports 256,000,000 livres, or £.11,640,000
Balance in favour of France   £. 3,360,000

One great disadvantage to the commerce of France is, that the pro­fession of a merchant is not so honourable as in England and some other countries, so that the French nobility think it below them; which is the reason that the church, the law, and the army, are so full of that order. A great number of the cities of France, till the late revolution, had the privilege of coinage, and each of them a partic­ular mark to distinguish their respective pieces; which was very [...]crassing, especially to strangers.

Trade was much benefited in France by the following circumstances and regulations: First, By the great subordination the lower classes of the people were kept in habits of sobriety and industry; this was perhaps [...] of the few good consequences of the severity of a strict monarohi­ed government, which may in some measure palliate some other hard­ [...] resulting from it. Secondly, No goods were permitted to be of­ [...]d for sale which had not previously been examined by proper of­ [...], in order to prevent impositions on the purchaser. Thirdly, The French colonies were under the necessary of being supplied with almost all necessaries from the mother country. Fourthly, In the [...]ts, for instance, at Bourdeaux, the commodities imported by mer­chants wore deposited in the royal warehouses adjoining the custom­ [...]se, and the duties of the whole purchase were not paid at once, but [...]y the duties of such parts of it as the merchant took out gradually [...] the warehouses for sale.

The bank of France, called the Caisse d'Escompte, enjoys considera­ble credit. There is only one trading company, viz. the East-India company; the stock of which amounts to only ten millions of livres, and whose affairs are under the management of twelve administrators.

LEARNING AND TEARNED MEN.] The sciences have risen to a very great height in this kingdom, and this nation can boast of having pro­ [...]d great master-pieces in almost every branch of scientific knowl­edge and elegant literature. The influence of a superstitious religion on science has been less felt in France than in other Catholic countries; [...]ably from the emulation of the Catholics with their Protestant [...]trymen, who for many years enjoyed free exercise of their relig­ion, and who made great progress in sciences. During the last hun­dred years, the French language has acquired the great privilege of be­ing generally introduced as a polite language into all [...] European countries. Besides the excellence of the French writers of the age of [...] XV. the circulation of that language must be attributed [Page 278] to the frequent wars and negociations of the French, to the p [...] ­alence of their fashions, and to the dispersion of several hundred thousand banished Protestants over other countries, where the poss [...] ­ness of their manners effected a predilection for their language.

Lewis XIV. was the Augustus of France. The protection he give to letters, and the pensions he bestowed on learned men, both at home and abroad, which, by calculation, did not amount to above r [...], [...] per annum, have gained him more glory than all the military [...] ­prises, upon which he expended so many millions. The learn [...]ss [...] who appeared in France during this reign, are too numerous [...] mentioned. Their tragic poets, Racine and Corneille, have [...] obtained a very high reputation: The first was distinguished [...] skill in moving the passions; the second for majesty; and both, [...] the strength and justness of their painting, the elegance of their [...] and their strict adherence to the rules of the drama. Moliere [...] have exhausted the subjects of comedy, were they not every [...] inexhaustible, and particularly in France. In works of satire [...] criticism, Boileau, who was a close imitator of the ancients, poss [...] uncommon merit. But France has not yet produced an epic [...] that can be mentioned with Milton's; nor a genius of the same ext [...] five and universal kind with Shakespeare, equally fitted for the gay and the serious, the humorous and the sublime. In the eloquence of [...] pulpit and of the bar, the French are greatly superior to the England Bossuet, Bourdaloue, Flechier, Massillon and Saurin, have carried [...] pit eloquence to a degree of perfection which the English may [...] ­proach to, but can hardly be expected ever to surpass. The ge [...] however, of their religion and government, was extremely unfavou [...] to all improvements in the most useful branches of Philosophy. [...] establishments of Lewis XIV, for the advancement of science, were [...] able to counterbalance the influence of the clergy, and that the [...] and ministry, who had an equal interest in concealing the natural [...] of mankind, and every sound principle of government. The Fr [...] have not therefore so many good writers on moral, religious, or po [...] ­cal subjects, as have appeared in Great Britain. But France has pro­duced some great men who do honour to humanity; whose carver [...] obstacle could stop, whose freedom no government, however [...] no religion however superstitious, could curb or restrain. At [...] [...] ­ [...]orian, De Thou is entitled to the highest praise; and who is [...] of Pascal, or of the archbishop of Cambray? Few men have [...] [...] service to religion, either by their writings or their lives. [...] [...] Montesquieu, he is an honour to human nature: He is the leg [...] of nations; his works are read in every country and langu [...] wherever they go they enlighten and invigorated the human mind.

In the Belles Letters and miscellaneous way, no nation over [...] ­ced more agreeable writers; among whom we may place [...] D'Argens, Voltaire and Marmontel, as the most considerable.

Descartes ranks among the greatest philosophers in mode [...] [...] He was the first who applied algebra to the solution of geo [...] problems, which naturally paved the way to the analytical dis [...] of Newton. Many of the present age are excellent mathema [...] particularly D'Alembert, who, with all the precision of a go [...] has united the talents of a fine writer.

[Page 279] Since the beginning of the present century, the French have vied with the English in natural philosophy. Busson is to be regarded as a philosophical painter of nature; and, under this view, his Natural History is the first work of its kind.

Their painters, Poussin, Le Brun, and above all Le Sueur, did hon­our to the age of Lewis XIV. They have none at present to compare with them in the more noble kinds of painting; but Mr. Greuse, for [...]traits and conversation-pieces, never perhaps was excelled.

Sculpture is in general better understood in France than in most [...]er countries of Europe. Their treatises on ship-building and engi­ [...]ring stand unrivalled; but in the practice of both they are outdone by the English. No genius has hitherto equalled Vauban in the theo­ [...] or practice of fortification. The French were long superior to the English in architecture.

We shall conclude this head with observing, that the French have [...] finished the Encyclop [...]die, or general dictionary of arts and scien­ [...], which was draw up by the most able masters in each branch of [...]ture, in 28 volumes in folio (six of which are copper-plates) under [...] direction of Messieurs D'Alembert and Diderot, and is one of the most complete collections of human knowledge.

UNIVERSITIES AND PUBLIC COLLEGES.] Those literary institu­ [...] received a present loss by the expulsion of the Jesuits, who made the languages, arts, and science, their particular study, and taught than all over France; but as the extinction of this body of men has [...]ved to lessen the influence of superstition in France, there is reason [...] believe that the interests of real learning and science have, upon the [...]le, been promoted by that event. It is not within our plan to de­ [...]e the different governments and constitutions of every university public college in France; but they are in number twenty-eight, as [...]ows: Aix, Anglers, Arles, Avignon, Besancon, Bourdeaux, Bour­ [...] Caen, Cahors, Dol, Douay, La Fleche, Montauban, Montpellier, [...]tes, Orange, Orleans, Paris, Perpignan, Poitiers, Pont-a-Mousson, [...]lieu Rheims, Soissons, Strasbourg, Toulouse, Tournoise, and [...]lence.

ACADEMIES.] There are eight academies in Paris, namely, three [...]rary ones, the French Academy, that of Inscriptions, and that of the Sciences; one of painting and sculpture, one of architecture, and [...] for riding the great horse, and other military exercises.

ANIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} Few countries, if we except Italy, can boast of more valua­ble remains of antiquity than France. Some of the French antiquities [...] to the time of the Celts, and consequently, compared to them, those of Rome are modern. Father Mabillon has given us a most cu­rious account of the sepulchres of their kings, which have been dis­ [...]ed so far back as Pharamond; and some of them, when broke [...], were found to contain ornaments and jewels of value. At [...], and other parts of France, are to be seen triumphal arches; [...] the most entire is at Orange, erected on account of the victory ob­ [...] over the Cimbri and Teutones, by Caius Marius and Luctatius [...]. After Gaul was reduced to a Roman province, the Romans [...] [...] delight in adorning it with magnificent edifices, both civil [...] [...]ed; some of which are more entire then any to be met with in [Page 280] Italy itself. The ruins of an amphitheatre are to be found in [...] and likewise at Vienne. Nismes, however, exhibits the most valuable remains of ancient architecture of any place in France. The [...] Pont du Garde was raised in the Augustan age by the Roman [...] of Nismes, to convey a stream of water between two mounttains [...] the use of that city, and is as fresh to this day as Westminster-bridge. It consists of three bridges, or tires of arches one above another; the height is 174 feet, and the length extends to 723. The moderns [...] indebted for this, and many other stupendous aqueducts, to the igno­rance of the ancients, that all streams will rise as high as their ho [...]. Many other ruins of antiquity are found at Nismes; but the chi [...]y [...] the temple of Diana, whose vestiges are still remaining; the amphithe­atre, which is thought to be the finest and most entire of the kind [...] any in Europe; but above all, the houses erected by the emperor Ad [...] called the Maison Quarrée. The architecture and sculpture of [...] building are so exquisitely beautiful, that it enchants even the [...] ignorant; and it is still entire, being very little affected either by the ravages of time, or the havoc of war. At Paris, in La Rue the [...] Harpe, may be seen the remains of a palace, or Thermae, supposed as have been built by the emperor Julian, surnamed the Apostate, about the year 356, after the same model as the baths of Dioclesian. The re­mains of this ancient edifice are many arches, and within them a large saloon. It is fabricated of a kind of mastic, the composition of which is not now known, intermixed with small square pieces of free-stone and bricks.

In Arles in Provence is to be seen an obelisk of oriental granite, which is 52 feet high, and seven feet diameter at the base, and all but one stone. Roman temples are frequent in France. The most par­ticular are in Burgundy and Guienne; and other places, besides the neighbourhood of Nismes, contain magnificent ruins of [...]quodu [...]. The passage [...]ut through the middle of a rock near Briancon in [...] ­phlary, is thought to be a Roman work, if not of greater antiquity. The round buckler of massy silver, taken out of the Rhone in [...] being twenty inches in diameter, and weighing twenty-one poun [...] containing the story of Scipio's continence, is thought to be co [...]al with that great general. It would be endless to recount the different monuments of antiquity to be found in France, particularly in the cabinets of the curious.

CITIES AND TOWNS.] These are numerous in France; of which we shall mention only Paris, Lisle, and their principal sea-ports; street and Toulon.

Lisle, in French Flanders, is thought to be the most regular and strongest fortification in Europe, and was the master-piece of the famous Vauban. It is generally garrisoned with above 10,000 regulars; and, for its magnificence and elegance, it is called Little Paris. Its manufactures of silk, cambric, and camblets, are very con­siderable; and its inhabitants amounts to about 100,000. Dunkirk which the French were obliged by the treaty of Utrecht to de [...]lis [...] is still a thorn in the side of the English, by being a habour for their smugglers, and may now, by an article in the lest treaty of peace, be put into what condition the French ministry may please. The rest of French Flanders, and its Netherlands, abound with fortified towns which carry on very gainful manufactures.

[Page 281] Moving southward, we come to the Isle of France; the capital of which, and of the whole kingdom, is Paris. The population of Paris, [...] to Guthrie does not exceed 7 or 800,000; according to [...] 680,0000; so that if A [...]kin's conjecture respecting the population of London be near the truth, * the population of Paris [...] that of London.

Parts is divided into three parts; the city, the university, and that which was formerly called the Town. The city is old Paris; the uni­versity and the town are the new. Paris is said to be the paradise of splendor and dissipation. The tapestry of the Gobelines is unequal­led for beauty and richness. The Louvre is a building that does hon­or architecture itself; and the institution of the French academy far [...]eds any thing of the kind in England, or elsewhere. The Thuil­ [...]es, the palace of Orlean's, or, as it is called, Luxembourg, where a [...]able collection of paintings are shewn, the royal palace the king's [...], the guild-hall, and the hospital for the invalids, are superb to the highest degree. The city of Paris is said to be fifteen miles in cir­cumference. The hotels of the French noblesse at Paris take up a grant deal of room with their court-yards and gardens; and so do their [...] and churches. The streets are very narrow, and the houses way high, many of them seven stories. The river Seine, runs through the centre of the city, but it is too far distant from the sea for the pur­poses of navigation; over it are many stone and wooden bridges. The police of Paris is so well attended to, that quarrels, accidents, or selo­ [...]its, seldom happen; and strangers, from all quarters of the globe, let their appearance be ever so uncommon, meet with the most polite [...]ent. The streets are patrolled at night by horse and foot; so ju­diciously stationed, that no offender can escape their vigilance. They likewise visit the publicans precisely at the hour of twelve at night, to [...] that the company are gone; for in Paris no liquor can be had after [...] time. The public roads in France are under the same excellent, regulation, which, with the torture of the rack, prevents robberies in, they kingdom; but for the same reason, when robberies do happen, they are always attended with the death of the unfortunate traveller.

The environs of Paris are very pleasant, and contain a number of [...] seats, small towns, and villages; some of them being scattered on the edges of lofty mountains rising from the Seine, are remarkably de­lightful.

The palace of Vers [...]i [...]ies, which stands twelve miles from Paris, though magnificent and expensive beyond conception, and adorned with all that art can furnish, is properly a collection of buildings, each of exquisite architecture, but not forming a whole, agreeable to the grand and sub [...]me of that art. The gardens and waterworks. (which are supplied by means of prodigious engines across the Seine at Marli, about th [...]e miles distanced are astonishing proofs the fer­tile genius of man, and highly worthy of a stranger's attention. Tria­ [...], Marli. St. Germain [...]n Lave. Me [...]don, and other royal palaces, are laid out with taste and judgment; each has its peculiar beauties for the entertainment and amusement of a luxurious court.

[Page 282] Brest is a small, but very strong town, upon the English channel, with a most spacious and fine fortified road and harbour, the best and safest in all the kingdom: Its entrance however, is said to be difficult, by reason of many rocks lying under water. At Brest is a court of admiralty, and academy for sea-affairs, docks, and magazines for all kinds of naval stores, rope-yards, store-houses, &c. insomuch that is may now be termed the capital receptacle for the navy-royal of France, and is admirably well adapted for that end.

Lewis XIV. rendered Toulon, from a pitiful village, a sea-port of great importance. He fortified both the town and harbour, for the [...] ­ception and protection of the navy-royal. Its old and its new harbour, lie contiguous; and by means of a canal, ships pass from the one to other, both of them having an outlet into the spacious outer harbour. Its arsenal, established also by that king, has a particular storehouse for each ship of war, its guns, cordage, &c. being separately laid up. Here are spacious workshops for blacksmiths, joiners, carpent [...], locksmiths carvers, &c. Its ropewalk, of stone, is 320 toises or fa­thoms in length, with three arched walks. Its general magazine sup­plies whatever may be wanting in the particular store-houses, and con­tains an immense quantity of all kinds of stores, disposed in the great­est order. The other principal town in France are mentioned in the Table.

RELIGION.] The established religion of this kingdom before the late Revolution was the Roman Catholic; and since the years 1685, in which the edict of Nantes was repealed, greatly to the prejudice of the kingdom, no other Christian sect was legally tolerated. In some parts of the kingdom, at Bourdeaux and Metz, Jews were tolerated under certain restrictions. The sect of Jansenists are very numerous. The Gallican church has always been able to defend its liberties against the encroachments of papal power, and it adopted only such parts of the canon law as did not militate against its rights. The bishoprics and prebends were entirely in the gift of the king. No other Catholic state, except those of Italy, had so numerous a clergy as France: then were in this kingdom so late as 1784, 18 archbishops, 111 bishops 166,000 clergymen, 5400 convents, containing 200,000 persons devo­ted to a monastic life. * The numbers of the clergy were then, howev­er, greatly decreasing, and according to some statements, they did not amount to more the 130,000 persons. The revenues amounted as 121 millions of livres, but they were subject to heavy taxation. The income of the bishops alone was estimated at 6,000,000 of livres. Ev­ery diocese had a court, called bureau d [...]esain, the jurisdiction of which respected the contributions payable by the clergy, and was lim­ited to sums under 20 livres. From these courts appeal might be made to nine Chambres ccelefiastiques superieures.

The unsettled state of affairs in France, render it difficult, if not im­possible, to give a just account of the present state of Religion in that kingdom.

[Page 283]

Statement of the Annual REVENUE and EXPENDITURE of France, made out by M. Necker, first Minister of the Finances, and delivered by him to the Assembly of the States General, on the 4th of May, 1789.

REVENUE.
  Livres. Pounds Sterl.
Revenue farmed, called fermes géné­rates, being the duty on salt, on to­bacco, entries at Paris, &c. 150,107,000 or 6,254,458
Post duty 12,000,000 500,000
Hackney-coaches, stage-coaches, and other public carriages 1,100,000 45,833
Duties on cattle sold at the markets of Sceaux and Poissy 630,000 26,250
Duties of affinage 130,000 5,000
Duties at port Louis in Britany 47,000 1,958
Duties compounded for in some of the maritime parts of Flanders 823,000 34,291
Aides, or duties on wines and spirits, and a variety of other duties united under the direction of the same per­sons 50,220,000 2,092,500
The royal domains and forests 50,000,000 2,083,333
Revenue carried over 265,047,000 11,043,623
EXPENDITURE.
  Livres. Pounds Sterl.
Expense of the houshold of the king, the queen, the king's sister Mad­ame Elizabeth, and his two aunts 25,000,000 or 1,041,666
Of the king's brother, Monsieur, 2,296,000    
Of Madame, wise to Monsieur 1,360,000    
  3,656,000 152,333
Of the Count d'Artois 2,296,000    
Of the Countess d'Artois 1,360,000    
Of the duke of Angouléme Sons to the Count d Artois 400,000    
Of the duke of Berry 300,000    
  4,356,000 191,000
Expenditure carried over 33,012,000 1,384,999

[Page 284]

REVENUE BROUGHT OVER.
  Livres. Pounds Sterling.
Brought over 265,017,000 11,043,623
Lotteries 14,000,000 583,333
Duty on wrought gold, called the ma [...]e d'or 1,500,000 62,500
Powder and salt petre 800,000 33,333
Taxes; including the poll-tax, land­tax, &c. in Paris, and in the prov­inces called the Pays d' Ele [...]tun and Pay [...] conquis 155,655,000 6,485,625
In Languedo [...] 9,767,250 406,968
Britany 6,611,460 275,477
Provence 2,892,460 120,519
Pau, Bayonne, and Foix 1,156,650 48,193
Branches of the poll Tax and land Tax that are farmed 575,000 23,958
Profit of the Mint 500,000 20,833
Profit at the Royal forges 80,000 3,333
Duties received by the board of Com­merce 636,000 26,500
Revenue carried over 466,349,000 19,431,202
EXPENDITURE BROUGHT OVER.
  Livres. Pounds Sterl.
Brought over 33,012,000 1,384,999
Department of foreign affairs, including the expense at home and abroad, the secretary of state, the public offices, ambassadors, ministers, secret service, &c. 5,150,000    
Subsidies and succours to the duke of Parma 375,000    
To the duke of Deux Ponts 500,000    
To the prince of Nassau Saatbruck 100,000    
Succours and annual al­lowances to different foreigners 375,000    
6,500,000    
League with the Swiss 830,000    
  7,330,000 306,416
Expense of the Army, and every thing belonging to the war depart­ment 99,091,000 4,128,794
Expenditure carried over [...] [...]

[Page 285]

REVENUE BROUGHT OVER.
Brought over 466,349,000 19,431,202
Interest on about 36,230,000 livres owing by the States of America. 1,600,000 66,666
Interest on 6,000,000 lent to the duke of Deux Ponts 300,000 12,500
Rent on ground and houses belong­ing to the hospital of the Quinze Vingts 180,000 7,500
Poll Tax and tenths deducted from pensions, &c. 6,290,000 26 [...],083
Particular duties at fortified towns 575,000 23,958
Total of Revenue 475,294,000 19,803,909
EXPENDITURE BROUGHT OVER.
Brought over 1 [...],4 [...]3,000 5, [...]20,16 [...]
Marine department and colonies 40,500,000 1,687,500
Bridges and highways 5,680,000 236,666
Steeds for breeding horses 814,000 33,916
Pensions 29,954,000 1,248,083
Allowances to different persons by way of indemnity, for rights and privileges relinguished 3,167,000 131,958
Salaries to Counsellors of State, and Magistrates 2,815,000 117,291
Wages and allowances to persons in different employments 351,000 14,625
Intendants in the provinces, and per­sons under them 1,413,000 58,875
Police of Paris 1,569,000 65,375
Guards, horse and foot, for the po­lice of Paris 1,136,000 47,333
The guards called Maréchaussée of the Isle de France 251,000 10,458
Paving the streets of Paris 627,000 26,125
Work in the quarries under Paris 400,000 16,666
Remissions and deductions made on taxes, &c. comm. an. 7,123,000 296,791
Allowances to the receivers and farmers general, and other ex­penses on the receipts 19,511,000 [...]12,958
Expenditure 254,744,000 10,614,784

[Page 286]

REVENUE BROUGHT OVER.
Brought over 475,294,000 or 19,803,909
N. B. In this statement, the écu of three livres, is reckoned at two shillings and six pence sterling; for though the exchange with France has for some months past been some­times even under twenty-six pence for the ecú, the medium rate of ex­change is from thirty to thirty-one pence.    
EXPENDITURE BROUGHT OVER.
Brought over 254,744,000 10,614,784
Board and clerks of the treasury, payers of the annuities, &c. 3,372,000 140,500
Board of the general administration of the finances 2,345,000 97,708
Board of commerce, the mint, mines, and the board for settling the affairs of the late East-India company 794,000 33,083
Funds reserved for acts of charity to distressed families 173,000 7,208
Succours to the Dutch refugees in France 829,000 34,541
Religious communities, convents, and repairs of sacred edifices 2,082,000 86,750
Gifts, alms, hospitals, including the hospital for foundlings 3,635,000 151,458
Persons employed out of charity in times scarcity 1,911,000 79,625
      Houses for vagabonds in different parts of the kingdom 1,144,000 47,666
Prizes, &c. for encouraging com­merce and manuactures 3,862,000 160,916
Royal garden for plants, and cabinet of natural history 129,000 5,375
Expenditure carried over 275,0 [...]0,000 11,4 [...]9,614

[Page 287]

REVENUE BROUGHT OVER.
Brought over 475,294,000 19,803,909
EXPENDITURE BROUGHT OVER
Brought over 275,020,000 11,459,614
Royal library 159,000 6,625
Universities, academies, colleges, arts and sciences 1,004,000 41,833
Passports and exemptions from du­ties to foreign ministers, &c. esti­mated at 400,000 16,666
Keeping up and constructing public buildings 1,874,000 78,083
Expenses of Plantations, &c. in the forests, &c. 817,000 34,041
Expense of criminal prosecutions and maintenance of prisoners 3,180,000 132,500
Various expenses, local and variable, made in the provinces, of succours in cases of inundations, encourage­ments to different useful establish­ments, &c. 4,500,000 187,500
Extraordinary and unforseen expen­ses, estimated at 5,000,000 208,333
Perpetual annuities 56,796,924 *161,466,390 2,366,538
Life annuities 101,469,586 4,227,899
Tontines 3,199,880 133,328
Carried over 453,320,390 18,892,960

[Page 288]

REVENUE BROUGHT OVER.
Brought over 475,294,000 19,803,909
Desiciency or the amount of what the expenditure exceeded the revenue 56,239,000 2,313,291
  531,533,000 22,147,200
Difference for the fraction   9
    22,147,209
EXPENDITURE BROUGHT OVER.
Brought over 453,320,390 18,892,960
Interest of sums borrowed at different times 44,856,000 1,869,0 [...]0
Money owing to the clergy 2,500,000 10½,166
Wages and salaries of places and offi­ces, purchased, and which may be considered as interest on money borrowed 14,729,000 613,708
Interest and expense of anticipations, on the revenue of 1790 and 1791 15,800,000 658,333
Total livre, 531,205,390 22,138,167
Signed, DUFRESNE, and examined, NECKER.
*
161,466,390, instead of 161,466,000, in the addition stated by M. Necker.

The foregoing statement of the Revenue and Expenditure of France before the late revolution, may be considered as [...] most [...] of any that has been laid before the public. The experience of the Minister of Finance, aided by the [...] assistance of man who had long been in o [...]e, enabled him to produce the exact [...]st information [...] the [...] [...] the [...] was produced precludes every idea of [...].

[Page 289] ARMY.] In 1784 the whole French army consisted of

infantry, 144,624
[...]alry, 58,176
M [...]rs, 9,798
[...]ers, 326
Total, 212,924

The following is said to be an actual statement of the French army, a reported to the national assemble, in the summer of 1792, by a com­ [...] of twelve, appointed for the purpose:

TROOPS OF THE LINE.Marshal Luckner.
[...]stive men in the field, 23,049
[...] the several garrisons, 15,375
Total, 38,424
To complete the regiment of which these troops consist, there are wanting, 5409
[...] that when the regiments are complete, the number of effective men will be, 43,833
M. la Fayette.
M [...]ssive men in the field, 23,227
In the several garrisons, 15,127
Total, 38,354
[...] to complete the several regimonts, 7020
Wanting complete they will be, 45,374
M. Lamoliere.
[...] field, 20,94 [...]
[...] [...]rison, 11,630
Total, 32,573
Wanting to complete the several regiments, 4,924
[...] complete they will be, 37,497
M. Montesq [...]ieu.
In the field, 23,380
[...], 10,841
Total, 34,221
Wanting to complete the several regiments, 8,650
[...] complete they will be, 38,871

[...] four armies, the troops in the field, including some compa­ [...]ly joined, are 90,599; in garrison 54,173; making, together, [...] Wanting to complete the regiments 21,885; so that, when [...], the four armies will consist of 66,657.

[...]interior of the kingdom are 21,375 men; and when the reg­ [...] completed they will be 26,375.

[...] [...]ies them are 12,564.

[Page 290] The whole effective men of the troops of the line, are 178,518; and when completed they will be 205,286.

NATIONAL GUARDS.
With Luckner 21,000
With Fayette 22,000
On the Rhine 26,000
In the South 25,000
In the Colonies 5,000
In the Interior 3,500
Total, 92,500

The troops lately voted by the national assembly, and partly raised, will amount to 171,774. The troops of the line and volunteer nation­al guards, when completed will amount to 400,000; and of these 201,000 are actually in the field, or in garrison.

NAVY.] In 1785, France had 256 ships, viz.

Ships of the line 72
Frigates 74
Corvettes 28
Gallies 36
Cutters 27
Fire ships 19
  256

In the year 1780, 1782, the number of ships was 266.

The navy department is divided into the western and eastern depart­ments (du Ponent & du Levant) the first of which has again three sub­divisions. The chief ports of the royal navy are those of Toulon, Brest, Port Louis, Rochefort, and Havre de Grace; that of Cherb [...] has lately been repaired.

All naval affairs are under the management of the Secretaire de la Marine; the chief commander of the fleet is the Lord Admiral France. There are in France six naval academics, and many military schools, for the formation, of sea and land officers.

CONSTITUTION.] The French constitution, finally decreed by the National Assembly, and presented to the king on the 3d, and accepted by him on the 13th of Sept. 1701, contains a declaration of the rights of a man and citizen; a guarantee of natural and civil rights, and a frame of government. The declaration asserts, among other things. That all men are born and remain free and equal in rights—That these rights are liberty, property, security and resistance against oppression—That the principle of sovereignty resides essentially in the nation—That lib­erty consists in the power of doing every thing, except that which is hurtful to another—That the law has a right to forbid those action on­ly that are hurtful to society—That the law is the expression of the general will—That no person can be accused, arrested or de [...]i [...] ex­cept in the cases, and according to the forms, prescribed by [...]. That no person shall be molested for his opinions, even such as are re­ligious, provided they be consistent with public order—That [...] citizen may freely speak, write and publish his sentiments; [...], however, to answer for the abuse of that liberty, in cases dete [...] by the law—That society has a right to demand from every [...] [Page 291] [...], an account of his administration—That no person can be depri­ved of his property, except when the public necessity, legally ascer­tained, shall evidently require it, and on condition of a just and pre­ [...] indemnification.

The constitution, established on these principles, declares. That there is no longer nobility or peerage, or hereditary distinctions, or dis­tinctions of orders, or feudal system, or patrimonial jurisdiction or any of the titles, denominations and prerogatives derived from them, or any g [...]ers of chivalry, corporations or decorations, for which proofs of [...] were required, or which supposed distinctions of birth, or any [...] superiority, but that of public officers, in the exercise of their [...]tions—That no public office is any longer saleable or hereditary—That the law no longer recognizes religious vows or any other engage­ [...]ts contrary to natural rights, or to the constitution.

The constitution guarantees, as natural and civil rights, among others, That all citizens are admissible to places and employments without any distinction, but that of ability and virtue—That all contributions shall be divided equally among all the citizens in proportion to their mean—That the same crimes shall be subject to the same punishments with­out any distinction of persons—That the citizens have a right to choose the ministers of their worship—It promises that a national festival shall be established to preserve the memory of the French revolution, [...] and that a code of civil law small be framed for the common use of the whole kingdom.

By the constitution, the kingdom is one and indivisible; its territory [...]or administration, is divided into 83 departments, each depart­ment into districts, each district into cantons.—Those, by the constitu­tion are French citizens who are the offspring of French men or [...]ch women, whether born in the kingdom, or in foreign countries, provided their fixed residence be in France.—The legislature may nat­ [...]ize a foreigner on no other condition than that of his residing in [...]ce, and taking the civic oath.—The civic oath is—▪ I swear to be faithful to the nation, the law and the king; and to maintain with all my [...] the constitution of the kingdom decreed by the National Assembly dur­ing the years 1789,1790 and 1791.

[...] constitution declares. That the sovereignty is one, indivisible, [...]enable, and imprescriptible, and it belongs to the nation—That the nation, from which alone flow all powers, cannot exercise them [...] by delegation—The French constitution is representative—The representatives are the legislative body and the king.

The government is monarchical. The legislative power is delegated [...] National Assembly, consisting of one chamber only; composed of representatives, freely chosen by the people every two years, and to be exercised by this assembly, with the sanction of the king, in manner [...] determined—The legislative body shall not be dissolved by [...]—The executive power is delegated to the king, to be exer­ [...] under his authority, by ministers and other responsible agents, in [...] afterwards determined.

[...] constitution declares, that the number of representatives to the [...] body shall be 745; and that they shall be distributed among [...] departments, according to the three proportions of land, of [...], and the contribution direct.—Of the 745 representatives, [Page 292] 247 are attached to the land—249 to the population, and 249 to [...] contribution. In order to form a legislative National Assembly, the active citizens shall convene every two years on the second Sunday [...] March, if not sooner convoked, in primary assemblies, in the cities and cantons. To be an active citizen, it is necessary to be a Frenchman, or to have become a Frenchman—to have attained 25 years, complete—to have resided in the city or canton during the period determined by law—to pay a contribution, to the value, at least, of 3 days labour— [...] to be a servant receiving wages—to be inscribed in the municipality of the place of his residence, in the list of the national guards—and to have taken the civic oath.—Every 6 years the legislative body shall [...] the maximum and minimum of the value of a days labour. The pri [...] ­ry assemblies shall name electors, in proportion to the number of [...] citizens residing in the city or canton, viz. one elector for 100 [...] citizens; two electors, from 150 to 2 [...]0, and so on in this proportion. In order to be nominated an elector, a man crust have the qualification of an active citizen, and also, in towns of above 6000 souls, must [...] property, or the usufruct or property, valued on the rolls of contribu­tion at a rent equal to the local value of [...]00 days labour; or be the [...] ­ter of a habitation, valued, on the same tolls, at a rent equal to the value of 150 days labour. In towns of less than 6000 souls.—must [...] property, or the usufruct of property, valued as above, at a rent, equal to 150 days labour; or be the render of a habitation, valued at a rent, equal to 100 days labour; and in the country—must possess property or the usufruct of property, valued, as above, at a rent equal to 15o days labour; or of being farmer or lessee of property valued at a rent equal to 400 days labour.

The electors named in each department shall convene, of full [...], if they have not been convoked by the proper officers, on the last Sun­day in March, to choose the number of representatives, whose nomina­tion shall belong to their department, and a number of substituted e­qual to a third of the representatives. The representatives and [...] ­tutes shall be chosen by a majority of voters, from the active citi [...] of the department. All active citizens, whatever be their state, pro­fession, or contribution, may be chosen as representatives of the nation, except ministers and other agents of the executive power, commi [...]n­ers of the national treasury, collectors and receivers of the direct c [...]i­b [...]ions, superintendants of the indirect contributions and national domains, civil and military officers of the king's household. The ex­ercise of the municipal, ministrative and judiciary functions, shall be incompatible with the function of a representative of the nation do­ing every period of the legislature. The members of the legislative body may be re-elected to a subsequent legislature, but not afterward, until an interval of one legislature. The representatives named in the departments, shall not be representatives of a particular department, but of the whole nation, and no instructions can be given them.

No active citizen can enter or vote in an assembly, if he be equal. In no case, under no pretext, shall be king, or any agents [...] by him, interfere in questions relative to the regularity of the [...] ­tion, the sitting of assemblies, the form of elections, or the [...] rights of citizens, without prejudice to the functions of the king [...] missioners, in cases determined by law, when questions relative to the political rights of citizens are to be brought before the tribunals.

[Page 293] The representative shall convene on the first Monday of May, at the place of the sitting of the last legislature. The eldest of their [...]mber shall preside in order to verify the powers of the representa­tion present. When 373 representative shall be present, and their powers verified, they shall constitute themselves under the title of "The Legislative National Assembly"—name a president, vice president, and secretaries, and enter on business. The representatives shall pro­ [...]ce in a body, in the name of the French people, the oath—"To [...] [...], OR DIE."—They shall then individually take the civic [...]. The representatives of the nation are inviolable.

The royalty is indivisible, and delegated hereditary to the race on the throne from male to male, and by order of primogeniture to the [...]etual exclusion of women, and their descendants.—The person of [...] king is inviolable: His only title is "KING OF THE FRENCH." There is no authority in France superior to that of the law. The king [...] only by it, and it is only in the name of the law that he can re­ [...] obedience. The king, one his accession to the throne, or at the [...] of his majority, shall take to the nation, in the presence of the legislative body, the oath. "To [...]e faithful to the nation and the law, to [...]loy all the power delegated to him, to maintain the constitution de­ [...]d by the Constituent National Assembly to the years 1789, 1790, [...], and to cause the laws to be executed." If the king does not [...] this oath within one month after an invitation by the legislative [...], or if, after taking it, he shall retract; if the king put himself at the land of an army, and direct the forces of it against the nation, or if he do not oppose, by a formal act, any such enterprize undertaken in his name; or if the king shall go out of the kingdom, and if after [...]ing invited by a proclamation of the legislative body, he do not re­ [...], in the delay to be fixed by the proclamation, and not to be less [...] two months; in either of these cases he shall be held to have ab­ [...]ed the throne, be ranked in the class of citizens, and may be accu­ [...] and tried like them, for acts posterior to his abdication. The con­ [...]tion provides for the splendor of the throne by a civil list, and al­ [...] the king, besides the guard of honour, a guard paid out of the civil [...], not exceeding 1200 infantry and 600 horse.

The king is a manor till the age of 13 complete; and during his [...]ority there shall be a regent of the kingdom, who must be a rela­tion of the king, the next in degree according to the order of succession [...] the throne, 23 years of age, a Frenchman, resident in the kingdom, [...] a presumptive heir to any other crown, and have previously taken the civic oath; or if the minor king have no relation thus qualified, a [...] shall be chosen by electors in each district, appointed for the purpose. The regency of the kingdom confers no right over the per­son of the minor king, the care of whom shall be confided to his [...]er▪ or, in case he have no mother, or she legally disqualified, [...] the legislative body.

The presumptive heir to the crown shall bear the name of Royal [...]. He cannot go out of the kingdom, without a decree of the Na­tional Assembly and the consent of the king: If, when out of the king­dom, [...] be required by the legislative body to return to France, and [...], he is held to have abdicated the right of succession to the [...]. To the king alone, belongs the choice and revocation of [Page 294] ministers; who are responsible for all the offences committed by them against the national safety and the constitution; and in no case can the written or verbal order of a king, shelter a minister from responsibility.

The constitution delegates to the legislative body, the powers and functions which are usually given to such bodies. The king can only invite the legislative body to take an object into consideration. War cannot be resolved on but by a decree of the National Assembly, passed on the formal and necessary proposition of the king, and sanctioned by him. It belongs exclusively to the legislative body to ratify treaties of peace, alliance and commerce. The executive power cannot march, or quarter, or station any troops of the line within 30,000 toises of the legislative body, without their consent. The deliberations of the leg­islative body, shall be public, and the minutes of the sittings be printed.

The decrees of the legislative body are presented to the king, who may refuse them his assent; but his refusal is only suspensive. When the two following legislatures shall successively present the same de­cree, in the same terms in which it was originally decreed, the king shall be deemed to have given his sanction. The king must express his assent or refusal within two months after the decree is presented to him. If he assents, he must say— "The king consents and will cause it to be executed."—If he refuses, he must say— "The king will examine."

When the legislative body is definitively constituted, it shall send a de­putation to inform the king. The king may every year open the session, and propose the objects, which, during its continuance, he thinks ought to be taken into consideration; this form, however, is not to be considered as necessary to the activity of the legislative body. Eight days, at least, before the end of each session, the legislative body shall send a depution to the king, to announce to him the day on which it proposes to terminate its sittings: The king may come in order to close the session.

The supreme executive power resides exclusively in the hands of the king, who is the supreme head of the general administration of the kingdom, and also of the land and sea forces. He appoints ambassa­dors—bestows the command of armies and fleets, and makes all other appointments, and transacts all other business which commonly apper­tain to the office of supreme magistrate. The king alone can interfere in foreign political connexions, conduct negotiations, make prepara­tions of war, distribute the land and sea forces, as he shall judge most suitable, and regulate their direction in case of war. Every declara­tion of war shall be made in these terms— "By the king of the French, in the name of the Nation."—It belongs to the king to agree upon and sign, with all foreign powers, all treaties of peace, alliance and com­merce, and other conventions, which he shall judge necessary for the welfare of the state, saving the ratification of the legislative body.

The judicial power can, in no case, be exercised by the legislative body or the king. Justice shall be gratuitously rendered by judges chosen for a time by the people, instituted by letters patent of the king, who cannot refuse the same; and who cannot be deposed, except from a forfeiture duly judged, or suspended, except from an accusation admitted. The public accuser shall be named by the people. The tribunals cannot either interfere in the exercise of the legislative pow­er, or suspend the execution of the laws, or undertake the administra­tive [Page 295] functions. There shall be one or more judges of peace in the cantons and in the cities. In the criminal matters, no citizen can be judged, except on an accusation received by jurors or decreed by the legislative body in the cases in which it belongs to it to prosecute the accusations. After the accusation shall be admitted, the fact shall be examined, and declared by the jurors. The party accused shall have the privilege of rejecting twenty. The jurors who declare the fact shall not be fewer than twelve. The application of the law shall be made by judges. The process shall be public, and the accused cannot be denied counsel. No man acquitted by legal jury, can be appre­hended or accused again on account of the same fact.

For the whole kingdom there shall be one tribunal of errors, estab­lished near the legislative body. Its functions shall be to pronounce, on applications to quash judgments, tendered by the tribunals in the last resort—On applications to refer causes from one tribunal to ano­ther on lawful grounds of suspicion—On questions respecting juris­diction or cognizance, and suits brought against a whole tribunal for illegal or corrupt judgment—The tribunal of errors can never de­termine on the merits of a case.

A high national court, composed of members of the tribunal of er­rors and high jurymen, shall have cognizance of crimes ministers and principal agan [...]s of the executive power, and of crimes against the general safety of the state, when the legislative body shall have issued a decree of accusation. They shall not convene but on the proclama­tion of the legislative body, and at the distance of 30,000 toises at least from the place where the legislature shall hold its sessions.

The constituent national assembly declares, that the nation has the unalienable right of altering the constitution; and the constitution ac­cordingly, prescribes the mode in which alterations shall be made.

The French colonies and possession in Asia, Africa and America, although they constitute a part of the French empire, are not included in the present constitution.

The Constituent National Assembly, commits this deposit to the fi­delity of the legislative body, of the king and of the judges; to the vig­ilance of others of families, to wives and mothers; to the affection of young citizens, and to the courage of Frenchmen.

(Signed) VERNIER, President.

HISTORY OF THE DATE REVOLUTION.] To give some idea of the orig [...] of this memoriable event, we must take notice, that the liberties of France, as well as those of Britain, were secured by their parlia­ments; but in the French constitution there was this capital defect, that the offices of its members were attached to particular families, ti­tles or situations; so that though the sanction of parliament was re­quisite for rendering every act of the king valid, they never were in a condition to refuse it. By degrees it was generally perceived by the people, that this excessive power with which the monarch was invest­ed did not originate either in the principles of the constitution, or the natural rights of mankind; but, as the kings were always in pos­session of a great standing army, any attempt at innovation would have been exceedingly dangerous. After the conclusion of the treaty of Paris in 1763, the French ministry seemed to adopt a plan different from, what they had formerly pursued. Justly supposing that the im­mense [Page 296] trade carried on by the British was the true source of their pow­er, they lessened the army in order to increase the marine; and in this they succeeded so well, that in the last war the French navy became much more formidable to Britain than ever it had been. But by this improvement, the power of the king, whose despotism could only be supported by a great standing army, was lessened of course. The army which assisted the Americans imbibed from them enthusiastic notions of liberty, which they would probably diffuse among their country­men, and consequently render them more impatient of the tyranny they laboured under than they were before. Besides this, the vast expenses attending the war with Britain had augmented the national debt far be­yond every resource which the kingdom could afford, so that govern­ment were put to the last shift in order to carry on the necessary opera­tions. In 1776, the finances had been put under the direction of M. Neckar, a native of Switzerland, and a Protestant, by whom a general reformation was made throughout every department in the revenue. In the beginning of the year 1780, a variety of unnecessary offices in the royal household were abolished, as well as many salutary regula­tions made for the public benefit. By his activity, the excess of dis­bursements above the revenue, which in the year 1776, had amounted to at least a million sterling, was converted into an excess of revenue above the disbursements, amounting to 445,000l. These reformations, however, not being calculated to please such as had found their in­terest in the abuses of revenue, he was dismissed, and others more a­grreable to the views of the courtiers appointed. Succeeding minis­ters being endowed neither with the integrity nor abilities of M. Nec­kar, the finances and credit of the nation were on the point of being entirely ruined, when the assembly of notables was convened. This as­sembly had been instituted in the early ages, and was composed of arch­bishops, bishops, various presidents of the different parliaments, and deputies of the different states. Thus it was a proper representation of the whole kingdom, and as such had been frequently called in times of public danger and distress. The minister at this time was M. de la Cal­onne, who is acknowledged not to be possessed of that disinterestedness for which M. Neckar was so eminently distinguished. He is said to have prevented the Assembly from sitting, from the 2 [...]th of January 1787, when it was convened, to the 22d of February; and to this the subsequent revolution is said immediately to have been owing; as, during then in­terval, an opportunity was given to the members of conversing with each other, communicating their complaints, and forming schemes for redress.

When the Assembly at last met for business, the king told them, that the object of their meeting was to improve the revenues; to ascer­tain their freedom by a more equal partition of taxes; to disengage the commerce of the kingdom from some of its embarassments; and to sup­port, as far as possible, the poorer part of the community. M. de Ca­lonne acknowledged the deficiency of the annual revenue to be about 80 millions of livres (about three millions sterling) which deficiency he traced as far back as the time of Cardinal Fleury, preceptor, and afterwards minister to Louis XV. The Abbe Terai, he said, had found the deficiency at 74 millions, and left it at [...]0; while M. Neckar, who had found it at 37 in the year 1776, had [...] It it at 56▪ [Page 297] in 1780; and in 18 months after that time it had risen to 80. M. Ne [...] ­ [...] offered to refute this charge; but Calonne refused to enter into [...]y discussion of the matter, and the king would not allow of an Inquiry. On a fair state of the case, however, it appeared that the deficiency of the revenue was at least 130 millions; and this was the more alarming, as during the administration of Calonne, no less than six hundred millions of debt had fallen in. The remedy he proposed [...] a general tax on land, and a stamp act. This last, called the Tim­ [...], occasioned the greatest alarm. It was even said, that every letter, which at any time might be adduced as a proof in a process at law, was to be stamped. Calonne's speech was published and severely criticised; he was supposed to have traced the deficiency of the revenue very high, in order to conceal his own faults; and he was opposed by the nobility and clergy; whose privileges he was supposed to have invaded by his land tax. In short, so great were the difficulties and embarra [...] ­ [...] of the minister, that he appealed from this Assembly to the peo­ple, [...]ming the Notables for their opposition, as he did not mean to [...] any new tax on the people, but to relieve them. In a general [...], on the 23d of April, the king expressed his sorrow for the [...] deficiency of revenue, and promised a more exact economy for the [...]; but concluded with mentioning the stamp act. The Notables received the speech with the utmost applause, but ventured to inquire into the necessity of a new tax, the proposed term of its duration, and the nature and extent of the savings to be made by it. This uncom­ [...] boldness did not give offence: The king condescended to enter [...] particulars, and calculated the increase of revenue at 40 millions: The Notables proceeded in their inquiries, and it was now suggested that an Assembly of the States should be called, as the Notables were [...] competent to impose a new tax. As the deliberations of the Not­ables were not carried on in secret, this proposal was instantly circulat­ed through the capital, and supposed to be a new discovery. The Nota­bles were soon after dissolved, without having accomplished any thing, excepting the justification of M. Neckar. During their researches into [...] affairs of the revenue, it was found, that at the end of his admin­istration, there was an excess of ten millions annually; while at present the six hundred millions which were fallen in▪ had not been accounted [...], and a deficiency of between 130 and 140 millions was to be sup­posed.

The Assembly of Notables was succeeded by the establishment of the Council of Finance; a free passage for corn was allowed from one province to another; and the Cor [...]ee [...], or personal services to the [...] were abolished by edict; but at the same time, the stamp act was estab­lished. It extended to all letters and commissions for ev [...] office and place, either honorary or useful; for every grant, title, o [...] concession; [...]cites for study; grants under the privy seal; commissions in the [...] of the king; accounts and receipts of every king, &c. &c.

The weight of this tax was looked upon to be so intolerable, that [...] parliament refused to register it. Instead of this, they called, in [...], for accounts, till, in the discussion of the affair, it was also [...] to be discovered, that the parliament had no right to tax, but [...] existed only in the States General. The peers were convened [...] parliament on the 30th, and joined with them in all their views. [Page 298] A bed of justice was held by the king on the 5th of August, at which the parliament was obliged to attend, and the edict was registered not­withstanding their protest to the contrary. Ten days after, they were banished to Troyes, and the edict registered, by authority, in the Cham­ber of Accompts, and the Court of Aids; though each body joined the parliament in their opposition and protests, applauding them for their firmness and propriety of conduct.

The banishment of the parliament of Paris, was resented so much by the whole nation, that in a short time it was found necessary to recall them, and matters were for a time conciliated; though on this occa­sion▪ it is said, that the parliament departed from the principles they had formerly proceeded upon. Disturbances, however, were very soon revived. The parliament of Bourdeaux was banished in the month of August, the same year, and the consequences were similar to what have been related concerning that of Paris. The latter was scarcely recall­ed, when they were desired to register a loan to be taken up by gradual instalments, which, the minister pretended, would in 1792, render the revenues more than equivalent to the expenses; but as this loan a­mounted to no less than 340 millions, somewhat more than 15 millions sterling, the parliament hesitated, notwithstanding all the man [...] of the minister. At last the king himself came to the house, and held what is called a Royal Session. The edicts were now registered, but the duke of Orleans protested, in the presence of the king, against the le­gality of the proceeding. The parliament protested against the le­gality of the session itself, but to no purpose. The duke of Orleans, with four others, were banished; the king called for the journals of the house, destroyed the protest, and forbade it to be inserted again. Great clamours were raised by the banishment of the duke of Orleans, and other members of parliament; remonstrances were presented by the parliaments of Paris, Bourdeaux, and Rennes, but the exiles were not recalled till the spring of 1788.

Towards the end of 1787, matters were apparently in a state of tran­quillity, the loans being filled, and the royal payments exact. Secret discontents and commotions, however, had undoubtedly taken place; the passion for liberty, which had already displayed itself in great free­dom of speech, continued to gain ground, and at last broke forth with irresistible fury in the month of June, 1789. The National Assembly, or Estates of the Kingdom, were then sitting▪ and had been so for some time, when on the 20th of the month, an address to the king was pre­sented by the nobility, complaining that "the deputies of the Third Estate had attempted to centre, in their own persons, the whole authority of the States General, without waiting for the concurrence of the oth­er orders, or the sanction of his Majesty—that they had attempted to convert their decrees into laws; and had ordered them to be printed, published and distributed in the provinces; had repealed, and re-enact­ed the taxes, and seemed to attribute to themselves the united rights of the monarch, and the three great orders who compose the States General." In consequence of this the king issued a proclamation, in­timating that he would hold a Royal Session in two days. At [...] in the morning, Mr. Baillie, the president of the commons, went to the hall with his two secretaries, but found the door shut, and guarded by soldiers; the hall was also filled with soldiers, and all the benches [...]. [Page 299] The commanding officer informed them that he had orders to al­low nobody to enter the hall; to which the president replied, that he had no orders to discontinue the meetings of the National Assembly; but was again told, that positive orders had been given to allow no­body to enter the halls of the States General before the Royal Sessions. It was then moved by Mr. Target, an eminent lawyer, and member for Paris, that an oath should be taken by all the members of the Assembly, that they were called together to six the constitution, and operate the regeneration of public order; that nothing could prevent them from continuing their deliberations, in whatever place they were compelled to hold their meetings; that wheresoever the members are collected, there the National Assembly is; and that each member take a solemn [...]th never to separate, but to assemble together wherever circumstan­ces require, until the constitution be established, and consolidated on proper foundations.

This proposal was received with loud acclamations; the oath was signed by the president and members, as well as by the deputies from St. Domingo, who requested leave to do so; after which the National Assembly proceeded to business. They began with resolving that an address should be presented to the king, for augmenting the pay of the national troops of France, to an equality with those of foreigners in the French service, viz. from four and a half to six and half sous per dry; thus conciliating the army to their side, in case there should be occasion for their assistance in the affair. These proceedings were far from being agreeable to his Majesty. On the 23d of June, he held a ses­sion of the Three Estates, to whom he made a speech, complaining that [...] was not seconded in his benevolent intentions; that the States Gene­ral had been sitting more than two months, without having even agreed [...]n the preliminaries of their operations. Instead of consulting the [...] of their country, they had raised an opposition, and made pre­ [...]sions to which they were not entitled. His Majesty considered it [...] incumbent upon him to destroy the seeds of these fatal divisions▪ and [...] called upon the two principal classes, the nobility and clergy, to assist [...] in his endeavours, and to propose a re-union of consultation and opinion, which ought to take place for the general good of the king­dom. A declaration was then read by the keeper of the seals, consist­ing of 35 articles, by way of concession to his subjects, the most remark­able of which were the abolition of lettres de cachet; the liberty of the press left to the judgement of the States; the present States Gene­ral to six the manner of convening the next, and to form the provincial [...]es; custom houses to be removed to the frontiers; the salt duty to be softened till it could be abolished; civil and criminal justice to be reformed by the king; corvees and mortmain to be abolished, and no [...] imposed without the consent of the States, &c. After this declara­tion▪ the king, and keeper of the seals left the hall; but the Tiers Etat, or Commons, remained, with some of the nobility and clergy who had joined them, and passed some very spirited resolutions in support of [...] they had already done. Next day the oath was subscribed by the duke of Orleans▪ at the head of 40 of the principal nobility, and [...] of the clergy. They now began to exert themselves in the cause [...] with great spirit. On the introduction of a deputation from [...] [...]bles, the president of the commons was not allowed to address [Page 300] them in the usual terms, "I have the honour to acquaint you;" but, "I am requested to acquaint you." In taking the oath, it was insisted that the country should be put before the king. A proposal of [...] ­nulling all the taxes, and laying them on by the authority of the Na­tional Assembly was made by Mr. Target, and instantly agreed to with­out one dissonting voice.

In the mean time, the commons had the satisfaction to find that their proceedings were agreeable to the nation at large. Deputations were received, not only from the inhabitants of Paris, but from the election of the provinces, assuring the assembly of their firm support and deno­mination to stand or fall with them in the cause they had undertakes. But while thus employed, to the mutual satisfaction of themselves and of the people, the commons received a message from the king, com­manding them to depart from the hall. Some of them replied, that they might be taken out dead, but would not go alive. The soldiery were then commanded to interfere, but they positively refused; and the king was informed by the commander in chief, the Duc de Chatelet, that he could not answer for the safety of his royal person, if the or­ders given to the troops were to be inforced. His Majesty then [...] a letter to the nobility and clergy, desiring them to join the co [...] which was accordingly done; but any little hope of accommodation which might now take place was entirely overthrown by the following accident. Two soldiers of the French guards formed a design of en­tering the National Assembly, in order to complain of the Duc de Chatelet, their colonel, in the name of the whole regiment. With this view they had dressed themselves in plain cloths; but being observed by the duke, they were by him committed to prison. From [...] they sent a letter to the Assembly, informing them of the danger in which they were, on account of the patriotic behaviour of the [...] ­ment who had refused to fire on their countrymen. This letter pro­duced the most astonishing effect. A multitude of people set [...] from the Palais royal, where the friends of liberty were assembled, with a design to release the prisoners. As they proceeded on their journey, they were joined by many thousands of others, among whom were a number of the French guards. Having procured the necessary instru­ments, as they went along, the gates and bolts of the prison were for­ced, and the prisoners released in less than an hour. Troops of [...] ­goons and hussars were sent for, but they refused to act, drank with the multitude, and joined in their acclamations.

Such an alarming tumult could not fail to affect even the bold [...] patrsots. A deputation was therefore sent, at the motion of Mr. Tar­get, to the king, requesting him to take effectual measures for putting an end to the present troubles, and to forgive what was pact. His Majesty consented, and the Assembly continued its proceedings, Some of the nobility and clergy attempted to enter a protest against every thing that had been done, but they were overpowed by a vast [...] ­jority. The presidency of the Assembly was offered to the duke of Orleans, but on his declining the office, it was offered to the archbish­op of Vienne, who accepted it. The king, however, perceiving his authority almost annihilated, resolved to overawe the Assembly by [...] camping his troops in the neighbourhood. This excited a [...] alarm, and the Assembly became tumultuous. M. Mirabeau now [...] [Page 301] [...] to distinguish himself as a speaker. After taking notice that the nation of the troops was an infringement on the liberty of the Assem­bly, and that the very finding them in provisions in such a time of scarcity must be a grievance, they being no less than 35,000 in number, he proposed an address to the king, praying that he would order back the troops to the place from whence they came, together with the train of artillery they had along with them; and informing him, that in case any disturbances were apprehended at Paris or Versailles, he night raise companies of armed burghers, who would be a sufficient protection. This address was presented, but the king did not think proper to send away his troops, though he assured the Assembly that they had nothing to fear, and offered to remove the place of their sit­ting to Noyon, or Soissons.

These assurances seem to have removed the apprehensions of the As­sembly. They now proceeded to consider the dismission of M. Neck­ [...] and his associates in the ministry; they presented an address to the king, in which they set forth the virtues of the dismissed ministers, as­suring his Majesty that the nation neither could nor would have any confidence in the new ones. They represented the horrors of the scene which must ensue, if the troops should act against the Parisians, and [...]posed to send a committee to the capital to prevent bloodshed. To this an unfavourable answer was given; the king refusing either to re­move the troops, or to allow the committee to be sent to Paris. This answer produced a number of spirited resolutions; among which was the following: "That this Assembly, dreading the fatal consequences which this Majesty's answer may produce, must continue to insist up­on the removal of the troops, drawn together in an extraordinary man­ner, in the neighbourhood of Paris and Versailles; and upon the estab­lishment of armed bodies of citizens." These resolutions were taken on the 13th of July, and next day the people began to arm themselves; a party of troops entered the capital, but the French guards having [...] the people, only a slight skirmish happened, in which two drag­ [...], of the duke de Choiseuil's regiment, were killed and two wound­ed. The troops then left the city, and the people proceeded to act openly in support of the cause of liberty. The police of the city was now entirely without influence, and its place was supplied by armed [...]ighers; the shops were shut up: a general consternation prevailed [...] over the city; and it was proposed to raise a militia of 48,000 men.

The first exploit performed by these patriots, was forcing the con­vent of St. Laylare, where they found a considerable quantity of corn, as well as of arms and ammunition, supposed to have been brought [...]ther from the arsenal, as to a place of security. Next day the hos­pital of invalids was summoned to surrender, and taken possession of [...] a slight resistance. The cannon, small arms, and ammunition were seized, and thus all the citizens, who chose to arm themselves, was supplied with what was necessary. The ammunition lodged in the Bastile was then demanded the same evening. A flag of truce had [...]eded the body of people who made the demand, and was answered [...] within; but, nevertheless, the commandant gave orders to his [...] to fire, and killed several of them. Enraged at this proceeding, they rushed forward to assault the place. The governour than consent­ [...] to admit a certain number of them, upon condition that they should [Page 302] make no disturbance. This being readily agreed to, about 40 passed the draw bridge, which was instantly drawn up, and the whole party massacred, Exasperated at this, the people assaulted the fortress with such violence that it soon surrendered; and the governor, with some of the more active persons in this treachery were put to death, and their heads carried on pikes round the city. Only four or five prisoners were found in the Bastile. Some account say seven.

The king now perceiving that all the troops he could command would be insufficient to quell the insurrection, repaired to the Assem­bly, and informed them, that he had ordered the troops to retire to a certain distance from Paris and Versailles. This speech was received with universal applause; and soon after the troops had retired, the mar­quis de la Fayette, who distinguished himself so much in the army of the United States, was appointed to command the Paris militia, along with M. Bailly, Prevot de Marchands. The number of armed men in the capital were now computed at 150,000. The king put himself into the hands of the citizens, and passed through Paris to the Hotel de Ville, escorted only by them. On entering that place, he declared that he ap­peared there only to gratify the wishes of the people, and to assure them of his readiness to do every thing in his power to restore tran­quillity to the city. In return he received every testimony of affection that could be expressed by a numerous and orderly people. This was followed by a dismission of all his new servants, and the recal of Mr. Neckar.

All this time the patriotic party continued to gain ground. The capital was guarded by the militia; the troops removed speedily to the places from whence they came: The Duc de Chatelet resigned his command; and several changes were made in the ministry. The Duc de Liancourt was chosen president of the National Assembly in room of the archbishop of Vienne, whose time was expired; and the king, hearing that a number of his guards had joined the militia, granted leave to the marquis de la Fayette to retain as many as chose to stay; at the same time, he authorised the guards to enter among the militia▪ with a promise to continue their pay and maintenance till the city was reduced into a state of tranquillity.

Though this extraordinary revolution was attended with much less bloodshed than what usually accompanies affairs of this kind, yet it was not wholly bloodless. Besides those who perished immediately in the affair of the Bastile, several other victims were offered up at the shrine of liberty. One of these was M. de Foulon▪ late intendant of Paris, who was accused of having caused, or increased the scarcity in that capital. To avoid the popular fury, he had spread a report of his death, and retired to his house in the country. Here he was discover­ed, and dragged to Paris, where he was first hanged, his head then cut off, and carried upon a pole to meet his son-in-law, M. Berthier, the intendant at that time, whose death had been already determined upon, and who had been seized at Compeigne. The marquis de la Fayette interceded for Berthier as far as he could with safety but to no purpose. In the provinces the most grievous disorders took place. In Britanny [Page 303] several regiments laid down their arms when ordered out against the insurgents. At Havre de Grace the whole garrison left the fort on bearing what had happened at Paris, and the burghers immediately took possession of it. A most melancholy affair happened at Besancon, which at once discovered the greatest cruelty and depravity in the per­petrators. The people there having resolved to celebrate the revolu­tion at Paris by rejoicings, a nobleman of the opposite party, by name M. de Mesmay▪ projected the horrid scheme of pretending to enter in­to the views of the people, with an intention of destroying them at once. For this purpose he invited them to an entertainment at his castle of Quesnay. A great number of the people attended, and were most barbariously massacred at once, by blowing them up with gun­powder, by means of a concealed mine. The wretch himself escaped, but his castle was demolished by the enraged populace, and not only that of Quesnay, but many others in the neighbourhood; and on this occasion, it is not to be doubted, that several valuable buildings were destroyed. Among these was the rich Abbey of the order of Citeaux, frequently animadverted upon by Voltaire. On examining into this affair, however, by a committee of the National Assembly, it was said to have happened by accident, though it is difficult to conceive how it could be so.

While these disturbances were going on, the roads were beset by troops of banditti and robbers, chiefly foreigners. At Montmartre 5000 desperadoes began to level the platforms▪ with a view to erect batteries for destroying the city; but being dispersed by the citizens, they formed themselves into several bands, and committed many dep­redations; but at last, intelligence having been received at the Hotel de Ville of these and other enormities, 200 citizens set out in quest of the robbers, whom they [...]ound dispersed in parties all over the coun­try. They attacked the citizens with stones, &c. but being soon put to flight, and 200 taken prisoners, the country was restored to tran­quillity.

The impatience of the nation for the return of M. Neckar now grew to such a height▪ that the Assembly wrote a letter to the king, demand­ing it, in the following terms:

SIRE,

You came yesterday among us, and testified your confidence in our counsels, requiring us to give them in the present dreadful state of af­fairs. We were yesterday in the capital, where we saw and heard everything. Your whole people are afflicted at the fate of Mr. Neckar▪ and demand him of your Majesty. Every body holds your present ministers in horror: the public indignation is at its height; we there­fore, Sire, for the happiness of your kingdom, for your own happiness, advise you to recal Mr. Neckar.

We may judge of the state of humiliation to which the mighty sov­ereign of France was now reduced, by his sending the following letter, addressed to Mr. Neckar, unsealed, to the National Assembly▪ for their inspection:

The KING of FRANCE to Mr. NECKAR.

I have been deceived respecting you. Violence has been commit­ted [...] my character. Behold me at length enlightened. Come, Sir, [Page 304] come without delay, and resume your claims to my confidence, which you have acquired forever. My heart is known to you. I exp [...] you with all my nation; and I very sincerely share in its impatience. On which, I pray God, Sir, until you return, to take you into his holy and worthy keeping.

In consequence of this letter, M. Neckar hastened to Paris, where he was received by the people with the most excessive exultations, and by the king with the greatest cordiality and affection. He was attend­ed to the Hotel de Ville, by M. de St. Priest, the secretary of state, and escorted by a numerous company of the horse and foot militia. The people who were in the Place de Greve, being impatient to see him, he was obliged to go into an adjacent room; and during the short time of his absence, the Assembly came to a resolution of passing a gen­eral amnesty, in consequence of the festival which existed by the re­turn of Mr. Neckar, and that the same should be read in all the church­es of France; which resolution was in the highest degree acceptable to the worthy minister on his return. On the report of this transaction to the States General at large, however, some disputes ensued, and it was urged by some, that the electors of Paris had no right to grant a general amnesty, as such power belonged only to the Assembly; and the same day a resolution was brought forward, in which it was insist­ed, that a tribunal should be erected for judging of the demerits of such offenders as should be brought before it, on accusations of having at­tacked the safety, peace, or liberty of the public, though the people had a right to pardon them if they thought proper.

During this time of trouble and confusion, the English nation had become highly obnoxious to the French patriots. The reason of this was, that the people of England were reported to be such enemies to the French, that they had even denied them a morsel of bread in the time of their present calamity. The duke of Dorset had written a letter to the count d'Artois, which was found among the papers of the baron de Castelnau; and this was said to be in favour of the noblest, and the party of the queen, who were inimical to the liberties of the people; though, in truth, it was merely complimentary. News had likewise been circulated of an English fleet sailing from Plymouth, to make an attempt on Brest; and a pamphlet against the commons had been published by lord Camelford. All these aspersions, however, were quickly wiped off, by a letter from the earl of Dorset to the [...] de Montmorin, and which was read in the National Assembly. On re­ceipt of this letter, the Count de Liancourt, president of the Assembly, wrote a letter to the Count de Montmorin, in which he expressed the greatest satisfaction; and in consequence of this the English, from [...] ­ing treated as enemies, were held as affectionate friends, and the recon­ciliation was confirmed by some further correspondence between D [...] ­sot and Montmorin.

The national Assembly having now in a great measure overcome all opposition, proceeded to new model the constitution. For this [...] ­pose twenty two articles were formed; in which were included [...] equal taxation; a renunciation of all privileges, whether per [...], provincial, or municipal; redemption of feudatory rights; various suppressions and abolitions of particular jurisdictions, duties, and ser­vices; abolition of the sale of offices; justice to be executed [...] [Page 305] any expense to the people; admission of all citizens to civil and mili­tary offices; his Majesty to be proclaimed the Restorer of French Lib­erty; a medal to be struck, and T [...] Deum celebrated in memory of this re­markable event. On the representation of the minister, a loan of 30 mill­ions was voted, in order to provide for the pressing exigencies of the state, until the finances could be properly regulated. The French guards were voted a medal of 50 livres; but, in the most patriotic manner, they sent three of their body to the Hotel de Ville, begging leave to decline this honour, on account of its expense; likewise refusing to ac­cept of any pecuniary acknowledgement from their fellow citizens; but, however, as a mark of their approbation, desiring a medal of six livres each, to wear at their buttons. They were to be incorporated with the city militia, and to have 20 sols per day.

While the assembly were thus proceeding vigorously in their work of reformation, a report was spread of a mine having been formed from under the stables of the count d'Artois, to the hall of the Assem­bly, with a design to repeat the horrible scene at Quisnay. After the most diligent search, a vast hole of great depth was discovered in one of the cellars, but which did not appear to have any communication with any place in the neighbourhood; though from hence it was con­cluded, that some such horrid plot had been in agitation. In other re­spects they were disturbed by intelligence of dreadful disorders com­mitted in the provinces; where among many other shameful proceedings, [...] was proved, that a number of persons went from province to prov­ince, spreading false news, and encouraging the populace to insurrec­tion; and even the authority of the king was pretended to be produc­ed by these miscreants for every species of disorder. To remedy this [...]cious evil they passed a decree, that all municipal bodies of the kingdom, as well in towns as in the country, should watch over the maintenance of general tranquillity; that, at their requisition, the na­tional militia, and all the troops should come to their assistance, in pur­suing and apprehending all public disturbers of the peace, &c. and to prevent any abuse of power, the national militia and soldiers should take a certain oath, the form of which was mentioned. This scheme was at first opposed by M. Mirabeau; but in a short time he dropped his opposition, and the resolution was carried unanimously, and had, soon after, the sanction of a royal proclamation to the same purpose.

The authority of the Assembly continuing still to increase, they next proceeded to take into consideration the revenues of the clergy, to ex­ [...]e the pension list, and to assign a particular sum of the royal revenue in time to come. The utmost extent of a country clergy­man's revenue was fixed at 1500 livers, or L. 62, their curates to L. 25; the city priests L. 100, and their curates, L. 53. The bishops, and other beneficed clergymen to undergo a proportionable reduction. They began also to consider the suppression of monastic orders, from which, and the proposed reduction of the clerical revenues, it was com­puted that the finances of the nation must be considerably augmented. From some calculations it appeared that the number of ecclesiastics. [...] and regular, with the nuns, amounted to 316,274; and [...] for their support, an annual revenue, of 117,699,500 livers [...]. Near 80,000 of both sexes were supposed to belong to [...] [...]ders, and there were 17,000 mendicants. The distressed [...] [Page 306] the national finances now began to draw the attention, not only of the Assembly, but of the nation at large. In the beginning of September, it was announced to the Assembly, that there was a deputation of la­dies from Paris, who came to offer their jewels and valuable ornaments for the service of their county. These fair patriots were received with the utmost politeness, and it was proposed by the ladies themselves, that an office should be established, merely for the reception of jewels, which should be fold, and the sum applied to the diminution of the national debt. An address of thanks was voted by the Assembly to these generous females; their names were ordered to be published in the votes of the Assembly; and they were authorized to wear a badge of distinction, on account of their having made such an honorable sac­rifice. The example of the ladies of Paris, in giving up their jewels, was followed by a vast number of individuals throughout the kingdom, and many gifts of great value were every day brought in by patriots of all denominations.

But while matters were thus going on, seemingly in the most suc­cessful manner for the patriots▪ the king, at the head of the aristocrat [...] party, had so far strengthened himself, that he ventured to give a very unfavourable answer to most of the requisitions of the Assembly. This, however, was the last effort of royalty. The commons, conscious of their own power, adhered strictly to the principles they had laid down, and which the other two orders were by no means able to oppose. The following articles were finally determined, as part of the new con­stitution of the kingdom.

1. All powers slow essentially from, and can only emanate from the nation.

2. The legislative power resides in the National Assembly, composed, of the representatives of the nation freely and legally elected.

3. No act of the legislative body shall be deemed law, unless con­sented to by the representatives of the nation, and sanctioned by the king.

4. The supreme executive power resides in the hands of the king.

5. The judicial power can in no case be exercised by the king, not by the legislative body; but justice shall be rendered in the name of the king, by the tribunals established by the law, according to the Principles of the new constitution.

The distressed state of the national finances at last overcame every other consideration, and for sometime engrossed the attention of the As­sembly. A bill was brought in by Mr. Neckar, taking into considera­tion the urgent necessities of the state; and proposing certain reductions in the royal households, pensions, clergy, &c. requesting also a contri­bution from all the inhabitants of the kingdom, but which was to be made only once, and not to be renewed on any presence whatever.—The contribution was restricted to a nett fourth of the income, without any inquiry into the person's fortune; a list of contributions to be [...] out, and the money returned to them, if alive, in the year 1792, but their heirs not to be entitled to any benefit from it. None, whose in­come did not exceed 400 livres, to be included in the tax. This was followed by a donation of 100,000 livres from M. Neckar himself.—The plan was laid before the king, with the articles of the new consti­tution▪ but his Majesty informed them, that though he assented to the [Page 307] plan of the new constitution, it was on this positive condition, that the general result of their deliberations should leave him in the full pos­session of the executive power. However, after making some remarks on the constitution, he acquiesced in it for the present, until a more perfect system could be adopted. This answer was deemed insufficient, and a deputation was sent to his Majesty, requiring his unequivocal assent to the new constitution.

This was followed by most violent tumults. A new regiment of troops happening to arrive at Versailles, were sumptuously entertained by the Gardes du Corps in the palace. The king and queen themselves honoured them with their presence, by which the whole assembly were [...]o elevated, that among other instances of their exultation, they tore the national cockades, the badge of patriotism, from their hats, trampled them under their feet, and supplied themselves with black ones. This produced such disturbances at Paris, that all the districts of the capital were summoned▪ and the marquis de la Fayette was ordered to proceed immediately to Versailles, at the head of a large body of troops, and bring the king under his guard to Paris. The marquis hesitated at first, but was soon glad to comply, on hearing that a gibbet was prepared for himself, and another for the mayor, in case of his refusal. In conse­quence of this preremptory command, he set out at the head of [...]0,000 men, and attended by several of the magistrates of Paris. The flame of patriotism, however, had now extended itself even to fe­males of the lowest class. Eight thousand fish women had preceded the marquis, and about two o'clock next morning had entered the palace with an intention to seize and kill the queen. It was afterwards [...]ound, that several of the French guards had mixed among them in women's dresses. On their arrival, they forced their way to her Ma­jesty's apartment, who instantly ran to that of the king, with only her [...] on. The mob, however, were fortunately repulsed by the guards, of whom a greater number than ordinary had been ordered to sleep in the antichambers adjoining to the queen's apartment. On the arrival of the Parisian troops, a skirmish ensued betwixt them and the guards, in which several were killed on both sides, and among the rest several women who had mixed themselves with the patriotic soldiers. The re­ [...]nt of Flanders, notwithstanding the affection they had pretended for the king, laid down their arms, and refused to fire. The body guard resisted as long as they were able, but at last were overpowered and put to flight; however, by the authority of the marquis de la Fay­ette, the Parisians were prevented from entering the palace. In a little time the marquis was introduced to the king, along with some of the magistrates of Paris, by whom the desire of the people was communicat­ed to his Majesty that he should remove to the capital. As he knew that [...]stance would be vain, he complied with their desire on assurance of protection; and, the royal equipages being ordered to be got ready, he [...] [...]t with the queen▪ the dauphin, Monsieur, the king's brother, and the king's aunts, attended by the marquis de la Fayette and about 5000 [...]ds. The road was so crowded with people, that though 50,000 of the Parisian troops had been sent out to keep the way clear, it was six [...] before they reached the Hotel de Ville, though the distance is only twelve miles. In this humiliating procession, it is not to be sup­ [...]d but their Majesties must have met with many insults, sufficiently [Page 308] disagreeable to people in their high station, abstracted from all considera­tions of personal safety. Indeed even of this there seemed now to be ve­ry considerable danger. The queen particularly was abused by the patriots of her own sex, who called loudly for her to be given up to them, that they might put out her eyes, and cut off her ears. On their arrival at the Hotel de Ville, the king was harrangued by M. de St. Mery, who assured his Majesty that he had only been conducted to Pa­ris for his better security, and that he would find himself more happy among his loyal children there than he had been at Versailles; after which he was conducted to the palace of the Thuilleries, an old and ruinous place, which had not been inhabited since the time of Louis XIV, and where no preparations had been made for the reception of the royal family.

Thus was the finishing stroke given to the authority of the French monarch. He instantly caused it to be announced to the National Assembly, that he complied with their demands in the fullest extent. Since that time he has continued a kind of prisoner, insomuch, that he has not the freedom of going any where, even to the shortest distance, for the purpose of amusement, without the attendance of some persons under the name of guards. Having once spoke of taking the diversion of the chace, he was instantly informed, that 1000 of the Paris militia were ready to attend him; on which he declined the amusement. The marquis de la Fayette, touched with the miserable situation to which his sovereign was reduced, made a proposal for recalling his own guards; but this excited such murmurs among the people at large, that it was thought proper to drop the scheme altogether. At first the royal pair were overwhelmed with addresses and congratulations, many of them of a very disagreeable king. The queen was constrained to give audience to a deputation of females of the very lowest class, some of whom were among those who had attempted to murder her a few nights before. These, by one whom they had chosen for their presi­dent, demanded the liberty of all prisoners who were not malefactors, deserters not excepted. The Count de Luxemburg then demanded in the name of the queen, the pardon of those princes of the blood royal who had been obliged to fly into foreign countries, viz. the count d'Artois, the princes of Conde, and Conti, which was agreed to. The fair president of this illustrious band is said to have appeared so pretty in the eyes of the king, that he did not suffer her to depart without a kiss.

The mob having thus presumed so far, soon ran into the greatest ex­cesses; and, assuming the power of life and death, shewed a determi­nation to proceed to execution in a summary way against every [...] who was obnoxious to them; but having put to death in this manner a baker, with some circumstances of barbarity, the Assembly instantly de­termined to put the capital under martial law. This was attended with so good an effect, that in a short time the disturbances ceased, and the Assembly were no more interrupted in their deliberations. Only a single attempt has been made to rescue the king, and this ended very unfortunately for the projector, the marquis de Faveras. In conse­quence of the discovery, this nobleman, with his wife, who is also prin­cess of Anhalt Chambourg, were taken into custody. One of the wit­nesses against them was M. de St. Priest, secretary of state. He depos­ed, that, about the middle of August, he was accosted by an unknown [Page 309] gentleman, who afterwards owned himself to be the marquis le Fave­ras. This stranger told him that he felt for the king and royal family, and was ready to sacrifice himself if he could preserve them from the disasters which threatened both them and the kingdom in general. The privileges of the clergy and nobility, he said, ought to be supported▪ and he had a force of 1200 men ready to act against the National As­sembly, and the marquis de la Fayette. The design is further said to have been that the marquis, M. Bailli, and the mayor, should have been murdered in the first place; after which the king and queen were to have been escorted to Lisle, in Flanders, by a band of 3000 vol­unteers. The guard at the barrier towns, it is said, had been gained over to this scheme, and a loan of three or four millions procured for p [...]tting it in execution. A committee of inquiry was set on foot, and it having appeared to them that the marquis was really concerned in the affair, he was impeached, tried, and condemned by 21 judges against 19, to make the Amende Honourable, and then to be hanged; but as the new regulations required that four-fifths of the judges should be unan­imous before a prisoner could be condemned, the execution of the sen­tence was suspended: But on the 18th of February 1790, he was again condemned to make the Amende Honouarble before the gate of the ca­thedral of Nortre Dame, from thence to be drawn in a cart to the Place de Greve, with his head and feet bare, a lighted flambeau of two pounds weight in his hand, and clothed in a linen frock covered with brimstone, having a label on his breast, with the words CONSPIRATOR AGAINST THE STATE, wrote upon it in large characters. And lastly, having confessed, on his knees, the crimes meditated against his coun­try, and begged pardon of God, his country, his sovereign, and justice, he was to be hanged on a gallows erected for the purpose. This severe sentence was put in execution next day, without the least mitigation.

No institution does the Assembly more honour than the unlimited toleration in religious matters, which has at length taken place in that once intolerant country; and, what is very remarkable, this impor­tant point was carried without a division. By this act of toleration, every person, of whatever profession, the Jewish only excepted, is en­titled to bear offices in the state, whether civil or military; nor can any thing be accounted an unlawful impediment, except disobedience to some of the decrees of the National Assembly. Thus it appears, that Catholics at last can shew unlimited toleration to Protestants, while the latter, in some countries, cannot bear with one another with­out the security of a Test Act; and while they are thus new-modelling the government▪ we cannot help observing, that every method is used [...] extinguish the debts of the French nation, without overburthening the people with taxes; a consideration which seems to have been long forgotten in Great Britain, where a tax is seldom taken off after being once laid on; while the produce seems to be employed for the purposes of luxury and idleness to individuals, rather than to supply the exigen­ces of the state. Even the Jews at Bourdeaux, and some other places, have had their privileges confirmed to them, which are very considerable viz. a liberty of partaking of the rights of citizens, of purchasing prop­erty, voting at elections, serving offices military and civil, and discharg­ing the duties of them, even on the sabbath day. Another resolution [...] passed, that there shall be no distinction of orders in France, in [Page 310] consequence of which the whole body of nobility are annihilated. A third resolution determines, that it shall not be lawful for the offices of the police to imprison any person, by way of correction, for more than three days, without bringing him to a trial.

Among the patriotic exertions of the people we must reckon the destruction of the Bastile to have been the most remarkable.

"The mind," says Mr. Paine, "can hardly picture to itself a m [...] ­tremendous scene than what the city of Paris exhibited at the time of taking the Bastile, and for two days before and after, nor conceive the possibility of its quieting so soon. At distance, this transaction has appeared only as an act of heroism, standing on itself; and the class political connexion it had with the Revolution is lost in the brilliancy of the atchievement. But we are to consider it as the strength of the parties, brought man to man, and contending for the issue. The Bas­tile was to be either the prize or the prison of the assailants. The downfal of it included the idea of the downfal of Despotism; and this compounded image was become as figuratively united as Bunyan's Doubting Castle and Giant Despair.

The National Assembly, before and at the time of taking the Bastile▪ was sitting at Versailles, twelve miles distant from Paris. About a week before the rising of the Parisians, and their taking the Bastile, it was discovered that a plot was forming, at the head of which was the Count d'Artois, the King's youngest brother, for demolishing the Na­tional Assembly, seizing its members, and thereby crushing, by a coup de maine, all hopes and prospects of forming a free government. For the sake of humanity, as well as of freedom, it is well this plan did not succeed. Examples are not wanting to shew how dreadfully vin­dictive and cruel are all old governments, when they are successful a­gainst what they call a revolt.

This plan must have been some time in contemplation; because, in order to carry it into execution, it was necessary to collect a large mili­tary force round Paris, and to cut off the communication between that city and the National Assembly at Versailles. The troops destined for this service were chiefly the foreign troops in the pay of France, and who, for this particular purpose, were drawn from the distant provin­ces where they were then s [...]ationed. When they were collected, to the amount of between twenty-five and thirty thousand, it was judg­ed time to put the plan into execution. The ministry who were then in office, and who were friendly to the Revolution, were instantly dis­missed, and a new ministry formed of those who had concerted the project; among whom was Count de Broglio, and to his share was giv­en the command of those troops. The character of this man, as describ­ed to me in a letter which I communicated to Mr. Burke before he began to write his book, and from an authority which Mr. Burke well knows was good, was that of "an high flying aristocrat; cool, and ca­pable of every mischief."

While these matters were agitating, the National Assembly stood in the most perilous and critical situation that a body of men can be sup­posed to act in. They were the devoted victims, and they knew it. They had the hearts and wishes of their country on their side, but military authority they had none. The guards of Broglio surrounded the hall where the Assembly sat, ready, at the word of command, to [Page 311] seize their persons, as had been done the year before to the Parliament in Paris. Had the National Assembly deserted their trust, or had they exhibited signs of weakness or fear, their enemies had been encourag­ed, and the country depressed. When the situation they stood in, the cause they were engaged in, and the crisis then ready to burst which should determine their personal and political fate, and that of their country, and probably of Europe, are taken into one view, none but a heart callous with prejudice, or corrupted by dependance, can avoid interesting itself in their success.

The Archbishop of Vienne was at this time President of the National Assembly; a person too old to undergo the scene that a few days, or a few hours, might bring forth. A man of more activity, and bolder fortitude, was necessary; and the National Assembly chose (under the form of a Vice-President, for the presidency still resided in the arch­bishop) M. de la Fayette, and this is the only instance of a Vice-Presi­dent being chosen. It was at the moment that this storm was pending (July 11) that a declaration of rights was brought forward by M. de la Fayette. It was hastily drawn up, and makes only a part of a more extensive declaration of rights, agreed upon and adopted afterwards by the National Assembly. The particular reason for bringing it forward at this moment (M. de la Fayette has since informed me) was, that if the National Assembly should fall in the threatened destruction that then surrounded it, some traces of its principles might have the chance of surviving the wreck.

Every thing now was drawing to a crisis. The event was freedom or slavery. On one side▪ an army of nearly thirty thousand men; on the other, an unarmed body of citizens; for the citizens of Paris, on whom the National Assembly must then immediately depend, were as unarm­ed and as undisciplined as the citizens of London are now. The French guards had given strong symptoms of their being attached to the national cause; but their numbers were small, not a tenth part of the force that Broglio commanded, and their officers were in the inte­rest of Broglio.

Matters being now ripe for execution, the new ministry made their appearance in office. The reader will carry in his mind, that the Bas­ple was taken the 14th of July; the point of time I am now speaking to, is the 12th. Immediately on the news of the change of ministry reaching Paris in the afternoon, all the play houses and places of enter­tainment, shops and houses, were shut up. The change of ministry was considered as the prelude of hostilities, and the opinion was rightly founded.

The foreign troops began to advance towards the city. The Prince de Lambesc, who commanded a body of German cavalry, approached by the Place of Lewis XV. which connects itself with some of the streets. In his march, he insulted and struck an old man with his sword. The French are remarkable for their respect to old age, and the insolence with which it appeared to be done, uniting with the general fermentation they were in, produced a powerful effect, and a cry of To arms! to arms! spread itself in a moment over the city.

Arms they had none, nor scarcely any who knew the use of them; but desperate resolution, when every hope is at stake, supplies for a while, the want of arms. Near where the Prince de Lambesc was [Page 312] drawn up, were large piles of stones collected for building the new bridge, and with these the people attacked the cavalry. A party of the French guards, upon hearing the firing, rushed from their quarters and joined the people; and night coming on the cavalry retreated.

The streets of Paris, being narrow, are favourable for defence; and the loftiness of the houses, consisting of many stories, from which great annoyance might be given, secured them against nocturnal enterprises; and the night was spent in providing themselves with every sort of weapon they could make or procure: Guns▪ swords, blacksmith's hammers, carpenter's axes, iron crows, pikes, halberts, pitchforks, spits, clubs, &c. &c.

The incredible numbers with which they assembled the next morn­ing, and the still more incredible resolution they exhibited, embarrass­ed and astonished their enemies. Little did the new ministry expect such a salute. Accustomed to slavery themselves, they had no idea that Liberty was capable of such inspiration, or that a body of unarm­ed citizens would dare to face the military force of thirty thousand men. Every moment of this day was employed in collecting arms, concerting plans, and arranging themselves into the best order which such an instantancous movement could afford. Broglio continued ly­ing round the city, but made no farther advances this day, and the suc­ceeding night passed with as much tranquillity as such a scene could possibly produce.

But defence only was not the object of the citizens. They had a cause at stake, on which depended their freedom or their slavery.—They every moment expected an attack, or to hear of one made on the National Assembly; and in such a situation, the most prompt measures are sometimes the best. The object that now presented itself was the Bastile; and the eclat of carrying such a fortress in the face of such an army, could not fail to strike a terror into the new ministry, who had scarcely yet had time to meet. By some intercepted correspond­ence this morning, it was discovered, that the Mayor of Paris, M. Des­ [...]lesselles, who appeared to be in their interest, was betraying them; and from this discovery, there remained no doubt that Broglio would reinforce the Bastile the ensuing evening. It was therefore necessa­ry to attack it that day; but before this could be done, it was first necessary to procure a better supply of arms then they were then pos­sessed of.

There was adjoining to the city, a large magazine of arms deposited at the hospital of the invalids, which the citizens summoned to surren­der; and as the place was not defensible, nor attempted much defence, they soon succeeded. Thus supplied, they marched to attack the Bas­tile; a vast mixed multitude of all ages, and of all degrees, and armed with all forts of weapons. Imagination would fail in describing to it­self the appearance of such a procession▪ and of the anxiety for the event which a few hours or a few minutes might produce. What plans the ministry was forming, were as unknown to the people with­in the city, as what the citizens were doing was unknown to them; and what movements Broglio might make for the support or relief of the place, were to the citizens equally unknown. All was mystery and hazard.

That the Bastile was attacked with an enthusiasm of heroism, such only as the highest animation of liberty could inspire, and carried in [Page 313] the space of a few hours, is an event which the world is fully possessed of. I am not undertaking a detail of the attack, but bringing into view the conspiracy against the nation which provoked it, and which fell with the Bastile. The prison to which the new ministry were doom­ing the National Assembly, in addition to its being the high altar and castle of despotism, became the proper object to begin with. This en­terprise broke up the new ministry, who began now to fly from the ruin they had prepared for others. The troops of Broglio dispersed, and himself fled also.

It is much to be wished that a particular history and description of [...]is celebrated engine of tyranny were made public. At present we can only inform our readers in general, that in it were found the most horrible machines, calculated for grinding to mummy those unhappy criminals whom the cruelty or jealousy of the monarch, or even of his favourite mistress, had determined to destroy. An iron cage, about twelve tons in weight, was found with the skeleton of a man in it, who had probably lingered out a great part of his days in that horrid mansion. Among the prisoners released by its destruction were major White, a Scotsman▪ and the earl Mazarine an Irish nobleman. The former appeared to have his intellectual faculties almost totally impair­ed by the long confinement and miseries he had endured; and, by being [...]accustomed to converse with any human creature, he had forgot the use of speech. Earl Mazarine, after having left Paris, narrowly esca­ped being detained at Calais, but luckily escaped the danger, possibly owing this good fortune to his being taken for a madman. On his arri­val at the British shorepunc; he eagerly jumped out of the boat, fell down on the ground, and kissed it. It doth not appear that any remarkable particulars concerning the treatment of prisoners in the Bastile have [...]pired from the accounts of these two persons. This cursed build­ing is now totally destroyed. The last stone of it was presented to the National Assembly in the beginning of the month of February 1790, by those brave soldiers and citizens who had exposed their lives in forming the place. M. Maillard, who presented the gift of these pa­triots, made the following speech. "Gentlemen, we are poor▪ and [...] therefore only offer the Poor Man's Mite, but we accompany it with an offering which, we flatter ourselves, will prove acceptable to our country, and, we hope, glorious to ourselves. It is the Last Stone of the Bastile." The gift was received with the loudest applause."

The demolition of this place, where people, without any crime, ex­cept perhaps having given offence to a strumpet, might be suddenly imprisoned for life, or even destroyed in a short time, must give pleasure to every friend to humanity. Unluckily great numbers of the papers belonging to it were burnt by the mob; but such as have been preserv­ [...] abundantly shew the way in which the prisoners were sometimes [...]. The following letter, from M. S—e, intendant of the police [...] Paris, to de Launay the governor of the Bastile, killed by the mob, was much spoke of. "My dear de Launay, I send you F—, [...] offender. Keep him eight days, after which order mat­ter, i. e. let him be put to death. A memorandum was found in de [...] hand writing, intimating, that, after the time specified, he [...] sent to S—e, to know under what name F—should be [...].

[Page 314] The destruction of the Bastile has again called the attention of the public to a piece of history, which engaged the pens of several [...] of the last and beginning of the present centuries. In the year [...] a short time after the death of the cardinal Mazarine, an [...] prisoner was sent to the isle of St. Margaret, in the Mediterr [...] near Provence. This person always wore a black mask, supposed [...] of iron, but on examination found to consist of black velvet and [...] bone. It was fastened on by steel springs, and fixed with a [...] in such a manner, that he could not put it off himself, though he [...] eat and drink without being greatly incommoded by it. He w [...] ­ed with the greatest respect, insomuch, that the governor of the [...] where he was kept, always waited on him bare-headed, and never [...] down in his presence, but it was understood that any discovery of [...] self would be attended with immediate death. He was exceeding well made, and had something engaging in the sound of his voice [...] according to the account of an old physician, who had seen the [...] part of his face, in examining his tongue when sick, his [...] was very dark, and the skin of the rest of his body brownish. He [...] ­er complained of his situation, or discovered the least inclination [...] liberty. He amused himself with playing on the guitar, and [...] were given to supply him with every thing he required; but his [...] passion seemed to be for fine laces and linen. His rank and quality [...] undoubtedly very high, as appeared from the respect shewed him [...] only by the governor, but by the prime minister of France, who [...] paid him a visit during his confinement in the isle of St. Margaret, [...] never sat down in his presence. The prisoner himself, however, [...] not at any time drop the least hint by which it might be conjectured [...] be was; but it seems that had it been in his power to make a dis [...] ­ry of himself, which might have been accounted accidental, it [...] undoubtedly have been done. The room in which he was confined [...] but one window, which looked towards the sea. A barber one day [...] ­ceived something white floating under the prisoner's window, and [...] ­ing it up, found it to be a very fine shirt carelessly folded up, which [...] had filled from one end to the other with writing. The unsuspe [...] barber carried it to the governor, but his officiousness cost him [...]. He was found dead in his bed a few days after, murdered undoubted­ly by the cruel instruments of oppression and despotism by whom [...] prisoner had been so long confined. Another time the prisoner with some words with a fork upon a small silver dish, and threw it out of the window towards a fishing boat which had approached almost [...] the foot of the wall; but this being also carried to the governor, [...] fisherman was in danger of sharing the same fate with the barber, [...] not the governor been assured that he could not read. In 1698 he [...] removed from this place of confinement to the Bastile, where he [...] ­mained till the time of his death, November 19th, 1793. After [...] death the head was separated from the body, cut into small pieces [...] interred in different places. Orders were given to burn all his cloth linen, matrass, and coverlets. Even the panes of glass in the win­dows of his room were destroyed, the walls of it scraped and [...] p [...]istered, left he should have wrote something on them which [...] ­ter [...]d to a discovery.

Such extraordinary secrecy could not but excite the curiosity [...] public in a proportionable degree; but it would have been death [...] [Page 315] [...] of those concerned in it to divulge the least article. M. Chamil­ [...] was the last minister to whom the secret was known. When [...] death bed, his son in law, Marshal de Feuillade, conjured him [...] [...] him who this prisoner was; but he replied, that it was a stato [...], and he had sworn not to reveal it. While the prisoner remain­ [...] the Bastile, he found means to converse with another person con­ [...] i [...] an adjacent apartment, through the funnels of the chimnies. [...] [...] asked him why he concealed his name, and why he was [...] there; but he replied, that his confession would cost him his [...] [...] occasion the destruction of all those to whom he might reveal [...]. Many conjectures have been formed concerning this ex­ [...]dinary personage. Some have imagined that he was the duke of [...], a turbulent nobleman who took an active part in the civil [...] during the minority of Louis XIV. and was said to have been [...] by the Turks at the siege of Candia. But this opinion is un­ [...]dly refuted by the profound respect on all occasions shewn to [...] by the greatest personages in the kingdom. Other imag­ine that he was the count de Vermandois, a natural son of Louis XIV. [...] [...] of his imprisonment is said to have been his giving the dau­ [...] a box in the ear; but this cannot be the case, if it be true that the [...] with the iron mask was confined in 1661, and that the count de [...]dois was only born in 1667. A third party suppose him to [...] [...] the duke of Monmouth, who rebelled against James II. He [...]nced to be beheaded, and the sentence said to be put in execution▪ [...], however, went, that the duke did not really suffer; but that one [...] followers, who resembled him, had the courage to die in his stead. [...]inion is still more untenable than the former; but it is now [...] [...] fully manifest, from an original letter from the princess of [...] to the duke de Fronsac, that he was twin-brother of Louis [...] and born only four hours after him. Thus the unfortunate [...], through the jealousy and bigotry of the times, was forever con­ [...] from the eyes of the world all his life-time, and lingered out an [...] and melancholy life. This account seems to be the only prob­ [...], as it explains at once the very great respect shewn to the pril­ [...] and likewise the circumstance, otherwise unaccountable, that, at [...] time of his confinement, no person of consequence disappeared in [...].

The foregoing account of the Revolution in France, is taken from [...] Geographical Grammar. It has the appearance of being [...] by an impartial hand; and we give it as the best account, in [...] of this event, so far as it goes, of any that has come to our knowl­edge.

We are not furnished with materials sufficiently authentic and con­ [...] to authorize a detail of the interesting events that have taken [...] in the course of the two last years, 1791 and 1792. We can [...] [...] in general, that the Revolution is not yet completed—that a [...]-Revolution has been set on foot by the French emigrants, in [...] the United powers of Austria, Prussia, part of the Germanic [...] Naples and Sardinia, are engaged—that their forces, to the [...], it is said, of upwards 500,000 men, are now on the borders of [...]—that France is torn by violent internal dissensions—that the [...] Assembly, on the 9th of August, passed a decree, "revoking [Page 316] the authority entrusted by the constitution to LOUIS XVI. [...] [...] ­pending him from that moment, until a National Convention [...] have decreed the measures necessary to be pursued for preserving the Na­tional Independence—that the primary assemblies were to conv [...] [...] the 26th of August, to elect their delegates to the National Convention, which was to meet at Paris on the 26th of September—that [...] Na­tional Assembly have named four commissioners, for the four [...] who have power to issue mandates of arrest, and pronounce the [...] pension and dismission of the General and Staff Officers. who act [...] the general safety—and that the following decree of accusation [...] M. La FAYETTE, was passed on the 18th of August.

I. It appears to this Assembly that there is just ground for accus [...] against M. la Fayette, heretofore Commander of the Army of the North.

II. The Executive Power shall in the most expeditious manner pos­sible, put the present decree into execution; and all constituent author­ities▪ all citizens, and all soldiers, are hereby enjoined, by every [...] in their power▪ to secure his person.

III. The Assembly forbids the Army of the North any longer to ac­knowledge him as General, or to obey his orders; and strictly [...], that no person whatsoever shall furnish any thing for the troops, or pay any money for their use, but by the orders of M. Dumourier.

To give the reader some idea of the objects aimed to be accomplished by the Counter Revolutionists we add the following summary of the MANIFESTO on the part of the combined forces of AUSTRIA and PRUSSIA.

The King of France shall name the frontier town of his kingdom▪ which he desires to repair. The Duke of Brunswick shall send [...] guard, besides his Military Household, which will be appointed by [...] Princes, his brothers.

The Emperor and the King of Prussia do not desire that the kingdom of France should be dismembered in any of its franchises; nor do they wish to intermeddle in the government.

They desire the restoration of the King to his liberty and full au­thority, the Ministers to their altars, and property to its proprietors.

The Deputies to the first and second Legislature shall be tried.

The National Assembly and the city of Paris are answerable, upon their heads and effects, for the life of the King, and that of all the Royal Family, to commence from the day of the publication of the Manifesto.

Every man who shall be taken with arms in his hands, shall be treated as a rebel, and tried according to military law.

Every man taken in the act of firing or throwing stones from his windows, shall be put to the sword, and his house burnt or demolished.

The National guards are enjoined to maintain good order, and [...] responsible, as well as all administrators, both collectively and individ­ually, upon their heads and effects, for every event.

The Duke of Brunswick and the Prussian army, will protect all in­dividuals that shall declare for the King; and the said army is prohib­ited, under pain of death, from committing any act of vengeance [...] justice, without receiving orders.

[Page 317] The Duke of Brunswick will retain in his pay all regiments or mili­on [...] shall declare for the King.

[...] p [...]don will be granted to whoever shall oppose the King's de­ [...], and his passage to the town that he may appoint.

Lewis XVI. king of France and Navarre, was born in 1754, suc­ [...] his grandfather Lewis XV. in 1774, married, 1770, to Maria [...], sister of the emperor of Germany, born 1755. Their is­ [...] [...] Madame Maria Theresa Charlotte, born on the 19th of De­cember 1778; and Lewis-Joseph-Xavier-Francis, dauphin of France, [...]ber 22, 1781.

N. B. The reader who wishes to obtain a knowledge of the history [...], may consult Caesar's Commentaries, Rollin's Ancient Histo­ [...] [...]iversal History, Voltaire, and Sully's Memoirs.

SPAIN.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 700 Miles. between Degrees. 10 and 3 east longitude.
Breadth 500 Miles. Degrees. 36 and 44 north latitude.

BOUNDARIES.] IT is bounded on the West, by Portugal and the At­lantic Ocean; by the Mediterranean, on the East; [...] the Bay of Biscay and the Pyrenean Mountains, which separate it [...] France, on the North; and by the strait of the sea at Gibraltar, [...] South.

[...] [...] now divided into fourteen districts, besides islands in the Medi­ [...]; as in the following table: [Page 318]

TABLE.
DIVISIONS. Areas in square Miles. Population. Population for every square Mile. TOWNS.
  148,148 ac­cording to Lopez's map. 10,500,000 according to Ct. Aranda. 70 Towns 139
  Villages and Boroughs 21,08 [...]
according to others 18,000
    Inhabit
1. New Castile 28,000.     Madrid 140,000
  Toledo 16,000
Aranjuez 7,000
2. Old Castile 11,840     Burgos 10,000
  Segovia 9,500
3. Leon 12,880     Leon 6,000
  Valladolid 19,000
Salamanca 13,000
4. Granada 9,280 500,000 53 Granada 52,000
  Malaga 41,000
5. Andalusia, viz. 15,360   Seville (120,000) 80,000
Sevilla or Seville   325,000   Cadiz 80,000
Cordova and Jaen   Cordova 20,000
  Jaen 27,000
Antequera 19,600
6. Murcia 3,000     Murcia 44,000
  Cartagena 23,000
          Inhabit.
7. Valencia 7,850 716,000 Cavanilles 91 Valencia 80,000
  Alicante 15,000
8. Catalonia 9,280     Barcelona 115,000
  Tarragona 7,500
Lerida 16,000
9. Arragonia or Arragon 11,360 471,000 41 Sarragoca 36,000
  Hues [...]a 6,800
10. Navarra or Navarre 2,880     Pampelona 11,000
  Tudela
11. Biscaya, Guipuzca, and Alava 4,460     Bilbao 6,000
  St. Sebastian 8,000
12. Asturia 3,840     Oviedo 7,000
13. Gallicia 10,240     St. Jago Compestella 10,000
  Corunna 3,600
Ferrol 7,500
14. Estremadura       Badayoz 6,000
  Merida
15. Balearic Islands       Palma 23,000
Majorca [...],440     Mahon
Minorca 752 27,800 [...]7 Ciudadella 2,500
Ivica   Murray   Ivica
[Page 320]

POSSESSIONS IN OTHER PARTS OF THE GLOBE.

1. In Africa. On the Coast of Barbary, the towns of Ceuta, [...] Melilla▪ and Masalquivir: the Canary Islands, viz. Canaria, Fe [...], Teneriffe, &c. The islands of Aunabon and Delpo, under the Equator.

2. In Asia. The Philippine Islands; the principal of which is Luzon, whose capital is Manilla. The Marian, the Caroline, and [...] ­laos Islands.

3. In America, immense provinces, much larger than all Europe, most of which are astonishingly fertile.

(1.) In North America, Louisiana, California, Old Mexico, or New Spain, New Mexico, both the Floridas.

(2.) In the West-Indies, the island of Cuba, one half of St. Do [...] ­go, Potorico, Trinidad, Margareta, Tortuga, &c.

(3.) In South-America, Terra-Firma, Peru, Chili, Tucuman, Par [...] guay, Patagonia.

These extensive countries we have already described.

ANCIENT NAMES AND DIVISIONS.] Spain formerly included Por­tugal, and was known to the ancients by the name of Iberia, and His­peria, as well as Hispania. It was about the time of the Punic wars divided into Citerior and Ulterior; the Citerior contained the provin­ces lying north of the river Ebro; and the Ulterior, which was [...] largest part, comprehended all that lay beyond that river. Innumera­ble are the changes that it afterwards underwent; but there is no country of whose ancient history, at least the interior part of it, [...] know less than that of Spain.

CLIMATE, AND WATER.] Excepting the period of the equino [...]ial rains, the air of Spain is dry and serene, but excessively hot in the southern provinces in June, July, and August. The vast mountains that run through Spain are, however, very beneficial to the inhabitants, by the refreshing breezes that come from them in the southernmost parts; though those towards the north and north-east are, in the win­ter, very cold.

The waters of Spain, especially those that are medicinal, are little known; but many salutiferous springs are found in Granada, Seville, and Cordova. All over Spain the waters are found to have such heal­ing qualities, that they are outdone by those of no country in Europe; and the inclosing, and encouraging a resort to them, grow every day more and more in vogue, especially at Alhamar in Granada.

MOUNTAINS.] It is next to impossible to specify these, they are so numerous: The chief, and the highest, are the Pyrenees, near 200 miles in length, which extend from the Bay of Biscay to the Mediterranean, and divide Spain from France. Over these mountains there are only five narrow passages to France, and the road over the pass that sepa­rates Roussillon from Catalonia, reflects great honour on the [...] who planned it. It formerly required the strenth of 30 men to support, and nearly as many oxen to drag up a carriage, which four horses now do with ease. The Cantabrian mountains are a continuation of the Pyrenees, and reach to the Atlantic Ocean, south of Cape Finisterpe. The celebrated Mount Calpe, now called the Hill of Gibraltar, was in former times, known under the name of one of the pillars of Hercul [...]; the other, Mount Abyla, lies opposite to it in Africa.

[Page 321] Among the mountains of Spain, Montserrat is particularly worthy the attention of the curious traveller; one of the most singular in the [...], for situation, shape and composition. It stands in a vast plain, [...] thirty miles from Barcelona, and nearly in the centre of the [...] of Catalonia. It is called by the Catalonians Monte-serrado, or Mount Scie, words which signify a cut, or sawed mountain; and [...] so called from its singular and extraordinary form: For it is so brok­ [...] and dvided, and so crowned with an infinite number of spiring [...] or pine heads, that it has the appearance, at a distant view, to [...] [...] work of man; but, upon a nearer approach▪ to be evidently a [...] production. It is a spot so admirably adapted for retirement [...] contemplation, that it has, for many ages, been inhabited only by [...] and hermits, whose first vow is, never to forsake it. When the mountain is first seen at a distance, it has the appearance of an in­ [...] number of rocks cut into conical forms, and built one upon [...] to a prodigious height, or like a pile of grotto work, or Gothic [...]. Upon a nearer view, each cone appears of itself a mountain; [...] whole composes an enormous mass about 14 miles in circum­ [...]; and the Spaniards compute it to be two leagues in height. * [...] like no other mountain, so it stands quite unconnected with [...] though not very distant from some that are very lofty. A con­ [...] [...] erected on the mountain, dedicated to our lady of Montserrat, [...] which pilgrims resort from the farthest parts of Europe. All the [...] who come here are fed gratis for three days, and all the sick re­ [...] into the hospital. Sometimes, on particular festivals, seven [...] persons arrive in one day; but people of condition pay a rea­ [...] price for what they eat. On different parts of the mountain [...] a number of hermitages, all of which have their little chapels, or­ [...]s for saying mass, water cisterns, and most of them little gar­ [...]. The inhabitant of one of these hermitages, which is dedicated [...] [...]. Benito, has the privilege of making an annual entertainment on a [...] day, on which day all the other hermits are invited, when they [...] the sacrament from the hands of the mountain vicar; and af­ter [...] service, dine together. They meet also at this hermitage, [...] [...] days of the saints [...]o which their several hermitages are dedicat­ [...] [...] say mass, and commune with each other. But at other times [...] live in a very solitary and recluse manner, perform various pen­ [...], and adhere to very rigid rules of abstinence, nor do they ever [...] [...]. Nor are they allowed to keep within their walls either dog, [...], or any living thing, lest their attention should be withdrawn [...] [...] to earthly objects. The number of professed monks [...] in 76, of lay brothers 28, and of singing boys 25, besides a phy­ [...], surgeon, and servants. Mr. Thicknesse, who has published [...] [...] particular description of this extraordinary mountain, was inform­ [...] of the hermits, that he often faw from his habitation, the [...] of Minorca, Majorca, and Ivica, and the kingdoms of Valencia [...].

[Page 322] RIVERS AND LAKES.] These are the Duero, formerly D [...]rius, which falls into the Atlantic ocean below Oporto in Portugal; the To­go or Tagus, which falls into the Atlantic ocean below Lisbon; the Guardiana falls into the same ocean near Cape Finisterre; as does the Guadalquiver, now Turio, at St. Lucar; and the Ebro, the ancient Iberus, falls into the Mediterranean sea below Tortosa.

The river Tinto, the qualities of which are very extraordinary, [...] in Sierra Morena, and empties itself into the Mediterranean, near Huelva, having the name of Tinto given it from the tinge of its waters, which are as yellow as a topaz, hardening the sand, and petrifying [...] in a most surprising manner. If a stone happen to fall in, and [...] another, they both become, in a year's time, perfectly united. This river withers all the plants on its banks, as well as the roots of [...], which it dies of the same hue as its waters. No kind of verdure will come up where it reaches, nor any fish live in its stream. It kills worms in cattle when given them to drink; but in general no animals will drink out of this river, excepting goats, whose flesh nevertheless has an excellent flavour. These singular properties continue till [...] rivulets run into it, and alter its nature: For when it passes by Ni [...]la, it is not different from other rivers, and falls into the Mediterranean sea six leagues lower down.

There are several lakes in Spain. That of Beneventa, abounds with fishes, particularly with excellent trout. Of the water of a lake near Antiquera salt is made by the heat of the sun.

BAYS.] The chief bays are those of Biscay, Ferrol, Corunna, (com­monly called the Groyne,) Vigo, Cadiz, Gibraltar, Carthagena, A [...] ­cant, Altea, Valencia, Roses, Majorca in that island, and the harbour of Port-Mahon, in the island of Minorca. The strait of Gibraltar di­vides Europe from Africa.

WEALTH AND COMMERCE.] The kingdom of Spain might be one of the richest countries in Europe. It borders, like France, upon two seas; it is intersected by six large streams, and by upwards of [...] smaller rivers; it has very considerable mountains, and its climate [...] in some respects, still finer than that of France. With respect to its size, it is somewhat smaller than the latter; however, the advantages just enumerated, added to the immense extent and wealth of the Indies, ought to raise this monarchy high above all the other powers of Eu­rope. And yet the reverse is the case; Spain is thinly peopled, has but little commerce, few manufactures, and what commerce it has is almost entirely in the hands of strangers, notwithstanding the impedi­ments thrown in their way by government. With respect to the in­dustry and fertility of the several provinces, AbbÉ Cavaniles distin­guishes between the central and outward provinces; the latter, [...] Gallicia, Asturia, Navarre, Arragon, Catalonia, Valencia, [...] Granada, and the south of Andalusia, are better watered and wo [...] consequently less hot, and upon the whole much more fertile, than [...] middle provinces; most of them have besides, the advantage of [...] maritime provinces. As a favourable instance of the fertility and in­dustry of Spain, the same author has stated the produce of the provinces of Valencia, in the following manner: [Page 323]

  French Livers.
Silk, 2,000,000 lb. valued at 30,000,000
Hemp, 1,500,000
Flax, 1,500,000
Wool, of the coarser sort, 23,000 cwt. 920,000
[...]ite, 5,180,000
Oil, 1000,000 cwt. 4,500,000
Wine, 3,000,000 cantaros, 2,250,000
[...] raisins, 60,000 cwt. 600,000
[...], 480,000
Dutes, 300,000
  46,730,000

The articles of corn, oil, maize, almonds, soda, salt, and the fisheries of the same province, amounted 1770, to 65,000,000 livres. The amount [...] variety of these productions is really astonishing; yet it must be [...]ed, that this province is perhaps the richest in Spain. One of the [...]test obstacles to agriculture in this kingdom is the breeding very [...] flocks of sheep, the value of which is estimated in Spain at [...],000,000 livres. They take up too great an extent of ground for their subsistence, to the prejudice of agriculture and population. The number of those sheep whose wool is of the finest sort, is estimated at [...],000,000; the profits arising from them amount, annually, to 8,500,000 livres, of which 2,200,000 are paid to the king▪ 5,600,000 must be de­ [...]led from the necessary expenses, and only 700,000 livers are the [...] benefit to the proprietors. Of this sine wool, 40,000 cwt. is an­nually sent off to London and Bristol; about the same quantity to [...]en; 20,000 cwt. to Amsterdam, of which only 6000 cwt. Re­ceipt in Holland; the rest is exported chiefly to different parts of [...]. The principal towns which carry on the wool-trade, [...] harbours of Bilboa and Santander, where wool is shipped for [...]portation; and those which produce the finest sorts of wool, are [...], Segovia, (which alone produces 25,000 cwt.) Avila, Burgos, [...] Seria.

Agriculture flourishes most in the provinces of Castile and Estremadu­ [...]; but, upon the whole, Spain does not produce corn enough for its consumption, and is under the necessity of importing large quantities.

Spain produces excellent fruit, as oranges, lemons, almonds, figs, and [...]. In 1764, they were exported from the harbour of Malaga, [...] chests of lemons and oranges, holding from 1000 to 1500, each; [...] barrels of figs, at 75—150 lb. each; 400 barrels of almonds, of [...]—300 lb. each; 500 balls of orange and lemon-peel; 15 balls of [...] the ball weighing 750 lb. Pomegranates, dates pistachios [...] the kernel of this fruit, which resembles an almond in flavour, [...] of it are used in Spain; they are boiled down to a resinous [...] which serves instead of frankincense). Capers, chesnuts, of [...] 30,000 shiplasts are produced in the province of Asturia; fil­ [...] 30,000 bags of which, sold at 1l. sterling each, are sent over to [...]. The sugar-cane, which at present is little cultivated, on ac­ [...] of the importation of West-India sugar: Only four sugar-mills [...] remaining in the province of Granada. Soda, saffron, tobac­co. The greatest tobacco-manufacture is at Seville; it employs 1000 [Page 324] workmen, and 180 mules, used to put 28 mills in motion. The build­ing used for this purpose resembles a palace in magnificence, and the profits it yields, amount to 6,000,000 of dollars: Every day 24,000 lb. of tobacco are dried. Tobacco is mixed in this manufacture with a sort of red earth, called Almagra (rubrica frabrilis) which is found [...] Carthagena, in the province of Murcia. Upwards of 1000 lb. of ho [...] is exported; but the consumption of wax is so great, that a great [...] must be imported from the West-Indies. Salt is very plentiful i [...] Spain; there are not only many rich brine-springs, but large quanti­ties of rock salt; and much salt is also extracted from the sea-wa [...], Unhappily, the salt trade is a monopoly of the crown. Saltpetre a­bounds in this country; the soil is impregnated with it, and many p [...] ­ants have saltpetre pits: If properly attended to, considerable quanti­ties for exportation might be produced. The wines of Spain are cele­brated for their rich and delicious flavour, and they form very con­siderable articles of exportation.

Next to the province of Valencia, those of Arragon, Granada, [...] Murcia, are distinguished for the large quantities of silk the supply. The whole produce of silk, within these four provinces, was estimated about 30 years ago, at about 1,500,000 lb. annually. This produce has increased of late: In 1776, Granada and Murcia produced 700,000 [...] and Valencia upwards of 1,000,000. In 1762, the silk raised in Valen­cia, amounted to 1,150,000 lb. in Murcia to 400,000, in Arragon [...] 170,000, in Granada to 100,000 lb. Notwithstanding these vast quan­tities of silk, the silk manufactures are few and inconsiderable in [...] ­portion; scarcely the fourth part of those remain which were in a flourishing state in the 16th century. Of 70,000 looms, which Spain formerly had, Ustariz found only 10,000 remaining in the year 1724. Since that time, their number has again increased.

Cotton in likewise one of the many productions of this kingdom; Valencia, in good years, produces 120,500 cwt. most of which is ex­ported raw. The best cotton-manufactures are in Valencia, Arragon, and Catalonia.

Gold and silver was found in the mines in very considerable quanti­ties during the times of the Roman dominion, and even afterwards by the industrious Moors. At present only a few silver mines are work­ed, among which, that at Guadalcornal, in the province of Estre [...] ­dura, is the most important. It was formerly worked to very great advantage by German adventurers, but it is at present greatly on the decline: It is said to have produced, while in a flourishing state, to the amount of 60,000 ducats a week. A few silver mines are found in the provinces of Granada, Arragon, and Catalonia. Arragon produ­ces a great deal of iron, most of which is exported as it is brought from the mines, and is imported again when manufactured abroad. This province produces likewise very large quantities of load; the [...] profits of one of these lead mines, at Binares, amounted to 3,000 [...] dollars in seven years. Quicksilver is found in the rich mines of Gua­dalcornal and Almada. The first who worked them were Germa [...] the celebrated Fuger, so conspicuous for his wealth in Charles [...] Fifth's time, got most of his riches from the mine of Almada. In the middle of the present century, the produce of quicksilver, amounted to 18,000 cwt. the whole of which is sent over to America for the pur­pose [Page 325] of almagamating; and the sale of quicksilver to strangers is severe­ly prohibited.

Spain is indebted to German mincralgolists for the discovery of some [...] mines of cobalt: The most important of them is that of Gistan, in A [...]gon. Besides metals, the mineral kingdom affords many valuable articles, among which the quarries of marble, alabaster, and other useful [...], deserve to be mentioned.

Spain now first begins to think of facilitating trade, by the establish­ment of a bank, and by the improvement of the inland communication, by means of good roads and canals. A paper-bank was established in 178 [...], in East-India Company incorporated in 1785, and a large canal [...] near Zaragocedil;a in 1784.

All the exports of Spain, most articles of which no other European country can supply, are estimated at only 80,000,000 livers, or [...], [...],833l. Sterling▪ a very inconsiderable amount, as will appear [...] the above specification of the excellent and various articles of production. The most important trade of Spain is that which it car­ [...] with its American provinces. The chief imports from these [...] countries consist of gold, silver, precious stones, pearls, cot­ton cocoa, cochineal, red wood, skins, rice, medicinal herbs and barks, [...] Peruvian bark, &c. Vanilla, Vicunna wool, sugar, and to­ [...]. In 1784, the total amount of the value of Spanish goods ex­ [...]d to America, was 195,000,000 reales de vellon; foreign com­ [...]di [...]s, 238,000,000. r. d. v. The imports from America were valued [...],000,000, reales de vellon, in gold, silver, and precious stones; [...] upwards, of 300,000,000 in goods. In the Gazeta de Madrid, 1787, [...], 20th) it was stated, that the exports to America (the Indies) from the following twelve harbours: Cadiz, Corunna, Malaga, Seville, St. [...], Santander, Canarias, Alicante, Barcelona, Tortosa, Gipon, St. [...], amounted, in 1785, to 767,249,787 reales de vellon; the [...] paid on these exports amounted to 28,543,702 reales de vellon. The imports, both in goods and money, from America and the West-Indies islands, amounted in the same year to 1,266,071,067 reales de vel­lon, and the duties to 65,472,195 reales de vellon. The profits of the [...]ants from the whole American trade was valued at 5,000,000 dollars.

With respect to European commerce, the balance is generally against Spain, and those losses must be made up by the produce of its Ameri­ca provinces. All the exports from Spain to Great-Britain, amount­ed, i [...] 1785, to 607,712l. sterling; the imports from Great-Britain, to [...]064l. sterling. In 1784, the exports were 646,526; the imports [...]l. sterling.

[...]AL PAODUCTIONS BY SEA AND LAND.] The Spanish horses, especially those of Andalusia, are thought to be the handsomest [...] in Europe, and at the same time very fleet and serviceable. The [...] does all he can to monoplise the finest breed for his own stables [...] service. Spain furnishes likewise mules and black cattle; and [...] wild bulls have so much ferocity, that their bull-feasts were the magnificent spectacle the court of Spain could exhibit, nor are [...] disused. Wolves are the chief beasts of prey that infest [...], which is well stored with all the game and wild fowl that are [...] found in the neighbouring countries already described. The [...] seas afford excellent fish of all kinds, especially anchovies, [...] are here cured in great perfection.

[Page 326] POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MANNERS, CUSTOMS, DIVERSIONS, AND DRESS.} Spain, formerly the [...] populous kingdom in Eu­rope, is now but thinly inhabited. This is owing partly to the [...] drains of people sent to America, and partly to the indolence of the natives, who are at no pains to raise food for their families. Another cause may be assigned, and that is, the vast numbers of ecclesiastics of both sexes, who lead a life of celibacy. Some writers have gives sev­eral other causes, such as their wars with the Moors, and the final ex­pulsion of that people. The present inhabitants of this kingdom have been computed by Feyjoo, a Spanish writer, to amount to 9,250, [...] count Aranda makes them as stated in the Table.

The persons of the Spaniards are generally tall, especially the Cas­tilians; Their hair and complexions swarthy, but their counten [...] are very expressive. The court of Madrid has of late been at [...] pains to clear their upper lips of mustachoes, and to introduce among them the French dress, instead of their black cloaks, their short jerkin, strait breeches, and long Toledo swords, which dress is now chiefly confined to the lower ranks. The Spaniards, before the accession of the house of Bourbon to their throne, affected that antiquated dress in hatred and contempt of the French; and the government, probably, will find some difficulty in abolishing it quite, as the same spirit i [...] the from being extinguished. An Old Castilian, or Spaniard, who [...] none above him, thinks, himself the most important being in nature▪ and the same pride is commonly communicated to his descendants.

Ridiculous, however, as this pride is, it is productive of the must valuable effects. It inspires the nation with generous, humane, and virtuous sentiments; it being seldom found that a Spanish nobleman, gentleman, or even trader, is guilty of a mean action. During th [...] most embittered wars they have had with England for near 70 years past, there is no instance known of their taking advantages (as they might easily have done) of confiscating the British properly on board their galleons and Plate fleet, which was equally secure in time of war as in peace.

By the best and most credible accounts of the late wars, it appears that the Spaniards, in America, gave the most humane and noble relief to all British subjects who were in distress, and sell into their hands, not only by supplying them with necessaries, but money; and treating them in the most hospitable manner while they remained among them

Having said thus much, we are carefully to distinguish between the Spanish nobility, gentry, and traders, and their government, which is to be put on the same footing with the lower ranks of Spaniards, who are as mean and rapacious as those of any other country. The kings of Spain of the house of Bourbon, have seldom, ventured to employ na­tive Spaniards of great families, as their ministers. These are general­ly French or Italians, but most commonly the latter, who rise into pow­er by the most infamous arts, and of late times, from the most abject sta­tions. Hence it is that the French kings of Spain, since their accession to that monarchy, have been but very indifferently served in the cab­inet. Alberoni, who had the greatest genius among them, embroiled his master with all Europe, till he was driven into exile and disgrace; and Grimaldi, the last of their Italian ministers, hazarded a rebellion in the capital, by his oppressive and unpopular measures.

[Page 327] The common people who live on the coasts, partake of all the bad politics that are to be found in other nations. They are an assem­bl [...] of Jews, French, Russians, Irish adventures, and English smug­gler; who being unable to live in their own country, mingle with the Spaniards. In time of war, they follow privateering with great suc­cess; and when peace returns, they engage in all illicit practices, and [...] enter into the Irish and Walloon guards in the Spanish service. There are about 40,000 gypsies, and who, besides their fortune telling, are inn-keepers in the small towns and villages. The character of the Spaniards, is thus drawn by Mr. Swinburne, after his late travels through the country: "The Catalans appear to be the most active during set of men, the best calculated for business, travelling, and man­ufactures. The Valencians a more sullen, sedate race, better adapted to the occupations of husbandmen, less eager to change place, and of a much more timid, suspicious cast of mind than the former. The An­ [...]ans seem to be the greatest talkers and rhodomontadoes of Spain. The Castilians have a manly frankness, and less appearance of cunning and deceit. The new Castilians are perhaps the least industrious of the whole nation; the old Castilians are laborious, and retain more of [...] simplicity of manner; both are of a firm determined spirit.—The Arragonese are a mixture of the Castilian and Catalan, rather in­ [...]g to the former. The Biscayners are acute and diligent, fiery and impatient of control, more resembling a colony of republicans th [...]n a province of an absolute monarchy; and the Galicians are a p [...]dding pains-taking race of mortals, that roam over Spain in search [...] hardly earned subsistence."

Notwithstanding the pride and ostentation of the Spaniards, their [...] is easily discernible, but their wants are few, and their appe­ [...] easily satisfied. The inferior orders, even in the greatest cities, [...]iserably lodged, and those lodgings wretchedly furnished. Many o [...] the poorer sort, both men and women, wear neither shoes nor stock­ [...]g [...], and coarse bread steeped in oil and occasionally seasoned with vinegar, is the common food of the country people through several provinces. A traveller in Spain must carry provisions and bedding [...] him, and if per chance he meets with the appearance of an inn, he must even cook his victuals, it being beneath the dignity of a Span­iard to perform these offices to strangers; but lately some tolerable inns have been opened by Irish and Frenchmen in cities, and upon the high roads. The pride, indolence, and laziness of the Spaniards, are pow­erful inducements to their more industrious neighbours the French, who are to be found in all parts of the kingdom; and here a won­derful contrast distinguishes the character of two neighbouring na­tions. The Spaniard seldom stirs from home, or puts his hand to work of any kind. He sleeps, goes to mass, takes his evening walk. While the industrious Frenchman becomes a thorough domestic; he is butch­ [...], cook, and taylor, all in the same family; he powders the hair, cuts the corns, wipes the shoes, and after making himself useful in a thou­sand different shapes, the returns to his native country loaded with dol­lars and laughs out the remainder of his days at the expense of his [...] benefactor.

The Spaniards are universally known to have refined notions and excellent sense; and this, if improved by study and travelling, which [Page 328] they now stand in great need of, would render them superior to the French themselves. Their slow, deliberate manner of proceeding of [...] in council or war, has of late years worn off to such a degree, [...] during the two last wars, they were found to be as quick both in res [...] ­ing and executing, if not more so than their enemies. Their [...] constancy and patience, have always been deemed exemplary; and in several of their provinces, particularly Galacia, Granada, and An [...] ­sia the common people have, for some time, assiduously applied them­selves to agriculture and labour.

Among the many good qualities possessed by the Spaniards, their [...] ­briety in eating and drinking is remarkable. They frequently [...] fast, as well as sup in bed; their breakfast is usually chocolate, [...] [...] ­ing very seldom drank. Their dinner in generally beef, mutton, veal, pork, and bacon, greens, &c. all boiled together. They live much up­on garlic, chives, sallad and radishes; which, according to one of their proverbs, are food for a gentleman. The men drink very little wine; and the women use water or chocolate. Both sexes usually sleep [...] dinner and take the air in the cool of the evenings. Dancing is so much their favourite entertainment, that you may see a grandmother, mother, and daughter, all in the same country-dance. Many of their theatrical exhibitions are insipid and ridiculous bombast. The [...] ­ter's head sometimes appears through a trap-door above the level of the stage, and he reads the play loud enough to be heard by the [...], Gallantry is a ruling passion in Spain. Jealously, since the accession of the house of Bourbon, has slept in peace. The nightly, musical [...] ­renades of mistresses by their lovers are still in use. The fights of the cavaliers, or bull-feasts, are almost peculiar to this country, and [...] a capital figure in painting the genius and manners of the Spaniards. On these occasions, young gentlemen have an opportunity of shewing their courage and activity before their mistresses; and the valour of the cavalier is proclaimed, honoured, and rewarded, according to the num­ber and fierceness of the bulls he has killed in these encounters. Great pains are used in settling the forms and weapons of the combat, so as [...] give a relief to the gallantry of the cavalier. The diversion itself, which is attended with circumstances of great barbarity, is undoubted­ly of Moorish original, and [...] adopted by the Spaniards when upon good terms with that nation, partly through complaisance, and partly through [...]ivalship.

There [...] a town in Spain but what has a large square for the purpose of exhibiting bull-lights; and it is said that even the poorest inhabitants of the smallest villages, will often club together, in order to procure a cow or an ox, and fight them riding upon asses, for want of horses.

GOVERNMENT.] Spain is at present an absolute monarchy. The meeting of the deputies of the towns, whenever a new tax is to be im­posed, is a more matter of form. Some provinces, however, as Navarre, Biscay, and Arragon, have preserved some of their ancient immuni­ties. The king's edicts, before they require the force of laws, must be registered in the court of Castile. The crown is hereditary, both in the male and female line. By a law made in 1715, female heirs cannot succeed till after the whole male line is extinct.

[Page 329] Public business is managed by the following departments: The council of State, or the Cabinet: of the ministers belonging to it, the [...] of state for foreign affairs is considered as the first. The Su­ [...] Royal Court, or Chamber of Castile, occupied with the internal administration. It is likewise the Supreme Court of justice in the king­dom, and is divided into four chambers: The Council of War, the Royal Council of the Indies, and the Council of Finances. There are as tribunals in the different provinces of Spain, called Chancillerias, [...]sejois, or Audiencias. In the smaller towns, the judges of the in­ [...] courts of justice are called Alcaides or Bayles; in the larger [...], Corregidores, and their assessors Regidores. Lawsuits in this country are exceedingly expensive, and of long duration.

The civil, criminal, and police laws, are partly derived from the an­ [...] Gothic laws, and partly contained in the edicts of the kings. In [...] where these laws are deficient, the Roman laws are made use of▪ by ecclesiastical matters, the canon or papal law, in its full extent, is adopted as the rule of right.

Fundamental laws of the monarchy are the following: 1. The indi­ [...]bility of the Spanish dominions. 2. The right of primogeniture, which put an end to the custom of dividing the kingdom between the sums of the king. And, 3. The above-mentioned clause concerning the succession of the female line.

The provinces are governed by viceroys (Virreyes); and all the American dominions of Spain are divided into three royal govern­ments, under the viceroys of New-Granada, Mexico, and Peru. There [...] nine superior courts of justice, or Audiencias, in America, and one in the Philippine Islands.

FINANCES.] The king's revenue from old Spain amounts to up­wards of 5,000,000l. sterling. The whole of the revenue from Spain, America, and the Philippine Islands, is said to amount to 100 millions of posters.

The public revenue is divided into the general and provincial reve­nue. The first arises. 1. From the customs and the duties on imported goods from abroad, as well as on those imported from one province in­to [...]other. 2. From the monopolies of the crown, viz. those of to­bacco, salt, lead, quicksilver, and gunpowder. 3. From stamp duties, contributions, a tax on landed estates, taxed levied on the estates of the clergy, from the sale of papal absolutions and indulgences, reduced to the price of 40 sous each, from the posts, deductions from the salaries of public officers, and the mint. 4. The crown revenue from America. 5. The crown revenue from Arragon, Valencia, Catalonia, Majorca, and Minorca. What is called the provincial revenue arises from the as provinces, into which the kingdom of Castile has been divided; it consists of various tithes▪ and duties on soap, brandy, wine, and other [...]. Part of the provincial contributions are assigned over to the creditors of the crown, in lien of interest on their capitals. Many branches of the revenue are farmed out to companies. The farm of tobacco alone employs no less than 53,000 collectors. Before the year 1770, the public expenditure was nearly equal to the revenue, but has [...] found since to exceed it. In the year 1770, a deficiency of five millions of piasters was made good, by withholding the sums destined for the extraordinary expense of the colonies.

[Page 330] Spain is burthened with considerable public debts; they are at pre­sent divided into the old and new debts: The former are those con­tracted by the wars of Charles V. and his successors, amounting to [...] millions of piasters; the new debts have been chiefly incurred by the last war with England, and they are stated by Mr. Neckar to amount to 120 millions of French livres, which will be paid off by the year 1800, if no new war should happen.

ARMY.] The army of Spain, in 1783, amounted to between 60 and 70,000 men; besides 20,000 militia. According to others, the regu­lar troops did not then actually exceed 50,000 men; and more recent accounts reduce the army to only 20,000 effective men. The army establishment, as published in the year 1776, amounted to 132,73 [...] men on the lists, viz.

Royal guards, 9,900
Forty-six regiments of foot, 61,425
Artillery, 3,355
Engineers, 150
Horse and dragoons, 13,200
Militia, 29,700
Invalids and militia of the town. 15,000
Total, 132,730

This number, if actually raised in time of war, would be very mod­erate, considering the great extent of the kingdom. There are mili­tary schools at Segovia, Barcelona, and Oran, chiefly for artillery. A tactic school is established at Avila. There are, on the French fron­tiers, 15 strong fortresses, and as many on the frontiers of Portugal.

NAVY.] In 1778, Spain had ships of war of all sorts 144. Other accounts say only 126. In 1784, there were said to be 62 ships of the line, from 120 to 64 guns. The naval troops consisted, in 1783, of three companies of guardias marinas, and 12 batallions of marines, both together, 5712 men, a naval artillery corps of 20,000 men; a corps of naval engineers, a corps of pilo [...]s.

All naval affairs are managed by a board, divided into three depart­ments, those of Cadiz, Carthagena, and Ferrol, which are the chief harbours of the navy. The whole is under the administration of a sec­retary of the marine; and each department has its naval academy.

RELIGION.] The Roman Catholic religion is the exclusive religion of the Spanish monarchy, and it is in these countries of the most bigot­ed, superstitious, and tyrannical character. All other denominations of Christians, as well as the Jews, are exposed to all the severities of persecution; and the least deviation from what is called the orthodox, faith, is liable to be punished with loss of liberty, and even of life. The power of the Court of inquisition, established in Spain in 1478, has however been considerably diminished in some respects by the inter­ference of the civil power. Besides the Supreme Court of Inquisition at Madrid, there are 18 inferior tribunals in the several provinces of the monarchy, which entertain a numerous host of spies or familiars, amounting to about 20,000 persons, who, on the slightest suspicious of heresy, denounce persons of every condition, sex, and age. The pro­ceedings of this arbitrary court are unlike those of all other courts of justice, by deviating from every law of equity and humanity; they [Page 331] do not even inform the accused party of the crime laid to his charge, nor confront him with his accuser, but endeavour to extort by imprison­ment, and by still harsher methods, a confession of heretical opinions.

The public worship is loaded with an enormous number of ceremo­nies, calculated to support the blind aeal of the people for their relig­ion, and the reverence for their spiritual tyrants. The whole of the canon law is here in [...]rce, and the power of the pope is still very ex­tensive. It is supposed that the clergy of this kingdom amount to 200,000 persons, half of whom are monks and nuns, distributed through 3000 convents. The possessions of the clergy are very large▪ the revenue of the archbishop of Toledo amounts to 100,000l. sterling, per annum. There are in the kingdom of Spain eight archbishops and 46 bishops; in America six archbishops and 23 bishops; in the Philip­pine Islands, one archbishop and three bishops. All these dignities are in the gift of the king. Fifty-two inferior ecclesiastical dignities and offices are in the gift of the pope.

To the Spanish clergy there belong three spiritual orders of knight­hood: The orders of Santiago, Calatrava, and Alcantara, possessed of very large estates.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, ARTIFICIAL AND NATURAL.] The former of these consist chiefly of Roman and Moorish antiquities. Near Segovia, a grand aqueduct, erected by Trajan, ex­tends over a deep valley between two hills, and is supported by a double row of 152 arches. Other Roman aqueducts, theatres, and cir­ [...], are to be found at Terrago, and different parts of Spain. Near the city of Salamanca are the remains of a Roman way, paved with large flat stones; it was continued to Merida, and from thence to Seville. At Toledo are the remains of an old Roman theatre, which is now con­verted into a church, said to be one of the greatest curiosities of an­tiquity. It is 600 feet in length, 500 in breadth, and of a proportion­able height; the roof, which is amazingly bold and lofty, is supported by 350 pillars of fine marble, in ten rows, forming eleven ailes, in which are 366 altars, and 24 gates; every part being enriched and adorned with the most noble and costly ornaments. At Martorel, a large town, where much black lace is manufactured, is a very high bridge, built in 1768, out of the ruins of a decayed one that had existed 1985 years from its erection by Hannibal. At the north end is a tri­umphal arch or gateway, said to have been raised by that general in honour of his father Hamilcar. It is almost entire, well proportioned and simple, without any kind of ornament, except a rim or two of hewn stone. Near Mu [...]viedro (once the faithful Saguntum) destroyed by Hannibal, are some Roman remains—as the runs of the theatre, an [...]act semicircle about 82 yards diameter, some of the galleries are cut out of the rock, and 9000 persons might attend the exhibitions without inconvenience.

The Moorish antiquities are rich and magnificent. Among the most distinguished of these is the royal palace of the Alhambra at Gra­nada, which is one of the most entire, as well as the most stately, of may of the edifices which the Moors erected in Spain, It was built in [...], by the second Moorish king of Granada; and, in 1422, in the [...] of their eighteenth king, was taken by the Spaniards. It is situ­ated on a hill, which is ascended by a road bordered with hedges of [Page 332] double or imperial myrtles, and rows of elms. On this hill, [...] the walls of the Alhambra, the emperor Charles V. began a new p [...] ­ace in 1568, which was never finished, though the shell of it [...]. It is built of yellow stone; the outside forms a square of one hundred and ninety feet. The inside is a grand circular court, with a portion of the Tuscan, and a gallery of the Doric order, each supported by thirty-two columns, made of as many single pieces of marble. The grand entrance is ornamented with columns of jasper, on the pedestals of which are representations of battles, in marble basso relievo. The Alhambra itself is a mass of many houses and towers, walled round, and built of large stones of different dimensions. Almost all the [...] have stucco walls and ceilings, some carved, some painted, and some gilt, and covered with various Arabic sentences. It is the most curious place within, that perhaps exists in Europe. Here are several baths, the walls, floor, and cieling of which are of white marble. The gardens abound with orange and lemon trees, pomegranates, and myrtles. At the end of the gardens is another palace called Ginaraliph, situated on a more elevated station than the Alhambra. From the balconies of this palace is one of the finest prospects in Europe, over the whole fertile plain of Granada, bounded by the snowy mountains. The Moors to this day regret the loss of Granada, and still offer up prayers to God for the recovery of the city. Many other noble monuments, erected in the Moorish times, remain in Spain; some of them in tolerable preserva­tion, and others exhibiting superb ruins.

Among the natural curiosities, the medicinal springs, and some noi­sy lakes, form a principal part; but we must not forget the River Gua­diana, which, like the Mole in England, runs under ground, and then is said to emerge. The royal cabinet or natural history at Madrid, was opened to the public by his majesty's orders in 1775. Every thing in this collection is arranged with neatness and elegance, and the apartments are opened twice a week for the public, besides being shewn privately to strangers of rank. The mineral part of the cabinet, containing precious stones, marbles, ores, &c. is very perfect; but the collection of birds and beasts at present is not large, though it may be expected to improve apace, if care be taken to get the productions of the Span­ish, American colonies. Here is also a curious collection of vases, ba­sons, ewers, cups, plates, and ornamental pieces of the finest agates, amethysts, rock crystals, &c. mounted in gold, and enamel, set with ca­meos, intaglios, &c. in an elegant taste, and of very sine workmanship, said to have been brought from France by Philip V. The cabinet also contains specimens of Mexican and Peruvian vases and utensils.

In blowing up the rock of Gibraltar, many pieces of bones and teeth have been sound incorporated with the stone. On the west side of the mountain is the cave, called St. Michael's, eleven hundred and ten feet above the horizon. Many pillars of various sizes, some of them two feet in diameter, have been formed in it by the droppings of water, which have petrified in falling. The water perpetually drips from the roof, and forms an infinite number of stalactitae of a whitish colour, composed of several coasts or crusts, and which, as well as the pillars, continually increase in bulk, and may probably in time fill the whole cavern. From the summit of the rock, in clear weather, not only the town of Gibralter may be seen, but the bay, the straits, the [Page 333] towns of St. Roque and Algesiras, and the Alpuzara mountains, mount Abyla on the African shore, with its snowy top, the cities of Ceuta, T [...]gier, and great part of the Barbary coast.

CHIEF, CITIES, &c.] Madrid, which is enclosed by a mud wall, is the capital of Spain. It is surrounded with very lofty mountains, whose summits are frequently covered with snow. It is well paved and lighted, and some of the streets are spacious and handsome. The houses of Madrid are of brick, and are laid out chiefly for shew, conve­niency being little considered: Thus you will pass through usually two or three large apartments of no use, in order to come at a small [...] at the end where the family sit. The houses, in general, look more like prisons than the habitations of people at their liberty; the windows, besides having a balcony, being grated with iron bars, par­ticularly the lower range, and sometimes all the rest. Separate fami­lies generally inhabit the same house, as in Paris and Edinburgh.—Foreigners are very much distressed for lodgings at Madrid, as the Spaniards are not fond of taking strangers into their houses, especially if they are not catholics. Its greatest excellency is the cheapness of its provisions; but neither tavern, coffee-house, nor news paper, except­ing the Madrid Gazette, are to be found in the whole city. The royal palace stands on an eminence, on the west side of the city; it is a spa­cious, magnificent structure, consisting of three courts, and commands a very fine prospect. Each of the fronts is 470 feet in length, 100 high, and there is no palace in Europe fitted up with greater magnificence; the great audience chamber especially, which is 120 feet long, and long with crimson velvet, richly embroidered with gold. Ornament­ed also with 12 looking-glasses, made at St. Ildefonso, each 10 feet high, with 12 tables of the finest Spanish marbles. The other royal palaces round it are designed for hunting seats or houses of retirement [...] their kings. Some of them contain fine paintings and good statues. The chief of those palaces are the Buen Retiro (now stripped of all i [...] best pictures and furniture,) Cassa del Campo, Aranjuez, and St. Ildefonso.

A late traveller has represented the palace of Aranjuez, and its gar­dens, as extremely delightful. Here is also a park many leagues round, cut across in different parts by alleys of two, three, and even four miles in extent. Each of these alleys is formed by two double rows of elm trees; one double row on the right and one on the left, which renders the shade thicker. The alleys are wide enough to ad­ [...] of four coaches abreast, and betwixt each double row there is a narrow channel, through which runs a stream of water. Between these allies there are thick groves of smaller trees of various kinds, and thousands of deer and wild boars wander there at large, besides num­berless hares, rabbits, pheasants, partridges, and several other kinds of kinds. The river Tagus runs through this place, and divides it into two unequal parts. The central point of this great park is the king's palace, which is partly surrounded by the garden, and is exceedingly pleasant, adorned with fountains and statues, and it also contains a vast variety of the most beautiful flowers, both American and Euro­pean. As to the palace of Aranjuez itself, it is rather an elegant than a magnificent building.

[Page 334] The palace of St. Ildefonso is built of brick, plaistered, and pointed, but no part of the architecture is agreeable. It is two stories high, and the garden-front has thirty-one windows, and twelve rooms in a suite. The gardens are on a slope, on the top of which is a great reservoir of water, called here El Mar, the sea, which supplies the fountains:—This reservoir is furnished from the torrents which pour down the mountains. The water-works are excellent, and far surpass those at Versailles. The great entry of the palace, is somewhat similar to that of Versailles, and with a large iron pallisade. In the gardens are twenty-seven fountains; the basons are of white marble, and the stat­ues, many of which are excellent, are of lead, bronzed and gilt.—These gardens are in the formal French style, but ornamented with sixty-one very fine marble statues, as large as the life, with twenty-eight marble vases, and twenty leaden vases gilt. The Upper part of the palace contains many valuable paintings, and the lower part an­tique statues, busts, and basso relievos.

The pride of Spain, however, is the Escurial; and the natives say, perhaps with justice, that the building of it cost more than that of any other palace in Europe. The description of this palace forms a sizable quarto volume, and it is said, that Philip II. who was its founder, ex­pended upon it six millions of ducats. It contains a prodigious num­ber of windows, 200 in the west front, and in the east, 366, and the apartments are decorated with an astonishing variety of paintings, sculpture, tapestry, ornaments of gold and silver, marble, jasper, gents, and other curious stones, surpassing all imagination. The Spaniards say, that this building, besides its palace, contains a church, large and richly ornamented, a mausoleum, cloisters, a convent, a college, and a library, containing about thirty thousand volumes, besides large apart­ments for all kinds of artists and mechanics, noble walks, with exten­sive parks and gardens, beautified with fountains and costly ornaments. The fathers that live in the convent are 200, and they have an annual revenue of 12000l. The mausoleum, or burying-place of the kings and queens of Spain, is called the Pantheon, because it is built upon the plan of that temple at Rome, as the church to which it belongs is upon the model of St. Peter's. It is 36 feet in diameter incrusted with fine marbles.

But this fabric, notwithstanding the incredible sums bestowed on it, discovers, upon the whole, a bad taste. The conceit of building it in the form of a gridiron, because St. Lawrence, to whom it is dedicated, was broiled on such a utensil, and multiplying the same figure through its principal ornaments, could have been formed only in the brain of a tasteless bigot, such as Philip II. who erected it to commemorate the victory he obtained over the French at St. Quintin, on St. Lawrence's day, in the year 1557. The apartment where the king resides, forms the handle of the gridiron. The building is a long square of 640 feet by 580. The height to the roof is 60 feet. It has been enriched and adorned by his successors; but its outside has a gloomy appearance, and the inside is composed of different structures, some of which are master-pieces of architecture, but forming a disagreeable whole. It must however be confessed, that the pictures and statues that have found admission here, are excellent in their kind, and some of [...] not to be equalled even in Italy itself.

[Page 335] Cadiz is the great emporium of Spanish commerce. It stands on an Island separated from the continent of Andalusia, without the straits of Gibraltar, by a very narrow arm of the sea, over which a fortified bridge is thrown, and joins it to the main land. The entrance into the bay is about 500 sathoms wide, and guarded by two forts, called the Puntals. The streets are narrow, ill paved and filthy, and full of [...] in the night. The houses lofty with flat roofs, and few are with­out a turret for a view of the sea. The cathedral hath been already [...] years building, and the roof a few years since, was not half finished. The environs are beautifully rural.

Seville, the Julia of the Romans, is next to Madrid, the largest city in Spain, but is greatly decayed both in riches and population. The shape is circular, and the walls seem of Moorish construction; its cir­cumference is five miles and a half. The suburb of Triana, is as large as many towns, and remarkable for its gloomy Gothic castle, where, in 1481, the inquisition was first established in Spain. Manufactures is wool and silk, which formerly amounted to 16,000, are now reduc­ed to 400, and its great office of commerce to Spanish America is re­ [...]ed to Cadiz. The cathedral of Seville is a fine Gothic building, with a curious steeple or tower, having a movable figure of a women at top, called La Giralda, which turns round with the wind; and which is referred to in Don Quixote.

Barcelona, formerly Barcino, said to be founded by Hamilcar Bar­ons, is a large circular trading city, containing 15,000 houses, is situa­ted on the Mediterranean facing Minorca, and is said to be the hand­ [...] place in Spain; the houses are lofty and plain, and the streets [...]ll lighted, and paved. The citadel is strong, and the place and in­habitants famous for the siege they sustained in 1714 against a formi­dable army, when deserted both by England and the Emperor for whom they had taken up arms.

A singular custom prevails among them on the 1st of November, the [...] of All Souls; they run about from house to house to eat chesnuts, believing that for every chesnut they swallow, with proper faith and [...]tion, they shall deliver a soul out of purgatory.

Carthagena is a large city, but has very good streets, and fewer remark­bl [...] buildings. The port is very complete, formed by nature in the figure of a heart, and the arsenal is a spacious square south-west of the town, with forty pieces of cannon to defend it toward the sea. When Mr. Swinburne visited it, in 1775, there were 800 Spanish criminals, and 600 Barbary slaves working at the pumps to keep the docks dry, &c. and treated with great inhumanity. The crimes for which the Spaniards were sent there, deserved indeed exemplary punishments.

Granada stands on two hills, and the ancient palace of the Alhambra towns the double summit between two rivers, the Dauro, and the Xe­ [...]l. The former glories of this city are passed away with its old in­habitants; the streets are now filthy and the aqueducts crumbled to [...], and its trade is lost. Of 50,000 inhabitants, only 18,000 are rec­ [...]ed useful, the surplus is made up of superfluous clergy, lawyers, children, and beggars. The amphitheatre, for bull feasts, is built of [...] and one of the best in Spain, and the environs of the city are [...] pleasing and healthful.

[...] is situated on the banks of the river Ybaizabal, and is about [...] leagues from the sea. It contains about eight hundred houses, [Page 336] with a large square by the water side, well shaded with pleasant [...] which extend to the outlets, on the banks of the river; where there [...] great numbers of houses and gardens, which form a most pleasing [...] ­pect, particularly in sailing up the river; for, besides the beautiful [...] ­dure, numerous objects open gradually to the eye, and the town [...] pears as an amphitheatre, which enlivens the landscape, and [...] the scenery. The houses are solid and lofty, and the streets well [...] ­ed and level; and the water is so conveyed into the streets, that [...] may be wa [...]l [...]ed at pleasure; which renders Bilboa one of the [...] towns in Europe.

Malaga is an ancient city, and not less remarkable for its [...] and extensive commerce than for the luxuriance of its soil, yielding [...] great abundance the most delicious fruits; whilst its rugged [...] ­tains afford those luscious grapes, which give such reputation to the Malaga wine, known in England by the name of Mountain. The city is large and populous, and of a circular form, surrounded with double wall, strengthened by stately towers, and has nine gates. A Moorish castle, on the point of a rock, commands every part of [...]. The streets are narrow, and the most remarkable building in it is a [...] ­pendous cathedral, begun by Philip II. said to be as large as that of [...] Paul's in London. The bishop's income is 16,000l. sterling.

The city of Salamanca is of a circular form, but on three hills and two vallies, and on every side surrounded with prospects of fine houses, noble feats, gardens, orchards, fields, and distant villages; and it an­cient, large, rich, and populous. Over some of the arches of [...] houses are medallions, with busts of the kings of Spain, and of several eminent men, in stone basso-relievo, among which are those of Fer­nando Cortez, Francis Pizarro, Davila, and Cid Ruv. In this [...] the bull-fights are exhibited for three days only, in the month of June. The river Tormes runs by this city, and has a bridge over it of 25 arch­es, built by the Romans, and yet entire.

Toledo is one of the most ancient cities in Spain, and during several centuries it held the rank of its metropolis. But the neighbourhood of Madrid has by degrees, stripped it of its numerous inhabitants. It is now exceedingly ill built, poor and mean, and the streets very steep.

Burgos was the ancient capital of the kingdom of Castile, but [...] in obscurity.

Gibraltar, once a celebrated town and fortress of Andalusia, is a [...] present in the possession of Great-Britain. It was taken from [...] Spaniards by a combined fleet of English and Dutch ships, under the command of Sir George Rooke, in 1704; and after many fruitless at­tempts to recover it, was confirmed to the English by the treaty of Utrecht, in 1713. Repeated attempts have been since made to wrest it from England, but without success: The last war hath made it more famous than ever, when it underwent a long siege against the united forces of Spain and France by land and sea, and was gallantly defeat­ed by general Elliot and his garrison, to the great loss and disgrace of the assailants: Though it must be granted, the place is by nature al­most impregnable. Near three hundred pieces of cannon of different bores, and chiefly brass, which were sunk before the port in the [...] ­ing batteries, have been raised, and sold, to be distributed among the garrison. It is a commodious port, and formed naturally for con­ [...]ding [Page 337] the passage of the Straits, or, in other words, the entrance in­to the Mediterranean and Levant seas. But the road is neither safe against an enemy nor storms: The bay is about twenty leagues in cir­cumference. The straits are 24 miles long, and 15 broad; through which sets a current from the Atlantic ocean into the Mediterranean, and for the stemming of it a brisk gale is required. The town was rather large nor beautiful, and in the last siege was totally destroyed by the enemies bombs, but on account of its fortifications, is esteem­ed [...]ey of Spain, and is always furnished with a garrison well pro­ [...] for its defence. The harbour is formed by a mole, which is well fortified and planted with guns. Gibraltar is accessible on the [...] side only by a narrow passage between the rock and the sea, but [...] walled and fortified both by art and nature, and so inclosed by [...] steep hills, as to be almost inaccessible that way. It has but two [...] on that side, and as many towards the sea. Across this isthmus the Spaniards have drawn fortified line, chiefly with a view to hin­ [...] the garrison of Gibraltar from having any intercourse with the country behind them: Notwithstanding which they carry on a [...]estine trade, particularly in tobacco, of which the Spaniards are [...]eedingly fond. The garrison is, however, confined within very [...] limits; and, as the ground produces scarcely any thing, all [...] provisions are brought them either from England, or from Ceuta, o [...] the opposite coast of Barbary. Formerly Gibraltar was entirely [...] military government; but that power producing those abuses which are naturally attendant on it, the parliament thought proper to [...] it into a body corporate, and the civil power is now lodged in its magistrates.

The chief islands belonging to Spain in Europe, are those of Major­ [...] and Yvica, of which we have nothing particular to say. Minorca, which was taken by the English in 1708, was retaken by the Spaniards the last war, and is now become a Spanish island again, containing about 23,000 inhabitants.

GENERAL REMARKS.] Whoever considers the climate, the fertility, all the immense extent of the dominions belonging to the crown of Spain, must be grieved to find the accumulated natural treasures of so [...] a part of the globe, turn out to so little advantage to the human [...]. A comparison of this kingdom with France or England, [...] its inferiority in a very striking light. It seems, that the want of vigour and happiness of the Spanish monarchy, is to be attributed chiefly to three causes. 1. To the depopulation of Old Spain, occa­sioned by the injudicious and cruel expulsion of the industrious Moors. 2. To the religious oppression still prevailing in Spain, and discouraging foreigners from settling in that kingdom. 3. To the dis­covery of so very rich a country as America, and to the sudden influx of [...] much gold and silver from thence. It appears from several [...]dations, that some thousand millions of ducats have been brought [...] to Spain since the discovery of America. These riches being ac­ [...] without any other trouble than that of plundering and oppress­ion natives, proved extremely prejudicial to the mother country, [...] great numbers of inhabitants to emigrate from Old Spain, [...] to exchange labour and industry for rapine; and by render­ [...] ancient sources of wealth, agriculture and manufactures, con­ [...]able, when compared to the riches to be acquired in America. [Page 338] In consequence of this revolution, the useful arts, rendered perhaps more difficult in this kingdom by the influence of the climate, [...] into neglect and insignificancy, from which they have not yet [...] ­ed. It is to be hoped, however, that this fatal consequence [...] rapid and influx of money, especially if the latter should not be [...] ­nent in its nature, will in future be guarded against by other con [...] ­cial nations, to whom the present state of Spain, may serve as [...] ­ful warning.

While the Moors were masters of Spain, agriculture and the [...] arts were in a very flourishing state, and sciences were arrived [...] ­gree of lustre the more conspicuous, by being contrasted with the ig­norance spread over the rest of Europe.

Several old fathers of the church were Spaniards; and [...] owes a great deal to Isidore, bishop of Seville, and cardinal [...] Spain has likewise produced some excellent physicians. Such [...] the gloom of the Austrian government, that took place with the [...] ­peror Charles V. that the inimitable Cervantes, the author of [...] Quixote, born at Alcala, in 1549, listed in a station little superior to that of a common soldier, and died neglected, after fighting [...] for his country at the battle of Lepanto, in which be lost his loss [...]. His satire upon knight-errantry, in his adventures of Don Quixote [...] as much service to his country be curing them of that ridiculous spi­rit as it now does honour to his own memory. He was in [...] debt, when he composed the first part of his history. Perhaps he [...] be placed at the head of moral and humourous satirists.

Tostatus, a divine, the most voluminous perhaps that ever [...] was a Spaniard; but his works have been long distinguished only by their bulk. Herrera, and some other historians, particularly De [...] have shewn great abilities in history, by investigating the antiqu [...] of America, and writing the history of its conquest by their countrymen. Among the writers who have lately appeared in Spain, Father Po [...] ­joo has been one of the most distinguished. His performances dis­play great ingenuity, very extensive reading, and uncommon liberali­ty of sentiment; especially when his situation and country are [...] ­ered. Many of his pieces have been translated into English, and pub­lished in four volumes. Don Francisco Perez Bayer, arch [...] of Valencia, and author of a dissertation on the Phenician language, may be placed in the first line of the Spanish literati. Spain has like­wise produced many travellers and voyagers to both the Indies, who are equally amusing and instructive.

Some of the Spaniards have distinguished themselves in the police arts, and not only the cities, but the places, especially the Escuri [...], discover many striking specimens of their abilities as sculpture and ar­chitects. Palomino in an elaborate treatise on the art of painting, in two volumes, folio, has inserted the lives of two hundred and thirty three painters and sculptors, who flourished in Spain from the [...] of Ferdinand the Catholic, to the conclusion of the reigns of [...] the Fourth. Among the most eminent Spanish painters, were [...] ­ques, Nurillo, who is commonly called the Spanish Vandyke, [...] and Caludio Coello, whose style of painting was very similar [...] of Paul Veronese.

The present state of sciences in Spain is fat from being [...] There are, it is true, near thirty universities in the Spanish [...] [Page 339] Among which, those of Madrid, Salamanca, Seville, Valladolid, Zara­ [...]ea, and Toledo, are the most celebrated; but Aristotelic and scho­lastic philosophy, subservient to the absurd doctrines of a superstitious church, is still prevailing in these seminaries, with very little change over since the restoration of ancient learning. While sciences are ex­clusively taught by monks and priests, while the productions of ge­ [...] are subject to the rigorous censure of an inquisition, which is by [...] nature an enemy to free discussion and to the prevalence of reason, [...] not to be expected that philosophy will make any progress under [...] terrors of prisons and autos da fé. Yet poetry and the arts have [...] a considerable figure in Spain. There are several societies at [...], Valencia, Barcelona, Valladolid, intended for the improve­ment of the Castilian language, the study of the cannon law, and the li­ [...]gy; of history, the latin language, medicine, the arts of design and [...]eraphy. Great hopes are entertained of the progress of science and philosophy in a future reign, from the attachment of the present [...]ince of Austria to natural history and the political sciences.

HISTORY.] The first inhabitants of Spain were the Celtae a peo­ple of Gaul; after them the Phoenicians possessed themselves of the [...] southern parts of the country, and may well be supposed to have [...] the first civilizers of this kingdom, and the founders of the most ancient cities. After these followed the Grecians; then the Cartha­ [...]iant, on whose departure, sixteen years before Christ, it became [...]bject to the Romans, till the year 400, when the Goths, Vandal [...], [...], Alans and Sillingi, on Constantine's withdrawing his forces [...] that kingdom to the East, invaded it, and divided it amongst themselves; but the Goths in a little time were sole masters of it un­der their king Alarick I. who founded the Spanish monarchy. After [...] succession of monarchs, we come to the present king, Charles [...] who ascended the throne upon the death of his half brother, Fer [...]nd VI in the year 1759.

As the best histories of Spain and her American Colonies, the read­er is referred to Rollin's Ancient History—Universal History—Rob­ [...]in's Histories of Charles Vth. and of South America, and the Ab­ [...] Clavigero's History of New Mexico.

PORTUGAL.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 300 Miles. between Degrees. 37 and 42 north lat.
Breadth 100 Miles. Degrees. 7 and 10 west long.

BOUNDARIES.] IT is bounded by Spain on the North and East, and on the South and West by the Atlantic Ocean, [...] the most westerly kingdom on the continent of Europe.

ANCIENT NAMES AND DIVISIONS.] This kingdom was, in the [...] the Romans, called Lusitania. The etymology of the modern [...] uncertain. It most Probably is derived from some noted har­ [...] [...] to which the Gauls (for so strangers are called in the Cel­ [...] [...]. By the form of the country it is naturally divided in­ [...] [...]; the north, middle, and south provinces.

[...] [...] of this kingdom are more particularly specified in the [...] [...]ble.

[Page 340]

TABLE.
DIVISIONS. Areas in square miles. Population. Population for each single square mile. CHIEF TOWNS.
The whole kingdom, with the Atlantic Islands 32,000— 2,360,000 74  
    2,500,000    
Portugal, without the Islands 27,376— 2,300,000 80 10 Towns.
    2,200,000   527 Villages.
  3343 Parishes
    1,800,000 65  
  5,440— above 350,000 in the year 1732.   Names Num. Inh.
1. The Province of Estrem [...]dura   64 Lisbon 120,000
  7,200—   According to others 180,000
2. Beira   550,856 76 Coimbra 12,000
  1,840—     Aveiro 4,400
3 Province Entre Minho e Duero   430,300 the most populous Province. 234 Oporto 40,000
  2,400—   Braga 12,000
4. Tras loz Mentes   180,800 74 Braganza 2,700
  7,800—     Miranda
5. Alentejo   262,223 30 Evora 10,000
        Villa Viciosa 3,700
  1,600—     Estremoz 6,500
6. The kingdom of Algarviz   63,700 40 Lago [...] 2,800
  4,608     Tavira 4,700
Islands in the Atlantic Ocean, Viz.   130,000 28  
Isle Porte Santo 1,200   Porte Santo 600
Madeina 65,000 Funchal
The A [...]ores    
St. Mig [...]ol 52,900 Ponta Delgada
[...]orceien   [...]
Royal   [...]
[...]   [...]
[...]   [...]
[...]    
[Page 341]

POSSESSIONS OF THE CROWN OF PORTUGAL IN OTHER PARTS OF THE GLOBE.

1. In Asia. Some settlements along the western coast of the Indian peninsula within the Ganges, as Diu, Chaoul, Goa, of which the latter i [...] the most important, and the seat of the governor of the Portuguese possessions in the East-Indies. Macao, a small town on the coast of [...]

2. In Africa. The islands called Azores; the islands Maderia and [...] Santo; the islands of Cape Verde; several forts along the Gam­ [...], and on the coast of Guinea; the islands of St. Thomas and do [...]ciple; some settlements in Congo, Loango, and Angola: (the Por­tuguese are almost the only nation acquainted with these Provinces, with which they carry on a very lucrative trade;) several settlements on the coast of Zanguebar and Sofala, and farther in the country. Mosambique is the most important of these places.

3. In America. The large province of Brasil, divided into 14 capi [...] or governments; and small possessions on the coast of Guiana, and in Paraguay. The colony of San Sacramento, on the river de la [...]ta, was taken by the Spaniards in 1777.

MOUNTAINS.] The face of Portugal is mountainous, or rather rocky, for their mountains are generally barren: The chief are those which divide Algarva from Alentejo; those of Tralos Montes, and the rock of Lisbon, at the mouth of the Tajo.

WATER AND RIVERS.] Though every brook in Portugal is reckoned a river, yet the chief Portuguese rivers are mentioned in Spain, all of them falling into the Atlantic ocean. The Tagus, or Tajo, was cele­brated for its golden sand. Portugal contains several roaring lakes and springs; some of them are absorbent even of the lightest substances, such as wood, cork, and feathers; some, particularly one about 45 miles from Lisbon, are medicinal and sanative; and some hot baths are found in the little kingdom or rather province of Algarva.

WEALTH AND COMMERCE.] Portugal, situated in the same genial climate with Spain, abounds like the latter in excellent natural pro­ductions; it is well watered, and a great part of it bounded by the ocean. It is possessed of very rich provinces beyond the seas. It is how­ever not proportionably powerful; its inhabitants are indigent, and the balance of trade is against it. It is even obliged to import the neces­saries of life, chiefly corn, from other countries. In point of popula­tion, it has rather the advantage of Spain.

Portugal produces wine, wool, oil, silk, honey, aniseed, sumac; all the finer sorts of fruit enumerated in the preceding table of Spain; some corn, flax, cork. These articles of produce might, with a little industry, be raised in great abundance. There are in this kingdom several evident traces of very rich mines; they continue however to be unregarded. Portugal has very little silver in circulation; it is not [...]sual to find it difficult to make up a sum of twenty pounds in sil­ver. This scarcity was in a great measure owing to an injudicious possession of exporting coined silver.

The exports of Portugal are not inconsiderable; but they are greatly exceeded by the imports. The soil produces no more corn annually [Page 342] than what is barely sufficient for three months consumption; corn, therefore is the most considerable article of importation from abroad. As no manufactures of any importance are in a thriving state, the Por­tuguese are supplied by the industry of other nations, chiefly the En­glish, with almost every article of dress, and with most other articles of use and convenience. It seems, that the efforts of government [...] encourage industry have hitherto been ineffectual. The late minister of state, M. de Pombal, found it impracticable to raise a glass manufac­ture into consequence, notwithstanding he laid out 80,000 crusades, or 54,000 crowns upon this scheme, and doubled the duties of foreign glass, in order to encourage the manufacture. A linen manufacture established at Oporto, cannot easily be expected to thrive, while the materials used in it must be imported from the Baltic.

To the above-mentioned disadvantages we must add the want of fisheries, which obliges this country to buy, by far the greatest part of the fish it consumes, from other nations. Its commerce is almost, en­tirely in the hands of strangers. It has imposed very heavy duties up­on the necessaries of life, a measure which is very unfavourable to in­dustry. In the year 1784, the Portuguese government, in order to en­courage the freighting trade, lowered the duties on all goods imported and exported in Portuguese bottoms by 10 per cent. which probably will be of great use of commerce.

In 1785, the goods imported from Great Britain and Ireland into Portugal, consisting of woollens, corn, fish, wood, and hard-ware, a­mounted to upwards of 960,000l. sterling. The English took in re­turn of the produce of Portugal and Brasil to the amount of 728,000l. sterling. To support a trade which is, upon the whole, much against Portugal, this kingdom has the resource of ready money drawn from Brasil: If these supplies should ever fail, it would be soon entirely ruined, if it had nothing to rely upon but its present industry. Only 15 millions of livres, in ready money, are supposed to circulate in a country which draws annually upwards of 1,500,000l. sterling, or 36 millions of livres, from the mines of Brasil. Since the discovery of these mines, that is, within the last sixty years, Portugal has brought from Brasil about 2400 millions of livres, or 100,000,000l. sterling. Besides these large sums of money, Portugal imports from Brasil large quantities of cocoa, sugar, rice, train-oil, whalebone, coffee, and medi­cinal drugs.

No commercial companies have hitherto been established. The principal trading places are, the towns of Lisbon, Oporto, and Setu­val. In former times, when the Portuguese had an extensive com­merce and settlements in the East-Indies; their trade to China was important, but it has lately greatly decreased.

CHARACTER.] The modern Portuguese retain nothing of that adven­turous, enterprising spirit that rendered their forefathers so illustrious 300 years ago. They have, ever since the house o Braganza mount­ed the throne, degenerated in all their virtues; though some noble ex­ceptions are still remaining among them, and no people are so little obliged as the Portuguese are, to the rep [...]s of historians and travel­lers. Their degeneracy is evidently owing to the weakness of their monarchy, which renders them inactive, for fear of disobliging their powerful neighbours. Treachery has been laid to their charge, as [Page 343] well as ingratitude: and above all, an intemperate passion for revenge. They are, if possible, more superstitious, and, both in high and com­mon life, affect more state than the Spaniards.

The Portuguese ladies are thin and small of stature. Their com­plexion is olive, their eyes black and expressive, and their features generally regular. They are esteemed to be generous, modest, and [...]. They dress like the Spanish ladies, with much awkwardness and assessed gravity, but in general more magnificently; and they are might by their husbands to exact from their servants an homage, that in other countries is paid only to royal personages. The furniture of the houses, especially of their grandees, is rich and superb to excess; and they maintain an incredible number of domestics, as they never [...]arge any who survive, after serving their ancestors. The poorer [...] have scarcely any furniture at all, for they, in imitation of the [...]ors, fit always cross-legged on the ground.

LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN.] These are so few, that they are mentioned with indignation, even by those of the Portuguese them­selves, who have the smallest tincture of literature. Some efforts, though very weak, have of late been made by a few, to draw their country­men from this deplorable state of ignorance. It is universally allowed [...] the defect is not owing to the want of genius, but of a proper edu­cation. The ancestors of the present Portuguese were certainly pos­sessed of more true knowledge, with regard to astronomy, geography, and navigation, than all the world besides, about the middle of the 16th century, and for some time after. Camoens, who himself was a great adventurer and voyager, was possessed of a true, but neglected poetical genius.

UNIVERSITIES.] These are Coimbra, founded in 1291 by king [...]nis; and which had fifty professors; but it has been lately put under some new regulations. Evora, founded in 1559; and the col­ [...] of the nobles at Lisbon, where the young nobility are educated in every branch of polite learning and the sciences. All the books that did belong to the banished Jesuits are kept here, which compose a very large library. The English language is likewise taught in this college. Here is also a college where young gentlemen are educated in the [...]ince of engineering, and when qualified get commissions in that corps.

CURIOSITIES.] The lakes and fountains which have been already mentioned form the chief of these. The remains of some castles in the Moorish taste are still standing. The Roman bridge and aqueduct at Coimbra are almost entire, and deservedly admired. The walls of San­ [...]een are said to be of Roman work likewise. The church and [...]stery near Lisbon, where the kings of Portugal are buried, are in­expressibly magnificent, and several monasteries in Portugal are dug cut of the hard rock. The chapel of St. Roch, is probably one of the [...] and richest in the world; the paintings are mosaic work, so cu­riously wrought with stones of all colours, as to astonish the beholders. In these curiosities we may add, that the king is possessed of the largest diamond (which was found in Brasil) that perhaps ever was seen in the world.

CHIEF CITIES.] Lisbon is the Capital of Portugal, a great part of [...] was ruined by an earthquake, which also set the remainder on fire, [Page 344] upon All-Saints day, 1755. It still contains many magnificent palaces, churches, and public buildings. Its situation (rising from the Tagus in the form of a crescent) renders its appearance at once delightful and superb, and it is deservedly accounted the greatest port in Europe, next to London and Amsterdam. The harbour is spacious and secure, and the city itself is guarded from any sudden attack, towards the sea, by forts, though they would make but a poor defence against ships of war. All that part of the city that was demolished by the earthquake, is planned out in the most regular and commodious form. Some large squares, and many streets are already built. The streets form right an­gles, and are broad and spacious. The houses are lofty, elegant, and uniform; and being built of white stone, make a beautiful appearance. The second city in this kingdom is Oporto, which is computed to con­tain 40,000 inhabitants. The chief article of commerce in this city is wine; and the inhabitants of half the shops are coopers. The merchants assemble daily in the chief street, to transact business; and are protected from the sun by sail-cloths, hung across from the op­posite houses. About thirty English families reside here, who are chiefly concerned in the wine trade.

GOVERNMENT.] Towards the latter end of the last century, the diets, or meetings of the states, were discontinued, and the council of the three estates ( Junta dos tres estados) viz. the clergy, the nobility, and the cities, now substituted, in lieu of those assemblies, is composed only of such members as are nominated by the king himself. Since that time, the government of the kingdom of Portugal is absolutely monarchical; yet the political influence of the two first estates is still now and then perceived.

The fundamental laws of Portugal are: 1. The statutes of Alphon­sus, published at Lamego in 1143, consisting of 22 regulations relative to the royal succession, to the rights of jurisdiction, the independence of the kingdom, and the rights of the nobility. 2. The manifesto of the states, published in 1641, immediately after the revolution relat­ing to the order of succession.

The civil laws of Portugal are contained in the edicts of the kings; and where these are deficient, the Roman laws are consulted. In ec­clesiastical matters, the canon law in its full extent is adopted, and the power and authority of the pope is very great in this kingdom.

The chief departments of government are the following: The Council of State, the Council of War, the Aulic Council ( Disembarge do Pacedil;o) or Supreme Court of Justice, the Council of Finances, and the Royal Board of Censure ( Regia Mesa censoria.)

In the inferior courts of justice the judges are nominated by the king, or by the possessors of the large estates; in the superior courts, by the king exclusively. There are two courts of appeal at Lisbon and Oporto; from which appeal may be made in the last instance to the Aulic Council. The magistrates of the towns have likewise an in­ferior jurisdiction in matters of less importance. The proceedings in the courts of justice are slow and arbitrary; and the number of lawyers and law-officers is exceedingly great.

FINANCES.] The revenue of the crown is 1,800,000l. sterling; and arises from the customs and duties, from several internal taxes; from the mines of Brazil, of the produce of which one fifth belongs to the [Page 345] king, estimated at 350,000l. sterling; from other duties on the pro­duce of Brazil; from a tax on the rent of lands, which is to per cent. of the yearly income; from duties on imported goods, at 16 per cent. and duties of 5 per cent. on exported goods.

The public debts were estimated in 1774 at only 28 millions of cru­sades.

ARMY.] The army consists of 25,000 men. According to the es­tablishment of the year 1772. the army ought to consist of 35,998 men, viz. 38 regiments of foot, at 811 men each; and of 12 regiments of cav­alry, of 400 men each. The late Count of Lippe Buckeburg has made considerable improvements in the military discipline of Portugal.

Besides the regular army they have a country militia formed of pea­sant.

NAVY.] The navy consists of 24 ships, viz. 13 ships of the line and [...] frigates. Five ships of the line are stationed on the coast of Bra­zil. There are two regiments of marines and a corps of naval artillery.

RELIGION.] The state of religion in Portugal exactly resembles that of Spain; the intolerant bigotry of the established Roman Catho­lic religion is no less prejudicial to the Portuguese, than to the Spanish nation. There are several tribunals of Inquisition, viz. at Lisbon. Coimbra, Evora, and at Goa in the East-Indies. A great number of Jews are however in the country, who conform outwardly with the established religion: It is said that many of them are even among the clergy.

The Portuguese clergy consist of one Patriarch, a dignity granted to the church of Portugal in the year 1716, of three archbishops and 15 bishops; the number of ecclesiastical persons in the whole amounts to 200,000; 30,000 of which are monks and nuns: According to others there are 60,000 monks and nuns, and 745 convents. The proportion of clerical persons to that of laymen, is as 1 to 11. There are three spiritual orders of knighthood in Portugal, that of Avis, of Santiago, and of Christ; the last is by far the most opulent.

HISTORY.] Portugal was anciently called Lusitania, and inhabited by tribes of wandering people, till it became subject to the Carthagini­ans and Phoenicians, who were dispossessed by the Romans 250 years before Christ. In the fifth century it fell under the yoke of the Suevi and Vandals, who were driven out by the Goths of Spain, in the year 589; but when the Moors of Africa made themselves masters of the greatest part of Spain, in the beginning of the eighth century, they penetrated into Lusitania; there they established governors, who made themselves kings. After many fruitless attempts made by the kings of laon on this part of Spain, Alonzo V. king of Castile and Leon, car­ried here his victorious arms, and to insure his conquest, he gave it, in the year 1088, with the title of count. or earl, to Henry, grandson of Robert king of France, who had married Theresa, Alonzo's natural daughter. Henry was succeeded in his earldom by his son Alonzo, who, encouraged by his conquests over the Moors, in the year 1139 allowed the title of King of Portugal. His successors, continued till 1580, when, upon the death of Henry, surnamed the Cardinal, it was [...] upon by Philip II. king of Spain, after a war of two or three [Page 346] years; but in 1640, the people rebelled, shook off the Spanish Yoke, and elected for their king the duke of Braganza, who took the name of John IV. in whose family it has ever since remained independent of Spain. Her present Majesty's name is Mary Frances Isabella, who acceded to the throne in the year 1777. See Universal History.

ITALY.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 600 Miles. between Degrees. 38 and 47 north latitude.
Breadth 400 Miles. Degrees. 7 and 19 east longitude.

THE form of Italy, readers it very difficult to ascertain its extent and dimensions; for, according to some accounts, it is, from the fron­tiers, of Switzerland to the extremity of the kingdom of Naples, about 750 miles in length; and from the frontiers of the duchy of Savoy, [...] those of the dominions of the states of Venice, which is its greatest breadth, about 400 miles, though in some parts it is a scarcely 100.

BOUNDARIES.] Nature has fixed the boundaries of Italy; for to­wards the East it is bounded by the Gulph of Venice, or Adriatic sea; on the South and West by the Mediterranean sea, and on the North, by the lofty mountains of the Alps, which divide it from France and Switzerland.

The whole of the Italian dominions, comprehending Corsica, Sar­dinia, the Venetian and other islands, are divided and exhibited in the following table: [Page 347]

  Countries Names. Squ. Miles. Length. Breadth. Chief Cities.
Italy.        
To the king of Sardinia Piedmont 6619 140 98 Turin
Savoy 357 [...] 87 60 Chambery
Montserrat 446 40 2 [...] Cassal
Alessandrine 204 27 20 Alexandria
Oneglia 132 24 7 Oneglia
Sardinia Island 6600 135 57 Cagliari
To the king of Naples Naples [...]2,000 275 200 Naples
Sicily I. 9400 180 92 Palermo
To the Empe­ror Milan 5431 155 70 Milan
Mantua 700 47 27 Mantua
Mirandola 120 19 10 Mirandola
  Pope's dominions 14,348 [...]35 143 Rome N. lat.41 54
          E. lon.12 45
To their res­pective princes Tuscany 6640 115 94 Florence
Massa 82 16 11 Massa
Parma 1225 48 37 Parma
Modena 1560 65 39 Modena
Piombino 100 [...]2 18 Piombino
Monaco 24 12 4 Monaco
Republics Lucca 286 28 15 Lucca
St. Marino 8     St. Marino
Genoa 2400 160 25 Genoa
To France Corsica I. 2520 90 38 Bastia
To the repub­lic of Venice Venice 8434 175 95 Venice
Istria P. 1245 6 32 Capo d'Istria
Dalmatia P. 1400 135 20 Zara
Isles of Dalmatia 1364      
Islands in the Venetian do­minions. Cephalonia 428 40 18 Cephalonia
Corfu, or Corcyra 194 31 10 Corfu
Zant, or Zacynthus 120 23 12 Zant
St. Maura 56 12 7 St. Maura
Little Cephalonia 14 7 3  
Ithaca olim        
  Total [...]5,056      

[Page 348]

SUBDIVISIONS.The King of SARDINIA, possesses Piedmont, Savoy, Montserrat, [...] Island of Sardinia, part of the Milanese, and of Genoa.The subdivisions in these territories are,
  Subdivisions. Titles. Chief towns.
Piedmont. Piedmont Proper Turin, Pignerol, Carign [...]
Verceil Lordship Verceil
Masseran Principality Masseran
Ivrea Marquisate Ivrea
Asti County Asti
Susa Marquisate Susa
Saluzzo Marquisate Saluzzo, Coni
Vaudois Vallies Pragelas, or Cluson
Nice Territory Nice
Tende County Tende
Aouste County Aouste
Savoy. Savoy Proper Chambery, Montmelian
Geneva County Annacy
Chablais County Tonor, or Thonon
Tarantaise   Moustriers
Maurienne Valley St. John de Mauriene
Fossigny   Bonneville
Genoa Milanese Monts. Montserrat Duchy Casal, Albi, Aqui
Tortonese   Tortona
Alessandrine   Alexandria
Laumelin   Laumello
Oneglia Territory Oneglia
The dominions of the King of NAPLES.
Subdivisions. Chief towns.
Lavora Naples, Capua
  Gaeta
Ultra Princip. Benevento
Citra Princip. Salerno
Molise Bojano
Basilicata Cerenza
Citra Calabria Cosenza
Ult. Calabria Reggio
Ult. Abruzzo Aquila
Citra Abruzzo Chieti
Capitinate, or Manfredonia
Apulia Lucera
Bari Bari
Otranto Otranto
  Brundifi
  Tarenta
Island of Sicily Val de Mazara Palermo
Val de Demona Messina
Val de Noto Catania, Syracuse, Noto

[Page 349] LIPARI ISLANDS, North of Sicily. Lipari, Strombulo, Rotto, P [...]naria, Elicusa.

ISLANDS on the West Coast of Italy. Capri, Ischia, Ponaz, Pianosa, &c.

The House of AUSTRIA possesses the Milanese, the Mantua and Tuscany.

The subdivisions and chief towns in these territories are,

Subdivisions. Titles. Chief towns.
Milanese Milanese Proper Milan
Pavesan   Pavia
Navnaesc   Navara
Comas [...]o   Como
Lodesan   Lodi
Cremonese   Cremona
Tuscany Florentina   Florence
Siennese   Sienna
Pisa   Pisa, Leghorn, Piombino
Man­tuan Mantua Proper Mantua

In Tuscany is contained the republic of Lucca, and the principality of Massa Carara, subject to its own prince; also the coast del Persidii, of which the capital is Orbitello, subject to the king of Naples.

The Duke of PARMA (of the House of Bourbon) is Sovereign of the Duchies of

Parma Chief towns. Parma
Placentia Placentia
Guastalla Guastalla, Castiglione, Luzzara,

The subdivisions of the Genoese territories, with their chief towns, are,

Subdivisions. Chief towns.
Genoa, Proper Genoa
Savona, Territory Savona
Vado, Territory Vado
Noli, Territory Noli
Final, Territory Final
Albenga, Territory Albenga
Oneglia to Sardina Oneglia
St. Remo, Territory St. Remo
Ventimiglia, Teritory, Ventimiglia
Monaco, Principality Monaco
Rapallo, Territory Rapallo
Lavigna Lavigna
Spezia Spezia

The Duchy of MODENA is subject to its own Duke, and contains

Dutchies. Chief towns.
Modena Modena
Mirandola Mirandola
Rhegio Rhegio, Borsello, Carpi.

[Page 350] The Republic of VENICE is subdivided in the following manner [...]

Subdivisions. Chief towns.
Venice Venice
Paduan Padua
Veronese Verona
Bresciano Brescia
Cremafno Cremu
Bergamasco Bergamo
Vincentino Vincenza
Rovigno Rovigno
Trevegiano Treviso
Bellunese Belluno
Friuli Aquile [...]
Udinese Udia
Istria, part. Capo de Istria

The Patria [...]ate, or the dominions of the POPE, are subdivided than:

Subdivisions. Chief towns.
Compania of Rome Rome
Tivoli
Frescati
Ostia
Athano
St. Peter's Patrimony Viterbo
Civita Voechia
Bracciano
Castro
Orvietto
Aquapendente
Ora [...]in, or Spoletto Spoletto
Narni
Terni
Pe [...]ugia
Ancona, Marquis Ancona
Loret [...]
Urbino, Duchy Urbino
Pefaro
Semig [...]li [...]
Romania Rav [...]nna
Rimi [...]i
Bolognese Bologn [...]
Fer [...]arese Ferrara
Co [...]sia
Republic of St. Marino St. Marino

Island of Corsica, subject to the French.

Chief towns Bastia and Bonifacio.

Island of Malta, subject to the Knights. Chief town, Valett [...].

SOIL AND AIR.] The happy soil of Italy produces the comforts and luxuries of life in great abundance; each district has its peculiar excellency and commodity; wines, the most delicious fruits, and oil, are the most general productions. As much corn grows here as [...] the inhabitants; and were the ground properly cultivated, the Italians might export it to their neighbours. The Italian cheeses, particularly those called Parmesans, and their native silk, form a principal part of their commerce. There is here a great variety of air; and some parts of Italy bear melancholy proofs of the alterations that accidental causes make on the face of nature; for the Campagna di Roma, where the an­cient Romans enjoyed the most salubrious air of any place perhaps on the globe, is now almost pestilential, through the decrease of inhabit­ants, which has occasioned a stagnation of waters, and putrid exhala­tions. The air of the northern parts, which lie among the Alps, or in their neighbourhood, is keen and piercing, the ground being, in many places, covered with snow in winter. The Appennines, which are a ridge of mountains that longitudinally almost divide Italy, have great [Page 351] effects on its climate; the countries on the South being warm, those on the North mild and temperate. The sea-breezes refresh the kingdom of Naples so much, that no remarkable inconveniency of air is found there, notwithstanding its southern situation. In general, the air of Italy may be said to be dry and pure.

MOUNTAINS.] We have already mentioned the Alps and Appen­ [...], which form the chief mountains of Italy. The famous volcano of Mount Vesuvius lies in the neighbourhood of Naples.

RIVERS AND LAKES.] The rivers of Italy are the Po, the Var, the Ad [...]ge, the Trebbia, the Arno, and the Tiber, which runs through the city of Rome. The famous Rubicon forms the southern boundary [...]cen Italy and the ancient Cisalpine Gaul.

The lakes of Italy are, the Maggiore, Lugano, Como, Iseo, and Gar­ [...] in the North; the Perugia or Tharsimene, Bracciana, Terni, and C [...]la [...]o, in the middle.

[...], GULFS, OR BAYS, CAPES, PROMONTORIES, AND STRAITS.} Without a knowledge of these, neither the ancient Roman au­thors, nor the history nor geography of Italy, can be understood. The sons of Italy are, the gulfs of Venice, or the Adriatic sea; the [...] of Naples, Tuscany, and Genoa; the bays or harbours of Nice, [...] Franca, Oneglia, Final, Savona, Vado, Spe [...]ia, Luca, Pisa, Leg­h [...], Piombino, Civita, Vecchia, Gaeta, Naples, Salerno, Polic [...] stro­ [...]gio, Quilace, Tarento, Manfredonia, Ravenna, Venice, Trieste, Is­ [...], and Fiume; Cape Spartavento del Alice, Otranto, and Ancona [...] and the strait of Messina, between Italy and Sicily.

The gulfs and bays in the Italian islands are those of Fiorenzo, Bas­i [...], Taluda, Porto Novo, Cape Corso, Bonifacio, and Ferro, in Corsi­ [...] and the strait of Bonifacio, between Corsica and Sardinia. The [...] of Caligari and Oristagni; Cape de Sardis, Cavello, Monte Santo, and Polo, in Sardinia. The gulfs of Messina, Melazzo, Palermo, Ma­ [...]ra, Syracuse, and Satania: capes Furo, Melazzo, Orlando, Gallo, Trapano, Passaro, and Allessia, in Sicily; and the bays of Porto Fe­ [...]i [...], and Porto Longone, in the island of E [...]a.

METALS AND MINERALS.] Many places of Italy abound in miner­al springs; some hot, some warm, and many of sulphureous, chaly­ [...]e, and medicinal qualities. Many of its mountains abound in mines the produce great quantities of emeralds, jusper, aga [...]e, porphyry, la­p [...]l [...]ali, and other valuable stones. Beautiful marble of all kinds is one of the chief productions of Italy.

POPULATION AND CHARACTER.] Authors are greatly divided on [...] [...] of Italian population. This may be owing, in a great meas­ure, to the partiality which every Italian has for the honour of his own province. The king of Sardinia's subjects, according to Zimmermann. [...] to 3,170,000, viz. in the duchy of Piedmont 2,450,000, in the duchy of Savoy 300,000, in the kingdom of Sardinia 420,000. Na­ [...] has about 4,500,000 souls, and Sicily about 1,300,000. The city [...] itself, by the best accounts, contains 300,000, and the dutchy a proportionably populous. As to the other provinces of Italy, geo­graphers and travellers have paid very little attention to the numbers [...] that live in the country, and inform us by conjecture only, of [...] who inhabit the great cities. Some doubts have arisen [...] Italy is as populous now as it was in the time of Pliny, when [Page 352] it contained 14,000,000 of inhabitants. It is however believed that the present inhabitants exceed that number. The Campagna d [...] [...] ­ma, and some other of the most beautiful parts of Italy, are at present in a manner desolate; but we are to consider that the modern Italians are in a great measure free from the unremitting wars, not to mention the transmigration of colonies, which formerly, even down to the 16th of century, depopulated their country. Add to this, that the prin­ces and states of Italy now encourage agriculture and manufactures of all kinds, which undoubtedly promotes population; so that it may not perhaps be extravagant, if we assign to Italy 20,000,000 of inhabit­ants; but some calculations greatly exceed that number.

The national character of the Italians, lately been given by the Abb [...] Jagemann, member of the Florentine Academy of Agriculture, as fol­lows: "Considering the mildness of the climate, the uncommon fertili­ty of the soil, the situation of most towns and boroughs on hills, the excellent spring water from the Alps and the Appennines, the number of mineral waters and baths, the spaciousness of the streets and houses, the delightful views, the frequent residence of the Italians on their villas, the fragrancy and healthiness of the air, the temperate diet, the facility of getting cured of deseases in the hospitals, one is inclined to think that the corporeal frame of an Italian, if not enervated in early youth, cannot but be strong, healthy and beautiful. The handsomest persons of either sex, are found in Tuscany. The Italians, in general are also endowed with good sense, and discernment; apt to despise mere theoretical speculations, and to judge by their own feelings and experience: But education is rather neglected. The chief part of their religion consists in an external observance and practice of eccle­siastical rites, ceremonies, and injunctions. An Italian, not enlighten­ed by reflection and experience, will sooner commit adultery than eat any flesh-meat on a Friday; but a foreigner, who wishes to pass for us Roman catholic, needs only to stick to his window an attestation, by a physician, that his state of health requires a flesh-meat diet; and [...] may, without any risk, eat flesh-meat in Lent. Such attestations may be purchased in coffee-houses, at Florence. The Italians are very sensual; exceedingly fond of music; little addicted to drunkenness and coarse jokes; impatient of delay in their passion for the fair sex; jeal­ous of the French, but fond of the national characters of the English and the Germans. They still breathe their ancient spirit of liberty and republicanism, and are averse to monarchical government, to which they were subjected by force. Hence a true-born Italian, of an inde­pendent fortune, seldom courts public employments; hence their best geniuses too are little known; hence also their almost general incli­nation to sa [...]ire, and the bitterness of their satires. Hence their gene­ral hatred and contempt for the military service, and for the ministers and executors of criminal jurisdiction. Their dress and their whole conduct, prove their fondness of liberty and ease, and their aversion to constraint, ceremony and compliments. As so great a variety of en­joyments and conveniences are, for an Italian, so many necessaries of life, he must be a rigid economist; but those most famous for their economical management, are the Florentines and the Gonoese. Hence their habitual custom of entering into the most minute details and cal­culations, and of strictly adhering to rules. Hence their peculiar tal­ents [Page 353] and skill for commerce, trade, political economy, finances, their avidity for gain, and their envy at the prosperity of other people.—Their resentment lasts only till they have produced a satisfaction ade­quate to a wrong sustained; they are less irascible than many other nations: But when grossly injured in their character or fortunes, they are capable of every excess. Of assassinations, however, Abbe [...]ge [...]an recollects only three instances in Tuscany, in fifteen years. From their mutual distrust, an Italian indeed seldom becomes an inti­mate friend to another Italian; but then their friendship proves the mo [...]e cordial and lasting. No nation is more compassionate to the dis­tressed, or more ready to serve strangers; yet letters of recommenda­tion [...]ght not to be neglected by travellers."

RELIGION.] The religion of the Italians is Roman Catholic. The inquisition here is little more than a sound; and persons of all religions five unmolested in Italy, provided no gross insult is offered to their worship. The ecclesiastical government of the papacy has employed many volumes in describing it. The cardinals, who are next in digni­ty to his holiness, are seventy: But that number is seldom or never complete: They are appointed by the pope, who takes care to have a [...]ority of Italian cardinals, that the chair may not be removed from [...], as it was once to Avignon in France, the then pope being a Frenchman. In promoting foreign prelates to the cardinalship, the pope regulates himself according to the nomination of the princes who p [...]sess that religion. His chief minister is the cardinal patron, gene­rally his nephew, or near relation, who improves the time of the pope's [...] by amassing what he can. When met in a consistory, the car­dinals pretend to control the pope, in matters both spiritual and tem­poral, and have been sometimes known to prevail. The reign of a [...] is seldom of long duration, being generally old men at the time of their election. The conclave is a scene where the cardinals princi­pally endeavour to display their parts, and where many transactions [...], which hardly shew their inspiration to be from the Holy Ghost. [...]ing the election of a pope in 1721, the animosities ran so high, that they came to blows with both their hands and feet, and threw the [...]ndishes at each other. We shall here give an extract from the [...] of pope Pius IV. 1560, before his elevation to the chair, which [...]ains the principal points wherein the church of Rome differs from the protestant churches. After declaring his belief in one God, and [...] heads wherein Christians in general are agreed, he proceeds as follows:

I most firmly admit and embrace the apostolical and ecclesiastical [...]tions, and all other constitutions of the church of Rome.

I do admit the holy scriptures in the same sense that holy mother­ [...]ch doth, whose business it is to judge of the true sense and inter­ [...]tation of them; and I will interpret them according to the unani­ [...] consent of the fathers.

I do profess and believe that there are seven sacraments of the [...] truly and properly so called, instituted by Jesus Christ our Lord, [...] necessary to the salvation of mankind, though not all of them to [...] one; namely, baptism, confirmation, eucharist, penance, ex­ [...]ction, orders and marriage, and that they do confer grace; and [...] of these, baptism, confirmation, and orders, may not be repeated [Page 354] without sacrilege. I do also receive and admit, the received and approved rites of the catholic church in her solemn administration of the abovesaid sacraments.

I do embrace and receive all and every thing that hath been de­fined and declared by the holy council of Trent * concerning original fin and justification.

I do also profess that in the mass there is offered unto God [...] true, proper and propitiatory sacrifice for the quick and the dead; and that in the most holy sacrament of the [...]ucharist there is truly, really and substantially, the body and blood, together with the soul and divinity, of our Lord Jesus Christ; and that there is a conversion made of the whole substance of the bread into the body, and of the whole substance of the wine into the blood; which conversion the catholic church calls Transubstantiation. I confess that under one kind only, whole and entire, Christ and a true sacrament is taken and received.

I do firmly believe that there is a purgatory; and that the souls kept prisoners there do receive help by the suffrages of the faithful.

I do likewise believe that the saints reigning together with Christ, are to be worshipped and prayed unto; and that they do offer prayers unto God for us, and that their relics are to be had in veneration.

I do most firmly assert, that the images of Christ, of the blessed Vir­gin the mother of God, and of other saints, ought to be had and re­tained, and that due honour and veneration ought to be given unto them.

I do likewise affirm, that the power of indulgencies was left by Christ to the church, and that the use of them is very beneficial to christian people.

I do acknowledge the holy catholic, and apostolical Roman church to be the mother and mistress of all churches; and I do promise and swear true obedience to the bishop of Rome, the successor of St. Peter, the prince of the apostles, and vicar of Jesus Christ.

I do undoubtedly receive and profess all other things which have been delivered, defined and declared by the sacred canons, and oe [...] ­nical councils, and especially by the holy synod of Trent. And all other things contrary thereto, and all heresies condemned, rejected, and anathematised by the church, I do likewise condemn, reject and anathematise.

The established religion is not quite so intolerant in the king­dom of Sardinia, as in some other states: The wisdom of gov­ernment has greatly limited the power of the Pope and of the inquisi­tion. A stop is likewise put to the persecutions of the harmless Pro­testants, in the vallies of Lucern, Peyrouse, and St. Martin, formerly so famous, by the name of Vaudois, on account of their sufferings and firm adherence to the cause of truth: Their number amounts to about 20,000. The very numerous clergy in this kingdom are not rich. The church is governed by five archbishops and 26 bishops: The whole number of clerical persons, including monks and nuns, is said to amount to 350,000; but this statement, probably, is too large. They [Page 355] are obliged to pay the same taxes with the laity, besides other burthens which the king has it in his power to impose on them. The clergy are indeed entirely dependent on the king, and subject to the secular ju­risdiction: The church preferments are all in the gift of the king.

The inhabitants of Naples and Sicily are bigotted Roman Catholics, and more zealous than those of Rome. There is, however, no inquisition established in the country. The power of the Pope in these kingdoms is not great. In Naples, some prebends are in his gift; but in Sicily, all church preferment is in the gift of the king. The clergy are very numerous; and so rich, that not less than one half of the riches of the [...]ntry are in the possession of the church. There are, in Naples, 20 archbishops and 107 bishops: In Sicily, three archbishops and eight bishops. In the year 1782, there were in Naples alone 45,525 priests, 24,694 monks, 20,793 nuns. In 1783, government resolved to dis­solve 466 convents of nuns, and the beginning has been actually made to carry this resolution into execution.

LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN, PAINTERS, [...]ATUARIES, ARCHITECTS, AND ARTISTS.} Since the revival of learning, some Ital­ians have shone in controversial learning, but they are chiefly celebrat­ed by those of their own persuasion. The mathematics and natural philosophy owe much to Galileo, Toricelli, Malpighi, Borelli, and sev­eral other Italians. Strada is an excellent historian; and the history of the council of Trent, by the celebrated father Paul, is a standard work. Machiavel is equally famous as an historian and as a political writer. Among the prose writers in the Italian language, Boccace has been thought one of the most pure and correct in point of style: He was a very natural painter of life and manners, but his productions are [...] licentious. Petrarch, who wrote both in Latin and Italian, reviv­ed among the moderns the spirit and genius of ancient literature: But among the Italian poets, Dante, Ariosto, and Tasso, are the most dis­tinguished. Metastasio has acquired a great reputation by writing dra­matic pieces set to music. Socinus, who was so much distinguished by the opposition to the doctrine of the Trinity, was a native of Italy.

The Italian painters, sculptors, architects, and musicians, are unri­valled, not only in their numbers, but their excellencies. The revival of learning, after the sack of Constantinople by the Turks, revived taste likewise, and gave mankind a relish for truth and beauty in design and colouring. Raphael, from his own ideas, assisted by the ancients, struck out a new creation with his pencil, and still stands at the head of the art of painting. Michael Angelo Buonaroti united in his own person painting, sculpture, and architecture. The colouring of Titian, has perhaps never yet been equalled. Bramante, Bernini, and many other Italians, carried sculpture and architecture to an amazing height. Julio Romano, Correggio, Caraccio, Veronese, and others, are, as painters, unequalled in their several manners. The same may be said of Corelli, and other Italians, in music. At present, Italy cannot justly boast of any remarkable genius in the fine arts.

UNIVERSITIES.] Those of Italy are, Rome, Venice, Florence, Mantua, Padua, Parma, Verona, Milan, Pavia, Bologna, Perusia, Fer­ [...]a, Pisa, which has 46 Professors, Naples, Salerno, Palermo, Catania; the four last are in Naples and Sicily.

[Page 356] ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} Italy is the native country of all that is stupendous, great or beautiful, either in ancient or modern times. A library might be filled by descriptions and delineations of all that is rare and curious in arts; nor do the bounds of this work admit of enlarging upon this subjects. We can give but a very brief account of those objects that are most dis­tinguished either for antiquity or excellence.

The amphitheatres claim the first rank, as a species of the most stri [...] ­ing magnificence: There are at Rome considerable remains of that which was erected by Vespasian, and finished by Domitian, called [...] Colisseo. Twelve thousand Jewish captives were employed by Ves­pasian in this building; and it is said to have been capable of contain­ing eighty seven thousand spectators seated, and twenty thousand stand­ing. The architecture of this amphitheatre is perfectly light, and its proportions are so just, that it does not appear near so large as it really is. But it has been stripped of all its magnificent pillars and ornaments, at various times and by various enemies. The amphitheatre of Verona, erect­ed by the consul Flaminius, is thought to be the most entire of any in Italy. There are forty-five rows of steps carried all round, formed of fine blocks of marble about a foot and a half high each, and above two feet broad. Twenty-two thousand persons may be seated here at their case, allowing one foot and a half for each person. This amphithea­tre is quite perfect, and has been lately repaired with the greatest care, at the expense of the inhabitants. They frequently give public spec­tacles in it, such as horse races, combats of wild beasts, &c. The ruins of theatres and amphitheatres are also visible in other places. The triumphal arches of Vespasian, Septimius Severus, and Constantine the Great, are still standing, though decayed. The ruins of the baths, palaces, and temples, answer all the ideas we can form of the Roman grandeur. The Pantheon, which is at present converted into a mod­ern church, and which from its circular figure is commonly called the Rotunda, is more entire than any other Roman temple which is now remaining. There are still left several of the niches which anciently contained the statues of the heathen deities. The outside of the build­ing is of Tivoli free-stone, and within it is incrusted with marble. The roof of the Pantheon is a round dome, without pillars, the diameter of which is a hundred and forty-four feet; and though it has no win­dows, but only a round aperture in the centre of this dome, it is very light in every part. The pavement consists of large square stones [...] porphyry, sloping round towards the centre, where the rain water, fall­ing down through the aperture on the top of the dome, is conveyed away by a proper drain covered with a stone full of holes. The cal­onnade in the front, which consists of sixteen columns of granite, thirty-seven feet high, exclusive of the pedestals and capitals, each cut out of a single block, and which are of the Corinthian order, can hardly be viewed without astonishment. The entrance of the church is adorn­ed with columns forty-eight feet high, and the architrave is formed of a single piece of granite. On the left hand, on entering the portico, is a large antique vase of Numidian marble; and in the area before the church is a fountain, with an antique bason of porphyry. The pillars of Trajan and Antonine, the former 175 feet high, and the latter cov­ered with instructive sculptures, are still remaining. A traveller for­gets [Page 357] the devastations of the northern barbarians, when he sees the ros­t [...]ated column erected by D [...]illius, in commemoration of the first naval victory which the Romans gained over the Carthaginians; the statue of the wolf giving suck to Romulus and Remus, with visible marks of the stroke of lightning mentioned by Cicero; the very original brass p [...]es containing the laws of the twelve tables; and a thousand other [...]entical antiquities, some of them transmitted unhurt to the present [...]; not to mention medals and the infinite variety of seals and en­graved stones which abound in the cabinets of the curious. Many p [...]ces, all over Italy, are furnished with busts and statues fabricated in the times of the republic and the higher empire.

The Appian, Flaminian, and AEmilian roads, the first 200 miles, the second 130, and the third 50 miles in length, are in many places still entire; and magnificent ruins of villas, reservoirs, bridges, and the like, present themselves all over the country of Italy.

The subterraneous constructions of Italy are as stupendous as those above ground; witness the cloacae, and the catacombs, or repositories [...] dead bodies, in the neighbourhood of Rome and Naples. It is not above 30 years since, a painter's apprentice discovered the ancient city of Paestum or Posidonia, in the kingdom of Naples, still standing; for so indifferent are the country people of Italy about objects of an­tiquity, that it was a new discovery to the learned. An inexhaustible [...]ne of curiosities are daily dug out of the ruins of Herculaneum, a city lying between Naples and Vesuvius, which in the reign of Nero [...] almost destroyed by an earthquake, and afterwards, in the first [...] of the reign of Titus, overwhelmed by a stream of the lava of Ve­suvius. The melted lava in its course filled up the streets and houses in some places to the height of sixty-eight feet above the tops of the lat­ter, and in others one hundred and ten feet. The lava is now of a con­sistency which renders it extremely difficult to be removed or cleared away: It is composed of bituminous particles, mixed with cinders, minerals, metallics, and vitrified sandy substances, which all together [...] a close and heavy mass. In the year 1713, upon digging into these parts, somewhat of this unfortunate city was discovered, and ma­ny antiquities were dug out; but the search was afterwards discontin­ued, till the year 1736, when the king of Naples employed men to dig perpendicularly eighty feet deep, whereupon not only the city made [...] appearance, but also the bed of the river which ran through it. The temple of Jupiter was then brought to light, and the whole of the theatre. In the temple was found a statue of gold, and the inscrip­tion that decorated the great doors of entrance. In the theatre the fragments of a gilt chariot of bronze, with horses of the same metal, likewise gilt: This had been placed over the principal door of en­trance. They likewise sound among the ruins of this city multitudes of statues, bustos, pillars, paintings, manuscripts, furniture, and various [...], and the search is still continued. The streets of the town appear [...]here been quite straight and regular, and the houses well built and much [...]; some of the rooms paved with mosaic, others with fine marbles, [...] again with bricks, three feet long and six inches thick. It ap­ [...] that the town was not filled up so unexpectedly with the melted [...] to prevent the greatest part of the inhabitants from escaping [...] of their richest effects; for when the excavations were [...] there were not more than a dozen skeletons found, and but lit­ [...] gold, silver, or precious stones.

[Page 358] The town of Pompeia was destroyed by the same eruption of mount▪ Vesuvius, which occasioned the destruction of Herculaneum; but it was not discovered till near forty years after the discovery of Hercula­ncum. One street, and a few detached buildings of this town, have been cleared: The street is well paved with the same kind of stone of which the ancient roads are made, and narrow causeways are raised a foot and a half on each side for the conveniency of foot passengers.—The street is narrow, and is supposed to have been inhabited by trades people. The traces of wheels of carriages are to be seen on the pave­ment. The houses are small, but give an idea of neatness and conve­niency. The best paintings, hitherto found at Pompeia, are those found in the temple of the goddess Isis; they have been cut out of the walls; and removed to Portici. Few skeletons were found in the streets of this town, but a considerable number in the houses. *

With regard to modern curiosities in Italy, they are as bewildering as the remains of antiquity. Rome itself contains 300 churches, filled with all that is rare in architecture, painting and sculpture. Each ci­ty and town of Italy contains a proportionable number. The church of St. Peter, at Rome, is the most astonishing, bold and regular fabric, that ever perhaps existed; and when examined by the rules of art, it may be termed faultless. The house and chapel of Loretto is rich beyond imagination, notwithstanding the ridiculous romance that com­poses its history.

The natural curiosities of Italy, though remarkable, are not so nu­merous as its artificial. Mount Vesuvius, which is five Italian miles dis­tant from the city of Naples, and Mount AEtna, in Sicily, are remarkable for emitting fire from their tops. The declivity of Mount Vesuvius towards the sea, is every where planted with vines and fruit trees, and it is equally fertile towards the bottom. The circumjacent plain af­fords a delightful prospect, and the air is clear and wholesome. The South and West sides of the mountain form very different views, being like the top, covered with black cinders and stones. The height of Mount Vesuvius has been computed to be 3900 feet above the surface of the sea. It hath been a volcano, beyond the reach of history or tra­dition. An animated description of its ravages in the year 79, is given by the younger Pliny, who was a witness to what he wrote. From that time to the year 1631, its eruptions were but small and moderate, however, then it broke out with accumulated fury, and desolated several miles a­round. In 169 [...] was a great eruption, which continued near a month, when burning matter was thrown out with so much force, that some of it fell at thirty miles distance, and a vast quantity of melted minerals, mixed with other matter, ran down like a river for three miles, carry­ing every thing before it which lay in its way. In 1707, when there was another eruption, such quantities of cinders and ashes were thrown [Page 359] out, that it was dark at Naples at noonday. In 1767, a violent erup­tion happened, which is reckoned to be the 27th from that which de­stroyed Herculaneum in the time of Titus. In this last eruption, the ashes, or rather small cinders, showered down so fast at Naples, that the people in the streets were obliged to use umbrellas, or adopt some other expedient, to guard themselves against them. The tops of the houses, and the balconies, were covered with these cinders, and ships at sea, twenty leagues from Naples, were covered with them to the great astonishment of the sailors. An eruption happened also in 1766, and another in 1779, which has been particularly described by Sir William Hamilton, in the Philosophical Transactions. It has been ob­served by a modern traveller, that though Mount Vesuvius often fills the neighbouring country with terror, yet as few things in nature are so absolutely noxious as not to produce some good; even this raging volcano, by its sulphureous and nitrous manure, and the heat of its sub­ [...]raneous fires, contributes not a little to the uncommon fertility of the country about it, and to the profusion of fruits and herbage with which it is every where covered. Besides, it is supposed that open and active, the mountain is less hostile to Naples, than it would be, if its eruptions were to cease, and its struggles confined to its own bowels, for then might ensue the most fatal shocks to the unstable foundation of the whole district of [...]erra di Lavora. *

Mount AEtna is 10,9 [...]4 feet in height, and has been computed to be so miles in circumference. It stands separate from all other mountains, its figure is circular, and it terminates in a cone. The lower parts of it are very fruitful in corn and sugar canes; the middle abounds with woods, olive trees, and vines; and the upper part is almost the whole year covered with snow. Its fiery [...]ruptions have always rendered it famous: In one of these, which happened in 1669, fourteen towns and villages were destroyed, and there have been several terrible eruptions since that time. There is generally an earthquake before any great eruption. In 1693, the port town of Catania was overturned, and 18,000 people perished.

Between the lakes Agnano and Pozzuoli, there is a valley called Sol­ [...]tara, because vast quantities of sulphur are continually forced out of the clifts by subterranean fires. The grotto del Cane is remarkable for its poisonous steams, and is so called from their killing dogs that enter it, if forced to remain there. Scorpions, vipers, and serpents are said to be common in Apulia.

Among the natural curiosities of Italy, those vast bodies of snow and ice, which are called the Glaciers of Savoy, deserve to be particularly mentioned. There are five glaciers, which extend almost to the plain of the vale of Chomouny, and are separated by wild forests, corn fie [...]s, and rich meadows; so that immense tracts of ice are blended with [...] highest cultivation, and perpetually succeed to each other, in the most [Page 360] singular and striking vicissitude. All these several vallies of ice, which lie chiefly in the hollows of the mountains, and are some leagues in length, unite together at the foot of Mont Blanc; the highest moun­tain in Europe, and probably of the ancient world. Account­ing to the calculations of Mr. de Luc, the height of [...] mountain, above the level of the sea, is 15,303 English [...] ▪ "I am convinced," says Mr. Coxe, "from the situation of Mont Blanc, from the heights of the mountains around it, from its superior elevation above them, and its being seen at a great dis [...]ed from all sides, that it is higher than any mountain in Switzerland; which, beyond a doubt, is, next to Mont Blanc, the highest ground in Europe."

STATES OF ITALY, CONSTITU­TION AND CHIEF CITIES.} Thus far, of Italy in general; but as the Italian States are not, like the republics of Holland or Switzerland, or the empire of Germany, cemented by a political confederacy, to which every member i [...] ac­countable, for every Italian state has distinct forms of government, trade and interests, we shall be obliged to take a separate view of each to assist the reader in forming an idea of the whole.

The duke of Savoy, or, as he is now styled, king of Sardinia; taking his royal title from that island, is a powerful prince in Italy, of which he is called the Janus, or keeper, against the French. His capital, Turin, is strongly fortified, and one of the finest cities in Europe;—containing 84,000 inhabitants.

Of the dominions of his Sardinian majesty, the dutchy of Savoy alone is not fertile. The island of Sardinia, and the provinces of Pi­edmont and Montferrat, abound in corn, wine, oil, oranges, lemons, almonds, figs, maize, rice, hemp, and flax. Sardinia has large flocks of sheep; the number of sheep is said to amount to 1,600,000: It is remarkable, that in this island there subsists still a species of wild sheep, called the muston. The fisheries on the coast of Sardinia pro­duce, even in the worst years, upwards of 60,000 scudi, in the article of tunny-fish, and a considerable sum for black fish (sepia [...]in [...];) and anchovies, besides other species of fish. Some mines in this island produce iron, and a small quantity of silver: Salt, sufficient for the consumption of the country, is made of sea-water: There are like­wise quarries of marble, alabaster, and other valuable stones. Savoy is celebrated on account of its breed of mules, many of which are sent abroad. Piedmont raises large quantities of the finest silk; single peasants often raise 100lb. each every year. Upwards of 100,000lb. are required to supply the silk manufactures at Turin, where there are about 600 looms for silk stockings. In the village of Torre, in Pied­mont, upwards of 50,000lb. of silk are spun. About 300,000lb, of raw and spun silk are annually sent to Switzerland: The whole pro­duce of raw silk in the Sardinian dominions, is estimated at 650,000lb. Piedmont has woollen manufactures, which supply the cloathing of the army. There is a manufacture of ropes and tackle in this province, a large quantity of which articles is exported from Nizza to Marse [...]les, Toulon and Genoa. Of the Piedmontese wines, a considerable quan­tity is exported to Genoa and Milan, and several delicate spirituous liquors are distilled, known by the name of ros [...]oli. The imports of [Page 361] the Sardinian provinces, which are nearly the same with those of the [...] of Italy, consist in hardware, metals, cotton, woollen, and silk [...], linen, leather, whalebone, train oil, herrings, cod, tar, pitch, [...]i [...]ber porcelaine, &c. The goods imported from England into Italy amount annually to about 513,000l. sterl. and England takes in re­ [...] for 687,155l. sterling, which leaves a considerable balance in fa­vour of Italy. Trade is much discouraged in Italy by the heavy duties [...]posed on it; and in the islands of Sardinia and Sicily it is still more stagnating. A great fair is kept every year at Alessandria.

The government in the Sardinian states is absolutely monarchical. In the island of Sardinia, however, the states assemble; but merely to grant free gifts or subsidies to the king, in whose hands the whole legis­lative, as well as executive power, is vested. As the provinces which compose this kingdom have been united under the same government at different periods of time, and had formed independent states before, [...] of them has its peculiar laws and customs, which were suffered to continue in force as far as they did not militate against the king's ed­i [...]. Among the state departments, the council of state is the highest. Sardinia forms a separate government, under a viceroy. Justice is a [...]istred by a number of inferior and territorial courts, in which for proprietors of large estates appoint the judges: The judges of the superior courts are appointed by the king: From these courts appeal [...] to several courts of appeal, the highest of which is il supremo real [...], at Turin.

The revenne of the king amounts to 1,000,000 sterling nearly. The royal revenues are raised from the crown domains, from the customs, the mint, the posts, land-tax, salt-duty, stamps, a monopoly of tobacco, and a lottery of that sort called Lotto di Genoa. All matters of financ­e are under the direction of a minister, or intendant-general of fi­nances.

The army of his Sardinian majesty, in time of peace, consists of 11,000 men, and in time of war, of upwards of 30,000.

The provinces of Savoy and Piedmont are, by their situation, the [...] to Italy; and they are of the greatest consequence in wars between the house of Austria and France. Both these powers have, therefore, always courted the alliance of the princes possessed of these provinces; and the latter have wisely availed themselves of this favourable situa­tion, to increase their own power, by joining with either of the two, [...] it best suited their views. At present the king of Sardinia is the most powerful prince in Italy. Under the present reign, which is dis­tinguished by its wisdom and activity, the state is in a rising and pros­ [...] condition. Its revenue is increasing, and its progress in opu­lence would be rapid, if it were not for the great impediments thrown into the way of commerce. The sciences are likewise in a flourishing [...]. Turin has a university, a society of sciences, and fine libraries, and collections of paintings and statues. Two other universities are established at Cagliari and Sassari: The other institutions of education [...] greatly improving, in consequence of a regulation enjoining [...]asters to undergo a strict examination at the university, before they are permitted to give instructions.

The Milanese, belonging to the house of Austria, is a most formida­ [...] state, and formerly gave law to all Italy, when under the govern­ment [Page 362] of its own dukes. The fertility and beauty of the country are almost incredible. Milan, the capital, and its citadel, is very strong, and furnished with a magnificent cathedral in the Gothic taste, which contains a very rich treasury, consisting chiefly of ecclesiastical fur­niture, composed of gold, silver, and precious stones. The revenue of the duchy is above 300,000l. annually, which is supposed to maintain an army of 30,000 men. The natives are fond of literary and political assemblies, where they converse on almost all subjects. With all its natural and acquired advantages, the natives of Milan make but few exports; so that its revenue, unless the court of Vienna should pur­sue some other system of improvement, cannot be much bettered. The duchy of Mantua, being now incorporated with it, the province is to take the name of Austrian Lombardy.

The republic of Genoa is vastly degenerated from its ancient power and opulence, though the spirit of trade still continues among its no­bility and citizens. Genoa is a most superb city, and contains some very magnificent palaces, particularly those of Doria * and Duraz [...]o. The inhabitants of distinction dress in black, in a plain, if not an un­couth manner. Their chief manufactures are velvets, damasks, gold and silver tissues, and paper. The city of Genoa contains above 150,000 inhabitants (but some writers greatly diminish that number) among whom are many rich trading individuals. Its maritime power is dwind [...]ed down to six gallies. The chief safety of this republic con­sists in the jealousy of other European powers, because to any one of them it would be a most valuable acquisition. The common people are wretched beyond expression. The soil of its territory is poor.—Near the sea some parts are tolerably well cultivated. The govern­ment of Genoa is aristocratical, being vested in the nobility: The chief person is called the Doge, or Duke; to which dignity no person is promoted till he is fifty years of age. Every two years a new Doge is chosen, and the former is incapable, during five years, of holding the same post again. The doge gives audience to ambassadors, all orders of government are issued in his name, and he is allowed a body guard of two hundred Germans.

Venice is one of the most celebrated republics in the world, on ac­count both of its constitution and former power. It is composed of several fine provinces on the continent of Italy, some islands in the Adriatic, and part of Dalmatia. The city of Venice is feated on 7 [...] islands at the bottom of the north end of the Adriatic sea, and is sep­arated from the continent by a marshy lake of five Italian miles in breadth, too shallow for large ships to navigate, which forms its prin­cipal strength. Venice preserves the vestiges of its ancient magnifi­cence, but is in every respect degenerated, except in the passion which its inhabitants still retain for music and mummery during their carni­vals. They seem to have lost their ancient taste for painting and ar­chitecture, and to be returning to Gothicism. Lately▪ however, they have had some spirited differences with the court of Rome, and seem to be disposed to throw off their obedience to its head.

[Page 363] The constitution of the republic was originally democratical, the magistrates being chosen by a general assembly of the people, and so continued for one hundred and fifty years; but various changes after­wards took place; doges▪ or dukes, were appointed, who were invest­ed with great power, which they often grossly abused, and some of them were assassinated by the people. By degrees a body of hered­itary legislative nobility was formed, continued and progressive encroachments were made on the rights of the people, and a complete aristocracy was at length established upon the ruins of the ancient popular government. The nobility are divided into six classes, amount­ing in the whole to 2500, each of whom, when twenty-five years of age, has a right to be a member of the grand council. These elect a doge or chief magistrate, in a peculiar manner by ballot, which is man­aged by gold and silver balls. The doge is invested with great state and with emblems of supreme authority, but has very little power, and is not permitted to stir from the city without the permission of the grand council. The government and laws are managed by different councils of the nobles.

The college, otherwise called the seignoty, is the supreme cabinet council of the state, and also the representative of the republic. This court gives audience, and delivers answers, in the name of the repub­lic, to foreign ambassadors, to the deputies of towns and provinces, and to the generals of the army. It also receives all requests and me­ [...]orial [...] on state affairs, summons the senate at pleasure, and arranges the business to be discussed in that assembly. The council of ten takes [...]izance of state crimes, and has the power of seizing accused per­sons, examining them in prison, and taking their answers in writing, with the evidence against them. But the tribunal of state inquisitors, which consists only of three members, and which is in the highest de­gree despotic in its manner of proceeding, has the power of deciding without appeal, on the lives of every citizen belonging to the Ve­netian state; the highest of the nobility, even the doge himself, not being excepted. To these three inquisitors is given the right of em­ploying spies, considering secret intelligence, issuing orders to seize all persons whose words or actions they think reprehensible, and after­wards trying them, and ordering them to be executed, when they think proper. They have keys to every apartment of the ducal palace, and can, whenever they please, penetrate into the very bed-chamber of the doge, open his cabinet, and examine his papers; and of course, they may command access to the house of every individual in the state.

They continue in office only one year, but are not responsible after­wards for their conduct whilst they are in authority. So much dis­trust and jealousy are displayed by this government, that the noble Venetians are afraid of having any intercourse with foreign ambassa­dors, or with foreigners of any kind, and are even cautious of visiting at each other's houses.

All the orders of Venetian nobility are dressed in black gowns, large wigs, and caps which they bold in their hands. The ceremony of the Doge's marrying the Adriatic once a year, by dropping into it a ring, from his bucentaur or state-barge, attended by those of all the nobility, is the most superb exhibition in Venice, but not comparable for magnifi­cence to a lord mayor's shew in London. The inhabitants of Venice are [Page 364] said to amount to 200,000. The grandeur and convenience of the city, particularly the public palaces, the treasury, and the arsenal, are beyond expression. Over the several canals of Venice, are laid near 500 bridg­es, the greatest part of which are stone. The Venetians still have some manufacturer, in scarlet cloth, gold and silver stuffs, and above all, fine looking glasses, all which bring in a considerable revenue [...] the owners; that of the state annually is said to amount to 8,000,000 of Italian ducats, each valued at twenty pence of English money. Out of this are defrayed the expenses of the state and the pay of the army, which in the time of peace consists of 16,000 regular troops (always com­manded by a foreign general) and 10,000 militia. They keep up a small fleet for curbing the infolencies of the piratical states of Barbury, and they have among them some orders of knighthood, the chief of which are those of the Stolo doro, so called from the Robe they wear, which is conferred only on the first quality, and the military order of St. Mark.

In ecclesiastical matters the Venetians have two patriarchs; the au­thority of one reaches over all the provinces, but neither of them have much power: And both of them are chosen by the senate; and all religious sects, even the Mahometan and Pagan, excepting Protes­tants, are here tolerated in the free exercise of their religion.

The Venetians are a lively, ingenious people, extravagantly fond of public amusements, with an uncommon relish for humour. They are in general tall and well made; and many fine, manly countenance [...] are met with in the streets of Venice, resembling those transmitted to us by the pencils of Paul Veronese and Titian. The women are of a fine style of countenance, with expressive features, and are of an easy address. The common people are remarkably sober, obliging to stran­gers, and gentle in their intercourse with each other. As it is very much the custom to go about in masks at Venice, and great liberties are taken during the time of the carnival, an idea has prevailed, that there is much more licentiousness of manners here than in other places; but this opinion seems to have been carried too far. Great numbers of strangers visit Venice during the time of the carnival, and there are eight or nine theatres here, including the opera-houses.

The dominions of Venice consist of a considerable part of Dalmatia, of four towns in Greece, and of the islands of Corfu, Pachfu, Antipach, su, Santa, Maura, Curzolari, Val di Compare, Cephalonia and Zant [...]. The Venetian territories in Italy contain the duchy of Venice, the P [...] ­duanese, the peninsula of Romo, Cremasco, and the Marca Trevigian [...], with part of the country of Friuli. The subjects of the Venetian re­public are not oppressed: The senate has found that mild treatment, and good usuage are the best policy, and more effectual than armies, in preventing revolts.

The principal city of Tuscany is Florence, which is now possessed by a younger branch of the house of Austria, after being long held by the illustrious house of Medicis, who made their capital the cabinet of all that is valuable, rich, and masterly in architecture, literature, and the arts, especially those of painting and sculpture. It is thought to con­tain above 70,000 inhabitants. The beauties and riches of the grand duke's palaces have been often described; but all description falls short of their contents, so that in every respect it is reckoned, after Rome, the [Page 365] second city in Italy. The celebrated Venus of Medici, which, on the those, is thought to be the standard of taste in female beauty and pro­portion, stands in a room called the Tribunal. The inscription on its [...] mentions its being made by Cleomenes an Athenian, the son of [...]p [...]llodorus. It is of white marble, and surrounded by other master [...] of sculpture, some of which are said to be the works of Praxi­ [...], and other Greek masters. Every corner of this beautiful city, [...]ink stands between mountains covered with olive trees, vineyards, and delightful villas, and divided by the Arno, is full of wonders in the arts of painting, statuary, and architecture. It is a place of some [...]ngth, and contains an archbishop's see, and an university. The in­habitants boast of the improvements they have made in the Italian [...], by means of the Academia della Crusca; and several other [...]ies are now established at Florence. Though the Florentines [...] great state, yet their nobility and gentry drive a retail trade in [...]in [...], which they sell from their cellar windows, and sometimes they [...] hang out a broken flask, as a sign where it may be bought. They [...] also in fruits, in gold and silver stuffs. Since the accession [...] archduke Peter Leopold, brother to the present emperor, to this [...], a great reformation has been introduced, both into the govern­ment and manufactures, to the great benefit of the finances. It is [...] that the great duchy of Tuscany could bring to the field, upon [...]on, 30,000 lighting men, and that its present revenues are above [...]000l. a year. The other principal towns of Tuscany are Pisa, Leg­ [...] and Sienna: the first and last are much decayed; but Leghorn [...] very handsome city, built in the modern taste, and with such regu­ [...]ity, that both gates are seen from the market place. It is well for­ [...], having two forts towards the sea, besides the citadel. The ram­ [...] afford a very agreeable prospect of the sea, and of many villas on [...] land side. Here all nations, and even the Mahometans, have free [...], and may settle. The number of inhabitants is computed at [...], among whom are said to be 20,000 Jews, who live in a partic­ [...] quarter of the city, have a handsome synagogue, and though sub­ [...] to very heavy impost, are in a thriving condition, the greatest part [...] commerce of this city going through their hands.

The inhabitants of Lucca, which is a small free commonwealth, ly­ [...] on the Tuscan sea, in a most delightful plain, are the most indus­ [...] of all the Italians. They have improved their country into a [...]tiful garden, so that though they do not exceed 120,000, their an­ [...] revenue amounts to 80,000l. sterling. Their capital is Lucca, [...] contains about 40,000 inhabitants, who deal in mercenary goods, [...], and fruits, especially olives. This republic is under the protec­ [...] of the emperor. The vicinity of the grand duchy of Tuscany [...] the people of Lucca constantly on their guard, in order to pre­ [...] their freedom; for in such a situation, an universal concord and [...] can alone enable them to transmit to posterity the blessings of [...] [...]rling liberty, whose name they [...]ear on their arms, and whose [...] is not only impressed on their coin, but also on the city gates, [...] their public buildings. It is also observable, that the inhabit­ants of this little republic, being in possession of freedom, appear with [...] of cheerfulness and plenty, seldom to be found among those of neighbouring countries.

[Page 366] The republic of St. Marino is here mentioned as a geographical cu­riosity. Its territories consist of a high, craggy mountain, with a few eminences at the bottom, and the inhabitants boast of having preserved their liberties, as a republic, for 1300 years. It is under the produc­tion of the pope; and the inoffensive manners of the inhabitants, who are not above 5000 in all, with the small value of their territory, have preserved its constitution.

The dutchy and city of Parma, together with the duchies of Placen­tia and Guastalla, now form one of the most flourishing states in Italy of its extent. The soils of Parma and Placentia, are fertile, and pro­duce the richest fruits and pasturages, and contain considerable manu­factures of silk. It is the seat of a bishop's fee, and an university; and some of its magnificent churches are painted by the famous Corregg [...]. The present duke of Parma is a prince of the house of Bourbon, and son to the late Don Philip, the king of Spain's younger brother. This country was, some years past, the feat of a bloody war between the Austrians, Spaniards, and Neapolitans. The cities of Parma and Placentia are enriched with magnificent buildings; but his catholic majesty, on his accession to the throne of Naples, is said to have car­ried with him thither the most remarkable pictures and moveable curi­osities. The duke's court is thought to be the politest of any in Italy, and it is said that his revenues exceed 100,000l. sterling a year, a [...] rather exaggerated. The city of Parma is supposed to contain 50,000 inhabitants.

Mantua, formerly a rich duchy, bringing to its own dukes 500,000 crowns a year, is now much decayed. The government of it is an­nexed to that of the Milanese, in possession of the house of Austria. The capital is one of the strongest fortresses in Europe, and contains about 16,000 inhabitants, who boast that Virgil was a native of their country. By an order of the emperor in 1785, the duchy is incorpo­rated with that of Milan into one province, and, as before mentioned, is now to be called Austrian Lombardy.

The duchy of Modena (formerly Mutina) is still governed by its own duke, the head of the house of Este, from whom the family of Brunswic descended. The duke is absolute within his own dominions, which are fruitful. The duke is under the protection of the house of Austria, and is a vassal of the empire. His dominions are far from be­ing flourishing, though very improveable, they having been alternately wasted by the late belligerent powers in Italy.

The Ecclesiastical State, which contains Rome, formerly the cele­brated capital of the world, lies about the middle of Italy. Those spots, which under the masters of the world were formed into so many terrestial paradises, surrounding their magnificent villas, and enriched with all the luxuries that art and nature could produce, are now con­verted into noxious, pestilential marshes and quagmires; and the Cam­pagna di Roma, that formerly contained a million of inhabitants, would afford, at present, of itself, but a miserable subsistence for five hundred. Notwithstanding this, the pope is a considerable temporal prince, and some suppose that his annual revenue amounts to above a million sterling; other authors calculate them to be much higher. When we speak comparatively, the sum of a million sterling is too high a revenue to arise from his territorial possessions; his accidental [Page 367] income, which formerly far exceeded that sum, is now diminished by the suppression of the order of the Jesuits, from whom he drew vast supplies, and the measures taken by the catholic powers, for prevent­ing the great ecclesiastical issues of money to Rome. According to the best and latest accounts, the taxes upon the provisions and lodg­ings, furnished to foreigners, who spend immense sums in visiting his d [...]nions, form now the greatest part of his accidental revenues. From what has happened, within these thirty years past, there it rea­ [...] to believe that the pope's territories will be reduced to the limits which the houses of Austria and Bourbon shall please to prescribe. Some late popes have aimed at the improvement of their territories, [...] their labours have had no great effect. The discouragement of in­dustry and agriculture seems to be interwoven in the constitution of the papal government, which is vested in proud, lazy ecclesiastics. Their indolence, and the fanaticism of their worship, infect their infe­riors, who prefer begging, and imposing upon strangers, to industry and agriculture, especially as they must hold their properties by the [...]carious tenure of the will of their superiors. In short, the inhab­itants of many parts of the ecclesiastical state, must perish through their [...], did not the fertility of their soil spontaneously afford them sub­sistence. However, it may be proper to make one general remark [...] Italy, which is, that the poverty and sloth of the lower ranks do not take their rise from their natural dispositions.

This observation is not confined to the papal dominions. The Ital­ian princes affected to be the patrons of all the curious and costly arts, and each vied with the other to make his court the repository of taste and magnificence. This passion disabled them from laying out mo­ney upon works of public utility, or from encouraging the industry, or relieving the wants of their subjects; and its miserable effects are sum in many parts of Italy. The splendour and furniture of the churches in the papal dominions are inexpressible, and partly account for the misery of the subjects. But this censure admits of exceptions, [...]en in a manner at the gates of Rome.

Modern Rome contains, within its circuit, a vast number of gardens and vineyards. We have already touched upon its curiosities and an­tiquities. It stands upon the Tyber, an inconsiderable river when compared to the Thames, and navigated by small boats, barges and lighters. The castle of St. Angelo, though its chief fortress, would be [...] to be a place of small strength, were it regularly besieged. The city standing upon the ruins of ancient Rome lies much higher, so that it is difficult to distinguish the seven hills on which it was originally built. When we consider Rome as it now stands, there is the strong­est reason to believe that it exceeds ancient Rome itself in the magnifi­cence of its structures; nothing in the old city, when mistress of the world, could come in competition with St. Peter's church; and per­ [...]gs many other churches in Rome exceed, in beauty of architecture, and value of materials, utensils and furniture, her ancient temples; though it must be acknowledged that the Panthcon must have been an [...]ing structure. The inhabitants of Rome, in 1714, amounted to [...]. If we consider that the spirit of travelling is much increased [...] that time, we cannot reasonably suppose them to be diminished [...]sent.

[Page 368] There is nothing very particular in the pope's temporal government at Rome. Like other princes he has his guards, or sbirri, who take care of the peace of the city, under proper magistrates, both ecclesias­tical and civil. The Campagna di Roma, which contains Rome, is under the inspection of his holiness. In the other provinces he gov­erns by legates and vice legates. He monopolises all the corn in his territories, and he has always a sufficient number of troops on [...], under proper officers, to keep the provinces in awe. Pope Cl [...]mo [...] XIV. wisely disclaimed all intention of opposing any arms to that neighbouring princes, but those of prayers and supplications.

We have, under the head of religion, mentioned the ecclesiastical government of the papacy. As to the rota, and other subordi [...] chambers of this complicated jurisdiction, they are too numerous to be even named, and do not fall properly under our plan. Under a gov­ernment so constituted, it cannot be supposed that the commercial [...] ports of the ecclesiastical state are of much value.

Next to Rome, Bologna, the capital of the Bolognese, is the most considerable city in the ecclesiastical state, and an exception to the in­dolence of its other inhabitants. The government is under a legate [...] latere, who is always a cardinal, and changed every three years. The people here live more sociably and comfortably than the other subjects of the pope; and perhaps their distance from Rome, which is [...] miles north-west, has contributed to their ease. The rest of the eccle­siastical state contains many towns celebrated in ancient history, [...] even now exhibiting the most striking vestiges of their flourishing state, about the beginning of the 16th century; but they are at present little better than desolate, though here and there a luxurious magnifi­cent church and convent may be found, which is supported by the toil and sweat of the neighbouring peasants.

The grandeur of Ferrara, Ravenna, Rimini, Urbino (the native city of the celebrated painter Raphael) Ancona, and many other states and cities, illustrious in former times, are now to be seen only in their rui [...] and ancient history. Loretto, on the other hand, an obscure sp [...] never thought or heard of in times of antiquity, is now the admiration of the world, for the riches it contains, and the prodigious resort to is of pilgrims, and other devotees, from a notion industriously propagat­ed by the Romish clergy, that the house in which the Virgin Mary is said to have dwelt at Nazareth, was carried thither through the air by angels, attended with many other miraculous circumstances, [...] as that all the tress, on the arrival of the sacred mansion, bowed with the profoundest reverence; and great care is taken to prevent any bits of the materials of this house from being carried to other places; and exposed as relics to the prejudice of Loretto. The image of the Vir­gin Mary, and of the divine infant, are of cedar, placed in a small apart­ment, separated from the others by a silver ballustrade, which have gate of the same metal. It is impossible to describe the gold ch [...]i [...] the rings and jewels, emeralds, pearls, and rubies, wherewith this [...] age is or was loaded; and the angels of solid gold, who are here p [...] ­ed on every side, are equally enriched with the most precious [...] ­monds. To the superstition of Roman catholic princes, Loretto in [...] ­debted for this mass of treasure. It has been matter of surprise, [...] no attempt has yet been made by the Turks or Barbary states [...] [Page 369] Loretto, especially [...] fortified, and stands near the sea; but it is now generally supposed, that the real treasure is withdrawn, and metals and stones of less value substituted in its place.

The king of Naples and Sicily, o [...], as he is more properly called, the king of the two Sicilies (the name of Sicily being common to both,) is possessed of the largest dominions of any prince in Italy, as they comprehend the ancient countries of Samnium, Campania, Apulia, [...]gna Craecia, and the island of Sicily, containing in all about [...],000 square miles. They are bounded on all sides by the Mediter­ [...]an and the Adriatic, except on the north east, where Naples ter­ [...]nates on the ecclesiastical state. The Appennine runs through it [...] north to south, and its surface is estimated at 3,500 square leagues. The air is hot, and its soil fruitful of every thing produced in Italy.—The wines called Vino Greco, and Lachrymae Christi, are excellent. The city of Naples, its capital, which is extremely superb, and adorn­ed with all the profusion of art and riches, and its neighbourhood, [...] be one of the most delightful places in Europe to live in, were [...] for their vicinity to the volcano of Vesuvius, which sometimes [...]ens the city with destruction, and the insects and reptiles which [...] it, some of which are venomous. The houses in Naples are in­ [...]te to the population, but in general, are five or six stories in [...]i [...]nt, and flat at the ton; on which are placed numbers of flower [...], or fruit tress, in boxes of earth, producing a very gay and agree­ [...] effect. Some of the streets are very handsome: No street in [...] equals in beauty the Strada di Toledo at Naples; and still less [...] any of them [...]e compared with those beautiful streets that lie open [...] the bay. The richest and most commodious convents in Europe, [...] for male and female votaries, are in this city; the most fertile and beautiful hills of the environs are covered with them; and a small [...] of their revenue is spent in seeding the poor, the monk distribut­ing bread and soup to a certain number every day before the doors of [...] convents.

Though above two-thirds of the property of the kingdom is in the [...] of the ecclesiastics, the protestants live here with great freedom; and though his N [...]ap [...]li [...]an majesty presents to his holiness every year [...]rey, as an acknowledgment that his kingdom is a fief of the pon­ [...]te, yet no inquisition is established in Naples. The present rev­ [...] of the king amount to about 5 millions dollars; of which Na­ples raises 4 millions, and Sicily 1 million. The army consists of [...] men, and some say [...], and the navy of 25 armed ships.

The fertility of both Naples and Sicily is so great, that nature pro­ [...] her gifts almost spontaneously, and little assisted by the industry [...] the inhabitants. In both countries the natural productions, as well [...] the climates, are nearly the same with those in Spain, except [...] at [...] former, and more especially the island of Sicily, are much richer [...]. Naples exports annually, 1,500,000 tornoli of wheat, equal [...] [...],000 Winchester bushels: 200,000 cassisi of oil, weighing [...] [...]oirdupois each. It is reckoned that the average amount of [...]portation of oil exceeds in value four millions of florins. Saf­ [...] raised in the province of Abruzzo, is exported annually to the [...] of 30,000 ducats, the ducat equal to [...]s 9d. Sicily exports 2,000 [...] of oranges. The environs of Syracuse produce near 40 differ­ent [Page 370] sorts of excellent wine and 84,000 cwt. of almonds, and great quantities of pistachios peculiar to that district. Messina sends off 6,000 chests of lemons, and the rest of the kingdom about as much more: 280 barrels of lemon juice weighing ten salme each, and 27 cwt. of bergamot juice. The quantity of silk raised in the kingdom of Na­ples amounts to 800,000 lb. and Sicily produces annually to the value of 187,000l. sterling. The latter country produces likewise manna, barilla, oil of of turpentine, the sugar cane, cotton, and many other vegetable productions of the warmer climates, which, however, are of inferior commercial importance. The mineral kingdom is remarkable for the extraordinary variety of its productions: Of met­als, Naples has silver, iron, copper; and Sicily, tin and lead; yet ex­cepting the marble quarries and falt, very little advantage has hitherto been derived from minerals.

The imports of Naples and Sicily consist in woollens, linen, hard­ware, articles of luxury, and East and West-India productions. There are but few manufactures in proportion to the riches of the soil; and the wool raised in these kingdoms is exported to other countries. Na­ples is the centre of trade; but trade and navigation is almost entirely in the hands of foreigners. The fisheries are valuable, especially those of the tunny-fish, anchovies, and corals: From the silk of the pinne marina, gloves are manufactured.

In this kingdom the breed of horses and of mules is very excellent and celebrated.

The king has a numerous but generally poor nobility, consisting of princes, dukes, marquises, and other high sounding titles; and his capital, by far the most populous in Italy, contains at least, 350,000 in­habitants. Among these are about 30,000 lazaroni, or black guards, the greater part of which have no dwelling houses, but sleep every night in summer under porticoes, piazzas, or any kind of shelter they can find, and in the winter or rainy time of the year, which lasts seve­ral weeks, the rain falling by pailfuls, they resort to the caves under Capo di Monte, where they sleep in crowds like sheep in a pinfold. Those of them who have wives and children, live in the suburbs of Naples near Pausrlippo, in huts, or in caverns or chambers dug out of that mountain. Some gain a livelihood by fishing, others by carrying burdens to and from the shipping; many walk about the streets ready to run on errands, or to perform any labour in their power for a very small recompense. As they do not meet with constant employment, their wages are not sufficient for their maintenance; but the deficiency is in some degree supplied by the soup and bread which are distributed at the doors of the convents.

But though there is so much poverty among the lower people, there is a great appearance of wealth among some of the great. The Nea­politan nobility are excessively fond of show and splendour. This appears in the brilliancy of their equinages, the number of their at­tendants, the richness of their dress, and the grandeur of their titles. According to a late traveller (Mr. Swinburne), luxury of late hath ad­vanced with gigantic strides in Naples. Forty years ago the Neapoli­tan ladies wore nets and ribands on their heads, as the Spanish women do to this day, and not twenty of them were possessed of a cap; but hair plainly drest is a mode now confined to the lowest order of in­habitants, [Page 371] and all distinction of dress between the wise of a nobleman and that of a citizen is entirely laid aside. Expense and extravagance are here in the extreme.

Through every spot of the kingdom of Naples, the traveller may be said to tread on classic ground, and no country presents the eye with more beautiful prospects. There are still traces of the memorable town of Cannae, as fragments of altars, cornices, gates, walls, vaults, and under-ground granaties; and the scene of action between Hannibal and the Romans, is still marked out to posterity by the name of pezzo di sangue, "field of blood." Taranto, a city that was once the rival of Rome, is now remarkable for little else than its fisheries. Sorento i [...] a city placed on the brink of steep rocks, that over-hang the bay, and of all the places in the kingdom, hath the most delightful climate. Nola, once famous for its amphitheatre, and as the place where Augustus Caesar died, is now hardly worth observation.

Brundusium, now Brindisi, was the great supplier of oysters for the Roman tables. It has a fine port, but the buildings are poor and ruinous; and the fall of the Grecian empire under the Turks reduced i [...] to a state of inactivity and poverty, from which it has not yet em­erged. Except Rome, no city can boast of so many remains of ancient sculpture as Benevento: Here the arch of Trajan, one of the most magnificent remains of Roman grandeur out of Rome, erected in the year 114, is still in tolerable preservation. Reggio hath nothing re­markable but a Gothic cathedral. It was destroyed by an earthquake before the Marcian war, and rebuilt by Julius Caesar; part of the wall still remains, and was very roughly handled by the earthquake in 1783, but not destroyed: Only 126 lost their lives out of 10,000 inhabitants. The ancient city of Oppido was entirely ruined by the earthquake of the 5th of February, and the greatest force thereof seems to have been exerted near that spot, and at Casal Nuova and Terra Nuova. From Tropea to Sq [...]illace, most of the towns and villages were either totally [...]in part over thrown, and many of the inhabitants buried in the ruins. To ascertain the extent of the ravages, sir William Hamilton, who sur­veyed it, gives the following description: "If on a map of Italy, and with your compasses on the scale of Italian miles, you were to measure of 22, and then fixing your central point in the city of Oppiddo (which appeared to me to be the spot on which the earthquake had [...]erted its greatest force) form a circle (the radii of which will be, as [...] just said, 22 miles) you will then include all the towns and villages that have been utterly ruined, and the spots where the greatest mor­tality has happened, and where there have been the most visible alter­ations on the face of the earth. Then extend your compass on the [...] scale to 72 miles, preserving the same centre, and form another circle, you will include the whole of the country that has any mark of having been affected by the earthquake."

Naples is a fief of the Holy See, and a trifling annual tribute is paid in acknowledgment of the Pope's rights; yet the dependence of the king, who is legatus natus of the see of Rome, on his feudal lord, is [...]ly nominal. The government is monarchical, but not quite abso­lute; for though the king's power is very great, the states have pre­served the right of meeting every other year, in order to grant subsi­ [...], or a don gra [...]uit, to the king. This assembly is called a parlia­ment; [Page 372] it is composed of deputies from the nobility, the order of citi­zens, and of the prelates who are possessed of baronies. Royal edicts, behave they acquire the force of laws, must be registered by another as­sembly of the nobility and the order of citizens, it consists of six seggi, or wards, five, of which are governed by a committee of nobles; the last belongs exclusively to the Plebeian; and is governed by six eletti, who are likewise the chief civil magistrates of the city of Naples.

Both the ancients and moderns have maintained, that Sicily was originally joined to the continent of Italy, but gradually separated from it by the encroachments of the sea, and the shocks of earthquakes, so as to become a perfect island. The climate of Sicily is so hot, that even the beginning of January the shade is refreshing; and chilling winds are only felt a few days in March. The only appearance of winter of found towards the summit of Mount Altna, where snow falls, convents, and religious foundations are extremely numerous have; the buildings are handsome, and the revenues considerable. If this island were better cultivated, and its government more equitable, it would in many respects be a delightful place of residence. There are great number of fine remains of antiquity here. Some parts of this island are remarkable for the beauty of the female inhabitants. Pale [...] ­mo, the capital of Sicily, is computed to contain 120,000 inhabitants. The two principal streets, and which cross each other, are very fine. This is said to be the only town in all Italy which is lighted at night at the public expense. It carries on a considerable trade; as also did Messina, which before the earthquake in 1783, was a large and well­built city, containing many churches and convents, generally elegant structure. By that earthquake a great part of the lower district of the city and of the port was destroyed, [...] considerable damage done to the lofty uniform building called the Pa [...]z [...]a [...], in the shape of a crescent; but the force of the earthquakes; though violent, was nothing at Messina or Reggio, to what it was in the plain, for of 30,000, the sup­posed population of the city, only 700 are said to have perished. The greatest mortality fell upon those towns and countries situated in the plain of Calabria Ultra, on the western side of the mountains Deje, Sacro, and Caulone. At Casal Nuova, the princess Gerace. and up­wards of 4000 of the inhabitants, lost their lives; at Bagnara, the num­ber of dead amounts to 3017; Radicina and palad count their loss at about 3000 each: Terra Nu [...]va about 1400: Seminars still more. The sum total of the mortality in both Calabrias and in Sicily, by the earth­quakes alone, according to the returns in the secretary of state's office at Naples, is 32,367: But sir William Hamilton faith he has good reason to believe, that, including strangers, the number of lives lost must have been considerably greater; 40,000 at least may be allowed, he believes, without exaggeration.

In Sicily states have likewise a share in government, by the right which they possess of granting subsidies to the crown. They are com­posed of three classes, or bracci, the nobility or military class the cler­gy and the royal demesne lands, viz. 42 royal towns.

The great state officers are nominated by the king: the highest de­partment of government is the state council, composed of four minis­ters or secretaries of state. Next of this council is that called [...] [Page 373] and several departments for particular branches of public business. Sicily is governed by a viceroy. The late king has pub­lished a new code of laws, called Codex Carolinus; yet, notwithstand­ing the improvements it contains, the proceedings of justice in this country are still very dilatory. It is said there are not less than 30,000 lawyers at Naples, (Swinburne). In some parts of the kingdom the possessors of large estates have a territorial jurisdiction, in others the king: From the provincial courts appeals may be made to the Gran Corte della V [...]a; and, in the last instance, to the Supreme Court of Appeal at Naples.

The present government seems to have the welfare of the country more at heart than any former. There are, in Naples and Sicily, four universities, viz. those of Naples, Salerno, Palermo, and Catania, of which the first is the most useful. At the capital there is likewise an academy of sciences, and magnificent collections of antiquities. Na­ples has long [...] the principal and favourite seat of music. Educa­tion is greatly neglected; the schools are still in the hands of monks, whose interest it is that superstition and ignorance should prevail, and who are the greatest enemies to the liberty of thinking and writing.

The island of SARDINIA, which gives a royal title to the duke of Sa­voy, lies about 150 miles west of Legborn, and hath seven cities or towns. Its capital, Cagliari, has an university, and archbishopric, and the seat of the viceroy, containing about 24,000 inhabitants. It is thought his Sardinian majesty's revenues, from this island, do not ex­ced 5000l. sterling a year, though it yields plenty of corn and wine, and has a coral fishery. Its air is bad, from its marshes and high mountains on the North, and therefore was a place of exile for the humans. It was formerly annexed to the crown of Spain, but at the peace of Utrecht it was given to the emperor, and in 1719 to the house of Savoy.

The islands of C [...]RSICA lies opposite to the Genoese continent, be­tween the gulf of Cenoa and the Island of Sardinia, and is better known by the noble stand which the inhabitants made for their liberty against their Genoese tyrants, and afterwards against the base and un­generous efforts of the French to enslave them, than from any advan­tages they enjoy, from nature of situation. Though mountainous and woody, it produces corn, wine, figs, almonds, chesnuts, olives, and other fruits. It has also some cattle and horses, and is plentifully sup­plied, both by sea and rivers with fish. The inhabitants are said to amount to 120,000. Bastia, the capital, is a place of some strength; though other towns of the island, that were in possession of the male contents, appear to have been but poorly fortified.

CAPR [...], the ancient CAPREA, is an island to which Augustus Caesar then came for his health and recreation, and which Tiberius made a scene of the most infamous pleasures. It lies three Italian miles from that part of the main land which projects farthest into the sea. It ex­tends four miles in length from East to West, and about one in breadth. The western part is, for about two miles, a continued rock, vastly high, and inaccessible next the sea; yet Ano Capri, the largest town of the island, is situated here; and in this part are several places cov­ered with a very fruitful soil. The eastern end of the island also rises up in precipices that are neatly as high, though not quite so long as the [Page 374] western, Between the rocky mountains, at each end, is a slip of lower ground that runs across the island, and is one of the pleasantest spots that can easily be conceived. It is covered with myrtles, olives, al­monds, oranges, figs, vineyards, and corn fields, which look extremely fresh and beautiful, and afford a most delightful little landscape, when viewed from the tops of the neighbouring mountains. Here is situated the town of Caprea, two or there convents, and the bishop's palace. In the midst of this settle tract rises a hill, which in the reign of [...]i­berius was probably covered with buildings, some remains of which are still to be seen. But the most considerable ruins are at the very extremity of the eastern premontory.

From this place there is a very noble prospect: On one side of it the sea extends farther than the eye can reach; just opposite is the green promontory of Sarentum, and on the other side the bay of Naples.

ISCHIA, and some other islands on the coasts of Naples and Italy, have nothing to distinguish them but the ruins of their antiquities, and their being now beautiful summer retreats for their owners. ELBA has been renowned for its mines from a period beyond the reach of his­tory. Virgil and Aristotle mention it. Its situation is about ten miles S. W. from Tuscany, and 80 miles in circumference, containing near 7000 inhabitants; it is divided between the king of Naples, to whom Porto Longone belongs, and the great duke of Tuscany, who is master of Forto, Ferraio, and the prince of Piombino. The fruits and wine of the island are very good, and the tunnery, fishery, and salt, pro­duce a good revenue.

I shall here mention the isle of MALTA, though it is not properly ranked with the Italian islands. It was formerly called Melita, and is situated in 15 degrees E. lon. and 45 degrees N. lat. 60 miles south of Cape Passaro in Sicily, and is of an oval figure, 20 miles long, and 12 broad. Its air is clear, but excessively hot: The whole island seems to be a white rock, covered with a thin surface of earth, which is how­ever amazingly productive of excellent fruits and vegetables, and gar­den-stuff of all kinds. This island, or rather rock, was given to the knights of St. John of Jerusalem, in 1530, by the emperor Charles V. when the Turks drove them out of Rhodes; under the tender of one falcon yearly to the viceroy of Sicily, and to acknowledge the kings of Spain and Sicily for their protectors: They are now known by the dis­tinction of the Knights of Malta. They are under vows of celibacy and chastity; but they keep the former much better than the latter. They have considerable possessions in the Roman Catholic countries on the continent, and are under the government of a grand-master, who is elected for life. The lord-prior of the order, was formerly account­ed the prime baron in England. The knights are in number 1000: 500 are to reside on the island, the remainder are in their seminaries in other countries, but at any summons are to make a personal appearance. They had a seminary in England, till it was suppressed by Henry VIII.

When the great master dies, they suffer no ve [...]el to go out of the island till another is chosen, to prevent the pope from interfering in the election. Out of the 16 great crosses, the great-master is elected, whose title, is "The most illustrious, and most reverend prince, the lord-friar A. B. great master of the hospital of St. John of Jerusalem, prince of Malta and Gaza." All the knights are sworn to defend the [Page 375] church, to obey their superiors, and to live on the revenues of their order only. Not only their chief town Valetta, or Malta, and its har­bour, but their whole island is so well fortified, as to be deemed im­pregnable. On the 8th of Sept. there is an annual procession at Malta, in memory of the Turks raising the siege on that day, 1663, after four months assault, leaving their artillery, &c. behind.

HISTORY.] See Rollin's Ancient and Roman Histories—Gibbon's Decline of the Roman Empire—and Goldsmith's Roman History.

TURKEY.

The Grand Signior's Dominions are divided into
1. TURKEY in EUROPE. inhabitants, 49,000,000 Sq. Miles,
2. TURKEY in ASIA. 960,060, Guthrie.
3. TURKEY in AFRICA. 800,000, Zimmermann.

TURKEY IN EUROPE.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 1000 Miles. between Degrees. 17 and 40 east longitude. Sq. Miles.182,562
Breadth 900Miles. Degrees. 34 and 49 north latitude. Sq. Miles.182,562

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED by Russia, Poland, and Sclavonia, on the North; by Circassia, the Black Sea, the Pr [...]pontis, Hellespont, and Archipelago, on the East; by the Medi­terreanean, on the South; by the same sea, and the Venetian and Au­strian territories, on the West.

Divisions. Subdivisions. Chief towns. Sq. M.
On the north coast of the Black Sea are the provinces of Crim and Little Tar­tary, and the an­cient Taurica Cher­fonesus * Precop Brachiseria Kaffa 26,200
Budziac Tartary Oczakow 12,000
North of the Danube are the Provinces of Bessarabia Bender 8,000
  Belgorod  
Moldavia, olim Dacia lazy Choczim Falczin 26,000
  Walachia, another part of the ancient Dacia Buckaretch 60,000ir.
    Tergovisto19,000
South of the Danube are Bulgaria, the east part of the ancient Myfia Widin 17,000
  Nicopoli
  Siliftra,
    Scopia
  Servia, the west part of Myf [...]a Belgrade 22,57 [...]
    Semendria
    Nissa
  Bosnia, part of the ancient Illyricum Seraio 8,640
On the Bosphorus and Hellespont Romania olim Thrace Constantin­opel, N. L., 4. E. L. 29. 21,200
Adrianople  
South of Mount Rho­dope or Argentum, the north part of the ancient Greece Macedonia Strymon 18,980
  Contessa
Thessaly, now Janua Salonichi 4,650
    Larissa
  Achaia and Boeotia, now Livadia Athens 3,420
    Thebes
    Lepanto
On the Adriatic Sea or Gulf of Venice, the ancient IIIyricum Epirus Chimaera 7,953
  Burtinto  
  Scodra  
Albania Durazzo 6,375
    Duleigno  
  Dalmatia Zara 4,560
    Narenza  
  Ragusa republic * Ragusa 430
in the Morea, the an­cient Peloponnesus, being the south divi­sion of Greece, are Corinthia Corinth 7,220
Argos Argos
Sparta Napoli de
  Romania
  Lacedae­mon, now Misitria, on the river Eurosas
Olympia, where the games were held Olympia, or Longi­nica, on the river Alpheus
  Arcadia Modon
    Coron
  Elis Patras
    Elis, or Bel­videre, on the river Peneus.

MOUNTAINS.] These are the most celebrated of any in the world, and at the same time often most fruitful. Mount Athos lies on a pen­insula, running into the Egean sea; the Mounts Pindus and Olympus, celebrated in Grecian fables, separate Thessaly from Epirus. Parnas­sus, in Achaia, so famous for being consecrated to the Muses, is well known. Mount Haemus is likewise often mentioned by the poets; but not of the other mountains have changed their names; for instance the mountains Shua, Witoska, Staras, Plamina, and many others. Even the most celebrated mountains above mentioned have held modern names imposed upon them by the Turks, their new masters, and others in their neighbourhood.

SEAS.] The Euxine or Black Sea; the Palus Maeotis, or Sea of Asoph; the sea of Marmora, which separates Europe from Asia; the Archipelago; the Ionian sea, and the Levant, are so many evidences, that Turkey in Europe, particularly that part of it where Constanti­ [...]ple stands, of all other countries, had the best claim to be mistress of the world.

STRAITS.] Those of the Hellespont and Bosphorus are joined to the sea of Marmora, and are remarkable in modern as well as ancient his­tory.

RIVERS.] The Danube, the Save, the Neister, the Neiper, and the Don, are the best known rivers in this country; though many others have been celebrated by poets and historians.

[Page 378] LAKES.] These are not extremely remarkable, nor are they men­tioned with any great applause, either by the ancients or moderns. The Lago di Sentari, lies in Albania. It communicates with the Lago di Plave and the Lago di Holti. The Stymphalus, so famous for its har­pies and ravenous birds, lies in the Morea; and Peneus, from its qual­ities, is thought to be the lake from which the Styx issues, conceived by the ancients to be the passage into hell.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITICS, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} Almost every spot of ground, every river, and every fountain in Greece presents the traveller with the ruins of a celebrated antiqui­ty. On the Isthmus of Corinth, the ruins of Neptune's temple, and the theatre where the Isthmean games were celebrated, are still visible. Athens, which contains at present above 10,000 inhabitants, is a fruit­ful source of the most magnificent and celebrated antiquities in the world, a minute account of which would exceed the limits of this work; but it will be proper to mention some of the most considerable. On the south-west of Athens is a beautiful structure, commonly called the Lantern of Demosthenes: This is a small round edifice of white marble, the roof of which is supported by six fluted columns of the Corinthian order, nine feet and an half high; in the space between the columns are pannels of marble; and the whole is covered with a cupola, carved with the resemblance of scales; and on the frieze are beautifully represented in relievo the labours of Hercules. Here are also to be seen the temple of Winds; the remains of the theatre of Bacchus; of the magnificent aqueduct of the emperor Adrian; and of the temples of Jupiter Olympius, and Augustus. The remains of the temple of the oracle of Apollo are still visible at Castri, on the south side of mount Parnassus, and the marble steps that descend to a pleasant running water, supposed to be the renowned Castalian spring, with the niches for statues in the rock, are still discernible. The famous cave of Trophonius is still a natural curiosity in Livadiae, the old Boeotia.

Mount Athos, which has been already mentioned, and which is com­monly called Monto Santo, lies on a peninsula which extends into the AEgean sea, and is indeed a chain of mountains, reaching the whole length of the peninsula, seven Turkish miles in length, and three in breadth; but it is only a single mountain that is properly called Athos. This is so lofty, that on the top, as the ancients relate, the sun-rising was beheld four hours sooner than by the inhabitants of the coats; and, at the solstice, its shade reached into the Agora or market place of My­rina, a town in Lemnos, which island was distant eighty-seven miles eastward. There are twenty-two convents on mount Athos, besides a great number of cells and grottos, with the habitations of no less than six thousand monks and hermits; though the proper hermits, who live in grottos, are not above twenty; the other monks are anchorites or such as live in cells. These Greek monks, who call themselves the inhabitants of the holy mountain, are so far from being a set of sloth­ful people, that, besides their daily offices of religion, they cultivate the olive and vineyards, are carpenters, masons, stone-cutters, cloth­workers, taylors, &c. They also live a very austere life; their usual food, instead of flesh, being vegetables, dried olives, figs, and other fruit; onions, cheese, and on certain days, Lent excepted, fish. Their fasts are many and severe; which, with the healthfulness of the air, [Page 379] [...]eaders longevity so common there, that many of them live above an hundred years. It appears from AElian, that anciently the mountain in general, and particularly the summit, was accounted very healthy, and conducive to long life; whence the inhabitants were called Ma­ [...]i or long lived. We are farther informed by Philostratus, in the life of Apollonius, that numbers of philosophers used to retire to this mountain, for the better contemplation of the heavens, and of nature; and after their example the monks doubtless built their cells.

CITIES.] Constantinople, the capital of this great empire, is situat­ed on the European side of the Bosphours. It was built upon the ru­ins of the ancient Byzantium, by the Roman emperor Constantine the Great, as a more inviting situation than Rome for the seat of empire. It become afterwards the capital of the Greek empire, and having es­caped the destructive rage of the barbarous nations, it was the greatest as well as the most beautiful city in Europe, and the only one during the Gothic ages, in which their remained any image of the ancient elegance in manners and arts. While it remained in the possession of the Greek emperors, it was the only mart in Europe for the commodi­ties of the East Indies. It derived great advantages from its being the rendezvous of the crusaders, and being then in the meridian of its glo­ry, the European writers, in the ages of the crusades, speak of it with astonishment. "O what a vast city is Constantinople (exclaims one when he first behold it) and how beautiful? How many monasteries are there in it, and how many palaces built with wonderful art! How [...] manufactures are there in the city amazing to behold! It would [...]e astonishing to relate how it abounds with all the good things, with gold, silver, and stuffs of various kinds; for every hour ships arrive in the port with all things necessary for the use of man." Constantino­ple is at this day one of the finest cities in the world by its situation and its port. The prospect from it is noble. The most regular part, is the Besestin inclosed with walls and gates where the merchants have their shops excellently ranged. In another part of the city is the Hippodrome, an oblong square of 400 paces by 200, where they exer­ [...] an horseback. The Meidan, or parade, is a large spacious square, the general resort of all ranks. On the opposite side of the port are four towns, but considered as a part of the suburbs, their distance be­ing so small, a person may easily be heard on the other side. They are [...] Pera, Galata, Pecha, and Tophana. In Pera, the foreign am­bassadors and all the Franks or strangers reside, not being permitted to live in the city; Galata also in mostly inhabited by Franks and Jews, and is a place of great trade. The city abounds with antiquities; the [...] of Constantine the Great is still preserved. The mosque of St. Sophia once a Christian church, is thought in some respects to exceed in grandeur and architecture St. Peter's at Rome. The city is built in a triangular form, with the Seraglio standing on a point of one of the angles, from whence there is a prospect of the delightful coast of the lesser Asia, which is not to be equalled. When we speak of the se­raglio, we do not mean the apartments in which the grand signior's [...] are confined, as is commonly imagined, but the whole inclo­ [...]e of the Ottoman palace, which might well suffice for a moderate [...]. The wall which surrounds the seraglio is thirty feet high, hav­ing [...]lements, embrasures, and towers, in the style of the ancient forti­fications. [Page 380] There are in it nine gates, but only two of them magnifi­cent; and from one of these the Ottoman court takes the name of the Porte, or the Sublime Porte, in all public transactions and records. Both the magnitude and population of Constantinople have been great­ly exaggerated by credulous travellers. It is surrounded by a high and thick wall with battlements after the oriental manner, and towers, defended by a lined but shallow ditch, the works of which are double on the land side. The best authors think that it contains a million of inhabitants, among them are reckoned 200,000 Greeks, 40,000 A [...] ­nians, and 60,000 Jews.

The city hath been frequently assailed by fires, either owing to the narrowness of the streets and the structure of the houses, or the arts of the Janizaries. In August, 1784, a fire broke out in the quarter situ­ate towards the harbour, and spread into other quarters, and about 10,000 houses (most of which had been rebuilt since the fire in 1782) were consumed.

Opposite to the seraglio, on the Asian side, and about a mile and a half distant across the water, is Scutari, adorned with a royal mosque, and a pleasure house of the grand signior. On the brow of an adja­cent hill is a grand prospect▪ in one view are the cities of Constanti­nople, Galata, and Pera, and small seas of the Bosphorus and Proponti [...], with the adjacent countries on each shore.

As to the population, manners, religion, government, revenues, learning, military strength, commerce, and manufactures of the Turks, these several heads depending on the same principles all over the em­pire, shall be mentioned under TURKEY in ASIA.

ISLANDS belonging to TURKEY in EUROPE, being Part of Ancient GREECE.

WE shall mention these Islands chiefly for the use of such readers as are conversant with ancient history, of which they make so distin­guished a part.

Negropont, the ancient Euboea, stretches from the south east to the north west, and on the eastern coast of Achaia or Livadia. It is 90 miles long, and 25 broad, and contains about 1300 square miles. Here the Turkish gallies lie. The tides on its coasts are irregular; and the island itself is very fertile, producing corn, wine, fruit, and cattle, in such abundance, that all kinds of provisions are extremely cheap. The chief towns in the island are, Negropont, called by the Greeks Egripos, situated on the south west coast of the island, on the narrowest part of the strait; and Castel Rosso the ancient Craystus.

LEMNOS, or STALIMENE, lies on the north part of the Egean sea or Archipelago, and is almost a square of 25 miles in length and breadth. Though it produces corn and wine, yet it principal riches arise from its mineral earth, much used in medicine, sometimes called [...]erra Lemna or sigillata, because it is sealed up by the Turks, who receive therefrom a considerable revenue.

TENEDOS is remarkable only for its lying opposite to old Troy, and its being mentioned by Virgil as the place to which the Greeks retired, and left the Trojans in a fatal security; it hath a town of the same name.

[Page 381] S [...]TROS is about 60 miles in circumference, and is remarkable chiefly for the remains of antiquity which it contains; about 300 Greek fam­ilies inhabit it.

LISBOS, or MYTELENE, is about 60 miles long, and is famous for the number of philosophers and poets it produced. The inhabitants were formerly noted for their prodigality.

SCIO, or CHIOS, lies about 80 miles west of Smyrna, and is about 100 miles in circumference. This island, though rocky and moun­tainous, produces excellent wine, but no corn. It is inhabited by 100,000 Greeks, 10,000 Turks, and above 3,000 Latins. It hath 300 churches besides chapels and monasteries; and a Turkish garrison of [...] men. The inhabitants have manufactures of silk, velvet, gold and silver stuffs. The island likewise produces oil and silk, and the [...], or mastic, from which the government draws its chief rev­ [...]. The women of this, and almost all the other Greek islands, [...] in all ages been celebrated for their beauty, and their persons [...] been the most perfect models of Symmetry to painters and statua­ [...]. A late learned traveller, Dr. Richard Chandler, says, "The beautiful Greek girls are the most striking ornaments of Scio. Many of these were sitting at the doors and windows, twisting cotton or silk, or employed in spinning and needle-work, and accosted us with fa­ [...]iarity, bidding us welcome, as we passed. The streets on Sundays and holidays are filled with them in groups. They wear short petti­coats, reaching only to their knees, with white silk or cotton hose. Their head-dress, which is peculiar to the island, is a kind of turban, [...]linen so white and thin in seemed snow. Their slippers are chiefly yellow, with a knot of red fringe at the heel. Some wore them fas­ [...]d with a thong. Their garments were of silk of various colours; and their whole appearance so fantastic and lively, as to afford us [...] entertainment. The Turks inhabit a separate quarter, and their women are concealed." Among the poets and historians said to be [...] here, the inhabitants reckon Homer, and shew a little square house which they call Homer's school.

SAMOS lies opposite to Ephesus, on the coast of the Lesser Asia, [...] seven miles from the continent. It is 30 miles long, and 15 [...]. This island gave birth to Pythagoras, and is inhabited by Greek Christians, who are well treated by the Turks, their masters. The muscadine Samian wine is in high request; and the island also produces wool, which they fell to the French; oil, pomegranates, and [...]. This island is supposed to have been the native country of Juno; and some travellers think that the ruins of her temple, and of the an­cient city Samos, are the finest remains of antiquity in the Levant.

To the south of Samos lies PATMOS, about 20 miles in circumfer­ence, but so barren and dreary, that it may be called a rock rather than [...] island. It has, however, a convenient haven; and the few Greek [...] who are upon the island shew a cave where St. John is suppo­ [...] have written the Apocalypse.

The CYCLADES island lie like a circle round Delos, the chief of [...] which is south of the islands Mycone and Tirfe, and almost mid­ [...] between the continent of Asia and Europe. Though Delos is [...] six miles in circumference, it is one of the most celebrated [...] Grecian islands, as being the birth-place of Apollo and Di­ana, [Page 382] the magnificent ruins of whose temples are still visible. This island is almost destitute of inhabitants.

PAROS lies between the islands of Luxia and Melos. Like all the other Greek islands, it contains the most striking and magnificent ru­ins of antiquity; but is chiefly renowned for the beauty and whiteness of its marble.

CERIGO, or CYTHERA, lies south-east of the Morea, and is about 50 miles in circumference, but rocky and mountainous, and chiefly re­markable for being the favourite residence of Venus.

SANTORIN is one of the most southern islands in the Archipelago, and was formerly called Calista, and afterwards Thera. Though see­mingly covered with pumice-stones, yet, through the industry of the inhabitants, who are about 10,000, it produces barley and wine, with some wheat. One-third of the people are of the Latin church, and subject to a catholic bishop. Near this island another arose of the same name, from the bottom of the sea, in 1707. At the time of its birth there was an earthquake, attended with most dreadful lightnings and thunders, and boilings of the sea for several days, so that when it arose out of the sea, it was a more volcano, but the burning soon, ceas­ed. It is about 200 feet above the sea; and at the time of its first emerging, was about a mile broad, and five miles in circumference, but it has since increased. Several other islands of the Archipelago ap­pear to have had the like original, and the sea in their neighbourhood is so deep as not to be fathomed.

The famous island of RHODES is situated in the 28th degree of east, longitude, and 36 degrees 20 minutes north latitude, about 20 miles south-west of the continent of Lesser Asia, being about 60 miles long, and 25 broad. This island is healthful and pleasant, abounds in wine, and many of the necessaries of life; but the inhabitants import their corn from the neighbouring country. The chief town of the same name, stands on the side of a hill fronting the sea, and is 3 miles in cir­cumference, interspersed with gardens, minarets, churches, and tow­ers. The harbour is the Grand Signior's principal arsenal for shipping, and the place is esteemed among the strongest fortresses belonging to the Turks. The colossu [...] of brass, which anciently stood at the mouth of the harbour, and was 50 fathom wide, was deservedly accounted one of the wonders of the world: One foot being placed on each side of the harbour, ships passing between its legs; and it held in one hand a light-house for the direction of mariners. The face of the colo [...]us represented the sun, to whom this image was dedicated; and its height was about 135 feet. The inhabitants of this island were formerly masters of the sea; and the Rhodian law was the directory of the Ro­mans in maritime affairs. The knights of St. John of Jerusalem, after losing Palestine, look this island from the Turks in 1308, but lost it in 1522 after a brave defence, and afterwards retired to Malta.

CANDIA, the ancient Crete, is still renowned for its hundred cities, for its being the birth-place of Jupiter, the seat of legislature to all Greece, and many other historical and political distinctions. It lies between 35 and 36 degrees of north latitude, being 200 miles long, and 60 broad, almost equally distant from Europe, Asia, and Africa, and contains 3220 square miles. The famous Mount Ida [...] stands in the middle of the island, and is no better than a barren rock; and Lethe, [Page 383] the river of oblivion, is a torpid stream. Some of the vallies of this island produce wine, fruits, and corn; all of them remarkably excel­lent in their kinds. The siege of Candia, the capital of the island, in modern times, was far more wonderful and bloody than that of Troy. The Turks invested it in the beginning of the year 1645, and its Vene­tian garrison, after bravely defending itself against 56 storms, till the latter end of September 1669, made, at last, an honourable capitulation. The siege cost the Turks 180,000 men, and the Venetians 80,000.

CYPRUS lies in the Levant sea, about thirty miles distant from the coasts of Syria and Palestine. It is 150 miles long, and 70 broad, and lies at almost an equal distance from Europe and Africa. It was for­merly famous for the worship of Venus, the Cyprian goddess; and during the time of the Crusades, was a rich flourishing kingdom, in­habited by Christians. Its wine, especially that which grows at the [...]om of the celebrated Mount Olympus, is the most palatable, and the richest of all that grows in the Greek islands. Nicosia is the capi­tal, in the midst of the country, and the see of a Greek archbishop, in­duced most part of the inhabitants of the island are Greeks. Famagusta, is ancient capital, has a good harbour; and the natural produce of the island is so rich, that many European nations find their account in keeping consuls residing upon it; but the oppressions of the Turks [...] depopulated and impoverished it to such a surprising degree, that the revenue they get from it does not exceed 1250l. a year. The island produces great quantities of grapes, from which excellent wine is made, and also cotton of a very fine quality is here cultivated, and oil, silk, and turpentine. Its female inhabitants do not degenerate from their ancestors as devotees to Venus; and Paphos, that ancient seat of pleasure and corruption, is one of the divisions of the island. Richard king of England, subdued Cyprus, on account of its king's treach­ [...] and its royal title was transferred to Guy Lusignan, king of Jeru­salem, from whence it passed to the Venetians, who still hold that emp­ty honour.

The islands in the Ionian sea are, SAPIENZA, STIVALI, ZANTE, CE­ [...]LONIA, SANTAMAURA, CORFU, FANNU, and others of smaller note, particularly ISOLA DEL COMPARE, which would not deserve mention, had it not been the ancient Ithaca, the birth-place and kingdom of [...]. These islands in general are fruitful, and belong to the Ve­ [...]ns.

Z [...]te has a populous capital of the same name, and is a place of considerable trade, especially in currents, grapes, and wine. The cita­ [...] is erected on the top of a large hill, strong by nature, but now lit­tle better than a heap of ruins. Here is a garrison of 500 men, but their chief dependence is on their fleet and the island of Corfu. The inhabitants of Zante are about 30,000, mostly Greeks, and friendly to [...]. Corfu, which is the capital of that island, and the residence of the governor-general over all the other islands, is a place of great [...], and its circumference about 4 miles. The Venetians are [...] concern themselves very little about the welfare or government [...] islands, so that the inhabitants, who are generally Greeks, bear [...] indifferent character. Their number at Corfu is estimated at [...] and their manners more severe than at Zante.

[Page]

ASIA.

AS Asia exceeds Europe and Africa in the extent of its territories, it is also superior to them in the serenity of its air, the fertility of its soil, the deliciousness of its fruits, the fragrancy and balsamic qualities of its plants, spices and gums; the salubrity of its drugs; the quantity, variety, beauty, and value of gems; the richness of its met­als, and the fineness of its silks and cottons. It was in Asia, according to the sacred records, that the all-wife Creator planted the garden of Eden, in which he formed the first man and first woman, from whom the race of mankind was to spring. Asia became again the nursery of the world after the deluge, whence the descendants of Noah dispersed their various colonies into all the other parts of the globe. It was in Asia that God placed his once favourite people, the Hebrews, whom he enlightened by revelations delivered by the prophets, and to whom he gave the Oracles of Truth. It was here that the great and merci­ful work of our Redemption was accomplished by his divine Son; and it was from hence that the light of his glorious gospel was carried with amazing rapidity into all the known nations by his disciples and fol­lowers. Here the first Christian churches were founded, and the Christian faith miraculously propagated and cherished even with the blood of innumerable martyrs. It was in Asia that the first edifices were reared, and the first empires founded, while the other parts of the globe were inhabited only by wild animals. On all these account, this quarter claims a superiority over the rest; but it must be owned, that a great change has happened in that part of it called Turkey, which has lost much of its ancient splendor, and from the most populous and best cultivated spot in Asia, is become a wild and uncultivated desert. The other parts of Asia continue much in their former con­dition, the soil being as remarkable for its fertility, as most of the in­habitants for their indolence, effeminacy, and luxury. This effemi­nacy is chiefly owing to the warmth of the climate, though in some measure heightened by custom and education; and the symptoms of it are more or less, visible, as the several nations are seated nearer or farther from the north. What is wanting in the robust frame of their bodies among the Chinese, Mogul Indians, and all the inhabitants of the more southern regions, is in a great measure made up to them by the vivacity of their minds, and ingenuity in various kinds of work­manship, which our most skillful mechanics have in vain endeavoured to imitate.

This vast extend of territory was successively governed in past times by the Assyrians, the Medes, the Persians, and the Greeks; but the immense regions of India and China were the little known to Alexander, or the conquerors of the ancient world. Upon the decline of those empires, great part of Asia submitted to the Roman arms; and after­wards; in the middle ages, the successors of Mahomet, or as they are [Page]

ASIA

[Page 385] usually called, Saracens, founded in Asia, in Africa, and in Europe, a more extensive empire than that of Cyrus. Alexander, or even the Roman when in its height of power. The Saracen greatness ended with the death of Tamerlane; and the Turks, conquerors on every side, took possession of the middle regions of Asia, which they still enjoy. Besides the countries possessed by the Turks and Russians, Asia contains at present three large empires, the Chinese, the Mogul, and the Persian, upon which the lesser kingdoms and sovereignties of Asia generally depend. The prevailing form of government in this division of the globe is absolute monarchy. If any of them can be said to enjoy some share of liberty, it is the wandering tribes, as the Tartars and Arabs. Many of the Asiatic nations, when the Dutch first came among them, could not conceive how it was possible for any people to live under any other form of government than that of a despotic monarchy. Turkey, Arabia, Persia, part of Tartary, and part of India, profess Mahometanism. The Persian and Indian Ma­hometans are of the sect of Hali, and the others of that of Omar; but both own Mahomet for their law-giver, and the Koran for their rule of faith and life. In the other parts of Tartary, India, China, Japan, and the Asiatic islands, they are generally heathens and idola­ters. Jews are to be found every where in Asia. Christianity, though planted here with wonderful rapidity by the apostles and primitive fathers, suffered an almost total eclipse by the conquests of the Sara­cens, and afterwards of the Turks. Incredible indeed have been the hazards, perils, and sufferings of catholic missionaries, to propagate their doctrines in the most distant regions, and among the grossest idolaters; but their labours have hitherto failed of success, owing in a great measure to their own avarice, and the avarice and profligacy of the Europeans, who resort thither in search of wealth and do­minion.

The principal languages spoken in Asia are, the modern Greek, the Turki [...], the Russian, the Tartarian, the Persian, the Arabic, the Mal [...]yan the Chinese, and the Japanese. The European languages are also spoken upon the coasts of India and China.

The continent of Asia is situated between 25 and 180 degrees of [...] longitude, and between the equator, and 80 degrees of north lati­tude. It is about 4740 miles in length, from the Dardanelles on the [...] the eastern shore of Tartary; and about 4380 miles in [...], from the most southern part of Malacca, to the most north­ [...] cape of Nova Zembla. It is bounded by the Frozen Ocean on [...] north; on the west it is separated from Africa by the Red Sea, and from Europe by the Levant or Mediterranean, the Archipelago, [...] Hellespont, the sea of Ma [...]mora, the Bosphorus, the Black Sea, [...] river Don, and a line drawn from it to the river Tobol, and from [...]ence to the river Oby, which falls into the Frozen Ocean. On the [...], it is bounded by the Pacific Ocean, or South-Sea, which sepa­rates it from America; and on the south, by the Indian Ocean; so that it is almost surrounded by the sea. The principal regions which [...] this country are as follow▪

[Page 386]

  Nations. Leng. Bread. Square Miles. Chief Cities. Diff. and bearing fr. Lond. Diff. of time from London. Religions
Tartary. Russian The bounds of these parts are unlimited, each power pushing on hisconquests as far as he can 3,050,000 Tobolsk 2160 N. E. 4 10 bef. Ch. & Pag
Chinese 644,000 Chynian 4480 N. E. 8 4 bef. Pagans
Mogulean 185,350 TIbet 3780 E. 5 40 bef. Pagans
Independ. 600,060 Samar­eand 2800 E. 4310 4 36 bef. Pagans
  China 144 1000 1,105,000 Peking 4320 S. E. 7 24 bef. Pagans
  Magols 2000 1500 1,916,500 Delhi 3720 S. E. 5 10 bef. Moh. & P.
  Ind. beyond the Ganres 2000 1000 741,500 Siam Pegu 5040 S. E. 6 44 bef. M. & Pag.
Persia 1300 1100 800,000 [...]ahan 2460 S. E. 3 20 bef. Mahom.
Turkey in Asia. Pt. of Arabia [...] 1300 1200 700,000 [...]cca 2640 S. E. 2 52 bef. Mahom.
Syr [...]a. 270 160 29,000 [...]eppo 1860 S. E. 2 30 bef. Ch. & M [...].
Holy land 210 90 7,600 Jerusalem 1920 S. E. 2 24 bef. Ch. & M [...].
Natolia 750 390 195,000 Burla or [...]myrn [...] 1440 S. E. 1 48 bef. Mahom.
Diarbeck or Mesopotam. 240 210 27,600 Diarbeck 2060 S. E. 2 56 bef. Maha­metans with some few Chris­tians.
trac, or Chalde [...] 420 240 50,400 Bagdad 2240  
Turcumania of Armenia 360 300 55,000 Erzerum 1860 S. E. 2 44 bef.
Georgia 240 180 25,600 Te [...]rs 1920 E. 3 10 bef.
Curditan or Assivia 210 20 [...] 23,900 Scherazer 2220 E. 3 00 bef. Maham.

All the islands of Asia (except Cyprus, already described, in the Levant, belonging to the Turks) lie in the Pacific or Eastern Ocean, and the Indian Seas, of which the principal, where the Europeans trade, or have settlements, are,

Islands. Towns. Sq. Miles. Tradewith or belon.
The Japanese isles Jeddo, Meaco 138,000 Dutch
The Ladrones Guam   Spain
Formosa Tai-ouan-fou 17,000 China
Anian Kionteheow 11,900
The Philippines Minills 133,700 Spain
The Molucca or Clove isles Victoria fort, Ternate   Dutch
The Banda, or Nutmeg isles Lantor   Dutch
Amboyna surrounding the Molucca & Banda isles Amboyna 400 Dutch
Celebes Macassar 68,400 Dutch
Gilolo, &c. Gilolo 10,400 Dutch
The Sunda isles Borneo Borneo, Cayteng [...]e 228,000 All nations
Sumatra Achen, Bencoolen 129,000 English and Dutch
Java, &c. Baravia, Bantam 38,250 Dutch
The Andama & Nicobar isles Andaman, Nicobar   All nations
Ceylon Candy 27,730 Du [...]s
The Maldives Caridon   All nation
Bombay Bombay   English
The Kurile isles, and those in the sea of Kamtschatka, lately discovered by the Russians. Russia
[Page 387]

TURKEY IN ASIA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length [...]000 Miles. between Degrees. 27 and 46 east longitude. Sq. Miles. 520,820.
Breadth 800 Miles. Degrees. 28 and 45 north latitude. Sq. Miles. 520,820.

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED by the Black Sea and Circassia, on the north; by Persia, on the east; by Ara­bic and the Levant Sea, on the south; and by the Archipelago, the H [...]llespont, and Propontis, which separate it from Europe, on the west.

Divisions. Subdivisions. Chief towns.
The eastern provinces are 1. Eyraca of Arabic or Chaldea Bassora and Bagdad.
2. Diarbec or Mesopotamia Diarbec, Orfa & Mousul.
3. Curdistan or Assyria Nineveh and Betlis.
4. Turcomanla or Armenia Erzerun and Van.
5. Georgia, including Men­grelia and Imaretta, and part of Circassia. Teflis, Amarchia, and Gonie.
K [...]lia, or the Lesser Asia, on the west. 1. Natolia Proper Bursa, Nici, Smyrna, and Ephesus.
2. Amasia Amasia, Trapesond, and Sinope.
3. Aladulia Ajazzo and Marat.
4. Caramania Satalia and Taresso,
West of the Levant Sea. Saria, with Palestine, or the Holy Land. Aleppo, Antioch, Damas­cus, Tyre, Sidon, Tripoli, Scanderoon & Jerusalem,

MOUNTAINS.] These are famous in sacred as well as profane writings. The most remarkable are, Olympus, Taurus and Anti­ [...]arus; Caucasus and Ararat; Lebanon and Hermon.

RIVERS.] The same may be observed of the rivers, which are the [...]phrates, Tigris, Orontos, Meander, Sarabat; Kara; and Jordan.

WEALTH AND COMMERCE.] The Turkish dominions, including, besides, the above specified possessions in Europe, the provinces of Asia Minor, Georgia, Mingrelia, Armenia, Bagdad, Aleppo, Damascus, Palaestina, part of Arabia and Egypt, belong to those parts of the world, which enjoy the most delightful climate, and the happiest situ­ation for commerce and the acquisition of opulence. Nature has poured out her gifts on these provinces with profusion. But the ty­ [...]nical government now prevailing in this large part of the world being hostile to industry and population, renders this immense empire wretched and indigent.

Besides the finest natural productions which are found in Spain and [...] Turkey in Europe abounds in horses, and in various sorts of excellent peltry, supplied by the wild beasts in the mountainous and [...]cedy parts of the provinces. It produces also a great deal of cotton. [...], manna, goats hair, which resembles silk in softness, especially [...] fort called camel-hair.

[Page 388] The province of Walachia in particular, produces, in good years, 5,000,000 cymers of wine, the cymer weighing 22½lb. Three small islands in the Archipelago, Methalika, Patrazzo, and Rostizza, yield about 800,000lb. of currants. Honey and wax is produced in great abundance in Moldavia; the tenth part of the profits from the hires yields a revenue of 200,000 dollars to the Hospodar, or prince of Moldavia. (Sulzer.) Livadia, Macedonia, and Candia, produce annual­ly upwards 3,000,000lb. of honey, of which about one-fourth is ex­ported. (Sprengel.) Most provinces raise, or might raise, excellent silk in considerable quantities. That which is raised in the province of Macedonia is estimated to amount to 100,000lb. and at Thessalonica, or Salonichi, to the amount of 500,000 piasters, is annually sold. Cotton is likewise found chiefly in Macedonia, which province ex­ports 120,000 balls, sold at 80 piasters each. The French purchase annually 12,000 balls at Salonichi, the English for 400,000 piasters, the Italians for 240,000, and the Germans for 1,700,000 piasters, (Sprengel.) Tobacco is exported from the same place to Italy, to the amount of 290,000 piasters.

The provinces of Moldavia and Wallachia possess immense masses of salt-rock, connected with the great rock strata of Gallicia and Tran­sylvania; and the prince of Wallachia gains upwards of 500,000 flor­ins annually by the salt-works at Riamick. (Sulzer.) Moldavia abounds in buffalos and oxen, of which 40,000 head are sold to the neighbouring provinces; nearly as many horses are annually sold in this province. (Boscowich.) In the same fertile districts, great num­bers of sheep are bred, reckoned to amount to 4,000,000. Besides the profits arising from the wool, the skins of these sheep, and skins of goats, are used in making Sassian and Morocco leather. Bosnia and Servia sell about 40,000 hogs annually to Hungary. The wines of Greece, and its olive oil, are very celebrated for their excellence.

In the extensive dominions of Turkey, which are bordered by great ridges of mountains, the mineral kingdom might yield extraordi­nary riches; but the science of mining is as much neglected by the Turks as all other sciences. They have, however, begun to search for copper and iron in Wallachia; and the gold dust, washed down by the rivers of that province, gives sufficient indication of what may be expected to be found in its mountains. The several sorts of marble found in Greece have been highly esteemed in ancient and modern times. Sulphur, allum, saltpetre, asphaltes, and other valuable min­erals, are found in plenty.

If we consider the natural riches of the Asiatic provinces and of Egypt, we cease to wonder how the Turks, notwithstanding their aversion to industry and manufactures, are no losers by their trade, of which the balance is rather in their favour. From Turkey the follow­ing goods are exported: Cotton, Silk, wool, camel yarn, leather, coffee, wine, rice, fruits, tobacco, honey, wax, cattle, marble, &c. The imports consist in woollens, corn, indigo, [...] coche [...]ille, spices, glass, hard-ware, and East-India goods. The Turks are no great los­ers by their trade with France; they lose not much by their trade with the Dutch; and they seem to be gainers by that with England. In 1785, the goods exported from Turkey to England amounted to [Page 389] 146,906l. sterl. the goods imported from England into Turkey to only [...],499l. sterl. They are likewise gainers; by their trade to Germany and Hungary: The imports from the latter kingdom into Turkey amounted, in 1778, to only 241,773 florins, whereas the Turkish goods sold to Hungary amounted to 1,328,337 florins. From these benefits derived from trade, even with the present inconsiderable shipping em­ployed in it, and notwithstanding the want of manufactures, we may infer how great the profits of commerce might be rendered, if industry should ever be so far encouraged as to bear a just proportion to the natural wealth of the country.

The principal trading towns in Turkey are the cities of Constantino­ple, Smyrna, Aleppo, Damascus, Alexandria, and Salonichi.

GOVERNMENT.] The government of the Turkish empire is des­p [...]tical; the life and property of the subject depend on the will of the Sultan, who is the only free man in his dominions, and who exacts a blind obedience to his will as a civil and religious duty. Yet the em­peror is restrained, in some measure, by the same religious system on which his arbitrary power is founded, and still more by the intrigues of the principal officers of his court or seraglio, who are possessed of the actual power of which the Sultan enjoys only the appearance. The great influence of the army, and, now and then, a sense of op­pression which rouses the people to rebellion, are likewise objects of error, and have often proved fatal to these arbitrary monarchs. The Turkish throne is hereditary in the family of Osman: After the ex­tinction of the lineal descendants of this prince, of whom there are few remaining, the right of succession devolves on the family of Ghe­ [...], Chan of the Crimea.

The supreme council of state is called the divan. The regular of ordinary divan is composed of the high officers of state; and, on par­ticular emergencies, an extraordinary divan is held, which consists, besides these officers, of other persons of experience and knowledge of the law, called in by the ministers to assist in their deliberations. At both meetings the Grand Sultan is usually present, but only in an ad­joining apartment, where he many hear the advice of his ministers: The president of the divan is the grand visier as first minister, whose power in the state is exceedingly great, but whose place is very preca­rious, and generally fatal to the possessor. The provinces of the em­pire are ruled by governors, called Bashaws, who exercise nearly the same arbitrary power over the subject provinces, which the Sultan has over the whole empire. The connexion of the distant provinces with the seat of the empire is very weak, and often shaken by rebellions, and the quarrels of the Bashaws. All public offices are bought, and of course generally filled with the worst and most rapacious persons. The Hospodars, or princes of Wallachia and Moldavia, pay very large [...] to the Grand Sultan for their dignities, and they indemnify them­selves by extortions from their subjects.

The Turkish laws are contained in the Koran, in the code of laws collected by Soliman II. and, in dubious cases, the decisions of the [...], the chief of the Mohometan church, have the authority of [...]. Each town has its court of justice, consisting the superior Judge or cadi, who is called molla in the larger towns, under whom there is an inferior judge and a clerk. In the provinces, the Bashaws [Page 390] are supreme judges. From the decisions of the magistrates of the towns, appeal may be made to the Cadi [...]. or superior judges of the army, in Rumilia and Anadoli. From these, appeal li [...] in the last instance to a divan, held expressly, for that purpose, by the Grand Visier, at his own house.

The Greeks, subject to the Grand Sultan, have their own courts of justice.

FINANCES.] The public revenue amounts to 30,000,000 dollars, o [...] [...]9,9 [...]5 purses, at 500 p [...]ters each.

It is very difficult to state the revenue of the Turkish emperor with any degree of accuracy, as a very considerable part of it is irregularly levied on the subject, and liable to great variations. The [...]i [...]i, or pub­lic treasury, is reckoned to receive annually about [...]0,000,000 dollars. But there are, besides the miri, two other treasuries, the private cha­ [...]oustle of the emperor, called chasna, and the treasury of the [...]. The ordinary revenue paid annually into the chasns, [...] to 600,000 dollars; but a much larger sum arises from confiscated [...] and property, from the exchange and the sale of public offices from seizures of the fortunes of rich private persons, to whom the emperor declares himself heir, and from various other extortions.

In 1776, the revenues was collected in the following manner:

1. Amount of the Charatsch, or capitation of such subjects in Europe, as are not mussulmen, and who are not under the immediate protection of foreign ambassadors. Florins 11, [...],000
2. Charatsch of Asia, 8,16 [...],000
3.—of Cyprus, Candia, and the Archipelago 1,3 [...],000
4.—of Egypt. 7 [...],000
5. Other revenues from Asia and Egypt. 850,000
6. Contributions of the tributary nations of Asia. 2, [...]0, [...]00
7. Tribute of the Hospodars of Wallachia and Moldavia 1,400,000
8. Domaine of the emperor, including the revenues from fisheries 2,390,000
9. Customs a [...] Constantinople, and duty on tobacco 2, [...]0,000
10. Farm of the salt and mines 12,500,000
11. Revenue from Mecca and Medina 1,640,000
12. Extraordinary revenue from inheritance and confis­cation. [...],17 [...],000
Upwards of 53,000,000

In the same year the public expenditure was said to amount only to 44,495,000 florins. This statement is taken from the statistical tables, published at Vi [...]una, the author of which, from the vicinity of that capital to Turkey, was likely to be best acquainted with the pres­ent state of the latter. The department of the treasury, [...] is divided into twelve bureaux: The first minister of finances is called Desterdar. In every province the officers and collectors of the reve­nue are very numerous and oppressive.

ARMY.] It is usually estimated at 300,000 men, nor is it at all diffi­cult to raise so large a number of men in time of war, if all those [...] dis­ciplined crowds are taken into the account, which flock together from all parts to the standard of Mahomet. But even a regular [...] disci­plined army of 300,000 men, would not be 100 large for an empire of [Page 391] south extent, and which contains such great numbers of inhabitants. About one half of the above number may be considered as of real use; and this was the actual force of the empire in the beginning of the into Russian war.

NAVY.] About 60 ships of war.

In the year 1786, the Turks had actually 30 ships of the line, of two men each, and 40 galleys, 140 men each; and this number was intended to be increased.

In any extraordinary exigency the Turks are able to fit out 40 ships of the line of 800 men each

40 gallies 140
20 caravellas 300
100 galliots 60

Total 200 ships of war, and 50,000 sea troops, or leventi. The [...] under the protection of the Porte, viz. Algiers, Tunis, and Tri­ [...], are obliged to furnish ten ships of the line.

RELIGION.] The established religion in this empire is the Ma­ [...]tan, of the sect of the Sunnites: The heretical sect of the Sha­ [...] in, however, tolerated; all other religions are likewise included in this system of toleration, on paying a certain capitation. Among the Christians residing in Turkey, those of the orthodox Greek re­ligion are the most numerous, and they enjoy several priviliges; they [...], for instance, be advanced to dignities and posts of trust and prof­ [...] on to the princely dignity of Moldavia and Wallachia, to the place of body physicians and interpreters of the imperial court. The [...] are, in religious matters, subject to the patriarch of Constanti­ [...], who is considered as the chief of the Greek church and nation, and whose authority and jurisdiction is extensive. Other branches of [...] Greek church are the Armenians, Nestorians, Maronites, Coptes, and others.

The Turkish clergy is numerous: This body is composed of all the [...]ed in that empire; and they are likewise the only teachers of [...] law, who must be consulted in all important cases. In their ca­pacity of lawyers, or interpreters of the Koran, which, in most ca­ [...] in the code of laws, the clergy are called ylana, or the instructed in the law. The Grand Sultan himself as caliph, or successor to the [...] Mahomet, is their head; but their actual chief is the Mufti, [...] of great authority and political influence. The Sultan has the power of deposing the Mufti, but he cannot take his property [...], which is considered as sacred. The successors or descend­ [...] of Mahomet, who are called emirs, or sheriffs, enjoy the same [...]. Those persons or priests, who are employed in the rises of [...] worship, are called Imans; and the Mahometan temples [...] by the name of Mosques. There are, among the Turks, [...] religious orders; their Monks are called Dervises, and lead, in general, a very austere life. The Mosques are very richly endowed, [...] estates which they have acquired are become sacred, and can­ [...] taken away even by the most arbitrary despots. Many opulent [...] assign their estates over to the Mosques, even in their life [...] and pay them a small annual rent, which ensures them the pos­ [...] during life; after their death, the whole is the property of the [...]

[Page 392] Jews are very numerous in Turkey: They are subject to a chief of their own nation, called Cochan Pascha, whose power over them is even greater than that which the Patriarch exercises over the Greek Christians. Gypsies are found in all provinces. Upon the whole, the number of Mahometans is greater than that of the subjects of other religious denominations.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MAN­NERS, CUSTOMS, AND DIVERSIONS.} The population of this great country is by no [...] equal either to its extent or fertility, not have the best geographers been able to ascertain it, because of the uncertainty of its limits. It certainly is not so great as it was before the Christian aera, or even un­der the Roman emperors; owing to various causes, and above all, so the tyranny under which the natives live, and their polygamy, which is undoubtedly an enemy to population; as may be evinced from many reasons, and particularly because the Greeks and Armenians, among whom it is not practised, are incomparably more p [...]oli [...]ie than the Turks, notwithstanding the rigid subjection in which they are kept by the latter. The plague is another cause of depopulation. The Turkish emperor, however, has more subjects than any two European [...]. The probable number of inhabitants we have mentioned in the table.

As to the inhabitants, they are generally well made and robust men; when young; their complexions are fair, and their faces handsome; their hair and eyes are black or dark brown. The women, when young; are commonly handsome, but they generally look old at thirty. In their demeanour, the Turks are rather hypoch [...]ndraic, grave, [...] ­date, and passive: In matters of religion, tenacious, superstitions, and morose. The morals of the Asiatic Turks are preferable to those of the European. They are hospitable to strangers: They are likewise said to be charitable to one another, and punctual in their dealings. Their charity and public spirit is most conspicuous in their building c [...]tavan­feras, or places of entertainment, on roads that are destitute of accom­modations, for the refreshment of poor pilgrims or travellers. With the same laudable view they search out the best springs, and dig well as which in those countries are a luxury to weary travellers. The Turks sit cross legged upon mats, not only at their meals but in company. Their ideas, except what they acquire from opium, are simple and con­fined, seldom reaching without the walls of their own houses; where they fit conversing with their women, drinking coffee, smoking tobac­co, or chewing opium. They have little curiosity to be informed of the state of their own or any other country. If a visier, bashaw, or other officer, is turned out, or strangled, they say no more on the oc­casion, than that there will be a new visier or governor, seldom inquir­ing into the reason of the disgrace of the former minister. They have few printed books, and seldom read any other than the Koran, and the comments upon it. Nothing is negociated in Turkey without p [...] ­ents; and here justice may commonly be bought and sold.

The Turks dine about eleven o'clock in the forenoon, and they [...] at five in the winter, and six in the summer, and this is their principal meal. Among the great people, their dishes are served up one by [...]; but they have neither knife nor fork, and they are not permitted by other religion to use gold or silver spoons. Their victuals are always high seasoned. Rice is the common food of the lower sort, and some­times [Page 393] it is boiled up with gravy; but their chief dish is pilau, which is mutton and fowl boiled to rags, and the rice being boiled quite dry, the soup is high seasoned, and poured upon it. They drink water, [...], and coffee; and the only debauch they know is in opium, which gives them sensations resembling those of intoxication. Guests of higher rank sometimes have their beard perfumed by a female slave of the family. They are temperate and sober from a principle of their religion, which forbids them the use of wine; though in private many of them indulge themselves in the use of strong liquors. Their com­mon salutation is by an inclination of the head, and laying their right hand on their breast. They sleep in linen waistcoats and drawers upon [...], and cover themselves with a quilt. Few or none of the con­siderable inhabitants of this vast empire have any notion of walking or riding either for health or diversion. The most religious among them [...], however, sufficient exercise when they conform themselves to the frequent ablutions, prayers, and rites prescribed them by Mahomet.

Their active diversions consist in shooting at a mark, or tilting it with darts, at which they are very expert. Some of their great men are fond of hunting, and take the field with numerous equipages, which are joined by their inferiors; but this is often done for politi­cal purposes, that they may know the strength of their dependants. Within doors, the chess or draught board are their usual amusements; and if they play at chance games they never bet money, that being exhibited by the Koran.

DRESS.] The men shave their heads, leaving a lock on the crown, and wear their beards long. They cover their heads with a turban, and never put it off but when they sleep. Their shirts are without collar or wristband, and over them they throw a long vest, which they tie with a sash, and over the vest they wear a loose gown somewhat shorter. Their breeches, or drawers, are of a piece with their stock­ings; and instead of shoes they wear slippers, which they put off when they enter a temple or house. They suffer no Christians, or other peo­ple, to wear white turbans. The dress of the women differs little from that of the men, only they wear stiffened caps upon their heads with [...]rns something like a mi [...]re, and wear their hair down. When they appear abroad, they are so muffled up as not to be known by their near­est relations. Such of the women as are virtuous make no use of paint [...] heighten their beauty, or to disguise their complexion; but they [...] tinge their hands and feet with kenna, which gives them a deep yellow. The men make use of the same expedient to colour their [...].

MARRIAGES.] Marriages in this country are chiefly negociated by the ladies. When the terms are agreed upon, the bridegroom pays [...] a sum of money, a licence is taken out from the cadi, or proper magistrate, and the parties are married. The bargain is celebrated, as in other nations, with mirth and jollity; and the money is generally employed in furnishing the house of the young couple. They are not [...] by their law more than four wives, but they may have as many [...]bines as they can maintain. Accordingly, besides their wives, [...] wealthy Turks keep a kind of Seraglio of women; but all these [...]lgencies are sometimes insufficient to gratify their unnatural [...].

[Page 394] FUNERALS.] The burials of the Turks are decent. The [...] is attended by the relations, chanting passages from the Koran; and [...] being deposited in a mosque (for so they call their temples) they are buried in a field by the iman or priest, who pronounces a funeral [...] ­mon at the time of the interment. The male relations express their sorrow by alms and prayers; the women, by decking the [...] [...] certain days with flowers and green leaves; and in mourning [...] husband they wear a particular head dress, and leave of all [...] the twelve months.

LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN.] The Turks till of late [...] a sovereign contempt for our learning. Greece, which was the [...] country of genius, arts, and sciences, produces at present, [...] Turks, numerous, bands of Christian bishops, priests, and months, [...] in general are as ignorant as the Turks themselves, and are divided [...] to various absurd sects of what they call Christianity. The education of the Turks seldom extends farther than reading the Turkish lan­guage and the Koran, and writing a common letter. Some [...] understand astronomy, so far as to calculate the time of an [...] but the number of these being very small, they are looked upon [...] ex­traordinary persons.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} These are so various, [...] have furnished matter for [...] voluminous publications, and others are appearing every day. Th [...] countries contained all that was rich and magnificent in archi [...] and sculpture; and neither the barbarity of the Turks, nor the d [...] ­dations they have suffered from the Europeans, seem to have di [...] ­ed their number. They are more of less perfect, according to the [...], soil, or climate, in which they stand, and all of them bear [...] marks of neglect. Many of the finest temples are converted into Turk­ish mosques, or Greek churches, and are more disfigured than [...] which remain in ruins. Amidst such a plenitude of curiosities, and that can be done here is to select some of the most striking; and I shall begin with Balbec and Palmyra, which form the pride of all anti [...].

Balbec is situated on a rising plain, between Tripoli in Syria and [...] mascus, at the foot of Mount Libanu [...], and in the Heliopolis of [...] Syria. Its remains of antiquity display, according to the best judging the boldest plan that ever was attempted in architecture. The portion of the temple of Heliopolis is inexpressibly superb, though dis [...]d by two Turkish towers. The hexagonal court behind it to [...] known only by the magnificence of its ruins. Their walls were a­dorned with Corinthian pilasters and statues, and it opens into a quad­rangular court of the same tasto and grandour. The great temples [...] which this leads is now so ruined, that it is known only by an [...] ­ture, supported by nine lofty columns, each consisting of three [...] joined together, by iron pins, without cement. Some of these [...] [...] a foot long, and a foot in diameter; and the forded Turks are [...] [...] work to destroy the columns, for the sake of the iron. A small [...] is still standing, with a pedestal of eight columns in front, and [...] [...] flank, and every where richly ornamented with figures in [...] [...] expressing the heads of gods, horses, and emperors, and part of the an­cient mythology. To the west of this temple is another, of a [...] form, of the Corinthian and Ionic order, but disfigured with Turkish [Page 395] mosques and houses. The other parts of this ancient city are propor­ [...]ably beautiful and stupendous.

Various have been the conjectures concerning the founders of these immense buildings. The inhabitants of Asia ascribe them to Solomon, [...] some make them so modern as the time of Antoninus Pius. Per­haps they are of different aeras; and though that prince and his suc­cessors may have rebuilt some part of them, yet the boldness of their architecture, the beauty of their ornaments, and the stupendous exa­mination of the whole, seem to fix their foundation to a period before the Christian aera, but without mounting to the ancient times of the Jews of the phoenicians, who probably knew little of the Greek style in building and ornamenting. Balbec, is at present a little city, encompassed with a wall. The inhabitants, who are about 5000 in number, chiefly Greeks, live in or near the circular temple, in houses built out of the [...] ruins. A free stone quarry, in the neighbourhood, furnished the [...] for the body of the temple; and one of the stones not quite [...] from the bottom of the quarry, is 70 feet long, 14 broad, and [...] [...] five inches deep, and reduced to our measure in 1135 tons. A course, white marble quarry, at a greater distance, furnished the orna­mental parts.

P [...]myra, or, as it was called by the ancients. Tadmor in the Desert, situated in the wilds of Arabia Petrae, about 33 deg. N. lat. and 200 miles to the south east of Aleppo. It is approached through a narrow [...], lined as it were with the remains of antiquity; and, opening [...] at once, the eye is presented with the most striking objects that are in [...] found in the world. The temple of the Sun lies in ruins; but the access to it is through a vast number of beautiful Corinthian col­umn of white marble, the grandeur and beauty of which can only be [...]own by the plates of it, which have been drawn and published by Mr. [...], who, with his friends, paid it a visit some years ago, purposely to preserve some remembrance of such a curiosity. As those drawings, [...] copies from them are now common, we must refer the reader [...] them, especially as he can form no very adequate ideas of [...] from a printed relation. Superb arches, amazing columns, a [...] extending 4000 feet in length, terminated by a noble mau­ [...], temples, fine porticos, peristyles, intercolumniations, and en­ [...]tures, all of them in the highest style, and finished with the most beautiful materials, appear on all hands, but so dispersed and disjointed, that it is impossible from them to form an idea of the whole when per­ [...]. These striking ruins are contrasted by the miserable huts of the [...] Arabs, who reside in or near them.

Nothing but ocular proof could convince any man, that so superb [...] only, formerly 10 miles in circumference, could exist in the midst of that now are tracts of barren uninhabitable sands. Nothing however is there certain, than that Palmyra was formerly the capital of a great [...]; that it was the pride as well as the emporium of the eastern [...], and that its merchants dealt with the Romans, and the western [...], for the merchandises and luxuries of India and Arabia. Its [...] altered situation, therefore, can be accounted for only by nat­ [...], which, have turned the more fertile tracts into barren [...] The Asiatics think that Palmyra, as well as Balbec, owes its [...] to Solomon; and in this they receive some countenance from [...] history. In profane history it is not mentioned before the time [Page 396] of Mavc Anthony; and its most superb buildings, are thought [...] of the lower empire, about the time of Gallienus. Odenathus, the [...] king of Palmyra, was highly caressed by that emperor, and [...] de­clared Augustus. His widow Zenobia reigned in great glory [...] for some time, and Longinus, the celebrated critic, was her secret [...] Not being able to brook the Roman tyranny, she declared war against the emperor Aurelian, who took her prisoner, led her in triumph [...]o [...] and butchered her principal nobility, and among others the [...] Longinus. He afterwards destroyed her city, and massacred its inhab­itants, but expended large sums out of Zenobia [...]s treasures in [...] the temple of the Sun, the majestic ruins of which have been mention­ed. This, it must be acknowledged, is but a very lame account [...] celebrated city; nor do any of the Palmyrene inscriptions reach, [...] the Christian aera, though there can be no doubt that the city itself, [...] of much higher antiquity. The emperor Justinian, made some, [...] to restore it to its ancient splendor, but without effect, for it [...] by degrees to its present wretched state. It has been observed [...] Justly, that its architecture, and the proportions of its columns▪ [...] by no means equal in purity to those of Balbec.

Nothing can be more futile than the boasted antiquities [...] the Greek and Armenian priests in and near Jerusalem, which [...] [...]own to have been so often razed to the ground, and rebuilt [...] that no scene of our Saviour's life and sufferings can be a [...] and yet those ecclesiastics subsist by their forgeries, and pretending [...] guide travellers to every spot mentioned in the Old and New Te [...] ­ment. They are, it is true, under severe contributions to the Turks, but the trade still goes on, though much diminished in its profits, [...] church of the Holy sepulchre, as it is called, said to be built by, H [...] ­na, mother to Constantine the Great, is still standing, and of [...] good architecture; but its different divisions, and the [...] made round it, are chiefly calculated to support the forgeries of the keepers. Other churches, built by the same lady, are found in Pales­tine; but the country is so altered in its appearance and qualities, that it is one of the most despicable of any in Asia, and it is in vain for a modern traveller to attempt to [...] in it any vestiges of the kingdom, of David and Solomon. But let a fertile country be under the frowns of heaven, and abandoned to tyranny an [...]vild Arabs, it [...] in time become a desert. Thus oppression soon thinned the [...] plains of Italy, and the noted countries of Greece and Asia the [...] once the glory of the world, are now nearly destitute of learning, [...] and people.

Mecca and Modina are curiosities only through the superstition [...] the Mahometans. Their buildings are mean, when compared [...] rope [...] houses or churches; and even the temple of Mecca, in point of architecture, makes but a sorry appearance, though erected on the [...] where the great prophet is said to have been born. The same [...] said of the mosque at Modina, where that impostor was buried [...] the vast sums spent yearly by Mahomet [...]n pilgrims, in visiting [...] places, are undoubtedly converted to temporal uses. I shall not [...] the reader with any accounts of the spot which is said to have [...] Paradise, and to have been situated between the river Euphra [...] and Tigris, where there are some tracts which undoubtedly [...] that [Page 397] [...]. The different ruins, some of them inexpressibly magnificent, [...] are to be found in those immense regions, cannot be appropriated with any certainty to their original founders; so great is the ignorance i [...] which they have been buried for these thousand years past. It is indeed easy to pronounce whether the style of their buildings be Greek, Roman, or Saracen; but all other information must come [...] their inscriptions.

The neighbourhood of Smyrna (now called Ismir) contains many [...]ble antiquities. The same many be said of Aleppo, and a number [...] places celebrated in antiquity, and now known only by geo­graphical observations. The seat of Old Troy cannot be distinguished by the smallest vestige, and is known only by its b [...]ing opposite to the [...] of Tenedos, and the name of a brook, which the poets magnified, into a wonderful river. A temple of marble built in honour of Au­ [...] Caesar, at Milasso in Caria, and a few structures of the same [...], in the neighbourhood, are among the antiquities that are still en­ [...]. Three theatres of white marble, and a noble circus near Laodi­ [...], now Latichea, have suffered very little from time or barbarism; and some travellers think that they discern the ruins of the celebrated [...] of Diana, near Ephesus.

CHIEF CITIES, MOSQUES, AND OTHER BUILDINGS.} These are very numerous, and at the same time very insignificant, be­ [...] they have little or no trade, and are greatly decayed from their [...]ent grandeur. Scanderoon stands upon the site of Old Alexan­ [...] but it is now almost depopulated. Superb remains of antiquity are [...] in its neighbourhood. Aleppo, however, preserves a respecta­ [...] [...]ank among the cities of the Asiatic Turkey. It is still the capital of Syria, and is superior in its buildings and conveniences to most of the Turkish cities. Its houses, as usual in the East, consist of a large [...], with a dead wall to the street, an arcade or piazza running [...]nd it, paved with marble, and an elegant fountain of the same in the middle. Aleppo and its [...]burbs are seven miles in compass, stand­ing on eight small hills, on the highest top of which the citadel or [...] is erected, but of no great strength. An old wall and a broad [...], now in many places turned into gardens, surround the city, which contains 235,000 inhabitants, of whom 30,000 are Christians, [...] 5000 are Jew. It is furnished with most of the conveniences of [...] excepting good water, within the walls, and even that is supplied [...]an aqueduct, distant about four miles, said to have been erected by [...] empress Helena. The streets are narrow, but well paved with [...] square stones, and are kept very clean. Their gardens are pleas­ [...], being laid out in vineyards, olive, fig, and pistachio trees; but the country round it rough and barren. Foreign merchants are numerous [...], and transact their business in caravanseras, or large square build­ings, containing their ware-houses, lodging-rooms, and compting­ [...]ses. The city abounds in neat, and some of them magnificent [...]ques, public bagnios, which are very refreshing, and bazars, or [...] places, which are formed into long, narrow, arched or covered [...], with little shops, as in other parts of the East. Their coffee is [...]ent, and considered by the Turks as a high luxury; and their [...] meats and fruits are delicious. European merchants [...]ye here in [...] splendor and safety than in any other city of the Turkish em­pire, [Page 398] which is owing to particular capitulations with the [...] Coaches or carriages are not used here, but persons of quality ride on horse-back with a number of servants before them according to their rank. The English, French and Dutch, have consuls, who are much respected, and appear abroad, the English especially, with mar [...]s or distinction.

The heat of the country makes it convenient for the inhabitants [...] sleep in the open air, here, over all Arabia, and many other parts of the East, for which reason their houses are flat on the top. This prac­tice accounts for the early acquaintance those nations had with astron­omy, and the motions of the heavenly bodies, and explains some [...] of the holy scripture. As the Turks are very uniform in their way of living, this account of Aleppo may give the reader an idea of the other Turkish cities.

Bagdad, built upon the Tigris, not far, it is supposed, from the [...] of ancient Babylon, is the capital of the ancient Chaldea, and was the metropolis of the caliphate, under the Saracens in the twelfth century. This city retains but few marks of its ancient grandeur. It is in the form of an irregular square, and rudely fortified, but the conveniency of its situation renders it one of the seats of the Turkish government, and it has still a considerable trade, being annually visited by the Smyrna, Aleppo, and western caravans. The houses of Bagdad are generally large, built of brick and cement, and arched over to admit the freer circulation of the air; many of their windows are made of elegant Venetian glass, and the ceiling ornamented with chequ [...] work. Most of the houses have also a court-yard before them, in the middle of which is a small plantation of orange trees. The number of houses is computed at 80,000, each of which pays an annual tribute [...] the Bashaw, which is calculated to produce 300,000l. sterling. Their bazars, in which the tradesmen have their shops, are tolerably hand­some, large and extensive, filled with shops of all kinds of merchan­dize, to the number of 12,000. These were erected by the Persians, when they were in possession of the place, as were also their bagnios, and almost every thing here worthy the notice of a traveller. In this city are five mosques, two of which are well built, and have handsome domes, covered with varnished tiles of different colours. Two chap­els are permitted for those of the Romish and Greek persuasions. On the north-west corner of the city stands the castle, which is of white stone, and commands the river, consisting of curtains and bastions, on which some large canon are mounted, with two mortars in each b [...]s­tion, but in the year 1779, they were so honey-combed and bad, as to be supposed not to support firing. Below the castle by the water-side, is the palace of the Turkish governor; and there are several summer-houses on the river, which make a fine appearance. The Arabians, who inhabited this city under the caliphs, were remarkable for the purity and elegance of their dialect.

Ancient Affyria is now called the Turkish Curdistan, though part of it is subject to the Persians. The capital is Curdistan; the ancient Nineveh being now a heap of ruins. Curdistan is said to be for the most part cut out of a mountain, and is the residence of a vic [...]r [...]y, [...] ­beglerbeg. Orfa, formerly Edessa, is the capital of the fine province of Mesocpotamia. It is now a mean place, and chiefly supported by a [Page 399] manufacture of Turkey leather. Mousul is also in the same province, a large place situated on the west shore of the Tigris, opposite to where Nineveh formerly stood.

Georgia, or Gurgistan, now no longer subject to the Turks, is chiefly peopled by Christians, a brave, warlike race of men. Their capital, Teflis, i [...] a handsome city, and makes a fine appearance, its inhabitants being [...] 30,000. It is situated at the foot of a mountain, by the side of the river Kur, and is surrounded by strong walls, except on the side of the river. It has a large fortress on the declivity of the mountain, which is a place of refuge for criminals and debtors, and the garrison consists of native Persians. There are fourteen churches in Teflis, fix of which belong to the Georgians, and the rest to the Armenians; the Mahometans who are here, have no mosques. In the neighbour­hood of the city are many pleasant houses, and fine gardens. The Georgians in general are by some travellers said to be the handsomest people in the world; and some think that they early received the practice of inoculation for the small-pox. They make no scruple o [...] [...]ing and drinking wines in their capital, and other towns; and their [...]our has procured them many distinguishing liberties and privileges. Lately they have formed an alliance with Russia, and claimed its pro­tection.

The ancient cities of Damafcus, Tyre, and Sidon▪ still retain part of their former trade. Damascus is called Sham, and the approach to it by the river is inexpressibly beautiful. It contains a fine mosque, which was formerly a Christian church. It still is famous for its steel [...]ks, such as sword blades, knives, and the like; the excellent tem­per of which is said to be owing to a quality in the water. The in­habitants manufacture also those beautiful silks called Damasks, from their city, and carry on a considerable traffic in raw and worked silk, [...] water extracted from the famous damask roses, fruits and wine. The neighbourhood of this city is still beautiful, especially to the Turks, who delight in verdure and gardens. Sidon, now Said, which likewise lies within the ancient Phoenicia, has still some trade, and a [...]derable harbour. The town is surrounded with a stone wall, a cita­ [...] on the land side, and another towards the sea. The houses are [...] chiefly of stone, and are two stories high. The inhabitants are [...] 16,000, chiefly Christians of the Greek church, and the place is the seat of a bishop of that persuasion. There are in the town two public baths, and two mosques. It stands on a neck of land over a­gainst Tyre, and both form a bay of about 16 miles in breadth. Tyre, [...] called Sur, about 20 miles distant from Sidon, so famous formerly [...] its rich dye, is now inhabited by scarcely any but a few fishermen, who live in the ruins of its ancient grandeur. There are strong walls, [...] the land side, of stone, 18 feet high, and seven broad. The circumfer­ence of the place is not more than a mile and a half; and Christians [...] Mahometans make the number of 500. Some of the ruins of an­cient Tyre are still visible.

Na [...]olia, or Asia Minor, comprehending the ancient provinces of [...] Pampirylia, Pisidia, Lycaonia, Cilicia, Cappadocia, and Pontus, [...] [...]sia, all of them territories celebrated in the Greek and Roman [...], are now, through the Turkish indolence and tyranny, either [...], [...] a theatre of ruins. The sites of ancient cities are still dis­cernible; [Page 400] and so luxurious is nature in those countries, that in many places she triumphs over her forlorn condition. The selfish Turks cultivate no more land than maintains themselves; and their gardens and summer-houses fill up the circuit of their most flourishing cities. The most judicious travellers, upon an attentive survey of these coun­tries, fully vindicate all that has been said by sacred and profane writ­ers of their beauty, strength, fertility and population. Even Palestine and Judaea, the most despicable at present of all those countries, lie [...]uried within the luxuries of their own soil. The Turks seem partic­ularly [...]ond of representing Judea in the most dreadful colours, and have formed a thousand falsehoods concerning it, which being artfully propagated by some European writers, have imposed upon weak Christians. *

Under the government of Sheik Daher, the ally of the famous Al [...] Bey, some part of Palestine revived. He enlarged the buildings and walls of St. John dc Acre, formerly Ptolemais, and shewed great in­dulgence to the Christians. Its inhabitants were lately computed at 40,000. Caifa, which stands on the declivity of mount Carmel, dis­tant about 20 miles from Acre, was also new built and enlarged by Da­her. The ancient Joppa, now Jaffa, 50 miles west from Jerusalem, stands on a rocky hill, hath an harbour for small vessels, and its cir­cumference is about two miles. The number of inhabitants is 7000; the western part of the town is inhabited by Christians. The present state of Ramah is deplorable, its walls in decay, and most of the hou­ses empty, though the number of inhabitants is still between 3 and 4000. Not a house is standing of the once magnificent city of Cesarea, but the remains of the walls testify its former grandeur. Azotus is about two miles in circumference, the inhabitants are near 3000, and mostly Mahometans: An old structure is shewn here, with fine marble pillars, which is said to be the house that Sampson pulled down, when insulted by the Philistines. Gaza is still respectable, it extends from east to west three miles, and is a mile in breadth, divided into the old and new town. The last is inhabited by the inferior Turks and Arabs: The number of the inhabitants is reckoned to be 26,000. It is about five miles from the sea, and outside the town is a market for the coun­try people to dispose of their commodities to the inhabitants, for they are not permitted to enter the town. The country around is very fer­tile, but its chief produce is corn, oil, wine, honey, bees-wax, flax, and cotton.

TITLES.] The emperor's titles are swelled with all the pomp of eastern magnificence. He is styled by his subjects, the Shadow of God, [Page 401] a God on Earth, B [...]her to the Sun and Moon, Disp [...]s [...]r of all earthly Crow [...]s, &c.

COURT AND SERAG [...]O.] Great care is taken in the education of the youths who are designe [...] for the state, the army, or the navy; but they are seldom preferred till about 40 years of age, and they rise by their merit. They are generally the children of Christian parents▪ ei­ther taken in war, purchased, or presents from the viceroys and gover­nors of distant provinces, the most beautiful, and well made▪ and sprightly children that can be met with, and are always reviewed and approved of by the grand-signior, before they are sent to the colleges or seminaries, where they are educated for employments according to their genius and abilities.

The ladies of the seraglio are a collection of beautiful young women, chiefly sent as presents from the provinces and the Greek islands▪ most of them the children of Christian parents. The brave prince Hera­ [...]s, hath for some years past abolished the infamous tribute of chil­dren of both sexes, which Georgia formerly paid every year to the [...]te. The number of women in the Harem, depends on the taste of the reigning monarch or sultan. Selim had 2000, Achmet had but [...], and the present sultan has nearly 1600. On their admission they are committed to the care of old ladies▪ taught to sew and em­broider, music, dancing, and other accomplishments, and furnished with the richest clothes and ornaments. They all sleep in separate [...]ds, and between every fifth there is a preceptress. Their chief gov­erness is called Katon Kiaga▪ or governess of the noble young ladies. There is not one servant among them, for they are obliged to wait on one another by rotation; the last that is entered serves her who pre­ [...]ded her, and herself. These ladies are scarcely ever suffered to go abroad, except when the grand-signior removes from one place to another, when a troop of black eunuchs conveys them to the boats, which are inclosed with lattices and linen curtains; and when they [...] by land they are put into close chariots, and signals are made at cer­tain distances, to give notice that none approach the roads through which they march. The boats of the Harem, which carry the grand signior's wives▪ are manned with 24 rowers, and have white covered [...], shut alternately by Venetian blinds. Among the emperor's at­ [...]dants are a number of mutes, who act and converse by signs with great quickness, and some dwarfs who are exhibited for the diversion of his majesty.

When he permits the women to walk in the gardens of the seraglio, all people are ordered to retire▪ and on every side there is a guard of black [...], with [...] in their hands, while others go the rounds in order to hinder any person from seeing them. If unfortunately any [...] is found in the garden▪ even through ignorance or inadvertence, [...] is certainly k [...]ed, and his head brought to the feet of the grand signior, who gives a great reward to the guard for their vigilance. Sometimes the grand-signior passes into the gardens to amuse himself, when the women are there: And it is then that they make use of their most efforts, by dancing, singing, seducing gestures, and amorous [...]dishments▪ to ensnare the affoctions of the monarch. It is not [...]rmitted that the monarch should take a virgin to his bed except dur­ing the solemn festival, and on occasions of some extraordinary rejoic­ings, [Page 402] or the arrival of some good news. Upon such occasions, if the sultan chooses a new companion to his bed, he enters into the apart­ment of the women, who are ranged in files by the governesses, to whom he speaks, and intimates the person he likes best: The ceremo­ny of the handkerchief, which the grand-signior is said to throw at the girl that he elects, is an idle tale, without any foundation. As soon as the grand-signior has chosen the girl that he has destined to be the partner of his bed, all the others follow her to the bath, washing and perfuming her, and dressing her superbly, conducting her singing, dancing▪ and rejoicing to the bed-chamber of the grand-signior, who is generally, on such an occasion, already in bed. Scarcely has the new-elected favourite entered the chamber, introduced by the grand eunuch who is upon guard, than she kneels down, and when the sultan calls her, she creeps into bed to him at the foot of the bed, if the sultan does not order her by special grace, to approach by the side: After a certain time, upon a signal given by the sultan, the governess of the girls, with all her suite, enter the apartment▪ and take her back again, conducting her with the same ceremony to the women's apartments; and if by good fortune she becomes pregnant, and is delivered of a boy, she is called asaki sultaness, that is to say, sultaness-mother; for the first son she has the honour to be crowned, and she has the liberty of forming her court. Eunuchs are also assigned for her guard, and for her par­ticular service. No other ladies, though delivered of boys, are either crowned, or maintained with such costly distinction as the first: How­ever, they have their service apart, and handsome appointments. Af­ter the death of the sultan, the mothers of the male children are shut up in the old seraglio, from whence they can never come out any more, unless some one of their sons ascend the throne. Baron de Tott informs us, that the female slave who becomes the mother of a sultan, and lives long enough to see her son mount the throne, is the only woman who, at that period, acquires the distinction of Sultana Mother: She is till then in the interior of her prison, with her son.—The title of Bache Kadun▪ principal women, is the first dignity of the grand-signior's Harem, and she has a larger allowance than those who have the title of second, third, and fourth woman, which are the four free women the Koran allows.

HISTORY.] For the best history of the Turks, the reader is referred to "The History of the Turkish or Ottoman Empire," in 4 vols. 8vo. Translated from the French of MIGNOT, by A. HAWKINS, Esq. Print­ed in 1787, and sold by Mr. Stockdale, London.

[Page 403]

TARTARY IN ASIA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 4000 Miles. between Degrees. 50 and 150 east long.
Breadth 2400 Miles. Degrees. 30 and 72 north lat.

BOUNDARIES. IT would be deceiving the reader to desire him to de­pend upon the accounts given us by geographers▪ of the extent, limits, and situation of these vast regions. Even the em­press of Russia and her ministry are ignorant of her precise limits with the Chinese, the Persians, and other nations. Tartary, taken in its fullest extent, is bounded by the Frozen Ocean, on the North; by the Pacific Ocean, on the East; by China, India, Persia, and the Caspian [...], on the South; and by Muscovy, on the West.

Grand divisions. Subdivisions. Chief towns. Sq. M.
North-east division Kamtschatka Tartars Kamtschatka  
Jastutskoi Tartars Jakutskoi  
South-east division Bra [...]ski Bra [...]ski 985,380
  Thibet
Thibet and Mogul Polon
Tartars Kudak
North-west division Samoieda Mangasia  
Ostia [...]k Kortskoi  
South-west division Cir [...]assian and Astra­chan Tartary Terki  
  Astrachan  
Middle division. Siberia Tobolsk  
Kalmuc Tartary Bokharia 850.000
Usbeck Tartary Samarcand 339.840

Kamtschatka is a great peninsula▪ which extends from North to South about seven degrees thirty minutes. It is divided into four districts, Bolcheresk, Tigilskaia Krepost. Verchnei or Upper Kamt­schatkoi Ostrog, and Nishnei or Lower Kamtschatkoi Ostrog.

MOUNTAINS.] The principal mountains are Caucasus in Circassia, and the mountains of Taurus and Ararat so contiguous to it, that they appear like a continuation of the same mountain, which crosses all [...]sia, from Mongrelia to the Indies; and the mountains of Stolp, in the North.

SEAS.] These are the Frozen Ocean, the Pacific Ocean, and the [...]alpian Sea.

RIVERS.] The principal rivers are, the Wolga, which runs a [...]rse of two thousand miles: The Oby, which divides Asia from [...]pe; the Tabol, Irtis, Genesa or Jenska; the Burrumpooter, the [...], and the Argun, which divides the Russian and Chinese empires.

AIR, CLIMATE, SOIL, AND PRODUCE.] The air of this country is very different, by reason of its vast extent from north to [...]; the northern parts reaching beyond the arctic polar circle▪ and southern being in the same latitudes with Spain, France, Italy, and of Turkey.

[Page 404] Nova Zembla and the Russia Lapland are most uncomfortable re­gions; the earth, which is covered with snow nine months in the year, being extremely barren, and every where incumbered with un­wholesome marshes, uninhabited mountains, and impenetrable thick­nesses. The climate of Siberia is cold, but the air pure and whole­some; and Mr. Tooke observes, that its inhabitants in all probability would live to an extreme old age, if they were not so much addicted to an immoderate use of intoxicating liquors. Siberia produces rye, oats, and barley, almost to the 60th degree of northern latitude. Cab­bages, radishes, turnips, and cucumbers, thrive here tolerably well; but scarcely any other greens. All experiments to bring fruit trees to bear, have hitherto been in vain; but there is reason to believe that industry and patience may at length overcome the rudeness of the cli­mate. Currants and strawberries of several sorts are said to grow here in as great perfection as in the English gardens. Herbs, as well me­dicinal as common, together with various eatable roots, are found very generally here; but there are no bees in all Siberia. Astrachan, and the southern parts of Tartary, are extremely fertile, owing more to na­ture than industry. The parts that are cultivated produce excellent fruits of almost all the kinds known in Europe, especially grapes, which are reckoned the largest and finest in the world. Their sum­mers are very d [...]y▪ and from the end of July to the beginning of Oc­tober, the air is pestered▪ and the soil sometimes ruined, by incredible quantities of locusts. Mr. B [...]ll, who travelled with the Russian am­bassador to China, represents some parts of Tartary as desirable and fertile countries▪ the grass growing spontaneously to an amazing height. The country of Thibet is the highest in Asia, and is a part of that elevated tract which gives rise to the rivers of India and China, and those of Siberia and other parts of Tartary.

METALS AND MINERALS.] It is said that Siberia contains mines of gold, silver, copper, iron, jasper, lapis lazuli, and loadstones; a sort of large teeth found here, creates some dispute among the naturalists, whether they belong to elephants, or are a marine production; their appearance is certainly whimsical and curious, when polished with art and skill.

ANIMALS.] These are camels, dromedaries, bears, wolves, and all the other land and amphibious animals that are common in the north parts of Europe. Their horses are of a good size for the saddle, and very hardy: As they run wild till they are five or six years old, they are generally headstrong. Nea [...] Ast [...]achan there is a bird called by the Russians baba, of a grey colour▪ and something larger than a swan▪ he has a broad bill, under which hangs a bag that may contain a quart or more▪ he wades near the edge of a river, and on seeing a shoal, or fry of small fishes, spreads his wings and drives them to a shallow, where he gobbles as many of them as he can into his bag, and then going ashore, eats them, or carries them to the young. Some travellers take this bird to be the pelican.

The forests of Siberia are well stocked with a variety of animals, some of which are not to be found in other countries. These supply the inhabitants with food and clothes; and, at the same time, furnish them with commodities, for an advantageous trade. Siberia may be considered as the native country of black foxes, sables, and ermines, [Page 405] the skins of which are superior to those of any part of the world.—Horses and cattle are in great plenty▪ and sold at low prices.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MANNERS, CUSTOMS, DIVERSIONS, AND DRESS.] We can form no prob­able guess as to the num­ber of inhabitants in Tartary: but from many circumstances we must conclude, that they are [...] from being proportioned to the extent of their country. They are in general strong made, stout men; their fa­ [...] broad, their [...] [...], their eyes small and black, but very [...]ick; their beards are scarcely visible, as they continually thin them by pulling out the hairs by the roots. M. le Clerc's account of the Tartars (or Tatars as he calls them) just published, is curious. He ob­tained the information on which it is founded, from two princes and [...]everal Mou [...]zas of that nation. Their origin is the same with that of [...] ancient Turks; and Turk was the general denomination of this people until the time that Zingis-Khan made himself master of the North of Asia: nay, they still retain this title among themselves, though, after the period now mentioned▪ the neighbouring nations [...] to all their [...]bes the general appellation of Tartars. The term [...], according to him, does not signify properly a tribe; it denotes a [...] assembled, either to march against the enemy, or for other politi­cal reasons.

The beauty of the Circassian women is a kind of staple commodity in that country▪ for parents there make no scruple of selling their daughters to recruit [...] seraglios, or [...]ather haren [...]s, of the great men of Turkey and Persia. They are purchased, when young, by merchants, and taught such accomplishments as suit their capacities, to render them more valuable against they day of sale.

According to Mr. Bruce, the Circassian women are extremely well [...]ped, with exceeding fine features, smooth, clear complexions, and beautiful black eyes, which with their black hair hanging in two tres­ [...], one on each side the [...]ace, give them a most lovely appearance: They wear a black [...]oi [...] on their heads▪ covered with a fine white cloth [...] under the [...] During the summer they go almost naked. They have the reputation of being very chaste, though they seldom want op­portunity to be otherwise▪ for it is an established point of good man­ners among them, that as soon as any person comes in to speak to the [...], the husband goes out of the house; but whether this continency of theirs proceeds from their own generosity, to recompense their hus­bands for the confidence they put in them▪ or has its foundation only [...] same, I pretend not to determine. Their language they have in common with the [...] neighbouring Tartars▪ although the chief peo­ple among them are not ignorant of the Russian: The apparel of the men of Circassia is much the same with that of the Nagayans, only their caps are something larger, and their cloaks being likewise of [...]se cloth or sheep-skins, are fastened only at the neck with a string, [...] as they are not large enough to cover the whole body, they turn [...] round according to the wind and weather.

The Tartars are in general a wandering sort of people; in their pe­ [...]inations they [...]et out in the spring, their number in one body be­ [...] frequently 10,000, pr [...]ceded by their flocks and herds. When [...] come to an inviting spot, they live upon it till all its grass and [...] is eaten up. They have little money, except what they get [Page 406] from their neighbours the Russians, Persians, or Turks in exchange for cattle; with this they purchase cloths, silks, stuffs, and other apparel for their women. They have few mechanics, except those who make arms. They avoid all labour as the greatest slavery; their only em­ployment is tending their flocks, hunting, and managing their horses. If they are angry with a person, they wish he may live in one [...] place▪ and work like a Russian. Among themselves they are very hos­pitable, and wonderfully so to strangers and travellers, who confiden­tially put themselves under their protection. They are naturally of an easy, cheerful temper, always disposed to laughter, and seldom depress­ed by care and melancholy. When any of their people are infirm through great age, or seized with distempers reckoned incurable, it is said, they make a small hut for the patient near some river, in which they leave him with some provisions, and seldom or never return to visit him. On such occasions they say they do their parents a good office, in sending them to a better world. Notwithstanding this be­haviour, many nations of the Tartars, especially towards the south, are tractable, humane, and are susceptible of pious and virtuous senti­ments. Their affection for their fathers, and their submission to their authority, cannot be exceeded; and this noble quality of filial love has distinguished them in all ages. History tells us, that Darius, king of Persia, having invaded them with all the forces of his empire, and the Scythians retiring by little and little, Darius sent an ambassador to demand where it was they proposed to conclude their retreat, and when they intended to begin fighting. They returned for answer, with a spirit peculiar to that people, "They had no cities or cultivat­ed fields, for the defence of which they should give him battle; but when once he was come to the place of their fathers monuments, he should understand in what manner the Scythians used to fight."

The Tartars are inured to horsemanship from their infancy: they seldom appear on foot. They are dextrous in shooting at a mark, in­somuch that a Tartar, while at full gallop, will split a pole with an ar­row, though at a considerable distance. The dress of the men is very simple and fit for action; it generally consists of a short jacket, with narrow sleeves made of deer's skin, both of one piece, and light to the limbs. The Tartars live in huts half sunk under ground; they have a fire in the middle, with a hole in the top to let out the smoke, and benches round the fire to sit or lie upon. This seems to be the com­mon method of living among all the northern nations, from Lapland eastward, to the Japanese ocean. In the extreme northern provinces, during the winter, every family burrows itself as it were under ground; and we are told, that so sociable are they in their dispositions, that they make subterraneous communications with each other, so that they may be said to live in an invisible city. The Tartars are immoderately fond of horse-flesh, especially if it be young▪ and a little tainted, which makes their cabbins extremely nauseous. Though horse-flesh be pre­ferred raw by some northern tribes, the general way of eating it is af­ter it has been smoked and dried. The Tartars purchase their wives with cattle. In their marriages they are not very delicate. Little or no difference is made between the child of a concubine or slave, and that of the wise; but among the heads of tribes the wife's son is al­ways preferred to the succession. After a wife is turned of forty, she [Page 407] is employed in menial duties as another servant, and as such must at­tend the young wives who succeed to their places; nor is it uncom­mon, in some of the more barbarous tribes, for a father to marry his own daughter.

The descendants of the old inhabitants of Siberia are still most of [...] idolaters. They consist of many nations, entirely differing from each other in their manner of living, religion, language, and counte­ [...]ces. But in this they agree, that none of them follow agriculture, which is carried on by some Tartars, and such as are converted to Christianity. A few of them breed cattle, and others follow hunting. The population of Siberia has been much increased since it became a Russian province▪ for the Russians have founded therein a number of towns, fortresses, and villages. Notwithstanding which it presents [...]ut a void and desert view; since, by its extent it is capable of sup­porting several millions more than it at present contains. For the manners and customs of the other Tartars belonging to the Russian em­pire, we refer to our account of that country.

RELIGION.] The religion of the Tartars somewhat resembles their civil government, and is commonly accommodated to that of their neighbours; for it partakes of the Mahometan, the Gentoo, the Greek, and even the Catholic religions. Some of them are the grossest idola­ters, and worship little rude images dressed up in [...]gs. Each has his own deity, with whom they make very free when matters do not go according to their own mind.

The Circassian religion is Paganism, for notwithstanding they use circumcision among them, they have neither priest, alcoran, or mosque, like other Mahometans. Every body here offers his own sacrifice at pleasure, for which, however, they have certain days, established rather by custom than any positive command. Their most solemn sacrifice is [...]ered at the death of their nearest friends, upon which occasion both [...] and women meet in the field to be present at the offering, which is a he-goat▪ and having killed, they flay it, and stretch the skin with the head and horns on, upon a cross at the top of a long pole, placed commonly in a quickset hedge (to keep the cattle from it,) and near the place the sacrifice is offered by boiling and roasting the flesh, which they afterwards eat. When the feast is over, the men rise, and hav­ [...] paid their adoration to the skin, and muttered over some certain [...]yers, the women withdraw, and the men conclude the ceremony with drinking a great quantity of aqua vitae, and this generally ends in a quarrel before they part.

But the religion and government of the kingdom of Thibet, and [...]ssa, a large tract of Tartary, bordering upon China, are the most re­markable, and the most worthy of attention. The Thibetians are gov­erned by the Grand Lama, or Delai Lama, who is not only submitted [...], and adored by them, but is also the great object of adoration for the various tribes of Heathen Tartars, who roam through the vast [...]ct of continent which stretches from the banks of the Wolga, to Lama on the sea of Japan. He is not only the sovereign pontiff, the [...]gerent of the Deity on earth; but, as superstition is ever the [...]gest, where it is most removed from its object, the more remote [...] absolutely regard him as they Deity himself. They believe [...] to be immortal, and endowed with all knowledge and virtue. Ev­ery [Page 408] year they come up from different parts, to worship and make rich offerings at his shrine: Even the emperor of China, who is a Man­chou Tartar, does not fail in acknowledgements to him in his religious capacity▪ though the Lama is tributary to him, and actually entertains, at a great expense, in the palace of Peking, an inferior Lama, deputed as his nuncio from Thibet. The opinion of those who are reputed the most orthodox among the Thibetians is, that when the grand Lama seems to die, either of old age or infirmity, his soul in fact only quit [...] a crazy habitation, to look for another younger or better, and it is dis­covered again in the body of some child, by certain tokens known only to the Lamas or priests, in which order he always appears. In 1774, the Grand Lama was an infant, which had been discovered some time before by the Tayshoo Lama, who in authority and sanctity of character is next to the Grand Lama, and during his minority acts as chief. The lamas, who form the most numerous, as well as the most powerful body in the state▪ have the priesthood entirely in their hands; and, besides, fill up many monastic orders, which are held in great vene [...] among them. The residence of the Grand Lama is at Pato­ [...] a vast palace on a mountain near the banks of the Barampooter, about seven miles from Lassa. The English East India Company made a treaty with the Lama in 1774. * The religion of Thibet, though in many respects it differs from that of the Indian Bramins, yet in others has a great [...]inity to it. The Thibetians have a great veneration for the cow, and highly respect the waters of the Ganges, the source of which they believe to be in heaven. The Sunniasses, or Indian pil­grims, often visit Thibet as an holy place, and the Lama always enter­tains a body of two or three hundred in his pay. Besides his religious influence and authority, the Grand Lama is possessed of unlimited power throughout his dominions, which are very extensive, and stretch to Bengal.

Another religion▪ which is very prevalent among the Tartars, is that of Schamanism. The professors of this religious sect believe in one su­preme God, the Creator of all things. They believe that he loves his creation▪ and all his creatures; that he knows every thing, and is all powerful; but that he pays no attention to the particular actions of men, being too great for them to be able to offend him, or to do any thing that can be meritorious in his sight. But they also maintain, that the Supreme Being has divided the government of the world, and the destiny of men, among a great number of subaltern divinities, under his command and control, but who nevertheless generally act accord­ing to their own fancies; and therefore mankind cannot dispense with [...]sing all the means in their power for obtaining their favour. They likewise suppose, that, for the most part, these inferior deities abomin­ate and punish premeditated villainy, fraud, and cruelty. They are all firmly persuaded of a future existence; but they have many supersti­tious notions and practices. Among all the Schamanes, women are considered as beings vastly inferior to men, and are thought to have been created only for their sensual pleasure, to people the world, and [Page 409] to look after household affairs: And in consequence of these princi­ples, they are treated with much severity and contempt.

CURIOSITIES.] These are comprehended in the remains of the build­ings, left by the above mentioned great conquerors and their successors. Remains of ditches and ramparts are frequently met with, which here­tofore either surrounded small towns, now quite demolished, o [...] were designed for the defence of camps, forts, o [...] castles▪ the vestiges of which are often to be discovered upon the spot, as well as other traces of de­cayed importance. Many of them are in tolerable preservation, and make some figure even at present.

The desert of Kirgurs abounds in the relics of opulent cities. Some gold and silver coins have been found, with several manuscripts neatly written, which have been carried to Petersburg. In 1720, says M. Voltaire▪ in his history of Peter the Great, there were found in Kal­muc Tartary a subterraneous house of stone, some urns, lamps, and ear­ [...]gs, an equestrian statue, an oriental prince with a diadem on his head, two women scared on thrones, and a roll of manuscripts, which was sent by Peter the Great to the Academy of Inscriptions at Paris, and proved to be in the language of Thibet. About 80 miles from Lassa is the lake Palte, or Jangso; of that extent, the natives say it re­quires 18 days to walk round it. In the middle of it are islands, one of which is the seat of the Lamassa Turcepama, or the Great Regenerate, in whom the Thebetians think a divine spirit inhabits as in the Great Lama.

CITIES AND TOWNS.] Of these we know little but the names, and that they are in general no better than fixed hordes. They may be said to be places of a [...]ode rather than towns or cities, for we do not find that they are under any regular government, or that they can make a defence against any enemy. The few places, however, that are men­tioned in the preceding divisions of this country▪ m [...]rit notice. To­bolsk and Astrachan are considerable cities, the first containing 15,000 and the latter 70, [...]00 inhabitants. Forts, villages, and towns have also lately been erected in different parts of Siberia, for civilizing the in­habitants, and rendering them obedient to the Russian government.

Terki, the capital of Circassian Tartary, is seated in a spacious plain on an island formed by the rivers Terki and Bustrow, and is garrisoned by 2000 regular [...] and 1000 Cossa [...]ks. It is well fortified with ram­parts and bastions in the modern style▪ well stored with cannon, and has always a considerable garrison in it▪ under the command of a gov­ernor. The Carcassian prince who resides here, is allowed five hun­dred Russians for his guard, but none of his own subjects are permitted to dwell within any part of the fortifications. Ever since the reduc­tion of those parts to the obedience of Russia, they have put in all pla­ces of strength, not only Russian garrisons and governors, but magis­trates▪ and priests for the exercise of the Christian religion; yet the Circassian Tartars are governed by their own princes, lords, and judges, but these administer justice in the name of the emperor▪ and in mat­ters of importance▪ not without the presence of the Russian governors, being all obliged [...] take the oath of allegiance to his imperial majesty.

Tark [...] is the capital of Dagestan▪ and contains 3000 houses, two sto­ries high, platfo [...]ed at the top for walking. The Tartars of this province are numerous, and Mahometans, governed by a sheskel, [Page 410] whose office is elective. The city of Derbent is situated on the Cas­pian shore, and called the frontier of Persia. It is said to have been first built by Alexander the Great▪ and that he here received the visit from the Amazonian queen Thalestris. It is now inclosed with a broad strong wall, built with large square stones, hard as marble, from the quarries in Caucasus. Lassa is a small city, but the houses are of stone, and are spacious and lofty.

COMMERCE AND MANUFACTURES.] This head makes no figure in the history of Tartary, their chief traffic consisting in cattle, skins, beavers, rhubarb, musk, and fish. The As [...]rachans, notwithstanding their interruptions by the wild Tartars, carry on a considerable traffic into Persia, to which they export leather, woollen and linen cloth, and some European manufactures.

HISTORY.] Though it is certain that Tartary, formerly known by the name of Scythia, peopled the northern parts of Europe, and fur­nished those amazing numbers who, under various names, destroyed the Roman empire▪ yet it is now but very thinly inhabited; and those fine provinces, where learning and the arts re [...]ded, are now scenes of horror and barbarity. This must have been owing to the dreadful massacres made among the nations by the two above mentioned con­querors and their descendants; for nothing is more common in their histories than their putting to the sword three or four hundred thou­sand people in a few days.

The country of Usbec Tartary was once the seat of a more powerful empire than that of Rome or Greece. It was not only the native coun­try, but the favourite residence of Zingis, or Jenghis Khan and Tam­erlane, who enriched it with the spoils of India and the eastern world. But some authors have absurdly questioned the veracity of the histori­ans of these great conquerors, though it be better established than that of the Greek or Roman writers. The former, about the year 1200 made himself master of those regions, which form at this day the Asia­tic part of the Russian empire; and his son Batou Sagin made himself master of Southern Russia▪ and peopled it with Tartar colonies, which are now confounded or blended with the Russians. Long and heavily did the Tartar yoke gall the neck of Russia▪ till alleviated by the divi­sions among themselves. But not till Ivan III. who ascended the Rus­sian throne in 1462, were they delivered from these warlike invaders. He repeatedly defeated them, subdued the kingdom of Kasan and oth­ther provinces, and made his name respected in all that quarter.

Tamerlane's memory has been more permanent than that of Zingis Khan, his defeat of the Turkish emperor Bajazet hath been before no­ticed in the history of that nation, and great were his conquests, and his name, far beyond the limits of his porper dominions. His descent is claimed not only by all the Khans and petty princes of Tartary, but by the emperor of Indostan himself. The capital of this country is Bokharia, which was known to the ancients by the name of Bucharia; situated in the latitude of 39 degrees 15 minutes, and 13 miles distant from the once famous city of Samarcand, the birth-place of Tamerlane the Great, and who died in the year 1405.

The present inhabitants of this immense common, compose innume­rable tribes, who range at pleasure with their flocks and their herds, in the old patriarchal manner. Their tribes are commanded by sepa­rate, [Page 411] Khans or leaders, that, upon particular emergencies, elect a great Khan, who claims a paramount power over strangers as well as natives, and who can bring into the field from 20 to 100 000 horsemen. Their chief residence is a kind of military station, which is moved and shift­ed according to the chance of war and other occasions.

Besides what may be learned from their history and traditions, the standard or colours of the respective tribes form a distinctive mark, whereby each Tartar knows the tribe to which he belongs. These marks of distinction consist of a piece of Chinese linen, or other col­oured stuff, suspended on a lance, twelve feet in length, among the Pagan Tartars. The Mahometan Tartars write upon their standards the name of God, in the Arabic language. The Kalmucs and the Mo­gul Tartars, distinguish theirs by the name of some animal; and, as all the branches or divisions of a tribe preserve always the figure drawn upon the standard of that tribe▪ adding only the particular denomina­tion of each branch, those standards answer the purpose of a genealog­ical table or tree, by which each individual knows his origin and de­scent.

They are bounded on every side by the Russian, the Chinese, the Mogul, the Persian, and the Turkish empires; each of whom are push­ing on their conquests, in this extensive, and in some places, fertile country. The Khans pay a tribute, or acknowledgement of their de­pendency upon one or other of their powerful neighbours, who treat them with caution and lenity; as the friendship of these barbarians is of the utmost consequence to the powers with whom they are allied. Some tribes, however, affect independency; and when united they form a powerful body, and of late have been very formidable to their neighbours, particularly to the Chinese, as we shall mention in our ac­count of that empire. The method of carrying on war, by wasting the country▪ is very ancient among the Tartars, and practised by all of them from the Danube eastward. This circumstance, renders them a dreadful enemy to regular troops, who must thereby be deprived of all subsistence, while the Tartars, having always many spare horses to kill and eat, are at no loss for provisions.

See Univer. Hist.

THE EMPIRE OF CHINA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 1450 Miles. between Degrees. 20 and 42 north latitude. Sq. Miles. 1,105,000
Breadth 1260 Miles. Degrees. 98 and 123 east longitude. Sq. Miles. 1,105,000

To which should be added Chinese Tartary. 644,000

BOUNDARIES. IT is bounded by the Chinese Tartary, and an amaz­ing stone wall, on the North; by the Pacific Ocean, which divides it from North America, on the East; by the Chinesian Sea, South; and by Tonquin, and the Tartarian countries and moun­tains of Thibet and Russia, on the West.

[Page 412] DIVISIONS.] The great divisions of this empire, according to the authors of the Universal History, is into fifteen provinces (exclusive of that of Lyau-tong, which is situated without the Great Wall, though under the same dominion;) each of which might, for their largeness, fertility, populousness, and opulence, pass for so many distinct king­doms.

But it is necessary to acquaint the reader, that the information con­tained in Du Aalde's volumin [...]u [...] account of China, are drawn from the papers of Jesuits, and others sent thither by the pope, whose mis­sions have been at an end for above half a century. Some of those fa­thers were men of penetration and judgement, and had great opportuni­ties of being informed about a century ago▪ but even their accounts of this empire are justly to be suspected. They had powerful enemies at the court of Rome, where they maintained their footing only by mag­nifying their own labours and successes, as well as the importance of the Chinese empire.

NAME.] It is probably owing to a Chinese word signifying Middle, from a notion the natives had that their country lay in the middle of the world.

MOUNTAINS.] China, excepting to the north, is a plain country, and contains no remarkable mountains.

RIVERS AND WATER.] The chief are the Yamour and the Ar­gun, which are the boundary between the Russian and Chinese Tarta­ry; the Crocceus, or Whambo, or the Yellow River; the Kiam, or the Blue River, and the Tay. Common water in China is very in­different, and is in some places boiled to make it sit for use.

BAYS.] The chief are those of Nankin and Canton.

CANALS.] These are sufficient to entitle the ancient Chinese to the character of being the wisest and most industrious people in the world. The commodiousness and length of their canals are incredible. The chief of them are lined with hewn stone on the sides, and they are so deep, that they carry large vessels, and sometimes they extend above 1000 miles in length. Those vessels are fitted up for all the conveni­encies of life; and it has been thought by some, that in China the wa­ter contains as many inhabitants as the land. They are furnished with stone quays, and sometimes with bridges of an amazing construction. The navigation is flow, and the vessels sometimes drawn by men. About 10,000 boats from 200 tons and under, are kept at the public expense. No precautions are wanting▪ that could be formed by art or perseverance▪ for the [...] of the passengers▪ in case a canal is crossed by a rapid river, or exposed to [...] from the mountains. These canals▪ and the variety that is seen upon the border [...] ▪ render China the most delightful to the eye, of any country in the world, as well as fer­tile, in places that are not so by nature.

FORESTS.] Such is the industry of the Chinese, that they are not [...]cumbered with forests or wood, though no country is better fitted for producing tim [...]er of all kinds. They [...] ▪ however, none to grow but for ornament and use, or on the sides of mountains, from whence the trees, when cut down, can be conveyed to any place by water.

AIR, SOIL, AND PRODUCE.] The air of this empire is according to the situation of [...]. Towards the north it is sharp, in the mid­dle [Page 413] mild, and in the south hot. The soil it, either by nature or art, fruitful of every thing that can minister to the necessities, conveni­encies or luxuries of life. The culture of the cotton▪ and the rice [...]lds, from which the bulk of the inhabitants are clothed and fed, is ingenious almost beyond description. The rare trees, and aromatic productions, either ornamental or medicinal, that abound in other [...]ts of the world, are to be found in China, and some others pecu­liar to itself; but even a catalogue of them would form a little volume. Some, however, must be mentioned.

The tallow tree has a short trunk, a smooth bark, crooked branches, [...]d leaves, shaped like a heart, and is about the height of a common cherry-tree. The fruit it produces have all the qualities of our tal­low, and when manufactured with oil serve the natives as candles; [...]t they smell strong▪ nor is their light clear. Of the other trees pe­culiar to China, are some which yield a kind of flour; some partake of the nature of pepper. The gum of some is poisonous, but affords the [...]est varnish in the world. After all that can be said of these, and many other beautiful and useful trees, the Chinese, notwithstanding their industry, are so wedded to their ancient customs, that they are very little, if at all, meliorated by cultivation. The same may be said of their richest fruits, which, in general, are far from being so delicious [...] those of Europe, and indeed of America. This is owing to the Chinese never practising grafting, or inoculation of trees, and knowing nothing of experimental gardening.

It would be unpardonable here not to mention the raw-silk, which so much abounds in China, and above all, the tea-plant, or shrub. It is planted in rows▪ and pruned to prevent its luxuriancy. Notwith­standing our long intercourse with China, writers are still divided about the different species and culture of this plant. It is generally thought that the green and boheateas grow on the same shrub, but that the [...]tter admits of some kind of preparation, which takes away its raking qualities, and gives it a deeper colour. The other kinds, which go by the names of imperial, congo, singlo, and the like, are occasioned prob­ably by the nature of the soils, and from the provinces in which they grow. The culture of this plant seems to be very simple; and it is certain that some kinds are of a much higher and delicious slavour then others. It is thought that the finest, which is called the flower of the tea, is imported over land to Russia; but we know of little dif­ference in their effects on the human body. The greatest is between the [...]ohea and the green.

It is supposed, that the Portuguese had the use of tea long before the English, but it was introduced among the latter before the Restoration, as mention of it is made in the first act of parliament, that settled the [...]ci [...]e on the king for life in 1660. Catharine of Lisbon▪ wife to Charles II. rendered the use of it common at court. The ginfeng, so [...]ous among the Chinese as the universal remedy, and monopolized [...] by their emperors, is now found to be but a common root, and is plentiful in America. When brought to Europe, it is little distin­guished for its healing qualities; and this instance alone ought to [...] us with what caution the former accounts of China are to be [...]. The ginseng, however, is a native of the Chinese Tartary.

[Page 414] METALS AND MINERALS.] China (if we are to believe natural­ists) produces all metals and minerals that are known in the world. White copper is peculiar to itself, but we know of no extraordinary quality it possesses. One of the fundamental maxims of the Chinese government is, that of not introducing a superabundancy of gold and silver, for sear of hurting industry. The gold mines, therefore, are but slightly worked, and the currency of that metal is supplied by the grains the people pick up in the sand of rivers and mountains. The silver specie is furnished from the mines of Honan.

POPULATION AND INHABITANTS.] Much has been said of the popu­lation of China. It is undoubtedly great. According to Le Compte the 15 Provinces contain 2357 fortified towns, 10,128,789 families, 58,916,783 men. But this subject has been treated with the utmost attention and industry by M. Amiot, in a desertation dated Sept. 1777, and inserted in the 6th vol. of the "Memoirs concernant les Chinois." By estimates of the inhabitants of each Province made by authority, and communicated to the late M. Allerstain, President of the Mathe­matical department, it appears that this great Empire contains at least two hundred millions of inhabitants. Notwithstanding the industry of the people, their amazing population frequently occasions a dearth. Parents, who cannot support their female children, are allowed to cast them into the river; but they fasten a gourd to the child, that it may float on the water; and there are often compassionate people of for­tune, who are moved by the cries of the children to save them from death. The Chinese▪ in their persons, are middle sized, their [...] broad, their eyes black and small, their noses rather short. The Chi­nese have particular ideas of beauty. They pluck up the hairs of the lower part of their faces by the roots with tweezers, leaving a few straggling ones by way of beard. Their Tartar princes compel them to cut off the hair of their heads, and like Mahometans, to wear only a lock on the crown. Their complexion towards the north is fair, to­wards the south, swarthy, and the fatter a man is▪ they think him the handsomer. Men of quality and learning, who are not much exposed to the sun, are delicately complexioned, and they who are bred to let­ters let the nails of their fingers grow to an enormous length, to shew that they are not employed in manual labour.

The women have little eyes, plump rosy lips, black hair, regular features, and a delicate though florid complexion. The smallness of their feet is reckoned a principal part of their beauty, and no swathing is omitted, when they are young, to give them that accomplishment, so that when they grow up, they may be said to totter rather than to walk. This fanciful piece of beauty was probably invented by the ancient. Chinese, to palliate their jealousy.

DRESS.] This varies according to the degrees among them. The men wear caps on their heads of the fashion of a bell; those of quality are ornamented with jewels. The rest of their dress is easy and loose, consisting of a vest and a sash, a coat or gown thrown over them, silk boots quilted with cotton, and a pair of drawers. The ladies towards the south wear nothing on their head. Sometimes their hair is [...] up in a net, and sometimes it is dishevelled. Their dress differs but little from that of the men, only their gown or upper garment has very large open sleeves.—The dress both of men and women varies, howev­er, according to the temperature of the climate.

[Page 415] MARRIAGES.] The parties never see each other, in China, till the [...]gain is concluded by the parents, and that is generally when the parties are perfect children. Next to being barren, the greatest scan­dal is to bring females into the world; and if a woman of a poor family happens to have three or four girls successively, it not unfreqently happens that she will expose them on the high roads, or cast them into a river.

FUNERALS.] People of note cause their coffins to be made, and their tombs to be built in their life time. No persons are buried with­in the walls of a city, nor is a dead corpse suffered to be brought into a town, if a person died in the country. Every Chinese keeps in his [...] a table, upon which are written the names of his father, grandfa­ther, and great grandfather, before which they frequently burn incense, and prostrate themselves; and when the father of a family dies, the name of the great grandfather is taken away, and that of the deceased i [...] added.

LANGUAGE.] The Chinese language contains only three hundred and thirty words, all of one syllable: But then each word is pronoun­ [...] with such various modulations, and each with a different meaning, [...] it becomes more copious than could be easily imagined, and enables them to express themselves very well on the common occasions of life. The missionaries, who adapt the European characters, as well as they [...], to the expression of Chinese words, have devised eleven different, and some of them very compounded, marks and aspirations, to signify the various modulations, elevations, and depressions of the voice, which distinguish the several meanings of the same monosyllable. The Chinese oral language being thus barren and contracted, is unfit for literature, and therefore, their literature is all comprized in ar­bitrary characters, which are amazingly complicated and numerous; according to some of their writers they amount to twenty-five thousand; [...] thirty or forty thousand, according, to others; but the later wri­ters say they amount to eighty thousand, though he is reckoned a very [...] man, who is master of fifteen or twenty thousand. This lan­guage being wholly addressed to the eye, and having no affinity with their tongue, as spoken, the latter has still continued in its original [...], uncultivated state, while the former has received all possible im­provements.

The Chinese characters, Mr. Astle observes, which are by length of [...] become symbolic, were originally imitative; they still partake so [...] of their original hieroglyphic nature, that they do not combine [...] words like letters or marks for sounds; but we find one mark for [...], another for a horse, a third for a dog, and in short a separate and distinct mark for each thing which hath a corporeal form. The Chinese also use a great number of marks entirely of a symbolic nature, [...] impress on the eye the conceptions of the mind, which have no cor­ [...] forms, though they do not combine these last marks into words, [...] [...]arks for sounds or letters; but a separate mark is made to rep­ [...] or stand for each idea, and they use them in the same manner as [...] [...]o their abridged picture-characters, which were originally imi­ [...] or hieroglyphic.

The Chinese books begin from the right hand; their letters are [...] in perpendicular columns, of which there are generally ten in [Page 416] a page. They are read downwards, beginning from the right hand side of the paper. Sometimes a title is placed horiaontally, and this is likewise read from the right hand.

GENIUS AND LEARNING.] The genius of the Chinese, it is said, in peculiar to themselves. They have no conception of what is beautiful in writing▪ regular in architecture, or natural in painting; and yet in their gardening▪ and planning their grounds, they hit upon the [...] sublime and beautiful. They perform all the operations of arithmetic with prodigious quickness, but differently from the Europeans. Till the latter came among them▪ they were ignorant of mathematical learn­ing▪ and all its depending arts. They had no proper apparatus for astronomical observations; and the metaphysical learning, which ex­isted among them, was only known to their philosophers; but even the arts introduced by the Jesuits were of very short duration [...] them, and lasted very little longer than the reign of Cang-hi, who [...] contemporary with Charles II. of England, nor is it very probable they [...]ver will be revived. It has been generally said, that they [...] ­stood printing before the Europeans▪ but that can be only app [...] block printing, for the [...] and moveable types were undoubtedly Dutch or German inventions. The Chinese, however, had [...], which were stamped from plates or blocks, many hundred years be­fore printing was discovered in Europe.

The difficulty of mastering and retaining such a number of arbitrary marks and characters as there are in what may be called the Chinese written language, greatly retards the progress of their erudition. But there is no part of the globe where learning is attended with such honours and rewards, and where there are more powerful induce­ments to cultivate and pursue it. The literati are reverenced as men of another species▪ and are the only nobility known in China. If their birth be ever so mean and low▪ they become mandarins of the highest rank, in proportion to the extent of their learning. On the other hand, however exalted their birth may be, they quickly sink into pov­erty and obscurity, if they neglect those studies which raised their fa­thers. It has been observed, that there is no nation in the would where the first honours of the state lie so open to the lowest of the people, and where there is less of hereditary greatness. The Chinese range all their works of literature into four classes. The first i [...] the class of King, or the sacred books, which contains the principles of the Chinese religion, morality, and government, and several curious and obscure records, relative to these important subjects. History [...] a class apart; yet, in this first class, there are place I some historical mon­uments on account of their relation to religion and government, and among others the Tekun-tsicou, a work of Confucius, which contains the annals of twelve kings of Low, the native country of that illustri­ous sage. The second class is that of the Su, or Che, that is, of history and the historians. The third class, called Tsu, or Tse, comprehends philosophy and the philosophers, and contains all the works of the Chinese literati, the productions also of foreign sects and religio [...]s, which the Chinese consider only in the light of philosophical opin­ions▪ and all books relative to mathematics, astronomy, physic, [...] ­ry science, the art of divination, agriculture, and the arts and sciences in general. The fourth class is called T [...]e, or Miscell [...], and [...] ­tains [Page 417] all the poetical books of the Chinese, their pieces of eloquence, their songs, romances, tragedies, and comedies. The Chinese literati, in all the periods of their monarchy, have applied themselves less to [...] study of nature, and to the researches of natural philosophy, than [...] moral inquiries, the practical science of life, and internal polity and [...]. It is said, that it was not before the dynasty of the Song, in the [...]th and 11th centuries after Christ, that the Chinese philosophers [...] hypothesis concerning the natural system of the universe, and [...] into discussions of a scholastic kind, in consequence, perhaps, of the intercourse they had long kept up with the Arabians, who [...] with ardour the works of Aristotle. And since the Chinese have begun to pay some attention to natural philosophy, their progress in it has been much inferior to that of the Europeans.

The invention of gunpowder is justly claimed by the Chinese, who [...] use of it against Zinghis Khan and Tamerlane. They seem to have known nothing of small fire-arms, and to have been acquainted only with the cannon, which they call the fire-pan. Their industry i [...] their manufactures of stuffs, porcelane, japanning, and the like sed­ [...]ry trades is amazing, and can be equalled only by their labours in [...] field, in making canals, levelling mountains, raising gardens, and navigating their junks and boats.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES.] Few natural curiosities present themselves in China, that have not been comprehended under foreign [...]. Some volcanos, and rivers and lakes of particular qualities, [...] to be sound in different parts of the empire. The volcano of [...] is said sometimes to make so furious a discharge of fire and [...], as to occasion a tempest in the air; and some of their lakes are [...] to petrify fishes when put into them. The artificial curiosities of China are stupendous. The great wall, separating China from Tarta­ [...] [...]o prevent the incursions of the Tartars, is supposed to extend from [...] to 1500 miles. It is carried over mountains and vallies, and [...]ches from the province of Xensi to the Kang sea, between the [...]vinces of Pekin and Laenotum. It is in most places built of brick [...] mortar, which is so well tempered, that though it has stood for 1800 [...], it is but little decayed. The beginning of this wall is a large [...] of stone raised in the sea, in the province of Petcheli, to the [...] of Pekin, and almost in the same latitude: It is built like the [...] of the capital city of the empire, but much wider, being [...]rrassed [...] cased with bricks, and is from twenty to twenty-five feet high­ [...] [...], and the other gentleman, who took a map of these provin­ [...] often stretched a line on the top, to measure the basis of triangles, [...] to take distant points with an instrument. They always sound it [...] wide enough for five or six horsemen to travel abreast with ease, [...] has been already made of the prodigious canals and roads [...] are cut through this empire.

The artificial mountains present on their tops, temples, monasteries, [...] other edifices. Some part, however, of what we are told con­ [...] the cavities in these mountains, seems to be fabulous. The [...] bridges cannot be sufficiently admired. They are built some­ [...] [...]on barges strongly chained together, yet so as to be parted, [...] lot the vessels pass that sail up and down the river. Some of [...] from mountain to mountain, and consist only of one arch; [Page 418] that over the river Saffrany is 400 cubits long, and 500 high, through a single arch, and joins two mountains; and some in the interior parts of the empire are said to be still more stupendous. The triumphal arches of this country form the next species of artificial curiosities. Though they are not built in the Greek or Roman style of architecture, yet they are superb and beautiful, and erected to the memories of their great men, with vast labour and expense. They are said in the wh [...]e to be eleven hundred, two hundred of which are particularly magni­ficent. Their sepulchral monuments make likewise a great figure. Their towers, the models of which are now so common in Europe un­der the name of pagodas, are vast embellishments to the face of their country. They seem to be constructed by a regular order, and all of them are finished with exquisite carvings and gildings, and other orna­ments. That at Nankin, which is 200 feet high, and 40 in diameter, i [...] the most admired. It is called the Porcelane Tower, because it is lined with Chinese [...]iles. Their temples are chiefly remarkable for the disagreeable taste in which they are built, for their capaciousness, their w [...]imfical ornaments, and the ugliness of the idols they contain. The Chinese are remarkably fond of bells, which gave name to one of their principal festivals. A bell of Pekin weighs 120,000 pounds, but its sound is said to be disagreeable. The last curiosity I shall mention, is their fire works, which in China exceed those of all other nations. In short, every province of China is a scene of curiosities. Their buildings, except their pagodas, being confined to no order, and susceptible of all kinds of ornaments, have a wild variety, and a pleas­ing elegance, not void of magnificence, agreeable to the eye and the imagination, and present a diversity of objects not to be found in Eu­ropean architecture.

CHIEF CITIES.] Little can be said of these more than that some of them are immensely large. The empire is said to contain 4400 [...] cities; Le Compte says but 2357; the chief of which are Pekin, Nan­kin, and Canton. Pekin, the capital of the whole empire of China, and the ordinary residence of the emperors, is situated in a very fertile plain, 20 leagues distant from the great wall. It is an oblong square, and is divided into two cities: That which contains the emperor's pal­ace is called the Tartar city, because the houses were given to the Tar­tars when the present family came to the throne; and they refusing to suffer the Chinese to inhabit it, forced them to live without the walls, where they in a short time built a new city; which, by being joined to the other, renders the whole of an irregular form, six leagues in com­pass. The walls and gates of Pekin are of the surprising height of [...] cubits, so that they hide the whole city; and are so broad, that c [...] ­ne [...]s are placed upon them on horseback; for there are slopes within the city of considerable length, by which horsemen may ascend the walls, and in several places there are houses built for the guard. The gates, which are nine in number, are neither embellished with [...], nor other carving, all their beauty consisting in their prodigious height, which at a distance gives them a noble appearance. The arches of the gates are built of marble, and the rest with large bricks [...] with excellent mortar. Most of the streets are built in a direct [...], the largest are about 120 feet broad, and a league in length. The shops, where they [...] silks and china-ware, generally take up the [Page 419] whole street, and afford a very agreeable prospect. Each shop-keeper places before his shop, on a small kind of pedestal, a board about twenty feet high, painted, varnished, and often guilt, on which are written in large characters the names of the several commodities he fells. These being placed on each side of the street at nearly an equal distance from each other, have a very pretty appearance; but the hous­es are poorly built in front, and very low, most of them having only a ground floor, and none exceeding one story above it. Of all the build­ings in this great city, the most remarkable is the imperial palace, the grandeur of which does not consist so much in the nobleness and ele­gance of the architecture, as in the multitude of its buildings, courts, and gardens, all regularly disposed; for within the walls are not only the emperor's house, but a little town, inhabited by the officers of the court, and a multitude of artificers, employed and kept by the empe­ror; but the houses of the courtiers and artificers are low and ill con­trived. F. Attiret, a French Jesuit, who was indulged with a sight of the palace and gardens, says, that the palace is more than three miles in circumference, and that the front of the buildings shines with gild­ing, paint, and varnish, while the inside is set off and furnished with every thing that is most beautiful and precious in China, the Indies, and Europe. The gardens of this palace are large tracts of ground, in which are raised, at proper distances, artificial mountains, from 20 to [...] feet high, which form a number of small vallies, plentifully water­ed by canals, which uniting, form lakes and meres. Beautiful and magnificent barks sail on these pieces of water, and the banks are orna­mented with ranges of buildings, not any two of which are said to have any resemblance to each other, which diversity produces a very pleasing effect. Every valley has its house of pleasure, very large: Many of these houses are built with cedar, brought, at a vast expense, the distance of 500 leagues. Of these palaces, or houses of pleasure, there are more than 200 in this vast enclosure. In the middle of a [...], which is near half a league in a diameter every way, is a rocky [...]and, on which is built a palace, containing more than a hundred apartments. It has four fronts, and is a very elegant and magnificent structure. The mountains and hills are covered with tress, particular­ly such as produce beautiful and aromatic flowers; and the canals are [...]ged with rustic pieces of rock, disposed with such art, as exactly to resemble the wildness of nature. The city of Pekin is said to contain [...] million inhabitants.

Nankin is said to exceed Pekin, both in extent and population. But [...] we may judge from the account which M. Bourgeois, missionary at Pekin, gives of it, in a letter of his, dated in 1777, we are to believe [...] there is nothing remarkable in this celebrated city, but its famous [...]ple, its vast circumference, the barren hills, and uncultivated tracts of land that are inclosed within its walls, and which make a stranger [...] that he has left it far behind him when he is in the midst of it.

Canton is the greatest port in China, and the only port that has [...] much frequented by Europeans. The city wall is about five [...] in circumference, with very pleasant walks around it. From [...] top of some adjacent hills, on which forts are built, you have a fine [...] of the country. It is beautifully interpersed with moun­tains, little hills, and vallies, all green; and these again pleasantly di­versified [Page 420] with small towns, villages, high towers, temples, the seats of mandarins and other great men, which are watered with delightful lakes, canals, and small branches from the river T [...] on which are num­berless boats and junks, sailing different ways through the most fertile parts of the country. The city is entered by seven iron gates, and within-side of each there is a guard-house. The streets of Canton are very straight, but generally narrow, and paved with slag-stones. There are many pretty buildings in this city, great numbers of triumphal arches, and temples well stocked with images. The streets of Canton are so crowded▪ that it is difficult to walk in them; yet a woman of any fashion is seldom to be seen, unless by chance when coming out of their chairs. There are great numbers of market-places for fish, flesh, poultry, vegetables, and all kinds of provisions, which are sold very cheap. There are many private walks about the skirts of the town, where those of the better sort have their houses, which are very little frequented by Europeans, whose business lies chiefly in the trading parts of the city, where there are only shops and warehouses. Few of the Chinese traders of any substance keep their families in the house where they do business, but either in the city, in the more remote sub­urbs, or farther up in the country. They have all such a regard to privacy, that no windows are made towards the streets, but in shops and places of public business, nor do any of their windows look to­wards those of their neighbours. The shops of those that deal in silk are very neat, make a fine show, and are all in one place; for trades­men, or dealers in one kind of goods, herd together in the same street. It is computed that there are in this city, and its suburbs, 1,200,000 people; and there are often 5000 trading vessels lying before the city.

TRADE AND MANUFACTURES.] China is so happily situated, and produces such a variety of materials for manufactures, that it may be said to be the native land of industry; and which is exercised with vast art and neatness. They make paper of the bark of bamboo, and other trees; as well as of cotton, but not comparable for records, or printing, to the European. Their ink, for the use of drawing, is well known in England, and is said to be made of oil and lamp-black. We have already mentioned the antiquity of their printing, which they still do by cut­ting their characters on blocks of wood. The manufacture of that earthen ware, generally known by the name of China, was long a se­cret in Europe, and brought immense sums to that country. The an­cients knew and esteemed it highly under the name of porcelane, but it was of a much better fabric than the modern. Though the Chinese affect to keep that manufacture still a secret▪ yet it is well known that the principal material is a prepared pulverized earth, and that several European countries far exceed the Chinese in manufacturing this com­modity. * The Chinese silks are generally plain and flowered gaus [...], and they are said to have been originally fabricated in that country, where the art of rearing silk-worms was first discovered. They manu­facture silks likewise of a more durable kind, and their cotton, and other cloths, are famous for furnishing a light warm wear.

[Page 421] Their trade, it is well known, is open to Americans and to all the European nations, with whom they deal for ready money; for such us the pride and avarice of the Chinese, that they think no manufactures equal to their own. But it is certain, that since the discovery of the porcelane manufactures, and the vast improvements the Europeans have made in the weaving branches, the Chinese commerce has been on the decline.

CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT.] This was a very instructive, entertaining article, before the conquest of China by the Tartars; for though their princes retain many fundamental maxims of the old Chi­nese, the Tartars have obliged the inhabitants to deviate from the ancient discipline in many respects. Perhaps their acquaintance with the Eu­ropeans may have contributed to their degeneracy. The original plan of the Chinese government was patriarchical, almost in the strictest sense of the word. Duty and obedience to the father of each family was recommended and enforced in the most rigorous manner; but, at the same time, the emperor was considered as the father of the whole. His mandarins, or great officers of state, were looked upon as his sub­stitutes, and the degrees of submission which were due from the infe­rior ranks to the superior, were settled and observed with the most scrupulous precision, and in a manner that to us seems highly ridicu­lous. This simple claim of obedience required great address and knowledge of human nature to render it effectual; and the Chinese legislators, Confucius particularly, appear to have been possessed of won­derful abilities. They enveloped their dictates in a number of mystical appearances, so as to strike the people with awe and veneration. The mandarins had modes of speaking and writing different from those of other subjects, and the people were taught to believe that their princes partook of divinity, so that they were seldom seen, and more seldom approached.

Though this system preserved the public tranquillity for an incredi­ble number of years, yet it had a fundamental defect that often convuls­ed, and at last proved fatal to the state, because the same attention was▪ not paid to the military as to the civil duties. The Chinese had pas­sions like other men, and sometimes a weak or wicked administration dove them into arms, and a revolution easily succeeded which they justified by saying, that their sovereign had ceased to be their father. During those commotions, one of the parties naturally invited their neighbours the Tartars to their assistance, and it was thus those barbar­ [...], who had great sagacity, became acquainted with the weak side of their constitution, and they availed themselves accordingly, by in [...]ding and conquering the empire.

Besides the great doctrine of patriarchal obedience, the Chinese had sumptuary laws, and regulations for the expenses of all degrees of sub­jects, which were very useful in preserving the public tranquillity, and preventing the effects of ambition. By their institutions likewise the mandarins might remonstrate to the emperor, but in the most submissive manner, upon the errors of his government, and when he was a [...]ous prince, this freedom was often attended with the most salutary effects. No country in the world is so well provided with magistrates [...] the discharge of justice, both in civil and criminal matters, as Chi­ [...]; but they are often ineffectual through want of public virtue in the [Page 422] execution. The emperor is styled "Holy Son of Heaven, Sole Govern­or of the Earth, Great Father of his People."

RELIGION.] This article is nearly connected with the preceding. Though the ancient Chinese worshipped idols, yet their philosophers and legislators had juster sentiments of the Diety, and indulged the people in the worship of sensible objects, only to make them more sub­missive to government. The Jesuits made little opposition to this when they attempted to convert the Chinese; and suffered their pros­elytes to worship Tien, pretending that it was no other than the name of God. The truth is, Cor [...]ucius, and the Chinese legislators, intro­duced a most excellent system of morals among the people, and en­deavoured to supply the want of just ideas of a future state, by pre­scribing to them the worship of inferior deities. Their morality ap­proximated to that of Christianity; but as we know little of their relig­ion, only through the Jesuits, we cannot adopt for truth the numerous instances which they tell us of the conformity of the Chinese with the Christian religion. Those fathers, it must be owned, were men of great abilities, and made a wonderful progress about a century ago in their conversions; but they mistook the true character of the emperor who was their patron; for he no sooner found that they were in fact aspiring to the civil direction of the government, than he expelled them, levelled their churches with the ground, and prohibited the ex­ercise of their religion; since which time Christianity has made no progress in China.

REVENUES.] These are said by some to amount to twenty millions sterling a year; but this cannot be meant in money, which does not at all abound in China. The taxes collected for the use of government in rice, and other commodities, are certainly very great, and may be easily imposed, as an account of every man's family and substance is annually enrolled, and very possibly may amount to that sum.

MILITARY AND MARINE STRENGTH.] China is, at this time, a far more powerful empire than it was before its conquest by the eastern Tartars in 644. This is owing to the consummate policy of Chun­tchi, the first Tartarian emperor of China, who obliged his hereditary subjects to conform themselves to the Chinese manners and policy, and the Chinese to wear the Tartar dress and arms. The two na­tions were thereby incorporated. The Chinese were appointed to all the civil offices of the empire. The emperor made pekin the seat of his government, and the Tartars quietly submitted to a change of their country and condition, which was so much in their favour.

This security, however, of the Chinese from the Tartars, takes from them all military objects: the Tartar power alone, being formidable to that empire. The only danger that threatens it at present is the disuse of arms. The Chinese land army is said to consist of five millions of men: but in these are comprehended all who are employed in the col­lection of the revenue, and the preservation of the canals, the great roads, and the public peace. The imperial guards amount to about 30,000. As to the marine force, it is composed chiefly of the junks, we have already mentioned, and other small ships, that trade coast­ways, or to the neighbouring countries, or to prevent sudden descents.

A treatise on the military art, translated from the Chinese into the French language, was published at Paris in 1772, from which it [Page 423] appears that the Chinese are well versed in the theory of the art of war: But caution, and care, and circumspection, are much recom­mended to their generals; and one of their maxims is, never to fight with enemies either more numerous or better armed than themselves.

HISTORY.] The Chinese pretend as a nation to an antiquity be­yond all measure of credibility; and their annals have been carried beyond the period to which the scripture chronology assigns the crea­tion of the world. Poan-Kou is said by them to have been the first man, and the interval of time betwixt him and the death of the cele­brated Confucius, which was in the year before Christ, 479, has been reckoned from 276,000 to 96,961,740 years. But upon an accurate in­vestigation of this subject, these extravagant pretensions to antiquity, appear to be wholly unsupported. A correspondence has been carried on, for a number of years past, with the missionaries of China, and with two young Chinese, whom, the desire of being useful to their country, engaged to leave it for some time, that they might learn, in France the European languages and sciences. After a residence of several years there, where they applied themselves with singular atten­tion to the study of natural philosophy, chemistry, &c. and also acquir­ed a considerable knowledge of trade, manufactures, and the mechanic arts, they returned to China in 1765, carrying with them instructions and questions, relating to a variety of objects, which the learned and others, desired to have elucidated. On their arrival in China, they joined their labours, with those of the missionaries, and thus, since the year 1766, a variety of pieces have been annually sent, containing answers to the questions that had been proposed to them.

In 1776, was printed in a 4to vol. at Paris, the first of a series of vol­ume (some of which have since been published) which we are allowed to expect from this annual correspondence. This volume contains a­mong other valuable things, an ample memoir concerning the antiqui­ty of the Chinese nation. It is replete with learned researches, and shews a very extensive degree of erudition. The authors give a mortal blow to the pretended antiquity of the Chinese empire, and the authen­ticity of its ancient history. They prove that all historical relations of events prior to the reign of YAO, who lived 2057 years before Christ, are entirely fabulous, composed in modern times, unsupported by au­thentic records, and full of contradictions.

The same volume contains the translation of two books of great an­tiquity, the one entitled Tahio, or the Grand Science: The other Tsong­y [...]ng, or the exact middle way, with a preface and notes. These two pieces of morality contain the most excellent precepts of wisdom and virtue, expressed with the greatest eloquence, elegance and precision. In the preface to them we are told, they were composed by the grand­son of Confucius, and one of his disciples, from the lessons of that great Philosopher. If so, they are indeed uncommonly curious, and are equal to the noblest philosophical remains of Grecian antiquity, of which they bear, in several places, a very strong resemblance. But one of the passages, which is very striking, and which far exceeds, in clearness, the prophesy of Socrates, is that which follows. "How sub­lime are the ways of the Holy One! His virtue shall fill the universe—shall vivify all things, and shall rise to the Tier or Supreme Deity. What a noble course is opening to our view! What new laws and ob­ligations! [Page 424] What august rites and sacred solemnities! But how shall mortals observe them, if He does not first give them the example? His coming alone can prepare us for the performance of these sublime du­ties. Hence that saying, known and repeated in all ages. "the paths of perfection shall never be frequented, until the Holy One, by way of eminence, shall have consecrated them by the traces of his footsteps."

This certainly is a remarkable passage, especially if it has been trans­lated with precision and fidelity, from an authentic production, of so early a date as the time of Confucius.

The origin of the Chinese empire cannot be placed higher than two or three generations before Yao. But even this is carrying the em­pire of China to a very high antiquity, and it is certain that the ma­terials for Chinese history are extremely ample. The grand annals of the empire of China are comprehended in 668 volumes, and consist of the pieces that have been composed by the tribunal or department of history, established in China for transmitting to posterity the public events of the empire, and the lives, characters, and transactions of its sovereigns. It is said, that all the facts, which concern the monarchy since its foundation, have been deposited in this department, and from age to age have been arranged according to the order of time, under the inspection of government, and with all the precautions against il­lusion or partiality that could be suggested. These precautions have been carried so far, that the history of the reign of each imperial fam­ily, has only been published after the extinction of that family, and was kept profound secret during the dynasty, that neither fear nor flattery might adulterate the truth. It is asserted, that many of the Chinese historians exposed themselves to exile, and even to death, rather then disguise the defects and vices of the sovereign. But the emperor [...]hi-hoangti, at whose command the great wall was built, in the year 213 before the Christian aera, ordered all the historical books and records, which contained the fundamental laws and principles of the ancient government, with the medals, inscriptions, and monu­ments of antiquity, to be burnt, that they might not be employed by the learned to oppose his authority, and the changes he proposed to in­troduce into the monarchy, and that there might remain no earlier rec­ord, date, or authority, relative to religion, science, or politics, than those of his own reign, and he be considered as the founder of the em­pire. Four hundred literati were burnt with their books; yet this barbarous edict had not its full effect; several books were concealed, and escaped the general ruin. After this period, strict search was made for the ancient books and records that yet remained; but though much industry was employed for this purpose, it appears that the au­thentic historical sources of the Chinese, for the times anterior to the year 200 before Christ, are very few, and that they are still in smaller number for more remote periods. But notwithstanding the depreda­tions that have been made upon the Chinese history, it is still immense­ly voluminous, and has been judged by some writers superior to that of all other nations. Of the grand annals before mentioned, which amount to 668 volumes, a copy is preserved in the library of the French king. A chronological abridgment of this great work, in one hundred volumes, was published in the 42d year of the reign of Kang­hi; that is, in the year 1703. This work is generally called Ka [...]- [...], or the abridgment.

[Page 425] But the limits to which our work is confined will not permit us to enlarge upon so copious a subject as that of the Chinese history; nor would we have said even so much on this subject, could we have refer­red the reader to any good history of this Empire. It seems, that the original form of government, was monarchical; and a succession of ex­cellent princes, and a duration of domestic tranquility, united legisla­tion with philosophy, and produced their Fo-hi, whose history is wrap­ped up in mysteries, their Li-Loakum, and above all their Confucius, at once the Solon and Socrates of China. After all, the continued wars for several centuries between the Chinese and Tartars, and the in­ternal revolutions of the empire, produced the most dreadful effects, in proportion as its constitution was pacific, and they were attended with the most bloody exterminations in some provinces; so that though the Chinese empire is hereditary, the imperial succession was often broken into, and altered. Upwards of twenty dynasties, or dif­ferent lines and families of succession, are enumerated in their annals.

In the year 1771, all the Tartars which composed the nation of the [...]rgouths, left the settlements which they had under the Russian government on the banks of the Wolga, and the Iaick, at a small dis­tance from the Caspian sea, and in a vast body of fifty thousand fami­lies, they passed through the country of the Hasacks. After a march of eight months, in which they surmounted innumerable difficulties and dangers, they arrived in the plains that lie on the frontier of Carapen, not far from the banks of the river Ily, and offered themselves as sub­jects to Kien-long, emperor of China, who was then in the thirty-sixth year of his reign. He received them graciously, furnished them with provisions, cloths and money, and allotted to each family a portion of and for agriculture and pasturage. The year following there was a [...]cond emigration of about thirty thousand other Tartar families, who [...] quitted the settlements which they enjoyed under the Russian government, and submitted to the Chinese sceptre. The emperor [...]sed the history of the emigrations to be engraven upon stone, in [...] different languages.

INDOSTAN, HINDOOSTAN, or INDIA on this side the GANGES.

SITUATION AND BOUNDARIES.} THIS fine country, one of the most celebrated in the world for its antiquity, population and opulence, is situated between 66° and 92° 30′ of eastern longitude, and between the 8th and 36th Degrees of northern latitude, and is consequently, partly in the torrid, and partly in the northern temper­ [...] Zone.

It is washed on the South west by that part of the Indian Ocean, [...] the Arabian sea, on the south-east by another large inlet of the [...] ocean called the Bay of Bengal, and bounded on all other sides [...], Independent Tartary, Thibet, and India beyond the Ganges.

DIVISIONS.] In the year 1596, the dominions of the Emperor of [...], consisted of 105 Sircars or Provinces, subdivided into 2737 [...] or townships. The Empire at that period was parcelled in­to [Page 426] twelve grand divisions, and each was committed to the govern­ment of a Soobadar or Viceroy. The names of the Soobahs or Vice­royalties, were

Allahabad Ahmedabad Cabul
Agra Bahar Lahoor
Owdh Bengal Multan
Ajmeer Dehly Malwa.

To those were added, by conquest, Berar, Khandeess, and A [...] ­nagur, which were formed into three Soobahs, increasing the number to fifteen. *

Indostan is usually divided into Indostan Proper, to thenorth; and the peninsula called the Deccan, to the south.

These contain a variety of provinces, whose limits have been at all times every fluctuating, from the unsettled state of government.

The Tartar princes, the successors of Tamarlane, as they subdued this country, divided it into large provinces called Soubahs, which [...] subdivided into Circars and Purgunnahs: The boundaries of these Soubahs having been fixed by the emperor Akber in the 16th century are tolerably well known.

Of these Soubahs Indostan Proper contained thirteen, viz,

Soubahs or Provinces Chief Towns, &c.
Cabul Cabul, a very ancient and beautiful city, lat. 34° 30′. lon. 104°. 40′.
Gazna or Ghuzneen, situated in the second cli­mate, a barren place.
Lahoor § or the Pen­jab Lahoor on the Rauvee, lat. 31°. 50′. lon. 109°. 22′—a very large, populous city.
Attock on the Indus, here called the R. of At­tock, has one of the strongest fortresses in the empire, built to secure the passage of the rivers.
Moultan Moultan or Multan is one of the most ancient cities of Indostan, and is in lat. 29°. 25′. lon. 107°. 35′.
Sindy Tatta, Patala, on the Indus, here called the R. of Mehran, lat. 29°. 25. long. 107°. 35.
Provinces Chief Towns. &c.
Delhi or Dehly Dehly or Gehan-abad on the R. Jumna, lat 28°. 15′ lon. 114°. 38′.
Agra * Agra on the R. Jumna. It contains 500 stone buildings, of surprising construction, and ex­quisite workmanship
Canoge on the R. Ganges
Azmere of Agi­mere Azmere on the Puddar was a royal residence Chitore
Oude, Owdh or Ahored Oude or Owhd, on the Dewah or Gogra, one of the largest cities of Indostan, was the an­cient capital, lat 27°. 22′. lon. 118°. 6′.
Fyzabad on the same R. is the present capital Lucknow
[...]ar Patna on the Ganges
Tirhoot, the ancient residence of Hindoo learn­ing
[...]gal Ruins of Gour or Lucknouti; Gange-regia, of immense extent, situated formerly on the Gan­ges, though the main channel of the river is now 5 miles from it; it was the capital of Ben­gal 2270 years; the seat of government was in 1540 removed to
Tanda on the Ganges, now in ruins
Rajemal have succeeded to Tanda and become successively the capi­tals of Bengal
Dacca
Moorshedabad
Hoogly on the River Hoogly.
Chittacong Two emporiums 1 mile, distant from each other; both in pos­session of Europeans. The lat­ter famous for pomegranates.
Sa [...]gong
Allahabad Allahabad Helialas at the conflux of the Ganges and Jumna
Bennares on the Ganges
[...]leva  
[...]erat or Guje­j [...]t Ahmedabad, on the R. Sabermutty, lat. 23° con­taining 1000 stone mosques
Cambay and Ghogch are seaports
Surat on the R. Tapte, an emporium, formed in­to 9 divisions, each inhabited by a different tribe, and they spake different languages.

THE DECCAN.] This name, which signifies the south, in the most [...]ive signification includes the whole peninsula south of Indostan [...]er, but in its more limited sense it only comprehends the prov­inc [...] of Candeisn, Berar, Golconda, Amednagur, and Visiapour; thus [Page 428] excluding the provinces of Orissa, the Carnatic, and the Malabar states, which comprehend that long narrow tract between the Gauts and the western coast, a considerable part of which was never subjected by the Mogul emperors.

Provinces. Chief Towns, &c.
Candeish Burhanpour
Berar Shawpour, ancient capital—Nagpour, present capital
Golconda * Hydrabad or Bagnagar—Golconda—Masu­lipatam
Amednagur, Bal­lagate or Dow­latabad Amednagur
Aurungabad
Dowlatabad, a strong fortress
Visiapour or Beja­pour Visiapour
Orssia Cattac on the Mahanada
Balasore
Carnatic Bisnaghar—Chandeghere
Arect—Trichinapoli
Scringapatam—Gingee
Malabar states com­prehend   Cochin
Malabar proper Calicut
Canara Goa
Concan Mangalore

PRESENT DIVISION.] Such was the general division of Indostan under the Mogul emperors, but the celebrated Persian usurper Thamas Kouli Khan, having in the year 1738 defeated the emperor Mahomed Shaw, plundered Delhi, and pillaged the empire of treasure to the amount of more than 70 millions sterling, restored the unhappy prince his dominions, but annexed to Persia all the countries westward of the Indus.

This dreadful incursion so weakened the authority of the emperor, that the Viceroys of the different provinces either threw off their al­legiance or acknowledged a very precarious dependence; and en­gaging in wars with each other, called in as allies the East India com­panies of France and England, who had been originally permitted as traders, to form establishments on the coasts: These, from the great superiority of European discipline, from allies became in a short time principals in an obstinate contest, that at length terminated in the ex­pulsion of the French from Indostan; and thus a company of British merchants have acquired, partly by cessions from the country powers, and partly by injustice and usurpation, territories equal in extent, and superior in wealth and population to most of the kingdoms of Europe.

The Mahrattas originally possessed several provinces of Indostan, from whence they were driven by the arms of the Mogul conquerors; they were never wholly subjected, but retiring to the northern part of the Gauts, made frequent irruptions from these inaccessible moun­tains; taking advantage of the anarchy of the empire, they have ex­tended [Page 429] their frontiers, and are at present possessed of a tract of country 1000 British miles long by 700 wide.

Hyder Alley, a soldier of fortune, who had learned the art of war from the Europeans, having possessed of himself of that part of the ancient Carnatic, called the kingdom of Mysore, has within a few years ac­quired by continual conquests, a considerable portion of the southern part of the Peninsula; this able and active prince, the most formidable enemy that the English ever experienced in Indostan, dying in 1783 left to his son Tippo Saib, the peaceful possession of his dominions, su­perior in extent to the kingdom of England.

These extraordinary revolutions, with others of less importance, [...]nder the following account of the present division of property in this unhappy empire, absolutely necessary, in order to understand its modern history.

PRESENT DIVISION OF INDOSTAN.

Such is the instability of human greatness, that the present Great Mogul, Shaw Allum, the descendant of the Great Tamerlane, is merely a nominal prince, of no importance in the politics of Indostan: He is permitted to reside at Delhi, which, with a small adjacent Territory, is [...] that remains to him of that vast empire, which his ancestors gov­erned more than 350 years.

The principal Divisions of this country, as they stood in 1782, are [...] follow, viz. The British possessions; States in alliance with Brit­ain; Tippo Saib's Territories; Mahratta states and their tributaries; and the Territories of the Subah of the Deccan.

BRITISH POSSESSIONS.] The British possessions contain about [...],000 square British miles, (which is about 18,000 more than in con­ [...]ed in Great Britain and Ireland) and about 10 millions of inhab­itants. They consist of three distinct governments, viz.

Government of Cal­cutta or Bengal Bengal Subah On the Ganges.
Bahar Subah
Benares Zemindary
  Northern Circars On the coast of Orissa.
Government of Ma­drass The Jaghire On the coast of Coro­mandel.
Territory of Cuddalore
—of Devicotta
—of Nagapatam
Government of Bombay   On the Gulf of Cambay.

GOVERNMENT OF BENGAL.] This government was rich, flourish­ing and populous before the late usurpations in Indostan; it is finely [...]ed by the Ganges and Burrampooter with their numerous navi­gable channels, and the several navigable rivers they receive: It is fer­ [...] by their periodical inundations; and by its natural situation is [...] secured against foreign enemies: On the east and north it is [...] by stupendous mountains, large rivers, and extensive wastes; [...] south by a sea-coast guarded by shallows and impenetrable [...], where it is accessible only by the River of Hoogly; and on [...] [...]est, though more exposed, the natural barrier is strong. The [Page 430] capital and seat of government is CALCUTTA, on the River of Hoogly, navigable by ships of the line; it is a modern city, and though in an unhealthy situation, it is at present one of the most rich, flourishing, and commercial cities in Indostan.

GOVERNMENT OF MADRAS.] The great defects of this government, are not only the want of connexion between its parts, which are scat­tered along an extensive coast, and separated from each other by states frequently hostile, but being totally devoid of good harbours: Hopes however have been entertained of removing this last defect, by remov­ing the bar at the mouth of that branch of the Caveri called Coleroon, which falls into the sea at Devicotta. The capital and seat of govern­ment is MADRAS in the Jaghire, called also Fort St. George; it is illy situated without a harbour, and badly fortified, yet contains upwards of 200,000 inhabitants.—Fort St. DAVID in the Territory of Cuddalore is rich, flourishing, and contains 60,000 inhabitants.—MASULIPATAN in the northern Circars, at one of the mouths of the Krishna, was for­merly the most flourishing and commercial city on this coast, and though much declined, is still considerable.

The northern Circars, which are denominated from the towns of Cicacole, Rajamundry, Elore and Condapily, are defended inland by a strong barrier of mountains and extensive forests, beyond which the country is totally unknown for a considerable space.

GOVERNMENT OF BOMBAY.] This government is watered by the Tapee and Nerbudda. Its capital and seat of government is BOMBAY, in a small island in an unhealthy situation, but well fortified and on a fine harbour.—SURAT on the Tapte which forms an indifferent port, is one of the most rich and commercial cities in Indostan. T [...]CHE [...] ­RY on the Malabar coast, is dependent on Bombay.

ALLIES OF THE BRITISH.

Dominions of the Nabob of Oude Fyzabad
Lucknow
Dominions of the Nabob of Arcot, comprehend the eastern part only of the an­cient Carnatic. Arcot on the Paliar is the capital, though the Nabobusually resides at Madrass.
Gingee, the strongest Indian fortress in the Carnatic.
Trichinapoli near the Caveri well for­tified in the Indian manner, was rich and populous, containing near 400,000 inhabitants, now almost ru­ined by the numerous sieges it has sustained.
Seringham Pagoda, in an island of the Caveri, is famons throughout Indos­tan for its sanctity and has no less than 40,000 priests who constantly reside here in voluptuous indolence.
Chandegeri, the ancient capital of the empire of Narzzingua, formerly rich, powerful, and populous; near it is the famons Pagoda of
Tripetti, the Lorretto of Indostan, the offerings of the numerous Pilgrims who resort hither bring in an im­mense revenue.
Tanjore, Madura, and Tinivelly are the capitals of small states of the same name, which with Marawar, are dependent on the Nabob of Ar­cot.
Territory of Futty Sing Guicker in the Soubah of Guttrat. Amedabad
Cambay.
Territory of the Rajah of Ghod Gwalior a celebrated fortress.

TIPPO SAIB'S TERRITORIES.

Kingdom of Mysore Seringapatam on the Caveri
Bednore Bednore or Hyder Nuggar
Canara Mangalore
Part of Malabar proper Calicut

Chitteldroog, Sanore, Harponelly, Roydroog, Gooty, Condanore, [...], C [...]ddapa, &c. are the capitals of Territories of the same name, which have been successively conquered by Hyder Ally.

MAHRATTA STATES AND THEIR TRIBUTARIES.

The extensive country is divided among a number of chiefs or [...], who have one common head called the Paishwa or Nana, to [...] however their obedience is merely nominal, as they often was [...] each other, and are seldom confederated except for mutual de­ [...].

[Page 432]

Southern Poonah Mahrattas, or the Territories of Paish­wa, are naturally strong, being intersected by the va­rious branches of the Gauts. Satara the nominal capital of Mah­ratta states, the Paishwa at present resides at
Poonah
Aurungabad, Amednagur, and Visia­pour, are in his Territories.

The Concan or tract between the Gauts and the sea is sometimes called the Pirate coast, as it was subject to the celebrated Pirate An­gria and his successors, whose capital was the strong fortress of Gheria, taken by the English and Mahrattas in 1755; by the acquisition of this coast the Mahrattas have become a maritime power, and dangerous enemies to the government of Bombay.

Berar Mahrattas, their coun­try is very little known to Europeans. Nagpour is the capital Balasore has considerable trade Cuttack on the Mahanda, an important post which renders this nation a for­midable enemy to the British, as it cuts off the communication between the governments of Bengal and Ma­drass.
Northern Ponah Mahrattas governed at present by Sindia, Holkar, and some other less considerable princes. O [...]gein, the residence of Sindia Indoor, the residence of Holkar Calpy, the residence of Gungdar Punt Sagur, the residence of Ballagec.
Territory of the Soubah of the Deccan * Hydrabad is the capital.

Country of the Abdalli. This government, which includes the Sou­bah of Cabul, and the neighbouring parts of Persia, was formed by Abdalla, one of the generals of Thamas Kouli Kan, when on the death of that usurper his empire was dismembered: Its capital is Candahar in Persia.

Country of the Seiks: They are said to consist of a number of small states independent of each other, but united by a federal union.

Country of the Jats or Getes, very little known to Europeans.

Country of Zabeda Cawn, an Afguan Rohilla.

Territory of Agra on the Jumna.

Furrukabad, or country of the Patan Rohillas, on the Ganges, sur­rounded by the dominions of Oude.

Bundelclund.

Travancore near C. Commorin.

AIR AND SEASONS.] The winds in this climate generally blow for six months from the south, and six from the north. April, May, and the beginning of June, are excessively hot, but refreshed by sea br [...]ts; and in some dry seasons, the hurricanes, which tear up the sands, [...]od let them fall in dry showers, are excessively disagreeable. The [...] [Page 433] [...]sh, and consequently the Europeans in general, who arrive at Indos­ton, are commonly seized with some illness, such as flux or fever, in their different appearances; but when properly treated, especially if the patients are abstemious, they recover, and afterwards prove healthy. About the end of June, a south-west wind begins to blow from the sea, on the coast of Malabar, which, with continual rains, last four months, during which time all is serene upon the coast of Coromandel (the western and eastern coasts being so denominated.) Towards the end of October, the rainy season, and the change of the monsoon be­gins on the Coromandel coast, which being destitute of good harbours, renders is extremely dangerous for ships to remain there, during that time; and to this is owing the periodical returns of the English ship­ping to Bombay, upon the Malabar coast. The air is naturally hot in this peninsula, but is refreshed by breezes, the wind altering every 12 hours; that is from raidnight to noon it blows off the land, when it is tolerably hot, and during the other twelve hours from the sea, which last proves a great refreshment to the inhabitants of the coast.—The produce of the soil is the same with that of the other parts of the [...]est-Indies. The like may be said of their quadrupeds, fish, fowl, and [...]ious creatures and insects.

MOUNTAINS.] At C. Camorin commences a range of steep and lof­ty mountains, called the Gauts or Gettes, which run parallel to the western coast, and assumes various names as it advances northward: These mountains rise abruptly from the low Country on the west, like a stupendous wall, that supports a vast extent of fertile and populous plains, which are so much elevated as to render the air, though in the [...]rid Zone, cool, and pleasant. Indostan is separated from the countries that environ it to the northward by several ranges of stupendous mountains that have no general appellation, but are distinguished by various names, in different parts: Of these the most remarkable are the mountains Hindoo-Koh, the ancient Paropamisus and Indian Cau­ [...]s, on the confines of Persia and Independent Tartary. The moun­tains of Thibet, on the confines of that country are very lofty, and [...]ected with others farther north, of such great height, that they [...] supposed the highest in Asia.

RIVERS.] Of the rivers of Indostan three far exceed the rest in [...]itude and utility; the Indus, the Ganges, and the Burrampooter. The Indus, called Sindeh by the Natives, issues from the mountains of Hindoo-Koh, and soon becoming navigable is called the River of At­ [...]k; in the upper part of its course it receives several fine, navigable [...]ers, but none in the lower, where it crosses a flat, open country, and [...]lls into the Arabian sea, by several channels, the chief of which is called the River of Mehran. These channels form and intersect a [...] triangular island which they fertilize by their periodical inunda­tio [...]. The principal rivers it receives are the Behat, or Hydaspes, [...] the Hyphasis, which formed the eastern boundary of the conquests [...] Alexander.

The Ganges, one of the finest rivers in the world, issues from Ken­ [...], one of the vast mountains of Thibet, and after a course of about [...]les, through mountainous regions little known, enters Indostan [...] Defile of Kupele, supposed by the natives to be its source; from [...] this fine river (which is revered by the Hindoos as a deity that [Page 434] is to wash away all their stains, and who say that is flows from the hair of Mahadeo) passes through delightful plains, with a smooth navigable stream, from one to three miles wide, during the remainder of its course, which is about 2350 miles, to the bay of Bengal, into which it falls by two larger, and a multitude of lesser channels, that form and in­tersect a large triangular island, whose base at the sea is near 200 miles in extent. The entire course of the Ganges is 2100 miles, and is to that of the Thames as 9frac12; to 1. The navigation of the eastern branch being dangerous is little frequented. The western branch, called the little Ganges, or R. of Hoogly, is navigable by large ships, and most generally frequented. The Ganges receives 11 rivers, some of which are equal to the Rhine, and none inferior to the Thames, in England. The learned among the Hindoos, have composed volumes in praise of these waters, all parts of which they consider as holy; but some parti­cular parts are esteemed more so than others. People of high rank have the water of the Ganges brought to them from vast distances, it being thought necessary to the performance of some religious rites. The water of the Ganges has been celebrated in all ages, not only for its sanctity, but also on account of its sweetness, lightness, and whole­someness, and because it does not become putrid though kept for years.

The Burrampooter, is called Sanpoo in the upper part of its course. This rival sister of the Ganges issues from the same mountains that give birth to that river; but taking a contrary direction through Thibet, winds to the south west, through A [...]am and entering Indostan, flows to the south, assumes the name of Megna, and joins the western branch of the Ganges, with an immense body of water, equal if not superior to the Ganges itself.

These two noble Rivers when they approach the sea, divide into such a multitude, of channels, and receive such a number of navigable streams, that a tract of country, nearly equal to Great Britain in extent, enjoys by their means the finest inland navigation that can be con­ceived, and which gives constant employment to 30,000 boatmen: These channels are so numerous that very few places in this tract are even in the dry season 25 miles from a navigable stream; and in the season of the periodical rains, they overflow their banks to the depth of 30 feet, and form and inundation that fertilizes the soil to the extent of more than 100 miles.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, RELIGION AND GOVERNMENT.} The Mahometans (says Mr. Orme) who are called Moors, of Indostan, are compared to be about ten millions, and the Indians about an hundred millions.

The original inhabitants of India are called Gentoos; or, as others call them, Hin [...]o [...], and the country Hindoostan. They pretend that Brumma, who was their legislator both in politics and religion, was inferior only to [...], and that be existed many thousand years before our account of the creation. This Brumma, probably, was some great and good genius, whole beneficence, like that of the pagan legislators, led his people and their posterity to pay him divine honours. The Bramins for so the Gentoo priests are called pretend that he bequeath­ed to them a book called the Vidam, containing his doctrines and in­stitutions; and that though the original is lost, they are still possessed of a sacred commentary upon it, called the Shahstah, which is written in the Shanscrita language, now a dead language, and known only [...] the Bramins, who study it, even as our sacred scriptures are written [...] [Page 435] Greek and Hebrew. But whether that language was originally differ­ent from that of the country, or whether it has only now become unin­telligible to the people, through that change which is incident to all living languages, is not well known.

The foundation of Brumman's doctrine consisted in the belief of a Su­preme Being, who created a regular gradation of beings, some superior, and some inferior to man; in the immortality of the soul, and a future state of rewards and punishments, which is to consist of a transmigra­tion into different bodies, according to the lives they have led in their pre-existent state. From this it appears more than probable, that the Pythagorean metempsychosis took its rise in India. The necessity of inculcating this sublime, but otherwise complicated doctrine, into the lower ranks, induced the Bramins, who are by no means unanimous in their doctrines, to have recourse to sensible representations of the Deity and his attributes; so that the original doctrines of Brumma have de­generated to rank ridiculous idolatry, in the worship of different ani­mals, and various images, and of the most hideous figures, delineated of carved. Wooden images are placed in all their temples, and on cer­tain festivals are exhibited in the high roads and in the streets of towns. The human figures, with elephants heads, which are the objects of their devotion, have many hands, and are enormously corpulent.

The Hindoos have, from time immemorial, been divided into four great tribes. The [...]st and most noble tribe are the Bramins, who alone can officiate in the priesthood, like the Jewish tribe of Levi. They are not, however, excluded from government, trade, or agriculture, though they are strictly prohibited from all menial offices by their laws. The second in order is the Sittri tribe, who, according to their original institution, ought to be all military men; but they frequently follow other professions. The third is the tribe of Beise, who are chiefly merchants, bankers, and banias or shopkeepers. The fourth tribe is that of [...]der, who ought to be menial servants; and they are incapable of raising themselves to any superior rank. If any one of them should be excommunicated from any of the four tribes, he and his posterity are for ever shut out from the society of every body in the nation, excepting that of the Harri cast, who are held in utter detesta­tion by all the other tribes, and are employed only in the meanest and vilest offices. This circumstance renders excommunication so dread­ful, that any Hindoo will suffer the torture, and even death itself, ra­ther than deviate from one article of his faith.

Besides this division into tribes, the Gentoos are also subdivided into ca [...]s, or smaller classes and tribes; and it has been computed that there are eight four of these casts, though some have supposed there was a greater number. The order of pre-eminence of all the casts, in a par­ticular city on province, is generally indisputably decided. The ln­dian of an inferior would think himself honoured by adopting the cus­toms of a superior cast; but this last would give battle sooner than not vindicate its prerogatives: The inferior receives the victuals pre­pared by a superior cast with respect, but the superior will not partake of a meal which has been prepared by the hands of an inferior cast. Their marriages are circumscribed by the same barriers as the rest of their intercourses; and hence, besides the national physiognomy, the [...]eres of each cast, preserve an air of still greater resemblance to one [Page 436] another. There are some casts remarkable for their beauty, and others as remarkable for their ugliness. The most striking features in the character of the Hindoos, are their superstition, and veneration for the institutions and tenets of their forefathers.

In India, the dominion of religion extends to a thousand particulars, which in other countries are governed either by the civil laws, or by taste, custom, or fashion. Dress, food, the common intercourses of life, marriages, professions, all are under the jurisdiction of religion. There is scarcely any thing that is not regulated by superstition. It prescribes rules of conduct in all circumstances and situations; nor is there any thing almost so trifling or minute as to be considered as a matter of indifference. The original government of the Hindoos, was in reality an hierarchy; for among that religious people, the highest authority was possessed by the priesthood, or the Bramin cast. Nor is it in this instance only, that we find a resemblance between the natives of India and them. Not only were the governments of both nations hierarchical, but in both there was a vast variety of religious obser­vances and ceremonies extending to many particulars, which in other countries are matters of choice or of indifference; and both entertain­ed the most profound respect and veneration for their ancestors. All the cast acknowledge the Bramins for their priests, and from them derive their belief of the transmigration; which leads many of them to afflict themselves even at the death of a fly, although occasioned by inadvert­ence. But the greater number of casts are less scrupulous, and eat, al­though very sparingly, both of fish and flesh; but, like the Jews, not of all kinds indifferently. The food of the Hindoos is simple, consist­ing chiefly of rice, ghee, which is a kind of imperfect butter, milk, vegetables, and oriental spices of different kinds, but chiefly what is called in the East, chilly, and in the West, green or Cayen, pepper. The warrior cast, may eat of the flesh of goats, mutton, and poultry. Other superior casts may eat poultry and fish; but the inferior casts are prohibited from eating flesh or fish of any kind. Their greatest luxury, consists in the use of the richest spiccries and perfumes, of which the great people are very lavish, and which grow almost spon­taneously in their gardens. They esteem milk the purest of foods, be­cause they think it partakes of some of the properties of the nectar of their gods, and because they esteem the cow itself almost like a divinity.

Their manners are gentle; their happiness consists in the solaces of a domestic life; and they are taught by their religion, that matrimony is an indispensable duty in every man, who does not entirely separate himself from the world from a principle of devotion. Their religion also permits them to have several wives; but they seldom have more than one: And it has been observed, that their wives are distinguished by a decency of demeanour, a solicitude in their families, and a fidelity to their vows, which might do honour to human nature in the most civilized countries. The amusements of the Hindoos consist in going to their pagodas, in assisting at religious shews, and in fulfilling a vari­ety of ceremonies prescribed to them by the Bramins. Their religion seems to forbid them to quit their own shores, * nor do they want any [Page 437] thing from abroad. They might, therefore, have lived in much tran­quillity and happiness, if others had looked on them with the same in­difference with which they regard the rest of the world.

The soldiers, are commonly called Rajah-poots, or persons descended from rajahs, and reside chiefly in the northern provinces, and are generally more fair-complexioned than the people of the southern provinces, who are quite black. These rajah-poots are a robust, brave, faithful people, and enter into the service of those who will pay them; but when their leader falls in battle, they think that their engagements to him are finished, and they run off the field without any stain upon their reputation.

The custom of women burning themselves, upon the death of their husbands, still continues to be practised among some of high cast and condition, though much less frequently than formerly, and it is said, that the Bramins now do not encourage it.

One particular class of women are allowed to be openly prostituted: These are the famous dancing girls. Their attitudes and movements are very easy, and not ungraceful. Their persons are delicately form­ed, gaudily decorated, and highly perfumed. By the continuation of wanton attitudes, they acquire, as they grow warm in the dance, a fran­tic lasciviousness themselves, and communicate, by a natural contagion, the most voluptuous desires to the beholders.

The Gentoos are as careful of the cultivation of their lands, and their public works and conveniences, as the Chinese; and remarkably hon­est and humane: There scarcely is an instance of a robbery in all In­dostan, though the diamond merchants travel without defensive weap­ons. According to a late writer, the Hindoos, as well as the Persians, Tartars, and adjoining nations, who have inhabited Indostan since it was invaded by Tamerlane, though of different nations, religions, laws, and customs, possess nevertheless, in equal degrees, hospitality, polite­ness, and address. In refinement and ease they are superior to any peo­ple to the westward of them. In politeness and address, in graceful­ness of deportment, and speech, an Indian is as much superior to a Frenchman of fashion, as a French courier is to a Dutch burgo-master of Dort. A Frenchman's ease is mixed with forward familiarity, with confidence, and self-conceit; but the Hindoos, especially those of the higher casts, are in their demeanour easy and unconstrained, still more than even a French courtier, and their ease and freedom is reserved, [...]dest, and respectful.

Their persons are straight and elegant, their limbs finely proportion­ed, their fingers long and tapering, their countenances open and pleas­ant, and their features exhibit the most delicate lines of beauty in the females, and in the males a kind of manly softness. Their walk and gait, as well as their whole deportment, is in the highest degree grace­ful. The dress of the men is a kind of close-bodies gown, like our [Page 438] women's gowns, and wide trowsers, resembling petticoats, reaching down to their slippers. Such of the women as appear in public, have shawls over their heads and shoulders, short close jackets, and the tight drawers which come down to their ankles. Hence the dress of the men gives them, in the eyes of Europeans, an appearance of effeminacy; whereas that of the women will appear rather masculine: Such is the influence of habit and custom on sentiments; an influence which ex­tends to matters of taste, and to objects of higher importance.

Their houses cover much ground, and have spacious galleries and accommodations of various kinds. The apartments are small, and the furniture not very elegant, if we except the rich Persian carpets. The grandeur of their palaces consists in baths, perfumes, temples, gods, and harams. The harams or zenanas, that is, the residences of the women, are removed from the front of the house, and lighted only from a square space in the centre of the whole building. The apparel of the wom­en is inconceivably rich; they have jewels on their fingers and about their necks, and also in their ears and nostrils, with bracelets on their wrists and arms, and around their ankles.

The temples or pagodas of the Gentoos are stupendous but disgustful stone buildings, erected in every capital, and under the direction of the Bramins. If the Bramins are masters of any uncommon art or science, they frequently [...] to the purposes of profit from their ignorant vo­taries. Mr. Scraston says, that they know how to calculate eclipses; and that judicial [...] is so prevalent among them, that half the year is taken up with unlucky days; the head astrologer being always consulted in their councils. The Mahometans likewise encourage these superstitions, and look upon all the fruits of the Gentoo industry as belonging to the [...]ves. Though the Gentoos are entirely passive under all their opp [...], and by their state of existence, the practice of their religion, and the scant [...], is of their food, have nothing of that resentment in their nature that animates the rest of mankind; yet they are susceptible of [...], and somet [...] [...] their money, and rather than [...] [...] put themselves to death by poison or otherwise. This practice, which it [...]uns is not uncommon, accounts lot the vast scarci­ty of silver that [...] or late prevailed in Indostan.

The reasons above [...] [...] account likewise [...] their being less under the influence of their passions than the inhabitants of other countries. The perpetual use of rice, their [...] food, gives them but little [...] [...] and their [...] early, the male before [...], and then women at ten [...] keeps them low and [...] in their persons. A man [...] in the declare of life at [...], and the beauty of the women [...] at eighteen: At [...] five they have all the [...] of old age. We are not therefore to wonder at then being [...] to all [...] [...]tion and vig­our of mind: And whatever may be the cause, a recent travelier among them, observes, it is certain, that death is regarded with less ho [...] ­ [...]or in India than in any other country in the world. The origin and the end of all things, [...] the philosophers o [...] India of the [...] times, i [...] a [...] [...]. A state of repose is the [...] of greatest perfection; and [...] is the [...] after which a wise men aspire. It is better, say the [...], to [...] than to walk, and to [...] than to wake; but death is the best of all. According to the Gentoo laws, [...] sentenced to [Page 439] death are not to be strangled, suffocated, or poisoned, but to be cut off by the sword: because, without an effusion of blood, malefactors are supposed to die with all their sins about them; but the shedding of their blood, it is thought, expiates their crimes.

The Mahometans, who, in Indostan, are called Moors, are of Persian, Turkish. Arabic, and other extractions. They early began, in the reigns of the caliphs of Bagad, to invade Indostan. They penetrated as far as Delhi, which they made then capital. They settled colonies in several places, whose descendants are called Pytans; but their em­pire was overthrown by Tamerlane, who founded the Mogul govern­ment, which still subsists. Those princes being strict Mahometans, re­ceived under their protection all that professed the same religion, and who being a brave, active people, counterbalanced the numbers of the natives. They are said to have introduced the division of provinces, over which they appointed soubadars; and those provinces, each of which might be styled an empire, were subdivided into nabobships; each nabob being immediately accountable to his soubadar, who in pro­cess of time became almost independent on the emperor, or, as he is called, the Great Mug [...]l, upon their paying him an annual tribute. The vast resort of Pers [...]n and Tartar tribes has likewise strengthened the Mahometan government: But it is observable, that in two or three gen­erations, the progeny of all those adventurers, who brought nothing with them but their horses and their swords, degenerated into all the eastern indolence and sensuality.

Of all those tribes, the Marattas at present make the greatest figure. They commonly serve on horseback, and, when well commanded, they have been known to give law even to the court of Delhi. Though they are originally Gentoos, yet they are of bold, active spirit, and pay great respect to the principles of their religion. Mr. Scraston says, that the Mahometans of Moors are generally of so detestable a character, that he never knew above two or three exceptions, and those were among the Tartar and Persian officers of the army. These are void, we are told, of every principle even of their own religion; and if they have a vir­tue, it is an appearance of hospitality, but it is an appearance only; for while they are drinking with, and embracing a friend, they will stab him to the heart. But it is probable, that these representations of their moral depravity are carried beyond the bounds of truth.

The manner of drinking among the Gentoos is remarkable. They religiously avoid touching the vessel that contains the liquor with their [...]ps, and pour it into their mouths, holding the bottle, or other vessel, at least at a foot's distance. Their idea is, that they would be polluted by stagnating water. They will drink from a pump, or of any running stream, but not out of a pool.

Mr. Dalry [...]ple observes, according to the Gentoo constitution, land (houses and gardens excepted) is not private properly, but belongs to the community, in the several villages; each of which are supplied with their respective public officers, as the headman, to execute jus­tice; the con [...]poly, to keep the accounts of the village; the corn­ [...]ter, smith, barber, doctor, astrologer, &c. The grounds are culti­vated by the community, and the produce shared out in certain pro­portions to all. One is allotted to the Pagodas and Bramins, one to the government, another to the public officers, one to the repair of [Page 440] tanks, or reservoirs of water, and the rest distributed among the com­munity: But we understand that the Mahometan government, and the intrusion of Europeans, have introduced some innovations in this an­cient constitution, particularly, by farming the circar, or government shares.

Such are the outlines of the government by which this great empire long subsisted without almost the semblance of virtue among its great offi­cers, either civil or military. It was shaken, however, after the over­throw of Mahomet Shah, by Kouli Khan, which was attended by so great a diminution of the imperial authority that the soubahs and na­bobs became absolute in their own governments. Though they could not alter the fundamental laws of property, yet they invented new tax­es, which beggared the people, to pay their armies and support their power; so that many of the people, a few years ago, alter being un­mercifully plundered by collectors and tax-masters, were left to perish through want. To sum up the misery of the inhabitants, those sou­badars and nabobs, and other Mahometan governors, employ the Gen­toos themselves, and some even of the Bramins, as the ministers of their rapaciousness and cruelties. Upon the whole, ever since the in­vasion of Kouli Khan, Indostan, from being a well regulated govern­ment, is become a scene of mere anarchy; every great man protects himself in his tyranny by his soldiers, whose pay far exceeds the nat­ural riches of his government. As private assassinations and other murders are here committed with impunity, the people, who know they can be in no worse state, concern themselves very little in the revolutions of government. To the above causes are owing the late successes of the English in Indostan. The reader, from this represen­tation, may perceive, that all the English have acquired in point of territory, has been gained from usurpers and robbers; and their pos­session of it being guranteed by the present lawful emperor, is said to be founded upon the laws and constitutions of that country. We are, however, sorry to be obliged to remark, that the conduct of many of the servants of the East India Company towards the natives, and not properly punished or checked, either by the directors or the British legislature, has in too many instances been highly dishonourable to the English name, and totally inconsistent with that humanity which was formerly their national characteristic.

It may be here proper just to observe, that the complexion of the Gentoos is black, their hair long, and the features of both sexes regu­lar. At court, however, the great families are ambitious of intermary­ing with Persians and Tartars, on account of the fairness of their com­plexion, resembling that of their conqueror Tamerlane and his great generals.

PROVINCES, CITIES, AND OTHER BUILDINGS, PUBLIC AND PRIVATE.} The province of Agra is the largest in all Indostan, con­taining 40 large towns and 340 villages. Agra is the greatest city, and its castle the largest fortification in all the Indies. The Dutch have a factory there, but the English have none.

The city of Delhi or Dehly, which is the capital of that province, is like­wise the capital of Indostan. It is described as being a fine city, and con­taining the imperial palace, which is adorned with the usual magna­ficence of the East. Its stables formerly contained 12,000 horses, brought [Page 441] from Arabia, Persia, and Tartary; and 500 elephants. When the for­age is burnt up by the heats of the season, as is often the case, these horses are said to be fed in the morning with bread, butter, and sugar, and in the evening with rice-milk properly prepared.

Tatta, the capital of Sindy, is a large city; and it is said that a plague which happened there in 1699, carried off above 80,000 of its manufactures in silk and cotton. It is still famous for the manufac­ture of palanquins, which are a kind of canopied couches, on which the great men all over India, Europeans as well as natives, repose when they appear abroad. They are carried by sour men, who will out along, morning and evening 40 miles a day; 10 being usually hir­ed, who carry the palanquin by turns, four at a time. Though a pa­lanquin is dear at first cost, yet the porters may be hired for nine or ten shillings a month each, out of which they maintain themselves.—The Indus, at Tatta, is about a mile broad, and famous for its fine carp [...].

Though the province of Moultan is not very fruitful, yet it yields excellent iron and canes; and the inhabitants, by their situation are enabled to deal with the Persians and Tartars yearly for above 60,000 horses. The capital is Moultan, about 800 miles, by the course of the river, from the sea.

The province of Cassimere, being surrounded with mountains, is difficult of access, but when entered, it appears to be the paradise of the Indies. It is said to contain 100,000 villages, to be stored with cattle and game, without any beasts of prey. The capital (Cassimere) stands by a large lake; and both sexes, the women especially, are al­most as fair as the Europeans, and are said to be witty and ingenious.

The province and city of Lahor formerly made a great figure in the Indian history, and is still one of the largest and finest provinces in the Indies, producing the best sugars of any in Indostan. Its capital was once about nine miles long, but is now much decaved. We know little of the provinces of Ayud, Varad, Bekar, and Hallabas, that is not in common with the other provinces of Indostan, excepting that they are inhabited by a hardy race of men, who seem never to have been conquered, and though they submit to the Moguls, live in an easy in­dependent state. In some of those provinces many of the European fruits, plants, and flowers thrive, as in their native soil.

Bengal, of all the Indian provinces, is perhaps the most interesting [...] an English reader. Its natural situation, (as described by Major Rennel, late surveyor-general in Bengal) is singularly happy with re­spect to security from the attack of foreign enemies. On the north and east it has no warlike neighbours, and has moreover a formida­ble barrier of mountains, rivers, or extensive wastes towards those q [...]rters, should an enemy start up. On the south is a sea coast guard­ed by shallows and impenetrable woods, and with only one port, which is of difficult access, in an extent of 300 miles. Only on the [...], can an enemy be apprehended, but there the natural barrier is [...], and with its population and resources, and the usual propor­tion of British troops, Bengal might bid defiance to any part of In­dostan which was inclined to become its enemy. It is considered as [...] [...]ehouse of the Fast Indies. Its fertility exceeds that of Egypt [...] being overflowed by the Nile; and the produce of its soil con­sists [Page 442] of rice, sugar-canes, corn, sesamum, small mulberry, and other trees. "Most of the rivers of Bengal," says the author of Ayeen Ak­berry, "have their banks cultivated with rice, of which there are a variety of species. The soil is so fertile in some places, that a single grain of rice will yield a measure of 2 or 3 Seer. Some lands will pro­duce three crops in a year. Vegetation is here so extremely quick, that as fast as the water rises, the plants of rice grow above it, so that the ear is never above it. Men of experience affirm that a single stalk will grow six cubits in one night." (Ayeen Akberry.) Its calicoes, silks, salt-p [...]tre, lakka, opium, wax, and civet, go all over the world; and provisions here are in vast plenty, and incredibly cheap, especial­ly pullets, ducks, and geese. The country is intersected by canals cut out of the Ganges for the benefit of commerce; and extends near 100 leagues on both sides the Ganges, full of cities, towns, villages, and castles.

In Bengal, the worship of the Gentoos is practised in its greatest pu­rity; and their sacred river (Ganges) is in a manner lined with their magnificent pagodas or temples. The women, notwithstanding their religion, are said by some to be lascivious and enticing.

The principal English factory in Bengal is at Calcutta, and is called Fort William: It is situated on the river Hoogly, the most westerly branch of the Ganges. The fort itself is said to be irregular, and un­tenable against disciplined troops; but the servants of the company have provided themselves with an excellent house, and most conve­nient apartments for their own accommodation. As the town itself has been in fact for some time in possession of the Company, an English civil government, by a mayor and aldermen, was introduced into it. This was immediately under the authority of the Company. But in 1773, an act of parliament was passed to regulate the affairs of the East India Company, as well in India as in Europe. By this act the governor-general and four counsellors were appointed, and chosen by the parliament, with whom was vested the whole civil and military government of the presidency of Fort William; and the ordering, management, and government of all the territorial acquisitions and revenues in the kingdom of Bengal, Bahar, and Orissa, so long as the Company should remain possessed of them. The governor-general and council to appointed, are invested with the power of superintend­ing and controlling the government and management of the presiden­cies of Madras, Bombay, and Benco [...]len. The governor-general and council to pay obedience to the orders of the court of directors, and to correspond with them. The governor-general and counsellors were likewise empowered to establish a court of judicature at Fort William; to consist of a chief justice, and three other judges, to be named from [...] to time by his majesty: These are to exercise all criminal, admiralty, and ecclesiastical [...] ▪ to be a court of record and a court of [...] and terminer for the town of Calcutta, and factory of fort William, and its limits, and the factories Inbordinate thereto.—But the establishment of this supreme court does not appear to have promoted either the interests of the East India Company, or the feli­city of the people of the country. No proper attention has been paid to the manners and customs of the people; acts of great [...]ppression and injustice have been committed; and the supreme court has been a [...] and confusion.

[Page 443] In 1756, an unhappy event took place at Calcutta, which is too re­markable to be omitted. The Indian nabob or soubadar, quarrelled with the company, and invested Calcutta with a large body of black troops. The governor, and some of the principal persons of the place, threw themselves, with their chief effects, on board the ships in the river; they who remained for some hours, bravely defended the place; but their ammunition being expended, they surrendered upon terms. The soubadar, a capricious, unfeeling tyrant, instead if observing the capitulation, forced Mr. Holwell, the governor's chief servant, and 145 British subjects, into a little but secure prison, called the Black­hole, a place about eighteen feet square, and shut up from almost all communication of free air. Their miseries during the night were in­expressible, and before morning no more than twenty three were found alive, the rest dying of suffocation, which was generally attended with a horrible frenzy. Among those saved was Mr. Holwell himself, who has written a most affecting account of the catastrophe. The in­sensible nabob returned to his capital, after plundering the place, imag­ining he had rooted the English out of his dominions; but the season­able arrival of admiral W [...]son, and colonel afterwards lord. Clive, put them once more, with some difficulty, in possession of the place; and the war was soon concluded by the battle of [...]alty, gained by the colonel, and the death of the nabob Suraja Dowla, in whose place [...]hir Jaffeir, one of his generals, and who had previously signed a se­cret treaty with Clive to desert his master, and amply reward the English, was advanced to the soubahship.

The capital of Bengal, where the nabob keeps his court, is Muxada­had, or Moorsh [...]d [...]d: Lenares, lying in the same province, is the Gentoo university, and celebrated for its sanctity. This zemindary which includes also the circars of Gazype [...] and Chunar, constituted a part of the dominions of Oude or Owdh till 177 [...], when its tribute a [...] quit-rent of 24 lacks was transferred to the English.

Chandenagore is the principal place possessed by the French in Bengal: It [...] higher up the river than Calcutta. But though strongly fortified, furnished with a garrison of 500 Europeans, and 1 [...]00 Indians, and defended by the 123 pieces of cannon and three mor­tars, it was taken by the English admirals Watson and Pococke, and colonel Clive, and also was obliged to surrender in the last war, but re­served by the peace. Hoogly, which lies fifty miles to the north of Calcutta, upon the Ganges, is a place of prodigious trade for the rich­est of all Indian commodities. The Dutch have here a well fortified factory. The [...] for diamonds is carried on by about 10,000 peo­ple from [...], which lies thirty leagues to the North of Hoog­ly, for about fifty miles farther. Daccan is laid to be the largest city of Bengal, and the tide comes up to its walls. It contains an English and a Dutch factory. The other chief towns are [...]assum [...]azar, Chin­ [...]ra, Barn [...]gua, and Maldo; besides a number of other place of less [...], but all of them [...] in the Indian manufactories.

We know [...] co [...]ning the province o [...] [...] of Malva, which [...] to the west of Bengal: Sindia and Holkar divide the largest part of it. The capital of the former is Ougein, and of Holkar, the city of labour. It [...] as fertile as the other provinces, and its chief city is [...]. The province of [...]andish included that of Be [...] and part of [Page 444] Orixa, and its capital is Brampur, or Burhanpoor, a flourishing city, and it carries on a vast trade in chintzes, callicoes, and embroidered stuffs. Cattack is the capital of Orixa, and lies in the only road be­tween Bengal and the Northern circars, and belongs to the Berar Ra­jah Moodajee Boosla, whose dominions are very extensive. Of the five Northern circars, Cicacole, Rajamundry, Ellore, and Condapilly are in possession of the English, and Gunton is in the hands of the Nizam.

We shall speak of those provinces, belonging to the Malabar, or Coro­mandel coast, the two great objects of English commerce in that coun­try; and first, of the eastern, or Coromandel coast.

Madura begins at Cape Comorin, the southernmost point of the pen­insula. It is about the bigness of the kingdom of Portugal, and i [...] said to have been governed by a sovereign king, who had under him seventy tributary princes, each of them independent in his own do­minions, but paying him a tax; now, the case is much altered, the prince of the country being scarcely able to protect himself and his people from the depredations of his neighbours, but by a tribute to buy them off; the capital is Tritchinopoly. The chief value of this kingdom seems to consist of a pearl fishery upon its coast. Tanjore is a little kingdom, lying to the east of Madura. The soil is fertile, and its prince rich, till plundered by the nabob of Arcot, and some British subjects connected with him. Within it lies the Danish East India settlement of Tanquebar, and the fortress of Negapatam, which was taken from the Dutch the last war, and confirmed to the English by the late treaty of peace. The capital city is Tanjore, governed by a rajah under the English protection.

The Carnatic, as it is now called, is well known to the English. It is bounded on the east by the bay of Bengal, on the north by the river Christina, which divides it from Golconda; on the west by Visapur, or Visipour, and, on the south, by the kingdoms of Messaur and Tan­jore; being in length, from south to north, about 345 miles. It Tan­jore, Marrawar, Tritchinopoly, Madura, and Tinevelly be included, and they are all appendages of the Carnatic, the length of it from north to south is 570 miles, but no where more than 110 wide, and chiefly no more than 80. The capital of the Carnatic is Bisnagar, and of the English ally the nabob, Arcot, whose dominions commence on the south of the Guntoo circar, and extend along the whole coast of Coromandel to Cape Comorin. The country in general is esteemed healthful, fertile, and populous. Within this country, upon the Co­romandel coast, lies fort St. David's, or Cuddalore, belonging to the English, with a district round it. The fort is strong, and of great im­portance to the English trade. Five leagues to the north lies Pondi­cherry, once the emporium of the French in the East Indies, but which had been repeatedly taken by the English, and as often restored by the treaties of peace.

Fort St. George, better known by the name of Madras, is the capital of the English East India company's dominions in that part of the East Indies, and is distant eastward from London, about 4800 miles. Great complaints have been made of the situation of this fort; but no pains have been spared by the company, in rendering it impregnable to any force that can be brought against it by the natives. It protects two [Page 445] towns, called, from the complexions of their several inhabitants, the White and the Black. The white town is fortified, and contains an English corporation of a mayor and aldermen. Nothing has been omitted to mend the natural badness of its situation, which seems orig­inally to be owing to the neighbourhood of the diamond mines, that are but a week's journey distant. These mines are under the direction of a Mogul officer, who lets them out by admeasurement, enclosing the contents by pallisadoes; all diamonds above a certain weight orig­inally belonged to the emperor. The district belonging to Madras, does not extend much more than 40 miles round, and is of little value for its produce. Eighty thousand inhabitants, of various nations, are said to be dependant upon Madras; but its safety consists in the supe­riority of the English by sea. It carries on a considerable trade with China, Persia, and Mocha.

The reader needs not be informed of the immense fortunes acquired by the English, upon this coast, within these thirty years; but some of these fortunes appear to have been obtained by the most iniquitous practices. There seems to have been some fundamental errors in the constitution of the East India Company. The directors considered the riches acquired by their governors and other servants as being plundered from the company, and accordingly sent out superinten­dents to control their governors and overgrown servants, and have from time to time changed their governors and members of the coun­ [...] there. As this is a subject of the greatest importance that ever per­haps occurred in the geography of a commercial country, the reader [...] indulge us in one or two reflections.

The English East India company, through the distractions of the Mogul empire, the support of their government, and the undaunted, [...] fortunate successes, of their military officers, have acquired so amax­ [...]g a property in this peninsula, and in Indostan, that it is superior to the [...]ues of many crowned heads: And some of their own servants [...], that when all their expenses are paid, their clear revenue [...]nts to near two millions sterling; out of which they were to pay [...],000l. annually to the government, while suffered to enjoy their [...]ues. How that revenue is collected, or from whence it arises, is [...] known to the company: Part of it, however, has been granted in [...]perty, and part of it is secured on mortgages, for discharging their [...]p [...]ses in supporting the interests of their friends, the emperor, and [...] respective soubadars and nabobs they have assisted.

This company has exercised many rights appropriated to sovereign­ty; such as those of holding forts, coining money, and the like. Those [...]ers were thought incompatible with the principles of a commercial [...] company, and therefore the English ministry and parliament [...] repeatedly interfered: In order to regulate the affairs of the company, a board of control at home is at length established. It has [...] [...]en hoped, that in consequence of this interference of the gov­ernment, such measures may be taken with the Eastern princes and [...], as may render the acquisitions of the company permanent national.

[...] have already mentioned the kingdom of Golconda, which, be­ [...] diamonds, is famous for the cheapness of its provisions, and for [...] white wine of grapes that are ripe in January. Golconda is [Page 446] subject to a prince called Ni [...]m or soubadar of the Deccan, who is rich, and can raise 100,000 men. The famous diamond mine, Raoloconda, is in this province. The capital of his dominions is called Bagnagur, or Hyderabad, but the kingdom takes its name from the city of Gol­conda, and comprises the eastern part of Dowletabad. East south-east of Golconda lies Masulipatam, where the English and Dutch have factories, the English have also factories at Ganjam and Visagapa­tam, in this coast; and the Dutch at Narsipore. The province of O­rissa, from whence the English company draw some part of their rev­enues, lies to the north of Golconda, extending in length from east to west about 550 miles, and in breadth about 240. It is governed chiefly by Moodajee Boonslah, and his brother Bembajee, allies to the Marat­tas. In this province stands the idolatrous temple of Jaganaut, which they say is attended by 500 priests. The idol is an irregular pyra [...] ­ical black stone, of about 4 or 500lb. weight, with two rich diamonds near the top, to represent eyes, and the nose and mouth painted with vermillion. Near this is the temple of the Sun, one of the most mag­nificent buildings is the world.

Major Rennell observes, that there is a void space between the known parts of Berar, Golconda, Orissa, and the northern circars of near 300 miles in length, and 250 in breadth, and that it is not likely to be filled up unless a great change takes place in European politics in India. The British possessions in the northern circars, extend only 70 miles by land, and in some places not more than 30, which form a slip of 350 miles in length, bounded towards the continent, by a ridge of mountains. Within these, and towards Berar is an extensive tract of woody and mountainous country, with which the adjacent provin­ces appear to have scarcely any communication. Though surrounded by people highly civilized, and who abound in useful manufactures, it is said, that the few specimens of the miserable inhabitants of this tract who have appeared in the circars, use no covering but a wisp of straw. This wild country extends about 100 miles, and the first civilized peo­ple beyond them are the Barar Marattas.

The country of the Deccan comprehends several large provinces, and some kingdoms; particularly those of Baglana, Balagate, Telenga, and the kingdom of Vis [...]apour. The truth is, the names, dependencies, and governments of those provinces, are extremely unsettled; and since their reduction by Aniengz [...]be, or his father, have been subject to almost annual revolutions and alterations. The principal towns are Aurun [...]bad, and Dolta [...], or Dowlataba [...]: The latter is the strongest place in all Incost [...]. Near at [...] famous paged of Elora, in a plain of about two leagues square. The tombs, chapels, temples, [...] and many thousand [...] [...] surround it, are said to be cut out of the natural neck, and to [...]rpa [...]s all the other efforts of human art. Telenga lies on the east of Golconda, and its capital, Beder, contains a garrison of 3000 men. The inhabitants of this province speak a lan­guage peculiar to themselves.

Guzerat or Gujerat is a maritime province on the gulf of Camb [...]y [...], and one of the finest in India, but inhabited by a fierce rapacious peo­ple. It is said to contain 35 cities. Amedba [...] is the capital of the province, where there is an English factory, and is said, in wealth, [...] [Page 447] with the richest towns in Europe. About 43 French leagues dis­tant lies Surat, where the English have a flourishing factory.

Visiapour is a large province, the western part is called Konhan, which is intermingled with the Portuguese possessions. The rajah of Visiapour is said to have had a yearly revenue of six millions sterling, and to bring to the field 150,000 soldiers. The capital is of the same name, and the country very fruitful. The principal places on this coast are Damam, Bassaim Tropor, or Tarapor, Chawl, Dandi-Rajah­ [...], Dabul-Rajahpur, Gheriah, and Vingorla. The Portuguese have lost several valuable possessions on this coast, and those which remain are on the decline.

Among the islands lying upon the same coast is that of Bombay, be­longing to the English East-India company. Its harbour can conve­niently hold 1000 ships at anchor. The island itself is about seven miles in length, and twenty in circumference; but its situation and harbour are its chief recommendations, being destitute of almost all the conve­ [...]encies of life. The town is about a mile long, and poorly built; and the climate was fatal to English constitutions, till experience, caution, and temperance taught them preservatives against its unwholesomeness. The best water there is preserved in tanks, which receive it in the rainy seasons. The fort is a regular quadrangle, and well built of [...]. Many black merchants reside here. This island was part of the portions paid with the infanta of Portugal to Charles II. who gave it to the East-India company; and the island is still divided into three Roman catholic parishes, inhabited by Portuguese, and what are called catholic Mestizos and Canarins; the former being a mixed breed of the natives and Portuguese, and the other the Aborigines of the country. The English have fallen upon methods to render this island and town, under all their disadvantages, [...], if not an agreeable residence. The governour and council of Bombay have lucrative posts, as well as the of­fers under them. The troops on the island are commanded by Eng­lish offices; and the natives, when formed into regular companies, and disciplined, are here, and all over the East-Indies, called Sea poys. The inhabitants of the island amount to near 60,000 of different na­tions; each of whom enjoys the practice of his religion unmolested. Have, besides Europeans of all countries, you meet with Turks, Per­sians, Arabians, Armenians, a mixed race, the vilest of their species, descended from the Portuguese, and the outcasts from the Gentoo re­ligion, &c. and also captives that are slaves to every other tribe. The Turks that resort to this place on account of trade, are like the rest of their countrymen, stately, grave, and reserved; and honest in their [...]. The Persians are more gay, lively, and convertible, but less [...] in matters of trade, than the saturnine Turks. The Arabians are [...] life and fire, and when they treat with you on any subject, will make [...] a fine oration in flowing numbers, and a musical cadence; but they [...] the most dishonest of all. The Armenians are generally handsome [...] their features, mild in their tempers, and in their nature kind and [...]. They are a kind of Christians, and an honour to that sect, [...] numbers that go from England.

Near Bombay are several other islands, one of which, called Ele­ [...], contains the most inexplicable antiquity perhaps in the world. [...] of an elephant, of the natural size, cut coarsely in stone, pre­ [...] itself on the landing-place, near the bottom of a mountain. An [Page 448] easy slope then Lads to a stupendous temple hewn out of the solid rock, eighty or ninety feet long, and forty broad. The roof, which is cut flat, is supported by regular rows of pillars, about ten feet high, with capitals, resembling round cushions, as if pressed by the weight of the incumbent mountain. At the farther end are three gigantic figures, which have been multiplied by the blind zeal of the Portuguese. Be­sides the temple, are various images, and groupes of each hand cut in the stone: one of the latter bearing a rude resemblance of the judg­ment of Solomon; also a colonnade, with a door of regular architec­ture; but the whole bears no manner of resemblance to any of the Gentoo works.

The island and city of Goa, the capital of the Portuguese settlements in the East-Indies, lies about 30 miles south of Vingorla. The island is about twenty-seven miles in compass. It has one of the finest and best fortified ports in the Indies. This was formerly a most superb settlement, and was surpassed either in bulk or beauty by few of the European cities. It is said that the revenues of the Jesuits, upon this island, equalled those of the crown of Portugal. Goa, as well as the rest of the Portuguese settlements on this coast, is under a viceroy, who still keeps up the remains of the ancient splendour of the govern­ment. The rich peninsula of Salvett is dependent on Goa. Sunda lies south of the Portuguese territories, and is governed by a rajah, tributary to the Mogul. Canorce lies about forty miles to the south of Goa, and reaches to Calicut. Its soil is famous for producing rice, that supplies many parts of Europe, and some of the Indies. The Ca [...] ­rines are said generally to be governed by a lady, whose son has the ti­tle of rajah; and her subjects are accounted the bravest and most civi­lized of any in that peninsula, and remarkably devoted to commerce.

The celebrated Hyder Ally, with whom the Company formerly made a peace, but with whom their servants soon after embroiled them, and who lately made a violent irruption into the Carnatic, took many of its chief places, obtained great advantages over the company's troops, and brought his forces to the gates of Madras, but died before the con­clusion of the war, is said to be a native of Mysore, which lies to the south-west of the Carnatic; and the Christians of the apostle St. Tho­mas, live at the foot of the Gatti mountains. The dominions of Tip­poo Saib, son of Hyder Ally, comprehend generally the provinces of Mysore, Bednore, Zaimbetore, Zanare, and Dindigal, besides his ac­quisition to the northward from the Marattas: They are at least 400 miles in length, and in the breadth from 290 to 130, so that he hath the largest share in the Peninsula.

Though Malabar gives name to the whole south-west coast of the peninsula, yet it is confined at present to the country so called, lying on the west of Cape Commorin, and called the Dominions of the Samorin. The Malabar language, however, is common in the Car [...] ­ic; and the country itself is rich and fertile, but pestered with green address, whose poison is incurable. It was somerly a large kingdom of itself. The most remarkable places in Malabar are Cranganore, con­taining a Dutch factory and fort; Tellichery, where the English have a small settlement, keeping a constant garrison of thirty or forty sol­diers. Calicut, where the French and Portuguese have small factories, besides various other distinct territories and cities. Caps Com [...]in, [Page 449] which is the southern most part of this peninsula, though not above three leagues in extent; is famous for uniting in the same garden the two seasons of the year; the trees being loaded with blossoms and fruit on the one side, while on the other side they are stripped of all their leaves. This surprising phenomenon is owing to the ridge of mountains so often mentioned, which traverse the whole peninsula from south to north. On the opposite sides of the Cape, the winds are constantly at variance, blowing from the west on the west side, and from the east on the eastern side.

Before we take out leave of India, it may be proper to observe, that in the district of Cochin, within Malabar, are to be found some thou­sands of Jews, who pretend to be of the tribe of Manasseh, and to have [...]cords engraven on copper plates in Hebrew characters. They are said to be so poor, that many of them embrace the Gentoo religion. The like discoveries of the Jews and their records have been made in China, and other places of Asia, which have occasioned various specu­lations among the learned.

It appears to be the interest of the East India Company, that their governments in India should interfere as little as possible in the domes­tic or national quarrels of the country powers, and that they should al­ways endeavour to be in a state of peace and tranquillity with their neighbours. But these maxims of sound policy they have not ad­herod to; the governours and servants of the East India Company have unnecessarily, and sometimes very iniquitously, embroiled them­selves with the country powers, and engaged in wars of a very per­ [...]icious and indefensible nature. The wars into which they have en­ [...]ed with the Marattas, and with that enterprising prince Hyder Al­ly now dead, but succeeded by a warlike son, Tippo Saib, have been [...]ded with an enormous expense, and been extremely prejudicial to the interests of the company, and the nation at home. By temporary [...] of violence and injustice, and sometimes disregarding their own [...], they have forfeited the good opinion of the natives; and by [...]iting the indignation of the country princes against them, greatly [...] the security of the possessions of the company.

The emperor of Indostan, or Great Mogul (so called from being de­ [...]ed from Tameriane the Mongul, or Mogul Tartar) on his advance­ment to the throne, assumes some grand title; as The Conqueror of the World; the Ornament; of the Throne, &c. but he is never crowned.

HISTORY.] The reader will find much entertaining and useful in­ [...]tion both historical and Geographical, concerning this country, in a work, in three quarto volumes, published at Calcutta, in 1784, enti­tled "Ayeen Akberry, or the Institutes of the Emperor Akber." Trans­ [...]ed from the original Persian, by Francis Gladwin. This valuable work is in Harvard College Library, at Cambridge.

[Page 450]

The PENINSULA of INDIA beyond the GANGES, called the FARTHER PENINSULA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 2000 Miles. between Degrees. 1 and 30 north lat. Sq. M. 741,500
Breadth 1000 Miles. Degrees. 92 and 109 east long. Sq. M. 741,500

BOUNDARIES.] THIS peninsula is bounded by Thibet and China, on the North; by China and the Chi­nese sea, on the East; by the same sea and the straits of Malacca, on the South; and by the bay of Bengal and the Hither India, on the West. The space between Bengal and China is now called the prov­ince of Mecklus, and other districts, subject to the king of Ava or Burmah.

Grand divisions. Subdivisions. Chief towns. Sq. M.
On the north west Acham Camdara 180,000
Ava Ava
Arracan Arracan.
On the south-west Pegu Pegu. E. [...]0. 97. N. la. 17-30. 50,000
Martaban Martaban  
Siam Siam, E. l. 100-55. N. la. 14-18. 170,000
Malacca Malacca, E. l. 101. N. la. 2-12. 48,000
On the north-east Tonquin Cachao, or Keccio, E. lon. 105. N. lat. 21-30. 112,000
Laos Lanchang. 59,400
Cochin China Thoanoa 61,900
On the south-east Cambodia Cambodia 60,000
Chiampa Padram

NAME.] The name of India is taken from the river Indus, which of all others was best known to the Persians. The whole of this pen­insula was unknown to the ancients, and is partly so to the moderns.

AIR AND CLIMATE.] Authors differ concerning the air of this country, some preferring that of the southern, and some that of the northern parts. It is generally agreed, that the air of the former is hot and dry, but in some places moist, and consequently unhealthy. The climate is subject to hurricanes, lightnings, and inundations, so that the people build their houses upon high pillars to defend them from floods; and they have no other idea of seasons, but wet and dry. Easterly and westerly monsoons (which is an Indian word) prevail in this country.

MOUNTAINS.] Those run from North to South almost the whole length of the country; but the lands near the sea are low, and an­nually overflowed in the rainy season.

RIVERS.] The chief are Sanpoo or Burrumpooter, Domea, [...], Menan, and Ava, or the great river Nou Kian.

BAYS AND STRAITS.] The bays of Bengal, Siam, and Cochin-Chi­na. The straits of Malacca and Sineapora. The promontories of Siam, Romana, and Bansac.

SOIL AND PRODUCT OF THE DIFFERENT NATIONS.} The soil of this peninsula is fruit­ful in general, and produces all the [Page 451] delicious fruits that are found in other countries contiguous to the Ganges, as well as roots and vegetables; and in Ava; a quantity of salt­petre, and the best teek timber; or Indian oak, which for ship-building in warm climates is of much longer duration than any European oak. Teek ships of 40 years old are no uncommon objects in the Indian seas. This peninsula abounds likewise in silks, elephants, and quadrupeds, both domestic and wild, that are common in the southern kingdoms of Asia. The natives drive a great trade in gold, diamonds, rubies, to­pazes, amethysts, and other precious stones. Tonquin produces little or no corn or wine, but is the most healthful country of all the penin­sula. In some places, especially towards the north, the inhabitants have swellings in their throats, said to be owing to the badness of their [...].

INHABITANTS, CUSTOMS, AND DIVERSIONS.} The Tonquinese are excellent mechan­ics and fair traders; but greatly oppress­ed by their king and great lords. His majesty engrosses the trade, and his factors sell by retail to the Dutch and other nations. The Tonqui­nese are fond of lacker houses, which are unwholesome and poisonous. The people in the south are a savage race, and go almost naked, with large silver and gold ear-rings, and coral, amber, or shell bracelets. In Tonquin and Cochin-China, the two sexes are scarcely distinguishable by their dress, which resembles that of the Persians. The people of quality are fond of English broad-cloth, red or green; and others wear a dark-coloured cotton cloth. In Azem, which is thought one of the [...] countries in Asia, the inhabitants prefer dogs-flesh to all other an­imal food. The people of that kingdom pay no taxes, because the king is [...] proprietor of all the gold and silver, and other metals, found in his kingdom. They live, however, easy and comfortably. Almost every house keeper has an elephant for the conveniency of his wives and women, polygamy being practised all over India.

It is unquestionable that those Indians, as well as the Chinese, had the use of gunpowder before it was known in Europe; and the in­ [...]on is generally ascribed to the Azemese. The inhabitants of the southern division of this peninsula go under the the name of Malayans, from the neighbouring country of Malacca.

Though the religious superstitions that prevail in this peninsula are [...] gross, yet the people believe in a future state; and when their kings are interred, a number of animals are buried with them, and such vessels of gold and silver as they think can be of use of them for their future life. The people in this peninsula are commonly very [...] of shew, and often make an appearance beyond their circumstan­ces. They are delicate in no part of their dress but in their hair, which they buckle up in a very agreeable manner. In their food they [...] [...]some; for besides dogs, they eat rats, mice, serpents, and [...] fish. The people of Arracan are equally indelicate in their [...], for they hire Dutch and other foreigners to consummate the [...] with their virgins, and value their women most when in a [...] of pregnancy. Their treatment of the sick, is ridiculous beyond [...]; and in many places, when a patient is judged to be incurable; [...] is exposed on the bank of some river, where he is either drowned, [...] by birds or beasts of prey. Notwithstanding the great [...] of most Indian nations, it is said, on the veracity of some [Page 452] who have seen them, that on the confines of Arracan and Pegu, there is a people (if solitary savages roaming through woods in quest of prey; deserve the name of people) that appear to be in the very first stage of society. They are the only people in the known world that go abso­lutely naked, without the smallest covering on any part of their bodies. They live on fruit, which grows spontaneously, in the uncultivated desert they inhabit, in great abundance; and on the flesh of animals, which they tear alive and devour raw. They fit on their hams, with their legs and arms disposed in the manner of monkeys. At the ap­proach of men, they fly into their woods: They take care of their offspring, and live in families, but seem to have no ideas of subordi­nation of rank or civil government.

The diversions common in this country are fishing and hunting, the celebrating of festivals, and acting comedies, by torch light, from even­ing to morning.

LANGUAGE.] The language of the court of Delhi is Persian, but in this peninsula it is chiefly Malayan, interspersed with other dialects.

LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN.] The Bramins, who are the tribe of the priesthood, descend from those Brachmans who are mentioned to us with so much reverence by antiquity; and although much infe­rior, either as philosophers or men of learning, to the reputation of their ancestors, as priests, their religious doctrines are still implicitly followed by the whole nation; and as preceptors, they are the source of all the knowledge which exists in Indostan. But the utmost stretch of their mathematical knowledge seems to be the calculation of eclipses. They have a good idea of logic; but it does not appear they have any treatises on rhetoric; their ideas of music, if we may judge from their practice, are barbarous; and in medicine they derive no assistance from the knowledge of anatomy, since dissections are repugnant to their religion.

The poetry of the Asiatics is too turgid, and full of conceits, and the diction of their historians very diffuse and verbose; but though the manner of eastern compositions differs from the correct taste of Europe, there are many things in the writings of Asiatic authors wor­thy the attention of literary men. Mr. Dow observes, that in the Shanscrita, or learned language of the Bramins, which is the grand repository of (the religion, philosophy, and history of the Hindoos, there are in particular many hundred volumes in prose which treat of the ancient Indians and their history. The same writer also remarks, that the Shanscrita records contain accounts of the affairs of Western Asia very different from what any tribe of the Arabians have transmit­ted to posterity; and that it is more than probable, that, upon exam­ination, the former will appear to bear the marks of more authenticity, and of greater antiquity than the latter. The Arabian writers have been generally so much prejudiced against the Hindoos, that their ac­counts of them are by no means to be implicitly relied on.

Mr. Dow observes, that the small progress, which correctness and elegance of sentiment and diction have made in the East, did not pro­ceed from a want of encouragement to literature. On the contrary, it appears, that no princes in the world patronized men of letters with more generosity and respect than the Mahometan emperors of Indos­tan. A literary genius was not only the certain means to acquire a degree of wealth which must astonish Europeans, but an infallible road [Page 453] for rising to the first offices of the state. The character of the learned was at the same time so sacred, that tyrants, who made a pastime of [...]bruing their hands in the blood of their other subjects, not only ab­stained from offering violence to men of genius, but stood in fear of their strength.

MANUFACTURES AND COMMERCE.] These vary in the different countries of this peninsula; but the chief branches have been already mentioned. The inhabitants, in some parts, are said to manufacture their salt out of ashes. In all handicraft trades that they understand, the people are more industrious, and better workmen, than most of the Europeans; and in weaving, sewing, embroidering, and some other manufactures, it is said that the Indians do as much work with their feet as their hands. Their painting, though they are ignorant of draw­ing, is amazingly vivid in its colours. The fineness of their linen, and and their fillagree work in gold and silver, are beyond any thing of those kinds to be found in other parts of the world. The commerce of India, in short, is courted by all trading nations in the world, and probably has been so from the earliest ages: It was not unknown even in Solomon's time; and the Greeks and Romans drew from thence their highest materials of luxury. The greatest share of it, through events foreign in this part of our work, is now centered in England, though that of the Dutch is still very considerable; that of the French has for some time declined, nor is that of the Swedes and D [...]s of much importance.

CONSTITUTENT, GOVERNMENT, RARITIES, AND CITIES.} This article is so extensive, that it requires a slight review of the kingdoms that form this peninsula. In Azem, it hath already been observed, the king is proprietor of all the gold and silver; he pays lit­tle or nothing to the Great Mogul; his capital is Ghergong or Kirga­ [...]. We know little or nothing of the kingdom of Tipra, but that it was anciently subject to the kinds of Arracan; and that they send to the Chinese gold and silk, for which they receive silver in return. Arracan lies to the south of Tipra, and is governed by twelve princes, subject to the chief king, who resides in his capital. His palace is ve­ry large, and contains, as we are told, seven idols cast, in gold of two inches thick, each of a man's height, and covered over with diamonds and other precious stones. Pegu is about 350 English miles in length, and almost the same in breadth. The riches of the king when an in­dependent state, were almost incredible; some of his idols, as big as life, being of massy gold and silver. His revenues arose from the rents of loads, of which he was sole proprietor, and from duties on mer­chandise; so that some thought him to be the richest monarch in the world, excepting the Chinese emperor. He was said to be able to being a million, and on occasion, a million and a half of soldiers to the [...], well clothed and armed; and to be master of 800 trained ele­phants, each with a castle on his back, holding four soldiers.—The constitution of this empire is of the feudal kind, for he assigns [...] and towns to his nobles upon military tenures. In the year [...]4 Pegu was reduced to the state of a dependent province by the [...] of Ava. Macao is the great mart of trade in that province.

We know little of the kingdom of Ava. Moncha [...] was the resi­dence of the king, and not Ava, in 1755. It is said, the honours the [Page 454] king assumes are next to divine. His subjects trade chiefly in musk and jewels, rubies and saphires. In other particulars, the inhabitants resemble those of Pegu. In those kingdoms, and indeed in the greatest part of this peninsula, the doctrines of the Grand Lama of Thibet pre­vail. as well as those of the Bramins.

The kingdom of Laos or Lahos, formerly included that of Jang [...] or Jangomay, but that is now subject to Ava; we know few partiecu­lars of it that can be depended upon. It is said to be immensely pop­ulous, to abound in all the rich commodities as well as the gross super­stitions of the East, and to be divided into a number of petty king­doms, all of them holding of one sovereign, who, like his oriental brethren, is absolutely despotic, and lives in inexpressible pomp and magnificence; but is of the Lama religion, and often the slave of his priests and ministers.

The kingdom of Siam has been often described by missionaries and pretended travellers in the most romantic terms; and therefore we can pay little other credit to their accounts, farther than that it is a rich and flourishing kingdom, and that it approaches, in its govern­ment, policy, and the quickness and acuteness of its inhabitants, very near to the Chinese. The kingdom of Siam is surrounded by high mountains, which, on the east side, separate it from the kingdoms of Camboja and Laos; on the west, from Pegu; and on the north, from Ava, or, more properly, from Jangoma; on the south it is washed by the river Siam, and has the peninsula o Malacca, the north-west part whereof is under its dominion. The extent of the country, however, is very uncertain, and it is but indifferently peopled. The inhabit­ants of both sexes are more modest than any found in the rest of this peninsula. Great care is taken of the education of their children. Their marriages are simple, and performed by their talapoins, or priests, sprinkling holy water upon the couple, and repeating some prayers. We are told that gold is so abundant in this country, that their most ponderous images are made of it; and that it is seen in vast quantities on the outside of the king's palace. These relations are found, by modern travellers, to be the fictions of French and other missionaries; for though the country has mines of gold, their ornaments are either excessively thin plates of that metal, or a very bright lacker that cover wooden or other materials. The government here is extremely des­potic; even servants must appear before their masters in a kneeling posture; and the madarins are prostrate before the king. Siam, the capital, is represented as a large city, but scarcely a sixth part of it is inhabited; and the palace is about a mile and a half in circuit. Ban­kok, which stands about 18 leagues to the south of Siam, and 12 miles from the sea, is the only place towards the coast that is fortified with walls, batteries. and brass cannon: and the Dutch have a factory at Ligor, which stands on the east side of the peninsula of Malacca, but belonging to Siam.

The peninsula of Malacca is a large country, and contains several kingdoms or provinces. The Dutch, however, are said to be real masters and sovereigns of the whole peninsula, being in possession of the capital (Malacca.) The inhabitants differ but little from brutes in their manner of living; and yet the Malayan language is reckoned the purest of any spoken in all the Indies. We are told by the latest trav­ellers [Page 455] that its chief produce is tin, pepper, elephants teeth, canes, and gums. Some missionaries pretend that it is the Golden Chersonesus, or peninsula of the ancients, and that the inhabitants used to measure their riches by bars of gold. The truth is, that the excellent situation of this country admits of a trade with India; so that when it was first discovered by the Portuguese, who were afterwards expelled by the Dutch, Malacca was the richest city in the East, next to Goa and Or­ [...]s, being the key of the China, the Japan, the Moluccas, and the S [...]nda trade. The country, however, at present, is chiefly valuable for its trade with the Chinese. This degeneracy of the Malayans, who were formerly an industrious, ingenious people, is easily accounted for, by the tyranny of the Dutch, whose interest it is that they should nev­er recover from their present state of ignorance and slavery.

The English carry on a smuggling kind of trade in their country ships, from the coast of Coromandel and the Bay of Bengal to Malac­ [...]. This commerce is connived at by the Dutch governor and coun­cil among them, who little regard the orders of their superiors, provi­ded they can enrich themselves.

Cambodia, or Camboja, is a country little known to the Europeans; but, according to the best information, its greatest length, from north to south, is about 520 English miles; and its greatest breadth, from west to east, about 398 miles. This kingdom has a spacious river run­ning through it, the banks of which are the only habitable parts of the nation, on account of its sultry air, and the pestiferous gnats, serpents, and other animals bred in the woods. Its soil, commodities, trade, animals, and products by sea and land, are much the same with the other kingdoms of this vast peninsula. The betel, a creeping plant a particular flavour, and, as they say, an excellent remedy for all those diseases that are common to the inhabitants of the East Indies, is the highest luxury of the Cambodians, from the king to the peasant; but is very unpalatable and disagreeable to the Europeans. The same barbarous magnificence, the despotism of their king, and the ig­norance of the people, prevail here as throughout the rest of the pen­insula. Between Cambodia and Cochin-China lies the little kingdom of Chiampa, the inhabitants of which trade with the Chinese, and seem therefore to be somewhat more civilized than their neighbours.

Cochin-China, or the western China, is situated under the torrid [...], and extends, according to some authors, about 500 miles in length; but it is much less extensive in its breadth from east to west. Laos, Cambodia, and Chiampa, as well as some other smaller king­doms, are said to the tributary to Cochin-China; some particulars of which we have mentioned in the general view of this peninsula. The manners and religion of the people seem to be originally Chinese; and they are much given to trade. Their king is said to be immensely rich, and his kingdom enjoys all the advantages of commerce that are found in the other parts of the East Indies; but at the same time we are told, that this mighty prince, as well as the king of Tonquin, is subject to the Chinese emperor. It is reasonable to suppose, that all those rich countries were peopled from China, or at least that they had, some time or other, been governed by one head, till the mother empire became so large, that it might be convenient to parcel it out, preserving to itself a kind of feudal superiority over them all.

[Page 456] Tonquin has been already mentioned, and little can be added to what has been said, unless we adopt the fictions of the catholic mis­sionaries. The government of this kingdom, however, is particular. The Tonquinese had revolted from the Chinese, which was attended by a civil war. A compromise at last took place between the chief of the revolt and the representative of the ancient kings, by which the former was to have all the executive powers of the government, under the name of the Chouah; but that the Bua, or real king, should re­tain the royal titles, and be permitted some inconsiderable civil pre­rogatives within his palace, from which neither he nor any of his fam­ily can stir without the permission of the chouah.

The chouah resides generally in the capital Cachao, which is situa­ted near the centre of the kingdom. The bua's palace is a vast struc­ture, and has a fine arsenal. The English have a very flourishing house on the north-side of the city, conveniently fitted up with store, houses and office-houses, a noble dining-room, and handsome apart­ments for the merchants, factors, and officers of the company.

The above is the best account we have been able to give of this vast peninsula. Its rarities, consisting of houses overlaid with gold, and solid idols of the same metal, adorned with an infinite number of prec­ious stones and jewels, are mentioned by many travellers; but it is difficult to give them credit, when we consider the undisciplined weak­ness of the inhabitants, their superstition, indolence, ignorance, and native timidity; which must render them a prey not only to European adventurers, but to the Tartar conquerors of China. To this we may add, the universally admitted passion of those people for oftentation, and the many discoveries that have been made by candid travellers, of their displaying plated or gilded furniture and ornaments, at which they are wonderfully expert, for those of massy gold.

The possession of rubies, and other precious stones of an extraordi­nary size, and even of white and party-coloured elephants, conveys among those credulous people a pre-eminence of rank and royalty, and has sometimes occasioned bloody wars. After all, it must be ac­knowledged, that, however dark the accounts we have of those king­doms may be, yet there is sufficient evidence to prove, that they are immensely rich in all the treasures of nature; but that those advan­tages are attended with many natural calamities, such as floods, volca­nos, earthquakes, tempests, and above all, rapacious and poisonous animals, which render the possession of life, even for an hour, preca­rious and uncertain.

[Page 457]

PERSIA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 1300 Miles. between Degrees. 44 and 70 east longitude. Sq. Miles.800,000
Breadth 1100 Miles. Degrees. 25 and 44 north latitude. Sq. Miles.800,000.

BOUNDARIES.] MODERN Persia is bounded by the mountains of Ararat, or Daghistan, which divide it from Circassian Tartary, on the North-West; by the Caspian sea, which divides it from Russia, on the North; by the river Oxus, which divides it from Usbec Tartary, on the North-East; by India, on the East; and by the Indian Ocean, and the gulfs of Persia and Ormus, on the South; and by Arabia and Turkey, on the West.

This kingdom is divided into the following provinces: On the frontiers of India are Chorasan, part of the ancient Hyrcania, includ­ing Herat and Esterabad; Sableustan, including the ancient Bacteria­ [...]a and Candahor; and Sagistan the ancient Drangiana. The southern division contains Makeran, kerman, the ancient Godiossia, and Far­si [...]tan, the ancient Persia. The south west division, on the frontiers of Turkey, contains the provinces of Chusistan, the ancient Susiana, and Irac-Agem the ancient Parthia. The north-west division, lying be­tween the Caspian sea and the frontiers of Turkey in Asia, contains the provinces of Aderbeitzen, the ancient Media; Gangea, Daghistan part of the ancient Iberia and Colchis; Ghilan part of the ancient Hyrcania; Shirvan, and Mazanderan.

NAME.] Persia, according to the poets, derived its name from Per­seus, the son of Jupiter and Danae. Lets fabulous authors suppose it derived from Paras, which signifies a horseman; the Persians, or Par­thians, being always celebrated for their skill in horsemanship.

AIR.] In so extensive an empire this is very different. Those parts which border upon Caucasus and Daghistan, and the mountains near the Caspian sea, are cold, as lying in the neighbourhood of those mountains which are commonly covered with snow. The air in the midland provinces of Persia is serene, pure, and exhilarating, but in the southern provinces it is hot, and sometimes communicates nox­ious blasts to the midland parts, which are so often mortal, that the inhabitants fortify their heads with very thick turbans.

SOIL AND PRODUCTIONS.] These vary like the air. The soil is far from being luxuriant towards Tartary and Caspian sea, but with cultivation it might produce abundance of corn and fruits.—South of mount Taurus, the fertility of the country in corn, fruits, wine, and other luxuries of life, is equalled by few countries. It produces wine and oil in plenty, senna, rhubarb, and the finest of drugs. The fruits are delicious, especially their dates, oranges, pistachio nuts, mel­ons, cucumbers, and garden-stuff, not to mention vast quantities of ex­cellent silk; and the gulf of Bassora formerly furnished great part of Europe and Asia with very fine pearls. Some parts, near Ispahan es­pecially, produce almost all the flowers that are valued in Europe: and from some of them, the roses especially, they extract waters of a [Page 558] salubrious and odorific kind, which form a gainful commodity in trade. In short, the fruits, vegetables, and flowers of Persia, are of a most excellent flavour; and had the natives the art of horticulture to as great perfection as some nations in Europe, by transplanting, en­grafting, and other meliorations, they would add greatly to the natural riches of the country. The Persian assafoetida flows from a plant cal­led Hil [...]ot, and turns into a gum. Some of it is white, and some black; but the former is so much valued, that the natives make very rich sauces of it, and sometimes eat it as a rarity.

MOUNTAINS.] These are Caucasus and Ararat, which are called the mountains of Daghistan; and the vast collection of mountains called Taurus, and their divisions, run through the middle of the coun­try from Natolia to India.

RIVERS.] It has been observed, that no country, of so great an ex­tent, has so few navigable rivers as Persia. The most considerable are those of the Kur, anciently Cyrus; and Aras, anciently Araxes, which rises in or near the mountains of Ararat, and, joining their streams, fall into the Caspian sea. Some small rivulets falling from the mountains water the country; but their streams are so inconsider­able, that few or none of them can be navigated even with boats. The Oxus can scarcely be called a Persian river, though it divides Persia from Usbec Tartary. Persia has the river Indus on the east, and the Euphrates and Tigris on the west.

WATER.] The scarcity of rivers in Persia, is joined to a scarcity of water; but the defect, where it prevails, is admirably well supplied by means of reservoirs, aqueducts, canals, and other ingenious methods.

METALS AND MINERALS.] Persia contains mines of iron, copper, lead, and above all, turquoise stones, which are found in Chorasan—Sulphur, salt-petre, and antimony, are found in the mountains. Quar­ries of red, white, and black marble, have also been discovered near Tauris.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MAN­NERS, CUSTOMS, AND DIVERSIONS.] It is impossible to speak with any certainty concern­ing the population of a country so little known as that of Persia. If we are to judge by the vast armies, in modern as well as ancient times, raised there, the numbers it contains must be very great. The Per­sians of both sexes are generally handsome; the men being fond of Georgian and Circassian women. Their complexions towards the south are somewhat swarthy. The men shave their heads, but the young men suffer a lock of hair to grow on each side, and the beard of their chin to reach up to their temples; but religious people wear long beards. Men of rank and quality wear very magnificent turbans; many of them cost twenty-five pounds, and few under nine or ten—They have a maxim to keep their heads very warm, so that they nev­er pull of their caps or their turbans out of respect even to the king. Their dress is very simple. Next to their skin they wear callico shirts, over them a vest, which reaches below the knee, girt with a sash, and over that a loose garment somewhat shorter. The materials of their clothes, however, are commonly very expensive; consisting of the richest furs, silks, muslin, cottons, and the like valuable stuffs, richly embroidered with gold and silver. They wear a kind of loose boots on their legs, and slippers on their feet. They are fond of riding, and [Page 459] very expensive in their equipages. They wear at all times a dagger in their sash, and linen trowsers. The collars of their shirts and clothes are open; so that their dress upon the whole is far better adapted for the purposes both of health and activity, than the long flowing robes of the Turks. The dress of the women is not much different; their wear, as well as that of the men, is very costly; and they are at great pains to heighten their beauty by art, colours, and washes.

The Persians accustom themselves to frequent washings and ablu­tions, which are the more necessary, as they seldom change their linen. In the morning early they drink coffee, about eleven go to dinner, upon fruits, sweatmeats, and milk. Their chief meal is at night. They out at their repasts cakes of rice, and others of wheat flour; and as they esteem it an abomination to cut either bread, or any kind of meat, after it is dressed, these cakes are made thin, that they may be easily broken with the hand; and their meat, which is generally mutton, or fowls is so prepared, that they divide it with their fingers. When every thing is set in order before them, they cat fast, and without any ceremony. But it is observed by a late traveller, that when the oldest man in the company speaks, though he be poor and set at the lower end of the room, they all give a strict attention to his words. They are temperate, but use opium, though not in such abundance as the Turks; not are they very delicate in their entertainments of eating and drinking. They are great masters of ceremony towards their su­periors, and so polite, that they accommodate Europeans who visit them, with stools, that they may not be forced to fit cross-legged. They are so immoderately fond of tobacco, which they smoke through a tube fixed in water, so as to be cool in the mouth, that when it has been prohibited by their princes, they have been known to leave their country rather than be debarred from that enjoyment. The Persians are naturally fond of poetry, moral sentences, and hyperbole. Their long wars, and their national revolutions have mingled the native Per­sians with barbarous nations, and are said to have taught them dissim­ulation; but they are still pleasing and plausible in their behaviour, and in all ages have been remarkable for hospitality.

The Persians write like the Hebrews, from the right to the left; are [...] in their seals and materials for writing, and wonderfully expedi­tious in the art. The number of people employed on their manu­scripts (for no printing is allowed there) is incredible. They great [...]ble seems to be ostentation in their equipages and dresses; not are they less jealous of their women than the Turks, and other eastern na­tions. They are fond of music, and take a pleasure in conversing in large companies; but their chief diversions are those of the field, [...] hawking, horsemanship, and the exercise of arms, in all which they are very dexterous. They excel, as their ancestors the P [...]hians did, in archery. They are fond of rope-dancers, jugglers, and fighting of wild beasts; and privately playing at games of chance.

Men may marry for life, or for any determined time, in Persia, as well as through all Tartary; and travellers or merchants, who intend to stay some time in any city, commonly apply to the cadee, or [...] for a wife during the time they propose to stay. The cadee for [...] gratuity, produces a number of girls, whom he declares to be [Page 460] honest, and free from diseases; and he becomes surety for them. A gentleman who lately attended the Russian embassy to Persia declares, that, amongst thousands, there has not been one instance of their dis­honesty during the time agreed upon.

RELIGION.] The Persians are Mahometans of the sect of Ali; for which reason the Turks, who follow the succession of Omar and Abu Bekr, call them heretics. Their religion is, if possible, in some things more fantastical and sensual than that of the Turks; but in many points it is mingled with some bramin superstitions. When they are taxed by the Christians with drinking strong liquors, as many of them do, they answer very sensible, "You Christians whore and get drunk, though you know you are committing sins, which is the very case with us." Having mentioned the bramins, the comparison between them and the Persian guebres or gaurs, who pretend to be the disciples and successors of the ancient magi, the followers of Zoroaster, may be highly worth a learned disquisition: That both of them held original­ly pure and simple ideas of a Supreme Being, may be easily proved; but the Indian bramins and parse [...]s accuse the gaurs, who still worship the fire, of having sensualized those ideas, and of introducing and evil principle into the government of the world. A combustible ground, about ten miles distant from Baku, a city in the north of Persia, is the scene of the guebres devotions. It must be admitted, that this ground is impregnated with very surprising inflammatory qualities, and con­tains several old little temples; in one of which the guebres pretend to preserve the sacred flame of the universal fire, which rises from the end, and a large hollow cane stuck in the ground, resembling a lamp burning with very pure spirits. The Mahometans are the declared enemies of the gaurs, who were banished out of Persia by Shah Abbas. Their sect is said to be numerous, though tolerated in very few places.

The long wars between the Persians and the Romans seem early to have driven the ancient Christians into Persia, and the neighbouring countries. Even to this day, many sects are found that evidently have Christianity for the ground work of their religion. Some of them, called Souffccs, who are a kind of quietists, sacrifice their passions to God, and profess the moral duties. The Sabean Christians have, in their religion, a mixture of Judaism and Mahometanism; and are nu­merous towards the Persian gulf. We have already mentioned the Armenian and Georgian Christians, who are very numerous in Persia. The present race of Persians are said to be very cool in the doctrines of Mahomet, owing chiefly to their late wars with the Turks.

LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN.] The Persians, in ancient times, were famous for both; and their poets renowned all over the East. There is a manuscript at Oxford (Eng.) containing the lives of an hun­dred and thirty-five of the finest Persian poets. Ferdusi and Sadi were among the most celebrated of the Persian poets. The former compri­sed the history of Persia in a series of epic poems, which employed him for near thirty years, and which are said by Mr. Jones to be "a glori­ous monument of Eastern genius and learning." Sadi was a native of Schiras, and flourished in the thirteenth century, and wrote many fine pieces, both in prose and verse. Shemseddin was one of the most em­inent lyric poets that Asia has produced; and Nakhsbeb wrote in Per­sian a book called the "Tales of a Parrot," not unlike the Decameron [Page 461] of Boccace. Jami was a most animated and elegant poet, who flour­ished in the middle of the fifteenth century, and whose beautiful com­positions, on a great variety of subjects, are preserved at Oxford, in twenty-two volumes. Hariri composed in a rich, elegant, and flowery style, a moral work, in fifty dissertations, on the changes of fortune, and the various conditions of human life, interspersed with a number of agreeable adventures, and several fine pieces of poetry.

At present, learning is at a very low ebb among the Persians. Their boasted skill in astronomy is now reduced to a mere smattering in that science, and terminates in judicial astrology; so that no people in the world are more superstitious than the Persians. The learned profes­sions in greatest esteem among them is that of medicine; which is at perpetual variance with astrology, because every dose must be in the lucky hour fixed by the astrologer, which often defeats the ends of the prescription. It is said, however, that the Persian physicians are acute and sagacious. Their drugs are excellent, and they are no strangers to the practices of Galen and Avicenna. Add to this, that the plague is but little known in this country; as equally rare are many other dis­eases that are fatal in other places; such as the gout, the stone, the small-pox, consumptions, and apoplexies. The Persian practice of physic is therefore pretty much circumscribed, and they are very ig­norant in surgery, which is exercised by barbars, whose chief knowl­edge of it is in letting blood; for they trust the healing of green wounds to the excellency of the air, and the good habit of the pa­tient's body.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} The monuments of antiquity in Persia, are more celebrated for their magnificence and expense, than their beauty or taste. No more than nineteen columns, which formerly belonged to the famous palace of Persepolis, are now remaining. Each is about fifteen feet high, and composed of excellent Parian marble. The ruins of other ancient buildings are found in many parts of Persia, but void of that elegance and beauty which is displayed in the Greek architecture. The tombs at the kings of Persia are stupendous works; being cut out of a rock, and highly ornamented with sculptures. The chief of the modern edifices is a pillar to be seen at Ispahan, sixty feet high, consisting of the skulls of beasts, erected by Shah Abbas, after the suppression of a rebellion. Abbas had vowed to erect such a column of human skulls; but upon the submissions of the rebels, he performed his vow by sub­stituting those of brutes, each of the rebels furnishing one.

The baths near Gombroon work such cures, that they are esteemed among the natural curiosities of Persia. The springs of the famous Naphtha near Baku, are mentioned often in natural history for their surprising qualities; but the chief of the natural curiosities in this country, is the burning phaenomenon, and its inflammatory neigh­bourhood, already mentioned under the article of Religion.

HOUSES, CITIES, AND PUCLIC EDIFICES.] The houses of men, of quality in Persia, are in the same taste with those of the Asiatic Turks already described. They are seldom above one story high, built of bricks, with flat roofs for walking on, and thick walls. The hall is arched, the doors are clumsey and narrow, and the rooms have no communication but with the hall; the kitchens and office-houses be­ing [Page 462] built apart. Few of them have chimnies, but a round hole in the middle of the room. Their furniture chiefly consists of carpets, and their beds are two thick cotton quilts, which serve them likewise as coverlids, with carpets under them.

Ispahan or Spahawn, the capital of Persia, is seated on a fine plain, within a mile of the river Zenderhend, which supplies it with water. It is said to be twelve miles in circumference. The streets are narrow and crooked, and the chief amusement of the inhabitants is on the flat roofs of their houses, where they spend their summer evenings; and different families associate together. The royal square is a third of a mile in length, and about half as much in breadth; and we are [...]old, that the royal palace, with the buildings and gardens belonging to it, is three miles in circumference. There are in Ispahan 160 mosques, 1800 caravanseras, 260 public baths, a prodigious number of [...] squares, streets, and palaces, in which are canals, and tress planned to shade and better accommodate the people. This capital is said for­merly to have contained 650,000 inhabitants; but was often depopu­lated by Kouli Khan during his wars, so that we may easily suppose, that it has lost great part of its magnificence. In 1744, when Mr. Hanway was there, it was thought that not above 5000 of its houses were inhabited.

Schiras lies about 200 miles to the south of Astrachan. It is an open town, but its neighbourhood is inexpressibly rich and beautiful, being laid out for many miles in gardens, the flowers, fruits, and vi [...] of which are incomparable. The vines of Shiras are reckoned the best of any in Persia. This town is the capital of Pars, the ancient Persia, and hath a college for the study of eastern learning. It contains an uncommon number of mosques, and is adorned by many noble build­ings, but its streets are narrow and inconvenient, and not above 4000 of its houses are inhabited.

The cities of Ormus and Gombroon, on the narrow part of the Per­sian Gulf, were formerly places of great commerce and importance. The English, and other Europeans, have factories at Gombroon, where they trade with the Persians. Arabians, Banyans, Armenians, Turks, and Tartars, who come hither with the caravans which set out from various inland cities of Asia, under the convoy of guards.

Mosques are religions buildings, square, and generally of stone; and are pretty much the same in all Mahometan countries. Before the chief gate there is a square court, paved with white marble, and low galleries round it, whole roof is supported by marble pillars. These galleries serve for places of ablution before the Mahometans go into the mosque. About every mosque there are six high towers, called minarets, each of which has three little open galleries, one above an­other. These towers, as well as the mosques, are covered with land, and adorned with gilding and other ornaments; and from thence in­stead of a bell, the people are called to prayer by certain officers ap­pointed for that purpose. No woman is allowed to enter the mosque; nor can a man with his shoes or stockings on. Near most mosque is a place of entertainment for strangers during three days; and the [...] of the founder, with conveniencies for reading the Koran, and pray­ing.

[Page 463] The bagnios in the Mahometan countries are wonderfully well con­structed for the purpose of bathing. Sometimes they are square, but oftener circular, built of white well polished stone or marble. Each [...]gnio contains three rooms; the first for dressing and underssing; the second contains the water, and the third the bath; all of them paved with black and white marble. The operation of the bath is very curi­ous but wholesome; though to those not accustomed to it, it is pain­ [...]. The water rubs the patient with great vigour, then handles and stretches his limbs as if he was dislocating every bone in the body; all which exercises are, in those inert warm countries, very conductive to health. In public bagnios, the men bathe from morning to four in the afternoon; when, all male attendants being removed, the ladies succeed and when coming out of the bath display their finest clothes.

We might here attempt to describe the eastern seraglios or harams, the women's apartments; but from the most credible accounts, they on contrived according to the taste and conveniency of the owner, and divided into a certain number of apartments, which are seldom or never entered by strangers; and there is no country where women are [...] strictly guarded and confined as among the great men in Persia.

MANUFACTURES AND COMMERCE.] The Persians equal, if not ex­ [...]d, all the manufactures in the world in silk, woollen, mohair, car­ [...]t and leather. Their works in these join fancy, taste, and elegance, to richness, neatness, and shew: and yet they are ignorant of painting, and their drawings are very rude. Their dying excels that of Europe. Their silver and gold laces, and threads, are admirable for preserving their lustre. Their embroideries and horse furniture are not to be equalled; not are they ignorant of the pottery and window glass man­ufactures On the other hand, their carpenters are very indifferent artists, which is said to be owing to the scarcity of timber all over Per­sia. Their jewellers and goldsmiths are clumsy workmen; and they are ignorant of lock-making, and the manufacture of looking-glasses. Upon the whole, they lie under inexpressible disadvantages from the [...] of their government, which renders them slaves to their kings, who often engross either their labour or their profits.

The trade of the Persians, who have little or no shipping of their own, is carried on in foreign bottoms. That between the English and other nations, by the gulf of Ormus at Gombroon, was the most gain­ful they had; but the perpetual wars they have been engaged in have [...] their commerce. The great scheme of the English, in trading with the Persians through Russia, promised vast advantages to both nations, but it has hitherto answered the expectations of neither. Per­haps the court of Petersburgh is not fond of suffering the English to [...]ddish themselves upon the Caspian sea, the navigation of which is [...] possessed by the Russians; but nothing can be said with certainty [...] that head, till the government of Persia is in a more settled condi­ [...] th [...]n it is at present.

CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT.] Both these are extremely [...], as resting in the breast of a despotic, and often capricious [...]. The Persians however had some fundamental rules of gov­ernment. They excluded from their throne females, but not their [...] progeny. Blindness likewise was a disqualification for the roy­ [...] [...]ssion. In other respects the king's will was a law for the peo­ple. [Page 464] The instances that have been given of the cruelties and inhu­manities practised by the Mahometan kings of Persia, are almost in­credible, especially during the two last centuries. The reason given to the Christian ambassadors, by Shah Abbas, one of their most cele­brated princes, was, that the Persians were such brutes, and so insensi­ble by nature, that they could not be governed without the exercise of exemplary cruelties. But this was only a wretched and ill-grounded apology for his own barbarity. The favourites of the prince, female as well as male, are his only counsellors, and the smallest disobedience to their will is attended with immediate death. The Persians have no degrees of nobility, so that the respect due to every man, on account of his high station, expires with himself. The king has been known to prefer a younger son to his throne, by putting out the eyes of the elder brother.

REVENUES.] The crown claims one third of the cattle, corn, and fruits of his subjects, and likewise a third of silk and cotton. No rank or condition of Persians is exempted from severe taxations and services. The governors of provinces have particular lands assigned to them for maintaining their retinues and troops; and the crown lands defray the expenses of the court, king's household, and great officers of state. After saying thus much, the reader cannot doubt that the revenues of the Persian kings were prodigious; but nothing can be said with any certainty in the present distracted state of that country. Even the water that is let into fields and gardens is subject to a tax; and foreign­ers, who are not Mahometans, pay each a ducat a head.

MILITARY STRENGTH.] This consisted formerly of cavalry, and it is now thought to exceed that of the Turks. Since the beginning of this century, however, their kings have raised bodies of infantry. The regular troops of both brought to the field, even under Kouli Khan, did not exceed 60,000; but according to the modern histories of Persia, they are easily recruited in case of a defeat. The Persians have few fortified towns; not had they any ships of war, until Kouli Khan built a royal navy; but since his death we hear no more of their fleet.

ARMS AND TITLES.] The arms of the Persian monarch are a lion couchant looking at the rising sun. His title is Shah, or the Dispo­ser of Kingdoms. Shah or Khan, and Sultan, which he assumes like­wise are Tartar titles. To acts of state the Persian monarch does not subscribe his name, but the grant runs in this manner. This act is giv­en by whom the universe obeys.

HISTORY.] All ancient historians mention the Persian monarchs and their grandeur; and no empire has undergone a greater variety of governments. It is here sufficient to say, that the Persian empire succeeded the Assyrian or Babylonian, and that Cyrus said its founda­tion about 556 years before Christ, and restored the Israelites, who had been captive at Babylon, to liberty. It ended in the person of Darius, who was conquered by Alexander 329 years before Christ. When Alexander's empire was divided among his great general offi­cers, their posterity were conquered by the Romans. These last, how­ever, never fully subdued Persia, and the natives had princes of their own, by the name of A [...]saces, who more than once defeated the Roman legions. The successors of these princes survived the Roman empire [Page 465] itself, but were subdued by the famous Tamerlene, whose posterity were supplanted by a doctor of law, Cheki Adir, the ancestor of the Sefi or Sophi family, and who pretended to be descended from Ma­homet himself. His successors, though some of them were valiant and politic, and enlarged the empire, and from him sometimes called So­phis, proved in general to be a disgrace to humanity, by their cruelty, * ignorance and indolence, which brought them into such disrepute with their subjects, barbarous as they were, that Hassein, a prince of the Sesi race, who succeeded in 1694, was murdered by Mahmud, son and successor to the famous Miriweis; as Mahmud himself was by Es­ref, one of his general officers, who usurped the throne. Prince Tahmas, the representative of the Sefi family, had escaped from the rebels, and assembling an army, took into his service Nadir Shah, who defeated and killed Esref, and re-annexed to the Persian monarchy all the places dismembered from it by the Turks and Tartars during their late rebellions. At last the secret ambition of Nadir broke out, and after assuming the name of Thamas Kouli Khan, and pretending that his services were not sufficiently rewarded, he rebelled against his sov­ereign, made him a prisoner, and it is supposed, put him to death.

This usurper afterwards mounted the throne, under the title of Shah Nadir; made a successful expedition into Indostan, where he acquired an amazing booty, but brought back an inconsiderable part of this booty from India, losing great part of it upon his return, by the Marrattas and various accidents. He next conquered Usbec Tartary; but was not so successful against the Daghestan Tartars, whose coun­try he found to be inaccessible. He beat the Turks in several engage­ments, but was unable to take Bagdad. The great principle of his government was to strike terror into all his subjects by the most cruel executions. His conduct became so intolerable, that it was thought his brain was touched; and he was assassinated in his own tent, partly is self-defence, by his chief officers and his relations, in the year 1747. Many pretenders, upon his death, started up; but the fortunate can­didate was Kerim Khan, who was crowned at Tauris in 1763, and, according to the latest accounts, still keeps possession of the throne.

[Page 466]

ARABIA.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 1430 Miles. between Degrees. 35 and 60 east longitude. Sq. Miles. 700,000
Breadth 1200 Miles. Degrees. 12 and 30 north latitude. Sq. Miles. 700,000

BOUNDARIES.] BOUNDED by Turkey on the North; by the gulfs of Persia or Basfora, and Ormus, which separate it from Persia, on the East; by the Indian Ocean, South; and the Red Sea, which divides it from Africa, on the West.

Divisions. Subdivisions. Chief towns.
1. Arabia Petraea, N. W. —— SUEZ, E. lon. 33-27. N. lat. 29▪50.
2. Arabia Deserta, in the middle. Haggiaz or Mecca MECCA, E. lon. 43-30 lat. 21-20.
  Siden—Medina
Tehama Dhafar
3. Arabia Felix, S. E. Mocha MOCHA, E. long. 44-4. N. lat.13-45.
  Sibit
Hadramut Hadramut
Casseen Casseen
Segur Segur
Oman or Muscat Muscat
Jamama Jamama
Bahara Elcalf.

NAME.] It is remarkable that this country has always preserved in ancient name. The word Arab, it is generally said, signifies a robb [...], or freebooter. The word Saracen, by which one tribe is called, it said to signify both a thief and an inhabitant of the desert. These names justly belong to the Arabians, for they seldom let any merchan­dise pass through and country without extorting something from the owners, if they do not rob them.

MOUNTAINS.] The mountains of Sinai and Horeb, lying in Ara­bia Petraea, east of the Red-Sea, and those called Gabel el Ared, in A­rabia Felix, are the most noted.

RIVERS, SEAS, GULFS, AND CAP [...]S.] There are few fountains springs, or rivers in this country, except the Euphrates, which washes the north-east limits of it. It is almost surrounded with seas; as the Indian Ocean, the Red-Sea, the gulfs of Persia and Ormus. The chief capes or Promontories are those of Rosalgate and Mussedon.

CLIMATE, AIR, SOIL, AND PRODUCE.] As a considerable part of this country lies under the Torrid Zone, and the Tropic of Cancer passes over Arabia Felix, the air is excessively dry and hot, and the country is subject to hot poisonous winds, like those on the opposite shores of Persia, which often prove fatal, especially to strangers. The soil, in some parts, is nothing more than immense sands, which, when agitated [Page 467] by the winds, roll like the troubled ocean, and sometimes form moun­tains by which whole caravans have been buried or lost. In these des­erts, the caravans, having no tracks, are guided, as at sea, by a com­pass, or by the stars, for they travel chiefly in the night. Here, says Dr. Shaw, are no pastures clothed with stocks, nor vallies standing thick with corn; here are no vineyards or oliveyards; but the whole is a lonesome desolate wilderness, no otherways diversified than by plains covered with sand, and mountains that are made up of naked rocks and precipices. Neither is this country ever, unless sometimes at the equinoxes, refreshed with rain; and the intenseness of the cold in the night is almost equal to that of the heat in the day-time. But the southern part of Arabia, deservedly called the Happy, is blessed with an excellent soil, and, in general, is very fertile. There the cul­tivated lands, which are chiefly about the towns near the sea-coast, produce balm of Gilead, manna, myrrh, cassia, aloes, frankincense, spikenard, and other valuable gums; cinnamon, pepper, cardamum, oranges, lemons, pomegranates, figs, and other fruits; honey and wax in plenty, with a small quantity of corn and wine. This country is famous for its coffee and its dates, which last are found scarcely any where in such perfection as here and in Persia. There are few trees fit for timber in Arabia, and little wood of any kind.

ANIMALS.] The most useful animals in Arabia are camels and dromedaries; they are amazingly fitted by Providence for travelling the dry and parched deserts of this country, for they are so formed, that they can throw up the liquor from their stomach into their throat, by which means they can travel six or eight days without water. The camels usually carry 800lb. weight upon their backs, which is not ta­ken off during the whole journey, for they naturally kneel down to rest, and in due time rise with their load. The dromedary is a small camel that will travel many miles a day. It is an observation among the Arabs, that wherever there are trees, the water is not far off; and when they draw near a pool, their camels will small it at a distance, and set up their great trot till they come to it. The Arabian horses are well known in Europe, and have contributed to improve the breed of those in England. They are only fit for the saddle, and are admired for their make as much as for their swiftness and high mettle. The [...] breed is in the kingdom of Sunnaa, in which Mocha is situated.

INHABITANTS, MANNERS, CUSIOMS, AND DRESS.} The Arabians, like most of the na­tions, of Asia, are of a middle stature, thin, and of a swarthy complexion, with black hair and black eyes. They are swift of foot, excellent horsemen, and are said to be in gene­ral a brave people, expert at the bow and lance, and since they became acquainted with fire arms, good marksmen. The inhabitants of the in­ [...]id country live in tents, and remove from place to place with their sacks and herds, as they have ever done since they become a nation.

The Arabians in general are such thieves, that travellers and pil­grims, who are led thither from all nations through motives of devotion [...] curiosity, are struck with terror on their approaches towards the deserts. Those robbers, headed by a captain, traverse the country in considerable troops on horseback, and assault and plunder the car­avans; and we are told, that so late as the year 1750, a body of 50,000 [...]ians attacked a caravan of merchants and pilgrims returning [Page 468] from Mecca, killed about 60,000 persons, and plundered it of every thing valuable, though escorted by a Turkish army.

It has been contended says Mr. Bruce, that Polygamy is unnatural and detrimental to the population of a country. This has been found­ed upon a calculation from the bills of mortality of particular coun­tries, by which it appears that the number of the sexes is equal. In England the proportion is found to be, as thirteen to twelve: Nature having provided a greater proportion of men, in order to make up for the havock occasioned by war, murder, drunkenness, and all species of violence to which women are not so subject as men. These arguments however, do not apply to this country and many others: From a dil­igent enquiry, it appears, that from the Isthmus of Suei to the Straits of Babelmandeb, which contains the three Arabias, the proportion is fully four women to one man.

Without allowing Mahomet all the abilities some have done, we may surely suppose him to have seen this great disproportion of four women born to one man: And from its obvious consequences, we are not to wonder that one of his first cares was to rectify it, as if struck at the very root of his Empire, Power and Religion; with this view, he enacted, or rather revived, the law which gave liberty to every in­dividual to marry four wives, each of whom was to be equal in rank and honour, without any preference but what the predilection of the husband gave her. By this he secured civil rights to each woman, and procured a means of doing away that reproach, of dring without issue, to which the minds of the whole sex have al­ways been sensible, whatever their religion was, or from whatever past of the world they came. Many, have taxed this permission of a plurality of wives, (one of the most political and necessary measures of that Legislator) with a tendency to encourage lewdness, from which it was very far distant. The expediency of the measure will further appear, by drawing a comparison between the state of women in those countries in which the former calculations are made, and the one we are now describing. Women in those countries are commonly capa­ble of child bearing at fourteen, let the other term be forty eight, when they bear no more: Thirty four years therefore these women bear children. At the age of fourteen or fifteen they are objects of our love; they are endca [...]ed by bearing us children after that time, and none will pretend, that at forty eight and fifty years a woman is not an agreeable companion. Perhaps the last years to thinking minds, are fully as agreeable as the first. We grow old together, we have a near prospect of dying together; nothing can present a more agreeable picture of social life, than monogamy in these countries.

The Arab on the other hand begins to bear children at eleven, and seldom or never has a child after twenty. The time then of her child­bearing is nine years, and four women taken together. have then the term of thirty six; so that the women in the former case, who bear children for thirty four years, have only two years less than the wives whom Mahomet has allowed. But there are other grievous differences. An Arabian girl, at eleven years old, is the object of man's desire; being an infant however in understanding, she is not a rational companion for him. A man marries there, say at twenty, and before he is thirty, his wife improved as a companion, ceases to be an object of his desires, and a mother of children; so that the best and [Page 469] most vigorous of his days are spent with a woman he cannot love, and with her he would be destined to live forty or forty-five years without comfort to himself by increase of family, or utility to the public.

The reasons them against poligamy, which subsists in the countries first mentioned, do by no means subsist in Arabia. *

The habit of the roving Arabs is a kind of blue shirt, tied about them with a white sash or girdle; and some of them have a vest of furs or sheep-skins over it; they also wear drawers, and sometimes slippers, but no stockings; and have a cap or turban on their head. Many of them go almost naked: but, as in the eastern countries, the women are so wrapped up, that nothing can be discerned but their eyes. Like other Mahometans, the Arabs eat all manner of flesh, ex­cept that of hogs; and prefer the flesh of camels, as we prefer veni­son, to other meat. They take care to drain the blood from the flesh, as the Jews do, and like them refuse such fish as have no scales. Cof­fee and tea, water, and sherbet made of oranges, water and sugar, is their usual drink: they have no strong liquors.

RELIGION.] Of this the reader will find an account in the follow­ing history of Mahomet their countryman. Many of the wild Arabs are still Pagans, but the people in general profess Mahometanism.

LEARNING AND LANGUAGE.] Though the Arabians in former ages were famous for their learning and skill in all the liberal arts, there is scarcely a country at present where the people are so universally ig­norant. The vulgar language used in the three Arabias is the Arabesk, or corrupt Arabian, which is likewise spoken, with some variation of dialect, over great part of the East, from Egypt to the court of the Great Mogul. The pure old grammatical Arabic, which is said to be a dialect of the Hebrew, and by the people of the East accounted the richest, most energetic, and copious language in the world, is taught in their schools, as Greek and Latin are among Europeans, and used by Mahometans in their worship; for as the Koran was written in this language, they will not suffer it to be read in any other: They look upon it to have been the language of Paradise, and think no man can be master of it without a miracle, as consisting of several millions of words. The books which treat of it say, they have no sewer than a thousand terms to express the word, camel, and five hundred for that of a Lion.

In the Temple of Mecca, of suspended on its walls and gates, are seven Arabian poems, called the Mcalakat, a fine specimen of Orien­tal poetry, as to the dramatic pastoral, which have been lately trans­lated into English by sir William Jones: The following stanzas of one of the poems are transcribed, as they serve to gratify the curiosity, and also display a lively and entertaining view of the Arabian customs and modes living.

1. Desolate are the mansions of the fair, the stations in Minia, where they rested, and those where they fixed their abodes! Wild are the hills of Goul, and deserted is the summit of Rijaam.

2. The canabs of Rayann are destroyed; the remains of them are laid bare, and smoothed by the floods, like characters engraved on the solid rocks.

[Page 470] 3. Dear ruins! Many a year has been closed, many a month, holy and unhallowed, has elapsed since I exchanged tender vows wish the fair inhabitants.

4. The rainy constellations of spring have made their hills green and luxuriant: The drops from the thunder-clouds have drenched them with profuse as well as gentle showers:

5. Showers from every nightly cloud, from every cloud veiling the horizon at day-break, and from every evening cloud, responsive with hoarse murmurs.

6. Here the wild eringo-plants raise their heads; here the antelopes bring forth their young by the sides of the valley; and here the ostriches drop their eggs.

7. The large-eyed wild cows lie suckling their young a few days old; their young, who will soon become and herd on the plain.

8. The torrents have cleared the rubbish, and disclosed the traces of habitations, as the reeds of a writer restore effaced letters in a book.

9. Or as the black dust, sprinkled over the varied marks on a fair hand, brings to view, with a brighter tint, the blue stains of wo [...]d.

10. I stood asking news of the ruins concerning their lovely habit­ants; but what avail my questions to dreary rocks, who answer them only by their echo?

11. In the plains, which now are naked, a populous city once stood; but they decamped at early dawn, and nothing of them remains but the canals, which encircled their tents, and the Thuma [...] ­plants, with which they were repaired.

12. How were they tender affections raised, when the damsels of the tribe departed; when they hid themselves in carriages of cotton, like antelopes in their lair; and the tents, as they were struck, gave a piercing sound!

13. They were concealed in vehicles, whose sides were well covered with awnings and carpets, with fine spun curtains, and pictured veils.

14. A company of maidens were seated in them, with black-eyes and graceful motions, like the wild heifers of Tudah, or the roes of Wegera, tenderly gazing on their young.

15. They hastened their camels, till the sultry vapour gradually stole them from they sight; and they seemed to pass through a vale, wild with tamarisks, and rough with large stones, like the valley of Beista."

CHIEF CITIES, CURIOSITIES, AND ARTS.} What is called the Desert of Sinai, is a beautiful plain near nine miles long, and above three in breadth; it lies open to the north-east, but to the southward is closed by some of the lower eminences of Mount Si­nai; and other parts of that mountain make such encroachments upon the plain as to divide it into two, each so capacious as to be sufficient to receive the whole camp of the Israelites.

From Mount Sinai may be seen Mount Horeb, where Moses kept the flocks of Jethro, his father-in-law, when he saw the burning bush. On those mountains, are many chapels and cells, possessed by the Greek and Latin monks, who, like the religious at Jerusalem, pretend to shew the very spot where every miracle or transaction recorded in scripture happened.

[Page 471] The chief cities in Arabic are Mocha, Aden, Muschat, Suez, and Juddah or Jidda. Mocha is well built, the houses very lofty, and are with the walls and forts covered with a chinam or stucco that gives a dazzling whiteness to them. The harbour is semicircular, the circuit of the wall is two miles, and there are several handsome mosques in the city. Suez, the Arsinoe of the ancients, is surrounded by the desert, and but a shabby place. The ships are forced to anchor a league from the town, to which the leading channel has only about nine feet water. Juddah is the place of the greatest trade in the Red Sea, for there the commerce between Arabia and Europe meets and is interchanged, the former sending her gums, drugs, coffee, &c. and from Europe come cloths, iron, furs and other articles by the way Cairo. The port of Juddah, according to Mr. Bruce, is very exten­sive, consisting of numberless shoals, small islands, and sunken rocks, with deep channels between them. The harbour is very secure, but difficult of entrance: The pilots, however, are very skilful, and no incidents ever happen.

We cannot omit here to mention the astonishing manner in which trade is carried on at this place. While Mr. Bruce was there in May, 1769, nine ships arrived from India, some of them worth perhaps £ 200,000. One merchant, a Turk, living at Mecca, thirty hours journey off, where no christian dares go, while the whole continent is open to the Turk for escape, offers to purchase the cargoes of four out of nine of these Ships himself: Another of the same cast, comes and says he will buy none, unless he has them all. The samples are shewn, and the cargoes of the whole nine ships are carried into the wildest part of Arabia, by men with whom one would not wish to trust him­self alone in the field. This is not all; two India Brokers come into the room to settle the price. One on the part of the India Captain, the other on that of the buyer the Turk. They are neither Mahome­ [...]s nor Christians, but have credit with both. They sit down on a carpet, and take an India shawl, which they carry on their shoulder like a napkin, and spread it over their hands. They talk in the mean time, on different subjects; of the arrival of the ships from India, or of the news of the day, as if they were employed in no seri­ous business whatever. There never was one instance of a dispute happening in these sales.

Matters are to be carried still further, and the money is to be paid. A private Moor, who has nothing to support him but his character, becomes responsible for the payment of these cargoes. This man de­livers a number of hempen bags full of what is supposed to be mon­ey. He marks the contents upon the bag, and puts his seal upon the string that ties the mouth of it. This is received for what is marked upon it, without any one ever having opened the bag, and in India, it is current for the value marked upon it, as long as the bag lasts.

Juddah being the most unwholesome part of Arabia, is at the same time, in the most barren and desert situation. This, and many other inconveniences under which it labours, would probably have occa­sioned its being abandoned altogether, were it not for its vicinity to Mecca, and the great and sudden influx of wealth from the India [...], which once a year, arrives in this part, but does not continue, [...] on as through a turnpike to Mecca, whence it is dispersed all [Page 472] over the east. Very little advantage however accrues to Juddah. The customs are all immediately sent to a needy sovereign, and a hun­gry set of relations, dependents and ministers at Mecca. The gold is returned in bags and in boxes, and passes on as rapidly to the ships as the goods do to the market, and leaves as little profit behind. In the mean time provisions rise to a prodigious price, and this falls upon the townsmen, while all the profit of the traffic is in the hands of strangers, most of whom, after the market is over, retire to Yemca, and other neighbouring countries, which abound in every sort of provision. Though Jidda or Juddah is the country of their Prophet, yet no where are there so many unmarried women; and the permission of marry­ing four wives was allowed in this district in the first instance, and af­terwards communicated to all the tribes. But Mahomet, in his per­mission of plurality of wives, seems constantly to have been on his guard against suffering that, which was intended for the welfare of his people, from operating in a different manner. He did not permit a man to marry two, three or four wives, unless he could maintain them: And the man who married them was obliged to shew before the Cadi or some equivalent officer, that it was in his power to sup­port them. From this great scarcity of provisions, which is the re­sult of an extraordinary concourse of people to a place almost desti­tute of the necessaries of life, few inhabitants of Jidda can avail them­selves of the privileges granted by Mahomet, as they cannot maintain more than one wife. From this cause arises the want of people here, and the large number of unmarried women.

Mecca the capital of all Arabia, and Medina, deserve particular no­tice. At Mecca, the birth-place of Mahomet, is a mosque so glorious, that it is generally counted the most magnificent of any temple in the Turkish dominions: Its lofty roof being raised in fashion of a do [...], and covered with gold, with two beautiful towers at the end, of ex­traordinary height and architecture, make a delightful appearance, and are conspicuous at a great distance. The mosque hath a hundred gates, with a window over each; and the whole building within is decorat­ed with the finest gildings and tapestry. The number of pilgrims who yearly visit this place is almost incredible, every Muss [...]lman being obliged by his religion to come hither once in his life time, or send a deputy. At Medina, about fifty miles from the Red Sea, the city to which Mahomet fled when he was drive out of Mecca, and the place where he was buried, is a stately mosque, supported by 400 pillars, and furnished with 300 silver lamps, which are continually burning. It is called the Most Holy by the Turks, because in it is placed the coffin of their prophet Mahomet, covered with cloth of gold, under a canopy of silver tissue, which the bashaw of Egypt, by order of the grand-signior, renews every year. The camel which carries it derives a sort of sanctity from it, and is never to be used in any drudgery after­wards. Over the foot of the coffin is a rich golden crescent, so curi­ously wrought, and adorned with precious stones, that it is esteemed a master-piece of great value. Thither the Pilgrims resort, as to Mecca, but not in such numbers.

GOVERNMENT.] The inland country of Arabia is under the gov­ernment of many petty princes, who are stiled xe [...]ifs and imans both of them including offices of king and priest, in the same manner as the [Page 473] [...] of the Saracens, the successors of Mahomet. These monarchs appear to be absolute, both in spirituals and temporals; the succession is hereditary, and they have no other laws than those found in the Koran, and the comments upon it. The northern Arabs owe subjec­tion to the Turks, and are governed by bashaws residing among them; but it is certain they receive large gratuities from the grand-signior for protecting the pilgrims that pass through their country from the robberies of their countrymen. The Arabians have no standing reg­ular militia, but their kings command both the persons and the purses of their subjects, as the necessity of affairs requires.

HISTORY.] The Arabs are descended from Ishmael, of whose pos­terity it was foretold, that they shall be invincible, "have their hands against every man, and every man's hands against theirs." They are at present, and have remained from the remotest ages, during the va­rious conquests of the Greeks, Romans and Tartars, a convincing proof of the divinity of this prediction. The conquests of the Arabs [...] as wonderful a part of their history, as the independence and freedom which they have ever continued to enjoy. These, as well as their religion, began with one man, whose character forms a very singu­lar phenomenon in the history of mankind. This was the famous Ma­homet a native of Mecca, a city of that division of Arabia, which, for the luxuriancy of its soil, and happy temperature of its climate, has ever been esteemed the loveliest and sweetest region of the world, and is distinguished by the epithet of Happy.

Mahomet was born in the sixth century, anno 569, in the reign of Justinian II. emperor of Constantinople. Though descended of mean parentage, illiterate and poor, Mahomet was endowed with a subtile genius, like those of the same country. and possessed a degree of enter­prise and ambition peculiar to himself, and much beyond his condition. He had been employed, in the early part of his life, by an uncle, Abu­ [...]h, as a factor, and had occasion, in this capacity, to travel into Syria, Palestine, and Egypt. He was afterwards taken into the service of a rich merchant, upon whose death he married his widow, Cadiga, and by her means came to be possessed or great wealth, and of a numer­ous family. During his peregrinations into Egypt and the East, he had observed the vast variety of sects in religion, whose hatred against each other was strong and inveterate, while at the same time there were many particulars in which the greater part of them were agreed. He carefully laid hold of these particulars, by means of which, and by addressing himself to the love of power, riches, and pleasure, passions universal among them, he expected to raise a new system of religion, [...] general than any which hitherto had been established. In this design he was assisted by a Sergian monk, whose libertine disposition had made him forsake his cloister and profession, and engage in the service of Cadiga, with whom he remained as a domestic when Mahomet was taken to her bed. This monk was perfectly qualified by his great learning, for supplying the defects which his master, for [...] of a liberal education, laboured under, and which in all proba­bility, must have obstructed the execution of his design. It was [...], however, that the religion they proposed to establish should [...] a divine sanction; and for this purpose Mahomet turned a cala­ [...], with which he was afflicted, to his advantage. He was often [Page 474] subject to fits of the epilepsy, a disease which those whom it afflicts are desirous to conceal; Mahomet gave out therefore that these fits were trances, into which he was miraculously thrown by God Almighty, during which he was instructed in his well, which he was commanded to publish to the world. By this strange story, and by leading a re­tired, abstemious, and austere life, he easily acquired a character for superior sanctity among his acquaintance and neighbours. When he thought himself sufficiently fortified by the numbers, and the enthusi­asm of his followers, he boldly declared himself a prophet, sent by God into the world, not only to teach his will, but to compel mankind to obey it.

As we have already mentioned, he did not lay the foundation of his system so narrow as only to comprehend the natives of his own coun­try. His mind, though rude and enthusiastic, was enlarged by travel­ling into distant nations, whose manners and religion he had made a peculiar study. He proposed that the system he established should extend over all the neighbouring nations, to whose doctrines and pre­judices he had taken care to adapt it. Many of the inhabitants of the Eastern countries were at this time much addicted to the opinions of Arius, who denied that Jesus Christ was co-equal with God the Father, as is declared in the Athanasian creed. Egypt and Arabia were filled with Jews, who had fled into these corners of the world from the persecution of the emperor Adrian, who threatened the total extinction of that people. The other inhabitants of these countries were pagans. These, however, had little attachment to their decayed and derided idolatry; and, like men whose religious principle is weak, had given themselves over to pleasure and sensuality, or to the acquisi­tion of riches, to be the better able to indulge in the gratifications of sense, which, together with the doctrine of predestination, composed the sole principles of their religion and philosophy. Mahomet's system was exactly suited to these three kinds of men. To gratify the two former, he declared that there was one God, who created the world and governed all things in it; that he had sent various prophets into the world to teach his will to mankind, among whom Moses and Jesus Christ were the most eminent; but the endeavours of these had proved ineffectual, and God had therefore now sent his last and greatest pro­phet, with a commission more ample than that Moses or Christ had been entrusted with. He had commanded him not only to publish his laws, but to subdue those who were unwilling to believe or obey them; and for this end to establish a kingdom upon earth which should propagate the divine law throughout the world; that God had design­ed utter ruin and destruction to those who should refuse to submit to him; but to his faithful followers, he had given the spoils and pos­sessions of all the earth, as a reward in this life, and had provided for them hereafter a paradise of all sensual enjoyments, specially those of love; that the pleasures of such as died in propagating the faith, would be peculiarly intense, and vastly transcend those of the rest. These, together with the prohibition of drinking strong liquors (a restraint not very severe in warm climates), and the doctrine of predestination, were the capital articles of Mahomet's creed. They were no sooner published than a vast many of his countrymen embraced them with implicit faith. They were written by the priest we formerly mention­ed, [Page 475] and compose a book called the Koran, or Alkoran, by way of emi­nence, as we say the Bible, which means the Book. The person of Mahomet, however, was familiar to the inhabitants of Mecca; so that the greater part of them were sufficiently convinced of the deceit. The more enlightened and leading men entered into a design to cut him off; but Mahomet getting notice of their intention, fled from his na­tive city to Medina Tahmachi, or the city of the Prophet. The same of his miracles and doctrine was, according to custom, greatest at a distance, and the inhabitants of Medina received him with open arms. From this flight. which happened in the 622d year of Christ, the fifty-fourth year of Mahomet's age, and the tenth of his ministry, his fol­lowers, the Mahometans, compute their time, and the aera is called in Arabic, Hegira, "the Flight."

Mahomet, by the assistance of the inhabitants of Medina, and of others whom his insinuation and address daily attached to him, brought over all his countrymen to a belief, or at least to an acquiescence in his doctrines. The speedy propagation of his system among the Ara­bians, was a new argument in its behalf among the inhabitants of Egypt, and the East, who were previously disposed to it. Arians, Jews, and Gentiles, all forsook their ancient faith, and became Maho­metans. In a word, the contagion spread over Arabia, Syria, Egypt, and Persia; and Mahomet, from a deceitful hypocrite, became the most powerful monarch in his time. He was proclaimed king at Me­dina in the year 627, and after subduing part of Arabia and Syria, he died in 632, leaving two branches of his race, both esteemed divine among their subjects. These were the caliphs of Persia and of Egypt, under the last of which Arabia was included. The former of these turned their arms to the East, and made conquests of many countries.

The caliphs of Egypt and Arabia directed their ravages towards Eu­rope, and under the name of Saracens or Moors (which they obtained because they entered Europe from Mauritania in Africa, the country of the Moors) reduced most of Spain, France, Italy, and the islands in the Mediterranean.

In this manner did the successors of that impostor spread their re­ligion and conquests over the greatest part of Asia, Africa, and Europe; and they still give law to a very considerable part of mankind.

See "The History of the Turkish or Ottoman Empire, from its foun­dation in 1300, to the peace of Belgrade in 1740; to which is prefixed as Historical Discourse on Mahomet and his successors;" translated from the French of Mignot, by A. Hawkins, Esq. published 1787.

THE INDIAN AND ORIENTAL ISLANDS.

THE JAPAN ISLANDS, Japan or Nipham, Bongo, Tonsa, and Dezima, form together what has been called the empire of JA­PAN, and are governed by a most despotic prince, who is sometimes called emperor and sometimes king. They are situated about 150 miles east of China, and extend from the 30th to the 41st degree of north latitude, and from the 130th to the 147th of east longitude. The chief town is Jeddo, in the 141st degree of east longitude, and the 30th of north latitude.

[Page 476] The soil and productions of the country are pretty much the same with those of China; and the inhabitants are famous for their lacker ware, known by the name of Japan. The islands themselves are very inaccessible, through their high rocks and tempestuous seas; they are subject to earthquakes, and have some volcanos. The Dutch expelled the Portuguese from this gainful trade. The Japanese are idolaters, and so irreconcilable to Christianity, that it is commonly said the Dutch, who are the only European people with whom they now trade, pretend themselves to be no Christians, and humour the Japanese in the most absurd superstitions. Notwithstanding all this compliance, the natives are very shy and rigorous in all their dealings with the Dutch; and Nagasacci, in the Island of Dezima, is the only place where they are suffered to trade. The complexions of the Japanese are in general yellowish, although some few, chiefly women, are almost white. Their narrow eyes, and high eye-brows, are like those of the Chinese and Tartars; and their noses are short and thick. Their hair is universally black; and such a sameness of fashion reigns throughout this whole empire, that the head-dress is the same from the emperor to the peasant. The fashion of their clothes has also remained the same from very high antiquity. They consist of one or more loose gowns, tied about the middle with a sash. People of rank have them made of silk, but the lower class of cotton stuffs. Women generally wear a greater number of them than men, and much longer, and have them more ornamented, often with gold or silver flowers woven into the stuff.

Their houses are built with upright posts, crossed and wattled with bamboo, plaistered both without and within, and white-washed. They generally have two stories; but the uppermost is low, and seldom in­habited. The roofs are covered with pantiles, large and heavy, but neatly made. The floors are elevated two feet from the ground, and covered with planks, on which mats are laid. They have no furni­ture in their rooms; neither tables, chairs, stools, benches, cupboards, or even beds. Their custom is to sit down on their heels upon the mats, which are always soft and clean. Their food is served up to them on a low board, raised but a few inches from the sloor, and one dish only at a time. They have mirrors, but never fix them up in their houses as ornamental furniture; they are made of a compound metal, and used only at their toilets. Notwithstanding the severity of their winters, which obliges them to warm their houses from Novem­ber to March, they have neither fire-places nor stoves: instead of these they use large copper pots standing upon legs. These are lined on the inside with loam, on which ashes are laid to some depth, and charcoal lighted upon them, which seems to be prepared in some manner which renders the fumes of it not at all dangerous. The first compliment offered to a stranger in their houses, is a dish of tea, and a pipe of to­bacco. Fans are used by both sexes equally; and are, within or with­out doors, their inseparable companions. The whole nation are na­turally cleanly: every house, whether public or private, has a bath, of which constant and daily use is made by the whole family. Obedience to parents, and respect to superiors, are the characteristics of this nation. Their salutations and conversations, between equals, abound also with civility and politeness: to this children are early accustomed by the [Page 477] example of their parents. Their penal laws are very severe; but punishments are seldom inflicted. Perhaps there is no country where fewer crimes against society are committed. Commerce and manufac­tures flourish here, though, as these people have few wants, they are not carried to the extent which they are in Europe. Agriculture is so well understood, that the whole country, even to the tops of the hills is cultivated. They trade with no foreigners but the Dutch and Chi­nese, and in both cases with companies of privileged merchants. Be­sides the sugars, spices, and manufactured goods which the Dutch send to Japan, they carry thither annually upwards of 200,000 deer skins, and more than 100,000 hides, the greatest part of which they get from Siam, where they pay for them in money. The merchandise they ex­port from these islands, both for Bengal and Europe, consist in 9000 chests of copper, each weighing 120 pounds, and from 25 to 30,000 weight of camphor. Their profits on imports and exports are valued at 40 or 45 per cent. As the Dutch company do not pay duty in Japan, either on their exports or imports, they send an annual present to the emperor, consisting of cloth, chintz, succotas, cottons, stuffs and trinkets.

The L [...]DRONE ISLANDS, of which the chief town is said to be Guam, [...] longitude 140, north latitude 14: they are about twelve in num­ber. The people took their name from their pilfering qualities. We know nothing of them worth a particular mention, except that lord Anson landed upon one of them (Tinian), where the found great refresh­ment for himself and his crew.

FORMOSA is likewise an Oriental Island. It is situated to the east of China, near the province of Fo-kien, and is divided into two parts by a chain of mountains, which runs through the middle, beginning at the south coast, and ending at the north. This, is a very fine island, and abounds with all the necessaries of life. That part of the island which lies to the west of the mountains, belongs to the Chinese, who consider the inhabitants of the eastern parts as savages, though they are said to be a very inoffensive people. The inhabitants of the cultivat­ed parts are the same with the Chinese, already described. The Chi­nese, have likewise made themselves masters of several other islands in these seas, of which we scarcely know the names; that of Ainan is between sixty and seventy leagues long, and between fifty and sixty in breadth, and but twelve miles from the province of Canton. The original inhabitants are a shy, cowardly people, and live in the most unwholesome part of the island, the coast and cultivated parts, which are very valuable, being possessed by the Chinese.

The PHILIPPINES, are said to be 1100 in number, lying in the Chi­nese sea (part of the Pacific Ocean), 300 miles south-east of China, of which Manilla, the chief, is 400 miles long and 200 broad. The in­habitants consist of Chinese, Ethiopians, Malays, Spaniards, Portu­guese, Pintudos, or painted people, and Mestes, a mixture of all these. The property of the islands belongs to the king of Spain, they having been discovered by Magellan, and afterwards conquered by the Span­iards in the reign of Philip II. from whom they take their name. Their situation is such, between the eastern and western continents, that the inhabitants trade with Mexico and Peru as well as with all the islands and places of the East Indies. Two ships from Acapulco, in Mexico, carry on this commerce for the Spaniards, who make 400 [Page 478] per cent. profit. The country is fruitful in all the necessaries of life, and beautiful to the eye. Venison of all kinds, buffaloes, hogs, sheep, goats, and a particular large species of monkeys, are found here in great plenty. The nest of the bird saligan affords that dissolving jelly, which is so voluptuous a rarity at European tables. Many European fruits and flowers thrive surprisingly in those islands. If a sprig of an orange or lemon tree is planted there, it becomes within the year a fruit-bear­ing tree; so that the verdure and luxuriancy of the soil are almost in­credible. The tree amet supplies the natives with water; and there is also a kind of cane, which if cut, yields fair water enough for a draught, of which there is plenty in the mountains, where water is most wanted.

The city of Manilla contains about 3000 inhabitants; its port is Ca­vite, lying at the distance of three leagues, and defended by the castle of St. Philip. In the year 1762, Manilla was reduced by the English under general Draper and admiral Cornish, who took it by storm, and humanely suffered the archbishop, who was the Spanish viceroy at the same time, to ransom the place for about a million sterling. The bar­gain, however, was ungenerously disowned by him and the court of Spain, so that great part of the ransom is still unpaid. The Spanish government is settled there, but the Indian inhabitants pay a capitation tax. The other islands, particularly Mindanao, the largest next to Ma­nilla, are governed by petty princes of their own, whom they call sul­tans. The sultan of Mindanao is a Mahometan.

Upon the whole, though these islands are enriched with all the pro­fusion of nature, yet they are subject to most dreadful earthquakes, thunder, rains, and lightning; and the soil is pestered with many nox­ious and venomous creatures, and even herbs and flowers, whose poi­sons kill almost instantaneously. Some of their mountains are volcanos.

The MOLUCCAS, commonly called the SPICE or CLOVE ISLANDS. These are not out of sight of each other, and lie all within the compass of twenty five leagues to the south of the Philippines, in 125 degrees of east longitude, and between one degree south, and two north lati­tude. They are in number five, viz. Bachian, Machian, Motyr, Ter­nate, and Tydore. These islands produce neither corn norrice, so that the inhabitants live upon a bread made of sagoe. Their chief produce consists of cloves, mace, and nutmegs▪ in vast quantities; which are monopolized by the Dutch with so much jealousy, that they destroy the plants lest they natives should sell the supernumerary spices to other nations. These islands, after being subject to various powers, are now governed by three kings, subordinate to the Dutch. Ternate is the largest of these islands, though no more than thirty miles in circum­ference. The Dutch have here a fort called Victoria, and another called Fort Orange in Machian.

AMBOYNA. This island, taken in a large sense, is one, and the most considerable, of the Moluccas, which, in fact, it commands. It is sit­uated in the Archipelago of St. Lazarus, between the third and fourth degree of south latitude, and 120 leagues to the eastward of Batavia, Amboyna is about seventy miles in circumference, and defended by a Dutch garrison of 7 or 800 men, besides small forts, which protest their clove plantations. It is well known that when the Portuguese were driven off this island, the trade of it was carried on by the Eng­lish [Page 479] and Dutch, and the barbarities of the latter in first torturing and then murdering the English, and thereby engrossing the whole trade, and that of Banda, can never be forgotten; but must be transmitted as a memorial of Dutch infamy at that period, to all posterity. This tra­gi [...]l event happened in 1622.

The BANDA, or NUTMEG ISLANDS, are situated between 127 and 128 degrees east longitude, and between four and five south latitude, com­prehending the islands of Lantor, (the chief town of which is Lantor, [...]leron) Rosinging, Pooloway, and Gonapi. The chief forts belong­ing to the Dutch on these islands, are those of Revenge and Nassau. The nutmeg, covered with mace, grows on these islands only, and they are entirely subject to the Dutch. In several islands that lie near Ban­da, and Amboyna, the nutmeg and clove would grow, because, as nat­uralists tell us, birds, especially doves and pigeons, swallow the nut­meg and clove whole, and void them in the same state; which is one of the reasons why the Dutch declare war against both those birds in their wild plantations. The great nutmeg harvest is in June and Au­gust.

The island of CELEBES, or MACASSAR, is situated under the equator, between the island of Borneo and the Spice islands, at the distance of [...]60 leagues from Batavia, and is 500 miles long, and 200 broad. This island, notwithstanding its heat, is rendered habitable by breezes from the north, and periodical rains. Its chief product is pepper and opi­ [...]; and the natives are expert in the study of poisons, with a variety of which nature has furnished them. The Dutch have a fortification on this island; but the internal part of it is governed by three kings, the chief of whom resides in the town of Macassar. In this, and in­deed in almost all the Oriental islands, the inhabitants live in houses built on large posts, which are accessible only by ladders, which they pull up in the night time, for their security against venomous animals. They are said to be hospitable and faithful, if not provoked. They carry on a large trade with the Chinese; and if their chiefs were not perpetually at war with each other, they might easily drive the Dutch from their island. Their port of Jampoden is the most capacious of any in that part of the world.

The Dutch have likewise fortified GILOLO and CERAM, two other spice islands lying under the equator, and will sink any ships that at­tempt to traffic in those seas.

The SUNDA ISLANDS. These are situated in the Indian Ocean, be­tween 93 and 120 degrees of east longitude, and between eight degrees north and eight degrees south latitude, comprehending the islands of Borneo, Sumatra, Java Bally, Lamboe, Banca; &c. The three first, from their great extent and importance, require to be separately de­scribed.

BORNEO is said to be 800 miles long, and 700 broad, and has there­fore been thought to be the largest island in the world. The inland part of the country is marshy and unhealthy; and the inhabitants live in towns built upon floats in the middle of the rivers. The soil pro­duces rice, cotton, canes, pepper, camphor, the tropical fruits, gold, and excellent diamonds. The famous ouran-outang, one of which [...] dissected by Dr. Tyson at Oxford, is a native of this country, and [...] thought, of all irrational beings, to resemble a man the most. The [Page 480] original inhabitants are said to live in the mountains, and make use of poisoned darts; but the sea-coast is governed by Mahometan princes; the chief port of this island is Benjar-Masseen, and carries on a com­merce with all trading nations.

SUMAIRA has Malacca on the north, Borneo on the east, and Java on the south-east, from which it is divided by the straits of Sunda; it is divided into two equal parts by the equator, extending five degrees, and upwards, north-west of it, and five on the south-east; and is 1000 miles long, and 100 broad. This island produces so much gold, that it is thought by some to be the Ophir mentioned in the scriptures; but Mr. Marsden in his late history of the island, thinks it was unknown to the ancients. The highest mountain in Sumatra, is called Ophir by the Europeans, whose summit above the level of the sea is 13,842 feet, exceeding in height the Peak of Teneriffe by 577 feet. The Portuguese were the first discoverers and settlers, but met with disgrace in their at­tempts against Acheen. The first English fleet that made its appear­ance in this part of the world, and laid the foundation of a commerce that was to eclipse that of every other European state, visited Acheen in the year 1602, under captain Lancaster, who carried a letter from queen Elizabeth to the king of that place. The English East-India company have two settlements here, Bencoolen, and Fort-Marlbo­rough; from whence they bring their chief cargoes of pepper. The king of Acheen is the chief of the Mahometan princes who possess the sea-coasts. The interior parts are governed by Pagan princes, whose governments are all independent, and their language and manners are very different. The natural products of Sumatra are pretty much the same with those of the adjacent islands, but this island is surpassed by few in rice, pepper, and camphor, and in the bountiful indulgence of nature. It is from this country that most of the cassia sent to Europe is produced. The cassia tree grows to fifty or sixty feet, with a stem of about two feet diameter, and a beautiful and regular spreading head. The quantity of pepper produced in the East-India company's districts on Sumatra, is annually 1200 tons; of which the greater part comes to Europe, and the rest is sent to China.

Rain is very frequent here; sometimes very heavy, and almost al­ways attended with thunder and lightning. Earthquakes are not un­common, and there are several volcanos on the island. The people who inhabit the coast are Malays, who came hither from the peninsula of Malacca; but the interior parts are inhabited by a very different people, and who have hitherto had no connexion with the Europeans. Their language and character differ much from those of the Malays; the latter using the Arabic character, as do the Acheenese. The prin­cipal internal languages of the island are the Rejang and Batha, each containing characters essentially different from each other. The peo­ple between the districts of the English company, and those of the Dutch at Palembang, on the other side the island, write on long narrow slips of the bark of a tree, with a piece of bamboo. They begin at the bottom, and write from the left hand to the right, contrary to the cus­tom of other eastern nations. These inhabitants of the interior parts of Sumatra are a free people, and live in small villages, called Dooso [...], independent of each other, and governed each by its own chief. All of them have laws, some written ones, by which they punish offenders, [Page 481] and terminate disputes. They have almost all of them, particularly the women, large swellings in their throat, some nearly as big as a man's head, but in general as big as an ostrich's egg, like the goi­tres of the Alps. That part of this island which is called the Cassia country, is well inhabited by a people called Battas, who differ from all the other inhabitants of Sumatra in language, manners and customs. They have no king, but live in villages, independently of each other, and generally at variance with one another. They fortify their vil­lages very strongly with double fences of camphor plank pointed, and placed with their points projecting outwards; and between these fences they place pieces of bamboo, hardened by fire, and likewise point­ed, which are concealed by the grass, but which will run quite through a man's foot. Such of their enemies whom they take prisoners, they put to death and eat, and their skulls they hang up as trophies, in the houses where the unmarried men and boys eat and sleep. They allow of polygamy: a man may purchase as many wives as he pleases; but Mr. Marsden observes, it is extremely rare, that an instance occurs of their having more than one, and that only among a few of their chiefs; but this continence is attributed to their poverty. The original cloth­ing of the Sumatrans is the same with that of the inhabitants of the South-Sea islands, generally styled Otheitean cloth. The Buffalo ( carbow) constitutes a principal part of their food, and is the only ani­mal employed in their domestic labours. The Sumatran pheasant is a bird of uncommon beauty.

Within about ninety miles of Sumatra is the island of ENGANHO, which is very little known, on account of the terrible rocks and break­ers that entirely surround it. It is inhabited by naked savages, who are tall and well made, and who generally appear armed with lances and clubs, and speak a different language from the inhabitants of any of the neighbouring islands.

The greatest part of JAVA belongs to the Dutch, who have here erected a kind of commercial monarchy, the capital of which is Batavia, a noble and populous city, lying in the latitude of six degrees south, at the mouth of the river Jucata, and furnished with one of the finest har­bours in the world. The town itself is built in the manner of those in Holland, and is about a league and a half in circumference, with five gates, and surrounded by regular fortifications; but its suburbs are said to be ten times more populous than itself. The government here is a mixture of Eastern magnificence and European police, and held by the Dutch governor-general of the Indies. When he appears abroad, he is attended by his guards and officers, and with a splendor superior to that of any European potentate, except on some solemn oc­casions. The city is as beautiful as it is strong, and its fine canals, bridges, and avenues, render it a most agreeable residence. The de­scription of it, its government, and public edifices, have employed whole volumes. The citadel, where the governor had his palace, com­mands the town and the suburbs, which are inhabited by natives of almost every nation in the world; the Chinese residing in this island are computed at 100,000; but about 30,000 of that nation were bar­ [...]sly massacred, without the smallest offence ever proved upon [...], in 1740. This massacre was too unprovoked and detestable to [...] defended even by the Dutch, who, when the governor arrived in [Page 482] Europe, sent him back to be tried at Batavia; but he never has been heard of since. A Dutch garrison of 3000 men constantly resides at Batavia; and about 15,000 troops are quartered in the island and the neighbourhood of the city. Their government is admirably well cal­culated to prevent the independency either of the civil or military power.

THE ANDAMAN and NICOBAR islands.] These islands lie at the en­trance of the bay of Bengal, and furnish provisions, consisting of tropi­cal fruits and other necessaries, for the ships that touch there. They are otherwise too inconsiderable to be mentioned. They are inhabited by a harmless, inoffensive, but idolatrous people.

CEYLON, OR SEIEN-DIVE.] This island, though not the largest, i [...] thought to be by nature the richest, and finest island in the world; and is celebrated for being the only place which produces the true Cinna­mon. It is separated by the Gulf of Manora, from the continent of Indostan, to which it is supposed to have been joined, till torn from it by the force of the waves, or earthquakes; and the shallowness of the intervening channel seems to favour this opinion, for a land-bank, called Adam's bridge, (on which only a few feet water runs,) inter­rupts all navigation except by boats. On this bank, and the neigh­bouring coast, is a pearl fishery formerly considerable, but now much declined.

This island, which is happily situated for commerce, is inhabited by two distinct nations, the Bedas to the north, and the Cinglasses to the south; it is about 250 miles long, and 200 broad; the natives call it, with some shew of reason, the terrestrial paradise; and it produces, besides excellent fruits of all kinds, long pepper, fine cotton, ivory, silk, tobacco, ebony, musk, crystal, salt-petre, sulphur, lead, iron, steel, copper; besides cinnamon, gold, and silver, and all kinds of precious stones, except diamonds. All kinds of fowls and fish abound here. Every part of the island is well wooded and watered; and besides some curious animals peculiar to itself, it has plenty of cows, buffa­loes, goats, hogs, deer, hares, dogs, and other quadrupeds. The Cey­lon elephant is preferred to all others, especially if spotted; but several noxious animals, such as serpents and ants, are likewise found here. The chief commodity of the island is its cinnamon, which is by far the best in all Asia. Though its trees grow in great profusion, yet the best is found in the neighbourhood of Columbo, and Negambo.

Mountains, covered with impossible forests, intersect it in all direc­tions, amongst which Adam's pic rises like a lofty cone, far superior to the rest in elevation, and visible, (it is said) at the distance of more then 100 miles. From this mountain issues the Mowil-ganga, the largest river in the island, which visiting Candy the ancient capital, falls after a course of several miles into the bay of Trinconom [...]le, the finest not only in Ceylon, but in all Indostan; it is capable of re­ceiving, 1000 sail of the largest ships in perfect security. Ceylon, though formerly divided into several petty kingdoms, has now but one prince, who possesses only the internal parts of the island, and resides at D [...]g­lige, but is called the king of Candy, from the ancient capital, which having suffered much in the wars, between the Portuguese, and natives, has ceased to be the royal residence.

The Dutch, who expelled the Portuguese, have possessed themselves of the entire coast, in order to exclude all other nations from the cin­namon [Page 483] trade: this valuable spice, however, is cultivated only in the south-west coast, in a tract called the Cinnamon coast, in which the principal places are, COLUMBO, the capital of the Dutch settlements, in the island, regularly fortified, on a tolerable harbour formerly very considerable, but much declined. Columbo root, an article lately in­troduced into the materia mediea, originally grew in America, and was thence transplanted to this town, which gives name to it, and supplies all India, and Europe with it. It is a bitter, rather ungrateful [...]o the taste, but when received into the stomach, it appears to be corroberant, antiseptic, sedative and powerfully antieme [...]ic. It has been used with great success in the cholera morbus and other bilious complaints. POINT DE GALLE, on a small indifferent harbour, is fortified, and be­come the centre of the Dutch trade in the island.

It may be here proper to observe, that the cinnamon-tree, which is a native of the island, has two, if not three barks, which form the true cinnamon; [...] trees of a middling growth and age afford the best; and the body of the tree, which when stripped is white, serves for building and other uses. In 1656, the Dutch were invited by the na­tives of this delicious island, to defend them against the Portuguese, whom they expelled, and have monopolized it ever since to themselves. Indeed, in January 1782, Trinconomale, the chief sea-port of the island was taken by the English, but soon afterwards retaken by the French, and restored to the Dutch by the last treaty of peace.

The MALDIVES. These are a vast cluster of small islands or little rocks just above the water, lying between the equator and eight de­grees north latitude, near Cape Comorin. They are chiefly resorted to by the Dutch, who drive on a profitable trade with the natives for couries, a kind of small shells, which go, or rather formerly went for money upon the coasts of Guinea and other parts of Africa. The cocoa of the Maldives is an excellent commodity in a medicinal ca­pacity: "Of this tree (says a well-informed author) they build vessels of twenty or thirty tons; their hulls, masts, sails, rigging, anchors, cables, provisions, and firing, are all from this useful tree.

We have already mentioned BOMBAY on the Malabar coast, in speak­ing of India. With regard to the language of all the Oriental islands, nothing certain can be said. Each island has a particular tongue; but the Malayan, Chinese, Portuguese, Dutch, and Indian words, are so frequent among them, that it is difficult for an European, who is not very expert in those matters, to know the radical language. The same may be almost said of their religion; for though its original is certain­ly Pagan, yet it is intermixed with many Mahometan, Jewish, Christian religions, and with many foreign superstitions.

The sea which [...] the southern point of the peninsula of Kam [...]a from Japan, contains a number of islands in a position from north-north-east to south-south-east, which are called the KURILE ISLANDS. They are upwards of twenty in number, are all mountain­ous, and in several of them are volcanoes and hot springs. The prin­cipal of these islands are inhabited; but some of the little ones are en­tirely desert and unpeopled. They differ much from each other in respect both to their situation and national constitution. The forests in the more northern ones are composed of laryx and pines; those to the southward produce canes, bamboos, vines, &c. In some of them are [...] and [...]

[Page 484] The sea-otter appears on the coasts of all these islands, as well as whales, sea-horses, seals, and other amphibious animals. Some of the inhabi­tants of these islands have a great likeness to the Japanese in their manners, language, and personal appearance; others very much re­semble the Kamtschadales. The northern islands acknowledge the sovereignty of the empire of Russia; but those to the south pay hom­age to Japan. The Kurilians discover much humanity and probity in their conduct, and are courteous and hospitable; but adversity renders them timid, and prompts them to suicide. They have a particular vene­ration for old age. They reverence an old man whoever he be, but have an especial affection for those of their respective families. Their language is agreeable to the ear, and they speak and pronounce it slow­ly. The men are employed in hunting, fishing for sea animals and whales, and catching fowl. Their canoes are made of wood that their forests produce, or that the sea casts upon their shores. The women have charge of the kitchen, and make clothes. In the northern islands they sew, and make different cloths of the thread of nettles. The southern islanders are more refined and polished than the northern, and carry on a sort of commerce with Japan, whither they export whale­oil, furs, and, eagles feathers to fledge arrows with. In return, they bring Japanese utensils of metal and varnished wood, skillets, sabres, different stuffs, ornaments of luxury and parade, tobacco, all sorts of trinkets, and small wares.

[Page]

AFRICA
[Page]

AFRICA.

AFRICA, the third grand division of the globe, is generally rep­resented as bearing some resemblance to the form of a pyramid, the base being the northern part of it, which runs along the shores of the Mediterranean, and the point or top of the pyramid, the Cape of Good Hope. Africa is a peninsula of a prodigious extent, joined to Asia only by a neck of land, about sixty miles over, between the Red Sea and the Mediterranean, usually called the Isthmus of Suez, and its utmost length from north to south, from Cape Bona in the Mediterra­nean, in 37 degrees north, to the Cape of Good Hope in 3 [...]7 south latitude, is 4300 miles; and the broadest part from Cape Verd, in 17-20 degrees, to Cape Gurdafui, near the straits of Babel-Mandeb, in 51-20 east longitude, is 3500 miles from east to west. It is bounded on the north by the Mediterranean sea, which separates it from Europe; on the east by the Isthmus of Suez, the Red Sea, and the Indian ocean, which divides it from Asia; on the south by the southern ocean: and on the west by the great Atlantic ocean, which separates it from Ame­rica. As the equator divides this extensive country almost in the middle, and the far greater part of it is within the tropics, the heat is in many places almost insupportable to an European▪ it being there increased by the rays of the sun from vast deserts of burning sands. The coasts, however, and banks of rivers, such as the Nile, are gene­rally fertile; and most parts of this region are inhabited, though it is far from being so populous as Europe or Asia. From what has been said, the reader cannot expect to find here a variety of climates. In many parts of Africa, snow seldom falls in the plains: and it is gene­rally never found but on the tops of the highest mountains. The na­tives, in these scorching regions, would as soon expect that marble should melt, and slow in liquid streams, as that water by freezing should lose its slu [...]dity, be arrested by the cold, and ceasing to slow, be­come like the solid rock.

The most considerable rivers in Africa. are the Niger, which falls into the Atlantic or western ocean at Senegal, after a course of 2800 miles. It increases and decreases as the Nile, fertilizes the country, and has grams of gold in many parts of it. The Gambia and Senegal are only branches of this river. The Nile which dividing Egypt into two parts, discharges itself into the Mediterranean, after a prodigious course from its source in Abyssinia. The most considerable mountains in Africa are the Atlas, a ridge exten [...]ing from the western ocean, to which it gives the name of Atlantic Ocean, as far as Egypt, and had its name from a king of Mauritania, a great lover of astronomy, who used to observe the stars from its summit; on which account the poets represent him as bearing the heavens on his shoulders. The mountains of the moon, extending themselves between Abyssinia and Monomo­pata, and are still higher than those of Atlas. Those of Sie [...]a Leona, or the mountains of the Lions, which divide Nigritia from Guinea, [Page 486] and extend as far as Ethiopia. These were styled by the ancients the Mountains of God, on account of their being subject to thunder and lightning. The Peak of Teneriffe, which the Dutch make their first meridian, is about two miles high, in the form of a sugar-loaf, and is situated on an island of the same name near the coast. The most noted capes, or promontories, in this country, are Cape Verd, so called, be­cause the land is always covered with green trees and mossy grounds. It is the most westerly point of the continent of Africa. The Cape of Good Hope, so denominated by the Portuguese, when they first went round it in 1498, and discovered the passage to Asia. It is the south extremity of Africa, in the country of the Hottentots; at present in the possession of the Dutch; and the general rendezvous of ships of ev­ery nation who trade to India, being about half way from Europe. There is but one strait in Africa, which is called Babel-Mandeb, and is the communication between the Red Sea and the Indian ocean.

The situation of Africa for commerce is extremely favourable, stand­ing as it were in the centre of the globe, and having thereby a much nearer communication with Europe, Asia, and America, than any of the other quarters has with the rest. That it abounds with gold, we have not only the testimony of the Portuguese, the Dutch, the English and the French, who have settlements on the coast of Africa, but that of the most authentic historians. It is however the misfortune of Af­rica, that, though it has 10,000 miles of sea-coast, with noble, large, deep rivers, penetrating into the very centre of the country, it should have no navigation, nor receive any benefit from them; that it should be inhabited by an innumerable people, ignorant of commerce, and of each other. At the mouths of these rivers are the most excellent har­bours, deep, safe, calm, and sheltered from the wind, and capable of being made perfectly secure by fortifications; but quite destitute of shipping, trade, and merchants, even where there is plenty of mer­chandize. In short, Africa, though a full quarter of the globe, stored with an inexhaustible treasure, and capable, under proper improve­ments, of producing so many things delightful, as well as convenient, within itself, seems to be almost entirely neglected, not only by the na­tives, who are quite unsolicitous of reaping the benefits which Nature has provided for them, but also by the more civilized Europeans who are settled in it, particularly the Portuguese.

Africa once contained several kingdoms and states, eminent for the liberal arts, for wealth and power, and the most extensive commerce. The kingdoms of Egypt and Ethiopia, in particular, were much cele­brated; and the rich and powerful state of Carthage, that once formi­dable rival to Rome itself, extended her commerce to every part of the then known world; even the British shores were visited by her fleets, till Juba, who was king of Mauritania, but tributary to the republic of Carthage, unhappily called in the Romans, who, with the assistance of the Mauritanians, subdued Carthage, and by degrees all the neigh­bouring kingdoms and states. After this, the natives, constantly plundered, and consequently impoverished, by the governors sent from Rome, neglected their trade, and cultivated no more of their lands than might serve for their subsistence. Upon the decline of the Ro­man empire, in the fifth century, the north of Africa was over-run by the Vandals, who contributed still more to the destruction of arts and [Page 487] sciences; and, to add to this country's calamity, the Saracens made a sudden conquest of all the coasts of Egypt and Barbary, in the seventh century. These were succeeded by the Turks; and both being of the Mahometan religion, whose professors carried desolation with them wherever they came, the ruin of that once flourishing part of the world was thereby completed.

The inhabitants of this continent, with respect to religion, may be divided into three sorts: namely, Pagans, Mahometans, and Christians. The first are the most numerous, possessing the greatest part of the country, from the tropic of Cancer to the Cape of Good Hope, and they are generally black. The Mahometans, who are of a tawny com­plexion, possess Egypt, and almost all the northern shores of Africa, or what is called the Barbary coast. The people of Abyssinia, or the Upper Ethiopia, are denominated Christians, but retain many Pagan and Jewish rites. There are also some Jews, on the north of Africa, who manage all the little trade that part of the country is possessed of.

There are scarcely any two nations, or indeed any two of the learn­ed, that agree in the modern divisions of Africa: and for this very rea­son, that scarcely any traveller has penetrated into the heart of the country; and consequently we must acknowledge our ignorance of the bounds, and even the names of several of the inland nations, which may be still reckoned among the unknown and undiscovered parts of the world; but according to the best accounts and conjectures, Africa may be divided according to the following Table.

[Page 488]

  Nations. leng. [...]rea. Chief cities. Dist. and bear. from London. Religions.
  Morocco, 500 480 Fez 1080 S. Mahom.
Barbary. Tafilet, &c.
Algiers 480 100 Algiers 920 S. Mahom.
Tunis 220 170 Tunis 990 S. E. Mahom.
Tripoli 700 240 Tripoli 1260 S. E. Mahom.
  Barca 400 300 Tolemeta 1440 S. E. Mahom.
  Egypt 600 250 Grand Cairo 1920 S. E. Mahom.
  Biledulgerid 2500 350 Dara 1565 S. Pagans
  Zaara 3400 660 Tegessa 1800 S. Pagans
  Negroland 2200 840 Madinga 2500 S. Pagans
  Guinea 1800 360 Benin 2700 S. Pagans
Up. Ethiop. Nubia [...]40 600 Nubia 2418 S. Ma. & Pa.
Abyssinia 900 800 Gondar 2880 S. E. Christian.
Abex 540 130 Doncal [...] 3580 S. E. Ch. & Pa.
The middle parts, called the Lower Ethiopia, are very little known to the Europeans, but are computed at 1,200,000 square miles.
  Loango 410 300 Loango 3300 S. Ch. & Pa.
Low Guinea. Congo 540 420 St. Salva [...]or 3480 S. Ch. & Pa.
Angola 3 [...]0 250 Loando 3750 S. Ch. & Pa.
Beng [...]ela 1 [...]0 180 Benguela 3900 S. Pagans.
  Matemen 150 240 No Towns *** Pagans.
  Ajz [...] [...]00 [...]00 Brava 370 S. E. Pagans.
  Zanguebar 1400 350 Melinda or Mo z [...]moique 4440 S. E. Pagans.
  Monomot [...]pa 900 660 Monomot [...]pa 4500 S. Pagans.
  Monemugi 90 [...] [...]00 [...]nco [...]a 4260 S. Pagans.
  So [...]ala 480 300 So [...]ala 4600 S. E. Pagans.
  Terra de Nat. 600 3 [...]0 No Towns *** Pagans.
  Caffraria or Hotten [...]or 708 660 Cape of Good Hope 5200 S. Pagans.

The [...] islands [...] At [...]icaly in the [...] [...] and Atlantic Ocean; of w [...]n the [...] belong, to, or trade with, the European, [...] serve to refresh their shipping to and from [...].

Island. Sq. Mi. [...] Trad. with or belon.
Babel Mande [...], at the entrance of the Red Sea.   Babel [...]and [...] All Nations
Soco [...], in the Indian Ocean 3,600 [...]usia Ditto
The C [...]mera Is [...]es, ditto 1,000 Jo [...]nna Ditto
Mada [...]asear, ditto 168,000 St. Austin Ditto
Mau [...]us, ditto 1,840 M [...]ritius French
Bou [...]an, ditto 2,100 [...] Ditto
St. Helena, in the Atlantic Ocean   St. Helena English
Ascension, ditto     Uninhabited
St. Ma [...]w, do     Ditto
St. [...], Anab [...]a, Princes island, Fe [...]dinan [...] [...] ditto   St. [...] [...] Portuguese
Cape Verd Islands, ditto 2,000 St. D [...]go, Ditto
[...] ditto   Fort St. [...] French
Can [...]ies, ditto   [...] Spanish
[...], ditto 1,500 [...] Portuguese
The [...] Amer. ditto. 2, [...]00 Angra. St. Michael [...]

[Page 489] Having given the reader some idea of Africa, in general, with the principal kingdoms, and their supposed dimensions, we shall now con­sider it under three grand divisions: First, Egypt; secondly, the states, of Barbary, stretching along the coast of the Mediterranean, from Egypt on the east, to the Atlantic Ocean, west; and, lastly, that part of Africa, between the tropic of Cancer and the Cape of Good Hope; the last of these divisions, indeed, is vastly greater than the other two; but the nations, which it contains, are so little known, and so barba­rous, and, like all barbarous nations, so similar in most respects to one another, that they may, without impropriety, be thrown under one general head.

EGYPT.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 600 Miles. between Degrees. 20 and 32 North latitude.
Breadth 250 Miles. Degrees. 28 and 36 east longitude. 140,700.

BOUNDARIES.] IT is bounded by the Mediterranean Sea, North; by the Red Sea, East; by Abyssinia, or the Upper Ethi­opia, on the South; and by the Desert of Barca, and the unknown parts of Africa, West.

Divisions. Subdivisions. Chief towns.
Northern division contains Lower Egypt GRAND CA [...]RO, E. lon. 32 N. Lat. 30.
Bulac
Alexandria
Rosetto
Damietta
Southern division contains Upper Egypt Saved or Thebes
Cossiar

[...]. It is observed by M. Volney, that during eight months of the ye [...] (from March to November) the heat is almost insupportable by an European. "During the whole of this season, the air is inflamed, the sky sparkling, and the heat oppressive to all unaccustomed to it". The oth [...] months are more temperate. The southerly winds which sometimes blow in Egypt, are by the natives called poisonous winds, or the [...]. They are of such extreme heat and aridity than no [...]mated body exposed to it can withstand its fatal influence. During the three days which it generally lasts, the streets are deserted; and woe to the traveller whom this wind surprizes remote from shel­ter▪ when it exceeds three days it is insupportable.

RIVERS, SOIL AND PRODUCE.] The sources of this celebrated river were so much unknown to the ancients, that to search for them be­came a proverb to express any ridiculous or impossible attempt. By the Jesuit missionaries, however, who formerly passed into Abyssinia, they certainly were explored; and the very reason given by Mr. Bruce for [...]p [...]sing that the missionaries never were there, must be a convinc­ing [Page 490] proof to every rational person that they really did visit them. The reason he gives, is a small difference betwixt his calculation and that of the missionaries in the latitude of the fountains from which the prin­cipal branch of the Nile proceeds, and which, according to his map, is exactly in 11 degrees north latitude. The difference is not quite a de­gree; it is impossible to know which of the travellers are in the right, and we may as well make this difference an argument against Mr. Bruce, as against the missionaries. According to both accounts, it rises in the territory of Gojam in Abyssinia, runs first northward, then changing its course to north-east, falls into the great lake of Dembea, from whence taking a circle south and westward, it again assumes a norther­ly direction, and being joined by two other large rivers, named the White River and the Atbara, or Astaboras, it passes through the great desert of Nubia, enters Egypt at the south west corner under the Tro­pic of Cancer, and continues its course between two rows of moun­tains, fertilizing, annually the low ground between them; for the whole of Upper Egypt, as has already been mentioned, is a long and not very broad valley. The fountains are situated, as has already been mentioned, in a long and not very broad valley. The fountains are situated, as has already been said, in 11 degrees north latitude; and al­most 37 east longitude; and are three in number, rising out of the marshy ground at the foot of a mountain; the water is fine, and issues in considerable quantity. About two miles from its source the stream becomes sufficiently large to turn a mill, but soon afterwards increases greatly, though even after a course of 60 miles it is fordable at certain seasons.

The natives, at the head of the Nile, pay divine honours to it. Thousands of cattle are offered, supposed to reside at its source. The Lake Dembea is much the largest known in this country. Its greatest breadth is thirty-five miles; but it decreases greatly at each extremity, where it is not sometimes above ten miles broad. Its greatest length is forty nine miles from north to south. In the dry months, from October to march, the Lake shrinks greatly in size; but after all these rivers are fail which are on every side of it, and fall into the lake, like Radii drawn to a center, then it swells, and extends itself into the plain country, and has of course a much larger surface.

The fertility of Egypt is well known to arise entirely from the annu­al overflowing of the Nile, and this is now equally well known to arise from the rains which fall periodically in Abyssinia. By these its waters are augmented, and begin to rise about the middle of June, and continue so to do until the middle of September, or the end of that month, the inundation taking up 100 days to arrive at its height. After that time it gradually decreases, and returns to its former channel, and so great is the influence of the sun, that even the vast quantity of water which at all times runs in its channel, becomes corrupted and heated to such a degree, that it can scarce be used be­fore the return of the flood. No notice, however, is taken of the rise of the river till the end of June, when it has usually swelled to five or six cubits beyond its former standard. This is publickly proclaim­ed through the streets of Cairo by a crier, and the daily increase con­tinues to be proclaimed in like manner, till it has attained the height of 16 peeks, when great rejoinings are made, and the inhabitants cry [Page 491] out Wassah Ullah, "God has given us abundance." This common­ly happens about the end of July, or before the 20th of August, and the sooner it rises to the height just mentioned, the greater hope they have of a plentiful harvest. Sometimes, however, they are disap­pointed, as was the case in 1705, when it did not rise to the requisite height, till the 10th of September; the consequence of which was, that a famine and pestilence ensued. After the inundation has risen to this height, the banks are cut to let it into the canals which water the country, and prepare it for the reception of the seed. The height to which it rises is different, depending entirely on the quantity of rain that falls in Abyssinia. If it does not attain to 16 peeks, the inhabitants are exempted from paying tribute. Eighteen cubits produces but an indifferent crop; 22 a very good one; put, if the inundation exceeds 24, a famine ensues, because the waters do not retire in time for sowing the corn.

The waters of the Nile are mightily extolled by the Egyptians, on account of their wholesome and light qualities, and likewise their plea­sant taste; but these commendations are naturally to be expected from people who never saw any other water; though it is certain that by the great length of its course, the Nile must be very perfectly deprived of every saline and earthly taint, excepting only the mud which hap­pens to be accidentally mixed with it. This indeed is so abundant in the dry season, that it cannot be used without filtration, and even then has a putrid quality, which were it to continue long, would un­doubtedly bring on dangerous diseases, but the waters of the inunda­tion are always pure and wholesome.

SOIL AND PRODUCE.] The fertility of the soil of Egypt has been celebra­ted in all ages, and if proper care was taken, there is not the least reason to doubt that it would now be the same as ever. In the dry months indeed the whole of this country is a dusty desert; though this is ow­ing to nothing but the want of water; for the gardens which are arti­ficially watered afford a perpetual verdure. As some parts of the country lie too high to be reached by the inundation, artificial means are likewise used for watering the corn grounds, though by reason of the unartful methods made use of, very little produce can be expected. One of the ways in which the water is generally raised is by the Sakiah, or Persian wheel, turned by oxen, and having several earthen vessels fastened to it by a rope, which empty themselves as the wheel turns round, into a cistern at top. In places where the banks of the river are high, they sometimes make basons in the side of them, near which they fix an upright pole, on the top of which is another moving upon an axle. At one end of the cross pole hangs a great stone, and at the other a leathern bucket; and the latter being pulled down by two men, is raised by the weight of the stone, and emptied into a proper cistern. From these cisterns the water is conveyed to the gardens, or plantations, and allowed to run in several little trenches, from whence it is conducted all round the beds in rills, which the gardener easily stops by raising the earth with his foot, and diverts the current another way.

Throughout all Egypt the soil is remarkably impregnated with that species of salt called Mineral Alkali, mingled with some common salt, and this may be supposed a reason of the extraordinary quickness of [Page 492] vegetation in this country, which is so remarkable, that a certain spe­cies of gourd, named Kara, will send out in one night a shoot four inches in length: but for the same reason in all probability it is, that foreign plants will not thrive here. Thus the European merchants, residing at Cairo, are obliged annually to send to Malta for the seeds of their garden stuffs; and always observe, that though they thrive very well, and bear seed the first year, yet if that seed is sown, the succeed­ing plants are too weak and slender. All kinds of grain are produced in plenty in Egypt, and the harvest months are march and April, dur­ing which the people reap three crops, viz. one of lettuces and cucum­bers (the latter being a principal article of food with them) another of melons, and a third of corn. Dates, figs, plantanes, &c. are produced here in great plenty, as well as palm trees, from which wine is made.

ANIMALS.] Egypt abounds in black cattle; and it is said, that the inhabitants employ every day 20,000 oxen in raising water for their grounds. They have a fine large breed of asses, upon which the Chris­tians ride, these people not being suffered by the Turks to ride on any other beast. The Egyptain horses are very fine; they never trot, but walk well, and gallop with great speed, turn short, stop in a moment, and are extremely tractable. The hippopotamus, or river-horse, an amphibious-animal, resembling an ox in its hinder parts, with the head like a horse, is common in Upper Egypt. Tygers, hyenas, cam­els, antelopes, apes, with the head like a dog, and the rat, called Ich­neumon, are natives of Egypt. The camelion, a little animal some­thing resembling a lizard, that changes colour as you stand to look upon him, is found he [...] as well as in other countries The crocodile was formerly thought peculiar to this country: but there does not seem to be any material difference between it and the alligators of India and America.

This country produces likewise great numbers of eagles, hawks, pelicans, and water-fowls of all kinds. The ibis, a creature (accord­ing to Mr. Norden) somewhat resembling a duck, was deified by the ancient Egyptians for its destroying serpents and pestiferous insects.

They were thought to be peculiar to Egypt, but a species of them is said to have been lately discovered in other parts of Africa. Ostriches are common here, and are so strong that the Arabs sometimes ride upon their backs.

POPULATION, MANNERS, CUS­TOMS, AND DIVERSIONS.] As the population of Egypt is al­most confined to the banks of the Nile, and the rest of the country inhabited by Arabs, and other na­tions, we can say little upon this head with precision. It seems to be certain, that Egypt is at present not near so populous as formerly; ac­cording to M. Volney, the number of inhabitants may amount at pres­ent to 2,300,000, of which Cairo contains about 250,000.

The descendants of the original Egyptians are represented as sloven­ly, indolent people, and are here distinguished by the name of Coptis; in their complexions, they are rather sun-burnt than swarthy or black. Their ancestors were once Christians, and in general they still pretend to be of that religion. Mahometanism is the prevailing worship among the natives. The Arabs who inhabit the villages and fields, at any considerable distance from the Nile, are of a deep swarthy complex­ion [...] are represented by the best authorities, as retaining the pa­triarchal [Page 493] mode of tending their flocks, and many of them have no fixed place of abode. The Turks, who reside in Egypt, retain all their Ot­toman pride and insolence, and the Turkish habit, to distinguish them­selves from the Arabs and coptis, who dress very plain, their chief fi­nery being an upper garment of white linen, and linen drawers; but their ordinary dress is of blue linen, with a long cloth coat, either over or under it. The Christians and Arabs of the meaner kind content themselves with a linen or woollen wrapper, which they fold, blanket like, round their body. The Jews wear blue leather slippers, the oth­er natives of their country wear red, and the foreign Christians yellow. The dress of the women is tawdry and unbecoming; but their cloths are silk, when they can afford it; and such of them as are not exposed to the sun, have delicate complexions and features. The Coptis are generally excellent accomptants, and many of them live by teaching the other natives to read and write. Their exercises and diversions are much the same as those made use of in Persia, and other Asiatic dominions. All Egypt is over-run with jugglers, fortune-tellers, mountebanks, and travelling slight-of-hand men.

RELIGION.] The bulk of the Mahometans are enthusiasts, and have among them their santos, or fellows who pretend to a superior degree of holiness, and without any ceremony intrude into the best houses, where it would be dangerous to turn them out. The Egyptian Turks mind religious affairs very little, and it would be hard to say what species of Christianity is professed by the Christian Coptis, which are here numerous, but they profess themselves to be of the Greek church, and enemies to that of Rome. In religious, and indeed many civil matters, they are under the jurisdiction of the patriarch of Alex­andria, who by the dint of money, generally purchases a protection at the Ottoman court.

LANGUAGE.] The Coptic is the most ancient language of Egypt. This was succeeded by the Greek, about the time of Alexander the Great; and that by the Arabic, upon the commencement of the cali­fate, when the Arabs dispossessed the Greeks of Egypt. Arabic or Arabesque, as it is called, is still the current language, but the Coptic and modern Greek continue to be spoken.

LEARNING AND LEARNED MEN.] Though it is past dispute that the Greeks derived all their knowledge from the ancient Egyptians, yet scarcely a vestige of it remains among their descendants. This is owing to the bigotry and ignorance of their Mahometan masters. Here it is proper to make one observation which is of general use. The califs or Saracens who subdued Egypt, were of three kinds. The first, who were the immediate successors of Mahomet, made war from conscience and principle upon all kinds of literature, excepting the Koran; and hence it was, that when they took possession of Alexan­dria, which contained the most magnificent library the world ever be­held, its valuable manuscripts were applied for some months in cook­ing their victuals, and warming their baths. The same fate attended the other magnificent Egyptian libraries. The califs of the second race were men of taste and learning, but of a peculiar strain. They bought up all the manuscripts that survived the general conflagration, relating to astronomy, medicine, and some useless parts of philosophy; but they had no taste for the Greek arts of architecture, sculpture, [Page 494] painting, or poetry, and learning was confined to their own courts and colleges, without ever finding its way back to Egypt. The lower race of califs, especially those who called themselves califs of Egypt, dis­graced human nature; and the Turks have riveted the chains of barba­rous ignorance which they imposed.

All the learning therefore possessed by the modern Egyptians con­sists in arithmetical calculations for the dispatch of business, the jargon of astrology, a few nostrums in medicine, and some knowledge of Ara­besque or the Mahometan religion.

CURIOSITIES AND ANTIQUITIES.] Egypt abounds with these. Its pyramids have been often described. Their antiquity is beyond the researches of history itself, and their original uses are still unknown. The basis of the largest, covers eleven acres of ground, and its perpen­dicular height is 500 feet, but if measured obliquely to the terminating point, 700 feet. * It contains a room thirty four feet long, and seven­teen broad, in which is a marble chest, but without either cover or contents, supposed to have been designed for the tomb of the founder. In short, the pyramids of Egypt are the most stupendous, and to ap­pearance, the most useless structures that ever were raised by the hands of men.

Among the greatest curiosities in this country, or perhaps in the whole world, we may reckon those people called Psylli, who have the faculty, either natural or acquired, of enchanting the most venomous serpents, so that they shall have no power to bite or hurt them, though they retain all their mischievous qualities with regard to others. Ac­counts of these have been transmitted by the Roman historians, but were looked upon as false till confirmed by those of modern trav­ellers. Mr. Hasselquist asserts, that he has seen one of these people handling the most venomous reptiles of this kind as if they had been laces; nay, Mr. Bruce not only assures us of this fact, but that he has seen a fellow eat a living serpent, beginning at its tail, and proceeding all the way up to its head, without the creature offering to resent such a violent injury. In what manner this extraordinary enchantment is performed we know not; for those who practise it will not speak up­on the subject.

The mummy pits, so called for their containing the mummies or embalmed bodies of the ancient Egyptians, are subterraneous vaults of a prodigious extent; but the art of preparing the mummies is now loft. It is said that some of the bodies thus embalmed, are perfect and dis­tinct at this day, though buried 3000 years ago. The labyrinth in Up­per Egypt is a curiosity thought to be more wonderful than the pyra­mids themselves. It is partly under ground, and cut out of a marble rock consisting of twelve palaces, and 1000 houses, the intricacies of which occasion its name. The lake Moeris was dug by order of an Egyptian king, to correct the irregularities of the Nile, and to commu­nicate with that river, by canals and ditches which still subsist, and are evidences of the utility, as well as grandeur of the work. Won­derful grottos and excavations, mostly artificial, abound in Egypt. The whole country towards Grand Cairo, is a continued scene of anti­quities, of which the oldest are the most stupendous, but the more [Page 495] modern the most beautiful. Cleopatra's needle, and its sculptures, are admirable. Pompey's pillar is a fine regular column of the Corin­thian order, the shast of which is one stone, being eighty-eight feet nine inches in height, or ten diameters of the column; the whole height is 114 feet, including the capital and the pedestal. The Sphynx, as it is called, is no more than the head and part of the shoulders of a woman hewn out of the rock, and about thirty feet high, near one of the pyramids.

The papyrns is one of the natural curiosities of Egypt, and served the ancients to write upon, but we know not the manner of preparing it. The pith of it is a nourishing food. The manner of hatching chickens in ovens, is common in Egypt, and now practised in some parts of Europe. The construction of the oven is very curious.

CITIES, TOWNS, AND PUBLIC EDIFICIES.} Even a slight review of these would a­mount to a large volume. In many places, not only temples, but the walls of cities, built before the time of Alex­ander the Great, are still entire, and many of their ornaments, particu­larly the colours of their paintings, are as fresh and vivid as when first laid on.

Alexandria, which lies on the Levant coast, was once the emporium of all the world, and by means of the Red Sea furnished Europe and great part of Asia with the riches of India. It owes its name to its founder Alexander the Great. It stands forty miles west from the Nile, and a hundred and twenty north-west of Cairo. It rose upon the ruins of Tyre and Carthage, and is famous for the light-house erected on the opposite island of Pharos, for the direction of mariners, deservedly esteemed one of the wonders of the world. The mole which was built to form a communication with the island of Pharos is 1000 yards in length, and though near 2000 years old, such were its excellent materials as to resist in a great measure the violence of wind [...] and waves ever since. All the parts of the city were magnificent in proportion, as appears from their ruins, particularly the cisterns and aqueducts. Many of the materials of the old city, however, have been employed in building New Alexandria, which at present is a very ordinary sea-port, known by the name of Scanderoon. Notwithstand­ing the poverty, ignorance, and indolence of the inhabitants, then mosques, bagnios, and the like buildings, erected within these ruins, preserve an inexpressible air of majesty. Some think that Old Alex­andria was built from the materials of the ancient Memphis.

Rosetta, or Raschid, stands twenty-five miles to the north-west of Alexandria, and is recommended for its beautiful situation, and de­lightful prospects, which command the fine country, or island of Delta, formed by the Nile, near its mouth. It is likewise a place of great trade. The length of the city is two miles, but only half a mile broad. In the environs are many country houses belonging to Chris­tian merchants, with fine gardens, producing the choicest fruits of the East. The Mahometan inhabitants are here also particularly civil and polite.

Cairo, now Masr, the present capital of Egypt, is a large and popu­lous, but a disagreeable residence, on account of its pestilential air, and narrow streets. It is divided into two towns, the Old and the New and defended by an old castle, the works of which are said to be three [Page 496] miles in circumference. This castle is said to have been built by Sala­dine; at the west end are the remains of very noble apartments, some of which are covered with domes, and adorned with pictures in Mosaic work; but these apartments are now only used for weaving embroide­ry, and preparing the hangings and coverings annually sent to Mecca. The well, called Joseph's well, is a curious piece of mechanism, about 300 feet deep. The memory of that patriarch is still revered in Egypt, where they shew granaries, and many other works of public utility, that go under his name. They are certainly of vast antiquity; but it is very questionable whether they were erected by him. One of his granaries is shewn in Old Cairo, but Captain Norden suspects it is a Saracen work, nor does he give us any high idea of the buildings of the city itself. On the bank of the Nile, facing Cairo, lies the village of Gize, which is thought to be the ancient Memphis. Two miles west, is Bulac, called the port of Cairo. The Christians of Cairo prac­tise a holy cheat, during the Easter holidays, by pretending that the limbs and bodies of the dead arise from their graves, to which they re­turn peaceably. The streets of Cairo are pestered with the jugglers and fortune-tellers already mentioned. One of their favourite exhibi­tions is their dancing camels, which, when young, they place upon a large heated floor: The intense heat makes the poor creatures caper, and being plied all the time with the sound of drums, the noise of that instrument sets them a dancing all their lives after.

The other towns of note in Egypt are Damietta, supposed to be the ancient Pelusium: Seyd, on the west banks of the Nile, 200 miles south of Cairo, said to be the ancient Egyptian Thebes; by the few who have visited it, it is reported to be the most capital antique curiosity that is now extant; and Cossiar, on the west coast of the Red Sea. The general practice of strangers, who visit those places, is to hire a Janizary, whose authority commonly protects them from the insults of the other natives. Suez, formerly a place of great trade, is now a small city, and gives name to the Is [...]hmus, that joins Africa with Asia. The children of Israel are supposed to have marched near this city, when they left Egypt, in their way towards the Red Sea; almost every object and village in this country presents some amazing piece of anti­quity. The difficulties in visiting it are great; so that the accounts we can depend upon are but few, nor do they always agree.

MANUFACTURES AND COMMERCE.] They Egyptians export pro­digious quantities of unmanufactured as well as prepared flax, thread, cotton, and leather of all forts, callicoes, yellow wax, sal ammoniac, saffron, sugar, fenna, and cassia. They trade with the Arabs for cof­fee, drugs, spices, callicoes, and other merchandises, which are landed at Suez, from whence they fend them to Europe. Several European states have consuls resident in Egypt, but the customs of the Turkish government are managed by Jews. The trade of the English with this country is almost annihilated, as the French are able to undersell them in the principal articles of trade, particularly in light cloths of Langue­do [...], called first and second Londries. which yield a good profit.

CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT.] A viceroy is sent to Egypt, from the Porte, under the title of the bashaw of Cairo, and is one of the greatest officers of the Ottoman empire. It is generally agreed, that the bashaw is very careful how he provokes the little princes, or [Page 497] beys, who have parcelled out Egypt among themselves, and whom he governs chiefly by playing one against another. It has sometimes hap­pened, that those bashaws have employed their arms against their mas­ters; and they are often displaced by the Porte, upon complaint from those petty princes. These circumstances may account for the reason why Egypt is not overloaded with taxes. Captain Norden and Dr. Pococke have given us the best, and indeed a very favourable account of those petty princes, who are called the Schechs or Sheiks of the Be­donians, or wandering Arabs, and are generally too powerful to receive laws from the Turkish government.

Egypt is now divided into 24 provinces, each of which is governed by a Sangiack, or Bey, so that the government of Egypt is both mo­narchical and republican. The monarchical is executed by the bashaw, and the republican by the mamalukes or sangiacs. The bashaw is ap­pointed by the grand signior as his viceroy. The republican, or rather the aristocratical part of the government of Egypt, consists of a divan, composed of these twenty-four sangiacks, beys, or lords. The head of them is called the sheik bellet, who is chosen by the divan, and con­firmed by the bashaw. Every one of the sangiacks is arbitrary in his own territory, and exerts sovereign power; the major part of them re­side at Cairo. If the grand signior's bashaw acts in opposition to the sense of the divan, or attempts to violate their privileges, they will not suffer him to continue in his post, the Porte is obliged to send an­other. They have an authentic grant of privileges, dated in the year 1517, in which year sultan Selim conquered Egypt from the Mama­lukes.

REVENUES.] From the nature of this divided government it must be difficult, if not impossible to form a judgment of the amount of the revenue of this country; according to the most probable conjecture, it exceeds two millions annually at present.

MILITARY STRENGTH.] Authors are greatly divided on this arti­cle. Captain Norden tells us, that it is divided into two corps of jani­zaries, and as [...]afs which are the chief; the former amounting to about six or eight thousand, and the latter to between three and four thou­sand. The other troops are of little account. After all, it does not appear, that the bashaw ever ventures to employ those troops against the Arab or Egyptian beys already mentioned, and who have separate armies of their own; so that, in fact, their dependance upon the Porte is little more than nominal, and amounts at most to feudal services. *

HISTORY. See Ro [...]hn's Ancient History.

THE STATES of BARBARY.

UNDER this head we shall rank the countries of, 1. Morocco and Fez; 2. Algiers; 3. Tunis; 4. Tripoli and Barca.

The empire of Morocco, including Fez, is bounded o [...] the North by the Mediterranean sea; on the South, by Tafilet; and on the East, by Segelmessa and the kingdom of Algiers, being 500 miles in length, and 480 in breadth.

[Page 498] Fez, which is now united to Morocco, is about 125 miles in length, and much the same in breadth. It lies between the kingdom of Al­giers to the East, and Morocco on the south, and is surrounded in oth­er parts by the sea.

Algiers, formerly a kingdom, is bounded on the East by the kingdom of Tunis, on the North by the Mediterranean, on the South by Mount Atlas, and on the West by the kingdoms of Morocco and Tafilet. Ac­cording to Dr. Shaw, who resided 12 years at Algiers in quality of chaplain to the British factory, and has corrected many errors of an­cient and modern geographers respecting the states of Barbary, this country extends in length 480 miles along the coast of the Mediterra­nean, and is between 40 and 100 miles in breadth.

Tunis is bounded by the Mediterranean on the North and East; by the kingdom of Algiers on the West; and by Tripoli, with part of Biledulgerid, on the South; being 220 miles in length from North to South, and 170 in breadth from East to West.

Tripoli, including Barca, is bounded on the North by the Mediter­ranean sea; on the South by the country of the Beriberies; on the West by the kingdom of Tunis, Biledulgerid, and a territory of the Gadamis; and on the East by Egypt; extending about 1100 miles along the sea-coast; and the breadth is from 1 to 300 miles.

Each capital bears the name of the state or kingdom to which it be­longs, but the capital of Biledulgerid (the ancient Numidia) is Dara.

This being permised, I shall consider the Barbary states as forming (which they really do) a great political confederacy, however indepen­dent each may be as to the exercise of its internal policy; nor is there a greater difference than happens in different provinces of the same kingdom, in the customs and manners of the inhabitants.

AIR AND SEASONS.] The air of Morocco is mild, as is that of Al­giers, and indeed all the other states, except in the months of July and August.

SOIL, VEGETABLE AND ANIMAL PRODUCTIONS, BY SEA AND LAND.} These states, under the Ro­man empire were justly denom­inated the garden of the world; and to have a residence there, was considered as the highest state of luxury. The produce of their soil formed those magazines, which furnished all Italy, and great part of the Roman empire, with corn, wine, and oil. Though the lands are now uncultivated, through the oppression and barbarity of their con­stitution, yet they are still fertile, not only in the above mentioned commodities, but in dates, figs, raisins, almonds, apples, pears, cherries, plums, citrons, lemons, oranges, pomegranates, with plenty of roots and herbs in their kitchen-gardens. Excellent hemp and flax grow on their plains; and by the report of Europeans, who have lived there for some time, the country abounds with all that can add to the pleas­ures of life; for their great people find means to evade the sobriety prescribed by the Mahometan law, and make free with excellent wines, and spirits of their own growth and manufacture. Algiers produces salt-petre, and great quantities of excellent salt; and lead and iron have been found in several places of Barbary.

Neither the elephant nor the rhinoceros are to be found in the states of Barbary; but their deserts abound with lions, tigers, leopards, hyaenas, and monstrous serpents. The Barbary horses were formerly very val­uable, [Page 499] and thought equal to the Arabian. Though their breed is now said to be decayed, yet some very fine ones are occasionally imported into England. Camels and dromedaries, asses, mules, and kum [...]ahs, a most serviceable creature, begot by an ass upon a cow, are their beasts of burden. Their cows are but small, and barren of milk. Their sheep yield but indifferent fleeces, but are very large, as are their goats. Bears, porcupines, foxes, apes, hares, rabbits, ferrets, weasels, moles, camelions, and all kinds of reptiles are found here. Besides vermin, says Dr. Shaw (speaking of his travels through Barbary) the apprehen­sions we were under, in some parts at least of this country, of being bitten or stung by the scorpion, the viper, or the venomous spider, rarely failed to interrupt our repose; a refreshment so very grateful, and so highly necessary to a weary traveller. Partridges and quails, angles, hawks, and all kinds of wild fowl, are found on this coast; and of the smaller birds, the capsa-sparrow is remarkable for its beauty, and sweetness of its note, which is thought to exceed that of any other bird, but it cannot live out of its own climate. The seas and bays of Barbary abound with the finest and most delicious fish of every kind, and were preferred by the ancients to those of Europe.

POPULATION, INHABITANTS, MAN­NERS, CUSTOMS, AND DIVERSIONS.} Morocco was certainly far more populous than it is now, if, as travellers say, its cepital contained 100,000 houses, whereas at present it is thought not to contain above 25,000 inhabitants; nor can we think that the other parts of the country are more populous, if it is true that their king or emperor has 80,000 horse and foot, of foreign negroes, in his armies.

The city of Algiers is said to contain 100,000 Mahometans, 15,000 Jews, and 2000 Christian slaves; but no estimate can be formed as to the populousness of its territory. Some travellers report, that it is in­habited by a friendly hospitable people, who are very different in their manners and character from those of the metropolis.

Tunis is the most polished republic of all the Barbary states. The capital contains 10,000 families, and above 3000 tradesmen's shops, and its suburbs consist of 1000 houses. The Tunisines are indeed ex­ceptions to the other states of Barbary; for even the most civilized of the European government might improve from their manners. Their distinctions are well kept up, and proper respect is paid to the military, mercantile, and learned professions. They cultivate friendship with the European states; arts and manufactures have been lately introdu­ced among them; and the inhabitants are said at present to be well ac­quainted with the various labours of the loom. The Tunisine women are very handsome in their persons; and though the men are sun­burnt, the complexion of the ladies is very delicate, nor are they less neat and elegant in their dress; but they improve the beauty of their eyes by art, particularly the powder of lead-ore, the same pigment, ac­cording to the opinion of the learned Dr. Shaw, that Jezebel made use of when she is said (2 Kings, chap. ix. verse 30.) to have painted her face; the words of the original being, that she set off her eyes with the powder of lead-ore. The gentlemen in general are sober, orderly, and clean in their persons, their behaviour genteel and complaisant, and great regularity appears through all the streets and city.

Tripoli was once the richest, most populous, and opulent of all the states on the coast; but it is now much reduced, and the inhabitants, [Page 500] who are said to amount to between 4 and 500,000, have all the vices of the Algerines.

Their manners are much of a peice with those of the Egyptians. The subjects of the Barbary states, in general subsisting by piracy, are allowed to be bold intrepid mariners, and will fight desperately when they meet with a prize at sea. They are notwithstanding far inferior to the Europeans, both in the construction and management of their vessels. They are, if we except the Tunifines, void of all arts and literature. The misery and poverty of the inhabitants of Morocco, who are not immediately in the emperor's service, are beyond all de­scription; but those who inhabit the inland parts of the country are an hospitable, inoffence people; and indeed it is a general observation, that the more distant the inhabitants of those states are from the seats of their government, the more pure are their manners. Notwithstand­ing their poverty, they have a liveliness about them, especially those who are of the Arabic descent, that gives them an air of contentment; and having nothing to lose, they are peaceable among themselves. The Moors are supposed to be the original inhabitants, but are now blend­ed with the Arabs, and both are cruelly oppressed by a handful of in­solent domineering Turks, the refuse of the streets of Constantinople.

DRESS.] The dress of these people is a linen shirt, over which they tie a silk or cloth vestment with a sash, and over that a loose coat. Their drawers are made of linen. The arms and legs of the wearer are bare, but they have slippers on their feet; and persons of condition sometimes wear buskins. They never move their turbans, but pull off their slippers when they attend religious duties, or the person of their sovereign. They are fond of striped and fancied silks. The dress of the women is not very different from that of the men, but their draw­ers are longer, and they wear a sort of cawl on their heads instead of a turban. The chief furniture of their houses consists of carpets and mattrasses, on which they sit and lie. In eating, their slovenliness is shocking. They are prohibited gold and silver vessels; and their meat is boiled or roasted to rags.

RELIGION.] All foreigners are here allowed the open profession of their religion, but the inhabitants of these states are Mahometans; and many subjects of Morocco follow the tenets of one Hamed, a modern sectarist, and an enemy to the ancient doctrine of the califs. All of them are very fond of idiots; and in some cases their protection screens offenders from punishment, for the most notorious crimes. In the main, however, the Moors of Barbary, as the inhabitants of these states are now promiscuously called (because the Saracens first entered Eu­rope from Mauritania, the country of the Moors) have adopted the very worst parts of the Mahometan religion, and seem to have retained only as much of it as countenances their vices. Adultery in the wom­en is punished with death; but though the men are indulged with a plurality of wives and concubines, they commit the most unnatural crimes with impunity.

LANGUAGE.] As the states of Barbary possess those countries that formerly went by the name of Mauritania and Numidia, the ancient African language is still spoken in some of the inland countries, and ev­en by some inhabitants of the city of Morocco. In the sea-port towns, and maritime countries, a bastard kind of Arabic is spoken; and sea­faring [Page 501] people are no strangers to that medly of living and dead langua­ges, Italian, French, Spanish, &c. that is so well known in all the ports of the Mediterranean, by the name of Lingua Franca.

ANTIQUITIES AND CURIOSITIES, NATURAL AND ARTIFICIAL.} This article is well worth the study of an antiquary, but the subjects of it are difficult of access. The reader can scarcely doubt that the countries which contained Carthage, and the Pride of the Phaenician, Greek, and Roman works, are replete with the most curi­ous remains of antiquity; but they lie scattered amidst ignorant, bar­barous inhabitants; and but few curious persons, except Dr. Shaw, have visited the country. Some remains of the Mauritanian and Nu­ [...]idian greatness are still to be met with, and many ruins which bear evidences of their ancient grandeur and populousness. These point out the old Julia Caesarea of the Romans, which was little inferior in magnificence to Carthage itself. A few of the aqueducts of Carthage are said to be still remaining, but no vestige of its walls. The same is the fate of Urica, and many other renowned cities of antiquity; and so over-run is the country with barbarism, that their very sites are not known, even by their ruins, amphitheatres, and other public buildings which remain still in tolerable preservation. Besides those of classical antiquity, many Saracen monuments, of the most stupendous magnifi­cence, are likewise found in this vast tract; these were erected under the califs of Bagdad, and the ancient kings of the country, before it was subdued by the Turks, or reduced to its present form of govern­ment. Their walls form the principal fortifications in the country, both inland and maritime. We know of few or no natural curiosities belonging to this country, excepting its salt-pits, which in some places take up an area of six miles. Dr. Shaw mentions springs found here that are so hot as to boil a large piece of mutton very tender in a quar­ter of an hour.

CITIES AND PUBLIC BDILDINGS.] Mention has already been made of Morocco, the capital of that kingdom, but now almost in ruins, the court having removed to Mequinez, a city of Fez, 30 miles distant, and very populous. Incredible things are recorded of the magnificent palaces in both cities; but by the best accounts the common people live in a dirty, slovenly manner.

The city of Algiers is not above a mile and an half in circuit, though it is computed to contain near 120,000 inhabitants, 15,000 houses, and 107 mosques. Their public baths are large, and handsomely paved with marble. The prospect of the country and sea from Algiers is very beautiful, being built on the declivity of a mountain; but the city, though for several ages it has braved some of the greatest powers in Christendom, it is said, could make but a faint defence against a re­gular siege, and that three English fifty-gun ships might batter it about the ears of its inhabitants from the harbour. If so, the Spaniards must have been very deficient either in courage or conduct. They attacked it in the year 1775, by land and by sea, but were repulsed with great loss, though they had near 20,000 foot and 2000 horse, and 47 king's ships of different rates, and 346 transports. In the year 1783 and 84, they also renewed their attacks by sea to destroy the city and gallies, but after spending a quantity of amunition, bombs, &c. were forced to retire without either it▪ capture or extinction. The mole of the [Page 502] harbour is 500 paces in length, extending from the continent to a small island were there is a castle and large battery.

The kingdom of Tunis, which is naturally the finest of all these states, contains the remains of many noble cities, some of them still in good condition. The capital, about 30 miles south of old Carthage, has fortifications, and is about three miles in circumference. The houses are not magnificent, but neat and commodious; as is the public ex­change for merchants and their goods; but, like Algiers, it is distress­ed for want of fresh water.

The city of Tripoli consists of an old and new town, the latter being the most flourishing; but never can make any considerable figure, on account of the inconveniences attending its situation, particularly the want of sweet water. The city of Oran, lying upon this coast, is about a mile in circumference, and is fortified both by art and nature. It was a place of considerable trade, and the object of many bloody dis­putes between the Spaniards and the Moors. Constantina was the ancient Cirta, and one of the strongest cities of Numidia, being inac­cessible on all sides, excepting the south-west.

Besides the above towns and cities, many others, formerly of great renown, lie scattered up and down this immense tract of country. The city of Fez, at present the capital of the kingdom so called, is said to contain near 300,000 inhabitants, besides merchants and foreigners.

Its mosqes amount to 500: one of them magnificent beyond descrip­tion, and about a mile and a half in circumference. Mequinez i [...] esteemed the great eporium of all Barbary. Sallee was formerly fa­mous for the piracy of its inhabitants. Tangier, situated about two miles within the straits of Gibraltar, was given by the crown of Portu­gal as part of the dowry of queen Catharine, consort of Charles II. of England. It was intended to be to the English what Gibralter is now; and it must have been a most noble acquisition, had not the mis­understandings between the king and his parliament occasioned him to blow up its fortifications and demolish its harbour; so that from being one of the finest cities in Africa, it is now little better than a fishing town. Ceuta, upon the same strait, almost opposite to Gibral­tar, is still in the hands of the Spaniards, but often, if not always, be­sieged or blocked up by the Moors. Tetuan, which lies within twen­ty miles of Ceuta is now but an ordinary town, containing about 800 houses; but the inhabitants are said to be rich, and tolerably civilized in their manners.

The provinces of Suz, Taffilet, and Cesula, form no part of the states of Barbary, though the king of Morocco pretends to be their sove­reign; nor do they contain any thing that is particularly curious.

Zaara, is a desert country, thinly peopled, and nearly destitute of both water and provisions.

MANUFACTURES AND COMMERCE.] The lower subjects of these states know very few imaginary wants, and depend partly upon their piracies to be supplied with necessary utensils and manufactures; so that their exports consist chiefly of leather, fine mats, embroidered handkerchiefs, sword-nots, and carpets, which are cheaper and softer than those of Turkey, though not so good in other respects. As they leave almost all their commercial affairs to the Jews and christans sett­led among them, the latter have established silk and linen works, [Page 503] which supply the higher ranks of their own subjects. They have no ships that, properly speaking, are employed in commerce; so that the French and English carry on the greatest part of their trade. Their exports, besides those already mentioned, consist in elephants teeth, ostrich feathers, copper, tin, wool, hides, honey, wax, dates, raisins, olives, almonds, gum arabic, and sandrac. The inhabitants of Mo­rocco are likewise said to carry on a considerable trade by caravans to Mecca, Medina, and some inland parts of Africa, from whence they bring back vast numbers of negroes, who serve in their armies, and are slaves in their houses and fields.

In return for their exports, the Europeans furnish them with timber, artillery of all kinds, gunpowder, and whatever they want, either in their public or private capacities; the particulars of which are too many to specify. The duties paid by the English in the ports of Mo­rocco, are but half those paid by other Europeans. It is a general ob­servation, that no nation is fond of trading with these states, not only on account of their capricious despotism, but the villany of their indi­viduals, both natives and Jews, many of whom take all opportunities of cheating, and when detected are seldom punished.

It has often been thought surprising, that the Christian powers should suffer their marine to be insulted by those barbarians, who take the ships of all nations with whom they are at peace, or rather who do not pay them a subsidy either in money or commodities. We cannot ac­count for this forbearance otherwise than by supposing, first, that a breach with them might provoke the Porte, who pretends to be their lord paramount: secondly, that no christian power would be fond of seeing Algiers, and the rest of that coast, in possession of another; and, thirdly, that nothing could be got by a bombardment of any of their towns, as the inhabitants would instantly carry their effects to their deserts and mountains, so that the benefit, resulting from the conquest, must be tedious and precarious. Indeed expeditions against Algiers have been undertaken by the Spaniards, but they were ill-conducted and unsuccessful: of th [...]se some account hath already been given.

CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT.] In Morocco, government cannot be said to exist. The emperors have for some ages been par­ties, judges, and even executioners with their own hands, in all crimi­nal matters; nor is their brutality more incredible than the submission with which their subjects bear it. In the absence of the emperor, every military officer has the power of life and death in his hand, and it is seldom that they mind the form of a judicial proceeding. Some ves­tiges, however of the cali [...]ate government still continue; for in places where no military officer resides, the mufti or high-priest is the fountain of all justice, and under him the cad [...], or civil officers, who act as our justices of the peace. Though the emperor of Morocco is not immediately subject to the Porte, yet he acknowledges the Grand Signior to be his superior, and he pays him a distant allegiance as the chief representative of Mahomet. What we have said of Morocco is applicable to Fez, both kingdoms being now under one emperor.

Though Algiers, Tunis, and Tripoli, have each of them a Turkish bashaw or dey, who governs in the name of the Grand Signior, yet very little regard is paid by his ferocious subjects to his authority. He cannot even be said to be nominated by the Porte. When a [Page 504] vacancy of the government happens, which commonly does by mur­der, every soldier in the army has a vote in choosing the succeeding dey; and though the election is often attended with bloodshed, yet it is no sooner fixed than he is cheerfully recognized and obeyed. It is true, he must be confirmed by the Porte; but that is seldom refused, as the divan is no stranger to the dispositions of the people. The power of the dey is despotic; and the income of the dey of Algiers amounts to about 150,000l. a year, without greatly oppressing the sub­jects, who are very tenacious of their property. A detachment of the army of their states is annually sent into each province to collect the tribute from the Moors and Arabs; and the prizes they take at sea, sometimes equal the taxes laid upon the natives. These deys pay slight annual tributes to the Porte. When the Grand Signior is at war with a Christian power, he requires their assistance, as he does that of the king of Morrocco; but he is obeyed only as they think proper. Subordinate to the deys are officers, both military and civil; and in all matters of importance, the dey is expected to take the advice of a common council, which consists of thirty bashaws. These bash­aws seldom fail of forming parties, among the soldiers, against the reign­ing dey, whom they make no scruple of assassinating, even in council; and the strongest candidate then fills his place. Sometimes he is de­posed; sometimes, though but very seldom he resigns his authority to save his life; and it is seldom he dies a natural death upon the throne. The authority of the dey is unlimited; but an unsuccessful expedition, or too pacific a conduct, seldom fails to put an end to his life and gov­ernment.

REVENUES.] We have already mentioned those of Algiers, but they are now said to be exceeded by Tunis. They consist of a certain proportion of the prizes taken from christians, a small capitation tax, and the customs paid by the English, French, and other nations, who are suffered to trade with those states. As to the king of Morocco, we can form no idea of his revenues, because none of his subjects can be said to possess any property. From the manner of his living, his attendance, and appearance, we may conclude he does not abound in riches. The ransoms of Christian slaves are his perquisites. He some­times shares in the vessels of the other states, which entitles him to a part of their prizes. He claims a tenth of the goods of his Mohome­tan subjects, and six crowns a year from every Jew merchant. He has likewise considerable profits in the Negroland and other caravans, es­pecially the slave-trade towards the south. It is thought that the whole of his ordinary revenue, in money, does not exceed 165,000 a year.

MILITARY STRENGTH AT SEA AND LAND.] By the best accounts we have received, the king of Morocco can bring to the field 100,000 men; but the strength of this army consists of cavalry mounted by his negro slaves. Those wretches are brought young to Morocco, know no other state but servitude, and no other master but that king, and prove the firmest support of his tyranny. About the year 1727, all the naval force of Morocco consisted only of three small ships, which lay at Sallee, and being full of men, sometimes brought in prizes. The Algerines maintain about 6500 foot, consisting of Turks, and cologlies, or the sons of soldiers. Part of them serve as marines on board their vessels. About 1000 of them do garrison duty, and part are employed [Page 505] to fomenting differences among the neighbouring Arab princes. Be­sides these, the dey can bring 2000 Moorish horse into the field; but as they are enemies to the Turks, they are little trusted. Those troops are under excellent discipline, and the deys of all the other Barbary states keep up a force in proportion to their abilities; so that a few years ago they refused to send any Tribute to the Turkish emperor, who seems to be satisfied with the shadow of obedience which they pay him.

It is very remarkable, that thought the Carthaginians, who inhabited this very country of Barbary, had greater fleets and a more extensive commerce than any other nation, or than all the people upon the face of the earth, when that state flourished; the present inhabitants have scarcely any merchant ships belonging to them, or indeed any other than what Sallee, Algiers, Tunis, and Tripoli fit out for piracy; which, though increased since the last attack of the Spaniards, are now but few and small, and some years ago did not exceed six ships from thirty-six to fifty guns. The admiral's ship belongs to the government; the other captains are appointed by private owners, but subject to military law. With such a contemptible fleet, these people not only harrass the nations of Europe, but oblige them to pay a kind of tribute by way of presents.

HISTORY.] There perhaps is no problem in history so unaccounta­ble as the decay or fall of the splendor, power, and glory of the states of Barbary; which, when Rome was mistress of the world, formed the fairest jewels in the imperial diadem. It was not till the seventh cen­tury, that, after these states had been by turns in possession of the Van­dals and the Greek emperors, the califs or Saracens of Bagdad con­quered them, and from thence became masters of almost all Spain, form whence their posterity was totally driven about the year 1492, when the exiles settled among their friends and countrymen on the Barbary coast. This naturally begot a perpetual war between them and the Spaniards, who pressed them so hard, that they called to their assist­ance the two famous brothers Barbarossa, who were admirals of the Turkish fleet, and who, after breaking the Spanish yoke, imposed upon the inhabitants of all those states (excepting Morocco) their own. Some attempts were made by the emperor Charles V. to reduce Al­giers and Tunis, but they were unsuccessful; and, as already observ­ed, the inhabitants have in fact shaken off the Turkish yoke likewise.

The emperors or kings of Morocco are the successors of those sove­reigns of that country who were all called xeriffs, and whose powers resembled that of the califate of the Saracens. They have been in general a set of bloody tyrants; though they have had among them some able princes, particularly Muley Moluc, who defeated and killed Don Sebastian, king of Portugal. They have lived in almost a continued state of warfare with the kings of Spain and other Christian princes ever since; nor does the crown of Great-Britain sometimes disdain, as in the year 1769, to purchase their friendship with presents.

[Page 506]

Of AFRICA, from the Tropic of Cancer to the Cape of Good-Hope. See the Table and Map.

THIS immense territory is, comparitively speaking, very little known; there is no modern traveller that hath penerated into the interior parts; so that we are ignorant not only of the bounds, but even of the names of several inland countries. In many material cir­cumstances, the inhabitants of this extensive continent agree with each other. If we except the people of Abyssinia, they are all of a black complexion: In their religion, except on the sea-coasts, which have been visited and settled by strangers, they are pagans; and the form of government is every where monarchical, or despotic. Few princes, however, possess a very extensive jurisdiction; for as the na­tives of this part of Africa are said to be grossly ignorant in all the arts of utility or refinement, they must be little acquainted with one another; and generally united in small societies, each governed by its own prince. In Congo, Loango, and Angola, we are told of powerful monarchs; but on examination, it is found that the author­ity of these princes stands on a precarious footing, each tribe or separate body of their subjects being under the influence or a petty chieftain of their own, styled Negus, to whose commands, however contrary to those of the Negascha Negascht, or king of kings, they are always ready to submit. This indeed must always be the case among rude nations, where the art of governing, like all others, is in a very simple and imperfect state. In the succession to the throne, force generally prevails over right; and an uncle, a brother, or other col­lateral relation, is on this account commonly preferred to the descend­ants, whether male or female.

We are but imperfectly acquainted with the manners and customs of the people of this extensive country. The accounts given us by Mr. Bruce, of the Abyssinians, represent them as in a state of very great barbarism. Their manner of feeding is beyond a parrallel, if we may believe the report of our author. He informs us, that hav­ing fallen in with some soldiers driving a cow before them, he was surprised to see them throw down the animal, cut off pieces of her flesh, and then flapping the skin over the wound, make her get up and walk on as before. This he at first supposed to be a military man [...] ­vure, and an expeditious method of carrying provisions along with them; but he soon found that it was the common practice of the country, and that the fate of the unfortunate animals used by Abys­sinians for food, was much worse than if they were devoured by the most cruel wild beasts. The latter would kill them at once, or at least not keep them long in torment; but these wild beasts in human shape protract their agonies as much as possible; flesh being in no estima­tion among them, unless it be warm and quivering with life. In their manners, they are debauched in the most incredible degree; the country is a seat of continual war and bloodshed; ignorance, and the most abominable superstitions universally prevail; and, when to all this we join the nominal profession of Christianity, the idea is too shocking to be born.

[Page 507] Although we read from the Jesuits, says Mr. Bruce, a great deal about marriage and polygamy, yet there is nothing which may be averred more truly, than that there is no such thing as marriage in Abyssinia, unless that which is contracted by mutual consent, without other forms, subsisting only till dissolved of one or other, and to be re­newed or repealed as often as it is agreeable to both parties, who when they please, cohabit together as man and wife, after having been divorced, had children by others, or whether they have been married, or had children with others or not. Upon separation they divide the children. If the numbers are unequal they are divided by lot. There is no such distinction as legitimate or illegitimate children from the king to the beggar.

The religion of the Abyssinians is a mixture of Christianity, Juda­ism and Paganism, the two latter of which are by far the most predom­inant. There are here more Churches than in any other country, and though it is very mountainous, and consequently the view much ob­structed, it is very seldom you see less than five or six churches. Ev­ery great man that dies thinks he has atoned for all his wickedness, if he leaves a fund to build a Church, or has built one in his life time. Wherever a victory is obtained, a church is erected, the situation for them is always chosen near running water, for the convenience of their purifications and ablutions, in which they observe strictly the leviti­cal law. The churches are all round, with thatched roofs: Their s [...]mits are perfect cones: The outside is surrounded by a number of wooden pillars, which are nothing else than the trunks of the cedar tree, and are placed to support the edifice, about eight feet of the roof projecting beyond the wall of the church, which forms an agreeable walk or c [...]lonade, around it in hot weather, or in rain. The inside of the church is in several divisions, according as is prescribed by the law of Moses. The first is a circle somewhat wider than the in­ner one; here the congregation fit and pray. Within this is a square, and that square is divided by a veil or curtain, in which is another very small division answering to the holy of holies.

This is so narrow, that none but the priests can go in to it. You must be bare-footed whenever you enter the church, and then you may go through every part of it, provided you are pure, that is, have not been concerned with women for 24 hours before, nor touched dead bodies or carrion: (a curious assemblage of ideas,) in which case you must stand at an awful distance and say your prayers.

The churches are full of pictures slovenly painted on parchment, and nailed upon the walls. Sometimes for a particular church they get a number of pictures of saints, on skins of parchment ready finish­ed from Cairo, in a style very little superior to their own performan­ces. There is no choice in their saints, they are both of the old and new Testament, and those that might be dispensed with from both. There is St. Pontius Pilate and his wife; there is St. [...]alaam and his as [...]; Samson and his Jaw Bone; and so of the rest.

The Abyssinians receive the holy sacrament in both kinds, in un­leavened bread, and in the grape bruised with the hush together as it grows, so that it is a kind of marmalade, and is given in a flat spoon. Large pieces of bread are given to the co [...]untments in proportion to their quality, and it sometimes is the case, with great men, who though [Page 508] they open their mouths as wide as they conveniently can yet from the respect the priest pays them, such a portion of the loaf is put into their mouths, that water runs from their eyes, from the incapacity of chew­ing it, which however they do as indecently, and with full as much noise as they eat at table.

The Abyssinians are not all agreed about the state of souls before the resurrection of the body. The opinion which generally prevails, is that there is no third state, but that, after the example of the thief, the souls of good men enjoy beatific vision immediately upon the sep­eration from the body. But their practice and books both contradict this; for when any person dies, alms are given, and prayers are offer­ed for the souls of those departed, which would be vain did they be­lieve they were in the presence of God.

The fertility of a country so prodigiously extensive, might be sup­posed more various than we find it is; in fact, there is no medium in this part of Africa with regard to the advantages of soil; it is either perfectly barren, or extremely fertile; this arises from the intense heat of the sun, which, where it meets with sufficient moisture, produces with the utmost luxuriancy; and in those countries where there are few ri­vers, reduces the surface of the earth to a barren sand. Of this sort are the countries of Anian and Zaara, which, for want of water, and consequently of all other necessaries, are reduced to perfect deserts, as the name of the latter denotes. In those countries, on the other hand, where there is plenty of water, and particularly where the rivers over­flow the land, part of the year, as in Abyssinia, the productions of na­ture, both of the animal and vegetable kinds, are found in the highest perfection and greatest abundance. The countries of Mandingo, Ethi­opia, Congo, Angola, Batua, Truticui, Monomotapa, Casati, and Me­henemugi, are extremely rich in gold and silver. The baser metals likewise are found in these and many other parts of Africa. But the persons of the natives, detestable as is the traffic, make the most consi­derable article in the produce and trade of this miserable quarter of the globe.

The principal towns in this part of Africa, which are known, are the following.

Gondar, the metropolis of Abyssinia, is situated upon a hill of consi­derable height, the top of it nearly plain, on which the town is placed. It consists of about ten thousand families in times of peace: The hou­ses are chiefly of clay, the roofs thached in the form of cones, which is always the construction within the tropical rains. On the west end of the town is the king's house, formerly a structure of considerable consequence; it was a square building, flanked with square towers, was formerly four stories high, and from the top of it had a magnificent view of all the country southward to the lake Izana. Great part of this house is now in ruins, having been burnt at different times; but there is still ample lodging in the two lowest floors of it; the audi­ence chamber being above one hundred and twenty feet long.

Adowa, the capital of Tigre, is situated on the west side of a small plain, surrounded every way by mountains; it contains about 300 hou­ses; it was not formerly the capital, but has accidentally become so upon the accession of the governor, whose property lies in and about it. His mansion house resembles a prison rather than a palace, for [Page 509] there are in and about it, more than 300 persons in irons, some of whom have been there for 20 years mostly with a view to extort money from them. Adowa is the seat of a considerable manufacture of coarse cotton cloth, which circulates instead of money all over Abyssinia.

Siré the capital of the province of the same name, is situated on the brink of a very steep, narrow valley. In the midst of this valley runs a brook bordered with palm tress, which bear no fruit: Its houses are all of clay. This town is also famous for the manufacture of coarse cotton cloths, which pass for current money through all the Province of Tigré beside these, beads, needles, cohol and incense, at times only, are considered as money. Siré is situated lat. 14°, 4′, 35″, north, and long. 38° 0′ 16″ E. from Greenwich, and although in one of the finest countries in the world, says Mr. Bruce, putrid fevers of the very worst kind, are almost constant here.

The nations bounding on Abyssinia, are but little or not at all known. They are, the chief of them, on the north, south and West, Pagan blacks. Sennaar, the chief town of the kingdom of Sennaar, is in lat. 13° 34′ 36″ north, 33° 30′ 30″ east from Greenwich: It is on the west side of the Nile, and close upon the banks of it. The ground whereon it stands, rises just enough to prevent the river from entering the town. The country around Sennaar is exceedingly pleasant in the months of August and September. The corn at this season is now sprung up, and makes the whole of this immense plain appear a level green land, interspersed with great lakes of water, and ornamented at certain intervals with groups of villages, the conical tops of the houses appearing at a distance, like small encampments. Throughthis extensive plain, winds the Nile, a delightful river there, more than a mile broad, full to the brim, but never overflowing. Every where on these banks are seen, numerous herds of the most beautiful cattle of various kinds, the tribute recently extorted from all the Arabs; who, freed from their vexations, return home with the remainder of their flocks in peace, at as great a distance from the town, country, and their oppressers as they possibly can.

War and treason seem to be the only employment of this horrid peo­ple, whom Heaven has separated by almost impassable deserts from the rest of mankind. The dress of the Sennaar's is very simple: It consists of a long shirt of blue of surat cloth, called marotuy, which covers them from the lower part of their neck down to their feet, but does not con­ceal the neck itself; and this is the only difference between the men's and women's dress; that of the women covering theirs altogether, be­ing buttoned like ours. Both men and women go barefooted in the house. Their floors are covered with Persian carpets, especially the women's apartments. In fair weather, they wear sandals; and with­out doors they use a kind of wooden patten, neatly ornamented with shells. In the greatest heat at noon, they order buckets of water to be thrown upon them instead of bathing. Both men and women an­noint themselves, at least once a day, with camel's grease, mixed with civet, which they imagine softens their skin, and preserves them from [...]utaneous eruptions, of which they are so fearful, that the smallest pimple in any visible part of their body, keeps them in their house till it disappears. They lie all night, in a shirt dipt in grease, upon a bull's hide tanned, and very much softened by this constant greasing, [Page 510] and very cool at the same time, though it occasions a smell that no washing can free them from. Their horned cattle are the largest and fattest in the world, and are exceedingly fine; but the common m [...]t sold in the market, is camel's flesh: The liver of the animal, and the sparerib are always eaten raw, through the whole country.

All the nations of Africa, within the tropics, are wonderfully affected at the smallest eruption or roughness of the skin; nor is there any remedy, however violent, that they will not fly to, for immediate re­lief. A very singular complaint mentioned by travellers as common to these countries, is the Farent [...]t, a corruption of an Arabiac word which signifies the worm of Pharaoh. This animal afflicts those who are in a habit of drinking stagnant water. It appears indiscriminately in every part of the body: It comes on with an itching in the spot, and on observing, the small black head of this worm is very visible. Its body is seemingly of a white silky texture, very small like a tendon. After its appearance, the natives of these countries, who are used to it, seize it gently by the head, and wrap it round a thin piece of silk, or small bird's feather. Every day, or several times a day, they try to wind it up upon the quill as far as it comes readily; and upon the smallest resistance, they give over least it should break. They are of­ten as much as five feet in length.

On the Guinea or western coast, the English trade to James Fort, and other settlements near and up the river Gambia, where they ex­change their woollen and linen manufactures, their hard ware and spirituous liquors, for the persons of the natives. By the treaty of peace in 1783, the river of Senegal, with its dependencies were given up to France. Among the Negroes, a man's wealth consists in the number of his family, whom he sells like so many cattle, and often at an inferior price. Gold and ivory, next to the slave trade, form the principal branches of African commerce. These are carried on from the same coast, where the Dutch and French, as well as English, have their settlements for this purpose.

According to a late sensible writer, Mr. Ramsay, the annual British exports to Africa are estimated at 500,000l. including a considerable quantity that is annually exchanged with American and other foreign traders on the coast; about 50,000l. of this is returned in ivory, gold dust, gum, &c. The greatest part of the profits of the slave trade is raised on the sugar plantations. If by establishing factories, and en­couraging civilization on the coast of Africa, and returning some of the West-India and other slaves, to their original country, some amends could be made for past treachery, to the natives, and the inhabit­ants could be instructed in the culture of tobacco, indigo, cotton, rice, &c. to barter with us for our manufactures, great might be the profits and much would it serve the cause of humanity. An undertaking of this kind has lately been set on foot by the Sierra Leona company which bids fair to be successful, and does very great honor to the humane gen­tlemen, who are agents in this business.

The Portuguese are in possession of the east and west coast of Afri­ca, from the Tropic of Capricorn to the Equator; which immense tract they became masters of by their successive attempts, and happy discov­ery and navigation of the Cape of Good Hope. From the coast of Zan­gu [...]bar, on the eastern side, they trade not only for the articles above [Page 511] mentioned, but likewise for several others, as sena, aloes, civet, amber­grease, and frankincense. The Dutch have settlements towards the southern part of the continent, in the country called Caffraria, or the land of the Hottentots, particularly Cape Town, which is well settled, and fortified; where their ships, bound for India, usually put in, and trade with the natives for their cattle, in exchange for which they give them spirituous liquors.

The establishment which the Dutch East-India company have made on either side of the Cape of Good Hope, the extreme southern point of that great Continent, which comprehends Europe, Asia and Africa, extends according to computation, 450 miles Eastward and Westward, and 250 towards the North. In this extensive domain, the population amounts to 17,000 inhabitants of European descent, and about 30,000 slaves, Africans and Asiatics.

This country is capable of being made, by the simplest means, a pop­ulous commercial Colony. Its pure and temperate climate is favour­able to health, longevity and population. Its soil, though not appa­rently rich, is, from the genial temperature of the air, and alternate dews and sunshine, so kindly vegetative, that it nourishes with little culture, and almost spontaneously, whatever the husbandman, the bot­anist, the florist chooses to commit to its bosom. Thus it is calculated to produce whatever is requisite to the increase of flocks, horses, and cattle; and at the same time to yield whatever is necessary to the comfortable subsistence of the human species.

The greatest want of this country, is that of timber for building, and even for fuel. The navigable rivers are separated from each oth­er by great distances: But canals are more practicable here than in the low countries of Europe. The east side of the promontory, and the inland parts, are the richest, and capable of the highest cultivation. The two principal parts with regard to actual commerce, are Table Bay and False Bay, which are always safe; so formed and sheltered, as alternately to yield security against the two prevailing winds, which are peculiar to that meridian. There are other bays very fit for navigation; but the policy of the chartered sovereigns, the East India Company, has drawn a veil over the true knowledge of them. The same jealousy which hides the knowledge of the ports to which we allude, prohibits the inhabitants from transporting, on any pre­text, their produce and effects to the principal towns, coastwise by water. The excellent vines of the Cape, if encouraged and improved, would yield to none in taste, flavour or delicacy. Its grains are not inferior to those of Sicily. Aloes, myrtle wax, salt and paints, it is capable of furnishing in profusion; as also indigo, cotton and tobac­co. It contains virgin copper, and copper ore, and the appearance of the soil in many places indicates the possession of the precious metals.

Families in this place generally consist of from 7 to 17 children, and some from 18 to 27. From the want of intercourse with strang­ers, they are all allied together with intermarriages; without feeling, however, for each other any kindred affection, and even without that sympathy and fellowship which prevail in other countries among neighbours. The females appear to be more numerous than the other sex. It is computed, that at the least five-sixth parts of the whole number of European descent (17,000) are females and male children under [Page 512] manhood. About one fourth part of those who are descended from Euro­peans, reside at Cape-Town, and about two-fifths of all the slaves.

The people of this place are less the descendants of the Dutch than of emigrants from France (after the revocation of the Edict of Nantz) from all the protestant estates in Germany, and from the Austrian Ne­therlands.

As there is no exportation but from Table and False Bays, wines, grain, and some other articles pay duties upon entering the towns.—There is a considerable quantity of wheat shipped annually by the company to Batavia, Ceylon and Holland. Cattle and sheep for the use of shipping, are provided by contracting farmers, who pay a duty for this exclusive privilege.

The chief-justice, or fiscal, unites in his own person the three dis­tinct branches of government; the legislative, the judicial and the executive. This legislator, judge and executioner, with high powers, possesses great privileges and emoluments: He can impose and levy taxes for his own use; dispense with laws; create new crimes; compound for crimes of all denominations and complexions, and in general, dispose as he pleases, of the lives and fortunes of the whole people. It is true there is a kind of controlling power, paramount to this highly privileged person; but woe to him who dares appeal to that tribunal.

Most families manufacture their own articles of wearing apparel and household furniture: So that they are only obliged to import from Europe and Asia the gross materials, and a few of the simplest arti­cles of conveniency, and still fewer of luxury. Their streets are spa­cious, airy and regularly laid out at right angles; and they seem to have inherited and preserved the cleanliness of Haerlem and Delst. But there is one inconveniency which they cannot remedy with all their industry. The strong squalls of wind which often force them­selves through narrow passes between the surrounding mountains, raise dust in the streets, in troublesome quantities, in spite of the frequent application of water from canals and occasional gutters.

Every house keeper has good accomodations for boarders: but stran­gers are discouraged from settling there by political finesse. As the Cape of Good-Hope has, for many years, been a half way house for refreshment, out and home, travellers of quick conceptions and some genius, have had frequent opportunities of drawing the strangest med­leys of characters, and of remarking the various effects of wealth, and climate on the manners and passions of men. The various degrees of rank, and the different stations and circumstances of persons travelling to and from India, have furnished ample scope for observations of this kind.

The Aborigines of the country, who are called Hottentots, and who are of a mild and tractable disposition, have been easily reduced to the condition of obedient subjects. They are a quiet, inoffensive people, useful to the Dutch in many respects, particularly in the management of flocks and herds of cattle. They have been very much misrepresent­ed in Europe: And itis surprising that the falsehoods which have been propagated concerning them, should so long have gained credit in the world. It is not true, that they are in the practice of eating raw flesh, or that they entwine their bodies with the entrails of cattle. They pre­pare [Page 513] their food with fire; and their cloathing consists of a dressed hide, which is tied like a collar round the neck, hangs down over the shoulders near to the ground, and is broad, and it may be wrapt round the fore part of the body: besides this, they wear another covering of skin round the loins, which reaches half way down the thighs. Some­times they have a cap for the head, and shoes for the feet of the same materials. Their shoes are formed of a piece of hide, drawn closely about the feet with thongs of the same. The Hottentots having few conveniences for bathing, and living in a climate where they are very frequently involved in clouds of dust, have acquired habits of dirti­ness; but their skins, when washed, are clear, though sallow. There is a straggling nation of Hottentots, in very inland parts of the coun­try, who are mere savages, having neither flocks nor herds, houses, huts nor settled residence. These savages live by prey, and their abodes are caves, rocks and trees. They use very little cloathing: It has been said, that they are cannibals; but this has not been ascertained. They are untameable and unmanageable by any means that have been yet tried. They refuse to converse as other uncivilized nations readily do, by nat­ural signs; and scarce deserve to be ranked among the human species. They are happily, very few in number, and are seldom to be seen in day-light. They make their depredations in the night, like so many wolves and tigers.

We are informed by a late learned traveller, that the Hottentots live much in the same manner as the ancient Gauls, mentioned in Caesar's Commentaries; residing in different herds or tribes, on the banks of rivers, and near the forests; where they form so many dis­tinct villages and independent republics. By means of the rivers, the country about them is fertile in the production of those roots and wild fruits on which the Hottentots in a great measure subsist; and the forests yield them the like advantages. The Hottentot villages are all circular; the cabbins of which they are composed being covered with skins, and so very low, that a man must either stoop very much, or crawl on his knees, to got into them. They serve, indeed, chiefly to contain provisions, and their implements of husbandry; the owner himself never occupying them unless when it rains: At other times, he passes his leisure hours in sleeping at the door of his hut; where he lies on his belly, and exposes his back to the sun and the weather; waking now and then to amuse himself with smoking a certain strong­scented herb, which hath much the same effect as our tobacco.

The employment of the Hottentots is purely pastoral: their prin­cipal and almost only occupation being the care of their herds of sheep and ki [...]e. Of these each village hath one common herd; eve­ry inhabitant taking it in his turn to be herdsman. This charge re­quires many precautions, very different from those which are taken by our herdsmen, beasts of prey being numerous and fierce in the southern parts of Africa. Lions, indeed, are not very common there: but there are elephants, the rhinoceros, leopards, tigers, and several kinds of wolves, more destructive than ours, together with many oth­er furious animals that abound in the forests, and occasionally make excursions towards the Cape, and destroy the tame cattle. To pre­vent these misfortunes, it is the business of the herdsmen to go, or send, every day round his district, in order to discover if any be [...]t of [Page 514] prey be lurking in that quarter. In which case, he assembles the whole village together, and makes his report; when a party of the stout [...]st among them arm themselves with javelins and poisoned ar­rows, and follow the person who may have discovered the beast, to the cave or covert where he is lodged. Here they arrange them­selves in two lines; the herdsman entering the cave, and endeavour­ing to provoke the beast to follow him out, where he is inevitably de­stroyed. United among themselves by the bonds of fraternal con­cord, the inhabitants of the same village live in constant peace. But they take cruel vengeance on the neighbouring tribes, on the first in­sult that is offered them. The subject of their mutual complaints is generally the stealing of a sheep or cow, and sometimes only a sus­picion of it; the consequences, however, are usually very terrible, when they determine on revenge; as they take all possible means, af­ter having made this determination, to make the aggressors suppose the injury forgotten; but no sooner do they find their dissimulation hath taken effect, in the security of the enemy, than they fall sudden­ly upon them with poisoned weapons, sparing neither age nor sex, but rooting out at once the whole community: such is the method of going to war in this country.

The care of household affairs among the Hottentots belongs to the department of the females. The men, indeed, are the butchers, and prepare the meat for dressing; but the care of providing the vegeta­bles concerns only the women. Thus the mother of a family sets out in a morning, attended by such of her children as are able to follow her, and carrying the rest in her arms or on her back. In this man­ner she searches the woods and river sides, for roots, pulse, or fruit; of which having gotten a sufficient quantity, she returns, lights a fire on a large stone before the cabbin, and when the food is dressed, wakes her husband, who fits down to his meal with the rest of the fam­ily. The women are clothed with sheep-skins, as well as the men; wearing the wool outwards in summer, and inwards during the win­ter.

HISTORY.] The Abyssinians, from a very ancient tradition, accord­ing to Mr. Bruce, attribute the foundation of their monarchy to Men­ilek, son of Solomon, by the Queen of Saba, (Sheba) or Arab, rendered in the Vulgate, the Queen of the South. The annals of the Abyssinians say, she was a Pagan, when she left Arab, but being full of admiration at the fight of Solomon's works, she was converted to Judaism in Je­rusalem, and bore him a son whom she called Menilek, and he became their first King. She returned with her son to Saba, or Arab, whom, after keeping him some years, she sent back to his father to be in­structed. Solomon did not neglect his charge, and he was anointed and crowned King of Ethiopia, in the temple of Jerusalem, and at his inauguration, took the name of David: After this he returned to A­rab, and brought with him a colony of Jews, among whom were many doctors of the Law of Moses, particularly one of each Tribe, to make Judges in his kingdom, from whom the present Umbra (or Supreme Judges, three of whom always attend the king) are said and believed to be descended. With these came also Azarias, the son of Zadok the priest, and brought with him a Hebrew transcript of the law, which was delivered into his custody, as he bore the title of Nebrit, or High [Page 515] Priest; and this charge though the book itself was burnt with the church at Axum in the Moorish war of Adel, is still continued, as it said, in the lineage of Azarias, who are keepers of the church of Axum at this day. All Abyssinia was thereupon converted, and the Govern­ment of the church and state modelled according to what was then in use at Jerusalem.

Mr. Bruce has collected a chronological lift of the Princes who have reigned in that country, from the restoration of the line of Solomon, to the time he was there, in the year 1769. The kings of Abyssinia, are above all laws. They are supreme is all causes, eclesiastical and civil. The land and persons of their subjects are equally their property, and every inhabitant of their kingdom is born their slave: If he hears a higher rank, it is by the king's gift; for his nearest relations are ac­counted nothing better. Punishments inflicted on criminals are the cross or crucifixion, flaying alive, lapidation, plucking out the eyes: This last is inflicted usually on rebels. It is considered as a fun­damental law of the land, that none of the royal family, who have any bodily defect or deformity shall be allowed to succeed to the crown; and for this purpose any of the princes who may have escaped from the mountain of Wechne, and who are afterwards taken, are mutilated in some of their members, that thus they may be disqualified from suc­ceeding. The crown being hereditary in one family, but elective in the person, and polygamy being permitted, must have multiplied these heirs very much, and produced constant disputes, so that it was found necessary to provide a remedy for the anarchy and effusion of royal blood, which was otherwise inevitably to follow. The remedy was a bur [...]ne and gentle one; they were confined in a good climate, upon a high mountain, and maintained there at the public expense: They are taught to read and write, but nothing else. 750 Cloths for wrap­ping round them, 3000 ounces of Gold, which is 30,000 dollars are allowed by the state for their maintainance. These princes are hardly used, and in troublesome times, often put to death upon the smallest pretensions. It is said, that their revenue is sometimes so grossly mis­applied, that some of them die with hunger and cold. The situation however is not so distressing as that of the princes of the neighbouring kingdom of Sennaar or Nubia. There, no mountain is trusted with the confinement of their princes; but as soon as the father dies, the throats of all the collaterals, and all their descendants that can be laid hold of, are cut; and this is the case with all the states in the desert, west of Sennaar.

The Portuguese are sovereigns of the greatest part of the coast, and have a number of black princes their tributa [...]ies. There are some in­dependent princes who have extensive dominions, particularly the kings of Dahome and Widah, the most noted of any for the infamous slave trade. Upwards of 200 years have the European nations traded with Africa in human flesh, and encouraged in the Negroe countries, wars, rapine, desolation, and murder, that the West India islands might be supplied with that commodity. The annual exportation of those poor unhappy creatures from Africa for slaves has exceeded 100,000, numbers of whom are driven down like sheep, perhaps 1000 miles from the sea coast, who are generally inhabitants of Villages, that have been surrounded in the night by armed force, and carried off for sale.

[Page 516] A sea officer lately visited all the chiefs of the Negroes in the En­glish settlements, from Santa Apollonia to Athera, which is upwards of 250 miles, and found the police and punishment of all crimes sup­ported by the slave trade. Those who commit crimes on trespasses against their laws, are, at the decision of twelve elders, sold for slaves for the use of their government, and the support of their chiefs. These, adultery, and murder, are the highest crimes, and, whenever they are detected, subject the whole family to slavery. But any indi­vidual condemned to slavery for the crime of his relation, may redeem his own person, by furnishing two slaves in his room. Or when a man commits one of the above cardinal crimes, all the male part of his family are forfeited to slavery: If a woman, the female part is sold. "While on the coast" says me. "I saw instances of this sort so truly cruel, as made my very bosom bleed. This traffic in crimes makes the chiefs vigilant. Nor do our planters, who purchase them, use any pains to instruct them in religion, to make them amends for the oppression thus exercised on them. I am sorry to say they are un­naturally averse to every thing that tends to it; yet the Portuguese, French, and Spaniards, in their settlements, succeed in their attempts to instruct them, as much to the advantage of the commerce, as of re­ligion. It is for the sake of Christianity, and the advantages accom­panying it, that English slaves embrace every occasion of deserting to the settlements of these nations."

It is high time for the legislature to enforce and put an end to this most infamous of all trades, and so disgraceful to the Christian name, and so repugnant to the principles of a free government.

AFRICAN ISLANDS.

OF the African islands, some lie in the Eastern o [...] Indian Ocean, and some in the Western or Atlantic. We shall begin with those in the Indian Ocean; the chief of which are Zocotra, Babel­mandeb, Madagasear, the Comora Islands, Bourbon, and Mauritius.

ZOCOTRA. This island is situated in east lon. 53, north lat. 12. thirty leagues east of Cape Gardefoi, on the continent of Africa: It is eighty miles long, and fifty-four broad, and has two good harbours, where the European ships used formerly to put in when they lost their passage to India. It is a populous, plentiful country, yielding most of the fruits and plants that are usually found within the tropics, together with frankincense, gum-tragacanth, and aloe. The inhabit­ants are Mahometans, of Arab extraction, and are under the govern­ment of a prince or Sheik who is probably tributary to the Porte.

BABELMANDEB. The island of Bebelmandeb gives name to the straight at the entrance of the Red Sea, where it is situated in east lon. 44 30, north lat. 12, about four miles both from the Arabian and Abyssinian shores. The Abyssinians or Ethiopians, and the Arabians, formerly contended with great fury for the possession of this island, as it commands the entrance into the Red Sea, and preserves a commu­nication with the ocean. This strait was formerly the only passage [Page 517] through which the commodities of India found their way to Europe; but since the discovery of the Cape of Good Hope, the trade by the Red Sea is of little importance. The island is of little value, being a barren, sandy spot of earth, not five miles round.

COMORA. These Islands are, Joanna, Mayotta, Mo [...]lla, Angezeia, and Comora: situated between 41 and 46 east lon. and between 10 and 14 south lat. at an equal distance from Madagascar and the conti­nent of Africa. Joanna, the chief, and which claims sovereignty ov­er, and exacts tribute from the others; is about 30 miles long and 15 broad, and affords plenty of provisions, and such fruits as are produ­ced between the tropics. East-India ships, bound to Bombay, usual­ly touch here for refreshments. The inhabitants are negroes of the Mahometan persuasion, and entertain our seamen with great human­ity.

MADAGASCAR. This is the largest of the African islands, and is situated between 43 and 51 deg▪ east lon. and between 10 and 26 south lat. 300 miles south-east of the continent of Africa; it being near 1000 miles in length from north to south; and generally between 2 and 300 miles broad. The sea rolls with great rapidity, and is exceed­ing rough between this island and the continent of the Cape of Good Hope, forming a channel, or passage, through which all European ships, in their voyage to and from India, generally fall, unless prevented by storms.

Madagascar is a pleasant, desirable, and fertile country, abounding in sugar, honey, [...] fruit-trees, vegetables, valuable gums, corn, cat­tle, fowls, [...] [...], iron, some silver, copper, steel, and tin. It affords an agreeable variety of hills, vallies, woods, and champaign; watered with numerous rivers, and well stored with fish. The air is generally temperate, and said to be very healthy, though in a hot cli­mate. The inhabitants are of different complexions and religions: some white, some [...] some [...], some pagans. The whites, and those of a tawny complexion who inhabit the coast, are descended from the Arabs, as is evident from their language, and their religions [...] but here are no mosques, temples, nor any stated wor­ship, except that they offer sacrifices of beasts on particular occasions: as when sick, when they plant yams, or rice, when they hold their As­semblies, circumcise their children, declare war, enter into new-built houses, or bury their dead. Many of them observe the Jewish sab­bath, and give some account of the sacred history, the creation and fall of man, as also of Noah. Abraham, Moses, and David; from whence it is conjectured that they are descended of Jews who formerly settled here; though none knows how or when. This island was dis­covered by the Portuguese, and the French took possession of it in 1642; but the people disliking their government, were driven out in 16 [...]1: since which the natives have had the sole possession of the island, under a number of petty princes, who make war upon one another for slaves and plunder.

MA [...]RITIUS, or Maurice, was so called by the Dutch, who first touched here in 1598, in honour of prince Maurice their s [...]adtholder; but the French have given it the name of THE ISLE OF FRANCE. It is situated in east lon. 56, south lat. 20, south about 400 miles east of Mad­agalcar. It is of an oval form, about 150 miles in circumference, [Page 518] with a fine harbour, capable of holding fifty large ships, secure against any wind that blows, and 100 fathoms deep at the entrance. The cli­mate is extremely healthy and pleasant. The mountains, of which there are many, and some so high that their tops are covered with snow, produce the best ebony in the world, besides various other kinds of valuable wood, two of which greatly resemble ebony in qual­ity; one red, the other yellow as wax. The island is watered with several pleasant rivers well stocked with fish; and though the soil is none of the most fruitful, yields plenty of tobacco, rice, fruit, and seeds a great number of cattle, deer goats, and sheep. It was former­ly subject to the Dutch, but is now in possession of the French.

BOURBON. The Isle of Bourbon is situated in east lon. 54, south lat. 21, about 300 miles east of Madagascar, and is about 90 miles round. There are many good roads for shipping round Bourbon, particularly on the north and south sides; but hardly a single harbour where ships can ride secure against those hurricanes which blow du­ring the monsoons. Indeed the coast is so surrounded with blind rocks, sunk a few feet below the water, that coasting along shore is at all times dangerous. On the southern extremity is a volcano, which continually throws out flames, smoke, and sulphur, with a hideous roaring noise, terrible in the night to mariners. The climate here, though extremely hot, is healthy, being refreshed with cooling gales, that blow morning and evening from the sea and land: Sometimes, however, terrible hurricanes shake the whole island almost to its foun­dation; but generally without any other bad consequence than fright­ening the inhabitants. The island abounds in brooks and springs, and in fruits, grass, and cattle, with excellent tobacco (which the French have planted there,) aloes, white pepper, ebony, palm, and other kinds of wood, and fruit-trees. Many of the trees yield odorif­erous gums and resins, particularly benzoin of an excellent sort in great plenty. The rivers are well stocked with fish, the coast with land and sea tortoises, and every part of the country with horned cat­tle, as well as hogs and goats. Ambergris, coral, and the most beauti­ful shells, are found upon the shore. The woods are full of turtle doves, paroquets, pigeons, and a great variety of other birds, beauti­ful to the eye and pleasant to the palate. The French first settled here in the year 1672, after they were driven from the island of Mad­agascar. They have now some considerable towns in the island, with a governor; and here their East-India ships touch and take in refresh­ments.

There are a great many more small islands about Madagascar, and on the eastern coast of Africa, laid down in maps, but no where de­scribed.

Leaving therefore the eastern world and the Indies, we now turn round the Cape of Good Hope, which opens to our view the Atlantic, an immense ocean, lying between the two grand divisions of the globe, having Europe, Asia, and Africa, or the Old World, on the east; and America, or the New World, on the west. In this Ocean on the Af­rican coast are the following islands that have not yet been described, viz. St. Helena, Ascension, St. Matthew, St. Thomas, &c. Gorec, Cape-Verd, the Canary and Madeira islands.

[Page 519] ST. HELENA. The first island on this side the Cape is St. Helena, situated in west lon. 6▪4, south lat. 16, being 1200 miles west of the continent of Africa, and 1800 east of south America. The island is a rock about 21 miles in circumference, very high, and very steep, and only accessible at the landing-place, in a small valley at the east side of it, which is defended by batteries of gums planted level with the wat­er; and as the waves are perpetually dashing on the shore, it is gen­erally difficult landing even here. There is no other anchorage about the island but at Chappel Valley Bay; and as the wind always blows from the south-east, if a ship over-shoots the island ever so little, she cannot recover it again. The English plantations here afford pota­toes and yams, with figs, plantains, bananas, grapes, kidney-beans, and Indian corn: of the last, however, most part is destroyed by the rats, which harbour in the rocks, and cannot be destroyed: so that the flour they use is almost wholly imported from England; and in times of scarcity they generally eat yams and potatoes instead of bread. Though the island appears on every side a hard barren rock, yet it is agreeably diversified with hills and plains, adorned with plantations of fruit-trees and garden-stuff. They have great plenty of hogs, bul­locks, poultry, ducks, geese, and turkeys▪ with which they supply the sailors, taking in exchange shirts, drawers, or any light cloths, pieces of callico, silks, muslins, arrack, sugar, &c.

St. Helena is said to have been first discovered by the Portuguese on the festival of the Empress Helena, mother of the Emperor Constan­tine the Great, whose name it still bears. It does not appear that the Portuguese ever planted a colony here: And the English East-India company took possession of it in 1600, and held it without interrup­tion till the year 1673, when the Dutch took it by surprise. However, the English, under the command of Capt. Munden, recovered it again within the space of a year, and at the same time took three Dutch East-India ships that lay in the road. There are about 200 families in the island, most of them descended from English parents. The East-India ships take in water and fresh provisions here, in their way home; but the island is so small, and the wind so much against them outward bound, that they then very seldom see it.

The company's affairs are here managed by a governor, deputy-gov­ernor, and store-keeper, who have standing salaries allowed by the company, besides a public table well furnished, to which all comman­ders, masters of ships, and principal passengers are welcome.

ASCENSION. This island is situated in 7 deg. 40 min. south lat. 600 miles north west of St. Helena: It received its name from its being discovered by the Portuguese on Ascension-day; and is a mountain­ous, barren island, about 20 miles round, and uninhabited; but has a safe, convenient harbour, where the East-India ships generally touch to furnish themselves with turtles or tortoises, which are very plentiful here, and vastly large, some of them weighing above an hundred pounds each. The sailors going ashore in the night-time, frequently turn two or three hundred of them on their backs before morning; and are some­times so cruel, as to turn many more than they use leaving them to die on the shore.

ST. MATTHEW. This is a small island lying in 6-1 west lon. and 1-30 south lat. 300 miles to the north-east of Ascension, and was also discov­ered [Page 520] by the Portuguese, who planted and kept possession of it for some time; but afterwards deserted it, this island now remains uninhabited, having little to invite other nations to settle there, except a small lake of fresh water.

The four following islands, viz. St. THOMAS, PRINCES ISLAND, AN­NABOA and FERNANDOPO, are situated in the gulph of Cuinea, be­tween Congo and Benin; all of them were first discovered by the Por­tuguese, and belong still to them; they furnish shipping with fresh wa­ter and provisions as they pats by. And to the honor of the Portu­guese government, and disgrace of the west-India legislatures, there are 15,000 Negro Christians in St. Thomas', instructed to read and write, who daily attend divine worship, clean and well clothed.

CAPE VERD ISLANDS. These islands are so called from a cape of that name on the African coast, near the river Gambia, over against which they lie, at the distance of 300 miles, between 23 and 26 deg. west long. and 14 and 18 deg. north lat. They were discovered in the year 1460, by the Portuguese, and are about 20 in number; but some of them being only barren, uninhabited rocks, are not worth notice. St. Jago, Bravo, Fogo, Mavo, Bona [...]ista, Sal, St. Nicholas, St. Vin­cent, Santa Cru [...], and St. Amonio, are the most considerable, and are subject to the Portuguese. The all, generally speaking, is very hot, and in some of them very unwholesome. They are inhabited by Europeans, or the descendants of Europeans and negroes.

St. Jago, where the Portuguese viceroy resides, is the most fruitful, best inhabited, and largest of them all, being 150 miles in circumfe­rence, yet it is mountainous, and has much barren land in it. Its prod­uce is sugar, cotton, some wine, Indian corn, cocoa-nuts, oranges and other tropical fruits, but the plant of most consequence is madder, which grows in abundance among the cliffs. Here is plenty of roots, garden-stuffs, hogs, and poultry, and some of the prettiest green mon­kies, with black faces, that are to be met with any where. Baya, or Praya (famous for an action between an English and French squadron the last war) situated on the east side, has a good port, and is seldom without ships, those outward bound to Guinea or the East-Indies, from England, Holland and France, often touching here for water and re­freshments.

In the Island of Mayo, or May, immense quantities of salt are mado by the head of the fun from the lea water, which at spring sides, is re­ceived into a fort of pan, formed by a sand bank, which runs along the coast for two or three miles. Here the English drive a considerable trade for salt, and have commonly a man of war to guard the vessels that come to load with it, which in some years amount to a hundred or more. The salt costs nothing, except for raking it together, wheel­ing it out of the pond, and carrying it on asses to the boats, which is done at a very cheap rate. Several English ships come higher for a freight of asses, which they carry to Barbadoes and other British plan­tations. The inhabitants of this Island, even the governor and priests, are all negroes, and speak the Portuguese language. The negro gover­nor expects a small present from every commander that loads salt, and is pleased to be invited aboard then ships. The sea water is so clear on this coast, that an English sailor, who dropped his watch, perceiv­ed it at the bottom, though many fathoms deep, and had it brought up by one of the natives, who are in general expert at diving.

[Page 521] The island of Fogo is remarkable for being a volcano, continually sending up sulphureous exhalations; and sometimes the flame breaks forth like AEtna, in a terrible manner, throwing out pumice stones that annoy all the adjacent parts.

GORER is situated within cannon shot of Cape Verd, N. lat. 14 [...]43, W. lon. 17-20, and was so called by the Dutch, from an island and town of the same name in Holland. It is a small spot not ex­pending two miles in circumference, but its importance arises from its situation for trade so near Cape Verd, and it has been therefore a bone of contention between European nations. It was first possessed by the Dutch, from whom, in 1663, it was taken by the English; but in 1665 it was retaken by the Dutch, and in 1677 subdued by the French, in whose possession it remained till the year 1759, when it was reduced by commodore Keppel, but restored to the French at the treaty of peace in 1763. It was retaken by the English in the last war, but again restored at the peace of 1763.

CANARIES.] The Canaries, anciently called the Fortunate Islands, are seven in number, and situated between 12 and 19 degrees west lon. and between 27 and 29 degrees north lat. about 150 miles south­west of Morocco. Their particular names are, Palma, Hiero, Go­mora, Teneriffe, Grand Canaria, Fuertuventura, and Langarote. These islands enjoy a pure, temperate air, and abound in the most de­licious fruits, especially grapes, which produce those rich wines that obtain the name of the Canary, whereof the greatest part is exported to England, which, in time of peace, is computed at ten thousand hogsheads annually. The Canaries abound with those beautiful lit­tle birds that bear their name, and are now so common and to much admired in Europe; but their wild notes in their native land far ex­cel those in a cage or foreign clime.

Grand Canary, which communicates its name to the whole, is about 150 miles in circumference, and so extremely fertile as to produce two harvests in the year. Teneriffe, the largest of these, islands next to that of Grand Canary, is about 120 miles round; a fertile coun­try, abounding in corn, wine, and oil; though it is pretty much en­cumbered with mountains, particularly the Peak. Captain Glass ob­serves, that in coming in with this island, in clear weather, the Peak may be easily discerned at 120 miles distance, and in sailing from it at 150 miles. The Peak is an ascent in the form of a sugar-loaf, a­bout fifteen miles in circumference, and according to the account of Sprat, bishop of Rochester, published in the Philosophical Trans­octions, near three miles perpendicular; but lately ascertained to be only 13,265 feet. This mountain is a volcano, and sometimes thrown out such quantities of sulphur and melted ore, as to convert the rich­est lands into barren deserts. These islands were first discovered and planted by the Carthaginians; but the Romans destroying that state, put a stop to the navigation on the west coast of Africa, and the Ca­naries lay concealed from the rest of the world, until they were again discovered by the Spaniards in the year 1405, to whom they still be­long. It is remarkable, that though the natives resembled the Afri­cans in their [...]ature and complexion, when the Spaniards first came among them, their language was different from that spoken on the continent; they retained none of their customs, were masters of no science, and did not know there was any country in the world besides their own.

[Page 522] MADEIRAS.] The three islands called the Madeiras, are situated, according to the author of Anson's voyage, in a fine climate in 32-27 north lat. and from [...]8-30 to 19-30 west lon. about 100 miles north of the Canaries, and as many west of Sallee Morocco. The largest, from which the rest derive the general name of Maderias, or rather Mattera, on account of its being formerly almost covered with wood, i [...] about 75 miles long, 60 broad, and 1 [...]0 in circumference. It is composed of one continued hill, of a considerable height, extending from east to west; the declivity of which, on the south side, is culti­vated and interspersed with vineyards; and in the midst of this slope the merchants have fixed their country seats, which form a very agreeable prospect. There is but one considerable town in the whole island, which is named Fonchial, seated on the south part of the island, at the bottom of a large bay; towards the sea, it is defended by a high wall, with a battery of cannon, and is the only place where it is possible for a boat to land; and even here the beach is covered with large stones, and a violent surf continually beats upon it.

Though this island seems to have been known to the ancients, yet it lay concealed for many generations, and was at length discovered by the Portuguese in 1519; but others after that it was first discover­ed by an Englishman, in the year 1344. Be that as it may, the Por­tuguese took possession of it, and are still almost the only people who inhabit it. The Portuguese, at their first landing, finding it little better than a thick forest, rendered the ground capable of cultivation by setting fire to this wood; and it is now very fertile, producing in great abundance the richest wine, sugar, the most delicate fruits, es­pecially oranges, lemons, and pomgranates; together with corn, honey, and wax; it abounds also with boars and other wild beasts, and with all sorts of sowls, besides numerous groves of cedar trees, and those that yield dragon's blood, mastic, and other guns. The in­habitants of this isle make the best sweetmeats in the world, and suc­ceed wonderfully in preserving citrons and oranges, and in making marmalade and perfumed pastes, which exceed those of Genoa. The sugar they make is extremely beautiful, and smells naturally of violets. This indeed is said to be the first place in the West where that man­ufacture was set on foot, and from thence it was carried to the Bra­sils in America. The Portuguese not finding it so profitable as at first, have pulled up the greatest part of their sugar canes, and planted vineyards in their stead, which produce several sorts of excellent wine, particularly that which bears the name of the island, malmsey, and tent; of all which the inhabitants make and sell prodigious quan­tities. No less than 20,000 hogsheads of Madeira, it is said, are year­ly exported, the greatest part of the West Indies, especially to Barba­does, the Madeira wine not only enduring a hot climate better than any other, but even being improved when exposed to the sun in bar­rels after the bung is taken out. It is said no venomous animal can live here. Of the two other islands, one is called Port Santo, which lies as a small distance from Madeira, is about eight miles in compass, and extremely fertile. It has very good harbours, where ships may ride with safety against all winds, except the southwest; and is fre­quented by Indiamen outward and homeward bound. The other island is an inconsiderable barren rock.

[Page 523] AZORES.] Leaving the Madeiras, with which we close the ac­count of Africa, we continue our course westward through this im­mense ocean, which brings us to the Azores, or as they are called, the Western Islands, that are situated between 25 and 32 degrees west lon. and between 37 and 40 degrees north lat. 900 miles west of Por­tugal, and as many east of Newfoundland, lying almost in the midway between Europe and America. They are nine in number, and are named Santa Maria, St. Miguel or St. Michael, Tercera, St. George▪ Graciosa, Fayal, Pico, Flores, and Corvo. They were discovered in the middle of the 15th century, by Joshua Vander Berg, a merchant of Bruges in Flanders, who in a voyage to Lisbon, was by stress of weather driven to these islands, which he found destitute of inhabi­tants, and called them the Flemish Islands. On his arrival at Lisbon, he boasted of this discovery, on which the Portuguese set sail immedi­ately, and took possession of them, to whom they still belong, and were called in general the Azores, from the great number of hawks and falcons found among them. All these islands enjoy a very clear and serene sky, with a salubrious air; but are exposed to violent earth­quakes, from which they have frequently suffered; and also the in­undations of surrounding waves. They are, however, extremely fer­tile in corn, wine, and a variety of fruits; also in cattle, fowl, and fish. It is said that no poisonous or noxious animals breed on the Azores, and that if carried thither they will expire in a few hours.

St. Michael, which is the largest, being near 100 miles in circum­ference, and containing 50,000 inhabitants, was twice invaded and plundered by the English in the reign of queen Elizabeth. Tercera is the most important of these islands, on account of its harbour, which is spacious, and has good anchorage, but is exposed to the southeast winds. It is generally visited by their homeward bound fleets from Brazil, Africa, and the East Indies. Its capital town, Angra, contains a cathedral and five churches, and is the residence of the governor of these islands, as well as the bishop.

[Page 524]

NEW DISCOVERIES.

IN this place, I shall mention those only which have been made in the eastern hemisphere, having given an account of the others at the close of our description of America. The parts discovered in th [...] hemisphere that j [...]erit particular notice, are New Holland, New Guinea, New Britain, and New Ireland. We shall also here and a more particular account of the Sandwich Islands.

CONTINENT OF NEW HOLLAND.

SITUATION AND EXTENT.
Length 2400 Miles. between 110° and 153° E. Lon.
Breadth 2300 Miles. 11° and 43° S. Lat.

IT lies S. E. of the island of Java, and South of New Guinea, in the Great South Sea. Fore more than a century after its first discov­ery by the Dutch, in 1616, it was thought to be a part of a vast south­ern continent, the existence of which had been a favourite idea with many experienced navigators. The great extent of New Holland, gives it an unquestionable claim to the name of CONTINENT.

The principal Capes are Cape York, and South Cape, which form the extreme N. and S. points of the Continent. Between these Capes, along the Eastern shore, are Cape Flattery, Cape Gloucester, Cape Townsend, Sandy Cape, Smokely Cape, and Cape Howe. The most noted Bays are Botany Bay on the East side of the Continent, Bate­man Bay, south of it, and Glass house Bay, Harvey's, Keppel, Hali­fax, and Trinity Bays, all between Botany Bay, and York Cape, on the Eastern shore. Shark Bay lies on the west side of the Continent, about south lat. 25°. The capacious gulf of Carpentaria, discovered in 1618, lies on the North; York Cape, and Arneim's land, make the two points of it.

The whole Eastern coast of this Continent, except the very South­ern point, was discovered and explored by Capt. Cook, in 1770, and is called NEW SOUTH WALES. It is claimed by England on the old principle of Prior discovery.

From want of opportunity to examine, no considerable rivers have yet been discovered; but from the appearance of the country, it is conjectured that it is well watered. Two kinds of Gum are produc­ed here, called red and yellow Gums; the former resembles Sang [...]s Droconis but is perfectly soluble in water. It is drawn from the tree by tapping, or taken out of the veins of the wood, when dry, in which it is copiously distributed. It is a very powerful rem­edy in the dissentary.

The yellow Gum, as it is called, is strictly resin, not being at all soluble in water: It has the resemblance of Gamboge, but has not the property of staining. The plant that produces it is low and small, with long grassy leaves; but the fructification of it shoots out in a singular manner from the centre of the leaves, on a single straight stem, to the height of twelve or fourteen feet. Of this stem, which is like some of the Reed Class, the natives usually make their spears. The resin is generally dug up out of the soil, under the tree, not col­lected from it, and may perhaps be that which Talisman called "Gum Lac of the Ground.'

[Page 525] There are a great variety of birds and animals found here, several of which, before the discovery of this place, were non descripts. *

There Natives go always uncovered, although it is observed they suffer sometimes from the cold. Those on the borders of the sea coast subsist principally on fish. On that part of the coast which the English have invaded, the natives have retired, and from, ac­counts, are much distressed for provision. A kind of twine is man­ufactured among them, which, with their fishing nets, is very neatly made from the flax plant. This plant promises to be very valuable for the purpose of making cordage, and the finest manufactures. It grows in Norfolk island (a small island N. W. of New Holland, on which the English are likewise making a settlement) in great plenty and with such luxuriance as to reach the height of eight feet.

Their cutting implements are made of stone. Several figures of animals, of shields and weapons, and even of men, have been seen curved upon the rocks roughly, indeed, but sufficiently well executed to indicate the object intended by them. On the top of the hills, is the figure of a man in the attitude assumed by them, when they be­gin to dance, executed in a still superiour stile. That the arts of im­ [...]tion should thus procode in any degree those of [...]ssity, [...] to be an exception to the rules laid down in the theory for the progress of invention. Though they have made no attempts towards clothing themselves, they are by no means insensible of the cold, and appear very much to dislike the rain. During a shower, they have been ob­served to cover their heads with pieces of bark, and to shiver ex­ceedingly. Their method of kindling fire is probably very labori­ous, as they are rarely seen without a fire actually, made, or a piece of burning wood which they carry with them from place to place, and even in their canoes. The perpetual fires which in some countries formed a part of the national religion, had perhaps no other origin than a similar inability to produce it at pleasure, and if we suppose the original flame to have been made from lightning, the fiction of its coming down from heaven, will be found to deviate very little from the truth.

In May, 1787, the British government fitted out a squadron of eleven vessels, with 8 [...]0 convicts, under the the command of Arthur Phillip, Esq. in order to form a settlement on this Continent. The situation determined upon has been named Port Jackson; south lat. 32° 52′, east lon. from Grenwich, 159° 19′ 30″. This place is about 9 miles from Botany Bay, and has a harbour capable of containing 1000 fail of the line in perfect security. A plan of a town has been regularly laid out, and from the latest accounts, the prospect was flat­tering to the new settlers.

On the first arrival of the English, the natives were found amica­ble, hospitable, unaccustomed to act with treachery, or to take the least advantage, and every precaution was taken to prevent this har­mony from being interrupted; but from some disagreement with in­dividuals, or what is more probable, a dislike of the encroachments on their territories, they appear to avoid any intercourse with their new neighbours.

[Page 526] The natives, like all other barbarous nations, have some customs peculiar to themselves. Governour Phillip, in the interviews he had with the natives, observed that the women in general had lost two joints from the little finger of their left hands. He was not able to find out the occasion of this mutilation, but noticed that it was con­fined to the females. *

The men are distinguished in a different manner: Their fingers are not mutilated. but most of them want the right front tooth in the upper jaw. They also have a custom of perforating the cartilage that divides the nostrils, and thrusting through it a long bone or stick.

The women are not treated with much tenderness; and are kept in great subordination by their husbands. They appear to be em­ployed chiefly in the canoes, in which women have frequently been seen with young children at the breast.

The inhabitants are not numerous, and are of a chocolate colour, middle stature, and very active and courageous. Their food is chief­ly fish, birds of various kinds, yams, fruit, and the flesh of the Kan­garoo, an animal resembling the Opossum, and peculiar to this Con­tinent. Their weapons are spears and lances of different kinds, which they throw with great dexterity. They also use shields of an oblong form, made of bark.

THE NEW HEBRIDES.

THIS name was given by Captain Cook, to a cluster of islands, the most northerly of which was seen by Quiros, the Spanish navigator, in 1606, and by him named Tierra del Espiritu Santo. From that time, till Baugainville's voyage in 1768, and Capt. Cook's voyage in the Endeavour, in 1769, this land was supposed to be part of a great southern Continent, called Terra Ausralis incognita. But when Capt. Cock had sailed round New Zealand, and along the eastern coast of New Holland, this opinion was fully confuted. On his next voyage, in the Resolution, he resolved to explore those parts accurately; and accordingly, in 1774, besides ascertaining the extent and situation of these islands, he discovered several in the group, which were before unknown. The New Hebrides are situated between the latitudes of 14° 29′. and 20° 4′ south; and between 169° 41′ and 170° 21′ east lon­gitude. They consist of the following islands, some of which have re­ceived names from the different European navigators, and others re­tain the names which they bear among the natives, viz. Tierra del Espiritu Santo, Mallicolla, St. Bartholomew, Isle of Lepers, Aurcra, Whitsuntide, Ambrym, Immer, Apeee. Three Hills, Sandwich, Mon­tagu, Hinchinbrook, Shepherd, Eorromanga, Irronan, Annatom, and Tanna.

Not far distant from the New Hebrides, and southwestward of them, lies NEW CATEDONIA, a very large island, first discovered by Capt. Cook, in 1774. It is about 87 leagues long, but its breadth is not considerable, nor any where exceeds ten leagues. It is inhabited by a race of stout, tall, well proportioned Indians, of a swarthy or dark chesnut brown. A few leagues distant are two small islands, called the Islands of Pines, and Botany Island.

[Page 527]

NEW GUINEA,

Till the late discoveries, was thought to be the north coast of an extensive continent, and to be joined to New Holland; but Capt. Cook discovered a strait between them which runs northeast, through which he sailed. Thus it was found to be a long narrow island, ex­tending north east, from the second degree of south latitude to the twelfth, and from one hundred and thirty one, to one hundred and fifty degrees east longitude; but in one part it does not appear to be above fifty miles broad. The country consists of a mixture of very high hills and vallies, interspersed with groves of cocoa nut trees, plantains, bread fruit, and most of the trees, shrubs, and plants, that are found in the other South Sea islands. It affords from the sea a variety of delightful prospects. The inhabitants make nearly the same appearance as the New Hollanders on the other side the straits.

North of New Guinea, is NEW BRITAIN, which is situated in the 4th degree of south latitude, and 152° 19′, east longitude from Green­wich. It was supposed to be part of an imaginary Continent, till Capt. Dampier found it to be an island, and sailed through a strait which divides it from New Guinea. Capt. Carteret, in his voyage round the world, 1767, found that it was of much less extent that it was till then imagined to be, by failing through another strait to the north, which separates it from a long island, to which he gave the name of New Ireland. There are many high hills in New Britain, and it abounds with large and stately trees. To the eastward of New Britain, and in both the above straits, are many islands, most of which are said to be extremely fertile, and to abound with plantains and co­coa nut trees.

NEW IRELAND

Extends in length, from the north east to the south east, about two hundred and seventy miles, but is in general very narrow. It abounds with a variety of trees and plants, and with many pigeons, parrots, rooks, and other birds▪ The inhabitants are black, and woolly head­ed, like the negroes of Guinea, but have not like them, flat noses and thick lips. Northwestward of New Ireland, a cluster of islands was seen by Capt. Carteret, lying very near each other, and supposed to consist of twenty or thirty in number. One of these, which is of a very considerable extent, was named NEW HANOVER; but the rest of the cluster received the name of the ADMIRALTY ISLANDS.

SANDWICH ISLANDS.

BESIDES the voyages already mentioned, another voyage was performed by Capt. Cook and Capt. Clerke, in the Resolution and Discovery, during the years 1776, 1777, 1778, and 1779, in search of a north west passage between the continents of Asia and America. After they had arrived at the Cape of Good Hope, they proceeded from thence in New Holland: In this course they discovered two islands, which Capt. Cook called Prince Edward's isles. The largest about 15 leagues in circuit, is in lat. 46° 53′ south, lon. 37° 46′: The other about 9 leagues in circuit, lat. 46° 40′ and long. 33° 8′, E. both barren and almost covered with snow. From thence they proceeded to New Zealand, and afterwards they visited the Friendly and the So­ciety Isles. In January 1777, they arrived at the Sandwich isles, which are twelve in number, and are situated between 22° 15′ and 18° 53′ N. lat. The air of these islands is in general salubrious, and many of [Page 528] the vegetable productions are the same with those of the Society and Friendly Isles. The inhabitants are of the middle size, stout and well made, and their complexion in general a brown olive. Owhyhee is in circumference about 300 English miles, and the number of inhabi­tants is computed at 150,000. The others are large and well peo­pled. The natives are described as of a mild and friendly temper and carriage, and in hospitality to strangers not exceeded by the in­habitants of the Friendly Isles. On the 7th of February, being nearly in lat. 44° 33′ north, and lon. 235° 36′ east, they saw part of the Amer­ican continent bearing north east.

Capt. Cook afterwards discovered King George's Sound, which is situated on the north west coast of America, and is extensive; that part of it where the ships under his command anchored, is in lat. 49° 36′ no [...], and lon. 233° 28′ east. The whole sound it surrounded by high land, which in some places appears very broken and rugged, and is in general covered with wood to the very top. They found the inhabitants here rather below the middle size, and their complex­ions approaching to a copper colour. On the 12th of May, they discovered Sandwich Sound, in lat. 59° 54′ north. The har­bour in which the ships anchored, appeared to be almost sur­rounded with high land, which was covered with snow; and here they were visited by some of the Americans in their canoes. They afterwards proceeded to the island of Unalaschka, and after their de­parture from thence still continued to trace the coast. They arrived on the 20th of August 1778, in lat. 70 deg. 54 min. lon. 194 deg. 55 min. where they found themselves almost surrounded with ice, and the farther they proceeded to the eastward, the closer the ice became compacted. They continued labouring among the ice till the 25th, when a storm came on, which made it dangerous for them to proceed; and a consultation was therefore held on board the Resolution, as soon as the violence of the gale abated, when it was resolved, that as this passage was impracticable for any useful purpose of navigation, which was the great object of the voyage, it should be prosecuted no farther; and especially on account of the condition the ships were in, the approach of winter, and their great distance from any known place of refreshment. The voyage, indeed, afforded sufficient evi­dence, that no practicable passage exists between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans towards the North; and this voyage also ascertained the western boundaries of the great continent of America. On their return it unfortunately happened, that the celebrated and able naviga­tor, Capt. Cook, was killed in an affray with the natives, by an act of sudden resentment and fear, rather than from a bad disposition, on the island of Owhyhee, the largest of the Sandwich isles, on the 14th of February 1779; and his death was universally regretted, not only in Great Britain, but also in other parts of Europe, by those to whom his merits and public services were known. In his last voyage he had explored the coast of America, from 42 deg. 27 min. to 70 deg. 40 min. 57 sec. north. After the death of Capt. Cook, the command devolved on Capt. Clerke, who died at sea on his return to the south­ward on the 22d day of August 1779. The two ships returned home by the Cape of Good Hope, and on the 5th of October 1780, anchor­ed at the Note.

[Page]

A NEW GEOGRAPHICAL TABLE.

Containing the Names and Situations of the chief Cities, Towns, Seas, Gulfs, Says, Straits, Capes, and other remarkable Places, in the known World. Collected from the most authentic Charts, Maps, and Observations.

Names of Places. Provinces. Countries. Quarter. Lat. Long.
        D. M. D. M.
ABheville Picardy France Europe 50° 7′ N. 1° 54′ E.
Aberdeen Aberdeenshire Scotland Europe 57-22 N. 1-40 W.
Abo Finland Sweden Europe 60-27 N. 22-18 E.
Acapulco Mexico North America 17-10 N. 101-20 W.
Aahem Sumatra East Indies Asia 5-22 N. 95-29 E.
Adrianople Romania Turkey Europe 42-00 N. 26-30 E.
Adriatick sea, or Gulf of Venice Between Italy and Turkey Europe Mediterranean Sea.
Adventure (Isle) Pacific Ocean Asia 17-05 S. 144-12 W.
Agde Languedoc France Europe 43-18 N. 3-33 E.
Agen Guienne France Europe 44-12 N. 0-40 E.
St. Agnes (lights) Scillies Atlantic ocean Europe 49-56 N. 6-41 W.
Agra Agra East India Asia 26-43 N. 76-49 E.
Air Airshire Scotland Europe 65-30 N. 4-35 W.
Aix Provence France Europe 43-31 N. 5-31 E.
Albany New York United States America 42-48 N. 73-30 W.
Alby Languedoc France Europe 43-55 N. 2-13 E.
Aleppo Syria Turkey Asia 35-45 N. 37-25 E.
Alexandretta Syria Turkey Asia 36-35 N. 36-25 E.
Alexandria Lower Egypt Turkey Africa 31-11 N. 30-21 E.
ALEXANDRIA Virginia United States America 38-45 N. 77-10 W.
Algiers Algiers Barbary Africa 36-49 N. 2-17 E.
Amboyna Amboyna Isle East India Asia 4-25 S. 127-25 E.
Ambrym Isle South Pacific ocean Asia 16-09 S. 168-17 E.
Amiens Picardy France Europe 49-53 N. 2-22 E.
AMSTERDAM Holland Netherlands Europe 52-22 N. 4-49 E.
Amsterdam Isle Pacific ocean Asia 21-09 S. 174-51 W.
Ancona March of Ancona Italy Europe 48-37 N. 13-35 E.
Angra Tercera Isle Atlantic ocean Europe 38-39 N. 27-07 W.
ANNAPOLIS Maryland U. States America 39-02 N. 76-40 W.
Antigua (Saint John's town) Antigua Isle Carib▪ sea N. American 17-04 N. 62-04 W.
Antioch Svria Turkey Asia 36-30 N. 36-40 E.
Antwerp Brabant Netherlands Europe 51-13N. 04-27 E.
Ape (Isle) Pacific Ocean Asia 16-46 S. 168-32 E.
Archangel Dwina Russia Europe 64-34 N. 38-59 E.
Archipelago Islands of Greece Europe   Mediterranean Sea.
Ascension Isle   South Atlantic Ocean 7-56 N. 14-27 W.
Astracan Astracan Russia Asia 46-00 N. 51-00 E.
Athens Achaia Turkey Europe 38-05 N. 23-57 E.
Augusta Georgia United States America [...]3-39 N. 82 9 W.
St. Augustin Madagascar South Indian sea Africa 23-35 S. 43 13 E.
Augustine E. Florida North America 29-51 N. 81-40 W.
Ava Ava East India Asia 20-20 N. 9 [...]-30 E.
Asignon Provence France Europe 43-57 N. 04-53 E.
A [...]ora Isle South Pacific ocean Asia 1 [...]-08 S. 168- [...]2 E.
BAgdad Eyraca Arabia Turkey Asia 33-20 N. 43-51 E.
Balasore Orixa East India Asia 21-20 N. 86-05 E.
B [...]lbee Syria Turkey Asia 33-30 N. 37-00 E.
Baldivia Chili South America 39-35 S. 82-20 W.
Baltie sea between Germ. & Swed. Europe Atlantic Ocean.
BALTIMORE Maryland United States America 39-21 N. 77-48 W.
Barbuda isle   Atlantic ocean N. America 17-49 N. 61-55 W.
Barcelona Catalonia Spain Europe 41-26 N. 02-18 E.
Basil Basil Switzerland Europe 47-35 N. 07-34 E.
Basseterre Guadaloupe Canb. sea N. America 15-59 N. 61-54 W.
Bassera Eyraca Arabia Turkey Asia 30-45 N. 47-00 E.
Bastia Corsica Italy Europe 42-20 N. 09-40 E.
Batavia Java East India Asia 06-10 S. 106-56 E.
Bath Somersetshire England Europe 51-22 N. 02-16 W.
Bay of Biscay Coast of France Europe Atlantic Ocean.
Bay of Bengal Coast of India Asia Indian Ocean.
Bayeux Normandy France Europe 49-16 N. 00-47 E.
Bayonne Gascony France Europe 43-29 N. 01-25 W.
Belfast Ulster Ireland Europe 54-30 N. 06-30 W.
Belgrade Servia Turkey Europe 45-00 N. 21-20 E.
Bencoole [...] Sumatra East India Asia 03-49 S. 102-05 E.
Bender Basiarabia Turkey Europe 46-40 N. 29-00 E.
Bennigton Vermont United States N. America 42-42 N. 74-10 W.
BERLIN Brandenburg Germany Europe 52-32 N. 13-31 E.
Bermudas Bermuda Isles Atlantic ocean N. America 32-25 N. 63-23 W.
Bern Bern Switzerland Europe 47-00 N. 07-20 E.
Berwick Berwickshire Scotland Europe 55-48 N. 01-45 W.
Bethlehem Pennlylvania United States America 40-37 N. 75-14 W.
B [...]lboa Biscay Spain Europe 43-26 N. 03-18 W.
Birmigham Warwickshire England Europe 52-30 N. 01-50 W.
Black, kuxin [...], sea Turkey in Europe and Asia    
Bokharia Usbeck Tartary Asia 39-15 N. 67-00 E.
Bolabola Isle Pacific ocean Asia 16-32 S. 151-47 W.
Bologna Bolognese Italy Europe 44-29 N. 21-26 E.
Bologne Picardy France Europe 50-43 N. 1-31 E.
Bolschenskoi Siberia Russia Asia 52-54 N. 156-42 E.
Bombay Bombay Isle East India Asia 18-56 N. 72-43 E.
Borroughston­ness Linhthgowshire Scotland Europe 55-48 N. 03-44 W.
Boston L [...]nshire England Europe 53-10 N. 00-25 E.
BOSTON Massachusetts United States America 42-23 N. 71- [...]4 W.
Bourbon Isle South Indian ocean Africa 20-51 S. 5 [...]-25 E.
Bourdeaux Guienne France Europe 44-50 N. 00-29 W.
Breda Brabant Netherlands Europe 51-40 N. 04-40 E.
Bremen Lower Saxony Germany Europe 53-25 N. 08-20 E.
BRESLAU Silesia Bohemia Europe 51-03 N. 17-13 E.
B [...]est Bretany France Europe 48-22 N. 04-25 E.
Bridgetown Barbadoes Atlantic ocean N. America 13-05 N. 58-03 W.
Bristol Sometletshire England Europe 51-33 N. 02-40 W.
British sea Between [...] and Germ. Europe Atlantic Ocean
Bru [...]s Flanders Netherlands Europe 51-16 N. 03-05 E.
Bru [...]wick Low Saxony Germany Europe 52-30 N. 10-30 E.
[...] Brabant Netherland. Europe 50-51 N. 04-26 E.
[...] Lower Hungary Europe 47-40 N. 19-20 E.
B [...]nes Ayres La Plata Brasil S. America 34-35 S. 58-26 E.
B [...]ka [...]as [...] Walachia Turkey Europe 44-26 N. 26-13 E.
Burlington Jersey North America 40-08 N. 79-00 W.
CAbelloport Terra Firma South America 10-03 N. 67-27 W.
CACHAO Tonquin East India Asia 21-30 N. 105-00 E.
Cadiz Andalusia Spain Europe 36-31 N. 6-06 W.
Ca [...]n Normandy France Europe 49-11 N. 0-16 W.
Cagliari Sardinia Italy Europe 39-25 N. 9-38 E.
Cahors Guienne France Europe 44-26 N. 1-32 E.
Cairo Lower Egypt Africa 30-02 N. 31-23 E.
Calais Picardy France Europe 50-57 N. 1-55 E.
Calcutta Bengal East India Asia 22-34 N. 88-34 E.
Calao Peru South America 12-01 N. 76-53 W.
Calmar Smaland Sweden Europe 56-40 N. 16-26 E.
Cambray Cambresis Netherlands Europe 50-10 N. 3-18 E.
Cambeltown Argyleshire Scotland Europe 55-30 N. 5-40 W.
Cambodia Cambodia East India Asia 13-30 N. 105-00 E.
Cambridge Cambridgeshire England Europe 52-12 N. 0-09 E.
Cambridge Massachusetts United States America 42-23 N. 71-07 W.
Canary, N. E. [Point Canary Isles Atlantic ocean Africa 28-23 N. 15-33 W.
Candia Candia Islands Mediterr. Sea Europe 35-18 N. 25-23 E.
Candy Ceylon Indian ocean Asia 7-54 N. 79-00 E.
Canso Port Nova Scotia North America 45-20 N. 60-50 W.
Canterbury Kent England Europe 51-16 N. 1-15 E.
Canton Canton China Asia 23-07 N. 113-07 E.
Cape Clear Irish Sea Ireland Europe 51-18 N. 11-10 W.
—Comorin On this side the Ganges East India Asia 7-56 N. 78-10 E.
—Finisherre Galicia Spain Europe 42-51 N. 9-12 W.
—Florida East Florida North America 24-57 N. 80-30 W.
—of Good Hope Hottentots Cassraria Africa 34-29 S. 18-28 E.
—Horn Terra del Fuego Island South America 55-58 S. 67-21 W.
—St. Vincent Algarve Portugal Europe 37-02 N. 8-57 W.
—Verd   Negroland Africa 14-45 N. 17-28 W.
Cardigan Cardiganshire Wales Europe 52-10 N. 4-38 W.
Carlescroon Schonen Sweden Europe 56-20 N. 15-31 E.
Cartisle Cumberland England Europe 54-47 N. 2-33 W.
Carthage Ruins Tunis Barbary Africa 36-30 N. 9-00 E.
Carthagena Terra Firma South America 10-26 N. 75-21 W.
Carthagena Murcia Spain Europe 37-37 N. 1-03 W.
Casan Casan Siberia Asia 55-43 N. 49-13 E.
Caspian Sea Russia Tartary Asia    
Cassel Hesse Cassel Germany Europe 51-19 N. 9-34 E.
Castres Languedoc France Europe 43-37 N. 2-19 E.
St. Catherine Isle Atlantic Ocean S. America 27-35 S. 49-12 W.
Cattegate Between Swed. and Den. Europe Atlantic Ocean.
Cavan Ulster Ireland Europe 54-51 N. 7-18 W.
Cayenne Cayenne Isle South America 4-56 N. 52-10 W.
Cet [...]e Languedoc France Europe 43-23 N. 3-47 E.
Ceuta Fez Morocco Africa 35-04 N. 6-30 W.
Chalons Burgundy France Europe 46-46 N. 4-56 E.
Chandernagore Bengal East India Asia 22-51 N. 88-34 E.
CHARLESION South Carolina United States America 32-35 N. 79-22 W.
Charlestown Massachusetts United States America 42-24 N. 70-32 W.
Charlton Isle Hundson's Bay N. America 52-03 N. 79-00 W.
Chartres Orleannois France Europe 48-26 N. 1-33 E.
Cherbourg Normandy France Europe 49-38 N. 1-33 W.
Chester Cheshire England Europe 53-15 N. 3-00 W.
Christmas Sound Terra del Fuego South America 55-21 N. 69-57 W.
St. Christopher's Isle Caribbean Sea N. America 17-15 N. 62-38 W.
Civita Vecchia Patro Di S. Petro Italy Europe 42-05 N. 11-51 E.
Cleske's Isles Atlantic Ocean S. America 55-05 S. 34-37 W.
Clermont Auvergne France Europe 45-46 N. 3-10 E.
Colmar Alface France Europe 48-04 N. 7-27 E.
Cologne Elec. of Cologne Germany Europe 50-55 N. 7-10 E.
Constance Suabia Germany Europe 47-37 N. 9-12 E.
CONSTANTI­NOPLE Romania Turkey Europe 41-01 N. 28-58 E.
COPENHACEN Zealand Isle Denmark Europe 55-40 N. 12-40 E.
Corinth Morea Turkey Europe 37-30 N. 23-00 E.
CORK Munster Ireland Europe 51-53 N. 8-23 W.
Coventry Warwickshire England Europe 52-25 N. 1-25 W.
Cow [...]s Isle of Wight England Europe 50-46 N. 1-24 W.
Cracow Little Poland Poland Europe 50-10 N. 19-55 E.
Cre [...]smanster Archduchy of Austria Germany Europe 48-03 N. [...]4-22 E.
Common Isle N. Pacific Ocean Asia 31-40 N. 121-0 [...] E.
Curassou Curassou Isle West India America 11-56 N. 68-20 W.
Cusco Peru South America 12-25 S. 70-00 W.
DAcca Bengal East India Asia 23-30 N. [...]9-20 [...].
Damascus Syria Turkey Asia 33-15 N. 37-20 [...].
D [...]tric Polish Prussia Poland Europe 54-22 N. 18- [...] E.
Dax Gascony France Europe 43-42 N. 0-58 W.
Delft Holland Netherlands Europe 52-06 N. 4-05 E.
Delhi Delhi East India Asia 29-00 N. 76-30 E.
Derbe [...]t D [...]ghistan Persia Asia 42-41 N. 50- [...]0 E.
Derby Derbyshire England Europe 52-58 N. 1-30 W.
Derry Ulster Ireland Europe 54-52 N. 7-40 W.
Dieppe Norraandy France Europe 49-55 N. 0-59 E.
Dsen G [...]erat East India Asia 21-37 N. 69- [...]0 E.
Dijon Burgundy France Europe 47-19 N. 4-57 E.
Dilbengen S [...]bia Germany Europe 48-30 N. 10- [...] E.
Dol Bretagne France Europe 48-33 N. 1-4 [...] W.
Dominique Windward Isle. West India America 15-18 N. 61-22 W.
DOVER Kent England Europe 51-07 N. 1-13 E.
Dover Delaware United States America 39-10 N. 7 [...]- [...]4 W.
DRESDEN Saxony Germany Europe 51-00 N. 1 [...]- [...]6 E.
Drcux Orleannois France Europe 48-44 N. 1-36 E.
DUBLIN Leinster Ireland Europe [...]-21 N. 6- [...]1 W.
Dumbarton Dumbartonshire Scotland Europe 55-44 N. 4- [...]0 W.
Dumfries Dumfrieshire Scotland Europe 55-08 N. [...]-2 [...] W.
Dumber Haddington Scotland Europe 55-58 N. 2-2 [...] W.
Dundee Forsar Scotland Europe 56-26 N. 2-48 W.
Dungeness Kent England Europe 50-52 N. 1- [...]4 E.
Duakirk Flanders Netherlands Europe 51-02 N. 2-27 E.
Durham Durham England Europe 54-48 N. 1-25 W.
EAoowe Isle Pacific Ocean Asia 21-24 S. 174-25 W.
Easter Isle Pacific Ocean America 27-06 S. 109-41 W.
Eastern Ocean betw. the N. W. of N. America and N. E. of Asia N. Pacific ocean.
Edenton N. Carolina United States America [...]6-04 N. 77-00 W.
Edinburgh Edinburghshire Scotland Europe 35-57 N. 3-07 W.
Edysto [...]e Eng. Channel England Europe 50-08 N. 4-29 W.
Elbing Prussia Poland Europe 54-15 N. 20-00 E.
Embden Westphalia Germany Europe [...]-25 N. 7-20 E.
Enat [...]m Isle Pacific Ocean Asia 20-10 S. 169-99 E.
Enebrun Douphine France Europe 44-34 N. 6-34 E.
English Channel between Eng. and France Europe Atlantic Ocean.
Ephesun Natolia Turkey Asia 36-01 N. 27-30 E.
Erramanga Isle Pacific Ocean Asia 18-46 S. 169-23 E.
Eraerum Turcomania Turkey Asia 39-56 N. 42-05 E.
Ethiopian Sea Coast of Guinea Africa Atlantic Ocean.
Evreux Normandy France Europe 49-01 N. 1-23 E.
Eustatia Town Carib. sea West India N. America 17-29 N. 63-05 W.
Exeter Devonshire England Europe 50-44 N. 3-29 W.
FAlkirk Sterling Scotland Europe 65-58 N. 3-48 W.
Falmouth Cornwall England Europe 50-08 N. 4-57 W.
Fayal Town Aaores Atlantic Ocean Europe [...]8-32 N. 2 [...]-36 W.
Ferdiand Na­ronka   Brasil S. America 3-55 S. 32-4 [...] W.
Ferrara Ferrarese Italy Europe 44-54 N. 11-41 [...].
Ferro (Town) Canaries Atlantic Ocean Africa 27-47 N. 17-40 W.
Ferrol Galicia Spain Europe 43-30 N. 8-40 W.
Fez Fez Morocco Africa 33-30 N. 6-00 W.
Florence Tuscany Italy Europe 43-46 N. 11-07 E.
Flores Azores Atlantic Ocean Europe 39-34 N. 30-5 [...] W.
St. Flour A [...]vergne France Europe 45-01 N. 3-10 E.
Fort St. David Coromandel East India Asia 12-05 N. 80-55 E.
France (Isle of) Indian Ocean Africa 20-09 S. 57-33 E.
Francfort on the Main Franconia Germany Europe 49-55 N. 8-40 E.
F [...]wenburg Polish Prussia Europe 54-22 N. 20-12 E.
Fuego Isle Cape Verd Atlantic Ocean Africa 14-56 N. 24-23 W.
Funchal Madeira Atlantic Ocean Africa [...]2-37 N. 17-01 W.
Furneaux Isle Pacific Ocean Asia 17-11 S. 143-01 W.
GAp Dauphine France Europe 44-33 N. 6-09 E.
Geneva Geneva Switzerland Europe 46-12 N. 6-05 E.
GENOA Genoa Italy Europe 44-25 N. 8- [...]0 E.
Genes Savoy Italy Europe 44-25 N. 8-40 E.
St. George's Isle Azores Atlantic Ocean Europe 38-39 N. 27- [...]5 W.
St. George's Fort Coromandel East India Asia 23-04 N. 80- [...] E.
St. Georgestown Bermudas Atlantic Ocean N. America 32-45 N. 63- [...]0 W.
Ghent Flanders Netherlands Europe 51-03 N. 5-48 E.
Gibraltar Andalusia Spain Europe 36-05 N. 5-17 W.
Glasgow Lanerkshire Scotland Europe 55-51 N. 4-10 W.
Gloucester Gloucestershire England Europe [...]-05 N. 2-16 W.
Goa Malabar East India Asia 15-31 N. 7 [...]-50 E.
Goat Isle Indian Ocean Asia 13-55 N. 120-07 E.
Gombroon Farsistan P [...]rs [...]n Asia 27-30 N. 74-20 E.
Gomera Isle Canaries Atlantic Ocean Africa 28-05 N. 17-03 W.
Good Hope Town Hottentots Caffres Africa 33-55 S. 28-28 E.
Gorce Atlantic Ocean Africa [...]4-40 N. 27-20 W.
Gottenburg Gothland Sweden Europe 57-42 N. 1 [...]-43 E.
Gottengen Hanover Germany Europe 51- [...]1 N. 9- [...]8 E.
Granville Normandy France Europe 48-50 N. 2-32 W.
Gratiosa Azores Atlantic Ocean Europe 39-02 N. 27-5 [...] W.
Grata Stiria Germany Europe 47-04 N. 15-29 E.
Gravelines Fr. Flanders Netherlands Europe 50-59 N. 2-13 E.
Greenock Renfrewshire Scotland Europe 55-52 N. 4-22 W.
Gryphiswald Pomerania Germany Europe 54-04 N. 13-43 E.
G [...]daloupe Oaribbean Sea N. America 15-59 N. 61-54 W.
Guarn Ladrone Isles East India Asia 24-00 N. 140-30 E.
Gulf of Bothnia Coast of Sweden Europe Baltic Sea  
—of California between California and Mexico N. America Pacisic Ocean.  
—of rinland between Sweden & Russia Europe Baltic Sea.  
—of St. Laurence Coast of New Scotland N. America Atlantic Ocean.  
—of Mexico Coast of Mexico N. America Atlantic Ocean.  
—of Ormus between Persia & Arabia Asia Indian Ocean.  
—of Persia between Persia & Arabia Asia Indian Ocean.  
—of Venice between Italy & Turkey Europe Mediterranean Sea.  
HAerlem Holland Netherlands Europe 52-20 N. 4-10 E.
Hague Holland Netherlands Europe 52-04 N. 4-22 E.
Hamburg Holstein Germany Europe 53-34 N. 9-55 E.
Halifax Yorkshire England Europe 53-45 N. 1-52 W.
HALIFAX Nova Scotia North America 44-40 N. 63-15 W.
Hanover Saxony Germany Europe 52-32 N. 9-35 E.
Hartford Connecticut United States America 41-50 N. 72- [...]0 W.
Hastings Sussex England Europe 50-52 N. 04- [...]6 E.
Havannah Cuba Island N. America 23-12 N. 82-13 W.
Haute de Grace Normandy France Europe 49-29 N. 0-10 E.
La Heese Dutch Flanders Netherlands Europe 51-25 N. 4- [...]0 E.
St. Helena (Ja. Town) South Atlantic Ocean Africa 15-55 S. 5-44 W.
Hellespont Mediterrancan and Black Sea Europe and Asia    
Hernosand W. Bothnia Sweden Europe 6 [...]-38 N. 17-58 E.
Hereford Herefordshire England Europe 52-06 N. 2-38 W.
Hervey's Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 19-17 S. 158-43 W.
Hoai Nagham Kian Nan China Asia 33-34 N. 118-54 E.
La Hogue Cape Normandy France Europe 49-44 N. 1-51 W.
Hood's Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 9-26 S. 138-47 W.
Hoogstraten Brabant Netherlands Europe 51-24 N. 4-52 E.
Howe's Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 16-46 S. 154-01 W.
Huabine Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 16-44 S. 151-02 W.
Hodson's Bay Coast of Labrador N. America N. Atlantic Ocean.
Hall Yorkshire England Europe 53-45 N. 0-12 W.
JAkutskoi Siberia Russia Asia 62-01 N. 129-52 E.
Janeiro (Rio)   Brasil S. America 22-54 S. 42-38 W.
Jassay Moldavia Turkey Europe 47-08 N. 27-34 E.
Java Head Java Isle East India Asia 6-49 S. 106-55 E.
Jeddo Japan Isle East India Asia 36-20 N. 139-00 E.
Jerusalem Palestine Turkey Asia 31-55 N. 35-25 E.
Immer Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 19-16 S. 169-51 E.
Indian Ocean   Coast of India Asia    
Ingoldstadt Bavaria Germany Europe 48-45 N. 22-27 E.
Inverness Invernesshire Scotland Europe 57-33 N. 4-02 W.
St. John's Town Antigua Leeward Isles N. America 17-04 N. 62-04 E.
St. John's Town Newfoundland North America 47-32 N. 52-21 W.
St. Joseph's California Mexico N. America 23-03 N. 109-37 W.
Irish Sea between Great Britain and Ireland, Europe, Atlantic Ocean    
Irra [...]me Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 19-31 S. 170-26 E.
Is [...]abad Bengal East India Asia 22-20 N. 91-50 E.
Isle of Pines South Pacific Ocean Asia 22-38 S. 167-43 E.
ISPA [...]AN Irac Agem Persia Asia 32-25 N. 52-55 E.
Isthmus of Suet joins Africa to Asia.          
—of Corinth, joins the Mores to Greece,     Europe    
—of Panama, joins North and South America.          
—of Malacca, joins Malacca to Farther India,     Asia.    
Ivica Isle Mediterr. Sea Italy Europe 38-50 N. 1-40 E.
Judda Arabia Felix Arabia Asia 21-29 N. 49-27 E.
Juthia Siam East India Asia 14-18 N. 100-55 E.
Kamtsch [...]tka Siberia Russia Asia 57-10 N. 163-00 E.
Kedgere Bangal East India Asia 21-48 N. 8 [...]-55 E.
Kelso Roxboro [...]shire Scotland Europe 55-38 N. 02-12 W.
Kilmarnock Airshire Scotland Europe 55-38 N. 04-30 W.
Kingsale Munster Ireland Europe 51-32 N. 08-20 W.
KINGSTON Jamaica West India America 18-15 N. 76-38 W.
Kiow Ukraine Russia Europe 50-30 N. 31-12 E.
Kola Lapland Russia Europe 68-52 N. 33-13 E.
Koningsberg Prussia Poland Europe 54-43 N. 21-35 E.
LAguna Teneriffe Cana [...]es Atlantic Ocean 28- [...]8 N. 16-13 W.
Lahor Lahor East India Asia 32-40 N. 75-30 E.
Lancaster Lancashire England Europe 54-05 N. 02-55 E.
Lancaster Pennsylvania United States America 40-02 N. 76-20 W.
Landau Alface France Europe 49-11 N. 08-02 E.
Landscroon Schonen Sweden Europe 55-5 [...] N. 1 [...]-51 E.
Lausa [...]e Canton of Vaud Switzerland Europe 46-31 N. 06-50 E.
Leeds Yorkshire England Europe 53-48 N. 01-29 W.
Leicester Lercestershire England Europe 52-38 N. 01-03 W.
Leipsic Saxony Germany Europe 51-19 N. 12-25 E.
Leith Edinburghshire Scotland Europe 55-58 N. 03-00 W.
Leper's Island S. Pacific Ocean Asia 15-23 S. 168-03 E.
Leskard Cornwall England Europe 50-26 N. 04-36 W.
Lesparre Guienne France Europe 45-18 N. 00-52 W.
Levant Sea Coast of Syria Asia Mediterranean Sea.
LEXINGTON Kentucky United States America 38-25 N. 85- [...]9 W.
Leyden Holland Netherlands Europe 52-10 N. 04-32 E.
Liege Bishop, of Liege Netherlands Europe 50-37 N. 05-40 E.
Lima Peru South America 12-01 S. 76-44 W.
Limerick Munster Ireland Europe 52-35 N. 08-48 W.
Limoges Limoges France Europe 45-49 N. 01-20 E.
Lincoln Lincolnshire England Europe 53-15 N. 00-27 W.
Linlithgow Linlithgowshire Scotland Europe 55-56 E. 03-30 W.
Lints Austria Germany Europe 48-16 N. 13-57 E.
Lisbon Estremadura Portugal Europe 38-42 N. 09-04 W.
Lisle French Flanders Netherlands Europe 50-37 N. 03-09 E.
L [...]chfield Staffordshire England Europe 52-43 N. 01-04 W.
Lizard Point Cornwall England Europe 49-57 N. 05-10 W.
LONDON Middlesex England Europe 51-31 N. 1st Meridian
Londonderty Ulster Ireland Europe 50-00 N. 07-40 W.
Loretto Pope's Territory Italy Europe 43-15 N. [...]4-15 E.
Lou [...]sbourgh Cape Breton Isle North America 45-53 N. 59-48 W.
Louvain Austrian Brabant Netherlands Europe 50-53 N. 04-49 E.
Louveau Siam East India Asia 12-42 N. 100-56 E.
Lubec Holstein Germany Europe 54-00 N. 11-40 E.
St. Lucia Isle Wind ward Isles West India N. America 13-24 N. 60-46 W.
Lunden Gothland Swaden Europe 55-41 N. 13-26 E.
Luneville Lorrain France Europe 48-35 N. 06-35 E.
Luxemburg Luxemburg Netherlands Europe 49-37 N. 06-16 E.
Lyous Lyous France Europe 45-45 N. 04-54 E.
MAcao Canton China Asia 22-12 N. 113-51 E.
Macassar Celebes Isle East India Asia 05-09 S. 119-53 E.
Madeira Funchal Atlantic Ocean Africa 32-37 N. 17-01 W.
Madras Coromandel East India Asia 13-04 N. 80-33 E.
MADRID New Castile Spain Europe 40-25 N. 03-20 E.
Magdalena Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 10-25 S. 138-44 W.
Mahon Port Minorca Mediterr. Sea Europe 39-50 N. 03-53 E.
Majorca Isle Mediterr. Sea Europe 39-35 N. 0 [...]-34 E.
Malacca Malacca East India Asia 0 [...]-12 N. 102-10 E.
Malines Brabant Netherlands Europe 51-01 N. 04-33 E.
Malico [...]a (Isle) South Pacific Ocean Asia 16-15 N. 167-44 E.
St. Maloes Bretagne France Europe 48-38 N. 01-53 W.
Malta Isle Mediterranean Sea Africa 35-54 N. 14-33 E.
Manilla Lucon [...]a Philip. Isles East India Asia 14-36 N. 120-58 E.
MANTUA Mantua Italy Europe 45-20 N. 10-47 E.
Margealante Atlantic Ocean S. America 15-55 N. 61-06 W.
MARIETTA N. W. Territory United States America 39-34 N. 81-40 W.
Marseilles Provence France Europe 43-17 N. 05-27 E.
St. Martha St. Martha Terra Firma America 11-26 N. 73-39 W.
St. Martin's Isle Carribbean Isles West India America 18-04 N. 62-57 W.
Martinico Isle Carribbean Isles West India America 14-44 N. 61-16 W.
St. Mary's Isle Scilly Isles Atlantic Ocean Europe 49-57 N. 06-38 W.
St. Mary's Town Azores Atlantic Ocean Europe 36- [...]6 N. 25-04 W.
Maskelyne Isles South Pacific Ocean Asia 16-32 S. 168-04 E.
Mauritius Indian Ocean Africa 20-09 S. 57-34 E.
Maurua Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia [...]6-25 S. 152-37 E.
Mayence Lower Rhine Germany Europe 49-54 N. 08-25 E.
Mayo Isle Cape Verd Atlantic Ocean Africa 15-10 N. 23-00 W.
Meaux Champagne France Europe 48-57 N. 02-57 E.
Mecca Arabia Felix Arabia Asia 21-45 N. 41-00 E.
Medina Arabia Felix Arabia Asia 25-00 N. 39-53 E.
Mediterr. Sea Between Europe and Africa Atlantic Ocean.
Mequinez Fez Barbary Africa 34-30 N. 06-00 E.
MESSIMA Scilly Island Italy Europe 38-30 N. 15-40 E.
Mergus Siam East India Asia 12-12 N. 98-13 E.
Mexico Mexico North America 19-54 N. 100-00 W.
Miatea Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 17-52 S. 148-01 W.
St. Michael's Azores Atlantic Ocean Europe 37-47 N. 25-37 W.
Middleburg Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 21- [...]0 S. 174-29 W.
MILAM Milanese Italy Europe 45-25 N. 09-30 E.
Milford Haven Pembrokeshire Wales Europe 51-45 N. 05-15 W.
Mocha Arabia Felix Arabia Asia 13-40 N. 43-50 E.
MODENA Modena Italy Europe 44-34 N. 11-17 E.
Montreal Canada North America 45-35 N. 73-11 W.
Montpelier Languedoc France Europe 43-36 N. 03-37 E.
Montague Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 17-26 S. 168-36 E.
Montrose Forfar Scotland Europe 56-34 N. 02-20 W.
Monferrnt Isle Caribbean Isle West India America 16-47 N. 62-12 W.
MOROCCO Morocco Barbary Africa 30-32 N. 06-10 W.
Moscow Moscow Russia Europe 55-45 N. 37-50 E.
Munich Bavaria Germany Europe 48-09 N. 11-35 E.
Munster Westphalia Germany Europe 52-00 N. 07-10 E.
NAmur Namur Netherlands Europe 50-28 N. 04-49 E.
Nancy Lorrain France Europe 48-41 N. 06-16 E.
Nangasachi Japan N. Pacific Ocean Asia 32-32 N. 128-51 E.
Nanking Kiangan China Asia 32-00 N. 118-30 E.
Nantes Bretagne France Europe 47-13 N. 01-28 W.
Naples Naples Italy Europe 40-50 N. 14-18 E.
Narva Livonia Russia Europe 59-00 N. 27-35 E.
NEW HAVEN Connecticut United States America 41-19 N. 73-00 W.
NEW YORK New York United States America 40-40 N. 74-00
Newcastle Northumberland England Europe 55-03 N. 01-24 W.
Newport Rhode Island United States America 41-35 N. 71-06 W.
Nice Piedmont Italy Europe 43-41 N. 07-22 E.
St. Nicholas Mole Hispaniola West India America 19-49 N. 73-24 W.
Nieuport Flanders Netherlands Europe 51-07 N. 02-50 E.
Nineveh Curdistan Turkey Asia 36-00 N. 46-00 E.
Ningpo Chekiang China Asia 29-57 N. 120-23 E.
Norfolk Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 29-01 S. 168-25 [...].
Norfolk Vinginia United States America 36-55 N. 0 [...]- [...]0 W.
Noriton Pennsylvania North America 40-09 N. 79- [...] W.
North Cape Wardhus Lapland Europe 71-10 N. 26- [...] E.
Northampaon Northamptonsh. England Europe 52-15 N. 00-55 W.
Norwich Norfolk England Europe 52-40 N. 01-25 E.
Nuremberg Franconia Germany Europe 49-27 N. 11-12 E.
Nottingham Nottinghamsh. England Europe 53-00 N. 01-06 W.
OChotskoi Siberia Russia Asia 59-20 N. 143-17 E.
Ohevah [...]n South Pacific Ocean Asia 09-04 S. 138-56 W.
Isle          
Ohita [...]oo Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 09-55 S. 139-01 W.
Oleron Saintonge France Europe 46-02 N. 01-20 W.
Olinde Brasil South America 08-13 S. 35-00 W.
Ol [...]nutz Moravia Bohemiz Europe 49-30 N. 16-45 E.
Olymapia Greece Turkey Europe 37-30 N. 22-00 E.
St. Omner's Flanders Netherlands Europe 50-44 N. 02-19 E.
O [...]teayo Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 09-58 S. 138-46 W.
Oporto Duoro Portugal Europe 41-10 N. 08-22 W.
Oran Algiers Barbary Africa 36-30 N. 00-05 E.
Orenburg Tartary Russia Asia 51- [...]6 N. 55-14 E.
L'Orient (Port) Bretagne France Europe 47-45 N. 03-20 W.
Orleans Orleannois France Europe 47-54 N. 01-59 E.
Orleans (New) Louisiana North America 29-57 N. 89-53 W.
Orm [...]s Ormicos Isle Persia Asia 26-50 N. 57-00 E.
Orotava Teneriffe Atlantic Ocean Africa 28-23 N. 16-19 W.
Orsk Tartary Russia Asia 51-12 N. 58-37 E.
Osnaburg Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 17-52 S. 148-01 E.
Ostend Flanders Netherlands Europe 51-13 N. 03-00 E.
Otaheite South Pacific Ocean Asia 17-29 S. 149-35 W.
Owhyoe South Pacific Ocean Asia 22-10 S. 199-00 E.
Oxford Obser­vatory Ocfordshire England Europe 51-45 N. 01-10 W.
PAcific or O­riental Ocean Between Asia and America    
Padua Paduano Italy Europe 45-22 N. 12-00 E.
Paisley Renfrewshire Scotland Europe 55-48 N. 04-08 W.
PALERMO Sicily Isle Italy Europe 38-30 N. 13-43 E.
Palliser's Isles South Pacific Ocean Asia 15-38 S. 146-25 W.
Palma Isle Canaries Atlantic Ocean Africa 28-36 N. 17-45 W.
Palmerston's Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 18-00 S. 162-52 W.
Palmyra Syria Turkey Asia 33-00 N. 39-00 E.
Panama Darien Terra Firma S. America 08-47 N. 80-16 W.
Paoom Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 16-30 S. 168-33 E.
PARIS (Observ [...]) Isle of France France Europe 48-50 N. 2-25 E.
Parma Parmasan Italy Europe 44-45 N. 10-51 E.
Patna Bengal East India Asia 25-45 N. 83-00 E.
Patrixf [...]o [...]d Iceland N. Atlan. Ocean Europe 65-35 N. 14-05 W.
Pau Bearn France Europe 43-15 N. 0-04 W.
St. Paul's Isle South Indian Ocean Africa 37-51 S. 77-53 E.
Pegu Pegu East India Asia 17-00 N. 97-00 E.
Peking Petchili China Asia 39-54 N. 116-29 E.
Pelew Islands North Pacific Ocean Asia 7-00 N. 135-00 E.
Pembroke Pembrokeshire Wales Europe 51-45 N. 4-50 W.
PANSACOLA West Florida North America 30-22 N. 87-20 W.
Penzance Cornwall England Europe 50-08 N. 6-00 W.
Perigueux Guienne France Europe 45-11 N. 0-48 E.
Perinaldi Genoa Italy Europe 43-53 N. 7-45 E.
Perth Perthshire Scotland Europe 56-22 N. 3-12 W.
Perth Amboy New Jersey United States America 40-30 N. 74-20 W.
Persepolis Irac Agem Persia Asia 30-30 N. 54-00 E.
St. Peter's Fort Martinico W. India N. America 14-44 N. 61-16 W.
St. Peter's Isle North Atlantic Ocean America 46-46 N. 56-12 W.
PETERSBURG Ingria Russia Europe 59-56 N. 30-24 E.
Petropawloskoi Kamtschatka Russia Asia 53-01 N. 158-40 E.
PHILADELPHIA Pennsylvania United States America 39-56 N. 75-09 W.
St. Philip's Fort Minorca Mediterr, Sea Europe 39-50 N. 3-53 E.
Pickersgill Isle South Atlantic Ocean America 54-42 S. 36-53 W.
Pico Azores Atlantic Ocean Europe 38-28 N. 28-21 W.
Pines, Isle of N. Caledonia Pacific Ocean Asia 22-38 S. 167-43 E.
Pisa Tuscany Italy Europe 43-43 N. 10-17 E.
Placentia Newfoundl. Isle North America 47-26 N. 55-00 W.
Plymouth Massachusetts United States America 41-48 N. 70-25 W.
Pollingen Swabia Germany Europe 47-48 N. 10-48 E.
Poundicherry Coromandel East India Asia 11-41 N. 79-57 E.
Ponoi Lapland Russia Europe 67-06 N. 36-28 E.
Porto Bello Terra Firma South America 09-33 N. 79-45 W.
Port Sancto Isle Madeira Atlantic Ocean Africa 32-58 N. 16-20 W.
Port Royal Jamaica West India America 18-00 N. 76-40 W.
Port Royal Martinico West India America 14-35 N. 61-04 W.
Portland Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 39-25 S. 178-17 E.
Portland Isle North Atlantic Ocean Europe 63-22 N. 18-49 W.
Portsmo. Town Hampshire England Europe 50-47 N. 0 [...]-01 W.
—Academy Hampshire England Europe 50-48 N. 1-01 W.
Portsmouth New Hampshire United States America 43-05 N. 70-43 W.
Poto [...]i Peru South America 21-00 S. 77-00 W.
Prague   Bohemia Europe 50-04 N. 14-50 E.
Preshurg Upper Hungary Europe 48-20 N. 17-30 W.
Preston Lancashire England Europe 53-45 N. 2-50 W.
Prince of Wales New N. Wales North America 58-47 N. 94--02 W.
Fort          
Providence Rhode Island United States America 41-50 N. 71-21 W.
Pulo Candor Isle Indian Ocean East India Asia 8-40 N. 107-25 E.
Pulo Timor Isle Gulf of Siam East India Asia 3-00 N. 104-30 E.
Pyles [...]aa [...]t Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 22-23 S. 175-36 W.
QUebec Lower Canada North America 46-55 N. 69-48 W.
Queen South Pacific Ocean Asia 10-11 S. 164-3 [...] E.
Charlotte's Isles          
St. Quintin Picardy France Europe 49-60 N. 3-22 E.
Quito Peru South America 0-13 S. 77-50 W.
RAgusa Dalmatia Venice Europe 42-45 N. 18-25 E.
Ramhead Cornwall England Europe 50-18 N. 4-15 W.
Ratisbon Bavaria Germany Europe 48-56 N. 12-05 E.
Re Isle Aunis France Europe 46-14 N. 1-29 W.
Recif Brasil South America 8-10 S. 35-30 W.
Resolution Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 17-23 S. 141-40 W.
Rheims Champagne France Europe 49-14 N. 4-07 E.
Rhodes Rhode Island Levant sea Asia 36-20 N. 28-00 E.
RICHMOND Virginia United States America 37-40 N. 77-50 W.
Riga Livionia Russia Europe 56-55 N. 24-00 E.
Rimini Romagna Italy Europe 44-03 N. 12-39 E.
Rennes Bretagne France Europe 48-06 N. 1-36 W.
Rochelle Aunis France Europe 46-09 N. 1-04 W.
Rochfort Saintonge France Europe 46-02 N. 0-53 W.
Rock of Lisbon Mouth of Tagus River Portugal Europe 38-45 N. 9-30 W.
Rodex Guienne France Europe 44-21 N. 2-39 E.
Rodrigues Isle South Indian Ocean Africa 10-40 N. 63-15 E.
Rome, St. Peter's Pope's Territory Italy Europe 41-53 N. 12-34 E.
Rotterdam Holland Netherlands Europe 51-56 N. 4-33 E.
Rotterdam Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 20-16 N. 174-25 W.
Rouen Normandy France Europe 49-26 N. 1-00 W.
SAba Isle Carib. sea West India America 17-39 N. 63-12 W.
Sagan Silesia Germany Europe 51-42 N. 15-27 E.
St. Augustine East Florida North America 29-45 N. 81-12 W.
St. Domingo Carib. sea West India America 18-20 N. 70-00 W.
St. Georga's Channel Between England and Ireland Europe Atlantic Ocean.
St. Jago Chilf South 34-00 S. 77-00 W.
St. Juan California North America 26-25 N. 114-09 W.
St. Salvador Brasil South America 11-58 S. 38-00 W.
Salem Massachusetts United States America 42-35 N. 70-52 W.
Salisbury Wiltshire England Europe 51-00 N. 1-45 W.
Sall Isle North Atlantic Ocean Africa 16-38 N. 22-51 W.
Salonichi Macedonia Turkey Europe 40-41 N. 23-13 E.
Salvage Isles North Atlantic Ocean Africa 30-00 N. 15-49 W.
Samana Hispaniola West India America 19-15 N. 69-11 W.
Samarcand Usbec Tartary Asia 40-40 N. 69-00 E.
Samaria Ruins Holy Land Turkey Asia 32-40 N. 38-00 E.
Sandwich Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 17-41 S. 168-38 E.
Santa Cruz Teneriffe Althntice Ocean Africa 28-27 N. 16-11 W.
Santa Fee New Mexico North America 36-00 N. 104-00 W.
Savage Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 19-02 S. 169-25 W.
SAVANNAH Geotgia Unitd States America 31-55 N. 80-20 W.
Saunder's Isle South Georgia S. Atlantic Ocean S. America 58-00 S. 26-53 W.
Sayd, or Thebes Upper Egypt Africa 27-00 N. 32-20 E.
Scarborough Yorkshire England Europe 54-18 N. 0-10 W.
Schwexingen Lower Rhine Germany Europe 49-23 N. 8-45 E.
Scone Perthshire Scotland Europe 56-24 N. 3-10 W.
Sea of Asoph Little Tartary Curope and Asia    
—Marmora Turkey in Europe and Asia Black sea.
—Ochotsk Between Siberia, and Kamtschatka, Asia N. Pacific Ocean.
—Yellow Between Eastern Tartary, China and Corea N. Pacific Ocean.
Sedan Champagne France Europe 49-42 N. 5-02 E.
Senegal   Negroland Africa 15-53 N. 16-26 W.
Seville Andalusia Spain Europe 37-15 N. 6-05 W.
Sheerness Kent England Europe 51-25 N. 0-50 E.
Shepherd's Isles South Pacific Ocean Asia 16-58 S. 168-47 E.
Shields (South) Durham England Europe 55-02 N. 1-15 E.
Shrewsbury Shropshire England Europe 52-43 N. 2-46 W.
Siam Siam East India Asia [...]4-18 N. 100-55 E.
Sidon Holy Land Turkey Asia 33-33 N. 36-15 E.
Sighamfu Chensi China Asia 34-16 N. 108-48 E.
Sisteron Dauphine France Europe 44-11 N. 6-01 E.
S [...]nyrna Natolia Turkey Asia 38-28 N. 27-24 E.
Sombavera Isles Carib. sea West India N. America 18-38 N. 63-32 W.
Soolo Isle Philip. Isles East India Asia 5-57 N. 121-20 E.
Southampton Hampshire England Europe 50-55 N. 1-25 W.
Spaw Leige Germany Europe 50-30 N. 5-40 E.
Stafford Staffordshire England Europe 52-50 N. 2-00 W.
Stockholm Upland Sweden Europe 59-20 N. 18-08 E.
Sterling Sterlingshire Scotland Europe 56-10 N. 3-50 W.

Straits of Babelmandel, between Africa and Asia, Red Sea.

—of Dover, between England and France, English Channel.

—of Gibraltar, between Europe and Africa, Mediterranean Sea.

—of Malacca, between Malacca and Sumatra, Asia, Indian Ocean.

—of Magellan, between Terra del Fuego, and Patagonia, South America.

—of La Maire, in Patagonia, South America, Atlantic and Pacific Ocean.

—of Ormus, between Persia and Arabia, Persian Gulf.

—of Sunda, between Sumatra and Java, Indian Ocean, Asia.

—of Waigats, between Nova Zembla and Russia, Asia,

Stralsund Pomerania Germany Europe 54-23 N. 13-22 E.
Strasburgh Alface France Europe 48-34 N. 7-46 E.
Straumness Iceland N. Atlant. Ocean Europe 65-39 N. 24-24 W.
Suez Suez Egypt Africa 29-50 N. 33-27 E.
Sultz Lorrain France Europe 47-53 N. 7-09 W.
S [...]nderland Durham England Europe 54-55 N. 1-10 W.
Surat Guzurat East India Asia 21-10 N. 72-27 E.
Surinam Surinam South America 6-00 N. 55-30 W.
Syracuse Sicily Isle Italy Europe 36-58 N. 25-05 E.
TAble Island New Hebrides South Pacific Asia 15-38 S. 167-12 E.
Tanjour Tanjour East India Asia 11-27 N. 79-07 E.
Tanna South Pacific Ocean Asia 19-32 S. 169-46 E.
Taoukaa Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 14-30 S. 145-04 W.
Tauris Aderbeitzan Persia Asia 38-20 N. 46-30 E.
Teslis Georgia Persia Asia 43-30 N. 47-00 E.
Temontengis Soloo East India Asia 5-57 N. 120-58 E.
Teneriffe Peak Canaries Atlantic Ocean Africa 28-12 N. 16-24 W.
Tercera Azores Atlantic Ocean Europe 38-45 N. 27-01 W.
Teruan Fez Barbary Africa 35-40 N. 5-18 W.
St. Thomas's Isle Virgin Isles West India America 18-21 N. 64-46 W.
Thorn Regal Prussia Poland Europe 52-56 N. 19-00 W.
Timor, S. W. Poi.   East India Asia 10-23 S. 124-04 E.
Timorland S. Po.   East India Asia 8-15 S. 131-59 E.
Tobolski Siberia Russia Asia 58-12 N. 68-17 E.
Toledo New Castile Spain Europe 39-50 N. 3-25 E.
Tomik Siberia Russia Asia 56-29 N. 85-04 E.
Tonga Tabu Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 21-09 S. 174-41 W.
Tornea Bothnia Sweden Europe 65-50 N. 24-17 E.
Toulon Provence France Europe 43-07 N. 6-01 E.
Trapesond Natolia Turkey Asia 41-50 N. 40-30 E.
Trent Trent Germany Europe 46-05 N. 11-02 E.
Trenton New Jersey United States America 4 [...]-15 N. 74-15 W.
Tripoli Tripoli Barbary Africa 32-53 N. 13-12 E.
Tripoli Syria Turkey Asia 34-30 N. 36-15 E.
Troy Ruins Natolia Turkey Asia 39-30 N. 26-30 E.
Tunis Tunis Barbary Africa 36-47 N. 10-00 E.
Turin Piedmont Italy Europe 45-05 N. 7-45 E.
Turtle Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 19-48 S. 178-02 W.
Tyre Palestine Turkey Asia 32-32 N. 36-00 E.
Tyrnaw Trentschin Hungary Europe 48-23 N. 17-38 E.
ULiatea South Pacific Ocean Asia 16-45 S. 151-26 W.
Upsal Upland Sweden Europe 59-51 N. 17-47 E.
Uranlberg Huen Isle Denmark Europe 55-54 N. 12-57 E.
Ushant Isle Butagne France Europe 48-28 N. 4-59 W.
U [...]echt Holland Netherlands Europe 52-07 N. 5-00 E.
Venice Venice Italy Europe 45-26 N. 11-59 E.
Vera Croz Mexico North America 19-12 N. 97-25 W.
V [...]RNON, Mount Virginia United States America 38-40 N. 77-20 W.
Verona Veronese Italy Europe 45-26 N. 11-23 E.
Vertailles Isle of France France Europe 48-48 N. 2-12 E.
VIENNA, Obser. Austria Germany Europe 48-12 N. 16-22 E.
Vigo Galicia Spain Europe 42-14 N. 8-23 W.
V [...]ntamiglia Genoa Italy Europe 43-53 N. 7-42 E.
Virgin Gords Virgin Isles West India America 18-18 N. 63-59 W.
WAkesield Yorkshire England Europe 53-41 N. 1-28 W.
Prince of Wales's Fort New N. Wales North America 58-47 N. 94-01 W.
Wardhus Norwegian Lapland Lapland Europe 70-22 N. 31-11 E.
Warsaw Massovia Poland Europe 52-14 N. 21-05 E.
Warwick Warwickshire England Europe 52-18 N. 1-32 W.
WASHINGTON Columb, District United States America 38-54 N. 77-09 W.
Waterford Munfter Ireland Europe 52-12 N. 7-16 W.
Wells Somersetshire England Europe 51-12 N. 2-40 W.
Westman Isles North Atlantic Ocean Europe 63-20 N. 20-22 W.
Whitchawen Cumberland England Europe 54-38 N. 3-36 W.
Whitf [...]ide Isle South Pacific Ocean Asia 15-44 S. 168-25 E.
Wilhansburg Virginia United States America 37-12 N. 76-48 W.
Wilis's Isles South Georgia Atlantic Ocean America 54-00 S. 38-24 W.
Wanchster Hampshire England Europe 51-06 N. 1-15 W.
Wil [...]a Lithuania Poland Europe 54-41 N. 25-32 E.
Wittesburg Upper Saxony Germany Europe 51-49 N. 12-46 E.
Wologda Wologda Russia Europe 59-19 N. 41-20 E.
Worcester Worcestershire England Europe 52-09 N. 1-55 W.
Worcester Massachusetts United States America 42-23 N. 71-44 W.
Wor [...] Lower Rhine Germany Europe 49-38 N. 8-05 E.
Woslak   Russia Europe 61-15 N.  
Wortzburg Francon'a Germany Europe 49-46 N. 10-18 E.
YArthoath Norsolk England Europe 52-45 N. 1-48 E.
York Yorkshire England Europe 53-59 N. 1-01 W.
Yorkminister Terra del Fuego South America 55-16 N. 70-03 W.

Greenwich Observ. Kent, England, Europe, 51° 28′ 40″ N. [...]° 5′ 37″ E. of St. Paul's, Lon.

[Page 533]

AN IMPROVED CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE, OF REMARKABLE EVENTS, DISCOVERIES, AND INVENTIONS;
Comprehending, in one view, the ANALYSTS or OUTLINES of GENERAL HISTORY, from the CREATION to the present TIME.

[...]ef. Christ.  
4004 THE creation of the world, and of Adam and Eve.
4003 The birth of Cain, the first who was born of a woman.
3017 Enoch translated into heaven.
2348 The old world destroyed by a deluge which continued 377 days.
2247 The tower of Babel is built about this time by Noah's posterity; upon which Cod miraculously confounds, their language, and thus disperses them into different nations.
2234 Celestial observations are begun at Babylon, the city which first gave birth to learning and the sciences.
2188 Misraim, the son of Ham, founds the kingdom of Egypt, which lasted 1663 years, to the conquest of Cambyses.
2059 Ninus, the son of Belus, founds the kingdom of Assyria, which lasted above 1000 years.
1921 The convenant of God made with Abraham, when he leaves Haran to go into Ca­naan, which begins the 430 years of sojourning.
1897 The cities of Sodom and Gomorrah are destroyed for their wickedness by fire from heaven.
1856 The kingdom of Argos in Greece begins under Inachus.
1822 Memnon the Egyptian invents the letters.
1715 Prometheus first struck fire from flints.
1635 Joseph dies in Egypt, which concludes the book of Genesis, containing a period of 2369 years.
1574 Aaron born in Egypt; 1490, appointed by God first high priest of the Israelites.
1571 Moses, brother to Aaron, born in Egypt, and adopted by Pharaoh's daughter.
1556 Cecrops brings a colony of Sanes from Egypt, into Attica, and begins the king­dom of Athens in Greece.
1546 Scamander comes from Crete into Phrygia, and begins the kingdom of Troy.
1503 Deluge of Deucalion in Thessaly.
1493 Cadmus carried the Phoenician letters into Greece, and built the citadel of Thebes.
1491 Moses performs a number of miracles in Egypt, and departs from that kingdom, together with 600,000 Israelites, besides children, which completed the 432 years of sojourning.
1485 The first ship that appeared in Greece brought from Egypt by Danaus, who ar­rived at Rhodes, and brought with him his fifty daughters.
1453 The first Olympic games celebrated at Olympic, to Greece.
1452 The Pentateuch, or five first books of Moses, are written in the land of Moab, where he died the year following, aged 110 years.
1451 The Israelites, after sojourning in the wilderness forty years, are led under Johns into the land of Canaan, where they six themselves, after having subdued the natives; and the period of the sabbatical year commences.
1263 Argonautic expedition.
1198 The rape of Helen by Paris, which, in 1193, gave rise to the Trojan war, and siege or Troy by the Greeks, which contained ten years, when that city was taken and burned.
1048 David is sole king of Israel.
1004 The Temple is solemnly dedicated by Solomon.
896 Elijah, the prophet, is translated to heaven.
894 Money first made of gold and silver at Argos.
869 The city of Carthage, in Africa, founded by Queen Dido.
814 The kingdom of Macedon begins.
776 The first Olympiad begins.
753 AEra of the building of Rome in Italy by Romulus, first king of the Romans.
720 Samaria taken, after three years siege, and the kingdom of Israel overthrown by Salmanaser king of Assyria, who carried the ten tribes into captivity.
  The first eclipse of the moon on record.
658 Byzantium (now Constantinople) built by a colony of Athenians.
604 By order of Necho, king of Egypt, some Phoenicians sailed from the Red Sea round Africa, and returned by the Mediterranean.
600 Thales of Miletus travels into Egypt, acquires the knowledge of geometry, as­tronomy, and philosophy; returns to Greece, calculates eclipses, and gives general notions of the universe, and maintains that one Supreme Intelligence reg­ulates all its motions.
  Maps, globes, and signs of the Zodiac, invented by Anaximander, the scholar of Thales.
597 Jehoiakin, king of Judah, is carried away captive by Nebuchadnezzar to Babylon.
587 The city of Jerusalem taken, after a siege of 18 months.
562 The first comedy at Athens acted upon a moveable scaffold.
559 Cyrus the first king of Persia.
538 The kingdom of Babylon destroyed; that city being taken by Cyrus, who, in 536, issued an edict for the return of the Jews.
534 The first tragedy acted at Athens, on a waggon, by Thespis.
526 Learning is greatly encouraged at Athens, and a publick library first founded.
515 The second temple at Jerusalem is finished under Darius.
509 Tarquin the seventh, and last King of the Romans, is expelled, and Rome is gov­erned by two consuls, and other republican magistrates, until the bottle of Phar­salia, 461 years.
504 Sardis taken and burned by the Athenians, which gave occasion to the Persian in­vasion of Greece.
4 [...]6 AEsohylus, the Greek Poet, first gains the prize of tragedy.
4 [...]1 Xerxes, King of Persian, begins his expedition against Greece.
458 Ezra is sent from Babylon to Jerusalem, with the captive Jews, and the vessels of gold and silver, &c. being seventy weeks of years, or 490 years before the cru­casixion of our Saviour.
454 The Romans send to Athens for Solon's laws.
451 The decemvirs created at Rome, and the laws of the twelve tables compiled and ratified.
443 Censors created at Rome.
432 Nincteen years cycle invented by Meton.
430 The history of the Old Testament finishes about this time.
  Malachi, the last of the prophets.
401 Retreat of 10,020 Greeks under Xenophon.
400 Socrates, the founder of moral philosophy among the Greeks, put to death by the Athenians, who soon after repent, and erect to his memory a statue of brass.
379 Boeotian war commences in Greece, finished in 366, after the death of Epami­nondas, the last of the Grecian heroes. After his death, Philip, brother to the King of Macedon, who had been educated under him, privately set out for that country, seized the kingdom, and after a continual course of war, treachery, and dissimulation, put an end to the liberty of the Greeks by the battle of Cheronea.
336 Philip King of Macedon murdered, and succeeded by his son Alexander the Great.
332 Alexandr [...]a in Egypt built.
331 Alexander, King of Macedon, conquers During King of Persia, and other nations of Asia.
323 Dies at Babylon, and his empire is divided by his generals into four kingdoms, af­ter destroying his wives, children, brother, mother, and sisters.
291 Darkness at Rome at noon day.
290 Solar quadrants introduced at Rome.
285 Dronysius, of Alexandria, began his astronomical aera on Monday June 26, being the first who found the solar year to consist exactly of 365 days five hours and 49 minutes.
264 Ptolemy Philadelphus, King of Egypt, employs seventy two interpreters to translata the Old Testament into the Greek language, which is called the Septuagint.
269 The first coinage of silver at Rome.
264 The first Punic was begins, and continus 24 years. The chronology of the Arun­delian marbles composed.
250 Eratofthenes first attempted to measure the earth.
242 Conic sections invented by Apollonius.
218 The second Punic was begins, and continues 17 years. Hannibal passes the Alps, and defeats the Romans in several battles; but being abandoned and refused sup­port buy his countrymen, fails in the accomplishment of his purpose.
190 The first Roman army enters Asia, and from the spoils of Antiochus brings the Asi­atic luxury to Rome.
170 Eighty thousand Jews massacred by Antiochus Epipha [...]es.
168 Perseus defeated by the Romans, which ends the Macedonian kingdom.
167 The first library erected at Rome, of books brought from Macedonia.
163 The government of Judea under the Maccabees begins, and continues 126 years.
146 Carthage and Corinth rased to the ground by the Romans.
145 An hundred thousand inhabitants of Antioch massacred in one day by the Jews.
135 The history of the Apocrypha ends.
63 Catiline's conspiracy against the liberties of his country defected.
52 Julius Caesar makes his first expedition into Britain.
47 The battle of Pharsalia between Caesar and Pompey, in which the letter is defeated. The Alexandrian library, consisting of 400,000 valuable books, burnt by accident.
45 The war of Africa, in which Cato kills himself.
  The solar year introduced by Caesar.
44 Caesar killed in the senate house, after having sought [...]0 pitched battled, and over­turned the liberties of his country.
43 Brutus, one of the conspirators against Caesar, and chief of the republicans, being vanquished in the battle of Philippi, kills himself.
35 The battle of Actium fought, in which Mark Antony and Cleopatra are totally de­feated by Octavius, nephew to Julius Caesar.
30 Alexandara taken by Octavius, and Egypt reduced to a Roman province.
27 Octavius, by a decree of the senate, obtains the title of Augustus Caesar, and an ab­solute exemption from the laws, and is properly the first Roman Emperor.
8 The temple of Janus is shut by Augustus, as an emblem of universal peace; and JESUS CHRIST is supposed to have been born in September, or on Monday, December 25.
After Christ.  
12 CHRIST disputes with the Doctors in the temple.
29 —is baptized in the wilderness by John.
33 —is crucified on Friday, April 3, at three o'clock, P. M.
  His Resurrection on Lord's day, April 5: His Ascension, Thursday, May 14.
36 St. Paul converted.
39 St. Matthew writes his Gospel.
  Pontius Pilate kills himself.
40 The name of Christians first given at Antioch to the followers of Christ.
43 Claudius Caesar's expedition into Britain.
44 St. Mark writes his Gospel.
46 Christianity carried into Spain.
49 London is founded by the Romans; and in 363 surrounded with a wall, some parts of which are still observable.
51 Caractacus, the British King, is carried in chains to Rome.
52 The council of the Apostles at Jerusalem.
55 St. Luke write his Gospel.
60 Christianity preached in Britain.
61 Boadicea, the British Queen, defeats the Romans; but is conquered soon after by Suetonius, governor [...] Britain.
62 St. Paul is sent in bonds to Rome—write his epistles between 51 and 66.
63 The acts of the Apostles written.
  Christianity is supposed to be introduced into Britain by St. Paul, or some of his disciples, about this time.
64 Rome set fire, and burned for six days; upon which began, under Nero, the first persecution against the Christians.
67 St. Peter and St. Paul put to death.
70 Tites takes Jerusalem, which is rased to the ground, and the plough made to p [...] over it.
79 Herculancum overwhelmed by an eruption of Mount Vesuvius.
[...] Julius Agricola, governor of South Britain, to protect the civilized Britons from the incursions of the Caledonians, builds a line of forts between the rivers Forth and Clyde; defents the Caledonians under Galgacus on the Grampian hills; and first fails round Britain.
96 St. John the Evangelist wrote his revelation—his Gospel in 97.
124 The Caledonians reconquer from the Romans all the southern parts of Scotland; up­on which the Emperor Adrian builds a wall between Newcastle and Carlisle; but this also proving ineffectual, Pollian Urbicus, the Roman general, about the year 144, repairs Agricola's forts, which be joins by a wall four yards thick, since call­ed Anto [...]inus's wall.
136 The second Jewish war ends, when they were all banished Judea.
139 Justin writes his first apology for the Christians.
140 Dublin built.
152 The Emperor Antoni [...]s Plus shops the persecution against the Christians.
211 The Emperor soverus, after having conquered the Scots, and pent them up by a new wall between the Forth and Clyde (since called Graham's Dyhe) having also con­quered the Parthians in the East, and extended the Roman empire to its utmost bounds, dies at York.
217 The Sept [...]gint said to be found in a cast. Church yards begin to be consecrated.
274 Silk first brought from India, and the manufactory of it introduced into Europe 551.
3 [...]3 The tenth general persecution begins under Dioclesian and Galerius.
[...]6 Constantine the Great begins his reign.
308 C [...]dinals first instituted.
313 The tenth persecution ends by an edict of Constantine, who favours the Christians, and gives full liberty to their religion.
325 The first general council at Nice, when 318 fathers attended against Arius, where was composed the famous Nicene Creed.
328 Constantine removes the sent of empire from Rome to Byzantium, which in thence forward called Const [...]tinople.
331 Constantine orders all the heathen temples to be destroyed.
363 The Emperor Julius, forwarded the Apostate, endeavours in rain to rebuild the tem­ple of Jerusalem.
364 The Roman empire is divided into the eastern (Constantinoble the capital) and west­ern (of which Rome continued to be the capital;) each being now under the gov­ernment of different Emperors.
The Scots utterly defeated and driven out of their country by the Pists and Romans.
Marriage in Lent forbidden.
400 Rolls invented by bishop Panlinus of Nola in Campagna.
404 The kingdom of Scotland revives under Fergus II.
410 Rome taken and plundered by Ala [...]ic, King of the Goths.
412 The Vandals begin their kingdom in Spain.
420 The kingdom of France begins upon the lower Rhine, under Phara [...]ond. Salique law confirmed by this monarch.
426 The Romans withdraw their troops from Britain, and never return, advising the Britons to arm in their own defence, and trust to their own valour.
432 St. Patrick began to preach in Ireland: he died 17th March, 493, aged 100 years.
446 The Britons, now left to themselves, are greatly harassed by the Scots and Picts; upon which they once more make their complaint to the Romans, but receive no assistance from that quarter.
447 Attila (surnamed the Scourge of God) with his Huns, ravages the Roman empire.
449 Vortigern, King of the Britons, invites the Saxoms into Britain against the Scots and Picts.
455 The Saxons having repulsed the Scots and Picts, invite [...] more of their country­men, and begin to establish themselves in kent under [...]
476 The western empire entirely destroyed; upon the ruins of which several new states arise in Italy and other parts, consisting of Goths, Vandals, Huns, and other Bar­bartans; under whom literature is extinguished, and the works of the learned are destroyed.
496 Clovis King of France baptined, and Christianity begins in that kingdom.
508 Prince Arthur begins his reign over the Britain.
510 Paris becomes the capital of France.
516 The computing of time by the Christian aera is introduced by Dionysins the monk
529 The code of Justinian, the eastern Emperor, is published.
557 A terrible plague all over Europe, Asia, and Africa, which continues near 50 years.
581 Latin ceased to be spoken about this time in Italy.
600 Bells first used in churches.
606 The power of the Popes begins by the concessions of Phocas, Emperor of the East.
622 Mahomet flied from Mecca to Medina in Arabia. His followers compute their time from this aera, which in Arabic is called Hegira, i. e. the Flight.
637 Jerusalem taken by the Saracens, or followers of Maho [...]et.
640 Alexandria in Egypt is taken by the Saracens, and the grand libeary there burned by order of Omar their caliph, or prince.
664 Glass invented in England by Benalt a monk.
670 Building with stone introduced into England by Ben [...]et a monk.
685 The Britons totally expelled by the Saxons, and driven into Wales and Cornwall.
696 Churches first begun to be bulk in England.
723 The Saracens conquer Spain. Their progress slopped in France by Charles Mar­tel, in 732.
726 The controversy about images begins, and occasions many insurrections in the Eas­tern empire.
748 The computing of years from the birth of Christ begun to be used in history.
749 The race of Abbas become caliphs of the Saracens, and encourage learning.
761 Thirty thousand books burnt by order of the Emperor Lee
76 [...] The city of Bagdad upon the Tigris is made the capital of the Saracen Empire.
786 The surplice, a vestment of the Pagan priests, introduced into churches.
800 Charlemagne, King of France, begins the empire of Germany, afterwards called the western empire, and endeavours in vain to restore learning in Europe.
828 Egbert King of Wessex unites the Heptarchy by the name of England.
838 The Scots and Picts have a decisive bottle, in which the former prevail, and both kingdoms are united by Kennet, which begins the second period of the Scottish history.
  The Danes with 60 ships arrived at, and book Dublin.
867 The Danes begin their ravages in England.
871 Bath Springs first discovered.
886 Juries first instituted.
896 Alfred the Great, after subduing the Danish invaders, composes his body of laws: divides England into counties, boundrods, and tythings; erects country courts, and founds the University of Oxford about this time.
915 The University of Cambridge founded.
936 The Saracen Empire divided into seven kingdoms, by usurpotion.
940 Christianity established in Denmark.
969 Christianity established in Russia.
991 The figures in arithmetic are brought into Europe by the Saracens, from Arabia. Letters of the Alphabet were hitherto used.
996 Otho III, makes the Empire of Germany elective.
999 Boleslaus the first King of Poland.
1000 Paper made of cotton rags comes into use, that of limen do. 1170.
1005 All the old churches are rebuilt about this time in a new style.
1014 On Good Friday, April 23d, the famous bottle of Clontarf was sought, wherein the Danes were completely defeated with a loss of 11,000 men, and driven out of Ireland—but the Irish King, Brian Boromy, was killed, aged 88.
1015 Children forbidden by law to be sold by their parents in England.
  Priests forbidden to marry.
1017 Canute, King of Denmark, gets possession of England.
1025 Musical gamut invented.
1040 The Danes driven one of Scotland.
1041 The Saxon line restored under Edward the confessor.
1043 The Turks become formidable, and take possession of Persia.
1065 The Turks take Jerusalem from the seracens.
1066 The bottle of Hastings fought, between Harold and William duke of No [...]andy, in which Harold is conquered and stain: After which William becomes King of England.
1070 William introduces the feudal law.
1075 Henry IV, Emperor of Germany, and the Pope, quarrel about the nomination of the German bishops, Henry, in [...], walks [...] to Roma, towards the end of January.
1076 Justices of the peace first appointed in England.
1080 Doomsday book began to be compiled by order of William, from a survey of all the estates in England, and finished in 1086.
  The Tower of London built by the same prince, to curb his English subjects; numbers of whom fly to Scotland, where they introduce the Saxon or English language; are protected by Malcolm, and have lands given them.
1086 Kingdom of Bohemia begun.
1091 The Saracens in Spain, being hard pressed by the Spaniards, call to their assistance Joseph King of Morocco; by which the Moors get possession of all the Saracen dominions in Spain.
1096 The first crusade to the Holy Land begun, to drive the inside [...]s from Jerusalem.
1107 King's speech first delivered by Henry 1.
1110 Edgar Atheling, the last of the Saxon princes, dies in England, where he had been permitted to reside as a subject.
  Learning revived in Cambridge
1118 The order of the Knights Templars instituted to defend the Scpulchre at Jerusalem, and to protect Christian strangers.
1140 King Stephen grants liberty to his nobles to build castles; in consequence of which 1100 are erected in 14 years.
1151 The canon law collected by Gratian, a monk of Bologna.
1163 London bridge, consisting of 19 small arches, first built of stone.
1164 The Teutonic order of religious knights begins in Germany.
1171 Dermot Mac Murrogh, prince of Leinster, being beaten and put to slight by other princes, induces some English adventurers to land in Ireland, and assist him in recovering his dominions: Dublin is besieged and taken by Raymond le Gross.
1172 Henry II, lands at Waterford, and soon after obtains from Richard E. Strongbow (who had married the daughter of Mac Murrogh, and according to compact, suc­ceeded to his dominions) a surrender of Dublin; where he erects a pavilion of wicker work, and entertains several Irish princes, who, voluntarily, submit to him, on condition of being governed by the same laws, civil and ecclesiastical, and enjoying the same liberties and immunities, as the people of England.
  Henry II, landed in Ireland, with 400 knights and 5000 men.
1173 The same king grants its first charter to Dublin; and, by divers privileges, en­courages a colony from Bristol to settle in it.
1174 Henry II, creates his younger son, 12 years old, King or lord of Ireland, who grants charters to the city of Dublin, and other corporations.
1180 Glass windows began to be used in private houses in England.
1182 Pope Alexander III, compelled the Kings of England and France to hold the stir­rups of his saddle when he mounted his horse.
1186 The great conjunction of the sun and moon and all the planets in Libra, happened in September.
1192 The battle of Ascalon, in Judea, in which Richard, King of England, defeats Sal­adine's army, consisting of 300,000 combatants.
  Richard treacherously imprisoned in his way home by the Emperor of germony
1194 Dieu et mon Droit, first used as a motto by Richard, on a victory over the French.
1200 Chimnies were not known in England.
  Surnames now began to be used; first among the nobility.
1208 London incorporated, and obtained its first charter from King John.
1210 King John met in Dublin upwards of 20 Irish princes, who swore allegiance to him, and there caused them to establish the English laws and customs.
1215 Magna Charta is signed by King John and the barons of England; and the follow­ing year it is granted to the Irish by Henry III.
1217 The same prince grants the city of Dublin to the citizens, in fee farm, at 200 marks per [...]annum.
1227 The Tartars, a new race of barbarians, under Gingis Khan, emerge from the north­ern parts of Asia, conquer the greatest part of that continent, and in 22 years destroy upwards of 14 millions of people.
1233 The inquisition, begun in 1204, is now trusted to the Dominicans.
  The houses of London, and other cities in England, France, and Germany, still thatched with straw.
1252 Magnifying glasses invented by Roger Bacon.
1253 The famous astronomical tables are composed by Alonzo King of Castile.
1258 The Tartars take Bagdad, which puts an end to the empire of the Saracens.
1263 Acho, King of Norway, invades Scotland with 160 fail, and lands 20,000 men at the mouth of the Clyde, but most of them are cut to pieces by Alexander III, who recovers the western isles.
1264 The commons of England have a place in parliament.
1269 The Hamburgh company incorporated in England.
1273 The empire of the present Austrian family begins in Germany.
1280 Pulvis fulminans and gun powder invented by Roger Bacon.
1282 Lewellyn, prince of Wales, defeated and killed by Edward I, who unites that principality to England.
1284 Edward 11, born at Carnarvon, is the first prince of Wales.
1285 Alexander III, King of Scotland dies, and that kingdom is disputed by twelve can­didates, who submit their claims to the arbitration of Edward King of England:
  Which lays the foundation of a long and desolating war between the two nations. Spectacles invented by Alexander Spina, a Spanish monk.
1293 There is a regular succession of English parliaments from this year, being the and of Edward I.
1298 The present Turkish empire begins in Bithynia under Ottoman. Silver hasted knives, spoons, and cups, a great luxury. Splinters of wood gen­erally used for lights.
  Wine sold by apothecaries as a cordial.
1299 Windmills invented.
1300 About this time the mariner's compass was invented, or improved, by John Gioia, or Goya, a Neapolitan. The flower de luce, the arms of the duke of Anjou, then King of Naples, was placed by him at the point of the needle, in compli­ment to that prince.
1307 The beginning of the Swise cantons.
  Interest of money in England at 45 per cent.
1308 The Popes remove to Avignon in France for 70 years.
1314 The battle of Bannockburn between Edward II, and Robert Bruce, in which the English are overthrown with prodigious slaughter, and all their boasted preten­sions of sovereignty are utterly dissipated.
1320 Gold first coined in Christendom.
1335 Two Brabant weavers settle at York, which, says Edward III, may prove of great benefit to us and our subjects.
1337 The first comet whose course is described with astronomical exactness.
1340 Gunpowder first suggested as useful for warlike purposes by Swartz, a monk of Cologne; 1346, Edward III, had four pieces of cannon, which contributed to gain him the battle of Cressy.
  Oil painting first made use of by John Vaneck.
1344 The first creation to titles by patent used by Edward III.
1349 The order of the Garter instituted in England by Edward III.
1352 The Turks first enter Europe.
1356 The battle of Porctiers, in which King John of France, and his sons, are taken prisoners by Edward the Black Prince.
1357 Coals first brought to London.
1358 Arms of England and France first quartered by Edward III.
1362 The law pleadings in England changed from French to English, as a favour of Edward III, to his people.
1386 A company of linen weavers from the Netherlands established in London.
1388 The battle of Otterburn between Hot [...]pur and the earl of Douglas; on this is founded the ballad of Chevy Chace.
  Title of Baron first given by Richard II.
1390 Coarse cloth first made in England at Kendal.
1391 Cards invented in France for the King's amusement.
1399 Westminster Abbey rebuilt and enlarged. Order of the Bath instituted at the coronation of Henry IV.
1402 Bajazet defeated by Tamerlane, and the power of the Turks almost entirely destroyed.
1404 Hats for men invented at Paris by a Swiss.
1412 Denmark united with the crown of Norway.
1415 The battle of Agincourt, gained over the French by Henry V, of England.
1416 The art of curing herrings invented by William Boekel, a Dutchman: By which he rendered an essential service to his country.
1428 The siege of Orleans. The celebrated Maid of Orleans appears, and gives the first blow to the English power in France. She is afterwards taken prisoner, and basely put to death.
1430 Laurentius of Haerlem invents the Art of Printing, which he practised with sepa­rate wooden types. Guttenburgh afterwards invented cut metal types. Peter Schoeffer invented the mode of casting types in matrices. But the most authentic accounts ascribe the invention of Printing to Dr. Faust, or Faustus, in 1444.
1446 The Vatican library founded at Rome.
  The sea broke in at Dort, and drowned 100,000 people.
1453 Constantinople taken by the Turks, which utterly overthrown the Roman empire.
1454 Otto Guerick, a German, invents the air pump.
  Cape Verd Isles first seen.
  Duelling appointed in certain cases in France, in order to have the judgment of God.
1460 Engravings and etchings in copper invented.
1461 Decimal arithmetic invented, and the use of tangents in trigonometry introduced, by Reg [...]omontanus.
147 [...] Greek language brought into France.
148 [...] Richard III, King of England, and last of the Plantagenets, is defeated and killed at the battle of Bosworth, by Henry (Tudor) VII, which puts on end to the civil wars between the houses of York and Lancaster.
1485 Great numbers carried off by the sweating sickness.
1486 Henry establishes fifty yeomen of the guards, the first standing army.
1489 Maps and sea charts first brought to England by Earth. Columbus.
1491 William Grocyn publickly teaches the Greek language at Oxford.
  The Moors, hitherto a formidable enemy to the native Spaniards, are entirely sub­dued by Ferdinand, and become subjects of that prince on certain conditions; but are cruelly persecuted by the inquisitors.
1492 AMERICA discovered by Columbus.
1494 Algebra first known in Europe.
1497 The Portuguese first sail to the East Indies by the Cape of Good Hope.
  South America discovered by Americus Vespusins, from whom the continent unjustly takes its name. North America discovered by Cabot.
1500 Maximilian divides the empire of Germany into six circles.
  Brasil discovered by Cabral.
150 [...] Mines used in the attack and defence of places, invented.
1509 Gardening introduced into England from the Netherlands, from whence vegetables were imported hitherto.
1512 Florida discovered.
1513 The battle of Flowden, in which James IV, of Scotland, is killed, with the flower of his nobility.
1517 Martin Luther began the Reformation.
  Egypt conquered by the Turks.
1518 Magellan, in the service of Spain, discovers the straits which bear his name, makes the first voyage round the world, but is killed by savages in the Marianne islands.
  Republick of Geneva founded.
1520 Henry VIII, for his writings in favour of Popery, receives the title of "Defender of the Faith" from the Pope.
  Chocolate first brought from Mexico by the Spaniards.
1529 The name of Protestant takes its rise from the Reformed protesting against the church of Rome, at the diet of Spires in Germany.
1530 Copernicus revives the Pythagorean system of astronomy.
1533 Currant trees brought into England from Zante.
1537 Religious houses dissolved by Henry VIII.
1539 The first English edition of the Bible authorised, the present translation finished 1611.
  About this time cannon began to be used in ships.
1543 Silk stockings first worn by the French king. Pins first used in England; before which time the ladies used skewers.
1544 Good lands let in England at one shilling per acre.
1545 The famous council of Trent begins, and continues 18 years.
1546 Interest of money first established in England by law at ten per cent.
  Ann Ascue, a Protestant, cruelly tortured by order of Henry VIII, who, to the ut­ter disgrace of royalty, put his own hands to the rack, as not thinking the ex­ecutioner sufficiently expert. She endured every thing with patience, and was afterwards burnt.
1549 Lords lieutenants of counties instituted in England.
1550 Cherries, pears, &c. introduced into England.
1553 Circulation of the blood through the lungs first published by Michael Servetus.
1557 Groats and half groats the greatest silver coin in England.
1560 Siberia was about this time discovered, under the reign of the Czar Ivan Basilides.
1563 Knives first made in England.
  The 39 articles of the English faith established.
1565 Botany revived at Thuringe in Germany.
  Potatoes first brought to Ireland from New Spain.
  Henry Lord Darnly, husband to Queen Mary of Scotland, blown up with gunpow­der in the Provost's house at Edinburgh, about two in the morning of Feb. 11.
1569 Royal Exchange, of London, first built.
  Circulation of the blood published by Cisalpinus.
  Mary Queen of Scotland, driven from her kingdom by the rebellion of her sub­jects, flies to Queen Elizabeth for protection, by whom she is treacherously im­prisoned.
1571 Printing in Irish characters first instituted.
1572 The great massacre of Protestants at Paris.
1573 Marby hill in Hereford removed of itself.
1578 Apricots and artichokes introduced into England.
1579 The Dutch shake off the Spanish yoke, and the republic of Holland begins.
  English East India company incorporated—established 1600. English Turkey company incorporated.
1580 Sir Francis Drake returns from his voyage round the world, being the first English circumnavigator.
1581 J. Usher, Archbishop of Armagh, born in Dublin, drew up 104 articles of religion for Ireland, 1615: which were established, 1635.—Died. 1636.
1582 Pope Gregory introduces the New Style in Italy; the 5th October being counted 15.
1583 Tobacco first brought from Virginia into England.
1587 Mary Queen of Scots is beheaded by order of Elizabeth, after 18 years imprisonment.
  Duelling introduced into England.
1588 The Spanish Armada destroyed by Drake and other English Admirals.
  Henry IV, passes the edict of Nantz, tolerating the Protestants.
  The manufactory of paper introduced into England at Dartford.
1589 Coaches first introduced into England. Bombs invented at Venlo.
1591 Trinity college, Dublin, founded.
1597 Watches first brought into England from Germany.
1600 Building with brick introduced into England by the earl of Arundel, most of the houses in London being hitherto built with wood.
1602 Decimal arithmetic invented at Bruges.
1603 Queen Elizabeth (the last of the Tudors) dies, and nominates James VI. of Scot­land (and first of the Stuarts) as her successor: which unites both kingdoms un­der the name of Great Britain.
1605 The Gunpowder Plot discovered at Westminster.
  Kepler lays the foundation of the Newtonian system of attraction.
1606 Oaths of allegiance first administered in England.
1608 Galileo, of Florence, first discovers the satellites about the planet Jupiter by the telescope, then just invented in Holland.—Quebec settled by the French.
1610 Henry IV, is murdered at Paris by Ravilliac, a priest.
  Virginia and Newfoundland settled by the English.
  Hudson's Bay discovered by a Captain of that name, who is left by his men to perish on that desolate coast.
1611 Baronets first created in England by James I.
1614 Napier, of Marcheston, in Scotland, invents the logarithms.
  Sir Hugh Middleton brings the New River to London from Ware.
  The custom of powdering the hair took its rise from some ballad singers at St. German's fair, who powdered themselves to look the more ridiculous.
  New York and New Jersey settled by the Dutch.
1618 New Holland discovered by the Dutch.
1619 Dr. W. Harvey, an Englishman, fully confirms the doctrine of the circulation of the blood.
1620 The broad silk manufactory from raw silk introduced into England.
1623 New Hampshire settled by an English colony.
  Plymouth in New England planted by a part of Mr. Robinson's congregation.
1625 The island of Barbadoes, the first English settlement in the West Indies, is planted.
1626 The barometer invented by Torricelli.
1627 The thermometer invented by Drebellius.
  A colony of Swedes settled on Delaware river, Pennsylvania.
1630 Peruvian bark first brought to France.
1631 Newspapers first published at Paris.
1632 The battle of Lutzen, in which Gustavus Adolphus, King of Sweden, and head of the Protestants in Germany, is killed.
1633 Maryland settled by Lord Baltimore, with a colony of Roman Catholics.
1635 Connecticut and Rhode Island settled.
1638 Harvard College in Cambridge, Massachusetts, established.
1640 King Charles disobliges his Scottish subjects; on which their army under General L [...]sley, enters England, and takes Newcastle, being encouraged by the mal [...]con­tents in England.
  The massacre in Ireland, when 40,000 English Protestants were killed.
1642 Civil war begins in England.
1646 Episcopacy abolished in England.
  Sympathetick powder made known by Sir K [...]nelm Digby.
1647 The first Sck [...]ographick maps made by Hevelius.
1649 Charles I, beheaded at Whitehall, January 30, aged 49.
1652 The first coffee house in London.
  The speaking trumpet invented by Kircher, a Jesuit.
1654 Crom well assumes the Protectorship.
1655 The English, under Admiral Penn, take Jamaica from the Spaniards.
1658 Crom well dies, and is succeeded in the Protectorship by his son Richard.
1659 Transfusion of the blood first suggested at Oxford.
1660 King Charles II, is restored by Monk, commander of the army, after an exile of twelve years in France and Holland.
  Episcopacy restored in England and Scotland.
  The people of Denmark being oppressed by the Nobles, surrender their privileges to Fred. III, who becomes absolute.
1662 The Royal Society established in London by Charles II.
  Pendulum Clocks invented by John Fromentel, a Dutchman.
  Fire engines invented.
1665 The plague rages in London.
1666 The great fire of London began, Sept. 2, and continued three days, in which were destroyed 13,000 houses and 400 streets.
  Tea first used in England.
  Academy of sciences established in France.
1667 The peace of Breda, which confirms to the English the New Netherlands, now known by the names of Pennsylvania, New York, and New Jersey.
1669 South Carolina planted by an English colony under Governor Sayle.
1670 The English Hudson's Bay Company incorporated.
1671 Academy of Architecture established in France.
1672 Lewis XIV, overruns g [...]t part of Holland, when the Dutch open their sluices, being determined to drown their country, and retire to their settlements in the East Indies.
  African company established.
1673 St. Helena taken by the English.
1675 Coffee houses shut up by proclamation, as encouragers of sedition.
1676 Repeating clocks and watches invented by Barlow.
1678 The peace of N [...]meguen.
  The habeas corpus act passed.
1679 Darkness at London, that one could not read at noon day, January 12.
1680 A great comet appeared, and continued visible from Nov. 3, to March 9.
1681 William Penn, a Quaker, receives a charter for planting Pennsylvania.
  Pennsylvania settled.
1682 College of physicians, at Edinburgh, incorporated.
  Royal academy established at Nismes.
1683 India stock sold from 360 to 500 per cent.
1685 The duke of Monmouth, natural son to Charles II, raises a rebellion, but is de­feated at the battle of Sedgemoor, and beheaded.
  The edict of Nantz infamously revoked by Lewis XIV, and the Protestants cruelly persecuted.
1687 The palace of Versailles, near Paris, finished by Lewis XIV.
1688 The Revolution in Great Britain begins, Nov. 5, King James retires to France, December 3.
1689 King William and Queen Mary, daughter and son in law to James II, are proclaim­ed February 16.
  Viscount Dundee stands out for James in Scotland, but is killed after gaining the battle of Killycrankie, upon which the Highlanders disperse.
  The land tax passes in England. The toleration act passes in ditto.
1690 The battle of the Boyne, gained by William against James, in Ireland.
1691 The war in Ireland finished, by the surrender of Limerick to William.
1692 The English and Dutch fleets, commanded by Admiral Russel, defeated the French sleet off La Hogue.
1693 Bayonets at the end of loaded muskets first used by the French.
  The duchy of Hanover made the ninth electorate.
  Bank of England established by King William. The first public lottery was drawn this year.
  Stamp duties instituted in England.
1695 Bank of Scotland established.
1696 The peace of Ryswick.
1697 Malt tax established.
1699 The Scots settled a colony at the isthmus of Darien, in America, and called it Caledonia.
1700 Charles XII, of Sweden, begins his reign.
  Yale College established at Saybrook, Connecticut—removed to New Haven 1716.
1701 Prussia elected into a kingdom.
  Cottonian library settled for public benefit.
  Society for the propagation of the Gospel in foreign parts established.
1702 King William dies, aged 50, and is succeeded by Queen Ann, daughter to James II, who, with the Emperor and States General, renews the war against France and Spain.
1704 Gibraltar taken from the Spaniards by Admiral Rooke.
  The battle of Blenheim, won by the Duke of Marlborough and allies against the French.
  The Court of Exchequer instituted in England. Prussian blue discovered at Berlin.
1706 The Treaty of Union betwixt England and Scotland, signed June 22.
1707 The first British parliament.
1708 Mino [...]a taken from the Spaniards by General Stanhope.
  The battle of Oudenarde won by Marlborough and the allies.
  Sardinia erected into a kingdom, and given to the Duke of Savoy.
1709 Peter the Great, Czar of Muscovy, defeats Charles XII, at Pultowa, who slies to Turkey.
1710 Queen Anne changes the Whig Ministry for others more favourable to the interest of her brother, the late Pretender.
  The cathedral church of St. Paul, London, rebuilt by Sir Christopher Wren, in 37 years, at one million expense, by a duty on coals.
  The English South Sea Company [...]egan.
1713 The peace of U [...]cht, whereby Newfoundland, Nova Scotia, New Britain, and Hudson's Bay, in North America, were yielded to Great Britain; Gibraltar and Mino [...]ca, in Europe, were also confirmed to the said crown by this treaty.
1714 Queen Anne dies▪ at the age of 50, and is succeeded by George I. Interest reduced to five per cent▪ in England.
1715 Lewis XIV▪ dies, and is succeeded by his great grandson Lewis XV.
  The rebellion in Scotland begins in September, under the Earl of Mar, in favour of the Pretender. The action of Sheriffmuir, and the surrender of Preston, both in November, when the rebels disperse.
1716 Au [...]ora Borealis first taken notice of in England—1719 in New England.
  The Pretender married to the Princess Sobieski, grand daughter to John Sobieski, late King of Poland.
  An act passed for septennial parliaments.
1719 The Mississippi scheme at its height in France.
  Lombe's silk throwing machine, containing 26,586 wheels, erected at Derby; takes up one eighth of a mile; one water wheel moves the rest; and in 24 hours it works 318,504,960 yards of organzine silk thread.
  The South Sea scheme in England begun April 7, was at its height at the end of June, and quite sunk about September 29.
1727 King George dies, in the 68th year of his age; and is succeeded by his only son, George II.
  Inoculation first tried on criminals with success.
  Russia, formerly a dukedom, is now established as an empire.
1728 North Carolina settled about this time.
1729 Parliament sat at the Blue coat hospital, Dublin, where an attempt was made to obtain the supplies for 21 years; but rejected by a majority of One.
1731 The first person executed in Britain for forgery.
1732 Kouh Khan usurps the Persian throne, conquers the Mogul empire, and returns with two hundred and thirty one millions sterling.
  Several public spirited gentlemen begin the settlement of Georgia, one of the United States of America.
1736 Captain Port [...], having ordered his soldiers to fire upon the populace, at the ex­ecution of a smuggler, is himself hanged by the mob at Edinburgh.
1737 The earth proved to be flatted towards the poles.
1738 Westminster bridge, consisting of fifteen arches, begun; finished in 1750, at the ex­pense of 389,000l. defrayed by parliament.
1739 Letters of marque issued out in Britain against Spain, July 21, and war declared October. 23.
1742 The first ship with Irish coals arrived at Dublin from Newry.
1743 The battle of Dettingen won by the English and allies, in favour of the Queen of Hungary.
1744 War declared against France.
  Commodore Anson returns from his voyage round the world.
1745 The rebellion breaks out in Scotland, and the Pretender's army defeated by the Duke of Cumberland.—Culloden, April 16, 1746.
1746 British Linen Company erected.
  Electric shock discovered.
  Li [...] and Callao swallowed up by [...].
1748 The peace of Aix la Chapel [...]e, by which a restitution of all places taken during the war was to be made on all sides.
  Halifax, in Nova Scotia, built.
1749 The interest of the British funds reduced to three per cent.
  British herring fishery incorporated. Dublin Society incorporated by charter.
1751 Antiquarian Society at London incorporated.
1752 The new style introduced into Great Britain; the third of September being count­ed the fourteenth.
  Identify of electric fire and lightning discovered by Dr. Franklin, who thereupon invented a method of securing buildings from thunder storms.
1753 The British Museum erected at Montague house.
  Society of Arts, Manufactures, and Commerce, instituted in London.
1755 Lisbon destroyed by an earthquake.
1756 One hundred and forty six Englishmen are confined in the black hole at Calcutta, in the East Indies, by order of the Nabob, and 123 found dead next morning.
  Marine Society established at London.
1759 General Wolse is killed in the battle of Quebec, which is gained by the English.
1760 Black Friars bridge, consisting of nine arches, begun; finished 1770, at the expense of 152,840l. to be discharged by a toll. George II dies, and is succeeded by George III.
1762 War declared against Spain.
  Peter III, Emperor of Russia, is deposed, imprisoned, and murdered.
  American philosophical society established in Philadelphia.
1763 The definitive treaty of peace between Great Britain, France, Spain, and Portugal, concluded at Paris, February 10, which confirmed to Great Britain the extensive provinces of Canada, East and West Florida, and part of Louisiana, in North America; also the Islands of Grenada, St. Vincent, Dominica, and Tobago, in the West Indies.
1764 The parliament granted 10,000l. to Mr. Harrison, for his discovery of the longi­tude by has time piece.
1769 George III's royal charter passed for incorporating the society of artists.
  The famous stamp act passed in the British Parliament March 23. Repealed March 1 [...], 1766.
  Grand canal adjoining the city bason, Dublin, begun; completed to mo [...]astereven in 1786.
1766 A great spot passed the s [...]n's centre.
  Gibraltar almost destroyed by a storm.
1768 Academy of painting established in London.
  The Turks imprison the Russian Ambassador, and declare war against that empire.
  Duration of Irish parliaments limited to eight years.
1769 Electricity of the aurora borealis discovered by Wideburg at Je [...].
1770 Massacre at Boston, March 5.
1771 Dr. Solander and Mr. Banks, in his Majesty's ship the Endeavour, Lieutenant Cook, return from a voyage round the world, having made several important discoveries.
1772 The King of Sweden changes the constitution of that kingdom.
  A dreadful fire at Antigua.
  Twelve hundred and forty people killed in the island of Java by an electrified cloud.
  A revolution in Denmark.
  The Emperor of Germany, Empress of Russia, and the King of Prussia, strip the King of Poland of great part of his dominions, which they divide among them­selves, in violation of the most solemn treaties.
1773 Capt. Phipps is sent to explore the North Pole; but having made eighty one de­grees▪ is in danger of being locked up by the ice, returns.
  The Jesuits expelled from the Pope's dominions, and suppressed by his bull.
  The English East India Company having, by conquest or treaty, acquired the ex­tensive provinces of Bengal, Orixa, and [...]har, containing fifteen millions of in­habitants, great irregularities are committed by their servants abroad, upon which the British government interferes, and sends out judges, &c.
  The war between the Russians and Turks proves disgraceful to the latter, who lose the islands in the Archipelago, and by sea are every where unsuccessful.
  Tea, 340 chests, destroyed at Boston.
1774 Peace proclaimed between the Russians and Turks.
  The British parliament having passed an act, laying a duty of three pence per pound upon all teas imported into America; the colonies, considering this as a grievance, deny the right of the British parliament to tax them.
  Boston Port Bill passed March 25. Deputies from the several American colonies [...] at Philadelphia, a [...] the first gen­eral congress, October 16.
  First petition of Congress to the King, November.
1775 April 19. The first action happens in America between the British troops and the Americans at Lexington.
  Ticonderoga and Crown Point taken by Colonels Allen and [...].
  A dreadful fire in Grenada; loss computed at 500,000l.
  Paper money issued by Congress.
  June 17, A bloody action at B [...]ker's Hill between the British troops and the A­mericans, in which the brave General Warren was [...]in.
  Charlestown burnt. Battle of Quebec, where fell the brave Montgomery, December 31st.
1776 March 17, The town of Boston [...] by the King's troops.
  An unsuccessful attempt in July, made by Commodore Sir Peter Parker and Lieu­tenant General Clinton, upon Charleston in South Carolina.
  Order for calling in all the light gold, and ordering it for the future to pass only by weight.
  Congress declare the American colonies free and independent States, July 4.
  The Americans retreat from Long Island, in August, after a bloody [...], and the city of New York is afterwards taken Possession of by the King's troops.
  December 25, General Washington take [...] 900 of the [...] prisoners at [...].
  Torture abolished in Poland.
  Battle of Brandy wine.
1777 General H [...] we takes possession of Philadelphia, September.
  Lieutenant General Burgoyne is obliged to surrender his army, consisting of 5752 men to the American Generals Gates and Arnold, October 17.
1778 A treaty of alliance concluded at Paris between the French King and the thirteen United American States, in which their independence i [...] acknowledged by the Court of France, February 6.
  The remains of the Earl of [...] [...] at the publick expense in Westmin­ster Abbey, June 9▪ in consequence of a [...] of parliament.
  The Earl of Carlisle, William Eden, Esq and George Johnstone, Esq arrived at Philadelphia the beginning of June, [...] [...] for [...] [...] between Great Britain and America.
1778 Philadelphia evacuated by the King's troops, June 18.
  Battle at Monmouth.
  The Congress refuse to treat with the British commissioners.
  Dominica taken by the French, September 7.
  Pondicherry surrenders to the arms of Great Britain, October 17.
  St. Lucia taken by the French, December 28.
1779 St. Vincent taken by the French.
  Grenada taken by the French, July 3.
  Battle at Stony Point, July 15.
  October 12. Both Houses of the Irish Parliament address the King for a free trade.
1780 Torture in courts of justice abolished in France.
  The inquisition abolished in the Duke of Modena's dominions.
  Admiral Rodney takes twenty two sail of Spanish ships. Jan. 8.
  The Admiral also engages a Spanish fleet under the command of Don Juan de La [...] ­gara, near Cape St. Vincent, and takes fire ships of the line, one more driven on shore, and another blown up, Jan. 16.
  Three actions between Admiral Rodney and the Count de Guichen, in the West Indies, in the months of April and May; but none of them decisive.
  Charleston, South Carolina, surrenders to Sir Henry Clinton, May 4.
  Pensacola, and the whole province of West Florida, surrender to the arms of the King of Spain, May 9.
  The Protestant Association, to the number of 50,000, go up to the House of Com­mons with their petition for the repeal of an act passed in favour of the Catholics.
  That event followed by the most daring riots in the cities of London and Southwark, for several successive days, in which some Popish chapels are destroyed, together with the prisons of Newgate, the King's Bench, the Fleet, several private houses, &c. These alarming riots are at length suppressed by the interposition of the military, and many of the rioters tried and executed for felony.
  Five English Fast Indiamen, and fifty English merchant ships bound for the West Indies, taken by the combined fleets of France and Spain, August 8▪
  Earl Cornwalli, obtains a victory over General Gates, near Camden, in South Car­olina, August 16.
  Arnold, the infamous traitor, deserts the service of his country, escapes to New York, and is made a Brigadier General in the British Service, September 24.—Burns New London.
  Major Andre, Adjutant General to the British army, hanged as a spy at Tappan, in the State of New York, October [...].
  The Hon. Henry Laurens is committed prisoner to the Tower on a charge of high treason, October 4.
  Dreadful hurricanes in the West Indies, by which great devastation is made in Jamaica, Barbadoes, St. Lucia, Dominica, and other islands, October 3, and 10.
  A declaration of hostilities published against Holland, December 20.
  First Irish State Lottery drawn.
  American an Academy of Arts and Sciences instituted in Massachusetts.
1781 The Dutch island of St. Eustatia taken by Admiral Rodney and General Vaughan, February 3. Retaken by the French, November 27.
  The [...]sland of sobago taken by the French, June 2.
  A bloody engagement fought between an English Squadron under the command of Admiral Parker, and a Dutch Squadron under the command of Admiral Zo [...]t­man, off the Dogger Bank, August 5.
  The Marqu [...]s La Fayette, at the head of 1000 light infantry, performs important services in Virginia.
  Earl Cornwa [...]s, with the British army under his command, surrendered prisoners of war to the American and French troops, under the command of General Wash­ington and Count Rochanibeau, at Yorktown, in Virginia, Oct. 19 which de­caded the contest in favour of America.
  Continental paper money ceased to circulate.
1782 Tri [...]co [...]ale, on the island of Ceylon, taken by Admiral Hughes, Jan.11.
  Mi [...]ca surrendered to the arms of the King of Spain, Feb. [...].
  The Island of St. Christopher taken by the French, Feb. 12.
  The Island of Nevis, in the West Indies, taken by the French, Feb. 14.
  Montserrat taken by the French, Feb. [...].
  The British House [...] of Commons address the King against any farther prosecution o [...] offensive war on the continent of North America, March 4; and resolve, that the House would consider all those as enemies to his Majesty and this country, who [Page 547] should advise, or by any means attempt, the further prosecution of offensive war on the continent of North America, for the purpose of reducing the revolted colonies to obedience by force.
  Admiral Rodney obtains a victory over the French fleet under the command of Count de Grasse, whom he takes prisoner, near Dominica, in the West Indies.
  April 6. The Parliament of Ireland asserted its independence and constitutional rights.
  The bill to repeal the declaratory act of George I, relative to the legislation of Ireland, received the royal assent, June 20.
  The first great Dungan [...]on meeting of Delegates from the Irish Ulster Volunteers, held February 15.
  The French took and destroyed the forts and settlements in Hudson's Bay, August 24.
  The Spaniards defeated in their grand attack on Gibraltar, September 13.
  Treaty concluded between the republic of Holland and the United States of Amer­ica, October 8.
  Provisional articles of peace singed at Paris between the British and American commissioners, by which the United American colonies are acknowledged by his Britannic Majesty to be free, sovereign and independent states, November 30.
1783 Preliminary articles of peace between his Britannic Majesty and the Kings of France and Spain, singed at Versailles, Jan. 20.
  Three earthquakes at Calabria Ulterior and Sicily, destroying a great number of towns and inhabitants, Feb. 5, 7, and 28th.
  Armistice between Great Britain and Holland, Feb. 10.
  Ratification of the definitive treaty of peace between Great Britain, France, Spain, and the United States of America, Sept. 3.
  The fire balloon invented by M. Montgol [...]er of Lyons; from which discovery Messrs. Charles and Robert of Paris taking the hint, construct inflammable gas, or the air balloon.
  Courts of justice in England and Ireland separated by a British act of Parliament.
  The bank of Ireland, established by act of Parliament, opened 25th June.
  A convention of representatives from all the Volunteer Corps of Ireland held in the Rotunda, Dublin, for promoting a Parliamentary Reform, 10th Nov.
1784 The city of London wait on the King with an address of thanks for dismissing the coalition ministry, Jan. 16.
  The Great Seal stolen from the Lord Chancellor's house in Great Ormond street, March 24.
  The definitive treaty of peace between Great Britain and Holland, May 24.
  Mr. Lunardi ascended in an air balloon from the Artillery ground, Moorfields; the first attempt of the kind in England, September 15.
1785 A Congress of Representatives from the Counties of Ireland held in Dublin, for promoting a Parliamentary Reform, January 20.
1786 Commissioners from several of the United States assembled at Annapolis, Mary­land, to consult what measures should be taken to unite the States in some gener­al and efficient system.
  Insurrection in Massachusetts.
  Charles River Bridge completed, connecting Boston and Charlestown, at the ex­pense of 15,000l.
  The King of Sweden prohibited the use of torture in his kingdom.
1787 The articles of Confederation, originally entered into by the United States, being found essentially defective, a general Convention of Delegates from all the States, except Rhode Island, was held at Philadelphia, this summer, with General Washington at their head, for the purpose of framing a general plan of govern­ment for the United States. And after four months deliberation, fixed on our present excellent constitution, which has since been ratified by all the States.
1788 George Washington was unanimously elected President of the United States, and John Adams, Vice President.
1789 Congress met at New York for the first time under the new Constitution, March. 4.
  April 30. George Washington was, in due form, publickly invested with the of­fice of President of the United States of America.
  July 14. Revolution in France—capture of the [...]stile.
1790 Grand French Confederation in the Champ de Mars.
1791 Seven islands discovered in the South Pacific Ocean, between the Marquesas and the Equator, by Capt. Joseph Ingraham, of Boston.
  First Folio and royal Quarto Bibles printed in America, at Worcester, Massachu­setts—Small Quarto, at Trenton, Newjersey.
1792 A bridge was built over Mernma [...]k River between Newbury and Salisbury.
1792 August. The Marquis la Fayette, General of the armies of France, who was the friend, and had served in the army of the United States; was a promoter of the French revolution, and firmly attached to the new Constitution of Iris country, accused of treason, and a price being set on his head, he quitted the army, and kingdom of France, with 12 officers of rank; who were all taken prisoners by the Prussians, and the Marquis is now in close confinement in the castle of Mag­deburg, once the residence of the celebrated Trenck.
1793 January. Trial of Louis 16th, King of France, commenced; the National Assem­bly, consisting of 745 members, of whom, 25 being absent, and the opinions of those present, taken, it was decreed by 480 (forming a majority) that the execu­tion should take place, without an appeal nominal to the people—the remaining number voted for punishment under various restrictions—Agreeably to the voice of the majority, be was beheaded the 21st January.
February 5. Declaration of War, against the Combined Powers of Great Britain, Holland, &c. issued by the National Assembly of France.
April. The President of the United States, issued his Proclamation, for the pur­poses of enjoining an impartial conduct on the part of the United States towards the belligerent powers, and of observing a strict neutrality.

MEN OF LEARNING AND GENIUS.

N. B. By the Dates is implied the Time when the Writers died; but taken that Period happens not to be known, the Age in which they flourished is signified by fl.
Bef. Christ.
907 HOMER, the first profane writer and Greek poet, flourished. He [...]od, the Greek poet, supposed to have lived near the time of Homer.
884 Ly [...]urgus, the Spartan lawgiver.
600 Sappho, the Greek Lyric poetess, fl.
558 Solon, lawgiver of Athens.
556 AEsop, the first Greek fabulist.
548 Thales, the first Greek astronomer and geographer.
497 Pythagoras, founder of the Pythagore­an philosophy in Greece.
478 Confucius, the Chinese Philosopher.
474 Anacreon, the Greek lyric poet.
456 AEschylus, the first Greek tragic poet.
435 Pindar, the Greek lyric poet.
413 Herodotus, of Greece, the first writer of profane history.
407 Aristophanes, the Greek comic poet, fl. Euripides, the Greek tragic poet.
406 Sophocles, ditto.
400 Socrates, the founder of moral Philo­sophy in Greece.
391 Thucydides, the Greek historian.
361 Hippocrates, the Greek physician. Democritus, the Greek philosopher.
350 Xenophon, ditto, and historian.
348 Plato, the Greek philosopher, and dis­ciple of Socrates.
336 Isocrates, the Greek orator.
332 Aristotle, the Greek philosopher, and disciple of Plato.
313 Demosthenes, the Athenian orator poisoned himself.
288 Theophrastus, the Greek philosopher, and scholar of Aristotle.
285 Theocritus, first Greek pastoral poet, fl.
277 Euclid. of Alexandria, in Egypt, the mathematician, fl.
270 Epicurus, founder of the Epicurean philosophy in Greece.
268 Berosus, the Chaldea [...] historian.
264 Zeno, founder of the stoic philosophy in Greece.
244 Callimachus, the Greek elegiac poet.
208 Archimedes, the Greek geometrician.
184 Plautus, the Roman comic poet.
179 Ennius, the Roman poet.
159 Terence, of Carthage, Latin comic poet.
155 Diogenes, of Babylon, stoic philo [...]o.
124 Polybius, of Greece, the Greek and Roman historian.
54 Lucretius, the Roman poet.
44 Julius Caesar, the Roman historian and commentator, killed.
  Diodorus Siculus, of Greece, the uni­versal historian, fl.
  Vitruvius, the Roman architect, fl.
43 Cicero, the Roman orator and philos­opher, put to death. Cornelius Nepos, Roman biographer, fl.
34 Sallust, the Roman historian.
30 Dionysius of Halicarnassus, the Roman historian, fl.
19 Virgil, the Roman epic poet.
11 Catullus, Tibullus, and Propertius, Ro­man poets.
8 Horace, Roman lyric and satiric poet.
Aft. Christ.
17 Livy, the Roman historian.
19 Ovid, the Roman elegiac poet.
20 Celsus, the Rom. philoso. and physi. fl.
23 St [...]abo, the Greek geographer.
33 Phaedrus, the Roman fabulist.
45 Pa [...]erculus, the Roman historian, fl.
62 Persius, the Roman satiric poet.
64 Quintus Curtius, a Roman, historian of Alexander the Great, fl.
64 Seneca, of Spain, the philosopher and tragic poet, put to death.
65 Lucan, the Roman epic poet, ditto.
79 Pliny the elder, the Roman natural historian.
93 Josephus, the Jewish historian.
94 E [...]ictetus, the Greek [...]oic philosopher. fl.
95 Quintilian, Roman orator and advocate.
96 Statius, the Roman epic poet.
98 Lucius Florus, of Spain, the Roman historian, fl.
99 Tacitus, the Roman historian.
104 Martial of Spain, epigrammatic poet.
  Valerius Flaccus, the Roman epic poet.
116 Pliny the younger, historical letters.
117 Suetonius, the Roman historian.
11 [...] Plutarch of Greece, the biographer.
128 Juvenal, the Roman satiric poet.
140 Ptolemy, the Egyptian geographer, mathematician, and astronomer, fl.
150 Justin, the Roman historian, fl.
161 Arrian, the Roman historian and phi­losopher, fl.
[...]67 Justin, of Samaria, the oldest Christ­ian author after the Apostles.
180 Lucian, the Roman philologer.
  Marcus Aur. Antoninus, Roman Em­peror and philosopher.
193 Galen, the Greek philosopher and physician.
200 Diogenes Laertius, Greek biograph. fl.
229 Dion Cassius, of Greece, the Roman historian, fl.
254 Origen, Christian father of Alexandria.
  Herodian, of Alexandria, the Roman historian, fl.
258 Cyprian, of Carthage, suffered [...]rtyrd.
273 Longinus the Greek orator, put to death by Aurelian.
320 Lactantius, a father of the church, fl.
336 Arius, a priest of Alexandria, found­er of the sect of Aria [...]s.
342 Eusebius, the ecclesiastical historian and chronologer.
379 Basil, bishop of Caesarea.
389 Gregory Nazienzen, bish. of Constan.
395 Claudian, the Roman poet. fl.
  Heliodorus, Phaenicia, AEthiopicks, &c.
397 Ambrose, bishop of Milan.
415 Macrobius, the Roman grammarian.
428 Eutropius, the Roman historian.
524 Boethius, the Roman poet and pla­tonic philosopher.
529 Procopius, of Caesarea, the Roman historian.
MODERN AUTHORS.
73 [...] Bede, a priest of Northumberland; history of the Saxons, Scots, &c.
901 King Alfred; history, philosophy.
980 Avicenna, the Mahometan philoso­pher and physician.
1118 Anna Comnena; Alexiad, or life of her father Emperor Ale [...]us Comnen [...].
1206 Averroes, Corduba, the Arabian phi­losopher.
1259 Matthew Paris, monk of St. Alban's; history of England.
1292 Roger Bacon, Somersetshire; natur­al philosophy.
1321 Dante, Florence; poetry.
1374 Petratch, Arezzo in Italy; poetry.
1376 Boccace, Tuscany; the Decameron, poems, &c.
1400 Chaucer, London; the father of Eng­lish poetry.
1481 Platina, Italy; Lives of the Popes, &c.
1502 Montaigne, Perigord in France; essays.
1509 Philip de Comines, Flanders; histori­cal memoirs.
1517 Martin Luther, the Great Reformer, fl. John Calvin, do. do. fl.
1530 Machiavel, Florence; politics, com­edies, &c.
1534 Ariosto, Lombardy; Orlando Furic­so, and five comedies.
1535 Sir Thomas Moore, London; history, politics, &c.
1536 Eras [...], Rotterdam; Colloquies, Praise of Folly, &c.
1540 Gui [...]ciardini, Florence; history of Italy.
1543 Coper [...]cus, Thor [...] in Prussia; astron­omy.
1549 Michael de Cer [...]antes S [...]vedra, Alca­la in Spain; Don Qui [...], &c.
1552 John Leland, London; lives and an­tiquities.
1566 H [...]bal Caro, Civita N [...]ova; poems and tran [...]tions.
  Vid [...], Cremona; art of poetry, and other didactic poems.
156 [...] Roger Ascha [...], Yorkshire; philology.
1578 Rev. John Knox, the Scots reformer; history of the church of Scotland.
1579 Camo [...]ns, Lisbon; the Lusi [...]d, an epic poem.
1582 George Buchanan, D [...]b [...]rtonshire; history of Scotland, psalms of David, politics, &c.
1590 Davila, [...]sle of Cyprus; history of the civil wars of France.
1595 Torquato Tasso, Italy: Jerusalem de­livered, an epic poem, A [...]inta, &c.
1598 Edmund Spencer, London; [...]a [...]y Queen. and other poems.
1600 Rev. Richard Hooker, Exeter; Ec­clesiastical Polity.
1605 U [...]ysses Aldro [...]and [...]s, B [...]logna; nat­ural history.
16 [...]8 Mendez, Casule; history of China, fl.
1610 Richard Knolle [...], Northamptonshire; history of the Turks.
1612 Battista Guarini, Ferrara; the Faith­ful Shepherd, a pastoral poem.
16 [...]5-25 Beaumont and Fletcher; 35 dra­matic pieces.
1616 Wm. Shakespeare, Stratford; 42 trag­edies and comedies.
1622 Johu Napier, Marcheston, Scotland; Inventor of logarithms.
1623 William Camden, London; history and antiquities.
  Father Paul Sarpi. Venice; history of the Council of Trent, Rights of Sovereigns and Subjects, letters, &c.
1624 John Mariana, Castile; history of Spain.
1625 John Baptist Marino, Naples; poetry.
1626 Lord Chancellor Bacon, London; philosophy and literature in general.
1627 Lewis de Congora, Cordom; poetry and plays.
1628 Francis de Malherbe, Normandy; poetry.
1630 John Kepler, Wittemberg; astrono­my.
1634 Lord Chief Justice Coke, Norfolk; laws of England.
1635 Trajan Boccalini, Rome; fatyrical pieces, fl.
1638 Ben. Johnson, Lo [...]d. dramatic pieces.
1639 Philip Massinger, Salisbury; 14 dra­matic pieces.
1641 Sir Henry Spe [...]an, Norfolk; laws and antiquities.
  Jeremiah [...]or [...]ox, Lancashire; astron­omer, died at the age of 22.
1646 Lewis Veli [...] de Gue [...]ara, Andalusi [...]; comedies.
1650 Des Cartes, Toura [...]me; philosophy and mathematics.
1654 John Selde [...], Sussex; antiquities and laws.
  John Lewis de Balzac, Ang [...]leme; letters, &c.
1655 Peter Gassendi, Provence; astronomy.
1656 Archbishop Usher, Dublin; divinity and chronology.
1657 Dr. William Harvey, Kent; discov­ered the circulation of the blood.
166 [...] Pascal, Auverg [...]e; Thoughts upon Religion, &c.
1667 Abraham Co [...]ley, London; miscel­laneous poetry.
1669 Sir John Denham, Dublin; Cooper's Hill and other poems.
1673 Moliete, Paris; comedies.
1674 John Milton, London; Paradise Lost, Regained, and various other pieces in verse and prose.
  Hyde, Earl of Clarendon, Wiltshire; history of the civil wars in England.
1675 James Gregory, Aberdeen; mathe­matics, geometry and optics.
  James Rohault, Amiens; physics.
1677 Rev. Dr. Isaac Barrow, London; natural philosophy, mathematics.
  Rev. Richard [...]axter, Divinity. fl.
1680 Samuel Butler, Worcestershire; Hu­dibras, a burlesque poem.
  Francis, Duke of Rochefoucault, France; maxims.
  Dr. Lewis Moreri, Provence; Histor­ical Dictionary.
1683 Meze [...]ay, Lower Normandy; A­bridgment of the history of France.
1684 Wentworth Dillon, Earl of Roscom­mon, Ireland; essay on translated verse, Horace's art of poetry.
  Peter Corncille, Rouen; 30 dramatic pieces.
1685 Thomas Otway, London; 10 trag­edies and comedies, &c.
1687 Edmund Waller, Bucks; poems.
1688 Dr. Ralph Cudworth, Somersetshire; Intellectual System.
1689 Dr. Thomas Sydenh [...], Dorsetshire; history of physic.
  Dr. Bonet, Geneva; medicine.
1690 Nathaniei Lee, London; [...]1 tragedies
  Barclay, Edinburgh; Apology for the Quakers.
1691 Honourable Robert Boyle, natural and experimental philosophy, &c.
  Sir. George M'Kentie, Dundee; An­tiquities and laws of Scotland.
1692 Giles Menage Angers; philology, mis­cellanies [...] verse and prose.
  St. Real, Savoy; conspiracy of the Spaniards against the Republic of Venice.
1694 John Tillotson, Archbishop of Can­terbury, Halifax; 254 sermons.
  Antonietta de la Garde Des Houlieres, Paris; poetry.
  Marcellus Malpighi, Bologna; dis­covered the circulation of the s [...]p in plants.
  Puffendorf, Upper Saxony; jurispru­dence and history.
1695 D' [...]erbelot, Paris; Bibliotheque ori­entale.
  Huygens, Hague; mathematics and astronomy.
1696 John de La Bruyere, France; charac­ters.
  March [...]ness De Sevigne, France; letters.
1697 Sir. W. Temple, London; politics and polite literature.
1698 W. Molyneux, Dublin; the case of Ireland stated.
1699 John Racine, France; tragedies.
  Rev. Dr. William Bates; Divinity.
1701 John Dryden, Northamptonshire; 27 tragedies and comedies, satiric poems, Virgil, ode on Saint Cecil­la's day, &c.
  Thomas Creech, Dorsetshire; transla­tions.
1703 Mascaron, Marseilles; funeral orations.
1704 John Locke, Somersetshire; philoso­phy, government and theology.
  Bacconi, Palermo; natural history.
  Bossuet, Dijon; discourse upon Uni­versal History, Funeral Orations, &c.
  Bourdaloue, France; sermons.
1705 John Ray, Essex; botany, natural philosophy, and divinity.
1706 Bailet, Picardy: Judgments of the learned, biography, &c.
1707 George Farquhar, Londonderry, 8 comedies.
  Rev. James Saurin, Sermons, tracts. fl.
1708 John Philips, Oxfordshire; Splendid Shilling, and other poems.
1709 Thomas Corneille, brother to Peter; tragedies.
1710 David Gregory, Aberdeen; geome­try, optics.
  [...]lechier, Avignon; sermons, funeral orations, &c.
  Edmund Smith, Worcestershire; Phe­dra, tragedy, translation of Longi­nus.
1712 Bo [...]leau, Paris; satires, epistles, art of poetry, the Lutrin, &c.
  Ca [...]lim, Italy; astronomy.
1713 Ant. Ash. Cooper, E. of Shaftsbury; characteristics.
  Dr. Ar [...]bald Pitcairn, Edinburgh, medicine.
1714 Gilbert Burnet, Edinburgh, Bishop of Salisbury; history, biography, &c.
1715 Malebranche, Paris; philosophy.
1716 Francis De Salignac De la Mothe Fenelon, Archbishop of Cambray, [...]erigord, Telemachus, Dialogues of the Dead, Demonstration of the Being of God, &c.
  Leib [...], [...]cipsi [...]; philosophy, &c.
1718 Nicholas Rowe, Devonshire; 7 trage­dies, translat. of Lucan's Pharsalia.
1719 Rev. John Flamstead, Derbyshire; mathematics and astronomy.
  Joseph Addison, Wiltshire; Specta­tor, Guardian, tragedy of Cato, &c.
  Dr. John Keill, Edinburgh, mathe­matics and astronomy.
1719 Sir Samuel Garth, Yorkshire; poetry.
1720 Anne Dacier, France; translation of Homer, Ter [...], &c.
1721 Matthew Prior, London; poems and politics.
17 [...]3 Fi [...]y, Paris; history. Bayle, Foix; historical and critical dictionary.
1725 Rapin de Thoyras, Languedoc; his­tory of England.
1727 Sir Isaac Newton, Lincolnshire; mathematics, geometry, astrono­my, &c.
1728 Father Daniel, Rouen; history of France.
1729 Rev. Dr. Samuel Clarke, Norwich; mathematics, divinity, &c.
  Sir Richard Steele, Dublin; four comedies, papers in Tatler, &c.
  William Congreve, Staffordshire; seven dramatic pieces.
1732 John Gay, Exeter; poems, fables, and eleven dramatic pieces.
1734 Dr. John Arbuthnot, Mearnshire; medicine, coins, politics.
1735 Vertot, France; Revolutions of Rome, Portugal, Sweden, &c.
1738 Dr. Boerhaave, Leyden; botany, &c.
1740 Ephraim Chambers, England; Cy­clopaedia.
1741 Rollin, Paris; history, Belles Lettres.
  John Baptist Rousseau, Paris; odes, epistles, epigrams, comedies, letters. Le Sage, Breta [...]y; Gil Blas, &c.
1742 Dr. Edmund Halley, London; natural philosophy, astronomy, navigation.
1743 Masillon, France; sermons. Richard Savage, London; tragedy, &c.
1744 Alexander Pope, London; poems, letters, translation of Homer.
1745 Reverend Dr. Jonathan Swift, Dub­lin; poems, politics, and letters.
1746 Colin M'Laurin, Argyleshire; alge­bra, view of Newton's philosophy.
1747 Rev. Jonathan Dickinson, President, Princeton College; Divinity.
1748 James Thomson, Roxburghshire; Seasons, and other pieces, five tragedies.
  Reverend Dr. Isaac Watts, Southamp­ton; logic, philosophy, psalms, &c. Dr. Francis Hutcheson, Ireland; system of moral philosophy.
1750 Rev. Dr. Conyers Middleton, York­shire; life of Cicero, &c.
  Andrew Baxter, Old Aberdeen; met­aphysics and natural philosophy.
1751 Lord Bolingbroke, Surry; philoso­phy, metaphysics, and politics.
1752 Reverend Dr. Doddridge; Family Ex­positor, Lectures, Sermons, &c.
1754 Dr. Richard Mead, London; on poisons, plague, small pox, medi­cine.
  Henry Fielding, Somersetshire; Tom Jones, Joseph Andrews, &c.
1755 Montesquieu, Bordeaux; spirit of laws, grandeur and declension of the Romans, Persian letters, &c.
1756 W. Collins, Chichester; poetry.
  West, England; translation of Pindar, poems.
1757 Reaumur, Rochelle; natural history of insects.
  Reverend Aaron Burr, President of Princeton College; Answer to Em­lyn's Humble Inquiry, Sermons.
  Colley Cibber, London; plays.
1758 Reverend Jonathan Edwards, Presi­dent of Princeton College; Divin­ity, Metaphysics.
1760 Reverend Samuel Davies, President of Princeton College; Sermons.
1761 Sherlock, Bishop London; sermons.
  Hoadley, Bishop Winchester; sermons.
  Richardson, London; Grandison, Clarissa, Pamela.
  Rev. Dr. John Leland, Lancashire; answer to Deis [...]cal Writers.
1763 W. Shenstone; Shropshire; poems.
1764 Reverend Charles Churchill, Eng­land; Ros [...]ad, satires.
1765 Reverend Dr. Edward Young; Night Thoughts, and other poems, &. c
  Robert Simson, Glasgow; Conic Sections, Euclid, Apollonius.
1766 Reverend Dr. Samuel [...]inley, Presi­dent Princeton College; Sermons, Tracts.
  Reverend Thomas Clap, President of Yale College; Sermons, Tracts.
1767 Dr. Alexander Monro, Edinburgh; Anatomy of the bones, anatomical and medical essays.
  Muratori, Italy; history, antiquities, Metastasio, Italy; dramatick pieces, fl.
1768 Reverend Lawrence Sterne, Dublin; 45 sermons, Sentimental Journey, Tristram Shandy.
  William Cunningham, Ireland; Pas­torals, &c.
1769 Robert Smith, Lincolnshire; har­monies and optics.
1770 Dr. Mark Akenside, N [...]castle upon Tyne; poems.
  Dr. Tobias Smollet, Dumbartonshire; History of England, novels, &c.
1771 Thomas Gray, London; poems.
1773 Earl of Chesterfield; letter. George Lord Lyttleton, Worcester­shire; History of England.
1774 Oliver Goldsmith, Roscommon, in Ireland; History of the Earth and animated Nature, Citizen of the World, essays, &c.
  Hon. Peyton Randolph, first Presi­dent of the American Congress.
1775 Dr. John Hawkesworth; essays.
1776 David Hume, Merse; History of England, essays.
  James Ferguson, Aberdeenshire; as­tronomy.
1777 Samuel Foote, Cornwall; plays.
1778 Voltaire, Paris; the Henriad, an epic poem, dramatic pieces, poe­try, history, literature in general.
  Rev. Dr. Eliot, Boston; Sermons.
1779 David Garrick, Hereford; plays.
  William Warburton, Bishop of Gloucester; Divine Legation of Moses, and various other works.
1780 Sir. William Blackstone, Judge of the Court of Common Pi [...]s, Lon­don; Commentaries on the Laws of England.
  Dr. John Fothergill, Yorkshire; philosophy and medicine.
  James Harris; Her [...], Philological Inquiries, Philoso. Arrangements.
  Gov. Hatchinson, Boston, Massachu­setts; History.
1782 Thomas Newton, Bishop of Bristol, Litchfield; discourses on the prophecies, and other works.
  Sir John Pri [...]gle, [...]art. Roxbor­oughshire; Diseases of the Army.
  Henry Home, Lord Kaimes, Scotland; Elements of Criticism, Sketches of the History of Man, Principles of Equity, of Morality, Art of [...]hink­ing, Hints on Education, Gentle­man Farmer, &c.
1783 Dr. William Hunter, La [...]erkshire; anatomy.
  John James Rousseau, Geneva; Emil­ins, a treatise of Education, Diction­ary of Music, New Heloi [...], &c.
1784 Dr. Samuel Johnson, Litchfield; Eng­lish Dictionary, biography, &c.
1785 William Whitchead, Poet Laureat; poems and plays.
  Dr. Thomas Le [...]d, Ireland; History of Ireland, &c. &c.
1786 Dr. Gilbert Stuart, Edinburgh; History of Mary, Queen of Scots, History of the Reformation, &c.
1787 Rev. Dr. Cha [...]cey, Boston; comple [...]t view of Episcopacy from the Fa­thers, Salvation for all men, Set­mons, Tracts, &c.
1788 The Count De Bo [...]on, Paris; Natur­al History.
1790 James Bowdoin, Gov. Massachusetts, Philosophy, politics.
  William Livingston, Gov. New Jer­sey; essays, poetry, politics.
  Dr. Benjamin Franklin, Boston; e­lectricity, natural philosophy, &c.
1791 Rev. John Wesley, Divinity, miscel­lanies.
1792 Henry Laurens, South Carolina, Pres­ident of Congress.
THE END.

This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal. The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.